-THE- 

-JOHN  -FRYER* 
-CHINESE -LIBRARY 


NON-CIRCULATING 


OLLENDORtfFS 

NEW  METHOD 


OF   LEARNING    TO 


READ,  WRITE,  AND  SPEAK 


zw    MeiVjTtyf   Lea  ft  nitre 

FRENCH  LANGUAGE: 


THE   LESSONS 

DIVIDED     INTO    SECTIONS    OP    A    PROPER    LENGTH    FOR    D.MIA 

TASKS,   AND   NU31£ROUS  CORRECTIONS,  ADDITIONS,  AND 

IMPROVEMENTS,    SUITABLE    FOR   THIS    COUNTRY. 

BY    V.    VALUE. 

TO  WHICH    AR&  ADDED 

VALUE'S  SYSTEM  OF  FRENCH  PRONUNCIATION, 

HIS  GRAMMATICAL  SYNOPSIS,  A  NEW  INDEX, 

AND    SHOUT    MODELS    OF 

COMMERCIAL   CORRESPONDENCE, 

NEW  YOKE: 
D.    A  PPL  ETON    AND    COMPANY, 

549    &    551    BROADWAY. 
1874. 


MAIN  LIBRARY 

JOHN  FRYER 

CHINESE  LIBRARY 


Entered,  accoxdiiig  to  the  Act  of  Congress,  m  the  year  165*1,  by 
D.  APPLETON   &   COMPANY, 

in  the  Clerk's  Office  of  the  District  Court  of  the  United  States  for  tho  Southern 
District  of  New  York. 


NOTICE. — A  KEY  to  the  Exercises   of  this  Grammar  is   pub- 
in  a  separate  volume. 


PREFACE. 


Ix  undertaking  to  edit  an  improved  edition  of  OLLENDORFF'S  FRENCH 
GRAMMAR,  I  may  be  allowed  to  state  my  personal  familiarity  and 
experience  with  the  system  which  I  have  practically  taught  for  many 
years.  However,  as  the  Method  is  called  a  New  Method;  if  it  deserves 
that  title,  its  active  principle  must  differ  from  that  of  the  old  mode 
of  tuition,  and  consequently  any  one,  let  him  be  ever  so  talented, 
who,  without  being  well  acquainted  with  its  modus  operandi,  would 
attempt  to  correct,  improve,  or  compose  a  work  based  on  that  princi- 
ple, would  be  as  likely  to  fail,  as  an  experienced  stage-driver  would 
be,  if  he  were  to  endeavor  to  take  the  management  of  a  steam  or  loco- 
motive engine.  It  is  then  incumbent  on  me  to  show  that  "I  am  fully 
acquainted  with  the  fundamental  principle  of  that  New  Method. 

In  1832,  before  the  publication  of  OllendoriFs  or  Manesca's  System, 
I  published  a  pamphlet  entitled  "  Experience  Consulted;  or  V.  Value's 
System  for  teaching  Modern  Languages."  At  page  3  of  the  introduc 
tion,  is  this  passage  : 

"Wo  will  merely  notice  that  the  principle  which  furnishes  the  stu- 
dent with  the  means,  from  the  first  lesson,  of  forming  his  own  sentences, 
or,  in  other  words,  of  making  an  immediate  and  continued  use  of  the  words 
he  Uarns,  so  as  to  speak,  will  appear  new  to  the  public,  although  it  has 
fore  been  acted  upon  for  many  years." 

At  page  5,  will  be  found  : 

"  Since  the  means  ought  always  to  be  made  subservient  to  the  end 
in  view,  and  since  immediate  is  in  direct  opposition  to  postponed  use,  we 
must  reverse  the  practice  usually  adopted,  and  consequently  furnish 
the  student  with  words  susceptible  of  inter-combinations,  instead  of 
teaching  him  such  as,  not  being  combinable  together,  cannot  be  incor- 
porated into  the  same  sentence,  and  must,  of  course,  render  his  efforts 
entirely  fruitless.'* 

This  is  what  Ollendorff  has  practically  carried  out;  and,  as  I  have 
long  used  his  system,  its  details  are  perfectly  familiar  to  me. 

The  difference  in  the  extent  of  the  lessons  cannot  have  escaped  the 
notice  of  teachers  and  scholars  who  have  practically  used  the  worn* 
Tho  1st,  2d,  and  3d  are  of  a  proper  length  for  one  recitation,  3veu 


751666 


IV  PREFACE. 

7/ith  an  ordinary  capacity ;  but  from  the  4th  they  begin  to  assume  o 
Bize  that  makes  it  difficult  to  learn  one,  at  a  single  lesson.  True,  a 
part  only  of  a  lesson  may  be  assigned  as  a  task,  but  the  teacher  must 
then  daily  ascertain  the  extent  of  the  lesson,  in  order  to  portion  it 
according  to  the  capacity  of  his  class.  With  a  private  scholar,  even 
with  a  private  class,  that  may  be  done  without  much  inconvenience ; 
but  the  case  is  different  when  applied  to  classes  in  schools,  where 
more  regularity  and  uniformity  are  required,  and  where,  the  scholars 
having  to  pass  quickly  from  one  study  to  another,  have  no  time  allowed 
for  measuring  the  fractional  part  they  ought  to  have  for  the  next  reci- 
tation. With  the  view  of  remedying  this  serious  objection,  the  equali- 
zation of  the  lessons  was  thought  expedient. 

To  divide  each  long  lesson  into  two,  three,  or  four  small  ones,  would 
in  a  great  measure  have  destroyed  the  unity  whi-ch  characterizes  each 
particular  and  successive  lesson  in  the  book.  This  was  thought  objec- 
tionable ;  and  hence  the  idea  of  dividing  each  lesson,  according  to  its 
length,  into  two,  three,  or  four  sections,  so  as  to  obtain  the  equaliza- 
tion of  the  parts  without  destroying  the  unity  of  the  whole. 

It  is  what  has  been  accomplished,  and  which  is. now  presented  to  the 
American  public.  '<  •» 

One  of  the  strongest  proofs  that  can  be  adduced  of  the  superiority 
of  the  principle  here  followed  is  that,  in  spite  of  the  numerous  faults, 
inaccuracies,  defects,  omissions,  and  errors  with  which  the  former  book 
is  teeming,  scholars  learn,  and  learn  well.  The  half  of  those  errors 
would  destroy  the  reputation  of  any  other  grammar  or  method,  was 
not  the  fundamental  principle  so  self-efficient.  Those  defects  are  like 
grades  on  a  railroad:  they  may  partially  impede  the  way,  but  the 
moving  power  of  the  engine  easily  overcomes  them.  We  will  notice  a 
few  of  them.  At  page  24,  we  find : 
This  or  that  ox.  This  or  that  hay.  |  Ce  bceuf.  Ce  foin. 

As  the  three  words  this  or  that  are  translated  by  ce  alone,  it  is  very 
natural  that  the  student  should,  in  the  fourteenth  line  of  the  13th 
Exercise,  translate  "Has  the  peasant  this  or  that  ox?"  by  "Le  paysan 
a-t-il  ce  bceuf?"  and  nothing  more ;  and  the  answer,  "  He  has  neither 
this  nor  that,"  by  "  II  n'a  ni  ce,"  without  adding  anything  else. 

This  is  one  of  those  results  that  experience  alone  can  teacn  and 
record ;  and  which  no  reasoning  a  priori  could  suggest.  At  the  same 
time  it  shows  how  carefully  we  must  weigh 'and  analyse  the  expres- 
sions, offered  to  the  learner.  For,  in  this  instance,  the  error  came  not 
from  any  fault  of  his ;  but  solely  from  the  combination  of  the  three 
words  this  or  that  being  carelessly  translated  by  ce.  To  obviate  the 
difficulty,  say:  this,  that— ce;  this,  that  ox — ce  bceuf.  And  then,  when 
he  comes  to :  this  or  that  ox,  he  cannot  possibly  translate  by  ce  bceuf 
alone,  but  he  will  use  Ce  bceuf-ci  ou  celui-lti,  &c.  Some  may  consider 


PREFACE.  ^ 

this  as  a  trifle.  So  it  is  ;  but  the  teacher's  or  author's  business  is  to 
give  right  direetioiis.  Below  will  be  found  a  few  of  Ollendorff's 
defects.1 

The  e  grave  has  purposely  been  placed  on  the  e  of  sitye,  privilege,  £c., 
to  conform  to  the  pronunciation;  although,  from  mere  hat  it  or  whim, 
those  words  usually  have  an  acute  accent,  (siege.) 

Seme  have  found  fault,  because  the  feminine  was  not  introduced 
before  the  5£th  Lesson;  but  experience  proves  it  to  be  one  of  the  hap- 
piest innovations  in  the  Method. 

The  mannsr  here  adopted,  of  forming  the  subjunctive  present  from 
the  third  pereon  plural  of  the  indicative  present,  and  of  placing  thftt 
third  person  plural  at  the  bead  of  the  tense,  will  have  a  tendency  to 
make  the  acquisition  of  the  tense  much  more  easy.  For  instance  : 
Boivent,  boive,  boives,  boive,  being  pronouncei  in  the  same  way,  may 
be  considered  as  a  single  word,  already  known  to  the  student,  (since  it 
is  the  third  person  plural  of  the  indicative  present,)  and  the  first  and 
second  persons  plural  being  similar  to  those  of  the  imperfect,  the  pupil 
has  in  fact  nothing  new  to  learn.  He  actually  knows  the  tense  before 
he  conies  to  it. 

A  great  portion  of  the  difficulties  attending  the  subjunctive,  arise  from 
the  manner  of  presenting  that  mood,  in  the  conjugations  intended  to  teach 
French  to  the  Americans.  It  is  one  of  the  most  inaccurate  and  deficient 
of  all  grammars.  From  its  nature,  the  subjunctive  being  subser- 


1  >\'  page  22,  we  find  personne  and  ne  separated  by  a  hyphen  (-)  —  wrong. 

30.    Porte-feuille,  no  directions  anywhere  how  to  form  the  plural  of 

compound  nouns  of  this  class. 

73.    What,  nominative,  que  :  it  should  be  qu'est-ce  qvi?  (A'j  trifle.) 
73.     Obs.  B.  wrong.    60.  To,  with  whom,  for,  to  whose  house  :  chezqui. 
00.    Soldier  in  71st  Exercise,  the  French  given  only  at  160. 
KH.    Do  and  AM.  for  all  persons  and  tenses,  should  be  for  the  present 

tense. 

112.     Obs.  A.  wrong,  because  the  preposition  does  not  belong  to  the  se- 
cond, but  to  the  first  verb.     The  list  there  given  by  Ollendorff 
is  transferred  to  the  Synopsis,  because   the  verbs  not  being 
introduced  in  the  exercises,  uselessly  encumber  the  lesson. 
'13,  119.    Rules  on  the  past  participles,  not  fully  explained.    The  word 
object,  applied  both  to  le,  les,  and  en,  show  that  the  author  was 
not  aware  of  their  difference  in  French. 
IIS,  141.    How  long.    No  explanation,  so  that  the  pupil  is  constantly  at  a 

loss. 

169.    Je,  me,  (separated.)    Wrong;  they  should  l>e  connected. 
183.    Rule  on  the  future  and  note  below,  wrong.   199.  Obs.  E.  defective. 
5K)8.    5th  and  6th  line  of  Exercise  :  Has  he  already  kept  something  from 
you?  wrongly  translated  by  A-t-il  d£ja  gardk  quelque  ckose  t?6 
vous  ? 

245.     Obs.  A.  not  correct.     273.    Obs.  A.  wrong.      325.   Obs.  A.  wrong 
389.     II  s'en  faut  beaucoup,  a  knotty  point  uselessly  presented  to  the 
student,  who  can  already  trans.ate  in  several  ways  tl'O  ques- 
tion* there  askel,  &c.  &c 


VI  PREFACE. 

vient  to,  or  governed  by  an  antecedent,  can  separately  have  no  speciiifc 
meaning,  and  ought  consequently  never  to  be  used  by  itself.  Now,  as 
in  grammars,  the  subjunctive  is  mostly  given  by  itself,  independently 
of  the  governing  expression,  it  follows  that  the  English  translation 
attached  to  it,  is  calculated  to  lead  into  numerous  errors.  Let  ua 
select  a  few  examples.  In  the  verb,  to  have,  avoir ;  to  know,  savoir ; 
to  go,  aller ;  the  subjunctive  present  Is  in  all  grammars,  and  in  Ollen- 
dorff's  also,  given  thus :  que  faie,  that  I  may  have;  que  je  sache,  that  1 
may  know;  que  faille,  that  I  may  go;  and  as  the  English  is  the 
prototype  of  the  French,  the  student  must  necessarily  connect  the 
idea  of  the  French  subjunctive  with  that  I  may,  and  with  no  other 
English.  Hence  the  phrases,  William  says  that  I  may  have  his  dic- 
tionary;.  She  says  that  I  may  know  my  lesson;  He  thinks  that  I  may 
go  ;  having  each  the  English  that  I  may,  which  is  intimately  linked  in 
the  student's  mind  with  the  French  subjunctive,  must  inevitably  lead 
him  to  use  that  mood,  and  translate  by,  Guillaume  dit  que  faie  son 
dictionnaire ;  Elle  dit  que  je  sache  ma  Ie9on;  II  croit  que  faille.  And 
such  translations  would  hardly  be  understood  by  the  very  authors  of 
the  grammars,  if  unconnected  with  the  English,  Now,  such  modes  of 
expression  abound  in  English :  what  an  inexhaustible  source  of  mis- 
takes ! !  But  this  is  not  all ;  it  is  only  one  side  of  the  medal ;  let  us 
see  the  reverse.  The  French  subjunctive  being  connected  exclusively 
with  that  I  may,  will  never  be  thought  of,  when  this  prototype  does  not 
constitute  a  part  of  the  English  phrase:  consequently;  / must  have; 
unless  I  know  ;  he  wishes  me  to  go  ;  cannot  by  the  student  be  translated 
by  the  French  subjunctive  mood ;  for  they  do  not  remind  him  of  his 
English  prototype,  that  I  may,  which  alone  can  recall  the  idea  of  the 
French  subjunctive.  Here,  then,  is  another  source  of  innumerable 
errors.  What  a  sad  dilemma  is  then  presented  to  the  student !  Both 
the  presence  and  the  absence  of  his  prototype  mislead  his  steps.  He 
is  in  an  intricate  labyrinth,  and  there  is  no  Ariadne  to  furnish  him 
with  a  clew  to  escape. 

The  unpleasant  dilemma  in  which  the  student  is  involved,  is  avoided 
by  always  presenting  the  subjunctive  mood,  as  I  do,  in  connexion  with 
the  expression  by  which  it  is  governed. 

All  those  defects  and  many  others  have  oeen  rectified.  The  Gram- 
matical Synopsis  will  be  found  to  contain  many  useful  explanations, 
the  result  of  experience.  The  Preterit,  Conditionnel,  Imperative,  Sub- 
junctive, the  Reflected  Verbs,  the  Negations,  are  new  and  important 
articles.  It  was  thought  preferable  to  transfer  into  the  Synopsis  many 
of  the  rules  and  directions  given  in  the  body  of  Ollendorff's  work,  so 
as  to  have  under  the  same  head  everything  relating  to  the  subject  it 
treats  of. 

V    VALUE. 


CONTENTS. 


Preface Pago  iii 

System  of  Pronunciation .    .         .     ix 

Directions  for  using  the  Method ...     xxiii 

Explanation  of  the  Signs  used  in  thJs  book      .     .  ...     xxlv 

Lessons— 1  to  86 25-456 

Grammatical  Synopsis .     .      457 

Recueil  fipistolaire .     .       539. 

Index ,     .       547 

Idiomatical  Expressions             ....  ,575 

m 


Directions  for  using  V.  VALUE'S  SYSTEM  OF  FRENCH  Puo 
NUNCIATION,  ~by  which  an  accurate  knowledge  of  the  sound* 
of  that  Lanyuaye  may  le  acquired  in  a  few  Lessons 


AFTER    READING    TIIE    DEFINITION    OF    VOWELS. 

Teacher. — Please  to  pronounce  the  English  word,  add. 

Student  pronounces  it. 

T. — "What  is  the  sound  of  the  letter  a  in  that  word? 

S.  gives  it,  if  he  can.  If  he  does  not  give  it  correctly,  the  teacher 
does  it,  and  tells  him  to  dwell  on  the  sound ;  as,  aaaa-d,  and  finally 
ai/a . . .  alone,  so  as  to  abstract  the  sound  of  the  vowel  a.  When  done — • 

T. — This  is  the  sound  of  the  French  letter  a,  marked  1  on  the  1st 
column,  nn:i,  a. 

S.  repeats  the  prolonged  sound. 

T. — Whenever  you  wish  to  ascertain  the  French  sound,  marked  1 
(one),  you  must  recur  to  the  English  word  add,  and  you  cannot  miss  it. 

S.  repeats  the  word,  prolongs  the  sound  aaa,  and  abstracts  it,  a. 

T. — The  sound  of  a  (with  a  circunitlex  accent),  marked  I2  (one  two, 
to  show  that  it  is  the  second  sound  of  the  same  letter  #),  is  found  in 
the  word  far  .  .fmta-r . . .  a.  Pronounce  the  word,  dwell  upon  the  vowel 
sound,  and  abstract  it. 

S.  tries  to  do  it.  If  he  docs  not  succeed,  the  teacher  must  go 
through  the  same  process  as  for  the  a  of  add.  When  done — 

T. — In  what  English  word  do  you  find  the  French  sound  marked  1 
(one)  ?  S.  gives  it. 

T. — What  is  the  sound  ?     S.  gives  it. 

T. — How  is  it  represented  ?     S. — By  the  letter  </,  in  add. 

T. — In  what  word  do  you  find  I2  (one  two)  ?     S.  gives  it. 

I7.— What  is  the  sound?     S.  gives  it. 

T. — How  is  it  represented  ?     S. — By  the  letter  </,  with  a  circumflex. 

T.  —What  is  the  last  sound  in  the  word  take  ? 

S.  tries  to  give  it.  If  he  cannot,  the  teacher- will  do  it,  and  tell 
him  to  dwell  on  the  sound  e  e  e — ta-ke-e  e  e.  This  is  in  fact  the  sound 
heard  at  the  end  of  every  English  consonant  sounded.  The  name  of 
this  letter  (k)  is  kay  ;  but  its  sound  in  bank,  for  instance,  is  not  bankay, 
but  bank  e  e,  ending  with  a  prolonged  mute  sound,  which  is  exactly 
the  sound  of  the  French  mute  e.  It  is  a  very  important  sound  with 
them;  it  is  marked  2  (little  two),  to  indicate  its  faintness. 

The  cough  sound,  as  I  have  called  it  (marked  2),  is  that  heard  iu 
the  French  words  pen,  deux.  If,  in  coughing,  both  teacher  and  pupil 
get  that  sound,  it  will  be  secured ;  but  if  they  do  not,  then  the  teacher 

(9) 


X  FRENCH     PRONUNCIATION 

must  make  him  pronounce  either  deux  or  pen,  and  make  him  refer  th« 
sound  to  the  word  he  pronounces  best,  and  retain  the  word  as  a  model. 

The  letter  ut  marked  6,  represents  the  sound  heard  immediatelj 
after  s,  in  sweet,  as  it  is  usually  pronounced  by  Americans.  However, 
some  say  sooeet.  With  those,  the  teacher  must  devise  some  way -to 
make  them  pronounce  the  u  properly. 

The  French  nasal  sounds  are  not  difficult  to  acquire ;  for  the  Ameri- 
cans have  many  words  in  which  they  give  to  an,  in,  on,  un,  the  eamc 
sound  as  the  French  do ;  but,  in  general,  they  end  it  by  dwelling 
separately  on  the  n,  while  the  French  never  do.  "With  the  latter  it  is 
a  simple  or  a  vowel  sound ;  with  the  former,  a  compound  one.  For 
'instance,  the  English  combination  in  is  pronounced  ee-n,  having 
nothing  of  a  nasal  nature  at  the  beginning,  but  ending  with  the  full 
nasal  sound  of  n,  thus  presenting  two  distinct  parts,  while  the  French 
in  has  but  one  sound,  as  heard  in  the  ain  of  faint,  or  en  of  pent.  So 
that,  to  pronounce  the  French  nasal  sound  properly,  ycu  must  retain 
throughout  the  sound  you  begin  with,  and  not  dwell  separately  on 
the  n. 

ON  DIVIDING  AND  MARKING  WORDS. 

There  are,  at  pages  xv,  xvi,  xvii,  xviii,  words  given  to  be  divided  into 
syllables,  and  to  be  marked.  When  the  pupil  has  learned  as  far  as 
the  words  to  be  divided,  (page  xv,  a  very  important  one,)  let  him,  ou 
some  paper  or  a  slate,  divide  the  first  word  thus :  fi-ni,  saying  men- 
tally, the  first  syllable  must  be  FI,  in  order  to  end  in  a  vowel  sound,  and 
because  the  N  being  followed  by  the  vowel,  I  must  go  with  it ;  the  second 
syllable  is  ni.  The  vowel  sound  of  the  first  is  i,  like  the  e  in  be, 
marked  4,  which  is  to  be  put  under  fi.  The  vowel  sound  of  the  second 
is  also  4  ;  so  that  the  word  divided  and  marked  will  assume  this  form  : 
fi-ni.  The  second,  me-nd,  &c. 
44  2  3 

Let  the  pupil  take  but  one  line  here  at  a  time  ;  then  proceed  with  the 
lules  at  xv  and  xvi,  dividing  and  marking  the  few  words  they  contain 
as  examples,  until  he  comes  to  the  paragraph  (page  xvi)  of  words  to 
be  divided  and  marked,  then  he  must  take  one  line  of  them,  with  the 
one  at  page  xv.  When,  in  going  through  the  other  rules,  at  xvi  and 
xvii,  he  comes  to  the  paragraph  of  words  (p.  xvii)  to  be  divided,  let 
him  take  one  line  there  also,  with  those  at  xv,  xvi,  &c.  This  gradual 
progress  by  line  is  essential ;  for,  the  words  to  be  divided  and  marked, 
although  intended  to  exemplify  the  rules  under  particular  heads, 
contain  rules  belonging  to  other  sections,  which  the  student  is  thug 
enabled  to  reach  just  in  time  to  divide  and  mark  them  correctly. 

I  have  said,  one  line  at  a  time ;  but,  although  the  progress  must  be 
gradual,  it  must  vary  according  to  the  aptness  of  the  class  or  scholar; 
for,  in  some  instances,  two  lines  will  hardly  be  enough ;  while,  in 
others,  three  words  would  be  too  much.  The  teacher  must  be  guided 
by  circumstances. 


FRENCH    PRONUNCIATION. 
BY  V.  VALUE 


VOWELS  are  simple 
ghange  in  the  position 

The  Frencli 
1       a       sounds 
I2     ft 


2 

e 

as  e 

2 

eu* 

as  th 

22 

eu 

as  u 

3 

6       (acute) 

as  a 

32 

(  I  (grave)          | 
\  2  (circumflex)  / 

as  e 

4 

i 

as  e 

5 

0 

as  o 

5* 

0 

as  o 

6 

i< 

as 

7 

ou 

as  oo 

8 

an,  en 

as  an 

9 

in 

as  air 

10 

on 

as  on 

11 

un 

as  wra 

TABLE  I. —  Vote  el  Sounds. 

sounds,  which  can  be  lengthened  without 
of  the  organs  that  produce  them. 

Other  combinationa. 
as  a     in   add  it,  ca. 

as  a    in  far  eft. 

at  end  of  tak<?. 
as  the  cough  sound     y  cu,  ocu. 

in  bttd 

in  gate 

in  get 

in  be 
in  no 
in  nor 
in  sweet 
in  good 
in  warzt 


i  { 
f    I  eii,  ecu,  eu,  rcu,  03. 

ai,  ci,  (cr,  ez,  final.) 


rai,  ci,  (cr, 

A  1 

tlai>  ai>  ei. 


i,  y  (»  grec). 

6,  au,  eau,  eo,  eo. 

6,  au,  eau,  eo,  eo. 

u,  u,  (eu,  in  avoir.) 

ou,  oii: 

am,  em,  en,  aon. 


f  im,  in,  aim,  ain,  ein,  ym, 


in  wowt 
in  grunt 


yn  (EX,  final.) 
om,  eon. 
um,  eun. 


TABLE  II. — Two  Irregular  Diphthongs. 

12.  oi   sounds  like  wa  in  water — or  (ou+a)  (7-j-l2)  ot. 

13.  oin  sounds  like  warn  in  quaint — or  (ou-J-in)  (7-f-9). 

They  are  irregular,  because  in  those  combinations  the  i  and  the  <? 
change  their  primitive  sounds.  As  in  regular  diphthongs  each  vowel 
retains  its  proper  sound,  they  offer  no  difficulty. 

*  There  is  in  pew,  deux,  heureux,  vceux,  &c.,  a  sound  of  French  «w,  au,  tliat  ha« 
bo  representation  in  English,  except  the  guttural  eound  heard  in  coughing  ;  heugh  ! 
hsugh!  (if  BO  spelt.)  It  is  between  the  u  of  budge  and  the  final  e  of  the  sanif 
l^ord.  In  French  it  is  not  guttural,  and  not  difficult  to  sound. 

t  Rules  wLl  bo  given  to  determine  the  sound  of  these  combinations. 

11 


Xll  FRENCH      PRONUNCIATION. 

Every  French  sound  having  a  representative  in  an  English  word,  H 
is  evident  that  the  mere  recollection  of  the  English  word  secures  tha 
pronunciation  of  the  French  sound,  and  secures  it  effectually ;  for  the 
scholar  is,  expected  -to  be  ?or.rect  in  the  utterance  of  his  own  language- 
(See  Appendix,  Note  i.)  , 

TAIL'S  III.  — 'French  dons-oncnttS  differing  in  Sound  from  the  English 

14.  $  (with  a  cedilla)  like  s  before  a,  o,  u — sa,  so,  su. 
16.  eh,  in  French  words,  like  sh  in  sAow. 

16.  gn  sounds  like  the  gn  of  miywonette. 

17.  il,  ill  (when  liquid),  sounds  like  Hi,  of  bri^z'ant. 

18.  j  (and  g,  which  is  ALWAYS  soft  before  e,  i,  and  ?/),  Hie  2,  in  azure 

19.  qu  like  k, — gu  like  g  at  the  end  of  %.  ' 

20.  s  like  z,  when  single  and  between  two  vowels, — rose,  nose. 

21.  th  sounds  ALWAYS  like  t  alone. 

92,.  tij  when  in  English  they  sound  like  sh  (as  in  r  i^on,  patfent,  &c.), 
sound  in  French  like  the  English  word  see. 

TABLE  IV. — Consonant  Letters. 

Consonants  have  no  sound  without  the  help  of  a  vowel.  Such  is  the 
definition ;  yet,  in  the  word  abstract,  the  b,  the  s,  the  t,  and  the  r,  £c., 
are  each  sounded,  and  sounded  respectively  as  b  in  tu&e;  as  s  in  base  ; 
as  t  in  rate ;  and  as  r  in  glare ;  or  else,  as  if  connected  with  the  faint 
or  mute  French  e,  or  e  at  the  end  of  take.  So  that,  any  consonant 
Bounded  by  itself,  or  at  the  end  of  a  word,  is  supposed  to  be  connected 
with  the  mute  or. faint  c. 

Each  consonant,  in  French,  as  in  English,  has  a  SOUND  differing 
from  its  NAMK.  This  distinction  is  important.  Although  the  French 
names  will  be  found  in  this  table,  yet  the  student  is  invited,  particu- 
larly at  first,  to  use  the  English  names,  bee,  cee,  dee,  &c.,  or  else  the 
final  sound  of  the  English  consonants,  b,  c,  d,  f,  g,  g,  h,  j,  k,  1,  m,  n, 
p,  qu,  r,  s,  t,  v,  x,  z. 
6  (bay),  as  in  English  at  the  end  of  mob. 

1     I2     2     2      22     3-   32    4    o     52    6     7      89     10     11    12     13 
ba,   ba,   be,  beu,  beu,  be,  be,   bi,   bo,   bo,  bu,  bou,  ban,  bin;  bon,  bun.  ooi,  bom, 
*e  (say),  hard  before  a,  o,  u,  as  the  English  k  in  ban/r. 
ca,  ca  co,  co,  cu,  cou,  can,  con,  cun,  coi.  coin, 

c  (say),  soft,  ahvays  before  e,  i,  y,  like  s  in  so. 

ce,  ceu,  ceu,  ce,  ce,  ci,  cy,  cin. 

v  (say),  hard,  as  A;  before  a  consonant  or  at  the  end  of  a  word.  Ao, 
civ.,  ere,  creu,  creu,  cl6,  cle,  cti,  oc,  cdo,  ctu,  clou,  cran.  crin, 
clpi,  cloin. 

|f  (with  a  cedilla),  only  before  a,  o,  u,  like  s  in  50,  instead  of  k.  99^ 
9a,  ce,  ceu,  ce,  ce,  ci,  90,  cu,  9ou,  9an,  cin,  9on,  9im,  901,  $oin. 

*c,  ir.  fecond  and  its  compounds,  sounds  like  g  hard— segon,— ^occndaire,  &«• 
able  III. 


FRENCH      PRONUNCIATION.  X1U 

*t'/»  (say,  ash),  like  sh  in  show,  cha,  cha,  che,  cheu,  cheu,  ch.6,  chb, 
clii,  cho,  chu,  chou,  chan,  chin,  chon,  chun — choi,  choin. 

d  'day),  as  in  English  at  the  end  of  larf.  Note. — Mien  final,  it  sound* 
like  t,  if  united  to  the  following  initial  vowel ;  as  grand  ami,  pro- 
nounced gran  tami — da,  da,  de,  &c. 

(  as  in  English  in  proof.     Note.— In  nenf  (9)  it  sounds 

/(eff),  \  like  v,  if  joined  with  the  following  vowel;  as  neuf 

fh  (pay,  ash),  \  hoyimcs,  pronounced,  neu-vom — ph,  does  not — fa,  .fa, 
V,  fe,  feu,  &c. 

g  (zhay,)  hard,  ALWAYS  before  a,  o,  u,  or  a  consonant,  like  g  hard  in 
the  English  word  ba# — garde,  fagot,  figure,  gloire.  Note.  When 
final,  like  k,  if  joined  to  the  following  vowel;  as,  rang  honorable — 
pronounced,  ran-kpnorable.  ga,  ga,  go,  go,  gu,  gou,  gan,  gon, 
gun — goi,  goin. 

*y  (zhay),  ALWAYS  soft  before  e,  i,  y, — like  z  in  azure — gea,  gea,  ge, 
geu,  geu,  ge,  ge,  gi,  geo,  geo,— geou,  gean— gin,  gecn,  geun— 
geoi,  geoin. 

*gn  (zhay,  enu),  like  gn  in  mignonette.  Note. — If  g  and  n  are  separated, 
they  sound  as  in  English  in  magna,  mag-na. 

*yu,  like  g  hard.     The  u  is  usually  silent. 

h  (ash).  This  letter,  at  the  beginning  of  words,  is  called  either  mutt 
or  aspirated ;  but  it  is  never  sounded.  The  word  .aspirated  usually 
leads  the  English  student  to  think  that  the  h  in  French  must  have 
the  same  guttural  sound  as  in  English ;  but  that  is  not  the  case. 
When  aspirated  in  French  the  h,  without  being  pronounced,  pre- 
vents the  elision  or  cutting  off  of  the  preceding  vowel.  For  instance, 
the  h  being  aspirated  in  the  French  word  heros  (hero),  you  must 
write  le  heros  (the  hero),  and  pronounce  le  ero  in  two  words.  On 
the  contrary,  when  the  h  is  mute,  you  write  Vhomme  (tbe  man)  and 
pronounce  Z'om,  in  one  word.  But  in  both  cases  the  h  is  entirely 
silent — ha,  ha,  he,  heu,  &c. 

*j  (zhee),  always  soft,  like  z  in  a~ure,  joujou — ja,  ju,  je,  jeu,  &c. 

k  (kah),  as  k  in  English  at  the  e*id  of  pac& — ka,  ka,  ke,  £c. 

c/i  (say,  ash),  when  followed  by  a  consonant,  like  /<•,  as  in  English 
Christ.     Note. — It  is  usually  in  words  of  foreign  origin. 

I  (ell),  as  in  English,  when  not  liquid,  as  in  untz'Z.     La,  la,  le,  &c. 

*l  (ell  mouille),  liquid,  always  written  il,  ill,  sounds  like  the  Hi  of  t\ 
English  word  briWzant.     Examples :  Ail,  aille,  paille,  veille,  fillo, 
juillet,  ceil.— Ilia,  ilia,  ille,  illeu,  illeu,  ille,  ille,  illo,  illo,  ilia, 
illou,  illan,  illan,  illin,  illon,  illun,  illoi,  illoin. 

K  (emm),  )  as  in  English,  when  not  combined  with  the  preceding  vow: 

9  (enn),     /  sound,  as  in  clam,  din — ma,  me,  mo,  &c. 


*  See  Table  III. 


XIV  FRENCH     PRONUNCIATION. 

P  (Pa7)>  as  m  English  in  pump.     Note. — Silent  after  m,  when  they  aid 

in  the  same  syllable,  as  pro??ipt,  temps.     Pa,  pa,  &c. 
q  (ku),  as  in  English  like  k. 
o[u  (ku-u),  like  the  English  k,  not  thje  English  qu,  as  quxnd,  kan ;  qu^ 

kee,  not  kwee.     Do  not  mark  qu  6,  and  f  4,  but  qui  (4) ;  qua,  qua, 

que,  queu,  queu,  que',  que,  qui,  quo,  quo,  qu,  quou,  quan,  quin 

quon,  qu'un,  quoi,  quoin. 

r  (air),  as  in  English  in  roar — strongly  articulated — ra,  ra,  ie,  &c. 
tf  (sss),  hard,  like  s  in  so. 

1st.  At  the  beginning  of  words,  as  sage. 

2d.    When  final  and  pronounced,  as  atlas,  moeurs. 

3d.    When  doubled,  as  passer,  possession. 

4th.  Single  and  preceded  by  another  consonant;    as  ccnscrvcr, 
absolu,  observation.     Note. — Although  the  English  s  fre- 
quently sounds  like  a  z,  after  the  letter  b,  as  in  absolve, 
observe,  £c.,  it  does  not  in  French; — sa,  sa,  se,  &c. 
*s  (ess),  soft  or  like  z,  when  single  and  between  two  vowels,  as  platsant, 

rose.  Note. — When  final,  if  joined  to  the  following  vowel,  it  sounds 

like  z ;  as  Us  o?it,  eelzon,-j-  &c.  ; — asa,  ase,  aseu,  ase,  ase,  asi,  iso, 

iso,  isu,  isou,  esan,  esin,  eson,  asun,  usoi,  u&oin. 
t  (tay),  as  in  English  in  fa£. — ta,  ta,,  te,  teu,  teu,  &c. 
*ti  (tay  ee).  Note. — When  the  ti,  in  English,  sounds  like  s/?,  as  in 

nation,  patient,  minutix,  the  French  ti  sounds  like  see  in  English. 

Examples :  Naft'on,  parent,  minufc'e, — tia,  tia,  tie,  £c. 
*th  (tay,  ash),  like  the  English  initial  t.     Examples :   Italic,  Mefitre, 

—tha,  tha,  the,  thcu,  theu,  the',  the,  &c. 

v  (vay),  as  in  English  at  the  end  of  drive — va,  va,  ve,  veu,  &c. 
w  (do:ble  vay),  as  v,  or  as  the  vowel  ou  (7th.) 

k  ks  & 

%  (eeks),  like  k,  ks,  gz,  s,  z ;  as  ezcepter,  extreme,  e-rercicc,  Bruzelles 

(Brussels),   sizieme. 
7  (zed),  as  in  phiz.     Examples :  Zone,  azur,  amazone. 

DIVISION    OF   WORDS    INTO    SYLLABLES. 

This  is  a  very  important  exercise,  and  one  which  should  be  daily 
practised  for  a  considerable  time,  and  now  and  then  renewed. 

In  dividing  the  words,  attend  to  the  combination  of  letters  in  Tables 
I.,  II.,  III.  For  instance,  in  the  word  hautement,  the  combination  au, 
*>emg  at  No.  5  in  Table  I.,  take  them  together  and  mark  them  52.  In 
Lua,  the  combination  ua  not  being  in  the  table,  separate  them  into  t 
ftii-i  a,  and  mark  them  G  and  1.  So  with  oi,  winch  being  in  Tab!e  II. 

*  See  Table  III. 

f  And  sometimes  before  ra,  as  enthousiasme,  mesmerisme 


FRENCH     PRONUNCIATION.  XV 

Is  marked  lli,  whilst  to  must  be  separated,  because  that  combination 
is  not  in  the  tables.  Ai,  in  the  table  ;  ia,  not  in,  £c. 

The  apostrophe  (')  is  used  to  connect  two  words  into  one,  and  takea 
the  place  of  a  vowel  suppressed  before  another.  L'cau  sounds  just 
like  lo;  quyavez-vous?  like  kahvayvoo. 

The  END  OF  ANY  SYLLABLE  must  be  a  vowel  sound.  This  is  an  aU~ 
important  direction.  Note.  A  vowel  sound  may  (as  is  the  case  with  an, 
en,  in,  on,  oin,  £c.)  end  with  a  consonant  letter. 

A  consonant,  when  final  or  sounded  by  itself,  is  supposed  to  form  a 
compound  syllable  with  the  mute  or  faint  e.  So  chef  is  separated  into 
che-fe  ;  avec  into  a-ve-ke  ;  fl  into  fi-le  ;  ver  into  ve-re  ;  portc  into 
po-r-te.  Hence  each  consonant  is  marked  2  from  the  faint  e. 

m  or  n,  mm  or  nn,  followed  by  a  vowel,  goes  with  it;  if  not,  it  goes 
with  the  preceding.  Image,  separates  into  i-ma-gc,  and  not  as  in  Eng- 
lish (irn-age).  Note,  k  after  n  is  always  null.  Inherent  separates  into 
i-nhe-rent,  (the  h  being  mute,  is  null  in  inherent;)  inhumain,  becomes 
i-nhu-main  ;  inhumainc,  i-nhu-mai-ne. 

Divide  and  mark  :  —  Fiui,  mcne,  proincnc,  amene,  ananas.     ITomme 

becomes  ho-mine  ;  donne,  do-nne"  ;  commc,  commune,  commere,  connu, 

•u6,  pommc',  adonna,  ronde,  campagnc,  enfant,  son,  mon,  pardon, 

parfum,  instrument,  conirnun,  commence,    innocent,   incui,   inhabit^, 

continental,  inharmonieux,  immobility. 

A  final  consonant  having  no  vowel  connected  with  it,  ought,  from  its 
definition,  to  be  silent.  It  is  so  in  French.  Hence  it  is  united  to  the  last 
syllable,  or  to  a  monosyllable  ;  as,  avant  becomes  a-vant—  the  final  t 
being  silent  goes  with  van,  so  as  to  make  vant  ;  four  letters,  although 
but  three  (van)  are  pronounced.  In  the  French  word  port  the  four 
letters  are  taken,  although  only  por  are  pronounced  ;  but  porte  becomes 
vor-te,  because  the  last  e  causes  the  t  to  sound. 

Divide  and  mark:  —  Comment,  dents,  prudent,  prudeute,  camp, 
temps,  nid,  pied.  (4-fr-3.) 

RULE.  —  Final  consonants  are  silent,  except  c,  /,  Z,  and  r  preceded  by 
ft,  i,  o,  u.  Sac,  avec,  lac,  vif,  actif,  sel,  miel,  fil,  car,  par,  finir,  cor, 
leur,  auteur.  See  Appendix,  Note  ± 

RULES    OX    FRENCH    E. 
Letters  and  Combinations,  marked  2  (little  two),  and  pronounced  like  ike  e  at  . 

the  end  of  take.* 

Any  sound  marked  2  (little  two)  is  in  French  called  mute  or  faint  ; 
t  (without  accent)  is  mute  or  faint,  in  the  following  cases. 
Rule  1st.     e—  2at  the  end  of  words,  as  ce,  de,  traite,  pere, 


•  This  is  the  only  vowel  sound  that  is  slighted  or  suppressed  in  French—a. 
•a    u,  &c.,  h-ivo  always  their  full  sounds. 


KV1  FRENCH    PRONUNCIATION. 

"  Rule  2d.  e,—  *  before  a  single  consonant  not  final,  (except  the  con 
Bonant  x,  which  has  usually  a  compound  sound.)  Venu,  deran^ 
recevoir,  Fernando,  redemande. 

Rule  3d.  c=2  before  two  consonants,  the  second  of  which  is  I,  or  r; 
as  in  replace,  represente,  secretement,  repliant. 

Rule  4th.  es=2  at  the  end  of  words  of  more  than  one  syllable,  aa 
Bibles, *  places,  dites,  faites. 

Rule  5th.  ent=2  at  the  end  of  the  third  person  plural  of  verbs ;  as 
chanted,  ils  jouerc^,  ils  disaiewZ.  When  immediately  after  a  vowel,  with- 
out any  intervening  consonant,  they  merely  lengthen  the  preceding 
vowel  sound. 

R-ule  6th.  2  is  placed  over  a  consonant  sounded  by  itself,  either  in 
the  body  or  at  the  end  of  a  word,  for  the  e  mute  is  supposed  connected 
with  it.  Examples:  pour,  pou-r;  corde,  co-r-de;  fil,  fi-1;  soldat, 
so-l-dat. 

Observation. — E  is  null,  and  therefore  not  marked,  when,  WITHOUT 
AN  ACCENT,  it  is  before  a  and  o,  as  George,  nageait.  It  is  frequently 
so  in  English,  as  George,  pageant,  dungeon.  It  is  thus  placed  to  soften 
the  g.  When  pronounced  in  French,  the  6  is  accented. 

These  constitute  what  the  French  call  mute  syllables. 

Divide  and  mark: — Le,  me,  que,  tete,  habite,  eleve,  montagne,  revenu,- 
revenant,  devoir,  repos,  repose,  reposant,  celui,  retire,  retire,  cede, 
cede,  accable,  devant,  replace,  repla^ant,  repli,  replie,  une,  moine, 
moins,  prenant,  refuse,  tu  refuses,  vie,  lui,  joue*,  jou^e,  petit,  petite, 
il  entre,  ils  entrent  (3d  pers.  pi.)  montagnes,  ils  replacent  (3d),  voies, 
Sieves,  ils  prient  (3d),  ils  disent  (3d),  poindre,  mangea,  mangeanres 
Georgie,  col,  protocol,  sel,  chef,  il,  foin,  cordial,  plongea,  seul,  pararol 

IMPORTANT    REMARK    ON    E    MUTE. 

When  e  without  accent  is  mute  or  faint,  it  invariably  (we  may  evev 
eay  universally)  lengthens  the  preceding  syllable. 

In  French,  in  the  following  cases,  it  does  not  merely  lengthen,  but  if 
likewise  alters  the  sound  of  the  preceding  vowel. 

</,  eft,  before  a  mute  syllable,  is  open  and  marked  I2  :  male. 

e,  before  a  mute  syllable,  usually  takes  the  grave  or  circumflex 
accent,  and  is  marked  32  or  e  open :  pere,  mere,  meme. 

ai,  ai}  ei,  before  a  mute  syllable,  are  marked  32:  aime,  connaitre. 
pcine. 

0,  o,  au,  eau,  before  a  mute  syllable,  52:  p^riode,  cote,  hawte. 

<w-  =  22,  before  a  mute  syllable:  riewse,  mewte.f 

The  same  vowel  sounds,  viz:  a,^e,  ai,  £c.,  o,  &c.,  eu,  are  open  and 
marked  in  the  same  manner,  before  two  or  more  consonants;  as,  apro, 

*  See  AppenJix,  Note  3.  |  See  Apper  Six ,  Note  4 


FRENCH     PRONUNCIATION.  XVfi 

ferine,  paraitre,  faiblc,  autre,  noble,  heurtc.  And  likewise  before  a 
final  consonant  sounded:  ver,  fer,  air,  chef,  cor,  parasol,  leur,  seuL 
Because,  in  both  cases,  the  following  consonant  is  supposed  to  be  Con- 
nected with  the  e  mute  or  faint,  and  may  be  considered  as  forming  a 
mute  syllable :  ve-re,  fe-re,  ai-re,  che-fe,  co-re,  &c.  In  these  two  last 
situations  (before  two  or  more  consonants  and  before  a  final  consonant 
sounded)  the  e  takes  no  accent,  though  marked  32. 

Divide  and  mark: — Changea,  changeames,  ane,  hate,  diademe,  brcf, 
plonge*,  plongerent  (3d),  frere,  nagea,  nageates,  leve,  promene,  prome- 
fiera,  supreme,  rieur,  rieuse,  haut,  haute,  cote*,  cote,  cotes,  "ose,  relief, 
ose',  saut,  saute,  osant,  gueux,  gueuse,  saut6,  sonne,  sonnd,  liberte, 
fameux,  fameuse,  faible,  heureux,  heureuse,  espoir,  aube,  ode,  odeur, 
preneur,  preneuse,  sel,  mer,  sec,  bonheur,  malheur,  Sieves,  gloire, 
mouvoir,  6gale,  6gales,  e*gout,  retirent  (3d),  seche,  sec,  compagnes, 
tfgalera,  entreprises,  replantent  (3d),  bonnes,  e*galerent,  mangeates, 
petites,  pour,  mer,  noircir,  George,  lient  (3d),  jouent  (3d),  cencounr, 
foui,  fouine,  neige,  neigea,  voient  (3d),  bel,  beau,  belle,  vendent  (3d), 
vendant,  content,  content  (3d),  neigeant,  plongea,  replongerent'(3d), 
diagonal,  replient  (3d),  moindre. 

Letters  and  Combinations  marked  3,  and  pronounced  like  a  in  gate,  or  § 
(close  or  with  acute  accent.) 

Rule  1st.  I  (with  acute  accent)  called  e  close,  is  marked  3. 

Rule  2d.  e  =  3  in  the  conjunction  ct  (and).  The  t  is  never  sounded, 
and  never  connected  with  the  following  initial  vowel :  un  et  un  (un  6* 
un)  ;  et  enfin  (d  enfin). 

Rule  3d.  c  =  3  before  cc,  dd,  ff,  or  any  other  double  consonants  noi 
followed  by  a  mute  syllable :  effacer,  dessin,  reddition,  excellent,  terri- 
toire,  paresseux. 

Rule  4th.  e  =  3  in  ex  followed  by  a  vowel:  ezact,  mger.  The  a 
sounds  then  like  gz,  egzact,  egzigc. 

R-ule  5th.  ez  =  3  when  final,  or  taken  in  combination  at  the  end  of 
words ;  as  avez,  prenez,  nez. 

Rule  6th.  cr=3,  when  final,  in  words  of  more  than  one  syllable; 
and  then  the  r  is  never  sounded,  as  parZer,  pommier.* 

Rule  7th.  ai,  eat,  ei=B,  when  not  followed  by  a  mute  syllable,  and 
likewise  when  final:  J'az,  aimer,  to  love — aimons,  let  us  love — je  man- 
geai,  I  ate — perne",  grieved — gai,  gay. 

Divide  and  mark  the  following  words : — Et£,  e'-te' ;  all<5,  a-lle ;  e'carte', 
horde*,  chante*,  repe'te',  de*cide*,  pile*,  peignd,  et,  trois  et  un,  errant, 
erronne*,  cccl6siastique,  efface,  errata,  exage*rer,  effacer,  exactement, 
easai,  ^carter,  (icartez,  effort,  bouchez,  bouches,  exister,  cxlstez,  exi^ 


k  See  Appendix,  Note  5. 


XVI 1 1  FRENCH      PRONUNCIATION. 

effarouche,  effarouche,  exaction,  £carte,  paresseux,  paresseuse,  ttj 
dennes,  effaroucher,  donnas,  effarouchez,  donnez,  donner,  causal,  et 
av^c,  et  au,  et  apres,  verrai,  prendrai,  aine',  la  et  ici,  et  avant,  peinai, 
aimant,  aimez,  aime*,  neig£,  neigeant,  neigcr,  mangeai,  nous  nageons, 
d^mangeaison,  raison,  plaisir,  peignant,  plein,  plpine,  peigne',  chez, 
rendez-vous,  prendrai,  peindrai,  effrene,  effarouches. 

Litters  and  Combinations  marked  32,  and  pronounced  like  e  in  get,  or  fe 
(grave  or  open)  and.  e. 

Hule  1st.  £  (with  a  grave  accent)  called  e  open,  and  also  e,  marked  32* 

Rule  2 d.  e=32in  monosyllables  ending  with  a  consonant;  as  ccs, 
des,  est,  lea,  mes,  ses,  tes,  &c.  Note. — If  the  consonant  is  c,  f,  Z,  or  r, 
it  sounds  after  the  e;  as,  sec,  se-k;  chef,  che-f ;  Bel,  se-1;  ver,  ve-r. 

Rule  3d.  e  =  32  before  two  or  more  consonants ;  as,  espe*rer,  restons, 
liberte.  Note. — The  consonant  that  immediately  follows  the  e  is  pro- 
nounced separately,  and  of  course  maiked2:  as  esp£rer,  e-s-pe'-rer: 
xestons,  re-s-tons. 

Rule  4th.  e=32  before  double  consonants,  cc,  ff,  ss,  rr,  II,  &c.,  when 
the  following  syllable  is  mute :  as  nette,  querelle,  cesse,  terre,  richesse, 
paresse-. 

Rule  5th.  e=32  before  a  sounding  final  consonant;  as  avec,  relief, 
miel,  Oreb,  hier,*  respect;  and  in  every  monosyllable  ending  in  er,  as 
fer,  mer. 

Rule  Gth.  ais,  ait,  aienty  oient^  aix,  et=&  when  final:  as  j'avais,  il 
(it-lit,  ils  6taient,  ils  6toient,  paix,  objet. 

Rule  7th.  c  =•  32  in  ex,  followed  by  a  consonant ;  as  extreme,  expe*ri- 
ence.  Note. — The  x  is  usually  pronounced  ks ;  ekstreme,  eksp<5rience. 

Rule  8th.  ai,  eai,  ei—  32  when  followed  by  a  mute  syllable ;  as  aime, 
ai-je?  peine,  enseigne. 

Divide  and  mark: — Sdvere,  scene,  meme,  supreme,  mes,  est,  bref, 
Bee,  tel,  mer,  espoir,  destitution,  fermente,  serment,  telle,  cette,  quelle, 
piece,  cachette,  richesse,  richesses,  grief,  griefs,  miel,  fiel,  j'avais,  tu 
avais,  il  donnait,  ils  portaient,  elle  joignait,  ils  jouaient  (3d),  fait,  effet, 
elles  dtaient,  objet,  sujet,  portefaix,  ils  6taient  (3d),  elles  priaient  (3d), 
venaient  (3d),  aime,  sennS,  seme,  aiment  (3d),  ils  semerent  (3d),  peine, 
peine,  peigne*,  peigne,  secret,  men^,  mene,  sain,  saine,  ancien,  ancienne, 
le  mien,  les  miens,  les  miennes,  boulet,  faite,  Jeter,  jette,  baudet,  cachet, 
met>  niets,  paix,  expres,  extravagant,  extraordinaire,  exposerent  (3d), 
fci,  ver. 


*  Soo  Appendix,  Note  5. 

f  6«n«  is  the  termination  of  tlie  third  person  plural  of  the  imporfoct  and  condi 
Uoaal,  old  orthography 


FRENCH      PRONUNCIATION.  XIX 

VARIOUS    EXPLANATIONS. 

e  (without  accent)  =  1,  or  sounds  like  French  a  in  the  combination 
Examples  :  femme  (pro.  fam) — decemment,  de-ce-inmenc.  (3-^-1 
4-8.) 

en  at  the  end  of  words  =  9.  Examples:  bi-en,  well;  rien,  nothing. 
Note. — In  the  words  composed  from  bicn-,  the  combination  en,  although 
it  may  no  longer  be  final,  retains  the  ninth  vowel  sound.  Examples : 
bi-^n-tot,  soon ;  bi-e;i-fe-sant,  benevolent. 

en=9,  in  the  termination  ienst  when  s  is  the  mark  of  the  pluraL- 
Examples :  mien,  miens ;  entretien,  entretiens. 

<rrc  =  9,  in  the  combinations  icn,  tens,  ient,  of  the  verbs  tenir,  to  hold, 
to  keep ;  venir,  to  come,  and  their  compounds.  Examples :  je  vi-en- 
irai,  I  shall  come;  je  ticns,  I  hold;  elle  convient,  she  agrees. 

en  everywhere  else,  except  in  the  termination  ent  of  the  third  person 
plural,  (see  Rule  5  on  e  mute,  page  xiv.)  always=8:  entends,  senti- 
ment, en. 

Remarks  on  th&  letter  y. 

When  the  letter  y  in  any  word  is  preceded  by  a  vowel,  it  is  equiva- 
lent to  i,  i.  The  first  i  unites  with  the  foregoing  vowel,  and  must  be 
marked  accordingly.  The  second  i  sounds  separately,  or  unites  with 
what  follows.  Examples:  ayant,  ai-i-ant;  citoyen,  ci-toi-i-en;  pays, 
pai-is. 

The  diaeresis  (••)  separates  two  letters,  which  otherwise  would  sound 
together.  Thus,  in  Saul,  (the  apostle's  name,)  aw=52;  but  in  the 
name  of  the  Hebrew  king  Saul,  with  the  diceresis,  a  and  u  are  sepa- 
rated, and  pronounced  Sa-u-1.  (1,  G,  2.) 

Of  the  liquid  sounds,  AIL,  EIL,  IL,  EUIL,  CEIL,  OUIL,  AILS,  EILS,  &c. 

Note. — The  sound  of  Hi  in  the  English  word  brilliant  is  similar  to 
the  French  liquid  t7,  ill. 

When  il  or  Us  final  is  liquid,  the  preceding  vowel  is  pronounced 
separately  with  its  open  sound,  viz:  <z  =  l2,  e=32,  eu=22,  02 =22,  and 
then  follows  the  liquid  sound  of  il  or  ils  =  17.  Examples:  ail,  a-il; 
re*veil,  rd-ve-il;  seuil,  seu-il;  fenouil,  fe-nou-il.  Note. — ceil  is  pro- 
nounced like  euil.  (22,  17.) 

Those  vowels,  a,  e,  i,  £c.,  have  a  long  sound,  because  the  il  final  it 
tujaposed  to  be  followed  by  e  mute. 

AILL,  EILL,  ILL,  EUILL,   CEILL,   OUILL. 

When  followed  by  a  mute  syllable,  the  preceding  vowel  a,  e,  i,  &o,, 
sounds  as  it  does  with  the  final  «7,  as  explained  above.  Exampleo: 
pa-ili-e,  ve-ill-e,  fi-ill-e,  feu-ill-e,  fou-ill-e. 

Wlten  not  followed  by  a  mute  syllable,  the  preceding  vowel  10 


XX  FRENCH     PRONUNCIAT    ON. 

viz:  «==!,  6—3,  eu=2,  ce~2.     Examples:  ma-ill-et,  ve-ill-er,  pi-iLU 
ft-ge,  feu-ill-et,  fou-ill-ant,  ceillet,  ce-ill-et.  (2,  17,  32.) 

CUEIL,  GTJEIL,  when  final. 

In  these  combinations  the  u  serves  only  to  make  the  c  and  the  g  hard: 
the  e  represents  the  long  sound  of  eu  marked  22,  and  the  letters  U  have 
the  liquid  sound  =  17.  Examples:  re-cue-il,  o-r-gue-il. 

CUEILL,  GUEILL,  not  final. 

When  followed  by  a  mute  syllable,  the  preceding  vowel  sounds  as  it 
does  with  the  final  cueil,  gueil,  as  explained  above.  Example,  je  rc- 
cue-ill-e. 

When  not  followed  by  a  mute  syllable,  the  preceding  vowel  is  short  or 
close  ;  that  is,  e  sounds  like  eu  marked  2,  and  the  letters  ill  have  their 
usual  liquid  sound  =  17.  Examples:  re-cue-ill-ant,  o-r-gue-ill-eux. 

Stress  of  the  voice. 

The  stress  of  the  voice  is  placed  on  every  vowel  preceding  a  mute 
syllable.  The  faint  or  mute  e  is  the  only  slighted  sound,  all  the  other 
vowels  receive  a  full  and  distinct  utterance. 

Entre ;  en,  distinct ;  ire,  faint — entreprise ;  en,  full ;  tre,  faint ;  pri, 
full ;  se,  faint.  In  communication,  every  syllable  is  distinct,  and  tlie 
stress  of  the  voice  rests  on  the  last. 


APPENDIX. 

NOTE  1,  (page  xii.) 

In  this  I  differ  totally  from  Mr.  Charles  Picot,  who  in  his  excellent 
Bystem  of  pronunciation  says  (page  C)  :  "  The  English  words  at, 
father,  &c.,  are  merely  given  as  means  of  comparison  and  association, 
to  enable  the  pupil  to  proceed  from  what  he  knows  to  what  he  is  to 
learn,  and  must'  be  dispensed  with  as  soon  as  the  sounds  are  well 
mastered."  Far  from  discarding  those  words,  I  strongly  recommend 
the  scholar  to  retain  them  carefully  as  unerring  guides.  If  they  are 
useful  at  first,  they  must  ever  be  so,  and  would  it  not  be  ungrateful 
to  throw  aside  those  that  befriended  us  in  the  beginning  of  our  career  ? 
Treasure  them  up,  therefore. 

NOTE  2,  (page  xv.) 

In  French,  final  consonants  are  not  generally  pronounced ;  for,  noi 
being  followed  by  a  vowel,  they  ought  naturally  to  be  silent.  Hence 
the  French  words  port  and  grand  are  pronounced  as  if  written  par  and 


XXI 

rrarz;  but  the  t  ai.  .  e  pronounced  :i  '.-h,  when  spelled 

a  French  with  a  final  e,  as  porte,  grande. 
The  above  observation  will  sufficiently  explain  why  the  final  conso- 

i  the  following 

sixteen  vowel  founds  and  two  diphthongs,  as  rzpnmntod 
at  the  end  of  words. 

«'o.  1.  1*          ut, 

8    68,  is  of  two  syllables  and  more,)  ?n{.* 

-2.  vowel,  the  next  consonant  sounds,  as  boeu/,  Icur, 

seuZ  ;  but  the  second  consonant  is  silent;  leure,  scours,  : 

(conjunction),  ez. 

8*.    ;,  :j  (and  fs  in  me  ~),  sicnt,* 

•1. 

.  aux,  op,  os,  ot,  ots,  auds,  auts,  eaux. 

e   consona 

sounds.     Examples  :  fol,  Jacob,  soc,  cor  ;  but  the  second  con- 
son:  <  t:  socs,  cors,  mort,  port 

ta  tlie  verb  ,  cut,  cue,  cues), 

•  lie,  oucs,  oud,  ouds,'  oup,  oups,  ous,  out,  outs,  oux.      ouent* 
8.     amp,  ami  us,  emps,  ent,  cnts,  ans,  ens. 

,  ainc,  aincs,  eii  nts, 

(en,  cnt.)t 

ons,  ont,  ond,  ends,  amb,  ombs,  ompt,  one,  ones. 
1  1.     mi--,  urns. 

oie,  oics,  ois,  oit,  oid,  oids,  <  oieni.* 

oing,  oins,  oii:r  ngs. 

i'agc  XTi.) 

The  reason  why  «  is  marked  J  and  pronounced  like  the  faint  <,  may 
follows.  ' 

/o/;,  mm  friend,  MY^CTI,  &c.,  are  expressions  u 

ie  singular  number.  Now,  as  THE  and  MY  undergo  no  change  in  th« 
lurul  number,  should  book,  friend,  andjpen,  be  spelt  and  prono< 
s  before,  there  could  be  no  distinction  between  the  singular  and  tho 
lural.  To  render  that  distinction  sensible,  an  8  is  added  to  the  end  of 
ach  noun,  (for  the  eye,)  and  is  articulated  to  apprise  the  ear  that  the 
lea  of  plurality  is  intended.  In  French,  on  the  contrary,  the  articles 
Mgular,  Ic,  la,  being  changed  into  lex  for  the  plural,  mon,  ?n>i, 


*  Third  pfrnon  -plural  t\f 

|  ot«nr,  old  nrtlice-  >l  »>f  imperfect  anil  eondltKNttl 

t  (in  and  «n>)  linn  I,  and  in  the  verbs  l«mr,  vcnir,  and  tlioir  compoujid». 


KXi;  FRENCH      PRONUNCIATION 

into  mes,  &c.,  when  those  words  les,  mes,  £c.,  are  heard,  they  &t  once 
intimate  to  the  ear  that  the  plural  is  meant,  hence  the  alteration  of 
the  noun  becomes  useless;  and  although  |Jie  5  is  added,  (for  the  eye,) 
it  is  not  pronounced,  and  of  course  final  es  is  marked  little  2. 

NOTE  4,  (page  xvi.) 

The  e  mute  or  faint,  marked  little  2,  after  a  consonant,  has  the  en"ee$ 
of  lengthening  and  altering  the  sound  of  the  preceding  vowel  or  syl- 
lable, in  English,  as  may  be  seen  below. 

hat,  on  account  of  the  faint  €  that  follows,  becomes  hate  ; 

met  decomes  mete;  bit  becomes  bite; 

hop  becomes  hope  ;  tub  becomes  tube. 

In  French  the  e  mute  always  lengthens  the  preceding  syllable,  but  it 
alters  the  vowel  sound,  when  it  is  after  a  consonant,  only  in  fcur 
instances,  instead  of  doing  it  in  every  case,  as  in  English. 

mal  (marked  1)  becomes  male  (marked  I2). 

heureux  (2,  2),  heureuse  (2,  22);  ce"de  (3,  3),  cede  (3»,  2) ;  haut  (5), 
haute  (52,  ?).  Hence  the  following  rule : 

Silent  E  lengthens  the  preceding  syllable,  and  when  the  vowel  has  two 
sounds,  that  vowel  takes  the  sound  marked  with  double  figures ;  22, 
o2,  52,  and  likewise  I2  when  there  is  a  circumflex  on  the  a ;  not  other- 
wise. 

When  the  faint  e  comes  immediately  after  a  vowel,  no  consonant 
intervening,  as  ie,  ue,  de,  cue,  £c.,  it  lengthens  that  vowel  without 
altering  its  sound. 

NOTE  5,  (pages  xvii  and  xviii.) 

The  r  is  sounded  only  in  a  few  words  of  two  or  more  syllables 
Amer  (1,  32,  2),  bitter;  cuiller,  cu-i-11-e-r  (6,  4,  17,  32  2),  spoon;  enfer, 
hell :  fier,  proud  j  hier,  yesterday ;  hiver,  winter  ;  magister,  country 
Ecli<X'J-:cmsi(?r ;  c**iccrt  ether,  frater,  Alaer,  Jupiter,  Lucifer, 


DIRECTIONS  HOW  TO  USE  THIS  METHOD 


As  there  is  now  a  System  of  Pronunciation  with  this  Method,  let  tha 
first  ten  or  twelve  lessons  be  devoted  to  acquiring  a  complete  know- 
lodge  of  that  important  branch  of  a  modern  language.  If  that  ia 
thoroughly  done,  the  teacher  will  have  no  further  trouble  with  the 
pronunciation,  for  the  pupils  will  be  able  to  read  correctly  by  them- 
selves. 

Each  lesson  now  consists  of  one,  two,  three,  £c.,  separate  vocabu- 
laries, each  followed  by  exercises,  English  at  first,  but  French  and 
English  at  the  Twelfth  Lesson;  that  is,  when  the  student's  ear  begins 
to  become  a  little  familiar  with  French  sounds. 

The  first  vocabulary  must  be  read  by  the  pupils,  each  taking  a  line 
and  pronouncing  aloud  both  the  English  and  French,  the  latter  being 
divided  into  syllables,  and  distinctly  uttered  under  the  direction  of  the 
teacher,  who  ought,  as  they  proceed,  to  ask  questions  respecting  the 
pronunciation.  This  done,  the  students  are  directed: — 1st,  to  learn 
for  the  next  recitation,  the  English  and  French  vocabularies,  so  as  to 
be  able  to  give  the  French  when  the  English  is  mentioned,  or  the 
English  when  the  French  is  given  out ;  and,  2dly,  to  write  down  the 
translation  of  the  first  exercise,  to  be  handed  to  the  teacher,  who, 
directing  them  to  close  their  books,  will,  while  correcting  the  errors, 
give  out  the  English  of  every  question  and  answer,  to  be  put  in  French 
by  the  students. 

The  correction  and  translation  ended,  let  the  next  vocabulary  bo 
read,  or  rather  syllabled,  slowly  and  distinctly,  and  explained  by  the 
teacher,  if  need  be,  and  so  on,  the  vocabularies  being  learned  and  the 
exercises  translated. 

As  this  method  is  simple  and  gradual  enough  for  every  capacity, 
should  there  be  pupils  too  young  to  write  the  translations,  let  them 
prepare  the  exercises  and  recite  them  to  the  teacher,  who  will  do  well 
to  mako  them  spell  out  a  number  of  words  at  each  recitation. 


(23) 


EXPLANATION  OF  THE  SIGNS  USED  IN  THIS  BOOK. 


THE  irregular  verbs  are  designated  by  a  (*)  star. 
The  figures  1,  2,  3,  4,  placed  after  verbs,  denote  that  they  are  regu- 
lar, and  indicate  the  conjugation  to  which  they  respectively  belong. 
Idiomatical  expressions  are  marked  thus :  f. 
The  verbs  taking  etre  (to  be)  as  auxiliary,  are  marked  thus ;  e. 
§  1  to  164  refer  to  paragraphs  in  the  Synopsis,  (from  p.  457  tc  538'.} 
Dir.  1,  means  first  Direction,  &c.,  (p.  457  to  460.) 
R.  1,  means  first  Rule,  &c.,  (from  p.  460  to  461.) 
Obs.  or  Ob.  7,  means  Observation  7th,  £c. 
241,  242,  means  24th  Vocabulary,  first  Section ;  second  Section 
243,  N.  2 ;  24th  Vocabulary,  Note  2. 
282,  Ob.  65 ;  28th  Vocabulary,  Observation  65th. 
§24— R.2,"\ 

g  24 — A.  2,  >  mean  the  2d  article  or  rule  of  24th  paragraph. 
8  24-2,      3 

490 — 3,  means  the  article  marked  3,  at  p.  490. 
Pa.  or  p.  419,  means  page  419 ;  405,  6,  7,  mea?i  4C5,  406,  40? 
Sec  Pro-nun.     830  System  of  Pronunciation. 


OLLENDORFF'S 

FRENCH  METHOD. 


FIRST  LESSON,  1st.— Premiere  Lc$on}  Ire. 


VOCABULARY. 
Have  you  ? 
Yes,  Sir,  I  have 
L 

The.  The  Id. 

Have  you  the  hat  ? 
Yea,  Sir,  I  have  the  bat. 
The  bread.  The  sugar. 

The  broom.  The  paper. 

The  soap. 

My.  Mv  hat. 

Your.  Your  bread 

Have  you  my  hat  ? 

Yes,  Sir,  1  have  your  hat. 

Have  you  your  bread  ? 

I  have  my  bread. 

Which  or  what  ? 
Which  hat  have  you  ? 
I  have  my  hat. 
Which  bread  have  you  ? 
I  have  your  bread. 
My  exercise. 


VOCABULAIIIE.1 

Avez-vous  ?2 

Oui,  Monsieur,  j'ai. 

J c, (which  becomes  jf  before  a 

or  silent  h.   (See  Pronunciation.^ ) 
Le.  Le  chapenu. 

Avez-vous  le  chapeau  ? 
Oui,  Monsieur,  j'ai  le  chapeau. 
Le  pain.  Le  sucre. 

Le  balai.  Le  papier. 

Le  savon. 

Mon.  Mon  chapeau. 

Votre.  Votre  pain. 

Avez-vous  mon  chapeau  ? 

Oui,  Monsieur,  j'ai  votre  chapeau, 

Avez-vous  votre  pain  ? 

j'ai  mon  pain. 

Quel  ?  (before  a  noun.) 
Quel  chapeau  avez-vous  ? 
J'ai  mon  chapeau. 
Quel  pain  avez-vous  ? 
J'ai  votre  pain. 
Mon  exercice. 


FIEST  EXERCISE.  1st. — PREMIER  EXERCICE.   ler. 

Which  exercise  have  you,  Sir  ?    I  have  the  first  exercise. — Have 
pa  the  bread?   Yes.  Sir,  I  have  the  bread. — Have  you  your  bread7 


1  For  the  manner  of  teaching  the  lesson,  see  Manner  of  using  the  Method. 
*  When  the  verb  is  interrogative  the  French  always  put  a  hyphen  (-}  be- 
tween the  veib  and  the  nominative  pronoun.     (J\liud  this  hi  wnfing.'} 
3  (26) 


2G 


SECOND     LESS  OK. 


I  have  my  bread. — Have  you  the  broom'?     I  have  the  broom.- 
Have  you  the  soap  ?     I  have  the  soap. — Have  you  your  soap  * 
have  my  soap. — Which  soap  have  you  ?    I  have  your  soap. — Hav 
you  your  sugar?    I  have  my  sugar. — Which  sugar  have  you? 
have  yoir  sugar. — Which  paper  have  you  ?    I  have  my  paper.- 
Hava  you  my  paper?     I   have  )rour  paper. — Which  bread  .hav 
you?     J  have  my  bread. — Which  broom  have  you?    I  have  yo 
broom . — Hav  3  you  your  exercise  ?    Yes,  Sir,  I  have  my  exercise.- 
Which  exercicte  have  you?    I  have  my  first  exercise.1 


Daily  Salutations. 
Good  day,  Miss. 
How  do  you  do,  Madam  ? 


Salutations  journaher  es. 
Bon  jour,  Mademoiselle. 
Comment  vous  portez-vous,    M 

dame? 
Tres-bien,  merci. 


Very  well,  thank  you. 
Ols.  1.     Tres  is  always  connected,  by  a  hyphen,  will*  the  following  \v 
Good  evening.  |     Bon  soir.2 


SECOND  LESSON,  2d.—Seconde  Legon,  2de. 
VOCABULARY.  VOCABULAIRE. 

5-£e,  before  a  consonant. 
It.    (Objective  pronoun.)  \L,   before  a  vowcl_  &c    ,Pro,lvn.y 

I  have.  I  have  it.  |  J'ai.  Je  1'ai. 

Obs.  2.     Objective  pronouns   are   usually  placed   before   the   verb, 
French.     Instead  of:  I  have  it,  the  French  say:  I  it  have.     Je  Z'ai. 


Have  you 

my  hat  ? 

Avez-vous  mon  chapeau  ? 

Yes,  Sir, 

I  have  it 

Oui,  Monsieur,  je  1'ai. 

Good. 

Bad. 

Bon.                  Mauvais. 

Pretty. 

Ugly. 

Joli.                    Vilain. 

Old. 

Fine,  handsome. 

Vieux.                Beau. 

My  cloth. 

My  fine  cloth. 

Mon  drap.         Mon  beau  drap. 

The  salt. 

The  good  salt. 

Le  sel.               Le  bon  sel. 

1  Pupils  desirous  of  making  rapid  progress  may  compose  a  great  many 
phrases,  in  addition  to  those  given  in  the  exercises  ;  but  they  miiGt  pro- 
nounce them  aloud,  as  they  write  them.     They  should  also  make  separate 
Ikttsof  such  substantives,  adjectives,  pronouns,  and  verbs,  as  they  meet  with 
ai  the  course  of  the  lessons,  in  order  to  be  able  to  find  those  words  more 
'eadily,  when  required  to  refer  to  them  in  writing  their  lessons. 

2  When  no  daily  salutations  are  found  in  some  of  the  lessons,  the  tea< 
ir.av  introduce  some,  or  else  use  the  preceding  ones. 


SKCOND      LESSON. 


The  shot'.          The  >ld  shoe. 
My  wood.  Your  pretty  wood. 

Your  stocking   The  ugly  stocking. 
The  thread.       Your  bad  thread. 
The  dog.  The  horse. 

Not.  (See  negations  in  Synopsis.)    ! 

I  have.  I  have  not. 

I  have  not  the  bread. 

No,  Sir. 

No,  Miss. 

Have  you  my  old  hat  ? 

No,  Sir,  I  have  it  not. 

Which  cloth  have  you  ? 

L  have  the  fine  cloth. 

What  dog  have  you  ? 

I  have  my  old  dog. 

Of. 

The  thread  stocking. 


Le  souliei 
Mon  bois. 
Votre  bas. 
Le  fil. 
Lc  chien. 


Le  vicux  soulier. 
Votre  joli  bois. 
Lo  vilain  bas. 
Votre  mauvais  fil. 
Le  choral. 


Ne  (before),  pas  'after  the  verb), 
J'ai.       Je  n'aipas.  (See  Promm.* 
.Te  n'ai  pas  le  pain. 
Non,  Monsieur. 
Non,  Mademoiselle. 
Avez-vous  mon  vieux  chapeau  ? 
Non,  Monsieur,  je  ne  1'ai  pas. 
Quel  drap  avez-vous  ? 
J'ai  le  beau  drap. 
Quel  chien  avez-vous  ? 
J'ai  mon  vieux  chien. 


De. 


Le  bas  de  fil. 


065.  3.  As  no  noun  can  in  French,  as  it  is  in  English,  be  used  as  iu 
adjective  to  another  noun :  the  preposition,  de,  is  always  put  between  the 
name  of  the  thing  and  the  name  of  the  substance  of  which  it  is  irade, 
which  latter,  in  French,  is  always  placed  last. 


The  paper  hat,    [the  hat  of  paper.] 
The  gun.  x  The  velvet. 

The  wooden  gun,  [the  gun  of  wood.] 
The  velvet  shoe, 
Which  gun  have  you  ? 
I  have  the  wooden  gun. 
Which  stocking  have  you  ? 
I  have  my  thread  stocking. 
Have  you  my  velvet  shoe 
No,  Miss,  I  have  it  not. 
Yes,  Miss,  I  have  it. 


Le  chapeau  de  papier. 

Le  fusil.  Le  velours. 

Le  fusil  de  bois. 

Le  soulier  de  velours. 

Quel  fusil  avez-vous  ? 

J'ai  le  fusil  de  bois. 

Quel  bas  avez-vous  ? 

J'ai  mon  bas  de  fil. 

Avez-vous  mon  soulier  de  velours  if 

Non,  Mademoiselle,  je  ne  Pai  pas. 

Oui,  Mademoiselle,  je  Pai. 


SECOND  EXERCISE,  2d. — SECOND  EXERCICE,  2d. 

Good  day,  Miss. — Good  day,  Sir. — Good  day,  Madam. — How  do 
you  do,  Sir  ?  Very  well ;  thank  you,  Miss. — How  do  you  do,  Ma- 
dam ?  Very  well,  Sir,  thank  you. — Have  you  my  fine  horse  ?  Yes, 
Sir,  I  have  it. — Have  you  my  old  shoe  ?  No,  Miss.  I  have  it  not. — 
Which  dog  have  you  ?  I  have  your  pretty  dog. — Have  you  my  bad 
paper?  No,  Sir,  I  have  it  not. — Have  you  the  good  velvet  cloth  ! 
Yes,  Sir,  I  have  it. — Have  you  my  ugly  gun?  No,  Sir,  1  have  ii 
not. — Which  gun  have  you  ?  I  have  your  fma  gun. — Which  stock- 
big  have  you  ?  I  have  the  thread  stocking.— Have  you  mv  thread 


50  THIRD     LESSOR 

stocking  ?  i  have  not  your  thread  stocking. — Have  you  my  wooden 
gun  ?  No,  Sir,  I  have  it  not. — Have  you  tin  old  bread  ?  I  havo 
not  the  old  bread. — Which  shoe  have  }ou?  I  have  the  fine  velvet 
shoe. — Which  velvet  shoe  ?  Your  velvet  shce. — Which  soap  have 
you?  I  have  my  old  soap. — Which  sugar  have  you?  I  have  your 
good  sugar. — Which  salt  have  you?  I  have  the  bad  salt. — Whicli 
exercise  have  you?  I  have  my  second  exercise. — Have  you  tne 
lirst  exercise  ?  No,  Madam,  I  have  it  not. — Which  hat  have  you'! 
I  have  my  bad  paper  hat. — Have  you  my  ugly  wooden  shoe?  No; 
Sir,  I  have  it  not. — What  vocabulary  have  you  ?  I  rV*^  the  second 
— Have  you  the  first?  Yes,  I  have  it. 


THIRD  LESSON,  3d.— 2  rowwme  Le$on}  3me. 


VOCABULARY. 
Something,  anything. 
Have  you  anything  ? 
I  have  something. 
Nothing,  not  anything. 

Obs.  4.  Quelque  chose  (something,  any  thing),  >s  never  used  with  a  nega- 
tion. Not....  any  thing,  as  well  as  nothing,  must  be  translated  by  nt 
.'before,  and)  rien  (after  the  verb),  and  not  by  ne .  • .  .pas  quelque  chose. 


VOCAEULAIRE. 

Quelque  chose. 

Avez-vous  quelque  chose  ? 

J'ai  quelque  chose. 

Ne  (before),  rien  (after  the  verb/. 


I  have  not  anything. 
I  have  nothing. 
The  wine. 
My  money  or  silver. 
The  gold. 


Je   n'ai  rien.     (Not:  jc  n'ai 

quelque  chose.} 
Le  vin. 
Mon  argent. 
L'or.  (Pronun.) 


pat 


Obs.  5.    Le,  the,  becomes  V  before  a  vowel  or  silent  h. 


The  string.  The  ribbon. 

The  golden  ribbon.   The  button. 
The  coflee.  The  cheese. 

The  coat.  My  coat. 

The  silver  candlestick. 

Are  you  hungry  ? 
I  am  hungry. 
I  am  not  hungry. 
Are  you  thirsty  ? 
I  am  thirsty. 
I  am  not  thirsty. 

Any  thing  or  something  good. 
Have  you  anything  good  ? 
Nothing  or  not  anything  bad. 
I  have  not  anything  'nothing)  gOD 


Le  cordon.  Le  ruban. 

Le  ruban  d'or.  Le  bouton. 

Le  cafe.  Le  fromage, 

L'habit.  (Pronun.)      Mon  hah  it. 
Le  chandelier  d'argent. 

t  Avez-vous  faim  ? 

t  J'ai  faim. 

t  Jc  n'ai  pas  faim. 

t  Avez-vous  soif  ? 

t  J'ai  soif. 

t  Je  n'ai  pas  soif. 

Quelque  c-wse  de  Aon. 
Avez-vous  quelque  chose  da  Ion  1 
Ne ....  rien  de  mauvais. 
Je  n'ai  rien  do  bon. 


THIRI     LESSON  29 

Oba.  6.      What  t  is  q-j.d1  before  a  noun,  as  :   Qncl  fcutoji  avez-vous  ?  but 
qiie  ?  Before  a  verb.) 

What?     ~\Vliat  have  you  ?  |     Que  ?     Qu'avez  vous  ? 

Obs.  7.     Quelque  chose  and  ne rien  require  de  when  they  are  before  an 

adjective  ;  and  so  does  \shat  ?     Examples : 


What  have  you  good  ? 
I  have  the  good  coffee. 
Have  you  anything  pretty  ? 
I  have  nothing  pretty 
Are  you  sleepy  ? 
I  am  sleepy. 
1  am  not  sleepy. 


Qw' avez-vous  de  bon  ? 

J'ai  le  bon  cafe. 

Avez-vous  quelque  chose  tfcjoli? 

Je  n'ai  rien  de  joli. 

t  Avez-vous  BORiRieil  ? 

t  J'ai  sommcil. 

t  Jc  n'ai  pas  sommeii. 


THIRD  EXEKOISE,  3d. — TROISI&ME  EXEBCICE,  onie. 

What  have  you?  1  have  the  third  exercise. — Have  you  your 
second  exercise,  Miss?  Yes,  Sir,  I  have  it— Good  evening,  Mu 
dam,  how  do  you  do  ?-  Very  well,  Sir,  thank  you.  Good  morning, 
Miss.  Good  morning,  Sir. — Have  you  my  good  wine  ?  I  have  it. — 
Have  you  the  gold  ?  I  have  it  not. — Have  you  the  money  ?  I  have 
it.— Have  you  the  gold  ribbon?  No,  Sir,  I  have  it  not.— Have  you 
your  silver  candlestick?  Yes,  Sir,  I  have  it. — What  have  you?  I 
have  the  good  cheese.  T  have  my  cloth  coat. — Have  you  my  silver 
button  ?  I  have  it  not. — Which  button  have  you  ?  I  have  your  good 
gold  button. — Which  string  have  you?  I  have  Jie  gold  string. — 
Have  you  anything  ?  I  have  something. — What  fcave  you  ?  I  have 
the  good  bread.  I  hs.ve  the  good  sugar. — Have  you  anything  good 1 
[  have  nothing  good.— Have  you  anything  handsome  ?  I  have  no- 
thing handsome.  I  have  something  ugly. — What  have  you  ugly? 
[  have  the  ugly  dog. — Have  you  anything  pretty  ?  I  have  nothing 
pretty.  I  have  something  old — What  have  you  old?  I  have  the 
old  cheese. — Are  you  hungry?  I  am  hungry. — Are  you  thirsty ?  I 
am  not  thirsty. — Are  you  sleepy  ?  I  am  not  sleepy. — What  have 
you  beautiful  ?  I  have  your  beautiful  dog. — What  have  you  bad  ? 
I  have  nothing  bad. — Which  paper  have  you?  I  have  your  good 
paper. — Have  you  the  fine  horse  ?  Yes,  Sir,  I  have  it. — Which  shoe 
have  you?  I  have  my  old  velvet  shoe. — Which  stocking  have 
you?  I  have  got  your  fine  thread  stocking. 

Obs.  8.     Always  translate  I  have  or  I  have  got,  by  :  J'ai.    /  have  not  or  J 
have  not  got,  by  :  Je  n'oi pas,1  &c. 

Salutations  journalicres. — To  day.     Aujourd'hui. 

1  N.  B.  —The  use  of  (he  word,  got,  is  condemned  by  grammarians,  but, 
as  it  is  constantly  introduced  in  common  practice,  it  is  perhaps  expedient  to 


BO 


FOURTH     LESSON. 


FOURTH  LESSON,  4th.— Qucrfram*  Legon,  4m* 


VOCABULARY.    1st  Section. 
This   ,  that,  (with  a  noun.) 
This  ,  that  book. 

Of  the  (before  a  consonant). 
Of  the  dog.        Of  the  tailor. 
Of  the  baker.     Of  the  neighbor. 

That  or  the  one. 

The  neighbor's^  or  that  of  the  neigh 
bor. 

The  baker's,  or  that  of  the  baker. 

The  dog's,  or  that  of  the  dog. 
Or. 

flave   you  my  book  or  the  neigh- 
bor's ? 

I  have  the  neighbor's. 

Have  you  my  bread  or  that  of  the 
baker  ? 

I  have  yours. 

I  have  not  the  baker's. 

Mine  or  my  own. 

Of  mine  or  of  my  own. 

Yours  or  your  own. 

Of  yours  or  of  your  own. 


VOCABULAIRE.   Ire  Sectioa. 

Ce  (before  a  consonant,  $  34.) 
Ce  livre. 

Du  ^genitif)  avant  une  consorme 
Du  chien.  Du  tailleur. 

Du  boulanger.         Du  voisin. 

Celui.    ($  35.) 

Celui  du  voisin. 

(French  way  to  express  thepos  c  >sivt 

case.} 

Celui  du  boulanger. 
Celui  du  chien. 

Ou. 
Avez-vous  mon  livre  ou  ceki  du 

voisin  ? 

J'ai  celui  du  voisin. 
Avez-vous  mon  pain  ou  celui  du 

boulanger  ? 
J'ai  le  votre. 
Je  n'ai  pas  celui  du  boulanger. 

Le  mien. 
Du  mien. 
Le  votre. 
Du  votre. 


Obs.  9.     Votre,  your,  has  no  circumflex  accent.     Le  votre,  yours,  has 
one.     Notre,  our,  has  no  accent.     Le  ?iotre,  ours,  has  one. 
Of  ours  or  of  cur  own.  |    Du  notre. 


EXERCISE.  1st  Sec.  —  QUATRIEME  EXERCICE.  Ire  Sec. 

Have  you  that  book  ?  No,  Sir,  I  have  it  not.  —  Which  book  have 
you  got?  I  have  that  of  the  neighbor.  —  Have  you  my  bread  or  the 
baker's?  I  have  not  yours;  I  have  the  baker's.  —  Have  you  the 
neighbor's  horse?  No,  Sir,  I  have  it  not.  —  Which  horse  have  you 
got  I  I  have  that  of  the  baker.  —  Have  you  the  pretty  gold  string  of 
my  dog  ?  I  have  it  not.  —  Which  string  have  you  ?  I  have  my  srl- 


insert  it  now  and  then.  When  entirely  omitted,  pupils,  after  learning  a 
considerable  time,  are  frequently  at  a  loss  how  to  translate  :  Nave  you  got 
my  hat  ?  thinking  that  they  do  not  know  the  French  ol  got ;  while  tnoy 
would  not  hesitate  to  translate  :  Have  you  my  hat  ?  &.c. 


FOURTH     LESSON. 


31 


ver  siring. — Have  you  my  gold  button  or  the  tailor's  ?  I  have  not 
yours ;  I  have  the  tailor's. — Which  coffee  have  you  ?  I  have  the 
neighbor's. — Are  you  sleepy  ?  I  am  not  sleepy ;  I  arn  hungry. — 
Are  you  thirsty?  I  am  not  thirsty. — Which  stocking  have  you?  I 
have  my  own  or  mine. — Have  you  your  thread  stocking  or  mine'? 
I  have  not  yours;  I  have  mine. — Which  shoe  have  you?  I  have 
the  neighbor's  wooden  shoe. — What  have  you  ?  I  have  nothing. — 
Have  you  anything  good  ?  I  have  nothing  good.  Have  you  any- 
thing bad  ?  I  have  not  got  anything  bad. — Are  you  hungry  or 
thirsty  ?  I  am  hungry. — Which  exercise  have  you  got?  I  have  the 
fourth. — Have  you  your  neighbor's  exercise  ?  No,  Sir,  I  have  got 
mine. — Have  you  our  velvet  ?  I  have  it  not. — Have  you  our  coffee] 
I  have  not  ours;  I  have  the  baker's. — Have  you  the  neighbor's  golden 
candlestick?  No,  Sir,  I  have  got  ours. — How  do  you  do  to-day1 
To-day  ?  Yes,  to-day.  Very  well,  thank  you. 


r 


VOCABULARY.    2d  Section. 

Arc.  you  warm  ? 

I  an   warm. 

I  am  not  warm. 

Are  you  cold  ? 

I  am  not  cold. 

Are  you  afraid  ? 

I  am  afraid. 

I  am  not  afraid. 

The,  (before  a  vo\ve  or  h  mute).  (See 

Gbs.  5,  p   28.) 
Man.  Friend. 

The  friend.    "          The  man. 
Of  the,  (before  G.  vowel  or  h  mute). 
Of  the  friend. 

That,  or  the  one,  of  the  friend. 
Of  the  man. 
That,  or  the  one,  of  the  man ;  the 

man's. 
Of  the  gold  or  silver.  / 

The  stick.  The  thimble. 

The  coal.  My  brother. 

My  brother's,  or  that  of  my  brother. 
Your  friend's,  or  that  of  your  friend. 
OUT  gold  thimble,  or  the  silver  one. 
The  wooden  one.  The  leather  one. 
Tho  leather.  Of  the  leather. 


VOCABULAIRE.    2de  Section, 
t  Avez-yous  chaud  ? 
t  J'ai  chaud. 
t  Je  n'ai  pas  chaud. 
t  Avez-vous  froitl  i 
t  Je  ri'ai  pas  froid. 
"t  Avez-vous  peur  ? 
t  J'ai  peur. 
t  Je  n'ai  pas  peur. 

L',  (avant  vine  voyelle  ou  un  h  muetV 

(Voyez  Obs.  5,  p.  SB.) 
Homme.  Ami. 

L'ami.  L'homme. 

De  1' ,  (avant  une  vcycllc  ou  li  muet) 
De  I'ami. 
Cclui  de  I'ami. 
De  1'homme. 
Celui  de  1'hoinmc. 


De  1'or  ou  de  1'argent. 

Le  baton.  Le  do. 

Le  charbon.  Mon  here. 

Celui  de  mon  frere. 

Celui  de  votre  ami. 

Notre  de  d'or,  ou  ce.ui  df argent. 

Celui  de  bois.  Celui  de  cui 

Le  cuir.  Du  cuir. 


FIFTH      LESSON. 


FOURTH  EXERCISE.  2d  Sec. — QUATIUEME  EXEHCICE.  2de  See. 

Have  you  my  stick,  or  that  of  my  friend  ?  I  have  that  of  ycn;i 
friend. — Have  you  your  thimble,  or  the  tailor's?  I  have  mine  01 
my  own. — Have  you  my  brother's  coat  or  yours?  I  have  youi 
brother's. — Have  you  your  dog  or  the  man's  ?  I  have  the  man's.— 
Have  you  your  friend's  money  ?  I  have  it  not. — Are  you  cold  ?  I 
am  cold. — Are  you  afraid  ?  I  am  not  afraid. — Are  you  warm  ?  I  am 
net  warm. — Have  you  my  coat,  or  the  tailor's?  I  have  the  tailorta* 
—Have  you  my  gold  candlestick,  or  that  of  the  neighbor?  I  have 
yours. — Have  you  your  paper  or  mine?  I  have  mine. — Have  you 
your  cheese  or  the  baker's  ?  I  have  my  own. — Which  cloth  have 
you  ?  I  have  that  of  the  tailor. — Have  you  the  old  wood  of  my 
brother?  I  have  not  got  it. — Which  soap  have  you  got?  I  have 
my  brother's  good  soap. — Have  you  my  wooden  gun  or  that  of  my 
brother  ?  I  have  yours. — Have  you  your  friend's  shoe  ?  Yes,  Sir; 
I  have  the  velvet  shoe  of  my  friend. — What  have  you  pretty  ?  I 
have  my  friend's  pretty  dog. — Have  you  my  handsome  or  my  ugly 
stick?  I  have  your  ugly  stick. — Have  you  the  second  exercise  of 
your  good  friend  ?  No;  I  have  the  third. — Which  soap  have  youi 
I  have  ours. — Have  you  your  friend's  bread?  No;  I  have  ours. — 
Have  you  the  man's?  No;  I  have  it  not. — Have  you  the  silver 
button  ?  No ;  I  have  the  golden  one,  or  that  of  gold. — Have  you  tho 
first  or  the  second  section  to-day?  I  have  the  second  section. 

Pretty  well,  well  enough.  |    Assez  bien. 

Obs,  10.  Good  day,  good  morning,  good  afternoon,  good  evening  /and 
good  night,  before  bed-time),  are  expressed  in  French  by  :  Ion  jour  or  boy 


FIFTH  LESSON,  5(h.—Cinquicme  Leeon,  5mo. 


VOCABULARY.    1st  Section. 
The  merchant. 
Of  the  shoemaker. 
Ths  boy.  The  merchant's  boy. 

The  pencil.       The  chocolate. 
Tne  penknife.    The  boy's  penknife. 


VOCABULAIRE.    Ire  Section 
Le  marchand. 
Du  cordonnier. 

Le  garcon.    Le  garc.on  du  marchand 
Le  crayon.   Le  chocolat. 
Le  canif.       Le  canifdu  garcon. 


Have  you  the  merchant's  stick,  or  !  Avez-vous  le  baton  du  marchand, 

yours  ?  ou  le  votre? 

Neither.  Nor.  Ne .  .  .  m.  ni. 

(  have  neither  the  merchant's  stick  |   Jc  n'ai  ni  le  baton  du  maicjiand  u 

iior  mine.  i      le  mien. 


FIFTH     LESSOJi. 


Have  you  the  shoemaker's  leather  ? 

Are  you  hungry  or  thirsty  ? 

I  am  neither  hungry  nor  thirsty. 

Are  you  warm  or  cold  ? 

I  am  neither  warm  nor  cold. 

Have  you  the  bread  or  the  wine  ? 

I  have  neither  the  wine  nor  the  bread. 

I  have  neither  my  thread  nor   that 

of  the  tailor. 

I  have  neither  yours  nor  mine. 
My  boy' s  thimble ,  [the  thimble  of . . .] 
Your  brother's  penknife. 
That  of  mine.  That  of  ours. 

Miss  Rose's  velvet. 
My  baker's  bread,  or  that  of  yours. 


Avez-vous  le  cuir  du  cordonmer  I 

t  Avez-vous  faim  ou  soif  ? 

t  Je  n'ai  ni  faim  ni  soif. 

t  Avez-vous  chaud  ou  froid  ? 

t  Je  n'ai  ni  chaud  ni  froid. 

Avez-vous  le  pain  ou  le  \in  ? 

Je  n'ai  ni  le  vin  ni  le  pain. 

Je  n'ai  ni  mon  fil  ni  celui  du  taih'sin 

Je  n'ai  ni  le  votre  ni  le  in  en. 
Le  de  de  mon  gar9on. 
Le  canif  de  votre  frere. 
Celui  du  mien.          Celui  du  noire. 
Le  velours  de  Mademoiselle  Rose. 
Le  pain  de  mon  boulanger,  ou  celuj 
du  votre. 


FIFTH  EXERCISE.  1st  Sec. — CIXQUIEME  EXERCICK.  Ire  Sec. 

How  do  you  do  to-'lay?  Pretty  well,  thank  you. — How  are  you 
this  evening,  Miss  Charlotte  ?  Very  well,  thank  you.  Good  even- 
ing, Sir. — Are  you  hungry  or  thirsty?  I  am  neither  hungry  nor 
thirsty. — Have  you  my  shoe  or  the  shoemaker's?  I  have  neither 
"yours  nor  the  shoemaker's. — Have  you  your  pencil  or  the  boy's?  I 
have  neither  mine  nor  the  boy's. — Which  pencil  have  you  ?  I  have 
that  of  the  merchant. — Have  you  my  chocolate  or  the  merchant's? 
I  have  neither  yours  nor  the  merchant's;  I  have  my  own. — Which 
penknife  have  you?  I  have  my  brother's  penknife. — Have  you 
Miss  Rose's  velvet?  No,  Madam,  I  have  it  not. — Are  you  warm, 
or  cold  ?  I  am  neither  warm  nor  cold ;  I  am  sleepy. — Are  you 
afraid?  I  am  not  afraid. — What  have  you?  I  have  Miss  Charlotte's 
fine  ribbon. — The  velvet  ribbon?  No,  the  golden  ribbon. — Havo 
you  anything,  Sir?  I  have  something. — What  have  you  ?  I  have 
something  fine. — What  have  you  fine?  I  have  the  shoemaker's 
fine  dog. — Have  ;TOU  my  gun  or  yours  ?  I  have  neither  yours  nor 
mine. — Which  gun  have  you?  I  have  my  friend's. — Have  you  my 
velvet  ribbon  or  my  brother's?  I  have  neither  yours  nor  youi 
brother's,  but  ours. — Which  string  have  you?  I  have  my  neigh- 
bor's thread  string. — Have  you  the  book  of  the  tailor  or  that  of  the 
boy  ?  I  have  neither  the  tailor's  nor  the  br  y's. 

This  morning.         This  evening.        Ce  matin.  Ce  soir. 

Are  you  well,  Miss  Clara?  t Vousportez-vousbicn, Mile. Clara J 

Not  very  well,  Pas  tres-bien 


FIFTH     LSSSOK. 


VOCABULARY  2d  Section. 
What  have  you  ?  (ails  you  ?) 


VOCABULAIRE.    2de  Section. 

>  t  Qu'avez-vous  ? 


What  is  the  matter  with  you  ? 
[  have  nothing ;  or 
Nothing  is  the  matter  with  me. 
Is  anything  the  matter  with  you  ? 
No.     Nothing,  or  Not  anything. 

Obs.  11.  When  the  verb  is  understood,  nothing,  or  not  anything,  is 
translated  not  by:  ne . . .  rien,  but  by:  rien  alone;  and  no,  nothing,  by: 
so/i,  rien. 


Je  n'ai  rien. 

t  Avez-vous  quelque  chose  ? 
Non,  rien. 


Have  you  anything  very  pretty  ? 

Ptfo,  nothing. 
Have  you  anything  ugly,  or  old  ? 

No,  not  anything.  The  shawl. 
The  parasol.           The  umbrella. 
The  dictionary.      The  cotton. 
The  Frenchman.    Of  the  Frenchman. 
The  carpenter.        Of  the  carpenter. 
The  hammer.         The  iron. 
The  nail.                 The  iron  nail. 
The  golden  nail;  that  of  silver. 

Avez-vous  quelque   chose  de   trea- 
joli? 
Non,  rien. 
Avez-vous  quelqt.e  chose  de  vila'n 
ou  de  vieux  ? 
Non,  rien.             Le  chale. 
Le  parasol.            Le  parapluie. 
Le  dictionnaire.     Le  coton. 
Le  Fran9ais.          Du  Francois. 
Le  charpentier.     Du  charpentier. 
Le  marteau.          Le  fer. 
Le  clou.                Le  clou  de  fer. 
Le  clou  d'or  ;  celui  d'argent. 

FIFTH  EXERCISE.  2d  Sec. — CINQUIEME  EXEHCICE.  2de  Sec. 

Are  you  well  this  morning?  Yes,  Sir,  pretty  well,  thank  you. — 
Uo\v  do  you  do,  Miss  Clara?  Not  very  well,  Madam. — Are 'you 
well,  Mr.  Robert?  Yes,  Sir,  this  evening  I  am  very  well. — Have 
you  the  fifth  exercise?  Yes.  I  have  it. — Have  you  my  dictionary 
or  my  book  ?  I  have  neither  your  dictionary  nor  your  book. — Have 
you  your  parasol  or  mine ?  I  have  neither  yours  nor  mine;  I  have 
Clara's. — Which  shawl  have  you  ?  I  have  the  neighbor's. — Have 
vou  the  iron  or  the  silver  nail?  I  have  neither  the  iron  nor  the  sil- 
ver nail;  I  have  the  gold  one. — Have  you  my  hammer  or  the  car- 
penter's? I  have  neither  yours  nor  the  carpenter's;  I  have  ours.— 
Which  nail  have  you?  I  have  the  iron  nail. — Which  hammer 
have  you?  I  have  the  wooden  hammer  of  the  carpenter. — Have 
you  anything  very  fine  ?  I  have  something  very  fine. — What  have 
you?  This  fine  shawl. — Have  you  the  Frenchman's  pretty  umbrella? 
Wo,  I  have  not  the  pretty  one,  I  have  the  old  one. — The  old  urn- 
hrelia7  Yes,  the  old  one. — Have  you  the  cotton,  or  the  thread  stock- 
yig  ?  I  have  neither  the  cotton  nor  the  thread  stocking.— Have  yon 
me  book  of  the  Frenchman  or  that  of  the  merchant?  I  have  nei- 
ther the  Frenchman's  nor  the  merchant's. — Which  book  have  >ou? 


SIXTH     LESSON. 


i  have  ours. — What  is  the  matter  with  you  ?  Nothing. — Is  anything 
the  matter  with  you,  Mr.  Robert?  No,  Miss,  nothing. — Are  you 
afraid '?  No,  I  am  not  afraid.  Nothing  ails  me. — Have  you  the  cot- 
ton, the  cloth,  or  the  shawl  ?  I  have  neither  the  cotton,  nor  the 
cloth,  nor  the  shawl. — What  have  you  ?  I  have  Webster's  Dictionary 


I  nm  glad  to  hear  it.    1  am  glad  of  it. 
Arid  you,  Sir,  how  are  you? 


J'en  suisbien  aise. 
Et  vous,  Monsieur,  comment 
portez-vous  ? 


SIXTH  LESSON,  6th.— Sixicme  Lepn,  6me. 
VOCABULARY.  1st  Section.  VOCABULAJRE.    Ire  Section. 


The  beef,  or  ox. 
Of  the  captain. 
Of  the  cook. 


The  biscuit. 
The  mutton. 
The  knife. 


Le  Iceuf. 
Du  capitaine. 
Du  cuisinief . 


Le  biscuit. 
Le  mtrLton. 
Le  conteau. 


Have  I  ?  Have  I  it  ? 

You  have.  You  have  got  it. 

You  have  not. 

You  have  not  got  it. 

7ouhave  nothing,  (not  got  anything). 

Am  I  afraid  ? 

You  are  afraid. 

Am  1  ashamed  ? 

You  are  not  ashamed. 

Are  you  ashamed  ? 

I  am  ashamed. 

Have  I  anything  ugly  ? 

You  have  not  got  anything  ugly. 

What  have  I  got  ? 

What  is  the  matter  with  me  ?  (ails  me?) 

The  fine  ono.  The  ugly  one. 

Which,  meaning  which  one  ? 

Obs,  12.     Which  is  translated  by : 
out  the  noun. 

Which  parasol  ?  Which  one  ? 

Am  I  afraid  or  ashamed  ? 
You  are  neither  afraid  nor  ashamed. 
You  are  neither  hungry  nor  thirsty. 


Ai-je?  L'aije? 

Vous  avez.  Vous  Vavez 

Vous  n'avez  pas. 

Vous  ne  Vavez  pas. 

Vous  n'avcz  rien. 

t  Ai-je  peur  ? 

t  Vous  avez  peur. 

t  Ai-je  honte  ? 

t  Vous  n'avez  pas  home. 

t  Avez-vous  honte  ? 

t  J'ai  honte. 

Ai-je  quelque  chose  de  vilai-i  3 

Vous  n'avcz  rien  de  vilain. 

Qu'ai-je? 

Le  beau.  Le  vilain. 

I     Lequel  ? 

quel,  with  a  noun, — by:  lequcl,  with 


Quel  parasol  ?  Lequel  ? 

t  Ai-je  peur  ou  honte  ? 
t  Vous  n'avez  ni  peur  ni  honto. 
t  Vous  n'avez  ni  faim  ni  soif. 


SIXTH  EXERCISE.  1st  Sec. — SIXIEME  EXERCICE.  Ire  Sec. 

Good  evening,  Miss;  are  you  well?  Very  well,  thank  you. — 1 
*m  glad  to  hear  it.  And  you,  Mr.  Louis,  how  do  you  do?  Not 
very  well  to-day. — Are  you  well,  this  evening,  Madam  ?  Pretty 
well,  thank  you.— I  am  glad  of  it.  I  have  neither  the  baker's  dog 


36 


SIXTH     LESSON. 


nor  that  of  my  friend. — Are  you  ashamed  1  I  am  not  ashamed.— 
Are  you  afraid  or  ashamed'?  I  am  neither  afraid  nor  ashamed.  • 
Have  you  my  kr.ife  ?  Which  one?  The  fine  one. — Have  you  my 
beef  or  the  cook's  ?  I  have  neither  yours  nor  the  cook's.  Which 
(lequcl1)  have  you  ?  I  have  that  of  the  captain. — Have  I  your  bis 
cuit  ?  You  have  it  not. — Am  I  hungry  or  thirsty  ?  You  are  neither 
hungry  nor  thirsty. — Am  I  warm  or  cold  ?  You  are  neither  warm 
nor  cold. — Am  I  afraid?  You  are  not  afraid.  You  are  neither 
afraid  nor  ashamed. — Have  I  anything  good?  You  have  nothing 
good. — What  have  I? — You  have  nothing. — Which  pencil  have  1 1 
You  have  that  of  the  Frenchman. — Have  I  your  thimble  or  that  of 
the  tailor?  You  have  neither  mine  nor  that  of  the  tailor. — Which 
one  have  I  ?  You  have  your  friend's. — Which  umbrella  have  1 1 
\fou  have  mine. — Have  I  the  baker's  good  bread  ?  You  have  it  not. 
—Which  dictionary  have  I?  You  have  your  own. — Have  you  my 
iron  gun?  I  have  it  not. — Have  I  it?  You  have  it. — Have  I  youi 
mutton  or  the  cook's?  You  have  neither  mine  nor  the  cook's.— 
Have  I  your  knife?  You  have  it  not. — Have  you  it?  I  have  it. — 
Which  biscuit  have  1  ?  You  have  that  of  the  captain. 


J) 


VOCABULARY.    2d  Section. 

Am  I  hungry  ? 

You  are  hungry. 

You  are  not  hungry. 

Am  I  wrong  ? 

You  are  wrong. 

You  are  not  wrong. 

Am  I  right  ? 

You  are  not  right. 

You  are  right. 
The  butter. 

The  grocer.  Our  grocsr. 

The  grocer's  butter  or  that  :f  the 

cook. 

Have  I  the  boy's  penknife  ? 
You  have  it  not,  (not  got  it.) 
Have  I  Miss  Clara's  ? 
You  have  neither  Miss  Clara's  nor 

the  boy's. 
Which  one  have  I  ? 
You  have  the  grocer's. 
Have  I  the  cook's  butter  ? 
You  have  it  not.   You  have  nothing. 
Have  I  anything  bad  or  old  ? 

Vou  have  neither  anything  bad  -nor 
old  (nothing^ 


VOCABULAIRE.  2dc  Section. 

t  Ai-je  faim  ? 

t  Vous  avez  faim. 

1  Vous  n'avez  pas  faun, 

t"  Ai-je  tort? 

t  Vous  avez  tort. 

t  Vous  n'avez  pas  tort. 

t  Ai-je  raison  ? 

t  Vous  n'avez  pas  raison. 

t  Vous  avez  raison. 
Le  leurre. 

i,' epicier.  Notre  epicier. 

Le   beurre  de  1' epicier  ou  cclui  du 

cuisinier. 

Ai-je  le  canif  du  gargon  ? 
Vous  ne  1'avez  pas. 
Ai-je  celui  de  Mile.  Clara  ? 
Vous  n'avez  ni  celui  de  Mile.  Clara, 

ni  celui  du  gargon. 
Lequel  ai-je  ? 

Vous  avez  celui  de  1'epicier. 
Ai-je  le  beurre  du  cuisinier  ? 
Vous  neF avez  pas.  Vous  n'avez  rien. 
Ai-je  quelque  chose  de  mauvaia  ou 

de  vieux  ? 
Vous  n'avez  rien  de  mauvnia  n;  4<? 


gJEVENTH    LESSOR. 


ll 


O6s.  13.  You  have  neither  anything  bad  nor  o\d,  being  a  negative  sen- 
lence,  must  not  be  translated  by :  Vous  n'avez  pas  quelque  chose  de  mauvaiu 
ni  de  vieux  ;  but  by :  Vous  ri uvez  rien  de  mauvais  ni  de  vieux. 

Have  you  anything  ugly  or  old  ?  Avez-vous  quelque  chose  de  vilain 

ou  de  vieux  ? 


I  have    neither  anything   ugly,  nor 
old,  nor  pretty. 


Je  n'ai  rien  de  vilain,  ni  de  vieux,  ni 

de  joli. 


SIXTH  EXERCISE.  2<1  Sec. — SIXIEME  EXEECICE.  2do  Sec. 

Have  you  the  fifth  vocabulary  to-day?  No,  Miss,  I  hare  the  exer- 
cise.— Which  one :  the  fifth  or  sixth  ?  I  have  the  fifth  to-day. — Sir, 
have  I  the  sixth  vocabulary,  this  evening  ?  No.  Miss,  you  have  it  not 
— Which  one  have  1 1  You  have  the  fifth  vocabulary,  second  section 
—Which  cloth  have  I  ?  You  have  the  merchant's. — Have  you  my 
coffee  or  that  of  my  boy  1  I  have  that  of  your  good  boy. — Have  you 
your  shawl  or  mine1?  I  have  neither  yours  nor  mine. — What  have 
you'?  I  have  my  brother's  good  candlestick. — Am  I  right?  You 
are  right. — Am  I  wrong?  You  are  not  wrong. — Am  I  right  or 
wrong?  You  are  neither  right  nor  wrong;  you  are  afraid.  You  are 
not  sleepy.  You  are  neither  warm  nor  cold. — Have  I  the  good 
coffee  or  the  good  sugar?  You  have  neither  the  good  coffee  nor  the 
good  sugar. — Have  1  anything  good  or  bad  ?  You  have  neither  any 
thing  good  nor  bad. — What  have  I?  You  have  nothing. — Whai 
have  I  pretty  ?-  You  have  my  friend's  pretty  dog. — Which  buttei 
have  I?  You  have  that  of  your  cook. — Have  I  your  parasol  or  the 
merchant's?  You  have  neither  mine  nor  the  merchant's. — Which 
chocolate  htve  you  ?  I  have  that  of  the  Frenchman. — Which  shoe 
have  you  ?  I  have  the  shoemaker's  leather  shoe. — Which  one  have 
I  ?  You  have  that  of  the  old  baker. — Which  one  have  you?  I  have 
that  of  my  old  neighbor.  —  What  is  the  matter  with  you  ?  I  am 
afraid. — Have  I  anything?  You  have  nothing. 


You  are  well,  I  hope  ? 
I  am  well,  perfectly  well. 
I  am  not  very  well. 


Vous  vous  portez  bien,  j'espere  ? 
Je  me  porte  bien,  parfaitement  bica, 
Jc  ne  me  porte  pas  tres-bicn. 


SEVENTH  LESSON,  lih.—Septiime  Le$on,  7me. 


VOCABULARY.    1st  Section. 
Who  ?     Has.      Who  has  ? 
Who  has  the  pencil-case  ? 
The  man  has  the  pencil-case. 
The  man  has  not  this  pencil-case. 


VOGABULAIRE.    ll'G  S 

Qui  ?     a.     Qui  a  ? 
Qui  a  le  porte-crayon  ? 
L'homme  a  le  porte-crayon. 
L'homme  n'a  pas  ce  porte-«vivon. 


as* 


SEVEKl'H     L£SSOW 


\Vho  7ms  it  9 

The  farmer  L&s  it 

The  farmer  has  not  got  it. 

flis  or  her,  (always  with  a  noun,)  its. 
The  chicken.  His  chicken. 

The  chest,  trunk,  caffer.  Her  chest. 
The  waistcoat,  the  vest.    His  vest. 
The  ship,  vesse'.. 
The  young  man.    Young. 

The  youth.  His  rice. 

*lf>,  (or  it,  nominative  case.) 
•  •'kle  has,  it  has.  He  has  not. 

'  £Ie  has  got  his  chest. 

He  has  not  his  waistcoat. 

H^e  has  ?t.  He  has  it  not. 

Has  he  or  has  it  ?       Has  he  it  ? 

Has  he  his  old  knife  ? 

'das  the  farmer  ? 


Qui  I'a  ? 

Le/ermier  I'a. 

Le  fermier  nc  Va  pas. 

Son,  (toujours  avec  un  nom.) 
Le  poulet.  Son  poulet, 

Le  coflre.  Son  coffre. 

Le  gilet.  Son  gilet 

Le  batimcnt,  le  vaisseau. 
Le  jeune  homme.    Jeune. 

L'adolescent.  Son  riz, 

II. 

II  a.  II  n'a  pas. 

II  a  son  coffre. 

11  n'a  pas  son  gilet. 

II  I'a.  II  ne  I'a  pas. 

A-t-il?  L'a-t-il? 

A-t-ii  son  vieux  couteau  ? 

Le  fermier  a-t-il  ? 


Obs.  14.  In  French,  when  in  the  third  person,  a  noun  is  the  nomin&uvi 
»r  subject  of  an  interrogative  sentence,  begin  the  question  with  the  noun, 
md  piace  the  pronoun,  il,  after  the  verb,  as  shown  above. 


Has  our  friend  got  ? 

Has  this  young  man  ? 

Has  the  dog  got  the  mutton  ? 

06*.  15.     The  loner  (-f-)  between  a  and  il,  is  inserted  for  the  sake  oi 
euphony,  and  must  be  used  whenever  the  verb  ends  with  a  vowel. 


Notre  ami  a-t-il  ? 

Ce  jeune  homme  a-t-il  ? 

Le  chien  a-t-il  le  mouton  ? 


He  has  neither . . .  nor  . . . 

ife  has  neither  mine  nor  vours. 


II  n'a  ni . . .  ni . . . 

II  n'a  ni  le  mien  ni  le  votre. 


SEVENTH  EXERCISE.  1st  Sec. — SEPTIEME  EXERCICE,  Ire  Sec. 


\~ou  are  well,  I  hope,  Miss?  Yes,  Sir,  I  am  perfectly  well. — And 
y..u,  Sir,  how  are  you?  Pretty  well,  to-day,  thank  you. — I  hope 
y^u  are  well,  Madam?  Yes,  Miss,  I  am  very  well  this  morning. 
\  win  very  glad  to  hear  it. — Are  you  cold  this  morning  ?  No,  Sir,  I 
am  not  cold. — Has  the  youth  his  chicken  ?  He  has  got  it. — Who  has 
my  waistcoat  ?  The  ycung  man  has  it. — Has  the  young  man  his 
preity  ship  ?  The  your.g  man  has  it  riot. — Who  has  it  ?  The  cap- 
tain nas  got  it. — Has  the  grocer  my  knife  or  yours  ?  He  has  neither 
yours  nor  mine. — Which  knife  has  he  ?  Which  knife  or  penknife  ? 
Which  penknife  ?  He  has  ours. — Has  he  it  ?  Yes,  he  has  got  it. — 
Has  his  brother  got  my  gold  ?  He  has  not  got  it. — Have  you  it  1  No, 
I  have  it  not. — Who  has  got  it  ?  You  have  it. — Has  the  youth  your 
waistcoaT  or  mine?  He  has  neither  yours  nor  mine. — Wnich  one 
Las  her  He  has  the  tailor's. — Have  you  his  hammer  or  his  nail? 


SEVENTH     LESSOM 


have  neither  his  hammer  nor  his  nail.  The  carpenter  has  the 
hammer,  his  boy  has  the  nail. — Have  you  his  umbrella  or  his  stick  1 
I  have  neither  his  umbrella  nor  his  stick. — What  have  you1?  Not 
anything. — Has  this  farmer  his  horse  or  his  dog  ?  He  has  neithei 
this  nor  that. — Have  I  the  merchant's  rice?  Which  merchant  1 
The  old  one  or  the  young  one  ?  The  young  one. — You  have  it  not, 
the  old  grocer  has  it. — Has  he  his  coffee  or  my  sugar?  He  has 
neither  his  coffee  nor  your  sugar. — Has  the  boy  his  dictionary,  my 
brother's,  or  that  of  the  Frenchman  ?  He  has  not  his  dictionary  noi 
your  brother's ;  he  has  the  Frenchman's. — Who  has  my  pencil-case? 
Which  pencil-case  ?  The  gold  pencil-case  or  the  silver  one  ?  The 
goid  one.  I  have  it. — Has  the  young  captain  the  old  ship  of  Mr. 
Henri  (Henry)  ?  He  has  net  Mr.  Henry's  old  ship :  he  has  Mr. 
Robert's  good  ship,  the  Helvetius. 


Kow  is  your  friend  ? 
He  is  not  very  well. 
He  is  better. 

VOCABULARY.  2d  Section. 
What  has  he  ?     What  has  he  got  ? 
What  ails  him,  or  is  the  matter  with 

him  ? 
What  has  the  farmer  ?  (ails  him  ?) 

He  has  something.    He  has  nothing. 
The  bird.  His  bird. 

His  or  hers  (without  the  noun.)  its. 

My  money  or  his  or  hers. 

My  ha?  or  his.  (hers.) 

His  bag  of  rice — of  money, 

This  servant. 

Has  his  servant  your  trunk  or  mine  ? 

He  has  his  own,  (no  noun  being  used.) 
He  has  neither  ours  nor  ymrs,  he 
has  his  own.  (its  own.) 

Somebody,  anybody. 

Some  one,  any  one. 
Elas  anybody  iny  book  ? 
Somebody  (some  one),  has  it. 
Has  any  one  got  it  ? 

No  one,  nobody,  not  anybody. 
>S  Nobody  has  your  stick. 
No  one  has  it. 
/sany  one  hungry,  sleepy  or  thirsty  ? 


Comment  se  porte  votre  ami  I 
II  ne  se  porte  pas  tres-bien. 
]     II  se  porte  micux. 

VOCABULATRE.    2Jc  Sectioil. 

>   Qu'a-t-il?  (Obis.  4,  p.  28.) 

Qu'a    le    fermier  ?  Le    fermior. 

qu'a-t-il  ? 

II  a  quelque  chose.  II  n'a  rien. 

L'oiseau.  Son  oiseaii 

Le  sien,  (sans  nom.) 

Mon  argent  ou  le  sien. 

Mon  sac  ou  le  sien. 

Son  sac  de  riz — d'argcnt. 

Ce  domestique. 

Son  domestique  a-t-il  son  cofiro  ou 

le  mien  ? 
II  a  le  sien. 

II  n'a  ni  le  noire  rii  le  votre,  il  a  le 
sien. 

Qnclqib'un,  (not  used  with  a  nega- 
tive.) 

Quelqu'un  a-t-il  mon  livre  ? 
Quelqu'un  t'a. 
Quelqu'un  l'a-t-il  ? 

Personne  ne.  (Nominatif.) 
Personne  n'a  votre  baton. 
Personne  ne  Fa. 
Quelqu'un  a-t-il  faim,  somm«ii,  03 

soif? 


10  SEVENTH     LESSON. 


Quelqu'un  a  chaud,  iroid,  on  fittr 
Personne  n'a  honte,  tort,  ni  raison. 


Some  one  is  warm,  cold,  or  afraid. 
No  one  is  ashamed,  wrong,  nor  right. 

Obs.  16.     Never  translate:  No  one,  not  any  one,  7iol)ody,  not 
&GS,  by  :  Quelqu'un  n'a  pas     but  by  :  personne  n'a. 

SEVENTH  EXERCISE.  2d  Sec. — SEPTIEME  EXERCICE.  2de  Sec. 

You  are  well,  I  hope,  this  evening?  I  am  not  very  well,  thank 
you. — And  you,  Sir,  how  are  you  ?  I  am  better,  thank  you. — How 
is  your  brother  ?  He  is  perfectly  well  to-day. — How  is  Mr.  Robert? 
He  is  better. — Who  has  my  trunk?  The  boy  has  it. — Is  anyone 
thirsty?  This  old  servant  is  thirsty. — Is  he  hungry?  No,  he  ^s  not 
hungry;  he  has  his  bread. — Has  he  the  butter  ?  He  has  not  got  it. 
— What  has  he  ?  He  has  his  cheese.— What  has  the  youth  ?  Ho 
has  the  farmer's  fine  chicken. — Has  he  *he  knife  ?  No,  he  has  it 
not;  he  has  the  pencil-case. — Is  he  afraid  ?  He  is  not  ah  did. — Is 
he  afraid  or  ashamed  ?  He  is  neither  afraid  nor  ashamed. — Is  the 
grocer  right  or  wrong  ?  He  is  neither  right  nor  wrong. — Have  I  the 
bag  of  rice  ?  Yes,  Sir,  you  have  it. — Wrho  has  the  farmer's  rice  ? 
My  servant  has  it. — Has  your  servant  my  umbrella  ?  No,  he  has  it 
not. — Has  he  yours?  No,  he  has  it  not. — Which  one  has  he  got? 
He  has  neither  yours  nor  mine. — Has  he  his  own  ?  He  has  it. — 
What  has  your  friend's  boy  ?  He  has  my  old  penknife. — Has  youi 
baker  my  bird  or  his?  He  has  his. — Who  has  mine  ?  The  carpen- 
ter has  it. — Is  he  warm  or  cold  ?  He  is  neither  warm  nor  cold. — 
Is  any  one  cold  ?  Nobody  is  cold. — Is  anybody  warm  ?  Nobody 
is  warm. — Has  anybody  my  chicken  ?  Nobody  has  it. — Has  that 
servant  your  vest  or  mine  ?  He  has  neither  mine  nor  yours. — 
Which  one  has  he  got  ?  He  has  his  own. — Has  any  one  my  gun  'I 
Which  gun  ?  The  old  one.  No  one  has  it. — What  has  the  youth  ? 
He  has  nothing. — Have  I  your  bag  or  that  of  your  good  friend  ?  No, 
you  have  the  larmer's  bag.— Who  has  Miss  Clara's  ?  Nobody  has 
it. — Who  has  her  shawl  ?  Which  shawl  ?  The  cotton  or  velvet 
one  ?  The  velvet  one.  I  have  it. — Who  is  afraid  ?  The  tailor's 
boy  is  (afraid). — What  is  the  matter  with  him?  He  is  afraid  of 
your  bad  dog. — Has  the  farmer  my  money  ?  He  has  it  not. — Hag 
the  captain  got  it  ?  He  has  it  not. — Has  he  anything  good  ?  He 
has  nothing  good. — What  has  he  ugly  ?  He  has  nothing  ugly. — 
Has  your  cook  his  mutton  ?  He  has  it. — Have  I  your  bread  or  youi 
cheese  ?  You  have  neither  my  bread  nor  my  cheese. — Has  any- 
one my  gold  button  ?  No  one  has  it. 

Is  your  friend  better,    his  morning?    |  Votre  ami  fie  porte-t-il   mieux,  o« 

matin  ? 


Mr.  Robert  is  better. 


Monsieur  Robert  se  poite  micux 


EIGHTH     LESSON 


EIGHTH  LESSON,  Sdi.—Huiticme  Legwi,  8me 

Ire  Section. 


VOCABULARY.    1st  Section. 
This,  that  handkerchief. 
This,  that  ox.        This,  that  hay. 
This,  that  friend. 

Obs.  17.  Get,  (before  a  vowel  or  h 
mute.) 

This,  that  man. 
This,  that  inkstand.     My  inkstand. 


VOCABULAIRE. 

Ce  mouchoir. 

Ce  bceuf.  Ce/om. 

Get  ami.  (Get, always  before  a  vowel] 

Cet,   (avant   une    voyelle  ou  un   ii 

muet). 
Get  homme. 
Get  encrier.  Mon  encrier. 


Obs.  IS.  Ce,  meaning:  this  or  that  :  Ce  livre,  does  not  ofTer  the  nice 
distinction  found  in  English,  between  :  this  book  and  that  look.  To  obtuin 
the  same  degree  of  precision,  the  French  say  as  follows  : 


This  book.  That  book.         !  Ce  livre-ci. 

This  inkstand.  That  inkstand.  1  Get  encrier-ci. 

Obs.  19.     Mind  the  hyphen  (-)  before  ci  and  Id. 

Th«  sailor.  This  sailor. 

That  tree.  The  tree. 

His  looking-glass,  (or  her.)  This . . . 

His  (her)  pocket-book  or  portfolio. 

The  mattress.          Which  mattress  ? 

This  garden.  That  pistol. 

The  stranger,  the  foreigner.   Our. . . 

This  or  that  glove. 

Have  you  this  or  that  book  ? 

I  have  this  one,  I  have  not  tnat  one. 

This  one.  That  one. 


Ce  I  iv  re-Id. 
Cet  encrier-ld 


Le  matelot.          Ce  matelot  ci. 

Cet  arbre-la.        L'arbre. 

Son  iniroir.          Ce  miroir-ci. 

Son  porte-feuille. 

Le  matelas.          Quel  matelas  f 

Ce  jardin-ci.         Ce  pistolet-la. 

L'etranger.  Notre  dtrangcr. 

Ce  gant. 

Avez-vous  ce  li \re-ci  ou  celui-Ia  'I 

J'ai  celui-ci,  je  n'ai  pas  celui-la. 

Cclui-ci.  Celui-ld. 


Obs.  20.  Instead  of:  this  or  that  booh,  the  French  say:  This  book  o? 
that,  because,  that,  (a  true  pronoun  in  this  case)  must  have  an  antecedent  to 
agree  with.  (3Iind  the  construction,  and  see  $  35.) 


Have  I  this  one  or  that  one  ? 

You  have  this  one.  you  have  not  that 

one. 
Has  the  man  this  or  that  glove  ? 

(Mind  the  French  construction.) 


Ai-je  celui-ci  ou  celui-la  ? 

Vous  avez  cclui-ci,  vous  n'avez  paa 

celui-la. 
L'homme  a-t-il  ce  gant-ci  ou  c«liii 

la? 


EIGHTH  EXERCISE.  1st  Sec. — HUITI^ME  EXERCICE.  Ire  Sec. 

Good  evening,  Miss  Clara,  how  do  you  do?  I  am  not  very  well, 
Sir,  thank  you. — And  you;  Sir,  are  you  well?  Pretty  well,  thani 
you. — I  hope  your  brother  is  better.  Yes,  Sir.  brother  (mon  f.)  is 
better.  —  Which  inkstand  has  the  stranger?  He  has  that  of  the 
sailoi.—  Has  the  sailor  my  looking-glaag?  He  has  it  not:  I  have 
it- — Have  3*011  this  pistol  or  that  one  ?-  I  have  this  one. — Have  you 


E  I  G  H  1  H      LESSON 


the  ioksland  oi  my  neighbor  or  that  of  yours  ?     1  have  neither  lha 
of  jour  neighbor  nor  that  of  mine. — Which  one  have  you  ?     I  have 
the  stranger's. — Which  glove  have  you  got ?     Which  one  ?     Yes, 
which  one.     I  have  the  sailor's. — You  have  the  sailor's  glove  1 
Yes,  I  have  it.— Have  you  his  mattress  ?    I  have  it  not. — Whic 
Docket-book  has  the  sailor  ?    He  has  his  own. — Who  has  my  go 
handkerchief  ?    This  stranger  has  It. — Has  he  got  it  ?    Yes;  he  '. 
it. — What  has  he  ?    He  has  my  pretty  handkerchief. — Have  I  Mis 
Victoria's  handkerchief  or  pencil-case  ?    You  have  neither  this  no 
that. — What  have  I  ?    You  have  not  anything. — Who  has  that  pis 
tol  ?    The  stranger's  friend  has  it. — What  has  your  servant  ? 
has  the  farmer's  old  tree. — Has  he  that  grocer's  old  handkerchief 
He  has  not  that  of  the  grocer;  he  has  the  sailor's. — Has  that  ox  ;h 
hay  of  tnis  horse  ?    No,  it  has  its  own. — Which  ox  has  the  farmer 
He  has  that  of  our  neighbor. — Have  I  your  inkstand  or  his?     Yo 
have  neither  mine  nor  his;  you  have   your  brother's. — Has  th 
foreigner  my  bird  or  his  own ?    He  has  got  that  of  the  captain. — 
Have  you  this  tree  ?     I  have  it  not. — Are  you  hungry  or  thirsty 
[  am  neither  hungry  nor  thirsty;  I  am  sleepy. — Has  the  old  sailo 
this  bird  or  that  one  ?    He  has  not  this ;  he  has  that. — Has  our 
vaut  this  broom  or  that  one  ?     He  has  the  ugly  one. — Has  your  cook 
this  or  that  chicken  ?    He  has  neither  this  nor  that ;  he  has  his  own. 
— Am  I  right  or  wrong?    You  are  not  wrong. — Who  is  right?    No 
body.— Have  I  this  or  that  penknife  ?    No ;  nobody  has  either  th: 
or  that. 


Take  a  seat  and  sit  down. 
I  thank  you. 

VOCABULARY.   2d  Section. 
The  note,  the  billet,  the  ticket. 
The  garret,  the  attic, 'the  granary. 
His  corn,  his  grain,  its  grain. 
This  copybook.     That  copybook. 
Big,  bulky,  thick,  coarse,  large. 
Tha*  big  tree. 

Your  coarse  cloth — thick  paper. 
But.  But  not. 

He  has  not  this  one,  but  he  has  that. 
He  has  this  one,  but  not  that  one. 
I  have  that  one,  but  not  this  one. 
Clave  you  this  or  that  note  ? 
(Mind  the  construction  in  French. > 
I  have  not  this  one,  but  that  one. 


|   Prenez  un  siege  et  asseyez-vous. 
I   Je  vous  remercie. 

VOCABULAIRE.    2dc  Section. 
Le  billet. 
Le  grenier. 
Son  grain. 

Ce  cahier-ci.     Ce  c0/iier-ia. 
Gros. 

Ce  gros  arbre-la. 
Votre  gros  drap — gros  papier. 
Jttais.     Mais  non.     Mais  non  pate. 
II  n'a  pas  celui-ci,  mais  il  a  celui-la 
I]  a  celui-ci,  mais  non  celui-lu. 
J'ai  celui-la,  mais  non  pas  celui-ci. 
Avez-vous  cc  billet- ci  ou  celui-la  ? 
rmais  j'ai  eelui 
Jc  n'ai  pas  celui-ci,  <     la. 
'  v  mais  eeiui  h 


EIGHTH     LESSON. 


nave  this  one,  but  not  that  one. 

Has  my  friend  my  dog  or  his  ? 
He  has  mine,  but  I  have  his. 
That  or  which,  (relative  pronoun.) 

Have  I  the  copybook  that  you  have  ? 
(Have  I  the  copybook  you  have  ?) 

I  have  not  the  note  which  your  bro- 
ther has.  (the  note  your,  &c.) 

That  which,  the  one  which.1 

[  have  not  that  which  you  have. 

1  have  not  that  which  he  has. 

Have  I  the  glove  which  you  have  ? 

You  have  not  that  which  I  have. 


finals  j 
ui-ci,  <      la. 
Cmais  i 


je  li  ai  pascului- 
J'ai  celui-i 

non  celui-la. 
Mon  ami  a-t-il  mon  chien  cu  le  sien  I 
II  a  le  mien,  mais  j'ai  le  sien. 
Q.ue,  (never  understood  in  French, 

as  it  is  frequently  in  English.) 
Ai-je  le  cahier  que  vous  avez  ? 

Je  n'ai  pas  le  billet  quo  votre  frere  a. 

Ceiui  que.  ($$  35,  36.) 
Je  n'ai  pas  celui  que  vous  avez. 
Je  n'ai  pas  celui  qu'il  a. 
Ai-je  le  gant  que  vous  avez  ? 
Vous  n'avez  pas  celui  que  j'ai. 


EIGHTH  EXERCISE.  2d  Sec. — HUITIEME  EXERCICE.  2de  Sec. 

Good  evening.  Madam,  you  are  well,  I  hope  ?  Perfectly  well, 
Sir,  I  thank  you. — I  am  glad  to  hear  it.  And  you,  Sir,  how  do  you 
do  ?  Not  very  well ;  but  take  a  seat  and  sit  down.  Thank  you,  I 
have  a  seat. — Have  you  the  corn  of  your  granary  or  that  of  mine 
I  have  neither  that  of  your  granary  nor  that  of  mine ;  but  I  have 
that  of  our  merchant. — Have  you  the  grocer's?  No,  I  have  it  not. 
Who  has  my  glove  ?  That  servant  has  it. — What  has  this  servant '? 
He  has  the  old  farmer's  big  tree. — Has  the  farmer  this  or  that  ox  (mind 
the  French  construction.')  He  has  neither  this  nor  that ;  but  he  hag 
the  one  which  the  boy  has  not. — Which  boy?  The  big  one  or  the 
good  one  ?  The  big  one. — Have  you  that  young  horse's  corn  ?  I 
have  it  not ;  our  servant  has  it. — Has  your  brother  my  note  or  his  .- 
He  has  neither  yours  nor  his  own ;  but  he  has  that  of  the  big  sailor. 
— Have  you  the  copybook  ?  Which  copybook  ?  The  big  copybook. 
—The  big  copybook  ?  No,  I  have  it  not ;  but  Charles  has  it. — What 
have  you  got  ?  I  have  my  copybook,  yours,  his.  or  hers,  and  the 
grocer's. — Have  you  the  chest  which  I  have  ?  I  have  not  that 
which  you  have. — Which  handkerchief  have  you?  I  have  the  ont) 
which  your  brother  has  not. — Which  inkstand  has  our  friend's  bro- 
ther ?  He  has  that  which  the  farmer's  boy  has  not. — What  copy- 
book have  you?  I  have  the  big  one  which  you  have  not. — What 
horse  has  the  shoemaker  ?  He  has  that  which  our  brother's  farmer 
Has  not. — What  has  the  grocer  ?  He  has  the  bag  of  rice  which  I 


1  Translate  :  the  one,  by  celui,  except  when  the  one  is  m  apposition  ^o  the 
ether.    (Less.  15.> 


NINTH    LESSON. 


have  not. — Which   waistcoat  have  you?     I  have  that  wli'ch 
young  friend  has  not  got. — Are  you  cold  or  hungry  ?     I  am  neitli 
cold  nor  hungry;  but  Jean  (John)  is  afraid. — Is  he  afraid?     Ye 
he  is  afraid  of  that  big  ox. — Who  is  sleepy  1     I  am  not  sleepy,  but 
1  am  thirsty. — Have  you  the  iron  or  the  wooden  ship  1     I  have 
neither  this  nor  that ;  but  I  have  that  which  the  big  captain  has  net 

T  am  very  sorry  to  hear  it,  tor  for  K.)]|    J'en  suis  bien  faclie. 


NINTH  LESSON,  9th.— Neuvieme  Le$on}  9me. 


VOCABULARY.    1st  Section. 


VOCABULAIRE.    Ire  Section. 


FORMATION  OF  THE  PLURAL.— Formation  du  Pluriel. 

As  the  plural  of  nouns,  in  French,  is  shown  by  the  preceding  article  01 

attending  word,  we  will,  in  the  first  place,  give  the  plural  of  those  different 

expressions, 

Singulier.  /  Plural  for    \ 

Masculin.  /    both  genders.1^ 

Lev  (      The.  / 

Dumbr:  deleft  V     Of  the. 

Obs.  21.     Des,  (contraction  of :  deles,  preposition  and  article  plural,) 
not,  [and  mind  it  carefully]  the  plural  of:  de,  which,  being  a  preposition,  i§ 
invariable;  but  that  of :  du,  (contraction  of:  de  le,  preposition  and  artic 
bingular.) 

My,         ofmy.\   Mon,      demon.    /My,        ofmy\\  Mes, 


Singular.  \ 
Masculine.  I 
The.  / 

Of  tlie.j/ 


Pluriel  pour 

les  deux  genres, 

Les. 

Des^for :  de  les.)} 


--  j    \ 

Your,       of  yourl  Votre,    de  votre. 
His,  her,  of  his.   I  Son,       de  son. 
Our,         of  our.  |  Notre,    de  notre 
Their,      of  their]  Leur,      de  leur. 
Which  ?  /  Quel  ? 

Which  one  ?       /   Lequel  ? 
This  ,   that.  -J     Ce,  cet. 


Your,     of  your  A  Vos, 
His,  her,  of  her.  1  Ses, 
Our,       of  our.   INos, 
Their,    of  their ./Leurs, 
Which  ?  /  Quels  ? 

Which  ones  ?     /  Lesqueis  ? 


de  me 
de  vos. 
de  ses. 
de  nos, 
de  leun 


1,18 

: 


V 


These 


Ces. 


General  Rule  for  the  formation  of  the  Plural. 


j  leura. 


The  plural  number,  is  in  English,  is  formed  by  adding  an  s  to  the  singu 
lar.  But,  in  French,  this  rule  is  not  only  applicable  to  nouns,  but  also  to 
articles,  adjectives,  and  pronouns. 


The  books.      \    Les  livres. 
Of  the  book.       \  Du  livre. 
The  sticks.  \Les  batons. 

Of  the  sticks.        |Des  batons. 
Of  the  copybooksJDcs  cahiers. 


The  good  books!  Les  bens  livres. 
Of  the  books.      jDes  livres. 
The  good  sticks. JLes  bons  batons. 
The  copybooks. /Les  cahiers. 
The  pretty  copy/  Les  jolis  cahiora. 
books.          J 


NINTH     LZSSOff. 


The  good  friends.  |  Les  bons  amis. 

Our  pretty  shawls.]  Nos  jolis  chales. 

My  penknives.     /  Mes  canifa. 

Small.  _x  Petit.     Petits. 

Which  large  fans  have  I  ? 
You  have  my  large  fans. 
Who  has  the  merchant's  shawls  ? 
NTobody  has  his  shawls,  but  some  one 
has  his  pretty  parasols  and  ribbons. 

Which  ones  ?     The  small  ones. 
Elave  you  rry  leather  shoes  ? 
[  have  not  your  leather  shoes,  but 
your  cloth  coats. 


the  friends.X      Des  amie. 
Of  our  shawls.  \     De  nos  chalee, 
Of  his  penknives!    De  ses  canifs. 

iGreat,  large.      f     Grand.    Granda 

^w~  -^ 

Quels  grands  eventails  ai-je  ? 
Vous  avez  mes  grands  eventails. 
Qui  a  les  chales  du  rnarchand  ? 
Personne    n'a    ses    chales,    mais 

quelqu'un  a  ses  jolis  parasols  ct 

ses  rubans. 

Lesquels  ?        Les  petits. 
Avez-vous  mes  souliers  de  cuir  ? 
Je  n'ai  pas  vos  souliers  de  cuir,  maie 

vos  habits  de  drap. 


NINTH  EXERCISE.  1st  Sec. — NEUVIEME  EXERCICE.  Ire  Sec. 

Good  evening,  Miss,  I  hope  you  are  well  ?  Perfectly  well.  Sir, 
I  thank  you.  I  am  glad  to  hear  it.- — How  is  your  father  ?  He  is 
well,  I  hope.  No,  Sir,  not  very  well.  I  am  sorry  to  hear  it.  But 
take  a  seat  and  sit  down.  Thank  you. — Have  you  my  gloves'? 
Yes,  Sir,  I  have  your  gloves. — Have  you  the  stranger's  gloves  ?  No. 
Sir,  I  have  not  his  gloves. — Have  I  your  looking-glasses?  You 
have  our  looking-glasses. — What  has  the  little  sailor?  He  has  the 
pretty  parasols. — Has  he  my  sticks  or  my  guns?  He  has  neither 
your  sticks  nor  your  guns. — Who  has  the  tailor's  good  waistcoats? 
Nobody  has  his  vests  ]  but  somebody  has  his  silver  buttons. — Has 
the  Frenchman's  boy  our  good  umbrellas?  He  has  not  our  good 
umbrellas,  but  our  parasols. — Has  the  shoemaker  the  shoes  of  the 
strangers  ?  He  has  not  their  shoes. — Has  he  their  bags  ?  Which 
bags  ?  Their  leather  bags.  No,  he  has  neither  their  shoes  nor  their 
leather  tags ;  but  he  has  the  velvet  shoes  of  the  merchants. — What 
.\as  the  captain?  He  has  his  go^d  sailors. — Which  brooms  has  our 
servant  ?  He  has  the  brooms  01  our  grocer. — Of  the  young  or  of 
the  old  grocer  ?  Of  the  old  one. — Has  this  man  those  large  fans  . 
He  has  not  those  large  fans. — Has  he  your  copybook  or  your  friend's? 
He  has  neither  mine  nor  my  friend's;  he  has  his  own.  Have  you 
three  of  the  exercises  ?  Of  which  exercises  ?  Of  the  exercises  of 
V.  Value.  Yes,  I  have  three  of  his  exercises.  Has  your  brother 
the  wine  which  I  have  or  that  which  you  have?  He  has  neither 
that  which  you  have  nor  that  which  I  have. — Which  wine  has  he  ? 
He  has  that  of  his  grocer. — Have  you  the  bag  which  my  server;! 
has  ?  I  have  not  the  bag  which  your  servant  has. — Have  you  the 
chicken  which  my  cook  has  or  that  which  the  peasant  has?  I  have 
neither  that  which  your  cook  has  nor  that  which  the  peasant  lias.— 
U  the  peasant  cold  or  warm  ?  He  is  neither  cold  nor  warm. 


NINTH    LESSON 


VOCABULARY.    2d  Section.  VOCABULAIRE.    2dc  Section* 

Exceptions  to  the  General  Rule  to  form  the  Plural. 

let  EXCEPTION. —Nouns  ending  in  s,  x,  or  z,  admit  of  no  variation  in  I 
plural ;  because  those  terminations  are  considered  as  plural  ones. 


The  stockings. 
The  French. 
The  Englishma 
Our  choice. 
The  nose. 


Les  has. 
Les  Fran^ais. 
L' Anglais. 
Notre  choix. 
Le  ncz. 


My  mattresses.   "NMes  matelas. 
Their  woods,  forests)  Leurs  boie. 
The  English.          /Les  Anglais. 
Our  choices.        /  Nos  choix. 
The  noses.       /     Les  nez. 


2d  EXCEPTIOJW*— Nouns  ending  in  au,  eu,  and  some  in  cm,1  take  x  inete 


The  hats. 
The  place. 
This  fire. 
That  jewel. 


Les  chapeaux. 
Le  lieu. 
Ce  feu-ci. 
Ce  bijou-la. 


a.  iiau  jowoi.  v^o    uij^u-i< 

The  cabbages.)         Les  choux 


The  birds. 
The  places. 
'  Those  fires. 
These  jewels.] 
Your  toys. 


Les  oiseaux. 
Les  lieux. 
Ces  feux-la. 
Ces  bijoux-ci. 
Vos  joujoux.1 


3d  EXCEPTION.  —  Nouns  ending  in  al,2  or  ail,3  change  those  terminatio 
into  auxy  As:\ 

The  horses.          \     Les  chevaux.       I  /General,  gener&^Generaljgener: 
The  work,  laborJ     Le  travail.  I  \The  works,  labors  jLes  travaux. 

Obs.  22.     There  are  a  few  more  exceptions  in  the  formation  of  the  plu 
of  nouns  and  adjectives,  which  will  be  separately  noted  as  they  occur. 

The  ships.  |     Les  batiments  tnrbatimens. 

Obs.  23.     According  to  some  grammarians,  nouns  of  more  than  one  sylu 
ole,  (polysyllables,)  ending  in  the  singular  in  ntj  drop  t  in  the  plural, 
nouns  of  one  syllable  /"monosyllables)  having  this  ending,  never  do. 
The  gloves.}  [     Les  gants. 

1  The  other  nouns  ending  in  ou,  that  take  x  in  the  plural,  are  :  le  caillou, 
the  pebble;  le  genou,  the  knee  ;  le  hibou,  the  owl.    All  others  that  have 
this  termination  mw  follow  the  general  rule,  taking  s  in  the  plural  ;  as,  h 
clou,  the  nail,  pluf  les  clous,  the  nails  ;  le  verrou,ilie  bolt,  plur.  les  verrou 
the  bolts,  &c. 


2  Of  the  nouns  ending  in  al,  several  follow  the  general  rule,  simply  taki; 
s  in  the  plural,  particularly  the  following  :  le  bal,  the  ball  ;  le  cal,  the  callo 
sity  ;  lepal,  the  pale  ;  le  regal,  the  treat  ;  le  carnaval,  the  carnival,  &e. 

3  The  nouns  ending  in  ail,  which  make  their  plural  in  aux,  are  particularly 
the  following  :  le  bail,  the  lease  ;  le  sous-bail,  the  under-lease  ;  le  corail, 
the  coral;  I'  email,  the  enamel;  le  soupirail,  the   air-hole;  le  travail,  the 
work  ;  le  vantail,  the  leaf  of  a  folding-door  ;  le  ventail,  the  ventail.     All 
others  having  this  termination  follow  the  general  rule,  i.  e.  take  s  in  the 
plural,  as,  Vattirail,  the  train;  le  detail,  particulars;  Veventail,  the  fan; 
le  gouvcrnail,  the  rudder  :  leportail,  the  portal  ;  le.  serai?,  the  seraglio  ;  &o 


NINTH     LESSON. 


4? 


f  he  eye.     ^ 

The  scissors; 


Les  ciseaux. 


VVIiich  horses  have  you  ? 

I  have  the  fine  horses  of  your  -good 

neighbors. 

Have  I  his  small  gloves  ? 
You  have  not  his  small  gloves,  but 

you  have  his  large  hats. 
Which  gloves  have  I  ? 
You  have  the  pretty  gloves  of  your 

brothers. 
Have  you  the  large  hammers  of  the 

carpenters  ? 
I  have  not  their  large  hammers,  but 

their  large  nails. 

Has  your  brother  my  wooden  guns  ? 
He  has  not  your  wooden  guns. 
Which  ones  has  he  ? 
Have  you  the  frenchmen's  fine  um- 
brellas ? 
I  have  not  their  fine  umbreUas,  but  I 

have  their  fine  sticks. 

The  oxen. 

Of  my  gardens. 

Of  your  woods  or  l^rests. 

Have  you  the  trees  of  my  gardens  ? 

I  have  not  the  trees  of  your  gardens. 

Of  my  pretty  gardens. 

Of  my  fine  horses. 


Les  yeux. 
Les  porte 


Quels  chevaux  .TVCZ-TOUS  ? 

J'ailes  beaux  chevaux  ue  vos  bom 

voisins. 

AI-JQ  ses  petits  gants  • 
Vous  n' avez  pas  ses  petits  gantg,  mais 

vous  avez  ses  grands  chapeaiix. 
Quels  gants  ai-je  ? 
Vous   avez   IBS  jolis  gants   de  vo& 

freres. 
Avez-vous  les  grands  marteaux  des 

charpentiers  ? 
Je  n'ai  pas  leurs  grands  marteaux, 

mais  j'ai  leurs  grands  clous. 
Votre  frere  a-t-il  mes  fusils  de  boie  ? 
II  n'a  pas  vos  fusils  de  bois. 
Lesquels  a-t-il  ? 
Avez-vous  les  beaux  parapluies  dea 

Frangais  ? 
Je  n'ai  pas  leurs  beaux  parapluies, 

mais  j'ai  leurs  beaux  batons. 

Les  boeufs.  (in  the  plural,  f  silent.) 

De  mes  jardins. 

De  vos  bois. 

Avez-vous  les  arbres  de  mes  jardins? 

Je  n'ai  pas  les  arbres  de  vos  jardins. 

De  mes  jolis  jardins. 

De  mes  beaux  chevaux. 


NINTH  EXERCISE.  2d  Sec. — NEUVIEME  EXERCICE.  2de  Sec. 

Are  you  well,  Miss  Gertrude  ?  Yes,  Sir,  I  2.m  very  well,  thank 
you. — And  you,  Sir,  how  do  you  do  ?  Not  very  well,  thank  you, 
Miss. — Indeed !  I  am  sorry  to  hear  it.  Take  off  your  shawl  and  hat, 
and  sit  down. — Thank  you,  thank  you.  With  pleasure,  I  will. — Have 
I  your  pretty  pocket-books?  You  have  not  my  pretty  pocket-books, 
—Which  pocket-books  have  I  ?  You  have  the  small  pocket-bookg 
of  your  friends. — Has  the  foreigner  our  good  pistols'?  He  has  not 
our  good  pistols,  but  our  old  sticks. — Who  has  our  ships  ?  The  fo- 
reigner has  our  ships. — Who  has  our  fine  horses  ?  Nobody  has  our 
fine  horses;  but  somebody  has  our  fine  oxen. — Has  your  neighboi 
the  choice  of  those  trees  ?  Our  neighbor  has  not  the  choice  of  those 
f/ees;  but  the  great  general  has  it. — Who  has  the  old  jewels  of  Mis< 


140.)  For  the  formation  of  the  plural  of  compound  words. 


48 


TENTH     LESSON. 


Le  Noir?    Her  brother  has  her  jewels. — Has  the  little  boy  his  tov 
or  his  birds'?     He  has  his  birds;  but  little  John  (le  petit}  has  his  play- 
things.— Has  the  farmer  got  the  horses'  hay?    He  has  not  their  hay 
but  their  corn. — Has  that  tailor  my  fine  gold  buttons  ?     He  has 
your  fine  gold  buttons;  but  our  old  silver  strings. — Has  our  frien 
our  bi£  pencils  1    He  has  not  our  big  pencils,  but  he  has  the  ug 
dogs  of  the  generals. — Has  little  John  the  choice  of  those  toys 
No,  he  has  not  the  choice  of  those  toys:  but  little  Robert  has 
— Who  has  the  merchant's  fine  inkstands'?     Nobody  has  his  fin 
inkstands ;  but  I  have  his  large  copybooks. — Who  has  their  coan 
handkerchiefs  ?     The  captaiivs  sailor  has  their  coarse  handkerchief; 
— Have  you  the  grocer's  coal  ?     No,  I  have  it  not. — Have  I  got  it 
You  have  it  not. — Who  has  his  coal?    The  servants  of  the  genen 
— What  have  you?    I  have  something  bad. — What  have  you  ba 
I  have  the  bad  chocolate. — The  grocer's  bad  chocolate  ?     No,  j 
old  sailor's. — Has  your  friend  the  small  knives  of  our  merchant; 
He  has  not  their  small  knives,  but  their  golden  candlesticks. — Hav 
you  the  big  cabbages  or  the  little  ones?    I  have  neither  the  bi< 
cabbages  nor  the  little  ones. — Which  have  you  ?     I  have  the  farn 
er's  good  cabbages. — Have  you  the  choice  of  the  cabbages?     No, 
have  it  not;  but  my  brother  has  it. — Which  choice  has  he  ?     He  ha 
the  first. — Who  has  the  second  choice?     I  have  it  not. — What  fa 
have  you?     What  fin  have  I?     Yes,  what  fan  have  you?     I  hav 
not  yours,  but  mine 

A  sore  throat.  Mai  de  gorge. 

A  cold.  A  bad  cold.  Un  rhumc.          Un  mauvais  rlmn 

A  headache.  Mai  de  tete. 


VOCABULARY.    1st  Section. 


fENTH  LESSON,  10th.— Dixieme  Le$on,  lOme. 

VOCABULAIRE.  Ire  S&ction. 
Ceux.  Ceux  des  generaux. 

Avez-vous  mes  dictionnaires  ou  ceil 

du  general  ? 

Je  n'ai  pas  les  votres,  j'ai  ceux  du 
general. 

Ceux  que.    ($  36.) 
Avez-vous  les  mouchoirs  quc  j'ai  ? 


Those.  Those  of  the  generals. 

Have  you  my  dictionaries  or  those  of 

the  general  ? 
f  have  not  yours,  I  have  those  of  the 

general. 

Those  which. 
I  Fare  you  the  handkerchiefs  which  I 

have  ? 

I  have  not  those  (which)  you  have. 
The  Cioak.  Our  cloaks. 

This  seat.  These  seats. 

Has    the   tailor    this   gentleman1 1 

cloak  ? 


Je  n'ai  pas  ceux  que'vous  avez. 
Le  manteau.  Nos  manteaux. 

Ce  siege.  .      Ces  sieges. 

Le  tailleur  a-t-il  le  manteau  do 
Monsieur  ? 


TENTH      LESS  ON. 


49 


The  gentlemen. 

Ladies.  Young  ladies. 

(Used  when  speaking  to  them.) 
Have  you  my  silver  knives  ? 
No,  I  have  mine, 

Obs.  24.  As  mine  refers  to  a  pi 
plural  pronoun.  Then  use  :  les  mie:is 
f-i  mini. 


Les  Messieurs. 
Mesdames. 


Mcsdemoiselleu. 


Avez-vous  ines  coutcaux  d'argent? 
Non,  j'ai  les  miens. 

.iral  noun,  it  must  be  translated  by  8 
,  which  is  plural,  and  not  the  singular  •; 


Mine         my  own          Of  mine. 
Yours,      your  own.       Of  yours. 
His  or  hers  (his  or  her  own.)  Of  his. 
Ours,        our  own.         Of  our  own. 
Theirs,      their  own       Of  theirs. 

These  substantives.  Those  nouns. 
The  article.  The  articles. 

Which  adjective  ?  Which  adjectives  ? 
This  verb.  Those  verbs. 

The  pronoun, — pronouns  personal, 
namely,  or  viz  :  I,  you,  he,  it,  &c. 
Also.  The  catalogue. 


Singulier.  Phiriel. 

Le  mien.  Les  miens,     des  miens. 

Le  votre.  Les  votres.     des  votres. 

Le  sicn.  Les  siens.       des  siens. 

Le  notre.  Les  notres.    des  not.res. 

Le  leur.  Les  leurs.      des  leurs. 

Ces  substantifs-ci..Ccs  noms-Ia. 
L' article.  Les  articles. 

Quel  adjectif?          Quels  adjectifs  ? 
Ce  verbe-ci.  Ces  verbes-la. 

Le  pronom.  Les  pronoins  personnels, 
savoir  :  Jc,  vous,  il,  le,  ct  cetera. 
Aussi.  Le  catalogue. 


TEXTII  EXERCISE.  1st  Sec. — DIXIEME  EXERCICE.  Ire  Sec. 

Good  day,  Miss,  you  are  well,  I  hope  ?  Very  well,  Sir,  I  thank 
you — And  you,  how  do  you  do?  Not  very  well^  this  morning. 
— Indeed!  I  am  very  sorry  for  it. — What  is  the  matter  with  you? 
I  have  a  bad  cold  and  a  sore  throat.  How  is  the  general  ?  (M.  le 
general?)  He  is  pretty  well. — And  his  brother'?  He  is  pretty  well 
also. — Take  a  seat  and  sit  down. — Have  you  these  or  those  nouns'! 
I  have  neither  these  nor  those  nouns. — Which  ones  have  you?  1 
have  those  which  little  Robert  has — namely,  (savoir :)  handker- 
chief, iikstand,  cloak,  dictionary,  fan,  penknife,  &c. — Have  you: 
the  eye  ?  Yes.  I  have  :  Vail. — Have  you  the  plural  of  ceil?  I  have  it, 
and  he  has  got  it,  also. — Has  Charles  the  catalogue  of  the  verbs 
which  you  have  ?  He  has  the  catalogue  of  those  which  I  have  and 
that  of  yours,  also.  Have  you  the  French  of:  to  give?  I  have 
it  not;  but  I  have  that  of,  He  is  better,  and  that  of  the  places.  Have 
you  the  horses  of  the  French  or  those  of  the  English'?  I  have  those 
of  the  English,  but  not  those  of  the  French. — Which  oxen  have  you  ? 
I  have  those  of  the  foreigners. — Have  }ou  the  fans  which  I  have  1 
I  hnve  not  those  which  you  have,  but  those  which  your  brother 
bas. — Has  your  brother  his  biscuits  or  mine  ?  He  has  his  own  and 
mine  also. — Has  he  got  yours  or  those  of  the  young  general  ?  He 
hos  neither  ours  nor  those  of  the  young  general. — Which  horses  has 


50 


TENTH     LESSCN. 


your  friend's  grocer  1     He  has  those  which  the  stranger  has  not. 
Has  your  farmer  my  copybooks  or  theirs?    He  has  neither  ours  n< 
theirs,  but  he  has  those  of  the  captain. — Have  I  your  vests  or  th 
of  the  tailors'?     You  have  not  theirs,  you  have  mine. — Have  I  the 
large  cloaks  ?     No,  you  have  not  got  the  large  cloaks. — Which  ink- 
stands have  I  ?     You  have  not  ours,  but  those  of  our  neighbors.— 
Have  you  the  birds  of  the  sailors  ?     I  have  not  their  birds,  but  their 
fine  sticks. — Which  jewels  has  this  ugly  boy  ?     He  has  mine. — Hav«3 
I  my  shoes  or  those  of  the  shoemakers  ?     You  have  not  yours,  but 
theirs. — Which  paper  has  the  man  ?     He  has  ours. — Has  he  our 
coffee  ?     He  has  it  not. — Have  you  our  big  coats,  or  those  of  th 
strangers?     I  have  not  anything. — Has  your  brother  this  or  the 
lawyer?     He  has  that  one. — Have  I  these  or  those  books'? — Yo 
have  not  anything. 


I  hope  you  are  better  ? 
Much  better,  at  your  service. 
The  toothache. 


J'espere  que  vous  vous  portez  mieu 
Beaucoup  mieux,  a  votre  service. 
Mai  aux  dents. 


VOCABULAIRE.  2de  Section. 
Ce  mot-ci.  Ces  mots-la. 


VOCABULARY.    2d  Section. 

This  word.  Those  words. 

Have  you  these  words  or  those  ? 
Have  you  these  or  those  words  ? 
These  (plural  of:  this  one.} 
Those  (plural  of:  that  one.} 
I  have  neither  these  nor  those. 
Has  he  these  or  those  ? 
He  has  these  ;  he  has  not  those. 
You  have  neither  these  nor  those. 
YOM  have   neither  the  one  nor  the 

other. 
You  have  neither  the  former  nor  the 

latter. 

Obs.  25  The  English  phrases  :  the  former  or  the  latter  ;  the  one  and  the 
other,  are  generally  expressed  by:  celui-ci,  ceux-ci ;  celui-ld,  ceux-ld ;  bul 
in  an  inverted  order  :  celui-ci,  referring  to  the  latter  or  nearest  object  ;  UIM! 
celui'lcty  to  the  former  or  more  dista?it  one. 

Have  you  my  guns  or  yours  ?  |   Avez-vous  mos  fusils  ou  les  votrca  1 


Avez-vous  ces  mots-ci  ou  ceu.x-Iii? 

Ceux-ci.  (pluriel  de  :  celui-ci.} 
Ceux-ld.  (pluriel  de  :  celui-ld.} 
Je  n'ai  ni  ceux-ci  ni  ceux-la. 
A-t-il  ceux-ci  ou  ceux-la  ? 
II  a  ceux-ci ;  il  n'a  pas  ceux-la. 


Vous  n'avez  ni  ceux-ci  ni  ceux-la. 


I  have  neither  yours  nor  mine. 

I  have  neither  the  former  nor  the 

latter. 

,  Have  you  not  ? 

Have  you  nothing  ?  (not  anything.) 
Nobody,  (no  one,  not  anyone)  (ob- 
jective.) * 
Yon  have  nobody. 
What  have  you  not  ?  (or  not  go?  ?) 


1   Je  n'ai  ni  les  votres  ni  les  miens. 
Je  n'ai  ni  ceux-la,  ni  ceux-ci. 

N' avez-vous  pas  ? 
N  'avez-vous  ricn  ? 
Ne ....  personne.  (Regime.) 

Vous  n'avez  personne. 
Que  ifavcz-vous  pas  ? 


TENTH     LESSON. 


51 


Has  he  ?  lias  he  not  ? 

Has  he  anything  ?    ,'ias  he  nothing  ? 

Has  he  any  one  ?      Has  he  nobody  ? 

What  has  he  not  ? 

Has  not  the  man  got  ? 

Has  not  the  dog  got  anything  ? 

Have  you  my  penknife  ? 

Yes,  Sir,  I  have  got  it. 

Have  you  not  (got)  my  penknife  ? 

No,  Sir,  I  have  it  not. 

Have  you  not  got  it,  Miss  ? 

Yes,  I  have  it. 

06s.  26.  When  the  question  is 
affirmatively  by:  Si  fait,  instead  of: 
as  usual. 

Has  he  nothing  ?          No,  nothing. 

Yes,  he  has  something. 

Have  you  not  your  money  ? 

Yes,  I  have  it.     No,  I  have  it  not. 

Has  not  the  scholar  his  book  ? 

Yes,  he  has  it. 

The  scholar,  pupil,  student. 


A-t-il?     N'a-t-ilpas  ? 

A-t-il  quelque  chose  ?  N'a-t-il  rient 

A-t-il  quelqu'un  ?  N'a-t-il  personnel 

Que  iCa-t-il  pas  ? 

L'homme  n'a-t-il  pas  ? 

Le  chien  n'a-t-il  rien  ? 

Avez-vous  mon  canif  ? 

Oui,  Monsieur,  je  1'ai. 

N'avez-vous  pas  mon  canif? 

Non,  Monsieur,  je  ne  1'ai  pas. 

Ne  1'avez-vous  pas,  Mademoiselle  f 

Si  fait,  je  1'ai. 

asked  negatively,  the  French  answer 
;   Oui.    The  negative  answer  remains 

N'a-t-il  rien  ?  Non,  rien. 

Si  fait,  il  a  quelque  chose. 
N'avez-vous  pas  votre  argent  ? 
Si  fait,  je  1'ai.     Non,  je  ne  1'ai  pas. 
L'ecolier  n'a-t-il  pas  son  livre  ? 
Si  fait,  il  1'a. 
L'ecolier. 


TENTH  EXERCISE.  2d  Sec. — DIXIEME  EXEECICE.  2de  Sec. 

I  hope  you  are  better  this  evening,  Miss. — I  thank  yon.  I  am  much 
better ;  but  my  young  brother  has  the  toothache. — I  am  very  sorry 
for  it. — How  is  Mr.  Charles  ?  He  is  riot  well ;  he  has  a  bad  cold. — 
Has  he  a  sore  throat1?  No,  he  has  not  a  sore  throat;  but  he  has  a 
headache.  And  you,  Sir,  are  you  well?  I  am  perfectly  well,  thank 
you. — I  am  glad  of  it. — Has  your  carpenter  our  hammers  or  those 
of  the  scholars,  our  friends  ?  He  has  neither  ours  nor  those  of  tho 
scholars. — Which  nails  has  he  ?  He  has  his  good  iron  nails. — Has 
any  one  the  fans  or  shawls  of  the  English?  No  one  has  those  of 
the  English,  but  some  one  has  those  of  the  French. — Have  you  not 
rqy  cloak  ?  Yes  (si  fait),  I  have  it. — Have  you  not  the  hats  of  the 
generals  ?  Yes,  I  have  the  generals7  hats. — Has  not  the  dog  tho 
cook's  chickens?  Yes,  it  has  his  chickens. — Has  he  not  his  large* 
knives  ?  Yes,  he  has  his  large  knives. — Who  has  his  cheese  ?  His 
cheese'1  He  has  it.  Has  he  got  it? — Who  has  my  old  gun?  The 
sailor  has  it. — Has  not  the  shoemaker  the  student's  old  shoe  ?  Yes, 
he  has  it. — Has  not  our  cook  the  stranger's  money?  No,  he  has 
not. — Have  you  not  got  that  money  ?  Yes,  I  have.  (1st  Direction)— 
Have  I  anything?  Yes,  you  have  something. — What  have  I  ?  You 
have  your  friend's  leather  gloves. — Has  not  big  /ohn  something 
good  1  Ye*,  he  has  something  good. — And  little  Charles,  \\hat  has 


TENTH     LESSON. 


he  ?    Nothing. — What  have  you  smalL?    I  have  Lamartiue's  pre 
little  bird  (joli  petit.) — Who  has  our  copybooks  and  his?     I  have 
neithev  these  nor  those. — Has  the  general's  boy  nothing?     Yes,  he 
nas  his  lictionary  of  French,  his  inkstand,  his  pencil,  his  copybooks 
and  his  little  brother's  toys. — Have  I  that  farmer's  bags'?     You  hav 
not  his  bags,  but  his  corn. — Has  he  your  books  or  her  shawls'? 
has  neither  these  nor  those  •  but  he  has  the  old  handkerchiefs. — I 
the  stranger's  brother  hungry  ?    He  is  not  hungry,  but  thirsty. — I 
your  friend  cold  or  sleepy'?    He  is  neither  cold  nor  sleepy;  but  ] 
is  afraid. — Is  he  afraid  of  your  dog  ?     He  is  not  afraid. — Has  not  th 
young  man  the  brooms  of  our  servants'?     He  has  not  their  brooms 
but  their  soap. — Which  pencils  has  he  not?    He  has  not  mine. — Ha 
he  not  large  eyes?     Yes,  he  has  large  eyes. — What  eyes  IK.S  th 
bird  ?     It  has  small  eyes. 


How  is  the  weather  ? 

What  kind  of  weather  is  it  ? 

[s  it  warm  ?  It  is  warm. 

It  is  not  warm. 

[t  is  line  (bad)  weather. 

It  is  cold.  Is  it  cold  ? 

[s  it  not  cold  ? 

I  wish  (or  bid)  you  a  good  morning. 

VOCABULARY.    3d  Section. 
Who  has  ?  Who  has  not  ? 

Who  has  something  ? 
Who  has  nothing  ? 
Who  has  some  one  ? 
Who  has  nobody  ? 
Who  has  not  got  the  young  bird  ? 
Has  he  neither  this  nor  that  ? 
Has  he  neither  these  nor  those  ? 

The  comb.        These  large  combs. 

My  glass.  Their  little  glasses. 

Have  you  the  glasses  ?  I  have  them. 

Them,  (objective,  $  43.) 

Elas  he  my  fine  glasses  ? 

He  has  them.     [He  them  has.] 

He  has  them  not. 

Have  I  got  them  ?  (Them  have  I  ?) 

You  have  them.  You  have  them  not. 

Have  you  them  not  ?  (not  got  them  ?) 

5fts.  I  have  them. 

Has  he  not  got  it  ?      Yes,  he  has  it. 

Has  not  the  sailor  got  my  old  pistols  ? 


t  Quel  temps  fait-il  ? 

t  Fait-il  chaud  ?         II  fait  chaud. 

II  ne  fait  pas  chaud. 

t  II  fait  beau  (mauvais)  temps. 

t  II  fait  froid.  Fait-il  froid  ? 

Ne  fait-il  pas  froid  ? 

Je  vous  souhaite  le  bonjour. 

VOCABULAIRE.  3me  Section. 
Qui  a?  Qui  n'a  pas  ? 

Qui  a  quelque  chose  ? 

Qui  n'a  rien  ? 

Qui  a  quelqu'un  ? 

Qui  n'a  personne  ? 

Qui  n'a  pas  le  jeune  oiseau  ? 

N'a-t-il  ni  celui-ci  ni  celui-la? 

N'a-t-il.  ni  ceux-ci  ni  ceoix-la  ? 

Le  peigne.        Ces  grands  peigneb, 
\[Vlon  verre        Leurs  petits  verres. 
Avez-vous  les  verres  ?     Je  les  ai. 
Les,  (regime  direct :  avant  le  verue.i- 
A-t-ii  mes  beaux  verres  ? 
II  les  a.     ($  51,  «fec.) 
II  ne  les  a  pas. 
Les  ai-je  ? 

Vous  les  avez.  Vous  ne  les  avez  paa 
Ne  les  avez- vous  pas  ? 
Si  fait,  je  les  ai. 
Ne  l'a-t-il  pas  ?     Si  fait,  il  1'a. 
Le  matelot  n'a-t-il  pas  mfB  vieus 
pistolets  ? 


TENTH     LESSON. 


He  has  them  not. 

Yes,  ho  has  them. 

Has  he  not  got  them  ? 

Have  I  it  not  ?       Have  I  them  not  ? 

Ye 3:,  you  have  it.  You  have  them. 

H.ave  I  nobody  ? 

Yes,  you  have  somebody. 

Have  I  nothing  ugly  ? 

Yes,  you  have  something  ugly. 

Have  I  neither  your  gold  nor  your 

silver  thimble  ? 
Yes,  you  have  them. 
What  have  I  not? 
You  have  not  the  scissors  of  silver. 
Am  I  neither  hungry  nor  thirsty  ? 
This  lawyer.  The  minister. 

Has  not  this  lawyer  got  ? 
Has  our  cook  got  nothing  ? 
Has  their  neighbor  nobody  ? 
What  has  not  the  doctor  got  ? 
Is  not  the  dog  hungry  or  thirsty  ? 
Is  Carnot  neither  sleepy  nor  afraid  ? 
Is  he  not  right  ?  Yes,  he  is. 

Is  not  that  minister  wrong  ? 
No  ;  that  minister  is  right. 
Which  lawyer  has  the  stranger  ? 
He  has  the  minister's  brother. 


II  ne  les  a  pas. 

Si  fait,  il  les  a. 

Ne  les  a-t-il  pas  ? 

Ne  1' ai-je  pas  ?     Ne  les  ai-je  pis  ? 

Si  fait,  vous  1'avez — vous  les  ave*. 

N'ai-je  personne  ? 

St  fait,  vous  avez  quelqu'un. 

N'ai-je  rien  de  viiain  I 

Si  fait,  vous  avez  quelque  chose  de 

viiain. 
N'ai-je  ni  votre  d3  d'or  ni   culai 

d'argent  ? 

Si  fait,  vous  ies  avez. 
Que  n' ai-je  pas  ? 

Vous  n'avez  pas  les  ciseauxd' ardent  - 
N'ai-je  ni  faim  ni  soif  ? 
Cet  avocat.  Le  ministre. 

Get  avocat  n' a-t-il  pas  ? 
Notre  cuisinier  n'a-t-il  rien  ? 
Leur  voisin  n'a-t-il  personne  ? 
Le  medecin  que  n'a-t-il  pas  ? 
Le  chien  n'a-t-il  pas  faim  ou  soif  ? 
Carnot  n'a-t-il  ni  sommeil  ni  peur  ? 
N'a-t-il  pas  raison  ?        Si  fait. 
Ce  ministre-la  n'a-t-il  pas  tort  ? 
Non  ;  ce  ministre-la  a  raison. 
Quel  avocat  1'etranger  a-t-il  ? 
II  a  le  frere  du  ministre. 


TENTH  EXERCISE.  3d  Sec. — DIXIEME  EXERCICE.  3me  Sec. 

Mile.  Charlotte,  I  wish  you  a  good  morning. — How  do  you  do  ? 
Thank  you.  Sir,  I  am  very  well,  but  very  cold. — Is  it  cold  ?  Yes,  it 
is  very  cold. — I  am  sorry  for  it.  How  is  your  young  friend?  I  hope 
he  is  better  this  morning. — Yes,  Sir,  he  is  better. — And  how  is  Ma- 
dame 1  Madame  is  perfectly  well. — Mile.  Anne  is  well,  I  hope  ] 
No,  not  very  well  And  her  brother  has  a  bad  cold. — Take  a  seat 
and  sit  down.  Thank  yoiL— Is  it  warm  to-day?  No,  it  is  not 
\varm. — Have  you  my  fine  glasses'?  I  have  them. — Have  you  riot 
the  fine  horses  of  the  English'?  I  haVe  them  not.— Who  has  them  ! 
The  old  minister  has.  (Dir.  1st.) — Which  sticks  have  you?  I  havo 
those  of  the  foreigners. — Who  has  our  small  combs?  My  bo)rs  have 
them. — Which  knives  has  the  lawyer's  servant  ?  He  has  those  of 
vour  friends. — Which  (ones)  has  he  not  ?  He  has  not  purs. — Have 
1  not  your  good  guns  ?  No,  you  have  not  got  them  •  but  the  old 
general  has  them. — What  has  the  farmer  got  ?  He  has  the  grocer's 
bag  of  rice. — Has  not  the  pretty  young  man  Miss  Clara's  beautifu-J 


ELEVENTH      LESSON. 


handkerchiefs?     He  has  them  not,  I  have  them. — Have  you  them? 
Yes,  I  have  them.     I  have  also  her  velvet  shawl,  her  gold  pencil- 
case>  her  silver  inkstand,  her  small  copybooks,  her  two  large  dic- 
tionaries of  French;  her  fans,  and  the  toys  of  her  friend  Auguste.— 
Who  has  the  fine  cloaks  of  the  generals'?     The  minister's  servant 
has  them. — Has  the  scholar  the  words  which  you  have  ?    He  has 
them  not. — Has  not  the  scholar  got  good  dictionaries?     Yes,  he  hag 
good  dictionaries  of  French. — Which  playthings   has  the  grocer's 
Little  boy  ?     He  has  little  Henry's  playthings. — Have  you  the  noun 
adjectives,  and  pronouns  of  the  (la)  ninth  les&on?     I  have  tho 
cf  the  ninth  vocabulary  and  those  of  the  exercises. — Has  ti:e  lawye 
or  the  minister  the  choice  of  the  farmer's  cabbages?     The  lawye 
has  it. — Has  he  not  also  the  choice  of  the  grocer's  cheese  ?    Yes,  he 
has. — Who  has  the  choice  of  the  merchant's  wine?    The  minister, 
ihe  lawyer,  or  the  generals?    -Neither  the  minister,  the  lawyer,  nc 
the  generals,  but  the  grocer. — Are  you  not  ashamed?     No,  I  an 
not. — Is  the  scholar  ashamed-?     Yes,  he  is. — Is  he  right  or  wrong 
He  is  not  wrong,  he  is  right. — Is  not  the  tailor  ashamed  of  his  coats 
Yes,  he  is  ashamed  of  his  coats.     WTho  is  not  cold  ?     I  am  not.- 
Who  has  nothing  ugly?    Their  brother's  friend  has  nothing  ugly.- 
Has  the  youth  Anne's  handkerchiefs?    Which  handkerchiefs?    The 
email  ones. — No,  he  has  them  not;  but  he  has  those  of  her  brother. 
Who  has  the  cook's  mutton  ?     Nobody  has  it ;  but  the  carpenter's 
dog  has.  (Dir.  1st.) — Has  the  stranger  got  the  farmer's  fine  mutton 
He  has  it  not. — Have  you  my  pretty  pistols  or  those  of  my  brother 
[  have  neither  yours  nor  your  brothers',  but  my  own.— Who 
these  or  those  nails  ?     Nobody  has  either  these  or  those. 


I  am  glad  to  hear  it. 

I  am  glad  to  see  you. 

I  am  sorry  to  hear  that  you  have  the 

toothache. 
Out  of  doors.     Pleasant,  agreeable. 


Je  suis  bien  aise  de  1'apprendre. 

Je  suis  bien  aise  de  vous  voir. 

Je  suis  fache  d'apprendre  que  vou 

avez  mal  aux  dents. 
Dehors.  Agreable. 


ELEVENTH  LESSON,  llth.— Onzicme  Le$on,  llmt. 


VOCABULARY.    1st  Section. 
They.     have.     They  have  got. 
They  have  not.  They  have  nothing. 
They  have  it.     They  have  it  not. 
They  have  them. 
They  have  not  got.  them. 
The  Germans.     The  Turtz  9. 


VOCABULAIRE. 

Us.         ont. 

Us  n'ont  pas. 

Us  1'ont. 

Us  les  ont. 

Us  ne  les  ont  pas. 

Les  Allemands. 


Ire  Section. 
Us  ont. 
Us  n'ont  lien. 
lie  ne  Font  pau 

Les  Turea. 


FLEVFNTII    LESSON. 


Tlio  Germans  have. 

The  Turks  have  not. 

Have  they  ?          Plave  they  not  ? 

The  Italians.        The  Spaniards. 

Of  the  Italians.    Those  Spaniards. 

Have  the  Spaniards  ? 

Ka*e  not  the  Italians  got  ? 

Have  they  got  anything  ? 

Have   they  nothing  ? 

Have  they  got  it  ?  Have  they  them  ? 

What  have  they  ?    The  fine  ones. 

They  have  the  Spaniard's  line  dogs. 

What  have  they  not  ? 

They  have  not  the  general's  paper. 

ARTICLE  PARTITIVE  OR  INDEFINITE 

ADJECTIVE  PRONOUN. 
Some  or  any.  (§4,  $  25.) 
Of  some,  of  any,  from  some,  any. 
Some  or  any  wine.  Bread. 

Some  or  any  butter.         Milk. 
Some  or  any  books.         Buttons. 
Some  or  any  knives.        Men. 
This  steel.        Some  or  any  steel. 
Some  or  any  gold.  Silver. 

Some  or  any  friends.       Birds. 
Have  you  any  wine  ?     I  have  (some 

wine). 

Has  that  man  any  cloth  ? 
He  has  some  cloth,  or,  He  has. 
Has  the  scholar  any  copybooks  ? 
He  has  (some  copybooks). 
Have  they  any  steel  ? 
The  English  have  steel. 

No,  or  not  any  ....  (before  a  noun.) 
I  have  no  wine. 
He  has  no  steel. 
You  have  no  cloaks. 
Have  they  no  friends  ? 

Obs.  27.  Mind  that  the  noun  after 
but  merely  de  or  d\  (Or,  you  put  de 
bou.) 

Is  anything  the  matter  with  them  ? 
What  is  the  matter  with  them  ?  (ails 

them  ?) 

Nothing  is  the  matter  with  them. 
What  Is  the  matter  with  the  Italians  ? 


Les  Allemands  out. 

Lb*  Turcs  n'ont  pas. 

Om-ils  ?  N'ont-ils  pas  ? 

Les  Italiens.         Les  Espagnols. 

Des  Italiens.         Ces  Espagnols-la. 

Les   Espagnols   ont-ils  ?     (Obs.  H 

p.  38.) 

Les  Italiens  n'ont-ils  pas  ? 
Ont-ils  quelque  chose  ? 
N'ont-ils  rien  ? 

L'ont-ils  ?  Les  ont-ils  ? 

Qu'ont-ils  ?  Les  beaux. 

Us  ont  les  beaux  chiens  de  1'  Espagftol. 
Que  n'ont-ils  pas  ? 
Us  n'ont  pas  le  papier  du  general. 

ARTICLE  PARTITIF. 
SiLgulier.  mas.       Pluriel,  m.  et  f 
Du.        de  V.  Des. 

De,  (not  de  du.)         De,  (not  dc  de*.] 
Du  vin.  Du  pain. 

Du  beurre.  Du  lait. 

Des  livres.  Des  boutons. 

Des  couteaux.       Des  hommes. 
Get  acier.  De  1'acier. 

De  Tor.  De  1' argent. 

Des  amis.  Des  oiseaux. 

Avez-vous  du  vin  ?       J'ai  du  vin. 

(Ire  Direction.) 
Get  homme  a-t-il  du  drap  ? 
II  a  du  drap. 

L'ecolier  a-t-il  des  cahiers  ? 
II  a  des  cahiers. 
Ont-ils  de  1'acier  ? 
Les  Anglais  ont  de  1'acier. 

Ne pas  de ($  26.) 

Je  n'ai  pas  de  vin. 
II  n'a  pas  d'acier. 
Vous  n'avez  pas  de  manteaux. 
N'ont-ils  pas  d'amis  ? 
a  negation,  takes,  not :  du,  nor  das  * 
before  the  noun  that  follows  a  nego 

f  Ont-ils  quelque  chose  ? 
t  Qu'ont-ils  ? 

t  Us  n'ont  rien. 

t  Qu'ont  les  Italiens  1 


ELEVENTH     IKSSCW. 


-. 

well,  1 


s?   They 

them.-- 

s._Hav« 


ELEVENTH  EXERCISE.  1st  Sec. — ONZIEME  EXERCICE.   Ire  Sec 

Good  day,  Miss  Amanda,  I  am  glad  to  see  you.  You  are 
hope? — Very  well,  thank  you:  but  my  father  is  not  well. — Indeed 
I  am  sorry  to  hear  it. — What  is  the  matter  with  him  ?  He  has  a 
bad  cold. — I  am  sorry  to  hear  that  he  has  a  bad  cold. — Has  he  & 
sore  throat  too  ?  No,  but  he  has  a  pain  in  his  head. — Is  the  general 
well  ?  No,  but  he  is  much  better. — I  am  glad  to  hear  it. — Is  it  cold 
or  •warm  to-day  out  of  doors?  It  is  neither  warm  nor  cold;  bat 
eleasant.  I  am  pleased  at  it. — Sit  down.  With  pleasure. — Take 
this  seat.  Thank  you. — Which  ships  have  the  Germans?  The 
Germans  have  no  ships. — Have  the  sailors  onr  fine  mattresses?  The 
have  them  not. — Have  the  cooks  got  them  ?  They  have 
Has  the  captain  your  big  copybooks  ?  He  has  no  copybooks.- 
I  them  ?  You  have  them  not ;  but  I  have. — Has  the  Italian  the 
boys7  steel  inkstand  ?  He  has  it  not. — Have  the  Turks  any  steel  guns 
They  have  no  steel  guns. — Have  not  the  Spaniards  got  them?  Ye 
They  have  them. — Has  not  the  Spaniard  the  pretty  umbrellas  of  t 
Germans?  Yes,  he  has  them. — Has  he  them?  Yes,  indeed,  ho 
has  them. 

Have  not  the  two  big  Italians  our  pretty  thread  gloves?  They 
have  not.  (Dir.  1st.) — Who  has?  The  Turks  have  them,  and  they 
have  also  our  big  paper  fans. — The  pretty  ones  or  the  old  ones  ? 
The  pretty  ones. — Have  not  the  tailors  our  cloth  waistcoats  or  those 
of  your  friends?  They  have  neither  the  latter  nor  the  former;  bu 
they  have  those  of  the  general,  of  the  lawyer,  and  of  little  John.- 
Which  coats  have  they  ?  They  have  the  velvet  coats  which 
Turks  have  not. — Which  dogs  have  you  ?  I  have  those  which 
body  has. — Have  I  the  handkerchiefs  that  nobody  has  ?  Yes,  inde 
you  have  those  which  nobody  has. — Have  you  not  any  wood  ? — Yes, 
I  have  some  wood. — Has  not  your  small  brother  got  some  soap? 
No,  he  has  no  soap. — Have  I  not  some  mutton  ?  No,  you  have  no 
mutton,  but  you  have  some  birds  and  chickens. — Have  I  no  beef 
No,  you  have  no  beef. — Who  has  beef?  Nobody  has  beef. — Have 
your  friends  any  money  ?  They  have  money. — Have  they  no  milk? 
They  have  no  milk,  but  they  have  butter. — Have  I  no  wood  ?  No, 
you  have  no  wood,  but  you  have  some  coals,  (sing.  in.  Fr.) — Haw.  the 
old  merchants  any  cloth  ?  They  have  no  cloth,  but  they  have  cotton 
thread,  ribbons,  and  stockings. 


I  wish  you  a  good  evemng,  (I  bid  you.) 
Uow  have  you  been  ? 
I  have  been  pretty  well. 
I  have  not  been  very  well. 


Je  vous  souhaite  le  bonsoir. 
Comment  vous  eles-vous  porte  ? 
Je  me  suis  asscz  bien  porte. 
Jo  ne  me  sui?  pas  tres-bien  port& 


ELEVENTH    LESSON. 


VOCABULARY.   2d  Section. 
Some  or  any  (before  an  adjective). 
Some  or  any  good  cheese. 
Some  or  any  fine  velvet. 
Some  or  any  excellent  wine. 
Some  or  any  excellent  coffee. 
Some  or  any  very  pretty  glasses. 
Some  or  any  large  fans. 

Some  or  any  old  wine. 

Some  or  any  excellent  cabbages. 

No  or  not  any  .... 
Have  you  any  good  butter  ? 
I  have  no  good  butter,  but  some  ex- 
cellent cheese. 
Has  not  this  man  some  good  books  ? 

He  has  not  any'good  books. 

Have  the  young  merchants  pretty 

gloves  and  pocket-books  ? 
They  have  neither  pretty  gloves  nor 

pocket-books,  but  fine  jewels. 

The  clerk.  These  clerks. 

Our  bookseller. 
Their  shoe-dealer. 
Those  cloth-merchants,  (drapers.) 
The  milkman — butter-man. 
This  wood  (coal)  merchant. 
The  painter.  The  picture. 

Some  coals. 


What  has  the  baker  ? 

What  have  the  cloth-merchants  ? 
They  have  excellent  clerks. 
Are  the  Americans  afraid  ? 
The  Americans  are  not  afraid. 


VOCABULAIRE.    2de  Section. 


De,  (not  du  nor  des. 
De  bon  fromage. 
De  beau  velours. 
D' excellent  vin. 
D'excellent  cafe. 
De  tres-jolis  verres. 
De  grands  eventails.  - 

Du  vin  vieux. 

Des  choux  excellents 


(*  26.) 

De  and  d'  -, 
the  adjectives 
coming  before 
the  nouns. 
Repeat  it  bef. 
every  noun. 

}    Du  and  des; 

(the  nouns  be- 
ing before  the 
adjective. 


Ne ....  pas  de  . . 

Avez-vous  de  boi.  oeurre  ? 

Je   n'ai  pas  de   bon  beurre,   maia 

d'excellent  fromage. 
Get  homme   n'a-t-il  pas  de   bons 

livres  ? 

II  n'a  pas  de  bons  livres. 
Les  jeunes  marchands  ont-ils  de  jolis 

gants  et  de  jolis  porte-feuilles  ? 
Us  n'ont  ni  de 'jolis  gants  ni  de  jolis 

porte-feuilles,    mais     de     beaux 

bijoux. 

Le  commit.  Ces  commis. 

Notre  marchand  de  livres. 
Leur  marchand  de  souliers. 
Ces  marchands  de  drap. 
Le  marchand  de  lait — -de  beurre. 
Ce  marchand  de  bois — de  charbon. 
Le  peintre.  Le  tableau. 

Du  charbon,  (always  sing,  in  Fr.) 

Le  boulanger  qu'a-t-il?     (14  et  15 

38.) 

boulanger  ? 
Qu'ont  les  marchands  de  drap  ? 
Us  ont  d'excellents  commis. 
Les  Amencains  ont-ils  peur  ? 
Les  Americains  n'ont  pas  peur. 


rLe  boulanger 
<  Obs.  p.  38.) 
\  Qu'a  le  boula 


ELEVENTH  EXEKCISE.  2d  Sec. — ONZIEME  EXEROICE.  2de  Sec. 

I  wish  you  a  good  evening,  Mr.  Charles. — How  have  you  been  1 
I  have  been  pretty  well ;  and  you.  Miss,  how  have  you  been  ?  I 
have  not  been  well.  I  am  sorry  to  hear  it. — What  kind  of  weather 
is  it  out  of  doors'?  The  weather  is  fine  enough,  (pretty  lineV  but 


i 


58  ELEVENTH     LESSOW. 

coicl.  Is  it  very  cold?  Not  very  cold,  but  pleasaru, — 1  hope,  Mi 
EndLe,  that  you  are  well  1  Thank  you,  but  I  am  not  well,  I  have 
sore  throat. — And  your  friend  Robert,  how  is  he  to-day?  He 
better,  much  better. — I  am  very  glad  to  hear  that  he  is  better.— 
Which  exercise  have  the  scholars  to-day  ?  They  have  the  eleventh, 
the  tenth,  and  the  ninth. — Which  ones  has  the  young  clerk?  He 
has  the  fifth,  first  and  second  section. — Have  the  English  any  silver'1 
They  have  no  silver,  but  they  have  excellent  iron.  ($25.) — Has  the 
grocer  any  good  coffee  ?  He  has  no  good  coffee,  but  some  excellent 
wine. — Has  the  bookseller  no  old  dictionaries?  Yes,  he  has  those 
of  Boyer  and  Chambaud. — Has  he  those  which  your  brothers  have? 
No,  he  has  not  those  which  they  have. — Has  the  milk-man  no  milk? 
Yes,  he  has  some  milk. — Have  the  French  any  good  gloves  ?  They 
have  excellent  gloves. — Have  they  no  birds  ?  No,  they  have  no 
birds,  but  they  have  pretty  jewels. — Who  has  excellent  chocolate  ? 
The  Spaniards  have  excellent  chocolate. — Have  they  not  some  fino 
horses?  Yes,  they  have  some  very  fine  horses. — Have  not  the 
Germans  got  large  dogs?  Yes,  they  have  large  dogs  and  oxen.1 
— Have  the  Americans  large  oxen?  No,  they  have  little  oxen  and 
horses.1 — Has  your  friend's  brother  got  some  pretty  little  fans? 
Yes,  he  has  some  pretty  little  fans,  shawls,  and  ribbons.1 — What 
has  he  not?  He  has  neither  my  shoes,  nor  yours,  nor  theirs. — Wh< 
has  those  of  the  French?  They  have  them  and  ours  also. — A 
not  the  coal-merchants  ashamed?  No,  but  they  are  afraid. — Is  th 
clerk,  the  lawyer,  or  the  minister  wrong?  No,  they  are  not  wrong; 
but  right. — Have  the  wine-merchants  anything  good  ?  No,  they 
have  nothing  good. — Have  not  the  Americans  something  beautiful? 
Yes,  they  have  the  electric  telegraph,  (telegraphe  electrique.) — Has 
the  painter  any  umbrellas?  He  has  no  umbrellas,  but  he  haa 
beautiful  pictures. — Has  he  the  pictures  of  the  French,  or  those  of 
the  Italians?  \Vho?  the  painter?  Yes,  the  painter,— He  haa 
neither  the  latter  nor  the  former. 


5 

he 


As  usual. 
Better  than  usual. 
Not  BO  well  as  usual. 
Is  he  not  better  ?     Yes,  be  is  a  little 
better. 


Comme  a  1'ordinaire. 
Mieux  qu'a  1'ordinaire. 
Pas  si  bien  qu'a  1'ordinaire. 
N'est-il  pas  mieux  ?      Si  fait,  oo 
Pardonnez-moi,  il  es';  un  pen  mien*, 


06s.  28.     Pardonnez-rnoi,    is   as   frequently   used    as :    Si  fait,   by 
French.  (01"..  26.) 
I  present  my  respects  to  you.  |   J'ai  1'honneur  de  vous  saluer. 

1  Repeat  the  article  and  adioctive  :  (et  de  grands  bceuis.) 


TWJM.FTH      LESSON. 


TWELFTH  LESSON,  12ih.—  Douzieme 


I2me. 


VOCABULARY.    1st  Section. 
Some  of  it,  any  of  it,  of  it,  some. 
Some  or  any  of  them,  of  them,  some. 
Have  you  any  wine  ? 
I  have  some  of  it — of  it  some — I  have. 
Have  you  any  coals  ? 
Have  you  no  coals  ? 
I  have  none,  not  any — I  have  not. 
Have  you  not  any  ?     Yes,  I  have. 
Have  you  any  good  steel  ? 
I  have  some  good  ...  or  I  have. 
Have  I  good  cloth  and  "velvet  ? 
You  have  not  any  good.  You  have  not 
Has  the  grocer  any  sugar  and  salt  ? 
He  has  sugar,  but  no  salt. 
He  has  (some).      He  has  not  (any). 
Has  he  good  sugar  and  soap  ? 
lie  has  (some  good).       Pie  has  not. 
Have  I  any  bread  and  butter  ? 
Have  I  no  bread  and  butter  ? 
You  have  some  bread,  but  no  butter. 

You  have  neither  bread  nor  butter. 

You  have  some.         You  have  none. 

Have  you  any  shoes  and  stockings  ? 

[  have  shoes  ;  I  have  no  stockings. 

1  have  (some  good). 

[  have  not  (any  good). 

Has  the  farmer  got  good  horses  ? 

Me  has  (some  good  ones).  He  has  not. 

Has  he  any  pretty  knives  and  scis- 
sors ? 

Has  he  no  small  penknives  ? 

Yes,  he  has  (some  small  ones).  He 
has  not. 

Have  I  no  gold  pencil -rases  ? 

Yes,  you  have. 

Who  has  any  ?        Who  has  none  ? 

The  clerk  has  some. 

The  man  has  none. 

Who  has  no  clerk  ? 

The  lawyer  has  none. 


VOCABULAIRE.    ll'C  Section. 

I    En,  (before  the  verb.)   $  4,  £  25.) 

Avez-vous  du  vin  ? 
J'en  ai.  (Ire  direction.) 
Avez-vous  du  charbon  ? 
N'avez-vous  pas  dc  charbon  ?  ($  36.1 
Je  n'en  ai  pas. 

N'en  avez-vous  pas  ?  Si  fait,  j'en  ai. 
Avez-vous  de  bon  acier  ? 
J'en  ai  de  bon. 

Ai-je  de  bon  drap  et  de  bon  velours  1 
Vo&s  n'en  avez  pas  de  bon.  (Ire  dir.) 
L'epicier  a-t-il  du  sucre  et  du  sel  ? 
II  a  du  sucre  ;  mais  pas  de  sel. 
II  en  a.  II  n'en  a  pas. 

A-t-il  de  bon  si  ere  et  de  bon  savor  ? 
II  en  a  de  bon.    II  ri'en  a  pas  de  boa. 
Ai-je  du  pain  et  du  beurre  ? 
N'ai-je  pas  de  pain  et  de  beurre  ? 
Vous   avez   du  pain,    mais   pas   de 

beurre. 

Vous  n'avez  ni  pain  ni  beurre. 
Vous  en  avez.     Vous  n'en  avez  pas. 
Avez-vous  des  souliers  et  des  bas  ? 
J'ai  des  souliers  :  je  n'ai  pas  de  bas, 
J'en  ai  de  bons. 
Je  n'en  ai  pas  de  bons. 
Le  fermier  a-t-il  de  bons  chevaux  ? 
II  en  a  de  bons.    II  n'en  a  pas  de  bons. 
A-t-il  de  jolis  couteaux  et  de  jolie 

ciseaux  ? 

N'a-t-il  pas  de  petits  canifs  ? 
II  en  a  de  petits.        II  n'en  a  pas. 

N'ai-je  pas  de  porte-crayons  d?or  I 

Si  fait,  vous  en  avez. 

Qui  en  a  ?    '         Qui  n'en  a  paa  I 

Le  commis  en  a. 

L'homrne  n'en  a  pas. 

Qui  n'a  pas  de  commis  ? 

L'avocat  n'en  a  pas. 


TWELFTH  EXERCISE.  1st  bee. — DOUZIEME  EXERCICE.  Ire  Sec. 

Jo  vous  souhaite  le  bon  jour,  Mr.  Carnot,  j'espere  que  vous 
portez  ir.ie'ix  anjourcVhui.— Merci,  Madame,  je  me  porte  beauconp 


CO  r WEI  r  in   LESSON. 

niicux.— -Mais  vous,  M.  Napoleon,  comment  vous  eles-vous  poile? 
Je  ne  me  suis  pas  bien  porte,  comme  a  Pordinaire.  Je  suis  bien 
fache  de  Papprendre.  Asseyez-vous.  Prenez  ce  siege. — Avez-voua 
assez  chaud?  Oui,  je  vous  remercie,  je  n'ai  pas  froid. — Avez-voua 
mai  Je  gorge  ?  Non,  mais  mal  de  tete. — Votre  ami  se  porte-t-U 
mienx  qu'a  Pordinaire  ?  Oui,  beaucoup  mieux.  Je  suis  b?er_  aiso 
d'apprendre  qu'il  se  porte  mieux. — Fait-il  froid?  Non,  il  fait  agre- 
able. — Mr.  Charles,  avez-vous  mon  petit  canif  ?  Non,  M.,  je  ne  1'ai 
pas. — Qui  Pa?  Votre  ami  Jules  (Julius)  Pa. — Non,  Jules  n'a  paa 
Jte  mien,  il  a  le  votre. — Le  mien  1  Non,  je  Pai. — Pardonnez-moi. 
Jules  Pa. — Les  Espagnojs  n'ont-ils  pas  de  beaux  chevaux  ?  Us  < 
ont  de  beaux. — Le  domestique  de  Pavocat  qu'a-t-il?  II  a  le  vieu 
chapeau  du  jeune  Francais. — Le  commis  de  "Pepicier  n'a-t  il  pa 
mon  joli  petit  chien  ?  Non;  M.  il  n'a  pas  de  chien.—Son  frere 
i'a-t-il  pas?  Pardonnez-moi,  il  Pa. — Avez-vous  peur  de  ce  chien-ci 
Oui;  j'en  ai  peur. — Avez-vous  peur  de  celui-la?  Non.  je  n'en 
pas  peur. — L'adolescent  n'a-t-il  pas  peur  de  ce  bceuf-la  ?  Pardonnez 
moij  il  en  a  peur. 

Have  you  any  coal?  I  have.  (1st  dir.) — Have  you  any  wood  1 
I  have  not. — Have  you  any  good  beef?  I  have  (some  good). — Air 
young  mutton  ?  I  have  not. — Have  you  no  good  cloth  ?  No,  I  hav 
none. — No  good  paper?  Yes,  I  have. — Have  I  the  silver  ribbon  1 
No,  you  have  it  not. — Which  have  I  ?  The  velvet  one. — Have 
the  grocer's  rice  ?  You  have  it  not. — Have  I  any  rice  ?  You  have 
(some.) — Has  the  lawyer  any  thread  handkerchiefs  ?  He  has  none. 
— Who  has  any  ?  Miss  Rose  has  some  very  pretty  ones. — Has  the 
clerk  any  money  ?  He  has  none. — What  has  he  ?  He  has  not 
anything.  Who  ?  The  clerk. — Has  the  lawyer's  servant  any  old 
cheese  ?  He  has  some. — Have  not  the  Spaniards  the  scholar's  dic- 
tionary? Yes,  they  have  it. — Have  they  our  books?  No,  they 
have  them  not. — Who  has  them?  Your  good  friend,  the  minister, 
has  them. — Has  the  American  any  gold?  He  has  some. — Have 
the  tailors  our  vests?  No,  they  have  them  not. — Have  they  any 
vests?  They  have  some. — Have  the  French  the  pictures7  Which 
pictures  ? — Those  of  the  young  painter. — No,  the  French  have  them 
not ;  but  the  Italians  have. — What  have  they  ?  The  young  painter's 
pictures. — Has  not  the  milkman  some  fine  oxen  ?  Yes,  he  has  some 
fine  ones. — What  leather  has  the  shoemaker?  He  has  some  excel- 
lent.— Has  the  big  general  any  jewels  ?  He  t?as  not  any. — Who  nils' 
playthings?  The  buitermarf $  sen  has. 


TWELFTH     LESSON. 


61 


VOCABULARY.    2d  Section. 

The  hatter.  This  joiner. 

The  apothecary.  These  apothecaries. 

Have  our  friends  any  old  cloaks  ? 

They  have  (some  old  ones).  (1st  dir.) 

They  have  not  (any  old). 

Have  "hey  not  (any  old  ones)  ? 

Yes,  they  have  (some  old  ones). 

Have  they  good  or  bad  books  ? 

They  have  some  good  ones. 

vVhit  have  they  good  ? 

Thay  have  good  books. 

Have  you  any  good  ones  also  ? 

Have  you  no  pretty  ones  ? 

Has  the  hatter  any  hats  ? 

Has  he  any  ugly  ones  ? 

Has  he  neithsr  ugly  nor  old  ones  ? 

Yea,  he  has  eld  ones. 

Have  the  joiners  any  hammers  ? 

They  have  (1st  dir.)  and  the  hatters 
also. 

Have  not  the  carpenters  got  some  ? 

Yes,  they  have,  and  so  have  the  doc- 
tors. 

Are"  the  Spaniards  cold  ? 

No,  they  are  not ;  they  have  fire. 

Have  the  Italians  any  ? 

Are  the  Turks  afraid  of  the  Ger- 
mans ? 

No,  they  are  not  afraid  of  them. 

Are  they  not  afraid  of  the  Russia?is  ? 

Yes,  they  are.  (1st  dir.) 

Are  they  neither  warm,  sleepy,  hun- 
gry, nor  thirsty  ? 

No,  they  are  neither  warm,  sleepy, 
hungry  nor  thirsty,  but  wrong. 

Are  not  the  hatters  ashamed  of  their 
velvet  hats  ? 

N"o,  they  are  not  (ashamed  of  them). 
The  Russian's  apothecary. 


VOCABULAIBE.   2de  Sectioa. 
Le  chapelier.          Ce  menuisier. 
\j  apothicaire.         Ces  apothicairts. 
Nos  amis  ont-ils  de  vieux  manteaux! 
Us  en  ont  de  vieux. 
Us  n'en  ont  pas  de  vieux. 
N'en  ont-ils  pas  de  vieux  ? 
Si  fait,  ils  en  ont  de  vieux. 
Ont-ils  de  bons  ou  de  mauvais  li  vreat 
Us  en  ont  de  bons. 
Qu'ont-ils  de  bon  ? 
Ils  ont  de  bon  livres. 
En  avez-vous  de  bons  aussi  ? 
N'en  avez-vous  pas  te  jolis  ? 
Le  chapelier  a-t-il  des  chapeaux  ? 
En  a-t-il  de  vilains  ? 
N'en  a-t-il  ni  de  vilains  ni  de  vieux  ? 
Si  fait,  il  en  a  de  vieux. 
Les  menuisiers  ont-ils  des  marteaux  I 
Ils  en  ont,  et  lea  chapeliers  aussi. 

Les  charpentiers  n'en  ont-ils  pas  ? 
Si  fait,  ils  en  ont  et  les  medecin? 

aussi. 

Les  Espagnols  ont-ils  frcid  ? 
Non,  ils  n'ont  pas  froid ;  ils  ont  du  feu, 
Les  Italiens  en  ont-ils  ? 
Les    Turcs  ont-ils  peur  des  AIlo 

mands  ? 

II  n'en  ont  pas  peur. 
N'ont-ils  pas  peur  des  Busses  ? 
Si  fait,  ils  en  ont  peur. 
N'ont-ils  ni  chaud,  ni  somrneil,  ni 

faim,  ni  soif  ? ' 
Non,  ils  n'ont  ni  chaud,  ni  sommeil, 

ni  faim,  ni  soif,  mais  ils  ont  tort. 
Les  chapeliers  n'ont-ils  pas  honte  cU 

leurs  chapeaux  de  velours  ? 
Non,  ils  n'en  ont  pas  honte. 
L'apothicaire  du  Russe. 


TWELFTH  EXERCISE.  2d  Sec. — DOUZIEMB  EXERCICE.  2de  Sec. 

M.  Lamartine,  j'ai  Fhonneur  de  vous  saiuer.  Comment  voua 
portez-vous  ce  matin,  et  comment  vous  etes-vous  portel  Bien:  et 
vous,  Mr.,  j'espere  que  vous  vous  portez  mieux  aujourd'hui.  Un  pen 
mieux,  a  votre  service. — Quel  temps  fait-il?  Fait-il  chaud  on  froid ? 
il  ne  fait  ni  chaud  ni  froid^  mais  agreable. — Comment  so  porte  notre 


T  W  E  L  F  T II     L  E  S  6  0  W . 


ministie?  II  ne  se  porte  pas  bien. — Qu7a-t-ii?  11  ami  mauvait 
rhume  et  nial  do  gorge. — A-t-il  aussi  mal  aux  dents'?  Non,  il  n'a 
pas  mal  aux  dents. — J'en  suis  bien  aise. — Le  bon  commis  a-t-il  les 
eventails  de  nos  marchands?  II  n'a  pas  d'eventails,  mais  il  a  leurs 
gants  de  cuir. — Avez-vous  du  grain  du  fermier?  Oui,  j'en  ai. — 
Auguste  a-t-il  froid  ou  faim  ?  II  n'a  ni  froid  ni  faim,  mais  il  a  chaud, 
— Le  marchand  a-t-il  quelque  chose  de  joli  ?  II  n'a  rien  de  joli. — 
N7a-t-il  rien  de  beau? — Non,  il  n'a  rien  de  joli ni  de  beau. — Qu'"ai-je? 
Vous  avez  de  bon  chocolat. — Avez-vous  le  bois  du  menuisier?  J0 
ne  Pai  pas,  mais  j'ai  son  marteau. — Lequel;  le  grand  ou  le  petit? 
Pai  le  grand. — N7avez-vous  pas  le  petit  ?  Si  fait,  ou  pardonnez-moi, 
je  1'ai.— J'ai  celui  que  vous  n'avez  pas. — Quels  e.xercices  ai-je  ?  Vous 
avez  ceux  de  Mr.  Charles,  ceux  de  Mr.  Robert,  ceux  de  ce  Mon- 
sieur-la, (gentleman}  et  les  miens. — Avez-vous  le  dixieme,  le  onzi- 
erne,  ou  le  douzieme  ? — Je  n'ai  pas  ceux-la,  mais  le  huitiemej  et  I 
neuvieme. — Lequel  ont  les  Italiens  ?  Us  ont  le  septieme. 

Has  the  captain  any  good  sailors?  He  has  some  good  ones.- 
Have  the  sailors  any  fine  mattresses?  They  have  not  (1st  dir. 
Have  the  painters  any  very  old  pictures  ?  No,  they  have  no  oL 
pictures  ;  but  the  booksellers  have. — Have  not  the  minister  and  the 
lawyer  got  some  also?  This  one  has  some,  that  one  has  none.— 
Who  has  beautiful  shawls,  ribbons,  and  handkerchiefs?  Messrs. 
Boutilliers  and  Cowell  have  some.  Has  the  apothecary's  clerk  my 
penknife  or  his?  He  has  his  own  penknife,  but  not  yours. — Who 
has  biscuits?  The  young  baker  of  our  big  neighbour  has. — Who  has 
beautiful  ribbons  ?  The  French  have. — Have  not  the  carpenters 
some  gold  and  silver  nails?  No,  they  have  iron  nails;  but  the 
joiners  have  gold,  silver,  and  steel  nails?  What  is  the  matter  with 
their  brothers?  They  r*:e  wrong  and  ashamed.— What  is  the  mat- 
ter with  the  foreigners  ?  Which?  These  or  those?  Those. — Those 
v\re  afraid  of  the  general's  dogs. — And  these  ?  These  ?  Nothing  is 
the  matter  with  them. — They  are  neither  cold  nor  warm,  hungry 
nor  thirsty. — Have  you  Miss  Clara's  shawl  and  gloves?  No,  I  have 
them  not. — Who  has  them  ?  I  have  some,  but  riot  hers. — Who  has 
any  of  the  grocer's  rice  ?  The  lawyer,  the  general,  the  apothecary, 
and  the  joiner  have  some  of  it. — Have  the  painters  fine  pictures 
and  gardens  ?  They  have. — Have  not  his  joiner  and  his  carpentor 
got  some  beautiful  old  wood  ?  The  former  has,  but  not  the  latter.— 
Have  the  hatters  good  and  bad  hats  ?  They  have  good  and  bad 
ones. — Who  has  no  pocket-book  ?  The  milk  and  butter  men  have 
none. — Have  you  none?  I  have  none. — Has  your  little  clerk  got 
any?  No,  he  has  none. — Who  has  any?  The  booksellers  have 
some  leather  ones. — Has  the  apothecary  anything  pretty?  He  has 


TWELFTH     LESSON. 


63 


not  anything  pretty,  but  he  has  something  good. — Who  has  yout 
birds?  The  farmer  has  them. — Has  he  their  grain  1  He  has  it 
also. 


Iio\v  are  they  at  home  ? 
Ail  well — Everybody  is  well. 
Almost  all  are  sick. 

VOCABULARY.    3d  Section. 
Fresh. 

This  fresh  butter.        Fresh  bread, 
A  dry  goods  store. 
A  journal,  daily  paper,  gazette. 
To-day's  paper,  the  paper  of  to-day. 
A  or  an  (article  indefini,  $  3). 
In,  into.        In  a  or  an.      Of  a. 
A  horse.       One  horse.      Of  a  horse. 
Have  you  a  book  ?     I  have  a  book. 
Have  you  a  glass  ?     I  have  no  glass. 


Comment  se  pc/rte-t-on  chez  vous  ? 
Tout  le  monde  se  porte  bien. 
Prcsque  tout  le  monde  est  malade. 

VOCABULAIRE.    3me  Section 
Frais  (after  the  noun). 
Ce  beurre/rais.         Du  pain  frais. 
Un  magasin  de  nouveautes. 
Un  journal — Un  papier. 
Le  papier  d'aujourd  'hui. 
Un.  (mas.  sing,  before  all  letters.) 
Dans.  Dans  un.  D'un. 

Un  cheval.  D'un  cheval. 

Avez-vous  un  livre  ?     J'ai  un  i;vre, 
Avez-vous  un  verre  ?        Je  n'ai  pas 


de  verre. 

Obs.  29.  The  French  use  :  je  n'aipas  de  . . .  in  preference  to ;  je  rfaipas  un, 
[   have  one,  (meaning:    one  of  the 
things  spoken  of.) 


Have  you  a  good  journal  \ 

I  have  a  good  journal. 

I  have  a  good  one — two  good  ones. 

I  have  two  good  journals. 

I  have  three,  no,  four  good  ones. 

Have  I  an  eye  ?       You  have  an  eye. 

You  have  one.       You  have  a  large 

one. 

You  have  two  large  ones. 
Has  your  brother  a  dry  goods  store  ? 

He  has  a  dry  goods  store. 

He  has  one.         He  has  a  small  one. 

He  has  twd.    A  large  and  a  small  one. 

lie  has  two  fine  ones — three  fine  ones. 

Four — five — six — seven — eight. 

Has  the  scholar  a  paper  of  to-day  ? 

He  has  not  any  (none). 

Have  the  gentlemen  five  good  horses  ? 

They  have  six.  No  ;  they  have  seven 

or  eight. 

Who  has  a  fine  satin  umbrella  ? 
Nobody  has  one.     Oh  !  yes  ;  sonw 

body  has  one.        Anna  has  one. 
Some  or  any  good  fresh  butter. 


J'en  ai  un,  (literally:  /,  of  them,  havi 
one.  The  quantity  placed  afki 
the  verb.) 

Avez-vous  un  bon  journal  ? 

J'ai  un  bon  journal. 

J'en  ai  un  bon — deux  bons. 

J'ai  deux  bons  journaux. 

J'en  ai  trois,  non,  quatre  bons. 

Ai-je  un  ceil  ?         Vous  avez  un  ceil. 

Vous  en  avez  un.  Vous  en  avez  un 
grand. 

Vous  en  avez  deux  grands. 

Votre  frere  a-t-il  un  magasin  de  nou- 
veautes. 

II  a  un  magasin  de  nouveautes. 

II  en  a  un.          II  en  a  un  petit. 

II  en  a  deux.      Un  grand  et  un  petit 

II  en  a  deux  beaux — trois  beaux. 

Quatre — cinq — six — sept — huit. 

L'  ecolier  a-t-il  un  papier  d'aujour 
d'hui?  II  n'  en  a  pas. 

Les  messieurs  ont-ils  cinq  bons  die 
vaux  ?  Us  en  ont  six.  Non , 

ils  en  ont  sept  ou  huit. 

Qui  a  un  beau  parapluie  de  satin  ? 

Perscnne  n'  en  a.  Oh  !  si  fait ;  quel 
qu'un  en  a  un.  Anne  en  a  un. 

DC  bon  bcure  frais,  (frais,  after). 


PELFT1I     LESSON. 

TWELFTH  EXERCISE.  3d  Sec. — DOUZIEME  EXERCICE.  Sine  -Sco. 

Mr.  Louis,  j'ai  Phonneur  de  vous  saluer.  Comment  se  porte-t- 
chez  vons?  Tout  le  monde  se  porte  bien,  merci.  Et  chez  vousl 
comment  se  porte-t-on  ?  Presque  tout  le  monde  est  malade.  Ma- 
dame a  mal  de  gorge.  George  a  mal  aux  yeux.  Clara  a  mal  aux 
dents.  Le  petit  Jean  a  un  vilain  rhume.  J?ai  un  peu  mal  de  tete. 
En  varite,  tout  le  monde  est  malade.  Asseyez-vous,  et  \>renez  un 
j,-eu  vie  cafe.  Non,  je  vci^s  remercie. 

Have  you 'any  fresh  butter?     I  have  some;  but  I  ^ave  no  frei 
tread. — Which  bread  have  you?   I  have  some  old  baker's  bread.- 
Have  they  any  coffee?   They  have  not. — Who  has  any  good  win 
The  grocer  has  some  in  his  store. — Has  the  cloth  merchant  any  go] 
cloth?    He  has  some  silver  cloth. — Have  I  not  got  good  sugar  ?   Ye; 
you  have  in  your  chest;  but  the  farmer  has  not. — What  has  t 
clerk  got?    Which  one?    The  bookseller's.     That  one  has  nothin, 
but  mine  has  something  good. — What  has  he  good?   He  has,  in  his 
bag,  some  of  the  good  rice  of  the  big  stranger. — Have  the  German 
any  fresh  cheese?     They  have  none. — Have  not  the  English 
any?     Yes,  they  have  some  good  fresh  cheese. — Which  words  ha 
the  scholars?    They  have  the  words  of  seven  lessons. — Who  h 
those  of  the  eighth?     The  minister,  the  lawyer,  and  Robert  ha 
them. — Have  they  also  those  of  the  ninth?     No,  they  have  the 
not. — Have  you  a  pencil  ?    I  have  one;  and  a  pencil-case  also. — ] 
the  apothecary  a  young  clerk?     He  has  none. — Has  not  the  gene: 
a  fine  satin  handkerchief?     Yes,  he  has,  and  the  sailor  also. 

Has  the  old  tailor  a  satin  coat?  He  has  three. — Has  the  captain 
line  dog  ?  He  has  two. — Have  your  friends  two  fine  horses  ?  They 
have  four. — Has  the  young  man  a  good  or  bad  pistol  ?  He  has  no 
good  one.  He  has  a  bad  and  ugly  one  in  his  trunk  (§  18.) — Have 
you  a  copy-book  ?  I  have  six  or  eight. — Has  your  servant  a  pen- 
knife ?  He  has. — Have  I  a  friend  ?  You  have  an  old  and  good 
one.  You  have  two  old  ones.  He  has  three  ugly  small  ones. — H; 
Mr.  Cowell  a  dry  goods  store?  Yes,  he  has  a  line  one. — Have  n 
the  Germans  a  cloth  store  ?  No,  they  have  a  dry  goods  store. — Ha1 
his  carpenter  and  her  joiner  iron  and  steel  nails?  They  have,  and 
they  have  also  a  small  silver  hammer. — Who  has  the  youths'  jour- 
nals? Nobody  has  their  journals;  but  somebody  has  their  fans, 
their  satin  vests  ($  140),  velvet  shoes,  steel  toys,  cloth  cloaks,  and 
.hread  gloves. — Has  the  ugly  Turk  a  young  and  good  cook?  He 
nastwo;  one  young,  and  one  old.  Have  you  none  of  his  coffee? 
Yes,  I  nave  some,  in  my  Mg  cotton  bag. 


,ve 


THIRTEENTH    LESSON. 


65 


THIRTEENTH  LESSON,  13th.—- Treizumc  Lcr.cn,  13me. 


VOCABULARY.    1st  Section. 
Ifow  much  ?  How  many?  (bef.  a  noun.) 
How  much  satin  ?   How  much  steel  ? 
How  many  words  ?  How  many  birds  ? 

How  much  (of  it)  has  he  ?  (no  noun.) 
How  many  (of  them)  has  he  ? 


VOCABULAIRE.     Ire  Section. 

Combie?i  de  l  (avant  un  nom.  Dir.  7.) 
Combiende  satin?  Combiend'acier! 
Combien  de  mots?  Combien  d'jtt- 

seaux  ? 

Combien  en  a-t-il  ?  (pas  de  nom.) 
Combien  en  a-t-il  ? 


Of  it,  of  them,  being  usually  omitted,  when  there  is  :K»  noun! 


Combien  en  (avant  le  verbe.l 
Combien  d'amis  avez-vous? 
Combien  en  a-t-il  ? 
Ne  (avant)  que,  (apres  le  verbo.* 

Wen que  .... 

Avant.  Apres. 

IV en  .  .  .  qu'un.    N'en  .  .  .  que  deux. 
Je  n'ai  qu'un  ami. 
Je  n'en  ai  qu'un — que  deuxou  trois, 
Combien  de  chevaux  a  votre  frere  ? 
II  n'en  a  qu'un — que  deux  jeunes. 
Beaucoup  de  . . . .  (avec  les  noms.) 
(Dir.  7.) 

En  ....  bcaiicoup  (sans  nom). 
Beaucoup  de  beurr^frais. 
Beaucoup  d'or.    Beaucoup  de  mots 
A-t-il  beaucoup  de  choux  ? 
II  en  a  beaucoup  -II  n'en  a  pas  beau 

coup. 
N'ont-ils  ni  beaucoup    de    fer,    ni 

beaucoup  d'acier  ? 
Trop  de  (avec).     En  ....  trap  (sans 

nom.) 

Avez-vous  trop  de  mats  ? 
J'en  ai  trop.     Je  n'en  ai  pas  trop. 
II  n'a  ni  trop  de  eelui-ci  ni  de  celui- 

la. 
A-t-il  beaucoup  de  choses?    II  en  a 

bea.ucoup  trop. 

-TREIZIEME  EXERCICE.  Ire  Sec. 


Obs.  30. 
eay. 

How  much  ?  How  many  ? 

How  many  friends  have  you  ? 
How  many  has  he  ? 
Only,  but,  (with  a  noun.) 
Only,  but,  (without  a  noun). 
Before.  After. 

Only  one  (of  them).     But  two. 
I  have  but  one  friend. 
I  have  but  one — but  two  or  three. 
How  many  horses  has  your  brother  ? 
He  has  but  one — but  two  young  ones. 
Much,  many,    a  good  deal  of,  very 

much,  many,  a  great  many,  (with 

nouns.) 

Much,  many,  &c.  (without  a  noun.) 
Much  fresh  butter  (a  great  deal  of). 
Much  gold.  Many  words. 

Has  he  many  cabbages  ? 
He  has  (many) — not  (many). 


iron  nor 


Have   they   neither  much 

steel ? 
Too  much.       Too   many,   (with   and 

without  noun). 
Have  you  too  many  words  ? 
I  have  (too  many).  I  have  not.  (Dir.l.) 
He  has  neither  too  much  of  this  one 

nrr  of  that. 
Has  he  many  things  ?     He  has  too 

many  by  far  (a  great  deal  too  much). 

THIRTEENTH  EXERCISE.  1st  Sec. 


Comment!  (How!*)  Vous  avez  mal  de  gorge ?  Oui,  j'ai un  tres- 
oiauvais  mal  de  gorge. — Avez-vous  im  rhume  aussi?  Non?  je  n'ai 
Das  do  rhume.  Pespere  que  votre  jeune  frere  se  porte  tien, — Ou^ 

1  Cardinal  numbers  answer  the  question:  Combie7i?  How  many  1 
Two— Deux,  &c. 


58  TH1UTKKNTU      LESSON 

\\  se  porte  tres-bien.  Quelqu'un  est-il  malade  chez  vous  ?  Personrie 
n'est  malade.  Mr.  j;ai  1'honneur  de  vous  saluer  et  j'espere  CJUG 
vous  vous  portez  mieux. — Je  me  porte  beaucoup  mieux.  je  vous 
remercie.  Fait-il  chaud?  II  ne  fait  pas  froid. — Asseyez-vcus,  pre- 
nez  ce  siege-ci.  NOLI  msrci. — Votre  cuisinier  se  porte-t-il  mieux  '•' 
II  se  porte  bi«n.  Pen  suls  bien  aise. 

How  many  friends  have  you?  I  have  two  good  friends. — Have 
you  eight  good  trunks ?  I  have  nine. — Has  our  servant  three  brooms] 
He  has  only  one  good  one. — Has  the  captain  two  line  ships'?  He 
has  only  one. — How  many  sailors  has  he?  He  has  too  many;  he 
/ias  thirteen. — How  many  hammers  have  the  carpenter  and  joiner? 
They  have  many. — Have  they  too  many  ?  They  have  not.  (Dir.  1 .) — 
Have  not  the  shoemakers  many  shoes  ?  Yes,  they  have  many,  but 
:?ot  too  many. — Has  not  the  young  man  an  old  copy-book?  Yes,  he 
has. — Has  the  clerk  ten  fans?  No.  he  has  but  seven;  but  he  has 
ten  handkerchiefs,  nine  inkstands,  eight  combs,  and  many  pencils. — 
How  much  money  have  the  Spaniards  ?  They  have  not  much.— 
Have  they  not  many  fine  horses  ?  Yes,  they  have. — Has  your  neigh- 
bor much  coffee  ?  He  has  some. — How  many  bags  has  he  1  He 
has  only  six  or  seven. — Who  has  too  much  grain?  Nobody  has. — 
What  has  he  got  in  his  hat?  He  has  some  journals. — How  many 
has  he?  He  has  three  or  four. — Has  he  but  three  or  four?  No,  he 
has  but  three  or  four. 

How  many  good  generals  have  the  Americans?  They  have 
great  many. — What  have  the  Russians?  They  have  much  salt: 
but  not  too  much. — Have  the  farmers  much  fresh  butter  ?  They  have 
some  old,  but  none  fresh. — Have  you  brothers?  I  have  but  one. — 
What  have  the  apothecaries  got  in  their  stores? — They  have  man) 
things. — Have  they  too  many  ?  Yes,  too  many  by  far. — Has  the  dry 
goods  merchant  any  satin,  cotton  and  thread  ?  He  has  neither  satin, 
cotton,  nor  thread. — What  has  he  got?  He  has  many  things. — Hat* 
he  anything  pretty?  Yes,  he  has.  (Dir.  1.) — Has  the  scholar  ?t 
copybook?  No,  he  has  none.  Oh  !  yes,  he  has  one  in  his  trunk. — 
What  has  the  grocer  got  in  this  and  in  that  bag  ?  In  this  he  has 
some  clothes.  In  that,  he  has  cabbages,  grain,  and  fresh  cheese.—*- 
Has  he  biscuits?  He  has. — Is  the  man  atraid?  No,  he  is  no- 
afraid. — Are  not  the  generals  cold  and  hungry?  No,  but  they  an1 
warm  and  thirsty. — Who  is  ashamed?  The  minister's  little  boy  if- 
ashamed.  He  is  wrong. — Who  has  the  electric  telegraph?  Thf 
Americans  have  it. — Has  the  youth  any  pretty  sticks?  He  has  nt 
pretty  sticks,  but  some  beautiful  birds. — What  chickens  has  ou. 
cook  ?  He  has  some  pretty  chickens. — How  many  has  he  ?  He  ha/ 
fcix. — Has  the  hatter  any  hais?  He  has  a  good  many. —  Has  the 
joiner  much  wood7  He  .ias  not  a  great  deal;  but  enough. 


uy 

• 


THIRTEENTH     LESSON. 


67 


VOCABUJ  AST    2(1  Section. 
Flar«  we  ?  We  have. 

We  have  not.      Have  we  not  got  ? 

What  have  we  ?  is  the  matter  with  us? 
We  have  nothing,  or  nothing  is,  &c. 
[lave  we  it  ?         We  have  them. 
ftnve  we  anybody  ? 
We  have  nobody,  (not  anybody). 
Whom  ?  Whom  have  we  ? 

We  have  our  young  and  old  friends. 

\ro  we  warm  ?     We  are  not  cold. 

Enough.  (Dir.6.)  'Enough  of  it,  of  them. 
VIoney  enough.       Enough  knives. 
We  have  enough  (of  it  or  them). 
But  little,  only  a  little,  not  much,  not 

many,  hut  few.  (Dir.  7.) 
Who  has  but  little  money  ? 
[  have  not  much,  or  but  little. 

NTot  much  of  it,  but  few  of  thf.ni. 
Have  we  not  many  friends  ? 
We  have  but  few. 
rlave  I  but  few  ? 
you  have  not  many. 
Has  he  but  little  ? 
Phe  lawyers  have  but  few 
Who  has  but  little  ? 
Nobody  has  much  (many). 
Hie  merit.  Some  men'. 

Phis  lawyer  has  great  merit. 
Little — Little  merit.    (Dir.  7.) 
Little  of  it— He  has  little  of  i' 

A.  little A  little  of  it. 

A.  little  cloth.         He  has  a  little. 

Nine — ten — eleven  —twelve. 

Courage. 

Pepper.  Some  vinegar. 


YOCABULAIBB.  2de  Section. 


Nous  avona. 
pas.     N'avons-noift 


Avons-nous  ? 
Nous  n'avons 

pas  ? 

Qu'avons-nous? 
Nous  n'avons  rien. 
L"avons-nj)us  ?       Nous  les  avons, 
Avons-nous  "quelqu'un  ? 
Nous  n'avons  personne. 
Qui  ?  Qui  avons-nous  1 

Nous  avons  nos  jeunes  et  nos  vie\is 

amis. 
Avons-nous  chaud  ?     Nous  n'avone 

pas  froid. 

Assez  de  (av.  b  nom.).     En  . .  assez. 
Assez  d' argent.    Assez  de  couteaux. 
Nous  en  avons  asse/. 
Ne..  guere  de,  or       Javantlenom. 
i\e.  .  pas  beaucoup  de  ) 
Qui  n'a  guere  d' argent  ? 
Je   n'en  ai  guure — Je  n'en  ai  paa 

beaucoup. 

N'en..  guere — N'cn.  .pas beaucoup, 
N'avons-nous  pas  beaucoup  d'amis  f 
Nous  n'en  ayons  guere. 
N'en  ai-je  guere  ? 
Vous  n'en  avez  pas  beaucoup. 
N'en  a-t-il  guere  ? 
Les  avocats  n'en  ont  guere. 
Qui  n'en  a  guere  ? 
Personne  n'en  a  guere. 
Le  merite.  Du  merits. 

Get  avooat  a  un  grand  merite. 
Pen  de  (av.  le  n.).     Pen  de  merite. 
En  ....  peu — II  en  a  pen. 
Un  peu  de  .  .  . .         En  . . . .  un  pen 
Un  peu  de  drap.         11  en  a  un  pen, 
Neuf — dix — onze — douze. 
Du  cceur,  (du  courage). 
Du  poivre.  Da  vinaigre. 


THIRTEENTH  EXERCISE.  2d  Sec. — TREIZI£ME  EXERCICE.  2de  Sec. 

J'ai  Phonneur  ie  vous  saluer,  Mle.  Sophie.  Monsieur,  je  vous 
souhaite  le  bonjour — Comment  vous  etes-vous  porte  ?  Je  vous 
remercie,  Mle.,  je  me  suis  tres-bien  porte,  comme  a  Pordinaire — 
Comment  se  porte-t-on  chez  vous?  Chez  raoi?  Tout  le  monde  se 
porte  bien,  merci — Le  menuisier  se  porte-t-il  mieux  ?  II  ne  se  pone 
pas  mieux.  Je  suis  fache.  de  1'apprendre.  Qui  a  mal  de  telw  che7 


08  FOURTEENTH     LESSON, 

voits  ?  Personne  n;a  maJ  de  tete  chez  moi;  mais  mon  frere  a  ma 
sux  dents. 

Have  we  many  notes?  We  have  only  a  few. — How  man)r  notes 
have  we  ?  We  have  only  three  pretty  ones. — Have  you  fresh  butteJ 
enough?  We  have  not  enough. — Have  our  boys  too  many  ink- 
stands? They  have  not  too  many,  but  enough. — Has  our  young 
friend  too  much  milk-?  Ke  has  only  a  little,  but  enough. — Who  li 
good  many  words  ?  The  scholars  have  enough,  but  not  too  many. 
Have  they  many  gloves?  Who?  The  iarmers  or  scholars  ($  15) 
The  farmers.  They  have  not  any. — Has  the  cook  any  pepper  ($  25), 
salt,  and  vinegar?  He  has  not  enough  vinegar,  but  he  has  too  much 
pepper  and  salt.  Have  we  much  soap  ?  We  have  only  a  little.— 
Fas  the  merchant  much  cloth?  He  has  a  good  deal. — Who  has 
good  deal  of  paper?  Our  neighbors  have. — Have  these  tailors 
many  buttons?  They  have  but  few. — Has  the  painter  many  gar- 
dens? He  has  not  many. — How  many  gardens  has  he?  He  has 
but  two. — Have  we  the  Germans'  knives?  We  have  them. — Have 
we  me  captain's  fine  horses?  We  have  them  not;  the  general  has 
them. — Have  we  any  good  and  fine  (§  18)  jewels?  We  have  a 
good  many. — What  jewels  have  we?  We  have  gold,  silver,  and 
steel  jewels  ($  140).  What  candlesticks  have  our  friends.  They  have 
\he  old  iron  ones  (les  vieux  de  fer.)  Have  we  not  Sarah's  satin  ribbons? 
No,  we  have  them  not. — Have  we  not  any  ribbons?  Satin  ribbons? 
Yes,  satin  ribbons?  Yes.  we  have  many,  but  not  Sarah's. — Has  the 
clerk  any  of  the  grocer's  chocolate,  sugar,  coffee,  vinegar,  pepper, 
salt,  and  biscuits  ($  140)  ?  He  has  not. — Whom  have  you  to-day? 
We  have  the  minister  of  merit. — Whom  has  your  brother?  He  has 
nobody. — Whom  have  I?  The  lawyer  who  has  little  merit. — Who 

has  merit?     Doctor  (Docteur)  M has  much  merit. — Have  we 

neither  gold  nor  silver?  Yes,  we  have. — What  have  they?  They 
have  something  fine. — Have  )'ou  anything  bad?  Yes,  and  I  arr; 
ashamed  of  it. 


FOURTEENTH  LESSON,  Uih.—Quatorzieme  Le$on,  Ume. 
VOCABULARY.  1st  Section. 


A  few— Some.  ($3.) 

A  few  books.  A  few  friends. 

Have  you  a  few  ejercises  ? 

Some  (of  them).       A  few  (of  them). 

A  few  of.  .  .  . 

They  have  a  few  of  mine  (some  of ); 

Have  we  not  a  few  ? 


VOCABULAIRE.   Ire  Section. 
Quelques  (no  de,  before  the  noun). 
Quelques  livres.        Quelques  ami*? 
Avez-vous  quelques  exercices  ? 
En  ....  quelques  uni  <. 
Quelques  uns  des  .... 
Us  en  ont  quelques  uns  des  miens. 
N'en  avons-nous  pas  quelquea 


One  or  a  sou.  Some  sous.         |  Un  sou,  Des  sous. 


FOURTEENTH     LESSOIf 


69 


One  or  a  franc 
A  dollar. 


Some  francs. 
Half  a  dollar. 


Un  franc. 
Un  dollar. 


Quelques  francs. 
Un  demi-dollar. 


Ols.  31.    In  the  United  States,  the  French  use  the  word  :  dollar  ;  giving 
to  the  ar  final,  its  French  sound. 


A  one  dollar  note.        Two  dollars. 

A  three,  five,  or  ten  dollar  note. 

A  two  dollar  one, or  one  of  two  dollars. 

Oilier.  One  or  another.  Some  others. 

Another  dollar.     Some  other  dollars. 

Have  we  another  franc  ? 

Have  vc  some  ether  francs  ?  (some 

more  ? 
We  have  another.     We  have  some 

more 
y"o  other  horse  ....  horses  ($  26). 

I  have  no  other  horse. 

I  have  no  other. 

Havo  they  other  horses? 

They  have  others. 

We  have  r.D  others  ($  28). 

The  arm.  The  foot. 

The  heart.  The  month. 

The  work.  The  volume. 

[  have  but  a  few  dollars. 

You.  have  but  a  few  (of  them). 

We  have  but  a  few  volumes. 

They  have  but  a  few. 

He  has  but  a  few. 


Un  b.llet  d'un  dollar.    Deux  dollars, 
Un  biiiet  de  trois,  de  cinq  ou  de  dix 

dollars. — Un  de  deux  dollars. 
Autre.     Un  autre.     D'autros  (§  26). 
Un  autre  dollar.       D'autres  dollars. 
Avons-nous  un  autre  franc  ? 
Avons-nous  d'autres  francs  ? 

Nous  en  avons  un  autre  (d  autres). 

Ne pas  d'autiv  ckjval — d'auiret 

chevaux. 

Je  n'ai  pas  d'  autie  cheval. 
Je  n'en  ai  pas  d'autre. 
Ont-ils  d'autres  chevaux  ? 
Us  en  ont  d'autres. 
Nous  n'en  avons  pas  d'autres. 
Le  bras.  I/e  pied. 

Le  cceur.  Le  mois. 

L'ouvrage.  Le  volume. 

Je  n'ai  que  quelques  dollars. 
Vous  n'en  avez  que  quelques  uns. 
Nous  n' avons  que  quelques  volumes. 
Us  n'en  ont  que  quelques  uns. 
II  n'en  a  que  quelques  uns. 


FOURTEENTH  EXERCISE.  1st  Sec. — QUATOKZIEME  EXERCICE,  Ire  Sec. 

Have  you  many  knives?  I  have  a  few. — Have  you  many  pen- 
cils? I  have  only  a  few. — Has  the  painter's  friend  many  looking* 
glasses?  He  has  only  a  few. — Have  your  boys  a  few  sous?  They 
have  a  few. — Have  we  not  a  few  francs?  Yes;  we  have.  (Dir.  1.) — 
How  many  francs  have  we?  We  have  ten. — Have  we  but  ten? 
We  have  but  ten. — How  many  dollars  has  the  Spaniard?  He  hag 
not  many,  he  has  only  five. — How  many  half  dollars  has  he  ?  Ho 
has  ten. — Who  has  a  ten  dollar  note?  I  have  a  five  dollar  note; 
little  John  has  a  three  dollar  one ;  the  clerks  have  two  two  dollai 
notes ;  the  doctor  has  one  of  a  dollar :  but  nobody  has  a  ten  dollar 
one. — Who  has  the  beautiful  glasses  of  the  Italians?  We  havu 
them. — Have  the  English  many  ships  ?  They  have. — Has  the  milk- 
man many  horses  ?  No,  he  has  but  two. — What  have  the  Germans  1 
They  have  many  dollars. — How  many  have  they  ?  They  have 
eleven.- -Havo  we  the  iournals  of  the  English  or  those  of  thr  GOP 


70 


FOURTEENTH    LESSON. 


ose 
iey 

«lf 


mans?  We  have  those  of  the  former,  but  not  of  the  latter. — Huva 
we  the  satin  parasols  of  the  Spaniards?  We  have  them  not,  but 
the  Americans  have. — Has  the  butter  man  much  fresh  butter  ?  He 
has  only  a  little,  but  enough. — Have  the  sailors  the  cotton  mattresses 
that  we  have  ?  They  have  not  those  which  we  have,  but  those 
which  their  captains  have. — Has  the  Frenchman  many  francs? 
has  only  a  few,  but  he  has  enough. — Has  your  servant  sous  enough 
He  has  only  a  few,  but  he  has  dollars  enough. 

Have  the  Russians  dollars,  half  dollars,  francs,  and  so  .is  ?  No,  the; 
have  none. — Who  has  any  ?    The  Americans  have  dollars  and  half 
dollars,  and  the  French  have  francs  and  sous. — Have  you  a  ten  dollar 
bill  in.  your  pocket-book?    No,  but  I  have  two  five  dollar  ores,  am 
a  few  of  one  and  two  dollars. — How  many  feet  have  men  ?     The; 
have  two. — How  many  has  that  one  ?    He  has  but  one. — How  man 
has  that  other  one?    Which  one?    The  big  or  the  tall  one  ?    T! 
big  one.     He  has  two. — How  many  feet  have  horses,  oxen,  bi 
and  chickens?  (§  15.)    Horses  and  oxen  have  four  feet,  but  birds 
cUckens  have  but  twro. 

N.  B. — Let  the  pupil  try  to  compose  a  French  exercise  on  the  words  01 
daily  salutations,  as  none  is  given  here. 


VOCABULARY.   2d  Section. 
What  day  of*  the  month  is  it  ? 
What  day  of  the  month  have  \ve  ? 
It  is  the  first.  The  second. 

We  have  the  first.     The  second. 
It  is  not  the  third ;    it  is  but   the 
second. 


VCCABULAIRE.  2de  Section. 
Quel  jour  du  mois  est-ce  ? 
Queljour  du  mois  avons-nous? 
C'est  le  premier.  C'est  le  deux- 
Nous  avons  le  premier.  Le  deux. 
Ce  n'est  pas  le  trois  ;  ce  n'est  que  1 

deux. 


except : 


Obs.  32.  The  cardinal  numhers  are  used  in  French  for  dates,  though  th 

le  premier,  for  the  first  of  every  mont] 

C'est  leonze  (not  Tonze). 
Nous  avons  le  onze. 
N'est-ce  pas  le  douze  ? 
N'avons-nous  pas  le  douze  ? 


ordinal  be  used  in  English 

It  is  the  eleventh. 
We  have  the  eleventh. 
It  it  not  the  twelfth  ? 
Have  we  not  the  twelfth  ? 

Obs .  33.  The  ordinal  numbers  are  formed  of  the  cardinal  by  adding  time, 
(and  when  they  end  in  e,  this  is  dropped.)  Premier  and  second  are  irregular 
and  used  for  first  and  second,  but  not  in  compound  numbers,  such  as  :  twenty 
first,  twenty-second  ;  which  are  not :  vingt-premier,  vingt-second  ;  but  vingt 
et  unieme,  vingt -deuxieme. 

Quel  volume  avez-vous  ? 

J'ai  le  onzieme — le  trente  ei  uniemf 

Singulier.  Pluriel. 

Le  premier.  Les  premiers. 

Le  deuxieme,  le    Lesdeuxiemes, 


Which  volume  have  you  ? 

I  have  the  eleventh — the  thirty-first. 


One, 
Two, 


un. 
deux. 


The  first. 
The  second. 


second. 


seconds. 


FOURTEENTH     LESSON. 


Thre;},  trois, 
Four,  quatre. 
Five,  cinq. 
Nine,  neuf. 
Eleven,  onze. 
Twenty,  ving'. 


The  third. 
The  fourth. 
The  fifth. 
The  ninth. 
The  eleventh 
The  twenty-hrst. 

The  twenty-second. 


Tiiiiiy,  trente,     The  thirty-first, 
ffundred,  cent.     The    hundred    and 

first. 

The  last. 
These  last  exercises.     His  last  dollar. 


Le  troisieme.  Les  trc'lsiemes. 

Le  quatrieme.  Les  quatriemea 

Le  cinquieme,  Les  cinquiemes. 

Le  neuvieme.  Les  neuviemes. 

Le  onzieme.  Les  onziemes. 

Le  vingt  et  imi-  Les  vingt  et  uni- 

erne.  ernes. 

Le    vingt-deux-  Les      vingt-deox* 

ieme.  iemes. 

Le  \rente  et  unierne.  * 

Le  cent-uniume.  Les  cent-unicme*. 

Le  dernier.  Les  derniers. 

Ces  derniers  exercices.    Son  dernier 

dollar. 

Notre  dernier  papier  ou  journal. 
Le  premier  et  le  dernier  jour  du  mois. 
C'est  bon.  Ce  n'est  pas  bon. 

Est-ce  son  cahier  ? 
C'est  le  sien. 

Let  the  pupil  try  to  compose 


Monday,  April  fourteenth,  1849. 


Our  last  paper  or  journal. 
The  first  and  last  day  of  the  month. 
That  is  right.          That's  not  right. 
[3  this,  is  that,  or  is  it  his  copy-book  ? 
It  is,  this  is,  that  is  his. 

N.  B. — No  French  exercise  is  given  here, 
one  on  the  wordai&f  daily  salutations. 

FOURTEENTH  EXERCISE.  2d  Sec. — QUATORZIEME  EXERCICE,  2de  Sec. 

Lundi,  quatorze  Avril,  mil  huit  cent 

quarante-neuf. 

How  many  exercises  have  we,  to-day  ?  We  have  but  one. — Have 
we  but  one  ?  No,  we  have  but  one. — What  day  of  the  month  is  it  ? 
it  is  the  fourteenth. — Is  it  the  fourteenth,  indeed?  Yes,  it  is  (the 
14th). — Have  you  the  paper  of  to-day  ?  To-day's  paper?  No;  but 
the  clerk  has  it. — Has  he  but  one  ?  No,  he  has  three. — Is  this  the 
last  journal  ?  Yes,  it  is. — Is  not  to-day  the  fourteenth  ?  No,  u  m 
only  the  thirteenth. — Indeed  !  yes,  indeed !  That's  right.  That's 
very  well. — How  many  stockings  has  the  merchant?  He  has  bur 
few  ;  -but  he  has  many  shawls,  gloves  and  ribbons. — Have  you  any 
other  biscuits?  I  have  no  other. — How  many  servants  has  that  gen- 
tleman? He  has  but  three ;  but  these  foreigners  have  five. — Has 
the  general  much  merit  ?  He  has. — Has  W.  Irving's  last  work  much 
merit  ?  Yes,  it  has. — How  many  arms  has  this  man.  ?  He  has  one.— 
How  many  feet  has  the  captain?  He  has  but  one. — How  many  has 

1  Let  the  learner  write  the  date,  before  his  task.  Ex.  L;indi,  seizo 
A.vril,  mil  huit  cent  quarante-neuf.  Monday,  April  16th,  1849, 

Days  of  the  week — Jours  de  la  Semaine — Sunday,  Dimanche  ;  Monday, 
Lundi;  Tuesday,  Mardi ;  Wednesday,  Mercredi ;  Thursday,  Jeadi;  Fri 
f*y,  Vendredi ;  Saturday,  Samedi. 

For  the  names  of  the  months,  ($  143.) 


FIFTEENTH    LESSON. 


! 

nd 


the  general?  He  has  two. — What  heart  has  your  boy  ?  He  has  i 
good  heart. — Have  you  no  other  servant  ?  Yes,  I  have  another. — • 
Has  your  friend  no  other  birds  ?  Yes,  he  has.— How  in:my  ? 
has  six  others. — Have  the  Spaniards  and  Italians  many  trues  in  theii 
gardens?  No,  they  have  but  few 5  but  the  lawyer  of  merit  has  j 
great  many  in  his. 

Which  volume  have  you  ?  I  have  the  first. — Have  you  the  second 
volume  of  my  work?  I  have  it. — Have  you  the  third  or  fourth 
exercise?  I  have  neither  fhe  former  nor  the  latter. — Have  the 
boys  the  fifth  or  sixth  volume?  They  have  the  fifth,  4nit  we 
have  the  sixth.— Which  volume  has  your  friend?  He  has  the 
twenty-first. — Is  not  to-day  the  eleventh  of  this  month  ?  The  eleventh 
of  the  month?  No.  It  is  the  twelfth.  The  twelfth!  indeed!— Ha 
the  youth  much  money  ?  No.  but  he  has  our  gold^. — Who  has  cou 
rage  ?  The  baker's  little  friend. — Have  we  the  nails  and  hammer: 
of  the  joiner,  or  those  of  the  carpenter?  We  have  neither  those  of 
the  joiner  .nor  of  the  carpenter,  but  those  of  the  grocer. — Is  this 
your  copy-book?  Yes,  it  is  mine. — Is  not  this  Miss  Anne's  velvet  bon- 
net ?  Yes,  it  is  hers. — Has  your  clerk  or  mine  got  the  good  two  dollar 
note?  Mine  has  it  not. — What  has  he?  He  has* the  five  dollar 
one. — Has  the  minister  this  or  that  work  ?  He  has  but  that  one. — 
Who  has  the  other?  Nobody  has  it.  It  has  no  merit. — Whom  have 
we  to-day  ?  We  have  our  )roung  friends  and  those  of  the  farmer. — 
Have  the  Russians  (les  Russes)  pepper  ?  They  have  but  little  pep- 
per, but  a  good  deal  of  salt. — Have  the  Turks  much  wine  ?  They 
have  not  much  wine,  but  a  good  deal  of  coffee. — W^ho  has  a  good 
deal  of  milk  ?  The  Germans  have  a  good  deal. — Have  you  no 
other  gun  ?  I  have  no  other. — Have  we  any  other  cheese  ?  We  j 
have  some  other. — Have  I  no  other  pistol  ?  You  have  another. 


FIFTEENTH  LESSON,  15th 
VOCABULARY.    1st  Section. 
The  tome  (volume).     The  last  tome. 
Have  you  the  first  or  second  tome  of 

my  work  ? 

Both,  or  both  the  one  and  the  other. 
L  have  both. 

Have  you  their  gold  or  silver  ? 
I  have  neither  (the  one  nor  the  c  ther). 
The  one  and  the  other,  (plural.) 
Hos>  your  brother  my  glq^g&pr  his  ? 
fie  has  (bo'h)  yoim  and 


.. — Quinzieme  Lcgorij  lome. 

VOCABULAIRE.  Ire  Section. 
Le  tome.  Le  dernier  tome. 

Avez-vous  le  premier  ou  le  deuxicme 

tome  de  mon  ouvrage  ? 
L'un  et  1'autre. 
J'ai  1'unet  1'autre. 
Avez-vous  leur  or  ou  leur  argent  ? 
Je  n'ai  ni  1'un  ni  1'autre. 
Les  uns  et  les  autres. 
Votre  frere  a-t-il  mes  gants  ou  les 

siens  ?      II  a  les  uns  ct  les  autree 


FIFTEENTH     LESSON. 


Has  he  theirs  or  those  of  the  clerks  ? 
He  has  neither.  (Mind  Dir.  1.) 
Have  they  neither  ?  (sing.) 
Have  they  neither  ?  (plur.) 
They  have  the  one,  but  not  the  other. 
The  Scotchman.        The  Dutchman. 
The  Irishman.  The  Swiss. 

Still,  yet,  some,  or  anymore,  more. 
Any  more  satin.     Some  more  steel. 
Yut  eome  dollars.   A  few  more  francs. 

ilave  you  any  more  cloth  ? 

I  have  still  some  cloth.    I  have  more. 

Has  IK)  any  more  steel  ?    He  has. 

Have  I  yet  many  things  ? 

You  have  still  many  (many  more). 

Have  the  Dutch  any  more  pepper  ? 


A-t-il  les  leurs  ou  ceux  des  commie  f 
II  n'a  ni  les  uns  ni  les  autres. 
N'ont-ils  ni  Tun  ni  1'autre  ? 
N'ont-ils  ni  les  uns  ni  les  autres? 
Us  ont  Tun  mais  non  pas  1'autre. 
L'6cossais.  Le  Hollandaia, 

LTrlandais.  Le  Suisse. 

Encore  (affirm atif ). 
Encore  du  satin.    Encore  de  1'acier. 
Encore  des  dollars.  Encore  queiqucs  . 

francs. 

Avez-vous  encore  du  Irap  ? 
J'ai  encore  du  drap.     J'en  ai  encore. 
A-t-il  encore  oe   1'acier?    II  tn  a 

encore. 

Ai-je  encore  beaucoup  de  choses  ? 
Vous  en  avez  encore  beaucoup. 
Les  Hollandais  ont-ils  encore  du  poi- 

vre  ? 

Us  n'en  ont  pas  ;  mais  nous  en  avona. 
Avez-vous  encore  assez  de  vinaigre 

et  de  sucre  ? 
Nous  avons  assez  de  1'un ;  mais  pas 

assez  de  1'autre. 


They  have  not,  but  we  have. 
Have    you    yet  vinegar   and   sugar 

enough  ? 
We  have  enough  of  the  one,  but  not 

enough  of  the  other. 

N.  B. — Let  the  pupil  compose  a  French  Exerciee. 
FIFTEENTH  EXERCISE.  1st  Sec. — QUINZIEME  EXERCICE.  Ire  Sec. 

Tuesday,  April ....  1849.  Write  the  date  fully  in  French. 
Which  exercises  have  these  gentlemen  to-day  ?  We  have  two. — 
Which?  The  fourteenth  and  fifteenth. — Have  you  many  words'? 
No,  not  many. — Which  volume  of  Cuvier's  great  works  has  your 
brother?  He  has  the  last. — Has  he  not  the  seventh,  also?  He  has 
it. — Ho^r  many  tomes  has  that  work1?  It  has  ten.  (Dir.  1.) — 
ou  my  work  Q:  rny  friend's  ?  I  have  both. — Has  the  foreigner 
ib  or  your  knife  ?  He  has  both. — Have  the  Dutch  the  fresh 
or  cheese  ?  They  have  neither  the  one  nor  the  other. — Have 
[.your  penknife  or  my  friend's  *  You  have  neither. — Who  has  them  ? 
[  have. — Has  the  Dutchman  my  glass  or  that  of  this  scholar?  He 
aas  neither.  (Dir  1.) — Has  the  Irishman  our  horses  or  chests'?  He 
has  both. — What  have  those  Irishmen  ?  They  have  some  one  dol- 
lar notes. — Has  the  Scotchman  our  leather  shoes  or  cotton  stockings? 
Utt'has  neither. — What  has  he  ?  He  has  the  iron  guns  of  the  Swiss. 
—What  has  the  Swiss  got  ?  He  has  the  Scotchman's  stick.-— Have 
ths  Dutch  our  ships  or  those  of  the  Spaniards?  They  have  neither. 
•-  Which  ships  have  they  ?  They  have  theti^n. 

Has  OUT  grocer  any  more  pepper  ?     He  hlflwie  more. — Has  the 
7 


FIFTEENTH     LESSOR. 


lawyers  clerk  any  more  half  dollars'?  He  has  some  more.  He 
yet  four  or  five. — Has  he  any  more  jewels'?  He  has  no  jewels.- 
Is  the  Swiss  warm  and  hungry  ?  No,  he  is  neither  warm  nor  hun- 
gry; but  the  Irishman  is  dry  and  sleepy. — Who  is  ashamed?  No 
one  is  ashamed,  but  the  minister  is  afraid  of  our  big  dog. — Is  not 
the  Scotchman  right'?  Yes,  he  is,  and  the  Russian  too. — Are  not 
the  doctor  and  the  apothecary  wrong  ?  No,  +hey  are  not  wrong. — 
Have  the  Irish  anything  old  ?  They  have. — Who  has  something 
ugly?  No  one  has. — Have  the  Americans  anymore  salt?  They 
have,  and  some  fresh  butter,  too. — Have"  the  painters  anything  pretty* 
No,  to-day  they  have  nothing. — Have  they  not  one  pretty  fan  ?  Oh, 
yes!  They  have  still  one. — How  many  lawyers  have  you?  We 
have  a  great  many;  we  have  also  many  (Dir.  7)  physicians,  minis- 
ters, grocers,  gentlemen,  apothecaries,  and  merchants. — Has  the 
youth  Miss  Anne's  shawl?  He  has,  and  he  has  also  her  velvet 
bonnet  ($  32),  her  gold  pencil-case,  satin  bag,  handkerchief,  and 
jewels.  That's  right. — Is  this  the  last  journal  ?  No,  it  is  that  of  tho 
eleventh.  Very  well. 


VOCABULARY.    2d  Section. 


VOCABULAIRB.    2de  Section. 


Obs.  34.  More,  affirmative,  is  encore.     But  with  a  negation,  use,  for  : 
Not  any  more,  no  more.     No  lojiger  (  Ne . .  .plus  de,  (avec  un  nom.) 
any — no  longer  any  more.  \  N'en. . .  .plus,  (sans  le  nom.) 


I  have  no  more  fire,  and  he  has  r>o 

more. 

He  has  no  more  rice.  He  has  no  more. 
Have  we  any  more  fresh  butter  ? 
I  have  no  more  (no  longer  any). 
We  have  no  more  (no  longer  any). 
Has  the  wine   merchant  any  mo»*e 

vinegar  ?  No,  he  has  no  longer  any. 
We  h^ve  no  more  of  that  good  coffee. 
Have  the  grocers  no  more  of  it  ? 
They  have  no  more.    I  have  no  more. 
Have  they  no  more  gold  nor  silver? 
Yes,  they  have  a  little  more. 

Not  much  more,  not  many  more. 

Have  you  much  more  velvet  ?  (Dir.  7.) 
I  have  not  much  more. 

lias  the  boy  many  more  toys  ?  He 
has  not  many  more. 

One  more  inkstand.  No  more  ink- 
stand. 

A  fcw  words.     No  more  words. 

Obe.  35.  I'lus  d'enc, 


Je  n'ai  plus  de  feu,  et  il  n'en  a  plu 

II  n'a  plus  de  riz.     II  n'en  a  plus. 

Avons-nous  encore  du  beurre  frais 

Je  n'en  ai  plus. 

Nous  n'en  avons  plus. 

Le  marchand  de  vin  a-t-il  encore  < 
vinaigre  ?     Non,  il  n'en  a  plus. 

Nous  n'avons  plus  de  ce  bon.cafe\ 

Les  epiciers  n'en  ont-ils  plusf 

Us  n'en.  ont  plus.     Je  n'en  ai  f 

N 'ont-ils  plus  ni  or  ni  argent  ? 

Si  fait,  ils  en  ont  encore  un  peu. 
(  Ne . . .  plus  guere  de,  (avec  un  nom,) 
(  N'e?i . . .  .plus  guere,  (sans  nom.) 

Avez-vous  encore  beaucoup  de  ve- 
lours ?    Je  n'en  ai  plus  guere. 

Le  garden  a-t-il  encore  beaucoup  de 
joujoux  ?    II  n'en  a  plus  guere. 

Encore  un  encrier.     Plus  d'encrier 


I  Encore  quelques  mots.  Plus  de  mots 
Plus  de  mots,  which  seem  to  pignifj  :  more  tni 


FIFTEENTH     LESSON.  75 

9land — more  words,  is,  however,  in  French,  0  negainj  expression.  As  me 
verb:  /  have.,  he  has,  &,c.,  is  understood,  &o  is  the  we,  which  precedes  it. 
tt  171,  II.  8.) 


One  more  cabbage.     A  few  m 

Have  you  a  few  more  dollars  ? 

I  have  (a  few  more). 

Have  I  still  too  many  sous  ? 

You  have  not  too  many,  but  enough. 


Encore  un  ciiou.     Encore  quelquea 


uns. 


How  much  more  gold  has  he  ?  |   Combien  d'or  a-t-il  encore  ? 


Avez-vous  encore  quelques  dollara  \ 
J'en  ai  encore  (quelques  uns). 
Ai-je  encore  trop  de  sous  ? 
Vous  n'en  avez  pas  trop,  mais  asse?. 


He  has  a  little  more  (yet  a  little). 
How  much  or  how  many  more  has  he? 
The  last.     The  last  two,  three. 

The  general's  stick  and  gloves.  (§  32, 


II  en  a  encore  un  peu. 

Combien  en  a-t-il  encore  ? 

Le  dernier.    Les  deux,  lee  trols  dej> 


niers. 


Le  baton  du  general  et  ses  gants. 


N.  3.) 

FIFTEENTH  EXERCISE.  2d  Sec. — QUINZIEME  EXERCICE.  2de  Sec. 
Wednesday,  April 1849.        Mercredi, Avril,  1849. 

Have  you  one  more  exercise,  Messrs.?  We  have  two  more.— 
Which?  The  last  two. — Has  our  cook  much  more  fresh  beef?  He 
has  not  much  more. — Has  he  many  more  chickens?  He  lias  not. — 
Has  the  farmer  much  more  milk?  He  has  not  much  more  milk  ; 
but  he  has  a  great  deal  more  butter. — Have  the  French  many  more 
horses?  They  have  not  many  more. — Has  our  friend  one  more 
umbrella  ?  He  has  no  more. — Has  the  tailor  no  more  buttons  ?  He 
has  no  more. — Has  our  carpenter  no  more  nails?  He  has  no  more 
nails;  but  he  has  a  little  more  wood. — Has  this  cook  no  more  fire? 
Yes,  he  has  a  little  more. — Have  those  Spaniards  a  few  more  half 
dollars?  They  have  a  few  more. — Have  you  a  few  more  francs'? 
We  have  no  more  francs ;  but  some  more  dollars. — Have  the  Swiss 
Btill  vinegar  enough  ?  They  have  theirs  and  mine. — Have  they  ? 
(Dir.  1.)  Yes,  they  have. — Have  we  any  of  the  grocer's  sugar? 
No,  we  have  no  more.— Has  the  joiner  wood  enough?  He  has 
enough. — Has  he  the  stranger's  wood?  He  has  it  not. — Has  he  his 
iron  and  wooden  hammers  ?  He  has  them  not. — Have  the  sailors 
got  their  rice  (§  32),  biscuits,  beef,  bread,  and  wine?  They  have 
them ;  but  they  have  neither  fresh  butter  nor  cheese. 

How  many  ships  has  the  little  Russian  ?  These  two. — Has  he  no 
more  ?  No,  he  has  but  two. — Is  this  to-day's  paper  ?  No,  it  is  not.— 
Which  journals  has  the  lawyer?  He  has  the  last  three. — What  day 
01  tho  month  is  it?  It  is 'the  sixth. — How  many  friends  have  you? 
I  have  but  one  good  friend. — Has  the  farmer's  horse  too  much  grain  ? 
Ke  has  not  enough. — Has  he  not  much  money  ?  Yes,  he  has  a  great 
ino].~ Has  he  much  iron?  He  ha«  still  mi73h. — Have  we  the  cotton 


7G 


SIXTEENTH     LESSON. 


or  thread  stockings  of  the  Americans  ?  We  have  npither  their  thread 
nor  cotton  stockings. — Is  John  cold,  in  the  garden  ?  No,  he  is  not. — » 
Are  you  very  thirsty  ?  I  am  thirsty  enough. — Is  the  Irishman  too 
(trop)  warm?  Too  warm?  No;  indeed,  he  is  not  too  warm. — Who 
is  too  warm  ?  Nobody  is  too  warm  •  but  I  am  too  hungry  and 
sleepy, — What  ails  your  young  dog?  Nothing  ails  him. — What  ail? 
those  Dutchmen?  They  are  afraid  of  the  fanner's  oxen  and  dog 
($  32;N.  3.) — Who  has  my  friend's  book  and  dictionary?  I  have 
them  not;  but  we  have  Edward's  (Edouard)  penknife,  copy-book, 
and  pencil. 


SIXTEENTH  LESSON,  16th.— Seizieme  Legon,  16me. 


VOCABULARY.    1st  Section. 


Several  (of  them}. 

Several  men.  Several  children. 

Several    copy-books     and    pencils. 

(Dir.  2.) 

The  father.  This  child. 

A  soil  ...  A  caJie.     Tea. 
Has  this  gentleman  several  sons  ? 
He  has  several. 
As  much,  as  many. 
As  much  ...  as,  as  many  ...  as. 

As  much  soap  as  sugar. 

As  many  men  as  children. 

Have  you  as  much  gold  as  silver  ? 

I  have  as  much  of  this  as  of  that. 

I  have  as  much  of  the  one  as  of  the 

other. 

Has  he  as  many  shoes  as  stockings  ? 
Me  has  as  many  of  these  as  of  those  — 

as  many  of  the  one  as  of  the  other. 
Quite  (or  just)  as  much,  as  many. 
Quite  as  much  .  .  .  as,  as  many  ...  as. 

Have  I  quite  as  much  velvet  as  satin  ? 

You.  have  (quite  or  just  as  much). 

Quite  or  just  as  much  (of  it). 

They  have  just  as  much  of  this  as  of 

that. 
fngt  93  many  of  ihesc  as  of  those. 


VOCABULAIRE.    Ire  Section. 
Plusieurs,  (no  de  before  the  noun.) 
En  .  .  .  plusieurs. 

Plusieurs  hommes.  Plusieurs  enfanta 
Pluaiours  cahiers  et  plusieurs  cray- 

ons. 

Le  pere.  Get  enfant. 

Unfils.         Un  gateau.        Du  the. 
Ce  Monsieur  a-t-il  plusieurs  tils  ? 
Ji  en  a  pkisieurs. 
Autant  de,  (avant  un  nom.) 
Autant  de  . . .  que  de  . . .  (avant  les 

noms.) 

Autant  de  savon  que  de  sucre, 
Autant  d'hommes  que  d'enfants. 
Avez-vous  autant  d'or  que  d'argent  ? 
J'ai  autant  de  celui-ci  que  de  celui-la 
J'ai  autant  de  1'un  que  de  1'autre. 

A-t-il  autant  de  souliers  que  de  bas  ? 
II  a  autant  de  ceux-ci  que  de  ceux-la. 
— autant  des  uns  que  des  autres. 
Tout  autant  de . . .  (avant  un  nom.; 
Tout  autant   de  . . .  que  de  (av.  lea 

noms). 
Ai-je  tout  autant  de  velours  que  do 

satin  ? 

Yous  en  avez  tout  autant. 
En  . .  t  tout  autant. 
Us  ont  tout  autant  ce  celui-ci  que  da 

celui-la. 
Tout    autant    de    ceux-ci    que    d« 

ceux-la. 


SIXTEENTH     LESSON. 


Quite  as  much  of  the  one  as  of  the 

other. 

£uite  as  many  of  the  one  as  the  other. 
Quite  as  much  of  the  grocer's  coflee 

as  sugar.  ($  32,  N.  3.) 


Tout  autant  de  Tun  v/ue  de  Paulre. 

Tout  autant  des  uns  que  des  autres. 
Tout  autant  du  cafe  de  1'epicier  que 
de  son  sucre. 


SIXTEENTH  EXERCISE,  1st  Sec. — SEIZIEME  EXERCICE.  Ire  Sec. 
Thursday,  April 1849.  Jeudi, April,  1S49. 

How  many  exercises  have  we,  to-day?  We  have  but  one.— 
Which  is  it  ?  It  is  this.  That's  right. — What  have  yea  ?  I  have 
several  horses. — Has  he  several  coats  ?  He  has  only  one. — Who 
has  several  looking-glasses'?  My  ^brother's  painter  has.  (Dir.  1.) — 
What  looking-glasses  has  he  ?  He  has  pretty  ones. — Who  has  our 
good  cakes  ?  Several  boys  have  them. — Is  this  your  friend's  child  ? 
Yes,  it  is  (his  child). — Has  he  several  children  ?  Yes,  he  has.— Is 
not  this  his  son  ?  No,  it  is  not  (his  son). — Have  you  as  much  coffee 
as  tea  ?  I  have. — Has  this  stranger  a  son  ?  He  has  several.— -How 
many  sons  has  he  ?  He  has  four. — How  many  children  have  the 
minister  and  the  physician  ?  Have  they  as  many,  the  one  as  ths 
other  ?  No  ;  the  first  has  four,  and  the  last  six. — Indeed !  Yes, 
indeed.  That  is  a  great  many. — Have  we  as  much  old  cheese  as 
fresh  butter  ?  You  have  as  much  of  the  one  as  of  the  other. — Have 
we  as  many  shoes  as  stockings?  We  have.  (Dir.  1.) — Have  I  as 
much  good  as  bad  paper?  You  have. — How  many  small  pistols 
have  the  Swiss  ?•  They  have  as  many  small  ones  as  large  ones. — 
Have  you  as  much  of  your  wine  as  of  mine?  I  have. 

Has  the  ugly  cook  as  much  fresh  butter  as  beef?  He  has  not 
(as  much  of  the  one  as  of  the  other).  Has  the  carpenter  as  many 
sticks  as  nails?  He  has  just  as  many  of  these  as  of  those. — What 
has  the  hatter  ?  He  has  velvet  and  satin  hats. — Has  he  not  as  many 
of  the  one  as  of  the  other  ?  Yes,  he  has  just  as  many. — Who  has 
my  books,  his  pencils,  your  copy-books,  Robert's  inkstand  and  pen- 
knife (§  32,  N.  3),  and  many  other  things  ?  The  little  scholar  has. — 
Have  you  as  many  biscuits  as  cakes?  I  have  not  as  many  of  these 
as  of  those. — Have  the  Dutch  as  many  horses  as  the  Germans  ?  No, 
they  have  not  as  many. — What  has  the  Irishman  ?  He  has  anothel 
note. — Has  your  son  one  more  pocket-book?  He  has  several  more. 
— Have  you  much  money?  We  have  only  a  little  money;  but 
enough  bread,  beef  (repeat  the  prep.  bef.  every  noun),  fresh  butter, 
cheese,  and  old  wine. — Has  this  boy  as  much  courage  as  our  neigh 
bors  son  ?  He  has  just  as  much. — Has  the  youth  many  notes  ?  He 
has. — Has  the  merchant  cloth  and  velvet?  (§25.)  He  has  cloth, 
but  no  more  velvet.  (Obs.  35.) — Have  the  boys  your  farmer's  ox 
and  horse  ?  They  have  that  one,  but  not  this. 


SIXTEENTH     LESSON. 


VOCABULARY.    2d  Section. 
An  enemy,  enemies. 
The  finger.  r?he  thumb,  inch, 

More,  (a  comparative  adverb.) 
More  bread,        More  men. 
Than. 

More  bread  than  wine. 
More  knives  than  sticks. 
More  of  this  than  of  that. 
More  of  the  one  than  of  the  other. 
More  of  these  than  of  those. 
More  of  the  ones  than  of  the  others. 
I  have  more  of  your  su^ar  than  of 

mine. 

He  has  more  of  our  books  than  of  his. 
Less,  fewer,  not  so  much  or  many. 
Less  satin  than  velvet  (not  so  much . .). 
Fewer  penknives  than  pencils. 


VOCABULAIRE.   2dc  SeclicQ, 
Un  ennemi,  des  ennemis. 
Le  doigt.  Le  pouce. 

Plus  de,  (avant  un  nom.) 
Plus  de  pain.        Plus  d' homines 
Que  de,  (avant  un  nom.) 
Pius  de  pain  que  de  vin. 
Plus  de  couteaux  que  de  batons. 
Plus  de  celui-ci  que  de  celui-la. 
Plus  de  1'un  que  de  1'autre. 
Plus  de  ceux-ci  que  de  ceux-ia, 
Plus  des  uns  que  des  autres. 
J'ai  plus  de  votre  sucre  que  du  mien 

II  a  plus  de  nos  livres  que  des  sicna 
Moins  de,  (avant  un  nom.) 
Moins  de  satin  que  de  velours. 


Fewer  penknives  than  pencils.  >         . 

Not  so  many  penknives  as  pencils.     {  Moms  de  camfs  ^ue  de  crayons. 


Less  than,  more  than,  (bef.  a  number.) 
I  have  more  than  three  dollars. 
He.  has  not  more  than  five  francs. 
They  have  not  less  than  te~. 
More  than  I,  (bef.  a  pronoun.) 
More  than  he.        More  than  we. 
Less  than  you.       Less  than  they. 
They.  Than  they. 

4s  much  as  you.  Just  as  many  as  he. 
As  much  as  I.  Quite  as  many  as  they. 
So  much,  so  many.  So  much  as  that. 
Not  so  much.  Not  so  many  as  that. 
They  have  six  servants. 
Have  they  so  many  ?  No,  they  have 

not  so  many  as  that.     They  have 

but  four. 


Moins  de,  plus  de,  (av.  un  nombre.) 
J'ai  plus  de  trois  dollars. 
II  n'a  pas  plus  de  cinq  francs. 
Us  n'en  ont  pas  moins  de  dix. 
Plus  que  moi,  (avant  un  pronom.)1 
Plus  que  lui.          Plus  que  nous. 
Moins  que  vous.    Moins  qu'eux. 
Eux.  Qu' eux. 

Autant  que  vous.  Tout  autant  que  lui. 
Autant  que  moi.  Tout  autant  qu'eux, 
Tant  de.  Tant  que  cela. 

Pas  tant.  Pas  tant  que  cela. 

Us  ont  six  domestiques. 
En  ont-ils  tant  ?     Non,  ils  n'en  onl 
pas  tant  que  cela.    Ils  n'en  ont  quo 


quatre. 
SIXTEENTH  EXERCISE.  2d  Sec. — SEIZI^ME  EXERCICE.  2de  Sec. 

Friday,  April 1849.  Vendredi, Avril,  1849. 

Have  you  three  exercises  to-day,  Mr.  Charles  ?  No,  Miss,  I  have 
not  so  many. — How  many  have  you  1  I  have  got  but  two. — We 
have  as  many  as  you ;  but  those  young  scholars  have  more  than 
we. — Have  they  five  or  six?  No;  they  have  not  so  many*  they 

TAre  used  in  French  as  no-">| 

minative  cases,  when  the          . 
1^01,  I,  instead  of:  Je.l    yerb  ig    understood    or  \Lui,  ho,  instead  of   il 

Toi,thcu,     "          tu,j   separated  from  the  pro-  \Euxt  they,    '         i!a 
I  noun.  (*  38.)  J 


SEVENTEENTH     LESSON.  V9 

have  only  four.  Four  ?  That's  a  great  deal. — Has  this  lawyer  more 
friends  than  enemies  ?  He  has  more  enemies  than  friends. — Has 
the  farmer  as  many  sheep  (moutons)  as  oxen  ?  He  has  just  as 
many. — Have  you  as  many  small  guns  as  I  ?  I  have  just  as  many.— 
Has  the  ugly  foreigner  as  much  courage  as  \ve  ?  He  has  less  than 
we. — Have  our  neighbors  as  much  fresh  butter  as  cheese  ?  They 
have  more  of  the  latter  than  of  the  former. — Have  not  your  sons 
as  many  books  as  copy-books  ?  They  have  not  so  many  of  these 
as  of  those;  they  have  fewer  of  the  latter  than  of  the  former. — 
How  many  noses  has  that  stranger?  That  small  man ?  Yes.  He 
has  but  one. — How  many  ringers  has  he  ?  He  has  several. — Has  he 
ten  ?  No,  he  has  not  so  many. — Has  he  not  so  many?  No,  he  has 
less  than  ten. — How  many  has  he  ?  He  has  but  eight  fingers  and 
two  thumbs. — How  many  thumbs  and  fingers  has  you  young  scholar? 
He  ?  (mind  the  last  note.)  (Lui  ?)  Yes,  he.  He  has  not  more  than 
seven  fingers  and  one  thumb. — And  I7  how  many  have  I?  You 
have  just  as  many  as  we  (nous). — Very  well. 

Has  the  minister  more  children  than  the  lawyer?  The  minister 
has  more  than  lie,  but  he.  the  lawyer,  has  more  than  they  and  we. — 
How  many  pistols  have  you?  I  have  only  one;  but  my  father  has 
more  than  I  and  they.  He  has  five. — Has  he  so  many,  indeed? 
Yes,  he  has  just  as  many. — John,  have  you  more  than  seven  dollars  ? 
No,  I  have  less  than  that.  I  have  not  so  many. — Have  my  children 
as  much  courage  as  yours?  Yours  have  more  than  mine. — Have  I 
as  much  money  as  you?  You  have  less  than  I,  but  more  than  he. — 
Have  you  as  many  books  as  I  ?  I  have  fewer  than  you.  I  have  not 
more  than  nine. — Have  I  as  many  enemies  as  your  father?  You 
have  fewer  than  he;  but  more  than  they. — Have  the  Russians  as 
many  children  as  we  ?  We  have  fewer  than  they. — Have  the  French 
as  mauy  ships  as  we  ?  They  have  fewer  than  we. — Have  the  dogs 
more  feet  than  the  horses?  No,  they  have  just  as  many. — Has  not 
your  bird  two  feet?  Yes,  it  has  two. — Has  not  this  little  boy  more 
arms  than  feet  ?  Yes,  he  has  two  arms ;  but  he  has  only  one  foot. — 

What  is  the  las?  verb  of  the  last  exercise  ?    It  is — What  is 

(he  last  noun  of  this  exercise  ?    It  is 


SEVENTEENTH  LESSON,  17th.— Dix-septieme  Legon,  17 me. 

VOCABULARY.    1st  Section.        |        VOCABULAIRE.    Ire  Section 

OF  THE  INFINITIVE  .-De  VInJinitif. 

There  are  in  French  four  Conjugations,  which  are  distinguished  by  the 
vermination  cf  the  Present  of  the  Infinitivp,  viz  : — 


80 


SEVENTEENTH     LESSON. 


1.  The  first  has  its  infinitive  terminated  in  ER,  as  :^  parler,    /to  cpiak, 
which  will  be  the  model  of  its  regular  verbs.  \ 

2    The  second  in  IR,  its  model jfinir,      [to  finish, 

?,  The  third  in  OIR,        " Irecevoz'A  to  receive. 

4,  The  fourth  in  RE,         " .J  vendre,  »Jo  sell. 

Obs.  36.  A  verb,  in  French,  is  regular,  when  conjugated  like  the  mode, 
of  its  conjugation.  Irregular,  of  course,  when  not  conjugated  like  it.  Each 
verb  given,  hereafter,  will  have  the  number  of  its  class.  Those  marked 
with  an  asterisk  (*)  are  irregular. 
To  buy.  -v 
To  choose.  I 
To  perceive) 
To  wait  for/ 

Fear,  p 

Wiongjtort. — (Right,  raison. — [A  mind,  a  desire,  a  wisriy  envie. 

Obs.  37.     These  seven  words  require  the  preposition  (de,  of,)  after  then, 
whejaJoUojVied  by  anjrifinitive.    ExajnpIc.-^Ajre _you_a_frajdjo  speak 
vous  peur  de  parler  ? 


A  dieter,        I.1 

fTo  cut,  cut  off.    "\    t!-ouper,  1. 

Choisir,         2. 

[To  build. 

Batir,      2. 

Apercevoir,  3. 

I  To  owe.                  I 

Devoir,    3. 

Attendre,      4. 

rTo  render,  rcstorel 

Rendre,  4. 

el  honte.-f~rTime, ^7e  temps. — Courage,  le  courage. 
, Iraison. — [A 


To  work.  ~  — -— ^^ 

Have  you  a  mind  to  work  ? 

I  have  a  mind  to  work. 

Fie  has  not  the  courage  to  speak. 

Are  you  afraid  to  speak  ? 

I  am  ashamed  to  speak. 

Have  they  time  to  wait  ? 

They  have  neither  time  nor  a  wish 

to  wait. 

To  cut  it,  him.        To  cut  them. 
To  cut  some.  To  cut  one  more. 

Has  he  time  to  cut  the  bread  ? 
He  has  (time  to  cit  it). 
Has  he  a  mind  ta  cut  other  trees  ? 


Travailler,  1. 

Avez-vous  envie  de  travailler  ? 

J'ai  envie  de  travailler. 

II  n'a  pas  le  courage  de  parler. 

Avez-vous  peur  de  parler  ? 

J'ai  honte  de  parler. 

Ont-ils  le  temps  d'attendrc? 

Us  n'ont  ni  le  temps,  ni  envie  d'at- 

tendre. 

Le  couper.        Les  couper. 
En  couper.        En  couper  encore  un, 
A-t-il  le  temps  de  couper  le  pain  ? 
II  a  le  temps  de  le  couper. 
A-t-il  envie  de  couper  d'autres  ar 

bres? 
He  has  (a  mind  to  cut  others).  II  a  envie  d'en  couper  d'autres. 

SEVENTEENTH  EXERCISE.  1st  Sec. — PIX-SEI>TIEME  EXERCICE.  Ire  Sec. 

Saturday April,  1849.  Samedi Avril  mil  huit,  &c. 

Have  you  more  than  one  exercise  this  morning  ?     We  have  no 
exercise,  but  we  have  a  vocabulary. — Have  you  not  more  than  one 

1  Questions  to  be  asked  and  answered  in  French,  on  the  introduction  of 
a  verb.  Of  what  conjugation  is  it  ?  De  quelle  conjugaiso?i  est-il  ?  Of  the 
1st,  2d,  3d,  or  4th.  De  la  Ire,  2de,  3me,  ou  4me. — Why  ?  Pourquoi?  Be- 
cause it  ends  in  :  er,  ir,  oir,  or  re.  Parce  qu'ilfniit  en  :  er,  ir,  oir,  ou  re.— 
Is  it  regular  ?  Est  il  regulier?  It  is.  J7  Vest. — Why  ?  Pourquoi?  Be 
cause  it  is  conjugated  like  the  model:  parler,  Ji?nr,  rccevoir,  or  vetulTe.— 
Parce  qu'i'Z  est  conjugue  comme  le  model <  :  parler,  &c. — It  is  net.  ll  ru 
rcst  pas. — It  is  not  conjugated,  &c.  U  n'cstms  conjugue,  &c. 


SEVENTEENTH    LESSON. 


81 


\  ocabu.a  y  ?  No,  \ve  have  not.  (Dir.  1 .)  That  is  not  much.  No,  thai 
is  not  much,  but  it  is  enough. — Have  you  still  a  mind  to  buy  my 
friend's  horse  and  sheep?  (§  32,  N.  3.)  I  have  still  a  mind  to  buy 
them ;  but  I  have  no  more  money. — Have  you  time  to  work l  1 
have  time,  but  no  mind  to  work. — Has  your  brother  time  to  cut 
some  beef  or  mutton  ?  He  has. — Is  he  afraid  to  cut  any  1  He  ia 
not.  but  he  has  no  mind  to  cut  any. — Has  he  got  no  knife?  ($  26.) 
Ye?,  he  has  one. — Have  you  time  to  cut  some  cheese l  I  have. — 
Has  he  a  desire  (a  mind)  to  cut  the  cabbages  ?  He  has,  but  he  ia 
ashamed  to  cut  them. — Is  the  tailor  of  the  minister  wrong  to  cut 
the  coarse  clolh  ?  He  is  not  wrong  in  cutting  it. — Who  has  time  to 
jut  the  trees?  What  trees?  The  general's  big  trees.  The  farmer 
has  time  to  cut  them. — How  many  trees  has  he  time  o  Cut?  He 
has  only  time  to  cut  two. — Who  has  time  to  cut  more  than  two? 
Nobody  has. — Are  the  little  scholar  and  the  little  boy  ashamed  to 
speak  ?  They  are  not  ashamed,  but  afraid  to  speak. 

Am  I  not  right  in  buying  as  many  cakes  as  they?  Yes.  y^u  are 
right  in  buying  as  many  cakes  as  they. — Is  our  friend  right  in  buying 
that  ugly  old  horse?  No,  he  is  wrong;  but  we  are  right  in  buying 
ibis  pretty  little  dog. — Has  any  one  a  mind  to  speak  ?  You,  he, 
John,  and  I,  have  (469,  N.  1)  a  mind  to  speak;  but  we  have  not 
courage  enough. — Have  you  the  courage  to  receive  those  gentle- 
men ?  I  have  the  courage  and  the  wish  to  receive  them. — Is  he 
not  wrong  to  receive  that  note  ?  He  is  right  to  receive  it.  Has  that 
sailor  the  courage  to  cut  off  the  finger  arid  thumb  of  this  little  boy* 
No,  he  has  not ;  but  the  doctor  has. — Has  the  cloth  merchant  a  mind 
to  choose  a  few  more  cloaks?  He  has  a  mind  to  choose  a  fe\v 
more,  but  he  has  no  more  money. — Are  the  carpenters  ashamed  U 
hvlld  a  ship  ?  They  are  not  ashamed  to  build  a  small  one ;  but  the 
captain,  is  afraid  to  build  a  large  one. — What  are  they  afraid  tc 
build?  They  are  afraid  to  build  a  great  many  things. — Is  not  the 
lawyer  of  merit  wrong  in  receiving  his  young  friends  in  his  garden  * 
No,  he  J3  not  wrong  in  receiving  them  in  his  garden  :  but  he  is  no4 
right  in  choosing  those  old  cakes  and  that  bad  wine. 

VOCABULARY.   2d  Section.         |        VOCAEULAIKE.  2cle  Section, 


To  break.  To  mend,  to  repair. 

Cazssr.     Of  what  conjugation  is  it  ? 

Of  the  first.     Why  ? 

Because  it  ends  in  :  er. 

(s  it  regular  ?     Yes,  it  is. 

vVhy  ?    Because  it  is  conjugated  like 

the  model :  parler. 
To  pick  up.        To  look  for,  to  seek. 


Casser,  1.  Raccommoder,   1. 

De  quelle  conjugaison  est-il  ? 
De  la  premiere.     Pourquoi  ? 
Parce  qu'il  finit  en  :  er. 
Est-il  regulicr  ?     Oui,  il  Test. 
Pourquoi  ?    Parce  qu'il  est  conjugu£ 

comme  le  modele  :  parler. 
Ramasser,  1.  Chercher,  1. 


52 


SEVENTEENTH     LESSON, 


To  buy,  purchase.        To  buy  one. 

To  buy  some  moro.      To  buy  two. 

To  buy  one  or  two  more. 

Have  you  a  mind  to  buy  one  more 
horse  ? 

I  have  a  mind  to  buy  two  more. 

\.m  I  not  right  to  pick  up  that  beau- 
tiful satin  shawl  ? 

Ves,  but  you  are  wrong  to  break  that 
pretty  paper  fan. 

Is  he  afraid  to  mend  this  cloak  ? 

He  is  not  afraid  to  mend  it. 

What  have  they  a  mind  to  look  for  ? 

They  do  not  wish  to  look  for  anything. 

Have  those  children  the  courage  to 
wait  in  the  garden  ? 

They  have  (the  courage).  (Dir.  1.) 

Is  not  the  young  scholar  wrong  to 
sell  his  dictionary  ? 

No,  he  is  not  wrong  in  selling  it,  be- 
cause it  is  an  old  dictionary. 

Has  the  merchant  more  sugar  than 
tbe  grocer  ?  He  has  not  so  much. 


Acheter,  1.  Enachcicrun. 

En  acheter  encore.  En  acheter  deu* 
En  acheter  encore  un  ou  deux. 
Avez-vous  en  vie   d' acheter  encore 

un  cheval  ? 

J'ai  envie  d'en  acheter  encore  deux. 
N'ai-je  pas  raison  de  ramasser  ce 

beau  chale  de  satin  ? 
Si  fait :  mais  vouo  avez  tort  de  cassci 

ce  joli  eventail  ce  papier. 
A-t-il  peur  de  raccommoder  ce  imn 

teau-ci  ? 

II  n'a  pas  peur  de  le  raccommoder. 
Qu'ont-ils  envie  de  chercher  ? 
Us  n'ont  envie  de  rien  chercher. 
Ces  enfanls  ont-ils  le  courage  dNdt 

tendre  dans  le  jardin  ? 
Us  en  ont  le  courage. 
Le  jeune  ecolier  n'a-t-il  pas  fort  d« 

vendre  son  dictionnaire  ? 
Non,  il  n'a  pas  tort  de  le  vendre,  par- 

ce  que  c'est  un  vieux  dictionnaire. 
Le  marchand  a-t-il  plus  de  sucre  qua 

1'epicier  ?     II  n'en  a  pas  tant. 


SEVENTEENTH  EXERCISE.  2d  Sec. — DIX-SKPTJKME  EXERCICE.  2de  Sec. 
Monday,  May 1849.  Lundi, Mai,  1849. 

Have  we  not  the  two  exercises  of  the  seventeenth  lesson  (de  la)C 
Yes,  we  have  the  seventeenth  lesson. — How  many  verbs  have  we 
in  our  vocabularies'?  We  have  ten. — Have  we  not  more  than  ten ? 
Is  it  not  enough?  Yes,  it  is  enough. — Have  we  any  adjectives  and 
nouns?  We  have  several. — Have  we  not  many  nouns  and  pro- 
nouns? We  have  more  of  the  last  than  of  the  first. — Has  the 
young  sailor  any  more  biscuits  or  bread?  He  has  biscuits,  but 
(06s.  35}  no  more  bread. — What  has  the  old  grocer  got?  He  has 
fresh  cheese,  but  no  more  rice. — Who  has  fresh  butter?  I  have 
some  yet,  the  physician  has  a  little  more,  but  the  lawyer  and  the 
minister  have  no  more. 

What  has  our  tailor  a  mind  to  mend  ?  He  has  a  mind  to  mend 
our  old  friend's  (467,  N.  1)  coaxs  and  vests. — Has  he  not  a  mind  to 
mend  our  hats  and  theirs?  No,  but  the  hatter  has  a  mind  to  rnciVu 
them. — Has  the  little  shoemaker  time  to  mend  our  old  shoes?  Ho 
has  time,  but  he  has  no  mind  to  mend  them. — Are  you  afraid  to 
look  for  my  horse  ?  I  am  not  afraid,  but  I  have  no  wish  to  look  foj 
it. — What  are  the  carpenters  right  in  building?  They  are  right  in 
building  vessels. — Are  their  children  afraid  to  pick  up  some  nails! 


EIGHTEENTH     LESSON 


S3 


they  are  nof. — Have  you  a  mind  to  break  my  jawel'?  I  have  a 
tnind  lo  pick  it  up,  but  not  to  break  it. — Am  I  wrong  in  picking  up 
your  leather  gloves'?  You  are  not  wrong  in  picking  them  up;  but 
you  are  wrong  in  cutting  them. — Who  has  a  mind  to  break  our 
large  looking-glass?  Our  enemy  has  a  mind  to  break  it. — Has  the 
lawyer  more  merit  than  the  minister?  The  one  has  no  more  merit 
than  the  other. — Has  the  big  chicken  more  feet  than  this  little  bird? 
No,  it  has  ;ust  as  many. 


EIGHTEENTH  LESSON,  18th.— Dix-huititme  Legmi,  18m  ± 

VOCABULAIKK.  Iro  Section. 
Fairc,*4. 
Vouloir,*  3. 

{  Voulez-vous  ? 

Je  vetix. 
Vcut-il  ? 


VOCABULARY.    1st  Section. 
To  make,  to  do,  to  perform. 
To  be  willing,  to  wish,  to  will. 
Will  you  ?     Do  you  wish  ? 
Are  you  willing  ?      Will  you  have? 
I  will,  am  willing,  wish.     I  will  not. 
Will  lie  ?  is  lie  willing  ?  dor.s  !:• 
He  will,  is  willing,  wishes.    He  will 
not. 

i,  are  willing,  wish,  will  have. 
You  will,  are  willing,  wish,  will  have. 

They  will,  are  willing,  wish,  w;  ill  ha  ve. 

Who  will  (h:iv<s?  Who  does  not  wish? 

Nobody  wishes.     Some  one  wishes. 

Do  you  wish  to  have  it  ? 

Does  any  one  wish  to  make  my  fire  ? 

I  am  willing  to  make  it. 

I  dr.  not  wish  to  make  it. 

Does  he  wish  to  buy  your  h   • 

'ics  to  buy  it ;  dors  he  not « 
[9  it  ?int  us  I  say  ?      Is  it  not  so  ? 


II  vcut. 


Je  ne  veux  paa. 
II  ne  veut  pas. 


Nous  voulons. 
Vous  voulez. 
Us  veulcnt. 
Qui  vcut  ? 


Vous  ne  voulez  pas 
Veulent-ils? 
Qui  ne  veut  pas? 

Personne  ne  veut.    Quelqu'un  vcuL 

Le  voulez-vous  ? 

Quelqu'un  veut-il  fairc  mon  feu  ? 

Je  veux  Ic  fairc. 

Jc  ne  veux  pas  le  faire. 

Veut-il  acheter  votrc  cheval  ? 

II  veut  I1  acheter  ;  n'est-cepas  ? 

t  N'est-ce  pas  ?     (Idiom.) 


Obs.  33.  (Important.}  This  French  :  N'c*t-cepas?  answers  to  any  ncga 
live  interrogation  in  the  same  person  as  a  preceding  affirmation,  as: 

1.  You  are  going  tc  write,  ARE  YOU  NOT  ?  meaning:  is  it  not  sc  f 

2.  You  would  write,  WOULD  YOU  NOT  ?  meaning:  is  it  not  so  f 

3.  They  wrote,  DID  THEY  NOT  ?  meaning :  is  it  not  BO  T 

4.  He  has  the  cloth,  HAS  HE  NOT  ?  meaning :  is  it  not  eo  ? 

5.  We  were  reading,  WERE  WE  NOT  ?  meaning  :  is  it  not  eo  ? 

These  five  negative  interrogations  (in  the  same  person  as  the  five  pro- 
seJing  affirmations  and  immediately  connected  with  them)  are  all  translated 
in  French  by :  n* cst-ce  pas  ?  and  so  arc  all  similar  ones,  in  all  mends,  tenses, 
und  persons. 


EIGHTEENTH     L  ESS  ON. 


Vou  have  the  French  of:  lo  do,  io 

make  ?     Have  you  not  ? 
Yes,  we  have  it.     It  is)  faire. 
You  have  also  that  off~7o  be  willing : 

have  you  not  ?     We  have  it  also. 

To  go.  To  be. 

To,  ct,  or  in  the  house  *>/ 

To  be  at  the  man's  house. 

To  go  to  the  grocer's. 

To  be  in  one's  friend's  house. 

To  go  to  their  father's. 

To  be  in  )  . 

To  go  to)  my  house~ hls  JOU3e- 

To  be  at,  to  go  to,  our  house. 

To  be  in,  to  go  to,  your  house. 

To  be  at,  to  go  to,  their  house. 

To  be  at  some  one's  house. 

To  go  to  no  one's  house. 

At  home..  To  go  home. 

Will  you  wait  at  home  ? 

At,  i?i,  or  to  whose  house  ? 

To  whose  house  do  you  wish  to  go  ? 

I  do  not  wish  to  go  to  any  one's. 

EIGHT KKXTII   Kxr.r.nsK.  1st  Sec. — '. 

Tuesday,  May 1849.  Mardi, .Mai,  18-19. 

Have  you  a  mind  to  work?  Yes,  I  have. — What  will  you  do* 
1  wish  to  do  an  exercise. — Which  .'  This  one.  Very  well. — Doee 
(he  little  son  of  the  general  wish  to  break  that  big  slick?  No,  ho 
does  not  wish  to  break  it. — Are  you  willing  to  look  for  my  son?  I 
am  (willing,  &c.).  (Dir.  1.) — What  do  you  wish  to  pick  up?  I  wi:<h 
to  pick  up  the  shawl,  hat,  and  gloves,  of  Miss  Clara. — You  wish  to 
pick  up  that  dollar,  do  you  not  Y^es,  I  wish  to  pick  it  up. — Will 
you  pick  up  that  old  pencil  ?  No,  I  will  not. — Do  you  wish  to  go  to 
that  man's  house?  No.  I  wish  to  go  to  the  minister's. — You  wish  to 
go  to  the  physician's,  do  you  not?  No,  I  do  not  wish  to  go  to  the 
physician's,  but  to  the  lawyer's  and  grocer's. — Who  wishes  to  go  to 
the  doctor's?  Nobody  -wishes  to  go  to  his  house. — Does  our  neigh 
bor  wish  to  buy  these  or  those  combs?  (mind  the  French  construc- 
tion.} He  wishes  to  buy  them. — Does  that  fanner  wish  to  cut  youi 
tree2  He  does  not  wish  to  cut  mine,  but  his  own. — Which  ?  The 
big  tree. — What  does  the  shoemaker  wish  to  mend*  He  wishes  to 
Iii2nd  our  old  shoes. — Does  the  tailor  wish  to  mend  anything?  He 
*vis,ie*  to  mend  ($  25)  waistcoats. — He  wishes  to  mend  their  coats, 
dees  he  not  ?  He  does  not. — Do  the  Swiss  wish  to  wait  for  your  son  * 


Vous  avez  le  i'raiignis  do  -{jo  :!*,,  i>) 

(rpakej     N'est-cc  pas  ? 
Oui,  nous  i'avons.     C'est :  faire. 
Vous  avez  aussi  celui  de  :  <£p  be  wH^ 

(ling):  N'est-ce  pas  ?  Nous  1'hvoiu 
aussi.  A 

Aller,*!.  Kt«:* 

Chez...    . 
Etre  chei  1'homme. 
Aller  chez  1'epicicr. 
Etre  chez  son  ami. 
-Aller  chez  leur  pure. 
Eire   )    . 

Aller  \  cnez  m01 — cne/  *UI 
Etre  chez  nous.     Aller  chez  nouB, 
Eire  chez  vous.     Aller  chez  vous 
Etre  chez  eux.      Aller  chez  eux. 
Etre  chez  quelqu'un. 
N'aller  chez  personnc. 
A  lamaisofi.     Aller  a  la  niaison. 
Voulez-vous  attendre  a  la  maiso/i  S 
Chez  quif 

Chez  qui  voulcz-vous  aller  ? 
Je  ne  veux  aller  chez  personnc. 

!  Ire  Sec. 


EIGHTEENTH     LESSOR.  86 

They  do. — What  do  they  wish  to  choose?  They  wish  to  chous'j 
lome  coarse  cloth. — And  their  children,  what  do  they  wish  to 
choose  ?  They  wish  to  choose  some  fine  handkerchiefs. — Who  has 
any  ?  The  dry  goods  merchants  have. — Do  they  wish  to  sell  them 1 

indeed ! 

Is  Charles  willing  to  wait  for  the  lawyer's  son?  No,  he  is  net. — 
Robert  will  wait  for  him  ;  will  he  not  ?  He  !  No,  he  will  not. — Who 
will  do  it?  Nobody  wiil  do  it. — Are  the  Scotchmen  willing  to  wail 
for  the  minister  at  your  father's  or  at  the  doctors?  They  will  wait 
for  him  neither  at  my  father's  nor  at  the  donor's?,  but  at  the  booK 
seller's. — Am  I  wrong  to  go  to  the  hatter's?  No,  you  are  not  wrong 
to  go  to  his  house. — At  whose  house  is  their  father?  He  is  at  hit» 
friend's,  the  apothecary. — To  whose  house  do  your  sons  wish  to 
go)-  They?  They  do  not  wish  to  go  to  anybody's  house. — Wih 
•  to  my  house '?  I  will  not  go  to  yours,  but  to  my  broth* 
,ot  this  little  child  wish  to  go  to  tke  cuke  shop  (rhex  ie  mar- 
chand  de  gittear,  .  indeed,  he  does.  (Dir.  1.) — Why  ' 

<\s  to  buy  two  cakes. — Will  mn 

your  childi  r  too?     No,  they  do  not  wish  to  bu> 

any;  they  are  not  hungry. — Have  you  the  French  of:  a  quarter  of  t> 
dollar  *  No.  I  h:ive  it  not.  Do  you  wi»h  to  have  it?  Yes,  >ir. 
It  is  :  mi  quart  de  dollar. — Have  you  two  quarters  of  a  dollar  ?  I  have 
t\vo. — How  many  quarters  has  he?  lie  has  several  quarters. — Has 
Charles  his  brother's  pretty  little  stk-k  and  playthings?  (-1GY. 
Ho  has  his  pp-ity  li:i!e  >:ii-k.  but  not  , — The  ge 

:  are  they  not?    No:  but  the  cook 
and  t-h: 


ction. 

To  burn.  To  warm. 

T:>  put,  put  on. 

The  broth.          My  linen  clothes. 
Beaut  ii.. 

Will  you  put  on  this  satin  vest  ? 
I  will  put  it  on  ;  it  is  beautiful. 


MI: n.    2dc  Secti vi) 
r,  1.         Chauffer,  1. 
Due-hirer.         Mettre*4,  (171,  N.  1). 
Le  bouillen.    Mon  linge,  (singular./ 
Superbe. 

Voulez-vous  rnettrc  ce  gilet  de  satin  ? 
Je  veux  le  mettre  ;  il  est  superbo.. 


At  Wl,oso  house  is  your  brother  ?       j  Chez  <*"!  est  vo!rf  frt}re  ?, , 

'  Chez  qui  votre  irure  est-il  ? 


.•it.  ours,  in  ours. 
Is  he  at  home  ?  at  his  house  ? 
He  is  not  at  home — in  his  house. 
He  is  at  or  in  yours. 
Who  is  at  or  in  theirs? — at  mine  ? 
Nobody  is  av  theirs  ;  yours  ;  mine. 
Are  you  ?  I  am. 

Tirc*l,  fatigued.         Are  yen  tired  ? 


II  est  chez  nous. 

Est-il  a  la  maison  ?     Est-il  chcv.  lui  ? 

II  n'est  pas  a  la  maison — chez  lui. 

II  est  chez  vous. 

Qui  est  chez  eux  ? — chez  moi  ? 

Personne  n'est  chez  eux;  vous;  moi 

fites-vous  ?         Je  suis. 

Fatigue.  iZtes-vous  fatigue? 


86' 


EIGHTEENTH     LESSON. 


(  am  tirea.  I  am  not  tired. 

[  am  a  little  titetl.     Very  tired. 
Cs  he  ?         He  is.       He  is  not. 
Busy  . . .  He  is  busy  ;  is  he  not  ? 
Are  we  ?     We  are  not. 
Are  they  ?    They  ere.    They  are  not. 
Arc  they  bus;/  ?     Yes,  they  are. 

£Ie  is  busy,  and  we  are  i:red. 
To  dzink,        To  drink  a  little  more, 
IVJicre  ?     Where  t!o  you  wish  to  go  ? 
What  do  you  wish  to  do  ? 
W"hat  does  your  brother  wish  to  Ho  ? 
la  your  father  at  home  ? 
What  will  the  Swiss  dr.'nk  ? 
They  wish  to  drink  some  broth. 
They  wish  to  drink  something  gocd. 
They  do  not  wish  to  drink  anything. 
Do  they  wish  to  tear  this  old  paper  ? 
They  do   not  wish  to   tear,  hut  to 

burn  it. 
All.     Is  it,  is  this,  is  that  all  ?    ]    is. 


Je  suis  fatigue.  Je  ne  suis  j>as  fatigufi 
Je  suis  un  peu  fatigu£ — -.r^s -fatigue'. 
Est-il.        II  est.        II  tt'est  pas. 
Occupe.  Ilestoroupe;  n'est-cepast 
Sommes-nous?  Nous  aesommes  pas 
Sont-ils  ?     Us  sont.     Us  ne  sont  pas. 
Sont-ils  occ'apes  ?     Oui,  ils  sont  oc 

cupes.  (§  137.) 

II  est  occ  ape  et  nor^s  sommes  fatigued. 
Boire*  ±.        Boive  encore  un  peu. 
Ou  ?     Ou  voulf  z-yous  aller  ? 
Quo  voulez-vo'js  faire  ? 
V'jtre  frere  qne  \reut-il  faire  ? 
Votre  frere  est-il  a  la  maison  ? 
LesSuisses  que  veulent-ils  boire 
Jls  veulen*  boire  du  bouillon, 
lie-  veuleM  boire  quelque  chose  dc 

ben.  Ils  ne  veulent  rien  boire. 
Veulen',-ils  dechirer  ce  vieux  papier  ? 
Ils  ne  veulent  pas  le  dechirer,  maia 

le  r  ruler. 
Tout.    Est-ce  tout  ?     C'est  tout. 


EIGHTEENTH  EXERCISE.  2d  Sec. — DJX-HUITI&ME  EXERCICE.  2cle  Sec 

Wednesday,  May 1849.  Mercredi, Mai,  1849. 

You  have  the  18th  exercise  to-day;  have  you  not?  No,  we  have 
only  the  18th  vocabulary. — Have  you  but  the  vocabulary?  Yes, 
indeed,  that's  all.  Very  well. — Miss  Caroline,  will  you  put  on  this 
or  that  hat?  I  will  put  on  neither  this  nor  that;  but  the  other. — 
Which?  This  ugly  old  hat  (vieux  vilain)  ?  This  ugly  old  hat!  It 
is  superb.  Superb!  indeed. — Will  you  not  put  your  velvet  shawl 
on?  Yres;  I  will  put  it  on,  because  I  am  cold. — 'Has  the  young 
painter  any  fi;3?  He  has. — Does  he  wish  to  bum  anything?  Yres; 
he  has  a  mind  to  burn  these  old  papers. — What  will  you  r^ar?  L 
will  tear  this  coarse  handkerchief. — Who  is  busy?  I  am  bury. — 
Who  is  tired  ?  I  am  not  tired. — Who  is  good  ?  The  grocer's  little 
son. — Are  you  busy,  very  busy?  I  am  very  busy. — Are  you  not 
tired?  Yes,  I  am  a  little  tired. — What  docs  the  cook  wish  to  warm* 
He  wishes  to  warm  our  tea,  and  our  father's  coffee. — Is  that  all  ? 
Yes,  that  is  all. — Do  you  wish  to  warm  my  brother's  broth  and 
coffee  ?  I  am  willing  to  warm  this,  but  not  that. — Is  the  farmer  wil- 
ling to  put  some  wood  in  the  fire  ?  Yes,  he  is. — Will  they  put  any 
grain  in  the  bag?  No,  they  do  not  wish  to  put  any  in  the  bag,  bu> 
m  the  granary;  that's  all. 

Is  not  the  grocer's  clerk  willing  f.o  put  your  rice  in  his  bag  ?  Yes,  he 
is  willing  to  put  ii  in  his  bag. — Am  I  not  right  in  warming  youi  broth? 


NINETEENTH    LESSON. 


87 


Fes,  you  are. —  Is  not  the  merchant  wrong  in  tearing  the  satin  ?-  Yeaj 
ha  is. — Have  we  time  to  go  in  the  garden  ?  No,  we  have  not  time.— « 
What  does  Charles  wish  to  tear?  He  does  not  wish  to  tear  any- 
thing; but  we  and  they  (467,  N.  1.)  wish  to  (nous  t'OwZons)  tear  the 
cotton  bags. — Is  he  afraid  to  tear  your  coat  ?  He  is  not ;  but  to  burn 
it. — What  are  you  willing  to  put  on?  I  am  willing  to  put  on  my 
coat,  (Dir.  2;)  vest,  shoes,  stockings,  and  gloves;  that's  all.  Very 
well;  that's  enough. — Are  you  tired?  I  am  not  tired. — Who  is 
tired  ?  My  brother  is  tired. — Has  the  Spaniard  a  mind  to  buy  as 
many  horses  as  oxen  ?  No ;  but  he  has  a  mind  to  buy  as  many 
birds  as  you  and  I. — Do  you  wish  to  drink  anything?  I  do  not. — 
How  many  chickens  have  you  at  home?  \Ve  have  four;  that's 
all. — Where  is  your  father  ?  At  his  friend's  house. — Is  the  physician 
at  the  lawyer's?  No;  but  the  minister  is  at  the  lawyer's. — Do  the 
strangers  wish  to  go  to  the  American's  or  to  the  Dutchman's?  They 
\vish  to  go  neither  to  the  American's  nor  to  the  Dutchman's? — WThere 
do  they  wish  to  go?  They  do  not  wish  to  go  to  anybody's  house. — 
Where  are  your  little  friends,  Robert  and  John?  They  are  at  theii 
father's. — That's  all. — Is  your  friend's  brother's  horse  sick?  (}  140; 
Art  3.)  No,  it  is  not  sick. 


NINETEENTH  LESSON,  19ih 

VOCABULARY.  1st  Section. 
Are  you  going  ?  do  you  go  ? 
I  am  going.     I  go.     I  am  not  going. 
Are  you  going  to  choose  a  book  ? 
I  am  going  to  choose  a  book. 
I  am  nyt  yet  going  to  choose  any. 
I  am  not  g:>ing  to  choose  anything. 
Are  you  going  home  ?     I  am  (going 

there). 

To  it,  at  it,  in  it,  there,  thither. 
To  go  thither.  To  be  there. 

It  to  it,  it  in  it,  him,  there,  or  thither. 
To  take,  to  carry.      To  send. 
To  take,  to   lead,  to   conduct — him 

there. 

Tc  take  you  there.   To  take  us  there. 
To  carry  it  there.   To  send  him  there. 
To  commence,  to  begin.  Tc  proceed. 
Than,  there,  or  thither. 
Some  of  it,  there,  or  thifhtr. 
To  cfi*ry  them  thither. 


i. — Dix-ncuviemc  Lcron}  19mc. 
VOCABULAIRE.    Ire  Section. 
Allez-vous  ? 

Je  vais.  Je  ne  vais  pas. 

Allez-vous  choisir  un  livre  ? 
Je  vais  choisir  un  livre. 
Je  ne  vais  pas  encore  en  choisir. 
Je  ne  vais  rien  choisir. 
Allez-vous  chez  vous?     J'#  vain. 

Yt  (avant  le  verbe.)  ($  47.) 
Y  aller,*  1.  Y  Ctrc,*4. 

Z/'y,  (avant  le  vcrbe.)  ($  57.) 
Porter,  1.  Envoyer,*  1, 

Mener,  1.  L'y  mener. 

Vous  y  mener.     Nous  y  mener. 
L'y  porter.  L'y  envoyer. 

Commencer,  1.    Continuer,  1. 
Les  y,  (av.  lo  verbe.)  ($  57.) 
Y  en,  (av.  le  verbe.)  (>  CO.) 
Les  y  porter. 


88 


NINETEENTH     LESSOR. 


To  carry  some  tliere  or  thitner. 
Will  you  send  him  to  my  lather's  ? 


Y  en  porter. 

Voulez-vous  I'tnvoycr  chjz  mon 

pere  ? 

Je  vais1  1'y  envoy er. 
Je  ne  vais  pas  encore  1'y  envoyer. 
Obs.  39.  The  adverb  y  always  stands  before  the  verb.     When  there  is  « 
pronoun  like  Ze,  it,  mm,  Zes,  them  ;  that  pronoun  stands  immediately  before 
the  adverb  y  ;  but  en,  some  of  it,  stands  after  the  y,  as  may  be  seen  above 


I  am  going  to  send  him  there. 

I  am  not  yet  going  to  send  him  there. 


tQ 


To  come.     To  come  to  it,  thither. 

Are  you  going  to  come 

Will  you  come  (meaning) 

Are  you  coming 

I  am  coming  (going  to  come)  there. 

When  ?     To-morrow.     To-morrow 

morning. 

With.  With  pleasure. 

At  first,  in  the  first  place.  Afterwards. 
What  are  you  going  to  do  first  ? 
First,  I  am  going  to  the  grocer's,  and 

then  to  the  apothecary's. 
With  me  —  with  him  —  with  them  — 

nobody. 
To  study.  To  recite. 


Venir,*  2.  Y  venir. 

Allez-vous  venir  chez  moi  ? 


Je  vais  y  venir. 
Quand  ?    Demain. 


Pern  am  mntiu, 


Avec.  Avec  plaisir. 

D'abord.  E?isuite. 

Qu'allez-vous  faire  d'abord  ? 
D'abord,  je  vais  chez  1'enicier,  et  en 

suite  chez  1'apothicaire. 
Avec  moi — avec  lui — aveceux — avec 

personne. 
£tudier,  1. 


Reciter,  1. 

NINETEENTH  EXERCISE.  1st  Sec. — DIX-NEUVIEME  EXERCICE.  Ire  Sec. 

Thursday,  May 1849.  Jeudi, Mai,  1849. 

Have  you  an  exercise  or  a  vocabulary,  to-day?  We  have  both.— 

Vre  you  going  to  recite  the  vocabulary  first  ?  Yes,  with  pleasure  , 
and  then  the  exercise:  will  we  not?  (won't  we?) — Very  well. — 
Will  you  begin,  Mr.  Charlemagne  ?  Yes,  Sir,  with  pleasure. — What 

is  the  French  of:  I  am  going?     It  is — Is  it  right?     Yes,  or 

no  (according  to  the  answer). — Do  you  wish  to  go  home  ?  I  do. 
(Dir.  1.) — Does  your  son  wish  to  go  with  you?  He  does. — Is  your 
brother  at  home?  He  is. — Where  are  you  going,  Mr.  Charles?  I 
am  going  to  the  minister's. — Do  your  children  wish  to  come  with 
me  ?  They  do  not  (wish  to  go  with  you). — To  whose  house  are 
you  going  to  send  this  note  ?  I  am  not  going  to  send  it,  but  I  am 
going  to  carry  (take)  it  to  the  general's. — Will  your  servant  take  my 
note  to  the  American's  house?  He  has  no  time  to  take  it  there 
hut  little  Henry  will  take  it  tliere. — Will  those  children  take  the 
Btrangerto  the  Russian's?  They  will  take  him  there. — Are  you  no( 
going  to  take  the  painter  to  the  physician's?  No,  but  I  am  going  to 
Bend  him  there. — Is  the  painter  willing  to  begin  that  picture,  to-day? 
No,  he  does  not  wish  to  commence  it  before  to-morrow. — To-mor 


1  When  the  wiil  is  not  particularly  referred  to,  use  vais,  instead  of  vcux» 


NINETEENTH     LESSON.  89 

row  morning?  (demain  matin?)  Yes,  to-morrow  morning.-- What 
tire  you  going  to  study  first,  to-morrow  morning?  To  study?  I  am 
not  going  to  study  anything. — Are  you  not  going  to  study  thrt  19th 
vocabulary?  I  am  going  to  study  it  to-day. 

Where  will  the  son  of  my  friend  take  the  Swiss's  large  dog? — Ho 
will  not  take  the  Swiss's  large  dog,  but  the  Scotchman's  pretty  little 
horse. — Where  will  he  take  him?  He  will  take  him  to  the  cook;3 
house. — When  will  he  take  him  there  ?  This  evening  or  to-morrow 
morning?  Neither  this  evening  nor  to-morrow,  but  to-day. — When 
are  you  coming  to  my  house?  First,  this  morning;  and  afterwards, 
to-ir.orrow. — Will  you  proceed  ?  I  have  no  time  to  proceed,  but 
Carnot  has. — Will  he  proceed?  Yes,  he  will. — Will  the  shoemaker 
take  the  boy's  shoes  home,  to  their  house?  No,  he  will  not, 
because  he  is  afraid  of  their  bad  dog. — That  old  man  is  hungry  and 
thirsty;  is  he  not?  This  one  is  neither  hungry  nor  thirsty,  but  that 
one  is. — We  will  first  go  to  the  Englishman's,  and  afterwards  to  tho 
Italian's;  won't  we?  Yes,  we  will;  but  the  Dutch  will  not. — Will 
your  son  begin  Thiers's  work,  to-morrow  ?  No,  because  he  has  not 
yet  got  it,  and  because  he  is  going  to  recite  the  last  vocabulary. — • 
Has  he  riot  got  it  yet?  No,  he  has  not. — Have  you  it?  Yes,  I  have 
it. — When  do  the  Germans  wish  to  go  in  the  farmer's  garden?  To- 
morrow? No,  they  do  not  yet  wish  to  go  thither  (or  in  it). — Is  the 
doctor  very  busy?  Yes,  he  is  very  busy  and  very  tired,  this  eve- 
ning.— Are  you  going  to  put  those  trees  in  your  son's  garden  ?  I 
am;  but  not  this  evening,  because  I  am  too  tired  and  too  busy. — 
What  is  the  student  going  to  drink  ?  He  is  first  going  to  drink  somo 
coffee  and  milk,  and  afterwards  some  wine. 

NINETEENTH  VOCAB.;  2d  Sec. — DIX-NEUVIEME  YOCAEULAIRE.  2de  Sec. 

Somewhere,  a?iywhcrc. 

Are  you  going  anywhere  ? 

Nowhere,  not  anywhere  ($  151). 

I  am  not  going  anywhere  (no\vhere>. 

To  write.      To  write  tnem.      Some 

To  translate.  To  correct. 

To  read.  To  copy. 

Will  you  refid  the  last  vocabulary  ? 

Does  he  not  wish  to  copy  anything  ? 

Will  they  translate  this  or  that  ex- 
ercise ? 

Will  you  not  correct  it  ?    Yes,  I  will. 

is  he  going,  does  he  go  ? 

He  goes,  (is  going.)     He  is  not  going. 

Who  is  gDing  ?  Nobody  goes,  (is 
going,) 


Quelque  part,  (not  used  with 
(jtionj       Allez-vous  quelque  part  ? 
Ne.  . .  nullepart. 
Je  IY?  vais  nulle  part. 
Ecrire,*  4.     Les  ecrire.     En  ecriro. 
Traduire,*  4.  Corriger,  1. 

Lire,*  4.  Copier,  1. 

Voulez-vous  lire  le  dernier  vocabn 

laire  ?          Ne  veut-il  rien  copier  f 
Veulent-ils  traduire  cet  excrcioe-ci 

oucelui-la?  ($37.) 
Ne  voulez-vous  pas  le  corriger  'f    hi 

fait.  Va-t-iL?    Ois.15) 

II  va.  II  ne  va  pas. 

Qui  va  ?         Personne  nc  va. 


NINETEENTH     LESSON 


l;3  he  going  (o  read,  translate,  and 
write  ?  He  is  going  neither  to 
read,  translate,  nor  write. 

What  is  he  going  to  do  ? 

He  is  not  going  to  do  anything. 

[s  the  teacher  going  to  correct  an- 
other of  our  exercises  ?  He  is 
(going  to  do  it). 

Is  he  coming  (going  to  come)  to  the 
teacher's  or  to  the  minister's  ? 

He  is  coming  neither  to  this  one's 
house  nor  to  the  other's. 

The  teacher,  master.  French  teacher. 

This  professor.  Our  professor  of 
English. 

At  what  o'clock  ? 

At  one  o'clock.         At  two  o'clock. 

EJalf.  The  or  a  quarter. 

At  half  past  one. 

At  a  quarter  past  one. 

At  a  quarter  past  two. 

At  a  quarter  to  (or  of,  or  before)  three. 

At  twelve,  noon.      Half  past  twelve. 

At  twelve  at  night,  or  midnight. 

Less. 

Now,  at  present.         Not  now. 

Ready. 

An;  we  ready  ?  I  am  ready. 

Ready  to.     They  arc  ready  to  go. 

In  a  quarter  of  an  hour.  Before  half 
an  hour. 


Va-t-il  lire,  traduire,  et  ecrire? 

II  ne  va  ni  lire,  ni  traduire,  ni  ecrire 
Que  va-t-il  faire  ? 
II  ne  va  rien  faire. 
Le  maitre  va-t-il  corriger  un  aulr* 
de  nos  exercices  ?     II  va  le  fairs. 

Va-t-il  venir  chez  le  maitre  ou  chez 

le  ministre  I1 
II  ne  va  vcrrir  m  chez  1'un  ni  chez 

1'autre. 

Le  maitre.    Le  maitre  de  Francois. 
Ce    professeur.      Notre    professeui 

d' Anglais. 
A  quelle  heure  ?2 
A  une  heure.        A  deux  heures. 
Demi.  Le  cm  un  quart. 

A  une  heure  et  demie.3 
A  une  heure  et  quart  (or  et  un  quart). 
A  deux  heures  un  quart.  (Mind  the  a.) 
A  trois  heures  moins  un  quart. 
A  midi.  Midi  et  demi. 

A  minuit.          A  minuit  et  un  quart. 
Moins,  (comparative  of  pru,  little.) 
A  present.  Pas  a  present. 

Pret.  Trots,  (plur.) 

Sommes-nous  pruts  ?    Je  siiis  pret. 
Pret  a — prets  a.         Us  sont  prets  a 

aller. 
Dans  un  quart  d'ho-.m\     Avant  du- 

mi-heure. 


DIX-NECVIEME  EXERCICE.  2de  Section. 

Friday,  Miy 1849.  Vendredi, Mai,  1849. 

Gentlemen,  what  are  you  going  to  do?  to-day  I  Recite  the  vocu- 
oulary,  translate  and  correct  our  exercises. — Very  well.  Will  you 

x  Va-t-il  venir ?  literally,  is  he  going  to  come?  Allez-vous  venir?  &c.,  are 
awkward  expressions  in  English,  but  much  used  in  French,  and  philosophi- 
cally so.  He  is  writing,  is  never  used  in  English  for  :  he  is  goi?i<r  to  write. 
Why  should  he  is  coming  be  substituted  for  :  he  is  going  to  come  ?  [Ditto 
of:  Sortir,  to  go  or  come  out,  &e.] 

2  Heure,  hour,  is  a  feminine  noun.     This  class  of  nouns  will  be  spoken 
}f  hereafter.     For  the  present,  the  learner  has  only  to  write  them  as  he  ^eee 
them  written  in  the«lessons. 

3  The  adjective  demie  is  here  in  the  feminine  gender,  agreeing  with  the 
feminine  noun  heure.     But  when  this  adjective  precedes  the  noun,  it  does 
.lot  agree  with  it  in  gender  and  number,  as :  une  demi-heure,  half  an  hour. 


NINETEENTH      LESSOR.  91 

begin,  Sir''     With  much  pleasure. — What  is  the  French  of:  some- 
where ?    It  is is  it  not?    Yes?  or  no  (as  the  case  may  require). 

Have  you  the  French  of:  is  he  going?     Yes,  we  have. — What  is 

it?  (qucl  csi-il  ?)     It  is it  is  right;  is  it  not?     Yes,  or  no. — Is 

the  youth  goinir,  in  a  quarter  of  an  hour,  to  the  Scotchman's  or  to 
the  Irishman's'4  He  is  going  neither  to  the  one;s  nor  to  the  other's 
house ;  but  I  am  going  to  take  (conduct)  him  to  the  young  Dutch- 
man's.— When  are  you  going  to  take  him  there?  Now. — k  he 
ready?  Xo.  he  is  not  yet  ready. — Very  well;  I  will  wait  for  him. 
(Je  vais.) — Do  you  go  to  the  physician's  this  evening?  No,  I  do 
not.— Do  you  go  anywhere? — I  go  somewhere  at  seven  o'clock.— 
Will  their  children  go  anywhere,  in  half  an  hour?  No.  they  will 
go  nowhere,  because  they  are  tired  and  busy. — Do  you  wish  to  go 
anywhere  ?  I  do  not  wish  to  go  anywhere,  but  my  brother's  friends 
_ro  to  the  Englishman7* — Where  is  the  Englishman 
He  is  at  home. — Are  his  sons  at  home?  They  are  there 
row.—  Are  you  ready  to  write  and  translate  ?  I  am  ready  to  trans- 
late, but  not  to  write.  I  have  no  pencil. — Has  the  cook  any  more 
butter  ?  No,  he  has  no  more ;  but  he  is  going  to  buy  some. — WlnM-u 
is  he  going  to  buy  a  is  going  to  buy  some  at  the  milk- 

—Has  he  much  ?  He  has  but  little  now;  but  he  is  going  to 
make  some  this  evening. — At  what  o'clock?  At  eight. 

When  will  you  go  with  me  to  the  booksellers?  At  six  o'clock. — 
I  am  bu>y  at  MX  o'clock. — Will  you  go  at  seven  ?  No,  not  before 
eight  or  half  past  eight. — Very  well. — When  are  you  coming  (going 
to  come)  to  my  house?  To-day  at  noon?  Not  at  twelve,  but  at 
half  past  twelve. — With  whom  are  you  coming?  With  nobody. — 
Is  not  the  student  going  to  study  first,  and  to  recite  afterwards  ?  Yes, 
he  will  (va)  study  first,  and  recite  afterwards. — Is  he  ready  to  com- 
mence? No,  not  yet. — Why  is  he  not  yet  ready  ?  Because  he  has 
but  little  time,  not  much  time. — Who  is  going  to  correct  our  exer- 
cises? The  old  professor  is. — What  is  the  young  teacher  going  to 
do  ?  He  is  going  to  put  on  his  hat  and  gloves,  and  go  to  his  father's. 
\Vill  you  read,  translate,  and  copy  your  French  with  us  to-day  ?  1 
am  afraid  to  do  it. — Are  you  ashamed  also  ?  No,  I  am  not  ashamed , 
f  am  only  afraid. — Who  has  time  and  courage  to  copy  those  two 
exercises?  These,  or  those ?  Those. — This  little  scholar  has  time, 

•^,  and  a  desire  to  copy  them. — When  will  the  clerk  go  to  the 
iawyer's  and  to  the  teacher's,  to  copy  something?  He  will  go  there 
first  to-day,  and  then  to-morrow  also. — Does  the  grocer  wish  to  buy 
as  many  bags  of  coffee  as  of  rice  ?  He  is  going  to  buy  more  of  the 
former  tnan  of  the  latter. — We  have  biscuits;  but  have  we  encugh? 
We  have  not  too  many. — How  many  more  bags  have  we  ?  We 


NINETEENTH      LESSON. 


have  yet  six. — Have  we  but  six?  Have  we  not  eight?  Yes,  wa 
have  eight-  and  the  baker  is  going  to  send  another. — At  wliaH 
o'clock  ?  At  a  quarter  to  six  or  at  a  quarter  to  seven/ — Very  well. 


TWENTIETH  LESSON,  20lh.— Vingtieme  Le$on,  20mc. 
VOCABULARY.    1st  Section.        1       VOCABULAIRE.    Ire  Section. 
To,  in  order  to,  for  the  purpose  of.       \  Pour,  (avant  un  infinitif.) 

06s.  40.  In  English,  all  prepositions  (to,  excepted)  are  usually  followed 
by  the  present  participle,  as :  of  coming,  without  havi?ig,  &c.  In  French, 
ull  prepositions  are  followed  by  the  infinitive  mood,  except  en  (in),  which  is 
followed  by  the  present  participle.  (Mind  this  Obs.  Rul.  1.) 


To  see.  In  order  to  see  him. 

Have  you  money  to  buy  (or,  for  the 

purpose  of  buying)  bread  ? 
I  have^ome  to  buy  some. 
Are  you  going  to  your  brother's  to 

(in  order  to)  see  him  ? 
I  have  no  time  to  go  there  to  see 

him. 
flas  your  servant  a  knife  to  cut  the 

cheese  ? 

He  has  none  to  cut  it. 
To  be  able,  (can.) 
Can  you  ?     Are  you  able  ? 
I  can.     I  am  able. 
I  cannot.     I  am  not  able  (unable). 
Can  you  read  ?  Are  you  able  to  write  ? 


Voir,*  3.  Pour  le  vo;r. 

Avez-vous  de  1' argent  pour  achctcr 

du  pain  ? 

J'en  ai  pour  en  acheter. 
Allez-vous  chez  votre  frere   pour  le 

voir  ? 
Je  n'ai  pas  le  temps  d'y  aller  pour  io 

voir. 
Votre  domestique  a-t-il  un  couteav 

pour  couper  le  fromage  ? 
II  n'en  a  pas  pour  le  couper. 
Pouvoir,*  3. 
Pouvcz-vous  ? 
Je  peux  (ouje  pursj. 
Je  ne  peux  pas  (ouje  ne  puis). 
Pouvez-vous    lire  ?       Pouvez-voiu 

ccrire  ? 

Je  peux  lire  et  ecrire  (ou  je  puis). 
Je  ne  puis  ni  lire  ni  ecrire. 
Balayer,  1.  Tuer,  1. 

Saler,  1.  Sucrer,  1. 

Puis-je  ?  (never  peux-je  ?) 


I  can  read  and  write.  (Rul.  2.) 
I  can  neither  read  nor  write. 
To  sweep.  To  kill. 

To  salt.  To  sweeten. 

Can  I  ?  may  I  ?          A.m  I  able  ? 

Obs.  41.  Pc2ix-je  ?  Ne  peux~je  pav  ?  are  not  used  interrogatively :  say 
therefore  :  Puis-je?  Can  I?  Ne  pms-jepas  ?  Can  I  not?  (of  which  here 
lifter,  Lesson  28th.) 

May  I  or  can  I  see  that  picture  ? 
You  can,  or  may.          You  cannot. 


Can  he  ?  may  he  ? 
He  can,  or  may. 
Can  we,  may  we  ? 


Can  he  not  ? 
He  is  not  able. 
Can  we  not  ? 


We  can,  are  able.         We  cannot. 
Gin  we  see  the  vessels  ? 


Puis-je  voir  ce  tableau-la  ? 
Vous  pouvez.     Vous  ne  pouvez  pas, 
Peut-il  ?  Ne  peut-il  pa«  ? 

11  peut.  II  ne  peut  pas. 

Pouvo?is-?ious  ?     Ne  pouvons-ncnu 

pas? 

Nous  pouvons.  Nousne  pouvoiwtxrft 
Pouvons-nous  vcirles  vaisseaux< 


TWENTIETH     LESSOR  93 


Are  we  going  ?  Do  we  go  ?    We  do. 

Do  we  go  there  ?     We  do. 

We  are  mt  going.   We  are  not  going 


V)  it. 


Allons-nous  ?         Nous  aliens. 
Y  ailons-nous  ?      Nous  y  alloua. 
Nous  n'allons  pas.     Nous  n'y  allune 

pas. 

Ailons-nous  tuer  le  boDiif  ? 
Essayer. 


Are  we  going  to  kill  the  ox  ? 
To  try. 

TWENTIETH  EXERCISE.  1st  Sec. — YixaiiEaiE  EXERCICE.  Ire  Sec. 
Saturday,  May, 1849.  Samedi Mai,  1849. 

A.re  we  going  to  recite  our  lesson  now?  Not  now.  Mr.  Y.  is  not 
isody. — Where  is  he  ?  He  is  at  his  friend's. — Is  he  coming  (going 
io  come)  ?  Yes,  he  is  coming. — Very  well. — Can  you  translate  to- 
day's exercise?  We  can  translate  it. — At  what  o'clock  can  we  com- 
mence ?  We  can  commence  in  a  quarter  of  an  hour. — Can  you, 
gentlemen,  read  and  correct  these  exercises?  We  can  commence, 
and  you  can  continue  (or  proceed). — Can  you  cut  the  bread  with  the 
knives  that  you  have?  We  are  going  to  try. — Can  you  mend  my 
gloves  ?  You  may  mend  them.  We  are  going  to  look  for,  some 
thread  to  mend  those  of  the  young  professoi. — Are  you  going 
to  the  tailor's  to  look  for  (he  old  vests?  We  are  not  going 
the>  ^  to  look  for  them.  \Ve  have  neither  the  time  nor  tho 
wish  to  do  it. — Can  you  put  those  shoes  on?  We  are  going  to 
try  them. — Will  you  try  our  scissors?  No,  thank  you,  I  have  mine, 
arid  mine  are  very  good  (are  sharp). — Can  the  tailor  make  a  coat 
to-day?  No,  ho  cannot  make  any. — Have  we  glasses  to  drink  our 
wine?  We  have  glasses  to  drink  it;  but  have  we  any  wine?  We 
can  send  the  servant  to  buy  some. — Can  you  drink  as  much  coffee 
as  tea?  We  can  drink  more  tea  than  coffee,  can  we  not? — Have 
you  any  sugar  to  sweeten  the  coffee?  I  have  some  to  sweeten  the 
coffee,  but  not  the  tea. — Has  not  the  young  man  time  to  see  my 
brother's  child  ?  Yes,  he  has  time  to  see  him. — Where  is  he  ?  He 
is  in  the  garden. — No,  not  in  the  garden,  but  in  the  large  and  beau- 
tiful vessel  of  the  big  captain. 

How  much  money  have  you  with  you  ?  I  have  a  good  deal. — « 
Have  you  a  hundred  dollars?  I  have  more  than  that.  More  than 
a  hundred  dollars?  Why  have  you  so  much?  Because  I  have  a 
mind  to  buy  a  horse.  Which  one?  The  general's?  Will  he  sell 
bis  ?  He  will.  It  is  not  that  (which)  I  wish  to  buy ;  but  the  farmer's 
young  horse. — Are  we  going  to  take  any  cakes  home  ?  We  are  not 
going  to  take  any. — Can  we  not  take  some  ?  No,  we  cannot. — Can- 
not the  cake-merchant  send  them  to  our  house  ?  Yes,  he  can  send 
them  there  in  half  an  hour.  That  will  do.  (C'est  Ion.) — Will  the 
Swiss  send  his  son  to  the  painter's?  No,  not  to  the  painter's,  but  to 
Jio  lookseller's. — VT;11  he  send  him  there  now ?  No,  he  is  not  going 


TWENTIETH 


to  send  him  there  now,  but  to-morrow. — Is  not  to-morrow  Saturday  i 
No,  it  is  Sunday. — What  day  of  the  month  is  it?  It  is  the  18th. 
The  18th,  indeed? — Who  is  going  to  read  and  copy  the  last  vocabu- 
lary ?  Nobody  is. — Is  not  Mr.  Lenoir  wrong  in  going  to  Mrs.  Ver- 
dier's  house  ?  Yes;  he  is  wrong  to  go  there ;  but  he  will  go. — Are 
you  going  to  put  on  but  one  glove  ?  No,  because  I  have  but  one. 

Is  the  servant  going  to  buy  a  broom  to  swreep  the  store  (magasin)  ? 
No,  he  is  afraid  to  sweep  it. — Why  is  he  afraid. to  sweep  it?  Be- 
cause the  big  Qog  is  there  (in  it). — Who  can  sweep  it?  Little  Robert 
can. — Has  he  a  broom  to  sweep  it?  He  has  a  broom  to  sweep  it— 
Has  the  cook  sugar  enough  to  sweeten  the  cakes?  He  i  as  enough 
to  sweeten  them ;  but  he  has  no  more  salt  to  salt  the  birth,  nor  the 
beef. — Is  he  not  going  to  salt  them  ?  Yes,  he  is ;  because  he  is 
going  to  the  merchant's  to  buy  some  salt  to  salt  them. 

VOCABULARY.    2d  Section.          ^*  VOCABULAIRE.  2de  Section. 
To,  at,  in.      1.  To  the.      2.  To  the.     A.  1.  Al'.  2.  Au,  aux. 

Obs.  42.  A  1'  is  used  before  a  vowel  or  silent  h,  in  the  sing.  (Obs.  5.) 
Au  (the  contraction  of:  d  le,  $  9),  is  used  before  consonants. 
Aux  (contraction  of:  d  les,  $  9),  is  the  plural,  before  all  letters 


To  the  friend. 
To  the  man. 
To  the  captain. 
To  the  penknite. 
The  basket. 
This  carpet. 
His  lioor. 
My  cat. 
To  mine. 
To  yours. 
To  him,  to  her 
To  me. 


To  the  friends. 
To  the  men. 
To  the  captains. 
To  the  penknives. 
To  the  basket. 
To  this  carpet. 
To  his  floors. 
To  my  cat. 
To  mine  (plur), 
To  ours  (plur). 
i. '.direct  object.) 


To  us.         To  you.          To  them. 
Are  they  able?  Can  they?  May  they? 
They  can.  They. cannot. 

Cannot  these  men  work  ? 

What  can  your  children  do  ? 

To  speak  to  me. 

To  speak  to  him,  (to  her.) 

To  write  to  him,  (to  her.)     To  me. 

To  speak  to  the  general  and  to  his 

friend. 

To  send  the  grocer  a  dollar.  ($  51  i.) 
To  give,  give  away.     To  lend. 


Aux  amis. 
Aux  hommes. 
Aux  capitaines. 
Aux  canif's. 
Au  panier. 
A  ce  tapis-ci. 
A  ses  planchers 
A  mon  chat. 
Aux  miens. 
Aux  notres. 


A  1'ami. 

A  rhomme. 

Au  capitaine. 

Au  canif. 

Le  panier. 

Ce  lapis-ci. 

Son  plancher. 

Mon  chat. 

Au  mien. 

Au  votres. 

Lui,  (regime  inject  av.  le  verbe.) 

Me,  (regime  indirect  av.  le  verbs, 

§47,  &c.) 

Nous.  Vous.  Leur. 

Peuvent-ils  ? 

Us  peuvent.     Us  ne  peuvent  paa. 
Ces  hommes  ne  peuvent-ils  pap  tra 

vailler? 

Vos  enfants  que  peuvent-ils  fairr  f 
Me  parler.     Peuvent-ils  me  parle*  * 
Lui  parler.     Us  peuvent  lui  pane' 
Lui  ecrire.  M'ecrire. 

Parler  au  general  et  a  son  ami 

Envoyer  un  dollar  a  1'epicier. 
Dormer.  Preter." 


1  W  £  XT  I  E  T  11     LESSON. 


95 


Fo  give  you-    them — us.  ($  45.) 

To  lend  a  friend  some  money.  ($  51£) 

Can  you  write  to  me  ? 

They  can  write  to  you. 

Can  the  clerk  speak  to  you  ? 

He  cannot  speak  to  us  now. 

Can  they  not  write  to  your  brother  ? 

Yes,  t'aey  can  write  to  him. 


Vous  donner.     Leur  donner.     Nous 

donner. 

Preter  de  F  argent  a  un  ami. 
Pouvez-vous  m'ecrire  ? 
Us  peuvent  vous  ecrire. 
Le  commis  peut-il  vous  parler  ? 
II  ne  peut  pas  nous  parler  a  present, 
Ne   peuvent-ils  pas  ecrire   a  votre 

frere  ? 
Si  fart ;  ils  peuvent  lui  ecrire. 


TWENTIETH  EXERCISE.  2d  Sec. — YINGTI&ME  EXERCICE.  2de  Sec. 


Monday,  June 1849. 


Lundi, Juin,  1849. 


At  what  o'clock  are  you  going  to  recite,  to-day  1  My  brother 
Marmot  recite  before  twelve  o'clock. — Can  they  not  recite  at  ten  ? 
No,  they  cannot. — Will  you  take  your  big  basket  to  my  house?  1 
will  not  take  my  basket  there,  but  to  the  general's. — When  ?  Now ? 
No,  I  will  take  the  basket  there  to-morrow. — Do  your  sons  wish  to 
take  mine  to  the  physician's?  No,  they  cannot  take  it  there. — 
Why  can  they  not?  Because  they  have  not  time  enough. — Is  the 
farmer  going  to  kill  anything?  He  is  going  to  kill  his  big  ox. — Is 
he  going  to  kill  it  now  ?  Yes,  he  is. — Can  they  write  to  me  ?  They 
cannot  write  to  you. — Can  they  speak  to  you?  They  can  speak  to 
us. — Can  they  not  wait  for  their  friends?  Yes,  they  can. — Can  they 
not  burn  as  much  coal  as  wood  ?  No,  they  cannot  bum  so  much  of 
the  former  as  of  the  latter. — Have  we  more  friends  than  the  Dutch? 
We  have  more  than  they. — Has  the  grocer  less  coffee  than  tea?  He 
has  less  tea  than  coffee:  but  we  have  more  of  that  than  c,f  this. — 
Who  has  a  cat?  The  sailors  have  a  cat. — Where  is  their  cat? 
Their  cat  is  in  a  small  basket  of  wood. — Can  the  little  servant 
sweep  the  carpet?  He  can. — Can  he  sweep  the  garret  floor?  Yes, 
he  can  do  it. — Will  you  lend  him  a  broom  to  sweep  that  floor?  We 
cannot  lend  any  to  sweep  the  floor,  but  we  can  lend  one  to  sweep  the 
carpet. — Who  is  going  to  write  to  the  merchant  and  to  the  grocer? 
The  clerks  can  write  to  them. 

Is  the  professor  of  English  going  to  write  a  book?  Yes,  he  is 
going  to  write  one.  He  can  write  a  good  one ;  can  he  not  ?  Yes, 
he  can.  He  is  a  man  of  merit.  (§  39,  N.  3.) — Are  we  not  going  to 
Pratt's  garden  to-night  ?  No,  we  are  not  going  there  to-night,  but 
to-morrow,  at  nine  or  ten  o'clock. — Will  you  give  a  dictionary  to 
your  son?  Yes,  I  will  give  him  a  good  dictionary. — Will  they 
lend  me  their  horse  ?  They  cannot  lend  you  their  horse,  because 
the  old  minister  has  it. — Are  we  going  to  lend  the  lawyer  (§  51j) 
anything?.  We  are  going  to  lend  the  physician  something. — Are 


96 


TWENTIETH    LESSON. 


you  not  going  to  lend  many  things?  Yes,  we  are  going  to  lend 
many  things. — What  are  we  going  to  lend  ?  We  are  going  to  lend 
first,  handkerchiefs,  shawls,  and  hats;  and  afterwards  cloaks,  bags, 
and  parasols,  to  the  friends  of  the  lawyer. — Why?  Because  they 
have  none.  You  are  very  good. — Who  is  busy?  The  grocer  and 
his  clerk,  the  doctor  and  his  neighbor  the  minister,  the  captain  and 
his  son,  are  busy. — Are  you  not  busy,  also  ?  Yes,  we  are  busy,  but 
Rot  very  busy. — Are  you  ready  to  go  to  the  garden  of  the  Scotch- 
man? I  am  ready  to  go,  but  Charles  is  not. — Why  is  he  not  ready? 
He  is  going  to  the  grocer's  to  buy  some  good  salt. — Is  he  going  to 
buy  much?  He  is. — What  does  he  wish  to  do?  He  will  salt  the 
beef  and  the  mutton  which  we  have. — Cannot  the  servants  salt 
them  1  No,  they  cannot,  or  they  will  not. 


VOCABULARY.     3d  Section. 

Are  they  going  ?     Do  they  not  go  ? 

They  are  going,  or  they  are.  They 
go,  They  do  not. 

To  the  museum.     To  the  wharf. 

Are  they  going  to  the  museum  ? 

No,  they  are  going  to  the  wharf. 

Are  the  carpenters  going  to  the  ship  ? 

They  go  there  to  work. 

They  go  neither  to  the  wharf,  nor 
the  museum. 

Are  they  going  to  see  anybody  ? 

They  are  not  going  to  see  anybody. 

What  are  they  going  to  do  ? 

They  are  not  going  to  do  anything. 

Where  are  they  going  ?  They  go 
nowhere. 

Do  they  wish  to  send  the  good  book 
to  the  man  ? 

They  are  going  to  send  it  to  him. 

When  are  they  going  to  send  it  to 
him? 

They  are  going  to  give  it  to  him  to- 
morrow. 

Can  they  lend  you  the  old  diction- 
ary ? 

They  can  (lend  it  to  me)  on  Thursday. 

Cannot  your  friend  lend  you  one  be- 
fore Thursday  ?  No,  he  cannot 
(lend  me  one)  before  Friday  or 
Saturday. 


VOCABULAIRE.     Sine  Section. 
Vont-ils  ?  Ne  vont-ils  pas  ? 

Ils  vont.  Us  ne  vont  pas 

Au  musee.  Au  quai. 

Vont-ils  au  musee  ? 
Non,  ils  vont  au  quai. 
Les  charpentiers  vont-ils   au    bati 
ment  ?  Ils  y  vont  pour  y  travailler. 
Ils  ne  vont  ni  au  quai,  ni  au  nrastfe. 


Vont-ils  voir  quelqu'u 

Ils  ne  vont  voir  personne. 

Que  vont-ils  faire  ? 

Ils  ne  vont  rien  faire. 

Ou  vont-ils  ?     Ils  ne  vont  nul. 


" 

le. 

)nt  nulle  pait. 
le    bo7i    livrt 


Veulent-ils    envoyer 

d  Vhomme  ? 

Ils  vont  le  lui  envoyer. 
Quand  vont-ils  le  lui  envoyer  ? 

Ils  vont  le,  lui  donner  demain. 


Peuvent-ils    vous    preter    ie    vieui 

dictionnaire  ? 

Ils  peuvent  me  le  preter,  jeudi. 
Votre   ami  ne  peut-il   pas  vous  CK 

preter  un  avant  jeudi  ?     Non,  il  ne 

peut   pas   m'en    preter   un   avani 

vendredi  ou  samedi. 


For  the  order  in  which  objective  personal  pronouns  must  be  invariably 
connected  in  sentences,  before  the  verb,  (  $  57),  and  with  the  partitive  pro 
noun  en  ($  59  and  §  60). 


TWENTIETH     LESSON. 


97 


Are    they  going  to  give   me   some 

sugar?     They  will  give  you  some. 
Can   he   lend   some   money  to   my 

brother  ?     Can  he  lend  my  brother 

any  money?     (Dir.  4,  §  51£.) 
II o  cannot  lend  him  any. 
Will  they  lend  us  some  ? 
They  will  not  lend  you  any,  but  they 

can  lend  some  to  them. 
Are  they  going  to  give  me  the  book  ? 
They  are  not  going  to  give  it  to  you, 

but  to  lend  it  to  you. 
A'fQ  you  not  going  to  send  it  to  us  ? 
i  am  not  going  to  send  it  to  you. 
Are  you  gcing  to  send  it  to  them  ? 
We  are  going  to  send  it  to  them. 
Will  you  send  the  cabbages  to  the 

cook  ? 

We  will  send  them  to  him  (to  her). 
Who  is  going  to  give  the  jewels  to  us  ? 
Our  good  friends  are  going  to  give 

them  to  us. 

Am  I  going  to  give  them  to  them  ? 
Can  he  not  lend  them  to  you  ? 

TWENTIETH  EXERCISE.  3d  Sec. — 

Tuesday,  June, 1849.  Mardi, Juin,  1849. 

Who  is  going  to  recite  to-day  ?  We  are  going  to  recite. — Can  you 
copy  the  vocabulary  ?  We  cannot  copy  it ;  we  have  not  time  to 
topy  it;  but  we  can  translate  it. — Will  you  try?  With  pleasure. — 
Is  a  le  the  French  of:  to  the?  No,  Sir,  au  is  the  French  of:  to  the. 
Very  well,  that  is  right. — Can  you  give  me  the  Frencii  of:  to  the 

museum ?     We  can  give  it :  it  is is  it  not?     (Fes,  or  no,  as 

he  case  mry  be.") — And  that  of:  to  the  baskets? — Have  you  that  of: 
Are  \hey  gomg  to  see  any  one?     Yes,  we  have. — What  is  it?     It 

....     Is  it  right?     Yes,  or  no — Who  is  going  to  the 

wharf?    To  which  wharf?    To  Girard  wharf  (au  quai  Girard).    Our 

merchant  is  going  there  to  see  his  ship. — To  see  what  ?    His  ship. 

Is  his  ship  at  the  wharf?     It  is  there.— Has  he  many  sailors?     Ho 

has  more  than  ten. — More  than  what  ?    More  than  ten. — How  many 

has  he  ?    He  has  twelve  or  thirteen. — Has  Jie  so  many  ?   Yes,  he  has. 

Can  you  cut  me  some  bread  ?     I  can  cut  you  some.— Have  you  a 

knifo  to  cut  me  some?     I  have  one. — Can  you  mend  my  gloves? 

f  can  mend  them,  but  I  have  no  wish  to  do  ii     Can  the  tailor  make 

me  a  coat  ?     He  can  make  you  one. — Will  you  speak  to  tne  physi- 

I  will  speak  to  him. — Does  your  son  wish  to  see  me  in  ordei 

n 


Vont-ils  me  donner  du  sucrc  ? 
lis  vont  vous  en  donner. 
Peut-il  preter    de   i' argent   a  men 
frere  ? 

II  ne  peut  pas  lui  en  prtr.er. 
Veulent-ils  nous  e?t  preter  ? 
Us  ne  veulent  pas  vous  en  preter, 

mais  ils  peuvent  leur  en  preter. 
Vont-ils  me  donner  le  livre  ? 
Ils  ne  vont  pas  vous  le  donner,  maiH 

vous  le  preter. 

N'allex-vous  pas  nozts  Z'envoyer? 
Je  ne  vais  pas  vous  Z'envoyer. 
Allez-vous  le  leur  envoyer  ? 
Nous  allons  le  leur  envoyer. 
Voulez-vous  envoyer  les  choux  au 

cuisinier  ? 

Nous  voulons  les  lui  envoyer. 
Qui  va  nous  donner  les  bijoux  ? 
Nos  bons  amis  vont  nous  les  donrer. 

Vais-je  les  leur  donner  ? 

Ne  peut-il  pas  vous  les  preter  ? 

EXERCICE.  3me  Sec. 


03  TWENTIETH     LESSON. 

t'j  speaK  to  me  1  He  wishes  to  see  you  in  order  to  give  you  a  dol 
lar. — Does  he  wish  to  kill  me ?  He  does  not  wish  to  kill  you;  he 
only  wishes  to  see  you. — Does  the  son  of  our  old  farmer  wish  Ic 
kill  an  ox  ^  He  wishes  to  kill  two. 

Who  has  a  mind  to  kill  our  cat?  Our  neighbors  bad  boy  has  &  j 
njind  to  kill  it. — How  much  money  can  you  send  me?  I  can  send 
you  twenty  francs. — Will  you  send  me  my  carpet!  I  will  send  it 
to  you. — Will  you  send  the  shoemaker  anything]  (quelque  chose  au 
COrdonnier?)  I  will  send  him  my  shoes. — Will  you  send  him  you? 
ooats?  No,  I  will  send  them  to  the  tailor. — Can  the  tailor  send  mo 
my  cloak?  He  cannot  send  it  you. — Are  your  children  able  to  write 
to  me?  They  are  able  to  write  to  you.: — Will  you  lend  me  yom 
basket?  I  will  lend  it  you. 

Have  you  a  glass  to  drink  your  wine  ?  I  have  one,  but  I  have  IK 
wine;  I  have  only  tea. — Will  you  give  me  money  to  buy  some?  1 
will  give  you  some,  but  I  have  only  a  little. — Will  you  give  me  that 
which  you  have  with  you?  I  will  give  it  you. — Can  you  drink  as 
much  wine  as  milk?  I  can  drink  as  much  of  the  one  as  of  the 
other. — Has  our  neighbor  any  wood  to  make  a  fire  ?  (du  feu  ?)  He 
has  some  to  make  one,  (pour  cnfairc,)  but  he  has  no  money  to  buy 
bread  and  butter. — Are  you  willing  to  lend  him  some  ?  I  am  willing 
to  lend  him  some. — Do  you  wish  to  speak  to  the  German  ?  I  wish  ; 
to  speak  to  him. — Where  is  he?  He  is  at  the  museum.  Very  well, 
I  am  going  to  see  him  and  speak  to  him. 

RECAPITULATORY    EXERCISE.       RESUME. 

L'adolescent  va-t-il  venir  aujourd'hui?  L' adolescent  va  venii 
pour  nous  apporter  de  Facier  et  du  fer. — Qu'allons-nous  acheter  ?  ' 
Nous  n'allons  rien  acheter  que  du  velours. — N'ai-je  pas  un  bon  ami 
allemand  ?  Vous  n'avez  pas  d'ami  allemand ;  mais  vous  en  avez 
un  suisse. — Les  marchands  de  nouveautes  n'ont-ils  pas  de  chales, 
de  rubans,  de  gants,  de  bas,  de  velours,  de  drap  ?  Si  fait,  ils  ont  de 
tout  eel?  :  et  c'est  ce  que  nous  allons  acheter. — Chez  qui  allez-voua 
acheter  Tout  celo."1  Quelque  chose  chez  celui-ci;  quelque  autre 
chose,  chez  celui-la. — Qui  va  acheter  des  livres  ?  Ces  deux  ecoliers 
vont  en  acheter. — Le  ministre  et  Pavocat  ne  vont-iis  pas  en  acheter 
quelques  uns  aussi?  Si  fait;  mais  il  ne  vont  pas  en  aoheter  beau 
coup. — Chez  qui  vont-ils  les  acheter?  Chez  Appleton. — Le  petit 
gallon  de  Pepieier  ne  va-t-il  pas  y  acheter  un  joli  canif  de  bon 
acier,  un  porte-crayon  d'argent,  un  encrier  de  fer,  du  papier,  et  des 
crayons  ?  Si  fait,  il  va  y  acheter  tous  ces  articles.  Non,  non,  pas 
tons  ces  articles  (Obs.  34.)  Tl  ne  vent  ni  encrier.  ni  canif.-- 


TWENTIETH     LESSON.  90 

M-il  un  canif  et  .in  encrier  1  II  a  encore  un  encrier,  mais  pas  de 
canif. — Pourquoi  ne  veut-il  pas  en  acheter  un  ?  Farce  qiv'il  a  celui 
de  son  frere. 

Comment  se  porte-t-on  chez  le  general?  Tout  le  monde  s'v 
porte  bien.  Je  suis  bien  aise  de  Papprendre. — Et  chez  le  ministre1 
Chez  lui,  plusieurs  personnes  sont  malades. — Qu'a  Jean?  Jean 
a  mal  de  gorge. — Charles  Pa-t-il  aussi?  Non,  celui-la  a  mal 
aux  dents. — Qu'ont  les  deux  petits?  Us  ont  mal  de  tete. — Et 
Sophie  ?  Sophie  n'a  rien.  J7en  suis  bien  aise. — Le  ministre  est-il 
malade1  Oui,  comme  a  l?ordinaire.  II  a  un  mauvais  rhume. — 
Comment  vous  etes-vous  porte?  Je  ne  me  suis  pas  bien  porte. — 
Vous  vous  portez  bien,  a  Fordinaire,  n'est-ce  pas  ?  Je  me 
porte  parfaitetnent  a  Pordinaire,  mais  pas  ce  matin. — II  fait  s\ 
ehaud,  n'est-ce  pas?  Oui,  il  fait  trop  chaud. — Ou  allez-vous?  Je 
vais  chez  Fapothicaire,  chez  le  marchand  de  souliers. —  On  le 
cordonnierj  n'est-ce  pas  ?  Non  pas  le  cordonnier,  mais  le  marchand 
de  souliers. — Est-ce  tout  ?  Non,  je  vais  chez  le  marchand  de  charbon 
et  au  telegraphe  electrique.  Je  vous  souhaite  beaucoup  de  plaisir. — 
J'ai  Phonneur  de  vous  saluer. — Je  vous  souhaite  le  bonjour.  Le 
Russe  se  porte-t-il  mieux  ?  Oui,  un  peu  mieux.  J'espere  que  votre 
frere  se  porte  bien?  Tres-bien,  je  vous  remorcie.  Comment  se 
porte-t-on  chez  lui?  Tout  le  moiide  s'y  porte  bien.  Personne  n'v 
est  malade. 

Votre  cuisinier  a-t-il  assez  d'avgent  pour  acheter  du  bceuf  et  du 
mouton?  Oui,  il  en  a  assez  pour  acheter  Pun  et  Pautre. — Va-t-il 
porter  autant  de  celui-ci  que  de  celui-la  ?  II  va  porter  plus  de 
celui-la  qr.c  de  celui-ci. — Les  matelots  orit-ils  des  billets  pour  acheter 
duchocolat?  Us  n'ont  pas  de  billets;  mais,  ils  ont  de  For.  C7est 
assez  bon,  n"est-ce  pas  ? — En  ont-ils  assez  pour  acheter  des  poulets, 
du  sel,  du  poivre,  des  biscuits,  du  beurre  frais,  du  pain  frais,  du 
bceuf  frais,  du  vin,  du  sucre,  du  the,  du  cafe ....  est-ce  tout?  Non, 
ce  n'est  pas  tout. — Des  choux,  du  vieux  fromage,  du  vinaigre,  du 
grain,  de  la  farine. — De  la  farine  ?  Quel  est  Panglais  de  cela  1 
N'avez-vous  pas  Panglais  de  farine  ?  Non,  nous  ne  Pavons  pas. — 
QuiFa?  Personne  ne  Pa. — Votre  domestique  a  un  baiai  pour 
talayer  le  plancher  du  magasin,  n'est-ce  pas  ?  Non,  il  ir  en  a  pas. — 
Voulez-vous  lui  dormer  un  quart  de  dollar  pour  en  acheter  un?  Je 
vais  lui  en  donner  un. — Je  n?en  ai  pas.  Je  n'ai  que  des  4emi-dol« 
:ars.  N'avez-vous  pas  un  quart  de  dollar?  Non,  je  iren  ai  plus. 

Quel  est  P Anglais  de:  fairc?-  C'est:  to  do,  to  make.  C'estbieiij 

c'est  cela. — De  quelle  conjugaison  est-il  ?  II  est  de  la conjn 

gaison. — Pourquoi  ?  Farce  qu'il  finit  en  : , . , .  Est41  regulier  ? • 

Pourquoi?  Farce  qu-il  n'ost  pas  conjn gue  comme  le  modele. .... 


100  TWENTY     FIRST     LE&SOB. 

(Le  maitre  peut  faire  les  memes  questions  sur  qnelques  auliei 
verbes,  comme  :  Voir — porter — ecrire.)— Quel  est  votre  dernier  vo 

cabulaire  7     C;est  le Quelle  section  '\     La Y  avez-voua 

des  verbesl  Oui;  nous  en  avons  plusieurs. — Quels  verbes  avez- 
vous? Les  avez-vous  dans  votre  catalogue  ?  Avez-vous  dea 

noms  dans  le  vocabulaire  ?  Combien  en  avez-vous?  Lesecoliers 
ont-ils  des  adjectifs  dans  le  leur  ? — En  avez-vous  dans  le  votre  ? — 
L'etranger  en  a-t-il  dans  le  sieu7 — Qu'avons-nous  dans  le  notre  ? — 
Prenez  mon  parapluie  pour  le  preter  a  Robert. — Ou  va-t-il  ?  II  va 
sortir. — Oui7  mais,  011  va-t-il  ?  Ne  va-t-il  pas  au  musee  7  A  qucl 
musee  ?  Sara,  Jean,  et  Guillaume  n'y  vont-ils  pas  aussi  ?  Pouvez- 
vous  sucrer  mon  the  1  Ne  veut-il  pas  sucrer  son  cafe  '\ — N'allez- 
vous  pas  mettre  du  sucre  dans  le  chocolat  1  Nous  allons  y  en 
mettre.  Qu'allez-vous  mettre  dans  le  vin?  Je  ne  vais  rien  y 
mettre. — Pouvez-vous  ecrire  au  commis "?. ...  a  l;epicier  ? . . . .  aux 
f  (rangers?. . .  .a  nos  amis ^. . . . — Quelqu'un  veut-il  tuer  Toiseau  du 

•^etit  enfant  ? Le  cuisinier  a-t-il  tue  les  jeunes  ou  les  vieux 

poulets  ^ 


TWENTY-FIRST  LESSON,  21st.— Vingt  et  wiieme  Legon,  21mo. 


f 


VOCABULARY.    1st  Section. 

INTERROGATIVE    PRONOUNS. 


/  For  persons.     Pour  les  personnes. 
/  Nominative.  Who?  Nominatif.  Qui? 
Object  direct.  Whom?  Regime  direct, 


VOCABULAIRE.    Ire  Section. 

PRONOMS    INTERROGATES. 

For  things.      Pour  les  choses. 
What  ?  Qu'est-ce  qui  ? 

What?  Que?     Qu'?      Quail 

Regime   indirect,  avec    une   prepo- 
sition. 
jTo  what  ?  A  quoi  ? 

Of  or  from  what  ?^j   De  quoi  ? 
'With   what  ?    (what  . .  with  \]   Avef 


quoi  ? 


For  what  ?  (What . .  for  ?)  Pour  quoi  f 


Qui? 
Objcctiva    with  a  preposition./ 

I  To  whom ?}         ^   A  qui? 
[   Of  or  from  whom  ?\   De  qui? 

With  whom?  (whom  . .  with?)  A  vec  qui  ? 

i  For  whom  ?  (whom  ,  .for  ?n  Pour  qui  ? 

•    t  ^  \. 

Qui  ? \Wlio  ?  has  no  plural,  and  always  refers  to  persons,  without  distinct) 

tion  of  se\;  as,  who:  in  Englislu 

Que?(^ana  Quoi  ?  \What  ?  have  no  rlural,  and  always  relate  to  tlungsA 

f     Obs.  43.     As  direct  object,  use  que  before  the  verb  in  an  interrogative*, 
form  ;  and  quoi  after  the  verb,  in  an  affirmative  form.     After  a  preposition  ) 
!     G*e  quoi,  never  que.     [Mind  that  all  those  pronouns  are  not  relative,  but/ 
interrogative.] 

\What  have  they  ?/    Qw'ont-ils  |  What  will  you   sa?/?>  Que  voulez* 

What  do  you  mean?) 


TWENTY-FIRST    LESSON. 


Thej  have,  what?/    Us  out,  quoi.? 

t\Vhat  is  he  going  to  reply  to^  A  quoi 
' 


He 
He 


will  say  what  ?  >  II  veut 
means   what?  .  y    quoi? 


101 
dire, 


He  is  going  to  answei  what  ?     il  vi 


repondre,  a  quoi? 
RJpouore,  4",,(tatv3F  d  6eforc  a  noun. 


va-t-il  repondre  ? 
'o  answer,  to  reply  to} 
Obs.  44.     Eepondre,  taking  d  before  *he  hcun,  coincides  \vich,  to  reply 
to,  better  than  with  to  answer,  which  has  no  preposition  after,  and  the 
scholar  is  invited  mentally  to  connect  repondre  d  with  to  reply  to,  even 
when  to  answer  is  used  in  the  book. 

Repondre  a  I'homme. 

Repondre  aux  hommes. 

A  qui  voulez-vous  repondre  ? 


To  answer  the  man,  (to  reply  to.) 
To  answer  the  mep,  (to  reply  to.) 

hom  do  you  wish  to  answer  ?  (reply 

to?) 

[  wish  to  answer  (reply  to)  my  brother.     Je  veux  repondre  a  mon  ,Tcre , 
To  answer  (reply  to)  him,  her. 
To  answer  (reply  to)  them. 


To  answer  (to  reply  to)  the  note. 
To  answer  (reply  to)  it. 
To  it,  to  them,  (usually  for  things.) 
To  answer  the  notes. 
To  answer  them,  (things.) 
To  ask  a  question  of  some  one,  some- 
body. 

Will  you  ask  me  a  question  ? 
I  am  going  to  ask  you  one. 
In  French.    In  English.    In  German. 

Can  you  answer  me  in  French  ? 

I  believe  so.    I  believe  I  can. 

Has  he  my  book  ?   I  believe  he  has  it. 


Lui  repondre.  ($  47.) 

Leur  repondre,  (pour  les  personneo.) 

(*  47.) 
Re'pondre  au  billet. 
Y  repondre.  ($  47.) 
Y,  (gdneralement  pour  les  choses.) 
Repondre  aux  billets. 
Y  re'pondre,  (pour  les  chose?.) 
Faire   une   question   (fern,  noun)  a 

quelqu'un. 

Voulez-vous  me  faire  une  question  ? 
Je  vais  vous  en  faire  une. 
En  Francois.    En  Anglais.    En  Al 

lemand. 
Pouvez-vous  me  re'pondre  en  Fran- 

$ais  ?  Je  crois  que  oui. 

A-t-il  mon  livre  ?     Je  crois  que  oui. 


06s.  45. — Any  affirmative  answer  after:  I  believe,  may  be  expressed  by: 
que  oui.     A  negative  answer,  by  :  que  non.  (Dir.  6.) 


Can  they  speak  German  well  ? 

I  believe  not.    I  believe  they  cannot. 


Peuvent-ils  bien  parler  1' Allernand  ? 
Je  crois  que  non. 


TWENTY-FIRST  EXERCISE.  1st  Sec. — VINQT  ET  UNIEME  EXERCICE.  Ire  Sec. 

Wednesday,  June, 1849.  Mercredi, Juin,  1849. 

What  are  we  going  to  try  to-day  ?  We  are  going  to  try  to  recite.— 
To  recite  what  ?  To  recite  a  vocabulary. — Which  ?  This  one. — la 
it  the  20th  ?  No.  it  is  not  the  20th,  but  the  last.— It  is  the  :  what? 
The  last,  the  21st.— Very  well.  Will  you  begin?  With  pleasure.— 
Will  you  ask  us  questions  in  French  or  in  English?  I  am  going  to 
ask  you  some  in  English  first,  and  in  French  afterwards. — We  are 
Teady  to  answer  you.  Are  you  ready,  indeed  ?  I  believe  we  are, 
^gue  ota.) — Can  I  begin?  I  believe  you  can. — To  how  many  nofes 
car.  you  reply  (answer)  this  evening?  I  can  reply  to  six  or  seven.— 


7  WENT  i'-  FIRST    LESSON 


Can  you  answer  so  many?  (a  aidant  quc  cela?-}  ]  belie \Tu  I  can.-' 
Have  you  as  many  brothers  as  I  ?  We  have  just  as  many  as  you 
and  more  tliUu  they. — Up\v  jruiny  volumes  of  living's  works  have 
they?  They  have  eight. — Have  they  so  many?  Yes,  indeed,  and 
they  are'  £ci:a£  'to  buy  "n?oVe. — How  many  more?  Two  more,  1 
believe. — Has  Miss  Clara  as  many  cr.ic.wls  as  Miss  Emily  (Emilie)  1 
No,  Miss  Clara  has  less  of  them  than  Miss  Emily. — Have  you  my 
copybook?  1?  No,  I  believe  not. — Has  he  got  it?  He?  I  believo 
net. — Who  has  it?  I  cannot  tell  you. — Have  not  those  children  got 
it?  They?  I  believe  not. — Are  you  not  going  to  give  a  handsome 
fan  to  Miss  Victoria?  Yes,  I  am  going  to  give  her'one. 

Will  you  write  to  the  Italian?  I  will  write  to  him. — Will  your 
brother  write  to  the  English  ?  He  will  write  to  them,  but  they  have 
no  mind  to  answer  him. — Will  you  answer  your  friend?  I  will 
-  answer  him. — But  whom  will  you  answer?  I  will  answer  my  good 
father. — Will  you  not  answer  your  good  friends?  I  will  answer 
them. — Who  will  write  to  you  ?  The  Russian  wishes  to  write  to 
me. — Will  you  answer  him?  I  will  not  answer  him. — Who  will 
write  to  our  friends?  The  children  of  our  neighbor  will  write  to 
them. — Will  they  answer  them?  They  will  answer  them.  To 
whom  do  you  wish  to  write  ?  I  wish  to  write  to  the  Russian. — Will 
he  answer  you?  He  wishes  to  answer  me,  but  he  cannot. — Can  the 
Spaniards  answer  us?  They  cannot  answer  us,  but  we  can  answer 
them. — To  whom  do  you  wish  to  send  this  note  ?  I  will  send  it 
to  the  joiner. — From  whom  is  this  boy  going  to  receive  a  hat?  He 
is  going  to  receive  one  from  his  friend,  the  lawyer. — For  whom  is 
this  coat?  It  is  for  our  father. — Whom  are  these  gloves  for?  They 
are  for  our  friend's  clerk.  With  whom  are  your  children  going  to  the 
museum  ?  They  are  going  there  with  the  old  professor. — Are  they 
not  also  going  to  the  wharf  to  see  the  merchant's  beautiful  vessel f 
Yes,  the)^  are  going  there  with  the  young  teacher,  the  old  captain, 
and  the  ^ood  sailor. 


VOCABULARY,  2d  Section. 
The  play,  the  theatre.        The  lall. 
To  or  at  the  play.     To  the  theatres. 
To  the  ball.  To  the  balls. 

The  parlor,  drawing-room. 
The  storehouse,  magaziie,  warehouse. 
This  counting-house. 
The  market.     In,  at,  to  the  market. 
There,  thither.     To  go  there  ;  to  be 

there. 
To  send  there.    To  carry  it  there, 


VOCABULAIRE,  2de  Sec. 


Le  theatre. 
Au  theatre. 
Au  bal. 
Le  salon. 

Le  marchi. 
Y. 

Y  envoyer. 


Le  bal. 

Aux  theatres. 

Aux  bals. 

Le  grand  salon. 


Au  marche. 


Y  aller. 


Yetra 
L'y  porter. 


TWENTY  "FIRST     LESSON 


Will  they  go  to  the  theatre  ? 
They  wish  to  go  there. 
Will"  you  go  there  ?     I  will.  (Dir.  1.) 
Are  you  going  now  ?         I  am. 
your  cousin  in  the  parlor  ? 
is  ;  or,  he  is  there.     He  is  not. 
Vly  cousin.  This  cousis. 

Where  is  our  cousin  ? 

9c  yow  &TZOM;  ?     I  know  not  (do  not}. 
[>o  you  know  the  French  of:  to  see  ? 
I  do.     I  know  it.     I  do  know  it. 
[  know  something.     I  know  nothing, 

Do  you  know  the  French  of:  to  have  ? 

'.  do  not  know  it. 

I  will  tell  you  (I  am  going  to).  (19  N.  1.) 


To  have,  to  get. 
To  have  to. 


To  have  got. 


Veulent-ils  aller  au  theatre  ? 

Us  veulent  y  aller. 

Voulez-vous  y  aller  ?  Je  veux  y  alier, 

Y  allez-vous  a  present  ?      J'y  vaia. 

Votre  cousin  est-il  dans  le  salon  ? 

II  y  est.  II  n'y  est  pas. 

P.ion  cousin.         Ce  cousin. 

Ou  est  notre   cousin?       Oil  notro 

cousin  est-il? 

Savez-vous  ?  Je  ^e  sais  pas. 

Savez-vous  le  Fram;ais  de  :  to  see  ? 
Je  le  sais. 

Je  sais  quelque  chose.  Je  ne  sais  rien. 
Savez-vous  le  Frangais  de  :  to  have? 
Je  ne  le  sais  pas. 
Je  vais  vous  le  dire. 
Avoir. 
Avoir  d. 


Obs.  46. — When  avoir,  to  have,  expresses  obligation,  use  the  preposition 
d,  before  the  following  infinitive,  and  repeat  it  with  each  verb. 


What  have  you  to  do  ? 
I  have  to  copy  and  translate  that. 
I  have  nothing  to  recite,  nor  read. 
Have  your  cousins  nothing  to  say  ? 
Yes,  they  have  something  to  say. 
What  has  John  to  answer  (reply  to)  ? 


Qu'avez-vous  d  faire  ? 
J'ai  a  copier  et  a  tiaduirc  cela. 
Je  n'ai  rien  a  reciter,  ni  a  lire. 
Vos  cousins  n'ont-ils  rien  a  dire  ? 
Si  fait.    Us  ont  quelque  chose  a  dire. 
A  quoi  Jean  a-t-ii  a  rdpondre  ?  Jean 

a  a  re'pondre  a  quoi  ? 
II  a  a  repondre  a  nos  questions. 
Alors.        Si,  s'ii.        S'il  peut. 


He  has  to  answer  our  questions. 
Then.          If,  if  he.          If  he  can. 

06s.  47. — The  ?',  of  si,  is  cut  off,  only  when  followed  by  il,  or  Us,  but.  in 
no  other  case.     If  he  has,  they  have  ;  s'il  a;  s'ils  ont — s'il  veut,  &c. 
We  are  well.  |  Nous  nous  portons  bien. 

TWENTY-FIRST  EXERCISE.  2d  Sec. — EXERCICE  21ME.  2de  Sec. 
Thursday,  June 1849.  Jeudi Juin,  1849. 

Good  morning,  ladies  and  gentlemen !  I  hope  you  are  well. 
Yes,  Sir,  we  are  well,  thank  you. — How  is  Miss  Emily's  cousin? 
Is  he  better  ?  I  believe  he  is. — How  is  )rour  brother's  cold  ?  His 
cold  is  better,  but  he  has  the  toothache. — I  am  sorry  to  hear  it. — Do 
you  know  how  the  general  is?  Yes,  I  know  that  he  is  well;  but 
Captain  Henry  is  sick. — I  know  it;  but  he  is  better;  is  he  not?  I 
cannot  tell  you. — What  have  we  to  do  this  evening?  We  have  to 
recite,  as  usual. — Who  is  going  to  begin  ?  I  and  he. — Why  not  ho 
and  I?  Very  well;  he  and  I,  then. —  I  am  going  to  ask  (faire)  a 
question  of  the  one  and  the  other,  (a  Vun  ct  d  Vautre.}--Vfi\l  you 
answer  me  in  French?  I  am  going  to  try. — What  have  you  got? 


[04  TWENTY-FIRST     LESSON. 

Nothing. — What  have  you  to  do?  I  have  only  to  write. — Whdl 
have  you  to  write?  I  have  to  write  a  note — To  whom?  To  the 
carpenter's  cousin. — What  have  you  to  give  him?  We  have  to 
give  him  some  fresh  bread  and  butter. — Has  your  servant  anything 
to  drink?  I  believe  that  he  has  to  drink  some  tea. — Are  we  not 
going  to  drink  some;  too?  Yes,  we  are  going  to  drink  some. — A1 
what  o'clock?  At  eight. — At  half  past  eight,  you  mean  (vous  YOU- 
!ez  dire). — No,  I  mean  at  a  quarter  to  nine. — Have  we  to  send  much 
rice  to  the  cook  of  Mr.  Girard's  vessel?  Yes,  we  have  to  send  him 
much. — Has  he  any  ?  I  believe  that  he  has  but  little  more. — Then, 
we  have  to  send  it  to  him  to-day;  have  we  not?  Yes,  indeed. — 
Who  is  going  to  take  it  to  him  ?  Do  you  know  ?  Yes,  I  do. — Who  1 
The  joiner's  little  boy. 

When  will  the  lawyer  go  to  the  play  '<  He  is  going  only  to-mor- 
row night. — When  can  his  cousin  go  with  him?  He  cannot  go  to 
the  play  if  he  is  going  to  a  ball. — To  which  ball  is  he  going  ?  To  that 
of  the  physician. — Is  he  going  to  give  a  grand  ball  ?  Yes,  he  is,  to- 
morrow evening. — Where  is  your  son  ?  I  believe  he  is  at  the  counting- 
room. — Where  are  they  going  to  take  me  ?  To  the  counting-room 
in  their  warehouse; — Where  are  the  cook  and  the  grocer  going?  If 
they  are  going  anywhere,  they  are  going  to  market. — Can  I  go  with 
them?  Yes,  you  may  (Dir.  1),  if  you  have  nothing  to  do. — To 
which  market  are  they  going?  To  the  large  one. — Are  the  farme: 
and  his  cousin  at  market  ?  No,  they  are  in  the  shoe-store. — Can  yon 
come  to  my  house  to  go  to  the  wharf?  I  have  no  wish  to  go  to  your 
house  first,  and  afterwards  to  the  wharf;  but  I  am  ready  to  go  to 
the  wharf  now. — Have  you  your  hat,  gloves,  and  umbrella?  Um- 
brella? Is  it  bad  weather?  Yes,  it  is.  Then,  I  will  not  go  there 
but  to  the  museum,  if  you  wish  to  go  with  me. — Are  they  going 
too?  Yes,  they,  also. — Very  well;  then  we  may  go  (y),  if  you  are 
ready, — Is  the  picture  of  the  Italian  in  the  parlor?  Yes,  it  is  there 
— Is  ine  servant  going  to  sweep  the  parlor?  No,  he  cannot  sweep 
it  now. — Why  can  he  not?  Because  I  believe  somebody  is  in  the 
parlor. — Who  is  in  it  (y)  ?  Madam  Vernet  and  her  cousin  Frede- 
rick.— Will  you  send  them  some  biscuits,  fresh  butter,  and  some 
wine  ?  I  cannot,  because  the  servant  is  not  at  home. — If  you  wili 
send  them  something,  I  can  take  it  to  them  ;  can  I  not'*  Very  well 
you  may,  if  you  wish. — How  many  biscuits  have  you  ?  I  hav<« 
only  six  or  seven  j  is  that  enough  ?  It  is. 

*h!  Since.  f  Ah!  Depuie. 

riince  last  Sunday.  I  Depuis  dimanche  dernier. 

Not  quite  well.  j  Pas  tout-a-lait  bien. 

I  am  glad  to  see  you,  them,  liim.  I  Je  suis  Uien  aise  de  vous,  les,  le  voir» 


TWENTY-SECOND     LESBOK 


105 


rWJSNTY-SECOND   LESSON,  2 

VOCABULARY.  1st  Section. 

To,  ai,  or  in  the  corner  ....  corners. 

To,  at,  or  in  the  hole  ....  holes. 

In  the  hole.  In  the  holes. 

To,  or  at  the  bottom. 

In  the  bottom  of  the  bag  ...  of  this 
chest. 

At  lha  corner  of  the  fire  ...  of  the 
garden. 

The  office.          The  lawyer's  office. 

This  workshop.  The  joiner's  work- 
shop. 

To,  or  at  the  end.        The  road. 

At  the  end  of  the  road  ...  of  the  roads. 

That  cousin  of  yours,  of  mine,  of  his, 
cf  theirs,  &c. 

2>  send  for.     To  go  for ,  to  fetch. 

To  come  for.     To  come  for  me. 

To  send  for  me     To  go  for  them. 

Whom  are  you  going  to  send  for  ? 

I  am  going  to  send  for  nobody. 

At  what  o'clock  are  you  coming  for 

him  ?  (192,  N.  2.) 
Are  you  going  for  any  one  ? 
I?     No.  But  John  is  going  for  his 

cousin,  who  is  in  our  office. 

Is  not  the  cat  in  the  workshop  ?  Yes, 

it  is  at  the  end. 
These  gentlemen  are  going  to  send 

for  cakes  and  wine  ;  are  they  not  ? 
Yes,  they  are  going  to  send  for  some. 
IVill  your  boy  go  for  some  fresh 

butter  and  vinegar  for  us  ? 

Ele  will  not  go  for  any  for  you. 

He  is  very  kind  (or  good),  indeed  ! 
Are  you  not  going  to  send  for  the 
doctor,  for  the  clerk  who  is  sick  ? 

Yes,  we  are  going  to  send  for  him, 

He  will  send  for  my  brothers. 
No,  IID  has  a  mind  to  go  for  them. 


2d. — Vingt-dcuxieme  Lcgoa,  22m& 

VOCABULAIRE.    Ire  Section. 
Au  coin.  Aux  coins. 

Au  trou.  Aux  trous. 

Dans  le  trou.        Dans  les  troua. 
Au,  fond. 
Au  fond  du  sac.    Au  fond  de  ce  coflre 

Au  coin  du  feu.   Au  coin  du  jardin 

Le  bureau.      Le  bureau  de  PavocaU 
Get  atelier.     L' atelier  dumenuisier. 

Au  bout.          Le  chemin. 

Au  bout  du  chemin  . . .  des  chcmins. 

Votre,  mon,  son,  ieur,  &c.,  cousin* 
($  108.) 

Envoyer  chercher.    Aller  chercher. 

Venir  chercher.        Ven ir  me  ckercker. 

M'envoyer  chercher.  Les  aller  cher- 
cher. 

Qui  allez-vous  envoyer  chercher  ? 

Je  nevais  envoyer  chercher  personne, 

A  quelle  heure  allez-vous  venir  It! 
chercher  ? 

Allez-vous  chercher  quelqu'un? 

Moi  ?  Non.  Mais  Jean  va  chercher 
son  cousin,  qui  est  dans  notre  bu- 
reau. 

Le  chat  n'est-il  pas  dans  Patelicr  ? 

Si  fait,  il  est  au  bout. 

Ces  messieurs  vont  envoyer  chercher 
des  gateaux  etduvin,  n'est-cepaa? 

Oui,  ils  vont  en  envoyer  chercher. 

Votre  garcon  veut-il  aller  cherchci 
du  beurre  frais  et  du  vinaigre  pour 
nous  ? 

II  ne  veut  pas  en  aller  chercher  pom 
vous. 

II  est  tres-bon,  en  verite ! 

N'allez-vous  pas  envoyer  chercher  le 
docteur  pour  le  commis  qui  cut 
malade  ? 

Si  fait.  Nous  allons  Penvoyer  cher- 
cher. 

II  veut  envoyer  chercher  mes  freres 

Non,  il  a  en  vie  de  les  aller  chercher 


106 


TWENTY-  SECOND    LES8OH. 


Will  you  send  for  more  glasses,  or 

have  we  enough  ? 
I  will  send  for  more,  because  we 

have  only  three. 


Voulez-vouB  envoyer  chercher  pltii 
de  verres,  ou  en  avons-nous  aseez  1 

Je  veux  en  envoyer  chercher,  parce 
que  nous  n'en  avons  que  trois. 


TWENTY-SECOND  EXERCISE.  1  si  Sec. — VINGT-DEUXI^ME  EXEHCICE.  Ire  Sec. 
Friday,  June, 1849.  Yendredi, June,  1849. 

All !  Mr.  Robert;  I  am  glad  to  see  you.  How  have  you  been  since 
last  Monday?  I  have  not  been  very  well. — Ah!  indeed!  I  am 
very  sorry  to  hear  it. — But  you  are  well  now,  I  hope?  Not  quite 
but  much  better.  Thank  you. — How  is  it  with  you  at  home  ?  (Com 
ment  se  porte-t-on  chez  vous  ?)  We  are  all  well,  at  your  service. — It 
is  cold,  is  it  not  1  Yes,  it  is. — Where  is  Samuel  going  ?  I  am  going 
to  send  him  for  something. — At  what  o'clock  are  you  going  to  send 
trim?  At  half  past  nine. — Is  it  not  yet  half  past  nine  ?  No,  not 
quite.  It  is  only  a  quarter  past  nine.  Then  he  can  wait  a  quarter  of 
an  hour. — What  is  he  going  for l  He  is  going  to  buy  sugar,  biscuits. 
and  cheese,  if  we  have  no  more. — Who  is  in  the  garden'1  Thf 
children  of  our  friends  are  there. — Will  you  send  for  the  physician^ 
We  will  send  for  him. — Who  will  go  for  him  at  the  joiners  work- 
shop ?  Little  Thomas  (Thomas)  will  go  for  him. — Can  he  do  it1 
Yes,  indeed. — Will  you  give  -me  my  broth?  Will  you  drink  some 
broth  now  ?  I  wish  to  drink  a  little. — Where  isit'*  It  is  at  the 
corner  of  the  fire.  I  will  give  it  to  you  (vais). 

Will  you  give  little  Thomas  three  sous  to  fetch  some  milk?  Is 
that  enough  ?  It  is  enough. — Where  is  he  going  to  buy  it  ?  He  can 
buy  it  at  the  market. — Very  well.  I  am  going  to  give  him  three 
cents  to  get  milk,  and  another  to  buy  a  cake.  You  are  very  good. 
But  I  have  no  money  with  me ;  it  is  at  the  counting-house. — Will 
you  go  for  it  ?  I  am  not  afraid  to  go  for  it. — Will  you  buy  my  Web- 
ster's Dictionary?  I  cannot;  I  have  no  more  money. — No  more 
money  (plus  d') !  No,  I  have  no  more  with  me. — Where  is  your 
nat?  At  the  bottom  of  the  garret,  in  a  hole. — In  which  hole  is  it? 
In  its  hole. — Where  is  that  old  man's  dog  ?  It  is  in  a  corner  of  the 
ship  Have  the  sailors  any  cats?  Yes,  they  have. — Has  not  the 
servant  to  sweep  the  office  and  parlor  ?  He  has  to  sweep  them. — 
Has  their  cook  got  a  good  fire  ?  He  has  an  excellent  fire,  because 
he  has  to  burn  the  coffee. — Has  he  not  to  make  tea?  He  has  to 
make  it. — Where  is  our  cat  ?  I  believe  it  is  in  Miss  Sophia's  basket 
in  the  parlor. — Is  not  my  Fleming's  Dictionary  in  the  parlor?  YeSj 
>.  is  there,  and  Surenne's  also. 

Have  you  anything  to  do?  I  have  something  to  do. — What  have 
pou  to  do  ?  I  have  to  mend  my  clothes,  and  go  to  the  end  of  the 


TWENTY-SECOND     LESSON. 


107 


road.  —  Why  have  you  to  go  to  the  end  of  the  road  I  I  am  going 
to  the  grocer's  to  buy  some  grain  for  our  bird  and  chickens. — Is  not 
the  professor  there  with  his  scholars,  the  minister,  the  apothecary, 
the  lawyer,  and  the  physician  T  Yes,  I  believe  they  are  there. — 
Can  you  give  me  as  much  fresh  butter  as  bread  ?  I  can  give  you 
more  of  the  latter  than  of  the  former. — Can  that  cousin  of  youra 
(votre)  drink  as  much  wine  as  coffee  or  tea?  He  cannot  drink  so 
much  of  the  former  as  of  the  two  latter.  Have  you  to  speak  to  any 
one  ?  I  have  to  speak  to  several  men,  if  I  can  see  them  at  the  end 
of  the  road.  They  are  in  the  work-shop.  Very  well,  I  will  go 
(192,  N.  1)  there  to  say  a  few  words  to  them. — Have  you  not  to 
answer  this  young  man's  last  note  r  No,  we  have  not  to  answer 
it.  (y.  06.  44.) 


Hier.  Hier  matin. 

Hier  soir  ou  hier  au  soir. 


Entrez. 
Quelques  uns. 


Car. 


Yesterday.    Yesterday  morning. 
Yesterday   evening ;    last  evening, 

night. 

Come  in,  walk  in,  go  in.  For  (because) 
Some   (meaning,   some  of  us,  you, 

them). 

VOCABULARY.    2d  Section. 
Thou.  Thou  ha'»t.  Hast  thou  ?  Thou 

hast  not. 

Hast  thou  my  pencil-case  ? 
Thou  art.   Art  thou  ?    Thou  art  not. 
Art  thou  not  busy  and  in  a  hurry  ? 
I  am  busy,  but  not  hurried. 
Are  the  farmers  tired  ? 

Obs.  48.  Adjectives  agree  in  number  with  the  nouns  or  pronouns  they 
qualify.    If  the  noun  or  pronoun  is  in  the  plural,  the  adjective  takes  an  s. 


VOCABULAIRE.    2de  Section- 
Tu.1     Tu  as.     As-tu?     Tun'apas. 

As-tu  mon  porte-crayon  ? 

Tu  es.       Es-tu  ?       Tu  n'es  pas. 

N'es-tu  pas  occupe  et  pressd  ? 

Jc  suis  occupe,  mais  non  pas  presse. 

Les  fermiers  sont-ils  fatigues  ? 


They  are  not  tired  but  busy. 

Thou  wilt,  thou  wishest,  (art  willing.) 

Canst  thoq  !    Art  thou  able  ?    Thou 

canst,  &c. 

Art  thou  willing  to  make  my  fire  ? 
I  am,  if  I  can. 
Art  thou  afraid  ?  cold  or  hungry  ? 


am  not  afraid.,  but 
hungry. 


I  am  cold  and 


Us  ne  sont  pas  fatigues  mais  occupes. 
Tuveux.  Veux-tu?  Tuneveuxrien, 
Peux-tu  ?  Tu  peux.  Tu  ne  pens 

pas. 

Veux-tu  faire  mon  feu  ? 
Je  veux  le  faire,  si  je  peux. 
As-tu  peur  ?     As-tu  froid  ?     As-tu 

faim  ? 
Je  n'ai  pas  peur  ;  mais  j'ai  froid  et 

faim. 


1  In  addressing  one  another  the  French  use  the  second  person  plural,  as  in 
English.  The  second  person  singular,  however,  is  employed :  1.  In  sub- 
tree or  serious  style,  and  in  poetry ;  2.  It  is  a  mark  of  intimacy  among 
friends,  and  is  used  by  parents  and  children,  brothers  and  sisters,  husbands 
and  wives,  towards  one  another  :  in  general  it  implies  familiarity  founded 
an  affection  and  fondness,  or  hatred  and  contempt. 


108 


TWEHTY-SECOHB     LESSON, 


Art  thou  nei.  her  ashamed  nor  sleepy  ? 

Art  thou  going  ?  Thou  art  not  going. 

Dost  thou  go  there  ?  Thou  art  go- 
ing. Thou  art  not  going. 

Thou  goest  to  the  work-shop,  dost 
thou  not  ? 

To  be  sure  ;  of  course  ;  without  doubt. 

Immediately.      Soon,  VERY  SOON. 

To  sell  something  to  somebody. 

What  are  you  going  to  sell  the  Swiss  ? 

We  are  not  going  to  sell  him  any- 
thing. 

To  tell,  (to  say)  something  to  9>}*ne  one. 

Wilt  thou  say  a  word  to  TLfOKias  ? 

Yes,  I  will  tell  him  one. 

To  tell ....  to ...  (a  before  the  noun  ; 
de,  before  the  infin.) 

Will  you  tell  the  boy  to  bring  some 
coals  ? 

I  will  tell  him  to  do  it.  (192,  N.  1.) 

Thee,  to  thee.  It  to  thee.  Them  to 
thee. 

Thy. . . .  Thy  thimble.  Thy  thim- 
bles. 

Thine. 

Some  to  thee,  thee  some.  I  can  give 
thee  some. 

In  the  morning,  (meaning)  any  morn- 
ing. 

In  the  evening,  (that  is)  any  evening. 

TWENTY-SECOND  EXERCISE.  2d  Sec. — VINGT-DEUXIEME  EXERCICE.  2de  Sec 
Saturday, June,  1849.  Samedi, Juin,  1849. 

Bonjour,  Mr.j  erurez,  prenez  un  siege  et  asseyez-vous.  Avec 
plaisir,  car  je  suis  fatigue. — Vous  n'etes  pas  malade,  j'espere  ? 
Non,  je  ne  suis  que  fatigue. — Comment  vous  etes-vous  porte  depuis 
hier  matin?  Tres-bien,  comme  a  1'ordinaire.  Et  vous?  Moi  aussi. 
Quelqu'un  est-il  malade  chez-vous  ?  Non?  personne  n'est  malade  a 
la  maison  depuis  dimanche  dernier. — Votre  cousin  1'avocat  est-ii 
tout-a-fait  bien  ?  Non;  pas  tout-a-fait  bien ;  mais  beancoup  mieux. 
J'en  suis  bien  aise. 

Who  is  in  the  joiner's  workshop  ?  The  three  boys  are  there. — 
What  have  they  to  do  ?  They  have  a  great  deal  to  do. — Can  they 
do  it  ?  To  be  sure. — Have  they  as  much  to  do  as  the  carpenter's  or 
ihe  baker's  boys  ?  They  have  just  as  much. — Hast  thou  enough  to 
study?  To  be  sure. — Hast  thou  too  much?  No,  riot  too  much,  but 
enough.— Art  thou  going  to  copy  thy  exercise  soor  ?  I  am  going  to 


N'as-tu  rii  honte  ni  soiv.mcil  ? 
Vas-tu?     Tu  vas.     Tu  ne  vas  pas 
Y  vas-tu  ?     Tu  y  vas.     T  a  n'y  vas 

pas. 
Tu  vas  a  1' atelier,  n'est-ce  pas  ? 

Sans  doute. 

Tout  de  suite.       Bientot. 
Vendre  quelqiie  chose  d  quelquhin. 
Qu'allez-vous  vendre  au  Suisse  ? 
Nous  n' aliens  rien  lui  vendre. 

Dire  (*  4)  quelque  chose  d  quelqu'vn. 
Veux-tu  dire  un  mot  a  Thomas  ? 
Oui,  je  veux  lui  en  dire  un. 
Dire  a  . . . .  de  . . .  (d,  avant  le  nom  , 

dc,  avant.  1'infinitif.) 
Voulez-vous  dire  au  garcon  d'appoi 

ter  du  charbon  ? 
Je  vais  lui  dire  de  le  faire. 
Te,  t'.      Te  le.      Te  les. 

Ton,  sing.  Tes,  plur.— Ton  de.  Tbg 

d<5s. 

Le  tien.  Les  tiens. 

T'en.  Je  peux  t'-en  donner. 

t  Le  matin, 
t  Le  soir. 


TWENTY-SECOND     LES3O1T.  109 

copy  it  immediately. — What  will  thy  brother  do  first?  He  will  first 
read,  tnen  translate,  and  afterwards  write. — Canst  thou  translate 
well?  Yes,  when  I  wish  to  do  it. — To  how  many  corners  is  John 
going?  He  goes  only  to  thiee. — To  how  many  lawyers  hast  thou  to 
speak  ?  I  have  to  speak  to  four. — When  hast  thou  to  speak  to  them  .- 
This  evening. — At  what  o'clock  ?  At  a  quarter  to  nine. — Not  before  ? 
I  believe  not. — When  canst  thou  go  to  the  office  of  the  big  general  ? 
I  can  go  there  only  in  the  morning  (to-morrow  morning'). — At  what 
o'clock  ?  At  half  past  seven. — When  wilt  thou  go  to  the  old  French- 
man's? I  am  going  to  his  house  immediately. — Will  thou  not  go 
first  to  the  hatter's  store,  or  work-shop,  to  choose  a  hat?  Oh,  yes,  1 
have  to- go  there  first,  and  then  to  the  Frenchman's. — Will  thou  go 
to  the  physician's  to-morrow  morning,  or  to-morrow  evening?  I  will 
go  in  the  morning,  at  a  quarter  past  ten,  if  it  is  fine  weather,  or  at  a 
quarter  of  eight  in  the  evening. 

Have  you  to  write  as  many  notes  as  the  Englishman?  I  have  to 
write  fewer  of  them  than  he. — Will  you  speak  to  the  German?  I 
will  speak  to  him. — When  will  you  speak  to  him?  At  present. — 
Where  is  he  ?  He  is  in  his  office,  at  the  other  end  of  the  wood, — 
Will  you  go  to  the  market?  I  will  go  thither  to  (pour}  buy  some 
linen. — Do  thy  neighbors  not  wish  to  go  to  the  museum  and  wharf? 
They  cannot  go  there ;  they  are  fatigued,  and  too  busy  to  go.  (y.) — 
Hast  thou  the  courage  to  go  to  the  wood  in  the  evening?  I  have 
the  courage  to  go  thither,  but  not  in  the  evening. — Are  your  children 
able  to  answer  my  notes  ?  They  are  able  to  answer  them. — What 
dost  thou  wish  to  say  to  the  servant  ?  I  wish  to  tell  him  to  make 
the  fire  and  to  sweep  the  warehouse,  our  office,  and  the  boy's  gar- 
vet. — Wilt  tLou  tell  thy  brother  to  sell  me  his  horse?  I  will  tell 
him  to  sell  it  to  thee. — What  do  you  wish  to  tell  me?  I  wish  to  tell 
you  a  word. — Whom  do  you  wish  to  see  ?  I  wish  to  see  the  Scotch- 
man.— Has  thou  to  tell  him  to  send  thee  some  milk?  I  have  to  tell 
him  to  send  me  some. — Will  you  tell  your  cousin  to  go  to  the  gene- 
ral's in  the  morning,  for  he  wishes  to  see  him.  \Vith  pleasure. — 
Which  book  does  my  brother  wish  to  sell  them?  He  wishes  to  sell 
only  thine  and  his  own.- — Thou  hast  the  last  exercise,  hast  thou  not! 
Yes,  I  have  it. — My  young  friend  wishes  to  see  me,  does  he  not? 
I  believe  he  does. — He  has  a  mind  to  see  thee,  to  tell  thee  something 
pretty. 


112 


LESSOR. 


counting-house  ?  No,  he  is  not  going  there. — Is  he  going  to  slai 
here  ?  Yes,  he  is. — Why  ?  Because  he  has  a  sore  thumb  and  finger, 
and  he  cannot  write. — Cannot  his  clerk  write  for  him ?  Yes,  he  can; 
and  brother  is  going  to  send  for  him  to  do  it. — Wilt  thou  come  foi 
John  at  seven  ?  With  pleasure. 

Since  I  had  the  pleasure  of  seeing 

you,  of  seeing  them,  him. 
I  have  been  perfectly  well. 
Oh  !  Will  vou  come  in  and  sit  down  ? 


I  can  neither  go  in  nor  sit  down. 

Many  thanks. 

The  heat.        Too  warm,  too  hot. 

VOCABULARY.    2d  Section. 
Nted.          To  have  need  of. .  . . 
To  have  need  of  it.         To  want  it. 
To  be  in  want  of  it,        To  have  use 

for  it. 

I  have  need  of  that.       I  want  that. 
I  am  in  want  of  it.  I  have  need  of  it. 
Have  you  need  of  this  knife  ? 
Do  you  want  this  knife  ?  (in  want  of) 
[  do  not  want  it,  (have  no  need  for  it.) 
Are  we  in  want  of  these  scissors  ? 
I  believe  that  you  have  need  of  them. 
Do  you  want  them  any  more  ? 
I  do  not  want  them  any  more. 
Has  he  need  of  money  ? 
He  has  great  need  of  it. 
He  is  much  in  want  of  »t. 
Has  the  merchant  need  of  any  ? 
He  does  not  want  any. 
Who  wants  or  has  need  of  any  ? 
Nobody  wants  any. 
They  have  need  of  it.  of  them,  of 

some. 

Do  John  and  Charles  need  the  horses  ? 
Have  J.  and  C.  need  of  the  horses  ? 
They  do  not  want  them. 
Of  what  ?     Of  what  have  you  need  ? 
I  have  need  of  all  that. 
I  want  nothing. 
What  is  he  in  want  of? 
What  does  he  want  ? 
What  has  he  need  of? 
(He  wants)  nothing,  that,  everything. 
To  be  acquainted  with.      To  know. 


Depuis  que  je  n'ai  eu  le  plaisir  da 
vous  voir,  de  les  voir,  de  le  voir. 

Je  me  suis  parfaitement  porte. 

Oh !  Voulez-vous  entrer  ct  vom 
asseoir  ? 

ue  ne  peux  ni  entrer  ni  m'asseoir 

Je  vous  rends  graces. 

Le  chaud.  Trop  chaud. 

VOCABULAIRE.    2de  Section 
Besoin.          Avoir  Itesoin  de  .  . . 

> 

>  En  avoir  besoin.  ($  50.) 

I 

J'ai  besoin  de  cela. 

J'en  ai  besoin. 

•  Avez-vous  besoin  de  ce  couteau  ? 

Je  n'en  ai  pas  besoin. 
Avons-nous  besoin  de  ces  ciseaus  \ 
Je  crois  que  vous  en  avez  besoin. 
En  avez- vous  encore  besoin  ? 
Je  n'en  ai  plus  besoin. 
A-t-il  besoin  d' argent  ? 

•  II  en  a  grand  besoin. 

Le  marchand  en  a-t  il  besoir  ? 
II  n'en  a  pas  besoir?. 
Qui  en  a  besoin  ? 
Personne  n'en  a  U^.soin. 
Us  en  ont  besoin. 

i    Jean  et  Charleu    *nt-ils  besoin  dci 
i        chevaux  ? 

Us  n'en  ont  pas  beboin. 

De  quoi  ?  De  quoi  avez-vous  besoir  1 

J'ai  besoin  de  tout  cela. 

Je  n'ai  besoin  de  rien. 

f.  De  quoi  a-t-il  besoin  ?  ($  95.) 

De  rien.     De  cela.     De  tort, 
Corma?tre»*  4. 


TWENTY    THIRD     LESSON. 


113 


J*o  be  acquainted  with  (to  know)  a 
man ;  somebody ;  a  good  teacher. 
To  be  acquainted  with  nobody. 
Of  me,      of  thee,     of  him,      of  it. 
Of  us,          of  you,          of  them. 
Is  your  father  in  want  of  me  ? 
He  is  in  want  of  you. 
Are  you  in  want  of  these  books  ? 
I  am  in  want  of  them. 
Is  he  ii;  want  of  my  brothers  ? 

He  13  in  want  of  them. 

Does  he  want  that  ?  He  does  (want  it.) 
Whom  do  I  want  ?  (have  I  need  of?) 
You  want  the  lawyer's  clerk. 

W/itil  else  or  what  inore  ? 


Connaitre  un  liomnic  ;    quelqu'un; 

un  bon  maitrc. 
Ne  connaitre  personnc. 
De  moi,     de  toi,     de  lui,   ^cn,  §  47.- 
De  nous,      de  vous,      d'eux,  (en.) 
Votre  pure  a-t-il  besoin  de  moi  ? 
II  a  besoin  de  vous. 
Avez-vous  besoin  de  ces  livres  ? 
J'CTI  ai  besoin. 
A-t-il  besoin  de  mes  frures? 
II  abesoin  d'eux.  (pour  les  personnea., 
II  en  a  besoin.  (pers.  et  choses.) 
A-t-il  besoin  de  cela  ?   11  en  a  besoiiL, 
De  qui  ai-je  besoin  ? 
Vous    avez   besoin  du  commis   do 

1'avocat. 
Quoi  encore  ?     De  quoi  encore  I 


TWENTY-THIRD  EXERCISE.  2d  Sec. — VINGT-TROISIEME  EXERCICJE,  2de  Sec. 
Ecrivez,  en  Fran9ais,  le  quantiemc  du  rnois. 

1  am  much  pleased  at  seeing  you.  Miss  Clara.  Sit  down;  tako 
this  seat.  How  do  you  do,  this  morning  ?  I  am  pretty  well ;  better 
than  last  Tuesday. — I  am  glad  of  it.  How  is  your  father.1  I  do 
not  know.  Father  is  not  here,  but  he  is  coming  in  two  or  three 
days.  But  you,  Sir;  how  have  you  been  since  I  had  tho  pleasure 
of  seeing  you?  I  have  been  perfectly  well,  I  thank  ysu. — Is  it 
cold  or  warm,  out  of  doors'?  It  is  warm,  quite  warm. — Indeed  !  I 
am  sorry  for  it. — I  bid  you  good  morning,  Sir.  Miss,  I  present  my 
respects  to  you.  Adieu ! 

Is  the  professor  going  to  make  us  recite  (nous  faire  reciter)  im- 
mediately? No,  not  before  a  quarter  of  an  hour  or  half  an  hour. — • 
Then,  I  may  still  study  my  vocabulary ;  can  I  not  ?  To  be  sure  you 
can. — But  do  you  not  know  it  yet?  Yes,  I  know  it  pretty  well;  but 
not  too  well,  (trop  bien.  Obs.  35.) — May  I  go  in  the  parlor,  to  study 
there  ?  Can  you  not  study  here  ?  I  can  write,  read,  copy,  ant1, 
translate  here ;  but  I  can  study  better  in  a  corner  of  the  parlor. — If 
you  will  stay  here,  I  can  ask  you  (vous  faire)  a  few  questions,  and 
then  you  can  ask  me  some. — Very  well,  I  am  going  to  stay.  Will 
you  begin  or  may  I  (puis-je?)  ask  you  the  first  questions?  Yon 
may  begin,  if  you  are  ready;  for,  I  am  ready  to  answer  you. — I  am 
*ot  quite  ready.  I  wish  first  to  correct  a  word  there.  Now  I  am 
*eady.  You  know  the  date  of  the  monti: ;  do  you  not?  I  believe 
I  do.  And  you;  do  you  know  it?  To  be  sure. — And  he;  can  he 
aay  it?  I  believe  not. — Who  cannot  tell  the  date  of  tho  nnnth! 


114:  T  WE  NT  Y-  FOURTH     LESSOR. 

Robert  cannot. — I  ?    Yes,  I  can.     Is  it  not  the  8th  of  May  ?     Yes 
it  is  (or  that's  it). 

Are  you  going  out?  (N.  1,  192.)  To  be  sure  ;  have  I  not  my  hat, 
cloak,  and  gloves?  Yes,  you  have. — Have  you  to  purchase  (buy) 
anything?  Yes.  I  nave  to  purchase  many  things.  What?  A  large 
shawl,  for  Sarah;  a  pretty  little  stick,  for  Henry;  some  gloves. 
handkerchiefs,  and  velve-t,  for  Charlotte. — Is  that  all?  All!  No, 
Indeed  ! — What  else  (or  more) ?  What  more  ?  A  great  many  things, 
—Have  you  n^  to  buy  something  for  oiu  little  cousin,  John  ?  Yes, 
[  have  several  things  to  get  for  him.  First,  a  wooden  gun  and  other 
toys;  and  afterwards  some  little  books. — Is  that  all  for  him ?  To  be 
sure ;  it  is  enough;  is  it  not?  Yes,  indeed. — Have  you  a  catalogue 
of  those  things?  No,  I  have  none;  but,  will  you  do  me  the  favor 
of  making  one  for  me  ?  Yes,  with  pleasure. — Where  is  the  paper, 
where  is  the  pencil?  The  paper  is  here,  and  the  pencil  there. — 
Have  you  money  enough  to  buy  all  that?  I  believe  so. — What  can 
you  lend  me?  A  knife,  if  you  have  need  of  one. — A  what?  A 
knife. — Thank  you,  I  have  no  need  of  a  knife. — What  have  you 
need  of?  I  have  need  of  a  good  gun. — An  iron  or  a  steel  one?  A 
steel  one. — Why  do  you  want  it?  I  want  it  to  kill  a  cat,  a  dog,  and 
some  birds. — Are  you  in  want  of  this  picture  ?  Which  ?  Our  good 
painter's  last  picture.  I?  No;  but  he  wants  it. — Who  wants  it  ? 
This  young  man  does. — How  much  will  he  give  for  it  ?  I  do  no» 
know  how  much. — Does  your  brother  want  money  ?  He  does  noc 
want  any. — Who  wants  sugar?  Nobody  wants  any. — Oh!  yes;  I 
want  some,  to  sweeten  my  tea. — Has  anybody  need  of  pepper1 
Nobody  has. — Has  the  grocer  but  one  eye  ?  No;  he  has  l\*  D  ;  but 
ho  has  but  one  thumb. 

Always.  ($  170.)  A  moment,  a  little  while.  Toujours.  Un  moment, 
un  petit  moment. 


TWENTY-FOURTH  LESSON,  24th.— Vingt-quatricme  Legon,  24me. 
VOCABULARY.    1st  Section.  VOCABULAIRE.    Ire  Section. 

INDICATIVE  MOOD.—Indicatif. 
THE  PRESENT  TENSE.— Temps  Present  ou  Present. 
For  its  formation  see  ($  144.)    That  article  must  be  carefully  studied. 
Obs.  52.  The  three  present  tenses:  1  love,  I  do  love,  I  am  loving,  will  fa 
the  present  be  expressed  in  French  by:  faime.   (Mind  that :  am  loving,  arfi 
reading,  &c.,  are  never  translated  literally.) 

To  love,  to  like,  to  be  fond  of.  I  Aimer,  1.  (a,  avant  un  infmitif.) 

I  love.  I  do  not  love.       I  J'aime.  Je  a'aimc  pas. 


T  W  E  N  T  Y  -  F  O  U  U  T  II     I.  E  S  S  0  N. 


115 


Does  he  like  ?  He  does.  (Dir.  1.) 

Does  he  not  love  ?    He  does  not. 
Are  you  fond  of?     We  are  (fond  of). 
Dost  thou  love  ?        Thou  lovest  tea. 
Who  loves  to  read  ?     They  like  to 

read. 
Do  you  like  him  ?  . . .  them  ? 

I  do  (like  him,  them). 

I  dc  not  (like  him,  them). 

Wot  at  all.     I  do  not  like  him  or  it 

&i  all. 

Does  he  sell  his  horse  ?    He  does. 
Do  you  sell  anything  ?      I  do  not. 

Do  those  farmers  sell  cabbages  ? 

They  do.  They  do  not. 

Do  you  finish  your  task  ? 

\  do.  I  do  not  (finish  it). 

What  do  the  pupils  finish  ? 

This  one  finishes  his  exercise,  those 
finish  their  tasks. 

Whom  are  you  waiting  for  ?  I  ex- 
pect the  boy  wham  he  expects. 

Do  you  receive  any  notes  to-night  ? 

Yes  ;  as  many  as  they  receive. 


Aime-t-il  ?  II  ai^ie. 

N'aime-t-il  pas  ?    II  n'aime  pas. 
Aimez-vous  ?        Nous  aimons. 
Aimes-tu  ?  Tu  aimes  le  the. 

Qui  aime  a  Ure  ?     Us  aiment  a  lire, 

L'aimez-vous  ?       Lea  aimez-vovisf 

($51.) 

Je  1'aime.  Je  les  aime. 

Je  ne  1'aime  pas.   Je  ne  les  aime  pas. 
Pas  du  tout.     Je  ne  1'aime  pas  dr. 

tout. 

Vend-il  son  cheval  ?     II  le  vend. 
Vendez-vous  quelque  chose  ?     Je  ne 

vends  rien. 
Ccs     fermiers-la     vendent-ils     dea 

choux ? 

Us  en  vendent.   Us  n'en  vendent  pas. 
Finissez-vous  votre  devoir? 
Je  le  finis.  Je  ne  le  finis  pas. 

Que  finissent  les  ecoliers  ? 
Celui-ci  finit  son  exercicc,  ceux-la 

finissent  leurs  devoirs. 
Qui   attendez-vous  ?      J'attends    le 

gar9on  qu'il  attend. 
Recevez-vous  des  billets  ce  soir  ? 
J'enregoisautantqu'ilsenrcsoivent, 


TWENTY-FOURTH  EXERCISE.  1st  Sec. — VINGT-QUATRIEME  Ex.    Ire  Sec. 
Mettcz  (put)  ici  le  quantieme  du  mois  en  Franc/ais. 

Are  you  going  to  see  Mr.  Charles,  to-day  1  I  am. — How  is  ho 
now?  He  is  better,  but  not  at  all  well. — How  is  his  old  cousin?  Ho 
is  quite  well. — How  have  you  been  since  I  had  the  pleasure  of  seeing 
you  at  your  friend's?  I  have  always  been  well,  as  usual. — How 
are  you  all  at  home  ?  Every  one  is  well. — Is  any  one  sick  at  your 
house  ?  No,  nobody  is  sick. — Is  not  your  little  boy  sick  ?  Oh !  yes ; 
he  is  a  little  sick;  but  not  much. — Are  you  not  coming  in?  Yes,  I 
am  coming  in  (N.  1,  192),  to  sit  down  a  moment. — Come  in,  come 
in.  Take  this  seat.— No,  thank  you;  I  will  (vais)  sit  here.  (N.  191.) 

Do  you  always  speak  French?  No,  we  do  not  always  speak  it. 
— Why  do  you  not  always  speak  it  ?  Because  I  do  not  speak  it 
trery  well,  Jules  does  not  speak  much  better,  and  the  children  do 
not  speak  it  at  all. — How  many  exercises  do  the  scholars  copy  every 
day?  They  copy  two;  one  in  the  morning,  the  other  in  the  eve* 
ning.  At  what  o'clock  do  they  copy  the  morning  one  ?  They  copy 
it  at  i  past  9. — And  the  evening  one ;  do  they  also  copy  it  at  £  past  9 } 


116  TWENTY-FOURTH     LESSCN, 

They  copy  it  at  J  past  7. — When  do  you  correct  them  ?     I  correct 
them  at  two  or  J  of  two. 

Do  you  not  dine  (diner)  at  one  ?  No,  we  dine  later. — Whc 
dines  at  one?  All  our  neighbors  do. — Why  do  you  not  dine  at  one 
also  ?  Because  we  like  to  dine  later. — Do  your  children  dine,  01 
eat  dinner,  when  you  do?  No,  they  dine  before  us. — Do  they  like 
to  eat  dinner  before  you  ?  Yes,  they  do  like  to  do  it,  because  they 
are  always  hungry. — Do  they  like  to  drink  tea  or  coffee  ?  They 
like  to  drink  neither  tea  nor  coffee,  out  milk. — Do  you  love 
your  brother  ?  I  do  love  him. — Does  your  brother  love  you  ? 
He  does  not  love  me. — Dost  thou  love  me,  my  good  child? 
I  do  love  thee. — Dost  thou  love  this  ugly  man?  I  do  not  love  him. 
—Whom  do  you  love  ?  .  I  love  my  children. — Whom  do  we  love  ? 
We  love  our  friends. — Do  we  like  any  one  ?  We  like  no  one. — 
Does  anybody  like  us?  The  Americans  like  us. — Do  you  want 
anything?  I  want  nothing. — Whom  is  your  father  in  want  of?  He 
is  in  want  of  his  servant. — What  do  you  want?  I  want  the  note. — 
Do  you  want  this  or  that  note?  I  want  this  one. — What  do  you 
wish  to  do  with  it?  (en?)  I  wish  to  open  it,  in  order  to  read  it. — 
Does  he  .receive  as  many  notes  as  I?  He  receives  more  of  them 
than  you. — What  do  you  give  me  ?  I  do  not  give  thee  anything. — 
Do  you  give  this  book  to  my  brother?  I  do  give  it  him. — Do 
you  give  him  a  bird  ?  I  do  give  him  one. — To  whom  do  you  lend 
your  books  ?  I  lend  them  to  those  scholars. — Does  your  friend  lend 
me  a  dollar?  He  lends  you  one. — To  whom  do  you  lend  your 
clothes?  (habits  ?)  I  do  not  lend  them  to  anybody. 

VOCABULARY.     2d  Section.  VOCABULAIRS.     2de  Section. 

PRESENT  TENSE  CONTINUED  —Le  Present  Continue 
Arc  you  fond  of,  do  you  like  beef?     J  Aimez-vous  le  bceuf ? 

05s.  53.  As  the  noun  leef  is  here  used  in  its  general  sense,  the  Frenoh 
use,  not  the  partitive,  but  the  definite  article,  Ze,  les,  (the.)  ($  15.) 


Does  he  like  the  Prussians  ? 

To  eat.     To  arrange,  to  set  in  order. 

Do  you  like  to  eat  beef? 


Aime-t-il  les  Prussieiis  ? 

Manger,  1.        Arranger,  ranger,  L 

Aimez-vous  a  manger  du  bceuf  ? 


O6s.  54.    As  the  noun  beef  is  here  used  to  express  a  portion  of  beef,  no! 
1  the  beef,  the  French  use  the  partitive,  du,  des,  (some  or  any.) 


Does  he  like  to  eat  cakes  ?  ($  20.) 
They  like  to  eat  some. 
To  eat,  eating,          we  eat. 

To  change,     changing,    we  change. 

($  144,  R.  2.) 
I  o  neglect,  neglecting,  we  neglect. 


Aime-t-il  a  manger  des  gateaux  f 
Us  aiment  a  en  manger. 
Manger,  mangeant,  nous  mangeon& 
Changer,     changeant,     nous  chan* 

geons. 
Ne"gliger,    nepUgeant,   nous    mlgli 

gc.ons 


TWEN  rV-KOURTH     LESSON. 


117 


Do  you  neglect  your  French  ? 
We  do  not  neglect  it  at  all. 
Does  he  send  you  the  bajik  note? 
He  does.  ($  144 — 3.)        Pie  does  not. 
I  send,  thousendest,  he  sends,  they 

send,    who  sends  ?    What  does  he 

send  ? 
i  sweep,  thou  sweepest,  he  sweeps, 

they  sweep,  who  sweeps  ?  does  he 

not  Bweep  ? 

Who  sweeps  the  parlor  carpet  ? 
I  do  not  know  who  sweeps  it. 
Open,        to  open  one,        opening. 
I  open,       thou  openest,       he  opens. 
Does  he  open  his  chest  ?       He  does. 
Does  he  open  his  eyes  ?         He  does. 


Ndgligez-vous  votre  Frangais  ? 

Nous  ne  le  negligeons  pas  du  tout. 

Vous  envoie-t-il  le  billet  de  lanque  ? 

II  me  1'envoie.  II  ne  ine  1'envoie  pas. 

J'envoie,  tu  envoies,  il  envoic,  il* 
envoient,quienvoie?  Qu  envoie-t- 
il  ? 

Je  balaie,  tu  balaies,  il  balaie,  ila 
balaient,  qui  balaie  ?  Ne  bahie-t-il 
pas  ? 

Qui  balaie  le  lapis  du  salon  ? 

Je  ne  sais  pas  qui  le  balaie. 

Ouvrir,*  2,    en  ouvrir  un,    ouvrant, 

J'ouvre,        tu  ouvres,       il  ouvre. 

Ouvre-t-il  son  coffre  ?     II  I'ouvre. 

tOuvre-t-il  les  yeux  ?      II  Ice  ouvre. 


Obs.  55.  Use  the  definite  article,  Ze,  Zes,  (the,)  instead  of  the  possessive, 
when  the  sense  clearly  indicates  the  possessor.  Ses  may  be  used,  but  let 
is  preferable. 

Souffrir.        Je  ne  peux  pas  le  (h 

souffrir. 

To  put  away,  to  put  by,  lay  up,  (put     Serrer,  1. 
any  article  in  its  proper  place.) 


To  sufier.      I  cannot  bear  it,  (them.'' 


Will  you  put  away  your  hat,  clothes, 
money,  shoes,  books,  pencils,  &c. 
(Dir.  2.) 

To  shut,     to  shut  up  the  store. 

Is  the  servant  shutting  up  the  office  ? 

He  does  not  now,  but  he  is  going  to 
shut  it  in  a  moment  (presently.) 

This  soldier.  Some  cider. 

Has  the  captain  more  than  thirty  sol- 
diers ?  He  has  less  than  twenty. 

Often,        pretty  often,  (enough.) 

What  does  the  American  like  ? 

He  is  very  fond  of  coffee  and  tea. 


To  dine,  to  eat  dinner,  to  eat  supper. 
The  dinner,  at  dinner.      The  supper, 

at  supper. 

Do  they  often  change  their  servants? 
We  often  change  them. 
To  change  something. 

TWENTY-FOURTH  EXERCISE.  2d  Sec. — VINGT-QUATRIEME  Ex     2de  Sec 

Mettez  ici  le  quantieme  en  Fran$ais. 

Ah?  Mr.  Arago,  I  am  glad  to  see  you.     You  Hie  well,  1  hope. 
Tolerably  well,  thank  you.   I  am  glad  to  hear  it.— Do  you  know  wlie!0 


Voulez-vous  serrer  votre  chapeau, 
vos  habits,  votre  argent,  vos  sou- 
liers,  vos  livres,  vos  crayons,  &c. 

Former,  1.         Fermer  le  magasin. 

Le  domestique  ferme-t-il  le  bureau  f 

II  ne  le  ferme  pas  a  present ;  mais  il 
va  le  fermer  dans  un  moment, 

Ce  soldat-ci.  Du  cidre. 

Le  capitaine  a-t-il  plus  de  trente  sol- 
dats  ?  II  en  amoins  de  vingt.  (162. 

Souve?it,         assez  sou  vent. 

Qu'aime  I'Americaia  ? 

II  aime  beaucoup  le  cafe  et  le  the. 
(Obs.  53.) 

Diner.  Souper. 

Le  dmer,  a  dmer.  Le  souper,  a 
souper. 

Changent-ils    souvertf     de    domes 

tiques  ?    Nous  en  changeons  souvent 

Changer  de  queique  chose,  (de.) 


118  TWENTY-FOURTH   LESSOR. 

Mr.  Lamartine  is?  Yes,  he  is  at  home.  Thank  you.  Hir.  I  have  to 
write  to  him. — Well !  come  in  my  house  and  sit  down  a  little.  M  iny 
thanks.  I  am  not  tired.  I  am,  as  usual,  in  a  hurry  (presse),  lor  I 
want  to  see  Mr.  Rush  ....  who  is  going  to  Liverpool  at  $  past  30. 
Adieu,  then;  for  you  have  not  much  time.  Adieu. — It  is  warm, 
very  warm,  is  it  not  ?  No ;  it  is  not  too  warm  for  me. — Not  too  warm 
for  you !  Then  you  like  the  heat  (le  chaud),  indeed !  T  do.—- Do 
you  not  like  the  heat?  Not  quite  sc  much  as  you,  I  believe. 

Do  you  recite  this  evening  at  6  or  at  7  o'clock  ?  We  recite  only 
at  1)  I  believe. — Do  you  know  what  vocabulary  we  recite  ?  You 
recite  the  last  one. — Which  is  the  last  one  ?  The  ...  is  it  not? — 
I  believe  not. — Which,  then?  This  one. — I  know  these  two.  And 
I  also. — Then,  I  am  ready  to  recite.  And  you  ?  I  also. — What  aro 
you  looking  for  (or,  do  you  seek),  Miss  Charlotte  ?  Is  it  your  shawl 
or  cloak  that  you  seek  (are  looking  for)  ?  No,  Sir,  I  a!7\  looking  fo? 
my  copy-book  of  French,  to  translate  my  exercise  in  it. 

What  do  you  eat  at  breakfast  ?  We  eat  a  little  beef  or  mutton, 
bread  and  butter,  &c. — Do  you  like  beef  at  breakfast  ?  Yes,  a  little , 
but  I  like  it  very  well  (beaucoup)  at  dinner. — Do  you  like  to  eat  it 
also  at  supper?  I  do  not  like  it  so  much  (tanf).  As  for  me  (raoz), 
I  do  not  like  it  at  all.  I  cannot  bear  it. — You  cannot  bear  it  ?  indeed ! 
No,  indeed,  I  cannot. — Do  you  eat  much  cheese  ?  We  do  not  eat 
much ;  we  do  not  like  it ;  we  cannot  bear  it. — Do  you  often  change 
servants  (de  domestiques)  ?  Yes,  we  often  change  them.  We  change 
them  every  month. — Does  not  Julius  neglect  his  task  often  ?  Yes, 
he  does;  but  we  do  not  neglect  ours. — What  do  you  neglect?  1 
believe  that  we  do  not  neglect  anything.  (Obs.  4.)  You  are  good 
scholars,  then,  if  you  neglect  nothing.  Thank  you. — What  are  you 
going  to  fix  or  arrange  ?  When  ?  To-day.  To-day  ?  We  do  not  fix 
anything,  but  these  boys  set  their  books  in  order  (fix). — Does  your 
father  send  you  anything?  He  sends  me  all  I  wish. — Does  he  send 
you  shoes,  stockings,  and  gloves  ?  No,  but  he  sends  me  money  to 
buy  some. — How  much  does  he  send  you  ?  He  sends  me  more  than 
ten  dollars  every  month. — Is  that  all  ?  Yes,  and  that  is  enough, — 
Will  you  be  kind  enough  to  tell  Isaac  to  open  the  panor?  He  is 
opening  it  now  (Pouvre). — Very  well.  Then  you  need  not  tell  him 
to  open  it;  but  you  may  tell  him  to  sweep  it.  I  will.  (Je  vais  16 
faire.)  (19«,  N.  1.) 

Do  you  cut  anything?  We  cut  some  wood. — What  do  those  mer- 
chants cut  ?  They  do  not  cut  anything ;  bu£  their  clerk  cuts  some 
coarse  cloth. — Does  he  not  cut  the  fine  cloth  too  ?•  No,  he  is  afraid  to 
cut  it.— You  mean,  he  is  afraid  to  tear  it,  do  yoi*  not?  Yes,  T  mean, 


TWKNT  Y-FOUKTII     LESSON 


119 


to  tear  it. — Does  he  not  tear  the  cotton  ?  Yes;  he  tears  it,  and  lht» 
coarse  cloth  too;  but  he  tears  neither  the  velvet  nor  the  satin. — 
When  do  you  receive  your  notes?  I  receive  them  every  morning 
when  you  receive  yours. — Does  ovr  neighbor,  the  lawyer,  receive 
his  journals  when  we  receive  ours?  I  do  not  know  when  he  receives 
his. — What  does  your  servant  carry?  He  carries  several  things  in  a 
large  trunk. — Does  he  open  it?  He  does  not. — Where  is  he  carry- 
ing it?  He  is  carrying  it  home.  (Obs.  52.) — Are  you  waiting  for 
anybody?  Yes,  I  am  only  waiting  for  the  little  Irishman. — Do  you 
wait  for  him  often  ?  Yes,  I  do. — Every  morning  or  every  evening? 
Morning  and  evening. — Are  you  killing  two  birds?  I  am  killing 
only  one. — How  many  chickens  does  that  old  cook  kill  ?  He  does 
not  kill  any. — Who  kills  them,  then  ?  The  farmers  kill  then.  — Do 
(the)  farmers  work  as  much  as  (the)  sailors?  They  do. — Who  works 
more  ?  You  or  your  son  ?  We  work  as  much  the  one  as  the  other. 


Very  ill.      Worse.       Much  worse. 
Does  the  doctor  hope  yet  ?  Go  (imper. 


Tres-mal.  Plus  mal.  Beaucoup  p.  m, 
Le  docteur  espere-t-il  encore  ?  Allez. 


To  rest  yourself,  myself.    Good-by.      Vousreposer,merepo.  Jevoussalue 

VOCABULARY.    3d  Section.  VOCABULAIRE.  Sme  Section. 

PRESENT  TENSE  CONTINUED  ($  144.)— Le  Present  Continue. 

Exceptions  to  the  general  rule  given  in  §(  144). 


Ce  pupitre.     Le  pupitre  du  miutre 

Vos  freres  que  font-ils  ? 

Us  ne  font  rien. 

Ne  faites-vous  pas  un  exercice  ? 

Non,  nous  n'en  faisons  pas. 

Quc  faites-vous  dans  le  bureau  ? 

Nous  y  faisons  le  devoir  que  nous 

avons  a  faire. 

Me  dites-vous  quelque  chose  ? 
Nous   vous   disons   qu'ils   veuleirt 

manger. 

Ne  dites-vous  rien  ? 
Non,  rien.  (*  151.  A.  8.) 
Cela  peut  etre. 

Au  coin  de  Walnut  et  de  la  13mo. 
Cela  ne  peut  pas  etre. 

TWENTY-FOURTH  EXERCISE.  3d  Sec. — VINGT-QUATRIEME  Ex.    SME  Sec 

Mettez  ici  le  quantieme  du  mois,  en  Frangais. 

Mr.  Jean,  je  suis  bien  aise  de  vous  voir.  Pouvez-vous  me  diro 
comment  se  porte  votre  cousin  Armand?  II  est  tres-mal.  En 
yerite  !  Pen  suis  bien  fache.  Est-il  plus  mal  que  hier  ?  Oui,  il 
6st  beaucoup  plus  mal.  Le  docteur  espere-t-il  encore?  Oui,  il 
cspere  encore,  parce  que  Armand  est  jeune ;  mais  il  est  tros  mal.-* 


This  desk.        The  teacher's  desk. 

What  are  your  brothers  doing  ? 

They  are  doing  nothing. 

Are  you  not  doing  an  exercise  ? 

No,  we  do  not  do  one. 

What  are  you  doing  in  the  office  ? 

We  do  the  task  we  have  to  do. 

Do  you  say  anything  to  me  ? 
W2  tell  you  that  they  wish  to  cat. 

Do  you  say  nothing  ? 

No,  nothing. 

That  may  be. 

At  the  corner  of  Walnut  and  13th. 

That  cannot  be. 


120  TWENTY- FOURTH     LESSON. 

Prenez  un  siege.  Asseyez-vous.  Non,  je  ne  peux  pas  m'asseoir  a 
present.  Ne  pouvez-vous  pas  vous  asseoir  un  petit  moment,  pour 
vous  reposer?  Non.  je  ne  le  peux  pas;  car  j'ai  a  aller  chez  PapO' 
thicaire  pour  acheter  quelque  chose.  Est-ce  pour  Arm  and ?-  Oui, 
e'est  pour  lui.  Alors,  allez,  allez.  Adieu!  Je  vous  salue. 

Miss  Emilie,  what  are  you  waiting  for  ?  I  am  waiting  for  the 
scholars. — Are  they  coming,  or  do  tney  come  ?  (06s.  52.)  I  be- 
lieve they  are  coming. — What  are  they  doing?  Who  ?  The  shoe- 
makers. They  are  making  shoes  ($  4). — Are  the  carpenters  making 
a  ship  ?  No,  they  are  not  making  one. — What  do  they  do  ?  They 
do  something,  but  we  do  not  know  what. — Do  you  know  where  are 
my  dictionaries ?  Which?  The  French  ones.  We  know  where 
they  are. — Will  you  tell  us  where  they  are?  No,  we  will  not  tell 
you.  You  may  look  for  them. — You  are  very  good,  indeed  !  Do 
the  reachers  owe  anything  to  the  butter-man?  They  do  not  owe 
him  anything.  ^-Do  they  not  owe  something  to  the  tailors?  They 
owe  them  something. — How  much?  Not  much.  Not  more  than 
two  or  three  dollars.— Do  they  owe  more  to  the  joiner?  No,  they 
do  not  owe  him  so  much;  for,  they  owe  him  nothing. — Nothing  at 
all?  No,  nothing  at  all.  1  believe  they  owe  him  nothing  at  all. — 
I  know  they  owe  him  something  for  their  last  desk. — That  may  be, 
(cela  peut  etre.) 

Do  the  Messrs.  Cowell  &  Son  keep  a  dry  goods  store  ?  Yes,  they 
keep  one. — Where  do  they  keep  it?  They  keep  it  at  the  corner  oi 
Chestnut  and  Seventh  (de  Chestnut  et  de  la  7me). — What  do  they 
keep?  They  keep  gloves,  ribbons,  satin,  velvet,  fine  cloth,  and 
many  other  things. — Do  they  receive  their  satin,  velvet,  gloves,  and 
ribbons  from  France  (France)  ?  No,  I  believe  they  do  not  receive 
them  from  France ;  they  buy  them  (achetent)  from  cur  merchants. 
—What  do  they  receive  from  France  ?  They  do  not  receive  any- 
thing.— Do  the  French  take  much  tea  ?  No,  they  do  not  take  much. 
— They  take  more  coffee  than  tea ;  do  they  not?  Yes,  they  take  a 
little  more. — Do  they  not  take  a  great  deal  more  of  it?  No.  they 
do  not  take  a  great  deal  more  ;  but  they  take  more  wine  than  either 
tea  or  coffee,  (que  de  the  ou  cle  cafe.) — \Vhat  c\o  the  Italians  and 
Spanish  drink?  They  drink  chocolate. — Do  they  not  drink  wine 
also  ?  Yes,  they  do. — Do  you  know  that  the  general's  old  brothe/ 
is  very  sick  ?  Yes,  we  know  it;  and  we  know  also  that  he  is  bettei 
this  morning. — We  are  glad  to  hear  it. — Do  you  say  anything  to 
rue  ?  We  do  not  say  anything  to  you. — Do  you  tell  them  anything  ? 
We  do  not  say  anything  to  them. — Do  you  say  anything  pretty  to 
your  good  neighbor?  We  tell  him  something  pretty. — What  do 
you  tell  him  pretty  7  We  are  not  going  to  tell  you  of  it,  or  it  to  you. 


TWENTY    FIFTH     LESSON. 


121 


Vou  have  been  well.     I  believe  it. 
At  the  hour.        Before  the  hour. 
Punctual.       On  the  way,  the  road, 

coming. 

I  think.  Dust, 

Tt  is  very  dusty. 


Vous  vous  etes  bien  port<5.  Je  le  croia 
A  r he ure.  Avant  1'heure. 

Ponctuel.  En  chemin. 

Je  pense.     De  la  poussiere,  (femi.) 
II  fait  beaucoup  de  poussiere. 


TWENTY-FIFTH  LESSON,  25lh.—Vingt'Cinquicme  Lecon,  25m* 

VOCABULAIRE.   Ire  Section. 

PRESENT  TENSE  CONTINUED.— Le  Present  Ornate. 
As  the  rule  given  in  ($  144),  on  the  formation  of  the  plural  of  the  present 
tense,  is  applicable  to  irregular  as  well  as  regular  verbs,  it  remains  now  only 
to  point  out  the  present  tense  singular  of  a  few  irregular  verbs,  to  enable 
the  learner  to  use  them  in  his  exercises.     They  are  the  following: 


To  do,  to  make.    Doing. 
I  do,  thou  dost,  he  do«s. 

To  drink,  drinking. 
I  diink,  thou  drinkest,  he  drinks. 

To  come,  coming. 
I  come,  thou  contest,  he  comes. 

To  write,  writing. 
i  write,  thou  writest,  he  writes. 

To  see,  seeing. 
I  see,  thou  seest,  he  sees. 

To  say,  tell,  saying. 
I  say,  thou  sayest,  he  says. 

To  go  out,  going  out. 
f  go  out,  thou  goest  out,  he  goes  out. 

To  read,  reading. 
I  read,  thou  readest,  he  reads. 

To    know,    (to    be    acquainted 
with,)  knowing. 

I  know,  thou  knowest,  he  knows. 

To  put  on,  putting  on. 
I  put  on,  thou  puttest,  he  puts. 

To  sleep,  sleeping, 
i  eleep,  thou  sleepest,  he  sleeps. 

To  serve,  serving. 
t  serve,  thou  servest,  he  serves. 

To  take,  taking. 
f  taxe,  thou  takest,  he  takes. 

To  translate,  translating. 
I  translate,  thou  translates!,  he  trans- 
lates. 
11 


Faire,*  faisant. 

Je  fais,  tu  fais,  il  fait. 

Boire,*  buvant. 

Je  bois,  t~  bois,  il  boit. 

Venir,*  venant. 

Je  viens,  tu  vicns,  il  vient. 

Ecrire,*  ecrivant. 

J'ecris,  tu  ecris,  ii  ecrit. 

Voir,*  voyant. 

Je  vois,  tu  vois,  il  voit. 

Dire,*  disant. 

Je  dis,  tu  dis,  il  dit. 

Sortir,*  sortant. 

Je  sors,  tu  sors,  il  sort. 

Lire,*  lisant. 

Je  lis,  tu  lis,  il  lit. 

ConnaTtre,*  connaissant. 

>  Je  connais,  tu  connais,  il  connaStt 
\  Je  sais,  tu  sais,  il  sait. 

Mettre,*  4,  mettant. 

Je  mets,  tu  mets,  il  met. 

Dormir,*  2,  dormant. 

Je  dors,  tu  dors,  il  dort. 

Servir,*  2,  servant. 

Je  sers,  tu  sers,  il  sert. 

Prendre,*4,  prenant. 

Je  prends,  tu  prends,  il  prend. 

Traduire,*  4,  traduisant. 

Je  traduis,  tu  traduis,  il  troduiL 


122  TWENTY-FIFTH     LESSON. 

VlNGT-CINQUIEME    ExERCICE.   Ire  Sec 

Mettez  (put)  le  quantieme,  en  Fran^ais,  ici. 

Bonsoir,  Mr.  Je  suis  bien  aise  de  vous  voir.  J'espere  que  voui 
vous  etes  bien  porte  depuis  que  je  n'ai  eu  le  plaisir  de  vous  voir, 
Tres-bien,  merci.  Suis-je  le  premier  ici,  ce  soir?  Vous  etes  pre- 
mier. Vous  Petes  assez  souvent7  mais  pas  toujours. — Je  suis  souvent 
trop  occupe  pour  venir  toujours  a  Pheure.  Je  le  crois,  car  vous  etes 
bien  ponctuel.  Oii  sont  les  autres  ecoliers?  En  chemin,  je  pense, 
car  ils  sont  ponctuels  aussi.  Mais  pas  tant  que  vous. — Vonlez-vous 
prendre  un  siege?  Non;  je  vous  remercie,  pas  encore.  Je  veux 
d'abord  chercher  un  mot  clans  le  dictionnaire. — Quel  mot  ^  oulez- 
vous  savoir?  Je  veux  savoir  le  Francais  de:  dust. — Que  voulez* 
vous  dire  en  Fran^ais?  Je  veux  dire :  it  is  dusty.  Le  Franpais  de 
it  is  dusty,  est:  il  fait  de  la  poussiere.  A  present,  je  peux  vous  dire4 
II  fait  beaucoup  de  poussiere.  Oui,  je  le  sais,  et  la  poussiere  n'ee! 
pas  agreable.  Prenez  un  siege  a  present.  Merci,  je  vais  en  prer> 
dre  un. 

Dost  thou  see  anything?  I  do  not  (see  anything). — Does  yoin 
father  see  our  ships  ?  He  cannot  see  them  at  all  from  there  •  but  we 
see  them  very  well  from  here. — How  many  soldiers  do  you  see? 
We  see  a  good  many;  we  see  more  than  thirty  of  them. — The  cap- 
tain expects  more  soldiers,  does  he  not  ?  I  do  not  know  if  he  expects 
any  others. — Do  you  know  the  captain  ?  No,  I  believe  I  do  not 
know  him ;  but  I  know  the  general. — Do  you  also  know  the  general's 
cousin?  Who?  that  tall  and  handsome  young  man  who  comes 
often  to  the  museum  to  see  the  pictures?  Yes,  that  one.  I  do  not 
know  him,  but  I  see  him  very  often. — What  do  these  sailors  and 
soldiers  drink  ?  They  drink  wine  and  cider. — Do  they  drink  more 
cf  the  latter  than  of  the  former  ?  No,  they  drink  more  of  the  former 
than  of  the  latter. — Do  they  drink  wine  every  day?  They  do;  but 
they  do  not  drink  cider  every  day. — Why  not?  Can  they  not  get 
some  ?  (en  avoir?')  No,  they  have  not  money  enough  to  buy  any. — • 
What  do  we  drink?  You  know  that  we  drink  tea,  coffee,  and 
wine. — Do  we  not  drink  chocolate  too?  Yes,  we  do.  We  do  like 
it  as  much  as  the  Italians  and  Spaniards. — Do  we  drink  as  much  oi 
it  as  they  ?  No,  we  do  not,  for  they  drink  it  in  the  morning,  at  din 
ner,  and  supper. — What  art  thou  writing?  I  am  not  writing,  I  am 
reading. — Who  writes  ?  (is  writing  ?)  The  lawyer  is  writing. — What 
is  the  Prussian  doing?  He  does  nothing.  Does  he  not  study  Eng- 
lish ?  Yes,  he  is  studying  it. — Does  he  not  write  it  ?  He  does  not 

What  dost  thou  say  ?  I  say  nothing.  I  am  too  sleepy  to  say  any 
thing.— « Does  thy  brother  say  anything  ?  He  is  afraid  to  say  a  word.— 


TWENTY-FIFTH     LESSON.    (2.)  123 

[lo  you  say  any  thing  ?  Yes,  I  tell  our  servant  to  go  to  the  book 
seller's  to  bring  me  the  last  work  of  Cooper. — Do  you  like  his  last 
>vork  ?  Do  you  not  like  it  ?  I  say  that  I  like  it  very  much. — Who 
loes  not  like  it?  Several  gentlemen  whom  (que)  I  know.  (§  77.)— 
Do  you  tell  me  anything?  I  tell  you  something.  Yes-  but  you  do 
lot  tell  me  something  pretty. — Is  it  not  pretty?  No,  not  at  all. — Do 
do  (are  you  doing)  anything  for  me?  We  do  not  do  anything 
br  you;  but  those  boys  are  (doing  something  for  you). — What  are 
hey  doing  for  me?  Do  you  not  see  it?  No,  I  do  not  see  it. — Dost 
hou  see  my  shawl  or  gloves?  (Dir.  2.)  I  see  neither  these  nor 
hat. — What  dost  thou  see  ?  I  see  nothing. — Who  sees  them  ?  Who 
sees  what  ?  My  shawl  and  gloves.  Nobody  sees  them. — Are  they 
lot  here  ?  No,  they  are  not.  I  see  but  this  old  cotton  shawl. — What 
lo  you  say  to  the  tailor  and  shoemaker?  I  do  not  tell  them  any 
hing. — What  do  our  friends  say  to  them?  They  tell  the  latter  to 
mend  their  shoes,  and  the  former  to  make  them  some  coats  and 
vests. — Have  they  time  to  do  it?  They  have  time  and  a  wish  to  do 
t. — What  are  you  doing  ?  I  am  putting  my  gloves  on. — Is  he  put- 
ing  on  his  large  hat?  No,  he  puts  on  the  old  one. — Do  you  not  put 
my  sugar  in  your  coffee  ?  Yes,  I  put  some,  for  I  have  not  enough. — 
3o  you  not  put  milk  in  it?  No,  I  do  not. — Do  you  know  those  Ger- 
mans ?  I  know  one,  but  not  the  others. — Who  is  acquainted  with 
his  Swiss  ?  We  know  him. — Does  he  know  us  ?  He  does. — Whom 
lost  thou  know?  I  know  nobody. — Does  he  not  know  you.  1 
)elieve  he  does,  (que  si.) 


3o  I  look  sick  ?    You  do  (look  sick). 

You  look  very  well.  On  the  contrary. 
You  do  not  look  well.    You  look 

cold,  (as  if  you  were  cold.) 
Vliss,  how  have  you  been  ? 


(fern.) 
VOCABULAIRE.  2de  Section. 


Ai-je  Tair  malade  ?         Vous  avez 

1'air  malade. 

Vous  avez  tres-bon  air.  Au  contraire 
Vous  n'avez  pas  tres-bon  air.     Voui 

avez  Pair  d' avoir  froid. 
Mle.  comment  von  etes-vous  portee. 


To  give  somellt'nig  to  do  to  some  one. 
Do  you  give  anything  to  the  dog  to 


cat  ?     Do  you  feed  the  dog  ?  au  chien  ? 


Donner  quclque  chose  d  faire  d  qvcl 

qu'un. 
Donnez-vousquelau?  chose  a  manger 


1  give  it  some  beef  to  eat. 
I  give  him  nothing  to  eat. 
What  do  you  give  the  scholars  to 

tranBlate  ? 

I  give  them  the  25th  exercise. 
To  bring.  To  find. 


To,  at  the  play.  <  Au  spectacle. 


Je  lui  donne  du  bceuf  a  manger. 
Je  ne  lui  donne  rien  a  manger. 
Que    donnez-vous    a    traduire 

e'coliers  ? 

Je  leur  donne  le  25me  exerf  »c«. 
Apporter,  1.  Trouvr    ) 


124 


TWENTY-FIFTH     LESSON.    (2.) 


Our  Butcher.  His  sheep. 

What,  that  which,  (relative  pronoun, 

objective  case.) 

Dp  you  bring  me  what  I  wish  ? 
I  ao  not  bring  you- what  you  want, 

(or  what  you  wish.)  « 
Do  you  find  what  you  look  for,  (or 

wJiat  you  are  looking  for  ?) 
I  find  what  I  look  for.  (am  looking.) 
He  finds  not  what  he  seeks. 
We  bring  what  we  find. 
All,  or  all  that,  all  that  which. 

They  do  not  find  all  they  look  ior, 

(or  all  that  which  they  seek.) 
Do  you  mend  all  I  do  not  ?  (Dir.  1.) 

I  mend  it  all. 

We  eat  all  we  have. 


Notre  boucher.  Sor;  mout£>n. 

Ce    que,    (pronom     relatif,     reginvs 

direct.)  ($  89.) 

M'apportez-vous  ce  que  je  veux? 
Je  ne  vous  apporte  pas  ce  que  voua 

voulez. 
Trouvez-vous  ce  q^e  vous  cherchez  ? 

Je  trouve  ce  que  je  cherche. 
II  ne  trouve  pas  ce  qu'il  cherche. 
Nous  apportons  ce  que  nous  trouvon 
Tout  ce  que,  (pron.   rel.  reg.  direc 

<*  91.) 
Us  ne  trouvent  pas   tout  ce  qu'i 

cherchent. 
Raccommodez-vous   tout   ce  que 

ne  raccommode  pas  ? 
Je  le  raccommode  tout. 
Nous  mangeons  tout  ce  que  nou 

avons. 
Au  lieu  de.  Au  lieu  de  lire. 


Instead  of.          Instead  of  reading. 

Ols.  56.  Instead  of  is  in  English  followed  by  the  present  participle, 
in  French  it  is  followed  by  the  infinitive,  as  all  other  prepositions,  ex 
en.  (Rule  1st.) 
This  room,  apartment. 
Put  yourself,  (imperative.) 
Near.  Near  Miss  Ann.  Near  the  fire. 


Now  that  I  think  of  it. 

As  you  think  of  it,  he  thinks  of  it. 

Come,  (imperative.)  ($  150.)      Come 

here.  Here  I  am. 

If  you  please.  If  he  pleases. 

To  finish,  to  quit  studying. 
At  least  I  do,  or  I,  at  least.  He,  at  least. 


Cet  appartement-ci. 

Mettez-vous. 

Pres  de.    Pres  de  Mile.  Anne. 

du  feu. 

A  present  que  j'y  pense.  ($  50.) 
Comme  vous  y  pensez,  il  y  pcnse. 
Venez,(imper.)        Venez  ici. 

voici. 

S'il  vous  plait.  S'il  lui  plait. 

Finir  d'etudier. 
Moi,  du  moins.          Lui,  du  moms. 

VINGT-CINQUIEME  ExERCiCE.  2de  Sec. 

Ecrivez  ladateici,  en  Fi'angais,  (the  date  noun  fern.,  of  which  hereafter.) 
Ah !  Mr.  Charles,  j'ai  1'honneur  de  vous  saluer.     Je  vois  que  voui 
vous  portez  bien.    Tres-bien,  merci.     Et  vous,  Mr.,  etes-vous  ma 
lade1    Ai-je  Vair  malade?     Un  pen.     Je  suis  un  peu  fatigue,  mai 
non  pas  malade.     J'en  suis  bien  aise.     Vous  n'etes  pas  le  premier 
ce  soir.     Non,  je  vois  que  Mile.  Clara  esl  ici  avant  moi.     Com* 
merit  vous  etes-vous  portee  (fern.),  Mlle.;  depuis  jeudi  dernier.     J-f 
me  suis  tres-bien  portee,  merci.    Je  n'ai-pas  Pair  malade,  j'esperel 
[)h!  non.     Au  contraire,  vous  avez  tres-bon  air;  comme'a  Pordij 
Merci  Mr.    Comment  est  le  rnal  de  gorge  du  general'? 


TWENTY -FIFTH      LESSON.    (2.)  125 

ma*  do  gorge  est  mieux,  mais  non  pas  son  rhume.  Entrez,  Mr, 
Lenoir.  Vous  avez  Pair  cPavoir  froid.  Oui,  j'ai  froid.  Mettez-vous 
ici,  pres  du  feu  et  de  Mile.  Clara.  Avec  beaucoup  de  plaisir.  Voua 
avez  bon  feu.  Le  feu  est  tres-agreable  quand  vous  avez  froid>  n'est- 
ce  pas,  Mr.?  Oui;  Mile.  II  est  alors  tres-agreable.  Vous  avea 
parfaitement  raison.  Fait-il  froid  dehors?  Oui,  il  fait  tres-froid.-« 
Connaissez-vous  Mr.  de  Genlis?  J'ai  le  plaisir  de  le  connaitre  et  de 
ie  voir  tres-souvent.  II  a  Pair  malade,  a  present,  n'est-ce  pas! 
Mais,  je  crois  que  non.  A  present  que  j'y  pense,  je  crois  qu'il  a  mal 
aux  dents.  Cela  peut  etre.  Si  cela  est,  j'en  suis  bien  fachee.  El 
moi  aussi.  Mr.  de  Genlis  est  un  homme  de  merite,  n'est-ce  pas'?  Jo 
le  crois. 

Do  you  go  to  the  play,  in  the  evening?  I  do  nc<  — Why?  What 
have  you  to  do  ?  I  have  to  study. — Does  your  teacher  give  you  any- 
thing to  study  in  the  evening  ?  Yes,  he  gives  us  something  to  do 
then. — At  what  o'clock  do  you  finish  studying?  We  finish  at  9  or 
10  oclock ;  in  a  word  (en  un),  we  finish  when  we  are  tired,  or 
sleepy,  (when  we  are.} — Does  he  give  you  anything  to  write  ? 
Yes,  he  always  gives  us  (§  170)  the  quarter  or  the  half  of  an 
exercise  to  write ;  because  he  says  that  we  know  it  better  then.— 
J)o  you  know  it  better  when  you  write  it  ?  To  be  sure.  I  do  (moi) 
at  least. — Do  you  copy  your  father's  notes  in  the  evening  ?  We 
copy  them  only  in  the  morning,  and  afterwards  we  send  them 
(away). — Do  the  scholars  write  all  they  translate  ?  No,  they  do  not. 
— Do  they  mend  all  they  tear?  They  do  not. — Do  they  find  all 
they  look  for?  They  do. — Does  the  captain  find  all  he  looks  for1 
No,  indeed,  he  does  not. — Who  finds  all  he  looks  for?  Nobody 
does. — What  do  they  wish  to  find?  They  wish  to  find  but  their 
books. — Do  they  not  put  them  away?  They  do  not. — Who  putn 
them  away?  Nobody  does. — Where  are  they?  You  know;  do 
you  not?  No,  not  at  all. — The  Swiss  wants  something;  do  you 
bring  him  all  he  wishes?  I  bring  it  to  him,  when  I  can  find  it.— 
Where  dost  thou  take  me  to?  I  take  thee  to  the  museum. — Do  you 
not  take  me  to  the  wharf?  I  have  neither  time  nor  a  mind  to  take 
you  there,  because  it  is  bad  weather. 

Do  not  the  merchants  put  away  what  they  do  not  sell  ?  They 
put  away  all  (ney  do  not  sell. — At  how  much  does  the  butcher  sell 
his  beef?  He  sells  it  at  ten  cents,  or  sous. — Does  the  butcher 
wish  to  buy  your  sheep  ?  He  does. — What  will  he  give  you  for 
it  (en)  ?  He  will  give  me  two  dollars  and  a  half  for  it. — Is  it 
enough?  I  think  not. — If  this  butcher  will  not  give  you  more  than 
that,  I  know  another  who  can  give  you  more.— Have  our  butcher*? 


124 


TWENTY-FIFTH     LESSON.    (2.) 


Our  Butcher.  His  sheep.         |  Notre  boucher. 

What,  that  which,  (relative  pronoun,     Ce    que,    (pronom 

objective  case.) 
Dp  you  bring  me  what  I  wish  ? 


I  ao  not  bring  you  what  you  want, 

(or  what  you  wish.)  * 
Do  you  find  what  you  look  for,  (or 

what  you  are  looking  for  ?) 
I  find  what  I  look  for.  (am  looking.) 
He  finds  not  what  he  seeks. 
We  bring  what  we  find. 
All,  or  all  that,  all  that  which. 

They  do  not  find  all  they  look  ior, 


(or  all  that  which  they  seek.) 
Do  you  mend  all  I  do  not  ?  (Dir.  1.) 

I  mend  it  all. 

We  eat  all  we  have. 


Instead  of. 


Instead  of  reading. 


Son  mouM.n, 
rclatif,    regii 
direct.)  ($  89.) 
M'apportez-vous  ce  que  je  veux? 


Je  ne  vous  apporte  pas  ce  que  voua 

voulez. 
Trouvez-vous  ce  q*e  vous  cherchez  ? 

Je  trouve  ceque  je  cherche. 
II  ne  trouve  pas  ce  qu'il  cherche. 
Nous  apportons  ce  que  nous  trouvons. 
Tout  ce  que,  (pron.  rel.  re.g.  direct.) 

(*  91.) 
Us  ne  trouvent  pas   tout  ce  qu'ila 


cherchent. 
Raccommodez-vous   tout   ce  que  je 

ne  raccommode  pas  ? 
Je  le  raccommode  tout. 
Nous  mangeons  tout  ce  que  nous 

avons. 
Au  lieu  de.  Au  lieu  de  lire. 

Obs.  56.     Instead  of  is  in  English  followed  by  the  present  participle,  but 
in  French  it  is  followed  by  the  infinitive,  as  all  other  prepositions,  except 
en.  (Rule  1st.) 
This  room,  apartment. 
Put  yourself,  (imperative.) 


Near.  Near  Miss  Ann.  Near  the  fire. 


Now  that  I  think  of  it. 

As  you  think  of  it,  he  thinks  of  it. 

Come,  (imperative.)  (§  150.)      Come 

here.  Here  I  am. 

If  you  please.  If  he  pleases. 

To  finish,  to  quit  studying. 
At  least  I  do,  or  I,  at  least.  He,  at  least. 


Pr* 


Cet  appartetnent-ci. 

J\lettez-vous. 

Prcs  de.    Pres  de  Mile.  Anne. 

du  feu. 

A  present  que  j'y  pense.  ($  50.) 
Comme  vous  y  pensez,  il  y  pcnsc. 

Venez  ici.      Me 


Venez,  (imper.) 

voici. 

S'il  vous  plait.  S'il  lui  plait. 

Finir  d'etudier. 
Moi,  du  moins.          Lui,  du  moins. 

EXERCICE.  2de  Sec. 
Ecrivcz  la  date  id,  en  Francais,  (the  date  noun  fern.,  of  which  hereafter.) 
Ah !  Mr.  Charles,  j'ai  I'honneur  de  vous  saluer.  Je  vois  que  vous 
vous  portez  bien.  Tres-bien,  merci.  Et  vous,  Mr.,  etes-vous  ma- 
lade ^  Ai-je  Pair  malade  ?  Un  pen.  Je  suis  uri  peu  fatigue,  mais 
non  pas  malade.  J'en  suis  bien  aise.  Vo;is  n'etes  pas  le  premier, 
ce  eoir.  Non,  je  vois  que  Mile.  Clara  est  ici  avant  moi.  Com- 
ment vous  etes-vous  portee  (fern.),  Mile.,  depuis  jeudi  dernier.  Je 
me  suis  tres-bien  portee,  merci.  Je  n'ai  pas  Pair  malade,  j'espere, 
Oh!  non.  Au,  contraire,  vous  avez  tres-bon  air,  comme  a  Pordi« 
Qaire.  Merci  Mr.  Corr/ment  est  le  mal  de  gorge  du  general?  Son 


TWENTY -FIFTH      LESSON.    (2.)  125 

ma*  d«  gorge  est  mieux,  mais  non  pas  son  rhume.  Entrez,  Mr, 
Lenoir.  Vous  avez  Pair  d/avoir  froid.  Oui,  jrai  froid.  Mettez-vous 
ici,  pres  du  feu  et  de  Mile.  Clara.  Avec  beaucoup  de  plaisir.  Voug 
avez  bon  feu.  Le  feu  est  tres-agreable  quand  vous  avez  froid>  n'est- 
ce  pas,  Mr.?  Oui,  Mile.  II  est  alors  tres-agreable.  Vous  avei 
parfaitement  raison.  Fait-il  froid  dehors?  Oui,  il  fait  tres-froid.— • 
Connaissez-vous  Mr.  de  Genlis?  J'ai  le  plaisir  de  le  connaitre  et  de 
ie  voir  tres-souvent.  II  a  1'air  malade,  a  present,  n'est-ce  pas! 
Mais,  je  crois  que  non.  A  presem  que  j'y  pense,  je  crois  qu'il  a  mai 
aux  dents.  Cela  peut  etre.  Si  cela  est,  yen  suis  bien  fachee.  El 
inoi  aussi.  Mr.  de  Genlis  est  un  homme  de  merite,  n'est-ce  pas?  Jo 
le  crois. 

Do  you  go  to  the  play,  in  the  evening?  I  do  net  — Why?  What 
have  you  to  do  ?  I  have  to  study. — Does  your  teacher  give  you  any- 
thing  to  study  in  the  evening?  Yes,  he  gives  us  something  to  do 
then. — At  what  o:clock  do  you  finish  studying?  We  finish  at  9  or 
10  oclock;  in  a  word  (en  un),  we  finish  when  we  are  tired,  or 
sleepy,  (when  we  are.) — Does  he  give  you  anything  to  write  ? 
Yes,  he  always  gives  us  ($  170)  the  quarter  or  the  half  of  an 
exercise  to  write ;  because  he  says  that  we  know  it  better  then.— 
J)o  you  know  it  better  when  you  write  it?  To  be  sure.  I  do  (moi) 
at  least. — Do  you  copy  your  father's  notes  in  the  evening?  We 
copy  them  only  in  the  morning,  and  afterwards  we  send  them 
(away). — Do  the  scholars  write  all  they  translate  ?  No,  they  do  not. 
— Do  they  mend  all  they  tear?  They  do  not. — Do  they  find  all 
they  look  for?  They  do. — Does  the  captain  find  all  he  looks  for1 
No,  indeed,  he  does  not. — Who  finds  all  he  looks  for?  Nobody 
does. — What  do  they  wish  to  find?  They  wish  to  find  but  their 
books. — Do  they  not  put  them  away?  They  do  not. — Who  putfi 
them  away?  Nobody  does. — WThere  are  they?  You  know;  do 
you  not?  No,  not  at  all. — The  Swiss  wants  something;  do  you 
bring  him  all  he  wishes?  I  bring  it  to  him,  when  I  can  find  it. — 
Where  dost  thou  take  me  to?  I  take  thee  to  the  museum. — Do  you 
not  take  me  to  the  wharf?  I  have  neither  time  nor  a  mind  to  take 
you  there,  because  it  is  bad  weather. 

Do  not  the  merchants  put  away  what  they  do  not  sell  ?  They 
put  away  all  mey  do  not  sell. — At  how  much  does  the  butcher  sell 
his  beef?  He  sells  it  at  ten  cents,  or  sous. — Does  the  butcher 
wish  to  buy  your  sheep  ?  He  does. — What  will  he  give  you  for 
it  (en)  ?  He  will  give  me  two  dollars  and  a  half  for  it. — Is  it 
enough?  I  think  not. — If  this  butcher  will  not  give  you  more  than 
that,  I  know  another  who  can  give  you  more. — Have  our  butcher? 


126 


TWENTY-FIFTH     LESSON.    (3.) 


as  many  oxen  as  sheep?  No;  they  have  many  more  of  ihe  lattei 
than  of  the  former.  Do  they  sell  as  much  beef  as  mutton  ?  They 
Bell  much  beef,  but  they  sell  only  a  little  mutton. — What  is  the  old 
cook  looking  for  ?  He  is  looking  for  a  young  chicken,  which  he 
does  not  find.  Where  can  it  be  ?  Who  knows  ? — What  is  the  Ger- 
man doing  in  his  room  ?  He  is  reading  the  journal  and  feeding  hia 
birds. — What  does  he  give  them  to  eat?  (what  does  he  feed  them 
with?')  He  gives  them  but  grain  to  eat,  (feeds  them  with.} — What 
journals  does  he  read  ?  He  reads  those  which  your  cousin  lends 
him. — Does  not  your  father  lend  him  some,  too?  He  has  three  in 
his  desk;  which  my  father  lends  him  ;  but  he  is  not  ieadk:g  them 
now. 

John,  come  here.  Here  I  am. — Come  with  ir>«3.  Where?  Here, 
near  the  fire. — Near  the  fire  ?  No,  indeed !  I  am  warm  enough 
where  I  am. — Take  that  seat.  No,  I  am  going  to  take  this  one ; 
that  one  is  too  big  for  me. — Very  well;  take  that  little  one,  if  you 
please. — Now  that  I  think  of  it,  go  in  that  apartment  to  bring  me 
the  cake  which  is  in  my  desk. — Which  one  of  your  desks  ?  The 
French  one.  I  am  going  to  bring  it  to  you,  if  you  please. — You  are 
going  to  give  me  some;  are  you  not?  Yes,  to  be  sure.  It  is  to 
give  you  some  that  I  tell  you  to  bring  it  to  me. — Have  you  a  knife 
to  cut  it?  I  can  cut  you  a  little  with  my  penknife. — You  cannot 
cut  me  enough  with  your  penknife. — Do  )rou  want  so  much?  Yes, 
[  want  a  great  deal;  you  know  that  I  like  it  much.  Go,  then,  go, 
instead  of  speaking. — Will  you  go  with  me  to  the  grocer's?  Here 
I  am,  ready  to  go. — Do  you  want  a  basket?  Why?  To  put  in  it 
something  good,  which  you  are  going  to  buy ;  are  you  not  ?  Yes, ! 
am  going  to  buy  something  good,  but  the  grocer  can  put  it  in  papei 
bags. 

VOCABULAIRE.     3me  Section. 


To  play.  To  listen. 

Instead  of  listening — of  playing. 
Do  you  play  instead  of  studying  ? 
I  study  instead  of  playing. 
That  man  speaks  instead  of  listening. 
Have  you  a  sore  finger  ?     Thumb  ? 
I  have  a  sore  finger.  Thumb. 

Has  your  brother  a  sore  foot  ? 
He  has  a  sore  eye.    A  sore  nose. 
We  have — They  have  sore  eyes. 
The  elbow.  The  right  elbow, 

The  right  arm.       The  left  arm. 
The  left  knee.        The  right  one. 
The  back.  The  dog's  back. 


Jotter,  1.         Ecouter  (sans  prepcs.j 
Au  lieu  d'ecouter — de  jouer. 
Jouez-vous  au  lieu  d'etudier? 
J'&udie  au  lieu  de  joucr. 
Get  homme  parle  au  lieu  d'ecouter. 
tAvez-vous  mal  au  doigt  ?  Au  poucet 
tj'ai  mal  au  doigt.  Au  pouce. 

tVotre  frere  a-t-il  mal  au  pied  ? 
til  a  mal  a  I'cail.    Au  nez. 
tNous  avons — Us  ont  mal  aux  yeux. 
Le  coude.  Le  coude  droit. 

Le  bras  droit.  Le  bras  gauche 

Le  genou  gauche.     Le  droit. 
Le  dos.  Le  dos  du  chien. 


TWENTY-  FIFTH      LESSON.    (3.) 


127 


Has  the  dog  a  sore  back  ?     It  has.      ) 

Is  the  dog's  back  sore  ?     It  is  (sore).    J 

Is  your  left  arm  sore  ? 

It  is  (sore).        It  is  not. 

Whose  elbow  is  sore  ?     Who  lias  a 

sore  elbow?    Nobody's.    Nobody. 
Are  not  the  child's  fingers  sore  ? 
Has  not  the  child  sore  fingers  ? 
They  are — He  has. 
Which  of  his  eyes  is  sore  ?     The  left. 
IB  not  my  right  eye  sore?  Yes,  it  is, 

or  your  right  eye  is  sore. 
Thifl  bed.  *  Those  beds. 

Does  the  servant  make  the  bed  ? 
He  makes  the  fire  instead  of  making 

the  bed.  The  bedstead. 

To  learn,  to  learn  how,  learning. 

I  do  learn,  thou  learncst,  he  learns. 

They  learn. 

I  learn  to  read,  how  to  read. 

They  learn  to  write,  how  to  write. 

Do  they  not  learn  to  speak  French  ? 

Yes,  they  do. 

Do  Arthur  and  his  cousin  go  out  ? 

NeithcrArthur  nor  his  cousin  does. 


Le  chicn  a-t-il  mal  au  dos  ? 
II  y  a  mal. 

Avi'z-vous  mal  au  bras  gauche  ? 
J'y  ai  mal.        Je  n'y  ai  pas  mal. 
Qui  a  mal  au  coude  ? 
Personne  n'y  a  mal. 

L'enfant  n'a-t-il  pas  mal  aux  doigts ! 

II  y  a  mal. 

A  quel  ceil  a-t-il  mal  ?    Au  gaucho. 

N'ai-je  pas  mal  a  1'ceil  droit?   Si  fait, 

vous  y  avez  mal. 
Ce  lit-ci.  Ces  ifts-la. 

Le  domestique  fait-il  le  lit  ? 
II  fait  le  feu  au  lieu  de  faire  le  lit.    I« 

bois  de  lit. 
Apprendre,*  4,  afrrenant,  (il  prend 

d,  avant  un  infinitif.) 
J'apprends,  tu  apprends,  il  apprend 
Us  apprennent.  ($  144.) 
J'apprends  a  lire. 
Us  apprennent  a  ecrirc. 
N'apprennent-ils     pas      a      parler 

Frangais  ?  Si  fait,  ils  1' apprennent. 
Arthur  et  son  cousin  sortent-ils  ? 
Ni  Arthur  ni  son  cousin  ne  sortent. 


dient 

Le  dentiste.  Le  sofa. 

Le  charpentier  raccommode-t-il  lo 

bois  de  lit  ? 

Npn,  parce  qu'il  a  mal  au  pouce. 
tA  quel  pouce  a-t-il  mal  ?    Au  droit. 


Obs.  57.     NEITHER,  connected  with  nominatives,  is  :  Ni....ni ne, 

before  the  verb.  ($  162,  II.  G.)    The  following  verb  is  usually  in  the  plural  :— 

Neither   this  scholar  nor  that  one  \  Ni  cet  e*colier-ci  ni  celui-la  n'dtu- 
studies  enough. 

The  dentist.  The  sofa. 

Does  the  carpenter  mend  the  bed- 
stead ? 

No.  because  he  has  a  sore  thumb. 

Which  of  hi3  thumbs  h»  sore  ?     The 
right  one. 

VlNGT-CINQUIEME   EXERCICE.    3me    Sec. 

Mettez  la  date  ici,  en  Frangais. 

An!  Mr.  Letourneur,  je  suis  bien  aise  de  vous  voir.  Comment 
BO  porte-t-on  chez  vous?  Tout  le  monde  s7y  porte  bien.  Personne 
u'est  malade  a  la  maison ;  mais  chez  mon  voisin.  le  ministre,  tout 
10  monde  est  malade.  Qu'ont  ils?  L'un,  a  mal  de  gorge,  un  autro, 
mal  de  tete ;  celui-ci  a  un  rhume,  celui-la  mal  aux  dents.  Alors,  ils 
.10  sont  pas  tres  malades.  Non,  mais  il  fait  si  mauvais,  qu'ils  souf- 
!rent  beaucoup.  Je  suis  fache  d'apprendre  qulls  soufFrent.  Celui 
qui  a  mal  aux  dents  ne  peut  pas  dormir.  Pourquoi  ne  va-t-il  pa*« 


128  TWENTY -FIFTH     LESSON.    (3.) 

chez  le  dentiste?  II  a  peur.  En  verite  !  Qui  est-^eJ  C'e.it  lu 
jeune  Arthur.  II  a  tort  d;avoir  peur.  II  le  sait,  mais  il  continue  a 
avoir  peur.  Qui  a  le  rkume  ?  C'est  George.  Prend-il  quelque  chose 
pour  sonrhume?  Oui,  sans  doute.  Qu'est-ce  que  c'est?  Je  ne 
sais  pas  quoi. 

Does  your  father  go  out  ?  He  does  not. — What  does  he  do  ?  He 
writes. — Does  he  write  a  book?  He  does.  (Dir.  1.) — When  does  he 
WTite  it  ?  He  writes  it  in  the  morning,  in  the  evening,  and  when  ho 
has  time. — He  is  at  home  now,  then?  To  be  sure. — Do  ycu  wish 
to  see  him?  No,  because  he  is  too  busy. — Does  the  Prussian  gc 
out?  No,  neither  he  nor  the  Swiss  goes  out. — Why  do  *4hey  not  go 
cut?  They  have  sore  feet. — What  do  they  do  for  their  sore  feet? 
They  do  something,  but  I  cannot  tell  you  what. — Does  the  shoe- 
maker bring  our  shoes?  He  does  not. — Does  he  drink?  Does  he 
not  work?  He  does  not  work,  because  his  left  knee  is  sore. — Has 
anybody  the  toothache  ?  Yes,  this  youth  has  it. — Is  he  not  going  to 
the  dentist  ?  No,  he  is  not. — Is  he  going  to  send  for  him  ?  He  does 
not  send  for  him.  He  does  not  wish  to  have  the  dentist. — Has  any- 
body a  sore  elbow?  I  believe  so.  Let  me  see.  (}  154.)  Yes,  the 
dentist  has  a  sore  elbow. — Which  of  his  elbows  is  sore  ?  The  right 
or  his  right,  (le.) — Who  has  a  sore  arm  ?  I  have. — Do  you  not  see  it  ? 
No,  I  do  not  see  it. — Which  of  your  arms  is  sore  ?  The  left. — Does 
the  minister  write  now  ?  No,  he  cannot  yet. — Is  not  his  right  thumb 
better?  It  is  better,  but  not  well. 

Do  you  read  your  pretty  book?  1  do  not.  I  have  a  sore  eye. — 
Which  of  your  eyes  is  sore  ?  Do  you  not  see  ?  My  right  eye  ia 
sore. — Let  me  see  it.  See  it  or  look  at  it.  (voyez-le.) — Who  has  sore 
eyes?  The  old  cooks  have  sore  eyes. — What  day  of  the  month 
is  to-day?  It  is  the  . . . — And  to-morrow?  The  . . . — What. is  the 
German  d  Ding  in  his  room  ?  He  is  learning  to  read. — Does  he 
not  learn  to  write  ?  Yes,  he  does. — Does  your  son  learn  to  trans- 
late  ?  He  learns  to  translate,  and  to  copy  French. — Does  the  Prus- 
sian speak  instead  of  listening?  He  speaks  instead  of  listening. — 
What  does  he  do  then  ?  Afterwards  he  goes  to  the  farmer's  to  drink 
milk. — Does  the  dentist  fix  (arranger)  the  teeth  of  your  son?  Ho 
does  not. — What  does  he?  He  makes  teeth  for  the  Dutchman, 
instead  of  fixing  my  son's  teeth. — Who  studies  instead  of  playing? 
A  few  boys  study  instead  of  pla)dng;  but  a  great  many  play  instead 
of  studying. — Does  our  English  teacher  speak  French  to  us  instead 
of  speaking  English?  He  does  often. — Do  the  children  of  the  Swiss 
drink  wine  in  the  morning,  instead  of  drinking  tea  or  coffee  ?  They 
drink  neither  wine,  tea,  nor  coffee. 

Can  you  find  the  French  of:  to  offer,  in  this  small  dictionary?    I 


TWENTY-SIXTH     LESSON.    (1.) 


129 


am  going  to  look  for  it  immediately.  Very  well ;  take  the  dictionary 
I  have  it. — Do  you  find  the  word  in  it  ?  No,  I  do  not.  Indeed !  Lei 
me  see.  I  see  why  you  cannot  find  it.  You  are  looking  for  it  in  the 
French  instead  of  the  English. — What  is  the  grocer  putting  in  that 
paper  bag  ?  I  believe  he  puts  in  it  salt  instead  of  sugar. — Is  thar 
salt,  Sir1?  No,  it  is  sugar,  but  it  looks  like  (a  Fair  de)  salt,  does  i 
not?  Yes,  it  looks  like  it.  ($  50.) — Let  me,  let  me,  I  want  to  say 
Let  me  taste  it,  but  I  do  not  know  the  French  of:  to  taste.  Will  yos 
tell  me,  William7?  To  be  sure;  it  is  gouter.  Gouter,  very  well. 
Now  I  can  say:  Let  me  taste  it.  Do.  (Dir.  1.)  Take  some  and 
taste  it.  ( /  54.) — Is  it  sugar  or  salt7?  You  are  right,  it  is  sugar.  Then 
we  can  sweeten  what  we  eat  and  drink. — Do  his  little  friends  receive 
more  books  than  copy-books l  They  receive  less  of  the  former  than 
of  the  latter. — Do  you  sleep  in  this  pretty  little  bed  ?  No,  I  sleep 
in  that  large  bed. — Who  sleeps  in  this  one?  Sophia  does. — Do  the 
joiner's  boys  make  sofas,  desks,  and  bedsteads'?  Yes,  they  make 
sofas,  bedsteads,  and  desks. — Do  they  work  as  much  as  the  boya 
of  the  carpenter?  They  work  quite  as  much. 


TWENTY-SIXTH   LESSON,  26th.— 'ringt-sixicme  Lc$on,  2(}me, 


YOCABULAIRE.  Ire  Section. 


00  you  learn  French  ?        Russian  ? 

1  Jo.  I  do  not. 

The  Polish.      Russian.       Turkish. 
Latin.     Greek.    Arabian,   Arabic. 
Syrian,  Syriac.    Swedish. 
Does  your  son  learn  Latin  ? 
No,  he  does  not. 

The  Pole.  The  Roman.  The  Greek. 
The  Swede.  The  Arab.  The  Syrian. 
To  speak  French.  German. 

Obs.  58.  After  the  verb,  parler,  the 
Fran$ais,Anglaix,  &c.,  although  it  is 

Who  speaks  Swedish  ?     Not  I ;  but 

I  am  studying  Polish. 
This  minister  reads  Latin  well,  and 

translates  Greek  and  Syrian. 
Are  you  an  Englishman — English  ? 


Lc 


Apprenez-vous  le   Fran$ais! 

Russe? 

Je  Tapprends.  Je  ne  1'apprends  pas. 
Le  polonais.  Le  russe.  Le  turc. 
Le  latin.  Le  grec.  L'arabe, 

Le  syriaque.      Le  suedois. 
Votre  h'ls  apprend-il  le  latin  ? 
Non,  il  ne  Papprend  pas. 
Le  Polonais.   Le  Remain.   Le  Grec. 
Le  Suedois.    L'Arabe.    Le  Syrien, 
Parler  Frangais.   Parler  AllemancL 
article  (Ze)  is  usually  omitted  before  : 
used  after  ail  other  verbs. 


Qui  parle  suedois  ?    Pas  moi  ;  mdt 

j'etudie  le  polonais. 
Ce  ministre  lit  bien  le  latin,  t/  C 
A  traduit  le  grec  et  le  syriaque. 
Etes-vous  Anglais  ? 


Obs.  59.  Where  the  indefinite  article  is  used  in  English  to  denote  quaU 
ties,  the  French  make  use  of  no  article,  ft  38,  R.  2.  p.  469.) 


TWENTY-SIXTH     LESSOK.    (\.\ 


No,  Sir,  1  am  a  Frenchman.  (French.) 

Is  he  a  Turk,  a  Greek,  or  an  Arab  ? 

[s  your  cousin  a  minister  ?       He  ? 

No,  he  is  an  apothecary. 

Crazy,  foolish. 

Sure,  certain. 

Are  they  sure  they  have  it  ?  They  are. 

To  take  away,  pull  off,  throw  off. 

Take  away,  off. 

Well,  vsry  well ! 

Are  you  tired  and  sleepy  ? 

I  am  tired  and  sleepy. 
Obs.  60.  Change  the  verb  when  the 

[  am  much  obliged  to  you,  (him ,  them.) 
You  are  welcome.      It  is  not  worth 
mentioning. 


Non,  Monsieur,  je  sins  Francis. 

Est-il  Turc,  Grec,  ou  Arabe  ? 

Votre  cousin  est-il  ministrc  ?     Lui 

Non,  il  est  apothicaire. 

Fou.  (plur.  s.  92.) 

Sur.  (de  avant  un  infinit.) 

Sont-ils  siirs  de  T avoir  ?    Us  en  HOH 

surs. 
Oter. 
Otez. 
Eh  bien ! 
IStes-vous  fatigue  et  avez-vous  som 

meil  ? 
Je  suis  fatigue  et  j'ai  sommeii. 

adjective  requires  a  different  one. 

Je  vous  (lui,  leur)  suis  bien  obligtf. 
De  ricn. 


EXERCICE.  Ire  Sec. 
\^    IVoulliez  pas  (do  not  forget)  le  quantieme  en  Frangais. 

Quel  jour  du  mois  est-ce?  C'est  le....  De  quel  mois?  Du 
mois  de  ...  En  etes-vous  siir  ?  Oui,  j'en  suis  sur.  N'est-co 
pas  aujourd'hui  jeudi?  Si  fait,  c'est  jeudi.  Eh!  bien,  le  papiei 
dit:  jeudi  le  . . . .  N'ai-je  pas  raison?  Si  fait,  je  crois  que  vous 
avez  raison.  Je  vous  remercie.  De  rien.  Vous  etesbien  bon.  Je 
BUIS  bien  aise  de  savoir  le  quantieme,  parce  que  j'ai  un  billet  a  ecrire. 
Avez-vous  besoin  de  papier7?  Non,  je  vous  suis  bien  pblige.  J'er. 
ai,  je  crois;  mais  je  ne  puis  trouver  mon  encrier.  Eles-vous  sui 
qu'il  n'est  pas  dans  votre  pupitre  ?  Je  n'en  suis  pas  tout-a-fait  sur, 
mais  je  crois,  qu'il  n'y  est  pas.  Laissez-moi  voir  (§  54)  si  je  ne 
peux  pas  1'y  trouver.  Cherchez.  (§  150.)  Eh  bien  !  L'y  trouvez 
vous  ?  Non,  il  n7est  pas  ici.  Qui  peut  Pavoir  ?  Votre  cousin  Arthui} 
je  pense.  Car  il  ecrit  son  devoir  da-ns  son  appartement.  Puis-je 
aller  le  chercher1?  Non;  s'il  en  a  besoin,  il  peut  Pavoir.  Je  vaia 
ecrire  mon  billet  aveo  mon  crayon. 

Do  you  go  for  anything?  I  do  go  for  something. — What  do  you 
go  for!  I  go  for  some  cider. — Does  your  father  send  fcr  anything? 
He  sends  for  some  wine. — Does  your  servant  go  for  some  bread'1 
He  goes  for  some. — For  whom  does  your  neighbor  send  ?  He  senda 
for  the  physician. — Does  your  servant  take  off  his  coat  in  order  to 
make  the  fire  ?  He  takes  it  off  in  order  to  make  it. — Do  you  tako 
5ff  your  gloves  in  order  to  givo  me  money  ?  I  do  take  them  off  in 
ttder  to  give  you  some. — Do  you  leam  Fiench?  I  do  learn  it. — 


TWENTY-SIXTH    LESSON.    (2.)  131 

Does  ycLT  brother  learn  German?  He  does  learn  it. — Who  learns 
English  ?  The  Frenchman  learns  it. — Do  we  learn  Italian  ?  You 
do  learn  it. — What  do  the  English  learn  ?  They  learn  French  and 
German. — Do  you  speak  Spanish  ?  No,  Sir,  I  speak  Italian. — Who 
speaks  Polish  ?  My  brother  speaks  Polish. — Do  our  neighbors  speafc 
Russian  T  They  do  not  speak  Russian,  but  Arabic. — Do  you  speak 
Arabic?  No,  I  speak  Greek  and  Latin. — What  knife  have  you?  I 
have  an  English  knife. — What  money  have  you  there  ?  Is  it  (est-ce) 
Italian  or  Spanish  money?  It  is  Russian  money. .—Have  you  an 
Italian  hat"-  No,  I  have  a  Spanish  hat. — Are  you  a  Frenchman? 
No,  I  am  an  Englishman.  —  Art  thou  a  Greek?  No,  I  am  n 
Spaniard. 

Are  these  men  Germans  ?  No,  they  are  Russians. — Do  the  Rus- 
sians speak  Polish?  They  do  not  speak  Polish,  but  Latin,  Greek, 
and  Arabic. — Is  your  brother  a  merchant  ?  No,  he  is  a  joiner. — Are 
these  men  merchants  ?  No,  they  are  carpenters. — Are  you  a  cook  ? 
No,  I  am  a  baker. — Are  we  tailors?  No,  we  are  shoemakers. — Art 
thou  crazy  ?  No,  I  am  not  crazy. — What  is  that  man  ?  He  is  a  phy- 
sician.— Does  the  son  of  the  painter  study  Greek?  No,  he  studies 
English  before  Greek.  He  is  right. — Is  he  going  to  learn  Greek 
before  Latin  ?  No,  he  is  going  to  learn  Latin  before  Greek. — Does 
the  butcher  kill  anything  to-day  ?  He  kills  oxen  and  sheep. — Does 
he  kill  some  every  day?  He  does. — Why  does  he  kill  some?  He 
soils  the  beef  and  mutton  in  market. — Do  you  listen  instead  of  doing 
your  task?  Yes,  I  do,  because  what  you  say  is  very  pretty. — Do 
they  listen  also?  No,  they  neither  listen  nor  study,  nor  copy;  but 
they  sleep.  They  do  right,  if  they  are  tired  and  sleepy.  Afterwards 
they  can  work  better.  ($  170.) 

VOCABULAIRE.   2de  Section. 


To  wish. 

I  wish  you  a  good  morning. 

Does  he  wish  me  a  good  evening  ? 

He  does. 

What  do  they  wish  me  ? 

They  wish  you  much  pleasure. 


Souhaiter,  1. 

t  Je  vous  souhaitc  le  bonjour. 

t  Me  souhaite-t-il  le  bonsoir  ? 

II  vous  le  souhaite. 

Que  me  souhaitent-ils  ? 

Us    vous    souhaitent    bcaucoup    in 


plaisir. 

The  forehead.  I  Le  front. 

He  has  a  large  forehead  )  n  a  le  f        , 

His  forehead  is  large.  (06*.  55.)          > 


His  forehead  is  large.  (Obs.  55.) 
He  has  blue  eyes.  His  eyes  are  blue. 
Blue.  Black.  Large. 

The  blue  ones.         A  black  one. 
Round.  Square  Long. 


II  a  les  yeux  bleuai. 

Bleu.            Noir.  Largo. 

Les  blcus.  Un  noir. 

Rond.             Carr<5.  Long. 


132 


TWENTY-SIXTH     LESSON.    (2.) 


A  great,  or  large  Knife.    A  great  man. 
A.  French  book.     An  English  penny. 


Un  grand  couteau.  Un  grand  homme. 
Un  livre  Fraii9ais.     Un  sou  Anglais 


Obs.  61.     Adjectives  of  nations,  colcrs,  and  shapes,  come  after  the  noun, 


A.  square  handkerchief.  A  square  bed. 
A  round  hat.  A  round  tree. 

Russian  money.        Italian  velvet. 

A  good  American  sailor. 

Do  the  Italians  make  fine  black  satin  ? 

To  listen  to  something. 

To  listen  to  some  one,  to  somebody. 

Do  you  listen  to  what  your  teacher 

tells  you?  I  do. 

Docs  he  listen  to  what  I  tell  him  ? 
He  does.  He  does  not  at  all. 

Do  you  listen  to  what  I  tell  you  ? 
,r\>  you  listen  to  me  ?  I  do. 

Whom  do  you  listen  to  ?       Nobody. 


Un  mouchoir  carre.  Un  lit  carre. 
Un  chapeau  rond.  Un  arbre  rond. 
De  1' argent  Russe.  Du  velours 

Italien. 

Un  bon  matelot  Ame'ricain. 
Les  Italiens  font-iis  de  beau  satin 

noir  ? 

t  ficouterquelque  chose ,  (sans  prepos.) 
t  £couter  quelqu'uji. 
t  Ecoutez-vous  ce  que  votre  maitrc 

vous  dit  ?  Je  1'ecoute. 

t  6coute-t-il  ce  que  je  lui  dis  ? 
t  II  1'ecoute.     II  r?e  1'ecoute  pas  du 

tout. 

t  EcoUt«z-voufl  ce  que  je  vous  dis  ? 
t  M' ecoutez-vous  ?  Je  vous  ecoute. 
t  Qui  ecoutez-vous?  Personne, 

(*  171,  R.  8.) 

t  Ecoutez-vous  mon  frcrc  ? 
t  Je  ne  V ecoute  pas. 
t  N'ecoutez-vous  pas  les  homines? 
t  Si  fait,  je  les  ecoute. 
Le  theme.  Le  dernier  theme, 

t  Prendre,  boirc  du  cafe  ou  le  cafe, 
t  Prendre,  boire  le  the  ou  du  the. 


Do  you  listen  to  my  brother  ? 

I  do  not  (listen  to  him). 

Do  you  not  listen  to  the  men  ? 

Yes,  I  do  (listen  to  them). 

The  exercise.          The  last  exercise. 

To  take,  to  drink  coffee. 

To  take,  to  drink  tea. 

Obs.  62.     With  the  verbs,  to  lake  and  to  drink,  (le)  or  (du)  may  be  use<? 
mdifierantly,  with  tea,  coffee,  and  chocolate,  but  not  so  with  other  verbs 
and  no  .ins. 
Will  you  eat  bread  ? 
Will  he  take  the  bread  ? 
Do  you  take  (drink)  tea  ? 
I  do. 

Do  they  drink  tea  every  day  ? 
They  do  take  some  every  day. 
My  father  drinks  coffee. 
The  French  take  coffee  after  dinner. 


Do  they  take  it  at  breakfast  ? 
Does  her  brother  take  chocolate  ? 


Voulez-vous manger  dupain  ?  (not  le.) 
Veut-il  prendre  le  pain  ?  (not  du.) 
t  Prenez-vous  (buvez)  du  (le)  the  ? 
t  yen  prends.  Je  le  bois. 

t  Prennent-ils  le  the  tons  les  jours  ? 
t  Us  le  prennent  tous  les  jours. 
t  Mon  pere  prend  du  cafe, 
t  Les  Frangais  boiveut  du  cafrf  aprei 

dine. 

t  Le  prennent-ils  a  dejeuner  ? 
t  Son  frere  prend-il  du  chocolat  ? 


1  Un  grand  homme  means  a  great  man,  but  un  Jwmme  grand  a  tall  man 
A  similar  distinction  is  made  with  respect  to  the  word  pauvre,  poor,  which 
expresses  pitiful,  or  a  want  of  intellect,  when  before,  and  indigent,  when 
ifter  the  substantive.  Ex.  Un  pauvre  homme  :  a  sorrowful  (pitiful ,  miserable 
man  ;  and  un  homme  pauvre,  an  indigent  man. 


TWENTY -SIXTH    LESSON.    (2.) 


133 


He  drinks  chocolate  every  morning. 

Is  your  exercise  easy  to-day? 

It  is  not  very  difficult,  (or  it  is  not)  a 
very  difficult  one,  (or  hard  one,')  but 
it  is  long,  of  it  is  a  long  one. 


t  II  prend  le  chocolat  tous  ies  matins. 
Votre  theme  est-il  aise  aujourd'hui? 
II  n'est  pas  irvs-dijficile,  mais  il  eert 
long. 


TII£ME.  2de  Sec 
N'oublicz  pas  lo  quanticme  en  Fran?ais. 

Mile.  Victoria,  j'ai  Fhorineur  de  vous  saluer,  ^ous  vous  portC2 
Lien.  ifesl-ce  pas?  Oui,  Mr.,  je  me  porte  bien,  merci.  Et  vous, 
Mr.,  comment  vous  etes-vous  porte  depuis  que  j'ai  eu  le  plaisir  de 
vous  voir  an  musee  ?  Je  ne  me  suis  pas  tres-bien  porte,  je  voua 
PHIS  tres-oblige.  Je  suis  fiiche  de  1'apprendre.  Mais  vous  etes 
inieux,  j'espere?  Oui,  beaucoup  mieux;  je  peux  dire:  bien  a  pre- 
sent. Mais,  je  vois  M.  Guillaume.  II  va  entrer.  je  crois.  J:espere 
que  non.  Pourquoi  done  ?  (so?)  Ne  1'aimez-vous  pas?  Non,  je 
ne  peux  pas  le  souflrir.  Je  vois  qu'il  rrentre  pas.  Pourquoi  ne 
pouvex-vous  pas  le  souffrir?  II  est  trop  ram.  N'a-t-il  pas  raison 
d'etre  vain?  N'est-ce  pas  un  joli  jeune  homme  ?  Si  fait;  mais  il  a 
tort  d?en  etre  vain.  —  A  present  que  j'y  pense,  savez-vous  ou  esl 
votre  ami,  Edouard  ?  Oui,  il  est  a  Burlington,  chex  un  de  ses  cou- 
pins.  Va-t-il  venir  ici  bientot?  Je  ne  peux  pas  repondre  a  votre 
question  \  car,  je  ne  sais  pas  quand  il  va  venir  ici. 

Do  you  wish  mo  anything?  I  wish  you  a  good  morning.  —  What 
does  the  young  Prussian  wish  me  ?  lie  wishes  you  a  good  evening. 
—  Where  are  the  children?  They  are  at  your  father's.  —  Why  are 
they  there?  To  wish  him  much  pleasure.  —  Has  the  German  black 
eyes?  No,  he  has  blue  eyes.  —  Who  has  black  eyes?  The  Spa- 
niards, Italians,  and  Turks  have  black  eyes.  —  Has  not  that  Greek 
small  feet,  a  large  forehead,  and  a  big  nose?  Yes,  he  has  small 
feet,  a  large  forehead,  but  he  has  not  at  all  a  big  nose.  Do  you 
listen  to  me  ?  I  do,  with  much  pleasure.  —  Does  the  lawyer  lister 
to  the  minister?  He  does  listen  to  him,  in  order  to  answer  hifn§ 
(reply  to  him.')  —  Are  you  going  to  listen  to  him  ?  No,  I  am  going  to 
study  my  exercise  instead  of  listening  to  him.  I  do  not  wish  to 
know  what  he  is  going  to  say.  —  Have  you  your  cousirrs  note  ?  To 
oe  sure  I  have  it.  —  Have  you  to  answer  it  immediately?  Yes,  I 
have  to  answer  it  immediately.  —  Are  you  answering  it  now  1  Yes 
1  am  ;  but  my  eyes  are  sore,  and  I  cannot  answer  it  very  well.  — 
Answer  it  (§  150,  Art.  8)  for  me;  will  you?  With  pleasure,  if  I 
jan.  —  Tell  me  what  I  have  to  write.  —  Tell  him  first  why  I  do  not 
answer,  and  then  tell  him  that  I  send  him  his  round  hat,  his  blue  coat, 
his  black  satin  vest,  his  black  velvet  shoes,  his  French  fan,  his 


134 


TWENTY-SEVEKTH    IESSON.    (I.) 


English  gun.  and  several  other  articles,  by  (par)  one  of  my  friends 
who  goes  where  he  is. 

Listen  to  what  the  professor  says,  instead  of  speaking.  Now,  I 
listen  to  what  he  says. — Is  the  doctor  a  man  of  merit?  Listen  to 
Lim,  and  then  you  can  say  whether  (if,  si)  he  is  a  man  of  merit. 
—Do  the  scholars  listen  to  their  English  teacher'?  Those  who  are 
good,  listen  to  him;  the  bad  ones  play  instead  of  listening. — Ara 
your  gloves  French?  Yes,  they  are  French  gloves.  (3.  §39.) — 
Do  you  give  me  English  or  Geiman  paper?-  I  give  you  neither 
English  (repeat  papier)  nor  German  paper;  but  I  give  you  some 
fine  French  paper. — Do  you  read  Spanish  well?  ($  170.)  I  do  not 
read  Spanish  well,  but  German. — What  book  is  the  soldier  reading? 
He  is  reading  a  pretty  French  book. — Do  the  sailors  drink  tea  or 
coffee,  in  the  morning?  Some  take  coffee,  others  drink  tea. — What 
do  j-ou  drink,  in  the  evening?  I  take  tea,  then. — You  take  coffee 
in  the  morning;  do  you  not?  No,  I  take  tea  in  the  morning,  also. — 
Do  you  drink  no  coffee  ?  No,  I  do  not  drink  it  any  more. — Who 
lakes  chocolate  ?  The  Spaniards  and  Italians  drink  a  great  deal  of 
it, — Do  the  French  take  it  also?  They  take  some,  but  not  so  much 
as  the  others. — Do  the  Turks  take  tea.  chocolate,  or  coffee  ?  They 
take  neither  tea  nor  chocolate,  but  they  are  very  fond  of  coffee. 


Why  so  ?  Then. 

How  goes  it  ?  (First  rate.) 

Is  it  possible  ?  It  is  possible. 

It  is  true,  however.        Is  it  true  ? 
la  it  not  true  ?  It  is  not  true. 


t  Pourquoi  done  ?  done. 

Comment va?  Celavabien, tres-bien. 
Est-il  possible  ?        C'est  possible. 
C'cst  vrai,  cependant.    Est-ce  vrai  I 
N'est-ce  pas  vrai?  Ce  n'est  pis  vrai. 


TWENTY-SEVENTH  LESSON,  27th.— Vingt-scptieme  Legon,  27me. 
YOCABULAIRE.    Ire  Section. 


To' show. 

I  show,  do  show,  am  showing. 

He  does  not  show. 

Dost  thou  show  ? 

SJiow  him  the  apartment. 

To  show  something  to  some  one. 

To  show  one  something. 

Do  you  show  me  your  gun  ? 

I  do. 

What  do  you  show  the  man  ? 

[  show  him  my  fine  clothes. 

Tobacco.      Tobacco,  (for  smoking 


Montr er,  I.         Faire*  voir. 

Je  fais  voir.        Je  montre. 

II  ne  fait  pas  voir.     II  ne  montre  p.ie 

Fais-tu  voir  ?    Montres-tu  ? 

IMontreZ'lui     >  Uappartement. 

\Faites-lui  voir}      ($150.) 

J  Montrer    )  quelque  chose 

(  Faire  voirj  a  quelqu'un. 
Me  faites-vous  voir  votre  fusil  ? 
Je  vous  le  fais  voir,  (le  montre.) 
Quo  faites-vous  voir  a  Phomme  f 
Je  lui  montre  mes  beaux  habits. 
Du  tabac.        Du  tabac  a  Timer. 


TWENTY-SEVENTH     LESSON.    (1.) 


135 


Snuft: 

To  smoke.        To  snufi',  take  snufT. 

Do  you  smoke  or  take  snuff? 

I  neither  smoke  nor  snuff. 

You  chew ;  do  you  not  ? 

[  neither  smoke,  snuff,  nor  chew. 

Is  it  possible  !         It  is  wonderful ! 

To  chew.     Do  not  chew,  (imperat.) 

The  gardener.  This  valet. 

That  concert.  To  the  concert  of  Mr. . . 

To  intend,  to  intend  to. 

Do  you  also  intend  to  go  to  the  ball  ? 

I  intend  to  go  to  it,  (going  there.) 

To  know,  to  know  how,  (bef.  a  verb.) 

Dost  thou  know?  Dost  thou  not  know? 

Does  the  child  know  ?    He  does  not. 

To  swim.  Swimming. 

Do  you  know  how  to  swim  ? 

Can  you  swim  ? 

Does  he  read  ?     He  does  not  know 

how. 

A  cigar.        A  Spanish  cigar. 
To  think  of,  [meaning,  what  is  your 

opinion  of.]     What  do  you  think 

of  the  weather  ? 


Dutabac  en  poudre,  (a  priscr.) 

Fumcr,  1.  Pre?idre*  du  tabac  oupristr, 

Fumez-vous  ou  prisez-vous  ? 

Je  ne  fume  ni  ne  prise.  ($  162,  A.  6.} 

Vous  chiquez,  n'est-ce  pas  ? 

Je  ne  fume,  ni  ne  prise,  ni  ne  chique, 

Est-il  possible!  C'est  extraordinaire1 

Chiquer,!.     Ne  chiquez  pas. 

Lc  jardinier.        Ce  valet-ci. 

Ce  concert-la.    Au  concert  de  M. .., 

Compter,  1,  (sans  prepos.) 

Comptez-vous  aussi  aller  au  bal  ? 

Je  coirpte  y  aller. 

Savoir,*3.  ($  14-J,  sans  prepos.) 

Sais-tu  ?     Ne  sais-tu  pas? 

L'enfant  sait-il  ?      II  ne  sait  pas. 

Nager,  1.     Nageant.  ($  1  -14,  R.  2.) 

>  Savez-vous  nager  ? 
Lit-il  ?  II  ne  sait  pas  lire. 

Un  cigare.        Un  cigare  espognol. 

Penser,  1,  de  . . . . 

Que  penscz-vous  du  temps  ? 


THEME.  Ire  Sec. 
N'oubliez  pas  d'ecrire  la  date  en  Francois. 

Bon  soir,  Michel,  comment  vous  portez-vous  aujourd'hui?  Jo 
me  porte  tres-bien,  merci.  Et  vous;  Mr.,  comment  va?  Cela  va 
bien,  je  vous  remercie.  Vous  voyez  que  je  fume  un  cigare  espa- 
gnol,  en  voulez-vous  un?  Non,  je  vous  suis  bien  oblige ;  mais  je  nc 
fume  plus.  Vous  chiquez,  n?est-ce  pas  ?  Non,  je  ne  chique  pas. 
Est-il  possible  !  Vous  ne  fumez  ni  ne  chiquez  !  C'est  extraordi- 
naire !  N'est-ce  pas?  Oui,  en  verite  !  Mais  vous  prisez?  Non, 
je  ne  prise  pas.  Quoi !  Yous  ne  chiquez,  ni  ne  fumez,  ni  ne 
prisez  ?  Est-il  possible  !  C'est  possible.  Ce  que  je  vous  dis  est 
vrai.  Mais,  pourquoi  est-ce  extraordinaire  ?  Parce  que  tout  le 
monde  fume  ou  prise  ou  chique.  Non  pas  tout-a-fait.  Que  pensez- 
vous  du  temps  ?  Je  pense  qu'il  est  super-be.  Quoi !  Ne  fait-il  paa 
*rop  chaud  pour  vous?  Pour  moi?  Non,  en  verite. 

What  does  your  father  want?  He  wants  some  tobacco. — Will 
you  go  for  some ?  I  will  go  for  some. — What  tobacco  does  he  want? 
He  wants  some  snuff. — Do  you  want  tobacco,  (for  smoking?)  I  do 
not  want  any;  I  do  not  smoke. — Do  you  show  me  anything?  I 
show  you  gold  ribbons,  (des  rubans  (for.) — Does  your  father  show 


136  TWENTY-SEVENTH    LESSON.    (2.) 

his  gun  to  my  brother?  He  does  show  it  him. — Does  he  show  hirf. 
his  beautiful  birds?  He  does. — Does  the  Frenchman  smoke?  Ho 
does. — Do  you  go  to  the  ball?  I  go  to  the  theatre  instead  of  going 
to  the  ball. — Does  the  gardener  go  into  the  garden  ?  He  goes  to  the 
market  instead  of  going  into  the  garden. — Do  you  send  your  valet 
to  the  tailor?  I  send  him  to  the  shoemaker  instead  of  sending  him 
to  the  tailor. — Does  your  brother  intend  to  go  to  the  ball  this  eve- 
ning? He  does  not  intend  to  go  to  the  ball,  but  to  the  concert. — 
When  do  you  intend  to  go  to  the  concert?  I  intend  to  go  there  this 
evening. — At  what  o'clock?  At  a  quarter  past  ten. — Do  you  go  for 
my  son  ?  I  do  go  for  him. — Where  is  he  ?  He  is  in  the  counting- 
house. — Do  you  find  the  gardener  whom  you  are  looking  for? — I 
do. — Do  your  sons  find  the  gardeners  whom  they  are  looking  for! 
They  do  not. 

Do  your  friends  intend  to  go  to  the  theatre  ?  They  do. — When 
do  they  intend  to  go  thither?  They  intend  to  go  thither  to-morrow. 
— At  what  o'clock  ?  At  half  past  seven. — What  does  the  merchant 
wish  to  sell  you?  He  wishes  to  sell  me  some  pocket-books. — Do 
you  intend  to  buy  some  ?  I  will  riot. — Dost  thou  know  anything? 
I  do  not  know  anything. — What  does  your  little  brother  know?  He 
knows  how  to  read  and  to  write. — Does  he  know  French?  He  does 
not. — Do  you  know  German?  I  do. — Do  your  brothers  know  Greek? 
They  do  not,  but  they  intend  to  study  it. — Do  you  know  English?  J 
do  not,  but  intend  to  learn  it. — Do  my  children  know  how  to  read 
Italian  ?  They  know  how  to  read,  but  not  (mais.non)  how  to  speak 
it. — Do  you  know  how  to  swim  ?  I  do  not  know  how  to  swim,  but 
how  to  play. — Does  your  son  know  how  to  make  coats  ?  He  does 
not  know  how  to  make  any;  he  is  no  tailor. — Is  he  a  merchant? 
He  is  not,  (ne  Vest  pas.) — What  is  he  ?  He  is  a  physician. 
We  are  well.  We  thank  you.  i  Nous  nous  portons  bien.  Nous  voui 

remercions. 
VOCABULAIRE.  2de  Section. 


To  conduct,  co7iducting. 
I  conduct,  thou  conductest,  he  con- 
ducts. 

Conduct  him  to  his  uncle's  house. 
Conduct  me  there  also. 
I  will,  willingly,  with  pleasure. 
To  extinguish,  put  out,  extinguishing. 
Do  you  extinguish  (put  out)  the  fire  ? 
I  do  not  put  it  out.          Put  it  out. 
He  extinguishes  it.  Thouputtestitout. 
To  light,  to  kindle,  to  fire. 


Conduire,*  4.         Conduisant. 

Je  conduis,  ti  conduis,  il  conduit. 

Conduiscz-le  choz  son  onde* 
Conduisez-y-moi  aussi    ($  58j 
Volon  tiers. 

£tei?idre,*4:,  eteignant. 
6teignez-vous  le  feu  ? 
Je  ne  1'cteins  pas.     Eteigncz-le. 
II  l'e'teint.     Tu  I'eteins. 
Allumer,  1. 


The    gas.      This    burner.      Which  (  Le  gaz.     Ce  bec-ci.     Quelbecf 
burner  ?  • 


TWENTY-SEVENTH     LESSON.    (2.) 


137 


How  many  burners  do  you  light  ? 

A  single  gas  burner  is  enough. 

Put  out  this  burner,  and  light  up  the 

other. 

Often.     As  flflrn  o.s  you.  (§  170) 
As  often  as  I.    As  often  as  we,  thou. 

Do  you  often  go  to  the  wharf? 
As  often  as  lie.    As  often  as  they. 
As  good  as  he,  we,  they,  I,  thou. 
Not  so  often.  Less  often. 

Do  you  frequently  see  my  uncle  ? 
I  do  not  see  him  so  often  as  you. 

X)  often  as  I,  as  they. 
Oftcner,  more  often.     Often  enough. 
Oftener  than  we,  than  they. 
Too  often.    Does  he  come  too  often  ? 
r  believe  he  comes  too  often. 
To  count.          To  count  in  French. 
The  number.  The  numbers. 

Do  you  know  this  number  in  French  ? 
What  number  ?  This,  7<">. 

To  pronounce. 

Can  you  pronounce  my  name  ? 
I  can  try.        Well,  try.        VALUE. 
f.'an  T  pronounce  it  ?        Yes,  pretty 
well. 


Combicn  de  bees  aliumez-voub  ? 
Un  scul  bee  de  gaz  est  assez. 
fctcignez  ce  bec-ci  ct  allumez  Tautru, 

Souvent.     Aussi  souvent  quc  vous. 
Aussi  souvent  quo  moi,  quo  noua, 

quo  toi. 

Allez-vous  souvent  au  quai  ? 
Aussi  souvent  que  lui,  qu'eux. 
Aussi  bon  que  lui,  nous,  eux,  moi,  toi 
J\loins  souvc?it. 

Voycz-vous  souvent  mon  oncle  ? 
Je  le  vois  moins  souvent  que  vous. 
Moins  souvent  que  moi,  qu'eux. 
Plus  souvent.  Assez  souvent. 

Plus  souvent  que  nous,  qu'eux. 
Trop  souvent.  Vient-il  trop  souvent  1 
Je  crois  qu'il  vicnt  trop  souvent. 
Compicr.      Compter  en  Fran^ais.1 
Le  nomlre.         Lcs  nomlres. 
Savez-vouscenombre-cienFran$ais? 
Quel  nombre  ?     Celui-ci.  ($  38.) 
Prononcer,  1.  (§  144,  R.  1.) 
tSavez-vous  prononcer  mon  nom  ? 
Je  puis  essayer.     Eh  bien  !  essayez. 
Puis-je  le   prononcer?      Oui,  assea 

bien. 


VlXGT-SEPTIEME    TlliblE.    2  lie    SeC. 

N'oublicz  pas  d'ecrire  la  date  ici,  en  Francois. 

Bon  jour,  Messieurs,  comment  vous  portez-vons  ?  Nous  nous  por- 
tons  bien,  excepte  M.  le  Blanc,  qui  n'est  pas  ici.  Va-t-il  venir? 
Non,  il  ne  vient  pas  anjourd''hui.  N'est-il  pas  assez  bien  pour  venir  ? 
Non,  il  n'est  pas  bien  du  tout.  Qu'a-t-il  ?  Je  ne  sai^  pas;  et  le  Doc- 
<eur  ne  le  sait  pas  mieux  que  moi,  du  moins,  je  le  crois.  Lui  donne- 
t-ii  quelque  chose  a  prendre  ?  II  lui  donne  quelque  chose.  Je  suis 
bien  aise,  Messieurs,  d'apprendre  que  vous  vous  portez  bien.  Nous 
vons  remcrcions.  Le  theme  que  vous  avez  est-il  difficile  ?  Moi,  je 
le  tronve  difficile  ;  mais  ces  trois  messieurs  ne  le  trouvent  pas  diffi- 
rile.  O'est  vrai,  au  contraire  nous  le  trouvons  aise.  Que  trouvez-vous 
difficile  ?  Je  ne  peux  pas  vous  le  dire  en  Francais.  Vous  pouvez 

1  The  teacher  is  invited  to  make  the  pupils  count  in  French,  by  the 
minute — slowly  at  first ;  but  when  they  pronounce  the  numbers  well  and 
tPDinlarly,  let  them  count  as  fast  as  they  can;  not  for  the  mere  satisfaction 
of  knowing  whether  they  can  count  150  or  170  in  a  minute,  but  to  give  east 
ind  readiness  to  their  utterance.  Pupils  arc  generally  fond  of  this  exerciser 


£38  TWfcN  TV- SEVENTH     LESSON.    ^2.j 

»jfisayer,  n'est-ce  pas?  Oui;  sans  doute.  Ehbien !  essayez.  Voiorb 
liers.  No  as  avons  beaucoup  de  new  mots.  Ne  savez-vous  pas  lo 
Francais  de:  new?  Je  ne  le  sais  pas.  Ces  autres  messieurs  le 
savent-ils?  Moi,  je  le  sais.  Nous,  nous  ne  le  savons  pas.  Je  vaia 
vous  le  dire,  c'est  nouveau.  Pouvez-vous  Pecrire  ?  Moi,  non — moi, 
oui — n,  o,  u,  v,  e,  a,  u.  Comment  formez-vcus  le  pluriel  ?  Avec  x, 
n'est-ce  pas?  Oui,  c'est  vrai,  vous  avez  raison. 

Do  you  wish  to  drink  some  cider1?  I  wish  to  drink  some  wine: 
have  you  got  any?  No,  I  have  none,  but  I  will  send  for  some. — 
Has  not  your  uncle  got  some  excellent'?  Yes,  he  has. — Conduct 
me  to  his  house,  then.  I  will,  or  willingly.  Now  ?  No,  not  now, 
but  very  soon. — Do  you  know  how  to  make  tea  ?  I  know  how  to 
make  it;  but  I  cannot  make  coffee. — Who  knows  how  to  make 
chocolate?  I;  it  is  not  difficult. — Where  is  your  father's  dentist 
going  to  1  He  is  going  nowhere.  He  remains  at  home  to  fix  the 
teeth  of  his  uncle. — Dost  thou  conduct  anybody  ?  I  conduct  no- 
body.— And  you,  whom  do  you  conduct  ?  I  conduct  my  son's  valet. — 
Where  are  you  conducting  him  ?  I  conduct  him  to  the  lawyer's 
office,  to  show  him  where  it  is. — Does  your  valet  conduct  this  German 
boy?  He  does. — Where  to?  He  conducts  him  into  the  garden  to 
speak  to  our  old  German  gardener. — Does  ycmr  old  German  gardenei 
snuff?  No,  but  he  smokes. — Does  he  work  well  ?  Yes,  he  does,  for 
no  cannot  talk  (parler  a)  with  the  other  servants ;  and  he  has  to  work. 

Do  we  conduct  any  one  ?  We  conduct  our  children. — Where  are 
your  children  conducting  their  uncle  ?  They  are  conducting  him  to 
the  museum,  to  show  it  to  him. — Conduct  me  there  also.  Come 
with  us. — Aie  they  going  to  show  him  the  theatre?  No,  they  have 
no  time  to  show  it  to  him  to-day  ;  they  have  time  only  to  show  him 
the  museum. — Can  you  pronounce  the  French  of :  to  extinguish? 
I  believe  I  can.  Let  us  see,  (Voyons,  §  150,  Art.  2.)  Try.  Pronounce 

it is  it  right?    Not  quite.    Try  it  again is  it  better?  It 

is  right  now.  I  am  very  glad  of  it,  for  it  is  a  difficult  word. — The 
imperative  is  not  easy.  Do  you  know  it?  Yes,  I  do. — Pronounce 
it,  if  you  please.  With  pleasure. — . ...  is  it  right?  Not  quite.  Pro- 
nounce the  gn  like  gn,  in  the  English  word  mignonette,  gne 

That  is  better.     Try  it  again That's  right  now. — Can  you 

count  a  little  in  French?  Not  much,  but  I  intend  to  learn. — Will 
you  count?  Willingly.— Begin.  1,  2,  3,  4,  6— No,  5—5,  6,  7,  8. 
No  ;  do  not  pronounce  the  h  of  huit,  say:  uit.  Uit,  9,  10,  11,  12,  &c. 
(Let  the  teacher  correct,  in  French,  the  mistakes  as  they  occur,  ana 
note  down  the  number  counted  in  a  minute,  whenever  this  exercise 
let  lies  place.) 

Eteignez-vous  le  feu?    Je  ne  Peteins  pas,  le  cuisinier  Peteint 


TWENTY-EIGHTH     LESSON.    ( /.)  139 

Qui  allume  le  feu  le  matin?  Le  cuisinier  allume  son  feu,  et  nion 
valet  allume  le  mien.  Qui  allume  celui  de  votre  oncle  et  de  votre 
cousin?  Ils  n'ont  pas  de  feu  dans  leurs  appartements.  parce  qu:ilg 
n'y  restent  pas.  Ou  restent-ils]  Ils  sont  avec  nous  dans  le  salon 
nuand  ils  sont  a  la  maison. — Sortent-ils  souvent  ?  Oui,  tres-souvent. 
Vont-ils  souvent  a  Fairmount?  Non,  pas  tres-souvent.  Pourquoiy 
vont-ils?  Ils  y  vont  pour  yoir  la  machine  hydrauliqiic,  (the  water 
works.)  Vont-ils  plus  souvent  au  musee?  Oui;  ils  y  vont  plus  sou- 
vent. —  Sortons-nous  aussi&myfent  que  nos  voisins  a  gauche  ?  Nous 
sortons  moins  souvent  qflfeifx.  L'cpicier  va-t-il  aussi  souvent  au 
marche  que  mon  jardinier"?*  Je  crois  qiril  y  va  aussi  souvent.  Al- 
lumez-vous  le  gaz  tous  les  jours'?  Oui,  nous  Fallumons  tous  les 
soirs.  A  quelle  heure  votre  domestique  Fallume-t-n"?  A  present,  it 
allume  le  premier  bee  a  sept  heures  et  demie  et  les  autres  plus  tard. 
A  quelle  heure  Feteint-il  ?  II  Feteint  a  dix  heures  et  demie  dans  le 
Baton,  et  dans  nos  appartements,  nous  Feteignons  a  onze  heures  ou 
a  onze  heures  et  demie. 

At  the  beginning  (commencement)  of 

the  exercise. 
Unwholesome.       It  is  unwholesome 

weather. 
Damp,  humid.     How  goes  the  tooth- 

ache  ? 

Since  when  ?    It  is  better.   Excepted. 
Much  obliged. 


Au  commencement  du  theme. 
Malsain.       C'est  un  temps  malsain. 

Humide.        Comment  va  le  mal  da 

dents? 

Depuis  quand  ?  II  va  mieux.  Excepte. 
Bien  oblige. 


TWENTY-EIGHTH  LESSON,  28th.— Vingt-huitieme  Leron,  28mo. 
VOCABULAIRE.  Ire  Section. 

Obs.  63.  Do  and  AM,  when  used  to  interrogate,  in  the  present  tense,  may 
be  rendered  by  EST-CE  QUE,  which  must  be  used  with  the  first  person  sin- 
gular, of  those  verbs  in  which  the  transposition  of  the  pronoun  would  pro- 
duce an  unpleasant  or  a  difficult  sound.1  (Dir.  8.) 

Do  1  wish  ?  Am  I  willing  ?      \  Est-ce  que  je  veux  ? 


Am  I  able  ?  Can  I  ? 

Am  I  doing  ?  Do  I  do  ? 

What  am  I  doing  ? 


Est-ce  que  je  peux  ? 
Est-ce  que  je  fais  ? 
Qu'est-ce  que  je  fais  ? 


1  Verbs  whose  first  person  singular  forms  Dnly  jne  syllable,  as :  je  sens, 
I  feel ;  je  prends,  I  take  ;  je  tends,  I  tend ;  jefonds,  I  melt :  or  whose  last 
syllable  sounds  like  je,  such  as  :  je  mange,  I  eat ;  je  venge,  I  revenge  ;  j* 
*ingc,  I  range  ;  je  songe,  I  dream  :  and  others,  such  as :  funis,  I  imito  ;  ji 
.?,  I  permit ;  j'offre,  I  offer  ;  &c.,  &c. 


140 


TWENTY -EIGHTH     LESSON.    (1.) 


What  do  I  say  ? 

Where  am  I  going  to  ? 

To  whom  do  I  speak  ? 

Am  I  going  ? 

Am  I  coming  ? 

You  are.  Are  you  coming  ? 

Do  you  tell  or  say  ! 

I  do  say  or  tell.  He  says. 

What  does  ho  not 


Qu'est-ee  que  jc  dis  ? 

Ou  est-ce  que  je  vais  ? 

A  qui  est-ce  que  je  parle  ? 

Est-ce  que  je  vais  ? 

Est-ce  que  je  viens  ? 

Vous  venez.  Est-ce  que  vous  venez  « 

Dites-vous  ?    Est-ce  que  vous  dites  1 

Je  dis.  II  dit. 

II  ne  dit  pas.        Qu'est-ce  qu'il  nfl 


dit  pas  ? 
Qu'est-ce  que  nous  ne  disons  pas  f 


lie  does  not  say. 

say? 
What  do  we  not  say  ? 

Obs.  64.  Some  verbs,  however,  ending  in  c  mute  in  the  first  person  sin- 
gular, present  tense,  may  be  used  interrogatively  in  that  person,  but  then 
they  change  e  mute  into  e  with  the  acute  accent,  followed  by  je. 

Do  I  speak  ?  J   Parl^'e  ?  (Pas  si  bon  ?Me) 


kst-ce  que  je  parle  ? 


Do  I  love  ? 

Are  you  acquainted  with  that  man  ? 
[  am  not  at  all  acquainted  with  him. 
Is  your  brother  acquainted  with  him  ? 
He  is  weR  acquainted  with  him. 
Do  you  drink  cider  ? 
I  begin  to  drink  cider,  but  my  brother 

drinks  milk. 

To  begin  to  (commence)  bcgin?ii?ig. 
I  begin  to  like  it. 
Does  he  begin  to  study  well  ? 
I  begin  to  be  cold— -to  be  warm — 
He  begins  to  be  ashamed — sleepy. 
We  commence  to   be   hungry   and 

thirsty. 

Badly,  awkwardly.  ($  170.) 
Does  your  uncle  speak  English  well  ? 
He  speaks  it  badly. 
They  both  write  it  well. 
A  minute.        In  a  few  minutes. 


,  mail 


Est-ce  que  j'aimc  ? 
Connaissez-vous  cet  homme  ? 
Je  ne  le  connais  pas  du  tout. 
Votre  frere  le  connait-il  ? 
II  le  connait  beaucoup. 
Buvez-vous  du  cidre  ? 
Je  commence  a  boire  du  cidre, 

mon  frere  boit  du  lait. 
Commencer  a,  commengant. 
Je  commence  a  1'aimer.  (a  av.  1'ini./ 
Commence-t-il  a  bien  etudier? 
Je  commence  a  avoir  froid  —  chaud— 
II  commence  a  avoir  honte  —  sommeil. 
Nous  commengons  a  avoir  faim  et 

soif.  ($  144.  R.  1.) 

Mai  —  tres-mal  —  plus  mal  —  trop  mal. 
Votre  oncle  parle-t-il  bien  Anglais  ? 
II  le  parle  mal. 

Us  1'ecrivent  bien  Fun  et  Fautre. 
Une  minute,  (fern.)     Dans  quelqucs 


minutes. 
VINGT-HUITIEME  TH£ME.  Ire  Sec. 

J&crivez  le  quantieme  au  commencement  (at  the  beginning)  du  theme. 

Que  pensez-vous  du  temps?  Nous  Je  trouvons  tTes-desagr cable, 
II  est  froid  et  humide. '  Je  ne  le  trouve  pas  froid ;  mais  tres-humice. 
C'est  un  temps  malsain.  Tres-malsain,  en  verite.  II  n7est  paa 
bon  pour  ceux  qui  ont  des  rhumes.  Non,  et  je  suis  fache  de  vo'sia 
dire  que  Louis  en  a  un  tres-mauvais.  Depuis  quand?  Depuis 
mercredi. — J'ai  Phonneur  de  vous  souhaiter  le  bonsoir.  Comment 
va  le  mal  de  dents  ?  II  va  mieux,  bien  oblige.  J'en  suis  bien  aisu, 


TWENTY- EIGHTH     LESSON.      (1.)  141 

Comment  se  porte-t-on  chez  lo  general  ?  Tout  le  inonde  s'y  porta 
bien,  excepte*  le  valet  irlandais.  QuVt-il  ?  Nous  ne  savone  pas  ce 
quo  c'est.  Est-il  trts-mal?  Oui,  il  est  oblig6  de  rester  dans  son  lit. 
Depuis  quand  est-il  malade  ?  Depuis  plusieurs  jours.  Cependant 
le  Dr.  croit  qu'il  est  un  pcu  mieux.  Quand  est-il  mieux ;  le  ma- 
tin ou  le  soir  ?  II  est  mieux  a  midi  ct  plus  mal  le  soir.  Qu'a  Henri  ? 
D  a  rnal  a  un  coude.  A  quel  ?  Au  droit  ou  au  gauche  ?  Je  crois 
quo  c'est  au  gauche ;  mais  jo  n'en  suis  pas  stir. 

Do  I  read  well  ?  You  do. — Do  I  speak  pretty  well  ?  You  do. — 
Does  my  little  brother  speak  French  well  ?  He  does. — How  does 
he  write  German  ?  He  writes  it  badly. — Who  writes  it  well  ?  Our 
young  minister  does. — Does  he  write  it  as  well  as  the  Svv'ss  dentist'1 
They  both  write  it  well,  very  well.  I  do  not  know  who  v;rites  the 
best. — Do  we  speak  badly  ?  You  do  not. — Do  I  drink  too  much  . 
You  do. — Am  I  able  to  make  hats'?  You  are  not;  you  are  not  a 
hatter. — Am  f  able  to  write  a  note  ?  You  are. — Am  I  doing  my 
exercise  well?  You  are. — What  am  I  doing1?  You  are  doing 
exercises. — What  is  my  brother  doing  1  He  is  doing  nothing. — 
U'hat  do  I  say?  You  say  nothing. — Do  I  begin  to  speak?  You 
do  begin  to  speak. — Do  I  begin  to  speak  well?  You  do  not 
begin  to  speak  well,  (d  lien  parler^  but  to  read  well,  (mais  d  lien 
lire.'] — Where  am  I  going  to?  You  are  going  to  your  friend's. — Is 
he  at  ho*ne  ? — Do  I  know  ?  Am  I  able  to  speak  as  often  as  the  son 
of  our  neighbor? — He  is  able  to  speak  oftener  than  you. — Can  I 
work  as  much  as  he?  You  cannot. — Do  I  read  as  often  as  you? 
You  do  not,  but  you  speak  oftener  than  I. — Do  I  speak  as  well 
(aussi  lien)  as  you?  You  do  not  speak  as  weil  as  I. — Do  I  go  to 
your  house,  or  do  you  come  to  mine  ?  You  come  to  mine,  and  I 
go  to  yours. — When  do  you  come  to  mine?  Every  morning,  at 
half  past  six. 

Do  you  know  the  Russian  whom  I  know  ?  I  do  not  know  the 
one  you  know,  but  I  know  another. — Do  you  drink  as  much  cider 
as  wine?  I  drink  less  of  the  latter  than  of  the  former. — Does  the 
Pole  drink  as  much  as  the  Russian?  He  drinks  just  as  much. — Do 
the  Germans  drink  as  much  as  the  Poles?  The  latter  drink  more 
than  the  former. — Dost  thou  receive  anything?  I  do. — What  dost 
thou  receive?  I  receive  some  money. — Does  your  friend  receive 
books?  He  does. — What  do  we  receive  ?  We  receive  some  cider. 
—Do  the  Poles  receive  tobacco  ?  They  do. — From  whom  (de  qui) 
do  the  Spaniards  receive  money?  They  receive  some  from  tho 
(dcs)  English,  and  from  the  (des)  French. 

Comptez-vous  tous  les  jours  en  Franc,  ais?  Oui;  nous  comptons, 
N-aimez-voiis  pns  a  comptor?  (Let  the  pupil  give  his  or  her  own 


142 


TWENTY-EIGHTH     LESSON.      2. 


answer.)  Combien  comptez-vous  dans  une  minute  'a  minute)  !  Jti 
compte  125. — Et  vous?  Moi,  je  ne  compte  pas  tant.  Je  ne  oompte 
que  98. — Et  vous,  et  votre  cousin  Armandl  Nous  comptons  128 
Est-ce  plus  que  lui?  Oui;  c'est  plus.  Combien  de  plus?  Trois  da 
plus.  (301.)  C'est  vrai,  vous  avez  raison.  Et  vous,  combien  comp- 
tez-vous de  moins  qu;euxl  Je  compte  trois  de  moins.  Combien 
de  plus  que  lui  ?  Je  compte  27  de  plus  que  lui.  C'est  beaucoup, 
n7est-ce  pas?  C'est  assez,  du  moins. 


A  degree,  32°,  zero,  75°,  100°,  212o. 
Thank  God. 


Un  degre,  32°,  zero,  75°,  100°,  213° 
Dien  merci. 


VOCABULAIRE.  2de  Section. 


Avant,  (de,  avant  un  infinitii.) 
Parlez-vous  avant  <f  ecouter  ? 
J'ecoute  avant  de  repondre. 

Obs.  65.  As  speak  and  listen  have  you  for  nominative,  dispense  with  the 
bccond  you,  and  use  the  infinitive  mood  after  the  preposition.  (Rule  3.) 


Before,  (previous  to.)  (R.  1.) 
Do  you  speak  before  you  listen  ? 
I  listen  before  I  answer. 


Does  he  go  to  market  before  he 
breakfasts  ? 

To  Iredkfast.       To  eat  breakfast. 

He  goes  (there)  before  he  writes. 

Do  you  take  oif  your  stockings  be- 
fore you  take  off  your  shoes  ? 

To  depart,  set  out,  start  ;  departing. 

When  do  you  intend  to  depart  ? 

I  set  out  to  -morrow  for  Paris. 

I  depart,  tliou  startest,  he  sets  out. 

Do  they  go  to  see  their  uncle  before 
they  start  for  Charleston?  They  do. 

To  wet,  to  moisten,  to  damp,  wetting. 

Wet,  damp,  (adjectives.) 

Are  your  shoes  wet  ? 

Yes,  they  are  quite  wet. 


Va-t-il  au  marche  avant  de  dejeuner ! 

Dejeuner,  1. 

II  y  va  avant  d'ecrire. 

Otez-vous  vos  bas  avant  d'oter  voa 
souliers  ? 

Partir,*  2;  partant. 

Quand  comptez-vous  partir  ? 

Je  pars  demain  pour  Paris. 

Jepars,  tupars,  il  part. 

Vont-ils  voir  leur  oncle  avant  de  par- 
tir pour  Charleston  ?  Us  y  vont. 

Mouiller,  1.        Mouillant. 

Mouille,  (sing.)     Mouilles,  (plur.) 

Vos  souliers  sont-ils  mouille's  ? 

Oui,  ils  sont  tout  mouilles. 


Obs.  66.   Tout,  quite,  being  an  adverb  is  invariable,  that  is,  does  not  taka 
an  s. 


To  dry,  to  get  to  dry. 

I  dry,  thou  driest,  be  dries.    ($  144, 

R.  5.) 
Dry  your  shoes. 

Take  a  seat  near  the  fire   and  dry 

your  shoes  and  feet. 
It  is  very  warm  ;  very  cold. 
IK  use.     Much,  commonly,  greatly, 

used. 
Almost,  all,   always,  too  much. 


Se'cher,  1.  Faire  secher. 

Je  seche,  tu  seches,  il  seche. 

Sechez  vos   souliers   (better)   faite? 

secher,  &c. 
Prenez  un  siege  pres  du  feu,  et  fnite« 

secher  vos  souliers  et  vos  pieds. 
II  fait  grand  chaud  ;  grand  froid. 
En  usage.  En  grand  usage. 

Fr-squc,  prn.sque  tout,  toujours,  trcp 


TWKNTY-EIGHTH     LESSON.    (2.)  143 

ViN<;r-nriTi£MK  TII£ME.  2de  Sec. 
fecrivez  le  jour  dii  niois  au  commencement  du  therne. 

Mr.,  nous  vous  souhaitons  le  bonjour,  ct  nous  esperons  que  vou* 
T/ous  portez  bien.  Je  vous  suis  bien  oblige,  Messieurs,  et  je  voisavec 
plaisir  quo  vous  avex  1'air  tie  vous  bien  porter.  Nous  nous  portons 
bien,  Dii-u  incrci,  (thank  God,)  mais  nous  avons  grand  chaud,  (very 
wajm.)  Je  le  crois,  car,  il  fait  grand  chaud.  A  quel  degre  est  le 
tlxrmomctre  ?  Le  mien  est  a  80°  ;  mais  celui  du  voisin  est  a  82$. 
Vo;is  parlez  du  thermometre  de  Fahrenheit,  n7est-ce  pas?  Oui,  car 
c'est  ici  le  seul  en  grand  usage.  ^Si  ce  temps  continue  je  ne  peux 
pas  rester  ici.  Oil  allez-vous?  A  Cape  May.  Quand  partez-vous  ? 
Je  pars  mardi  ou  jeudi.  Partez-vous  seul?  Non,  je  pars  avec  mon 

in.    Pourquoi  part-il  avec  vous?   Farce  qu'il  est  malade.   Qu'a- 
t-ii?    II  a  pour  d'avoir  le  tic  douloureux.     Le  tic  douloureux!     Je 

bien  fuche  de  Tapprendre.     Nous  en  sommes  tous  fachcs.     Je 

led  -'>nt-ils  mouilles?    Je  crois  que  non.     S'ils  1*> 

sont,  je  peux  vous  en  preter  d'autres,  et  vous  pouvez  faire  secher  let 

morci.    Vous  etes  bien  bon.    II  est  8j  heures  et  Louis 

pas  encore  ici.    Ce  matin  il  n'est  pas  ponctuel  comme  a  Fordi 

iidire.     Mon  habit  est  tout  mouille  et  mon  gilet  aussi.     Changez  Ie3 

et  faites>les  secher.     Ou  puis-je  les  faire  secher?     Donnez-les  au 

domestique  pour  les  mettre  pres  du  feu.     Les  souliers  et  les  bas  de 

ce  petit  enfant  sont  motiilles.     Jean,  otez-les  et  faites-les  secher;  car 

le  pauvre  enfant  commence  a  avoir  froid.     Oui,  Mile. 

Do  I  receive  as  much  Spanish  money  as  American  ?  You  receive 
more  of  the  la^er  than  of  the  former. — Do  I  receive  as  many  people 
(out ant  de  monde}  as  the  Doctor?  You  do. — Who  receives  more 
than  he?  more  than  \ve  ?  The  apothecary  does. — From  whom  (de 
qui)  do  your  children  receive  books?  They  receive  some  from  me, 
(de  moi,)  and  from  their  friends. — Do  the  English  receive  as  much 
Turkish  as  American  cotton?  They  receive  more  American  than 
Turkish  cotton. — Our  New  Orleans  merchants  receive  more  French 
than  English  cloth,  do  they  not?  I  believe  they  do. — What  gloves 
do  we  receive?  Wre  receive  French  gloves. — How  many  books 
does  your  neighbor  lend  you?  He  lends  me  three  more.  (301.) — 
When  does  the  foreigner  intend  to  depart?  He  intends  to  depart 
to-day. — Depart  with  him,  can  you  not?  Can  I  not?  No,  indeed; 
and  you  know  very  well  that  I  am  not  ready. — But  you  can  soon 
be  ready.  Do  you  think  so?  (le?)  To  be  sure  I  do.  Does  thfl 
Swede  depart  soon  ?  He  departs  in  a  few  minutes  — Does  he  depart 
alone  ?  No,  he  takes  a  valet  with  him,  because  he  does  not  speak 
English  well  enough  to  go  alone.  He  is  /ight.— Dost  thou  set  ou! 


144  TWENTY-NINTH     LESSON.    (1.) 

to-morrow  ?     Dost  thou  intend  to  go  with  me?     No,  for  we  do  cot 
intend  to  depart  before  10  days.     Then  I  have  to  bid  you  adieu. 

Do  the  Clintons  (Les  Clinton,  ($  140,  Art.  5)  answer  you  imme- 
diately when  you  write  to  them?  They  usually  answer  me  imme- 
diately, when  they  are  not  sick.  Well ;  write  to  them  to  know  if  I 
can  go  to  their  house  on  Saturday,  and  tell  them  to  answer  directly. — 
Are  you  not  going  to  read  the  dentists'  note  before  you  answer  it? 
Yes,  I  am  reading  it  now.  Ah !  pardon  me,  (pardonner.) — Does 
this  Irish  servant  of  yours  (votre  domestique  iiiandais,  §  108)  sweep 
yocr  apartment  before  he  makes  your  bed?  No,  he  makes  the  bed 
before  he  sweeps  the  room. — Dost  thou  drink  before  thou  goest  out7 
I  do. — Do  you  like  to  go  to  market  before  you  eat  breakfast'1  I  do 
not,  for  I  am  almost  Always  sick  when  I  do  it. — Henry,  put  on  your 
shoes  and  stockings.  No,  indeed,  I  intend  to  put  on  my  stockings 
before  I  put  on  my  shoes. — Dost  thou  read  first  and  translate  after- 
wards? Yes,  I  do  so;  but  I  translate  the  exercise  first,  and  write  it 
afterwards.  You  do  well ;  that  is  right. — Do  you  g~  to  the  Pole's 
house  before  you  breakfast?  Yes,  I  do. — At  what  o'clock  do  your 
children  breakfast  ?  They  breakfast  at  seven  o'clock. — Do  you  take 
snuff  before  breakfasting  ?  No,  but  I  smoke  after  breakfast. — Does 
your  son  sjnoke  also  after  breakfast?  He  does  not  smoke  at  all,  and 
I  am  glad  of  it.  Does  he  chew  or  snuff?  No,  he  does  neither. 


TWENTY-NINTH  LESSON,  29ih.—Vingt-neuvieme  Logon.  29w« 

VOCABULAIRE.  Ire  Section. 

COMPARISON  OF  ADJECTIVES  AND  ADVERBS. 
The  French  have  two  kinds  of  comparison  ;  that  of  equality,  formed  by 
autant  de  before  nouns,  and  aussi,  before  adjectives  or  adverbs,  and  qui 
after  them  ;  (1G1,  2?2.)  and  that  of  inequality,  formed  by  plus  or  moins, 
before,  and  que  after  the  same  parts  of  speech.  The  superlative  is  formed 
by  prefixing  to  the  comparative,  not  only  the  defim'e  article  le,  Ics,  but  any 
of  those  which  we  have  called  articles  ($  1),  mo?i,  mes,  &c.  ce,  eel,  ces. 


Positive.   Comparative.  Superlative. 

Great,      greater,  the  greatest. 

Small,       smaller,  my  smallest. 

Rich,        richer,  these  richest. 

Poor,        poorer,  my  poorest. 

Learned,  more  learned,  the  most 

learned. 
Quickly,  quicker,  the  quickest. 


Posit  if.      Comparatif.     Superlatif. 
Grand,     plus  grand,     le  plus  grand. 
Petit,       plus  petit,       monpluspetit. 
Riches,    plus  riches,    cesplus riches- 
Pativres.  pluspauvres,  mes  plus  pau- 

vres. 
Savant,    plus  savant,  le  plus  savant 

Vite,        plus  vite,       le  plus  vite. 


Dften,      more  often,      most  often      j  Souvent,  pliissouvent.le  plus  sol- 
vent. 


TWENTY-NINTH     LESSON.    (1.) 


145 


Fl  18  book  is  small,  that  is  smaller, 
and  this  is  the  smallest  of  all. 

This  hat  is  large,  but  that  i«  larger. 
Iff  yoar  hat  as  large  as  mine  ? 

ft  is  larger  than  yours. 

It  is  not  so  large  as  your*. 

B'jlky,  less  bulky,      the  least  bulky. 

Fine,      less  fine,         the  least  fine. 

Sfowly,      not  so  slowly,      the  least 

slowly. 

Good,    not  so  good,    the  least  good. 
Are  our  neighbor's  children  as  good 

as  ours  ?  (good  is  sage  when  applied 

to  children.) 

They  are  better  than  ours. 
They  are  not  so  good  as  ours,  they 

are  the  least  good  of  all. 


Ce  livre-ci  est  petit,  celui-la  estplu* 

petit,  et  celui-ci  est  le  plus  petit 

dc  tous. 
Ce  chapeau-ci  est  grand,  mais  cclui 

la  est  plus  grand. 
Votre  chapeau  est-ii  aussi  grand  qu« 

le  mien  ? 

II  est  plus  grand  que  le  votre. 
II  est  moins  grand  que  le  votre. 
Gros,    moins  gros,     le  moins  groa. 
Beau,    moins  beau,    le  moins  beau. 
Lentement,     moins  ientement,      la 

moins  lentement. 

Sage,     moins  e?ge,     le  moms  sage. 
Les  enfants  de  notre  voisin  sont-ila 

aussi  sages  que  les  notres? 


Us  sont  plus  sages  que  les  notres. 
Us  sont  moins  sages  que  les  notres, 
ce  sont  les  moins  sages  de  tous. 

Obs.  67.  To  express  the  absolute  superlative,  that  is,  the  highest  degree^ 
without  comparison,  the  French,  like  the  English,  use  one  of  the  adverbo, 
tres,  fort,  lien,  very;  extrcmement,  extremely ;  wfmimcnt,  infinitely. 

Un  tres-beau  sofa.       De  ires-beaux 

sofas. 
Un  tres-joli  couteau.         Tres-bien, 

fort  bien. 

Etre  accoutume  ii 

Y  etre  accoutume.  ($  50.) 

Pourquoi  parlez-vous  plus  en  Angluia 

qu'en  Francois  ? 
Parce  que   nous  y  sommes   accou- 

tume's. 
Que  sont-ils  accoutumes  a  prendio 

Je  matin  et  le  soir  ? 
Us   sont  accoutumes  a  prendre  <lu 

cafe,  le  rnatin,  et  du  the,  le  soir. 
A  quoi  cst-ce  que  je  suis  accoutume  ? 
II  n'y  est  pas  encore  accoutume*. 


A  very  fine  sofa.        Very  fine  sofas. 
A  very  pretty  knife.          Very  well. 

To  be  used  to  .... 

To  be  used  to  it. 

Why  do  you  speak  more  in  English 

than  in  French  ? 
Because  we  are  used  to  it.  (Obs.  48.) 

he 


What  are  they  used  to  take  in 

morning  ant.  evening  ? 
They  are  used  to  take  coffee  in  the 

morning  and  tea  in  the  evening. 
What  am  I  used  to  ? 
He  is  not  yet  used  to  it. 

VINGT-NEUVI&ME  TnihiE.  Ire  Sec. 
Mettez  le  quantieme  du  mois  ici  en  Fran^ais. 

Fa{;es-nous  des  questions  anjourd'hui,  s'il  vous  plait.  Voiontiern 
Qael  temps  fait-il?  Qui  peut  me  repondre  ?  Nous  pouvons  tons 
voiis  repondre.  Commencez,  M.  Legris.  Vous  voulez  savoir  quoT 
oernps  il  fait?-  Ouij  M.,  s'il  vous  plait.  Je  vais  vous  le  dire  avea 
jrrand  plaisir,  le  plus  grand  plaisir  du  monde.  Dites-le  done,  (then.) 


146  TWENTY -NINTH     LESSON,    (i./ 

Laisaez-mo;  voir  si  j?ai  le  Francais  de  unwholesome.  Oh !  oui;  nom 
I'avons.  Alors,  il  fait  un  temps  humide  et  malsain.  Oui,  voua 
avez  raison,  il  fait  un  temps  humide  et  malsain,  depuis  deux  on 
trois  jours.  N;est-ce  pas  extraordinaire?  Si  fait;  c'est  extraordi- 
naire, car  le  temps  change  tres-souvent.  Mais  il  ne  fait  pas  froid. 
Au  contraire.  il  fait  chaud.  II  fait  presque  toujours  chaud  quand  il 
fkit  humide,  n'est-ce  pas?  Oui,  sans  doute.  Ce  temps  humide 
n'ost  pas  bon  pour  le  rhume  du  petit  Robert,  qu  en  pensez-vous1 
Je  pense  que  non,  et  j?en  suis  fache,  car  c'est  un  bon  petit  garcon 
Comment  se  porte  le  frere  du  docteur?  II  se  porte  tres-bien  a  pre- 
sent. Et  comment  va  le  vieux  cuisinier  du  general?  II  va  mal, 
II  est  presque  toujours  malade,  n'est-ce  pas  ?  Oui,  mais  ce  n'est  pa? 
extraordinaire,  car  il  est  tres-vieux. 

Are  you  taller  (grand)  than  I?  I  am  taller  than  you. — Is  you* 
young  brother  taller  than  you?  No;  but  I  believe  that  he  is  just  as  tall. 
— Is  thy  leather  hat  as  bad  as  my  father's?  It  is  better,  but  not  so 
black  as  his. — Are  the  clothes  (les  habits)  of  the  Italians  as  line  as 
those  of  the  Irish?  They  are  finer,  but  not  so  good. — Who  muke.s 
the  finest  gloves2  The  French  make  them. — Who  makes  the 
finest  cloth?  The  French  and  Spanish  do. — Who  has  the  finest 
horses?  Mine  are  fine,  yours  are  finer  than  mine,  but  those  of  our 
friends  are  the  finest  of  all. — Why  do  the  French  take  wine  at 
breakfast  ?  Because  they  are  used  to  it. — See,  those  poor  children 
.have  neither  shoes  nor  stockings;  are  they  not  cold?  No,  indeed! 
they  are  used  to  it. — Am  I  used  to  write  quick  or  slow  ?  You  aro 
used  to  write  slowly;  but  your  cousin  is  used  to  write  very  quick. — 
Who  is  more  learned  than  this  old  Prussian  ?  I  do  not  know  who 
JS  more  learned  than  he. — Is  the  minister  more  learned  than  the 
druggist?  Yes,  he  is  more  learned  than  the  druggist;  but  the  law- 
yer is  the  mot£  learned  of  all. — Who  is  the  richest  merchant  here? 

Mr. is  the  richest. — Do  we  read  more  books  than  the  Dutch? 

We  read  more  (of  them)  than  they,  but  the  Prussians  read  (of  them, 
more  than  we,  and  the  Russians  read  the  least,  (le  moins.) 

Hast  thou  a  finer  garden  than  that  of  our  physician  ?  I  have  a 
finer  one  than  he. — Have  the  Americans  a  finer  telegraph  than  the 
other  nations  ?  They  have  the  finest  of  all. — Are  the  shawls  of  this 
merchant  larger  and  finer  than  those  of  that  one  ?  They  are  larger, 
but  not  so  fine. — Have  we  as  fine  children  as  our  neighbors?  We 
have  finer  ones. — Is  the  weather  as  bad  as  yesterday?  No,  it  is  not 
BO  bad ;  but  it  is  warmer,  and  I  am  not  sorry  for  it.  I  believe  it,  foi 
I  know  that  you  like  the  heat. — Do  the  French  speak  more  quickly 
than  the  Erglish,  Irish,  Scots,  and  other  nations?  I  believe  not 
Some  (quelques  mis)  speak  quickly,  but  others  speak  slowly.  (§  38.1 


T  WEN  T  V-  N  I  NTH      L  E  3  S  0  N.    (2.) 


147 


*— Are  your  clothes  as  wet  as  mine  or  his?  Yours  are  more  wei 
than  mine,  but  his  are  not  wet  at  all. — Do  you  depart  for  Washing- 
ton, soon?  I  start  to-morrow. — Do  you  go  alone?  No.  cousin 
William  starts  with  me. — When  do  you  set  out?  We  set  out  at  3 
o'clock. — George,  go  for  some  cigars;  these  gentlemen  want  some 
to  smoke. — Yes,  Sir:  but  before  going,  I  have  to  put  my  shoes  on. 
They  are  wet,  and  they  are  near  the  fire  to  dry. — Which  of  these 
two  children  is  the  better?  (sage?)  The  one  (X.  pa.  43)  who  studies 
is  better  than  the  one  who  plays. 

Section. 

Adjectifs  Irrtguliers. 
Bon,  lu-iileur,     mon  mcilk-nr. 

Mauvais,    pire,  le  pire. 

Petit,          moindre,     In  moindre. 

Adi-erbes  Irrtgvliers. 
Bien,          mieuT,         le  mieux. 


Irregular  A'ljec'.i 

Good,  better,  my  best. 

Bad,  ^,  the  worst. 

.:!,  little,    less,  the  l< 

Irregular  Adverbs. 

Well,  better,          the  best. 

Bad,  worse,  the  worst. 

Little,  the  least. 
Much,              mi  :  the  most. 


Mai,  pi?.  'e  pis. 

moins,         le  moins. 
Beaucoup,  plus,  le  plus. 

Obs.  C3.  We  may  with  equal  correctness  say :  plus  mauvais,  plus  mal 
plus  petit,  but  never  plus  bon,  plus  lien,  plus  put. 

Obs.  G9.  Never  use  pire  immediately  before  a  noun.  Do  not  say :  ur 
pire  chien  ;  but,  un  plus  mauvais  chien.  Votre  chien  est  pire  que  celui-ci 
is  correct,  but:  plus  mauvais,  is  to  be  preferred. 
•  109j 


,  (to  t/V/o/71  ?)  ( 

..is? 
It  is.        It  is  mine  —  hers  —  > 


A  qui  ?    (Pronomposs.  non  rclatif.) 
A  qui  est  ce  chapeau-ci  ? 
C'est.     C'est  le  mien — le  sien — le 
votre.  ($  104,  &c.) 

It  is  my  uncle's  dictionary, 

It  is  the  dictionary  of  my  uncle. 

It  is  my  uncui's. 

Whose  kid  gloves  are  those  ? 

They  are  ours—  thine — theirs.  ($  39.) 

They  arc  the  ch'.'dren's  cloaks. 

Who  has  the  besi  rice  ? 

Whose  lice  is  the  nest  ? 

The  grocer  has  it.     It  is  the  grocer's.  |  L'epicier  1'a.  C'est  celui  dc  I'epiciur, 

Who  has  the  smallest  feet? 

Whose  tee'  are  ihe  smallest  ? 

Miss  C.  has  the  final. cst. 

Miss  C.'s  are. 

That  of  my  .ather  is  the  '-.nest. 

Whose    ribbon    &   the   handsomer, 
yours  or  min^  ?     Yours  is,  cso  left 


C'est  le  dictionnaire  de  mon  oncle. 

A.  qui  sont  ces  gants  de  chamois  ? 
Ce  sont  les  votrcs,  les  tiens,  les  leurs* 
Ce  sont  les  manteaux  des  enfants. 

Qui  a  le  meilleur  riz  ? 


Qui  a  Jeg  plug  petitg  pieds  ? 


OUt.; 


Mile.  C.  a  les  plus  petits. 

Ce  sont  ceux  de  Mile.  C. 

Celui  de  mon  pere  est  le  plus  Lean. 

Quel  ruban  est  le  plus  beau  ?     L« 

votre  ou  le   mien?        Le 

Z'est. 


Okx.  70.  ,SV/,  m  r-m.iar  scmence?,  whether  expressed  or  not,  is  re  iderod 
Hi  Fr. 


148 


TWENTY-NINTH    LESSC  N,    (2.) 


Ce  garcon  lit-il  micux  quo  I'lioinrae' 

II  le  fait.         II  ne  le  fait  pas. 

Ce   grain-ci  est-il  meilleur  que   la 

dernier  ? 

II  rest.     II  est  beaucoup  meilleur. 
Les  Suedois  ecrivem  ils  moins  qu«s 

les  Polonais  ? 
Ils  dcrivent  moins  que   les   autre« 

nations. 
Qui  fait  le  plus  d'argent  ?     Le  bou 

langer,  le  boucher,  ou  le  laitier? 
Ils  en  font  tous  beaucoup. 
Votre  jardinier  est-il  bon  ? 
II  Test,  mais  son  cousin  ne  Test  pan 
Voici.  Le  voici. 

En  voici. 

Ou  sont  les  gros  couteaui  ? 
Les  voici. 


Does  that  boy  read  better  than  the 

man  ? 

He  does  so.      He  does  not  (do  so). 
Is  this  grain  better  than  the  last  ? 

[t  is.        It  is  much  better. 

Do  the  Swedes  write  less  than  the 
Polea  ? 

They  writs  less  than  the  other  na- 
tions. 

Who  makes  most  money  ?  The 
baker,  ths  butcher,  or  the  milkman  ? 

f  hey  all  make  a  great  deal. 

(B  your  gardener  good,  or  a  good  one  f 

He  is,  but  his  cousin  is  not. 

Here  is.        Here  he  is  or  it  is. 

Here  is  some. 

Where  are  the  big  knives  ? 

Here  they  are. 

YiXGT-Nr.uvii\ME  TiiibiE.  2de  Sec. 
Ici,  n'oubliez  pas  de  mcttre  le  quantieme,  en  Frangais. 

Vous  avez  Pair  d'avoir  froid.  Fait-il  froid  dehors  ?  Oui,  il  fail 
grand  froid.  A  quel  degre  est  le  therm  ometre  ?  Je  ivai  pas  de  ther- 
mometre;  je  ne  sais  pas  a  quel  degre  il  est.  Mais  j'ai  froid,  <;a, 
(§  387  N.  6.)  je  le  sais.  Comment  so  porte  le  medecin  ?  II  se  porto 
plus  mal.  Son  rhume  est-il  pire?  Oui,  il  Pe>t.  Quelqivun.  a-t-ii 
mal  de  tete  ?  Moi,  je  Pai  un  peu ;  avez-vous  quelque  chose  a  me  don- 
ner?  Oui,  j'ai  quelque  chose  qui  est  tres-bon  pour  le  mal  de  tete. 
Donnez-le-moi.  Je  Pai  dans monportefeuille.  Ldissez-moi lecher 
cher.  Tres-bien,  cherchez-le  et  donnez-le-moi.  Je  Pai  a  present. 
Le  voici.  Prer.ez-le.  Je  Pai.  Lisez  le  papier  pour  savoir  comment 
le  preparer  (to  prepare)  et  le  prendre.  Je  vous  suis  bien  oblige.  Je 
vais  le  lire  tout  de  suite  pour  le  preparer  et  le  prendre.  Preparez-lo 
bien.  Je  vais  essayer.  Est-ce  difficile  a  preparer?  Non.  ce  n'est 
pas  difficile  a  preparer.  Adieu:  je  vais  Parranger.  Adieu,  adieu. 

Whose  big  book  is  this?  It  is  mine. — Whose  hat  is  that?  It  ia 
my  father's. — Is  your  baker  good?  (or  a  good  one?)  He  is  good, 
but  yours  is  better ;  and  that  of  the  Prussian  is  the  best  of  all  our 
bakers. — Take  some  pretty  velvet  shoes.  I  have  very  pretty  ones, 
but  my  brother  has  still  prettier  ones  than  I. — From  whom  (de  qui) 
does  he  receive  them?  He  receives  them  from  his  best  friend  in 
Paris. — Is  your  wine  as  good  as  mine?  Here  is  some ;  taste  it.  anc. 
then  you  may  know,. and  tell  me.  Is  it  better,  cr  as  good,  or  worse  1 
tt  is  better. — Does  your  merchant  sell  good  knives?  He  sells  the 
best. — Do  we  not  read  more  books  than  the  Irish7  Yes,  we  read 


THIRTIETH     LESSOJN.    (I.)  149 

more  than  they,  but  the  Russians  read  (of  them)  more  than  we,  and 
the  Prussians  read  the  most. — Why  do  they  read  the  most  ?  Because 
they  wish  to  be  the  most  learned. — Do  the  merchants  sell  more 
sugar  than  coffee  ?  They  sell  more  of  the  latter  than  of  the  former. — 
Does  your  shoemaker  make  as  many  shoes  as  mine? — He  makes 
more  of  them  than  yours. — Can  you  swim  as  well  (aussi  lien)  as 
my  son  ?  I  can  swim  better  than  he,  but  he  can  speak  French  better 
than  I. — Does  he  read  as  well  as  you?  He  reads  better  than  I. — 
Does  the  son  of  your  neighbor  go  to  market?  No,  he  remains  at 
nome ;  he  has  sore  feet. — Do  you  learn  as  well  as  our  gardener's 

.'     I  learn  better  than  he,  but  he  works  better  than  I. —  Whose 

gun  is  the  finest?     Yours  is  very  fine,  but  that  of  the  captain  is  still 

:  ours  is  the  finest  of  all. — Has  any  one  finer  children  than 

you  ?     No  one  has  finer  ones. — Does  your  son  read  as  often  as  I  ? 

lie  i'  <T  than  you. — Does  my  brother  speak  French  as  often 

;is  often  as  I. — Do  I  write  as  much 
tfl  more  than  I. — Do  our  neighbor's  children  read 

:nan  as  often  as  we?  We  do  not  read  it  so  often  as  they. — Do 
we  Lfl  they?  They  write  oftener  than  we. — To 

whom  do  they  write?  ite  to  their  friends. — Do  you  read 

Ki.^li.-h  !<  K)ka  '  We  read  French  books  instead  of  reading  English 


ill.  Ml   LESSON,  SOth.— Trentiemc  Lc$on,  30me. 
•  urtr.   Ire  Section. 


To  believe,  belli. 

I  believe,  thou  believcst,  he  believes. 

I  believe  that  you  know  it. 

I  believe  you  know  nothing  of  it. 

To  put,  put  on.    Put,  put  on,  (impera.) 

Do  I  put  on  your  kid  gloves  ? 


Croire,*  4,  croyant. 

Je  crois,  tu  crois,  il  croir. 

Je  crois  que  vous  le  savez. 

Je  crois  que  vous  n'en  savez  rien. 

Mettre.  (25!.)      Mettez,  (impera.) 

Est-ce  que  je  mets  vos  gants  cle  c:-a« 


mois? 

Does  he  not  put  on  ?  is  he  not  putting?!  Est-ce  qu'il  ne  met  pas?     Ne  met-i! 

pas? 


He  pu'  He  does  not. 

What  do  you  put  on  t     I  put  this  on. 
Do  they  put  on  anything  more  ? 


II  met.  II  ne  met  pas. 

Que  mettez-vous?    Je  mets  ceci. 
Mettent-ils  quelque  chose  dc  plus  ? 


Obs.  71.  We  saw  in  (Oltt.  7,)  that  :  quelque  chose;  ne  .  .  .  .rien  and  que  I 
require  dc  before  the  following  adjective  ;  now  we  add  :  when  a  noun,  pro- 
noun, number,  or  adjective  precedes  an  adverb  or  past  participle,  the  prepo 
fition  de  (as  a  connecting  link)  must  be  put  before  the  adverb. 


150 


THIRTIETH     LESSON     (1.? 


They  put  nothing  more. 

Do  you  go  out  1     I  do. 

Do  you  not  put  on  your  big  shoes  I 

Yes,  I  do.     I  do  not  go  out  vrithout 

putting  them  on  when  the  weather 

is  bad. 

Without  you,  me,  him,  them,  us,  thee. 
Does  he  go  out  without  taking  his 

umbrella  and  his  cloak  ? 
He  does  not  go  out  without  taking 

them. 

To  rain.     Does  it  rain  ?     It  does. 
IB  the  weather  cloudy?     It  is  (so). 
Do  I  go  out  when   the  weather  is 

cloudy  ?     Neither  you  nor  we  go 

out. 

Early.  Early  enough. 

A.S  early  as  you,  as  they. 
He  goes  out  as  early  as  we. 
Too  soon,  too  early. 
Too  little,  (adv.),  too  small,  too  great. 
You  speak  too  little,  and  he  too  much. 
Together.     We  go  out  together. 
Later  than  you. 
[  go  out  later  than  you. 
Do  you  go  to  the  play  as  early  as  I  ? 

I  go  thither  earlier  than  you. 

Ea'lier,  (sooner.) 

Does  your  father  go   thither  earlier 

than  I  ? 
Try  *o  go  as  soon  as  he 


Us  ne  mettent  rien  de  vlu*. 
Sortez-vous?        Je  sors. 
Nemettez-vouspasvosgrossouliure,? 
Si  fait,  je  les  mets.     Je  ne  sors  pa« 

sans  les  mcttre  quand  il  fait  mau 

vais  temps. 

Sans  vous,  moi,  lui,  eux,  nous,  tci. 
Sort-il  sans  prendre  son  parapluie  tt 

son  manteau?  (R.  1.) 
II  ne  sort  pas  sans  les  prendre. 

Pleuvoir*  3.       Pleut-il?      II plati. 
Le  lemp>s  cst-il  convert  ?     II  Test. 
Est-ce  que  je  sors  quand  le  temps 

est  couvert  ?     Ni  vous  ni  nous  ne 

sortons. 

DC  boniit  heure..    D'assez  bonne  heure. 
DJaussi bonne  heure que  vous,  qu'eutf . 
II  sort  d'aussi  bonne  heure  qu€  nous. 
Trop  lot,  de  trop  bonne  heure. 
Trop  peu,  trop  petit,  trop  grand. 
Vous  parlez  trop  peu,  et  lui  trop. 
Ensemble.     Nous  sortons  ensembld. 
Plus  tard  que  vous. 
Je  sors  plus  tard  que  vous. 
Allez-vous  au  spectacle  d'aussi  bonne 

heure  que  moi? 
J'y  vais  plus  tot  (de  meilleure  heure) 

que  vous. 

Plus  tot,  (de  meilleure  heure.) 
Votre  pere  y  va-t-il  plus  tot  que  moi, 

(de  meilleure  heure  que  moi  ?) 
Essay ez  d'y  aller  aussi  tot  que  lui. 


TRENTIJ&ME  TII&ME.  Ire  Sec. 

NToubliez  pas  la  date  ici. 

Bon  jour,  M.,  rous  vous  portez  bien,  j'espere ;  mais  pourquoi  avez- 
vous  un  parapluie  ?  Pleut-il  ?  Non,  il  ne  pleut  pas  encore ;  maia 
le  temps  est  couvert,  tres-couvert,  et  quand  il  Test,  je  ne  sors  pas 
wins  prendre  un  parapluie.  Vous  avez  raison  de  le  faire,  car  il  esi 
tres-desagreable  d'etre  dehors  sans  parapluie,  quand  il  pleut.  No 
p!eut-il  pas  a.  present  ?  Si  fait,  je  crois  qu'il  commence  a  plenvoir. 
Oui,  c'est  vrai.  II  commence  a  pleuvoir,  mais  pas  beaucoup  eneoru. 
Moi,  je  suis  bien  aise  de  voir  lapluie,  (the  rain.)  car  nous  avons  trop 
de  poussiere.  C'est  vrai,  vous  n'avez  pas  tort;  il  fait  beaucoup  trop 
de  poussiere.  N7avez-vous  pas  mal  aux  yeux  quand  il  fait  de  ia 
poussieie  ?  Si  fait,  j'y  ai  souvent  mal  alors.  Pas  moi.  Comment 


THIRTIETH      LESSON.    (1.)  151 

Be  porte-t-on  chez  vous  ?  Tout  le  monde  y  est  ussoz  bie.i.  Per- 
Bonne  irest  malade,  excepte  notre  domestique.  Qu'a-t-il?  li  a  un 
gros  rhume  et  un  peu  mal  aux  dents. — II  pleut,  mais  il  ne  fait  pas 
froid;  n'est-ce  pas  ?  C'est  vrai,  il  ne  fait  pas  froid,  mais  tres-humide 
et  malsain.  Nous  le  croyons  comme  vous.  Quand  ii  fait  froid  ct 
humide,  mettez  quelque  chose  de  plus.  Et  quand  il  fait  cha-adr 
quelque  chose  de  moins,  n'est-ce  pas  ?  Oui,  c'est  cela.  C'est  \e 
plus  prudent. 

Do  you  put  on  another  coat  in  order  to  go  to  the  play  ?  I  put  on 
my  Frencli  coat  to  go. — Do  you  put  on  your  kid  gloves  before  you 
put  on  your  big  shoes  ?  I  put  on  my  overshoes  before  I  put  on  my 
kid  gloves. — Does  the  lawyer  put  on  his  round  hat  before  he  puts 
on  his  blue  coat7?  He  puts  on  his  coat  first,  instead  of  putting  on 
his  lound  hat. — Is  he  not  right  in  doing  so?  Yes,  he  is. — Do  ycu 
go  out  early,  every  morning  V  VTeSj  we  do. — Do  you  go  out  when 
your  son  does'?  Yes,  we  go  out  together. — Early?  No,  not  very 
early.  \Ve  breakfast  first. — Do  you  breakfast  together?  To  bo 
— At  what  o'clock  do  you  begin  to  breakfast?  We  begin  at 
half  past  6.  (Do  you,  indeed?)  En  verite?  Then  you  breakfast 
early. — Do  you  eat  dinner  early,  too?  I  think  we  dine  earlier  than 
you,  for  we  dine  at  half  past  one. — Is  it  possible?  Do  you  dine  as 
early  as  that? — We  dine  then,  when  we  are  all  at  home;  but  if  we 
wait  for  those  who  are  absent,  (absents,)  then  we  dine  together,  and 
later. — Does  your  uncle  write  before  he  breakfasts  ?  No,  he  does 
not. — What  does  he?  He  reads  the  paper. — Is  he  fond  of  reading 
the  paper  ?  Yes,  he  likes  it  very  much. — When  it  is  cloudy  wea- 
ther, does  he  go  out  without  his  umbrella?  No,  he  always  takes 
it. — Does  he  often  go  to  the  museum  ?  He  does,  often. — Does  he 
go  there  oftener  than  your  cousin  ?  No,  they  always  go  together. 

Do  you  translate  your  exercise  early  or  late  ?  I  always 
translate  it  in  the  morning,  as  early  as  I  can. — Do  you  translate 
it  from  the  book  or  do  you  read  it,  when  you  recite  it  to  your 
teacher  ?  We  translate  it  instead  of  reading  it,  when  we  recite  it 
to  him. — Do  you  begin  to  like  mutton?  No,  I  cannot  bear  it. — 
Does  your  cousin  like  it  ?  No,  he  does  not ;  he  cannot  bear  it. — 
But  your  uncle  William  does  like  it ;  don't  he  ?  He !  yes,  he  likea 
it. — Do  you  eat  supper  early?  We  do  not  eat  supper  late. — At  whist 
o'clock  do  they  take  tea  at  the  doctor's?  They  take  tea  quite  late. 
—Later  than  you  do?  Yes,  much  later;  but  at  the  general's  they 
take  it  very  early. — Do  the  Pole  and  Russian  go  early  to  the  con- 
cert? Yes,  they  do. — Let  us  go  earlier  than  they ;  will  you  *  Will- 
ingly. Let  us  go  before  them. — At  what  o'clock  can  you  be  ready  I 

can  be  ready  at  6  or  J  past  6.     It  is  soon  enough;  is  it  not  ?     I 


THIRTIETH      LESSON 


believe  sc  for  the  concert  does  not  begin  before  7. — Do  )ou  no! 
put  on  something  more  ?  No?  this  is  enough :  I  wish  nothing  more. 
— Do  I  write  too  much?  No,  but  you  talk  (speak)  too  much. — Do 
I  speak  more  than  you?  You  do,  very  often,  and  so  does  youi 
brother. — Do  you  count  quick  ?  Yes,  in  English  I  count  pretty 
fast. — No,  I  mean  in  French. — I  do  not  count  very  fast  in  French. — 
Does  he  count  as  fast  as  you?  Who  ?  This  youth  ?  Yes,  he;  this 
youth.  Do  I  know  ? — How  many  do  you  count  in  a  minute  ? — How 
many  does  he  count  1  Try.  both  of  you. — We  are  going  to  try  to 
count  as  fast  as  we  can. — Very  well ;  try  to  do  it. — Must  we  tp 
anything  more  ?  No;  nothing  more,  now. 

VOCABULAIRE.   2de  Section. 


Already,  yet.     Is  it  already  done  ? 

Do  you  speak  already  ? 

Does  he  start  already  ?        (depart.) 

Not  yet.  No,  not  yet. 

I  do  not  speak  yet. 

He  departs  immediately. 

Do  you  finish  your  exercise  aiready  ? 

I  finish  it  at  this  vcri/ moment,    (time.) 

Do  you  give  us  anything  to  do  ? 

Do  I  not  always  give  you  something 
to  do? 


Dejd.     Est-ce  dt'ja  fait  ? 

Parlez-vous  deja  ? 

Part-il  d'jjat 

Ne  . . .  pas  encore.    Non,  pas  «:ncort. 

Je  ne  parle  pas  encore. 

II  part  tout  de  suite. 

P'inissez-vous  deja  votre  theme  f 

Jc  le  finis  a  present  mtnte. 

Nous  donnez-vous  quelque  chose  a 

faire  ? 
Est-ce   que  je  ne  vous   donne  pas 

toujours  quelque  chose  a  faire  ? 


Obs.  72.     We  have  seen,  in  the  preceding  lessons,  that  when  two  verha 
are  joined,  the  first  sometimes  requires  no  preposition1  to  connect  i 
with  the  second  ;  that  sometimes  it  takes  the  preposition  d  ;2  at  others  tic. 3 
See  lists  of  those  verbs  ($  156),  preceded  by  a  short  explanation. 

The  scholar  was  directed  to  form  for  himself  lists  of  those  verbs,  of  nouns, 
adjectives,  &c.,  ns  they  are  presented  in  the  vocabularies.  In  order  to  see 
how  he  has  performed  that  task,  I  here  insert  the  model  of  a  dialogue  on 
the  subject,  which  teachers  may  modify  according  to  circumstances. 


Mr.  Armand,  have  you  a  catalogue 
of  the  verbs  which  govern  other 
verbs  without  a  preposition  ?  Yes, 
Sir,  I  have.  Which  is  the  first  verb 
on  your  catalogue  ?  It  is  voulez- 
mn*9  ?  That  is  right.  But  instead 
of  writing  down  voulez-vous  ?  make 
use  of  the  infinitive.  Do  you  know 
it  ?  Yes,  Sir,  I  do.  It  is  vouloir, 
is  it  not  ?  Yes,  that  is  it.  So,  your 
first  verb  which  governs  another 


M.  Armand,  avez-vous  un  catalogue 
des  verbes  qui  en  gouvernent  d'au- 
tres  sans  preposition  ?  Our  M., 
j'en  ai  un.  Quel  6st  le  premier 
verbe  snr  votre  catalogue  ?  C'est 
voulcz-vous?  C'est  bien.  Mais 
au  lieu  d'ecrire,  voules-vous ! 
faites  usage  de  Tinfinitif.  Le  *?vez- 
vous  ?  Oui,  M.,je  l»j  M;S.  C'est 
vouloir,  n'est-ce  pas  ?  Oui,  cV< 
cela.  Ainsi,  votre  premier  rerfc* 


2C2 12,  253.) 


5  (17-,  22». 


THIRTIETH     LESSON.    (2.) 


153 


without  a  preposition  is  vouloir,  is 
it  n«t  ?     Yes,  .Sir,  it  is  that.    In 
what  vocabulary    is  it  ?    I  do  not 
know,  but  I  have  the  folio,  (page.) 
That  will  do.     What  is  the  E 
verb  of  your  catalogue  ?  It  is  allcz- 
'     What  is  its  infinitive  ?     It 
is  aller.     Very  well. 
filler,  instead  of  allcz-vous  ?     On 
what  page  is  it  ?     On  the .... 


;r,  to  understand.         I  i 
I  understand.      I  do  not  und 
Do  you  understand  me  ?  I  do. 

I  understand  you  m  part. 
I  do  not  understand  you  at  all. 
Is  it  possible  ?  Do  you  not  understand 

a  single  word  ?       No,  not  a  single 

one. 


qui  en  gouverne  un  autre  sans 
preposition  est  vouloir,  n'cst-ce 
pas?  Oui,  M.,  c'est  cela.  Bans 
quel  vooabu!aire  est-il  ?  Je  ne 
niais  j'ai  le  fcuillet.  Cela 
tuflit.  Quel  est  le  second  verbe 
de  votrc  catalogue  ?  C'est  allez- 
rous  ?  Quel  en  est  Vinfmitifl 
($  31.)  C'est  aller.  Tres-bicn. 
Faites  usage  de  aller  au  lieu  dc 
allez-vous  ?  A  quel  fcuillet  est- 
il  ?  Au.... 

Entendre,  4.  Entendant. 

Tentends,  Jc  n'entends  pa*. 

M' entendez-vous  ?    Je  vou«  entenda. 

Je  vouscntcnds  en  pnrtie. 

Je  ne  vous  emends  pas  du  tout. 

Est-il  possible  ?  IN  'entendez-voua 
pas  un  seul  mot  ?  Non,  pas  un 
seal. 


Obs.  73.     The  infinitive  has  no  preposition  before  it  vhen  it  is  used  in  an 
absolute  sense,  or  as  a  nominative  case. 


To  eat  too  much  is  dangerous. 
•k  too  much  is  foolish. 
<ood  to  those  \vho  have  offended 
us,  is  a  commendable  action. 

;il  times. 
-nind,  wo  matter. 


r  trop  est  diingcreux. 
Parler  trop  est  imprudent. 
Faire  du  lien  a  ceux  qui  nous  onl 

offenses ,  est  747*  e  action  lovable, 
Quelque  fois.  Flusieurs  fois. 
Tfimfidrtei 

TH£ME.  2de  Se'c. 
N'oubliez  pas  le  quantierae  en  Frun^ais. 

incut  vous  etes-vous  porte  depuis  que  je  n'ai  eu  Je  plaisir  do 
vous  voir?  Quelque  fois  bien,  quelque  fois  mal;  mais  vous,  com- 
ment vous  etes-vous  porte  ?  Je  me  suis  toujours  bien  porte.  Je  le 
crois,  car  vous  avez  tres-bon  air.  Le  pensez-vous  ?  Tout  le  monde 
me  dit  que  j'ai  Pair  malade.  Moi,  au  contraire,  je  pense  que  vous 
-bon  air.  Mais,  ce  petit  garcon-la  n'a  pas  bon  air.  C'est 
vrai,  et  je  crois  qu'il  est  un  peu  malade.  L7etes-vous,  mon  petit 
ami?  Oui,  M.,  j'ai  un  peu  mal  de  tete.  Depuis  quand?  Depuia 
ce  matin  de  bonne  heure.  Avant  dejeuner?  Oui,  un  peu  avant. 
Entendez-vous  ce  que  ce  petit  garpon  dit?  Non,  je  ne  Pentends  pas 
bien.  L'entendez-vous,  vous?  Oui,  je  Pentends  parfaitement,  parce 
que  je  suis  accoutume  a  Pentendre.  Et  moi,  je  ne  Pentends  pas, 
parce  que  ie  n'*y  suis  pas  accoutume.  Vous  avez  raison.  Voyez 
vous  quelquefois  le  cousin  du  vieux  general?  Je  le  vois  souvent. 
wais  savez-vous  qn'il  part ?  Pour  ou?  (where  to?)  Pour  la  CaK 


154  THIRTIETH    LESSON.    (2.) 

fornie.  fcsl-il  possible?  Quand  pan-il?  Je  crois  qu'il  est  deja  pf£t 
a  partir.  Dans  quel  batiment  part-il  ?  11  part  dans  le  . . . .  Est-co 
an  bon  batiment'?  Je  crois  que  oui.  N'est-ce  pas  le  batiment  de 

M.  C ?  Non,  ii  n'est  plus  a  Mr.  C ••  mais  a  M.  H 

AJlons  le  voir.  Oui,  allons-y.  Mais,  voyez  done,  (see  there,)  il  pleut. 
N'importe.  Prenonsnosparapluies.  Je  n'ai.pas  le  mien  ici.  N:im- 
porte.  Nous  pouvons  vous  en  prefer  un.  Pourquoi  n'avez-vous  pas 
e  votre?  Je  ne  le  prends  pas  toujours  quand  le  temps  est  couvert 
Moi,  au  contraire,  je  ne  sors  pas  sans  prendre  le  mien  quand  le 
temps  est  couvert.  Vous  etes  plus  prudent  que  moi.  N'importe. 
Partons.  Vous  faut-il  un  mouchoir  de  plus  ?  J'en  ai  un ;  c'est  assez. 

Is  my  Italian  hat  too  large  ?  It  is  neither  too  large  nor  too  small. — 
Do  you  speak  French  oftener  than  English?  I  speak  the  latter 
oftener  than  the  former. — Do  your  uncle  and  cousin  buy  much  New 
York  corn  ?  They  buy  but  little. — Have  I  enough  fresh  bread  ?  You 
have  only  a  little,  but  enough. — Is  it  late  ?  Why  do  you  believe  it  is 
late  ?  Because  I  begin  to  be  sleepy,  (a  avoir  sommeil.)  You  may 
be  sleepy,  but  it  is  not  late. — What  o'clock  is  it?  It  is  only  half  past 
nine. — Is  it  too  late  to  go  to  your  father's?  W  iij  do  you  wish  to  go 
to  my  father's?  I  wish  to  return  (rcndre)  him  this  French  book. — 
[s  it,  (3,  $  39,)  a  pretty  book?  It  is  a  very  pretty  book.  Will  you 
conduct  me  there?  Can  you  not  find  the  way  alone?  I  believe  I 
cannot  in  the  evening. — I  do  not  wish  to  go  there  now.  Give  me 
the  book,  I  can  return  it  to  him.  No;  I  have  to  jeturn  it  to  him 
myself.  (Moi-meme,  $  41$.)  Very  well.  Do  it,  then. — Does  the 
young  Spaniard  buy  an  Arabian  horse  ?  He  cannot  buy  one. — Why  1 
[s  he  poor?  He  is  not  poor;  he  is  richer  than  you.  Why  can  he 
not  buy  one  then  ?  Because  (?io  Arabian  horse  can  be  found  here)  he 
cannot  find  any  Arabian  horse  here. — Is  this  Swiss  as  learned  as  that 
Pole  ?  He  is  just  as  learned,  I  believe  ;  but  you  are  more  learned 
than  they  and  I. — Are  you  studying  already?  No,  not  yet.  I  atn 
smoking. — Do  you  smoke  so  early  ^  Yes,  sometimes;  when  I  am 
cold. 

Do  you  understand  that  gentleman  ?  I  do. — Is  he  learned  ?  Ho 
is. — What  is  he  ?  A  lawyer  ?  A  minister  ?  An  apothecary  ?  A  mer- 
chant? Or  nothing  at  all?  I  believe  he  is  a  little  of  everything,  (un 
pen  de  tout.) — Is  your  horse  worse  than  mine  ?  It  is  not  so  bad  as 
yours. — Is  mine  worse  than  the  Dutchman's?  It  is  wcrse.  It  is  the 
worst  horse  (01  s.  69)  that  I  know,  (connaisse,  subjunct.)  Do  ycu 
give  those  men  less  silver  than  paper?  (Dir.  3.)  I  give  them  more 
of  the  former  than  of  the  latter;  for  some  of  them  cannot  read,  ana 
they  do  not  like  the  paper. — Who  receives  the  most  money1  The 
English  do. — Cannot  yostr  sen  write  a  note  in  French  ?  He  cannot, 


1H1RT1LTI!     LESSON.    (2.)  155 

Out  he  begins  to  read  a  little. — Do  the  Americans  write  more  than 
\ve  ?  They  write  less  than  we  ;  but  the  Italians  write  the  least. — 
Are  they  as  rich  as  the  American?  *  They  are  less  rich  than  they.— 
Are  your  birds  as  line  as  our  neighbor's?  They  are  less  fine ;  but 
never  mind,  ours  are  fine  enough.  Faitcs  du  bien ;  do  you  under- 
stand that,  Mr.  Charles]  1&  it  do  u-cll?  No,  Sir,  that's  not  it,  or  it 
i<3  not  that.  Then  I  do  not  understand  it  all,  Lut  in  part.  And  you, 
Mr  Durand,  do  you  understand  it?  I  believe  I  do  not  understand  it. 
Nevermind.  Who  understands  it?  I.  What  is  its  English?  ($  31-1.) 
Do  good.  That's  right.  I  see  that  yov.  understand  it.  I  believe  I  do. 

RECAPITULATORY    EXERCISE. — RE*SUME*. 

-t»au  a-t-il  son  grain?  Non,  il  ne  Pa  pas.  Ne  le  lui  donnez- 
vnns  pas  tons  les  matins?  Si  fait,  quand  j'ypense;  mais  aujour- 
d'hui  il  n'a  pus  fairn,  il  ne  mange  pas,  parce  qu'il  a  mal  au  pied. 
— Qui  a  le  pistolet  de  Petranger?  Personne  ne  Pa. — Avez-vous  les 
porte-feuilles  de  cuir  de  ces  deux  matelots?  Je  n'ai  que  le  porte- 
teiulle  de  Pun  cPeux.  Je  ne  sais  pas  qni  a  celui  de  Pautre.  Est-ce 
c-clui  du  grand  et  vieux  que  vous  avez?  Non,  c'est  celui  du  jeune 
'tit  que  in  .  N'allez-vous  pas  le  lui  rendre  ?  Si  fait, 

s'il  le  veut;  mais  il  dit  qifil  n'en  a  pas  besoin.  N'a-t-il  plus  d'ar- 
gent?  Je  crois  que  non ;  du  moins,  il  n'a  plus  de  billets. — Le  bceuf 
et  le  cheval  ont-ils  leur  foin  ?  Oui,  ils  ont  leur  foin.  Mangent-ils  le 
foin  que  vous  leur  donnez?  Ils  le  trouvent  bon,  car  ils  le  mangent 
bien.  Que  mangent-ils  encore?  Ils  mangent  leur  grain. — Qu'a  ce 
garcon?  Lequel  ?  Le  (,on.  Lui?  il  a  toujours  quelque 

.fant  du  tailleur  a-t-il  quelque  chose  de  vieux  ou 
de  vilain  '.  \  •  .  il  n'a  iie:i  de  vieux  ni  de  vilain  ;  mais  il  a  un  jol 
porte-crayon  d':i' 

'  Rien. — Qu'a  M.  Carnot?  II  n'a  rien. — Qu'a  son 
frere?  Qui  J  le  frere  de  Carnot?  Oui,  son  frere.  II  n'a  rien. — Ce 
jeune  homme-la  a-t-il  faim?  Non;  il  n?a  pas  faim,  car  il  a  du  pain, 
du  fromaij'i.  des  biscuits,  et  il  n'en  mange  pas. — Pourquoi  faites- 
vonscela?  Nous  avons  honte  de  vous.  Quoi !  Vous  avez  honte  do 
ce  que  je  fais?  Nous  en  avons  honte,  pour  vous.  Vous  etes  bien 
bon,  en  verite  ! — Ils  ont  soif ;  avez-vous  beaucoup  de  cafe  ce  soir  «^ 
leur  donner?  Je  n'en  ai  guere  :  mais  j'en  ai  assez  pour  eux. — Que 
pensez-vous  de  Phabit  de  ce  garcon-la?  II  a  trop  de  boutons,  n'est- 
ce  pas?  Oui,  vous  avez  raison  de  le  dire,  et  son  giiet  n'en  a  pas 
nssez.  Combien  en  a-t-il  ?  II  n'en  a  que  deux,  je  crois. — Le  fermiei 
n'a-t-il  pas  de  vieux  chovanx  ?  Non.  il  n'en  a  que  de  jeunes. — Nous 
avons  faim,  avez-vous  du  pain  a  nous  donner?  Je  n'ai  pas  de  pain 
mais  yai  d'excellcnts  biscuits. — Le  jeune  etranger  a-t-il  soif?  Jecrou 


136  THIRTY-FIRST    LESSON.    (1.) 

quo  oui,  car  il  boit  souvent.  (}  170.)  II  boit  quoi  ?  Un  j;eu  de  lait, 
un  peu  de  vin. 

J'ai  besoin  de  savon ;  dites-moi  ou  je  puis  en  trouver  de  bon  1 

Vous  pouvez  en  acheter  de   tres-bon   chez   M Ou  est  sort 

mag-asm  ?  Dans  la  rue  Chestnut,  pres  de  la.  ...  Jc  vous  re- 
njereie.  De  rien.  N'avez-vous  besoin  de  rien  de  plus  ?  Non  pag 
ce  matin. — Qui  a  le  gros  et  grand  couteau  du  cuisinier  ?  En  a-t-il 
besoin  pour  tuer  qnelque  chose  ?  Je  ne  sais  pas  pourquoi  il  en  a 
besoin;  mais  il  le  cherche.  L'avez-vous?  Savez-vous  ou  il  peut 
1«9  trouver  ?  Non,  je  n'en  sais  rien. — Le  Hollands's  a-t-il  queJque 
chose  a  boire  ?  Pourquoi?  A-t-il  soif?  Oui, il  a  soif,  ct  le  Prussien, 
Vlrlandais,  et  FEcossais  ont  soif  aussi.  Donnez-leur  du  vin,  s'ils  ont 
Koif,  et  de  vieux  pain,  s'ils  ont  faim. — Ce  Suisse  n'a  pas  bon  air  ;  est-i1. 
malade?  Je  ne  sais  pas,  et  comme  il  ne  parlc  ni  Anglais  ni  Fnmrais 
nous  ne  pouvons  pas  parler  ensemble.  QuVsl-ce  qu'il  parlel  Suisse, 
je  ponse. — Quel  joli  oiseau  Mile.  Emilie  :i !  QuVst-cu  que  e'est? 

n'en  sais  pas  le  nom.     Chantc-t-il  ?     Parle-t-il  1     N'importe.     S'i) 
li,  n'est-ce  pas  assez  ?      C'est  bctiucoup  ;    mais  s'il  fiit  (inelquu 
chose  de  plus,  c'est  encore  incMlleur. 

Madame  Leblanc,  je  suis  bieu  aisc  do  vous  voir.  Comment  se 
porte-t-on  chez  vous?  Tout  le  monde  sc,  portc  bien,  je  vous  remercie. 
Kntrez;  venez  vous  asseoir.  Non,  jc  ifai  pas  le  U'lnps  du  m'asseoir. 
Pourquoi  done  ?  J'ai  ;\  aller  chez  notre  Spicier  pour  acheter  beau- 
coup  d(5  choses.  Qu'avez-vous  ;\  acheter  ?  Jc  nc  peux  pas  vous 
dire  tout,  mais  en  voici  le  catalogue.  Lisez-le,  si  vous  voulez  savoir 
Co  qu'il  nous  faut. — Voyons.  D'abord  :  dubcurre.  Quoi!  n'achetcz- 
vous  pus  votre  beurre  an  inarche  ?  Si  fait,  mais  quand  nous  ne 
pouvons  pas  y  en  trouver  de  bon,  je  vais  chez  cet  rpicier,  ou  je  suis 
sure  (friii.)  d'en  trouver  de  bon,  d'cxccllent.  C'cst  bon  u  savoir. 
Du  sucre  blanc,  du  poivre,  des  biscuits,  du  fromage,  du  vinaigre,  du 
sel,  &c.,  &c.  C'cst  assez.  En  verite,  votre  catalogue  est  bi.cn  (very) 
long.  Mais  pourquoi  n'achetez-vous  pas  tout  ccla  pres  de  chez 
vous?  N'y  avez-vous  pas  des  epiciers '.'  Si  fait,  nous  en  uvons 
mais  leurs  articles  ne  sont  pas  aussi  bons  que  cenx  de  celui  chez 
qui  je  vais. 

THIRTY-FIRST  LESSON,  31st.— Trente  et  unieme  Legon,  ?Ime. 

VOCABULAIRE.  Ire  Section. 

OF  THE  PAST  PARTICIPLE.— Du  Participe  Passt. 
The  Past  Participle  is  usually  placed  after  the  auxiliaries,  to  have,  avoir, 
and  to  be,  6tre,  to  form  the  past  01  compound  tenses.     The  past  participle? 
of  regular  verbs  may  be  formed  by  changing  the  terminations  of  the  infiri 


THIRTY-FIRST     LESSON,    (l  ) 


157 


tive,  (jr  the  first  conjugation  into  «  with  the  acute  accent,  thus:  parler— 
parle  :  for  the  second,  into  i.  thus:  fuiir — -fni  ;  for  tlie  third,  into  ^ 
thus  :  recevoir — rc$u  ;  and  for  the  fourth,  also  into  u,  thus  :  vendrc — vendw- 
Examples  :— 


love,\ 
weep,  I 

eat,     / 
begin] 

P.  P. 
aime. 

pi  cure, 
maii'jc. 
commtJitt. 

Qemifj 
Blnir, 

Choisir, 

/to  trail  o\ 
1  to  sigh,    \ 
1  to  bless,    1 
\^o  choose  J 

P.P. 

Mri 

Wni 

choisi. 

to  owe,  \ 

r/u.1 

Vend  re, 

to  sell, 

ve'idn. 

to  conceive) 

\conCfU. 

Rendre, 

to  render, 

rendit. 

to  res 

Entendre, 

to  hear, 

vii  lend 

to  per 

Dcfendre, 

to  defend, 

dcfe-d 

V«.; 

ttre* 

>                Par  fait  ou  1 

ete.2 

^resent  Comt 

PREMIERE    COKJUGAISON. 

i,,f. 

Aimer, 
Pleurer, 
Manger, 
Commen 

TROISIE3IE    CONJUGAISON. 

Devoir, 
Concevoir. 

Recevoir, 
Apercevoir, 

nse. 

Have  you  been  to  market  ? 
I  have  (been  then-  ,      I  have  mt. 
have. 

Ha\-  'here  ?  Have  yon 

f  n  there  ?      Has  he  not  ? 
Ho  has  been  there.        He  has  not. 
Ever. 

To  the  iron  bridje. 
The  covered  bridirr.    7' //»'.*  U 
II-.v  been  at  the  bridge  ? 

I  h::\ 

been  there. 

lie  has  never  been  there. 

V«m  have  never  been  there. 

Mr.  Brunei,  have  you  a  catalogue  of 
the  verbs  which  govern  other  verbs 
with  the  preposition  a  ?  No,  Sir, 
I  have  no  catalogue  of  them.  Make 
one,  if  you  please.  Write  down  in 
French:  Verbs  with  the  preposi- 
tion a.  Have  you  the  title  now  1 
Not  quite  yet,  Sir. — Now,  I  have 
it.  Read  it  aloud,  if  you  please. 


SECONDE    CONJUQAISON. 


QUATRI^ME    CONJUGAISON. 


P' 

Avez-vous  616  au  marche  ?  3 

J'y  ai  e*te.        Je  n'y  ai  pas  ctr. 

Y  ai-je  et<5  ?     Vous  y  avez  t't«:. 

Y  avez -vous  616  ?      N'y  avez-TO\i 
pas  ete  ? 

Y  a-t-il  etc  ?      N'y  a-t-il  pas  <V-  ? 

II  y  a  etc.  II  n'y  a  pas  ete. 

Jama  is .  Ne . . .  jama  i* . 

Un  pont.  Au  -pout  defer. 

Lepont  convert.  Ce  pont  dejil  defer, 

Avez-vous  jamais  ete  au  pont  ? 

Jc  n'y  ai  jamais  etc. 

Tu  n'y  as  jamais  e^e. 

II  n'y  a  jamais  ete. 

Vous  n'y  avez  jamais  etc. 

M.  Brunei,  avez-vous  un  catalogue 
des  verbes  qui  en  gouvernenl 
d'autres  avec  la  preposition  at 
Non,  M.,  je  n'en  ai  pas  de  cata- 
logue. Faites-en  un,  s'il  vous  plait. 
6crivez  en  Francois  :  Verbs  with 
the  preposition  d.  Avez-vous  Ic 
titre  a  present  ?  Non  pas  tout- 
a-fait  encore. — A  present,  je  1'ai 


1  It  will  be  perceived,  that  in  the  third  conjugation  it  is  not  o/r,  but  evoir 
vhich  in  the  past  participle  must  be  changed  fnto  u..   Irregulars  hereafter. 

2  The  pupil,  in  repeating  the  irregular  verbs  already  given,  must  not  full 
V  mark  in  his  list  the  past  participles  of  those  verbs. 

3  A  'it  and  did  go. 


158  THIRTY-FIRST    LESSON.    (1.) 


Verbes  avec  la  preposition  a. 
That's  it.  Now,  what  is  the  first 
verb  of  that  class  which  you  have 
to  set  down,  do  you  know  ?  Not 
yet,  Sir. — You  may  find  it  if  you 
look  for  it.  Where  can  I  find  it  ? 
In  some  of  the  vocabularies.  I  am 
going  to  loola'for  it.  I  believe  it  is 
the  verb  tolhave,  at  tfys  21st  vo 
cabulary,  21  section 


it.  Ibeli 
',  at  tile  ! 
ion. 


Lisez-le  haul,  s'ii  vous 
Verbes  avec  la  preposition  d.  C'ert 
cela.  A  present,  quel  est  le  pre- 
mier verbe  de  cette  classe  (fern.) 
que  vous  avez  a  ecrire  ?  Le  savez^ 
vous  ?  Non  pas  encore,  M. — Vons 
pouvez  le  trouver,  si  vous  le 
cherchez.  X)u  puis-ji  le  trouver  ? 
Dans  queltiues  uns  lies  vocabu- 
laires.  Je  vais  le  chercjier.  Je  croia 

*  /  que  c'est  le  verbe  Avbir,  au  21mt 

vocabulaire,  2de  section. 

TRENTE  ET  UNIEME  THK\ME.  Ire  Sec. 
N'oubliez  pas  le  quantieme. 

Bon  jour,  Messieurs,  il  fait  chaud,  n'est-ce  pas  ?  Pas  trop  chaud 
Pas  aussi  chaud  qu'au  commencement  du  mois.  Vous  croyez '? 
Oui,  je  le  crois,  ou  plutot  (rather)  j'en  suis  sur,  car  le  thermometre 
n'esta  present  qu'a  78  ou  79  degres,  et  au  commencement  du  mois, 
il  a  etc  (was  up)  a  81  et  82.  Je  n'ai  rien  a  dire  a  cela,  vous  avez 
raison.  Mais  comment  va  ?  Cela  va  assez  bien.  Se  porte-t-on 
bien  chez  vous  ?  Pas  tout  le  monde.  Qui  est  malade  ?  Jules  a 
ete  malade,  mais  il  est  mieux  a  present,  je  puis  dire  presque  bien. 
Je  Papprends  avec  plaisir.  Jeanne  a  mal  aupied  droit,  et  ne  pent  pas 
sortir;  Victor  a  mal  de  tete  depuis  trois  jours.  Je  suis  bien  fache 
de  cela.  Ne  tfouvez-vous  pas  la  poussiere  bien  desagreable?  Si 
fait,  mais  comme  le  temps  est  convert,  j'espere  que  nous  allona 
avoir  de  la  pluie.  Je  Pespere  aussi.  Mes  amis  m'ont  dit  de  VOUH 
presenter  Icurs  compliments^  (present  their  compliments  to  you.)  Je 
leur  suis  tres-oblige.  Voulez-vous  me  faire  le  plaisir  de  leur  pre- 
senter les  miens  ?  Sans  doute. 

Where  have  you  been?  I  went  to  the  market  to  Duy  some  fresh 
butter. — Have  you  been  to  the  ball'?  I  have.  (Dir.  1.)— Did  I  not 
go  to  the  bridge  with  you  ?  Yes,  you  did. — Hast  thou  been  to  the 
play  ?  No,  I  have  not. — Has  your  oldest  son  ever  been  to  the  thea- 
tre? He  has  never  been  there,  but  his  young  brother  has  (been 
there). — Hast  thou  already  been  to  my  large  store  ?  I  never  was 
there,  (have  never  been.) — Do  you  intend  to  go  there  ?  I  do. — When 
will  you  go?  I  will  to-morrow,  if  I  can. — At  what  o'clock? — Why 
do  you  wish  to  know? — Because  I  wish  to  be  there,  if  you  come. — 
Very  well;  at  12  o'clock. — Has  your  good  uncle  already  been  in 
my  large  garden  ?  He  has  not  yet  been  there. — He  intends  to  sec 
it;  does  he  not?  I  believe  he  does. — When  can  he. go  there?  To 
day,  may  be. — Have  you  already  been  to  the  wire  bridge  ?  No,  not 
y«t;  but  I  have  been  to  the  covered  bridge. — Have  you  not  been  to 


THIRTY-FIRST     LESSON.    (1.) 


159 


he  other?  Is  it  possible !  Np;  I  have  not  yet;  but  I  intend  tc  go 
»oon,  if  I  have  time  to  go.— Go  there  early  in  the  morning;  that  is 
the  best  time. — I  have  been  somewhere  early  every  morning. 

Has  your  uncle  been  at  the  lawyer's  office  ?  Yes,  he  has. — Has 
he  been  to  the  wharf  and  museum  ?  He  was  at  the  former,  but  ho 
nas  not  yet  gone  to  the  latter. — Are  you  not  going  to  take  your  two 
cousins  there?  No,  they  have  already  been  there. — Have  they 
indeed  !  When  did  they  go  ?  They  went  yesterday. — Did  they  gc 
alone;  without  you?  They  did  not  go  alone;  we  went  together. — 
How  many  went  together  ?  Five  or  six. — Has  the  Italian  been  to 
the  workshop  of  the  joiner  or  that  of  the  painter?  He  has  been 
neither  in  the  one  nor  in  the  other,  but  he  has  been  all  the  day  with 
the  German  dentist. — Is  not  that  German,  or  Prussian  d°ntist  in  our 
parlor  now  ?  He  has  been  there,  but  he  is  no  longer  (no  more) 
ihere. — When  was  he  (has  he  been)  there?  This  morning,  early. 
—Before  breakfast  ?  Yes,  before  breakfast. — Has  the  son  of  our 
gardener  been  to  market?  I  believe  he  is  there  now. — What  does 
ne  intend  to  do  there  ?  He  intends  first  to  sell  his  cabbages  and 
several  other  things.,  and  then  to  buy  some  chickens,  corn,  (Dir.  2.) 
wine,  cheese,  and  cider.  Is  that  all  he  has  to  buy?  No,  he  has 
to  b  I  other  articles ;  but  he  is  going  to  buy  them  at  the 

grocer's. — What  other  articles  is  he  going  to  buy?  Tea,  coffee 
sugar.  i -ukes,  and  pepper. 

VOCABULAIRE.     2de  Section. 


MI  already  been  at  the  play  ? 
i  y  been  there,  and  he  too. 
Vou  have  already  been  thorn,  have 
I  have  been  there  seve- 
ral III 
/  have  not  yet  been  there. 

iiou  ever  been  there  alone  ? 
i  have  neve.'  been  there  alone. 
Where  have  we  never  been  ? 

ve  never  been  at  the  bridge. 
A.t  which  bridge  has  he  been  ? 
He  was  (has  been)  at  the  wire  one. 
We  have  not  yet  been  there. 
Thou  hast  not  yet  been  there. 
You  have  not  yet  been  there. 
He  has  not  yet  been  there. 
Have  Julius  and  Lewis  ever  been  at 
the  museum  ?    (Did  they  ever  go  ?) 
They  have  not  yet  been  there. 
Never  mind.     They  may  go   there 
this  evening  or  on  Tuesday. 


Avez-vous  deja  ete  au  spectacle  ? 
J'y  ai  deja  ete,  et  lui  aussi. 
Vous  y  avez  deja  ete,  n'est-ce  pm  4 
J'y  ai  doja  e'te  plusieurs  fois. 

Je  n'y  ai  pas  encore  ete. 

Y  as-tu  jamais  etc  seui  ? 

Je  n'y  ai  jamais  etc  seul. 

Ou  n'avons-nous  jamais  ete  ? 

Nous  n'avons  jamais  ete  au  pont. 

A  quel  pont  a-t-il  etc*  ? 

II  a  e'te  a  celui  de  fil  de  fer. 

Nous  n'y  avons  pas  encore  e'te'. 

Tu  n'y  as  pas  encore  c*te*. 

Vous  n'y  avez  pas  encore  e't'6. 

II  n'y  a  pas  encore  ete. 

Jules  et  Louis  ont-ils  jamaia  el6  aa 

miise'e  ? 

Us  n'y  ont  pas  encore  e'te'. 
N'importe.     Us  peuvent  y  allor,  c* 

soir  ou  mardi. 


160  THIRTY-FIRST     LESSON. 


Where  did  ycu  go  this  morning  ? 
[  went  to  (have  been  in)  the  garden. 
Where  has  thy  uncle  been  ?   (Did  he 

go?) 

He  went  to  the  store  near  the  bridge. 
Did  he  go  the^e  as  early  as  1  ? 

He  was  there  earlier  than  you. 


Oii  tftfez-vous  et£  ce 


J'ai  Oit;  an  jardin. 

Oii  ton  oncie  a-t-il  ete  5 

II  a  ctd  au  magasin  pres  du  t?ont. 
Y  a-t-il  616  d'aussi  bonne  heure  qac 

moi  ? 
II  y  a  etc*  de  meilleure  heure  que  vous 


Ota.  74.  j£/e,  past  participle  of  the  verb  etre,  to  be,  is  in  French  often 
employed  for  alii,  past  participle  of  the  verb  allert  to  go.  We  eay  fa\ 
6to  au  spectacle,  when  the  meaning  is,  that  I  went  to  ihe  play,  and  am  re- 
turned from  it ;  and,  il  est  alls  au  spectacle,  that  he  is  gone  to  the  play,  but 
is  not  yet  returned.  Accordingly  it  is  better  to  say,  in  the  first  and  second 
persons  sing,  and  plur. :  J'y  at  etet  I  have  been  there  ;  lit,  y  us  etc,  thou  hast 
been  there;  nous  y  avons  ete,  we  have  been  there;  vous  y  avcz  ete,  you 
have  been  there, — than,  j'y  suis  allc,  tu  y  cs  die,  nous  y  sonnies  alles,  VOUA 
y  etes  allis,  when  motion  is  not  particularly  to  be  expressed. 

To  have,  to  get.         Had,  got.  Avoir*  3.  eu.1 


Have  you  had  my  book  ? 

I  have  had  it.     I  did  get  it. 

I  have  not  had  it.     Have  I  had  it  ? 

You  have  had  it.     You  had  it  not. 

Who  has  hnd  it  I     You  h'ul  it. 

I  have  had  it,  but  I  have  it  no  longer. 


Avez-vous  eu  mon  livre  ? 
Je  Vaieu,  (not  j'ai  Teu,  $  52.) 
Je  ne  Vai  pas  eu.     L'ai-je  eu  ? 
Vous  Vavez  eu.  Vous  ne  Vavez  pas  eu. 
Qui  Va  eu  ?  Vous  Vavez  eu.  (Dir.  8.) 
Je  1'ai  eu,  mais  je  ne  1'ai  plus. 


TRENTE  ET  UNIEME  TII£ME.  2de  Sec. 

Kcrivez  la  date  en  Fran^ais  ici. 

Mile.  Clara,  je  suis  bien  aise  de  vous  voir.  Comment  vnus  ele«- 
vousportee  (fern.)  depuis  mardi  dernier,  jour  de  notre  le^on?  Jo 
me  suis  tres-b:.8ii  porlec,  je  vous  remercie.  Je  le  crois,  car  vous  ave/ 
tres-bon  air.  Comment  se  porle  M.  Jean?  Jean  n'est  pas  bien  du 
tout.  Alors  je  pense  qu?il  ne  va  pas  venir  aujourd;hui.  Je  ne  sais 
pas,  car  il  aime  beaucoup  a  prendre  le^on.  Aussi,  il  apprend  bien, 
car  il  etiulie  aussi  bien  que  possible.  Les  autres  ecoliers  vont-ili? 
venir?  l^urquoi  pas?  II  est  un  peu  tard,  n'est-ce  pas?  II  ireat 
que  5  heures  et  3  minutes.  Est-ce  tout?  n'est-il  pas  5  heures  et 
10?  Non,  j'ai  1'heure  exacte.  Je  crois  qu'ils  sont  ici,  a  present.  Oui; 
c'est  vrai,  les  voici.  J'ai  1'honneur  de  vous  saluer,  Messieurs.  Ah  ! 
M.  Jean,  je  suis  bien  aise  de  vous  voir.  II  fait  chaud,  n'est-ce  pas ! 
Je  trouve  qu'il  fait  agreable.  Nous  avons  un  air  frais  (cool)  et  agre 
able.  Mais  le  soldi  est  chaud.  M-entendez-vous?  Je  n'entend? 
pas  tout.  J'entends  une  partie.  Vous  entendez  le  mot:  chaud) 
n'est-ce  pas?  Oui,  j'entends  cela.  Que  n'entendez-vous  pas  alors1 

•  Eu.     This  combination,  throughout  the  verb  avoir,  sounds  like  Fr- 
it.    (See  Pronun.) 


THIRTT-FIHST     LESSON.    (2.)  1G1 

Un  mot  au  commencement.  Est-ce  le  mot:  soleilj  qje  VOL s  n'en 
tendez  pas'?  Oui,  c'est  celui-la.  Savez-vous  si  M.  Louis  Fentend 
Je  crois  qiril  ne  Fentend  pas.  Je  vais  vous  en  dire  FAnglais.  C'est 
the  sun.  Entendez-vous  la  phrase  a  present?  Oui,  parfaitement 
Je  peux  vous  en  donner  FAnglais.  Faites-le,  s'il  vous  plait.  O'est 
the  sun  is  warm  or  hot.  Tres-bien,  c'est  vrai. 

Have  you  a  mind  to  write,  translate,  or  study  an  exercise  ?  I  nave 
a  mind  to  translate  and  write  one.  (Dir.  2.) — To  whom  do  you  wish 
to  write  a  note  ?  I  wish  to  write  one  to  my  son. — Does  he  iinrr.e* 
diately  answer  )our  notes,  when  you  write  to  him?  He  does. — Do 
jour  brothers  answer  (reply  to)  the  Swiss's  notes?  No,  they  do 
not. — Do  they  not  answer  them?  No;  I  tell  you,  no,  (que  non.}— 

Have  your  uncle  and  father  already  been  at museum?    Tho 

former  has,  but  not  the  latter. — Why  did  not  the  latter  go?  Because 
he  has  not  had  time. — Has  lie  time  to  go  there  this  afternoon? — At 
what  o'clock?  At  4  past  3. — Xo,  he  has  no  time  then;  for  he  hag 
an  engagement  (un  engagement)  at  -1. — Never  mind;  he  may  go 
another  day. — When  does  your  cousin  set  out?  He  does  not  set  out 
yet. — When,  then  ?  lie  does  not  set  out  before  Monday. — Did  you 
not  go  to  the  iron  K  "onlay  ?  Yes,  we  went  (have  beon)  to 

the  iron  bridge,  near  the  lawyer's  garden. — Is  it  not  a  beautiful 
bridge?  Yes,  i*  :-  ^autiful. — Do  you  like  it  as  much  as  the  wire 
bridge  ?  I  like  ;  quite  as  much. — Did  you  go  to  the  play,  last 
nil/::  >,  I  did  not  go,  because  I  never  go. — Who  went  to  the 

wharf  early  this  morning?     Thomas  went  there  before  he  break- 
;1. — Did  you  go  there  together?     I  did  not  go  with  him ;  he 
:  there  alone. — Why  did  you  not  go  with  him?    Because  I  had 
not  time  to  go  then. — What  have  you  had  to  do?    I  had  (have  had) 
to  speak  to  the  gardener. 

our  neighbor  been  at  the  theatre  as  often  as  we?  He  has 
been  there  oftener  than  we. — Do  our  friend's  brothers  go  to  their 
counting-house  too  early?  They  go  too  late,  sometimes. — Do  they 
go  as  late  as  we  ?  They  go  later  than  we. — Has  the  clerk  been  as 
often  as  you  at  the  dentist's,  to-day  ?  He  has  been  (was)  there 
oftener  than  I. — Where  do  your  friends  Charles  and  Thomas  re- 
main ?  They  remain  at  home,  because  it  is  very  warm. — Do  they 
not  go  out?  They  do  not  go  out  before  i  past  8  in  the  evening,, 
because  then  it  begins  to  be  cool. — Are  they  sick?  No,  but  they 
are  afraid  of  the  heat. — Have  you  had  my  blue  gloves?  I  have 
cad  them. — Have  you  got  them  now?  No,  I  have  had  them,  but  I 
have  them  no  longer. — When  had  you  (have  had)  them  ?  I  had 
them  in  the  parlor,  and  I  th'.riK  they  are  there  yet.— Go  and  go!  them 


162 


r  H  I  R  T  Y  -SECOND     LESSON.    () 


for  mo,  ii  yo-j  please. — Can  you  not  go  yourself]  ($  4l£.)  No;  dc 
you  not  see  that  I  am  very  busy?  Very  well;  I  am  going  for  them 
— Hast  thou  had  my  old  umbrella?  I  have  not  had  it. — Have  I  had 
your  English  penknife?  You  had  it. — When  had  I  it?  (l'ai-je  eu?) 
— Had  you  it  not  yesterday,  in  the  garden,  to  cut  a  bouquet2  Oh\ 
yes;  that's  true.  I  had  it  then;  but  now  I  do  not  know  whero  it  is. 
—Can  it  not  be  in  your  apartment?  It  maybe  there. — Who  ha« 
had  my  Russian  stick?  Nobody  has  had  it;  you  have  had  it  your- 
self. (41i.) 


THIRTY-SECOND  LESSON,  32d.— Ircnte-deuxiemc  Lccou,  :  2me 


VOCABULAIRE.     Ire  Section. 


{last  thou  had  ? 
Thou  hast  (had). 

it). 

lias  he  had  ? 
He  has  had. 


Hast  thou  had  it  ? 
Thou  hast  not  (had 


lias  he  had  it  ? 

He  has  not  had  it. 
Hast  thou  had  the  coat  ?     I  have  not 

had  it. 
Who  has  had  it  ?      The  tailor  has 

(had  it). 

Somebody  has  had  it.     Nobody  has. 
Have  you  had  anything  ? 
I  have  not  had  anything,  (nothing.) 
4ave  we  had  ?     We  have  not  had. 

Have  we  not  had  ?  Yes,  we  have  had. 

We  have  had  it. 
Have  the  children  had  the  gun  ? 
They  have  had  it.      They  have  not. 
What  have  they  had  ? 
What  have  you  had  ? 
What  was  the  matter  with  you  ? 
What  has  been  the  matter  with  him  ? 
What  has  he  had  ? 
He  has  had  a  headache. 
Has  anything  been  the  matter  with 

us  ?       What  have  we  had  ? 
Have  I  had  anything  good  ? 
Have  you  had  the  books  ? 


As-tu  eu  ? 
Tu  as  eu. 


L'as-tu  eu  ? 

Tu  ne  Fas  pas  eu. 


A-t-il  eu?         L'n-t-il  eu  ? 
II  a  eu.  Ii  no  1'a  pas  cu. 

As-tu  eu  rhabit?      Je  ne  1'ai  paa 

eu. 
Qui  1'a  cu  ?         Le  tailleur  1'a  eu. 

Quelqu'unracu.  Personne  ne  I'acu. 
Avez-vous  eu  quelque  chose  ? 
Je  n'ai  rien  eu.  (Obs.  4.) 
Avons-nous  eu  ?    Nous  n'avons  pas 

eu. 
N'avons-nous  pas  eu  ?     Si  fait,  nous 

avons  eu.     Nous  1'avons  eu. 
Les  enfants  ont-ils  eu  le  fusil  ? 
Us  1'ont  eu.       Us  nc  1'ont  pas  eu. 
Qu'ont-ils  eu  ? 

[  Qu'avez-vous  eu  ? 
t  Qu'a-t-il  eu  ? 
II  a  eu  mal  de  tete. 
>  Qu'avons-nous  eu? 

Ai-je  eu  quelque  chose  de  bon  t 
Avez-vous  eu  les  livres  ? 


Obs.  75.  The  French  past  participle,  with:  avoir,  to  have,  for  auxiliary 
•nust  agree  wir.h  its  direct  object  ($43)  in  number^  when  that  object  rt^nei 
Jirtt,  tmd  only  then.  If  the  object  is  plural,  the  past  participle  takes  on  s. 


THIRTY-SECDNr     LESSON,    (t.) 


163 


?  have  had  them.  I  have  not  had  them. 
dave  I  had  them  ?  You  had  them, 
fou  have  not  had  (did  not  get)  them. 
das  he  had  them  ?     He  had  them. 
vVhich  gloves  have  you  had  ?  Theirs  ? 

Neither  he  nor  I  have  had  them. 
*Iave  you  had  mine  ?  (obj.  after.) 
Neither  they  nor  you  have  had  them. 
Have  you  had  bread  ?  (any.) 
I  have  had  some.      I  had1  none. 
Have  I  had  any  ?      You  had  some. 


Je  Ics  ai  ens.       Je  ne  les  ai  pas  cut. 
Les  ai-je  eus  ?     Vous  les  avez  cu*< 
Vous  ne  les  avez  pas  eus. 
Les  a-t-il  eus  ?      II  les  a  eus. 
Qucls  gants  avez-vous  eus  ?      Leo 

leurs  ? 

Ni  lui  ni  moi,  ne  les  avons  eus. 
Avez-vous  eu  les  miens?  (obj.  apres.: 
Ni  eux  ni  vous,  ne  les  avez  eus. 
Avez-vous  eu  du  pain  ? 
J'en  ai  eu.        Je  n'en  ai  pas  eu. 
En  ai-je  eu  ?      Vous  en  avez  eu. 


Obs.  76.  The  past  participle,  with  avoir,  never  agrees  with  its  indirect 
object,  ($  44,)  even  when  the  object  comes  first.  Consequently,  when  tho 
pronoun  en,  which  is  an  indirect  oiycci,  is  before  the  past  participle,  the 
latter  d  >es  not  take  an  s. 


You  have  not  had  any. 

Has  lie  had  any  ?         He  had  none. 

Have  they  had  any  ?       They  have. 

(Dir.  1.) 
Who  has  had  any  ?      We  have   had 

some). 
What  has  he  had  ?       He  (has)  had 

not!.. 

What  did  I  get  ?          You  got  that. 
We  had  somebody.  (We  have  had.) 
Von  have  had  nobody,  (had.) 


Vous  rCcn  avez  pas  eu. 

En  a-t-il  eu  ?       II  n'en  a  pas  eu. 

En  ont-ils  eu  ?     Us  en  out  eu. 


Qui  en  a  eu  ? 
Qu'a-t-il  eu  ? 


Nous  en  avons  en, 
II  n'a  rien  eu. 


Qu' ai-je  eu?        Vous  avez  eu  cela. 
Nous  avons  eu  quelqu'un. 
Vous  n'avez  eu  personne. 


IT.-DEUXIEME    TlllblE.   ll'C  SeC. 

Mettez  ici  le  quantieme  du  mois  en  Frangais. 

Ah  !  bon  jour,  M.  George,  comment  vous  etes-vous  porte 
tjue  je  n'ai  eu  le  plaisir  de  vous  voir?  Merci,  Mile.,  je  me  suis  lort- 
bien  porte  depuis  ce  temps-Id^  (time.)  Et  vous  aussi,  j'espere  ?  Moi 
nussi,  merci.  Mais,  avez-vous  ete  absent?  Oui,  j'a*  ete  absent, 
presque  dix  jours.  En  verite  !  Ou  avez-vous  ete  ?  J'ai  etc  a  New 
York,  dans  le  Connecticut,  et  a  Providence.  Avez-vous  eu  beaucoup 
de  plaisir?  Oui,  beaucoup.  Je  suisbieri  aise  de  1'apprendre.  Com- 
bien  de  jours  avez-vous  ete  a  New  York?  Je  n?y  ai  ete  que  deux 
ours. — Ce  n'est  pas  beaucoup. — Avez-vous  aussi  ele  deux  jours  a 
Providence?  Oui,  jy  ai  ete  un  peu  plus  de  deux  jours.  Qu'en 
pensez-vous?  (How  do  you  like  it?)  Je  Paime  beaucoup. — Y  con- 
naissez-vous  beaucoup  de  monde?  Oui,  j?y  connais  des  personnes 

1  //</</,  alone,  in  English,  is  frequently  used  instead  of  have  had  ;  but  hi 
French,  at  eu  is  used  when  the  action  is  fully  past. 


164  THIRTr-SECOixD    LESSON.    (2.) 

tres-aimables. — -A  present  que  j'y  pense.  votre  ami  Jule:j  y  a-t-il  etl 
avec  vous,  comme  a  Pordinaire?  Non,  il  n:y  a  pas  ete.  Qu'avez- 
7ous  eu  d'agreable  ?  Beaucoup  de  choses. 

Has  your  brother  had  my  wooden  hammer?  He  has. — Has  ho 
had  my  golden,  velvet,  and  satin  ribbons  ?  (Dir.  2.)  He  has  had  the 
first  and  the  second,  but  not  the  third. — Have  the  English  had  my 
beautiful  ship  ?  They  have  had  it. — Who  has  had  my  thread  stock- 
ings ?  Your  servants  have  had  them. — Have  we  had  the  iron  trunk 
of  our  good  neighbor  ?  We  have  had  it. — Have  we  had  his  fmo 
pistol?  We  have  not  had  it. — Have  we  had  the  mattresses  of 
the  foreigners?  We  have  not  had  them. — Has  the  American  had 
my  good  work?  He  has  had  it. — Has  he  had  my  silver  knife  ?  Ho 
has  not  had  it. — Has  the  young  man  had  the  first  volume  of  my 
work?  He  has  not  had  the  first,  but  (mats  il  a  eu)  the  second. — 
Has  he  had  it?  Yes,  Sir,  he  has  had  it. — When  has  he  had  it? 
He  has  had  it  this  morning. — Have  you  had  any  sugar  ?  I  have  had 
some. — Have  I  had  any  good  paper  ?  You  have  not  had  any. — Has 
the  cook  of  the  Russian  captain  had  any  chickens?  He  has  hau 
some.  He  has  had  none  at  all. 

lias  the  Frenchman  had  good  old  wine?  He  has  had  some,  and 
he  has  some  yet. — Hast  thou  had  large  cakes?  I  have. — Has  thy 
orother  had  any  ?  He  has  not. — Has  the  farmer's  son  had  any  fresh 
butter  ?  He  has  had  a  great  deal,  has  ho  not  ?  To  be  sure,  lie  has. — 
Have  the  Poles  had  good  Spanish  segars  and  tobacco  ?  They  havo 
had  some,  because  they  are  very  fond  of  smoking  and  snuffing.— 
Wha/  tobacco  do  they  usually  smoke  and  snuff?  They  usually 
smoke  Turkish  and  Polish  tobacco ;  but  sometimes  they  have  the 
best  American  and  Spanish  tobacco. — What  have  the  Spaniards 
bad?  They  have  had  fine  merino  sheep,  (de  beaux  moutons  meri- 
nos.)— Who  has  had  courage  ?  The  American  sailors  and  soldiers.^- 
Have  the  Germans  had  more  friends  than  the  Scotch  ?  They  have 
had  less. — Has  your  little  son  had  more  toys  than  his  big  cousin? 
He  has  had  many  more. — Have  the  Turks  had  more  pepper  than 
corn  and  tobacco  ?  They  have  had  less  of  the  former  than  of  these.—* 
Has  the  Italian  painter  had  anything?  He  has  had  nothing  at  all.— 
IVho  has  been  at  the  garden  of  Carr?  The  garden  which  is  near 
the  covered  bridge?  Yes,  that  one.  Many  of  our  friends  have. — 
What  have  you  had  to  do  ?  I  have  had  to  write  notes. — Had  the 
gardener's  son  to  write  notes  also?  He  has  had  to  work  in  hi/j 
father's  garden. — Have  we  had  to  work  ?  No,  we  have  had  to  trans- 
late and  copy. — Have  the  boys  sore  feet?  No,  they  have  had  sort* 
feet,  but  they  are  well  now. — Who  has  had  a  sore  nose?  The  littla 
Russian  baker. — Has  the  tobacco  merchant  had  sue  eyes  ?  Hia 
eyes  are  always  sore. 


THIRrT-SECDND     A.ESSON     (2.) 


165 


YOCABULAIRE.  2Je  Section 
So.       So  well.       Nat  so  often  05  ....  |  Si.     Si  lien.    iYe  ....  pas  si 


Have  you  been  hungry  or  cold  ? 
I  have  been  thirsty  and  warm. 
Who  has  been  right,  and  who  wrong  ? 
If  John  has  been  wrong,  then  Julius 

has  been  right. 

No,  they  have  both  been  wrong. 
Wo  have  been  afraid  to  show  any. 
To  take  place.        The  ball  will  take 

place. 
When  is  the    ball  in  honor  of  the 

g  to  take  place  ? 

Does  the  concert  take  place  to-day  ?  ) 
Is  the  concert  to  come  oflf  to-day?  J 
it  takes  place.  It  takes  place  this 

ling. 

It  does  not  take  place  to-d 
When  did  the  grand  dinner  take  place  ? 
It  took  (has  taken)  place  yesterday. 
It  has  not  yet  taken  place,  [had  place.] 
The  day  before  yesterday. 
Where  had  you  a  mind  to  po  the  day 

before  yesterday  ?  To  Bristol. 
How  many  times?  Once.(orone  time. 
Twice,  (two  times.  Thrice,  (three 

tin;. 

Many  times,  a  great  many  times. 
Formerly.  More  thnn  six  tinna. 

Has  the  President  a  bad  cold  ? 

No,  he  has  had  one,  but  he  is  well 
now.  I  am  glad  to  hear  it. 

I  thought  he  was  sick. 

jht  you  were  in  New  York. 

/  thought  they  were  Prussians. 

/  thought  I  had  your  hat. 

Did  you  thi?ik  you  had  it  ?          I  did. 

Did  you  think  you  knew  your  lesson  ? 

Did  you  think  you  knew  that  man  ? 

I  thought  I  did,  but  I  see  that  I  do 
not  (know  him). 

Gone.     To  have  gone.      To  have  gone 
there. 

Did  you  go  to  the  concert  of  V.  ? 

I  went  or  did  go.  I  did  not  go, 

nt  (there.)  fie  did  not  go  (there.) 

Who  has  gone?  Who  went  ?  Lewis 


que. . . . 

Avez-vous  eu  faim  ou  froid  ? 
J'ai  eu  soif  et  chaud. 
Qui  a  eu  raison  et  qui  a  eu  tort  ? 
Si  Jean  a  eu  tort,  alors  Jules   a  ou 

raison. 

Non,  ils  ont  Tun  et  1'autre  eu  tort. 
Nous  avons  eu  peur  d'en  montrer. 
t  Avoir  lieu.  Le  bal  va  avoir  lieu. 

t  Quand  le  bal  en  honncur  du  P resi- 
dent va-t-il  avoir  lieu  ? 

t  Lo  concert  a-t-il  lieu  aujourd'h ji  1 
t  II  a  lieu.   .         II  a  lieu  ce  soir. 

t  II  n'a  pas  lieu  aujourd'hui. 

t  Quand  le  grand  diner  a-t-il  eu  lieu » 

t  II  a  eu  lieu  hier. 

t  II  n'a  pas  encore  eu  lieu. 

Avant-hicr. 

Ou  avez-vous  eu  envie  d'aller  avant- 

hier  ?  A  Bristol. 

Comlitn  dcfois  ?       Unefoif.  (ddv.) 
Deux  fois.  Trois  fois. 

Bien  des  fois. 

Autrefois.       Plus  de  six  fois.  (162.) 

Le    President    a-t-il    un    mauvaia 

rhume  ? 
II  en  a  eu  un,  mais  il  se  porte  bien  a 

present.         J'en  suis  bien  aise. 
Je  le  croyais  malade. 
Je  vous  croyais  a  New  York. 
Je  les  croyais  Prussiens. 
Je  croyais  avoir  votre  chapeau. 
Croyiez-vous  I 'avoir  ?    Je  le  croyais 
Croyiez-vous  savoir  votre  lecon  ? 
Croyiez-vous  connaltre  cet  homme- 

la  ?  Je  croyais  le  co7inaitre,  mais  ja 

vois  que  je  ne  le  connais  pas. 
AlU,  itre  alii.         y  ttre  altt. 

Etes-vous  alle  au  concert  de  V.  ? 
J'y  ai  etd.         Je  n'y  suis  pas  alle. 
II  y  a  etc".  11  n'y  est  pas  all£. 

Qui  y  cet  alle  ?         Louis  y  et?t  alia 


166  THIRTY-SECOND     LESSON.    (2.) 

Has  he  had  a  sore  arm  ?        He  has.   |  A-t-il  eu  rnal  an  bras  ?  II  y  aeu  mal 

What  has  been  the  matter  with  him  ?  Qu'a-t-il  eu  ? 

He  had  a  sore  elbow,  and  he  has  it  II  a  eu  mal  au  coi  de,  et  il  y  a  iiicurc 

yet.  mal. 

Hovv  many  children  has   the   Presi-  Combien  d'enfantsle  Presideiita-t-i^ 

dent  had  ?  (eus,  because  the  object  eus  ?    (eus,  parce  quo  1'objet  e:*l 

precedes.;  avant.) 

He  has  had  three,  I  believe  II  en  a  eu  trois,  je  crois. 

That  if  to  say,  tkat  is,  (t.  *.)  C'est  d  dire. 

TIIEXTE-DEUXIEME  Tii^ME.  2de  Sec. 
Vous  continuez  a  mettre  le  quantieme,  n'est-cc  pas  ? 

Quoi,  Madame  !  vous  etes  ici?  Je  vous  croyais  a  Baltimore.  J'/ 
ai  etc,  M. ;  mais  je  suis  ici  depuis  deux  jours.  Est-il  possible  !  EL 
je  n'ai  pas  eu  le  plaisir  de  vous  voir.  Je  pense  que  vous  vous  por- 
tez  bien,  car  vous  avez  tres-bon  air.  Le  President  a-t-il  etc  a  Balti- 
more ?  Non,  il  n'y  a  pas  ete.  Ou  est-il  alle?  II  est  alle  a  Richmona 
pour  y  voir  ses  meilleurs  amis.  N'a-t-il  pas  ete  malade  ?  Si  fait, 
il  Pa  ete,  mais?res-peu.  II  a  eu  un  rhume,  n'est-ce  pas?  Oui,  au 
commencement  du  mois  d'Avril ;  mais  cela  n?a  pas  ete  grand'  chow1 
(much — expression  constantly  used.)  Je  le  croyais  encore  malade. 
En  verite  !  II  ne  Pest  plus,  et  nous  en  sommes  bien  aises. — N'avez- 
vous  pas  eu  mal  de  tete  ?  Si  fait,  mais  cela  n'a  pas  ete  grand'  chose. 
— A  present,  j'ai  mal  au  pied,  mais  ce  n'est  pas  grand7  chose. — Jo 
croyais  avoir  votre  eventail,  Mile  Sophie,  mais  je  vois  que  voua 
Pavez. — Je  Pai,  mais  il  est  a  votre  service.  Merci.  Si  vons  ivavex 
plus  chaud,  pretez-le-moi  un  moment,  s'il  vous  plait.  Le  voici, 
prenez-le.  II  est  joli  et  bon.  Oh!  ce  n'est  pas  grand7  chose.  En 
avez-vous  besoin,  a  present?  Non,  je  n'en  ai  pas  encore  besoin, 
vous  pouvez  en  faire  usage.  Votre  cousin  a-t-il  le  cheval  dn  fer- 
mier?  Noii,  le  fermier  en  a  eu  besoin,  lui-me-me.  (§  41^.) 

Hive  the  English  had  as  much  sugar  as  tea?  They  have  had  as 
much  of  the  one  as  of  the  other ;  but  they  want  more  sugar  than 
tea. — Has  the  physician  been  cold,  this  evening  ?  No,  he  has  been 
warm. — Has  he  been  warm  enough  ?  He  says  that  he  has  been 
too  warm. — Can  that  be  ?  Has  the  Dutchman  been  right  or  svrcng  ? 
He  has  been  right  or  wrong. — If  he  has  been  right,  he  has  not  been 
wrong. — If  he  has  been  wrong,  he  has  not  been  right. — I  believe 
you  are  right  when  you  say  that. — To  be  sure. — Have  I  been  right 

lPas  grand'  chose,  not  much,  no  great  thing.  As  chose  is  feminine, 
grand1  chose  ought  to  be  spelt :  grande  chose.  But  as,  in  pronouncing  those 
words,  true  d  is  not  sounded,  the  French  use  the  apostrophe  to  show  thai 
the  c  is  suppressed  and  the  d  silent.  So  in  :  grand1  faim,  gra?id'  soif,  grand? 
m?rc,  &c.  Grand1  rhose  is  always  used  with  a  negative. 


THIRTY-THIRD     LESSON,    (l.)  !  G7 

in  writing  to  my  brother'?  You  have  not  been  wrong  in  writing  to 
him. — Have  you  had  a  sore  finger?  I  have  had  a  sore  eye. — Have 
you  had  anything  good  ?  I  have  had  nothing  bad. — Did  the  bail 
take  place  yesterday?  It  did  not  take  place. — Does  it  take  place 
to-day?  It  lakes  place  to-day. — When  does  the  ball  take  place?  It 
takes  place  this  evening. — Did  it  take  place  the  day  before  yester- 
day ?  It  did  take  place. — At  what  o'clock  did  it  take  place?  It 
took  place  (a  cu  lieu)  at  eleven  o'clock. — Did  you  go  (06s.  74)  to 
:ny  brother's  ?  I  went  thither. — How  often  have  you  been  at  my 
friend's  house  ?  I  have  been  there  twice. — Do  you  go  sometimes 
to  the  theatre  alone  ?  I  do,  many  times. — How  many  times  have 
you  been  at  the  theatre  ?  I  have  been  there  only  once. 

etimes  been  at  the  ball  ?  I  have  often  been  there. 
— Has  your  brother  ever  gone  10  the  concert  ?  He  has  never  gono 
'.hither. — Has  your  father  sometimes  gone  to  the  museum?  Ho 
A*e*U  (a  I'K')  there  formerly. — Did  he  go  as  often  as  you?  He  went 
oftener  than  I. — Dost  thou  go  sometimes  into  the  small  garden?  I 
go  there  often  ;  I  1:0  every  day,  two  or  three  times. — Does  your  old 
cook  often  go  to  the  market?  He  does,  sometimes  twice  in  a  day. 
—  Does  he  go  there  oftener  than  my  gardener?  He  does;  for  he 
-  there  to  l»i:y.  and  your  gardener  to  sell. — Has  the  great  supper 

:  onor  of  (Jeneral  S .  taken  place?     Yes,  it  took  place  last 

::iesilay.  ili.it  is,  the  day  before  yesterday,  at  6  o'clock,  in  the 
great  saloon  of  the  museum.  I  went  to  it.  Indeed  !  I  thought  you 
were  at  Boston  OH*  that  day. — Are  you  hungrysometim.es?  Yes, 
many  times. — Are  you  hungry  and  thirsty  in  the  morning?  lam 
so,  at  noon,  too.  and  likewise  in  the  evening. — Are  you  sometimes 
iired  in  the  evening  ?  I  am  so,  when  I  have  been  very  busy. — Did 
you  go  earlier  to  your  office  than  the  merchant  to  his  counting- 
house  ?  I  went  sooner  than  he ;  but  the  painter  went  to  his  work- 
shop (laboratory  or  studio)  earlier  than  he  and  I. — Do  they  translate 
French  into  English  as  well  as  English  into  French?  No,  they  do 
not. 


THIRTY-THIRD  LESSON,  333,— Trentc-troisieme  Legon,  33?ne. 
PERFECT  TENSE.— Parfait  ou  Present  Compose. 

Le  Parfait  is  formed  as  the  perfect  tense  is  in  English,  viz:  from  th« 
present  of  the  auxiliary  and  the  past  participle.  ($  145  to  be  carcfulty 
studied.) 

:  On.     Nt-ver  translate  the  preposition  on,  when  connected  with  a  day 

-1C. 


108 


THIRTY-THIRD     LESSON.    (  1.) 


Perfect.     1  have  studied  this  day. 
I  have  studied  this  month. 
Columbus     has     discovered 

America. 

imperfect.     I  studied  yesterday. 
I  studied  last  month. 
Columbus  discovered  Ame- 
rica in  the  year  1492. 
To  -make,  to  do.  Made,  done. 

What  have  you  done  ? 
I  have  done  nothing — bad. 
Has  that  shoemaker  made  my  shoes  ? 
He  has.  He  has  not. 

He  made  some.  He  did  not  make  any. 
No  (nominative)  No  man  has.  ($171, 

R.  6.) 
No  (objective)  before  a  noun.  ($171, 

R.  5.) 

I  have  done  no  ill  or  evil. 
I  have  been  to  no  bridge. 
Has  the.  tailor  any  of  my  clothes? 
Ih;   lias  none.     None.  ($  171,  R.  5.) 
To  put,  to  put  on.         Put,  pat  on. 
Have  you  put  on  your  shoes  ? 
I  have  (put  them  on).     1  have  not. 
[  have  put  some  on.     I  have  put  none 

on. 

Did  we  not  take  ofTour  gloves  ? 
Yes.  we  took  them  off,  and  our  vests 

also. 

Take  off  your  coat  if  it  is  wet. 
To  tell,  to  say.  Told,  said. 

Have  you  said  the  word  ?  the  words  ? 
I  have. 

Have  you  told  me  the  word  ? 
1  have  told  you  the  word. 
I  have  told  it  to  you,  (or  told  you  of  it. 
That,  (meaning  that  thing.) 
This,  (meaning  this  thing.) 
That  is  the  very  thing. 
Has  he  told  you  that  ? 
He  told  me  this. 
What  have  you  told  them  ? 
Have  you  told  them  nothing  ? 
We  have  told  them  neither  this  nor 

that. 

Have  they  told  you  anything  ? 
They  have  told  us  nothing. 
To  whom  have  they  told  that  ? 
They  have  said  it  to  nobody. 


J'ai  etudie  aujourd'hui. 

J'ai  etudie  ce  mois-ci. 

Colomb  a  decouvert  I'Amerique. 

J'ai  etudie  hier. 

J'ai  etudie  le  mois  dernier. 

Colomb     a    decouvert    1'Ai 

dans  1  annee  14(J2. 
Faire*  fait.  (3lM 

Qu' avez-vous  fait  ? 
Je  n'ai  rien  fait — de  mal. 
Ce  cordonnicr  a-t-il  fait  mes  soulierri  ? 
II  les  a  fails.     II  ne  les  a  pas  fails. 
11  en  a  fait.     II  n'en  a  pas  fait. 
Aucun  . . .  ne  (sujet.)  Aucun  homme 

n'a. 
Ne . . .  aucun  (objet.)  (avant  un  nom.) 

i   Je  n'ai  fait  aucun  mal. 
Je  n'ai  die  a  aucun  pont. 
Le  taillcur  a-t-il  aucun  de  mcshabiu? 
II  n'en  a  u;;cun.     N'en  . . .  aucun. 
Met t re*  J//N.  $1.') 

Avez-vous  mis  vos  souliers  ? 
Je  les  ai  mis.     Je  ne  les  ai  pas  mis 
J'en  ai  mis.     Je  n'en  ai  mis  aucun 

N'avons-nous  pas  ote  nos  gants  ? 

Si  fait,  nous  les  avons  otcs,  ct  noa 

A  gilets  aussi. 

Otez  votre  habit  s'il  est  mouille. 

Dire.*  Dit. 

Avez-vous  dit  le  mot  ?  les  mots  ? 

Je  1'ai  dit.  Je  les  ai  dits. 

M'avez-vous  dit  le  mot  ? 

Je  vous  ai  dit  le  mot. 

Je  vous  1'ai  dit. 

Cela.    ($38,  N.  4.) 

Ceci. 

C'est  cela  m'uie. 

Vous  a-t-il  dit  cela? 

II  m'a  dit  ceci. 

Que  leur  avez-vous  dit  ? 

Ne  leur  avez-vous  rien  dit  ? 

Nous  ne  leur  avons  dit  iii  ecci   a! 

cela. 

Vous  ont-ils  dit  quelque  chose  ? 
Us  ne  nous  ont  rien  dit. 
A  qui  ont-ils  dit  cela  ? 
11s  nc  1'ont  (lit  a  pcrsonne. 


TH1KTV-THIKD     LESSON.    (1.)  109 

TUKNTE-THOI«II:MK  TII£ME.  Ire  Sec. 
Vous  continucz  a  mettrc  le  quantierne,  n'est-ce  pas? 
Qu'avez-vous  faitce  matin?  Nous  avons  fait  noire  devoir. — Que! 
devoir  ave/.-vous  fait  ?  Nous  avons  fait  celui  que  vous  nous  avez 
donne  a.  ftiiro.  L'avez-vous  tous  fait  ?  Je  sais  que  j'ai  fait  le  mien  : 
je  crois  que  Charles  et  Henri  out  fail  les  leurs,  mais  je  ne  peux  pas 
vous  dire  si  Guillaume  a  fait  le  sien. — Le  lien  est-il  fait,  Guillaume  ? 
L-e  mien  ?  sans  doute,  il  est  fait.  Tous  vos  devoirs  sont  done  fails. 
— -Alors,  asseyez-vous  tous,  el  comme  vous  avez  fait  vos  devoirs, 
DOUS  pouvons  commencer.  M.  Jules,  quel  est  le  parfait  du  verbe: 
donne r?  C'est:  j'ai  donne,  n'est-ce  pas?  C'est  cela  meme.  Com- 
ment 1'epelez-vous?  Je  ne  vous  entends  pas,  M.  Quoi!  vous  iven- 
tendez  pas :  epclcz-voiis?  Non,  jo  ne  Penten'ds  pas.  Kt  toi,  Guillaume, 
Pentends-tu?  Moi,  non  plus,  (I  neither,  or  neither  do  I,  $  162,  R.  9.) 
Kt  vous.  I  jj  ne  Tentendez-vous  pas  non  plus?  (do  you  not 

understand  it  cither !)     Non,  nous,  non  plus. — Qui  Kentem!  iei?  Au 
cun  do  nous  ne  Pentend.     Quoi!    Aucim  de  vous  ne  sait  L' Anglais 
> On,  aucun  de  nous  ne  le  sait.    Ne  vous  ai-je 
•  ie:  to  spell?     Non.  ^T..,  vous  ne  nous  1'avex 
encore  donne.     Je  croyais  vous  1'avoir  donno  Tautre  jour.    Non, 
MS  pas  encore  en.   Mais  vous  le  sayez  ^  present^  n'est- 
ce  pas?     Je  pense  que  c'est  le  mol  que  vous  avez  dit,  n'est-ce  pas? 
i  mume.    Prononcez-le  encore,  srl  vous  plait.    Volontiers: 
jfipclcr.     De  quelle  conjugaison  est-ii?     De  la  premiere,  parce  qu'il 
finit  en  cr.     Trcs-bien,  c'esl  cela  meme.     Alors  quel  esl  1'Anglais 
de:  Comment  -vous1     C'est:   how  do  you  spell  it?     C'est 

cela  meme.    A  present;  repondez  a  ma  question:  Comment  epe- 
:  j'ai  donne  ?   J'  (apostrophe)  a,  i,  d.  o.  n,  n,  e.  avec  un  accent 
'.     Comment  formez-vous  le  participe  pa-.-''   do:  donncr?     Je 
Mge  la  fcnrttnmsoii,  cr,  en  L 

Have  you  anything  to  do?  I  have  nothing  to  do. — What  hast 
thou  done?  I  have  done  nothing. — Have  I  done  anything?  You 
have  done  something. —  What  have  I  done?  You  havo  lorn  my 
books- — What  have  youi  children  done  ?  They  have  torn  their 
clothes. — What  have  we  done?  You  have  done  nothing,  but  youi 
brothers  have  burnt  iheir  copy-books. — Has  the  tailor  already  mn.de 
your  coat?  He  has  not  yet  made  it. — Has  your  shoemaker  already 
le  your  shoes?  He  has  already  made  them. — Have  you  some- 
times made  a  hat  ?  I  have  never  made  one. — Have  our  neighbor.-: 
orer  made  books?  They  made  ( — ont  fait)  some  formerly.— How 
juany  blue  coats  has  your  tailor  made?  He  has  made  twenty  or 
Has  lie  made  irood  or  bad  coats?  He  has  made  (both)  good 


170 


THIRTY-THIRD      LESSON.    (2.) 


and  bad. — Has  your  father  put  on  his  coat  ?    He  has  not  yet  put  it 
on,  but  he  is  going  to  put  it  on. 

Has  your  brother  put  his  shoes  on  ?  He  has  put  them  on. — Put 
on  your  shoes  and  stockings.  (Dir.  2.)  We  are  going  to  put  on 
neither,  (ni  ceux-ci  ni  ceux-la.) — What  has  the  physician  taken 
away  ?  He  has  taken  away  nothing. — What  have  you  taken  off? 
I  have  taken  off  my  large  hat. — Have  your  children  taken  off  their 
gloves  ?  They  have  taken  them  off. — When  did  the  ball  take  place? 
It  took  place  the  day  before  yesterday. — Who  has  told  you  that  ? 
My  servant  has  told  me  of  it. — What  has  your  brother  told  you  ? 
He  has  told  me  nothing.— Did  I  tell  you  that  ?  You  did  not  tell  me 
of  it. — Has  he  told  it  you  ?  He  has  told  it  me. — Who  told  your 
neighbor  of  it  ?  The  English  have  told  him  of  it. — Have  they  told 
it  to  the  French  ?  They  have  told  them  of  it,— Who  has  told  it  to 
you  ?  (or  you  of  it  ?)  Your  son  has  (told  me  of  it). — Has  he  told  it 
to  you  ?  He  has  told  me  of  it. — Are  you  willing  to  tell  that  to  your 
friends?  I  am  willing  to  tell  them  of  it. 

VOCABULAIRE.   2de  Section. 


Have  you  told  it  to  me  ?  (or  me  of  it  ?) 

I  have  not.  I  did  not. 

He  has  told  it  to  me,  (or  he  told  me.) 

He  did  not  tell  me,  (or  me  of  it.) 

Have  you  told  (did  you  tell)  him  that  ? 

I  have.  I  did. 

I  have  not.      I  did  not  (tell  him  so). 

What  have  I  told  you  ? 

You  told  me  that  John  is  sick. 

You  did  not  tell  me  anything. 

Did  I  say  so  to  you  ?  (tell  you  that  ?) 

Yes,  you  did. 

You  did  not. 

Did  we  say  so  to  you  ?  (tell  you  so  ?) 

You  said  so  to  us,  (told  us  of  it.) 

You  did  not  say  so  to  us. 

What  did  you  tell  us  ?  (to  us  ?) 

What  did  you  tell  him  ?  (to  him  ?) 

I  told  you  that  your  horse  has  a  sore 

foot. 

I  told  them  that  you  are  here. 
I  told  him  but  a  word. 
You  have  told  him  of  it. 
You  told  us  of  it. 
Vou  did  not  tell  them  (of  it). 
Did  any  one  tell  you  of  it  ? 
Homebody  did 
Nobody  did. 


Me  1'avez-vous  dit?  ($  57., 

Je  ne  vous  1'ai  pas  dit. 

II  me  1'a  dit. 

II  ne  me  1'a  pas  dit. 

Lui  avez-vous  dit  cela  ? 

Je  le  lui  ai  dit. 

Je  ne  le  lui  ai  pas  dit. 

Que  vous  ai-je  dit  ? 

Vous m'avez  dit  que  Jean est  malade 

Vous  ne  m'avez  rien  dit. 

Vous  T ai-je  dit  f 

Oui,  vous  me  1'avez  dit. 

Vous  ne  me  1'avez  pas  dit. 

Vous  avons-nous  dit  cela  f 

Vous  nous  1'avez  dit. 

Vous  ne  nous  1'avez  pas  dit. 

Que  nous  avez-vous  dit  ? 

Que  lui  avez-vous  dit  ? 

Je  vous  ai  dit  que  votre  cheval  n  rial 

au  pied. 

Je  leur  ai  dit  que  vous  etes  ici 
Je  ne  lui  ai  dit  qu'un  mot. 
Vous  le  lui  avez  dit. 
Vous  nous  1'avez  dit. 
Vous  ne  le  leur  avez  pas  dit. 
Quelqu'un  vous  l'a-t-il  dit  I 
Quelqu'un  me  1'a  dit. 
Personne  ne  me  1'a  dit. 


TH1R?  r-THIRD    LESSON.    (2.) 


Who  told  them  ? 

Have  you  told  them  ofit  ? 

I  have.  I  did. 

Have  you  told  them  the  words  they 

wish  to  know  ? 

I  did.    I  have  (told  them  to  them). 
He  told  them  to  me,         to  us. 
He  has  not  told  them  to  you,  to  thee. 
Have  you  spoken  to  the  men  ? 
I  have  spoken  to  them. 
To  whom  did  you  speak  ? 
I  spoke  to  no  one. 


Qui  le  leur  a  dit  ? 

Le  leur  avez-vous  dit  ? 

Je  le  leur  ai  dit. 

Leur  avez-vous  dit  les  inuts  qu'ilj 

veulent  savoir  ? 
Je  les  leur  ai  dits. 

II  me  les  a  dits.      II  nous  les  a  dits. 
II  ne  vous  les  a  pas  dits  v/.e  te  les.) 
Avez-vous  parle  aux  homines  ? 
Je  leur  ai  parle. 
A  qui  avez-vous  parle  ? 
Je  n'ai  parle  a  personm 


Obi.  77.  The  pronoun  le,  which  is  sometimes  rendered  into  English  by 
so,  and  very  frequently  omitted,  may  in  French  relate  to  a  substantive,  an 
adjective,  or  even  a  whole  sentence.  It  changes  neither  its  gendor  nor  num- 
ber when  it  relates  to  an  adjective  or  a  whole  sentence.  (2'J2,  t)bs.  70.) 

Are  you  the  brothers  of  my  friend  ?       Etes-vous  les  freres  dc  inon  ami  ? 


Nous  les  sommes. 
Sont-ils  riches  ?      Us  IIP.  le  sont  pas 
Ces  homines  aunt-its  savants  ? 
Us  le  eont.        Us  ne  le  sont  pas. 
Vous  et  votre  ami,  Ctes-vous  fatigues? 
Je  ne  lesuis  pas,  moisil  dit qu'il  Test. 
L'est-il,  en  verite  ?     II  le  dit, 
Nos  voisins  sont-iis  aussi 

qu'ils  le  disent  ?     Us  le  sont. 
Je  crois  qu'ils  ne  le  sont  pns. 
Votre  frere  a-t-il  parle  hier  ? 


Je  ne  le  sais  pas.        Ii  le  dit. 


\Ve  are.  (We  are  so — we  are  they.) 
Are  they  rich  ?        They  are  not. 
Are  those  men  learned  ? 
They  are.  They  are  not. 

Are  you  and  your  friend  fatigued  ? 
I  am  not,  but  he  says  he  is. 
Is  he  so  indeed  ?    He  says  he  is. 
Are  our  neighbors  as  poor  as  they 

say  (they  are)  ?      They  are. 
f  believe  they  are  not. 
Did  your  brother  speak  yesterday  ? 
I  do  not  know.        He  says  he  did. 

TllENTE-TUOISlfcME    TlIKME.  2de  Sec. 

Mettex  la  date  en  Frangais. 

Avez-vous  parle  a  votre  maitre  ?  Oui,  je  lui  ai  parle.  O.ii  est-iH 
[1  est  dai-3  son  appartement.  Pourquoi  n'en  sort-il  pas  ?  II  est  ma- 
lade.  Est-il  bien  (very)  malade?  Non;  mais  il  Pest  trop  poui 
donner  des  lepons  aujourd;hui.  Le  medecin  lui  a-t-il  donne  quelquo 
chose  a  prendre  ?  Oui,  il  lui  a  donne  quelque  chose.  Que  lui  a-t-il 
donne  ?  Je  ne  sais  pas  ce  qu?il  lui  a  donne.  Est-il  au  lit  ?  (in  bed  1) 
Non,  il  n'est  pas  au  lit,  il  est  dans  son  grand  fauteuiL  Son  fauteuil  ? 
Qu'est-ce  qiie  Jest  ?  (What  is  that  ?)  N7en  savez-vous  pas  P Anglais1 
Non,  en  verite.  Votre  maitre  ne  vous  en  a-t-il  pas  dit  F Anglais1 
Non,  je  suis  sur  qu:il  ne  me  Fa  jamais  dit.  Charles,  ne  vons  l'a-t-'" 
pas  dit?  Lui,  non  plus. — Eh!  bien,  je  vais  vous  le  dire.  C'es- 
arm-chair.  Fauteuil :  Arm-chair ?  Est-il  possible?  C'est  tres-pos 
sible,  car  c'est  cela  meme.  C'est  tout-a-fait  different  <differonH  d«» 
1'Anglaw.  C'est  vrai,  vous  avoz  raison 


172  THIRTY-THIRD    LESSON.    (3.) 

Have  you  spoken  to  my  father?  I  have. — When  did  you?  I 
spoke  to  him  the  day  before  yesterday. — How  many  times  have  yon 
spoken  to  the  captain  ?  To  which  captain  ?  To  the  French,  no,  no, 
I  do  not  mean  the  French,  but  the  Greek.  I  have  not  spoken  to  tho 
Greek  captain  ;  I  do  not  know  a  Greek  one  j  bu;  I  have  spoken  to 
the  American. — How  many  times  have  you  spoken  to  him  ?  I  spoke 
to  him  many  times. — Have  you  ever  spoken  to  his  son?  I  have, 
often. — To  which  strangers  has  your  young  cousin  spoken?  He  has 
spoken  to  these  and  to  those. — To  these  three  and  those  four  ?  Yes, 
to  them  all,  (d  tons,  ou  a  eux  tous.) — Are  you  the  brother  of  that 
handsome  young  man,  (cc  beau  gar^on,  is  as  often  used  as:  ce  bvaii, 
jtune  hommc.) — Is  that  other  young  man  the  minister's  cousin  ?  That 
one  or  this  ?  That  one.  No,  that  one  is  not ;  but  this  one  is. — I  wish 
to  speak  to  him.  Have  you  never  done  it?  No,  never.  And  I 
neither.  Are  your  friends  as  busy  as  they  say?  They  are  (so). — 
Are  the  carpenters  as  tired  as  they  think?  I  believe  they  are. 

Is  the  valet  tired  because  he  sweeps  the  stores?  He  is. — Does  ho 
sweep  them  often  ?  He  does  it  as  often  as  he  can. — Has  the  Pole 
money  enough  to  buy  wood  or  coal  ?  I  believe  he  has  not  got  any. 
Give  him  this  three  dollar  note. — Is  the  dentist  at  home  ?  No,  he 
h;is  pone  to  the  wire  bridge. — Has  your  old  cook  gone  to  market? 
No,  he  has  gone  to  bed  instead  of  going  to  market.— Is  he  ill  ?  (ma- 
lade?)  He  is  not  ill,  but  only  tired. — Is  he  very  tired?  He  is. 
because  he  made  a  great  dinner  in  honor  of  the  uncle  of  the  French 
minister. — Who  is  ill?  I  do  not  know  who  is.  I  am  not. — Are  you 
as  tall  (grand)  as  I  ?  I  am. — Is  your  son  much  taller  than  you  ?  He 
is. — Are  these  young  men  clerks?  They  are. — Are  you  as  busy  as 
your  brother  ?  I  am  more  so  than  he. — Do  you  know  the  name  of 
the  English  minister?  No,  I  do  not. — Does  Thomas  know  it?  He 
neither.  Has  not  Lewis  told  it  to  you  ?  No,  he  did  not. — Did  ha 
not  tell  it  to  your  uncle  ?  I  do  not  know  if  he  has  told  it  to  him.— 
To  whom  has  he  ta'l  it?  He  has  told  it  neither  ($  56,  $  64)  to  him. 
nor  to  them,  nor  to  you,  nor  to  me,  nor  to  anybody. 
VOCABULAIRE.  3me  Section. 


To  write,  written. 

Which  notes  have  you  written  ? 
I  have  written  these. 
Which  words  has  he  written  ? 
He  has  written  those  which  you  see. 
To  drink,  drunk. 

To  see,  seen. 

To  read,  read. 

To  be  acquainted  with.       been   ac- 
quainted with. 


6crire,*  e'crit.  (065.  75.1 

Quols  billets  avez-vous  ecrits  ? 
J'ai  ecrit  ceux-ci. 
Quels  mots  a-t-ii  ecrite  ? 
II  a  ecrit  ceux  que  vous  voyes. 
Boire,*  bu. 

Voir,*  vu. 

Lire,*  lu. 

Connaitre,*  connu. 


THIRTY-THIRD     LESSON.    (3.) 


ITS 


Wh\cb  men  have  you  seen  ? 

I  have  seen  those. 

Which  books  have  you  read  ? 

I  have  read  those  which  you  have 

lent  me. 
Have  you  been  acquainted  with  these 

men  ?  1  have  not. 

Which  ones  have  you  known  ? 
Have  you  seen  any  sailors? 
I  have  seen  some. 
I  have  not  seen  any. 
To  call,  to  ?iame,  (not  to  call  at,  upon.) 
To  call  at,  upon.      Call  on  me. 
To  throw,  throw  away — them — some. 
Do  you  call  me  ? 
I  do  not  call  you. 


Quels  hommes  avez-vous  VUB  ? 

J'ai  vu  ceux-la. 

Quels  livrea  avez-vous  lus  1 

J'ai  lu  ceux  que  vous  m'avez  pretea 

Avez-vous  connu  ces  hommes  ?    Jo 

ne  les  ai  pas  connus. 
Lcsquels  avez-vous  connus  ? 
Avez-vous  vu  des  matebts  ? 
J'cn  ai  vu. 

Je  n'cn  ai  vu  uicun.  (321,  06*.  76.) 
Appeler  ,\. 

Passer,  1,  chez.      Passez  chez  moi. 
Jeter,  1.  Les  jeter,  en  jeter. 

M'appelez-vous  ?    Je  vous  appelle. 
Je  ne  vous  appelle  pas. 


Obs.  78.  In  verbs  ending  in  cler  and  etcr,  as  appeler,  to  call ;  jeter,  to 
throw  ;  the  letter  /  or  /  is  doubled  in  all  persons  or  tenses  where  it  is  fol 
lowed  by  c  r. 

Who  calls  me  ?  [  Qui  m'appelle  ? 

Your  father  calls  you.  i  Votre  pcre  vous  appelle. 

Avez-vous  appele  les  homines? 

Je  l<js  ai  appeles. 

Jetez-vous  votre  argent  ? 

Je  ne  le  jette  pas. 

Qui  jette  ses  livres  ? 


Have  you  called  the  men  ? 

I  have  called  them. 

Do  you  throw  your  money  away  ? 

I  do  not  throw  it  away. 

Who  throws  away  his  books  ? 

you  thrown  away  anything? 
I  have  thrown  away  my  gloves. 
Have  you  thrown  them  away? 


Avez-vous  jetd  quelque  chose  ? 
J'ai  jete  mes  gants. 
Les  avez-vous  jetes  ? 

TH£ME.  3me  Sec. 
Vous  mettez  le  quantieme  ici,  n'est-ce  pas  ? 

Bon  jour,  mon  cher  Monsieur,  j'espere  que  vous  vous  portez  bien. 
Ou,  Dieu  merci,  je  me  porte  parfaitement  bien.  J'en  suis  bien  aise, 
j'en  suis  ckarmc.  Savez-vous  que  nous  attendons  le  professeur 
grec  ? — Va-t-il  passer  chez  vous  ce  matin  ?  II  va  passer  ici,  nous 
1'attendons  a  9  heures.  J'en  suis  charme;  car,  j'aigrande  envie  do 
le  connaitre.  Ne  le connaissez-vous  pas  encore?  Non,  je  n'ai  pas 
encore  eu  le  plaisir  de  le  voir.  Comment  Pappelez-vous?  Je  na 
sais  pas  son  vnii  nom,  mais  je  Fappelle  Miaulitz. — Comment  epelez- 
vous  son  nom  ?  Je  Fepelle  M,  i,  a,  u,  1,  i,  t,  z — mais  je  ne  sais  pas 
s'il  Fepelle  comme  cela.  N'imporle,  sil  vous  repond  quand  vous 
rappelez  comme-ra.  Mais,  a  present  que  j'y  pense,  parle-t-il  Fran- 

1  Custom,  however,  does  not  observe  this  rule  with  regard  to  the  verb 
tchtt  ,  and  its  compound,  racheler,  to  re*lcem,  to  buy  again.  (25l.) 


174  THIRTY-THIRD     LESSON.    (3.) 

cais  *  Sans  doule.  II  ]e  parle  bien  pour  un  etranger.  II  parle  aussi 
italien,  allemand,  et  un  peu  Anglais.  II  est  done  savant  ?  Oui;  ii 
Pest.  N'est-il  pas  encore  neuf  heures?  Non,  pas  tout-a-fait.  Je 
pense  que  comme  il  est  professeur,  il  est  ponctuel.  Je  le  pense 
aussi;  et  comme  il  est  pres  de  Pheure,  je  pense  qu'il  vient  et  qu'il 
est  en  chemin.  N?entendez-vous  pas  quelqu'un?  (302.)  Si  fait, 
j'entends  quelqu'un.  Est-ce  lui;  croyez-vous  ?  Oui,  c'est  lui- 
meme.  (}41j.)  Voyez.  Ah!  il  est  bien  grand,  n"est-ce  pas? 
What  have  you  to  tell  me ?  I  have  to  tell  you  to  call  on  Professor 

C . — Does  he  wish  to  see  me  ?     He  does. — What  does  ne  want 

with  me?  (me  veut-il?)  I  do  not  know  what  he  wants  with  you; 
he  did  not  tell  it  to  me.  When?  Immediately  after  breakfast. — 
Does  he  breakfast  early?  He  finishes  usually  at  i  of  7  o'clock. — 
Which  exercises  has  your  friend  written?  He  has  written  those.-^ 
Which  men  have  you  seen  at  the  wharf?  I  have  seen  these. — 
Which  books  have  your  children  read  ?  They  have  read  those 
which  you  have  lent  them. — Have  you  seen  these  strangers  or  those  ? 
I  have  neither  seen  these  nor  those. — Which  strangers  have  you 
seen?  I  have  seea those  to  whom  (dqui)  you  have  spoken. — Have 
you  been  acquainted  with  these  men  ?  I  have  been  acquainted  with 
them. — With  which  boys  has  your  brother  been  acquainted?  He 
has  been  acquainted  with  those  of  our  merchant. — Have  I  been 
acquainted  with  these  Frenchmen  ?  You  have  not  been  acquainted 
with  them. — Which  wine  has  your  servant  drunk?  He  has  drunk 
mine. — Have  you  seen  my  brother's  pretty  little  cousins?  I  have. — 
Where  have  you  seen  them  ?  I  have  seen  them  at  their  own  house, 
(chez  cux.) — Have  you  ever  seen  Greeks?  I  have  never  seen  any. 
(Obs.  76.) — Has  your  father  seen  any?  He  has  sometimes  seen 
some. — Do  you  call  me  ?  I  do  call  you. — Who  calls  your  brother? 
My  father  calls  him. — Dost  thou  call  any  one  ?  I  call  no  one. — Have 
you  thrown  away  your  hat  ?  I  have  not  thrown  it  away. — Does  your 
father  throw  away  anything?  He  throws  away  the  notes  which  he 
has  read,  if  they  are  not  important,  (importants.) — Have  you  thrown 
away  your  pencils?  I  have  not  thrown  them  away,  for  I  want 
them.  (232.) — Dost  thou  throw  away  thy  book?  I  do  not  throw  it 
iway  ;  I  want  it  to  (pour)  study  French. — Do  you  translate  and  write 
three  exercises  every  day?  No;  I  translate  and  write  only  one  but 
I  study  an  d  •  Bad  several. 


THIRTY-FOURTH     LESSON.    (1.) 


175 


THIRTY-FOURTH    LESSON,  34th.—  Trente-quatrieme  Lcfon,  34me. 
vr.uLAiRE.  Ire  Section. 

PARTICIPES   PASSES    IRREGULIEBS, 

6teint. 

ouvert. 

conduit. 

pris. 

cru. 


IXF1XITIFS. 

To  extinguish,  Eteindre.* 

To  open,  Ouvrir.* 

To  conduct,  Conduire.* 

To  take,  I'rendre.* 

To  believe,  Croire.* 

To  be  able,  (can,)  Pouvoir.* 
To  know,  iir.* 

To  be  willing,  Vouloir.* 


Extinguished, 

Opened, 

Conducted, 

Taken, 

Believe  1, 

Keen  able,  (could,)   pu. 

Known,  su. 

illing,  voulu. 


NEUTER  VERBS. —  Series  Centres  ou  Intrausitifs. 
See  (§  158,  and  Art.  1,  &c.)  and  study  it  carefully. 

Obs.  79.  Ti:  V:-.-h    arc  conjugated  with  the  auxiliary 

re,  in  French,  and  /•>  /<"•"  ,  i;.  ill  be  marked  thus,  e. 


To  set  out,  1'nrtir.* 

out,  ;ir.* 

\"enir.* 
Has  your  father  set  out  ? 

y.nir  InrntL  .-•  t  out  ? 
They  have  not  set  out. 
When  did  your  brothers  go  out  ? 
They  went  out  at  ten  o'clock. 
Did  the  men  come  to  your  father's 

and  to  your  uncle's  ? 
They  did. 

Which  firetf  have  you  extinguished  ? 
Which  storehouses  have  you  opened, 

and  which  shut  ?         (have  you.) 
Have   you  conducted   them    to   the 

storehouse  and  to  the  office  ? 
I  have. 

Which  books  have  you  taken  ? 
How  many  notes  have  you  received? 
I  received  but  one. 
The  same.  The  same  jewel. 

This  secretary.          This  scrutoire. 
The  secretary  of  the  minister. 
Upon,  on,  the  scrutoire  (writing desk.) 


Set  ouv,  departed,  parti «. 

Gone  out,  sorti*. 

Come,  venufc. 

Votre  pure  est-il  parti  ? 

Vos  amis  sont-ils  partis  ? 

II  ne  sont  pas  partis. 

Quand  vos  freres  sont-ils  sortis  ? 

Us  sont  sortis  a  dix  heures. 

Les    hommes    sont-ils   venus   chel 

votre  pere  et  chez  votre  oncle  ? 
Us  y  sont  venus. 
Quels  feux  avcz-vous  eteints  ? 
Quels  magasins  avez-vous  ouverts. 

et  lesquels  avez-vous  fcrmes  ? 
Les  avez-vous  conduits  au  magasin 

et  au  bureau  ? 
Je  les  y  ai  conduits. 
Quels  livres  avcz-vous  pris  ? 
Combien  de  billets  avez-vous  re5us  1 
|  Je  n'en  ai  reru  qu'un. 
Z«  meme.  JL,ts  mtmes.  Le  mime  bijou. 
Ce  secretaire. 
Le  secretaire  tin  ministre. 
Sur  le  secretaire. 
Le  lane.      Sur  ce  bane-la. 


The  bench.         Upon  that  bench. 

TRENTE-QUATRI&ME  TH£ME.  Ire  Sec. 
N'oubliez  pas  d'ecrire  la  date  en  Franc.ais. 

Quel  vilain  temps  nous  avons,  n'est-ce  pas?  Oui;  nous  avons  un 
emps  tres-cJc'-sagreable.  II  pleut  trop;  il  fait  trop  humide,  et  le 
ernns  est  malsain.  Quelqu'un  est-il  malade  chez  vcus?  Noil, 


176  THIRTY -FOURTH     LESSON.    (1.) 

Dieu  Therci,  tout  ie  monde  se  porte  bien;  mais  presque  tons  out  eie 
malades. — Qu'ont-ils  eu  ?  Non  pas  le  cholera,  j'espere  !  Non,  pas 
le  cholera.  Quoi  done?  L'un  a  eu  le  tic  douloureux,  I'autre  mal 
aux  dents;  celui-ci  a  eu  un  violent  mal  de  tele,  celui-la  quelqu'au- 
tre  chose,  en  un  mot  ils  ont  presque  tous  etc  malades.  Je  suis 
charme  d'apprendre  qu'"ils  se  portent  bien  a  present.  Quand  avez- 
vous  vu  votre  ami  le  jeune  secretaire  du  general!  Je  1'ai  vu  avant- 
hier.  Comment  Fappelez-vous?  Je  1'appelle  Lucien.  Lucien  est 
le  nom  d'un  des  freres  de  Napoleon,  n'est-ce  pas?  Oui,  ce  Pest.  Je 
aais  le  nom  a  present.  Est-il  ici  encore,  ou  est-il  parti?  Parti  pour 
ou?  Je  le  croyais  a  Boston.  Le  general  n'y  est-il  pas  alle  ?  Non, 
le  general  est  malade,  au  lit.  Ne  sort-il  pas?  Non,  en  verite. 
Qu'a-t-il  ?  Le  mcdecin  dit  que  c'est  lagoutte,  (gout.) 

Where  are  your  cousins  gone  to?  They  have  gone  to  the  bridge.— 
Have  your  friends  left?  (partis?)  They  have  not  yet  left. — When 
do  they  set  out?  This  evening. — Early  or  late  ?  At  what  o'clock ? 
At  half  past  nine. — When  did  the  French  boys  come  to  your 
brother's  ?  They  came  there  the  day  before  yesterday. — Did  they 
come  alone,  or  did  their  friends  come  also?  They  came  also. — 
Has  any  one  come  to  see  us?  The  Swiss  came. — Who  came  to  the 
Englishman's  office  ?  The  French  did. — When  did  you  drink  any 
German  wine  ?  We  never  drank  any. — Did  you  not  drink  some  the 
day  before  yesterday  and  to-day,  at  the  secretary's  house  ?  Is  the 
wine  that  we  drank  there  German  wine?  To  be  sure  it  is. — Then 
German  wine  is  very  good. — Has  the  big  servant  carried  my  notes? 
He  has. — Where  did  he  carry  them  ?  He  carried  one  to  the  law- 
yer's office,  the  other  to  the  merchant's  counting-house. — Did  you 
not  cany  a  pocket-book  to  the  captain's?  Yes,  I  did  carry  there 
that  which  you  gave  me  to  carry. — Which  papers  has  the  gardener's 
son  brought  here?  Did  he  bring  any  (aucun)  here?  Yes,  he 
brought  here  those  which  you  lent  to  his  father. — Where  has  he  put 
them  ?  I  have  not  seen  them. — I  believe  he  gave  them  to  Jacob, 
who  has  put  them  in  the  secretary,  or  under  it,  in  the  parlor. 

Which  books  has  the  clerk  taken7  He  has  taken  the  one  which 
you  do  not  read,  and  those  which  you  have  read. — Have  the 
clerks  opened  the  stores?  They  have. — Which  did  they  open? 
They  opened  those  you  have  seen,  under  the  lawyer's  offices.— 
When  did  they  open  them  ?  They  did  early  in  the  morning. — Did 
they  shut  them  last  night?  No,  the  servants  did. — Do  they  slim 
them  every  night,  and  open  them  every  morning?  They  do. — 
Why  did  they  not  open  them  this  morning?  Because  they  are  busy 
on  the  vessel,  at  the  wharf. — Did  Jacob  conduct  the  foreigners  tc 
the  museum'?  He  did. — Did  he  not  conduct  them  to  the  wins 


THIRTY-FOURTH    LESSON.    (2.) 


177 


bridge  alss  i  He  did  not;  but  he  intends  to  conduct  them  iheru  very 
•FOOII. — Has  the  cock  extinguished  the  fires?  He  has  nol  yet  extin- 
guished them. — Who  has  extinguished  the  parlor  fire?  The  Irisi^ 
servant  has. — Have  you  received  any  (aucun)  bench,  sofa,  and 
arm-chair1?  We  have  received  some. — Has  your  brother  received 
his?  He  has  not  received  them;  but  our  friends  have  received 
theirs 

VOCABULAIRE.  2de  Section. 


(jpon  U      The  shawl  is  upon  it. 
Undt-.f.     Under  the  writing-desk. 

it,   (underneath.) 
Where  are  my  velvet  and  satin  hats  ? 

They  are  upon  the  sofa. 

Are  my  kid  gloves  on  it  also  ? 

No,  they  are  under.     I  see  them. 

To  learn  how,         learned  how. 

Do  you  learn  how  to  read  and  count  ? 

I  do  learn  how  to  do  fcoth. 

Have  you  learned  how  to  spoak  ? 

I  have  learned  how,  (or  it.) 

Gone.     Have  they  gone  ? 

In  the  stove.     In  it  or  within. 

To  get    or   have  ..  .mended.     Got  or 

had  . .  .  mended. 
To  wash.     To  have  . . .  washed.     Got 

. . .  washed. 
To  get... made,  (bespeak,)   have... 

made. 

To  have  . .  .  swept.     Got . . .  swept. 
To  get ...  sold.     Had . . .  sold. 


Dessus  (adv.)   Le  chale  est  dessua 
Sous  (prep.)  Sous  le  secretaire. 
Dessous  (adv.) 
Oii  sont  mes  chapcaux  de  velours  el 

de  satin  ? 

lls  sont  sur  le  sofa. 
Mes  gants  de  chamois  y  sont-ils  aus?al 
Non,  ils  sont  dcssous.     Je  les  voi«. 
Apprendre*  d,         appris  a. 
Apprcncz-vous  a  lire  ct  a  compter  ? 
J'apprends  Tun  et  1'autre. 
Avex-vous  appris  a  parler  ? 
Je  1'ai  appris. 

AM*.  Sont-ils  alles  ? 

Dans  le  poele.     Dedans   (adv.; 
t  Faire   raccommoder.       Fait    racco< 

mmoder. 
Laver.     t  Faire  laver.      Fait  laver. 

t  Faire  fair e.         Fait  fair  e. 


t  Faire  balaycr.         Fait  balayer. 

t  Faire  vendre.         Fait  vendre. 
Obs.  SO.     The  two  French  verbs  ccme  together,  while  the  English  verbs 
are  separated  by  some  noun. 
To  get  the  coat  mended. 
To  have  it  mended. 
To  get  them  mended. 
To  get  some  mended. 
Are  you  getting  a  coat  made  ?   (do 

you  order  or  bespeak  a  coat  ?) 
I  am  getting  one  made,  (I  order  one.) 
I  have  had  one  made. 
Has  he  had  his  handkerchief  washed  ? 
He  has  had  it  washed. 
He  did  not  get  it  washed. 


I  have  had  my  shoes  mended. 
I  have  had  them  mended. 
To  wipe,     wiped. 


t  Faire  raccommoder  1' habit, 
t  Le  faire  raccommoder. 
t  Les  faire  raccommoder. 
t  En  faire  raccommoder. 
t  Faites-vous  faire  un  habit  ? 


t  J'en  fais  faire  un 

t  J'en  ai  fait  faire  un. 

t  A-t-il  fait  laver  son  mouchoir  ? 

t  II  1'a  fait  laver. 

t  II  ne  1'a  pas  fait  laver. 

t  J'ai  fait  raccommoder  mes  souliers 

t  Je  les  ai  fait  raccommoder. 

Esfiyer,  1,  essiivs   ($144,  R.  3.) 


173 


THIRTY-FOURTH     LESSON.    (2.) 


t  wipe,  thou  wipcst,  he  wipes. 
Have  you  not  seen  my  book  ? 
Yes,  I  have  put  it  away  for  you. 
When  did  you  see  my  brother  ? 
I  saw  him  last  evening  at  the  bridge. 
Where  did  you  see  my  cousins  ? 
I  saw  them  at  the  museum. 


J'essuie,  tu  essuies,  il  essuic. 
N'avez-vous  pas  vu  mon  livre  f 
Si  fait,  je  1'ai  serre  pour  vous. 
Quand  avez-vous  vu  mon  frere  ? 
Je  1'ai  vu  hier  soir  au  pont. 
Ou  avez-vous  vu  mes  cousins  ? 
Je  les  ai  vus  au  musee. 


TRENTE-QUATRIEME    TH&ME.  2de   SeC. 

Ou  est  le  chale  de  velours  de  Mile.  Clara?  II  est  sur  le  sofaj 
ri'est-ce  pas  ?  Ne  1'y  voyez-vous  pas  ?  Ses  gants  de  ill  sont-ils  des- 
BUS  aussi?  Non,  ils  sont  sous  le  bane.  Dessous !  avez-vous  ditl 
Oui,  c'est-ce  que  j'ai  dit.  Qui  les  a  mis  dessous?  Je  ne  sais  pas 
en  verite.  Ramassez-les  done  vite,  et  mettez  les  sur  le  sofa  avec 
son  chale. — Comme  son  chapeau  de  satin  est  sur  le  grand  fauteuil 
de  cuir,  je  vais  meltre  ses  gants  de  fil  dedans  et  son  chale  sur  le 
dos  du  fauteuil.  Tres-bien,  faites-le.  Mes  souliers  sont-ils  sur  le 
bane?  Non,  ils  sont  dessous.  Je  les  ai  mis  dessus:  Qui  les  a  mia 
dessous  ?  Moi.  C'est  moi  qui  les  ai  mis  dessous.  t  Je  vous  remercie, 
De  rien.  (26.) — Le  charbon  est-il  dans  le  coin  ou  sous  le  bane?  11 
est  dans  le  poele. — Avez-vous  mis  du  bois  dedans?  Oui,  d'abord, 
j'ai  mis  du  bois  dedans,  ensuite  j'y  ai  mis  du  feu  pour  Pallumer,  et 
apres  cela  du  charbon.  13rule-t-il?  Oui,  le  bois  et  le  charbon  bru- 
lent  bien.  Nous  avons  bon  feu.  Si  vous  avez  froid,  mettez-vous 
pres  du  poele.  Je  n'ai  pas  grand  froid.  J'ai  vu  un  peu  de  bois  dans 
un  coin,  est-il  tout  dans  le  poele  ?  II  est  dedans  et  brule.  Ou  sont 
mes  journaux  ?  Je  les  ai  otes  de  dessus  le  poele,  parce  que  je  n'ai  pas 
voulu  les  bruler.  Les  avez-vous  mis  sur  le  secretaire  ?  Non,  ils  sont 
dessous.  Avez-vous  envoye  votre  petit  garcon  au  marche  ?  Je  n'ai 
pas  voulu  Py  envoyer. — Pourquoi  n'avez-vous  pas  voulu  Py  envoyer7 
Je  ir ai  pas  voulu  Py  envoyer,  parce  qu'il  a  ete  un  peu  malade- 
Qu'a-t-il  eu  ?  II  a  eu  un  violent  mal  de  tete.  Avez-vous  ecrit  a  votre 
oncle,  Papothicaire  ?  Je  lui  ai  deja  ecrit. — Vous  a-t-il  repondu  ?  II 
ne  nra  pas  repondu. — Vous  a-t-il  envoye  Pargent  que  vous  voulcz  ? 
II  ne  me  Pa  pas  encore  envoye. — Avez-vous  deja  fait  faire  un  habit  1 
Je  iren  ai  pas  encore  fait  faire. — Avez-vous  fait  faire  un  gilet  ?  Je 
n'en  ai  pas  fait  faire.  N7avez-vous  rien  fait  faire  ?  Non,  lien,  parce 
que  je  veux  avoir  mon  argent  avant  de  faire  faire  quelque  chose. 

Are  you  getting  your  floor  swept  ?  I  am. — Have  you  had  your 
office  swept?  I  have  not  yet  had  it  swept,  but  I  intend  to  have  n 
swept  to-day. — Have  you  the  same  servant  ?  The  same  !  No,  in- 
deed, we  have  not  the  same.  We  have  changed  several  times,  (en, 
§  50.) — But  you  have  the  same  cook;  have  you  not?  Yes,  \ve  have 
the  same  yet. — Have  you  wiped  yc;ur  feet  ?  I  have. — Where  did 


THIRTY -FIFTH      L  E  S  S  0  N.   (1.)  179 

you  wipe  them  ?     I  wiped  them  oil  the  old  carpet.— Have  you  had 
your  sofa*,  and  arm-chairs  wiped?   I  have  (had  them 
wiped). — What  does  your  little  valet  wipe?     He  wipes  the  big  and 
email  knives. — Have  you  :i  a  Syrian?     I  have  already  seen 

two  or  three. — Have  you  ever  shown  one  to  your  cousin  ?  I  have 
already  shown  him  one  at  the  museum. — Has  he  ever  seen  a  Turk  ? 
lie  saw  one  before  I  did,  (moi.) — Have  you  ever  lent  anything  to 
anybody?  Y«  many  times  lent  something  to  a 

great  many  persons,  (beaucoup  de  mondc.) — Does  the  joiner's  son 
know  ho,  :  He  d<K-s. — Is  he  learning  how  to  write?  No, 

he  dors  not ;  ho  is  too  young  yet  to  learn  how  to  write. 

AVi.  t  caucus  going  to  take  place?    It  has  already 

I>id  you  go?    I  did  not. — Miss  Charlotte  wishes  to 

know  it'  Mrs.  Ji taken  place?     It  took  place  last 

— I  >id  the  gentlemen  go  to  it?     They  did. — Have  we  yet 

the   same   milkman  .'       .  the   same.      Wo   have   not 

changed,  (en,)  <»<!,  and  he  is  punctual;  but 

.. T  the  same  baker,  nor  the  same  butcher,  nor  the 

16  grocer.—  get  his  office  washed?     Yes,  he 

yours  washed  to-day;  will 

'.  I  cannot  irct  it  wa>hed  to-day :  I  am  too  busy,  I  have  too 

h  to  write. — Hast  tliou  ever  had  thy  shoes  mended?     I  have 

sometimes  had  them  mended. — Has  the  little  Dutchman  had  his 

I  Ie  had  it  sold  last  Wednesday. — Why  has  he  had  it 

gold  ?     He  had  it  sold  because  ho  is  going  to  California. — Have  his 

here?     Yes,  they  have. 


IT  FIFTH  LESSON,  35ih.—Trente-cinquitme  Lecon, 

VOCABULAIRE.    Ire  Section. 


To  pr.-  promised. 

(Prometlrc  est  comme  son  primitif, 

raettre.) 

To  promise  some  one  to  come, 
To  compose,  to  compound,  composed. 
Compouiid  Tenses.  Thus,  so. 


Promctlre*   4,  promis,   (prend    d 
avant  le  nom  ;  de,  avant  1'inf.) 

Promettre  d  quelqu'un  de  venir. 
Composer,  1,  compose. 

Les  Temps  composes.  Ainsi. 


Obs.  81.  Les  verles  composes  sont  con]ugues  comme  les primitif s.  Ainsi, 
?rom\ettre  est  comme  metlre ;  Apprendrc,  comme  prendrc.  (243,  251, 
831,  34*.) 


To  forget,  forgotten,  forget,  (impera.) 
I  forgot  to  take  that  to  the  dentist. 


OuWier,  1.  Oullie.  Oubliez,  (imp6r., 

de  avant  1'inf. 
J'ai  oublic  dc  porter  cela  au  dentistc. 


180 


.THIRTY-FIFTH    LESSON.    (l.J 


How  ?  So,  so. 

In  this  manner,  (way.)       Like  that. 

Do  you  promise  me  to  come  ? 

I  do  promise  you. 

What  have  you  promised  the  man  ? 

I  have  not  promised  him  anything. 

Have  you  ever  learned  French  ? 

I  learned  it  formerly. 

To  wear  out.          To  spell. 

11'  refuse. 

HJW  has  your   brother  written  his 

exercise  ?     He  has  written  it  well. 
To  put  to  dry,  put  to  dry. 

Do  you  put  your  vest  to  dry  ? 
I  have  already  put  it  to  dry. 
How  old  are  you  ? 
I  am  twelve  years  old. 
How  old  is  your  brother  ? 
He  is  thirteen  years  old. 
Almost,  hardly  ever. 

He  is  almost  fourteen  years  old. 
About,     about  sixteen  years  and  \. 
I  am  about  fifteen  years  old. 
Nearly,  (before  numbers.) 
He  is  nearly  fifteen  years  old. 
Hardly.     Scarcely.     Scarcely  nine. 
Vou  are  hardly  seventeen  years  old. 
Not   quite    eleven   years    and    two 

months. 

.  an  not  quite  sixteen  years  old. 
Art  thoa  older  than  thy  brother  ? 
I  am  younger  than  he. 
I  caanot  teil  you  how  old  I  am. 
There  is,  there  are. 
How   many   francs   nre   there   in   a 

crown  ?  Three. 

Thnre  are  five  centimes  in  a  sou. 
There  are  twenty  sous  or  a  hundred 

centimes  in  one  franc. 
A,  or  one  hundred. 
The  centime. 
How   many  francs   are   there   in   a 

dollar  ? 
There  are  5  francs  and  7  sous. 


!  Comment  I  ^  Comme  tela. 

'••  t  De  cette  maniere.        Comme  cda 
Me  prometlez-vous  de  venir  ? 
Je  vous  le  promets. 
Qu'avez-vous  promis  a  rhomme  f 
Je  ne  lui  ai  rien  promis. 
Avez-vous  jamais  appris  le  Francois 
Je  1'al  appris  autrefois. 
User   1.  Epeler,  1.  (05s.  78.) 

Refuser,  1,  (de,  avant  i'inf.) 
Comment  votre  frere  a-t-il  ecrit  sor, 

theme  ?  II  Fa  bien  ecrit. 

Mettre  d  seeker,        mis  d  sechcr. 
Mettez-vous  votre  gilet  a  secher  ? 
Je  1'ai  deja  mis  a  secher. 
t  Quel  age  avez-vcus  ? 
t  J'ai  douze  ans. 
t  Quel  age  votre  frere  a-t-il  ? 
t  II  a  treize  ans. 

Fresque,  presque  jamaw. 

t  11  a  presque  quatorze  ar.s. 
Environ,  environ  seize  ans  ot  demi 
t  J'ai  environ  quinze  ans. 
Fres  de,  (avant  les  nombres.) 
t  II  a  pres  de  quinze  ans. 
A  peine.  A  peine  neuf. 

t  Vous  avez  a  peine  dix-sept  ans. 
Pas   tout-a-fait  onze    ans   et  dec  ( 

mois. 

t  Je  n'ai  pas  tout-a-fait  seize  ans 
Es-tu  plus  age  que  ton  frere  ? 
Je  suis  plus  jeune  que  lui. 
Je  ne  puis  pas  vous  dire  quel  age  j'ai. 
11  y  a. 
Combien  de  francs  y  a-t-ii  dana  uu 

dcu  ?  Trois. 

II  y  a  cinq  centimes  dans  un  sou. 
II  y  a  vingt  sous  ou  cent  centimes 

dans  un  franc. 
Cent.   . 
Le  centime. 
Combien  de  francs  y  a-t  il  dans  in. 

dollar  ? 
II  y  a  5  francs  et  "7  sous. 

TnibiE.  Ire  Sec. 

i  vous  oubliez  dc  mettre  le  quantieme  au  commencement  du  tneme,  vous 

pouvez  le  mettre  a  la  un,  (end  fern.) 

Bon  jour,  mon  cher  ami,  j?ai  re^u  votre  billet  et  je  vois  avec  plaisii 
ue  vous  TT"    \)romettez  de  venir  a  notre  petit  concert.     Je  vous  le 


THIRTY-FIFTH     LESSOJT.   (1.)  181 

promeis;  si  je  me  porte  bicn.  Je  suis  sitr  de  vous  avoir,  car  von? 
vous  portez  toujours  bien.  Non,  je  vous  assure  (assure  you),  car  hier 
j'ai  eu  mal  de  tete. — Vous  ai-je  promis  quelque  chose?  Vous  ne 
m'avez  rien  promis.  Je  croyais  vous  avoir  promis  d'aller  quelque 
part  avec  vous.  Si  vous  me  Favez  promis,  je  Fai  oublie.  Qu'est-ce 
rme  mon  pere  vous  a  promis  ?  II  a  promis  de  nracheter  un  beau 
livre.  Donnez-moi  ce  que  vous  m'avez  promis. — Je  ne  peux  pas 
vous  le  dormer  avant  apres-demain. — Votre  ami  a-t-il  recu  beaucoup 
(Farg»5nt?  II  n?en  a  guere  recu. — Combien  a-t-il  recu?  II  n'a  reQU 
qu7un  dollar  et  un  ecu. — Combien  avez-vous  donne  a  mon  ills  ?  Jo 
Jui  ai  donne  six  dollars,  ce  qui  fait  un  peu  plus  de  trente  francs. — 
Est-ce  tout  ce  que  vous  lui  avez promis?  Oui.  c'est  tout  ce  que 
je  lui  ai  promis.  Avez-vous  de  Fargent  Francais?  J'en  ai.  Avez« 
vous  des  francs,  des  sous,  et  dps  centimes  ?  Oui,  j'en  ai. — Combien 
<lc  sous'y  a-t-il  (are  there)  dans  un  franc?  II  y  en  a  vingt. — Avez- 
vous  quelques  centimes?  J'en  ai  quelques  uns. — Combien  de 
centimes  y  a-t-il  dans  un  sou  ?  II  y  en  a  cinq. — Et  combien  y  en 
a-t-il  dans  un  franc?  Cent. — Avez-vous  un  habit  a  preter  a  ce 
panvre  homme?  A  lui  preter?  Ou  a  lui  dormer.  J'ai  un  habit 
qui  est  un  peu  use,  il  peut  Favoir. 

Are  your  shoes  worn  out?  They  are  almost  worn  out,  but  not 
quite. — Are  you  going  to  have  them  mended  ?  The  shoemaker  has 
them  to  mend. — Have  you  anything  to  lend  to  cousin  Charles?  J 
have. — To  whom  have  you  lent  your  hat  ?  I  have  not  lent  it;  I  have 
given  it  away,  because  it  is  almost  worn  out. — To  whom  have  you 
given  it  away  ?  I  have  given  it  to  a  pauper,  (d  un  pauvre.)  Does 
your  little  brother  already  know  how  to  spell?  He  does. — Does  he 
Fpell  well  ?  He  does. — Hew  old  is  he  ?  He  is  six  years  old. — Let  me 
hear  him.  Robert,  como  *iere  to  spell. — How  has  the  doctor's  little 
boy  spelt  ?  He  has  spelt  so  so. — Is  he  as  old  as  Robert  ?  He  is 
older. — How  have  their  children  written  their  exercises  ?  They  have 
written  them  badly,  as  usual;  but  they  are  young,  they  are  only 
ten. — Has  my  neighbor  lent  you  his  gloves  ?  He  has  refused  to  lend 
them  to  me. — Do  you  know  Spanish  ?  No,  I  do  not  like  it.  I  have 
refused  to  learn  it. 

Does  the  secretary's  son  speak  Italian  ?  He  speaks  it  well. — Does 
he  speak  it  with  every  Italian  he  sees?  (§78.)  He  does  usually,  but 
yesterday  lie  refused  to  speak  to  a  stranger. — How  old  are  you,  my 
\*oung  boy?  I  am  eleven  nearly. — How  do  our  friends  speak? 
They  do  not  speak  badly. — Do  they  listen  to  what  you  tell  them? 
They  do  almost  always. — How  hast  thou  learned  Italian?  I  have 
teamed  it  in  this  manner. — As  you  understand  it  well,  I  suppose  it 


182 


THIRTY-FIFTH     LESSON.    (2.) 


Is  a  gocd  way,  (une  bonne  maniere,)  is  it  not '  I  believe  il  is ;  ai 
Least,  I  like  that  way. — Have  you  called  me  *  I  have  not  called 
you;  but  I  have  called  your  brother  to  tell  him  to  piepare  his  clothes 
(habits)  to  start  to-morrow  for  Boston. — To  start  so  soon?  Yes,  1 
want  tc  send  some  one  to  Boston,  and  he  has  time  to  go. — Is  he 
come  ?  No,  he  has  not  yet  come.  Do  you  know  where  he  has 
gone  i  He  has  gone  to  the  tailor's  to  bespeak  a  coat  and  a  vest. 

VOCABULAIKE.  2de  Section. 


Tb  wtderstand,  to  comprehend. 

To  hear,  to  understand. 

To  wait  for,  to  expect.    To  lose. 

Do  you  understand  me  ? 

I  do. 

Have  you  understood  the  man  f 

L  have  understood  him. 

I  hear  you,  but  I  do  not  understand 

you. 

The  noise.  The  wind. 

The  noise  (roaring)  of  the  wind. 
Do  you  hear  the  roaring  of  the  wind  ? 
[  do.  I  do  not. 

To  bark. 
What  (21".)  barks  ?  Dogs  bark.  ($  15.) 

The  barking.     Have  you  heard  the 

barking  of  the  dogs  ? 
I  have.  I  have  not. 

To  wait  for  some  one  or  something. 

To  expect  some  one  or  something. 

Are  you  waiting  for  my  brother  ? 

[  am  waiting  for  him. 

Do  you  expect  some  friends  ? 

I  do  expoet  some. 

How  much  has  your  brother  lost  ? 

He  has  lost  about  a  crown. 

I  have  lost  more  than  he. 

To  remain,  to  stay,  to  dwell. 


mais  je  ne  voua 
Le  vent. 


Comprendre,*  4,    (conjugue   corume 

prendre.  (243,  25  »,  34*.) 
Entendre,  4. 

Attcndre,  4.  Perdre,  4. 

Me  comprenez-vous  ?     M'entendei- 

vous  ? 

Je  vous  comfends.    Je  vous  entends. 
Avez-vous  compris  1'homme  f 
Je  1'ai  compris. 
Je  vous  entends, 

comprends  pas. 
Le  bruit. 
Le  bruit  du  vent. 
Entendez-vous  le  bruit  du  vent  ? 
Je  1'entends.     Je  ne  1'cntends  pas, 
Aboyer.     ($144,  R.  3.) 
Qu'est-ce  qui  aboie  ?      Les   chiena 

nboient. 
L1  aboiement.       Avez-vous   entencfu 

1'aboiement  des  chiens  ? 
Je   1'ai  entendu.      je   ne   I'ai  paa 

entendu. 
Attendre    quelqu'un    on     quelquc 

chose. 

Attendez-vous  mon  frere  ? 
Je  1'attends. 

Attendez-vous  des  amis  ? 
J'en  attends  quelques  uns. 
Combien  votre  frere  a-t-il  perdu  ? 
II  a  perdu  environ  un  ecu. 
J'ai  perdu  plus  que  lui. 
Rester,  1,  (prend  plus  souvent  etrs 

que  avoir  pour  auxiliaire.?1 


1  This  verb  takes  avoir  when  it  signifies  to  live  in,  and  ctrc,  when  it 
(Signifies  to  remain..  Ex.  S'ai  resti  sept  mois  a  Colmar  sans  partir  de  mo 
chambre,  (Voltaire;)  I  remained  (lived)  seven  months  at  Colmar  without 
leaving  my  room.  Je  1'attendais  a  Paris,  mais  il  est  reste  a  Lyon,  (The 
French  Academy ;)  I  waited  for  him  in  Paris,  but  he  remained  at  Lyons. 


THIRTY-FIFTH    LESSON.    (2.)  183 

The  nobleman.  I  Le  gentilhomme. 

Noblemen.  j  Les  gentilshommes.   ($  140 — 7.) 

Obs.  82.     Quand  un  mot  est  compose  d'un  nom  et  d'un  adjectif,  Tun  et 
Tautre  prennent  la  marque  (the  mark)  du  pluriel.1 

Genteel,  pretty.  Gentil. 


Where  has  the  nobleman  remained  ? 
He  has  remained  at  home. 
Hove  you  remained  with  him  ? 


Ou  le  gentilhomme  est-il  rests'  ? 
II  est  reste  a  la  maison. 
Etes-vous  reste  avec  lui  ? 

TH£ME.  2de  Sec. 
JSi  vous  ne  mettez  pas  la  date  ici,  mettez-la  a  la  fin  du  theme. 
Ou  avez-vous  mouille  vos  habits  de  cette  maniere  ?  Un  des  gar- 
cons  m'a  mouille  comme  cela.  N'*importe.  Otez  vite  votre  habit, 
vos  souliers,  et  vos  bas,  et  mettez-les  pres  dufeu,  a  secher.  Je  ne  le 
peux  pas,  j'ai  besoin  d'etre  a  la  maison  a  six  heures  et  demie,  et  il  est 
presque  six  heures  et  quart  a  present,  ainsi  vous  voyez  que  je  n'ai 
'pa's  assez  de  temps  pour  faire  secher  mes  habits.  Vous  avez  raison. 
Alors,  allez  chez  vous,  changez-y  d'habit,  de  bas  et  de  souliers,  aus- 
sitot  que  possible.  Mais  quel  est  le  garden  qui  vous  a  mouille  ? 
C:est  celui  qui  a  mouille  le  petit  Jules  Pautre  soir.  Le  meme  !  Oui. 
le  meme,  en  verite.  C'est  done  un  mauvais  garcon!  Oui,  je  vous 
assure.  Quel  age  a-t-il  ?  II  a  d  pcine  dix  ans.  Me  comprenez-vous  ? 
Je  vous  comprends.  Qu?est-ce  qui  a  faitce  bruit-la?  Jepense  que 
c'est  le  domestique  dans  le  salon.  Quel  age  a  notre  voisin?  II  n;a 
pas  tout-a-fait  trente  ans. — Nos  amis  sont-ils  aussi  jeunes  que  nous? 
I  Is  sont  plus  vieux  que  nous.  Quel  age  ont-ils  ?  L'un  a  a  peine  dix- 
neuf  ans,  et  Pautre  en  a  pres  de  vingt. — Votre  oncle  est-il  aussi  age 
que  le  mien  ?  Quel  age  a  le  votre  ?  Le  notre  a  environ  cinquante-  • 
sept  ans  et  demi.  Combien  le  volre  a-t-il  ?  II  a  a  peu  pres  le  meme 

How  old  are  you  ?  I  am  hardly  eighteen  years  old. — How  old  is 
your  brother  ?  He  is  about  twenty-one. — He  is  then  older  than  you  ? 
To  be  sure.  But  as  you  are  much  taller,  I  thought  you  were  older. 
No,  he  is  3  years  older  than  I,  (il  a  3  ans  de  plus  que  moi.) — How 
old  art  thou?  I  am  not  going  to  tell  you  how  old  I  am. — Do  you 
understand  me  ?  I  do. — Does  the  Frenchman  understand  us  ?  He 
does. — Do  you  understand  what  (ce  que)  we  are  telling  you  ?  We 
do  understand  it. — Dost  thou  understand  French  ?  I  do  not  yet,  but 
I  am  learning  it. — Do  we  understand  the  English? — We  do  not  un- 
derstand them. — Do  theEnglish  understand  us?  They  do.— Do  we 
understand  them?  We  hardly  understand  them. — Do  you  hear  any 

1  EKCCpt  the  adjective  demi,  half, which  does  not  take  it,     (192,  N.  3.) 


184 


THIRTY-SIXTH    L£*SO*.    (1.) 


1  hear  nothing. — Have  you  heard  the  Hjaring  of  the  wind  * 
I  iiave  heard  it. 

What  do  you  hear  ?  I  hear  the  barking  of  the  dogs.— Whose  (29fcj 
do^  is  this?  It  is  the  dog  of  the  Scotchman. — Have  you  lost  you! 
atick?  I  have  not  lost  it. — Has  your  servant  lost  my  bank-notes] 
(billets  de  banque  ?)  He  has  lost  them. — Did  you  go  to  the  ball? 
I  did  not. — Where  did  you  remain  ?  I  remained  at  home. — Where 
lid  the  noblemen  remain'?  They  remained  in  the  garc.en. — Has 
your  father  lost  as  much  money  as  I  ^  He  has  lost  more  than  you. 
—Hew  much  have  I  lost?  You  have  hardly  lost  a  crown. — Did 
vour  friends  remain  at  the  ball?  They  remained  there. — Do  you 
know  as  much  as  the  English  physician  ?  I  do  not  know  as  much 
as  he. — How  many  books  have  you  read?  I  have  hardly  read  two. 
— Do  you  wait  for  any  one  ?  I  wait  for  no  one. — Are  you  waiting 
for  the  man  whom  I  saw  this  morning?  I  am  waiting  for  him. — 
Art  thou  waiting  for  thy  book  1  I  am  waiting  for  it. — Do  you  expect 
your  father  this  evening?  I  do. — Do  you  expect  some  friends? 
fdo. 


THIRTY-SIXTH  LESSOxN,  36th.— Trentc-sixieme  Lcgon,  36we. 

VOCABULAIRE.       Ire  Section. 


To  beat,  iVti/en,  bu&t. 

To  bite.  bitten,  bite. 

Why  do  you  beat  the  dog  ? 

1  beat  it  because  it  has  bitten  me. 

To  owe,  owed. 

IJow  much  do  you  owe  me  ? 

I  owe  you  fifty  crowns. 

How  much  does  the  man  owe  you  ? 

He  owes  me  sixty  francs. 

Do  our  neighbors  owe  as  much  as 

we? 

We  owe  more  than  they. 
How  much  dost  thou  owe  ? 
Eighty  francs.  Two  hundred  crowns. 

Ki^hty-three  francs. 

Two  hundred  and  fifty  francs. 

Obs.  83.     As  seen  above,  quatre-v, 
towed  by  nouns ;  but  they  have  no  s 

Are  you  to  . . . .  ?        I  am  to .... 
Where  are  you  to  go  this  morning 
after  breakfast  ? 


JSattre,  4,          baliu,          batlez. 

Motdre,  4,       mordu,        mordez. 

Pourquoi  battez-vous  le  chien  ? 

Je  le  bats  parce  qu'il  m'a  mordu. 

Devoir,  du. 

Combien  me  devcz-vous  ? 

Je  vous  dois  cinquante  ecus. 

Combien  1'homme  vous  doit-il  ? 

II  me  doit  soixante  francs. 

Nos  voisins  doivent-ils   autant  que 
nous? 

Nous  devons  plus  qu'cux. 

Combien  dois-tu  ? 

Quatre-vingts  francs.       Deio  cents 
ecus. 

Quatre-vingt-trcis  francs. 

Deux  cent  cinquante  francs. 
ingt  and  cent  take  s  when  they  are  ioi 
when  followed  by  another  numeral. 

•  t  Devez-vo\is  . . .  ?      t  Je  dois 

I  t  Ou  devez-vous    aller  ce 
aprcs  dejeuner? 


THIRTY-SIXTH     LESSON.    (I.) 


185 


I  am  to  go  to  the  store. 

Is  your  brother  to  come  here  soon  ? 

He  is  to  come  here  very  soon. 


t  Je  clois  aller  au  riagasin. 

t  Votre  Ircre  doit-il  venirici  bicnlolt 

t  II  doit  vcnir  ici  bicjitot. 


Obs.  84.  Are  you  to  .  . .  ?  I  am  to  . . .,  &c.,  riot  being  used  here  in  their 
natural  or  liu-ral  sense,  but  expressing  duty,  uldi^itwn  ;  tiie  Trench  translate 
ihciii  liy  iht-  vt  rii  to  we,  vi/..  ti<  VL /-vous  . . .  ?  Je  dois  . . .,  il  doit . . .,  &c. 


to  come  hack.) 
:i slated  by 

•it  o'clock  do  you  return  from 
the  market  ? 

I  return  from  it  at  twelve  o'clock. 
it,  from  (here,  t,\- 
the   servant  return   early  from 
the  %N 

'lock  m 
morning. 

At  nine  o'clock  in  tin  morning. 

At  five  o'clock  >  ng. 

o'clock  at 


Revcnir,*   2,          revenue  (conjugufc 
etui  me    son   primitit",    vcnir.    (24s 
341.) 

A   quelle    heure    revcnez-vous   di 
niari 

Yen  reviens  a  midi. 

En. 

Le  domestique  revient-ii  de  bonne 
heure  du  magasin  ? 

matin. 

t  i.  ncuf  he  HITS  du  matin. 
t  A  ainq  heures  du  soir. 
t  A  onze  heures  du  soir 

.  Ire  Sec. 

!«  qnantieme  ou  (either)  ici  on  a  la  fin  du  thi'mc. 
mon  cousin,  comment  va,  ce  matin?     Bien ;  el  vous 
Moi  aussi.    Avez-vous  bien  dormi,  (slept.)     Oui,  j'ai  tres-bien  dor 
mi.  ;  le  dejeune   est   pret?     Pret!   Avez-vous   deja 

,  ?     Oui,  j'ai  grand-'faim,  je  vous  assure.     Tres-bien.     Je  vais 
voir  ..:ier  est  re  verm  du  marche.  Allez,  et  revenez  vite ;  ou, 

plutot  (rather)  lai.->e/.-rnoi  aller  avec  vous. — Bien,  aliens  ensemble 
voir  si  le  r-jisinicr  a  eV-  au  marche,  et  s'il  en  est  revenu,  et  en  (at 
the)  memo  I;  >ir  quand  il  peut  nous  donner  a  dejeuner. 

Aliens,  venez,  (come,  let  us  go.)     Allez-y,  mes  enfants. — Moi,  je 
vais  compter  les  £  et  les  £  de  dollars  que  mori  vieux  fermier  rn'a 
apportes— 1,  2,  3,  4,  5,  C,  7,  8,  9,  10,  11,  12,  13,.  14,  15;  16,  17,  18, 
19,  20 — 20  quarts  de  dollar,  font  5  dollars.     C'est  bien.     A  present, 
comptons  les  J  dollars.  2,  4,  6,  8,  10,  12,  14,  1C,  18,  et  1  font  19. 
J'ai  mal  compte.  Comptons  encore.  3,  6,  9,  12,  15,  18,  et  2  font  20. 
'  jittte.  (that's  right.)     Ah!  vous  voila,  Messieurs,  et  bien,  le 
iniera-t-il  ete  au  marche  et  en  est-il  revenu?     Oui,  il  en  est 
•:u;,  et   le  dejeuner  va   etre   pret  dans  un   instant.     J?en  suis 
«-ar  ie  commence  aussi  a  avoir  faim.     Tenez  !   (hear!)  Le 
domestique  a  donne  le  signal ;  le  dejeuner  est  pret.     Aliens  dejeu- 
ner.— Donnez-moi  mon  mouchoir  qui  est  sur  le  dos  du  fauteuil.    Lo 
VoicL— Devez-vous  diner  en  ville'f  (in  town?)     Oui,  je  dois  diner 
ftvec  1'avocat  de  mon  ouclc.     A  quelle  heure  devez-vous  y  aller? 


J88 


THIRTY-SIXTH     LESSON 


Mon  cousin  et  moi,  nous  devons  y  aller  a  2  heures  i .  DoLUl  y 
aller  avec  vous  1  Oui7  il  doit  y  venir  avec  moi. — Nous  devons  touu 
deux  diner  avec  Favocat. 

Why  does  your  neighbor  beat  his  dog?  Because  it  has  bitten  his 
ooy. — How  many  times  did  it  bite  him!  .It  has  bitten  him  only 
once;  and  that  is  enough,  is.it  not? — Is  your  farmer  returned  from 
market?  He  is  not  yet  returned  from  it. — At  what  o'clock  did  your 
brother  return  from  the  ball  ?  He  returned  from  it  at  one  o'clock  in 
the  morning. — At  what  o'clock  Hidst  thou  come  back  from  thy 
friend's?  I  came  back  (en)  at  eleven  o'clock  in  the  morning. — 
Didst  thou  remain  long  with  him?  I  remained  with  him  about  an 
Hour. — How  long  do  you  intend  to  remain  at  the  ball?  I  intend  'o 
remain  there  a  few  minutes. — How  long  did  the  Frenchman  remain 
with  you?  He  remained  with  me  for  two  hours. — How  long 
did  the  Prussians  remain  in  town  ?  They  remained  there  during 
three  months. 

Do  you  intend  to  remain  long  with  us  ?  I  intend  to  remain,  with  you 
8,  10,  or  perhaps  15  days,  (a  fortnight.) — HOTV  much  do  I  owe  you? 
You  do  not  owe  me  much. — How  much  do  you  owe  your  tailor  ?  I 
owe  him  eighty  francs,  or  about  sixteen  dollars. — How  much  dost  thou 
owe  thy  shoemaker  ?  I  owe  him  already  eighty-five  francs,  that  is. 
about  seventeen  dollars. — Do  I  owe  you  anything  ?  You  owe  mo 
nothing. — How  much  does  the  Englishman  owe  you?  He  owes 
me  more  than  you. — Do  the  English  owe  as  much  as  the  Spaniards  ? 
Not  quite  so  much. — Do  I  owe  you  as  much  as  my  brother?  You 
owe  me  more  than  he. — Do  our  friends  owe  you  as  much  as  we  ? 
They  owe  me  less  than  you. — How  much  do  they  owe  you?  They 
owe  me  two  hundred  and  fifty  francs. — How  many  dollars  is  that  ? 
How  much  do  we  owe  you?  You  owe  me  three  hundred  francs, 
that  is,  about  60  dollars. 


VOCABULAIRE. 

How  long  ?.  During,  for. 

Whilst.     Whilst  I  am  here. 
How  long  has  he  remained  there  ? 
A  minute. 
An  hour. 
A  day. 
A  month. 
A  year. 
The  summer.  The  winter. 


2de  Section. 

Combien  de  temps  ?         Pendant.* 

Pendant  que.  Pendant  que  jc  suis  ici. 

Combien  de  temps  y  est-il  reste  ? 

Pendant1  une  minute.2 

Pendant  une  hcure.* 

Pendant  unjour. 

Pendant  un  mois. 

Pendant  une  anne'e.2 

L'ete.  L'hiver. 


1  The  adverb  $  enfant,  when  it  signifies  for,  may  be  omitted  in  French 
*B  well  as  in  English. 
9  Minute,  keure,  annec,  and  rue,  are  feminine  nouns,  of  which  the  in 


THIPTY-SIXTII     LJfcSSON.    (2.) 


1ST 


Obs.  85.    Lee  noms  des  saiso?is,  (seasons,)  des  mois,  et  des  joiire,  wnt 
madculins,  excepte  Vautomne,  autumn,  qui  est  masculin  ct  fuminin. 


During  the  summer.     Last  winter. 
To  dwell,  to  live,  to  reside,  to  remain. 
Where  do  you  live  ? 
I   live   in   Willia::.  number 

twenty-five. 

Where  did  your  brother  live  ? 
He  lived  in  Rivoli   street,  number 

forty-nine. 

Dost  thou  live  at  thy  brother's  house  ? 
I  do  not  live  at  his,  but  at  my  father's 

.house. 

'our  friend   still  live  where   i 

lived. 
Ho  lives  no  longer  where  you  lived. 

No  longer     Number,  at  number. 
I  law  long'were  you  speaking  to  the 

man  ? 
I  spoke  to  him  for  two  hours. 

Did  you  remain  long  with  my  father  ? 


I  stayed  there  a  long  time. 
I  remained  with  him  an  hour. 
A.  Jon.'j  time,         long. 


Pendant  Pete.        L'hiver  dernier. 

J)e7neurer,  I.1 

Ou  demeurez-vous? 

Je  demeure  (dans  la)  rue2  Guillaumo, 

(au)  numero  vingt-cinq.2 
Ou  votre  frere  a-t-il  demeure  ? 
II  a  demeure  (dans  la)  rue  de  Rivoli, 

vau)  numero  quarante-neuf.2 
Demeures-tu  chez  ton  frere  ? 
Je  no   demeiH-e  pas  chei  iui,  maia 

chez  mon  pure. 
Votre   ami   demeure-t-il   encore  oil 

j'ai  dcmeurtf  ? 
II  ne  demeure  plus  ou  vous   avez 

demeure. 

Ne  . .  plus.     Numero,  au  numdro. 
Combieri  de  temps  avez-vous  parld 

;\  1'homme  ? 

Je  Iui  ai  parle  pendant  deux  heures. 
Etes-vous  reste  long-temps  chez  mon 


pere  ? 

J'y  suis  reste  long-temps. 
J'y  suis  reste  une  heure. 
Long-temps,  (never  un  long-temps.) 

TRSNTE-SIXIEME  TH£ME.  2de  Sec. 

N'oubliez  pas  de  mettre  le  quantieme  ici,  ou  au  bout  du  theme. 
Avez-vous  dit  qu'il  y  a  dans  le  bureau  quelqu'un  qui  veut  mo 
voir  ?  Oui,  je  vous  P;ri  dit.  Quand  est-il  verm1?  II  y  a  un  momem 
Qui  est-ce?  Le  connaissez-vous  ?  Non;  je  ne  le  connais  pas.  Je 
ne  Pai  jamais  vu.  Je  ne  peux  pas  le  voir  a  present,  parce  que  jo 
dois  etre  au  quai  a  huit  heures  et  demie,  et  il  est  deja  huit  heures  et 
vingt-cinq  minutes. — Dites-lui  de  revenir,  cct  apres-midi.  Non, 
n'importe,  je  vais  le  Iui  dire  moi-meme.  Corabien  de  temps  avez- 
vons  lu?  J'ai  lu  environ  trois  quarts  d;heure. — Combien  de  tempH  . 

definite  article  is  une,  a,  one,  and  the  definite  la,  whose  plural  (les)  is  tne 
§ame  as  that  of  le.  Feminine  nouns  take,  like  masculine  nouns,  an  «  in 
the  plural,  as  will  be  seen  hereafter. 

1  The  verb  demeurer  takes  avoir  for  its  auxiliary  when  it  neans  to  hvt 
in,  and  ttre  when  it  signifies  to  remain.     Ex.  II  a  demeure  a  Paris,  he  has 
lived  in  Paris     il  est  demeure  court  en  haranguant  le  xoi,  he  stopped  short 
in  haranguing  the  king. 

2  Dans  la  before  rue,  and  au  before  numdro,  have  been  put  bettvoca 
oora.itheses,  because  they  arc  generally  omitted. 


188  THIRTY-SIXTH     LESSON.   (2.) 

lo  feimier  a-t-il  attendu?  II  n'a  pas  attendu  long- temps. — Jean  a-*>il 
tftudie  long-temps?  Non.  pas  tres-long-temps. — Combien  de  temps 
a-t-il  etudie  ?  Presd'une  demi-heure,  (192,  N.  3.)  Qu'a-t-ii  fait  pen- 
dant  le  reste  du  temps2  11  a  dormi.  Quoi !  II  a  dormi  une  heure 
et  demie;  et  il  n'a  etudie  qu'une  demi-heure  1  C'est  comme  je  vous 
ie  dis.  A-t-il  fait  son  devoir  ?  II  dit  qu'il  Pa  fait. — C'est  bon.  Cela 
suffit.  N'avez-vous  pas  promis  a  M.  P.  dialler  a  son  concert?  Si 
fait,  je  le  lui  ai  promis,  s'il  a  lieu  pendant  que  je  suis  ici.  Partez- 
vous  bientot?  Oui,  dans  quelques  jours.  Voyez-vous  le  scldat  qui 
est  malade?  Non;  mais  je  vois  celui  qui  Pa  ete.  Combien  de 
temps  Pa-t-il  ete  ?  11  Pa  ete  pendant  quinze  jours,  (a  fortnight.) 
Votre  cousin  ne  va4-ii  pas  a  Charleston  pendant  Phiver  .  Si  fait,  il 
y  va.  Y  reste-t-il  pendant  Pete  ?  II  n'y  reste  pas  pendant  Pete.  On 
va-t-il  alors?  II  en  revient,  pour  roster  avec  nous.  Combien  de 
temps  avez-vous  demeure  dans  la  rue  Chestnut?  Nous  y  avons 
demeure  long-temps.  Le  chien  est-il  reste  pres  du  feu  pendant 
deux  heures?  II  n'y  est  reste  qu'une  heure,  parce  qu'il  a  mal  au 
dos. 

How  much  have  you  given  for  that  English  horse  ?  I  gave  220 
dollars  for  it. — Did  not  your  little  son  give  something  to  that  poor  little 
boy  ?  Yes,  he  has  given  him  5  cents. — Do  you  owe  anything  to 
the  grocer?  No,  I  believe  I  owe  him  nothing. — Does  your  neighbci 
take  bread  from  your  German  baker?  He  does. — Does  he  owe  him 
anything?  I  believe  he  aoes>. — Does  he  owe  the  butcher?  I  do 
not  know  if  he  owes  him  anything. — Do  you  see  the  sailor  who  is 
in  the  ship?  I  do  not  see  the  one  (}  87)  in  the  ship,  but  the  one  en 
the  w^e  bridge. — Do  you  know  his  name  ?  I  do  not. — Where  are 
you  to  go?  I  am  to  go  to  the  old  bridge. — Is  your  friend's  uncle  to 
come  here  to-day  ?  Hois. — At  what  o'clock  is  he  to  come?  He  is 
to  come  very  soon. — When  are  your  sons  to  go  to  the  play?  They 
are  to  go  to-night,  (ce  soir.) — When  are  they  to  return  from  it? 
They  are  to  return  from  it  at  half  past  ten. — When  are  you  to  go  to 
the  physician's?  I  am  .to  go  at  ten  o'clock  at  night. — When  is 
your  son  to  return  from  (de  clicz)  the  painter's  ?  He  is  to  return  at 
live  o'clock  in  the  evening. — Where  do  you  live  ?  I  live  in  Blvoli 
street,  number  forty-seven. — Where  does  your  father  live  ?  He  lives 
at  his  friend's  house,  in  Walnut  street,  (rue  Walnut,)  No.  251.— 
Where  do  your  brothers  live  1  They  live  in  William  street,  numbei 
one  hundred  and  twenty. — Dost  thou  live  at  thy  brother's  Louse  ?  ) 
live  at  his  house. — Do  you  still  live  where  you  did?  I  live  there 
still. — Does  your  friend  still  live  where  he  did?  He  no  longer  lives 
where  he  did. — Where  does  he  live  at  present?  He  lives  at  hi* 
lather's  house 


T  II  I  R  T  Y  •  S  E  V  E  N  T  H     L  E  S  8  O  X.   (  1.) 


189 


THIRTY -SEVENTH  LESSON,  Mi\\.—Trente-septiimc  Igfon,  37mc 

VOCABULAIRE.     Ire  Section. 


Till,  until. 

Tili,  until  noon,  (twelve  o'clock.) 

Till  to-morrow.      Till  this  evening. 

Till  the  day  after  to-morrow. 

Till  Sunday.  Till  Monday. 

Till  evening.  Till  morning. 

lrr*:il  the  next  day. 

Until  the  day  before  yesterday. 

Till  to-day. 

Until  this  moment — that  moment. 

Till  now — hitherto. 

Until  then. 

How  long?  Until  \i-lm t 


Jusque,  (followed  by  apreposition  and 
its  objective  case.)     Jusqu'd  midi, 
Jusqu'a  demnin.      Jusqu'a  ce  soil. 
Jusqu'apres  domain. 
Jusqu'a  dimanche — a  hindi. 
Jusqu'au  soir.         Jusqu'au  matin. 
Jusqu'au  Icndemav*. 
Jusqu'avant  hier. 
Jusqu'a  aujourd'hui. 
Jusqu'a  ce  moment-ci — moment  la, 
Jusqu'a  present — jusqu'ici 
Jusqu'alors. 

>  Jusqu'd  quand  ?  Jusques  a  quand  ? 


ll'hut  lunirt—Whnt  period? 

Obs.  86.     I  meaning,  until  what  time,  what  hour,  or  period, 

must  be  translated  by  jusqu'd  quand.  Uut  when  it  means,  How  many 
hours,  days,  &,c.,  or  what  length  of  time  :  (36*)  translate  by  Combien  de 
ttinjut  f  or  instance  :  How  long  did  you  stay  in  New  York? 

may  '//  what  o'clock  did  you  stay  in  New  York,  or  in  other  words, 

when  did  you  leave  or  quit  it  ?  The  answer  might  then  be  :  At  six  o'clock, 
or  on  Tuesday,  &.c.  Or  else  it  may  mean,  How  many  hours  or  days,  &c., 
did  you  stay  there?  The  answer  might  then  be,  six  hours,  three  days,  &c. 
Hence,  when  How  long  is  used,  consult  the  answer  to  know  exactly  the 
meaning  of  the  question. 
Until  what  hour  do  you  take  lessons  ? 


We  take  them  till  one  o'clock,  (we 

quit  at  1.) 
Tuesday,  on  Tuesday — Wednesday. 

On  Thtf.-sday  —Friday — Saturday. 

Till  I  return,  (till  my  return.) 

Till  my  brother  returns,  (till  my  bro- 
the/s  return.) 

Till  four  o'clock  in  the  morning. 

Till  midnight,  (till  12  at  night.) 

The  return  or  coming  back. 

How  long  did  you  remain  at  my  fa- 
ther's house  ? 


Jusqu'a  quand  prenez-vous  lemons  ? 
Nous  les  prenons  Jusqu'a  une  heure. 

Mardi.    Mercredi.  (On  is  not  trans- 
lated.) 

Jeudi.  Vendredi.  Samedi.  (32*,  N.  1J 
Jusqu'a  mon  retour. 
Jusqu'au  retour  de  mon  frere. 


Jusqu'a  quatre  heures  du  matin, 

Jusqu'a  minuit. 

Le  retour. 

Jusqu'a  quand  etes-vous  reste  chez 

Nmoxi  pcre  ? 

nod  at  his  house  till  eleven  j   J'y  suis  rcste  jusqu'a  onze  hcurua 
•!;  zit  night.  I       du  soir. 

-an,)  been  able,  ''could.) 
KM  tli3  boy  been  able  to  read  it  ? 


He  was  aole  to  read  it.  He  could  not. 
Could  you  Jind  the  word  ? 
Yes.  I  for. .-/I  it  immediately 


Pouvoir,*  pu.  (20«,  24»,  34».) 
Le  garcpn  a-t-il  pu  le  lire  ?  ($  148.) 
II  a  pu  le  lire.         II  n'a  pas  pu. 
Avez-vous  pu  trouver  le  mot  ? 
On',  jo  1'ni  iroi-v'  tout  de  suite. 


190  THIRTY-SEVENTH     LESSON.    (1.) 

TRENTE-SEPTIEME    Tfi^ME.    Ire   Sec. 

N'oubliez  pas  de  mettre  le  quantieme  du  mois  ici  ou  a  la  fin. 

Mor.  cher  Lucien,  je  suis  charm  e  de  vous  voir.  Je  vous  croyais 
absent.  Depuis  quand  etes-vous  revenu  ?  Je  suis  revenu  samedi 
dernier,  Jusqu'a  quand  allez-vous  rester  ici?  (How  long  or  until 
what  time.)  Je  vais  y  rester  jusqu'au  retour  de  mon  oncle,  et  peut- 
etre  plus  long-temps.  L7attendez-vous  bientot  ?  Je  1'attends  dana 
S  ou  10  jours.  Demeurez-vous  avec  votre  cher  cousin?  Non,  je  ne 
demeure  plus  avec  lui. — Avec  qui  demeurez-vous  ?  Je  re  demeure 
avec  personne.  Je  suis  dans  un  hotel.  Allez-vous  y  rester  jusqu'au 
jetour  de  votre  oncle  ?  Je  pense  que  oui.  Laissez  votre  hotel  et 
venez  demeurer  avec  nous.  Je  vous  suis  bien  oblige.  Jusqu'a 
quand  le  commis  du  marchand  de  livres  est-il  reste  au  musee  ?  II 
n'y  est  reste  que  jusqu'a  midi.  Pourquoi  done  ?  (so.)  Farce  qu'il 
n'a  pas  pu.  Et  pourquoi  n'a-t-il  pas  pu  y  rester  jusqu'a  deux  heurea 
comme  les  autres  ?  II  n'a  pas  pu,  parce  que  son  pere  dine  de  bonne 
hcure.  Allez-vous  a  Lancastre  cet  ete  ?  Non,  je  n'y  vais  pas.  Et 
vous,  Jules,  y  allez-vous?  Moi  non  plus.  Et  Charlotte  et  son  frere, 
y  vont-ils  ?  Eux  non  plus. — Le  professeur  y  va-t-il?  Lui  non  plus. 
Qui  y  va?  Personne  n'y  va. — Combien  de  temps  etes-vous  tous 
restes  a  Bordeaux?  Mon  oncle  y  a  demeure  pendant  6  ans,  mon 
cousin  pendant  trois  ans,  moi  pendant  six  mois;  mais  ces  jeune* 
garcons  n'y  sont  restes  que  quelques  jours. 

Until  what  time  do  the  carpenters  work  at  noon  ?  They  work  till 
twelve. — When  do  they  leave  off  work  in  the  evening?  (or;  until 
what  hour  do  they  work  ?)  Until  6  o'clock,  or  rather  J  to  6. — How 
long  did  I  work?  (or,  until  what?  &c.)  You  worked  till  4  o'clock  in 
the  morning. — Has  the  physician  still  long  to  wait  ?  (encore  pour 
long-temps  ?)  He  has. — Am  I  to  remain  long  here  ?  You  are  TO 
remain  here  till  Sun  .lay. — Is  my  brother  to  remain  long  with  you  ? 
He  is  to  remain  with  us  till  Monday. — How  long  (until  what  time) 
are  we  to  work  ?  You  are  to  work  till  the  day  after  to-morrow. — 
Have  you  still  long  to  speak  ?  I  have  still  an  hour  to  speak. — Did 
you  speak  long?  I  spoke  (ai  parle)  till  the  next  day. — Did  you 
remain  Long  in  my  counting-house  ?  I  remained  in  it  till  this  mo- 
ment. 

Have  you  still  long  to  live  at  the  Frenchman's  house  ?  I  havo 
atill  long  to  live  at  his  house. — How  long  (till  what  time)  have  you 
still  to  live  at  his  house  ?  Till  winter. — Has  he  swept  the  floor  ?  fie 
has  swept  it. — How  long  c"id  he  remain  here  ?  Till  noon,  (wittfr.)— 
Does  your  friend  still  live  with  you?  He  lives  with  me  no  longsr. 
-  How  long  did  he  live  with  you  ?  He  lived  wnn  me  only  a  year. 


THIRTY-SEVENTH     LESSON.    (2.) 


191 


How  Jong  (till  what  time)  did  you  remain  at  the  ball?  I  remained 
ihere  till  midnight. — How  long  (what  time)  did  you  reirain  m  the 
ship?  I  remained  an  hour  in  it. — Have  you  remained  in  the  garden 
till  now  ?  I  have  remained  there  till  now. 

\;UE.    2de  Section. 


One,  some  or  any  one,  people,  (and  theyt 

tc<?,  yot.,  in  an  indefinite  &•<•• 
Have  they  brought  my  shoes  ? 
They  have  brought  them. 
They  have  not  brought  them  yet. 
What  have  they  said  ? 
They  have  said  nothing. 
What  have  they  cione  ? 

nothing. 

willing,  been  willing. 
Has  one  wi.-hrd  to  burn  my  coat  ? 
:M  burn  it.  ($148 — 4.) 

•he  books? 
i  not  find  them. 
i In- y  do  what  tiiey  wish  ? 
Tin  'j  d  /  can  ;   but  thi  >/  do 

.  !iat  they  \v 
What  do  tin  v  t«ay  ?      Nothing  new. 

iy  new  ? 

Tiny    say  nothing  n- 
Someti  .  thing  ncv/. 

My  new  coat. 
My  new  horse. 
My  handsome  n 
My  new  friend. 
My  handsome  coat. 


On,  (pronom  indefini,  toujour?  siiigu- 

licr.  $  38.) 

A-t-on  apporte  mes  soulicrs  f 
On  les  a  apportes. 
On  ne  les  a  pas  encore  apportes. 
Qu'a-t-on  dit  ? 
On  n'a  rien  dit. 
Qu'a-t-on  fait? 
0?i  n'a  rien  fait. 
Vouloir,*  voulu.  (18',  243,  34'.) 
A-t-on  voulu  briilfi  mon  habit? 
On  n'a  pas  voulu  le  bruler. 
A-t-on  pu  trouver  les  livres  ? 
On  n'a  pu  les  trouv'er. 
Peut-07*  faire  ce  qu'on  veut  ? 
On  fait  ce  qu'on  peut ;  mais  on  no 

fait  pas  ce  qu'o?i  veut. 
Que  dit-on  ?        Rien  de  nouveau. 
Que  dit-o/i  de  nouveau  ?   (06s.  7.) 
On  ne  dit  ri(m  do  nouveau. 
Quelque  chose  de  nouveau. 
Ncuf,  nouveau,  (before  a  vowel  or  7t 

mute,  nouvel.)1 
Mon  habit  neuf. 
Mon  nouveau  che  /al. 
Mon  beau  cheval. 
Mon  nouvel  ami. 
Mon  bel  habit.* 


'  Nouveau  (nouvel  before  a  vowel  or  h  mute)  is  used  for  things  which  wo 
new  from  nature  or  invention,  as:  du  vin  nouveau,  new  wine;  un  nourf.au 
commit,  a  new  clerk  ;  un  nouvel  ami,  a  new  friend  ;  un  livre  ?iouveau,  a 
book  just  published.  Ncuf,  on  the  contrary,  is  used  of  things  mado  by 
men,  as  :  un  habit  neuf,  a  new  coat ;  un  l>vre  neuf,  a  new  book,  (which  haj 
been  printed  long  ago,  but  has  not  been  used.)  Thus  we  may  say  Ct 
livre  neuf  est-il  nouveau  ?  Is  this  new  book  a  new  publication  ?  N*uf 
figuratively  means  inexperienced.  Ex.  Ce  valet  cst  lien  neuf,  this  valet  i« 
very  inexperienced. 

2  Bel  and  nouvel  are  used  only  before  masculine  substantives  beginning 
wiA  a  vowel,  or  h  mute,  as  may  be  seen  from  our  examples.  But  in  tho 
plural  the  adjectives  remain  beau  and  nouveau.  Ex.  Ces  beaux  arbres,  these 
fine  trees  ;  tnrs  tmuvcaux  amis,  my  new  friends. 


192 


THIRTY-SEVENTH     LESSON.    (2.) 


To  brush,           brushed,          Irush. 

This  fine-looking  man. 

These  fine-looking  men. 

This  fine  tree. 

Those  fine  trees. 

My  new  friends. 

Do  they  believe  that  ?        They  do. 

They  do  not  believe  it. 

Do  they  rpeak  of  that  ? 

They  do  speak  of  it. 

They  do  not  speak  of  it. 


Brosser,  1,   brossu,  brosstz,  (impcnt) 

Ce  bel  homrne. 

Ces  beaux  hommes. 

Ce  bel  arbre. 

Ces  beaux  arbres. 

Mes  nouveaux  amis. 

Croit-on  cela  ?         On  le  croit 

On  ne  le  croit  pas. 

Parle-t-on  de  cela  ? 

On  en  parle. 

On  n'en  parle  pas. 


TllENTE-SEl'TlEME    TlI^ME.    2de  See. 

Quel  est  le  quanticinc  ?     Apprenez-le  et  mettex-le  ici. 

Que  faites-vous  ce  matin  1  Je  lis.  Que  lisez-vous  ?  Le  journal 
d'aujourd'hui.  Avez-vous  deja  vu  quelque  chose  de  nouveau?  Jo 
n'ai  encore  rien  lu  de  nouveau.  Je  n'ai  lu  qu'un  article.  Que  dit-on 
du  cholera?  Pas  grand'  chose  encore.  Parle-t-on  de  1'or  de  la  Cali- 
fornie?  Je  crois  qu'on  en  parle;  mais  laissex-moi  lire,  et  alors  je 
peux  vous  dire  ce  qu'on  dit  de  nouveau.  Eh  !  :  iez. — Tni 

vaille/  avant  de  dejeuner.  Non,  jc  no  pe;i\  pas  travailler  avant  de 
dejeuner.  Je  n'ai  jamais  pu.  Moi,  jepeux;  \ -  l>ie:i  ;>i>e. — 

George  a-t-il  lu  et  cent?     11  n'a  voulu  ni  lire   :  Qu'a-t-il 

fait.'  11  n'a  lieu  voulu  faiio.  CVst  extraordinaire!  K-t-il  mahule  ? 
Non.  il  se  porte  tres-bien  au  contraire,  car  il  a  dejcnne. 

Pounjuoi  n'a-t-il  pas  voulu  otudier  com  me  a  Fordinaire  ?  II  a  dit :  Je 
VIMIX  jouer  au  lieu  de  travaillcr.  A-t-ii  perdu  son  livre  ?  Non,  je  le 
lui  ai  domic;  mais  au  lieu  de  1'ouvrir,  il  l*a  sen-  itre. 

Le  voisin  vous  a-t-il  prete  son  cheval?  Non.  il  a  refuse  de  me  le 
pieler.  Le  fermier  vous  a-t-ii  prete  le  sien  1  Non,  il  a  au 
parce  qu'il  en  a  besoin  pour  aller  en  ville.  Ah  !  Mile.,  je  suis  charmu 
d'avoir  le  plaisir  de  vous  voir.  Otez  votre  chale  et  votre  bonnet,  et 
asseyez-vous  dans  ce  fauteuii.  Ce  fauteuil  de  velours  est  trop  chaud, 
je  vais  prendre  ce  siege.  Je  veux  voir  Charlotte.  Charlotte  n'est 
pas  ici.  En  verite.  Alors,  je  vais  partir.  Adieu,  M.  Adieu,  INIlle. 

Has  the  shoemaker  been  able  to  mend  my  shoes?  He  has  not 
been  able  to  mend  them. — Why  has  he  not  been  able  to  mend  them  ? 
Because  he  has  had  no  time. — Have  they  (o»)  been  able  to  find  my 
gold  buttons'?  They  have  not  been  able  to  find  them. — Why  has 
the  tailor  not  mended  my  coat?  Because  he  has  no  good  thread.— 
Why  have  you  beaten  the  dog  ?  Because  it  has  bitten  me. — Win- 
do  you  drink  1  Because  I  am  thirsty. — What  have  they  wished  to 
say?  They  have  not  wished  to  say  anything. — Have 
thing  new?  They  have  not  ?niil  nnyll;' 


THIRTY-EIGHTH     LESSON.    (1.) 


193 


say  new  in  the  market?  They  say  nothing  new  theie. — Did  they 
kill  any  dogs  this  morning'?  They  killed  more  than  65. — Do  they 
believe  that?  They  do  not  believe  it. — Do  they  speak  of  that"? 
They  do  speak  of  it. — Do  they  speak  of  the  man  that  has  been 
killed?  They  do  not  speak  of  him. — Can  people  do  what  they 
wish?  They  do  what  they  can;  but  they  do  not.  what  they  wish. — 
What  have  they  brought?  They  have  brought  your  new  coat. — Has 
my  new  servant  brushed  my  fine  carpets?  He  has  not  yet  brushed 
•i.L'in.— Have  you  bought  a  new  horse?  I  have  bought  two  new 
horses. — How  many  iinu  trees  have  you  seen  ?  I  have  seen  but  one 
fine  tree.— I  fare  ymi  seen  a  line-looking  man  ?  I  have  seer  several 
line-looking  men. — Have  you  a  new  friend?  I  have  several. — Do 
you  like  your  new  friends?  I  do  like  them. 


THIRTY-EIGHTH  L  38th^Zhmf#JUtf£* 

VOCABCLAIRK.  Ire  Section. 


38m*. 


iy  uncle's. 
aa  here,      hither, 
tar  as  there,  that;  thither, 
as  London.      Paris.     Rome. 
« «r  in  Paris.  To,  at,  or  in  Berlin. 


Jusqu'oii  ?  (adv.)  Jusqu«. 

Jusque  clsex  n:on  onclc. 
Jusqu'ici. 
Jusque  la. 

Jusqu'a  Londres,  a  Paris,  a  Rome. 
A  Paris.  A  Berlin. 

Ols.  87.     Mettez  («)  avant  Ics  nons  des  villcs — Le  Havre,  to  Havre,  au 
I  12),  et  mcttez  (en)  avant  ccux  des  pays,  (countries,} — To  Hungary, 


vn  Hongrie. 

To,  at  or  in  France  -England. 

ir  as  England. 
As  far  as  Spain. 
As  far  as  France. 
As  far  as  Italy. 
As  far  as  my  house. 
As  far  as  the  warehouse. 
As  far  as  the  corner. 
As  far  as  the  end  of  the  road. 
As  far  as  the  middle  of  the  road. 
Up  flairs.  Down  stairs. 

As  far  as  above.      As  far  as  below. 
Aa  far  as  the  other  side  of  the  road. 

^-ide,  on  this  side. 
•That  side,  on  that  side. 
Germany.  In  America. 

Holland.  Hungary,  (to.) 


En  France — en  Angle tei re. 

Tusqu'en  Angletcrre. 

Jusqu'en  Espagne. 

Jusqu'en  France. 

Jusqu'en  Italic. 

Jusque  cnez  nioi. 

Jusqu'au  magasin.  (y  13.) 

Jusqu'au  coin. 

Jusqu'au  bout  du  chemin. 

Jusqu'au  milieu  du  chemin. 

En  haut.  E*i  las. 

Jusqu'en  haut.          Jusqu'en  ba*. 

Jusqu'a  1'autrc  cote  du  chemin. 

De  ce  cotd-ci. 

De  ce  cote-la. 

L'Allemagne.          En  Amdrique. 

Lallollande.1        La  Hongric,1  (en. 


1  In  ITollande  the  letter  h  is  aspirated  ;  therefore  we  say  la  Hollar.de. 
17 


194  THIRTY-EIGHTH     LESSON.    (1) 

Obs.  88.  The  names  of  states,  empires,  kingdoms,  and  provinces,  aie 
generally  feminine  when  they  end  in  e  mute,  and  masculine,  when  the? 
do  not. 


The  middle.  The  well. 

The  cask.  The  castle. 

To  travel. 


Le  milieu.  Le  puits. 

Le  tonneau.  Le  chateau. 

Voyager,  1. 


Do  you  go  to  Pans  ?  J   Allez-vous  a  Paris  ? 

Do  you  travel  to  Pans  ? 


I  do  travel  (or  go)  thither. 
Is  ha  gone  to  England  ? 
He  is  gone  thither. 
How  far  is  he  gone  ? 
How  far  has  he  travelled  to  ? 
lie  is  gone  as  far  as  America. 


J'y  vais. 

Eot-il  alle  en  Angleiorre  ? 

II  y  est  alle. 

Jusqu'ou  est-il  alle  ? 

Jusqu'ou  a-t-ii  voyage*  ? 

II  est  a.le*  jusqu'en  Amerique. 


TllKXTE-Hl'ITIEME    TlI&ME.   Ire  SeC. 

Si  vous  ne  savcz  pas  le  quanticme,  apprenez-le  et  ecrivez-le  ici. 

Ah!  vouavoild,  M.  Henri.  Je  vous  croyais  a  voyager.  Je  Mils 
revenu  depuis  uu  mois  environ. — Jusqu'ou  avez-vous  etc  ?  J'ni  etc 
jnsqu'en  Allemagne.  Ainsi,  vous  avez  voyage  en  Angleterre  et  en 
Prttnoe  1  Oui,  j'y  ai  voyage,  et  en  Itaiie  aussi.  Avez-vous  ete  jus- 
qu'en Hongrie?  Non,  je  n'ai  pas  eu  le  temps  d'y  aller;  parce  que 
j'ai  reste  trop  long-temps  a  Paris.  Combieu  de  temps  y  etes-voun 
reste  ?  J'y  suis  reste  un  mois.  Ce  n'est  pas  grand'  chose.  Pardon- 
nez-inoi,  c'est  beaucoup  quand  vous  avez  beaucoup  de  pays  a  voir. 
Vous  avez  raison. — Avez-vous  voyage  seul?  Non,  mon  cher  ami 
Francois  a  voyage  avec  moi,  et  nous  avons  ete  ensemble  tout  le 
temps. — Le  pere  Matthieu  est-ii  venu  jusqu'en  Amerique  ?  Oui,  ii 
y  est  venu.  Qui  est  le  pere  Matthieu?  Le  grand  champion  Irian- 
dais  de  la  temperance. — Jusqu'ou  les  Espagnols  sont-ils  alles?  11s 
Bont  alles  jusqu'a  Londres. — Jusqu'ou  ce  pauvre  homme  est-il  venu  ? 
II  est  venu  jusqu'ici.  Est-il  venu  jusque  chez  vousl  II  est  venu 
jusque  chez  mon  pere. — Combien  a-t-il  perdu?  II  a  perdu  tout 
son  argent.  Mon  ami  est-il  alle  de  ce  cote-la?  Oui,  il  est  alle  de 
ce  cote-la.  Je  croyais  qujil  etait  (§  147)  alle  de  ce  cote-ci.  Non, 
personne  ivest  alle  de  cc  cote-ci. — Voila  votre  garcon,  ou  etait-\\'} 
II  ctait  avec  moi. — Et  ou  eticz-vous?  Moi?  j'etais  en  haut. — Vous 
ctiez  eu  haut,  et  moi  j'etais  en  bas.  Qui  etait  en  bas  avec  vous1 
Personne  n'etait  eu  bas  avec  moi,  j'y  etais  seul. 

How  far  did  you  wish  to  go  *  I  wished  to  go  as  far  as  the  wood. 
Have  you  gone  as  far  as  there  ?  I  have  not  gone  as  far  as  there.—* 
How  far  does  your  brother  wish  to  go  ?  He  wishes  to  go  as  iar  as 
llie  end  of  that  road. — How  far  does  the  wine  go?  It  goes  to  the 
middle  of  the  cask. — Where  art  thou  going?  I  am  goiiu^  to  the 


TH  IKTV-EICII  Til      I.KSSON.    (2.) 


195 


bridges.- -I I o\v  far  are  we  going?  We  are  going  as  far  us  the  thea- 
tre.— Are  you  going  as  far  as  the  well?  I  am  going  as  fur  as  the 
castle. — Has  the  carpenter  drunk  all  the  wine?  He  has  drunk  it. — 
Has  your  little  boy  torn  all  his  clothes?  He  lias  torn  them  all.— • 
Why  has  he  torn  them  ?  Because  he  does  not  like  them. — How 
much  have  you  lost  ?  I  have  lost  all  my  money. — Do  you  know 
where  my  lather  is?  I  do  not  know. — Have  you  not  seen  my 
book?  I  have  not  seen  it. — Do  you  know  how  tnis  word  is  wiitteu? 
It  is  written  thus. — Do  you  travel  sometimes?  I  travel  often. — 
Whenj  Jo  you  intend  to  go  to,  this  summer?  (cct  cie?)  I  intend  to 
go  to  Paris. — Do  you  not  go  to  Italy?  I  do  go  thither. — Hast  thou 

.otimes  travelled?  I  have  never  travelled. — Have  your  friends 
a  mind  to  go  to  Holland  ?  They  have  a  mind  to  go  thither. — When 
do  they  intend  to  depart?  They  intend  to  depart  the  day  after  to 

.ow. — Where  is  General  Lewis  going?     He  is  going  as  far  as? 

Section. 


To  *!  commit  a  tl. 

To  steal  soin  :  ft  me  one. 

hey  stolen  your  hat  from  you  ? 
y  have  stolen  it  from  me. 
Has  the  man  stolen  the  books  from 

thee? 

If-'  has  stolen  them  from  me. 
What  have  they  stolen  from  you? 
They  have  stolen  gloves  from  me. 

.<  y  steal  many  ? 
They  did. 

How  do  you  spell  this  word  ? 
Ho.v  is  this  word  wr; 

Tf>  dye  or  colour,  dyctl,  dye. 
I  dye,  thcu  dycst,  he  dyes;  dyeing. 
To  dye  black. 
To  dye  red. 
To  dye  green 
To  dye  blue. 
To  dye  yellow. 

Id  that  'ih   French,  Ame- 

rican, or  English  ?     It  is  French. 
IB  not  that  blue  velvet  beautiful  ? 

•  is  superb. 

This  round  white  hat. 
Do  yon  dye  your  coat  blue  ? 
I  dye  it  green. 

•:'i:i  ? 


-,  'inipera.) 
:  ;n(IijnJuH. 

t  Vous  a-t-on  vole  votrc  chapeau  ? 
t  On  me  1'a  vole, 
t  I/homme  t'a-t-il  vole  les  livrca? 

t  II  me  les  a  vo! 
t  Quo  vous  a-t-on  vole  ? 
On  m'a  vole  des  :r 
Vous  en  a-t-on  vole  beaucoup  ? 
On  ni'en  a  vole  beaucoup. 
Comment  epelle-t-on  ce  mot? 
Comment  ecrit-on  ce  mot? 
On  1'ecrit  ainsi,  (de  ccttc  maniere.) 
Tcindrct*  4,  tei?it,  teig7iez  (impera.) 
Je  teins,  tu  teins,  il  teint ;   teignant. 
t  Teindre  en  noir. 
t  Teindre  en  rouge, 
t  Teindre  en  vcn. 
t  Teindre  en  bleu, 
t  Teindre  en  jaune. 
Ce  drap  bru?i  est-il  Francois,  AmS- 
ricain,  ou  Anglais  ?  II  est  Fran^aia 
Ce  velours  bleu  n'est-il  pas  beau  ? 
Si  fait,  il  est  superbc. 
Ce  chapeau  rond  ct  blanc.  (Ols.  (il.) 
t  Teignez-vous  votre  habit  en  blou? 
t  Je  le  teins  en  vrrt. 
t  Comment  tcint-i   son  satin  ? 


196 


THIRTY-EIGHTH     LESSOR'.    (2.) 


lie  dyes  it  blue. 

The  dyer. 

To  get  dyed,  got  dyed. 

What    colour    have   you    had    your 

white  nat  dyed  ? 
I  nave  got  it  dyed  black. 
Red.    Brown.    Gray.    Pink. 
Spring. 
List  spring. 
Clear,  lig'it. 
Light  bViie. 


In  (in  the)  spring. 
Next  spring. 
Dark,  deep. 
Dark  pink. 

Gray,   light   brown,    and  pink,   are 
good  for  spring. 

TRENTE-IIUITIEME 


t  II  le  teint  en  bleu. 

Le  teinturic-r. 

t  faire  teindre,   fait  tcindrc. 

t  Comment   avez-vous  fait   teindr* 

votre  chapeau  ? 
t  Je  1'ai  fait  teindre  en  noir. 
Rouge.    Brun.    Gris.    Rose. 
Leprintcmps.  Au  printemps. 

Le  printemps  passe — prochain. 
Clair.  Fonce. 

Bleu  clair.  Rose  fonrr. 

Le  gris,  le  brun  clair,  et  le  rose,  sent 

bons  pour  le  printemps. 

K.  2de  Sec. 


Savez-vous  le  quantieme  ?     Oui,  je  le  sais.     Mcttcz-ic  ici. 

Achetez-vous  un  chapeau  blanc  ou  noir  ce  printemps?  JVn 
uchete  un  blanc.  Le  noir  est  bon  pour  1'automne.  Allez-voua 
serrer  le  noir?  Sans  doute.  Votre  chale  est  trop  fonce  pour  le 
printemps,  n'allez-vous  pas  en  mettre  un  autre  ?  Je  n'en  ai  pas 
d;autre  ici. — Vous  a-t-on  vole  une  partie  de  votre  linge  ?  Non,  on  ne 
m'a  ricn  vole  ;  mais  on  a  vole  quelque  chose  a  mon  frere. — Que  lui 
a-t-on  vole  ?  On  lui  a  vole  son  paraplnie  et  ses  gants  neufs. — Ou  lea 
lui  a-t-on  voles  ?  On  les  lui  a  voles  dans  le  bureau  de  son  cousin. 
Je  suis  bien  fache  de  1'apprendre.  Mais  si  vous  ir'avez  pas  d'autre 
chale,  Victoria  peut  vous  en  preter  un  plus  clair.  Trouvez-vous  le 
mien  trop  fonce  ?  Oui,  je  le  trouve  trop  fonce.  Votre  chapeau  est 
beaucoup  plus  clair,  n'est-ce  pas?  Oui,  vous  avez  raison. — Victoria, 
pretez-moi  un  de  vos  chales.  Lequel  voulez-vous?  J'en  veux  un 
inoins  fonce  que  celui-ci;  en  avez-vous  de  moins fonce?  Oui,  j'en 
ai  un  plus  clair,  un  peu  plus  clair  que  le  votre.  Laissez-moi  1'aller 
chercher.  Allons-y  ensemble.  Allez-vous  voyager  le  printemps 
prochain?  Non  pas  le  printemps  prochain,  mais  1'automne  pro- 
chain. 

Have  they  stolen  anything  from  you?  They  have  stolen  all  the 
good  wine  from  me. — Have  they  stolen  anything  from  your  father? 
They  have  stolen  all  his  good  books  from  him. — Dost  thou  steal  any- 
thing? I  steal  nothing. — Hast  thou  ever  stolen  anything?  I  have 
never  stolen  anything. — Have  they  stolen  your  good  clothes  from 
you?  They  have  stolen  them  from  me. — What  have  they  stolen 
from  me  ?  They  have  stolen  all  the  good  books  from  you. — When 
did  they  steal  the  money  from  you?  They  stole  it  from  me  last 
tpring. — Have  your  servants  ever  stolen  anything  from  us  ?  They 
have  never  stolen  anything  from  us. — Does  your  son  get  his  white 
vest  dyed?  He  deep  get  it  dyed. — Does  he  get  it  dyed  red?  He 


THIRTY-NINTH      LESSON.    (1.) 


197 


gets  it  dyed  gray. — What  color  have  your  friends  got  their  coats 
dyed?  They  have  got  them  dyed  green. — What  color  have  the 
Italians  had  their  hats  dyed  ?  They  have  had  them  dyed  light 
brown. — Have  you  a  \vhite  hat?  I  have  a  black  one. — What  hat 
has  the  nobleman  T  He  has  two  hats;  awhile  one  and  a  black 
one. — What  hat  has  the  American'?  lie  has  a  round  black  hat. — 
Have  I  a  white  hat  ?  You  have  several  white  and  black  hats.— 
I  las  your  dyer  already  dyed  your  cloth  1  He  has  dyed  it. — What 
color  has  he  dyed  it  ?  He  has  dyed  it  green. 


THIRTY-NINTH  LESSON,  39th.— Trcntc-ncuvwne  Lcgor*.  39mc. 

VOCABULAIRE.  Ire  Section. 
To  be  ncces?'' 


Falloir,*  3  (vcrbc  irregulier,  deTectif, 
I      ct  unipersonnel),  p.  passe" /aZ/w. 

sit  necessary?  iFaut-il?  No  feut-51  pw t 

Must  I,  thou,  ho,  ihe,  we,  you,  they  ?  ) 
It  is  necessary.  I,  thou,  he,  &c.,  must,  j  II  faut.     ll  ne  faut  pas. 

Ols.  89.     All  verbs  expressing  necessity,  obligation,  or  want,  as,  to  It 
to  want,  to  be  necessary,  must,  are  in  French  generally  rendered  by 
falloir. 

Faut-il  aller  au  marcbe  ? 

II  ne  faut  pas  y  aller. 

Que  faut-ii  faire  pour  appre  -dre  le 

Francois  ? 

II  faut  etudier  beaucoup. 
Que  me  faut-il  faire  ? 

Obs.  90.  Faut  (as  all  unipersonal  verbs)  can  have  no  other  nominative 
but  i7.  Hence,  the  English  subject  of  must,  is  to  be  rendered  in  French  by 
the  indirect  object :  ($  47,)  me,  te,  lui,  nous,  vous,  or  leur. 

You  must  stay  still. 
Whither  must  lie  go  ? 
He  must  go  for  his  book. 
What  must  they  buy  ? 
They  must  buy  some  beef. 
What  must  we  read  ? 


Is  it  necessary  to  go  to  the  market  ? 
It  is  not  necessary  to  go  thither. 
What  must  be  done  to  learn  French  ? 

It  is  necessary  to  study  a  great  deal. 
What  must  /  do  ? 


It  vous  faut  rester  tranquille. 

Oii  lui  faut-il  aller  ? 

II  lui  faut  aller  chercher  son  Jivre. 

Que  leur  faut-il  acheter  ? 

II  leur  faut  acheter  du  bceuf. 

Que  nous  faut-il  lire  ? 

Que  vous  faut-il  ? 


What  must  you  have  ? 

Obs.  91.     The  verb  have,  following  in  English  the  verb  mvst,  is  not  rcn 
•icred  in  French. 


/must  have  some  money. 
Must  you  have  a  sou? 
Must  you  have  a  great  deal  ? 
/must  have  a  great  deal. 


II  me  faut  de  T argent. 
Vous  faut-il  un  sou? 
Vous  en  faut-ii  beaucoup  ? 
II  m'en  faut  beaucoup. 


198  i  HIKTY-NINT1I     LESSON.    (1.) 


I  want  only  one  sou. 
Is  that  all  you  want  ? 
That  is  all  /  want. 


II  ne  me  faut  qu'un  sou. 
t  Ne  vous  faut-il  que  cela  ? 
t  II  ne  me  faut  que  cela. 


Vow  much  must  thou  have  ?  )  Combien  te  faut.u  ? 

n.ow  much  qost  thou  want  ?  ) 


/  want  only  a  franc. 

How  much  must  your  brother  have  ? 

He  wants  only  two  francs. 

Have  you  what  you  want  I 

I  have  what  /want. 

He  has  what  he  wants. 

They  have  what  they  want. 

More. 


II  ne  me  faut  qu'un  franc. 
Combien  faut-il  d  votrefrere? 
II  ne  lui  faut  que  deux  franca. 
Avez-vous  ce  qu'il  vous  faut  ? 
J'ai  ce  qu'il  me  faut. 
II  a  ce  qu'il  lui  faut. 
Us  ortt  ce  qu'il  Icur  faut. 
Davanlage. 


Obs.  92.     This  adverb  lias  the  same  signification  as  plxi,  *,vith  this  differ- 
ence only,  that  it  cannot  precede  a  noun. 


No  more  (of  it,  them). 
Do  you  not  want  more  ? 
/  do  not  want  more. 
He  docs  not  want  more. 


JV'en pas  davantage. 

Ne  vous  en  faut-il  pas  davantage  ? 
II  ne  m'en  faut  fas  davantage. 
II  ne  lui  en  faut  pas  davantage. 


TRENTE-NEUVIEME  TH£ME.  Ire  Sec. 
Cherchez  le  quanticmc  et  mettcz-le  ici. 

Faut-il  envoyer  an.  marche?  Oui,  il  faut  y  envoyer.  Pourquoi 
faut-il  y  envoyer?  II  nous  faut  du  beurre,  du  bonif,  et  du  lait.  Du 
lait?  Le  laitier  n'en  a-t-il  pas  apporte  ce  matin?  Non,  il  nous  a 
oublies,  ou  il  est  malade.  N'importe.  Comme  vous  dites,  il  nous 
faut  du  lait. — Le  cuisinier  a-t-il  assez  d'argent  pour  acheter  tout  ce 
qu'il  nous  faut?  Ne  lui  avez-vous  pas  domic  1111  billet  de  deux  dol- 
lars ?  II  n'a  pas  voulu  le  prendre,  et  je  ne  lui  ai  donne  que  troia 
quarts  de  dollar.  S'il  iva  pas  davantage,  je  crois  que  ce  n'est  pas 
assez.  Alois,  il  faut  lui  en  donner  davantage.  Combien  davantage? 
Un  demi-dollar.  En  avez-vous  un?  Oui,  en  voici  un.  Donnez-le- 
lui.  Qui  fait  ce  bruit-la?  C7est  Francois.  Qu'a-t-il?  Que  lui  faut 
ii?  II  a  mal  li  rccil.  Dites-lui  de  rester  tranquille.  II  ne  peut  pas 
rester  tranquille.  11  lui  faut  rester  tranquille,  et  dormir.  Ce  n'est 
pas  difficile  a  dire ;  mais  c'est  plus  difficile  a  faire. 

Is  it  necessary  to  go  to  the  market? — It  is  not  necessary  to  go 
there. — What  must  they  buy  ?  They  must  buy  some  gloves. — Must 
I  go  for  some  salt?  You  must  go  for  some. — Am  I  to  go  to  the  ball? 
You  must  go. — When  must  I  go?  You  must  go  this  evening.— 
Must  I  go  for  the  carpenter?  You  must  go  for  him. — What  must 
be  done  to  learn  Russian  ?  It  is  necessary  to  study  a  great  deal.— 
Is  it  necessary  to  study  a  great  deal  to  learn  German  ?  It  is.  (Dir.  1.) 
—What  must  I  do  ?  You  must  buy  a  good  book. — What  is  he  to 
do?  He  must  stay  still. — What  are  \ve  to  do'*  You  must  not  slay 


THIRTY-NINTH     LESSCN.    (2.) 


199 


•sul],  but  work. — Must  you  work  much  in  order  to  learn  the  Arabic  1 
[  must  work  much  to  Irani  it. — Why  must  I  go*  to  the  wharf?  You 
must  go  there  to  bring  the  sailors  here. 

Must  I  go  anywhere  ?  Thou  must  go  into  the  garden. — Must  I 
send  for  anything?  Thou  must  send  for  some  wine. — What  must  I 
do?  You  must  write  an  exercise. — To  whom  must  I  write  a  note? 
Vou  must  write  one  to  your  friend. — Do  you  not  want  any  shoes? 
(  do  not  want  any. — Dost  them  want  much  money?  I  want  much 
— How  much  must  thou  have  ?  I  must  have  live  crowns. — How 
much  does  your  brother  want?  He  wants  but  six  sous. — Does  he 
not  want  more?  He  does  not  want  more. — Does  your  friend  want 
more?  He  does  not  want  so  much  as  I. — What  do  you  want?  I 
i:id  clothes. — Have  you  now  what  ;*ou  want?  I  lave 
what  I  wa:it. — Has  v.Kir  father  what  he  wants'!-  He  has  what  he 


VbOABULAiBB.   -Me  Section. 


.:i;cd  to  work  much 

to  learn  Frcm-h  I 

I  have  :  much. 

What  am  I  to  do  ? 
You  must  work. 
Am  I  to  go  thither  ? 
You  may  go  thither. 
To  be  worth — Iri-n  worth. 
How  much  may  that  horse  be  worth  ? 
It  may  be  worth  a  hundred  crowns. 
Are  you  worth  ?        I  am  worth. 
Thou  art  worth.        lie  is  not  worth. 
We  are  worth — they  are  worth. 
How  much  is  that  gun  worth  ? 
It  is  worth  but  one  crown. 
How  much  is  that  worth? 
That  is  not  worth  much. 
That  is  not  worth  anything. 
This  is  worth  more  than  that. 
The  one  is  nci  worth  so  much  as  the 

other. 

To  be  litter. 
Am  I  not  as  good  as  my  brother  ? 

You  are  better  than  he. 

1  am  not  so  good  as  you. 

To  give  back,  to  restore. 

Does  he  restore  you  your  book  ? 

He  does  restore  it  to  me. 

Has  he  given  you  back  your  glcves  ? 

lie  has  given  them  back  to  me. 


Vous  a-t-il  fallu  travailler  bcauro*jj> 

pour  appremlrc  le  Frangais  ? 
II  m'a  fallu  travailler  beaucoup 
Que  dois-je  i 
Vous  devez  travailler. 
Faut-il  y  aller  ? 
Vous  pouvez  y  aller. 
Valoir,*  3— vuJu. 

Combien  ce  clicval  peut-il  valoir? 
II  peut  valoir  cent  ecus. 
Valez-vous  ?  Jc  vaux. 

Tu  vaux.  II  ne  vaut  pas. 

Nous  valons — ils  valent. 
Combien  ce  fusil  vaut-il  ? 
II  ne  vaut  qu'un  ecu. 
Combien  cela  vaut-il  ? 
Cela  ne  vaut  pas  grand*  chose. 
Cela  ne  vaut  rien. 
Celui-ci  vaut  plus  que  cclui-la. 
L'un  ne  vaut  pas  autant  que  rautra, 

Valoir  micux. 

Est-ce  que  je  ne  vaux  pas  autant  qu€ 

mon  frere  ? 

Vous  valez  mieux  que  lui. 
Je  ne  vaux  pas  autant  que  vous. 
Rendre,  4.        Rendu.        Rendez 
Vous  rend-il  votre  livre  ? 
II  me  le  rend. 

Vous  n-t-il  rendu  vos  gants  ? 
II  me  les  a  rendus. 


200 


THIRTY-NINTil     LESSON.    (2.) 


Has  your  brother  already  commenced 
his  exercises  ? 

Not  yet. 

He  has  not  yet  commenced  them. 

The  gift.  The  present. 

Have  you  received  a  present  > 

I  have  received  several. 

Have  you  received  the  books  ? 

I  have  received  them. 

From  whom  ? 

l^rom  whom  have  you  received  pre- 
sents ? 

From  my  friends. 

Whence  ?  Where  from  ? 

Where  do  you  come  from  ? 

I  come  from  the  garden. 

Where  is  he  come  from  ? 

He  is  come  from  the  theatre. 

Where  did  they  come  from  ? 


SOS 


Votre-frere  a-t-il  dcja  commenc^ 

themes  ? 
Pas  encore. 

II  ne  les  a  pas  encore  commences. 
Le  don.  Le  present 

Avez-vous  rec,u  un  present  ? 
J'en  ai  re9u  plusieurs. 
Avez-vous  re9u  les  livree  I 
Je  les  ai  regus. 
De  qui ? 
De  qui  avez-vous  re^udea  pr&snlHi 

De  mes  amis. 

D'ou? 

D'oii  venez-vous  ? 

Je  vicns  du  jardin. 

D'oii  est-il  venu  ? 

II  est  venu  du  theatre. 

D'ou  sont-ils  venus  ? 

TH£ME.  2de  Sec. 
N'oubliez  pas  d'dcrire  la  date  ici  ou  a  la  fin  du  theme. 

Voulez-vous  sortir  avec  moi?  Pourquoi  sortez-vous?  Je  sora 
pour  arlieler  quelque  chose.  Que  vous  faut-il?  II  me  faut  plu- 
Meurs  articles.  Allons — allons — sortez-vous  sans  chapeau?  Je 
rroyais  1'avoir. — Je  1'ai  a  present.  Etes-vous  pret,  vous-meme'i 
( {•  -1 14-)  Je  crois  que  oui.  Non,  non,  attendez,  attendez.  Je.n'ai  pas 
pris  mon  porleieuille.  Ainsi  vous  n7avez  pas  d'argent.  G'est.une 
bonne  maniere  d7aller  acheter.  Chez  qui  allons-nous?  D'arbord 
chez  le  marchand  de  drap.  Vous  faut-il  du  drap  pour  un  habit  ? 
Oui,  il  m'en  faut.  Vous  en  faut-il  du  bleu,  du  vert,  du  noir,  ou  du 
gris?  Je  n'ai  pas  encore  fait  de  choix.  Nous  sommes  pres  du 
magasin.  Entrons.  Bon  jour,  M.  Bertrand.  Messieurs,  j?ai  Phon- 
neur  de  vous  saluer.  Vous  faut-il  quelque  chose  ce  matin?  Dr. 
drap,  du  velours,  du  satin?  Quoi?  ^11  faut  du  drap  a  Monsieur. 
Et  vous,  M.,  ne  vous  faut-il  rien?  'Non  pas  aujourd'hui.  Vous 
savez  qu'avant-hier  j'ai  achete  plusieurs  articles  chez  vous.  C'est 
vrai;  vous  avez  raison. 

What  do  you  want,  Sir?  I  want  some  cloth. — How  much  is  that 
hat  worth  ?  It  is  worth  four  crowns. — Do  you  want  any  stockings  ? 
I  want  some. — How  much  are  those  stockings  worth?  They  are 
worth  two  francs. — Is  that  all  you  want?  That  is  all. — Has  your 
little  boy  received  a  present?  He  has  received  several. — From 
whom  has  he  received  any  ?  He  has  received  some  from  my  father 
and  from  yours. — Have  you  received  any  presents?  I  have  received 


FORTIETH     LESSON.    (1  ) 


201 


"some.— What  piesents  haye  you  received  1  I  have  received  fine 
presents. — How  much  may  that  horse  be  Avorth  ?  It  may  be  worth 
five  hundred  crowns. 

Is  this  book  worth  as  much  as  that?  It  is  worth  more. — Hov; 
much  is  my  gun  worth  ?  It  is  worth  as  much  as  that  of  your  friend, 
— Are  your  horses  worth  as  much  as  those  of  the  English  ?  They 
are  not  worth  so  much. — How  much  is  that  knife  worth?  It  is 
worth  nothing. — Is  your  servant  as  good  as  mine?  He  is  better 
than  yours. — Are  you  as  good  as  your  brother  ?  He  is  better  than 
I. — Art  ihou  as  good  as  thy  friend?  I  am  as  good  as  he. — Are  we 
as  ^ood  as  our  neighbors  ?  We  are  better  than  they. — Is  your  um- 
brella worth  as  much  as  mine  ?  It  is  not  worth  so  much. — Why  is 
it  not  worth  so  much  as  mine  ?  Because  it  is  not  so  fine  as  yours. — 
How  much  is  that  gun  worth?  It  is  not  worth  much. — Do  you  wish 
to  sell  your  horse  ?  I  do  wish  to  sell  it. — How  much  is  it  worth  ?  It 
is  worth  two  hundred  crowns. 


KOKT1KTII   LESSON,  40lh.— Quarantieme  Lcrou, 
VOCABULAIRE.  Ire  Section. 


After  breakfast — dinner — supper.        ! 

After  me,  him,  you,  them,  my  friend. 

After  having  spoken. 

After  having  sold  (selling)  his  horse. 

After  having  been  (being)  there. 

1  put  away  the  knife  after  cutting  (or 

having  cut)  the  beef. 
We  took  tea  after  dining. 

We  ate  a  late  supper 

To  pay.  ($  144—3.) 

To  pay  a  man  for  a  horse. 

To  pay  the  tailor  for  the  coat. 

Do  you  pay  the  shoemaker  for  the 

shoes  ? 

I  pay  him  for  them. 
Does  he  pay  you  for  the  knife  ? 
He  does  pay  me  for  it. 
I  pay  what  I  owe. 
To  ask,  to  ask  of,  to  ask  for.  Ask  for. 


Apres  dejeunc — apres  dine — soupe. 
Apres  moi,  lui,  vous,  cux,  mon  ami. 
t  Apres  avoir  parle.  (Rul.  1,  N.  1.) 
t  Apres  avoir  vendu  son  cheval. 
t  Apres  y  avoir  etc. 
t  J'ai  serrd  le  couteau  aprus  avoii 

coupe  le  boeuf. 
t  Nous  avons  pris  le  the  apres  avoir 

dine. 

t  Nous  avons  soupe  tard. 
Payer,  1,      pay6,      payez  (irnpdra. 
t  Payer  un  cheval  a  un  homme. 
t  Payer  1'habit  au  tailleur. 
t  Payez-vous   les    soulisrs   au   cor- 

donnier*? 
t  Je  les  iui  paie. 
t  Vous  paie-t-il  le  couteau  ? 
t  II  me  le  paie. 
Je  paie  ce  que  je  dois. 
Demander,  1,    demandez,  (impe'ra.) 


Obs.  93.  The  English  verbs :  I o  pay  and  to  ask,  require  the  preposition 
for,  before  the  object.  In  French,  the  object  has  no  preposition,  but  thu 
person  takes  a.  When  the  verb  payer,  however,  hag  no  object,  do  not  ust 
d  before  the  person 


2  02 


FORTIETH    LESSON.    (1.) 


I  have  paid  the  tailor. 

I  have  paid  him. 

Have  you  paid  the  shoemaker  ? 

I  have  paid  him. 

Ask  Lewis  for  some  money. 

I  ask  my  father  for  some  money. 

Ask  him  for  some. 
Do  you  ask  me  for  your  hat  ? 
I  do  ask  you  for  it. 
To  a&k  him  for  it. 
To  ask  him  for  them. 
What  do  you  ask  me  for  ? 
[  ask  you  for  nothing. 
Ask  (of)  John  if  he  has  my  pencil. 
[  did  (ask  him,  or  ask  it  of  him). 
What  did  you  ask  of  the  clerk  ? 

I  asked  him  to  copy  that. 
tie  does  ~~t  ask  you  to  come. 


I  J'ai  paye  le  tailleur. 
Je  1'ai  paye. 

Avez-vous  paye  le  cordomiier  f 
Je  1'ai  paye. 

t  Dcmandez  de  1'argent  a  Louia. 
^  Je   demande   de   1'argent   a    mon 

per3.        Demandez-lui-en. 
t  Me  demandez-vous  votre  chapeau  1 
t  Je  vous  le  demande. 
t  Le  lui  demander. 
t  Les  lui  demander. 
t  Que  me  demandez-vous  ? 
t  Jc  ne  vous  demande  rit-n. 
t  Demandez  a  Jean  s'il  a  mon  crayon, 
t  Je  le  lui  ai  demande. 
t  Qu'avez-vous  demande   au   com 

mis  ? 

t  Je  lui  ai  demande  dc  copier  cela. 
t  II  ne  vous  demande  pas  de  venir. 


QUARANTINE  TnfbiE.  Ire  Sec. 

Qui  est  la?  C'est  le  boulanger. — Lui  avez-vous  demande  troia 
pains?  (loaves?)  Non,  je  ne  lui  en  ai  demande  que  deux,  comme 
a  I'ordinaire.  Demandez-lui-en  un  autre.  Je  vais  le  lui  demander. 
ljuol  pain  faut-il  lui  demander?  Un  rond  ou  un  tortillon?  (rt  twist 
loaf'?)  Demandez-lui  un  tortillon,  et  s'il  n'en  a  pas,  prenez-en  un 
rond. — Faut-il  lui  payer  cet  antre  pain?  Oui,  voiei  cinq  sons. 
payez-le. — Lc  laitier  est-il  venu?  Non,  pas  encore,  il  vient,  a  Fordi- 
naire,  apres  le  boulanger.  S:il  a  assez  de  lait,  achetex-en  pour  3 
BOUS  de  plus  qu'a  1'ordinaire.  II  n'en  a  jamais  assez.  Alors  dites-lui 
d'en  appoi-ter  davantage,  un  peu  plqs,  cet  apres-diner.  Faut-il  le 
paver?  Non,  n'importe.  Le  marchand  me  demande  un  dollar  et 
UP  quart  pour  ce  parapluie,  vaut-il  cela?  Je  crois  qu'il  ne  vaut  pas 
tent. — Qnel  age  as-tu,  mon  enfant?  Je  n'ai  pas  encore  dix  ans. — 
Et  ton  frere,  quel  age  a-t-il?  II  n'en  a  que  huit.  Appronez-vous 
deja  le  Fran^ais  tous  deux  ?  Je  1'apprends  deja,  mais  il  ne  1'apprend 
pas  encore.  Pourquoi  done?  Parce  que  notre  pere  croit  qiv'il  est 
trop  jeune.  N7ecrit-il  pas?  Non,  il  n'ecrit  pas. — Et  toi?  Moi^ 
j'ecris 

Have  you  paid  for  tne  new  gun  ?  I  have  paid  for  it. — Has  your 
ar.cle  paid  for  the  satin  and  the  velvet?  He  has. — Have  I  not  paid 
the  tailor  for  the  clothes?  Yes,  you  have  (paid  him  for  them). — 
VVliat  is  he  asking  for,  then?  He  is  not  asking  you  to  pay  him  for 
the  clothes,  but  for  the  handkerchiefs  and  gloves.  He  is  right.  1 
hive  not  yet  paid  him  for  them. — Have  we  paid  for  our  cloaks'! 


FORTIETH     LESSON.    (2.) 


203 


We  have. — Has  our  cousin  already  paid  for  his  shoes?  He  has  not 
yet  paid  for  them. — Does  my  brother  pay  you  what  he  owes  you  ? 
He  does  pay  it  me. — Do  you  pay  what  you  owe  ?  I  do  pay  what  1 
owe. — Have  you  paid  the  old  baker ?  I  have. — Has  your  uncle 
paid  the  butcher  for  the  beef?  He  has. — Who  has  broken  my 
knife?  I  have  broken  it  after  cutting  the  bread. 

I  his  your  sou  broken  my  pencils?     He  has  broken  them  after 
writing1  his  notes. — Have  you  paid  the  merchant  for  the  wine  after 
broking  it?     I  have  paid  for  it  after  drinking  it. — What  did  you  do 
after  finishing  your  exercises?     I  went  to  my  cousin's,  in  ort'er  to 
conduct  him  to  the  museum. — What  do  you  ask  this  man  for?     I 
Ji.4;  him  for  the  money  he  is  to  pay  me. — What  does  this  boy  ask 
me  for?     He  asks  you  for  some  money. — Do  you  ask  me  for  any- 
thing?    I  ask  you  for  a  crown. — Do  you  ask  me  for  the  bread  1     1 
Jo. — Which  man  do  you  ask  for  money?     I  ask  it  of  the  one  who 
>7ne  some.  (827  N.  1.) — Which  merchant  do  you  ask  forg.oves? 
k  for  some  from  tho<e  who  live  in  William  stnn«t.     What  do  you 
iie  baker  lor !     1  ask  him  for  some  fresh  bread. 

'VocAp.ri.Aiur.     2de  Section. 


t  Me  faut-il  essayer  de  faire  ccla  ? 
Essayez  de  le  faire  et  de  le  bien  fairc 
t  II  vous  faut  essayer  de  mieux  faire 
Tenir,*  2,     tenu,     tc7tez,  (impera.) 
Je  tie?is,  tu  tiens,  il  tient,  on  ticnt. 
Tenez-vous  mon  dictionnaire  ? 
Je  le  tiens.  Je  ne  le  tiens  pas. 

Qui  tient  le  chcval  ?     £.e  valet  le 

tient. 
Ne  les  tenons-nous  pas  ?    Nous  no 

les  tenons  pas,  mais  ils  les  tiennent. 
Us   tiennent  quoi  ?      Les  eVentaile 

des  dames. 

("Ms.  Jit.     /  say  I   here!  stop!   wait!  there!  or  any  interjection  used  to 
tract  the  attention  of  the  person  one  speaks  to,  is  ...  Tenez. 

See !  here !  see  here !  Is  it  what  you  [  Tenez  !    Est-ce  ce  que  vous  cher- 

chez  ? 
Non,  je  cherche  mon  de.     Tenoz  ! 

Est-ce  cela  ?     Non,  mais  tenet,  le 

voila. 

Mon  parent.     Tons  nies  parents. 
Mcs  parents,  (mean  all  my  relation* 

including  father  and  mother.) 


I  try  to  do  that? 

TV  to  do  it  and  to  do  it  well. 
You  must  try  to  do  better. 
To  hold,     held,     hold.  (243.) 
I  hold,  thou  boldest,  he  holds,  (one.) 

i  hold  my  dictionary? 
I  do.  I  do  not. 

Who   h.)!,!s  the    horse  ?     The  valet 

wot  hold  them  ?     We  do  not, 
but  they  do. 
They  hold  what?     The  ladies'  fans. 


seek? 
No,   I  am  looking  for  my  thimble. 

Here !    Is  that  it  ?     No,  but  there. 

that  ig  it. 

My  relation.     All  my  relations. 
My  parents,  (mean  o.xrlu.-ivoly  my 

father  and  mother.] 
A.  brother  of  mine.  ($107.) 
A,  cousin  of  yo lira. 


t  Un  de  mes  freres. 
t  Un  de  vos  cousins. 


20-1 


FORTIETH     1.K890N.    (2.) 


A.  relation  oflns,  (or  hers.) 

A  friend  oi'ours. 

A  neighbor  of  theirs. 

He  tries  to  see  you. 

Does  he  try  to  see  me  ? 

He  tries  to  see  an  uncle  of  his. 

To  try  to 

Tu  inquire  after  some  one. 

After  r/hom  do  you  inquire  ? 

I  inquire  after  a  friend  of  mine. 

They  inquire  after  you. 

I)o  they  inquire  after  me  ? 

Proper  1 1/. 

You  write  properly. 

They  do  their  duty  properly. 

Try  to  do  your  task  or  duly. 

We  have  done  it  properly.  ($  170.) 

A  k'luss  of  wine. 

A  ' 


t  Un  de  sea  pr.rentB. 
t  Un  de  nos  amiH. 
t  Un  de  leurs  voisins. 
II  cherche  a  vous  voii. 
Cherche-t-il  a  me  voir 't 
11  cherche  a  voir  un  de  fees  o: 
ChercJter  d  . . . . 
t  Demander  quelqu'un. 
f  Qui  demandez-vous  ? 
t  Je  demunde  un  de  mes  amis. 
I  t  On  vcus  demande. 
t  Me  demande-t-on  ? 
Comme  ilfaut. 
Vous  ecrivez  comme  il  faut. 
lls  font  leur  devoir  comme  il  laiit. 
Chcrchez  a  faire  votre  devoir. 
Nous  1'avons  fait  comme  il  faut 
I'n  vi  ITC  de  vin. 
Un  morccau  de  pain. 

QuAK.\vm;.Mi.  iMe  Sec. 

Bon  jour,  Monsieur.  Comment  ai-jo  prononce  cela  '  Vims  n'g  tojt 
pas  prononce:  bon,  comme  il  faut.  I'nmiiiLMit  faut-il  le  prononcer  i 
Comme  ceci:  frcw, sans  continuer  le  son  de  I'n,  (sound  of  the  n.)  Jo 
vais  .  ;>rononcer comme  il  faut. — Le  sondeTn  Fra: 

ost  difficile,  n?est-ce  pas?  Non,  ce  son-la  n'est  pas  ties-ditlicile. 
Comme  je  vous  1'ai  dit:  il  ne  faut  pas  le  continuer  long-temps. 
Comment  est-ce  que  je  le  prononce  a  present  ?  bon :  Vous  le  pro- 
noncez  mieux,  presque  comme  il  faut. — Comment  mon  cousin  a-t-il 
ecrit  son  theme  ?  Jl  Pa  ecrit  et  traduit  comme  il  faut. — Mes  enfanta 
>nt  bien  fait  leurs  devoirs,  j'espere?  Oui,  ils  les  ont  faits  comme 
J  faut. — Ce  general  ne  fait-il  pas  son  devoir?  Si  fait,  il  le  fait  ton- 
jours  comme  il  faut,  et  il  ne  peut  pas  faire  davantage. — Ces  deux 
jeunes  soldats  font  leur  devoir,  n'est-ce  pas?  lls  le  font  aussi  bien 
qu'ils  le  peuvent. — Faites  toujours  votre  devoir.  Je  le  fais  aussi  bien 
que  je  peux,  c?est-a-dire,  j'essaie. 

At -whose  house  do  you  dine  to-day?  My  cousin  and  I  (we)  dims 
at  the  house  of  a  friend  of  mine,  in  Walnut  street. — Wi;li  whom 
did  you  take  tea  yesterday,  that  is  to  say,  the  day  before  yesterday  1 
Must  you  know  it  ?  If  you  will  tell  me.  I  will  (N.  191)  tell  you.  1 
took  ea  at  the  house  of  a  relation  of  yours.  The  one  who  lias  so 
much  merit.  That  very  one,  (celui-la  mime  ou  lui-meme.) — Where 
are  you  going?  I  am  going  to  the  house  of  a  relation  of  mine, 
in  order  to  breakfast  with  him. — Art  thou  willing  to  hold  my 
gloves?  I  am  willing  to  hold  them. — Who  holds  ir.y  hat?  YUUJ 


FORTIETH     LESSON.    (2.)  205 

eon  holds  it.-  -Dost  thou  hold  my  stick?     I  do.  —  Do  you  held  any- 

thing?    See,  I  hold  your  gun.  —  Who  has  held  my  book?     YOI.I 

servant  has.  —  Will  you  try  to  speak  well?     I  will  try.  —  Has  your 

little  brother  ever  tried  to  do  exercises?     He  has  tried.  —  Have  you 

tried  to  make  a  hat  ?    I  have  never  tried  to  make  one.  —  Whom 

are  you  looking  for?     I  am  looking-for  the  man  who  has  sold  a 

horse  to  me.  —  Is  your  relation  looking  for  any  one?     Ke  is  looking 

fo:  a.  friend  of  looking  for  any  one  ?     We  are  looking 

fc:  a  neighbor  of  our?.  —  Whom  dost  thou  look  for?     I  look  fora 

—  Are  you  looking  for  a  servant  of  mine  ?     Nc,  I  am 

looking  for  one  of  mine.  —  Have  you  tried  to  speak  Spanish  to  your 

!e  ?     I  have  tried  to  speak  Italian  to  him.  —  Have  you  tried  to  see 

njy  father  ?     I  have  tried  to  see  him.  —  lias  he  received  you?     He 

h:i-  no:.—  !!;.•-  ::••:.  >ur  brothers  ?     He  has.—  have  you  beer 

i-.iion?     I  haVe  not. 

What  did  _  your  exercises?     I  wrote  my  note 

hem.  —  After  whom  do  you  inquire?     I  inquire  after 

the  tailor.  —  hues  this  sailor  inquire  after  any  one?     He  inquire:! 

you)    They  do  in  quire  after  me.  — 
They  do  not  inquire  after  you,  but  after 

a  frir  <>u  inquire  after  the  physician  ?     I  do  inquire 

after  him  and  after  the  lawyer.  —  What  does  your  little  brother  ask 
for?    lie;  mall  piece  of  bread.  —  Has  he  not  yet  breakfasted? 

lie  1  !.  but  he  is  still  hungry.  —  What  does  your  uncle 

ior  a  glass  of  wine.  —  Has  he  not  already  drunk  ? 
y  drunk,  but  he  is  still  thirsty.    Then  give  him  a  glass 
of  \^  ive  a  piece  of  old  bread  or  of  fresh  bread  to  my 

little  brother  ?  Give  him  neither  a  piece  of  old  bread  nor  of  fresh 
bread  ;  but  give  him  a  small  piece  of  the  cake  which  the  cook  made 
everr.ng.  —  7f  he  wants  a  glass  of  new  milk,  can  I  give  him  one  ? 
No,  do  not  give  him  a  glass  of  milk  so  soon  after  breakfast.  —  What 
has  the  clerk  got  there  ?  He  has  his  thread  gloves.  —  Has  he  had  them 
dyed  ?  He  has.  —  How  has  he  had  them  dyed  ?  He  had  them  dyed 
yellow.  Light  or  dark?  Neither  light  nor  dark.  —  Did  you  ask  the 
butcher  for  beef  or  mutton  ?  I  asked  him  for  beef.  I  do  not  like 
mutton.  (Ols.  53.) 


K  POUR  LA  40ME  LECOX. 
Les  chevaux  ivont-ils  pas  assez  de  foin?  Si  fait,  ils  en  ont 
assez,  mais  nos  petits  oiseaux  n'ont  pas  assez  de  grain.  —  N'avons- 
aous  ni  poivre.  ni  vinaigre7  Nous  avons  du  poivre,  mais  nous 
n'avor.s  pas  do  vinaigre.  Le  jeune  etranger  n'a-t-il  pa&  beau- 
oi-np  d  'argent  ?  Si  fait,  il  en  a  beaucoup;  mais  le  commis  du  grand 


E06  FORTIETH     LESSON.    (2.) 

marchaud  n'en  a  pas  beaucoup.  N'avons-nous  pas  de  lait?  Si  fait, 
AOUS  en  avons  un  peu.  En  avons-nous  assez?  Nous  n'en  avons 
guere,  mais  assez»— Le  garden  du  cuisinier  a-t-il  le  cordon  de  fil  de 
notre  vieux  voisin ?  Non,  il  ne  l;a  pas.  Que  n'a-t-il  pas?  II  n'a 
pas  le  cordon  de  fil  de  notre  vieux  voisin. — Le  petit  garcon  ira-t-il 
pas  les  bas  de  coton  ?  Quels  bas  de  coton  ?  Ceux  du  jeune  avoeat. 
II  ne  les  a  pas. — Avez-vous  du  fromage  de  1'epicier?  J'en  ai  im 
pcu.  En  avez-vous  assez?  Je  n'en  ai  pas  assez. — Avez-vous  peur 
de  ce  jeune  homme-la?  Non,  je  n'en  ai  pas  peur. — Qui  a  soif? 
Nous  avons  soif,  et  nous  avons  sommeil. — Le  menuisier  a-t-il  ^-eur 
duchien?  Non,  le  chien  a  peur  du  menuisier. — N'avons-nous  pa* 
Je  parapluie  de  coton  du  chapelier?  Non,  nous  ne  Favons  pas.  mais 
nous  avons  les  gants  de  fil  de  son  ami. 

Combien  de  bcoufs  avons-nous?  Nous  en  avons  trois.  Combieu 
en  a-t-il?  11  n'en  a  qu'un.  Combten  les  Alleraands  en  ont-ils,  ou, 
Les  Allemands,  combien  en  ont-ils?  Us  en  ont  cinq.  N'en  ont-ils 
pas  six?  Non,  ils  n'en  ont  que  cinq. — Qui  :i  du  courage?  N 
jeune  commis  en  a.  Kn  a-t-il  trop  ?  Non,  il  n'en  a  pas  trop,  maig 
assez. — Ce  petit  garron-la.  a-t-il  du  cfDiir?  11  n'en  a  guere. — Les 
peinlres  ont-ils  beaucoup  d'argent?  Non,  ils  n'en  ont  gucre.  En 
avex  ncoup  ?  Je  n\*n  ai  qu'un  JUMI.  Qui  en  a  beaucoup  ? 

Nous  rn  avons  beaucoup. — Qn" avons-nous?  Nous  avons  beaucoap 
d'or  i-  It  Kn  avons-nous  trop?  Nous  n'en  avons  pas  trop, 

mais  as  H^/..— l.«v-  dumestiques  de  1'epicier  corabien  do  verres  ont- 
ils?  Us  en  ont  sept  ou  Imit.  N;en  ont-ils  pas  neuf?  Si  fait,  il- 
ont  neuf.  N'en  ont-ils  pas  dix  ?  Ils  n'en  ont  que  neuf.  N'en  ont- 
ils  pas  assez  ?  Parclonnez-moi,  ils  en  ont  assez. — Combien  d'yeux 
i-et  hommc-ci  a-t-il  ?  11  en  a  deux.  Et  celui-la,  combien  en  a-t-ii  ? 
11  n'en  a  qu'un. — Nravez-vous  qu'un  oiseau  ?  Pardonnez-inoi,  j'en 
ai  deux. — Ces  garcons  ont-ils  beaucoup  de  batons  ?  Quels  garcons  2 
x-ci  ou  ceux-la?  Ni  ceux-ci  ni  ceux-la,  mais  ceux  du  menui- 
sier.  Ils  r.'en  ont  pas  beaucoup. 

Avez-vous  le  dernier  papier?  Non,  je  ne  Tai  pas. — Avez-voua 
un  papier  ?  Non,  je  n'en  ai  pas. — Le  ministre  a-t-il  le  journal  de 
hier?  II  en  a  un. — Volre  frere  a-t-il  le  parapluie  du  president? 
Non,  mais  il  a  le  baton  du  gouverneur,  (governor.') — Qui  a  le  cheval 
du  gouverneur  ?  Notre  vieux  matelot  1'a.  A-t-il  les  gants  du  pre- 
sident ?  Non.  le  president  lui-meme  les  a. — Le  lieutenant-gouver- 
neur  a-t-il  les  billets  du  prefet?  11  ne  les  a  pas.  II  n'a  pas  quoit 
II  n'a  pas  les  billets  du  prelct.  Je  les  ai. — Combien  de  francs  le 
president  du  Senat  a-t-il?  II  n'en  a  pas:  mais  il  a  des  dollars 
Combien  en  a-t-il  ?  II  en  a  beaucoup.  En  a-t-il  trop  ?  11  n'en  a 
pas  trop.  En  avoi?s-nous  assez?  Nous  n'en  avons  pas  assez.  Lee 


FORTY-FIRST     LESSON.    (1.) 


r 

20T 


Aineriuains  n'en  ont-iis  !     Us  n'en  ont  pas  t;op.    Qoi  en  a 

trop  ?  Personne  if  en  a  trop. — Le  president  et  le  vice -president  out- 
ils  beaucoup  d'amis  ?  Us  en  ont  beaucoup:  mais  ie  prefet'ifen  a 
guere.  N:en  avons-nnns  pas  bear.coup  >  <«£i  fait,  nous  en  avon« 
beaucoup.  Qui  en  a  pen  ?  Lo  l\i:.-.-e  en  a  , 

, -vons  quelques  sous?      Oui,  j'en    ai   quelques   nns. — Ai-je 
quel  .'    Vou.s  n'en  avex  ]  VOUfl  avex  des  francs,  et 

des  billets  de  banque.  Combien  en  ai-je  /  Vons  en  avex  dix.—  N'ai- 
je  pas  deux  billets  de  dix  dollars?  Non,  vous  n'en  avex  qu'un, 
mais  vons  avex  trois  billets  de  cinq  dollars. — Jean  a  le  premier 
volume  de  Fouvrage  de  Thiers,  n'a-t-il  pas  le  second?  Non.  il  rfa 
que  le  premier.  L'Anierieain  ifa-t-il  pas  le  dernier  vclume  ?  Non, 
sonne  ne  1'a. — Quelipf  nn  a  le  journal 

du  cinq  d  <-e  pas?     Le  Kusse  a  celni  dn  six,  du 

.  etdu  hni'  li  du  cinq. — Quels  j^apiers  le  jeune 

•/  j)as. — Les  Allemands 

n'ont-ils  pas  froid  ?     Non,  i!  , — Le  menuisier  et 

1'epicier  if ont-ils  pas  tort?     Non,  ils  ont  raison. — Notre  cordonnier 

n'a-t-il  p:i  -  i(3  cnir  dn  ^ouverneur?     II  a  ceux  du  lion- 

icur. — J'ai  li«  ilonxieme  exercice,  mon  ami  Charles  a 

ocats  ont  le  quatorxieme,  qui  a  le  quinxiemel 

n'a  le  (niinxieme,  mais  nous  avons  le  seixierne  et  le  dix- 

septieme. — Quel  e;ihier  avex-vous?     J'ai  le  mien. — Le  Ills  de  1'ami 

il  iei?     Non,  il  est  a  Bostor.. 


H)!;  'X,  41.*t.— 

Vor 

The  one  v>'io,       lie  who,       him  who. 
vhA  Tl"'y  who. 

perceived,     perceive. 

i   perceive   the   scholar   who 

::03  ? 

I  do  perceive  the  one  who  is  coming. 
The  one  on  ...    Those  in  .  . .  ($  87.) 

I  do  not  like  the  one  (those)  coming. 

Does  youf  unc.c  perceive  the  soldiers 
who  are  goinjr  to  the  covered  bridge  ? 
He  does  not  pcrrrive  those  who  .<:;"• 
Whom  do  the  children  prrrcivo? 
They  ucrccive  r.obody. 


Quanintc  ct  inucmc  Lc<-o;i:  \\n\e. 
Ire  Section. 
r.lviqui.  ($40.) 
Ceux  (jui. 

Apercevoir,  aper$u,  aperccvcz,  (conjc 
gue  commc  rccevoir.  (241,  243,  31  .) 
Apercevez-vous  1'ecolier  qui  vient  ? 

J'apercois  celui   qui  vient. 

Celui  qui  est  sur  . .  .     Ceux  qui  eont 

dans . . . 
Je  n'aime  pas  celui  qui  vient,  ecu* 

qui  viennent. 
Votre  oncle  aper^oit-il  les  soldatsqoi 

vont  au  pont  convert  ? 
II  n'aper^oit  pas  ceux  qui  y  vont. 
Qui  Irs  rnfaiiis  a/»  m>i'iv7t'-i7«  9 
Us  n'apercoivent  pcrsonne. 


203 


FORTY-FIRST     LESSON.    (1.) 


How  was  the  weather  yesterday  ?       )  ,.  ^     , 

,,7,    4     .    ,     ,.  J      ,    >  T  Quel  temps  a-t-il  fait  hier  ? 

What  kind  ot  weather  was  it  yest.  ?    $ 


What  weather  had  we  yesterday  ? 
Was  it  fine  weather  yesterday  * 
It  was  bad  weather  yesterday. 
It  is  fine  weather  this  morning. 
It  is  neither  cold  nor  warm,  but  plea- 
sant and  dry. 

Dark,  obscure.  Clear,  light. 

Dusky,  gloomy.     Dry.    Wet,  dump. 
Is  the  weather  damp  ? 
It  is  not  damp,  but  dry. 
The  weather  is  too  dry  to  be  pleasant. 
The  moonlight,  moonshine.      The  sun. 
Is  it  moonlight  ?  It  is. 

Have  we  too  much  sun  ?         Is  it  too 

sunny  ? 

It  is  too  sunny.  It  is  not. 

This  syrup.  His  vinegar  syrup. 

Have  you  tasted  this  vinegar  syrup  ? 
I  hrivn.  I  have  not. 

How  do  you  like  it  ? 


Quel  temps  avons-rious  cu  hier  f 
t  A-t-il  fait  beau  temps  hier  ? 
t  II  a  fait  mauvais  temps  hier. 
t  II  fait  beau  temps  ce  matin. 
t  II  ne  fait  ni  chaud  ni  froid,  mais 

ogreable  et  sec. 
Obscur.  Clair. 

Sombre.  Sec.          Ilumide. 

t  Fait-il  humide  ? 
t  II  ne  fait  pas  humide,  mm> 
t  II  fait  trop  sec  pour  etre  agrcnble. 
t  Le  clair  dc  June.  •!<  if. 

t  Fait-il  clair  de  lime  ?      II  1; 

de  lune. 
t  Fait-il  trop  de  solcii  ? 

t  II  en  fait  trop.  II  if  en  fait  j-  . 
Ce  strop.     Son  strop  <!< 
Avcz-vous  goute  ce  t?irop  <Je  vi 
Jc  I'ai  goute.     Je  ne  1'ai  pa- 
t  Comment  le  trot: 


0/-.S-.  '.).').     Tin*  Frrridi  seldom  use  aimer  in  similar  cases. 


What  do  you  think  of  it  ? 
I  like  it  pretty  well. 

I  do  not  like  it  at  all. 

To  l«irn  ly  Jmirt.     Learn  id  by  heart. 

Learn  every  day  something  by  heart. 

I  learn  by  heart. 

What  have  you  learned  by  heart  ? 

We  learned  our  exsrcises. 

Who  likes  to  learn  by  heart  ? 

This  fish.  Do  you  like  fish  ?  (06s.  53.) 


t  Qu'en  pensez-vous? 

t  Je  le  trouve  assez  bon.     Je  i'aimc 

assez. 

t  Je  ne  le  trouve  pas  bon  du  tout. 
A}>pn  ndrcjKircccur.  Appris  pa 
Apprenez  tousles  jours  quelquechoso 

par  oceur.       J'apprends  par  coeur 
Qu'avez-vous  appris  par  cceur  ? 
Nous  avons  appris  nos  themes  par 

coeur. 

Qui  aime  a  apprendre  par  coeur  ? 
Ce  poisson.  Aimez-vous  le  poisson  I 

ET  UNI£ME  TufhiE.  Ire  Sec. 

Comment  est  le  temps  aujourd'hui?  II  fait  tres-beau  temps.— 
A-t-il  fait  beau  hier?  11  a  fait  mauvais  hier.  Quel  temps  a-t-il  fa? 
ce  matin  ?  11  a  fait  mauvais,  mais  a  present  il  fait  agreable.  Fait-il 
chaud?  II  fait  tres-chaud.  Le  thermometre  est  a  81  degres  et  £. 
II  ne  fait  pas  froid,  alors.  Non,  en  verite,  il  ne  fait  pas  froid,  maia 
tres-chaud,  au  contraire. — Avez-vous  deja  ete  au  nouveau  jardin  de 

M ?     Non,  je  n'y  ai  pas  encore  ete.     Pourquoi  done?     Parce 

que  nous  avons  eu  mauvais  temps.     Avez-vous  peur  du  mauvaih 
temps?     Je  n'en  ai  pas  peur  quand  je  suis  oblige  de  sorlir :  mais  ie 


FORTY-FIRST     LKSSON.    (2.)  209 

if  aim  d  pas  a  sortir  quand  il  pleut.  Mais  il  n  a  pas  fait  de  pluie 
depuis  plusieurs  jours.  Yous  avez  oublie;  car,  il  en  a  fait  hier, 
avar.t-hier,  et  le  jour  avant.  C'est-a-dire  :  jendi,  mercredi,  et  mardi. 
Oui,  on. 

.0  the  man  who  is  coming?    I  do  not  perceive  him. 

— Do  yo  -klier's  children?    I  do  perceive  them. — Do 

yon  perceive  the  men  who  are  going  into  the  garden  ?    I  do  not  per- 

ho  are  going  into  the  garden,  but  those  who  are  going 

to  the  market. — Docs  your  brother  perceive  the  man  who  has  lent 

lie  does  not  perceive  the  one  who  has  lent  him,  but 

one  to  whom  he  has  lent  some. — Dost  thou  see  the  children  who 

are  studying  ?     1  do  not  see  those  who  are  studying,  but  those  who 

thou  perceive  anything?     I  perceive  nothing. — 

Havv-  you   ,  <  warehouses?     1  have  perceived 

them. — Where  ha.  ;1  them?     I  have  perceived  them 

I'll  tli  ••  >;ul. 

A  lie.  B  poulet  ou  de  ce  poisson  ?     De  ce  poulet, 

•'il  Tops  plait.     Je  n'ai:.  .-son.     Qucl  rnorceau  voulez- 

•••lie.    Donnez-moi  le  premier  venu.    N'avez-vous  paa 

;>as  de  choix.   Tenez,  voici  un  bon  morceau ; 

du  i  L'aimez-vooB  anBsi  1    Je  crois  qne  oui,  car,  je 

mai  t;  j'aime  tout.     Voulez-vous  un  verre  de  vin  ou  un 

verre  de  sirop?  Donnez-moi  un  verre  de  sirop;  mais  n'y  mettez 
pas  beaucoup  de  sirop.  Mettez-1'y  vous-meme.  Donnez-le-moi 
Je  vais  y  en  mettre  un  peu.  Tenez,  voila  le  verre.  Mettez-y  le 
sirop  qifil  vous  fa  -t  ce  petit  Monsieur?  C'est  mon  plua 

jenne  fir  !     Est-ce  un  bon  enfant?     Ktndie-t-ilcommo 

il  faut?     11  f,i  Men  son  devoir.     Aime-t-il  a  apprendre  par 

co?ur?  Oui,  il  apprend  tous  les  jours  quelque  chose  par  cccur.  Lea 
ecoliers  n'aiment-ils  pas  gcneralcment  (generally)  a  apprendre  pai 
crcur?  11  y  en  a  qui  aiment  a  le  faire;  mais  beaucoup  aiment  a 
etudier,  mais  non  pas  a  apprendre  par  cocur. 

Do  you  intend  going  to  see  the  new  vessel  of  Mr.  Tessier?  J 
do. — When?  to-morrow,  or  the  day  after?  The  day  after  to-mor- 
row, if  the  weather  is  fine.  Is  it  light  enough  in  your  counting- 
house  ?  It  i<  not  liirht  in  it. — Do  you  wish  to  work  in  mine?  I  do 
wish  to  work  in  it. — Is  it  light  there  ?  It  is  very  light  there. — Why 
cannot  your  brother  work  in  his  warehouse?  He  cannot  we rk  there, 
u  is  (i7  y  fait)  too  dark. — Where  is  it  too  dark?  In  hib 
wa:.  Is  it  light  in  that  hole  ?  It  is  dark  there. — Is  the  w?.>a- 

ther  dry?     It  is  very  dry. — Is  it  damp 7     It  is  not  damp.     It  : 
dry. — Is  it  moonlight?     It  is  not  moonlight;  it  is  very  damp- 


810 


FOU  TV- FIRST    LESSON.    (2.) 


what  docs  youi  uncle  speak?  He  speaks  of  the  fine  weather. — Of 
•A'hat  do  those  men  speak  ?  They  speak  of  lair  and  bad  weather.— 
Have  you  tasted  that  wine  ?  I  have  tasted  it. — How  do  you  like  it  ? 
I  like  it  well. — How  does  your  cousin  like  that  cider?  He  does  not 
like  it. — Which  wine  do  you  wish  to  taste  ?  I  wish  to  taste  that 
which  you  have  tasted. — Will  yori  taste  this  tobacco  ?  I  have  tasted 
it  already. — How  do  you  like  it  ?  I  like  it  well. — Why  do  you  MCA 
taste  that  cider  ?  Because  I  am  not  thirsty. — Why  does  your  friend 
not  taste  this  beef?  Because  he  is  not  hungry. 

VOCABULAIRE.    2dc  Section. 


The  pupil.  Once  a  day. 

Thrice,  or  three  times  a  month. 
•So  much  a  year.      So  much  a  head. 

So  much  a  soldier.  Six  times  a  year. 

Early  in  the  morning. 

We  go  out  early  in  the  morning. 

When  did  your  father  go  out  ? 
To  vpcak  of  some  owe  or  something. 

Of  whom  do  you  speak  ? 

We   speak   of  the   man  whom  you 

know. 

Of  what  are  they  speaking  ? 
Tlu-y  arc  speaking  of  the  wcatii 
To  be  pleased,  content,  satisfied  with. 


LYICve.  t  Une  fois  par  jour, 

t  Trois  fois  par  mois. 
tTantjwran.        tTant  par  tcrc. 
(La  ttte,l\\c  head,  est  un  noni  fern.'i 
Taut  par  soldat.      Six  fois  par  an. 
Le  matin  de  Lonne  heure. 
Nous    sortons   le   matin  dc    bonno 

heure. 

Quand  votre  pere  est-il  sorti  I 
Parlcr  de  quelqu'un  ou  de  guclqi:t 

chose. 

De  qui  parlez-vous  ? 
Nous  parlous  Jc  rhommo  r.ue  voiis 

connaisscz. 
De  quoi  parlcnt-ils? 
Us  parlent  du  ten 
Eire  content  de . . . . 


Obs.  06.   To  be  pleased,  cannot  be  translated  literally  in  French  ;  because 
ih  )  verb  p"aire  is  intransitive,  and  cannot  be  used  in  the  passive  form. 


Are  you  satisfied  wtth  this  man  ? 

J  am  pleased  with  him. 

Are  you  pleased  with  your  new  coat  ? 

I  am  pleased  with  it. 

What  are  you  pleased  with  ? 

Displeased,  discontented. 

I  am  displeased  with  him,  or  it. 

They  speak  of  your  friend. 

IX)  they  ?  What  do  they  say  of  him  ? 

Are  they  speaking  of  your  book  ? 

They  are.         They  arc  not. 

Not.  $171,  N.  ?/ 

The  teacher  and  hi.*  pupil  have  not 

gone  out. 
B«»  Miisfied  with  what  you  have. 


Etes-vous  content  dc  cet  homme-ci  ? 

J'en  suis  content. 

Etes-vous   content   dc  votrc    habil 

neuf? 

J'c;i  suis  content. 
De  quoi  etes-vous  content  ? 
Mccontent. 
Von  suis  mecontent. 
On  parle  de  votre  ami. 
En  parle-t-on  ?         Qu'en  dit- jn  t 
Parle-t-on  de  votre  livre  ? 
On  en  parle.       On  n'en  parle  point 
Ne  ....  point   (nearly  synonymir.ji 

to  ...  pas.) 
Le  mait re  et  son  elcve  ne  scut  poin. 

sortis. 
Soyez  content  de  cc  que  voua  avez. 


FORTY-FIRST     LESSON.    (2.) 


I  am  not  dissatisfied  with  it. 

Do    they   speak    of    the    cholera? 

They  do. 

What  do  they  talk  of?  (or  about  ?) 
Nothing  is  spoken  of. 
IVatcr.        The  water.        Some  w:aJrr. 
Wine  and  water.    Syrup  and  water. 


A  glasa  (or  drink)  of  water. 
A  drink  of  cider. 
A  glass  of  wine  and  v. 
ral  water. 


)f  niiti 


Je  n'en  suis  point  mecontent. 
Parle-t-on  du  cholera  ! 

On  en  parle. 
De  quoi  parle-t-on  I 
On  ne  parle  de  rien. 
Eau,  (feminin.)      L'cau.      De  V  tau. 
Du  vin  et  de  1'eau.      Du  sirop  et  do 

1'eau. 

ire  d'cau. 
Un  verre  de  cidrc. 
Un   verre   do    vin  et   d'enu — d'eaa 

inincrale. 


QUARANTE    ET    UN1EMK    Tllfi.ME.    2de  See. 

Ah !  vous  avez  un  morceau  de  pain  et  de  beurre.     Alle/-vciis  le 
'nanger,  ou  le  dormer  a  quelqu'un?     Je  vais  le  manger,  car  j'a; 
grand:faim. — Comment !     Vous  avez  dcja  faim  ?     11  n'est  pas  tara 
•  •ndant.     Combien  de  fois  mangez-vpus  par  jour?     Nous  man- 
is  quatre  fois. — Combien  de  fois  vos  enfarits  boivent-ils  par  jour'? 
11s  boivent  plusieurs  fois. — Buvez-vous  aussi  souvent  qu'eux?     Je 
plus  souvent. — Combien  de  fois  par  mois  allez-vous  au  theatre  ? 
y  vais  qu'une  fois  par  mois. — I-es  eleves  y  vont-ils?     Us  n'y 
vont  point. — De  quoi  parlent-ils?    Us  parlent  de  leurs  lemons.    Font- 
ils  irois  themes  par  jour?     Us  n'en  font  que  deux,  mais  ils  les  font 
coin  me  il  faut. — Avez-vous  pu  lire  le  billet  qu'on  vous  a  ecrit?     Je 
n'ai  pas  pu  le  lire  tout.     Est-ce  qu'il  est  mal  ecrit?     Oui,  je  vous 
re;  voyez,  vous-meme.    C'est  vrai.    Soyez  le  bien  venii,  M. — 
Allons  prendre  un  verre  d't-au  minerale.   J'y  mets  toujours  du  sirop 
et  vous  ?     Moi;  non. 

Plow  many  times  a  year  does  your  cousin  go  to  the  ball  ?  Ho 
goes  two  or  three  times  during  the  winter. — Do  you  go  there  as 
often  as  he  ?  I  am  not  used  to  go. — How  oftei  does  your  cook 
go  to  market?  He  goes  generally  once  a  day;  sometimes  twice. 
— Then  he  goes  every  day,  except  (excepte)  Sunday;  does  he 
not?  Yes,  he  doe?. — Whom  are  you  inquiring  for?  I  inquire 
for  your  English  cousin.  Is  he  at  home?  No,  he  is  not. — Do 
you  like  a  large  hat  ?  I  do  not  like  a  large  hat,  but  a  large 
umbrella, — What  do  you  like  to  do?  1  like  to  write. — Do  you  like 
to  see  these  little  boys?  I  like  to  see  them. — Do  you  like  mineral 
watei,  with  syrup?  I  do. — Does  your  brother  like  cider?  Ho  does, 
— What  do  the  soldiers  like?  They  like  wine. — Dost  thou  like  tea 
nr  coffee?  I  like  both. — Do  these  children  like  to  study?  They 
like  to  study  and  to  play.— Do  you  like  to  read  and  tc  write?  I  li^- 
to  read  and  to  write.  How  many  times  a  day  do  you  go  out?  I  go 


£12 


FORTY-SECOND     AESSON.    (1.) 


out  as  often  as  I  need  to  go  out. — Do  you  often  go  to  my  uncle's?  1 
go  there  six  times  a  year. — Do  you  understand  the  man  who  is 
speaking  to  you  ?  I  do  not. — Why  do  you  not?  Because  he  speaks 
too  badly. — Does  this  man  know  French?  He  knows  it,  but  I  dc 
not  know  it. — Why  do  yc«u  not  learn  it l  1  have  no  time  to  learn  it 
Of  whom  have  they  (on)  spoken?  They  have  spoken  of  your 
friend. — Have  they  not  spoken  of  the  physicians?  They  have  not 
spoken  of  them. — Do  they  not  speak  of  the  man  of  whom  we  have 
spoken  ?  They  do  speak  of  him. — Have  they  spoken  of  the  r.c bio- 
men  ?  They  have  spoken  of  them. — Have  they  spoken  of  those  of 
whom  we  speak?  They  have  not  spoken  of  those  of  whom  wo 
speak,  but  they  have  spoken  of  others. — Have  they  spoken  of  our 
children  or  of  those  of  our  neighbors?  They  have  spoken  neither 
of  ours  nor  of  those  of  our  neighbors. — Of  which  children  have  they 
spoken?  They  have  spoken  of  our  masters. — Do  they  speak  of 
my  work  ?  They  do  speak  of  it. — Are  you  satisfied  with  your 
pupils?  I  am  satisfied  with  them. — How  does  my  brother  study? 
lie  studies  well. — How  many  exercises  have  you  studied?  I  have 
already  studied  forty-one. — Is  your  master  satisfied  with  his  scholar? 
He  is  satisfied  with  him,  and  with  the  presents  he  has  received. 


FORTY-SECOND  LESSON,  42d.—Quarantc-dcuxiemc   I.  .        !2me. 

VOCABULAIRE.   Ire  Section. 

OF  PASSIVE  VERBS.— Pea  Verbes  Passif*. 

Passive  verbs  represent  the  subject  as  receiving  or  suffering  from  otliera 
Jic  action  expressed  by  the  verb.  In  French,  as  in  English,  they  are  con- 
jugated by  means  of  the  auxiliary  verb  etrc,  to  be,  joined  to  the  past  par- 
ticiple of  the  active  verb.  Thus  any  active  verb  may  be  changed  into  the 
passive  voice.  The  past  participle  agrees  with  the  nominative.  ($  159.) 


Active  voice. 

Passive  voice. 

Voix  active. 

Voix  passive. 

I  love. 

I  am  loved. 

J'aime. 

Je  suis  aime. 

Thou  condurt«st.    Thou  art  conduct- 

Tu  conduis. 

Tu  es  conduit. 

ed. 

lie  praises. 

He  is  praised. 

II  loue. 

11  est  loutj. 

We  hear. 

We  are  heard. 

Nous  entendona. 

Nous  sommea 

entendus. 

you  punish. 

You  are  punished. 

Vouspunissez. 

Vous  etes  puni* 

They  blame. 

They  are  blamed. 

Us  blament. 

Us  sont  blamca 

To  praise. 

praised,        praise. 

Louer,  1,      loue, 

louez,  (impera.l 

To  punish, 

punished,     punish. 

Punir,  2,      puni, 

punissez. 

To  blame, 

blamed,       blame  .10 

B  lamer,  1,  blame, 

Ne  lldmez  pc* 

one. 

sonne. 

J3y. 

Par  or 

fa 

By  me, 

By  us. 

Do  or  par  moi, 

de  or  par  nous. 

rORTY-SKCONI)      LESSON.    (1.) 


213 


B)  thcc,  by  you. 

l!y  h  by  them. 

Hy  whom  ia  tne  naughty  punished  ? 

unified  by  his  iajhcr. 
l>y  whom  is  the  good  loved  > 
Lie  is  loved  by  everybody. 


J  De  or  par  toi, 


de  or  par  M>US. 

De  or  par  lui,  d'  or  par  eux. 

Par  qui  le  mechutit  est-il  puni? 
11  cst  puni par  son  JH  re. 
Pe  qui  le  bon  est-il  «iW  ? 
II  est  atme  de  to  at  le  monde. 


Obs.  97.     Pur  is  used  for  physical  or  menial  actions, 
affections  of  the  heart  or  soul. 
Which  man  is  praised,  and  which  is 

blamed  I. 

Naughry,  wicked.     The  naughty. 
Skilful,  clever.     Diligent. 
Assiduous,  industrious,  studious. 
Idle,  lazy.  Ignorant. 

The  idler,  the  lazy  fri! 
To  reward.    To  <.  >iecm.    To  despiso. 


DC  relates  to  the 


To  ha i-  !  riled. 

Good,   wise.) 

children    01  because 

.re  studious  and  good. 
To  travel  (to  go)  to  a ....  (to  the.) 
Where  has  he  travelled  to  ? 
lie  has  travelled  to  Vienna. 
Is  it  good  travelling  ? 

.rood  travel! 

Sad  travelling. 
In  the  spring. 
It  is  bad  travelling  in  the  winter. 


Quel  homme  est  loue,  et  lequel  est 

bl;i!i 

Mediant.        Le  mechant. 
Habile.        Diligent. 
Assidu,  industrieux,  studieiLX. 
Paresseux.        Ignorant. 
Le  paresscux. 

Denser,  1.    Es  irner,  1.     M6- 

priser,  1. 

I  fair,*  •:  '.  lm\.  (241.) 

Je  hais,  tu  hais,  il  hait,  (le  sing,  est 

ilicr.) 

Sage,  (said  only  of  childn  i.) 
Ces  enfants  sont  ainn's,  parcc  qu'il« 

sont  studieux  et  sages. 
Aller,*!,  a  ...  (au)  (avant  un  n^m.) 
Ou  *st-il  alle  ? 

II  etrt  alle  a  Vienne. 

t  Fait-il  bon  voyager  ? 

t  II  fait  bon  voyager. 

t  II  fait  mauvais  voyager. 

Dans  le  printemps,  au  printemps. 

II  fait  mauvais  voyager  dans  1'hiver 


QuAiiANTi:-i>i-:rxiKMK  TH£ME,  Ire  Sec. 

Do  qui  avez-vous  parle  ?  Nous  avons  parle  de  vous.  M^avez- 
vous  loue  ?  Nous  ne  vous  avons  pas  loue,  au  contraire,  nous  vous 
avons  blame.  Pourquol  m'avez-vous  "blame?  Parce  que  vous 
n'etudiez  pas  bien. — Votre  frere  vous  a  parle  de  quoi?  II  a  parle  de 
ses  livres,  de  ses  chevaux  et  de  ses  chiens. — Pourquoi  ses  enfants 
aont-ils  aimes?  Parce  qu'ils  sont  bons,  ils  sont  aimes.  Sont-ils  plus 
sages  que  nous  ?  Ils  n^*,  sont  pas  plus  sages  que  vous,  mais  ils  sont 
-  studieux.  Votre  cousin  est-il  aussi  assidu  que  le  mien?  II  est 
aussi  aesidu  que  le  votre,  mais  le  votre  est  plus  sage  que  le  mien. 
Fait-il  bon  voyager  au  printemps?  II  fait  bon  voyager  au  printemps 
ot  dans  Pautomne ;  mais  il  fait  mauvais  voyager  dans  1'ete  et  dans 
rhivsr. — Aimez-vous  a  voyager?  Avez-vous  quelque  fois  voyage  on 
hivor  ?  J?aime  assez  a  voyager,  et  j'ai  souve-nt  voyage  en  etc  muia 


214 


FORTY -SECOND     LESSON.    (2.) 


pas  en  hiver. — Le  general  est  souvent  malade.  vous  savez  qcvil  a  It 
goutte.  Pourquoi  ne  voyage-t-il  pas  ?  II  dit  que  le  printemps  est  troy 
humide,  Pete  trop  chaud,  et  Fhiver  trop  froid.  Et  que  dit-il  de  Fau 
tomne  1  II  dit  qu'alors  il  est  trop  occupe  pour  voyager. 

Are  you  loved'?  I  am  loved. — By  whom  are  you  loved?  I  am 
loved  by  my  uncle. — By  whom  am  I  loved  ?  Thou  art  loved  by  thy 
parents. — By  whom  are  we  loved  ?  You  are  loved  by  your  friends. 
—By  whom  are  those  boys  loved  ?  They  are  loved  by  their  neigh- 
bors.— By  whom  is  this  man  conducted  ?  He  is  conducted,  by  me. — 
Where  do  you  conduct  him  to?  I  conduct  him  home. — By  whom 
are  we  blamed?  We  are  blamed  by  our  enemies. — Why  are  we 
blamed  by  them  ?  Because  they  do  not  love  us. — Are  you  punished 
by  your  master?  I  am  not  punished  by  him,  because  I  am  good  and 
studious. — Are  we  heard  ?  We  are. — By  whom  are  we  heard  ?  We 
are  heard  by  our  neighbors. — Is  thy  master  heard  by  his  pupils? 
He  is  heard  by  them. — Which  children  are  praised  ?  Those  that  are 
good. — Which  are  punished  ?  Those  that  are  idle  and  naughty. — Are 
we  praised  or  blamed?  We  are  neither  praised  nor  blamed. 

Is  our  friend  loved  by  his  masters?  He  is  loved  and  praised  by 
them,  because  he  is  studious  and  good ;  but  his  brother  is  despised 
by  his,  because  he  is  naughty  and  idle. — Is  he  sometimes  punished7 
He  is  (il  Vest)  every  morning  and  every  evening. — Are  you  some- 
times punished?  I  am  (je  ne  le  suis)  never;  I  am  loved  and 
rewarded  by  my  good  masters. — Are  these  children  never  punished  ? 
They  are  (Us  ne  le  sont)  never, because  they  are  studious  and  good; 
but  those  are  so  (le  sont)  very  often,  because  they  are  idle  and 
naughty. — Who  is  praised  and  rewarded?  Skilful  children  are 
praised,  esteemed,  and  rewarded,  but  the  ignorant  are  blamed, 
despised,  and  punished. — Who  is  loved,  and  who  is  hated  ?  He  who 
is  studions  and  good  is  loved,  and  he  who  is  idle  and  naughty  is 
hated. — Must  one  be  (faut-il  etre)  good  in  order  to  be  loved?  One 
must  be  so,  (ilfaut  I'etre.) — What  must  one  do  (que  faut-il  faire)  in 
orde-  to  be  loved?  One  must  be  good  and  assiduous. — What  njusS 
one  do  in  order  to  be  rewarded  ?  One  must  be  (ilfaut  ctre)  skilful, 
*nd  study  much. 

VOCABULAIRE.  2Je  Section. 
To  drive,  to  rids  in  a  carriage. 
To  ride  (on  horseback). 
To  go  on  foot,  to  walk. 
Do  you  like  to  ride  on  horseback  ? 
I  like  to  drive. 

To  live,         lived,  tivi?ig. 

\  live,  rhou  livcst,      he  .ivcs. 


Aller  en  voiture, ) 
Aller  a  cheval,    >tak.C 
Aller  a  pied,        ) 


the  aux 
iliary  etre. 

Aimez-vous  a  monter  a  che\al  ? 
J'aime  a  aller  en  voiture. 
Vivre,*  4,         vecn,          vivant, 
Je  vis,  ni  vis.        il  vit. 


FORTY-SECOND     LESSON.    (2.) 


215 


Is  it  good  living  in  Paris  ? 

Is  the  living  good  in  Paris  ? 

It  is  good  living  there. 

The  living  is  good  there. 

Dear. 

Is  the  living  dear  in  London  ? 

Is  it  dear  living  in  London? 

The  living  is  dear  there. 

Thunder.  The  thunder  roars. 

This  storm.        This  fog,  mist. 

la  it  windy  ?     Does  the  wind  blow  ? 

it  is  windy.  The  wind  blows. 

It  is  not  windy. 

It  is  very  windy. 

Does  it  thunder  ? 

Is  it  foggy  ? 

It  is  stormy. 

It  is  not  stormy. 

Does  the  sun  thine  > 

't  thunders  very  much. 

^s  soon  (if,     us  soon  us  /,     as  //. 

AS  soon  as  I  have  eaten,  I  drink. 

As  soon  as  I  have  taken  on" my  shoes, 

I  take  off  my  stockings. 
What  do  you  do  in  the  evening  ? 
Do  I  sleep  ?     Thou  sleepest.     Who 

sleeps  ? 

Does  the  child  sleep  ?  He  still  sleeps. 
Without  money.   Without  speak in-g. 
Without  saying  anything,  i'a  word.) 
At  last. 

To  arrive.  Arrived. 

Has  he  arrived  at  last  ? 
He  has  not  arrived  yet. 
Is  he  coming  at  last  ?  To  be  sure,  he  is. 
And  then. 
As  soon  as  he  has  supped,  he  reads, 


>  t  Fait-il  bon  vivre  a  Paris  1 

>  t  II  y  fait  bon  vivre. 
|  Cher. 

>  t  Fait-il  cher  vivre  a  Londree! 

t  II  y  fait  cher  vivre. 

Le  tonnerre.      Le  tonnerre  grorola, 

Cet  orage.        Ce  brouillani. 

t  Fait-il  du  vent  ? 

t  II  fait  du  vent. 

t  II  no  fait  pas  de  vent. 

t  II  fait  bcaucoup  de  vent. 

t  Fait-il  du  tonnerre  ? 

t  Fait-il  du  brouillard  ? 

t  II  fait  de  1'orage. 

t  II  ne  fait  pas  d'orage. 

t  Fait-il  du  solcil? 

t  II  fait  beaucoup  de  tonncrro. 

Aussitot  tjue,  aussittt  nuvmvi,  yu'eu* 

Aussitot  quo  j'ai  mange,  je  hois. 

Aussitot  quo  j'ai  6te  mcs  Bouliere, 

j'ote  mes  has. 
Que  faites-vous  le  soir  ? 
Est-ce  que  je  dors  ?     Tu  dors.     Qui 

dort? 

L'enfant  dort-il  ?  II  dort  encore. 
Sans  argent,  t  Sans  parlcr.  (Dir.  1.' 
t  Sans  rien  dire,  t  Sans  dire  un  mot. 
En  fin. 

Arriver,  1.  Arrive0,  (etrcpour  auxiU 
Kst-il  enfin  arrivd  ? 
II  n'cst  pas  encore  arrive". 
Vient-il  enfin  ?  Sans  doute,  il  vient. 
Puis,  et  puis. 
Aussitot  qu'il  a  soupe,  il  lit,  puis  \\ 

dort. 


and  then  he  sleeps. 

QUARANTE-DEUXIEME    TllfblE,  2de    Sec. 

Aimez-vous  ti  monter  a  cheval  le  matin?  Non,  mais  j'aime  a 
mcMiter  a  cheval  le  soir.  Pourquoil  Parce  que  le  soir,  il  fait  plus 
frais,  et  vous  dormez  mieux  apres  votre  retour.  Je  crois  que  vous 
iivex  raison,  et  cependant  on  monte  plus  a  cheval  le  matin  que  le 
soir.  Votre  frere  a-t-il  jamais  monte  a  cheval?  II  n'y  a  jamaia 
monle.  Votre  oncle  monte-t-il  a  cheval  aussi  souvent  que  votre 
pere  ?  Ils  vont  souvent  a  cheval  Fun  avec  Tautre. — Avez-vous  etc 
en  voiture  au  pont  de  fil  de  fer  1  Oui,  nous  y  avons  etc  plusieurs  fois- 
V  avez-vou3  \«eja  ete  a  cheval?  Non,  je  n'y  ai  jamais  etc  a  cheval 


21G  FORTY-SECOND    LESSON.    (2.) 

Allons-y  cet  apres-midi.  A  cheval  ou  en  voiture  ?  A  cheval.  Norij 
mais  a  pied;  si  vous  voulez. — Aimez-vous  a  aller  a  pied  ?  Oui,  j'aime 
beaucoup  a  aller  a  pied,  il  fait  trop  de  pcnssiere  pour  y  aller  a  cheval 

Have  you  been  in  London?  I  have  been  there. — Is  the  living 
good  there  ?  The  living  is  good  there,  but  dear. — Is  it  dear  living 
in  Paris  ?  It  is  good  living  there,  and  not  dear. — Do  you  like  travel- 
ling in  France  ?  I  like  travelling  there,  because  one  finds  good  peo- 
ple (de  bonnes  gens)  there. — Does  your  friend  like  travelling  in  Hol- 
land ?  He  does  not  like  travelling  there,  because  the  living  is  bad 
there. — Do  you  like  travelling  in  Italy  ?  I  do  like  travelling  there, 
because  the  living  is  good  there,  and  one  (ct  qu'on  y)  finds  good 
people  there ;  but  the  roads  are  not  very  good  there. — Do  the  English 
like  to  travel  in  Spain?  They  do  like  to  travel  there;  but  they  find 
the  roads  there  too  bad. — Ho\v  is  the  weather  ?  The  weather  is  very 
bad. — Is  it  windy?  It  is  very  windy. — Was  it  stormy  yesterday  ? 
It  was  very  stormy,  (un  grand  oragc.)  Do  you  go  to  the  market  this 
morning?  I  do  go  thither,  if  it  is  not  stormy. — Do  you  intend  going 
to  France  this  year?  (cette  annee?)  I  intend  going  thither,  if  the 
weather  is  not  too  bad. — Do  you  like  to  go  on  foot  ?  I  do  not  like 
to  go  on  foot,  but  I  like  going  in  a  carriage  when  (quand)  I  am 
travelling. — Will  you  go  on  foot  ?  I  cannot  go  on  foot,  because  I  am 
tired. 

What  sort  of  weather  is  it?  It  thunders. — Does  the  sun  shine? 
The  sun  does  not  shine;  it  is  foggy. — Do  you  hear  the  thunder  .'  it 
roars.  Yes,  I  hear  it:  it  roars  much. — Is  it  fine  weather?  The 
wind  blows  hard,  and  the  thunder  roars  much. — What  do  you  do  in 
the  evening?  I  work  as  soon  as  I  have  supped. — And  what  do  you 
do  afterwards  ?  Afterwards  I  sleep. — When  do  you  drink  ?  I  drink 
as  soon  as  I  have  eaten. — When  do  you  sleep  ?  I  sleep  as  soon  as 
I  have  supped. — Have  you  spoken  to  the  merchant  ?  I  have  spoken 
to  him. — What  has  he  said?  He  has  left  (parti*)  without  saying 
anything. — Can  you  work  without  speaking?  I  can  work,  but  not 
(non  pas)  study  French  without  speaking. — Wilt  thou  go  for  some 
wine  ?  I  cannot  (point)  go  for  wine  without  money. — Have  you 
bought  any  horses  ?  I  do  not  buy  without  money. — Has  your  father 
arrived  at  last  ?  He  has  arrived. — When  did  he  arrive  ?  This  morn- 
ing at  four  o'clock. — Has  your  cousin  set  out  at  last  ?  He  has  not 
Bet  out  yet. — Have  you  at  last  found  a  good  master  ?  I  have  at  last 
found  one. — Are  you  at  last  learning  German  ?  I  am  at  last  learning 
it. — Why  have  you  not  already  learned  it  ?  Because  I  have  not  beor 
able  to  find  a  good  master. 


V  3RTY-THIRD    LESSON.    (1.) 


217 


[-< ">RTY.TIIiUD  LESSON,  43d.— Quarante-troisiein   Lcgon,  43iiw. 

VOCABULAIRE.    Ire  Section. 
OF  IlEFL!  VERBS.— Des  Vcrlcs  Rijlechis  ou  Fro-Mtninnux. 

See  ($  180),  and  study  it  carefully. 
,:t  yourself.  \         Feu*  couper.    I/ To  cut  himself\    ^ 


T    c 

To  cut  myself.      l        Me  couper. 

To  cut  ourselves./        AMX  c«»«iper. 

Do  you  burn  yourself  f 

J  do  noi  burn  myself. 

Hfou  do  not  burn  yourself. 

1  see  myself.  I  do  noi. 

Do  I  see  myself? 

Ho  does  not. 
-ce  ourselves. 

They  see  themselves.    They  «!«-,  not. 
Do  you  wish  to  warm  your 
I  do  wish  to  warm  m\ 

warm  himself? 
He  d  warm  himself. 


To  cut  herself.  \    ( 

„,  ,_        \    \-  sc  couper. 

To  cut  itself.        I  f 

\To  cut  one's  self/  ) 
Vous  brulez-vous  ? 
Je  ne  me  briilc  point. 
Vous  ne  vous  brulez  pas. 
Je  me  vois.        Je  ne  me  vois  point. 
Est-ce  que  je  me  vois  ? 
II  se  voit.         11  ne  se  voit  point. 
Nous  nous  voyons. 
Us  se  voient.  Us  ne  se  voient  point. 
Voulez-vous  vous  chaufler  ? 
Je  vcux'mc  chaufK-r. 
Veut-il  se  chaul:- 
II  veut  se  chaufler. 
Us  veulent  se  chauffer. 


They  .:m  themselves. 

To  cnj,,y,  to  divert,  to  amuse  myself.' )  M-am  ,    ((J   avant 

I  o  pass  or  spend  my  time.  5 

Let  mo  am  :.  Amuse  your- 

Enjoy  yourself,  but  do  not  neglect 

your  duty. 
How  do    you   spend   or   pass  your 

time  ?i         I  pass  it  in  reading. 
He  passes  his  time  in  playing. 
Each.  Each  one. 


Each  man.  Each  of  those  men. 

Each  man  amuses  himself  as  he  likes. 


Amusez- 


Laissez-moi  m'amuser. 

vous. 
Amusez-vous,  mais  ne  negligcz  point 

votre  devoir. 

t  A  quoi  vous  amusez-vous  ? 
t  Je  m 'amuse  a  lire, 
t  II  s1  amuse  a  jouer. 
Chaque  (avec  le  nom.)  CJiacun  (sane 

nom.) 
Chaque  homme.          Chacun  de  cea 

hommes. 
Chaque   homme  s'amuse  comrne  il 

veut. 
Chacun  s'arnuse  de  son  mieux. 


Le  gout.  Le  bon  gofit. 

Chaque  homme  a  son  gout. 
Le  mien  est  d'etudier. 


Each  one  amuses  himself  in  the  best 

way  he  can. 

The  taste.  The  good  taste. 

Each  man  has  his  taste. 
Mine  is  to  study. 

01*.  98.     Translate  is  to,  meaning,  consist 8  in,  by  est  det  (piind  the  prepos.) 

1  Vous  amusez  vous  ?  which  is  much  used  by  the  French,  is  rendered  in 
English,  not  by  :  do  you  amuse  yourself?  but  by,  pass  or  spend  your  time, 
>ve. 
19 


218  FORTY-THIRD    LESSON.    (1.) 

QUARANTE-TKOISlfcME    TllfolE.    Ire   SeC. 

Ah !  vous  voila,  enfin  !  Je  vous  ai  attendu  long-temps.  Je  sail 
fache  de  vous  avoir  fait  attendra;  mais  je  n'*ai  pas  pu  (§  14S)  venir 
plutot.  Quelqu'un  est-il  malade  chez  vous  ?•  Non,  mais ....  N'im- 
porte.  Parlons  de  votre  nouveau  cheval.  Vous  plait-il  ?  (arc  you 
pleased  ?)  II  ne  me  plait  pas  beaucoup.  Pourquoi  done  ?  11  esl 
bon,  il  va  bien ;  mais  il  est  si  grand;  si  grand  que  j:ai  Fair  d'un  eniant 
quand  je  suis  dessus.  L7avez-vous  essaye  deja?  Oui,  deux  fois. — 
Est-il  difficile  a  monter?  Non,  pas  du  tout. — Joseph.  Joseph!  On 
m'appelle.  Je  crois  que  c'est  mon  oncle  qui  a  besom  de  moi 
Allez,  alors.  Adieu.  Attendez.  Je  veux  vous  demancer  queiaue 
chose,  "^iuoi?  Voulez-vous  revenir  ce  soir?  Ce  soir?  Je  crois 
que  non.  Je  suis  tres-occupe.  Mais  vous-meme,  venez  me  voir. 
Et  pourquoi?  Si  vous  etes  si  occupe,  nous  ne  pouvons  ni  parlor  ni 
nous  aniuser  ensemble.  Vous  avez  raison;  mais,  il  me  faut  parlir. 
Adieu,  an  plaisir.  An  plaisir. 

Who  kindles  your  ;  ;   servant  does. — P*  idle  it 

well?     He  burns  himself  sometimes. — Does  he  make  your  co., 
Yes,  arid  he  does  it  first-rate,  (excellent.)     You  have  been  in  • 
land,  have  you  not?     Yes.  I   have.     And   in   Ireland  too! 
would  not  (did  not  wish  to)  go  there. — Were  you  afrai 
a  little. — How  is  the  li.  •  '  (y  vit-oii  I)     S  well 

as  in  England  and  France. —  V.  the  living 

in  London  1  It  is  dearer  in  Paris,  no,  1  mean  in  London. — Do  peo- 
ple despise  the  1  the  wicked  ?  Yes,  people  despise  thorn. 
— -What  is  esteemed?  Merit  is. — Do  scholars  love  or  hate  their 
teachers?  Some  love  and  esteem  them;  others  hate  them.  The 
studious  is  generally  esteemed,  is  he  not?  Yes,  he  is,  by  every- 
body.— Do  parents  punish  their  bad  children  .'  Yes,  they  do;  when 
these  do  something  wrong,  (mal.) 

Do  you  see  yourself  in  that  small  look 

in  it. — Can  your  friends  see  themselves  in  that  large  looking-glass1 
They  can  see  themselves  therein.  Why  does  your  brother  not  light 
the  lire  ?  He  does  not  light  it,  because  he  is  afraid  of  burning  him- 
self.— Why  do  you  not  cut  your  bread  ?  I  do  not  cut  it,  because  I 
tear  to  cut  my  linger. — Have  you  a  sore  finger?  I  have  a  sore  finger 
and  a  sore  foot. — Do  you  wish  to  warm  yourself?  I  do  wish  to  wann 
myself,  because  I  am  very  (grand)  cold. — Why  does  that  man  not 
warm  himself  ?  Because  he  is  not  cold.— Do  your  neighbors  warm 
themselves  ?  They  warm  themselves,  because  they  are  cold. — How 
do  you  pass  your  time  ?  I  pass  it  in  the  best  way  I  can. — How  do 
your  children  pass  their  time?  They  pass  it  in  studying,  writing 
Olid  play  ing.- --How  does  your  cousin  spend  his  '•  He  amuses  him' 


FORTY-THIRD     LESSON.    (2.) 


219 


self  in  reading  good  books  and  in  writing  to  his  friendy. — What  do 
you  do  when  you  have  nothing  to  do  at  home  ?  I  go  to  the  play, 
and  to  the  concert. — I  often  say,  "  Every  one  amuses  himself  as  ho 
likes.'' — Every  man  has  his  taste ;  what  is  yours?  Mine  is  to  study, 
to  read  a  good  book,  to  go  to  the  theatre,  the  concert,  and  the  ball, 
and  to  ride.  His,  is  to  do  nothing.  Theirs,  is  to  have  line  dogs, 

.   2dc  Section. 


Each  of  you.  us,  them. 

The   world,    (the    people.;    Genteel 

people. 
Every  one,  everybody,  says  and  be- 

s  so. 

Everybody  speaks  of  it,  them,  you, 
&c. 
ry  one  (any  one)  is  liable  to  make 

To  be  subject  to  (plagued  with)  the 
toothache. 

We  are  all  liable  to  make  n 

To  mi- 
Do  not  make  a  mistake  (impera.) 

:i  ?     I  am. 
Is  he  mistaken  ?     lie  is  not. 


.as  cheated 
iias  cheated  me 
pea. 
YDU  cut  your  finger. 


of  a  hundred 


Chacun  do  vous,  de  nous,  cl'eux. 
Le  monde.        Le  beau  monde. 

Tout  le  monde  le  dit  et  le  croit. 
Tout  le  monde  (chacun)  en  parle. 

Tout  liomme  (chaque    homme)  est 
sujet  a  se  tromper. 

ijet  au  mal  de  dents. 

Nous  sommes  tous  sujets  a  noug 
tromper. 

•  ,  se,  nous,  vous  tromper,  1. 
t  Ne  vous  trompez  pas.  ($  55.) 
t  Vous  trompez-vous  ?  Je  me  trompc. 
t  Se  trompe-t-il  ?      II  no  se  trompe 

point. 

Tromper,  1. 
II  m'a  trompe. 
II  m'a  trompe  de  cent  francs. 


Vous  vous  coupez  le  doigt. 

'.    When  an  agent  performs  an  act  upon  a  part  of  himself,  the  vorft 
made  reflective. 


I  cut  my  nails. 

A  hair. 

To  pull  out,  pluck  out,  extract,  snatch 

.!ls  out  his  hair. 
He  cuts  his  hair. 

The  dentist  extracts  one  of  his  teeth. 
.  (tear  or  take  one's  self 
away  from  a  place.) 
065.  100.     Je  m'en  vais,  is  equival 

Are  you  jroin^  away  ?  I  am. 

I  am  not. 

Is  he  going  away  ?  He  is  not. 

In  lie  not  going  away  ?  He  is. 

Am  I  going  ?  You  are. 


Je  me  coupe  les  ongles. 

Un  cheveu,  (plur.  x.) 

Arracher,  1.  • 

II  s'arrache  les  cheveux. 

II  se  coupe  les  cheveux. 

Le  dentiste  arrache  une  de  ses  dunta 

t  Mf,  t',  s',  nous,  vous  en  aller,*  1. 

lent  to  :  /  take  myself  from  here. 

t  Vous  en  allez-vous  ?  Jc  m'en  vaia 
t  Je  ne  m'en  vais  pas. 
t  S'en  va-t-il  ?     II  ne  s'rn  va  point 
t  Ne  s'en  va-t-il  point  ?  II  s'en  va. 
t  M'cn  vais-je  ?  Vous  vous  m  i 


220  FORTY-THIRD     LESSON.    (2.) 

Are  we  not  going  away  ?  t  Ne  nous  en  allon^-nous  pas  ? 


Yes,  we  are. 

Are  these  pupils  going  away  ? 

They  are  not. 

To  feel  sleepy. 


t  Si  fait,  nous  nous  en  allons. 
t  Ses  e'leves  s'en  vont-ils  ? 
t  Us  ne  s'en  vont  pas. 
t  Avoir  envie  de  dormir. 


Do  you  feel  sleepy  ?  !  t  Avez-vous  envie  de  dormir  ? 

I  do  feel  sleepy.  j  t  J'ai  envie  de  dormir. 

To  soil.  Do  not  soil.  |  Salir,  2.        Ne  salissez  pas. 

T*  fear,  dread,  feared,  fear  nothing,  i   Craindre,*  4,  craint.       Ne  craignol 

rien. 


N<A  to  fear.  (*  171—7.) 

I  dread.     He  fears  he  has  nothing. 

He  fears  to  soil  his  fingers. 

Do  you  dread  to  go  out  ? 

I  do  dread  to  go  out. 

He  is  afraid  not  to  go  there. 

Do  you  fear  that  man  ? 

I  do  not  fear  him. 

What  do  you  fear  ?         Nothing. 

Whom  do  you  fear  ?      Nobody. 

I  fear  nobody. 


Nepas  craindre  (de  av.  I'lnfm.) 

Je  crains.    II  craint  de  ne  rien  avoir 

II  craint  de  se  salir  les  doigts. 

Craignez-vous  de  sortir  ? 

Je  crains  de  sortir. 

II  craint  de  nepas  y  aller. 

Craignez-vous  cet  homme  ? 

Je  ne  le  crains  pas. 

Que  craignez-vous  ?        Rien. 

Qui  craignez-vous  ?         Personne. 

Je  ne  crains  personne. 


QUAKANTE-TROISIEME    Tllfi.ME.    2de    Sec. 

Vous  avez  Fair  d'avoir  chaud,  prenez  un  verre  de  sirop.  Avez- 
vous  do  1'eau  minerale  ici  ?  Non,  nous  n'en  avons  point ;  mais  nous 
pouvons  en  envoyer  chercher,  ou  plutot,  allons-en  boire,  chacun  un 
verre,  chez  I'apothicaire  du  coin.  Volontiers.  Allons-y.  Venez 
aussi,  Frederic,  ne  voulez-vous  pas?  Non,  je  n'aipas  soif,  mais  j:ai 
faim.  Ainsi,  a  votre  retour,  apportez-moi  un  ou  deux  gateaux.  Ou 
pouvons-nous  en  acheter?  Vous  pouvez  en  trouver  chez  le  mar- 
chand  de  gateaux.  Demeure-t-il  au  coin?  Non,  il  demeure  au 
milieu  de  la  rue.  De  quel  cote  ?  De  ce  cote-ci.  N'avez-vous  jamais 
rien  achete  chez  lui?  Non,  je  n'achete  jamais  de  gateaux.  Pour- 
quoi  done  ?  Ne  les  aimez-vous  pas?  Si  fait,  je  les  aime  beaucoup, 
au  contraire,  mais  je  n'ai  pas  souvent  faim  avant  diner.  Avant  de 
vous  en  aller,  pretez-moi  votre  canif.  Pour  faire  quoi?  (ou  mieux : 
pourquoi  faire  ?)  Pour  me  couper  les  ongles.  Ne  vous  coupez-vous 
pas  les  ongles  avec  des  ciseaux?  Non,  je  ne  peux  pas  me  couper 
les  ongles  avec  des  ciseaux.  N'avez-vous  pas  de  janif?  Si  fait, 
j?en  ai  un;  le  voici;  mais  il  ne  coupe  pas  assez,  pour  me  couper  les 
ongles. 

Do  you  cut  your  hair  ?  (les  cheveux.)  I  do  cut  my  hair. — Doey 
your  friend,  cut  his  hair  ?  He  cuts  his  nails,  but  not  his  hair. — Why 
does  that  man  pull  out  his  hair?  Is  he  crazy?  Yes,  he  is. — Why 
does  not  your  cousin  brush  his  coat  ?  He  does  not  brush  it,  Vecauso 


FORTY-FOURTH     LESSON.    (1.)  221 

he  is  afraid  of  soiling  his  fingers. — What  does  my  neighboi  tell 
you?  He  tells  me  that  (que)  you  wish  to  buy  his  horse;  but  I  know 
that  (qiie)  he  is  mistaken,  because  you  have  no  money  to  buy  it. — 
What  do  they  (o?i)  say  at  the  market?  They  say  that  (que)  the 
enemy  is  beaten. — Do  you  believe  that?  I  believe  it,  because 
every  one  says  so. — Why  have  you  bought  that  book?  I  have 
bought  it,  because  I  want  it  to  learn  French,  and  because  every  ono 
speaks  of  it,  and  praises  it. — Are  your  friends  going  away  ?  They 
are. — When  are  they  going  away?  They  are  going  away  to-mor- 
row. — When  are  you  going  away?  We  are  going  away  to-day. — 
Am  I  going  away?  You  are  going  away,  if  you  like,  (si  vous  vou- 
Icz.) — What  do  our  neighbors  say  ?  They  are  going  away  without 

,r  anything. — How  do  you  like  this  wine  ?  I  do  not  like  it. 
What  is  the  matter  with  you?  I  feel  sleepy. — Does  your  friend 
feel  sleepy?  He  does  not  feel  sleepy,  but  he  is  cold. — Why  does 
he  not  warm  himself?  He  has  no  wood  to  make  a  fire. — Why  does 
he  not  buy  some  wood  ?  He  has  no  money  to  buy  any. — Will  you 
lend  him  some?  If  he  has  none  I  will  lend  him  some. — Are  you 
thirsty?  I  am  not  thirsty,  but  very  hungry,  (grand'faim.) — Is  your 
.servant  sleepy?  He  is  sleepy. — Is  he  hungry?  He  is  hungry. — 
Why  does  he  not  eat?  Because  he  has  nothing  to  eat. — Are  youi 
children  hungry?  They  are  hungry,  but  they  have  nothing  to  eat. 
— Have  they  anything  to  drink?  They  have  nothing  to  drink.- 
Why  do  you  not  eat?  I  do  not  eat  when  (quand)  I  am  not  hungry. 
— Why  does  the  Russian  not  drink  ?  He  does  not  drink  when  he 
is  not  thirsty. — Did  your  brother  eat  anything  yesterday  evening? 
He  ale  a  piece  of  beef,  a  small  piece  of  fowl,  and  a  piece  of  bread. 
—Did  he  not  drink  ?  He  also  drank. — What  did  he  drink  ?  He 
drank  a  glass  of  wine  and  water,  and  some  syrup  and  water. 


FORTY-FOURTH  LESSON,  44th.— Quarantc-quatriemc  Lccon,  44m* 

VOCABULAIRE.     Ire  Section. 
PERFECT  OF  REFLECTIVE  VERBS.— Parfait  des  Vcrbes  Rsjle chit 


Have  you  cut  yourself? 

I  have  cut  myself. 

Have  I  cut  myself? 

You  have  cut  yourself. 

You  have  not  cut  yourself. 

Hast  thou  cut  thyself? 

I  have  not  cut  myself. 

Has  your  brother  cut  himself  ? 


Vous  etes- vous  coupe  ?  ($  180—2.) 

Je  me  suis  coupe. 

Me  suis-je  coupe  ? 

Vous  vous  etes  coupe. 

Vous  ne  vous  etes  pas  coupo, 

T'es-tu  coupe  ? 

Je  ne  me  suis  pas  coupe. 

Votre  frere  s'est-il  coupe  I 


222 


FORTY-FOURTH     LESSON.    (I.) 


He  has  cut  himself. 

Have  we  cut  ourselves  ?  ($  180 — 2.) 

We  have  not  cut  ourselves. 

Have  these  men  cut  themselves? 

They  have  not  cut  themselves. 

To  walk,       take  a  walk,       a  stroll. 

To  go  a  walking,  to  stroll. 

To  take  an  airing  in  a  carriage. 

The  coach.  A  new  coach. 

To  take  a  ride. 

Do  you  take  a  walk  ? 

I  do  take  a  walk. 

Does  he  take  a  walk  ?     He  docs. 

We  take  a  walk. 

Thou  \vislicst  to  take  an  airing. 

They  wish  to  take  a  ride. 

To  walk  a  ckild. 

Do  you  take  your  children  a  walk- 
ing ? 

I  take  them  a  walking  every  morn- 
ing. 

To  go  to  led,  he  down.  Go  to  bed. 
btdt 

Go  to  bed.         Gel  in  bed,  (impt  ra.) 

To  get  up,  to  rise.          Get  up,  rise. 

Do  you  rise  early  ? 

t  rise  at  sunrise. 

I  go  to  bed  at  sunset. 

The  (or  at)  sunrise. 

The  (or  at)  sunset. 

Gentlemen,  at  what  time  did  you  go 

to  bed  ? 

•  At  three  o'clock  in  the  morning. 
At  what  o'clock  did  he  go  to  bed 

yesterday  ? 
He  went  to  bed  late. 


II  s'est  coupe. 

Nous  sommes-nous  coupes  ? 

Nous  ne  nous  sommes  pas  coup5a 

Ces  hommes  se  sont-ils  coupes? 

II  ne  se  sont  pas  coupes. 

t  Me,  te,  se,  nous,  vous,  promener 

t  Aller  me,  te,  &c.,  promener. 

t  Se  promener  en  carrosse. 

Le  carrosse.        Un  carrosse  ncuf. 

t  Se  promener  a  cheval. 
I  Vous  promenez-vous  ? 
,  t  Je  me  promene.  (§  144—4.) 
I  t  Se  promene-t-il  ?     II  se  prorjenc, 

Nous  nous  promenons. 

Tu  veux  te  promener  rn  carrosse. 

Us  veulent  se  promener  a  cheval. 

Promener  un  enfant. 

Promencz-vous  vos  enfants  ? 

Je  les  promOne  tous  les  matins?. 

t  Se  coucher,  1.  Couchez-vous 

t  Aller  sc  coucher,  se  mcttre  au  lit. 
t  Allez-vous   couclicr.      J\lettez~vout 

au  lit. 

t  Se  lever,  1.  Lcvez-vous. 

Vous  levez-vous  de  bonne  heure  ? 
Je  me  leve  au  lever  du  soleil. 
Je  me  couche  au  coucher  du  soleil. 
Le  (ou  au)  lever  du  soleil. 
Le  (ou  au)  coucher  du  soleil. 
Messieurs,  a  quelle  heure  vous  etes- 

vous  couches  ?  ($  180 — 2.) 
A  trois  heures  du  matin. 
A  quelle  heure  s'est-il  couche  hier  J 

II  s'est  couche  tard. 


QUAJlANTE-QUATRlfcME    TlI^ME.    Ire    Sec. 

Je  n'ai  pas  vu  George,  ce  matin,  ou  est-il?  II  est  alle  chez  le 
dentiste. — Pourquoi'?  A-t-il  mal  aux  dents?  Oui,  il  Pa  eu  toute  la 
nuitj  (all  night.)  Va-t-il  se  faire  arracher  une  dent?  (feminin.)  Oui, 
ei  le  dentiste  veut  Parracher. — N7arrache-t-il  pas  toujours  les  dents 
quand  on  le  veut  ?  NonJje  vous  assure.  Pourquoi  done  ?  Parco 
que  quelque  fois  ce  n'esr  pas  neccssaire. — Avez-vous  jamais  eu  une 
dent  arrackee  ?  Non,  jamais  encore.  Que  vous  a  dit  le  jardinier  ? 
II  m?a  dit  qivon  a  arrache  un  de  ses  petits  arbres.  En  verite  !  Qui 
pent  Pavoir  arrache  ?  II  n'.en  salt  rien.  J'ai  oublie  de  vous  rendre 


FORTY-FOURTH     LESSON.    (2.)  223 

B  canif,  mais  le  voici,  tenez,  prenez-le.     IM'erci.     C'est  moi  qui 

vous  remercie.     Quravez-vons  au  doigt'*    Je  me  suis  coupe. — Avec 

quoi  ?    Avec  im  des  couteaux  du  cuisinier      Qu'avez-vous  mis  des- 

'     Rieu  encore.     N'allez-vous  riea  y  mettre  ?     Pardonnez-moi. 

Cn  peu  d'cau  dc  Cologne  et  im  morceau  de  lingc. 

Have  you  cut  your  hair  ?  I  have  not  cut  it  (myself),  but  I  have  had 

it  cut,  (me  Ics  suis  fait  coupcr.} — What  has  this  child  done?   He  haa 

cut  his  foot. — Why  did  they  give  him  a  knife  1    They  gave  him  one 

in  (pour}  cut  his  nails;  dud  he  has  cut  his  finger  and  his  foot. — Do 

you  go  to  bed  early?     I  go  to  bed  late,  for  I  cannot  sleep  when  I 

lo  bed  early. — At  what  o'clock  viid  you  go  to  bed  yesterday? 

1  went  to  bed  at  a  quarter  past  eleven. — At  what  o'clock 

•  hildren  go  to  bed?     They  go  to  bed  at  sunset. — Do  they 

y  ?     They  rise  at  sunrise. — At  what  o'clock  aid  you  rise 

'  rose  late,  because  I  went  to  bed  late  yesterday 

(tiicr  an  soir.) 

your  son  :  .  for  he  never  goes  to  bed 

—What  does  he  do  when  hr  /lie  studies,  and  then 

!  'oes  he  not  go  out  before  he  breakfasts?     No,  he 

;  efore  he  goes  out. — What  does  he  do  after 

soon  ii-  he  has  breakfasted  he  comes  to  my  house, 

. — I)idst  thou  rise  this  morning  as  early  as  I  ?     I 

..an  you,  for  I  rose  before  sunrise. — Do  you  often  go  a 

\\  ai :  »  a  walking  when  I  have  nothing  to  do  at  home. — Do 

wish  to  take  a  walk  ?     I  cannot  take  a  walk,  for  I  have  too 

much  to  do. — Has  your  brother  taken  a  ride?     He  has  taken  an 

airi;  B. — Do  your  children  often  go  a  walking  ?     They 

y  morning,  after  breakfast. — Do  you  take  a  walk 

;  dinner  I  drink  tea,  and  then  I  take  a  walk. 

VOCABULAIEE.     2de  Section. 


To  rejoice  at  tomtthing. 

[  rejoice  at  your  happiness. 
At  what  does  your  uncle  rejoice  ? 
I  have  rejoiced. 
They  have  rejoiced. 
You  have  made  a  mistake. 
We  have  made  a  mistake. 
'  somebody. 


t  Se  rejouir  2  de  quelque  chose. 

Je  me  rejouis  de  votre  bonheur. 

De  quoi  votre  oncle  se  rejouit-il  ? 

Je  me  suis  rejoui. 

Us  se  sont  rejouis. 

t  Vous  vous  etes  trompe. 

t  Nous  nous  sommes  trompe's. 

t  Faire  du  mal  a  quelqu1  u*i. 


The  evil,        the  pain,        the  harm.      \  Le  mal. 
Have  you  hurt  that  man  ?  t  Avez-vous    fait    du    mal    a    cot 

homme  ? 


[  have  hurt  that  man. 

'lid  you  hurt  that  man  ? 


t  J'ai  fait  du  mal  a  cet  hommo. 
*  Pourquoi  avez-vouc  fait  du  mal 
cet  homme  ? 


224 


FORTY-FOURTH     LESSON.    '2.) 


*I  hate  net  hurt  him. 
Does  thai  hurt  you  ? 
That  hurts  me. 
To  do  good  to  anybody. 
Have  I  ever  done  you  any  harm  ? 
No  ;  on  the  contrary,  you  have  done 

mo  good. 
f  have  never  done  harm  to  any  one. 


his 


t  .Te  ne  lui  ai  pas  fait  dc  mal. 

t  Cela  vous  fait-il  du  mal  ? 

t  Cela  me  fait  du  mal. 

t  Faire  du  bie?i  d  quelqu  tin. 

t  Vous  ai-je  jamais  fait  du  mal  ? 

t  Non ;    vous  m'avcz   an  contrain 

fait  du  bien. 
t  Jo  n'ai  jamais  fait  de  mal  a  per 

sonne. 

t  Vous  ai-je  fait  mal  ? 
t  Vous  ne  m'avez  pas  fai»  mat 

:;ie  fait  du  bien. 
Faire  de. 
Le   domestique   que   fait-il    & 

bulai  ? 

t  II  balaie  le  plancher  avec. 
t  Quo  veut-il  faire  de  ce  bois  ? 


II  n'cn  veut  rien  faire. 


I  hurt  you  ? 
You  have  not  hurt  me. 
That  does  me  good. 
To  do  with,  to  dispose  of. 
What  does  the  servant  do  with 

broom  ? 

He  sweeps  the  floor  with  it. 
What  does  he  wish  to  make  of  this 

wood? 
He  does  not  wish  to  make  anything 

of  it. 

Ols.  101.    When  a  proposition   has  no   definite  subject,  the  English,  in 
order  to  avoid  the  pronouns  they,  pcojtlc,  &c.,  use  the  verb  in  the  p;i 
voice,  and  say:    1  was  told,   instead  of,    Tiny  told  me;    Ife  is  fluttered, 
instead  of,  They  flatter  him  ;    Jl  ?/</>•  ^irtn  to  wir,  instrad  of,  They  gave  it  to 
me.    This  is  always  cxprc.^  MS  of  the  indefinite  pronoun 

on,  one.    Ex. 

He  is  Haltered,  but  ho  is  not  beloved.  |    On  le  flatt-,  mnis  on  ne  1'aimc  pas 
i  am  told  that  he  is  arrived.  |    On  me  dit  qu'il  est  arrive. 

QUARAKTE-QUATJU&MK    Tllf.MK.   2do  SeC. 

Qui  est  cet  enfant  que  vous  louez  tant?  C7est  Albart,  le  plus  jeune 
liis  de  notre  epicier.  Ne  le  connaissez-vous  pas?  Non;  je  ne  le 
connais  pas.  Ne  Pavez-vous  jamais  vu  dans  le  magasin  de  Fepicier  'i 
C'est  possible.  Mais  pourquoi  Pavez  vous  tant  loue?  On  Fa  loue 
parce  qu'il  a  bien  etudie.  Mais  ii  n;a  fait  que  son  devoir.  Faut-ii 
le  louer  pour  cela  ?  Sans  doute.  Je  ne  croyais  pas  cel 
Quand  on  le  lou?,  il  etudie  mieux.  C'est  different. 
cet  autre  enfant  a-t-ii  ete  puni  ?  Pourquoi  punit-on  les  enfants  gem* 
ralement?  Parce  c^u'ils  sont  mechants  et  paresseux.  C'est  pou» 
cela  merne  qu'or  a  puni  cet  autre.  —  Et  celui-ci,  Pa-t-on  recom- 
pense ?  On  Fa  recompense  parce  qu'il  a  bien  travaille.  —  Que  faut-i1 
faire  pour  ne  pas  etre  meprise  ?  II  faut  etre  studieux,  diligent,  et  sage. 
—  Ah  !  Louis,  v:ms  vous  etes  fait  couper  les  cheveux,  vous  avez  mis 
un  habit  neuf,  un  joli  gilet  de  satin  noir,  vous  avez  Pair  d'un  autre 
garcon.  Je  vous  ai  a  peine  connu.  Que  pensez-vous  de  mon  habi 
ueuf  7  .^j  le  iro^ve  superbe. 


FORTY-FOURTH     LESSON.    (3.)  i2l2.J 

What  have  you  done  with  your  money?     I  have  bought  a  book 

with  it. — What  has  the  joiner  done  with  his  wood?     He  has  made 

a  bench  of  it. — What  has  the  tailor  done  with  the  cloth  which  you 

gave  him  -  made  clothes  of  it  for  (pour)  your  children,  and 

mine. — I1  .an  hurt  you?     No,  Sir7  he  has  not  hurt  me. — 

What  must  one  do  in  order  to  be  loved?     One  must  do  good  to 

•  that  have  do:ie  us  harm. — Have  we  ever  done  you  harm? 

on  the  contrary  done  us  good. — Do  you  do  harm  to  any 

'     I  do  ri"  harm. — Why  have  you  hurt  these  children? 

J  have  not  hurt  them. — Have  I  hurt  you?     You  have  not  hurt  me, 

but  your  boys  have,  (mjcn  ontfcit.) — What  have  they  done  to  you? 

They  ha\  •  me. — Is  it  (cst-cc)  your  brother  who  has  hurt  my 

-  not  (cc  n'cst  pas)  my  brother,  for  he  has  never 

hurt  any  one. 

Have  veil  drunk  that  wine?    I  have  drunk  it. — How  did  you  like 

it?     1  liked  it  very  well.— Has  it  done  you  good?     It  has  done  me 

good. — I!  art  yourself?    I  have  not  hurt  myself. — Who  has 

hurt  hin:  [y  brother  has  hurt  himself,    for  he  has  cut  his 

still  ill,  (inalade?)     He  is  better,  (mieux.) — I  rejoice 

to  hear  that  he  is  no  longer  ill,  for  I  love  him.     Why  does  your 

in  pull  out  his  hair?     Because  lie  cannot  pay  what  he  owes. — 

Did  your  father  rejoice  to  see  you?     He  did  rejoice  to  see  me. — 

What  did  you  rejoice  at?     I  rejoiced  at  seeing  my  good  friends.- 

\V1:;  -iir  uncle  delighted  with,  (s'cst  il  rcjoui?)     He  was 

^hted  with  the  horse  which  you  have  sent  him. — What  were 

;  children  delighted  with?     They  were  delighted  with  the  fine 

lies  which   I  have  had  made  for  them,  (que  je  Icur  ai  fait  fair c.} 

Voc  \  omc  Section. 


kni;  M   him  to  cut  his 

tread,  and  he  cut  his  finger. 


er  somi  one. 


To  flat  I 

1  0  flatter  one's  self. 

He  flatters  himself  that  he  knows 
French. 

NotllinS  lut. 

He  has  nothing  but  enemies. 
To  become. 

(DeveJiir  does  not  take  de  after  it.) 
He  has  turned  a  soldier. 
Have  you  turned  a  merchant  ? 


On  lui  a  donne  un  couieau  pour  cou- 
per  son  pain,  et  il  s'est  coupe  Ic 
doigt. 

Flatter  1  quelqifun. 

Se  flatter,  (takes  de  before  the  infini- 
tive.) 

t  II  se  ilatte  de  savoir  le  Ffan^aifl. 

Ne  .  . .  que. 

II  n'a  que  des  ennemis. 

Devenir,*  2,  p.  passe*  devenue,  (cou 

jugue  comme  Venir.  (251,  34 !.) 
t  II  s'est  fait  soldat. 
t  Vous  etes-vous  fait  marchaml  \ 


I  have  turned  (become)  a  lawyer.        I  t  Je  me  suis  fait  avocat. 

f  t  Votre  frcre  nu'est-t7  dcvcnu  ? 
What  ha>  become  of  your  brother  ?     \  f  ^^  ^^  wtrej-rirc  f 


226  FORTY-FOURTH     LESSON.    (3.) 


What  has  become  of  him  ? 

I  do  not  know  what  has  become  of 

him. 
To  enlist,  to  enroll. 


<  t  II  s  est  enrole. 

He  has  enlisted.  <  .  T1    , 

C  t  II  s  e 


t  Qu'est-/Z  cloveim  ? 

t  Je  ne  sals  pas  ce  qu'tY  csl  devenu 

S'enroler,  1,  se  faire  soldat. 


I  cannot  pay  you,   for   I   have   no 

money. 
He  cannot  give  you  arjy  bread,  for 

he  has  none. 
To  believe  some  one. 
Do  you  believe  that  man  ? 
[  do  not  believe  him. 


I  s'est  fait  soldat. 
Je  ne  puis  vous  payer,  car  je  n'ai 

pas  d'argent. 
II  ne  peut  pas  vous  donner  do  pnin. 

car  il  n'en  a  pas. 
Croire*  4  quelqu'un. 
Croyez-vous  cet  homme  ? 
Je  ne  le  crois  pas. 


Ohs.  102.  The  verb  croire  governs  the  accusative  ;  we  s:iy,  however  ; 
To  believe  in  God.  I  Croire  en  Dieu. 

I  believe  in  God.  I  Je  crois  en  Dicu. 


Jlcntir,*  2;   past  part.  mc?iti,  prea. 

part,  mciitdut.      J\Y  w  rif<  z  pas. 
Je  mens,  tu  mi?ns,  il  mcnt. 
Le  mentcur. 


To  utter  a  falsehood,  to  lie.    ' 

Do  not  lie,  (impera.) 
I  lie,  thou  liest,  he  lies. 
The  story-teller,  the  liar. 

QuARANTE-QUATinfcME  TiilbiE.  3me  Sec. 

PmnioMtv-Yous  souvent  vos  enfants?  Je  les  promene  tous  le,i 
matins  et  tous  les  soirs,  quand  le  temps  le  permet.  C-'est-a-dire, 
qnaml  il  fait  beau  temps?  Non;  mais  quaud  il  ne  fait  pas  hop 
mauvais. — Les  menez-vous  promener  quand  le  temps  est  convert  ou 
humide?  Sans  doute.  Et  quand  il  pleut?  Oui,  s?il  ne  pleut  pas 
braucoup.  Qn and  le  tonnerre  gronde?  Oui,  meme  quand  le  ton- 
•»!  gronde,  s'il  m»  fait  pas  de  pluie.  Allez-vous  les  mener  proine- 
ner  ce  soir?  Non,  il  fait  trop  de  pluie  et  de  vent.  N'enlendez-voua 
pas  le  bruit  du  vent  ?  Si  fait,  je  Fentends.  Et  le  bruit  de  la  pluie 
bur  la  maison  ?  Oui,  je  Fentends  aussi.  On  ne  peut  pas  promener 
avec  plaisir  pendant  un  orage  comme  celui-la.  Vous  avez  raison, 
je  pehse  comme  vous. — Croyez-vous  ce  petit  garcon  avec  les  che- 
veux  noirs  ?  Oui,  c'est  un  bon  petit  garcon,  mais  cet  autre-la  est  un 
pram!  menteur.  Sait-il  quand  il  ment?  En  vthite,  je  crois  que  non. 
—  Pourquoi  n'entrez- vous  pas?  Avez-vous  peur  d'etre  mordu  par 
notre  petit  chien  blanc?  Mord-il  aussi  bien  qiril  aboie  *  II  aboie 
beaucoup,  mais  il  ne  mord  pas. 

What  has  become  of  your  friend  ?  He  has  become  a  lawyer. — 
What  has  become  of  your  cousin  ?  He  has  enlisted. — Has  your 
neighbor  enlisted?  He  has  not  enlisted. — What  has  become  of 
him  ?  He  has  turned  a  merchant. — What  has  become  of  his  children  '< 
His  children  have  become  men. — What  has  become  of  your  son? 
He  has  become  a  great  man. — Has  he  become  learned  ?  He  haa 


FORTY-FIFTH     L  JB  S  S  0  N.    (1.)  227 

In-ecine  learned. — What  has  become  of  my  book?  I  do  not  know 
what  has  become  of  it. — Have  you  torn  ill  I  have  not  torn  it.— »- 
YVhat  has  become  of  our  friend's  son  ?  I  do  not  know  whai  has 
become  of  him. — Is  he  in  England  or  Italy?  I  cannot  tell  you. — I 
believe  his  father  does  not  know  what  has  become  of  him. — Whom 
did  he  go  travelling  with?  He  went  with  his  cousin. — Do  they 
know  what  has  become  of  the  latter?  Oh!  yes;  he  has  returned, 
and  he  is  studying  to  become  a  doctor.  It  is  extraordinary. — Wliv 
Joes  this  man  rejoice  so  much?  (tant  ?)  Because  he  flatters  himself 
ae  lias  good  friends. — Is  he  not  right  in  rejoicing?  He  is  wrong,  for 
ne  has  nothing  but  enemies. — Is  he  not  loved  ?  He  is  flattered,  but 
;}t  beloved. — Do  you  flatter  yourself  that  you  know  French? 
[  do  flatter  myself  that  I  know  it;  for  I  can  speak,  read,  and  write 
it. — I  Ins  the  physician  done  any  harm  to  your  child?  He  has  cut 
his  linger,  (lid  a  coupe  Ic  doigtj)  but  he  has  not  done  him  any  harm, 
so  (ct)  you  are  mistaken,  if  you  believe  that  he  has  done  him  any 
— Why  do  you  listen  to  that  man?  I  listen  to  him,  but  I  do 
not  believe  him  ;  for  I  know  that  he  is  a  story-teller. — How  do  you 
v-toller  ?  He  does  not  believe  in  God ;  and  nil 
ilo  not  believe  in  God  are  story-tellers. 


V-F1FTI!   IJ-'.SSOX,  45th.— Qiiarante-cinquiemc  Lcr.on,  4t>me. 

VOCABULAIRE.    Ire  Section. 
I.M1TJISONAL  VERBS.—  Verbes  Unipenonnds. 

.  423,)  some  idiomatical  expressions  with  faire, 

rhich  belong  to  the  impersonal  verbs.     These  verbs,  having  no  deter  • 
innate  subject,  are  conjugated  only  in  the  third  person,  by  means  of  the 

,  it.    i;.\. 

Pleuvoir,*  3.  i\p\eut,past  part.  plu. 


To  rain,  it  rains. 

o\v,  it  snows. 

To  hail,  it  hails. 


Neiger,  1.       il  neige. 
Greler,  1.        il  grele. 


The  substantives  belonging  to  these  three  verbs  are  feminine,  as  will  be 
when  we  come  to  treat  of  feminine  nouns. 


:iten. 

Does  it  lighten  ?  It  does. 

The  Ii«hfjii7i?.  Il  lightens. 

It  does  not  lighten. 
[t  lightens  much. 

it  r;iii:  >         It  rains  very  liard. 

•/.  snow  ?         It  snows  hard. 


t  Faire  des  eclairs, 
t  Fait-il  des  eclairs  ?          II  en  fait 
L1  eclair.  t  II  fait  des  Eclairs, 

t  II  ne  fait  pas  d'eclairs.  (Obs.  27.) 
t  II  fait  beaucoup  d'eclairs. 
t  Pleut-il  ?        11  pleut  d  verse. 
t  Neige-t-il  ?      II  ncigc/?rf,  (beau- 
coup.) 


228 


FORTY-FIFTH     LESSON,   (1.) 


It  hails  much. 

The  hail.  The  snow. 

The  sun  does  not  ishine. 

The  sun  is  in  my  eyes. 

To  thunder, — it  thunders. 

To  shine,  to  glitter,  shining,  thined. 

The  shutters.  It  hails,  shut  the 

shutters  quick. 
Is  the  walking  'rood  ? 
It  i«  good  (bad)  walking. 
This  country.  In  that  country 

He  has  made   many  friends  in   tha,t 

country. 

Of  which,  of  vJiom,  whosr. 
\  see  the  man  of  whom  you  Bj 
I  have  bought  the  horse  of  which  you 

spoke  to  me. 
I  see  the    man  whose   brother    lias 

killed  my  dog. 
I  sec  the  man  whose  dog  you  have 

killed 
Do  you  see  the  rhild  whose  father  set 

out  yesterday  ? 
Whom  have  you  ; 
I  have  Men  the  mi  rabani 

wan-house  yon  h;ive  taken. 
I    have    spokrii   to    the    ma:i 
warehouse  has  hern  burnt. 


II  fait  beaucoup  de  greie. 

La  grtle.  La  ncige.  (noms  fen.  Ji  nn 

t  II  ne  fait  point  de  solt-ii. 

*  Le  soleil  me  donne  dans  la  vue. 

Tonner,  1, — il  tonne. 

Luire,*  4,     luisant,     lui,  (p.  | 

Lcs  volets.     11  grOle,  ferincz  vite  le> 

volets. 

t  Fait-il  bon  marcher  ? 
t  11  fait  bon  (mauvais)  marcher. 
Ce  pays-ci.  Dans  ce  pays-Hi, 

t  II  s'est  fait  beaucoup  d'amis  dara 

<  e  pays-la. 

A>///,  proaom  I  elatif.  $8f>^ 

Je  vois  1'honnr.e  dont  vous  parlez. 

!Il'iiVC2 

Je  vois  rhomme,  dont  li;  frcre  a  tu«§ 

nion  . 
Je  vois  riion.  'us  avcz  tu3 

le  chini. 
Voyez-vous  lYniant  (lout  le  j 

parti  hirr  ? 
Qui  ;:•  ,  11  ? 

J'ai  vu  le  marcha: 

pris  le  manasin. 
J'ai  parl»'  a  rhomme  dont  le  it 

a  etc  Drfil i'. 


QUAI  Ire  Sec. 

Quel  immvais  temps  il  fait  aiijoiird?hiii!  II  plcnt  11  vorso  ,  il  fait 
des  eclairs,  le  tonncrre  grotide. . .  .Ne  grcle-t-il  pasaussi?  Je  lo 
croyais  il  y  a  un  moment,  (a  minute  ago.)  Ne  vaut-il  pas  mieux 
fm  re  for  merles  volets?  (have. . .  .shut?)  Je  crois  qu'il  vant  mieux 
les  faire  fermer.  Car  s'il  grele  encore,  la  grele  peut  casser  nos  car- 
rcaux  dc  litre,  (panes  of  glass.)  Dites  a  Salomon  de  venir  fermer 
les  volets.  Ou  est  Salomon?  Appelez-le,  si  vous  ne  pouvez  pag 
le  trouver.  Qu7est-ce  que  c:est  que  ce  bruit?  N;est-ce  pas  la  grele 
qui  vienfrcontre  les  vitres?  Salomon,  fermez  vite  ces  volets.  N?y 
a-t-il  pas  un  carreau  de  casse?  (30l,  Obs.  71.)  Non;  M.,  je  n;en 
vois  pas  de  casse.  Voici  un  volet  de  ferme.  Fermez  ^rite  1'antro, 
car  je  crains  pour  nos  carreaux. 

Have  you  seen  the  gentleman  from  whom  I  have  received  a  pro 
sent?  I  have  not. — Have  you  seen  the  fine  gun  of  which  I  spoke 
to  you?  I  have. — Has  your  uncle  seen  the  books  of  wnich  you 
BDoke  to  him  ?  He  has.—  Hast  thou  seen  the  man  whose  children 


TOHTY-FIFTH     LESSON.    (2.)  229 

have  been  punished'?     I  have  not  seen  him. — To  whom  have  you 
•  ?     I  have  been  speaking  to  the  nmn 

whose  brother  has  killed  my  fine  doir.— Have  you  seen  the  little  'uoy 
whose  father  has  become  (s'ctt  fait)  a  lawyer'?  I  have  seen  him, 
— Whom  havr  n  at  the  ball  .'  1  saw  the  farmer  whose  horsea 

you  bought  (§88),  and  the  men  whose  coach  you  had  a  mind  to 
— AYlium  .  1  see  the  man  whose  servant  haa 

broken  my  lo  I  my  two  panes  of  ulass. — Have  ycu 

heard  the  Befriend]  h  money?    I  have 

not. — Whom  have  y«.i  heard?     I  ha\-  French  captain 

thou  brushed  the  coat  of  which  I  spcke  to  thee?     I  have 

not  yet  brushed  it. — Ha1.  wired  the  money  which  you  have 

—  Have  I  the  brown  paper  of  which  I  have 

nir  brother  the  Italian  books  of  which 

he  1:  •: chants  whose 

'  them.— Have  yoi/ 

16  son  has  studied  German'?     I  have. 

— Hast  thou  fc-r  >i men  wi.  s  have  been  burnt' 

1  have.— Hav--  !  the  books  which  we  have  lent  you?     Wr 

.-.—\Vhat  them?  (e?i?)     We  say  that  they  air* 

.—Do  you  ;rive  anything  to  tho  children  who  are  idle?   \Vo 

••them  no:'.  !  it  snow  yesterday  ?    Yes,  it  did  hail,  lighten, 

evening  and  all  night.    I  am  very  sorry  for  it.    Why  r 

we  are  going  to  have  bad  walking  for  a  few  days.     AI-J 

we  : 

ABULAIRK.    -de  Section. 


I  (with  antecedents.)    £elul  ^OnL  \  (ont  dcs  antecedent*.-. 
.  J  v  Ceux  dont.  > 

S  J'ai  ce  dont  j'ai  besoin. 

II  a  ce  dont  il  a  besoin. 

Avez-vous  le  livre  dont  voua  av«»i 


:itecedent.) 
That  of  which. 
Those  01'  which. 

I  have  that  of  which  I  have  need. 
I  have  wha/  I  want. 
He  has  wha,,  he  wants. 
Have  you  the  book  of  which  you  have 

need  ? 

I  have  that  of  v-Jiich  I  have  need. 
Has  the  joiner  the  nails  of  which  he 

has  need  ? 

He  has  those  of  which  he  has  need. 
Which  men  do  you  see  ? 
I  see  those  of  whom  you  spoke. 


Cc  dont,  (n'a  point  d'anlecedeht ) 


besoin  ? 

J'ai  celui  dont  j'ai  besoin. 
Le  menuisier  a-t-il  les  clous  dont  il  q 

besoin  ? 

II  a  ceux  dont  il  a  besoin. 
Quels  hommes  voyez-vous  ? 
Je  vois  ceux  dont  vous  avez  parlo. 


Obs.  103.     The  relative,  dont,  of  which,  &c.,  being  an  indirect,  not  t 
iirect  object,  (or  regime,)  has  no  influence  on  the   past  participle.  (321 
->.  76.) 


ii30 


FORTY-FIFTH     LESSON     (2.) 


Do  you  see  the  pupils  of  whom  I  have 
spoken  to  you  ?  I  do. 

To  whom,  (relative),  to  which. 

I  see  the  children  to  whom  you  have 
given  some  cakes. 

To  which  pupils  do  you  speak  ? 

f  speak  to  those  to  whom  you  have 
applied. 

Which  dogs  do  you  feed  ? 

Those  to  which  you  gave  nothing. 


Ols.  104.     -1  quit  for  persons  only. 

To  apply  to ^rvl'J  ?<>.••• 

Apply  to  the  minister. 

I  did,  (or,  I  applied  to  him.) 

To  meet  with. 

I  have  met  with  the  men  to  whom 

you  have  applied. 
Of  which  men  do  you  sprak  ? 
I  speak  of  those  whose  childv. 

been  studious  and  obedient. 
*  >l>rdicnt,  «iisi>!»rdicnt. 
Kind.  '.lit.  Unkind. 

.V«j  (hut. 

not  pay  \ 
1  am  ill,  MI 


Voyez-vous  les  eleves  dont  je  voui 

ai  parle  I  Je  lea  voia. 

A  qui,  (relatif.)  aux  qucls,  (mas.  plur.) 
Je  vois  les  enfants  a  qui  vous  avei 

donnd  des  gateaux. 
A  quels  eleves  parlez-vous  ?  ($  79.> 
Je  parle  a  ceux  auxquels  (a  qui)  YOU* 

vous  etes  adresse. 

A  quels  chiens  donnez-vous  a  man- 
-  ger  ? 
A  ceux  auxquels  vous  n'avcz  rion 

donne*. 

Auxquels,  for  persons  and  things. 

•S'ar/rcsser,  1,  d . .  Adrcssez-vousd. . 
Adressez-vous  au  ministre. 

suis  adresse  a  iui.  ($  64.) 
mtrer,  1,  (transitif.) 
J  'ai  rencontre  les  homines  a  qui  (aux- 
quels) vous  vous  etes  adress<5. 
He  qucls  hoinnn :s  parlez-vous  ? 
Je  parle  de  ceux  dont  les  enfants  out 
Milieux  ct  obi'issa'.its. 

>!lt. 

Complaisant.  Desobligeant. 

De  sorte  que,  (conjunction.) 

J'ai  perdu  mon  argent,  de  sorte  quo 

je  ne  puis  vous  i 
Je  suis  m.'ilndc,  de  sorte  que  je  nc 


puis  sortir. 
QUAI  Sec. 

Vous  teue/  votre  chapeau  !  Mettez-lej  (put  it  on.)  Non.  : 
Alors,  dunne/.-le-inoi,  je  vais  le  meltre  sur  le  porlc-chapcau,  (hat- 
htand.)  Vous  etes  bien  complaisant.  Le  voila  sur  un  fanteuil. 
bien,  que  ponsox-vous  du  tableau  dont  nous  avons  parle  hicr  matin, 
et  (jtte  vous  avez  sans  doute  vu  hier  apres-midi?  (doubtless?')  Jo 
suis  lache  do  T  ous  dire  que  je  ne  Tai  pas  encore  vu.  Est-il  possible  1 
Hier?  j'ai  ete  tres-occupe.  de  sorte  que  je  n'ai  pas  pu  le  voir.  Ditea 
que  vous  n'avcz  pas  voulu  le  voir.  Non,  vous  vous  trompez:  voua 
avez  tort  do  croire  cela.  Car,  je  vous  assure  que  j'ai  grande  envie 
de  le  voir.  fites-vous  encore  tres-occupe  ?  Oui,  et  tres-presse,  (in  a 
great  hurry.)  parce  que  mon  bailment  va  partir  (192,  N.  1)  dans  un 
jour  ou  deux.  Cependant,  je  veux  essayer  de  voir  le  tableau  dont 
nous  avons  parle.  Comme  vous  etes  presse^  je  vais  m'en  ailer 
A.dieu;  au  plaisir.  J'ai  1'honneur  de  vous  saluer. 

Have  )rou  at  last  learned  French'2     I  was  ill,  so  that  I  coud  no! 


FORTY-SIXTH     LESSON.    \J.)  231 

learn  it. — Ha.*  your  brother  learned  it  ?  He  has  not  learned  it,  be- 
cause he  has  not  yet  been  able  to  find  a  good  mastei. — Do  you  go 
to  the  ball  this  evening?  I  have  sore  feet,  so  that  I  cannot  go  to  it 
— Did  you  understand  that  German  ?  I  do  not  know  German,  su 
that  I  could  not  understand  him. — Have  you  bought  the  horse  of 
which  you  spoke  to  me  ?  I  have  no  money,  so  that  I  could  not  buy 
it. — Have  your  children  what  they  want?  They  have  what  they 
want. — Of  which  man  do  you  speak?  I  speak  of  the  one  whoso 
brother  1:  soldier. — Of  which  children  have  }ou  spoken? 

1  have  spoken  of  those  whose  parents  are  learned. — Which  new 
^ook  liave  you  read  ?     I  have  read  that  of  which  I  spoke  to  you 
••.M-day. — Which  paper  has  your  cousin?     He  has  that  of  which 
lie   i.  —Which  fishes  has  he  eaten?     He  has  eaten  those 

whir,  not  like. 

i  books  are  you  in  want?     I  am  in  want  of  those  of 

which  you  have  spoken  tome. — Have  you  need  of  those  which  I  am 

reading?     I  have  not. — Do  you  see  the  children  to  whom  I  have 

I  do  not  see  those  to  whom  you  have  given  cake*, 

but  ;  :u  you  have  punished. — To  whom  have  you  given  any 

oney  !     1  have  niven  some  to  those  who  have  been  skilful. 

•.  Inch  children  must  one  give  presents?     One  must  give  some  to 

o  are  good  and  obedient. — To  whom  do  you  give  to  eat 

and  to  drink?     To  those  who  are  hungry  and  thirsty. — Have  the 

>Mied  to  that  man?    They  have  refused  (351)  to 

him;  ail  those  to  whom  he  applied  have  refused  to  hear 

him. — With  whom  have  you  met  this  morning?     I  have  met  with 

the  :  \horn  I  am  esteemed. — Have  you  Driven  any  cakes  to 

your  pup.i!.-  '    They  I  ave  not  studied  well,  so  that  I  have  given  them 


:  i  LESSON,  4Sth. — Quarante-sixicmc  Lcron,  46r7u». 

VOCABULAIBE.  Ire  Section. 

OF  TI1H  FIRST  FUTURE.— Du  Futiir,  ou  FuUr  Simph'. 
$  14G)  and  study  it  carefully. — Among  the  exceptions  (of  which  \vu 
m\\  soon  treat)  are  the  auxiliaries,  and  the  iu'lowing : — 

To  have.  I  shall  or  will  have.     I  Avoir,*  3.        J'aurai,  ras,  ra,  ronu, 

rez,  rout. 

I  shall  or  will  be.         j  6tre,*  4.          Jc  serai. 

I  shall  or  will  go.         !  Aller,*  1.        J'irai.          )  ^ 
To  send.  I  shall  or  will  scnu.      ;  Envoyer,*  1.  J'envcrrai.)  „,/,'• 

Shall  or  will  lie  have  money?  ara-t-iJ  dc  1'argcnt  ? 


FORTY-SIXTH    LESSON.   (1.) 


He  will  have  some.     He  will  not. 
Shall  you  soon  have  done  writing  ? 
I  shall  (soon  have  done). 
He  will  soon  have  done  his  task. 
Shall  we  have  the  bird  ?         No,  but 
they  shall  have  it. 


11  en  aura.    II  n'cn  aura  pas. 
t  Aurez-vous  bientot  fmi  d'e'crire  \ 
J'aurai  bientot  fini.  ($  170.) 
II  aura  bientot   fini  son  devoir. 
Aurons-nous  I'oiscan  ?      Non,  mail 
ils  1'auront. 


QUAIIAXTE-SIXIEME  TnihiE.  Ire  Sec. 

Comment  formez-vous  le  futur  des  verbes  en  Franc  ais  1  Faut-ii 
vous  repondre  en  Franc,  ais?  Sans  doute.  Le  puis-je  ?  Essayez, 
Esf.-ce  que  je  sais  tous  les  mots  necessaires  pour  cela  ?  Je  crois  que 
oui.  Ji  vais  essayer.  Attende/.  Savez-vous  le  Franc  ais  de  :  final? 
Je  ne  suis  pas  sur  du  (about  the)  Francais  do:  final.  Est-ce  le 
meme  que  F  Anglais  ?  Oui,  c'est  le  meme.  Vous  savez  traduire: 
changing!  n'est-ce  pas?  C'est:  changeant. — C  esl  cela.  Com- 
mencez.  Je  vais  repeter  la  question. — Je  pense  que :  repeter  est  to 
repeat,  n'est-ce  pas'?  Oui,  c'est  cela  meme.  Comment  forme/- 
vous  le  futur  des  verbes  Francais  *  En  changeant  (R.  1 ),  IV  final  do 
la  Ire  et  2de  conjugaison,  le  oir,  de  la  4me;  non;  je  me  trompe,  jo 
veux  dire  :  de  la  3me  et  le  re  de  la  4me5  en  rat.  C'est  cela.  Pou- 
vez-vous  me  dire  le  futur  de:  former?  .Oui,  c'est:  formerai.  Quel 
f-t  colui  do  :  devoir?  C'est  dcvoirai.  Non,  vous  vous  trompe/.  Ici, 
il  faut  ch;i:»LM'i-  oir  r:i  r>ii :  alors  c'est:  dcvrai.  Tres-bien.  (Juand 
vous  avez  la  premiere  personne,  pouvez-vous  former  les  autros  ?  Oui : 
car  If  i'utur  Unit  toujours  en:  rai,  ras,  ra,  rons,  rez,  rout. 

Shall  you  have  any  books?  I  shall  have  some. — Who  will  give 
you  any?  My  uncle  will  give  me  some. — When  will  your  cu 
have  money?  He  will  have  some  next  month. — How  much  money 
hhall  you  have?  I  shall  have  thirty-five  francs. — Who^will  have 
good  friends2  The  English  will  have  some. — Will  your  father  be 
at  home  this  evening  '!•  He  will  be  at  home. — Will  you  be  there  V 
1  shall  also  be  there. — Will  your  uncle  go  out  to-day?  He  will  go 
out,  if  it  is  fine  weather. — Shall  you  go  out  ?  I  shall  go  out,  if  it 
does  not  rain. — Will  you  love  my  son?  I  shall  love  him,  if  he  5a 
good. — Will  you  pay  your  shoemaker?  I  shall  pay  him,  if  1 
receive  my  money. — Will  you  love  my  children  ?  If  they  are  good 
and  assiduous,  I  shall  love  them;  but  if  they  are  I  lie  and  naughty, 
I  shall  despise  and  punish  them. — Am  I  right  in  speaking  thus'? 
You  are  not  wrong. — Is  your  friend  still  writing?  He  is  still 
writing. — Have  you  not  done  speaking  ?  I  shall  soon  have  done. — 
Have  our  friends  done  reading?  They  will  soon  have  done. — Whor 
will  you  send  me  the  money  which  you  owe  me  ?  I  shall  send  i< 
to  you  soon. — Will  your  brothers  send  me  the  books  which  I  have 
lent  them  ?  They  will  send  them  to  you. — When  will  they  scud 
them  to  me  ?  They  will  send  them  to  you  next  month. 


FORTY-SIXTH      LESSON.    (2.) 


233 


VOCABULAIRE. 

To  hold,  keep.      I  shall  or  will  hold. 
To  come.  I  shall  or  will  come. 

To  sit  down.        I  shall  or  will   sit 

down.  • 

To  be  necessary.  It  will  ben*v 
To  pro-  I  j*hall  provide. 

To  be  able.  I  will  be  able. 

To  foresoe.  I  shall  or  will  fore- 

see. 

Tc  know.  I  shall  or  will  know. 

To  suspend.          I  shall  suspend. 
To  be  worth.        I  will  be  worth. 

see.  I  shall  or  will  see. 

To  be  willing.       I  shall  be  willing, 
To  do.  I  shall  or  will  do. 

When  shall  you  do  your  exercises  ? 
I  will  do  them  soon,  (ere  long.) 
My  brother  will  do  his  exercises  to- 
morrow. 

Monday.          Xrxt  Tn< 

Last  Thu 
•  month. 

This  month.          That  age,  century, 
will  your  son  go  to  the  bridge  ? 
lie  will  go  next  Tuesday. 
Shall  you  go  anywhere  ? 

Will  he  send  UK?  the  book  ? 
He  will  send  it  you  if  he  !: 

with 
Shall  you  be  at  home  this  evening  ? 

I  sdiall  be  there. 

1  your  father  be  at  home  f 
II<>  will  be  there. 

Will  your  cousins  be  Uiere  ?     They 
will. 


2dc  Section. 
Tenir,*  2. 
Venir,*  2. 
S'asseoir,*  3. 

Falloir,*  3. 
Pourvoir,*  3. 
Pouvoir,*  3. 
Pievoir,*  3. 


Je  tiendrai.. 
Je  viendrai. 
Je  m'asseierai  or 

Je  m'assiorai. 
II  faudra. 
Je  pourvoirai. 
Je  pourrai. 
Je  prevoirai. 


Savoir,  3.  Je  saurai. 

Surseoir,*  3.         Je  surseoira:. 
Valoir,*  3.  Je  vaudrai. 

Voir,*  3.  Je  verrai. 

Vouloir,*  3.  Je  voudrai. 

Faire,*  4.  Je  ferai. 

Quand  ferez-vous  vos  themes  ? 
Je  les  ferai  bicntot. 
Mon  frere  fera  ses  themes  demain. 

Lundi  prochain.       Mardi  prochain 

Mercredi  passe.       Jeudi  dernier. 

t  Le  mois  prochain. 

Ce  mois-ci.  Ce  sidde-ld. 

Quand  votre  fils  ira-t-il  an  pont  7 

II  ira  mardi  prochain. 

Irez-vous  quelque  part  ? 

Nous  n'irons  nulle  part. 

M'enverra-t-il  le  livre  ? 

t  II  vous  Tenverra  s'il  1'a  fini. 

Serez-vous  chez  vous  (a  la  maisonj 

ce  soir  ? 
J'y  serai. 

Votre  pere  sera-t-il  chez  lui  ? 
II  y  sera. 
Vos  cousins  y  scront-ils  ?      Us  y 

seront. 


Obs.  105.  (Important.)  When  a  verb,  in  the  future  tense,  is  connected 
with  another  by  the  conjunction  if,  si,1  the  French  verb  following  si  must 
b«  in  the  indicative  mood,  present  tense,  although,  in  English,  it  may  be  in 
:he  future  tense,  or  subjunctive  mood. 


Will  John  go  to  the  concert  ?     Yes, 
if  you  go,  or  will  go,  or  should  go. 


Jean  ira-t-il  an  concert  ? 
vous  y  allez. 


Oui,    si 


1  Si.  (if,  meaning  granting,  supposijtg  that.}  But  when  si  means  whether^ 
thr  following  verb  must  be  in  the  future  tense  :  I  do  not  know  whether  h« 
*vill  go  or  not,  Je  ne  sais  pas  s'il  ira  ou  71  tw. 


234  FORTY-SIXTH      LESSON.    (2.) 

QfMRAHTE-SIXIKMK    EXERCICE.    2'Je  See. 

Allez-vous  a  Washington  aujouid'hui?  Non,  je  n;ai  pas  le  temps 
d'y  aller  aujourd;hui.  Quand  irez-vous  ?  J'irai  jeudi  ou  sainedi 
prochain.  Aurez-vous  le  temps  devenir  nous  voir?  Sans  doutc  que 
je  Faurai.  (Dir.  6.)  Quand  viendrez-vous?  J;irai  demain.  Nun, 
je  me  trompe,  apres-demain.  Vraimcnt?  Oui,  vraimcnt. — Enver- 
rez-vous  du  tabac  en  France?  Oui,  j'y  tn  enverrai.  Par  quel  bail- 
ment 1'enverrez-vous?  Je  l:y  enverrai  par  le  meme  que  M.  Lippard 
— Y  en  enverra-t-il  ?  Oui,  il  y  en  enverra.  Y  en  enverra-t-il  beau- 
coup  ?  II  y  enverra  tout  ce  qu'il  a. — Qui  licndra  le  magasin  du  coin  7 
Je  no  sals  pas  qui  le  tiendra.  N'est-ce  pas  le  petit  marchand  qui  le 
tiendra?  Lui  et  ses  "freres  le  tiendront.  Tiendront-ils  des  neu- 
veaules?  Us  ne  tiendront  que  du  drap.  Quand  Pouvriront-ils?  llg 
1'ouvriront  dans  quinze  jours.  Ne  vous  trompez-vous  pas  ?  Non. 
je  vous  assure. — Vos  cousins  viendront-ils  bientot?  II  ne  viendront 
j>as  avant  quinze  jours.  Votre  oncle  viendra-t*il  avec  eux?  II 
viendra,  f?i  le  capitaine  ne  vient  pas.  Croyez-vous  que  le  capitaine 
vitMidni.'  11  vitMidru  s'il  n'a  pas  la  gouttc. — (iuand  saurez-vous 
votre  theme?  Je  le  saurai  dans  r,n  (juart  d'heure.  Croycz-V()ii^ 
que  vous  le  saurez  si-tot?  Oui;  je  le  sanrai.  Fri'dirric  sanra-t-il  le 
.-icii  ?  II  le  sanra.  Les  nouveaux  ccoliers  saunmt-ils  U\s  lours?  lid 
les  sauront.  Nous  les  saurons  tous. 

Has  the  lailor  inado  my  coat?  He  has  not  made  it  yet ;  but  he 
will  soon  make  i:. — \Vlicn  will  he  make  it?  AV 
time. — When  will  you  do  your  exercises?  I  ?hall  do  them  when  I 
shall  have  time. — When  will  your  brother  do  his?  He  will  do 
them  next  Saturday. — Wilt  thou  come  to  me?  I  shall  come. — 
When  wilt  thou  come?  I  shall  come  next  Friday. — When  I 
you  seen  my  uncle?  I  saw  him  last  Sunday. — Will  your  cousins 
go  to  the  ball,  next  Tuesday?  They  will  go. — Will  you  come  to 
my  concert  ?-  I  shall  come,  if  I  am  not  ill. — Will  you  be  able  to 
pay  me  what  you  owe  me?  I  shall  not  be  able  to  pay  it  you,  for  I 
have  lost  all  my  money. — Will  the  American  be  able  to  pay  for  his 
shoes  ?  He  has  lost  his  pocket-book,  so  that  he  will  not  be  able  to 
pay  for  them. — Will  it  be  necessary  to  send  for  the  physician  ?  No- 
body is  ill,  so  that  it  will  not  be  necessary  to  send  for  him. — Will  it 
be  necessary  to  go  to  the  market,  to-morrow?  It  will  be  necessary 
to  go  there,  for  we  want  some  beef,  some  bread,  and  some  wine.— 
Shall  you  see  your  father,  to-day  ?  I  shall  see  him. — Where  will 
he  be?  He  will  be  at  his  counting-house. — Will  you  go  to  the  ball 
Co-night?  I  shall  not  go,  for  I  am  tco  ill  to.  go  to  it.— Will  youi 
friend  go  ?  He  will  go  if  you  will. 


FORTY-SIXTH     LESSON.    (3.) 


Scctiou. 

Obs.  106.  (Important.)  When  a  verb  in  the  future  tense  is  connected 
*-ith  another  by  the  word  t/7«/i,  quand  ;  the  French  verb  following  qnand 
must  be  in  they'  ,  although  tin-  jin-m  nt  is  then  used  in  English.  As, 


Will  he  go  when 

lie  will  go  when  you  do. 

ill  write  it  if  you  will. 
He  will  write  i:  Jo. 

tfonnthlg-ho 

He  will,  it'  y«>u  will  have  BO1 
He  wiii,  v  ant  some. 

you  be  able  to  pay  the  shoe- 
jiiak'  :  .  I  his  bill  / 

I  will  pay  him  when  he  sends  it. 

will  hold  my  parasol  ? 
Give  i1  .ss,  I  will  (hold  it). 

He  will  hold  it,  or  thoy  will. 
Will  your  < 

my  will. 

I  will  be  there. 
I  will  employ. 

To  •  ,:ill  or  will  try. 

What  will  you  use  to  ci 
I  will  use  this. 

Will  you  •:  I  will. 

Will  he  not  try  a 
Yes,  he  will,  but  they  will  not. 
You  are  mistaken,  they  will  try  also, 

;uire.  I  will  acquire. 

To  run.  I  shall  or  will  run. 

To  gather,  pick.         Will  I  gather  ? 
To  die,  (lose  life.)  Who  shall  not  die  ? 
What  will  you  acquire  ?  1  will 

acquire  what  I  can. 


Jra-t-il  quand  firai  f 

II  ira  quand  vous  irtz. 

II  Vecrira  sivousVecrivcz.  (Obs.  10.*  4 

11  1'ecrira  quand  vous  Tecrirez. 

Enverra-t-il  du  papier  blanc  a  mon 

comptoir  ? 

II  y  en  enverra  ^i  vous  en  voulez. 
II  y  en  enverra  quand  vous  en  vou- 

drez. 
Fourrez-vous   payer   le    cordonnier, 

s'il  envoie  son  memoire? 
Jc  le  paierai  quand  il  1'cnverra. 
Qui  vent  tenir  mon  parapluie  ? 

h'-moi,  Mile.,  je  le  tiendrai. 
11  In  ticndra,  ou  ils  le  tiendront. 
I/ami  de  votre  cousin  viendra-t-ii  ft 

mon  concert?  11  ir«i. 

Y  viendrez-vous  ?        J'y  serai. 

Employer.  J'emploierai.  >  ,*  ^^ ^  <. 

Essayer.     J'essaierai.     i 

Qu'emploierez-vous  pour  le  faire  ? 

J'emploierai  ceci. 

Essaierez-vous  bientol  ?  J'essaierai 

N'essaiera-t-il  pas  aussi  ? 

Si  fait,  il  essaiera,  mais  ils  n'essaie- 

ront  pas.     Vous  vous  trompez,  ilo 

essaieront  aussi. 
Acquerir,*  2.      J'acquerrai.1 
Courir,*  2.          Je  courrai. 
Cueillir,*  2.         Cueillerai-je  ? 
Mourir,*  2.         Qui  ne  mourra  pas  f 
Qu'acquerrez-vous  ?        J'acquerrai 

ce  que  je  pourrai. 


Ols.  107.  If,  instead  o{whe?i,  quand,  the  words  what,  ce  que  ;  as  soon  ag, 
aussitot  que,  des  que  ;  after,  apres  que  ;  as,  comme  ;  where,  ou  ;  connect 
the  English  verbs,  use  the  future  tense  after  the  2d  verb  in  French. 


Will  you  run  as  soon  as  he  runs  T 
We  will  run  after  he  has  run,  and 
where  he  has  run. 


Courrcz-vous  aussitdt  qu'il  courra  f 
Nous  courronsopres  qu'ilaura  couru. 
et  ou  il  a:ira  couru. 


1  These  4  verbs,  and  the  lists  given  in  1st  and  2d  sections,  amounting 
{Hie  auxiliaries  included)  to  21,  are  the  most  important  exceptions. 


230  FORTY-SEVENTH     LESSON.    (1.) 

QUARANTE-SIXIEME  THEME.  3mc  Sec. 

Si  je  viens  samedi  prochain,  votre  fils  viendra-t-il  ?  11  viendra 
quand  vous  viendrez.  Fera-t-il  ce  que  je  ferai?  II  fera  ce  qu'il 
pourra.  Iront-ils  ou  vous  voudrez  ?  Non,  ils  n'iront  pas  oil  je  vou- 
ilrai,  mais  ou  ils  voudront. — Quand  cueillerez-vous  mon  bouquet"? 
Je  le  cueillerai  quand  et  ou  vous  voudrez.  En  cueillerez-vous  aussi 
un  pour  Emma?  Je  lui  en  cueillerai  un  aussi,  cles  que  vous  me  lo 
direz. — Acquerra-t-il  de  Fhonneur  s'il  fait  son  devoir  ?  II  en  ae- 
querra  des  qu'il  fera  ce  qu'il  a  a  faire. — Courrez-vous  si  je  coura? 
Oui,  ;e  courrai  quand  vous  courrez,  ou  aussitot  que  vous  aurez 
court. — Comment  est  le  vieux  soldat?  II  est  bien  malade.  Croit- 
on  qu'il  en  mourra?  Oui,  on  croit  qu'il  en  mourra.  Et  le  matelot? 
II  est  mieux,  on  espere  qu'il  n'cn  mourra  pas. — Qn'acquerront  cea 
ccoliers?  Ils  acquerront  de  Hionneur. — Ce  jeune  cheval  vaudra-t-ii 
deux  cents  dollars,  quand  il  aura  quatre  ans?  Je  crois  qu'il  vaudra 
nins  que  cela.  Vraimcnt! 

Will  the  farmer  gather  his  corn  to-day?  No,  he  will  gather  il 
only  to-morrow,  or  the  day  after- — Will  he  be  ready  then  ?  Ho  will 
be  ready,  we  shall  be  ready,  and  our  friends  will  also  be  ready. — 
Where  will  our  young  neighbors  go?  They  will  go  nowhere;  they 
will  remain  at  home,  for  they  will  have  a  great  deal  to  do. — What 
will  they  have  to  do  ?  They  will  have  to  cut  their  grain  and  to  put 
it  in  their  granary.  You  will  lose  your  money,  if  you  do  not  keep 
your  pocket-book  shut  up,  (fcrmc.) — Will  your  con-in  keep  an  apo- 
thecary store  ?  He  will  keep  one. — Where  will  he  take  a  store? 
He  will  take  one  near  the  museum. — Will  he  be  able  to  get  one 
there,  (y  en  troitrcr  un?)  He  hopes  so. — When  will  he  come?  Iff 
will  conic  when  his  father  gives  him  (06s.  106)  the  two  thou 
dollars  which  he  has  promised  him. — Will  he  give  them  to  him 
soon  ?  He  will  receive  them  in  a  few  days. — Will  he  receive  any 
money  from  you?  Yes.  1  will  lend  him  some. — WiV  he  pay  you 
back?  (repaiera-t-il  ?)  He  will,  for  he  is  diligent,  assiduous,  and 
he  will  without  doubt  do  his  duty.  I  hope  that  you  are  not  mis- 
taken 


FORTY-SEVENTH  LESSON,  47th.— Quarante-scpiicme  Lr*on.  47 »w 

VOCABULAIRE.   Ire  Section. 
To  belong.  (213,  402,  4G2.)  |  Appartenir*  2.  (conj.  commo  r 


Do  you  belong  ?  I  do. 

Does  that  horse  belong  to  your  bro- 
ther?   It  does  (belong  to  him). 


Appartenez-vous?      J'appartiens. 
Ce  cheval  appartient-il  a  votre  firere  ? 
II  lui  appartient. 


TORT  Y-SEVENTH     LESSON.     (1.) 


?/37 


To  whom  do  thc?c  gloves  belong  ? 

They  belong  to  the  capta.: 

Do  these  horses  belong  to  the  Ame- 
rican generals  ? 

They  will  soon  belong  to  them.  ($  170.) 

To  suit.  Baited. 

(Used  principally  in  the  3d  person.] 

Did  that  cloth  suit  your  brother  ? 

It  did  not. 

Dd  these  shoes  suit  your  children  ? 

They  will  suit  them. 

Does  it  suit  you  to  do  that  ? 

It  will  suit  me  to  do  it. 

Does  it  suit  your  cousin  to  come  with 
us? 

It  will  not  jii.i  ,iirn  to  yo  out. 

To  succeed,  succ< 

:  succeed  in  learning  I 
I  do  (succeed  in  it). 
I  do  succeed  in  Icarni: 

se  men  succeed  in  selling  their 
s  ?  If  they  have  not  yet  suc- 
d,  they  will  succeed  in  it. 

To  succeed,  succeeding,  succeeded. 

>u  succeed  in  doing  that  ? 

-;  not. 

in  succeed  ?      I  did.  ($50.) 
To  clean. 

Immediately,  directly. 

This  instant,  instantly. 

I  am  going  to  clean  it  presently. 

'  do  it  immediately. 
I  am  going  to  work. 


A  qui  appartiennent  ct»  gante  ? 

Us  appartiennent  aux  capitaines. 

Ces  chevaux   appartiennent-ils  am 
generaux  Americains  ? 

Ils  leur  appartiendront  bientot. 

Contettir,*2.(commevenir)convemi, 
(aavantle  nom  ;  de,  avantl'inrini/ 

Ce  drap  a-t-il  convenu  a  votre  ircre  1 

II  ne  lui  a  pas  convenu. 

Ces  souliers   conviennent-ils  a  voa 
enfants  ?     Us  leur  conviendront. 

Vous  convient-il  de  faire  cela  ? 

II  me  conviendra  de  le  faire. 

Convient-il  c.  votre  cousin  de  vei:ir 
avec  nous  ? 

II  ne  lui  conviendra  pas  de  sortir. 

jParvenir,*  2,  a.  (coinmc  venir)  par- 
venu*. 

t  Parvc  i  apprendre  le  Fran* 

c.ais  ?        t  J'y  parviens. 

t  Je  parviens  a  Tapprendre. 

t  Ces  hommes  parviennent-ils  a  ven- 
dreleurs chevaux?  S'ilsn'ysont 
pas  encore  parvenus,  ils  y  pai 
viendront. 

Riussir,  2,  d.    reussissant,    reussi. 

Reussissez-vous  a  faire  cela  ? 

J'y  rcussis ;  mais  il  n'y  reussit  pas. 

Y  avez-vous  reussi  ?      J'y  ai  reuaal 

Nettoyer,  1. 

Tout  de  suite. 

A  1'instant,  sur  le  champ. 

Je  vais  le  nettoyer  tout  a,  Vhcure. 

Je  vais  le  faire  tout  de  suite. 

Je  vais  travailler. 


QUARAXTF.-SEPTI.fcME    TlllblE.    IrC  SeC. 

.1  ai  trouve  cles  gants.  A  qui  appartiennent-ils?  Sont-ce  des 
gants  de  chamois?  Oui.  Ce  sont  des  gants  de  chamois.  Ils 
nrappartiennent  alors.  Donnez-les-moi.  Attendez  un  instant,  s'ii 
>iit-ils  blancsj  jaunes,  verts;  ou  bleus  ?  Les  m  iens  sont 
plutot  bruns  que  jaunes.  Alors  les  voici.  Ils  vous  apparliennent.  Je 
vous  remercie.  DC  rtc?i,  (you  are  welcome.)  Avez-vous  achete 
quelq-ie  chose?  Oui.  Qu;est-ce  qui  (211)  vous  a  convenu?  Ceci 
m'a  convenu,  et  cela  conviendra  a  mon  frere.  Cela  lui  conviendra- 
t-il?  Oui^  j'en  puis  stir.  Le  cousin  de  Favocat  a-l-il  etc  au  mu-<V 
av*?<-  7  II  ne  lui  a  pas  convenu  d'y  al!1  'o  qu'il  a 


238  FORTY-SEVENTH     LESSOK.    (2.) 

refuse  d'y  aller  avec  eux.     Parvenez-vous  a  faire  votre  devoir 
les  jours?    J7y  parviens  souvent. — Le  menuisier  est-il  parvenu  a 
raccommoder  votre  pupitre  ?     Oui,  il  y  est  parvenu  tout  de  suite. 
il  aussi  parvenu  a  raccommoder  le  secretaire?     Non7  il  n'a  paa 
reussi  it  le  faire.     A-t-il  micux  reussi  avec  le  fauteuil  ?     Cui,  rl  y  a 
parfaitement  reussi. — Qui   a  nettoye  votre  gilet  de  satin?     Notre 
nouveau  domestique  Pa  nettoye.     N'a-t-il  pas  bien  reussi  ?     V 
cnout,  oui. — Vos  souliers  sont-ils  nettoyes?     11s   le   sont.     Je  me 
trompe,  on  les  a  pris  pour  les  nettoyer. 

To  whom  does  that  horse  belong?     It  belongs  to  th 
taptain,  whose  son  has  written  a  note  to  you. —  Does  this  money 
belong  to  you  ?     It  does  belong  to  me. — Prom  whom  have  you 
received  it?     I  have  received  it  from  the  men  whose  children  you 
have  seen. — \Yho>e   horses  are  those?    They  are  (cc  sont)  < 
(§  39,  N.  3.) — Have  you  told  your  brother  that  I  am  waiting  for  him 
iiere1     I  have  forgotten  to  tell  him  KO,  (lc.) — Is  it  (cst-cc)  your 
father  or  mine  who  is  gone  to  Berlin  ?     It  is  mine. — Have  you 
brought  me  the  book  which  you  promised  me  ?     I  have  forgotten 
it. — Has  your  uncle  brought  you  the  pocket-books  which  he  prou . 
you  ?    He  has  to  bring  me  them. — Have  you  already  writ- 

ten to  your  fri  IY6  not  yet  had  time  to  write  to  him. — Have 

you  forgotten  to  write  to  your  relation?     I  have  not. — Does  this 
cloth  suit  you?     It  does  not  suit  me  ;  have  you  no  other? — !  i 
some  other;  but  it  \  :han  this. — Will  you  shov.  .'     I 

will  show  it  to  you. — Do  these  shoes  suit  your  uncle  ?     They  ito*  not 
suit  him,  because  they  are  too  dear. — Are  these  (sont-cc*  the  sh 
of  which  (Jon/)  you  have  spoken  to  us?     They  are  (cc  sont)  the 
same,  (les  memcs.) — Whose  shoes  are  these?     They  belong  to  the 
nobleman  whom  you  have  seen  this  morning  in  my  warehouse. 

VOCABULAIRK.     2de  Section. 

Is  there  ?  There  is.  i  t  Y  a  t  il  ?  II  v  a 

Are  there  ?  There  are.          ) 


There  is  not.  There  are  not. 

There  is  nothing — nobody. 

Will  there  he  ?  There  will  he — not  be. 

What  is  there  ? — the  matter  there  ? 

Was  there,  or  has  there  been  ?  There 

was. 

Thsre  has  been  nothing.  J  t  II  „'  y  •  rien  eu. 

Nothing  tas  taken  place.  ) 


t  II  n'y  a  pas.  II  n'y  a  point. 

t  II  iv  y  a  rien — personne. 

i  Y  aura-t-il  ?      II  y  aura.       II  n'y 

aura  pas. 
t  Qu'y  a-t-il  la  ?     Qu'est  ce  qu'il  j 

a  la? 
t  Y  a-t-il  eu?  II  y  a  cu 


Is  there  wine  ?        syrup  ? 

There  is  some.      There  is  nc  moie. 

Are  there  men  of  merit  ? 


t  Y  a-t-il  du  vin  ?  du  sirop  ? 
t  II  y  en  a.  II  n'y  en  a  plus, 
t  Y  a-t-il  des  hommes  do  merito  f 


FORTY  -SEVENTH     LESSON.    (2.) 


239 


Obs,  108.     The  interrogative  :    What    is?  followed  by  a  preposition,  if 


aanslated  !••. 

1  do  ; 

ball 

There  ar-  it  many. 

The  credit.      On  .  >  sell  on 

credit. 

v/n. 
Will  y  '-ash  ? 

Does  it  suit  you  to  soil  me  on  credit  ? 
To  ft. 

•  tit  him. 

.  ' 

1  fits  you  very  well. 
To  I 
Will  ;.  rse  ? 

•)  it. 
You  must  not  k> 


The  relative:    IVimt  />-,  by:    Ce  yu'il 

t  Qu'y  a-t-il  dans  le  hariZ  /  (1  mute.) 

•l>td  y  a  dedans, 
Doit-il  y  avoir  beaucoup  de  monde 

,<:il  ile  Mine.  Rush  ? 
II  doit  yen  avoir  beaucoup. 
Le  credit.  A  credit.  Vcndre  a  credit 

'  ml,     Kn  argent  comp 

tant. 

Acheter  com  pi  ant. 
Vendre  comptant. 
Payer  comptant. 
Voulez-vous  aehcter   argent   comp 

tant  ? 

Vous   convicnt-il   de    me  verdr^  a 
lit  t 

-t-il  bien  ? 
t  II  vous  va  bien. 

.:ipcau  no  va  pas  bien  a  votrc 

til  ne  lui  va  pas  bien. 

t  Ces  soulicrs  vous  vont-ils  bien  t 

t  Us  me  ront  bien. 

t  Cela  vous  va  fort  bien. 

r,  1. 

rez-vous  le  cheval  ? 
Je  le  garderai. 
11  ne  faut  pas  garder  mon  argent 

QUA  .-TifeME  TH£ME.  2de  Sec. 

(inand  vous  sorez  en  Europe,  irez-vous  en  Allemagne?  Je  crois 
que  yirai ;  du  moins;  j'ai  grande  envie  d?y  voyager.  Y  voyagerez- 
vons  a  pied  ?  Non  ;  il  ne  me  convient  pas  d'y  voyager  a  pied;  do 
sorte  que  j'irai  en  voiture.  En  voiture,  ou  en  diligence?  (public 
coach.)  Quelque  fois  en  voiture ;  quelque  fois  en  diligence.  Croy- 
e/-vous  que  vous  aimerez  a  voyager  en  Allemagne  autant  qu7  en 
Italic?  Jc  n'cn  sms  nen,  en  verite,  (I  do  not  know  anything  about 
it.) — Lo  marchand  que  vous  connaissez  a  Amsterdam  a-t-il  beau- 
coup  de  cR-dit  ?  Oui7  c'est  un  des  premiers  marchands  de  la  villo 
Comment  Papnelez-vous?  On  Pappelle. . .  . — Vous  avez  un  habit 
va  binn ;  Pavez-vons  fait  faire  ici?  Non,  je  ne  Pai  pas 
fait  fairc  ici.  On  done?  Nulle  part.  Je  Pai  achete  tout  fait,  (rr.ndu 
I'ui.rqufM  vous  pas:  dejdfait?  pour,  alrcfidij  rxi<l<  .<' 


240  FORTY-SEVENTH     LESSON.    (3.) 

Parce  que  les  Francais  ne  Pemploient  point.  Vraiment,  il  voug  vi 
aussi  bieri  que  possible. — Je  vous  ai  prete  mon  canif,  n'est-ce  pas? 
L'avex-vous  garde  ?  Je  Pai  garde,  et  je  le  garderai  encore,  car  j'en 
aurai  be^oin  tout  a  Pheure. 

Does  this  merchant  sell  on  credit?  He  does  not  sell  on  credit.— 
Does  it  suit  you  to  buy  for  cash?  It  does  not  suit  me. — Where  did 
you  buy  these  prelty  knives?  I  bought  them  at  (chez)  the  mer- 
chant's whose  warehouse  you  saw  yesterday. — Has  he  sold  them  to 
you  on  credit?  He  has  sold  them  to  me  for  cash. — Do  you  often 
buy  for  cash?  Not  so  often  as  you. — Have  you  forgotten  anything 
lere?  I  have  forgotten  nothing. — Is  there  any  wine  in  this  barrel? 
Fiere  is  some  in  it. — Is  there  any  vinegar  in  this  glass  7  There  is 
none  in  it. — Is  wine  or  cider  in  it  ?  (dedans  ?)  There  is  neither  v 
nor  cider  in  it. — What  is  there  in  it?  There  is  vinegar. 

Are  there  any  men  iri  your  warehouse  7  There  are  some  there. 
— Is  there  anyone  in  the  office?  There  is  no  one  there. — Were 
there  many  people  in  the  theatre?  There  were  many  there. — Will 
there  be  many  people  at  your  ball  7  There  will  be  many  there. — 
Are  there  many  children  that  will  not  play  7  There  are  many  that 
will  not  study,  but  all  will  play. — Hast  thou  cleaned  my  trunk?  I 
have  tried  to  do  it,  but  I  have  not  succeeded. — Do  you  intend  buy- 
ing an  umbrella?  1  intend  buying  one,  if  the  merchant  sells  it  me 
on  rredit. — Do  you  intend  to  keep  mine?  I  intend  to  give  it  you 
back,  if  I  buy  one. — Have  you  returned  the  book  to  my  brother  7 
I  have  not  yet  returned  it. 

VOCABUI.  B  Section. 


You  had  better  .  . . 

I  had  better  .  .  . 

Hi-  had  better  . . . 

Instead  of  keeping  your  horse,  you 
had  better  sell  it. 

Instead  of  selling  his  hat,  he  had  bet- 
ter keep  it. 

To  please,  pleased,  please. 

L  please,  thou  pleasest,  he  pleases. 
To  please  some  otie,  (transitive.) 


t  Vous  ferez  inieux  dc  .  .  . 

t  Je  ferai  micux  de  .  .  . 

t  II  fcra  mieux  de  .  .  . 

t  Au  lieu  de  garder  votre  cheval,  vous 

ferez  mieux  de  le  vendre. 
t  Au  Hen  de  vendre  son  chapeau,  il 

fera  mieux  de  le  garder. 
Plairc,*   4,    o;    p.   p.  plu,   irnpcr. 


Je  plais,  tu  plais,  il  plait. 
Plairc  a  quelqu'un,  (intransitif.) 


Obs.  109.  Plaire,  etant  intransilif,  ne  pent  pas  tire  employe  au  pastif. 
Ainsi,  il  ncfaut  pas  traduire  :  Are  you  pleased  with  this  book  ?  par  the* 
vous  plu  avec  ce  livre?  mats  par  Vvnipcrsonnel. 


Does  this  book  please  you  ? 
\  am  very  well  pleased  with  it,  but 
he  \8  not  much  pleased  with  it. 


Ce  livre  vous  plait-il  ? 
II  me  plait  beaucoup,  mai*  il  ne  lai 
plait  guere. 


FOR 'I  -ON.    (3.)  241 


'•  d  with  it. 
What   are  you  so   much   delighted 

ii  ? 
I  will  u  please. 


II  plait  bcaucoup  a.  Charles. 
Qu'est-ce  qui  (Ul>)  vous  plait  taut  I 

:ii  cc  qu'il  vou?  plnira. 


You  are  pleased  t  foujoke.j  t  Cela  vous  plait  a  dire. 

.Vhat  is  your  pleasure  I  )   t          yous  , 

>u  want?  S 

:«>  you  say  ? 
light  in,  to  be  pleased. 
How  are  you  pit: 

-cry  well  pleased  here. 


t  Plait-il  ? 

t  Se  plaire,*  4.  (a,  avant  un  infm.) 
t  Comment  vous  plak-ez-vous  ici  ? 
t  Je  m'y  plais  heaucoup. 


Obs.  110.     The  impe:  r  the  singular,  and 

by  ce  sont,  when  followed  l»y  a  ?.d  pers.  plur.,  and  only  then.  (§  38,  N.  3,) 


Whose  book  is  this  ? 

e  ? 

It  is  '  :m. 

It  is  your  friends  who  are  right. 


X  qui  est  ce  livre  ?  C'est  le  sicn. 
A  qui  S'jnt  ces  souliers? 

Ce  font  eux  qui  Tont  vu. 

Ce  sont  vos  amis  qui  out  raison. 


QUARASTE-SEI'  i  rIME.    8mc    8 

-il  clu  soleil  ce  matin  ?     Oui,  il  en  fait.     Alors  je  ferai  biea  de 

»1,  n'est-ce  pas  7    Oui,  vous  ferex  bien  cle  le  pren- 

;t-il  beaucoup  de  soleil  en  Angleterre  ?   Non;  le  temps  y  est 

oujours  convert.    V  tonne-t-il  souvent  ?    Non,  il  n?y  fait  pas 

.coup  cle  tonnerre.     A\ez-vous  peur  du  tonnerre?    Non,  mais 

••;it  chien  blanc  en  a  peur.     Plait-il?     Ne  me  comprenez-vous 

uiit;  mais;  je  n'ai  jamais  vu  un  chien  craindre  le  tonnerre. 

peur,  je  vous  assure. — Vous  plaisez-vous  ici  ?     Oui, 

coup,  bcaucoup,  (very  much.)     Cela  vous  plait  a  dire.     Non 

beaucoup. — Que  pensez-vous  du  dernier 

age  de  C.  J) f.     Je  ne  Taime  pas  du  tout.     Cela  vous  plait 

a.  dire,  car  il  plait  a  tout  le  monde.     S'il  plait  a  tout  le  monde,  jo 

vous  assure  qu'il  ne  me  plait  pas. — Quel  parapluie  voulez-vous  ? 

'  celui-ci  que  je  veux.     Kt  quels  gants  vous  faut-il?     Ce  sont 

.-la  qu'il  me  faut. — Que  faut-il  a  votre  cousin?     II  a  ce  dont  il 

<oin.     Alors,  vous  pouvez  vous  en  aller.     Nous  aliens  nous  en 

aller  dans  un  instant.     Adieu,  au  plaisir.     Je  nren  vais  aussi.     Au 

pl;ii<ir,  done. 

What  i.s  your  pleasure,  Sir  ?  I  am  inquiring  after  (402)  your  father. 
— 1-  he  at  home?  No,  Sir,  he  is  gone  out. — What  do  you  say? 
it-il  ?)  1  tell  you  that  he  is  gone  out. — \Vill  you  sit  down  and 
wait  till  he  comes  back?  When  do  you  expect  him?  When  will 
he  come  back  ?  I  do  not  know  exactly.  He  may  return  in  a  quarter 
or  an  hour  or  less;  he  may  return  only  for  dinner.  That  is,  between 
and  ?,  o'clock,  1  suppose,  (supposcr.)  Not  between  2  and 
21 


2-12 


FORTY-EIGIITH     LESSON.    (1.) 


3?  as  you  suppose,  but  between  1  and  2. — Never  mind.  I  have  no 
time  to  wait  now,  so  that  I  had  better  call  again.  As  you  please.— 
What  name  shall  I  tell  him?  Give  him  this  note :  he  will  find  my 
name  in  it.  I  will  give  it  to  him.  Good  morning. — Is  it  our  baker 
or  the  doctor's,  who  has  sold  you  bread  on  credit'?  It  is  ours.  Is 
that  your  son  ?  He  is  not  mine;  he  is  my  friend's  neighbor's  son, 
(le  fils  du  voisin  dc  mon  ami.  {  140 — 2.) — Where  is  yours?  He  ha* 
become  a  traveller,  (voyageur  ;)  he  is  now  in  Paris.  No,  I  am  mis- 
taken, in  Bordeaux. — Do  you  intend  to  sell  your  coat?  I  intend 
keeping  it,  for  I  want  it. — Instead  of  keeping  it,  yea  had  better  sell 
it. — Do  you  sell  your  horses  ?  I  do  not  sell  them. — Instead  of  keep- 
ing them  you  had  better  sell  them. — Does  our  friend  keep  his  para- 
sol? He  does  keep  it;  but  instead  of  keeping  it  he  had  better  sell 
it,  for  it  is  worn  out. — Does  your  son  tear  his  bi  does  tear 

it;  but  he  is  wrong  in  doing  so,  for  instead  of  tearing  it  he  hud  better 
read  it. 


FORTY-EIGHTH   LESSON,  48th.— Quarantc-kuiticmc  Le 

VOCABULURE.    Ire  Section. 

\Vli<  ii  will  you  go  away?  (-132.) 

I  will  go  soon. 

By  and  by. 

He  will  go  away  soon,  (by  and  by.) 

We  will  go  to-morrow. 

They  will  go  to-morrow. 

Thou  wilt  go  immediately. 

Wlien,  (conjonction  adverbiale.) 

What  will  become  of  you  if  you  lose 

your  money  ?  (443.) 
I  know  not  what  will  become  of  me. 
What  will  become  of  him  ? 
What  will  become  of  us  ? 
What  will  become  of  them  ? 
I  do  not  know  what  will  become  of 

them. 

The  turn,  my  turn,  in  his,  in  my  turn. 
Jn  my  brother's  turn. 
Each  in  his  turn. 
When  it  comes  to  your  turn. 
Our  turn  will  come. 

To  take  a  turn,  (a  walk.) 
He  is  gone  to  take  a  walk. 


Quand  vous  en  irez-vous  ? 

Je  m'en  int. 

Tout  u  Theure. 

II  s'en  ira  tout  ii  1'heure. 

Nous  nous  en  irons  domain. 

Us  s'en  iront  demain. 

Tu  t'en  iras  sur  le  champ. 

Lorsquc, (never  used  interrogatively.) 

t  Que  deviendrez-voMs  si  vous  perdez 

votre  argent?  (Obs.  105.) 
t  Je  ne  sais  pas  ce  que  je  deviendrai. 
t  Que  deviendra-t-i7  ? 
t  Que  deviendrons-7ioMs  ? 
t  Que  deviendront-t'Zs  ? 
t  Je  ne  sais  pas  ce  qu'ils  deviendront, 

Le  tour,  mon  tour,  a  son,  dmontsur 
Au  tour  de  mon  frere. 
Chacun  a  son  tour, 
t  Quand  votre  tour  vienara. 
t  Nous  aurons  notre  tour. 
Faire  un  tour. 

Faire  un  tour  de  promenade. 
II  est  alle  faire  un  tour. 
II  est  allc  faire  un  tour  de  prnm« 
nade. 


FORTY-EIGHTif     LESSON,    (l.)  243 


TO  walk  round  the  garden. 
To  run,  to  hurry. 

i  run,  thou  runnest,  he  runs. 
•  u  run  ?     I  do.     I  do  not. 

Shall  I  run  ?  (4G3.)    You  shall  not. 

-/.  behind  him,  them,  me. 

.nt.rnan  gone  away  ? 
lie  has  gone  av. 


t  Faire  un  tour  dc  jardin. 

Courir,*  2,  p.  passe  count,  (inipcra.) 

courez. 

Je  cours,  tu  cours,  il  court. 
Courez-vous  ?  Je  cours.  Je  ne  cours 
pas. 

Courrai-jo  ?  Vous  ne  courrez  point. 
Derricre,  dcrricre  lui,  eux,  moi. 
Get  homme  s'en  est-il  alle*  ? 
II  s'en  est  alle. 


Have  your  brothers  gone  a -A  !  Vos  freres  s'en  sont-ils  a!! 

Tlicy  have  gone  ;:  j  Us  s'en  sont  allus. 
They  have  not  gone  away.  Us  ne  s'en  sont  pas  alh's. 

Have  they  gone  away  ?  •  S'en  sont-ils  allos? 

not  willing  to  go  away.  |   Us  n'ont  pas  voulu  s'en  ai.'ur. 

QUA  :;:  TII&ME.  Ire  Sec. 

Comptez-vous  acheter  un  cheval?    Je  ne  peux  pas  en  aclieler  un, 

car  je  irai  pas  encore  reru  mon  argent. — Me  faut-il  aller  au  tli 

II  ne  vous  faut  pas  y  aller.     Cc  >  votre  tour  d'y  aller,  et  il 

faitma;  Pourquoi  n'allez-vouspas  chezmon  frcro?     Ce 

:on  tour  d'aller  chez  lui. — Est-ce  que  c'est  son  tour  de 

venir  vous  voir?     Oai,  c?est  son  tour,  et  je  n'irai  chez  lui  qu'aprc.s 

hex  moi.     Corame  il  vous  plaira. — Le  quel  de  ces 

!  commence  a  parler  ?     Est-ce  le  plus  grand  ou  le  plus 

petit  ?     Le  plus  age  ou  le  plus  jeune  ?     Ce  n'est  pas  cela  qui  fait  la 

difference,  (the  difference,  nom  fern.)     Quoi  done?     Celui  qui  est 

studieux  apprend  et  commence  a  parler.     Et  que  fait  celui  qui  ne 

J'estpas?    II  apprend  a  lire  eta  traduirs  un  peu;  maisnon  a  parler, 

.ipprendra  jamais,  s:il  ne  devientpas  (06s.  105)  plus  studieux. 

J'espere  qu:il  le  deviendra.     Je  Pespere  aussi. 

you  going  away  already  ?  I  am  not  going  yet. — When  will 
that  man  go  away?  He  will  go  presently. — Will  you  go  away 
BOOH  ?  I  shall  go  away  next  Thursday. — When  will  your  friends  go 
away  ?  They  will  go  away  next  month. — When  wilt  thou  go  away? 
I  will  go  away  instantly. — Why  has  your  father  gone  away  so  soon  ? 
(si  tot  ?)  He  has  promised  his  friend  to  be  at  his  house  at  a  quarter 
to  nine,  30  that  he  went  away  early  in  order  to  keep  what  he  has 
Atomised. — When  shall  we  go  away?  We  shall  go  away  to-mor 
row. — Shall  we  start  early?  We  shall  start  at  five  o'clock  in  the 
morning. — When  will  you  go  away?  I  shall  go  away  as  soon  as  I 
nave  done  writing, — When  will  your  children  go  away  ?  They  will 
go  as  soon  as  they  have  done  their  exercises. 

\Vi.l  you  go  when  (lorsquc)  I  shall  go?     I  shall  <ro  away  when 
yon  g  vous  TOUS  en  ircz.} — Will  our  neighbors  soon  gc 


244 


FORTY-EIGHTH     LESSON.     (2.) 


away  ?  They  will  go  away  when  they  have  done  speaking. — What 
will  become  of  your  son  if  he  does  not  study  ?  If  he  does  not  study 
he  will  learn  nothing. — What  will  become  of  you  if  you  lose  your 
money  ?  I  do  not  know  what  will  become  of  me. — What  will  be- 
come of  your  friend  if  he  loses  his  pocket-book?  I  do  not  know 
what  will  become  of  him  if  he  loses  it. — What  has  become  of  your 
aon"2  I  do  not  know  what  has  become  of  him. — Has  he  enlisted? 
Ho  has  not  enlisted. — -What  will  become  of  us  if  our  friends  1^0 
away?  I  do  not  know  what  will  become  of  us  if  they  go  away.— 
What  has  become  of  your  relations  ?  They  have  gone  away. 

VOCABULAIRE.   2de  Section. 
A  blow,  a  kick,  a  knock,  a  stab. 
A  chip,  a  ship. 

you  given  ihiit  man  a  blow  ? 


S  Un  coup. 


un  coup   a  eel 


I  have  given  \i\m  one. 
A  blow  with  a  stick. 
A  kick,  (with  the  foot.) 
A  blow  with  the  fist. 

of  a  knife. 

•  •I,  or  the  report  of  a  gun. 
Thr  shot  of  a  pistol. 
A  glance  of  the  eye. 
A  clap  of  thunder. 
To  <iivc  a  cut  with  a  k 
To  give  a  man  a  blow  with  a  stick. 

To  give    a  man   a  kick,   (with  the 

foot.) 
To  give  a  man  a  bhw  with  the  fist. 

To  pull,  to  draw. 

To  shoot,  tojirc.  $ 

To  fire  a  gun.  ; 

To  lire  a  pistol.  | 

To  fire  at  some  one. 

I  have  fired  at  that  bird. 

I  have  fired  twice. 

I  have  fired  three  times. 

I  have  fired  several  times. 

How  many  times  have  you  fired  ? 

Mow  many  timej  have  you  fired  at 

that  bird  ? 
[  have  fired  at  if  several  times. 


Avez-vous   domic 

homme  ? 

Je  lui  en  &i  domu'  un. 
Un  coup  de  baton. 
Un  coup  de  pied. 
Un  coup  de  pping. 
Un  coup  de  couteau. 
Un  coup  de  fusil. 
Un  coup  de  pistolet. 
Un  coup  d'ccil. 
Un  coup  de  toni; 
Donner  un  coup  de  coir 
Donner  un   coup   do    baton    a 

houi: 
Donner    un  coup   de    pied    A 

hommc. 
Donner   un    coup 

homme. 

Tirer,  1. 

t  Tirer  un  coup  de  fusil. 

t  Tirer  un  coup  de  pistolet. 

t  Tirer  un  coup  de   fusL   sur  qual- 

qu'un. 
t  J'ai    tiro  un  coup   de  fusil    a  oct 

oiseau. 

t  J'ai  tire  deux  coups  de  fusil. 
t  J'ai  tire  trois  corps  de  fusil. 
t  J'ai  tire  quelque  coups  dc  fusil. 
t  Combien  de  coups  de  fusil  avez 

vous  tires  ? 
Combien  de  fois  avez-vous  tiro  sur 

cet  oiseau  ? 
J'ai  tire"  plusieurs  fois  sur  Tui- 


poing    a   un 


FORT  r-  EIGHTH     LESSOU.    (2.) 


1  have  heard  a  shot. 

He  has  heard  the  : 

We  have  heard  a  chip  oi'  thunder. 

The  ; 

To  cast  an  eye  in-tut  some  ont  or  some- 
thing. 

Have  you    cast   an   eye   upon   that 
book? 

o  upon  it. 


t  J'ai  cntendu  uti  coup  de  fusil. 
t  Jl  a  cntendu  un  coup  de  pistolet. 

uvons  cntendu  un  coup  de 
tonnerre. 
Le  poing. 

p  d'ail  surquilqu'unov 
quelque  chose. 

•  us  jete  un  coup  d'ceil  eur  ce 
livre  ? 
J'y  ai jete  uncoup  d'ceil. 


Qr.v  2-le  Bee. 

Curnbien  de  fois  les  ennemis  out- ids  tire  surnous?     Ilsonttire 

,  nous.     Ont-ils  tue  quelqu'un  ?     Us  n'ont  tue  per- 

Bonne. — Qu'avo/.-vou.s  fait  de  mon  livre?    Je  Pai  mis  derriere  le 

e. — Dois-je  vous  repondre?     Vous  mo  repon- 

votrc  tour. — Est-ce  le  tour  de  mou  frere?     Quand  son  tour 

viendra,  je  lui  d«  .  a  son  tour. — Avrz-vous  fait 

un  tourde  promenade  ce  matin  .'     J';;i  i'uit  un  tour  cle  jardin. — Oil 

votre  oncle  «  ile  se  promener. — DC  quel  cote  est-il 

alle  ?     De  ce  cote-hi. — Vous  vous  trompez,  il  est  alle  du  cote  du 

pont,  i;  •>?     Oui,  ii  est  alle  du  cote  ou  il  se  promene  tou- 

jours. — Pourtjuoi  ce  garcon-lii  court-il  si  vite?     II  a  peur  de  cet 

iiger  vcul-il  lui  faire  du  mal  ?     Oui,  il  veut  lui  don- 

ner  un  coup  de  pied  ou  de  poing. — Pourquoi  done  ?     Que  lui  a  fait 

le  gar^on  ?     Le  petit  mechant  (wicked  little  fellow)  lui  a  tire  led 

cheveux. — Uui  court  derriere  nous?    Notre  chien  court  derriere  nous 

Apercevex-vous  1'oiseau  qui  est  derriere  Parbre?    Je  Papercois. 

Does  not  your  boy  listen  to  what  you  tell  him'?  He  does  not  listen 
to  it,  if  I  do  not  give  him  a  beating,  (<fe  coups.) — Why  do  those 
children  not  work  ?  Their  master  has  given  them  blows  with  his 
fist,  so  that  they  will  not  work. — Why  has  he  given  them  blows 
with  his  fist?  Because  they  have  been  disobedient. — Have  you 
fired  a  gun  ?  I  have  fired  three  times. — At  what  did  you  fire  ?  I 
fired  at  a  bird. — Have  you  fired  a  gun  at  that  man?  I  have  fired  a 
pistol  at  him. — Why  have  you  fired  a  pistol  at  him  ?  Because  ho 
has  given  me  a  stab  with  his  knife. — How  *nany  times  have  you 
fired  at  that  bird  ?  I  have  fired  at  it  twice. — Have  you  killed  it  ?  1 
have  killed  it  at  the  second  shot,  (au  deuxieme  coup.) 

Have  you  killed  that  bird  at  the  first  shot  (du  premier  coup?)  I 
have  killed  it  at  the  fourth,  (du  quatricmc.) — Do  you  fire  at  the 
birds  which  you  see  upon  the  trees,  or  at  those  which  you  see  in  the 
gardons?  I  fire  neither  at  those  which  I  see  upon  the  trees,  nor  at 
those  which  I  see  in  the  gardens,  but  at  those  which  I  perceive  on 


UiG  FORTY-NINTH     LESSON.    (1.) 

me  castle  behind  the  wood. — Have  you  a  wish  to  fire  at  that  bird* 
I  have  a  desire  to  fire  at  it. — Why  do  you  not  fire  at  those  birds?  I 
cannot,  for  I  have  a  sore  finger. — When  did  the  captain  fire  ?  He 
fired  when  his  soldiers  fired. — How  many  birds  have  you  shot  at  1 
I  have  shot  at  all  that  I  have  perceived,  but  I  have  killed  ncne, 
because  my  gun  is  good  for  nothing. — Have  you  cast  an  eye  upon 
that  man?  I  have  cast  an  eye  upon  him. — Has  he  seen  you ?  He 
nas  not  seen  me,  for  he  has  sore  eyes. — Have  you  drunk  of  that 
wine  ?  I  have  drunk  of  it,  and  it  has  done  me  good. — Why  have 
your  pupils  gone  away  '?  Why  did  they  run  so  ?  They  went  away, 
and  they  have  run  so  quickly,  because  they  did  not  wish  to  be 
by  the  man  whose  (}  88)  dog  they  have  killed. 


FORTY-NINTH  LKSSOX,  49th.— Quara.\tc-ncuviemc  'me. 

VOCABULAIBE.   Ire  Section. 


To  h.-:ir  Ol  •;:•(!  of.  .  . 

1  lav.-  you  heard  of  your  brother  ? 

I  have  hi-artl  of  him. 

Is  it  long  since  you  breakfasted  ? 

How  long  is  it  since  you  breakfasted  f 

Obs.  111.  The  impersonal  il  v  a 
there  is,  there  arc,  when  it  is  used  in 
it  since  t 

It  13  not  long  since  I  breakfasted. 

It  is  a  great  while  since. 
It  is  a  short  time  since. 
How  long  is  it  since  you  heard  of 
your  brother  ? 

It  is  a  year  since  I  heard  of  him. 

ft  is  only  a  year  since. 

rt  is  more  than  a  year  since. 

Obs.  112.     Than,  before  a  cardinal 
More  than  nine. 
More  than  twenty  times. 
It  is  hardly  six  months  since. 


Entendre  parlerde  .  .  .  J.nu  ndu  par- 

lerde... 
t  Avez-vous  entendu  porter  de  votro 

t  J'cn  ai  entendu  par 

t  Y  a-t-il  long  temps  que  vous  avez 

dt'jeund  ? 
t  Combien   de   temps  y  a-t-il  que 

vous  avez  dejcunu  ? 

cannot  be  rendered  into  English  by 
reply  to  the  question :  Ifow  long  i* 

t  II  n'y  a  pas  long-temps  que  j'ai 

dejeund. 

t  II  y  a  trus-long-temps. 
t  II  y  a  peu  de  temps, 
t  Combien  de  temps  y  a-t-il  que  vous 
avez  entendu  parler  de  votre  frere  7 

It  II  y  a  un  an  que  j'ai  entendu  par- 
ler de  lui. 
1  II  y  a  un  an  que  j'en  ai  entondc 
parler. 

It  II   n'y  a  qu'un  an. 
t  II  y  a  plus  d'un  an. 
number,  is  rendered  by  ae  (1C1, 
Plus  «fc  neuf. 
Plus  de  vingt  fois. 
t  II  y  a  a  peine  six  mois. 


k'OUTY-NJNTII     LESSON.    ( 1 .)  247 

.    These  few  hours.  [  t  II  y  a  quelqucs  heures. 
<nr  age.      Tiiis  half  hour,  j  t  II  y  a  une  demi-heure. 

;_jo.     These  .        t  11  y  a  deux  ans. 

•  hours  and  a  half  ago.    19J,  N.  3.)  I  t  II  y  a  deux  heures  et  den. 


A  fortnight  ago.    These  two  weeks. 

•light. 

you  been  lon^  in  France  ? 


t  II  y  a  quinze  jours. 

t  Quinze  jours.1 

t  Y  a-t-il  long-temps  que  v< 


France  T 

;istene.e  or  of  action,  when  in  its 

ays  expressed  in  the  ',se,  while  in  French  it  ia 

expressed  you  been  long  in  Prune? !  means 

tfiat  j  :i,  in  French,  que  vous  ttcs  and  not  yue  vous 

ii  that  you  are  no  longer  at  the  place. 


M  been  in  Paris  these  three 


II  y  a  trois  ans  qu'il  est  a  Paris. 
II  y  a  deux  ans  que  je  demeurc  ici. 


K-NEUVifey.  Ire  Sec. 

-lu  do  joli  oombien  y  a-t-il  que  vous  les  av»v.  ? 

II  n'y  a  <jue  :  latre  jours.     Y  a-t-il  long-temps  que  voas 

lire?     Non,  il  n'y  a  que  quelques  minutes. 

que  votre  cousin  est  parti  ?     Oui,  c'est  depuis  cela. 

Combien  y  a-i-il  qu'il  est  parti  ?     II  n?y  a  pas  long-temps. — Quand 

contre  mon  pere  ?    Jo  Pai  rencontre  il  y  a  quinze 

jours.     Y  a-t-il  autant  que  cela  ?    Je  le  crois.    Ne  vous  trompez- 

vous  pas  ?   il  n'y  a  pas   si   long-temps   que  ca.     Non,  je  ne  me 

trompe  pas.     II  y  a  juste  quinze  jours  aujourd'hui,  que  nous  nous 

sommes  rencontres  au  pont  de  fer. — Y  a-t-il  long-temps  que  vous 

connaissez  ce  marchaiv.  Quel  marchand  suisse  ?    Je  n'en 

connais  aucun.     II  dit  qu7il  vous  connait,  lui.     II  se  trompe. — II  y  a 

prer-  de  trois  mois  que  votre  fils  est  en  Europe,  n'est-ce  pas?    Trois 

mois.     Laissez-moi  voir.     Mai,  Juin.     Non,  il  n7y  a  que  deux  mois. 

Vous  a-t-il  ecrit?   Oui,  plusieurs  fois.    D'ou?  De  Liverpool  d'abord: 

ensuite.  de  Londres,  ou  il  est  a  present.     Y  a-t-il  quinze  jours  qu'il 

i?    Oui,  il  y  a  environ  15  jours.     S'y  amuse-t-il  ?    II  m'ecrit 

:>lait  beaucoup.     Que  pense-t-il  de  Liverpool?     II  ne  m'en 

a  pas  dit  grand'  chose ;  il  n'y  est  reste  que  trois  ou  quatre  jours. 

Have  you  heard  of  any  one  ?  I  have  not  heard  of  any  one,  for  I 
have  not  gone  out  this  morning. — Have  you  not  heard  of  the  man 
who  has  killed  a  soldier?  I  have  not. — Have  you  heard  of  my 
brothers  ?  I  have  not. — Of  whom  has  your  cousin  heard?  He  has 

1  Literally  !."»  tlmjg.  \-.\  -j  weeks  there  are  15  days  and  only  11  nights.' 
bonce,  fortnight. 


248  FORTY-NINTH     LESSON.    (2.) 

heard  of  his  fiiend  who  is  gone  to  America. — Is  it  kn^  since  he 
heard  of  him?    It  is  not  long  since  he  heard  of  him. — How  long  id 
it?     It  is  only  a  month. — Have  you  been  long  in  Paris?     Thesa 
three  years. — Has  your  brother  been  long  in  London  ?     He  has  been 
there  these  ten  years. — How  long  is  it  since  you  dined  ?     It  is  long 
since  I  dined,  but  it  is  not  long  since  I  supped. — How  long  is  it  si 
you  supped  ?     It  is  half  an  hour. — How  long  have  you  had  these 
books?    I  havo  had  them  these  three  months. — How  long  is  it  n 
your  cousin  set  out?     It  is  more  than  a  year  since  be  set  out. 

What  is  become  of  the  man  v.  >nt  you  money':     I  do  not 

know  what  is  become  of  him,  for  it  is  a  great  while  since  (quc  je  ne) 
I  saw  him. — Is  it  long  since  you  heard  (que  vous  n'avcz  en!- 
varler)  of  the  soldier  who  gave  your  friend  a  cut  with  the  k; 
It  is  more  than  a  year  r-ince  I  heard  of  nirn. — How  long  : 
been   Learning  French?     1  have  been   learning   it   only  these   live 
months. — Do  you  know  already  how  to  speak  it  :     V    :  >ee  that  I 
am  beginning  to  speak  it. — Have  the  children  of  the  Knirlish  noble- 
men been  learning  it  long?    They  have  been  learning  it  these  thren 
years,  and  they  do  not  yet  begin  to  speak. — Why  dn  they  not  know 
how  to  speak  it  ?    They  do  not  know  how  to  speak  it,  because  they 
are  learninir  it. badly. — Why  do  they  not  learn  it  well  '     They  have 
not  a  good  master,  so  that  they  do  not  learn  it  well. 

VOCADULAIRE.     2dc  Section. 


How  In:  ii  had  that  : 

I  have  had  it  these  five  years. 

How  long?  (since  what  time?) 

How  long  has  he  been  here  ? 

These  thrsc  days. 

This  month. 

It  is  six  months  since  I  spoke  to  him. 


Combicn  y  a-t-il  que  vous 

chcval  ? 

II  y  a  cinq  nns  que  je  I';.i. 
Depuis  quand  ? 
Depuis  quand  est-il  ici  ? 
Depuis  trois  jours. 
Depuis  un  mois. 
II  y  a  six  mois  que  je  nc  lui  ai  parl£. 


Obs.  114.     The  meaning  of,  It  is  6  months  since  I  spoke  to  him, 
dently :  /  A.ive  not  spoken  to  hi?n  these  6  months.     When  a  negative  turn  may 
be  given  to  the  English  sentence,  the  French  use  KE,  but  suppress  PAS. 
(That  is,  they  suppress  only  a  part  of  t*hc  negative,  instead  of  suppressing  it 
altogether,  as  the  English  do.  $  145 — 1.) 


saw  you,  it  has  rained  very 

often. 
It  is  more  than  a  year  since  I  heard 

of  him. 

To  come  from.     To  have  just. 
I  come  from  your  brother's  office. 
I  nave  just  seen  your  brother. 


Depuis  que  je  ne  vous  ai  vu,  ii  a  plu 


tres-souvent. 


II  y  a  plus  d'un  an  qre  je  /i'on  ai 

entendu  parler. 
Venir,*  de.  (243.) 

Je  viens  du  bureau  de  \otrc  frere. 
Je  viens  de  voir  votre  frere. 


Obs.  115.     To  express  an  action  very  recen.ly  past,  use  the  verb  ventr 
immediately  followed  by  the  preposition  de>  and  an  infinitive.  ($  145 — 3.) 


FORTY-NINTH     LESSON. 


24',) 


H*  has  just  diMie  writing. 
Tiie  men  1. .. 

/.ing  long? 

but  just  come. 

•  f  lilt   jlift. 

To  do  one's 

I  will  do  my  best,  (as  well  as  I  can.) 
.  ill  do  his  best,  (as  well  as  be  can.) 

you  spent  to-day  T 
MS  a  month  to  live 

Near  f>- 

I  lui  i 


t  II  vient  d'ecrirc. 

t  Lea  homines  vicnitent  d'arriver. 

il  long- temps  quo  cet  hommt 
attend  ( 
t  II  ne  fait  tjue  r/'arri\ 

'/uctle,  used  only  negatively 
t  Fuirc  tie  son  mieux. 
t  Je  :  :i  mieux. 

:eu.x. 

Dipenstr,  1. 
Combi>  aujour 

d'hui? 
II  a  cinquante  ecus  par  mois  ;\  do 

penscr. 
Neveu,    plur.  mcs  ncvcus.  f!)8.) 

Par  Id. 

vous?  (imparfuit.)     J'; 

>  pas  ?      Je  n'avuis  pas 


If  Sec. 

que  vous  11  le  jeune  hominc  ^m  a 

le  iiKiitrc  UVL-C  lc(|uel  nous  Pavoi. 

i'aivu({  1-15-1.) — Combieriy  a-t-il  (jiiu 

cet  «•  nang£  '     1.  •';  il  y  a  quelques  minutes. — Com- 

:-il  que  ces  enfants  ont  bu?     Lesquels?     Ces  petits-la  ou 

1  es  grands-ci.     Ceux-la !     Oh !  ils  ont  bu  ii  y  a  uri 

i   d'heurc.      Ne    vous    trompez-vous   pas?      Non,  je    ne   me 

s  assure'  car,  j?ai  vu  le  jeune  valet  donner  du 

laitaux  uns  et  de  Peau  a  — Combien  y  a-t-il  que  votre  u 

II  n?y  est  pas.     Je  le  croyai 

.  ou  est-il  done?     II  est  a  Baltimore.     Depuis  quand  y  est- 

.     C'est  done  votre  cousia  qui  est  en 

Oh!  c:est  difTerent.     II  y  est,  c'est  vrai.     Combien  y 

qu'il  y  est?     II  y  a  un  m^is.     Y  a-t-il  vu  notre  ministre?     II 

1'a  vu  plus  de  dix  fois.     Je  me  trompe,  je  veux  dire  plus  de  vingt 

:  il  le  voit  presque  tous  les  jours.     Que  venez-vous  de  me  dire'^ 

Ils  se  voient?     Oui,  sans  doute.    Je  les  croyais  ennemis.     Ils  ne  le 

J'en  suis  charmc.    N'aviez-vous  pas  mon  journal  Italien 

bier  apres-midi?     Je  1'avais  alors,  mais  je  ne  Tai  plus. 

meet  the  lawyer's  nephew  ?     I  met  him  just  now. 
— Where  have  you  just  met  him?     I  met  him  close  by  here,  (/otil 
•  I'iri.) — AVhorn  did  you  see  with  him?    I  saw  him  alone. — Did 
any  harm?     He  did  me  no  (331)  harm,  for  he  is  ;i 
..)  —  U'hrie    are    my  gloves?     They   (rn)    1 


250 


FORTY-NINTH     LESSON.    (3.) 


thrown  them  away,  for  they  were  worn  out,  quite. — Who  is  th& 
man  who  has  just  spoken  to  you?  He  is  a  merchant. — What  ha/» 
the  shoemaker  Just  brought?  He  has  brought  the  shoes  which  he 
lias  made  us. — Who  are  the  men  that  have  just  arrived  ?  They  aro 
Russians. — Where  did  your  uncle  dine  yesterday?  He  dined  at  the 
hotel. — How  much  did  he  spend?  He  spent  five  francs. — How 
much  has  he  a  month  to  live  upon  ?  He  has  two  hundred  francs  a 
month  to  live  upon.  It  is  about  forty  dollars;  is  it  not?  Yes,  a 
little  less. — Do  you  throw  your  hat  away  ?  I  do  not  throw  it  away, 
for  it  fits  me  very  well. — How  much  have  you  spent  to-day  ?  J 
have  not  spent  much ;  I  have  spent  only  two  francs. — Do  you  spend 
every  day  as  much  as  that?  I  sometimes  spend  more  than  that. — 
Has  Unit  nephew  of  yours  (votre  neveu)  been  waiting  long?  He  has 
but  just  come. — What  does  he  wish  ?  He  wishes  to  speak  to  you. — 
Are  you  willing  to  do  that?  I  am  willing  to  do  it. — Shall  you  be 
able  (46^)  to  do  it  well  ?  I  will  do  my  best.— Will  this  man  be  able 
to  do  that  ?  Ho  will  be  able  to  do  it,  for  he  will  do  his  bust. — llavn 
you  my  yellow  copy-book?  I  had  it  this  morning,  but  I  have  it  no 
lonirer. — I  thought  you  had  it  yet. — You  have  made  a  mistake.  ( 132, 
44«.) 

VOCA  Sec. 

B  been  found  ? 

;  >und. 

Tin-  me:i  have  been  8CCI1. 
Our  children  have  been  praised  and 
:-drd,  because  they  have  been 

good  and  studious. 
By  whom  have  tlu  y  bei  :i  n-wardi-d  > 
Uy  whom  have  \vc  been  blamed  ! 
To  pa  a  a.          To  go  by.         Before. 

Obs.  lir>.     fit  fore  is  expressed  in  French  by  avant  when  it  denotes  pri 
priiy,  (\31,}  and  by  devant ,  when  it  signifies  in  presence  of.     Ex. 


Les  chcvaux  ont- 
Ils  ont  etc  trouves. 
Les  hommes  ont  etc  vus. 
Nos  enfants  ont  e'te  I.H: 

penses,  parce  qu 

et  assidus. 

Par  qui  ont-ils  cte  nVompci: 
Par  qui  avons-nous  etc  Man: 
Passer,  1.  1\  runt. 


To  pass  before  some  one. 

To  pass  before  a  place. 

A  plncf,  this  place,  this  line  place. 

I  have  passed  before  the  theatre. 
lie    pissed   before    /  did  before  the 

museum. 

Vt>  upend  time  in  sornctJiifi^. 
What  do  you  spend  your  time  in  ? 
I  spend  my  time  in  studying. 
What  has  he  spent  his  time  in  ? 
What  shall  we  spend  our  time  in  ? 
To  miss,  to  fail  to. 


Passer  devant  quelqu'un. 
Passer  devant  un  endroit. 
Un  endroit,  cet  endroit,  cc  bel  en 

droit. 

J'ai  passe*  devant  le  theatre 
II   a  passe   avant    moi   dcvant    Id 

musee. 

Passer  le  temps  d  quelquechcte. 
t  A  quoi  passez-vous  le  temps  ? 
t  Je  passe  le  temps  a  etudier. 
t  A  quoi  a-t-il  passtS  le  temps? 
t  A  quoi  passerons-nous  le  temps  f 
Manquer,  1,  (de  av.  1'inf.) 


FORTY-NINTH      LESSCN.    (3.) 


251 


Do  not  fail  to  go.  Do  not  fail  to  do  it, 

(do   not  neglect  it.)    Mind  !    (you 

hear  ?) 
The  merchant  has  failed  to  bring  the 

money.  Did  he  ? 

You  have  missed  your  turn. 
You  have  failed  to  come. 
Send  them  to  me.    Don't  you  forget 

it  now,  (don't  you  fail,)  mind  ! 
To  be  good  for  sontct/u 
Of  what  use  is  that  ? 
ft  is  good  for  nothing. 
4  good-for-nothin:: ftlloir.         He  is  a 

good-for-nothing  fellow, 
fa  the  gun  which  you  have  bought  a 

good  one  ? 

:  is  good  for  liotl; 
y.»u  thrown 

thrown  away  what   is  good 
nothing,  (worth  nothing.) 


Ne  manquez  pas  d'y  aller.       '   N'y 
manquez  pas.     Entendex-vcus? 

Le  marchand  a  manque  d  apporter 

1'argent.  Y  a-t-il  manque  ? 

Vous  avez  manque  votre  tour. 
Vous  avez  manque  do  venir. 
Envoyez-les-moi.  N'y  manquez  paa 

entendez-vous  ? 
t  £tre  ban  a  quelq-.te  chose. 
t  A  quoi  cela  est-ii  bon  ? 
t  Cela  n'est  bon  a  rien. 
Un  vanri*  n.  C'est  un  vauriou. 

(*  39,  N.  3.) 
Le  fusil  que  vous  avez  ach-fte*  est-il 

bon  ? 

Non,  il  nc  vaut  rien. 
Avcz-vous  jete  quclquc  chose  ? 
II  a  jetd  co  qui  n'est  bon  a  rien,  (ce 

qui  ne  vaut  ri« 


QUARANTI:  TII£ME.    8me  Sec. 

?     On  les  a  trouves.    Ou  ont-ils  ete  trou- 

:e  trouves  derriere  le  sofa,  de  ce  cote-ci  du  pupitre. — 

vu  par  quelqu'un?     Je  rfai  etc  vu  par  personne.    Je 

croyais  que  vous  aviez  etc  vu  par  le  nouveau  jardiriier.     Je  croyais 

nc  pas  avoir  etu  vu.  ($  171 — 7.) — Attendez-vous  quelqu'unt     Nous 

n'aUendons  que  notre  cousin,  le  capitaine.     Kst-il  arrive?     Oui,  il 

river.     Combien  y  a-t-il  qu'il  est  ici?     11  ne  fait  que  d;ar- 

river.     Envoyez-moi  chercher  lorsqu;il  viendia.  n'y  manquez  pas; 

-'?     Ne  pouvez-vous  pas  Pattendre'?   II  sera  ici  avant 

une  demi-heure.    Je  ne  peux  pas;  je  suis  presse  dans  ce  moment. 

5,  je  vous  enverrai  cliercher.    S'il  vous  plait:  n?y  manque/  pas, 

entendex-vous  ?     Non,  pon,  soyez  tranquille,  (depend  upon  it.)     Je 

n'y  manquerai  pas. — Le  roi  (king)  a-t-il  passe  sur  le  pont  de  fil  de 

fur7?    Non,  il  a  passe  devant. — Qu'est-ce  que  ce  vaurien  attend?   Je 

ne  sais  pas  co  qu;iJ  nUend.    Dites-lui  de  s'en  aller.     11  s'en  va. — Oil 

*.re  neveu?    T^ne^: ;  le  voilfi. 

Has  the  kin";  passed  here?  (p^ir  ict?)     He  has  not  passed  here, 
(par  id,)  but  before  the  theatre. — Has  he  not  passed  before  the 
castle  ?     He  has  passed  there,  but  I  have  not  seen  him. — How  do 
you  spend  your  time  ?  (A  quoi . . . .)     I  spend  :ny  time  in  studying. 
— What  does  your  brother  spend  his  time  it  1     He  spends  his  time 
in  reading  and  playing. — Does  this  man  spend  his  time  in  work! 
— He  is  a  good-for-nothing  feilow ;  he  spends  his  time  in  drinl 
and  playing. — What  do  your  children  spend  iheir  time  in?     Tliev 


252 


FIFTIETH     LESSON.    (1.) 


spend  their  time  in  learning. — Can  you  pay  me  what  you  owe  me1 
— I  cannot  pay  it  you.  for  the  merchant  has  failed  to  bring  me  my 
money. 

Why  have  you  breakfasted  without  me  ?  You  failed  to  come  at 
nine  o'clock,  so  that  we  have  breakfasted  without  you. — Has  the 
merchant  brought  you  the  gloves  which  you  bought  at  his  house, 
(chzz  h'A  ?)  He  has  failed  to  bring  them  to  me. — Has  he  sold  them 
to  you  on  credit?  He  has  sold  them  to  me;  on  the  contrary,  for 
cash. — Do  you  know  those  men?  I  do  not  know  them;  but  1 
believe  that  they  are  (ce  sont)  good-for-nothing  fellows,  for  they 
spend  their  time  in  playing. — Why  did  you  fail  to  come  10  my 
father's,  this  morning'?  The  tailor  did  not  bring  me  the  coat  which 
he  promised  me,  so  that  I  could  not  do  what  I  had  p: 


FIFTIETH  LESSON,  50th.— Cinquantitmc  Lcron,  5twc. 
VOCABULAIUE.     Ire  Sec. 

For,  very  far,  t-  niMijJi.       I    A«m,  fort  loin,  Hop  loin,  astc/  loin. 

//«(/'  m  u-htit  ilistuitct •?)    I    Quell c  distance ? 

Ol>s.  117.     The   Impersonal  il  v  a  cannot  be  rendered  into   English  bj 

l/ir/v  is,  tin  />  •//•<  ,  whrii  it  is  u.-eil  in  reply  to  thcqucs;.  •:  r  (  (Jut  II* 

distance  f 


How  far  is  it  from  li-  re  to  Paris  t 

Is  it  far  In »ni  IK  re  to  Paris  ? 

Is  it  far?  It  is  not  far. 

How  many  i;;:!i  s  is  it? 

K  mile.  Is  it  ten  miles? 

It  is  more  than  two  hundred  miles 

from  New  York  to  Washington. 
It  is  rvsarly   a  hundred   miles  from 

Berlin  to  Vienna. 
From  Venice,  from  Havre. 
I  am  from  Paris. 
What  countryman  are  you? 
Are  you  from  France  ? 
1  am.  I  am  not. 

The  Parisian. 

He  is  a  Parisian,  (from  Paris.) 
The  king.        The  philosopher 
The  preceptor,  the  tutor. 
The  innkeeper,  the  landlord. 
\rc  you  an  Englishman  ? 
Whence  do  you  come  ? 
1  come  from  Paris. 


Quelle  distance  y  a-t-il  d'ici  a  Paris  ? 

Y  a-t-il  loin  d'ici  a  Paris  ? 

Y  a-t-il  loin  ?         II  n'y  a  pas  loin. 

Combien  de  milles  y  a-t-il  ? 

Un  mille.     Y  a-t-il  dix  mil1' 

II  y  a  phis  de  acux  cents  milles  d« 

New  York  a  Washington. 
II  y  a  environ  cent  milles  de  Berlic 

a  Vienne. 

De  Venise,  du  Havre.  ($9.) 
Je  suis  de  Paris. 
t  De  quel  pays  etes-vous  ? 
Ktes-vous  de  Frrjice  ? 
J'en  suis.  Je  n'en  suis  paa 

Le  Parisien 
t  II  est  Parisien. 
Le  roi.        Le  philo»cphe. 
Le  precepteur. 
L'aubergiste,  1'hote. 
fctes-vous  Anglais  ? 
D'ou  venez-vous  ? 
Je  viens  de  Paris. 


FIFTIETH     LE880K.    (1.) 


253 


TO  fee,  to  fly,  run  av 
Run 

I  run  away,  thou  runnest  a-- 
runs  ;. 

I  lly  because  I  am  afraid. 
To  assure. 

•.re  you  that  he  is  arn\ 
To  hear  a  sound,  a  noise. 

«>ws 
you  heard  nothing  new  ? 

rd  nothing  i 


s'enfuyant,  fui. 

Eniuyez-vous.  Ne  vous  enfuycz  pan 
Je  m'enfuis,  tu  t'cnfuis,  il  s'enfuiu 

Pourquoi  vous  enfuyez-vous  ? 
Je  m'enfuis  parce  que  j'ai  peur. 
Assurer,  1. 

Je  vous  assure  qu'il  est  nrrivd. 
ire  un  son,  un  bruit. 
dre  line  nouvdlc  (noin  fi'm.) 
t  N  'avez-  vous  rien   appris  de  nou 


1  Je  n  ai  rie  i  nppris  de  nouveau. 


rixf.rANTife.ME  TII£MK.     Ire  Sec. 

-vous   quelque  part?     Pourquoi  me  c!  vous  celat 

,ue  vous  etes  pret  a  ••/.  lout  ce 

!  fjiut  pour  cela.     Chapr  KU.  (§140 

— <>.)     Vous  avez  raison.     Jc  lir  pour  1  ••     C\ nu- 

ll y  a  rri\  —  V  u-t-il 

.ishington  quc  do  Philadelphia  a  Pmvi- 
-fait  si  loin. — Qui  c  .»us?     Ce 

•iihiii. — Ne  craignex-vous  pas  ce  gros  cliien 
'     Je  ne  le  ei  ;>«is  nit-chant;  il   if  a  jainui.-i 

mordu  personne.     N'a-t-il  pas  mordu  Taubergiste ?     Nou,  il  ne  lui 
a  pas  fait  de  inal.—  ( }  116)  vous  plait  tant,  mon  jeune 

••u?    Ce  petit  chien-la.    II  e.-t  -  :;t  qu;il  fait  tout  ce  (ss  91) 

N  uviez-vous  pas  mon  dictionnaire  ce  matin  ?     Si  fait; 
je  1^  je  1'ai  encore.     En  avez-vous  eu  besoin?     Non,  pas 

•is  en  avez  besoin,  je  vous  le  rendrai.     Don 
Uvmoi.     Le  voici. 

from  Paris  to  London?  It  is  nearly  two  hundred 
miles  Irom  Paris  to  London. — Is  it  far  from  here  to  Berlin?  It  is? 
far. — ls  it  far  from  there  to  Vienna?  It  is  almost  a  hundred  and 
fifty  n.iles  from  there  to  Vienna. — Is  it  further  from  Paris  to  Blois 
tnan  from  Orleans  to  Paris?  It  is  further  from  Orleans  to  Paris  than 
from  Paris  to  Blois. — How  far  is  it  from  Paris  to  Berlin?  It  is 
almost  a  hundred  and  thirty  miles  from  Paris  to  Berlin. — Do  you 
intend  to  go  to  Paris  soon?  I  intend  to  go  soon. — Why  do  you 
\vi>h  to  go  this  time  !  (ccttefois?)  In  order  to  buy  good  books  an£ 
gx>d  gloves,  and  to  see  my  good  friends. — Is  it  long  since  you  were 
O/..s-.  111.)  It  is  nearly  a  year  since  I  was  there.— 
vou  not  go  to  Italy,  this  year  (cctle  annicJ}  I  do  not  go,  for  il 
is  too  far  from  here  to  Italv. 


254 


FIFTIETH     LESSOR.    (2.) 


Who  ire  the  men  that  have  just  arrived?  They  are  phiioso 
phers.—  Of  what  country  are  they  ?  They  are  from  London. — Whu\ 
countryman  are  you?  I  am  a  Spaniard,  and  my  friend  is  an  Ita- 
lian.— Are  you  from  Tours'?  No,  I  am  a  Parisian. — How  much 
money  have  your  children  spent  to-day  ?  They  have  spent  but 
little ;  they  have  spent  but  one  crown. — Where  did  you  dine  yester- 
day ?  I  dined  at  the  innkeeper's. — Did  you  spend  much  ?  I  spent 
a  crown  and  a  half. — Has  the  king  passed  here  ?  (par  id  ?)  He  has 
not  passed  here,  but  before  the  theatre. — Have  you  seen  him?  I 
have  seen  him. — Is  it  the  first  time  (la  premiere  fois  quc)  you  havo 
seen  him?  It  is  not  the  first  time,  for  I  have  seen  him  more  than 
twenty  times. — 1  thought  you  had  seen  him  a  few  times,  but  I  did  not 
think  that  you  had  seen  him  twenty  times. — Why  does  your  servar  t 
rmi  away?  He  is  afraid  of  that  ox. — Why  do  you  run  away?  P 
I  do  not  run  av. 

VOCABULAIKK.     iMe  Sec. 

To  JKIJIJKH. 

The  happiness,  fortu: 

The  unhappincss,  misfortune. 

1  misfortune  has  hap; 
ili-  has  nirt  with  a  fjrcat  misfortune 
What  has  happened  to  you  ? 

.  '  '  ' 

I  have  met  with  your  l>ro:i. 
The  poor  man. 
I  have  cut  his  linger. 
Von  have  hrokea  ihe  man's 
To  J'itifi  pitying,  ]>itittl. 

pity,  thoa  pi  t  lot,  he  pities. 
Tity  that  host  and  his  nephew. 
I  pity  him  with  all  my  heart. 
With  all  my  heart, 
To  complain. 
Do  you  complai:i  ? 
[  do  not  complim. 
Do  you  complain  of  my  friend  ? 
t  do  complain  of  him. 
I  do  not  complain  of  him. 
To  dare,  to  spoil.  Damage  nothing. 
To  serve,  wait  upon,  served,  t 
Dost  thou  wait  upon,  ^scrve  ?) 
I  do  wait  upon,  (I  serve.) 
Jle  waits  upon,  (he  serves.) 
Do  you  wait  upon  ?  (do  you  serve  ?) 
To  serve  some  one,  to   wait  upon 

aorne  one. 


-.  1. 

Le  bonhcur. 
L<>  malheur. 

. ••/and  malh- 

t  II  lui  cst  a:  ad  rnalheur 

Quo  vous  cst-il  an 
II  nc  rn'est  rien  ar 
J'jii  rcncontrd  votrc  fi< 

•ivrc  homme. 
t  Jo  lui  ai  coupe  le  d< 

Ivcou  a  Tii 

'/re,*  4,  plai  int. 

.!<'  plains,  tu  plains,  il  plaint. 
Plaignez  cet  hute  et  son  neveu. 
Je  le  plains  de  tout  men  conur. 
t  De  tout  mon  cceur. 
t  Se  plaindr- 
Vous  plaigner.-vo 
t  Je  ne  me  plains  pa?. 
Vous  plaigncz-vous  de  mon  ami  ? 
Je  m'en  plains. 
Je  ne  m'en  plains  pag. 
Oser,  1.     Gofer,  1.     Ne  gatez  nc» 
.NVrt'/r,*  2,  (251,)  servi,  serve*. 
Sers-tu  t 
Je  sers. 
II  sort 

Serve z- vous  ? 
Servir  quelqu?un.     • 


FIFTIETH     WESSON.     (2.) 

Has  he  been  in  your  service  ?  I   A-t-il  etc  a  votre  service  ? 

til*  he  served  y  |   Vous  a-t-il  servi  ? 

(  t  Combien  y  a-t-il  qu'il  vous  s«rt  t 
How  long  has  he  i  ill  ser-    S  f  Combien  y  a.t.H  qu>U  cst  d  votr* 

vlce  ?  (  service  ? 


To  ojfV  r 

'    I  do.  I  ofier  nothing. 


Lc  service. 

,*2,      offert,      o/rcz. 
vous?  J'^ttic.  Jen'offte  rieu 
-tu?  II  oflre. 

riEME  TU£MK.     2Je 

vous  ce  bouquet?     Oui,  Mile.;  je  vous  Poffre  de  tout 

mon  cuur. — Vous  plait-il?  (473,  06s.  109.)     11  me  plait  beaucoup, 

ot  j  mercie  de  votre  don,  (for  your  present.)     De  rien. 

nn  11  Sophie?     Non,  je  ne  lui  en  ai 

i   oflnre/-vous  mi  demain?     Je   n'y  mcnqueiuS 

.  je  vous  prie.     Non,  je  v  ;e  qne  jo 

(>us  mon  rve:,;ail  Hollandais?     Non,  je 

il  y  &  un  moment, 

\on,  je  ne  1'ai  pas  eu.     Ah! 

•  voici.     Merci.     De  rien. — 

neveu  de  M.  Lenoir?     Oh!  pas  grand'  chose.    11 

;:n  peu  mal  au  doigt. — Ne  vous  est-il  rien  arrive  ?     A  moi? 

13  que  vous  apprenez?    J7ap- 

ci,  et  ce  n7est  pas  diilieile.     Uu'e-t-ce   que  vous   a  vex 
i  rien  appris  de  nouveau.     On  parle  du 
e  la  Californie ;  mais  ce  :  nouveau. 

your  brother  heard  ?     He  has  heard  of  a  man  to 

•rtune  has  happened. — Why  have  your  scholars  not 

1  assure  you  that  they  have  done  them,  and 

you  ;  If  you  believe  that  they  have  not  done  them. — 

Whpt  have  you  done  with  my  book?     I  assure  you  that  I  have  not 

seen  ?t. — Has  your  son.  had  my  knives?     He  assures  me  that  he 

irjt   had  them. — Has   your  uncle   arrived    already?    He  has 

not  arrived  yet. — Will  you  wait  till  he  returns?     I  cannot  wait,  for 

1  hive  a  good  deal  (beaucoup}  to  do. — Have  you  not  heard  anything 

new?     1  have  heard  nothing  new. — Has  the  king  arrived  ?     They 

that  he  has  arrived. — What  has  happened  to  you?     A  great 

fortune  has  happened  to  me. — What?  (lequcl  ?)    I  have  met  with 

my  greatest  enemy,  who  has  given  me  a  blow  with  a  stick. — Then 

1  pity  you  with  all  my  heart. 

Why  do  you  pity  that  man?  I  pity  him  because  you  have  broken 
nis  neck. — Why  do  you  complain  of  my  friend?  I  complain  of 
lim  because  he  ha-  cut  my  finger. —  Does  that  man  serve  you  well  ? 


256 


FIFTIETH     LESSON.    (3.) 


Ho  does  serve  me  well,  but  he  spends  too  much. — Are  you  wilting 
to  take  this  servant  ?  I  am  willing  to  take  him,  if  he  will  serve 
me. — Can  I  take  that  servant?  You  can  take  him,  for  he  haa 
served  me  very  well. — How  long  is  it  since  he  is  out  of  (/tors  de] 
your  service?  It  is  but  two  months  since. — Has  he  served  you 
long?  He  has  served  me  for  (pendant)  six  years. — Do  you  offer  ma 
anything?  I  have  nothing  to  (d)  offer  you. — What  does  my  friend 
ciler  you  ?  He  offers  me  a  book. — Have  the  Parisians  offered  you 
anything?  They  have  offered  me  wine,  bread,  and  good 

VOCABULAIRB.     3mc  Sec. 


To  confute,  intrust.   Trust  me  with  it. 
Do  you  trust  me  \viih  jour  money? 
I  do  trust  you  with  it. 
I    have    intrusted    that    man    with   a 

secret. 
The  • 

To  keep  anything  secret. 
1  havi 

To  take  care  of  something. 

Do  you  take  care  of  your  clothes? 

1  do,  I  put  them  | 

Will  you  take  eare  of  my  horse  ? 

• 

I  will  take  care  of  it. 
To  leave,  left.         Leave,  let  me. 
To  squander,  to  dissipate.  . 

He  has  squandered  all  his  wealth. 
To  hinder        prevent,       keep  from. 
You  hinder  me  from  sleeping. 
Do  not  kcef  me  from  sleeping. 

To  shop,         to  purchase. 

What  have  you  purchased  ? 

I  have  purchased  two  handkerchiefs 

and  a  bag. 

Have  you  purchased  anything  ? 
Most  lovely,  charming. 

Admirably. 

That  hat  fits  you  admirably. 
That  cos,;  fits  him  very  well. 
It  is  charming. 


Confer,  1  ,  ...  o  ...   Confie/. 
Me  conficz-vous  voirc  argent  ? 

I  le  eonlie. 
J'ai  confic  un  secret  a  cet  homme. 


dc  quclquc  dlO80. 


Le  secret. 

t  Carder  le  s 

t  JTen  ai  garde  le  sen 

Avoir*  soin 

Trendre*  som, 

Avez-vous  soin  de  vos  habits  ? 

ai  soin,  jo  les  serrc. 
Voulez-vous  prendre  soin  de   moo 

cheval  ? 

Je  veux  en  prendre  soin. 
Laisser,  1,      laisse.        Laiss. 
Dissiper,  1. 

11  a  dissipe  tout  son  bien. 
Emptchcr,  1.  (de  av.  1'infini^ 
t  Vous  m'empechez  de  dormir. 
Ne  m'empechez  pas  de  dormir. 
Faire  emplette,  (a  feminine  noun 

takes  de  before  the  substantive.) 
Faire  des  emplettes. 
t  De  quoi  avez-vous  fait  emplette  ? 
t  J'ai  fait  emplette  de  deux  mou 

choirs,  et  d'un  sac. 
Avez-vous  fait  des  emplette?  ? 
Charmant,  (an  adjective,)  tres-bi*i\ 

extremement  bien,  (adverbs.) 
A  merveille,  (an  adverb.) 
Ce  chapeau  vous  va  a  merveUte 
Cet  habit  lui  va  tres-bien. 
C'est  charmant. 


FIFTIETH      LKSSON.    (3.) 

TH£ME. 
Quel  aller,  n'est-ce  pas?    Oui,  quelqu'im  vient 


de  s  .  aller?     C'e>t  un  A:  i  a 

tout  son  lien  (all  his  fortune.  wealth'  •  un  An- 

6  vous  assure.     Je  le  croyais  Allemand  on  plutot  Iloi- 

vous  etes  trori:  erre. 

—Pour  adolescent  II   s'enfuit   parce    qu'il  craint 

11  craint  de  1'etre  par 

un  de  ses  parents,  .  ;m  faire  son  devoir.  —  A  qui 

com.-  .e  a  ia  banque,  ou  je  le  garde 

moi-meme.  (:  ;ien  a  ce  -  \\  ne  peut 

pas  carder  un  secret.     Je  ne  hii  confierai  rien.—  (Jui  a  soin  de  vos 

••.     Qui  en  aura  soin  lorsqm;  vous 

votre  oncle?     Thomas  nra  pron:  -oin.  — 

my  u-hitc  |  ,r.)      Vous  led 

here  !  there  they  are.) 

:.eighbor  ?     1   pity   him    ;  be  has 

::ant  of  (<i>  i   the  man   (ct 

.,1  not  return  it  to  him.  —  Do  not  trust  this  man  \vith 

anylhi::ir.      I    du   :.  .^n    \\ith    anything.  —  Has    he    already 

:ed  you?     I  have  never  tin-led  him  with  anything,  so  that  he 

lias  ;  ated  me;  but  it  is  said  that  he  has  cheated  many 

le.  —  Will  you  trust  my  father  \vith  your  money'?     I  will  trust 

him  with  it.  —  With  what  secret  has  my  son  intrusted  yon?     I  can- 

not i  .  with  that  with  which  lie  has  intrusted  me,  for  he 

iesired  me  (m'a  prie  dc)   to  keep  it  secret.  —  Whom  do  you 

ii  your  secrets?     I  intrust  nobody  with  them,  so  thai  no- 

body knows  them.  —  Has  your  brother  been  rewarded?     lie  lias,  on 

the  contrary,  been   punished;   but   I   beg   you  (pricr)  to  keep  it 

secret,  for  no  one  knows  it.  —  What  has  happened  to  him  ?     I  will 

tell  you  what  lias  happened  to  him,  if  you  promise  me  to  keep  it 

secret.     Do  you  promise  me  to  keep  it  secret?     I  do  promise  you, 

for  I  pity  him  with  all  my  heart.  —  Will  you  take  care  of  my  clothes? 

I  will  take  care  of  them.  —  Are  you  taking  care  of  the  book  which 

I  lent  you  ?     I  am  taking  care  of  it  ;  I  have  put  it  away  in  my 

desk.  —  Who  will  take  care  of  iny  servant?     The  landlord  will 

take  care  of  him.  —  Do  you  throw  away  your  hat?     I  do  not  throw 

it  away,  for  it  fits  me  admirably.  —  Does  your  friend  sell  his  coat? 

Ho  does  not  sell  it,  for  it  fits  him  most  beautifully.  —  Who  has  spoiled 

my  book  ?     No  one  has  spoiled  it,  because  no  one  has  dared  to 

touch  it,  (le  toucher.}—  Did  not  that  little  boy  with  black  haJr  touch 


FIFTIKTII      LESSON.     (3.) 

it"?    No,  I  prevented  him  from  touching  it,  (his  touching  it.) — Pro- 
vent  his  touching  it ;  for  if  he  does,  he  will  soil  and  spoil  it. 

RESUME  TOUR  LA  50ME  LECON. 
Theme  en  Fran^ais. 

Le  chien  de  Fetranger  a-t-il  mal  au  dos?  Oui,  il  a  mal  au 
dos.  Le  jeune  cheval  du  boucher  a-t-il  mal  au  dos  ?  Non,  maig 
eon  vieux  mouton  a  mal  au  dos.  Va-t-il  tuer  le  mouton  qui 
u  mal  au  dos?  Non,  il  ne  va  pas  tuer  celui-la.  Lequel  va-t-il 
hier  ?  11  va  tuer  celui  qui  a  mal  au  pied.  —  Qui  a  mal  au 
dos  ?  Je  ne  sais  pas  qui  a  mal  au  dos.  Le  ioli  petit  mouton  de 
Mile.  Sara  est-il  dans  le  jardin  ?  Non,  il  est  dans  son  appartement 
— (|uel  apparlement  allez-vous  prendre  .'  Jo  vais  prendre  celui 
vous  if aye/  plus.  Aimez-vous  cet  appartement-la?  Non,  maia 
j'aime  relui-ci.  Le  trouvez-vous  (do  you  think  it)  joli?  Oui,  a 
joli.  Ne  le  trouvez-vous  pas  trop  petit?  Non,  je  le  trouve  assez 
grand.  Quel  jour  allez-vous  prendre  votre  appartement?  Nous 
allons  le  prendre  'e  10  de  ce  mois.  N'est-ce  pas  aujourd'hui  le 
huit  ?  Si  fait,  c?est  le  huit.  Alors  (then)  vous  allez  prendre  votre 
a;>partement  dans  deux  jours?  Oui,  nous  allons  le  prendre  dans 
ileux  jours. — Avec  qui  allez-vous  jouer?  Je  vais  jouer  avec  1. 
du  dentisle.  Ou  allez-vous  jouer  avec  lui?  Nous  ullons  jouer  dans 
i'atelier  de  son  pere.  Voulez-vous  venir  jouer  avec  nous?  A 
phiisir. — Qui  est  dans  cet  appartement-la?  Le  petit  garcon  qui  a 
mal  au  coude  et  au  genou.  Avec  qui  les  medecins  sont-ils  ?  11s  sont 
avec  les  enfants  qui  out  mal  aux  yeux. — Ne  voulez-vous  pas  venir 
avec  nous  voir  le  pont  de  iil  de  fer  ?  Si  fait,  avec  plaisir,  (i/cs,  7 
will.) — Ce  bois  de  lit-la  est-il  assez  grand  pour  Fappartement  que 
vousprenez?  Celui  que  nous  prenons  n'est  pas  tres-grand.  Pour- 
quoi  vos  petits  amis  vont-ils  chez  le  consul  ?  Us  y  vont  pour  lire 
les  journaux  de  France.  Quels  papiers  de  France  re^oit-ii?  II  en 
recoit  plusieurs.  En  recoit-il  autant  que  le  President  du  conseil 
•mnutpol?  (of  council.)  II  en  recoit  plus  que  Jui.  En  lit-il  pins 
de  dix?  II  en  lit  moins  de  dix.  II  n?en  lit  que  quatre  ou  cinq. 
N'est-ce  pas  assez?  Si  fait.  Je  crois  que  c?est  trop.  Je  ne  peux 
pas  en  lire  autant.  Combien  en  lisez-vous?  Je  rrai  le  temps  d'en 
lire  qu'un. — Le  boucher  vous  apporte-t-il  ce  que  vous  achetez  au 
marche  ?  II  ne  me  Papporte  pas;  mais  il  m'envoie  ce  que  j?achete. 
Vous  renvoie-t-il  tous  les  matins?  Non,  nous  irailons  au  marche 
que  tons  les  trois  jours,  le  mercredi  et  le  samedi. — Avez-vous  deux 
grands  bois-ds-lit  ?  Non.  J'ai  un  grand  bois-de-lit  pour  moi  et  un 
petit  pour  mon  fils. 

A   qui  est  ce  beau  Jardin  ?     C;est  celui  de  . . .  A  qui  sont  cea 


FIFTY-FIKST  .    (1.) 

beaux  chevaux  et  ce  joli  carrosse,  (carriage.)     .1.  pas  a  qui 

lls  sont. — Vous  etes  grand  ;  mais  je  crois  quo  mou  cousin  est  plug 
grand  que  vous.  Non,  il  est  moms  grand  que  moi.  J'ai  deux 
pouces  de  plus  que  lui.  (Ota.  71.) — Les  /  :s  envoienl-il? 

plus  de  colon  en  France  qu;en  Angletcrre  (England)  ?  Non,  ils  en 
unvoient  beaucoup  plus  en  Angleterro  Bos- 

tonir  -:»on?     Us  I'achrUMit  presque  toujours 

a  Philadi  Philadelphia  1     Us  la 

paient  S4  le  tonneau  ($7)  ci  ils  le  vendent  'iclo 

lit-il  beaucoup  !     11  ainie  beaucoup  a  lire  les  ouvrages  i 

»'t  Americ;:  i!s  les  journanx  tons  les 

inmencent  tons  IPS  matins  a  les  lire. — Que  lit  votre 
7     II  ne  lit  rien  a  pn'-srnt ;  il  a  mal  aux  yeux.    II  fait  lire  notre 
>•  frcre  pour  lui. — Quels  ouvrages  les  An 

e  toutes  les  autres  nations  aussi  bien  que  les 

leurs.     0:  v rages?     Ils  en  font  tous 

les  jours  quelques-i; 

L'ami  du  fils  de  son  jardinier  travaille-t-ii  autant  que  le  cousin  du 
".le  pastant  que  lui. — Kst-il  plus  jeune? 

Non,  au  contraire,  il  est  plus  ago. — Combien  a-t-il  de  plus?  (Hoiv 

\\  older?)    11  a  2  ans  do  plus. — 11  est  done  paresseux?    Oui,  un 

«-/  de  jolis  souliers,  qui  vous  les  fait?     Notre  cordcn- 

-il  toujours  aussi  bien?    Oui,  si  vous  les  faites  faire. — 

vendex-vous  ces  gants,  Mile.?     Nous  les  vendons  demi- 

ir. — Kn  a\v/-vous  a  un  quart  de  dollar?     Oui,  nous  en  avonsj 

mais  ce  ne  sont  pas  les  meilleurs. — Laissez-moi  voir  les  uns  et  les 

autrr  i   ceux  que  nous  vendons  cinquante   sous;   ils  sont 

superbes,  comme  vous  voyr  .  ceux  de  25  sous. — Us  sont 

bons;  mais  ils  sont  moins  Dons  que  les  autres. — Votre  panier  i 

assez  gr?Jid  pour  mettre  votre  marche   (marketing)  dedans?     Je 

crois  que  oui.     Nous  y  meltons,  du  moins  beaucoup  de  choses. — 

Qu'a  votre  cheval  ?    II  a  mai  au  dos  et  a  un  pied. — Jules  n*a-t-il  pas 

mul  a  r<cil?     Si  fait':  il  y  a  mal. 


Y-FIRST  LESSON,  51sl.— Cinqaante  et  uniemc  Lcrton, 
VOCABUXAIRE.     Ire  Sec. 


.  Will  the  people  come  soon  ? 
iS'oem,     very   soon,     too   soon,    soon 

enough. 
A  violin.  \  piano. 


Le  monde  viendra-t-il  bientot  ? 
Bicntut,  trop  tot,  assez  tot. 

Un  violon.  Un  pmito* 


To  play  upjn  the  violin.  >       f  Jouer  du  vielon> 

Tc  play  the  violin. 


2GO 


FIFTY-FIRST    LESSON.    (1.) 


Obs.  118.     When  a  musical  instrument  is  spoken  of,  the  verb,  jouer t  to 
play,  takes  de,  but  a,  when  a  game  is  spoken  of,  As  : 


To  play  at  cards,  at  chess. 

To  play  the  (upon  the)  piano. 

What  instrument  do. you  play? 

To  touch.     To  play  the  piano. 

Near  me,  near  them,  near  the  fire. 

Near  the  trees,  near  the  hotels. 

Near  going.  Near  breaking  it. 

Where  do  you  live  ? 

I  live  near  the  castle. 

What  are  you  ooing  near  the  fire  ? 

To  dance. 

T<>  fall,  fallen,  do  not  fall. 

Did  you  fall  ?  I  did  not. 

To  drop,  (meaning  to  let  fall.) 
Has  he  dropped  anything? 
1I(   has  not  dropped  anything, 
/o  retain,  to  livid,  keep  back. 

To  a/>jiro<ich,  to  draw  ; 

Draw  near  the  lire,  (approach.) 

Do  you  approach  the  fire  ? 

I  do  approach  it. 

To  approach,  to  hare  access  to  one. 

He-  is  a  man  difficult  of  access. 

1  go  away  (withdraw)  from  the  fire. 
To  withdraw  (or  go  away)  from. 
I  jjo  away  from  it. 
Why  does  that  man  go  away  from 

the  fire  ? 
lie  goes  away  from  it  because  he  is 

not  cold. 

So  much,  so  many. 
I  have  written  so  many  notes  that  I 

cannot  write  any  more. 
Do  you  fear  to  go  out  ? 


Jouer  aux  cartes,  jouer  aux  echecu. 

t  Jouer  du  piano. 

t  De  quel  instrument  jouez-vous  If 

Toucher,  1.        Toucher  le  piano. 

Pres  de  moi,  pres  d'eux,  pres  du  feu 

Pres  des  arbres,  pres  des  hotels.  ($  !  I.1 

Pros  d'aller.        Pres  de  le  c^socr. 

Ou  demeurez-voLS  ? 

Je  demeure  pres  du  chateau. 

Que  faites-vous  pres  du  feu  ? 

Danser,  1. 

Tomber,  1,  tombe e.  Ne  tombez  point. 

fites-vous  tombe  ?       Je  no  suis  paa 

tombe. 

Luittcr  t  amber. 

A-t-il  laisse"  tomber  quelque  chose  ? 
11  n'a  rien  laiss£  tomber. 
Retenir,*    2,    (comme   tenir,   24*, 

25',  34'.) 

S'approcher,  1,  (dc  av.  un  nom.) 
Approchez-vous  du  feu. 
Vous  approchez-vous  du  leu  ? 
Je  m'en  approche. 
Approchcr  quelqu 
C'est  un  homme  qu'on  no   peut  ap- 

procher. 

Je  m'e'loigne  du  feu. 
S'eloigner,  1,  (de  av.  le  iivtn.} 
Je  m'en  eloigne. 
Pourquoi  cet  homme  s'eloigne-t-il  du 

feu? 
II  s'en  eloigne  parce  gu'il  n'a  paa 

froid. 
Taut. 
J'ai  ^crit  tant  de  billets  quc  je  ne 

puis  plus  en  dcrire. 
Craignez-vous  de  sortir  ? 
Je  crains  de  sortir. 


[  do  fear  to  go  out. 

ClNQUANTE    ET    UNIEME    TlI^ME.       Ire  SeC. 

J'ai  entendu  tomber  quelque  chose,  avez-vous  rien  laisse  tomber? 
Non.  je  crois  ne  rien  avoir  laisse  tomber.  Voyez,  eependant. — Ah! 
voici  un  de  d'argent ;  est-ce  vous  qui  1'avez  laisse  tomber'?  C'est  le 
de  de  Louise.  Je  Tai  peut-etre  fait  tomber.  Je  croyais  1'avcir  mis 
dans  son  panier.  Je  Pai  trouve  pres  du  pied  du  fauteuii.  Merci. 
Do  rien. — Qui  va  au  musee  cet  apres-midi  ?  George  y  va;  mais  je 
crams  de  ne  pas  pouvoir  y  aller.  Pourquoi  done?  Mon  oncl» 


KITTY-FIRST     LESSON.    (2.)  Oftt 

Fit-lit  tie  me  dire  qu'il  attend  100  sacs  de  cafe  et  qiril  faut  les  rece- 
voir  ct  les  faire  mettre  dans  le  magasin.  N'importe,  si  vous  iry 
ullez  pas  cet  apres-midi,  vous  irez  nne  autre  fois.  Cela  est  vrai 
Jouez-vous  clu  violon  et  du  piano  ?  Non,  je  ne  joue  que  du  violon 
En  jouex-vous  tous  les  jours  ?  l"n  pen,  pour  ne  pas  oublier. 

Do  you  play  the  violin  ?  I  do  not  play  the  violin,  but  the  piano. — 
Shall  \ve  have  a  ball  to-nLhi  .'  We  shall  have  one,  in  the  large  par- 
lor.— At  what  o'clock  !•  At  a  quarter  to  eleven. — \Vhat  o'clock  is  it 
How?  1 1  .en,  and  the  people  will  soon  come. — What 

ixurtrument  will  you  play  ?  I  shall  play  tho  violin.  Jf  you  play  lh« 
violin,  I  shall  play  upon  the  piano. — Are  there  to  be  (doit-il  y  avoir } 
47*)  a  great  many  people  at  our  ball  ?  There  is  to  be  a  great  many. 
Will  yo  :  shall  dance. — Will  your  children  dance?  They 

will  dance  if  -»?,  (si  ccla  Icur  convicnt,  or  si  ccla  Icur  plait.} 

— How  do  you  spend  your  time  in  this  con:  ..end  my  time 

in   p'  tho  piano,  and  in  reading. — How  does  your  cousi:i 

.cits  himself  in  playing  upon  the  violin.—' 
>>u  play?     A  great  many  people  d; 
til  to  do  it.  (On  n'y  manque  jamais.) — 

Who?     At  first  (d'abord)  our  children,  then  our  cousins,  at  last  our 
hbors. — Do  you  amuse  yourselves  ?    I  assure  you  that  we  amuse 

.  much. 

Whom  do  you  pity  ?     1  pity  your  friend.— Why  do  you  pity  him  '? 
I  pity  him  because  he  is  ill. — Has  anybody  pitied  you?     Nobody 
I  me,  because  I  have  not  been  ill. — Do  you  offer  me  any- 
I  oiler  you  a  fine  gun. — What  has  my  father  offered  you? 
He  1.  i  me  a  line  book. — To  whom  have  you  offered  your 

fine  horses?  I  have  offered  them  to  the  English  captain. — Dost  thou 
offer  thy  pretty  little  dog  to  these  children?  I  offer  it  to  them,  for  ! 
love  them  with  all  my  heart. — Why  have  you  given  that  boy  a  blow 
with  your  list?  Because  he  hindered  me  from  sleeping. — Has  any- 
body hindered  you  from  writing?  Nobody  has  hindered  me  from 
writing,  but  I  have  hindered  somebody  from  hurting  your  cousin  and 
nephew. 

VOCABULAIRE.     2dc  Sec. 

T:>  recollect,  (no^^r^JnJFreflclL)     I  Se  rappeler,  1,  (33°,)  rappelez-voug 

ccla. 

Do  you  recollect  that  ?  j  Vous  rappelcz-vous  cela  ? 

[  d.">  recollect  it.  !   Te  me  le  rappelle. 


Docs  your  brother  recollect  that  ? 
He  recollects  having  seen  it. 
•  recollect  the  words  ? 
I  Jo  recollect  them. 


Votre  frcre  se  rappelle-t  ii  coin  ? 
II  se  rappelle  Pavoir  vu. 
Vous  rappelez-vous  les  mots  ? 
Je  me  les  rappelle. 
Vous  ctes-vons  rappeAe"  Ics  niota  / 


202 


FIFTY-l'IKST     LESSON.    (2.) 


I  have  recollected  them. 
I  have  not  recollected  them. 
Have  you  recollected  them  ? 
You  have  recollected  them. 
Has  he  recollected  them  ? 
He  has  recollected  them. 
We  have  recollected  them. 
They  have  recollected  them. 
I  recollect  (remember)  coming. 

TJ  remember,  to  recollect,  'romme 
venir,*  243,  251,  &c.) 

Do  you  remember  that  man  ? 

I  do  remember  him. 

Do  you  remember  seeing  him  ? 

I  do  not. 

1  do  remember  it. 

What  do  you  remember  ? 

I  remember  nothing. 

I  do  not  remember  falling  down. 

7\>  sit  down. 

Sit  down,  (impera.) 

Are  you  sitting  down  ? 

I  am  sitting,  thou  art  sitting  down. 

Is  he  sitting  down  ?  He  is  not. 

I  shall  or  will  sit  down. 

He  sits  near  the  fire. 

He  is  sitting  near  the  fire. 

To  run  atvay,  to  jly. 

Did  you  run  away  ? 

I  did  not  run  away. 

Why  did  that  man  run  away  ? 

He  ran  away  because  he  was  afraid. 

Who  has  run  away  ? 


Je  me  les  suis  rappelds. 

Je  ne  me  les  suis  pas  rappele*e. 

Vous  les  etes-vous  rappeles  ? 

Vous  vous  les  etes  rappeles. 

Se  les  est-il  rappeles  ? 

II  se  les  est  rappeles. 

Nous  nous  les  sommes  rappeleo. 

Us  se  les  sont  rappeles. 

Je  me  rappelle  etre  venu. 

Se  souvenir*  2,  de.    Soavenez-vo  JA 

de  .  .  .  Se  ressouve?iirj*  2,  de. 

Ressouvenez-vous-en,   (de    avam 

le  nom  et  av.  1'auxiliaire.) 
Vous  souvenez-vous  de  cct  hommc  T 
Je  m'en  souviens. 
Vous  souvenez-vous  de  r avoir  vu  f 
Je  ne  m'en  souviens  pas. 
Je  m'en  souviens. 
De  quoi  vous  souvenez-vous? 
Je  ne  me  souviens  de  ricn. 
Jc  ne  me  souviens  pas  d'etre  tombe. 
t  S'asgeoir,*  pres.  part.  s'asseya?tt  ; 

past  part.  a$sis.     Asseyez^ 
Vous  asseyez-vous  ? 
Je  m'assieds,  tu  t'assi 

d-il  ?  II  ne  s'assied  p< 
Je  m'assii'rai,  or  je  m'asscicrai. 

S  II  est  assis  pres  du  feu. 

I   Se  sauver,  1,  s'enfuir,*  2.  (i)0'.» 

Vous  etes-vous  sauve  ? 

Je  ne  me  suis  pas  sanve. 

Pourquoi  cet  homme  s'est-il  sauvd  ? 

11  s'cst  sauve  parce  qu'il  a  eu  peur. 
(  Qui  s'est  enfui  ? 


Qui  s'est  sauve  ? 
Ho  has.  They  have.  I  II  s'est  enfui.       Us  se  sont  sauves, 

ClNQUAXTE    ET    UNI^ME    TlI^ME.       2de    Sec 

Vous  ivez  1'aird'avoir  froid,  approchez-vous  du  feu.  Je  n'ose  pas 
m'en  approcher.  Pourquoi  n'osez-vous  pas?  Je  crains  de  me 
Druler.  Cela  vous  plait  a  dire.  (473.)  Votre  neveu  s'eloigne-t-il  du 
feu  parce  qu'il  craint  de  se  bruler?  Non,  mais  parce  qu;il  n'a  plus 
froid,  je  pense.  Non,  ce  n'est  pas  pour  cela.  Et  pourquoi  done* 
ll  a  laisse  tomber  un  quart  de  dollar,  et  ii  veut  le  ramasser.  Tenez 
le  voila  pres  du  sofa.  Ramassez-le  pour  lui.  De  quel  cote  du  sofa? 
De  ce  cote-ci ;  la,  pres  de  votre  pied.  Bon,  je  le  vois  a  present.  Jo 
I'ai,  je  vais  le  lui  rendre.  Tenez,  voici  votre  quart  de  dollar.  Merci. 
He  rien.  Ah!  M.  Incien,  vous  rappelez-vous  le  nom  du  mcdeciu 


FIFTY-FIRST    LESSON.    (3.) 


265 


du  general  ?  Non,  je  ne  me  le  rappelle  pas. — Qui  s'assied  sur  ce 
tauteuil  ?  Personne  ne  s'assied  dessus.  Alors,  je  vais  m'y  asseoir, 
Comme  il  vous  plaira ;  il  est  a  votre  service. — Pourquoi  le  petit 
Jules  s'eloigne-t-il  ?  II  a  honte  de  ne  pas  s'etre  souvenu  de  voue 
porter  rnon  billet. 

Do  you  remember  anything  pretty  ?  I  remember  nothing  at  all ; 
I  am  too  sleepy. — What  does  your  uncle  recollect  ?  He  recollects 
what  you  have  promised  him. — What  have  I  promised  him  ?  You 
have  promised  him  to  go  to  France  with  him  next  winter.  Have 
you  not  ?  I  intend  to  do  so,  if  it  is  not  too  cold. — Why  do  you  with- 
draw from  the  fire  ?  I  have  been  sitting  near  the  lire  this  hour  and 
a  half,  (il  y  a,)  so  that  I  am  no  longer  cold. — Does  your  friend  not 
like  to  sit  near  the  lire  ?  He  likes,  on  the  contrary,  much  (bcaucoup) 
it  near  the  lire,  but  only  (seulement?  adv.)  when  he  is  cold. — May 
one  approach  your  uncle?  One  may  approach  him,  for  he  receives 
everybody. — Will  you  sit  down?  I  will  not  sit  down;  I  have  to 
•  does  your  father  sit  down  ?  He  sits  down  near  me, 

in  that  large  red  velvet  arm-chair,  (grand  faut de  v.  n.) — Where 

shall  I  sit  down  ?  You  may  sit  near  me. 

Do  you  sit  down  near  the  fire,  or  on  the  sofa?  I  do  not  sit  down 
n.-ar  the  lire,  for  I  am  afraid  of  being  too  warm. — Do  you  recollect 
my  brother  ?  I  recollect  having  seen  him  and  spoken  to  him  once. — 
Do  your  parents  recollect  their  old  friends  ?  They  do  recollect  them. 
— Do  you  recollect  these  words  ?  I  do  not  recollect  them. — Have 
you  recollected  that  ?  I  have  recollected  it. — lias  your  uncle  recol- 
lected those  words?  Ho  has  recollected  them. — Have  I  recollected 
my  exercise  ?  You  have  recollected  it. — Have  you  recollected  your 
exercises  ?  I  have  recollected  them,  for  I  have  learned  them  by 
heart ;  and  my  brothers  have  recollected  theirs,  because  they  have 
k-nrned  them  by  heart. — Is  it  long  since  you  saw  your  friend  from 
Parin  ?  I  saw  him  a  fortnight  ago.  (Obs.  114.) 

VOCABULAIRE.      3inC  SCC. 


T>  like  letter,  to  prefer. 

Do  you  like  to  stay  hero  better  than 

going  out  ? 
I  like  staying  here  bettor  than  going 

out. 

He  likes  to  play  better  than  to  study. 
Do  you  like  to  write  better  than  to 
.k* 

u  spo«»k  better  than  to  write. 
HeUcr  than. 


Aimer  mieux,  (no  prep.  §  170 — 2.) 
Aimez-vous  inieux  reater  ici  quo  de 

sortir  \ 
J'aime  mieux  rester  ici  q^e  do  sortir, 

(mieux  comes  directly  after  the  verb.) 
II  aimo  mienx  jouer  quo  d'etudier. 
Aimez-vous    inieux    ecriro    que    de 

purler? 

J'aime  mieux  purler  quo  d'ecrire. 
Mieux  ...que  de,  (avant  un  innnitif.) 


y,  when  separated  from  the  verb,  is  seulemtnt. 


264 


FIFTY-FIRST     LESSON.    (3.) 


lie  likes  to  do  both. 

I  like  beef  better  than  mutton. 

Do  you  like  bread  better  than  cheese  ? 

I  like  neither  the  one  nor  the  other. 

I  like  tea  as  much  as  coffee. 

Just  as  much,  hardly  so  much. 

A  calf,  calves.     Some,  any  veal. 

Aloud.  Low,  too  low. 

Does  your  master  speak  aloud  or  low  ? 

He  speaks  aloud  and  slowly. 

In  order  to  learn  French,  one  must 
speak  aloud  and  quick. 

Quicker,  faster.    As  fast  as  you. 

Not  so  quick,  less  quirk. 

lie  eats  quicker  than  I. 

Do  you  learn  as  fast  as  I  ? 

I  learn  faster  than  you. 

I  do  not  understand  you,  because  you 
speak  too  fast. 

To  acll  c/nujt. 

To  sell  dear. 

Does  lie  sell  cln 

lit1  docs  not  sell  dear. 

He  lias  sold  to  inr  VITV  <iiar. 

This  man  soils  rvrryil. 
that  one  cannot  buy  anything  of 
him. 

You  speak  so  fast  that  I  cannot  under- 
stand you. 

To  buy  something  of  some  one. 

I  have  bought  it  of  him. 


II  aime  a  faire  1'un  et  1'autre. 
J'aime  mieux  le  bceuf  que  le  moutoa 
Aimez-vous  mieux  le  pain  que  la 

fro  mage  ? 

Je  n'aime  ni  Tun  ni  1'autre. 
J'aime  tout  autant  le  the  que  le  caf<5 
Tout  aulanl,  a  peine  taut. 
Un  veau,  des  veaux.        Du  veuu. 
Haul,  a  haute  voix.     Bas,  trop  bas 
Votre  maitre  parle-t-il  haul  ou  bas  ( 
II  parle  haut  et  lentement. 
Pour  apprendre  le  Fran^ais,  il  fan? 

parler  haut  et  vite. 
Plus  vitc.      Aussi  vite  que  \ 
Pas  si  vite,  mains 
II  mange  plus  vite  que  moi. 
Apprenez-vous  aussi  vitc  quo  im>i  ? 
J'apprends  plus  vite  que  vous. 
Je  ne  vous  comprends  pas,  parre  <pio 

vous  parlez  trop  vite. 
Vend  re  a  Ion  marche. 
Vendrc  chtr. 
Vend-il  a  bon  ninrclu'  ? 
11  ne  vend  pas  DTK 
11  nf  a  vciulu  fort  . 
Cct.homme  vend  tout  si  clu-r,  qu'uu 

ne  peut  ricn  acheter  chez  lui. 

Vous  parlez  si  vitc  que  je  ne  pms 

vous  comprendre. 

Acheter  quclque  chose  a  quelqu'un. 
Je  le  lui  ai  achete.1 


ClXQUANTE    ET    UNI&ME    TlJ^ME.       3m 6    Sec. 

Ramassez  le  gant  dc  chamois  de  INIlle.  Clara,  qui  vient  de  le  laisser 
lumber.  (06s.  115.)  Adrien  Pa  deja  ramasse. — Votre  neveu  vient 
ilo  linir  son  devoir,  n'est-ce  pas?  Non,  il  ne  1'a  pas  encore  fait. 
Moi,  je  croyais  qu'?7  I'avait  (he  had)  fait.  Vous  vous  etes  trompe. 
(432.) — Vous  sortez?  Passez-vous  pres  du  musee  ?  Non,  je  passe 
loin  de-la.  N;importe. — Charles,  venez  me  voir  ce  soir,  (come  and 
gee  me.  }  150 — 12)  voulez-vous  ?  Je  suis  tres-occupe,  cependant 
j'irai,  si  je  m/en  souviens. — Si  vous  avez  tant  ti  faire,  vous  tomberez 

1  Acneter  a  quclqu'un  means  to  buy  of  or  for  some  one.  Ex.  Tai  achete 
fc  dicval  o  votre  frere,  I  have  bought^Tliat  ITorse  of  your  brother  ;  i.  e.  Je 
r *\  ackete  de  lui,  I  have  bought  it  of  him.  Tai  achete  un  gateau  a  nwn 
enfant,  I  have  bo'flght  a  cake  for  my  child  :  i.  c.  Je  Tai  achete  pour  lui,  I 
hnvo  bought  it  for  him. 


FlfTY-FIRST     LESSON.    (3.)  2G5 

malade.     Ne  le  craignez-vou-  Moi,  je  ne  le  crains  pas,  mais 

mon  pere  le  craint.     Pourquoi  vous  eles-vous  sauve  com  me  cela 

hier  soil  ?     J'etais  (I  was,  imperfect)   tres-presse.     Qu'aviez-vous  a 

faire  >n,    J'avais  a  appiendre  mes  leeons.    Etiez- 

vous  (iccre.  you,  imperf.)  vous  etiez  chez  le  marchand 

de  gfiteai:  ;i  '     Vy  i'-:uv-vous  pas  a  on/e  heures? 

Je  n'y  t-tai.s  pa-,     li  \v..  (  ::  -es  gateaux  sont  a  peine  aussi 

bons  que  ceux  !  marchands,  et  ils  sont  beaucoup  plus  petits. 

Do  your  scholars  like  to  learn  by  heart?     They  do  not  like  to 

learn  by  hrart :  they  like  reading  and  writing  better  than  learning 

by  heart. —  I'"  you  like  cider  better  than  wine?    I  like  wine  better 

than  cider. —  Does  your  brother  like  to  play?     lie  likes  to  study 

better  than  to  play. — Do  you  like  veal  better  than  mutton?     I  like 

the  !  T  than  the  former  for  breakfast ;  but  I  like  the  former 

butter  than  the  latter  for  dinner. — Do  you  like  to  drink  better  than  to 

•;•  than  to  drink;  but  my  uncle  likes  to  drink 

•  r  than  to  <  durum  like  fowl  better  than  ii^h  ? 

He  likes  iish  better  than  fowl. — Do  yon  like  to  write  better  than  to 

ikl     I  like  to  do  both. — Do  you  like  honey  (miel)  better  than 

like  neither. — Does  your  father  like  coffee  better  than  tea  ? 

He  i 

von  understand  me?  No,  Sir,  for  you  speak  too  fast. — Will 
you  be  kind  enough  (avoir  la  bonte  de  ne  pas,  $  171 — 7)  not  to  speak 
so  faust?  I  will  not  speak  so  fast,  if  you  will  listen  to  me.  I  am 
ready  to  li>!en. — Can  you  understand  what  my  brother  tells  you  in 
French'  li«-  :  that  I  cannot  understand  him. — Can 

your  pupils  understand  you  f  They  understand  me  when  I  speak 
.'.  ly;  for  in  order  to  be  understood  one  must  speak  slowly. — Is  it 
necessary  to  speak  aloud  to  learn  French  ?  It  is  necessary  to  speak 
aloud. — Does  your  master  speak  aloud  ?  He  does  speak  aloud  and 
ef'.ow. — Why  do  you  not  buy  anything  of  that  merchant?  He  sells 
so  dear  that  I  cannot  buy  anything  of  him. — Will  you  take  me  to 
another?  I  will  take  you  to  the  son  of  the  one  from  whom  you 
bought  last  year,  (I'annec  passee.) — Does  he  sell  as  dear  as  this  one? 
He  sells  cheaper. — Do  your  children  like  learning  Italian  better  than 
Spanish  ?  They  do  not  like  to  learn  either;  they  only  like  to  learn 
French. — Do  you  like  mutton  ?  I  like  beef  better  than  mutton. — Do 
your  children  like  cake  better  than  bread  ?  They  like  both. — Has 
Le  read  all  the  books  which  he  bought?  He  bought  so  many  (tant) 
that  he  cannot  read  them. — Do  you  wish  to  write  some  exercises? 
I  Ixa/e  written  so  many  that  I  cannot  write  any  more. — Why  does 
that  lad  run  away  so  fast?  Will  any  one  touch  him?  hu:!t  him? 


266 


FIFTY-SECONE     LESSON.    (!.} 


No  one  will  hurt  him ;  but  he  will  be  punished  by  his  master  for  nd 
having  (pour  ne  pas  avoir)  done  his  task.  (}  171 — 7.) 


FIFTY-SECOND  LESSON,  52d.—Cinquantc-deuxitmc  Lecon, 


VOCABULAIRE.       Ire  Sec, 


£y  the  side  of.     By. 
To  pass  by  the  side  of  some  one. 
I  have  passed  by  the  side  of  you. 
Have  you  passed  by  the  side  of  my 

broth 
I  have  paayd  by  the  side  of  him. 

Obs.  119.     Pn  jio.-itions  formed  with  a,  au,  or  aux,  and  a  noun, 
the  preposition  dc  after  them  ;  almost  all  others  require  none. 


A  cote  de. 

Passer  a  cote  de  c  uelqu'un. 

J'ai  passe  a  cote  de  vous. 

A\V/.-YOUS  passe  a  cote  de  men  frere  3 

i  J'ai  >;e  de  lui. 


To  pass  by  a  place. 
1  have  passed  by  the  theatre. 
He  has  passed  by  the  castle. 
You  have  passed  before  my  \v;ur- 
house,      ll'hich  tray  did  they  pass? 
To  dare. 

I  dare  not  go  thither. 
He  dares  not  do  it. 
I  did  not  dare  to  tell  him  so. 
To  make  use  of,  to  use.  Used,  use  it 

Do  you  use  my  copy-book  ? 

1  do  use  it. 

Does  your  father  use  it  ? 

He  does  use  it. 

Have  you  used  my  gun  ? 

I  have  used  it. 

They  have  used  your  books. 

They  have  used  them. 

To  instruct,  instructed,  instruct. 

I  instruct,  thou  instructest,  he  in- 
structs. 

To  teach. 

To  teach  some  one  something. 

He  teaches  me  arithmetic. 

I  teach  you  French. 
have  taught  him  French. 

To  teach  some  one  (how)  to  do  some- 
thing. 

Ho  teaches  me  (how)  to  read. 

Vou  teach  them  (.how)  to  write. 


t  Passer  aiipres  d'un  cndroil. 
t  J'ai  passe  aup:  :rc. 

t  II  a  passe  aupres  du  chateau. 
Vous  avez  passe"  devant  mon 

sin.     Par  ou  ont-ils  passe  ? 
Oser,  1,  (point  de  preposition.) 
Jc  n'ose  pas  y  aller. 
11  n'ose  pas  le  faire. 
Je  n';;  lui  dire. 

Se  ftrvir,*  2,  dc,  (502)  servi,  serve* 

vous-en. 

Vous  servez-vous  de  mon  cahier  f 
Je  m'en  sers. 
Votre  pere  s'en  sert-il  ? 
II  s'en  sert. 

Vous  etes-vous  servi  de  mon  fusil  ? 
Je  m'en  suis  servi. 
Us  se  sont  servis  de  vos  livres. 
Us  s'en  sont  servis. 
Instruire*  4,  instruit,  instruisez. 
J'instruis,     tu  instruis,     il  instruu 

Enseigner,  1.       Apprendrc.*  4. 
Enseigster  quelque  chose  a  quelqti  u» 
II  m'enseigne  le  calcul. 
Je  vous  enseigne  le  Francois. 
Je  lui  ai  enseigne*  le  Fran^ais. 
Apprendre  a  quelqu'un  a  faire  qui^ 

que  chose,  ou  Enscig^er  a  .... 
II  m'apprend  a  lire. 
Vous  leur  apprenez  a  ccrire. 


FIFT  Y-SECO  N  D     LESSON.    (2.)  207 

CiNQUANTi:-i>r.i  XII.MK  Tnfi.ME.      Ire  Sec. 

Pai  ou  avez-vous  passe  pour  venir  chez  nous?    J'ai  [)asse  auprea 

<?u  pout  de  fer,  du  quai  Buena  Vista,  et  du  musee.     Yous  avez  done 

fait  un  grand  tour,  (taken  a  long  walk.')    Oui,  j'aime  a  me  promenei, 

et  j'aime  mieux  me  promener  de  bonne  heure  qu'a  midi.     Youa 

<m ;  il  ne  fait  pas  si  chaud  alors.     CVst  pour  cela  que  je  le 

•is  servez-vous  de  votre  parapluie  ?     Non,  je  ne  m'en  sera 

—  I'renez-le.     Servez-vous   en.     Merci.     De   rien. — Avcz-voua 

rencontre  le  neveu  de  Pepicier?     Non,  mais  j'ai  passe  a  cote  do 

celui  de  Papothicaire.     Que  vous  a-t-il  dit?     Rien.     Je  Pai  aper<ju ; 

-  il  ne  m'a  pas  aperc.u,  de  sorte  que  nous  avons  passe  a  cote 
Pun  de  Pautre  sans  nous  parler. — Avez-vous  dit  a  votre  cousin  ce 

:i  a  dit  de  lui  ?  Je  n;ai  pas  ose.  Pourquoi  n7avez-vous  pas  ose  ? 
je  ne  sais  pas  exactement  pourquoi  je  n'ai  pas  ose ;  mais  je  ne  le 
lui  ai  pas  dit.  Ne  le  lui  direz-vous  pas?  Pourquoi  lui  dire  ?  Cela 

:a  pas  plaisir. 

t  your  new  booi  found?     They  have  been  found. — 

WL<  1. — Is  my  eoat  on  the  bed?  It  is  under  it. — 

your  brother's  stockings  under  the  bed?  They  are  upon  it. — 
Have  I  been  seen  by  anybody?  You  have  been  seen  by  nobody. — • 
Have  you  pa— cd  by  anybody?  I  have  passed  by  you,  and  you  did 
not  see  me. — Has  anybody  passed  by  you  ?  Nobody  has  passed  by 
me. — Where  has  your  son  passed?  He  has  passed  by  the  theatre. 
Shall  you  pass  by  the  castle?  I  shall  pass  there. — Why  have  you 
not  cleaned  my  trunk?  I  was  afraid  to  soil  my  fingers. — Has  my 
broti  ant  cleaned  his  master's  guns?  He  has  cleaned  them. 

he  not  been  afraid  to  soil  his  fingers?  He  has  not  been  afraid 
to  soil  them,  because  his  fingers  are  never  clean,  (propre.) — Do  yon 

the  books  which  I  have  lent  you?  I  do  use  them. — May  I 
( pm*-jc)  use  your  knife  ?  Thou  mayest  use  it,  but  thou  must  not 
cut  thyself,  no*  spoil  the  knife. — May  my  brothers  use  your  books? 
They  may  use  them. — May  we  use  your  gun"?  You  may  use  it, 
but  you  must  not  spoil  it. — What  have  you  done  with  my  wood? 
I  have  used  it  to  warm  myself. — Has  your  father  used  my  horse  1 
He  has  used  it. — Have  our  neighbors  used  our  clothes  ?  They  have 
not  used  them,  because  they  did  not  want  them. — Who  has  ;:sej 
my  hat  ?  Nobody  has  used  it,  for  nobody  has  dared  use  it. 

VocAnrr.Air.K.     -de  Sec. 

rciH-li   master,   (meaning  the     Le  mattre  de  Francois. 
'  r  of  the  French  lang;: 

The  Fr.'-nr.i  master,  (a  Frenchman,      Le  maitre  Francois, 
whatever  he  teaches.) 


268 


FIFTY-SECOND     LESSON.    (2.) 


To  shave,  to  shave  onts  self. 

To  get  shaved. 

To  dress,  to  undress. 

To  dress  one's  self. 

To  undress  one's  self. 

Have  you  dressed  yourself? 

I  have  not  yet  dressed  myself. 

Have  you  dressed  the  child  V 

I  have  dressed  it. 

To  undo,      undone,      undo. 

To  get  rid  of. 

Arc  you  getting  rid  of  your  damaged 

sugar  ? 

I  am  getting  rid  of  it. 
Did  you  get  rid  of  your  old  ship  ? 

i  did  get  rid  of  it. 

To  part  with. 

The  design,  the  intention. 

To  intend,  to  have  the  intention  of. 

I  intend  to  go  thither. 

We  have  the  intention  to  do  it. 

Do  you  intend  to  part  with  your 

horses  ? 

i  have  already  parted  with  thorn. 
He  has  parted  with  his  gun. 
Have  you  parted  with  (discharged) 

your  servant  ? 

I  have  parted  with  (discharged)  him. 
To  get  rid  of  some  one. 
I  did  get  rid  of  him. 
Did  your  father  get  rid  of  that  man  ? 

He  did  get  rid  of  him. 

ClNQUAXTE-DEUXlilME 

Vous  etes  seul ;  vous  vous  etes  enfin  debarrasse  de  ce  vaurien.  Je 
m'en  suis  enfin  debarrasse. — Pourquoi  votre  pere  s'est-il  defait  de  sea 
chevaux?  S'en  est-il  defait  ?  N'en  savez-vous  rien?  Je  n'en  ai 
pas  entendu  parler.  Le  maitre  de  Franeais  vient  ce  matin,  n'est-ce 
pas?  O'est  son  jour,  du  moins,  et  je  pense  qu'il  viendra.  Serez- 
vous  pret  lorsqu'il  arrivera?  J?ai  a  me  raser  et  a  m'habiller,  cai 
vous  voyez  que  je  ne  suis  ni  rase  ni  habille.  Eh  bien !  rasez-voua 
®t  habillez-vous.  Qu'est-ee  qui  vous  en  empeche  ?  Rien  ne  m'eu 
empeche,  et  je  vais  dans  mon  appartement  pour  cela.  Appelez- 
moi,  s'il  vient  avant  mon  retour.  Je  Vy  manquerai  pas.— Guillaumcv 


Raser,  1,  se  raser,  rasez-voui. 

t  Se  faire  raser. 

Habiller,  1.  Deshabiller,  1. 

S'habiller,  1. 

Se  deshabiller,  1. 

Vous  etes-vous  habille  ? 

Je  ne  me  suis  pas  encore  habille*. 

Avez-vous  habille  1'enfant  ? 

Je  1'ai  habille. 

Defaire,*  4,          ddfal%          defailee 

(comme  faire,  251,  271.) 
Se  dtfaire*  de. 
Vous-  deTaites-vous  de   votre  sucr« 

avaric  ? 

Je  m'en  defais. 
Vous  etes-vous  defait  de  votre  f iemt 

vaisseau  ? 

Je  m'en  suis  defait. 
t  Se  defaire*  de. 
Le  dessein. 

Avoir  dessein,  (de  avant  un  iniini./ 
J'ai  dessein  d'y  aller. 
Nous  avons  dessein  de  le  faire. 
Avez-vous  dessein  de  vous  defaire 

de  vos  chevaux  ? 
Je  m'en  suis  dej a  defait. 
II  s'est  defait  de  son  fusil. 
Vous  etes-vous  defait  de  votre  do 

mestique  ? 
Je  m'en  suis  defait. 
Se  debarrasser  de  quelqu^un. 
Je  me  suis  ddbarrasse  de  lui. 
Votre  pere  s'est- il  debarrass«5  do  cot 

homme  ? 
II  s'en  est  debarrasse. 

2de  Sec. 


FIFTY-SECOND    LESSON.    (3.)  209 

qu  avez-vous  dessein  de  faii*e  de  votre  fusil  Anglais  ?  Le  maitre 
Francais  m?a  prie  de  (has  asked  me  to)  le  lui  preter.  Allez-voua 
le  lui  porter  ?  Pendant  qu'il  s'habille  et  se  rase,  il  a  envoye  ce  petit 
garden,  pour  le  chercher,  (get  it.)  Allez-vous  le  confier  a  ce  petit 
gallon  ?  Croyez-vous  qu'il  le  gatera?  J'en  ai  peur.  Alors  je  ferai 
mieux  de  le  lui  porter  moi-meme. 

Have  you  shaved  to-day?  I  have  shaved. — Has  your  brothel 
shaved?  He  has  not  shaved  himself,  but  he  got  shaved. — Do  you 
shave  often  ?  I  shave  every  morning,  and  sometimes  also  in  the 
evening. — When  do  you  shave  in  the  evening?  When  I  do  not 
dine  at  home. — How  many  times  a  day  does  your  father  shave  ? 
He  shaves  only  once  a  day,  but  my  uncle  shaves  twice  a  day. — 
Does  your  cousin  shave  often  ?  He  shaves  only  every  other  day, 
(de  deux  jours  Tim.) — At  what  o'clock  do  you  dress  in  the  morning? 
1  dress  as  soon  as  1  have  breakfasted,  and  I  breakfast  every  day  at 
eiidit  o?clock,  or' at  a  quarter  past  eight. — Does  your  neighbor  dress 
before  he  breakfasts?  He  breakfasts  before  he  dresses. — At  what 
o'clock  in  the  evening  dost  thou  undress  ?  I  undress  as  soon  as  I 
return  from  the  theatre. 

Dost  thou  go  to  the  theatre  every  evening?  I  do  riot  go  every 
evening,  for  it  is  better  to  study  than  to  go  to  the  theatre. — At  what 
o'clock  dost  thou  undress  when  thou  dost  not  go  to  the  theatre  ? 
I  then  undress  as  soon  as  I  have  supped,  and  go  to  bed  at  ten 
o'clock. — Have  you  already  dressed  the  child?  I  have  not  dressed 
it  yet,  for  it  is  still  asleep,  (dort  encore.} — Did  you  at  last  get  rid  of 
that  man  ?  I  did  get  rid  of  him. — Why  has  your  father  parted  with 
his  horses?  Because  he  did  not  want  them  any  more. — Has  your 
merchant  succeeded  at  last  in  getting  rid  of  his  damaged  sugar  ?  He 
has  succeeded  in  getting  rid  of  it. — Has  he  sold  it  on  credit  ?  He  wag 
able  to  sell  it  for  cash,  so  that  he  did  hot  sell  it  on  credit. — Who  has 
taught  you  how  to  read  ?  I  have  learned  it  with  (chez)  a  French 
master.— Has  he  taught  you  to  write  ?•  He  has  taught  me  to  read 
and  to  write. 

VOCABULAIEE.     3me  Sec. 


To  wake. 

To  awake. 

I  generally  awake  at  six  o'clock  in 

the  morning. 
My  servant  generally -wakes  me  at 

eix  o'clock  in  the  morning. 


fiveiller,  1.  Reveiller,  1. 

S'eveillerj  1.  Se  riveiller. 

Je  m'eveille  ordinairement    a    su 

heures  du  matin. 
Mon  domeetique  m'eveille  ordinaire 

ment  a  six  heir  es  du  matin. 


270 


FIFTY-SECONI     LESSON.    (3.) 


\  slight  noise  vakes  me. 

A.  dream  Las  waked  me. 

J  do  not  make  a  noise,  in  order  not  to 
wake  him. 

A  dream. 

Generally. 

To  come,  or  go  down. 

To  alight  irom  one's  horse,  to  dis- 
mount. 

To  conduct  one's  self.  Behave  well. 

To  behave. 

i  conduct  myself  well. 

How  does  he  conduct  himself? 

Towards. 

Ho  behaves  ill  towards  that  man. 

lie  lias  behaved  ill  towards  me. 

To  be  worf.li  while  to. 

Is  it  worth  while  to ? 

It  is  worth  while. 

I:*  it  worth  while  to  do  it  ? 

It  is  not  worth  while. 

Is  it  worth  while  to  write  to  him  ( 

It  is  worth  nothing. 

Is  it  better?  It  is  better. 

Will  it  be  better?  It  will. 

It  is  better  to  do  this  than  that. 

It  is  better  to  stay  here  than  go  a 

walking. 


Un  bruit  Icger  me  revsille 

Un  songe  m'a  reveille. 

Je  ne  fais  pas  de  uruit,  pour  nn  pas  It 

reveiller.  ($  171—7.; 
Un  songe,  un  reve. 
Ordinairement. 

Descendre,  4,  descendu,  duacondes 
Descendre  de  cheval. 

Se  conduire,*  4.        ConduLstz-voni 

bien. 

Se  comport cr,  1. 
Je  me  conduis  bien. 
Comment  se  conduit-il  ? 
Enters  or  vers. 

II  se  comporte  mal  en  vers  cet  horn  me. 
II  s'est  mal  comporte  nivers  moi 
t  Valoir  la  peine  de. 
t  Vaut-il  la  peine  de  . . . . 
t  Cela  en  vaut  la  peine.  ($  . 
t  Vaut-il  la  peine  de  le  faire  ? 
t  Cela  n'en  vaut  pas  la  peine. 
t  Cela  vaut-il  la  peine  de  lui  » 
t  Est-ce  la  peine  de  lui  ecrire  ? 
t  Cela  ne  vaut  rien.  (39-.) 
t  Vaut-il  mieux?     11  vaut  mieux. 
t  Vaudra-t-il  micux  ?  II  vaudra 

mieux. 
t  II  vaut  mieux  fairc  ceci  quo  de  faire 

cela. 
t  II  vaut  mieux  rester  ici  que  de  so 

promener. 


ClNQUARTE-DEUXIEME    TH&ME.       3mC  See. 

Vous  etes  descendu  seul.  N'avez-vous  pas  dit  a  votre  frere  de 
descendre?  Non,  je  n'ai  pas  ose  le  lui  dire.  Pourquoi  n'avez- 
vous  pas  ose  ?  Parce  qu'il  do.t.  Ne  1'avez-vous  pas  reveille  ?  Non, 
en  vt'rile.  Je  n'ai  pas  ose.  Et  pourquoi  done?  II  est  temps  de  se 
lever,  n'est-ce  pas'?  Oui,  sans  doute  ;  mais  il  m'a  dit  de  ne  jamais 
(§  171 — 7)  peveiller  quand  il  dort.  Et  si  vous  Peveillez,  qa?arri- 
vera-t-il  ?  11  me  battra.  Est-il  assez  mechant  pour  le  faire  1  II  le 
fait  quand  cela  lui  convient. — Qui  a  appris  le  calcul  a  votro  petit 
fiere?  Un  maitre  Francais  le  lui  a  enseigne. — M7appelez-vous  ? 
Je  vous  appelle. — Que  vous  plait-il?  Pourquoi  ne  vous  levez-voua 
pas?  Ne  savez-vous  pas  qu'il  est  deja  tard?  Que  me  demandez- 
vous?  (401.)  J:ai  perdu  tout  mon  argent,  et  je  viens  vous  frier  (k 


FIFTY-THIRD    LESSON.    (1.)  271 

(be::)  m'en  preler. — Quelle  heure  cst-il  ?  II  est  deja  six  heures  ot 
on  quart,  et  vous  ave/.  assez  dormi.  Y  a-t-il  long-temps  que  voua 
etes  leve  '  II  y  a  une  heure  et  demie  que  je  le  suis. — Voulez-vous 
faire  un  tour  avec  moi  ?  Je  ne  peux  pas  aller  faire  un  tour,  car  j'at 
tends  mou  niaiire  de  Fra:. 

Do  you  rise  a-  1  .'     I  do  not  know  at  what  o'clock  yon 

•  as  soon  as  I  awake. — Will  you  tell  my  servant  to 

wake  me  to-morrow,  at  four  o'clock  ]     1  will  tell  him. — Why  have 

you  risen  so  early?     My  children  have  made  such  a  (to£  de)  noise 

that  they  wakened  me,  and  hindered  me  from  sleeping. — Have  you 

blept  well  ?    1  have  not  slept  well,  for  the  dogs  have  made  so  much 

',  and  barked  so  loud,  that  I  have  not  been  able  to  sleep. — At 

what  o'clock  did  the  good  captain  awake?     He  awoke,  as  usual,  at 

:;ve  in  the  mor:. 

did  my  child  behave.'     He  behaved  very  well. — How  did 

I'rotherbr.  He  behaved  very  well  towards 

;  towards  everybody. — Is  it  worth  while  to 

write  to  that  man?     It  ith  while  to  write  to  him. — Is  it 

worth  while  to  dismount  from  my  horse  to  buy  a  cake?  It  is  not 
worth  while,  for  it  is  not  long  since  you  ate. — Is  it  worth  while  to 
ill -mount  from  my  horse  to  give  something  to  that  poor  man?  He 
seems  (parait)  to  want  it;  but  you  can  give  him  something  without 
Counting  from  your  horse. — Is  it  better  to  go  to  the  theatre  than 
to  study  ?  It  is  better  to  do  the  latter  than  the  former,  (ccci  que 
cela.)1 — Is  it  better  to  learn  to  read  French  than  to  speak  it?  It  is 
not  worth  while  to  learn  to  read  it  without  learning  to  speak  it. — Is 
it  better  to  go  to  bed  than  to  go  a  walking?  It  is  better  to  do  tho 
latter  than  the  former. — Is  it  better  to  go  to  France  than  to  Germany? 
It  is  not  worth  while  to  go  to  France  or  to  Germany  when,  one  has 
no  wish  to  travel. 


FIFTY-THIRD  LESSON,  53d.— Cinquante-troisiemc  Lec^on,  53mc. 
VOCABULAIRE.     Ire  Sec. 

To  hop f,  c.i  _  Hope  ever.     I  Esperer.  ($  144 — 5.)  Espereziou']ouis. 

rhjpet  tJwuhopest,  he  hopes,  one  hopes.     •Tespcre,    tu  csperes,    ii  espere,    o\ 

espere. 

1  When  latter  and  former  apply  to  actions,  translate  by  :  ceci  and  cela  , 
oot  by  :  cclm-ci  and  celui-ld,  which  refer  only  to  definite  nouns  or  object 
•*38,  N.  5.) 


272 


FIFTY-THIRD     LESSON.    (1.) 


Do  you  hope  ?     We  no  longer  hope. 

To  yield.  To  sell,  (as  a  favor  granted.)1 
I  yield,  thou  yieldest,  he  yields,  one 

yields. 
Will  you  sell  me  your  horse  ?   (or,  I 

wish  yDu  would  sell  me,  &c.) 
I  will,  Ic  oblige  you. 
Do  you  expect  to  find  him  there  ? 
I  do  expect  it. 

To  change,  (meaning,  to  exchange.) 
To  change  one  thing  for  another. 

I  change  my  hat  for  his,  or 

We  exchange  scats. 

To  change,  (meaning,  to  put  <*/.  .th<r 

things.) 

Do  you  change  your  hat.? 
I  do  change  it. 
He  changes  his  linen. 
They  change  their  clothes. 
To  mix,        amott",  amongst. 
I  mix  among  the  mm. 
He  mixes  among  the  soldiers. 
To  rtct^ninc  or  to  acknowli-. 


Esperez-vjus  ?         Nous  n'e^uoni 

plus. 

Cider,  1.  ($144-5.) 
Je  cede,  tu  cedes,  il  cede,  on  cede. 

Voulez-vousme  ceder  votre  chevall 


Do  you  recognise  that  man  ? 

It  is  so  long  since  I  saw  him  that  1 

do  not  recollect  him. 
I  have  more  bread  than  1  can  eat. 


Je  vous  le  cedtrai  pour  voua  cl 

Esperez-vous  1'y  trouver  ? 

Je  1'espcre. 

Changer,  1,  (contre,  pour,  de.) 

Changer  quelque  chose  contre  qucl- 

que  chose. 

.isje  mon  chapeau  pour  le  sien. 
Nous  changeons  d 
Changer,  1,  (take.-  a  sub- 

stantive.) 

t  Changez-vous  de  chapeau  I 
t  J'en  change. 
t  II  change  de  linge. 
t  Us  changent  (/'habits. 
t  Se  miler,  1,  parmi. 

t  Je  me  mele  parmi  les  homines. 
t  11  ee  mele  parmi  les  soldats. 
Reconnoitre,*  4.  lieconnaissez,  iuipe  j 

(comme  Connaitrc,  L'51,  33l.) 
Reconnaissez-vous  cet  homme  ? 
II  y  a  si  long-temps  que  je  ne  1'ai  vu 

que  je  ne  le  reconnais  plus. 
J'ai  plus  de  pain  que  je  n'  en  puif 


manger. 

Ols.  120.     When  there  is  a  comparison  between  two  sentences,  the  verb 
which  follows  plus  or  moins,  requires  the  negative  ne.     (49*,  06s.  114.) 


That  man  has  more  money  than  he 

will  spend. 

There  is  more  wine  than  is  necessary. 
You   have   more   money  than   you 

want. 


Cet  homme   a  plus  d'argent  qu'il 

n'en  de'pensera. 

II  y  a  plus  de  vin  qu'il  njen  faut. 
Vous  avez  plus  d'argent  qu'il  ne  voub 

en  faut. 


ClNQUANTE-TROISI^ME    TillblE.       Ire   Sec. 

Fourquoi  n'otez-vous  pas  votre  chapeau  lorsque  vous  etes  dans  la 
pnaison  ?  Farce  que  je  suis  accoulume  a  le  garder.  Si  vous  changez 
de  cheval  avec  Pierre,  (Peter,)  esperez-vous  en  avoir  un  meilleur  ?  Je 
ne  sais  pas  si  le  sien  vaut  mieux  que  le  mien  ;  mais  je  sais  qir.'l  est 
plus  joli,  eto'est  pour  cela  que  je  veux  changer  avec  lui.  II  no  vuui 


1  To  give  up,  (as  a  favor,  in  order  to  oblige.; 


MFTY-  THIRD    LESbON.     (2.)  273 

pas  la  peine  (Ten  changer,  ear  le  sien  ne  vaut  rien. — Ou  est  Pierre  \ 

mele  avec  ces  vauriens  qui  jouent  tant  aux  cartes.  (511.)     Est-il 

.^e?     II  Test  beaucoup;  de  sorte  que  vous  le  reconnaitrez  a 

peine  quand  vous  le  verrez.     Jrespere  qu'il  se  conduira  mieux  lors- 

que  son  pere  sera  revenu.    Je  Pespere  aussi.    II  a  peurde  son  pere. 

ex-vous  qu'il  ne  se  melera  plus  avec  ces  vauriens?     II  n'osera 

-•3  meler  avec  e  usavez  plusdemiel  qu'il  ne  vous 

en  faut,  yespere  que  vous  m'en  cederez  un  peu.     Oui,  volontiers;  je 

en  ceder  antant  que  vous  en  voudrez. 

Do  you  liope  to  receive  a  note  to-day  ?     I  hope  to  receive  Jne. — 

i  ((/f)  whom  ?    From  a  friend  of  mine. — What  dost  thou  hop«%  ] 

I  hope  to  see  my  parents  to-day,  for  my  tutor  has  promised  me  to 

take  I  -in. — Does  your  friend  hope  to  receive  anything'?     Ho 

hope-  :or  he  has  worked  well. — Do  you  hope 

to  arrive  early  in  Paris  ?     We  hope  to  arrive  there  at  a  quarter  past 

.t,  for  our  1  LT  for  us  this  evening. — Do  you  expect 

home?     \  it. — For  what  have  you  ex- 

Obs.  55.)  coach,  of  which  you  have  just  spoken  to 

me?     1  1  .mged  it  for  a  fine  Arabian  (261)  horse. — Do  you 

xchange  your  book  for  mine  ?     I  cannot,  for  I  want  it  to 

stini  — Why  do  you  take  your  hat  oil  ?    I  take  it  oil  because 

my  old  master  coming,  (jc  vois  rcniY.) 

ui  know  why  that  man  does  not  eat?     I  believe  he  is  not 
hungry,  for  he  has  more  bread  than  he  can  eat. — Have  you  given 
any  money  ?     I  have  given  him  more  than  lie  will  spend. 
Will  B  glass  of  cider?     You  need  not  drink  cider,  for 

there  is  more  wine  than  is  necessary. — Am  I  to  sell  my  gun  in  order 
to  buy  a  new  hat  ?  You  need  not  sell  it,  for  you  have  more  money 
than  you  want. — Do  you  wish  to  speak  to  the  shoemaker?  I  do  not 
wish  to  speak  to  him,  for  we  have  more  shoes  than  we  want. — Why 
do  the  French  rejoice  ?  They  rejoice  because  they  flatter  them- 
es they  have  many  good  friends. — Are  they  not  right  in  rejoicing, 
(de  se  rejouir?)  They  are  wrong,  for  they  have  fewer  friends  than 
they  imagine. — Did  you  recognise  your  cousin  when  you  met  him 
at  the  wire  bridge  ?  No,  he  has  changed  so  much  that  I  did  not 
recognise  him  at  all. — Did  he  recognise  you?  Instantly.  He  sayg 
I  have  not  changed  at  all. — How  long  ha?  your  nephew  had  this 
preity  little  bird  ?  He  ha*  had  it  long.  It  has  been  given  to  him  by 
*  Greek  merchant. 

VOCABULAIRE.     2(le  Sec. 

That  man  has  fewer  friends  than  he  j   Get  hormne  a  moins  d'amis  qu'il  nr 
imagines.  pense. 


274 


FIFTY-THIRD    LESSON,    (2,) 


To  fancy. 

To  think. 

To  earn,  to  gain,  to  get. 

Has  your  father  already  started  ? 

Me  is  ready  to  depart. 

To  make  one  s  self  ready. 

To  keep  one's  self  ready. 

To  split. 

To  break  somebody's  heart. 

You  break  that  man's  heart. 

Whose  heart  do  I  break  ? 

These  fine  eyes  will  break  more  than 

one  heart 

T0  spill,  spread.     To  spread. 
To  expatiate,  to  lay  stress  upon. 
I'hiU  man  is  always  expatiating  upon 
•    that  subject. 
The  subject. 

To  stretch  one's  self  along  the  floor. 
To  hang  to,  on  or  upon. 
The  wall.     The  garden  wall. 
1  hang  my  coat  on  the  wall. 
Ho  hangs  his  hat  upon  the  tree. 
We  hang  our  shoes  upon  the  nails. 
The  thief  has  been  hanged. 
Who  hung  the  basket  on  the  tree  ? 
The  thief.     The  robber. 
The  highwayman.     The  robber. 

You  are  always   studious,  and  will 
always  be  so. 


S:imaginer,  1. 

Penser,  1. 

Gagner,  1. 

Votre  pere  cst-il  deja  parti  ?  (198.) 

II  est  pret  d  partir.      (198.") 

Sepreparer,  1. 

Se  tenir*  pret. 

Fendre,  4. 

Fendre  le  cozur  d  quelqu'un. 

Vous  fendez  le  coeur  a  cet  homme. 

A  qui  est-ce  que  je  fends  Je  coeur  ? 

Ces  beaux  yeux  fendront  plus  d'un 

CGEUr. 

Repandrc,  4.         fctrndre,  4. 

S'ctendre  sur. 

Cet  hommc  s'etend  toujours  sur  ce 

sujet. 
Le  sujet. 

S'etendre  sur  le  planchcr. 
Pendre,  4,  d  ou  sur. 
Le  mur.     Le  mur  du  jardin. 
Je  pends  mon  habit  au  mur. 
II  pend  son  chapeau  a  1'arbre. 
Nous  pendons  nos  souliers  aux  clone, 
Le  voleur  a  6l6  pendu. 
Qui  a  pendu  le  panier  a  1'arbre  ? 
Le  voleur. 
Le  brigand,  le  voleur  de  grand  che- 

min. 
Vous  etes  toujours  studieux,  et  vous 

le  serez  toujours. 


Obs.  121.  The  personal  pronouns  are  almost  always  repeated  in  French 
before  every  verb  of  which  they  are  the  nominative  case,  whether  they  are 
repeated  in  English  or  nof ;  but  when  they  are  not  in  the  nominative  case 
they  must  always  be  repeated.  Ex. 

Votre  frere  est  toujours  sage,  et  il  le 

sera  toujours. 

Un  fils  bien  eleve  ne   cause  jamais 
de  chagrin  a  son  pere ;  il  Z'aime, 
Z'honore,  et  le  respecte. 
Avait-il  ?   II  avait.   II  ne  1'avait  pas. 
Saviez-vous?       Je   savais.      Je    ne 


Your  brother  is,  and  will  always  be 
good.' 

A  well-educated  son  never  causes 
his  father  any  grief;  he  loves,  hon- 
ors, and  respects  him. 

Had  he  ?    He  had.   He  had  not  got  it. 

Did  you  know  ?  I  did  know.  I  did 
net. 


savais  pas. 

ClNQUANTE-TROISliME    TH^ME.       2(le  Sec. 

Saviez-vous  que  votre  oncle  est  ici  ?  Je  ne  le  savais  pas.  Ne  lo 
eanez-vous  pas  vraiment7?  Non;  je  vous  assure  que  je  ne  le  savais 
pas.  Quand  est-il  arrive  ?  Hier  soir.  Je  serai  bien  aise  de  le  voir. 


FIFTY-FOURTH     LESSON.     (I.)  275 

A.-1  il  encore  le^  memes  habits,  ou  en  a-t-il  change  ?  11  eu  a  change- 
II  a  un  bel  habit  bleu  an  lieu  du  vieux  brun  qifil  avait. — Pourquo* . 
vous  en  allez-vous  si  tot  ?  Ne  vous  amusez-vous  pas  ici  ?  Vous  vous 
trompez  si  vous  pensez  que  je  ne  m'amuse  pas  ici;  car,  je  vous 
assure  que  je  trouve  beaucoup  de  plaisir  a  causer  (converse)  aveo 
vous.  Pourquoi  vous  en  allez-vous  done  ?  Je  croyais  que  vous  le 
saviez.  Qu'est-ce  ?  On  m'atterid  (I  am  expected)  au  concert  d'un 
de  mes  parents.  II  doit  commencer  a  neuf  heures,  et  vous  voyex 
qu'il  est  neuf  heures  moins  un  quart.  Je  ne  savais  pas  cela.  Adieu 

Are  you  ready  to  depart  with  me?  I  am  so. — Does  your  uncle 
depart  with  us?  He  departs  with  us  if  he  pleases,  (s't'J  le  vent.') — 
Will  yon  to!l  him  to  be  ready  to  start  to-morrow  at  six  o'clock  in  the 
'  I  will  tell  him  so. — Is  this  young  man  ready  to  go  out? 
Not  yet,  but  he  will  soon  be  ready. — Why  have  they  hanged  that 
man  .'  They  have  hanged  him  because  he  has  killed  somebody. — 
Have  ttmy  hmnged  the  man  who  stole  (382)  a  horse  from  your 
brother  *  They  have  punished  him,  but  they  have  not  hanged  him  . 
they  hang  only  highwaymen  in  our  country. — What  have  you  done 
with  my  coat  '.  1  have  hanged  it  on  the  wall. — Will  yon  hang  my 
hat  upon  the  tree  ?  I  will  hang  it  thereon. 

1  lave  you  not  seen  my  shoes  ?  I  found  them  under  your  bed,  and 
have  hanged  them  upon  the  nails. — Has  the  thief  who  stole  your 
j^nn  been  hanged?  He  has  been  punished,  but  he  has  not  been 
hanged. — Why  do  you  expatiate  so  much  upon  that  subject?  Be- 
cause it  is  necessary  to  speak  upon  all  subjects. — If  it  is  necessary 
to  (s'il  faut)  listen  to  you,  and  to  answer  you  when  you-  expatiate 
iipon  that  subject,  I  wiU  hang  my  hat  upon  the  nail,  (repeat  the  pro- 
noun je  before  each  verb,)  stretch  myself  along  the  sofa,  listen  to 
you,  and  answer  you  as  well  as  I  can.  You  will  do  well. — Your 
nephew  learns  French,  does  he  not?  To  be  sure. — How  long  haa 
he  been  learning  it?  These  five  months. — Does  he  know  as  much 
as  you  ?  He  knows  more  than  I. — I  thought  you  knew  more  than 
he.  You  made  »  mistake.  He  has  been  learning  it  longer  than  I. 


FIFTY-FOURTH  LESSON,  54th.— Cinquante-quati  iime  Lecon,  54?nd 
VOCABULAIRE.     Ire  Sec. 


To  be  well. 
How  do  you  do  ? 
I  am  well. 


t  Se  porter  Hen. 

t  Comment  vous  porte 

t  Je  me  porte  bien. 


.  122.    The  verbs  to  le  and  to  do,  are  both  expressed  in  French  by  tha 


270 


FIFTY-FOURTH     LESSON.    (1.) 


reflective  verb  se  porter,  when  they  are  used  in  English  to  inquire  ufter,  61 
to  speak  of  a  person's  health. 

How  is  your  father  ?  I  Comment  se  porte  monsieur  votre 

I      pere  ? 

Obs.  123.  The  qualifications  of  monsieur,  Mr.  ;  madame,  Mrs. ;  made- 
moiselle, Miss;  usually  precede  the  possessive  pronouns  in  French,  when 
wo  speak  to  a  person  respecting  his  parents,  relations,  or  friends,  and  wish 
to  pay  them  some  respect. 

He  is  ill. 
Your  brother. 
Your  cousin. 
Your  brothers. 

Obg.  124.     It  may  be  seen  '.hat  the  plural  of  monsieur 
being  changed  into  mes. 

YDiir  uncles. 

To  doult  a  thing. 

To  ifui-stiun.  anything. 

Do  you  doubt  that  ?  I  do. 

I  do  not  doubt  it. 

I  make  no  question,  have  no  doubt 


II  se  porte  mal. 
t  Monsieur  votre  frere. 
t  Monsieur  votre  cousin, 
t  Messieurs  vos  freres. 


|    t  Messieurs  vos  oncles. 
>   Doutcr,  1,  de  quelque  chose. 
Doutez-vous  de  cela?      J'en  douto. 


of  it. 

What  do  you  doubt  ? 
[  doubt  what  that  man  lias  told  inc. 

Thr  doubt.  Without  doubt,  no  doubt. 
To  agree  to  ti  thing. 


Do  you  agree  to  that  ? 

I  do  agree  to  it. 

How  much  have  you  paid  for  that 

hat  ? 
1  have  paid  three  crowns/0r  it. 

06s.  125.    When  one  of  the  prepositions,  for,  at,  is  used  in  English  tc 
expresi  the  price  of  a  thing,  it  is  not  rendered  in  French.  (401,  Obs.  93.) 


Jc  n'cn  doute  pas. 

De  quoi  doutez-vous  ? 

Je  doute  de  ce  que  cet  homme  m'u 

dit. 

Lc  doute.  Sans  doute. 

Convenir,*  2,  de  quelque  chose,  (con  • 

jugated  like  its  primitive,  vcnir.*, 
Convenez-vous  de  cela  ? 
Pen  conviens. 
t  Combien  avez-vous  paye*  ce  cha- 

peau? 
t  Je  1'ai  pave  trois  e'cus. 


I  bought  this  wine  at  6  dollars  a  bas- 
ket. ($  7.) 
I  bought  some  at  $10  a  basket. 


J'ai  achete  ce  vin  6  dollars  le  panier. 

(ou  a  6  dollars.) 
Pen  ai  achete  a  $10  le  panier. 


CINQUANTE-QUATRIEME  TidhiE.     Ire  Sec. 

Ou  est  M.  votre  oncle  ?  II  voyage.  Y  a-t-il  long-temps  qu'il  voy- 
age? II  y  a  deja  quelques  mois.  Se  porte-t-il  bien?  Oui,  il  so 
porte  beaucoup  mieux  depuis  qu'il  voyage.  Quepense-t-il  de  FEu- 
rope  ?  Quelques  pays  lui  plaisent;  d?autres  ne  lui  plaisent  pas. — 
A-t-il  ete  en  France  ?  Oui,  il  y  est  passe ;  mais  comme  il  ne  pane 
pas  le  Frangais,  il  ne  Faime  pas  beaucoup.  Comment !  M.  votro 


FIFl  Y-fOURTH     LESSON.    (2.)  277 

oncle  ne  parle  pas  Fran^ais!  Non,  il  ne  Pa  jamais  appris.— Com« 
ment  se  porte-t-on  chez  vous l  Tout  le  monde  s'y  porte  bien.  Et 
chez  M.  votre  neveu  ?  Le  domestique  dit  qu'on  y  est  malade.  Qui 
y  est  malade?  Je  ne  sais  pas.  Comme  j'ai  Tintention  d'y  aller,  ja 
n'ai  rien  demande  au  domestique.  Je  doute  de  ce  que  ce  valet  dit. 
Je  ne  le  crois  pas  toujours. — Ou  avez-vous  achete  ce  joli  baton  ?  Le 
trouvez-vous  joli?  Oui,  charmant.  Combien  1'avez-vous  paye  ?  Je 
n'oii  ai  donne  que  trois  quarts  de  gourdes,  (dollars.)  Ce  n'est  pas 
cher.  Etes  vous  convenu  d'aller  demain  a  Burlington  ?  J'en  suie 
convenu.  Prenez  de  notre  vin  a  Si 2  le  panier.  J'en  prendrai. 

How  is  your  father?  (Monsieur  votre  perc  ?)  He  is  (only)  so  so.  (351.) 
— How  is  your  patient?  He  is  a  little  better  to-day  than  yesterday. 
— Is  it  long  since  you  saw  your  brothers  ?  (Messieurs  vos  freres  ?)  I 
them  two  days  ago. — How  art  thou?  I  am  tolerably  well.— 
How  Long  Las  your  cousin  been  learning  French?  lie  has  been 
learning  it  only  eight  months. — Does  he  already  speak  it?  He 
already  speaks,  reads,  and  writes  it  better  than  your  brother,  who 
has  been  learning  it  those  two  years. — Is  it  long  since  you  heard  of 
my  uiicK'  ?  It  is  hardly  a  fortnight  (<piinze  jours)  since  I  heard  of 
him. — Where  is  lie  .-laying  now?  He  is  staying  at  Berlin,  but  my 
fathr  ;don. — Did  you  stay  long  at  Vienna?  I  stayed  there 

a  fortnight. — How  long  did  your  cousin  stay  at  Paris?  He  stayed 
there  only  a  month. 

Has  your  uncle  at  last  bought  the  garden  ?  He  has  not  bought  it, 
tor  he  could  not  agree  about  the  price. — Have  you  at  last  agreed 
about  the  price  of  that  picture  ?  We  have  agreed  about  it. — How 
much  hive  you  paid  for  it?  I  have  paid  fifteen  hundred  francs  foi 
it. — What  hast  thou  bought  to-day  ?  I  have  bought  two  fine  horses, 
three  beautiful  pictures,  and  a  fine  gun. — For  how  much  hast  thou 
bought  the  pictures?  I  have  bought  them  for  seven  hundred  francs. 
— Do  you  find  them  dear?  I  do  not  find  them  dear. — How  much 
nave  you  spent,  then  ?  I  have  spent  arid  paid  nearly  four  thousand 
francs. — How  many  dollars  (gourdes)  is  that  ?  About  800.  It  is  a 
good  deal  of  money. — Have  you  already  heard  of  your  cousin  who 
is  gone  to  Hungary  ?  He  had  agreed  to  write  to  me,  but  he  has  .^ot 
yet  done  it;  however,  I  have  written  to  him. 

VOCABULAIRE.   2dc  Sec. 


The  price. 

Have  you  agreed  about  the  price  ? 
We  have  agreed  about  it. 
About  what  have  you  agreed  ? 
About  the  pric* 


Le  prix. 

iStes-vous  convenus  du  prix  ? 
Nous  en  sommes  convenus. 
De  quoi  etes-vous  convenus  ? 
Du  prix. 


278 


FIFTY -FOUIITH     LESSON.    (2.) 


To  agret,  lo  compose  «  difference. 
To  feel,  feeling.     Felt,  feel. 
Do  you  feel  ?     We  do  not. 
I  feel,  thou  feelest,  he  feels. 
To  consent,  to  agree  lo  . . . 

I  consent  to  go  thither. 

To  wear  (garments.)    The  garment. 

Wliat  garments  does  he  wear  ? 

Tie  wears  beautiful  garments. 

Against  my  custom. 

As  customary. 

My  partner. 

To  observe  sonMhinj. 

To  take  nohc<  of  yuan  f}tin:r. 

Do  you  take  notice  of  that  ? 

I  do  take  notice  of  it. 

Did  you  observe  that  ? 

Did  you  notice  what  he  did  ? 

I  did  notice  it. 

To  expect,  (to  hope  for.) 

What  do  you  expect  ?  (hope  for  ?) 

Do  you  expect  to  receive  a  n<> 

your  uncle  ? 
I  expert  ir.          I  do  not. 
He  expects  it. 
We  expect  it. 
Have  we  expected  it. 
We  have  expected  it  ? 
To  get,  (meaning  to  procure.) 

I  cannot  procure  any  money. 

He  cannot  procure  anything  to  eat. 

ClNQUANTE-QUATRIEME    Tn^ME.       2de   Sec. 

Quefque  chose  ne  vns  plait  pas.  C'est  vrai.  Je  nr  attends  & 
recevolr  un  present,  et  il  ne  vient  pas.  Ne  soy ez  pas  (412)  impa- 
tient, il  viendra,  si  on  vous  Pa  promis. — Qui  vous  fait  ce  don?  Lo 
secretaire  du  general  m-en  a  promis  un. — Le  cousin  de  Papothi- 
caire  a-t-il  consenti  a  vous  ceder  son  dictionnaire  Anglais  et  Franrais  ? 
fl  n7y  a  pas  encore  consenti.  Y  consentira-t-il  ?  J'espere  qu'il  y 
oonsentira. — Qu'allez-vous  porter  ce  printemps?  Je  n'ai  pas  encore 
fait  de  choix.  Je  ne  sais  pas  ce  que  je  porterai.  Moi,  je  porterai 
des  habits  fonces  au  printemps,  et  quelque  chose  de  clair  en 
N'aviez-vous  pas  un  surtout  clair  Phiver  passe?  Si  fait.  J'rm  ai 
porte  un  tout  Phiver  Je  le  croyais.  Moi;  je  ne  les  aime  plus  claira 


S'accordcr,  1. 

Sentir*  2,  scnlant.     Senti,  sentet. 
Sentez-vous  ?   Nous  ne  sentonapao 
Je  sens,  tu  sens,  il  sent. 
Consentir,*  2,  (commc   sentirf)  (d 

ou  de  av.  1'infin.,  a  av.  un  nora.) 
Je  consens  a  (d'y)  aller. 
Porter,  1,  (des  habits.)  Lo  vetumont. 
Quels  vetemcnts  porte-t-il? 
II  porte  de  beaux  vetements. 
Centre  mon  ordinaire. 
Comme  a  Pordinaire. 
Mon  associd. 

>  t  S'apcrccvoir,  3,  dequcl^ite  cAj>c. 

Vous  apercevez-vous  de  cela  f 
Je  m'en  aper^ois. 
Vous  etes-vous  apercu  de  celu  ? 
Vous  etes-vous  apercu  de  ce  qu'il  • 

fait? 

Je  m'en  suis  apercu. 
t  tfattcndn-,   1,    a  av.  1'infmi.) 
A  quoi  vous  attendez-vous  ? 
Vous  attendez-vous  a  recevoir  un 

billot  dc  votre  oncle  f 
Jc  m'y  att(  : 
II  s'y  attend. 
Nous  nous  y  at  ten.' 
Nous  y  sommes-nous  altendus? 
Nous  nous  y  son;  us. 

t  .\V  procurer,  1. 

Je  ne  peux  pas  me  procurer  d'argenl. 
Je  ne  puis  me  procurer  de  Panrent. 
II  ne  peut  se  procurer  de  quoi  m 


FIFTY-FOURTH     LESSON.    (3.)  279 

J«  les  ai  aimes  autre  fois.  —  Avez-vous  vendu  votre  grain  &,  75  cento 
fe  boisseau?  (a  bushel.   §  7.)     J'en  ai  eu  80  cents  le  boisseau. 

Have  you  agreed  with  your  partner  ?  I  have  agreed  with  him.  — 
Does  he  consent  to  pay  you  the  price  of  the  ship  !  Ho  consents  to 
pay  me  the  price  agreed  upon,  (convenu.)  —  Do  you  consent  to  #a 
lo  France?  I  do.  —  Do  you  too?  1  ?  No.  —  Have  you  seen  your  old 
friend  again  l  (rcvoir^*  comme  roir,*  25',  3:*'.)  1  have  sec.i  him 
again.  —  Did  you  recognise  him?  I  could  haul  .ise  him; 

for,  contr;:  custom,  he  wears  a  large  hat.  —  How  is  he?     Ho 

7«  very  well.  —  What  garments  does  he  wear?     He  weais  beautiful 
new  garments.  —  Have  you  taken  notice  of  what  you:  :-oy  has  done? 
I  have  taken  notice  of  it.  —  Have  you  (Ven)  puni>lieu  niin  for  it?     1 
\  him  for  it.  —  Has  your  father  .  rilten  to  you? 

-.ds)  to  receive  a  note  from  him 
to-da 

Of  what  do  you  complain?     I  compl;,  \:\«   Mi*  to 

procure  some  money.  —  Why  do  these  poor  plain  '.     '1'huy 

:iiey  cannot  procure  How  are 

..  (comme  a  ioni'iuiirc,)  very  well. 

your  unclo  well  ?     He  is  better  than  he  usually  is.  —  I  hive  you 

:ieard  of  your  friend  who  is  in  Germany  ?     1  have  already 

written  to  him  several  times;  IK  •  has  not  answered  me 

—Why  have  you  punished  your  boy  ?    I  did  it  because  he  broke 

my  I  ..eu  him  tome  syrup  and  water,  and  instead 

of  drinking  it,  he  spilt  it  cii  the  new  carpet,  which  we  bought  leu 

I  what  do  you  think   he   did   at  '••  —  Did  ho 

i  iv  the  glass?     Yes,  he  did,"  and  then  I  gave  him  a  few  blows.  — 

What  did  you  pay  for  a  yard  of  your  new  carpet?     I  paid  dear  for 

1.60. 

oinc  Sec. 

:ke  fun  of  sonic  one  or  some-  \ 

(  Se  rnoquer  de  queiqu  un  ou  ao  quol. 


To  laugh  at  somt  one  or  something.  )      que  cllose- 

:it  everybody.  )  n  ge  c  dc 

lie  criticises  everybody.  i 


:!i  at  that  man  ? 
,  I  d3  not  laugh  at  him. 
To  stop,  to  stay.   Stop,  wait,  laid  on 
you  stayed  long  at  Berlin  ? 

T  Btaveil  tin  \~^  only  three  d 

To  tojoun/. 

Where   does   your    brother 

present  ? 
&t  present,  actually. 


Vous  moquez-vous  de  cet  homme? 
Je  no  m'en  moque  pas. 
S'arreler,  1.     Arretez-vous. 
Vous  etes-vous  arrete  long-temps  a 

Berlin  ? 

Je  ne  m'y  siiis  arrctc  que  trois  jours, 
SejoiLrner,  1. 
Ou  Monsieur  votre  frire  sejourne-t-U 

actuellement  f 
Actuellement. 


280 


FIFT  Y-FOt  K  Til     LESSON.    (3.) 


7'he  residence,  stay,  abode. 

P^ris  is  a  fine  place  to  live  in. 

After  reading. 

After  cutting  myself. 

After  dressing  yourself. 

After  dressing  himself. 

After  sharing  ourselves. 

After  warming  themselves. 

I  returned  the  book  after  reading  it. 

I  threw  the  knife  away  after  cutting 
myself. 

You  went  to  the  concert  after  dress- 
ing yourself. 

He  went  to  the  theatre  after  dressing 
himself. 

We  breakfasted  afier  shaving  our- 
selves. 

They  went  out  after  warming  them- 
selves. 

The  sick  person,  (the  patient.) 

Tolerably  well. 

It  is  rather  late.     It  is  rather  far. 

•ANTE-QUA 


Le  sejour. 

t  C'est  un  beau  sejoui  quo  Pans, 

t  Apres  avoir  lu.  (401.) 

t  Apres  m'etre  coupe. 

t  Apres  vous  etre  habilld. 

t  Apres  s'etre  habille. 

t  Apres  nous  etre  rases. 

t  Apres  s'etre  chaufles. 

t  J'ai  rendu  le  livre  apres  1' a  voir  lu, 

t  J'ai  jete  le  couteau  aprea  m'etra 

coupe, 
t  Vous  etes  al!6   au  concert  apres 

vous  etre  habille. 
t  II  est  alle  au  theatre  apres  s'fitro 

habille. 
t  Nous  avons  dcjeunl   apres  noai 

etre  rases, 
t  Us  sont  sortis  aprea  s'Ctre  chaufles. 

Le  malade. 

Assez  bien,  pacsablement. 

11  est  bien  tard.    C'est  bien  loin. 


Sec. 


Tu  arrives  tard,  imm  cher  Armand,  t'es-lu  urretu  en  chemin  '<  Jo 
euis  ptirti  mi  peu  tard,  et  je  me  suis  arrete  en  chemin,  (on  the  way.) 
Pourquoi  t'es-tu  arrete  1  Je  me  suis  arrete  pour  voir  un  voleur  d« 
grand  chemin  qu'on  a  pris  de  bonne  heure  ce  matin.  Je  crois  que 
tu  as  des  vetements  neufs?  Oui?  j'ai  mis  ai,jourd;hui  les  vetement.- 
dontmon  bon  oncle  m?a  fait  present.  Us  s\»nt  beaux;  mais  je  r 
que  1'habit  est  un  peu  trop  grand:  qu'en  ^enses-tu?  Je  ne  peux 
pas  bien  voir  derriere  ;  devant,  il  va  bien,  n'est-ce  pas  ?  A  mer- 
veille  ;  mais  ici  et  la;  il  est  un  peu  trop  largo.  Comment  va  le  gilet  ! 
Parfaitcment  bien.  Et  les  pantalons  (pahialoons)  comment  vont 
ils?  11s  vont  bien  aussi.  Ne  sont-ils  ni  iiop  longs  ni  trop  larges 
Non  ;  ils  sont  juste  ce  qu'il  faut. 

Do  you  like  to  speak  to  my  uncle  ?  I  liue  much  to  speak  to  him; 
Dut  sometimes  he  laughs  at  me,  (se  moque  de.)  —  Why  does  he 
laugh  at  you  ?  He  laughs  at  me  because  I  speak  badly.  —  Why  has 
your  brother  no  friends'?  He  has  none,  because  he  criticises  every-  - 
body.  —  Why  are  you  laughing  at  that  man?  I  do  not  intend  (jt 
n'aipas  (ksscin)  to  laugh  at  him.  I  beg  you  not  (pricr  de,  }  171  —  7) 
to  do  it;  for  you  will  break  his  heart  if  you  laugh  at  him.  —  DC, 
you  doubt  what  I  am  telling  you  1  I  do  not  doubt  it.  —  Do  you  doubt 
what  that  man  has  told  you?  I  doubt  it?  for  he  has  often  told 
stories,  (mcntir,*  443.)  —  Have  you  at  last  bought  the  horse  which  you 


FIFTY-FIFTH     LESSON.    (1.)  281 

wished  to  buy  last  month?     I  have  not  bought  it;  for  I  have  not 
been  able  to  procure  money. 

What  have  you  done  with  the  books  \\  hich  the  English  captain  haa 
»ent  you?  I  have  returned  them  to  him,  after  reading  them. — Why 
have  you  thrown  away  your  knife?  1  have  thrown  it  away  after 
cutting  myself. — When  did  I  go  to  the  concert  ?  You  went  after 
dressing  yourself. — When  did  your  brother  go  to  the  ball?  Ho 
*ent  after  dressing  himself. — When  did  you  breakfast  ?  We  bieak- 
Ousted  after  shaving  ourselves. — When  did  our  neighbors  go  out? 
They  went  out  after  warming  themselves. — What  did  you  do  thia 
morning?  I  shaved,  after  rising,  and  went  out  after  breakfasting.— 
What  did  your  father  do  last  niirhtl  (/tier  soir?)  He  supped  after 
•_C  to  the  play,  and  went  to  bed  after  supping. — Did  lie  rise  early? 
He  i 

A  t'M'.Ft'L  II:  uf  the  Ob.--  < -n  given  in    French, 

to  show  the   pupil  that   it  :•»•   done.     Let  him   now   translate  in 

•  jlish  he  finds  in  the  book,  as  a  part  of  his  daily  task. 


FIFTY-FIFTH  LESSON,  55th.— Cinquantc-cinquiemc  Lcccn,  55me. 

VOCABULAIBE.       llC  Sec. 

iMTK   ARTICLE,  FEMININE.— Article  Difini,  Femi/iin. 

Sing,  and  plur.     The,  of,  from  the,  to  the,  for  the. 

Singulier.  I. a,  1',         de  la,  de  1',  a  la,  a  F,       pour  la,  pour  I1. 

Piuriel.  Les,  des,  aux,  pour  les. 

Obs.  ICC.    It  will  be  observed  that  the  plural  of  the  definite  article  is  alike 
for  both  genders.  (*)'.) 

When  the  definite  article  stands  before  a  vowel  or  an  h  mute,  in  the  gin 
gular,  it  is  also  alike  for  both  genders,  viz.  V . 


Sing.  riur. 

The  woman,  women. 

The  mother. 

The  daughter  or  the  girl. 
The  sister. 
The  candle. 
The  bottle. 
The  key. 
She,  it.  They,  (nominatives.) 

.  To  her,  to  it.     Of,  from  her. 
Of,  Irom  it. 
Them.  To  them.  To  them.  Of,  from 


Shifrulier.  Pluricl. 

La  femme,  les  femmes. 

La  mere,  les  meres. 

La  fille,  les  filles. 

La  sceur,  les  so3urs. 

La  chandelle,  les  chandelles. 
La  bouteille,  les  bouteilles. 
La  clef,  les  clefs. 

Elle.     Elles,  ($  38,  1  &  2.)  Nominal 
La,  F.      Lui,  y.     D'elle,  en.     En 

(*  47.) 
Les.    Leur,  (211.)    Y,  (21'.)  D'cilee 


them.  en.     En. 

Has  she  ?     She  has.     lias  she  not?    'A-t-elle?     Elle  a.     N'a-v-ei.o  DBS? 


232  FIFTV-FIF'i.i     LESSON.    (1.) 

Have  they?  They  have,  they  have  not.  |  Ont-elles?  Elles  ont,  ellcs  n'ontpaa 

Of,  from.         To.  With. 

My,  (ferninin  singulicr  )  Ma,        dc  ma,          a.  ma,          avec  ma 

Thy.  Ta,         de  ta,  a  ta,  avec  ta. 

His,  her,  its.  Sa,          de  sa,  a  sa,  avec  sa, 

My,  (plur.  des  deux  genres.)          Mes,       de  mes,        a  mes,        avec  ints. 

Obs.  127.    In  the  plural,  the  possessive  pronouns  are  always  alike  for  both 
genders.  ((J!.) 


The  father  and  his  son  or  A  is  daugh- 
ter. ($  32.) 
The  mother  and  her  son  or  her  daugh- 


Le  pore  et  son  fils  ou  sa  fille. 
La  nu  re  et  son  fils  ou  sa  fille. 


ter. 
The  child  and  its  brother  or  its  eistor.1  L'enfant  et  son  frcre  ou  sa  sceur. 


Plur. 

SingnKer. 

rinrid. 

My  pen, 

my  pens. 

|  Ma  plume, 

mes  plumes. 

Thy  fork, 

thy  forks. 

I  Ta  fourchette, 

tes  fourchette§. 

His  or  her  nut, 

his  or  her  nuts. 

Sa  noix, 

ecs  noix. 

Our  hand, 

our  hands. 

I  Notre  main, 

nos  m 

Your  mouth, 

your  mouths. 

•  Votre  bouchc, 

vos  bouchee. 

Their  door, 

their  doors. 

|  Leur  porte, 

leursportee. 

Ota.  108.  The  personal  pronoun  leur  must  not  be  mistaken  for  the  pos- 
sessive leur.  The  lonnvr  nrvtr  lakes  an  s,  while  the  latter  does,  when  the 
person  or  thing  possessed  is  in  the  plural.  Ex.  Je  leur  parlo,  I  speak  to 
them  ;  jc  vois  leurs  freres  et  leurs  sosurs,  I  see  their  brothers  and  their  si 


The  pretty  woman.  ($  SOO — 4.) 

The  pn-tty  women. 

The  small  candle,  tiie  small  candles. 

The  large  bottle,      «Lc  large  bottles. 


La  jolie  fcmme. 

Les  jolies  fen: 

La  petite  chandellc, 

chand 
La  grande  boutcillc,        les  grandes 


boutcillo.i. 

ClXQUANTE-CINQUlilME    TlI^ME.   JrC    Sec. 

Comment  so  porte  Madame  votre  mere?  Je  vous  icmercie,  elle 
Be  porte  passablement.  Et  Mesdemoiselles  vos  so3urs?  Elles  ne 
se  portent  pas  si  bieu  qira  1'ordinaire.  Qu'ont-elles  1  Elles  n'ont 
Das  grand7  chose ;  mais  elles  se  plaignent  un  peu.  Les  femmea 
aiment  a  se  plaindre,  n'est-ce  pas  ?  Elles  ne  se  plaignent  pas  plus 
que  les  hommes.  La  fille  du  ministre  est-elle  mieux?  On  dit 
qu^elle  est  plus  mal.  Mange-t-elle  qnelque  chose  ?  Non,  elle  a 
trop  mal  a  la  bouche  pour  manger. — Brule-t-on  des  chandell«JS  ou 
du  gaz  chez  votre  socur?  On  y  brule  du  gaz.  On  pense  que  ce 
n'ost  pas  si  cher  que  les  chandelles. — Ou,  Sophie  a-t-elle  mis  la  clef? 
La  ciof  de  auoi  ?  La  clef  du  pupitre  Francais.  Je  rje  sais  pas. 
Mai§  voici  ma  clef;  elle  ouvre  le  pupitre.  N'importe.  Je  n'ai  pas 
Pouvnr.  A-t-on  apporte  les  bouteilles  ^  Les  bouteilles  de 


FIFTY-  FIFTH     LKSSON.    (2.} 


283 


quoi  ?  Les  bouteilles  de  vin.  Oui,  les  voici,  (here  llu-y  are.)  ierriere 
IH  porte.  Combien  ave/.-vous  pave  la  bouteille  ?  J'ai  pave  presque 
iiii  demi-dollar  la  bouteille.  —  AYC/-VOUS  vu  la  jolie  fern  me  qui  a 
Quand  a-t-elle  pas>r-  f  11  y  a  un  moment.  J'etais 
alors  occr  je  n:ai  pas  pu  la  voir.  — 

Ma  plume  d'acicr  est  dans  n:  meieuille,  prene/-la;  si  vous 

H,i-  \    ;:  _rold  ribbo-  ::ot.  —  What  has  she? 

Sh--  hftfl  '    '  vour  mother  anything?     She  has  a  line  gold 

fork.  —  W:  .  large  bottle  ?    Your  sister  has  it.  —  Do  you  some- 

times see  my  mother?  r  ol'ten.  —  When  did  you  see  your 

.  her  a  fortnight  ago.  —  Who  has  my  line  nuts?     Your 

good  -  them.  —  Has  she  also  my  silver  forks'?   She  has  them 

!ii?     Your  mother  has  them.  —  What  fork  have 

you  my  iron  fork.—  1'  ul  my  pens?    They 

•  nut  had  them,  but  I  believe  that  tin  i  have  had  them.  — 

Why  does  your  brother  complain  ?    He  complaii.  •  his  right 

foot  aches.  —  Why  do  you  complain?     I  complain  because  my  left 

<m  country  people  (parmi  vous  mitres  (§4H)  pens  de 
camp'"/!.':)  there  are  many  fools;  are  there  not?  a>ked  (dcnandd)  a 
phili  .itely,  (Vautre  jour,)  of  a  peasant,  (dunpaysan.)  The 

vered.  (repondit  :)  "  Sir,  they  are  to  be  found  (on  en  trouvc) 
in  a!.  (ietut.':)    "  Fools  sometimes  tell  the  truth,  (la  verite,") 

(dit)  the  philosopher.  —  What  did  the  philosopher  ask  of  the 
countryman'?     lit-  there  were  not  (n'y  avail  pas)  many 

fools  among  country  people?  —  What  did  the  countryman  reply  to 
the  philosopher  ?  1  i  ed  that  there  were  some  in  all  stations. 

—  Was  the  philosopher  pleased  with  the  peasant's  answer?  (la  re- 
ponsc,  fern.)  I  think  he  was  pleased  with  the  answer.  —  What  do 
you  think  of  the  peasant's  answer  ?  I  think  it  ....  (L;ecolier  peui 
linir  la  reponse.)  —  Do  you  nol  liKe  that  young  lady's  face?  Yes,  I 
do;  but  not  her  hair,  (plur.)  —  Has  not  that  young  woman  too  much 
tongue  ?  Yes,  she  has  a  little  too  much;  at  least,  so  they  say,  (<m 
le  dit.) 

VOCABULAIRE.       iMe  SeC. 


Which  woman  ?        Which  women  ? 
Which  daughter  ?  Which  daughters  ? 
Which,  what  one  ?     Which  ones  ? 
This,  that  woman. 

,  those  women. 
This  lady,  those  ladie?> 
1'hat  young  lady,  those  young  ladies. 


Quelle  femme  ?      Quelles  femmca  I 

Quelle  fille  ?     Quellca  filles  ? 

Laquelle  ?  Lesquelles  ? 

Cette  femme. 

Ces  femmes. 

Cette  dame-ci,     ces  dames-ci. 

Cette  demoiselle-la,        ces  dcmoi 


284 


FIFTY-FIFTH     LESSOM.    (2.) 


The  Land,  the  hands. 

The  right  hand. 

The  leit  hand. 

I  have  a  sore  hand. 


La  main,  lea  mains. 

La  main  droite. 
La  main  gauche. 
J'ai  mal  a  la  main. 


Obs.  129.     Avoir  mal  is  used  with  the  preposition  d,  to  express  thai  I 
part  of  the  body  is  aflected  with  illness  or  pain.  (231.) 


The  tooth,  the  teeth. 

Have  you  the  toothache  ? 

I  have  the  headache. 

I  feel  a  pain  in  my  aide. 

His  feet  are  sore. 

The  face.    The  mouth.    The  cheek. 

The  tongue.     The  language. 

The  door.    The  window.  The  street. 

The  town.  The  linen.  The  old  woman. 


La  dent,  les  dents. 

Avez-vous  mal  aux  dents? 

J'ai  mal  a  la  tete. 

J'ai  mal  au  cote. 

II  a  mal  aux  pieds. 

La  figure.       La  bouche.       Lajouo, 

La  langue. 

La  pone.     La  fenetre.     La  rue. 

La  ville.  La  toile.  La  vieille  fcmme. 


REMARK.  From  what  precedes,  this  principle  maybe  deduced: — Tho 
characteristic  ending  of  French  feminine  nouns  and  adjectives  is  the  lol'.tT  <•. 
There  are,  however,  some  adjectives  which  al^o  have  this  ending  in  the 
masculine,  and  then  they  are  of  both  genders,  as: 


An  amiable  man. 
An  amiable  woman. 
The  room. 
The  front  room. 

The  back  room. 

1  he  upper  room. 
INDEFINITE  ADJECTIVE 

Some, 

Sing,  (ll1**.)  De  la,  T, 

Plur.  DCS, 


Un  horn  me  aimable. 

Une  fenimc  aimable. 

La  chambre. 

La  chambre  de  devant,  (ou  du  de 

vant,  ou  sur  le  devant.) 
La  chambre  de  derriere,  (ou  du  der- 

riere,  cu  sur  le  dcrricre.) 
La  chambre  d'cn  naut,  (ou  du  haut.) 

PRONOUN.— Article  Partitif,  Ftminin. 
Of,  from  some.     To  some,         With  some. 

de,  a  de  la,  T,   avec  de  la,  1*. 

de,  a  des,  avec  des. 


Obs.  130.     For  the  plural  of  this  article,  and  when  it  stands  before  an 
adjective,  (II1*2.) 


Some  light.        Some  silk. 
Some  good  soup. 
Some  good  apples. 


De  la  lumiere.    De  la  soie. 
De  bonne  soupe. 
De  bonnes  pommes. 


Obs.  131.     Most  adjectives  ending  in  el,  eil,  ien,  on,  and  et,  double  tlioir 
final  consonant  before  the  ^  mute  of  the  feminine.     Examples: 


A  cruel  certitude. 
Such  a  promise. 
An  old  acquaintance. 
A  good  truth. 
A  dumb  woman. 


Une  cruelle  certitude. 
Une  pareille  promesse. 
Une  ancienne  connaissar.co. 
Une  bonne  ve'rite. 
Une  femme  muette. 


Obs.  132.     In  the  masculine,  the  above  adjectives  would  ho  cruclt 
,  ban,  muct. 


FIFTY-FIF1H      LESSON.    (2.)  285 

INDEFINITE  ARTICLE,  FEMININE.— Article  Indejhu,  Feminin. 
A  or  an,     of,    from  a,     too,     with  a.        Une,     d'une,     a  tine,     avec  uuo. 
A.  virtuous  woman.  |  Une  femme  vertueuse. 

Ob'.  123.  Adjectives  ending  in  the  masculine  in  x  become  feminine  by 
cnanging  x  into  se  as,  masc.  vcrtucux ;  fern,  vertueuse,  virtuous. 

\  happy  young  lady.  |  Une  demoiselle  heurcuse.1 

ClXQUAXTE-CIXQCIEME    TllfblE.       2de    Sec. 

Sont-ce  les  Demoiselles  Cavaignac  ?  Oui;  ce  sont  elles.  Vonloz- 
/OUR  me  presenter  d  dies?  (introduce  me  to  them.  $  64.)  Volontiers. 
Vene/.  Attendons  un  moment,  car  vous  voyez  qu'elles  parlent  d 
ces  dames  en  bleu.  Quelles  sont  ces  deux  dames  en  bleu,  elleg 
sont  jolics,  n'est-ce  pas  ?  Je  ne  les  connais  pas.  Approchons  a  pre- 
bent.  Mesdemoiselles,  voulez-vous  me  permettve  de  vous  presenter 
mon  ami,  M.  «!o  Montcalme  ?  Nous  sommes  bien  aises,  M.  de 
:calme;  de  fiire  votre  connaissance,  (acquaintance.) — Mesde- 
moiselles, tout  le  plaisir  est  de  mon  cote.  Vous  avez  bien  de  la 
lonte.  (literally  goodness,  here,  politeness.} — Mile.  Clara  va-t-elle  jouer 
du  piano"?  Non,  elle  n'cn  touchcra  pas  (will  not  play) ce  soir, parco 
•lie  a  mal  a  la  main  droite.  Comment  s'est-elle  fait  du  mal'? 
Kile  s'est  fait  du  mal  avec  ses  ciseaux. — Quel  bruit  est  cela?  C'est 
(a  porte  de  la  rue  (street  door)  qu'on  vient  de  fermer. — Pourquoi 
Mile.  Sophie  tient-elle  son  mouchoir  sur  sa  joue?  y  a-t-elle  mal? 
Kile  n'a  pas  mal  a  la  joue,  mais  aux  dents.  Cette  femme  muette 
est-elle  heureuse  1  Oui,  elle  est  heureuse,  parce  qu'elle  est  bonne 
et  vertueuse. 

Is  your  sister  writing  N:;  Madam,  she  is  not. — Why  does  she 
not?  Her  right  hand  is  sore. — Why  does  not  the  daughter  of  your 
neighbor  go  out  ?  She  does  not,  because  she  has  sore  feet. — Why 
does  my  sister  not  speak  ?  Because  she  has  a  sore  mouth. — Hast 
thou  not  seen  my  silver  pen  ?  No,  but  I  have  seen  your  sister's  steel 
pen. — Hast  thou  a  front  room  ?  I  have  a  back  one,  (une  de  der- 
riere,)  but  my  brother  has  a  front  one. — Is  it  (est-ce)  an  upper  room? 
It  is  ore,  (e'en  csl  une.) — Does  the  wife  (la  femme)  of  our  shoemaker 
go  oat  already  ?  No,  my  lady,  she  does  not  go  out  yet,  for  she  is 
still  very  ill. — Which  bottle  had  your  little  sister?  She  had  our 
mother's,  (celle  Je.)-^Have  you  eaten  of  my  soup  or  of  my  mother's  ? 
I  have  eaten  neither  of  yours  (de  la  votrc)  nor  your  mother's,  but 
of  that  of  my  good  sister. 

Have  you  seen  the  lady  who  was  with  me  this  morning  ?  No,  but  I 
MIW  her  amiable  daughter. — Has  your  mother  hurt  herself?  She 
has  not  hurt  herself. — Can  you  write  with  this  steel  pen  ?  Which  1 

1  From  the  masculine  lieurtux. 


280 


FIFTY-FIFTH     LESSON.    (3.) 


(la  qucllc?)  Sophia's'2  Yes,  Sophia's.  No,  but  I  shall  wfite  with 
the  golden  one,  (cclle  djor.) — Each  (chaque)  woman  thinks  herself 
amiable,  and  each  (chacune)  is  conceited,  (a  de  V amour  propre.) 
The  same  as  (de  meme  que)  men,  my  dear  friend.  Many  a  one 
(lei)  thinks  himself  (se  croit}  learned  who  is  not  so,  (ne  Vest  pas,) 
and  many  men  (bien  dcs  hommes)  surpass  (surpasser)  women  in 
vanity,  (en  vanite.) — What  is  the  matter  with  you?  Nothing  is  the 
matter  with  me. — Why  does  your  sister  complain  *•  Because  she 
has  a  pain  in  her  cheek. — Has  your  brother  a  sore  cheek?  No,  bit 
he  feels  a  pain  in  his  side. — Where  is  the  silk  ?  It  has  fallen  from 
the  window  in  the  street. — Did  this  old  woman  pick  it  up  ?  Yes, 
she  did;  but  she  did  not  pick  up  the  linen. — Did  the  linen  fall  also 
from  the  window  ?  Yes,  it  did. 

VOCABULAIRE.     3me  Sec. 
An  active  young  woman.  |  Une  jeune  personne1  active. 

Obs.  134.    Adjectives  ending  in  the  masculine  in  /,  become  feminine  by 
changing  /  into  ve,  as,  masc.  actif ;  fern,  active,  active. 


A  new  gown. 

An  ingenuous  proposal. 

Have  you  my  pen  ? 

No,  Madam,  I  have  it  not. 

Which  bottle  have  you  broken  ? 

Which  door  have  you  opened  ? 


Une  robe  neuve.2 

Une  proposition  na'i've.3 

Avez-vous  ma  plume  ? 

Non,  Madame,  je  ne  1'ai  pas. 

Quelle  bouteille  avez-vous  cassee  f 

Quelle  porte  avez-vous  ouvcrte  ? 


Obs.  135.   The  past  participle  agrees  with  its  direct  object,  (regime  direct,) 
in  gender  as  well  as  in  number.  (321,  Obs.  75.) 


Which  windows  have  you  opened  ? 
Which  bottles  has  the  woman  broken  ? 

Which  young  lady  have  you   con- 

ducted  to  the  ball  ? 
Which  water  have  you  drunk  ? 
Which  letters  have  you  written  ? 
This,  this  one.  These. 

That,  that  one.  Those. 

Have  you  this  or  that  pen  ? 

I  have  neither  this  nor  that. 

Do  you  see  tha   woman  ? 

I  sec  her. 

Have  you  seen  my  sisters  ? 

No,  Miss,  I  have  not  seen  them. 


Quelles  fcnetrcs  avez-vous  ouvertes  ? 
Quelles  bouteilles  la  femme  a-t-elle 

casse'es  ? 
Quelle   demoiselle    avez-vous   con 

duite  au  bal  ? 

Quelle  eau  avez-vous  bue  ? 
Quelles  lettres  avez-vous  ecrites  ? 
Celle-ci.  Celles-ci. 

Celle-la.  Celles-la. 

Avez-vous  cette  ph'me-ci  ou  celle 

la? 

Je  n'ai  ni  celle-ci  ni  celle-la. 
Voyez-vous  cette  femme  ? 
Je  la  vois. 

Avez-vous  vu  mes  sceurs  ? 
Non,  Mademoiselle,  je  ne  les  ai  [>ai 

vues. 


1  Persojine,  as  a  pronoun,  is  masculine  ;  as  a  substantive    it  ia 
*  From  the  masculine  neuf 
8  From  the  masculine  not/, 


FIFTY-FIFTH     LESSON.     (3.) 


287 


Has  he  spoken  to  her  ?  He  has. 

To  her,  to  him,  to  them. 

Do  you  speak  to  my  sisters  ? 

I  speak  to  them. 

Some  coarse  linen. 

Some  good  water. 

A  napkin,  a  towel.    A  clean  napkin. 

The  following  double  the  letter  /:  — 

(before  a  consonant,  |  Beau, 

Handsome.        <  betbre  a  vowel  or  h  >  ^  j 
(     mute,  i 

f  before  a  consonant,  [  Nouveau 

New.  <  before  a  vowel  or  h 

(     mute, 


Lui  a-t-il  parle  ?     II  lui  a  rarKS. 

Lui,  leur.  (Obs.  128.) 

Parlez-vous  a  mes  sceurs  ? 

Je  leur  parle. 

De  grosse  toile. 

De  bonne  eau. 

Une  serviette.  Une  serviette  propru 


^Nouvcl, 


Old. 
Crazy   loo. 

Soft. 

Some  fine  silk  stockings. 

The  Christian.  (  (M.t.  i 

The  Jew.  (Ol>s.  134.) 

The  negro. 

A  companion. 

A  friend.  (Remark,  p.  28-1.) 

To  celebrate,  to  final. 


{  Vieux, 
<  Vicil, 
*  Fou, 


belle. 


nouvelle, 


vieille 


>    molle. 
) 

Do  IHMIIX  l>as  de  soie. 
Le  Chretien,    l:t-m.  la  Chrutienne 
Le  Juif.  "     la  Juive. 

Le  negre.  "     la  negresse. 

Uricompagnon.  "     une  compagne. 
Un  ami.  "     une  amie. 

Celebrer,  1,  feter,  1. 


CiNoiAMixi  TII£ME.     3me  Sec. 

A  quelle  joue  ave/.-vous  maH  Ala  droite  ou  a  la  gauche?  Je 
n'ai  mal  ni  a  la  joue  droite  ni  a  la  gauche.  Vraiment?  Je  croyais 
que  vous  aviez  mal  a  1'une  ou  a  Pautre.  A  quoi  cette  dame  s'amuse- 
t-elle  ?  Elle  s?amuse  a  toucher  du  piano. — Guillaume,  apporte/  de 
la  lumiere,  nous  voulons  jouer  aux  echecs.  Voulez-vous  une  chan- 
d^lle,  ou  allumerai-je  le  gaz? — Apportez  une  chandelle,  allumee. 
N'avez-vous  pas  revu  notre  ancienne  connaissance,  Mme.  Leroux  '• 
Non7  je  n'ai  pas  revu  cette  ancienne  connaissance,  mais  j'en  ai  revu 
une  autre.  Qui  ?  Devinez}  (guess.) — Vous  a-t-elle  fait  une  pareille 

1  FoZ  is  used  instead  of  fou  before  nouns  beginning  with  a  vowel.     Fol 
always  precedes,  and  fou  always  follows  its  substantive.     Ex.  Un  march& 
fou,  a  foolish  bargain;  un  fol  espoir,  a  foolish  hope.     Suhytantively,  fou 
means  a  madman,  and  fulle  a  madwoman. 

2  Formerly,  mol  was   more  in  use  than  mou.     The  Academy  writes: 
"  Unhomme  mou  el  cffemine"   a  weak  and  effeminate  man.     We  read, 
however,  in  Button,  "  ^cs  Chi?iois  font  des  peiiples  7wo/.«?,"  the  Chinese  arc 
an  effeminate  people. 


388  FIFTY-FIFTH     LESSON.    (3.J 

promesse  ?  Oui,  elle  en  a  fait  une  pareille,  a  ma  scour,  a  ma  cousine. 
et  a  moi.  ($64 — 2.)  Comment  se  portent  Mesdemoiselles  von 
scBurs  l\  Elles  se  portent  tres-bien  depuis  que'lques  jours.  Ou  demeu- 
rent-elles  ?  Elles  demeurent  a  Wilmington. — Est-ce  une  petite  ville  ? 
Oui,  c'est  une  petite  ville  dans  Vetat  de  Delaware,  (the  state  of  Dela- 
ware.) Quel  jour  les  Turcs  celebrent-ils  ?  Us  celebrent  le  vendredi ; 
les  Juifs  celebrent  le  samedi,  et  les  Chretiens  le  dimanche.  Quel 
jour  est-ce  que  les  negres  celebrent  ?  Les  negres  celebrent  le  jour 
da  leur  naissance,  (their  birth-day.) 

Is  your  sister  as  old  as  my  mother  ?  She  is  not  so  old,  but  she  is 
taller. — Has  your  brother  purchased  anything?  (fait  des  emplettes  ?) 
He  has  purchased  something,  (il  en  a  fait.") — What  has  he  bought t 
He  has  bought  fine  linen,  good  pens,  old  candles,  and  napkins. — 
Has  ho  not  bought  some  silk  stockings?  He  has  bought  some. — 
Have  you  a  sore  nose  ?  I  have  riot  a  sore  nose,  but  1  have  the  tooth- 
ache.— Have  you  cut  your  finger  1  No,  my  lady,  I  have  "cut  my 
hand. — Will  you  give  me  a  pen?  I  will  give  you  one. — Will  you 
have  this  or  that?  I  will  have  neither. — Which  (laquclle}  one  do 
you  wish  to  have  ?  I  wish  to  have  that  which  your  sister  has. — Do 
you  wish  to  have  my  mother's  good  black  silk  (bonne  sole  noire)  or 
my  sisters?  I  wish  to  have  neither  your  mother's  nor  your  sister's, 
but  that  which  you  have. 

Do  you  open  the  back  window  ?  1  open  it,  because  it  is  too  warm. 
-Which  windows  has  your  sister  opened  ?  She  has  opened  those 
of  the  front  room. — Have  you  been  at  the  ball  of  my  old  acquaint- 
ance ?  I  have  been  there. — Which  young  ladies  have  you  taken  to 
the  ball?  I  took  my  sister's  friends  and  companions  (fern.)  there. — 
Did  they  dance  ?  They  danced  a  good  deal. — Did  they  amuse  them- 
selves? They  amused  themselves. — Did  they  remain  long  at  the 
call  ?  They  remained-there  two  hours. — Is  this  young  lady  a  Turk  ? 
No,  she  is  a  Greek. — Does  she  speak  French  ?  She  speaks  it. — Does 
she  not  speak  English?  She  speaks  it  also,  but  she  speaks  Frencli 
better. — Has  your  sister  a  companion  ?  She  has  one. — Does  she  like 
her?  She  likes  her  very  much,  for  she  is  very  amiable. — That 
active  young  woman  is  ingenuous,  is  she  not?  Yes,  she  is  (both) 
active  and  ingenuous. — What  do  you  think  of  his  sister's  new  silk 
gown?  Her  new  silk  gown?  Yes,  the  silk  one.  Her  new  silk 
gown  pleases  me  much. 


FIFTY-SIXTH    LESSON      (1.) 


FlFTV-SIXTil  LESSON,  56th.— Cinquantc-sixiemc  Leron,  56m« 


VOCABUI.AIRE.     Ire  Sec. 


To  go  to  the  country. 
To  be  pleased  in  the  con  airy. 
To  go  to  the  bank. 
'*o  ctop  at  the  bank. 
To  or  at  the  oxcli 
Tr»  or  at  the  river. 
1\>  or  at  the  kitchen. 
•r  at  the  cellar. 

?.t  church. 
To  or  nt  school. 
'1  o  or  a*,  ine  French  schooL 
'I'n  or  at  the  daix  .  singing 

ft'hool.  play. 

The  o; 
To  go  a  hu:i 
Is  he  a  hum 

To  hunt.  To 

To  go  a  fishing. 
To  get  tired  of  fishing. 
The  whole  day,  all  the  day. 
The  whole  morning. 
The  whole  evening. 
The  whole  night,  all  the  night. 
The  whole  year. 
TLQ  whole  week. 
Tfco  whole  society. 


Aller  a  la  campagne. 
S'amuser  a  la  campagno. 
Aller  a  la  banque. 

;cr  a  la  banque. 
A  la  bourse. 
A  la  riviere. 
A  la  cu 
A  la  cave. 
A  I'celise. 
A  Tecole. 

A  Tccole  de  Francois. 
A  i'ecole  dc  danse,  a  I'ccole  de  chaut. 
La  comedie. 

L'opi'ra,  (a  masculine  noun.^1 
t  Aller  a  la  chasse. 
t  Est-il  a  la  chasse  T 
Chasser,  1.  J'echer,  1 

Aller  a.  la  pCchc. 
S'ennuycr  a  la  peche. 
Toute  la  journee. 
Toute  la  matinee. 
Toute  la  soiree.2 
Toute  la  nuit. 
Toute  1'annee.3 
Toute  la  semaine. 
Toute  la  socicte. 


1  A'.l  nouns  ending  in  a  are  of  the  masculine  gender,  except  sepia,  sepia  ; 
an J  ti'pctj  a  tumor,  which  are  feminine. 

*  The  words  o'jy,  TM-rnixg,  and  evening,  are  expressed  by  jour,  matin,  and 
nuir,  when  we  speak  of  a  part  of  them,  and  by  journie,  matinee,  and  soiree, 
when  their  whole  duration  is  to  be  expressed.  Ex.  II  vient  me  voir  tons 
Us  jours t  he  comes  to  see  me  every  day ;  fai  rcste  chez  moi,  toute  la  journee, 
i  Htayed  at  liome  all  the  day  long ;  je  me  promtne  tons  les  matins  pendant 
wie  heure,  I  take  an  hour's  walk  every  morning  ;  il  a  plu  toute  la  matinee, 
it  has  been  raining  all  the  morning ;  j'irai  vous  voir  domain  au  soir,  I  shall 
call  upon  you  to-morrow  evening  ;  ou  passcrez-vous  la  soiree?  where  shall 
you  spend  the  evening  ? 

3  Year  is  expressed  by  an  when  we  wisli  to  express  one  or  more  units  6f 
i  twelvemonth,  and  by  annte  when  it  is  considered  as  a  twelvemonth  in  ith 
ddration.  Ex.  11  y  a  six  ans  que  tno?i  frere  ne  m'a  ecrit,  it  is  six  yenrs 
since  my  brother  wrote  to  me  ;  une  annee  heureuge  est  celle  que  Von  passo 
tins  ennui  ct  sans  infirmilc,  a  happy  year  is  that  which  is  spent  withoiu 
lediousness  or  infirmity. 


FIFTY-SIXTH    LESSON.    ^1.) 

All  at  once.  I  Tout  a  la  fois. 

(  Tout  a  coup. 
Suddenly,  all  of  a  sudden.  Soudainement. 


This  week. 

This  year. 

Last  week. 

Next  week. 

Every  woman. 

Once,  one  time,  every  time. 

Every  week. 


Cette  semaine. 

Cette  annee. 

La  semaine  passce. 

La  semaine  prochaine. 

Toutes  les  femmes. 

Une  fois,  toutes  les  fois,  cliaque  ibis 

Toutes  les  semaines. 


A  table.         This  mahogany  table.         Une  table.        Cette  table  d' acajou. 
CINQUANTE-SIXI£ME  TII£ME.     Ire  Sec. 

Venez-vous  cle  la  campagne  pour  aller  a  la  banque?     Oi 
iSfcssein  de  changer  uu  billet  de  banque  en  argent. — hvx-vous  a  la 
bourse  avant  de  retourner  a  la  campagne  ?   Non;  rnais  j'irai  achete: 
quelque  chose  ponr  aller  a  la  peche.    Aimez-vous  la  peche  ?   .V'ajme 
assez  a  prrhi'r.    l)ei.ihe/-vous  toute  la  journee?    Non,  nous 
toute  la  matinee  ou  toute  la  soiree. — Quiva  a  Fecole  de  chex  •< 
Jean  va  a  Fecole  d' Anglais  et  de  Francais,  Sophie  a  1't'cole  de  c'u.iso 
et  de  chant,  et  Frederic  ne  va  a  aucune. — Qu'allez-votU  faire  c 
semaine^  la^sampagne?     Nous  allons  couper  notre  graiu.— 
cousins  vonl-ils  en  Californie  la  semaine  prochaine  ?    Us  n'iront  que 
dans  deux  semaines.     Leurs  femmes  et  leurs  filles  iront-elles  ; 
eu#$*    If  on,  elles  n'iront  pas. — N'avez-vous  pa3  nettoye  mes  bas  de 
sole,  mes  jtantalons,  mon  habit  bleu,  et  mon  gilet  blanc?   Non,  pas 
encore,  je  ne  peux  pas  faire  tout  a  la  fois.     On  ne  peut  pas  fi 
tout  a  la  fois,  c'est  vrai;  mais  je  croyais  que  vous  aviez  eu  assr- 
temps  pour  faire  chaque  chose  a  son  tour. 

I  hear  a  noise  in  the  cellar;  who  is  in  it?  The  old  dumb  V7oma:i; 
I  suppose. — What  does  she  want  from  (dans)  the  cellar?  Slie  wauls 
some  wood  or  coal. — I  have  your  steel  fork:  have  you  mine?  1 
have  not  yours,  but  hers,  and  Henry's  is  on  the  table,  in  the  ether 
room, — Which  table  ?  The  mahogany  table. — Where  is  your  mo- 
ther? She  is  at  church. — Is  your  sister  gone  to  school?  She  is. — 
Does  your  mother  often  go  to  church?  She  goes  every  morning 
and  every  evening. — At  what  o'clock  in  the  morning  does  she  go  to 
church?  She  goes  as  soon  as  she  gets  up. — At  what  o'clock  does 
she  get  up?  She  gets  up  at  sunrise. — Dost  thou  go  to  school,  ic- 
day?  I  do. — What  dost  thou  learn  at  school?  I  learn  to  read, 
write,  and  speak  there. — Where  is  your  good  mother  ?  She  is  gone 
to  shop  (503)  with  my  little  sister. — Do  your  sisters  go  this  evening 
lo  the  opera?  No,  Madam;  they  go  to  the  dancing  and  singing 
school. — Do  the}* not  go  to  the  French  school?  They  go  in  the. 


iiot  go 


FIFTY -SI  XT  II  I,     (2.) 


morning,  but  not  (mais  non)  in  the  evening.  —  Is  you;  father  gone  a 
hunting  *     lie  has  not  been  able  to  go  a.  hunting,  for  he  has  a  cold. 
—  Do  you  like  to  go  a  hunting?     I  like  to  go  a  lishing  better  than  a 
hunting.  —  Is  your  father  still  in  the  country]     Yes,  Madam,  he  in 
there.  —  What  does  he  do  there?    He  goes  a  hunting  and  a  fish- 
ing. —  Did  you  hunt  in  the  country  1    I  hunted  the  whole  day.  —  How 
long  did  you  stay  with  my  mother?     I  stayed  with  her  the  whole 
-Is  it  In;  g  u  were  at  the  castle  ?     I  was  there  last 

week.  —  Did  you  iind  many  peop^  I  found  only  three  per- 

sons there,  the  French  teacher,  his  wife,  and  their  daughter,  who 
dances  so  well. 


MKI:. 


Set 


I'uur  aunt. 

Any  IM 

iic. 

The  heartache. 
His  sister  has  a  violent  headache. 


Madame  votre  tante. 
Mademoiselle  votre  ni 

Toute  pcrsonne.  (553,  N.  1.) 

t  Le  mal  d'oreille. 

t  Lc  inai  de  coeur. 

t  Sa  soDur  a  im  violent  mal  de 


>ms  Possessifs  Absolus,  Fiminui. 


• .'  la  r. 

thine,  his,  (hers,  its.) 

yours,          theirs. 

Plural. 

Mine,  thine,  his,  (hers,  its.) 

Ours,  (0.  9,  4.1)  yours,  theirs. 
Were  you  doing  ?  (imperfect.)  /  was. 
What  were  you  saying  ?       I  i 

saving  anything. 
Have  you  my  pen  or  hers  ? 
i  was  saying  that  I  had  hers. 
What  do  you  wish  to  send  to  your 

aunt? 

I  wish  to  send  her  a  tart. 
Will  you  send  her  some  fruit  also  ? 

I  will  send  her  some. 
Have  you  sent  the  books  to  my  sis- 
ters ? 
1  have  sent  them  to  them. 


The  *che,  pain. 
Uurt, 

The  pencil, 
The  strawberry, 
Tht>  cherry, 
The  newspaper, 
the  gazette 


la  douleur. 
ia  tour'.c. 
!-i  pgchc. 
la  frai.^e. 
la  cerise. 


:ilicr. 

La  mienne,      la  tienne,      la  sienne. 
La  noire,          la  votre,     '  la  leur. 

Plurid. 

Lesmiennes,  les  tienne.- 
Les  notres,     les  votres,  les  leurs. 
Faisiez-vous  ?  (imparfait)  Jefuisnis. 
Que  di  Jc  ne  disait 

rien. 

Avez-vous  ma  plume  ou  la  sienne  ? 
Je  disais  que  j'avais  la  sienne. 
Que   voulez-vous  cnvoyer   a  votro 

tante  ? 

Je  veux  lui  envoyer  une  tourte. 
Voulez-vous  lui  envoyer  aussi  dea 

fruits  ? 

Je  veux  1m'  en  envoy  ei. 
Avez-vous  envoye  les  livres  a  mea 

socurs  ? 

Je  les  leur  ai  envoyes. 
The  aunt,  ia  tante. 

The  female  cousin,       la  cousine. 
The  niece,  la  niece. 

The  maid-servant,        la  servanta 
The  female  relation,     la  parento. 
The  female  neighbor,  lavoisinc, 
Thn  female  cook,         la  cuisinicn* 


292 


FIFTY-SIXTH     LESSON.    (2.) 


The  merchandise, 

(goods,)  la  marclmndise. 

What  was  you  doing  ?   I  was  making 

a  cherry  tart  for  my  niece. 
Were  you  telling  the  maid-servant  to 

fasten  the  windows  ?  I  was. 


The  brother-in-law,  le  beau-frere. 
The  sister-in-law.  la  belle-sceur, 
Que  faisiez-vous  ?  Je  faisais  une 

tourte  aux  cerises  pour  ma  niece. 
Disiez-vous  a  la  servante  de  fermet 

les  fenetres?    Je  le  lui  disais. 


ClNQUANTE-SIXI^ME    TldblE.       2dc  Sec. 

Mile.,  votre  niece  est-elle  a  la  maison?  Je  ne  sais  pas.  Je  vaia 
savoyer  la  servante  pour  voir  si  elle  est  dans  sa  chambre.  N'im- 
porte;  je  n'ai  pas  le  temps  de  m'arreter  a  present.  Voulez-voua 
avoir  la  bonte  de  lui  presenter  ces  peches,  en  mon  nom?  Oh! 
elles  sont  superbes!  Je  vous  remercie,  en  son  nom.  Mais  a  pre- 
sent que  j'y  pense,  comment  se  porte  Madame  votre  belle-sceur? 
J'etais  chez  elle  hier  soir.  Elle  se  porte  bien,  merci.  Presentez-lui 
mes  compliments  quand  vons  la  reverrez.  Je  n'y  mahquerai  pas. 
J'ai  1'honneur  de  vous  saluer.  Adieu,  M. — La  parente  du  general 
a-t-elle  mal  d'oreille  ?  Mal  d'oreille !  Non,  elle  n'a  pas  mal 
d'oreille.  Pourquoi  le  croyiez-vous  ? — La  cuisiniere  de  notre  voisine 
n'a-t-elle  pas  envoye  une  tourte  aux  cerises  a  notre  petite  fille,  cette 
semaine  ?  Si  fait,  elle  lui  en  a  envoye  une ;  non  pas  cette  semaine, 
mais  la  semaine  passee. — Que  faisiez-vous  1'annee  passee  ?  J'etais 
marchand. — N'etes-vous  pas  1'associe  de  votre  beau-frere  ?  Je  n'ai 
point  de  beau-frere,  de  sorte  que  je  ne  puis  pas  etre  son  associe. — 
On  m'a  dit  que  votre  belle-scBur  avail  une  excellente  cuisiniere, 
est-ce  vrai?  On  en  trouve  a  peine  une  bonne,  mais  la  sienne 
I'est.  En  etes-vous  sure  ?  Oui,  du  moins  ma  belle-scour  le  dit. 

Are  these  girls  as  good  (sage)  as  their  brothers  ?  They  are  better 
than  they. — Can  your  sisters  speak  German'?  They  cannot,  but 
they  are  learning  it. — Have  you  brought  anything  to  your  mother'? 
I  brought  her  some  good  fruit  and  a  fine  tart. — What  has  your  niece 
brought  you  ?  She  has  brought  us  good  cherries,  good  strawberries, 
and  good  peaches. — Do  you  like  peaches  ?  I  like  them  much. — 
H*ow  many  peaches  has  your  neighbor  (fern.)  given  you?  She  has 
given  me  more  than  twenty. — Have  you  eaten  many  cherries,  this 
year?  I  have. — Did  you  give  any  to  your  little  niece  ?  I  gave  her 
BO  many  that  she  cannot  eat  them  all. — Why  have  you  not  given 
any  to  your  good  neighbor?  (fern.)  I  wished  to  give  her  some,  but 
she  would  not  take  any,  because  she  does  not  like  cherries 

Were  there  any  pears  (la  poire)  last  year  ?  There  were  not  mr.r.  r. 
•—Has  your  cousin  (fern.)  any  strawberries'?  She  has  so  many  that 
she  cannot  eat  them  all. — Do  you  expect  to  see  your  niece,  to-day  ? 
I  hope  to  see  her,  for  she  has  premised  me  to  dine  vs^iih  us. — 1 
admire  (admirer)  that  family,  (in  1'r.niillt-i)  for  tie  father  is  the  king, 


FIFTY-SIXTH     LESSON.    (3.) 


293 


and  me  mother  is  the  queen  of  it.  The  children  and  ll.e  servants 
are  the  subjects  (le  sujet)  of  the  state,  (I'ctat.)  The  tutors  of  the 
children  are  the  ministers,  who  share  (partaker)  with  the  king  and 
queen  the  care  (le  soin)  of  the  government,  (le  gouvcrncmcnt.)  The 
good  education  (V education j  fern.)  which  is  given  to  children  (Obs. 
101 — 2)  is  the  crown,  (la  couronna)  of  monarchs,  (le  monarquc.) 

VOCABTLAIUK.       OniC  SCC. 

Ols.  130.  The  three  substantive*  >mtrur,  author  ,  print  re,  painter  ; 
poet,  arc  ui"  the  masculine  gender. only,  and  are  used  ibr  both  sexes. 


She  is  a  poetess. 

Is  she  a  painter  ? 

She  is  an  author. 

To  hire,  to  let. 

you  already  hired  a  W 

To  admit  or  grant  at! 

To  confess  a  th: 

Do  you  grant  ti: 

1  do  grant  it. 

Do  you  confess  your  fault  ? 

I  confess  it. 

T  confess  it  to  be  a  fault. 

To  confess,  *  ;:,  to  ac- 

knowledge. 

To  confess. 

So  much,  so  many. 

She  has  so  many  candles  that  she 
cannot  burn  them  all. 

To  catch  a  cold. 

To  make  sick. 


Elle  est  poutc. 
Est-elle  peintre  ? 
Elle  est  autcui. 
Louer,  1. 

MO  uno  chainbrc  f 

Convcnir*  de  quelque  d 

is  de  cela? 
J'en  conviens. 

Convenez-vous  de  votrc  faute  ? 
J'en  conviens. 

Je  conviens  que  c'cst  une  faute. 
Avouer,  1. 

Confesser,  1. 

Tant. 

Elle  a  tant  dc  chandellcs  qu'elle  ne 

pcut  pas  les  bruki  toutes. 
t  S'enrhumcr,  1. 
t  Rendre  malade. 


01m.  137.   To  maJic,  before  an  adjective,  must  be  translated  by:  rendre. 
If  you  eat  so  much  it  will  make  you!  Si  vous  mangez  tant,  cda  vous  ren- 

sick.  I      dra  malade. 

Ols.  138.  When  the  English  pronoun  it  relates  to  a  preceding  circum 
stance,  it  is  translated  by  cela  ;  when  to  a  following  circumstance,  by  il. 


Does  it  suit  you  to  lend  your  gun  ? 

It  does  not  suit  me  to  lend  it. 

It  does  not  suit  me. 

Where  did  you  catch  a  cold  ? 

I  3\u^ht  a  cold  in  going  from  the 

opera. 

To  have  a  cnU. 
The  cold,  the  cough. 
\  have  a  cold  in  my  head. 
Tou  have  a  cold  on  your  breast. 
The  brain,  tho  chest. 


Vous  convient-il  de  preter  votre  fusil! 

11  ne  me  convient  pas  de  le  preter 

Cela  ne  me  convient  pas. 

t  Ou  vous  etes-vous  enrhume  ? 

t  Je  me  suis  enrhume  en  sortanl  rf» 

Topera. 

t  Etre  enrhumr. 
Lc  rhume,  latoux. 
t  J'd  un  rhume  de  cerveau. 
t  Vouo  avcz  un  rhume  do  poitrine, 
Lo  corvcau,  la  poitrine. 


294  FIFTY*  SIX  Til     LESSON.    (3.) 

Has  she  not  a  bad  cough  ?  |  N'a-t-clle  pas  une  mauvaise  tons  I 

Yes,  she  has  (one).  Si  fait,  elle  en  a  une  mau\ 

ClNOJ-'ANTII-SIXIliME    Tll£.ME.       3mC  SeC. 

Avcz-vous  bien  dormi  la  nuit  passee  ?  Non,  je  n'ai  pas  bien  dorm 
du  tout.  On  a  fait  tant  de  bruit  que  eel  a  m'a  empeche  de  dormir. 
Oil  avez-vous  passe  la  soiree  hier  ?  Je  1'ai  passee  chez  mon  beau* 
frere.  Y  avez-vous  vu  votre  belle-sanir?  JeTyaivue.  Comment 
Be  porte-t-elle  ?  Elle  se  porte  mieux  qira  1'ordinaire.  Avez-vous  , 
joue  ?  Nous  n'avons  pas  joue,  pas  memo  aux  echecs;  mais  nouo 
avons  lu  de  bons  livrcs;  car  ma  belle-sGDur  aime  mieux  lire  q^e  de 
jouer. — Avez-vous  lu  la  gazette  de  ce  matin?  Je  1'ai  lue.  Y  a-t-il 
quelque  chose  de  nouveau  dedans  ?  Ily  atoujoursdunouveau;  mai.s 
rien  de  bien  intercssant.  Que  dit-on  du  roi  et  de  la  reinc  ?  Celui-la 
est  occupe  du  soin  du  gouvernement,  et  celle-ci  du  soin  de  sa  famille. 
N'etait-elle  pas  a  la  campagne  quand  vous  y  etiez?  Non,  elle  n'y 
('tail  pas  alors;  mais  elle  y  etail  la  semaine  derniero. — Sa  fille  esl 
iiilrrcssanto,  n'ost-ce  pas?  C'est  ce  que  jr  Lc  cornmis  di- 

^ait-il  on  fai-ait-il  quelque  chose?  II  disait  quelque  chose,  mais.  ii 
no  faisait  rien.  Qui  ir  .'  Charlotte  faisait  une 

•jonnmnc  de  cerises. 

Why  do  your  sisters  not  go  to  the  play?     Tl  go  thither 

Because  they  have  a  cold,  and  that  makes  them  very  ill.— Where 
vlid  they  catch  a  cold  ?  Tbejcanght  a  cold  in  going  from  the  opera 
last  night. — Does  it  suit  your  sister  to  eat  some  peaches  ?  It  does 
not  suit  her  to  eat  any,  for  she  has  already  eaten  a  good  many,  and 
if  she  eats  so  much  it  will  make  her  ill. — Have  you  already  hired  a 
room?  I  have  already  hired  one. — Where  have  you  hired  it?  I 
have  hired  it  in  William-street,  (dans  la  rue  or  rue  Guillainne^  num- 
ber one  hundred  and  fifty-two. — At  whose  house  (chcz  qui)  have  you 
hired  it  ?  At  the  house  of  the  man  whose  son  has  sold  you  a  horse. 
— For  whom  has  your  father  hired  a  room  ?  He  has  hired  one  for 
his  son,  who  has  just  arrived  from  France. — Why  have  you  not  kept 
your  promise  ?  (la  promcsse.)  Which  promise  ?  I  do  not  remember 
what  I  promised  you. — Had  you  not  promised  us  to  take  us  to  the 
concert  last  Thursday?  I  confess  that  I  was  wrong  in  promising 
you  ;  the  concert,  however,  has  not  taken  place. 

Does  your  brother  confess  his  fault  ?  He  confesses  it. — Whr.t  GC'.*§ 
your  uncle  say  to  (dc)  that  note  ?  Ho  says  that  it  is  vriittsn  very 
well,  but  he  admits  that  he  hns  bosn  wrong  in  cendirg  it  to  the  cap- 
lain. — Do  you  confess  your  fault  now?  I  confess  it  to  be  a  fault. — 
Where  have  you  found  my  coat?  I  have  found  it  in  the  blue  roorfl 
UD  stairs.  The  front  room  or  tv.c  Lark  rcom 1  The  back  room,  (Ota, 


FIFTY-SEVENTH     LESSON. 


(1.) 


81.) — Will  you  hang  my  hat  on  the  treo  ?     I  will  hang  it  thereon. — • 

Ho  .  Iain  not  very  well. — What  is  the  matter 

with  you  .  and  a  cold. — Where  did  you 

I  caughl  <>iii^  from  the  play.— 

;r  niece  :  l»out  10  years  old. 


,57m*, 


To  question,  ion. 

The  1-  -ily,        {> 

The  1«- 

\Vo  h 


Cool  v. 
Some  good  A 

. 

-food. 
',  to  icaUcj  to  step. 

rhrr  must  not  be  mistaken  for  ge  promcnvr.     11'.) 
:is  to  walk,  and  the  latter  to  walk  for  pleasure. 


Questiormer,  1  (2 11),     la  question. 

:nn-,      l:i  maison. 
La  lettre,     la  famille,     la  pro: 
La  jamhi',  la  jamhe  droite,  la  gauche. 

( !«  mal  «li'.  - 
;ous  mul  a  la  gorge. 

la  viandc  salce. 

De  bons  aliments. 
Le  mets.  Les  entre: 

DCS  mots  sales.     Du  luitage. 
Marcher,  1. 

Tho 


I  have  walkrd  a  good  deal  to-day. 
I  havr  hrcn  walking  in  the  garden 

with  my  moti: 

.ilk  or  travel  a  mile. 
!k  or  travel  a  league. 
ilk  a  step. 
To   take  a  step,   (meaning   to  take 

measures.) 
To  go  on  a  jour: 
To  make  a  speech. 
A  piece  of  business. 
An  affair. 

To  transact  business. 
To  meddle  with  something. 
What  are  you  meddling  with  ? 
I  am  meddling  with  my  own  business. 
I  do  not  attend  to  it  any  longer. 
That  traveler  always  meddles  with 

'•r  people's  business. 
T  do  not  meddle  with  other  people's 

lu'.siness. 
9< Aers,  other  people. 


J'ai  marche  beaucoup  aujourd'liui. 
Je  me  suis  promenu  dans  lo  jardin 

avec  ma  mere. 
t  Faire  un  mille. 
t  Faire  une  Heue. 
t  Faire  un  pas. 
t  Faire  une  demarche. 

t  Faire  un  voyage, 
t  Faire  un  discours. 

Une  affaire. 

Faire  des  affaires. 

t  Se  meler  de  quelque  chose. 

De  quoi  vous  melez-vous  ? 

Je  me  mele  de  mes  propres  affaires. 

Je  ne  m'en  mele  plus. 

Ce  voyageur  se  mele  toujours  del 

affaires  des  autres. 
Je  ne  me  mele  pas  des  affaires  d'aa 

trui. 
Autrui,  (indefinite  pronoun,  without 

gender  or  plural.) 


296  FIFTY -SEVENTH     LESSON.     (1.) 

Did  you  wish,  want  ?  I  did,  (imperf.)    |  Vouliez-vous?  (147)  Jevoulaiaj  (imp. 

TT  •,        i  .       ic .        ...  C  T  H  86  mele  de  peindro. 

He  employs  himseli  in  painting.        |  J  n  s,occupe  ^^^ 

The  art  of  painting.  I  La  peinture. 

Chemistry.         The  chemist.  |  La  chimie.  La  chimiste. 

ClNQUANTE-SEPTIEME  THEME.      Ire  Sec. 

On  in'a  dit  que  vous  vouliez  me  questionner  ?  Oui,  c'est  vrai, 
j'ai  une  question  a  vous  faire.  De  qni  est  la  lettre  que  vous  avez 
rc£ue  ?  La  lettre  que  j'ai  re$ue !  Ah  !  c'est  un  secret.  Que  vous 
ne  voulez  pas  me  contier,  n'est-ce  pas  ?  Oui,  c'est  un  secret  que 
j'aime  mieux  garder.  Eh,  bien  1  gardcz-le. — La  voiture  est  devant 
ja  porte  de  la  maison,  etes-vous  pret  a  partir?  Pret;  mais  non, 
je  ne  savais  pas  que  la  voiture  allait  venir  sitot. — Kous  croyions  que 
vous  le  saviez.  Qu'avez-vous  encore  a.  faire  ?  J'ai  a.  mettre  ma 
cravate.  C'est  1'atfuiro  d'une  minute.  L'aifairo  d'une  minute !  pas 
avec  moi.  J'aime  &  avoir  une  cravato  bien  mise,  bien  arranges. 
Alors  no  parlez  plus  et  faites-le  vite.  Eh,  bien !  Laissez-inoi ; 
allcz-vous-en,  (go  away.)  Je  vais  en  bas,  jo  descends,  pour  pre- 
parer  votre  chapeau,  vos  gants,  et  votre  parapluie.  ISIon,  non, 
laissez  tout  cela  et  melez-vous  de  vos  propres  affaires.  Si  je  me 
mele  des  votres,  c'est  quo  je  vons  aime. 

Will  you  dine  with  us  to-day  ?  With  much  pleasure. — What  have 
you  for  dinner?  (qucls  mcts  avcz-vous?)  We  have  good  soup,  some 
fresh  and  salt  meat,  and  some  milk-food. — Do  you  like  milk-food? 
I  like  it  better  than  (prefcrcr  d)  all  other  food. — Are  you  ready  to 
dine  ?  I  am. — Do  you  intend  to  set  out  soon  ?  I  intend  setting  out 
next  week. — Do  you  travel  alone?  (seul?)  No,  Madam,  I  travel 
with  my  uncle. — Do  you  travel  on  foot  or  in  a  carriage  ?  (422.)  We 
travel  in  a  carriage.— Did  you  meet  any  traveler  in  your  last  journey 
(dans  votre  dernier  voyage)  to  Berlin?  We  met  many  travelers. — 
How  do  you  intend  to  spend  your  time  (493)  this  summer?  I  intend 
to  take  a  short  (petit)  journey. 

Did  you  walk  much  in  your  last  journey?  I  like  much  to  walk, 
but  my  uncle  likes  to  go  in  a  carriage.  Did  he  not  wish  to  walk  ? 
He  wished  to  walk  at  first,  (d'abord,)  but  he  wished  to  get  into  the 
coach  (montcr  en  voiture)  after  having  taken  a  few  steps,  so  that  I 
did  not  walk  much. — Does  he  no  longer  do  any  business?  He  no 
longer  does  any,  for  he  is  too  old  to  do  it. — Why  does  he  meddle 
with  your  business?  He  does  not  generally  (ordinmrement)  meddle 
with  other  people's  business,  but  he  meddles  with  mine  because  he 
loves  me. — Has  your  master  made  von  recite  your  lesson  to-day1 
He  has  made  me  recite  it. — Did  you  know  it?  I  knew  it  pretty 
well. — Have  you  also  done  some  exercises  ?  I  have  done  some 
but  I  have  not  Quite  finished  my  lesson. 


FIFTY-SEVENTH     LESSON.     (2.) 


297 


VoCABULAIiiE.      2de  S«C. 


That  art  is  easy. 


The  art. 

Strange. 

It  is  strange.      It  is  a  pity. 

To  employ  f/ne's  sdfi  .-. 

To  concern  some  one* 

To  kvk  at  some  one. 

I  do  not  Jke  to  meddle  with  things 

that  do  not  concern  me. 
That  concerns  nobody. 
To  care  about,     To  care  about  it. 


Vart.  Cet  art-la  est  facile, 

Ktrange,  6tonnant. 

C'est  etrange.     C'est  dommage. 

S'occuper,  1 ,  de  or  a. 

Concerner     1,  or    regarder,    1,    gud« 
qu'un. 

Regarder,  1,  quelqu'un. 

f  Je  n'aimo  pas  £  me  meler  de  cu 

qui  ne  me  regarde  pas. 
|"  Cela  ne  regarde  personne. 
I  f  Se  soucier,  1,  de.  S'en  soucier. 

Obs.  139.     Sc  soucier  de,  is  not  frequently  used  affirmatively. 

Do  you  wish  to  go  to  Italy  ?  |  Aves-vous  envie  d'aller  en  Italic  ? 

1  have  no  great  wish  to  go.    I  do  not 

care  about  it.     I'd  rather  not. 
She  used  to  like  dancing,  but  ehe 

cares  no  more  about  it. 
We'd  rather  not  sing. 
To  attract. 

Loadstone  attracts  iron. 
Her  singing  attracts  me. 
To  charm.  To  enchant. 


f  Je  ne  m'en  soucie  pas. 

Elle  aimait  ($  147)  la  danse,  maia  elld 

ne  s'en  soucie  plus. 
Nous  ne  nous  soucionspasdec//an<er. 
Attircr,  1. 

L'aimant  attire  le  fer. 
Son  chant  m'attire. 
Charmer,  1.  Enchanter,  1. 

J'en  suis  charmc,  (fcm.  ec.) 
La  beaute.  La  bonte. 


I  am  charmed  with  it. 

The  beauty.  The  goodness. 

Obs.  140.    All  nouns  ending  in  le,  and  expressing  properties  or  qi  alilies, 
are  feminine. 


The  harmony,  the  voice,  the  power. 

To  repeat. 

The  repetition,  the  rehearsal. 

The  wisdom.  Study. 

The  lord.  Our  Lord. 

A.memorandiim,abill.  A  nightingale. 

All  beginnings  are  difficult. 

To  create. 

The  Creator,  the  creation. 

The  fear  of  the  Lord. 

The  benefit.     Heaven.      The  earth. 

Solitude.  The  meeting. 

Flour,  meal.  Some  wheat. 

The  mill.        Marriage.        Death. 


L' harmonic, 
Eepeler,  1. 
La  repetition. 
La  sagesse. 
Le  seigneur. 
Un  memoire. 


la  voix,      le  pouvoir. 


L'etude. 

Notre  Seigneur. 

Unrossignol. 
Tous  les  commencements  sont  diffi- 

ciles. 
Crier,  1. 

Le  Createur,          la  creation. 
La  crainte  du  Seigneur. 
Le  bienfait.        Le  ciel.        La  terro 
La  solitude.  L'assemble'e. 

La  farine.  Du  froment. 

j  Le  moulin.     Le  mariage.     La  wort. 


ClNQUANTE-SEPTlfcME    TllfolE.       2de  Sec. 

N'admirex-vous  pas  la  beaute  de  cette  dame  ?     Si  fait,  mais  j'ad 
lire  encore  plus  ea  bonte. — Preft'rez-vovs  la  bonte  a  la  beaul64 


mire 


298  FIFTT-8ETENTH    LESSON,    (2.) 

Sans  doutc.  Qui  ne  la  prefere  pas  ?  Beaucoup  do  personnes. — La 
iarino  de  votre  boulanger  est-elle  bonne  ?  Ello  cst  quelque  foifl 
bonne  et  quelque  fois  sure,  (sour.) — Oii  se  tenaient  leurs  assem- 
bli-cs  ?  Leurs  assemblies  se  tenaient  dans  la  solitude  des  bois. 
Madamo  de  Beaumont  va-t-elle  au  concert  ?  Non,  elle  a  code  sa 
place  a  sa  niece.  Autrefois  elle  aimait  le  chant,  a  present  elle  no 
e'en  soucio  plus. — N'iront-elles  pas  au  bal  ?  Non,  elles  n'iront  ; 
r.ir  elles  no  se  soucient  plus  do  la  danse.  De  quoi  to  soucies-tu  ? 
Je  ne  me  soucie  pas  do  grand'  chose,  (/  am  indifferent  to  al 

./thing.) — Ou  est  lo  maitre  do  chant  ?  II  est  a  la  repetition. — 
r<unl/ieii  do  repetitions  y  a-t-il  par  semaino?  II  y  en  a  une  tons 
les  matins.  L'art  do  peindro  est-il  facile  ?  Pcmandez  a  Mile. 
Caroline,  qui  s'occtipv-  do  la  peinturc. — L:i  \  un  bienfait  du 

i-iol,  nV-i-(v  pas '{  Oui.  CVst  un  bienfait  quo  le  Creatcur  a  ac- 
rorde  a  la  Icrre.  Avcz-vous  appris  le  inariM.uv  «k-  votre  cousin  ? 
Oui,  il  ni'en  a  informe.  C'est  doinnitvge,  n'cst-co  pas?  Je  no  dis 
rien ;  inais  je  n'en  pense  pas  uioins.  La  mort  ducapitaine  est 
L-I range,  n'ost-oe  pas?  Oui,  ello  est  trcs-etrange. 

What  have  you  been  doing  (f  145)  at  school,  to-day?  We  have 
bocMi  Jistoninj;  to  our  professor. — What  did  he  say  new  and  interest- 
ing .'  Ho  made  a  long  (grand)  speech  on  the  goodness  of  God. 
Alter  saying  (40i)  "  Repetition  is  the  mother  of  studies,  and  a  good 
memory  is  a  great  benefit  of  God,"  he  said,  "God  is  the  Creator ot 
hiMYi'ii  and  earth;  the  fear  of  the  Lord  is  the  beginning  of  all  wis- 
dom."— What  are  you  doing  ull  day  in  this  garden?  I  am  walking 
in  il. — What  is  there  in  it  that  attracts  you?  (qu'cst-ce  qui  vous  y 
attire?)  The  singing  of  the  birds  attracts  me,  (nry  attire.) — Are 
there  any  nightingales  in  it?  There  are  some  in  it,  and  the  har- 
mony of  their  singing  enchants  me. — Have  those  nightingales  more 
power  over  (sur)  you  than  the  beauties  of  painting,  or  the  voice  of 
your  tender  (tcndre)  mother,  who  loves  you  so  much  ?  I  confess 
the  harmony  of  the  singing  of  these  little  birds  has  more  power 
over  me  than  the  most  tender  words  (que  les  paroles  les  plus  tendres) 
ul  my  dearest  friends. 

How  does  your  niece  amuse  herself  (or  pass  her  time)  in  her 
solitude?  She  reads  a  good  deal,  she  plays  on  the  piano,  she  is 
fond  of  painting,  and  she  writes  letters  to  her  absent  mother. — How 
does  your  uncle  amuse  himself  in  his  solitude?  He  used  to  find 
(§  147)  much  pleasure  in  society,  in  the  world;  but  now  he  does  not 
care  about  it;  he  is  only  fond  of  fishing  and  chemistry.  Why  do 
you  not  call  on  Frederick  ?  What  is  that  to  you?  (qu'est-ce  que  cela 
vous  fait)  I  beg,  (je  vous  prieJ)  I  do  not  generally  meddle  with 
things  that  do  not  concern  me;  but  I  love  yo^  so  much  that  I  con- 


FIFTY- EIGHTH      LESSON. 


299 


cern  myself  much  about  (quc  jc  m-iniercsse  bcaucoup  d)  what  you  are 
doing. — Does  any  one  trouble  his  head  about  you?  No  one  troubles 
his  head  about  me,  for  T  am  not  worth  the  trouble,  (jc  n'cn  VJKX  p<u 
la  pcine.) 


V'KTY-KIUITH  LKSSON,  58th.— Cinquantc-huitieme  Le^on, 

VOCABULAIBE.     Ire  Sec. 
SECOND  FUTURE.— Futur  Passe  ou  Compos*. 

Tni«  Futur  passe,  like  the  second  future,  is  formed  from  the  future  cf  the 
auxiliary,  and  the  past  participle  of  the  verb  to  be  conjugated. 


[  .-hall  h:r. 
Thou  wilt  have  ', 

will  liavn  loi 

Vou  will  hi. 

They  will  1 

I  f\\A\\  ha\v  come. 

Thou  wilt  hi 

lie  will  have  cume. 

She  will  have  come. 

;iall  have  come. 
You  will  have  come. 
They  will  have  come. 
They  will  have  come,  /<///. 

U  have  been  praised. 
Thou  wilt  have  been  prais<  <1. 
He  will  have  been  praised. 
She  will  have  been  praised. 
We  shall  have  been  praised. 
You  will  have  been  praised. 
They  will  have  been  praised. 
They  (/cm.)  will  have  been  praised. 
I  shall  have  risen. 
Thou  shalt  have  gone  to  bed. 
Shall  he  have  undressed  himself? 
She  will  not  have  dressed  herself. 
Will  any  one  have  praised  one's  self  ? 
We  shall  have  made  a  mistake. 
Shall  you  have  taken  a  walk  ? 
Shall  they  not  have  sat  down  ? 
Shall  they  not  have  sat  down  ? 


Ex. 

J'aurai-aimd. 
Tu  auras  airm'. 
.11,  elle,  ou  on  nura  aim'. 
Nous  aurons  aimd. 
Vous  aurez  ainu'. 
11s  (/em.  clles)  auront  aim»\ 
Je  serai  vcnu,    Fim.  venue. 
Tuserasvenu,     "     venue. 
11  sera  vcnu. 
Elle  sera  venue. 

Nous  serons  venus,  Fern,  venues. 
Vous  screz  venus,      "       venuea.1 

Ilsseront  venus.       \  Onseravenu. 
Elles  seront  venues. ) 

J'aurai  etd  loud,  Fcm.  louce. 

Tu  auras  dte  loud,  **      lou 

II  aura  dte  loue. 

Kile  aura  etd  loude. 

Nous  aurons  e*te  loues,  /em.  loueea, 

Vous  aurcz  dte  loues,       "       ouees, 

Us  auront  dtd  loues. 

F'lles  auront  dtd  louees. 

Je  me  serai  leve,    /em.  levde. 

Tu  te  seras  couche,  "     couchee. 

Se  sera-t-il  ddshabilld  ? 

Elle  ne  se  sera  pas  habillce. 

Sc  sera-t-on  loue  ? 

Nous  nous  serons  trompds. 

Vous  serez-vous  promend  ?  (sing.)' 

Ne  se  seront-ils  pas  assis  ? 

Ne  sc  seront-elles  pas  assises  ? 


1  It  is  hardly  necessary  to  remark,  that  if  one  person  only  is  spoken  to, 
I  e.  when  the  second  person  plural,  vous,  is  employed  instead  of  the  second 
person  singular  tu,  no  *  is  put  to  the  past  participle. 


£00  FIFTY-EIGHTH     LESSON.    (1.) 


To  have  left. 

When  I  have  paid  for  the  horse  I  shall 

have  only  ten  crowns  left. 
How  much  money  have  you  left  ? 
I  have  one  franc  left. 
I  have  only  one  franc  left. 
How  much  has  your  brother  left  ? 
He  has  one  crown  left. 
How  much  has  your  sister  left  ? 
Hie  h;i3  only  three  sous  left. 
How  much  have  your  brothers  left? 
Thrv  have  one  louis  left. 


*  Rcster,  1. 

Quand  j'aurai  paye  le  chcveL  il  * 

me  restera  que  dix  ecus. 
Combien  d' argent  vous  re*te-t-ii  t 
II  me  reste  un  franc. 
II  ne  me  reste  qu'un  franc. 
Combien  reste-t-il  a  votre  frcie  ? 
II  lui  reste  un  ecu. 
Combien  reste-t-il  a  votre  sceur  ? 
II  ne  lui  reste  que  trois  sous. 
Combien  reste-t-il  a  vos  freres? 
II  leur  reste  un  louis. 


O6.f.  111.     In  Kngli.-h  the  present  (O!>*.  106,  46s)  or   the  perfect  is  used 
aftrr  the  conjunctions,  vh<n,  ax  soon  as,  or  after,  when  futurity  is  to  be 
ssed  ;  but  in   French  the  future  must  in  such  instances  always  l«i 
employed. 

CINQUANTK-II:  !  i  IKMI:  TiiibiE.     Ire  Sec. 


vous  sere/  venue  nous  vor,  nous  irons  rous  voir,  car 
vous  save/  quo  vous  nous  devez  une  visile.  Comptez-vous  les 
visiles  dp.cette  maniere  ?  Non,  c'est  seulement  pour  vous  rappeler 
qu'il  y  a  long-temps  que  nous  n'avons  eu  le  plaisir  de  vous  voii 
chez  nous.  —  Aussitot  qu;ils  auiont  cte  apportes,  envoyez-les-moi, 
ontendez-vous  ?  Je  iry  manquerai  pas.  —  Quand  irez-vous  voir  leg 
De  Courci'?  (§  140  —  5.)  Nous  passerons  chez  eux  aussitot  que  noua 
eerons  in  formes  de  leur  retour.  —  Charles  ira-t-il  se  promener  a  cheval 
apres  qu'il  aura  dine?  Non,  il  ira  faire  une  visile  a  son  oncle 
donl  la  femme  est  morte,  (is  dead.)  Sa  femme  est  morte,  et  de 
qnoi?  Elle  est  morte  du  cholera.  C'est  dommage.  C'etait  une 
tres-bonne  dame.  —  Le  marchand  a-t-il  envoye  le  baril  de  farine  ? 
Non?  il  ne  Pa  pas  encore  envoye.  Quand  il  Paura  envoye,  faites  du 
pain.  Pen  ferai  aussitot  que  la  farine  sera  venue.  —  Saviez-vous  que 
Thomas  est  marie  ?  (married?)  Non,  je  ne  le  savais  pas;  mais  je 
savais  que  Marthe  est  mariee,  et  bien  mariee.  Avec  qui  est-elle 
mariee?  Elle  est  mariee  avec  M.  Dubois.  Le  marchand]  Non, 
Pavocat.  J'en  suis  charmee. 

Will  your  parents  go  into  the  country  to-morrow  ?  They  will  not 
go,  for  it  is  too  dusty.  —  Shall  we  take  a  walk,  to-day  ?  We  will  not 
take  a  walk,  for  it  is  soon  going  to  rain.  —  Will  it  rain  cefcie  12 
o'clock  ?  I  believe  it  will.  —  Do  you  see  the  castle  of  my  relation 
behind  (dcrrierc)  yonder  mountain  ?  (cette  montagnc-ld?)  I  see  it.  — 
Shall  we  go  in1  We  will  go  in,  if  you  like.  —  Will  you  go  mto  thai 
room  1  I  shall  not  go  into  it,  for  it  is  smoky.  —  I  wish  you  a  good 
rnorning,  Macam,  (262.)  —  Will  you  not  come  in?  Will  you  not  si« 
dovn  ?  I  will  sit  down  upon  that  large  arm-chair.  —  Will  you  teL 


FIFTY-EIGH  TH     LESSON.    (2.) 


301 


me  what  has  become  of  your  brother  ?  I  will  tell  you. — Wbere  is 
your  sister ?  Do  you  not  see  her?  She  sits  upon  the  bench. — la 
your  father  seated  upon  the  bench?  No,  he  sits  upon  the  sofa  of 
mahogany. 

Hast  thou  spent  all  th}  money  1  I  have  not  spent  all. — How  much 
hast  thou  left  *  I  have  not  much  left;  I  have  but  five  francs  left. — 
How  much  money  have  thy  sisters  left?  They  have  but  three 
crowns  left. — Have  you  money  enough  left  to  pay  your  tailor?  ) 
have  enough  left  to  pay  him;  but  if  I  pay  him  I  shall  have  but 
little  left. — How  much  money  will  your  brothers  have  left?  They 
will  have  a  hundred  crowns  left. — When  will  you  go  to  Italy?  I 
shall  go  as  soon  as  (aussitot  que)  I  have  learned  Italian. — When  will 
your  brothers  goto  France?  They  will  go  as  soon  as  they  know 
i%h. — When  will  they  learn  it  ?  They  will  learn  it  when  they 
have  found  a  good  master. — How  much  money  shall  we  have  left 
when  wr  .,1  for  our  horses?  When  we  tare  paid  for  them, 

only  a  hundred  crowns  left. 

VOCAIU  I.AIUK.     2de  Sec. 


\\  lu'ii  aid  the  tailor,  they 

will  have  a  hundred  francs  1-  ft. 
\\  hrn  1   run   at  my  aunt's,  will  you 

. :  »J  ? 

ne  writing,  will  you 
take  a  turn  wiiii 

n  you  have  finished 

your  exercise. 
What  will   you  do   \\licn  you  have 

dined  ? 
When  1  have  spoken  to  your  brother, 

I  shall  know  what  I  have  to  do. 


Does  it  ruin  ?  It  does. 

It  rains. 

Does  it  snow  ?          It  does  not. 

It  snows. 

Is  it  muddy  ? 

It  is  muddy. 

Is  it  muddy  out  of  doors  ? 

It  is  very  muddy. 

Is  it  dusty  ? 

It  is  very  dusty. 

Is  it  smoky? 

It  is  too  smoky 

Out  of  doors.        Out  of  the  window. 


Quand  ils  auront  paye  le  taillcur,  il 

leur  restera  cent  francs. 
Quand  je  serai  chez  ma  tantc,  vicn- 

drez-vousme  voir?  (0/«?.  1<W>,  4fAi 
Apres  que  vous  uurrz  fin  I  d'ecrire 

viendrez-vous  faire   un  tour  avt-« 

moi  ? 
Vousjouerez  lorsquc  wits  nnrczfini 

votre  theme. 
Que   fercz-vous   quand   vous  aurez 

dine  ? 
Quand  j'aurai  parlo  a  votre  frere,  je 

saurai  ce  que  j'ai  a  faire. 

IDIOMS  WITH  FAIRE. 

t  Fait-il  de  la  pluie  ?         II  en  fait. 

t  II  fait  de  la  pluie. 

t  Fait-il  de  la  neige  1    II  nTen  fait  pat 

t  II  fait  de  la  neige. 

t  Fait-il  de  la  boue  ? 

t  II  fait  de  la  boue, 

t  Fait-il  sale  dehors  ? 

t  II  fait  tres-sale. 

t  Fait-il  de  lapoussiere  ? 

t  II  fait  beaucoup  de  poussiere. 

t  Fait-il  de  la  fumee  ? 

t  II  fait  trop  de  fum^e. 

Dehors.  Par  la  fendtrc. 


502 


FIFTY-EJ  .JHTll     LESSON. 


To  enter,  to  go  in,  to  come  in. 

Will  you  go  into  my  room  ?     I  will 

go  in. 

Will  you  go  in  ?         1  shall  go  in. 
To  sit  down. 
Cs  sit,  to  be  sealed. 
{Jo  is  seated  upon  the  large  chair. 
Sli3  ic  seated  upon  the  bench. 
Tofill. .  .vf\\\\,         fill  up  ..  .  with. 
Fiil  this  bottle  with  wine. 
What  do  you  fill  up  with  water  ? 
What  does  he  fill  his  purse  with  ? 
He  fills  his  purse  with  money. 
The  park-it.  My  vest  pocket. 


Entrer,  1,  dans. 

Voulez-vous  entrer  dans  ma  choir 

bre  ?    Je  veux  y  entrer. 
Y  entrerez-vous  ?        J'y  cntrcioL 
S'asseoir,*  3.  (512.) 
Eire  assis  ;   fern,  asstse. 
II  est  assis  sur  la  grande  chaise. 
Elle  est  assise  sur  le  bane. 
liemplir,  2  ...  de,     remplissez  . . .  dfk 
Remplissez  cette  bouteiile  de  vin. 
Que  remplissez-vous  d'eau? 
De  quoi  rcmplit-il  sa  bourse  t 
II  remplit  sa  bourse  d'argent.1 
La  pochc.        La  poche  de  mon  gilet. 


CiNQUANTE-HUITlilMK    TlI^ME.       2dc  Sec. 

Ou  est  Mile.  Emilie?  Elle  est  assise  sur  le  bane  scus  le  srrus 
lubre  dans  le  jardin.  II  fait  tres-humide.  rr'a-t-elle  pas  peur  de  s'e:> 
rhumerl  Elle  craint  plus  la  poussiere  que  Vhumiditc,  (dampness.) 
Que  fera-t-il  aussitot  qu'il  aura  fini  son  theme'?  jouera-t-il  du  violon? 
Non,  il  n'en  jouera  pas ;  car  rimmidite  a  casse  deux  cordcs  (strings} 
de  son  vinlon.  Quelles  cordes  sont-ce?  Ce  sent  les  deux  plus 
peti:<  -il  pas  d?autres  cordes?  Non;  mais  auand  il  aura 

lini,  il  i,-a  e:i  aclieter.  Jouerez-vous  du  piano  quand  il  jouera  du 
violon  ?  Je  ne  me  soucie  pas  de  jouer  aujourd^hui ;  mais  nous  jouons 
trea-aouvent  ensemble.  11  fait  de  la  pluie,  appelez  Mile.  Emilie,  on 
elle  sera  mouillee.  Vous  vous  trompex ;  ce  n'est  pas  de  la  pluie, 
mais  de  la  neige.  Je  crois  que  vous  avez  raison,  et  j'en  suis  bien 
fache,  car  il  fera  tres-«ale  dehors,  il  fera  tres-mauvais  marcher.  Je 
commence  a  avoir  froid;  entrons  dans  mon  bureau;  il  y  fait  plus 
chaud. 

Do  you  gain  (gflgJier,  532)  anything,  by  (<t)  that  business?  I  do 
not  gain  much  by  it;  (i/;)  but  my  brother  gains  a  good  deal  by  it. 
He  fills  his  purse  with  money. — How  much  money  have  you  gained  1 
I  have  gained  only  a  little,  but  my  cousin  has  gained  much  Dy  if 
He  has  tilled  his  pocket  with  money. — Why  does  that  gardener  not 
work?  He  is  a  good-for-nothing  fellow,  for  he  does  nothing  but  eat 
all  the  day  long.  He  fills  himself  up  with  fresh  and  salt  meat,  so 
that  he  will  rrake  himself  (se  rendre)  ill  if  he  continues  to  eat  so 
much. — With  what  (de  quoi)  have  you  filled  that  bottle  ?  I  have 
filled  it  with  wine. — Will  this  man  take  care  of  my  horse?  He  will 

1  The  ambiguity  conveyed  by:  11  remplit  sa  bourse  d' argent,  might  be 
avoided  by  saying  :  11  remplit  d'argmt  sa  bourse  ;  but  the  French  havo  nof 
yet  adopted  the  latter  construction.  Hence  I  have  used  the  former. 


FIFTY-EIGHTH     iESSON.    (3.) 


303 


lake  care  of  it. — Who  \vill  take  care  of  my  servant  ?  The  landlord 
will  take  care  of  him. 

Does  your  servant  take  care  of  your  horses  ?  He  does  take  caru 
of  them,  and  my  cousin's. — Is  he  taking  care  of  your  clothes'?  He 
takes  care  of  them,  for  he  brushes  them  every  morning. — Have  you 
ever  drank  French  wine  ?  I  have  never  drunk  any. — Is  it  long  since 
you  ate  French  bread'.'  It  is  almost  tl.  since  I  ate  any. — 

Have  you  hurt  my  brother-in-law  1  I  have  not  hurt  him,  but  he  hag 
cut  my  finger. — What  has  he  cut  your  linger  with  ?  With  the-  knife 
which  you  have  lent  him. — Is  your  father  arrived  at  last .'  Every- 
body saya  that  he  is  arrived,  but  I  have  not  seen  him  yet.— -Has  the 
phy.Mciar.  hurt  your  son  ?  He  has  hurt  him,  for  he  has  cut  his  linger. 

VOCABULAIRE.       8me  ScC. 

\  ou  come  quite  alone  ?  I  Etes-vous  venu  to-.it  M-.U!  ? 

..:ive  brought  all  my  in  \on,  j'ui  arm-in;  tout  nxm  n>on<le. 
with  me. 

To  lr,  \   Amcncr,  1. 

.'•h,  not  !><•  :  r.     rhi 

;lk,  and  the  latter  when  it  cannot.   Kx, 


He  has  brouglit  al.   his  men  along 

with  him. 

vou  brought  your  brother  along 

with  you  ? 

I  have  brought  him  along  with  me. 
Have  you  told  the  groom  to  bring  me 

the  horse  ? 
The  groom,  the  ostler. 

MI  bringing  me  my  books  ? 
1  am  bringing  them  to 
To  take,  to  carry. 


II  a  amcnc*  tout  son  momJc. 
Avez-vous  anicnu  votrc  frere  ? 

Je  1'ai  amene. 

Avez-vous  dit  au  palefrenicr  de  m'a 

incncr  le  cheval  ? 
Lr  palefrenier,  le  valet  dYcnric. 
M'apportez-vous  nics  lr, 
Je  vous  les  apporte. 
•,  1. 


OLs.  143.     The  same  distinction  must  be  observed  with  regard  to  menct 
and  porter,  as  with  amencr  and  apporter. 


Will  you  take  that  dog  to  the  stable  ? 

I  will  take  it  thither. 

Are  you  carrying   this  gun  to   my 

father  ?  I  carry  it  to  him. 

The  cane,  stick.  The  stable. 

To  come  down,  to  go  down. 
To  go  down  into  the  well. 
To  go  or  come  down  the  hill. 
To  go  down  the  river. 


Voulez-vous  mener  ce  chicn  a  To 

curie  ? 

Je  veux  1'y  mener. 
Portez-vous  ce  fusil  a  mon  pure  ? 
Je  le  lui  porte. 
La  canne.  I/ecmic 

Descendre,  4. 
Descendre  dans  le  puits. 
Descendre  la  montagne. 
Descendre  la  riv.'ere.1 


1  The  verb  dcscc:n1rr  takes  the  auxiliary  avoir  in  its  compound  tcnaui 
when,  as  in  these  examples,  it  is  construed  with  the  accusative  ;  otherwise 


804 


FIFTY-EIGHTH     LESSON.    (3.) 


To  alight  from  one's  horse,  to  dis- 
mount. 

To  alight,  to  get  out. 
To  go  up,  to  mount,  to  ascend.    . 
To  go  up  the  mountain. 
Where  is  your  brother  gone  to  ? 
He  has  ascended  the  hill. 
To  mount  the  horse. 
To  get  into  the  coach. 
To  get  on  board  the  ship. 
To  desire,  to  beg,  to  pray,  to  request. 
Ask  him  to  do  it. 


Dcscendre  de  cheval.  (52*.) 

Descendre  de  voiture. 
Monter,  1. 
Monter  la  montagne. 
Ou  votre  frere  est-il  alle  ? 
II  a  monte*  la  collinr.1 
Monter  a  cheval. 
t  Monter  en  voiturc. 
Monter  sur  un  vaisseau. 
Frier,  I,  (de  av.  1'infin.) 
Priez-Ie  de  le  faire. 


Ask  your  brother  to  come  down.  Do,  I  Priez  votre   frere  de  descendra,  jo 


vousen  prie. 

Le  Jleuve,  (se  jettc  dans  une  mer.) 
La  riviere,  (se  jette  dans  un  ileiive.) 
La  riviere  Schuylkill  se  jette  dans  lo 

fleuve  Delaware. 
La  barbe.  Le  torrent. 

Remonter  la  riviere. 


(I  beg  you  would,)  pray. 
The  river,  (if  it  empties  in  a  sea.) 
The  river,  (empties  in  another  river.) 
The  river  Schuylkill  empties  in  the 

Delaware. 

The  beard.        The  stream,  torrent. 
To  go  or  come  up  the  river. 

CiXQUAXTE-liriTlfcME    TlI^HE.       3me  SeC. 

I.c  voyageur  a-t-il  descendu  la  monlagne?    II  a  descendu  la  mori 
(airiH\  et  il  a  rcmonte  le  fleuve.     Votre  neveu  est-il  descendu  do 
cheval  pour  rainasser  le  gant  de  sa  compagne?     NTon,  un  \ 
a  eu  la  bonte  de  le  ramasser  et  de  le  rendre  a  la  demoiselle. — J« 
Hail  Columbia  pour  nous.    Je  ne  me  soucie  pas  de  jouer  a  pnV 
Ah!  jouez-le,  je  vous  en  prie.  (Oh!  do,  play  it.)     Je  le  ferai  pour 
vous  obliger;  mais  je  ne  pourrai  pas  bien  le  jouer,  je  vous  assun.-. 
car  jcnc  suis  pas  en  train.  (I  do  not  feel  like  it;  in  the  humor.) — Qui 
est  ce  M.  a  la  barbe  bleue?     C'est  le  ministre  de  notre  eglise.     l.f 
palefrenier  a-t-il  mene  le  nouveau  cheval  a  la  vieille  ecune?    Oui; 
il  Fy  a  mene.    Voulez-vous  amener  votre  scour  avec  vous  et  apportur 
son  cahier  de  chant?    Je  Famenerai,  mais  je  irapporlerai  }>a- 
cahierde  chant. — J7ai  oublie  ma  canne  dans  Fecurie;  allez-Fy  che;- 
cher  pour  moi.     Attendez-moi  un  instant,  je  reviendrai  de  suite. 

Has  the  joiner's  leg  been  cut  off?  (coupcr  ?)  They  have  cut  it  oil 
to  prevent  his  dying. — Are  you  pleased  (content)  \vith  your  servant  ? 
I  am  much  pleased  with  him,  for  he  is  fit  for  anything,  (propre  d 

It  takes  ft  re.  Ex.  Il  a  dcscendu  la  montagne,  he  has  gone  down  the  moun- 
tain; die  est  descendue  djune  famille  honorable,  she  is  descended  from  an 
honorable  family. 

1  Monter  also  takes  avoir  when,  as  in  *tese  examples,  it  is  construed  with 
tho  accusative,  and  etre  when  otherwise.  Ex.  1 1  est  monte  par  degrit  co* 
plut  hautes  charges  mihtaires,  he  has  ascended  by  degrees  to  the  highest 
military  employments. 


FIFTY-NINTH     LESSON.    (1.) 


305 


lout.) — What  does  he  know?  He  knows  ererything,  (tout.) — Can 
he  ride  ?  (montcr  &  chcval  ?)  He  can. — Has  your  brother  returned  at 
last  from  England?  He  has  returned  thence,  and  has  brought  you 
a  line  horse. — Has  he  told  his  groom  to  bring  it  tc  me  ?  He  has. — 
"What  do  you  think  (quc  ditcs-vous)  of  that  horse  i  I  think  ( je  dis) 
that  it  is  a  line  and  good  one,  (qiSil  est  beau  et  ban.)  and  beg  you  to 
irai  it  ir.tD  the  stable. — How  did  yon  spend  your  time  yesterday? 
I  went  to  the  concert,  and  afterwards  (cnsuitc)  to  the  play. 

When  did  that  laborer  (ouvricr)  go  down  into  the  well?  He  went 
icwn  into  it  this  morning. — Has  he  come  up  again  already?  (reman* 
it:  ?)  He  came  up  an  hour  ago. — Where  is  your  brother?  He  is  in 
loom.  Tell  him  to  come  down,-  pray,  do,  (je  vous  en  prie.)  I 
will  tell  him  so,  but  he  is  not  dressed  (522)  yet. — Is  your  friend  still 
(toujours)  on  the  mountain?  l*e  has  already  come  down. — Did  you 
go  down  or  up  (remontcr)  the  river  ?  We  wont  down. — Did  my 
cousin  speak  to  you  before  he  started?  He  spoke  to  me  before  he 
got  into  the  coach. — Have  you  seen  my  brother?  I  saw  him  before 
I  went  on  board  the  ship. — Is  it  better  to  get  into  a  coach  than  to  go 
on  boaid  the  ship?  It  is  not  worth  while  to  get  into  a  coach  or  to 
go  on  board  the  ship,  when  one  has  no  wish  to  travel. 


FIFTY-NINTH   LKSSON,  59th.— Cinquantc-neuvieme  Lc^on,  59m«. 

VOCABULAIRE.       Ire  Sec. 

<>1    TUB  IMPERFECT.— De  VImparJait>$  147.) 
For  its  lormanon  ana  use  sec  ($  147).     That  paragraph  must  be  carefully 
fctudied. 

When  I  was  at  Merlin  I  often  went 

to  see  my  friends. 
When  you  were  in  I'aris  yon  often 

went  to  the  Champs-Elysees. 
At  the  death  of  Lucretia  Rome  was 

governed  by  kings. 
Washington  was  a  great  man. 
Cicero  was  a  great  orator,  (used  to  be.) 
Our  ancestors  went  a  hunting  every 

day,  (used  to  go.) 


The  Romans  cultivated  the  arts  and 
sciences,  and  rewarded  merit. 

Were  you  walking  ? 
1  was  not  walking. 


Quand  y  etais  a  Berlin,  fallals  sou- 
vent  voir  mes  amis. 

Quand  vous  etiez  a  Paris,  vous  allies 
souvent  aux  Champs-Elysees. 

A  la  mort  de  Lucrece  Rome  etau 
gouverne'e  par  des  rois. 

Washington  etait  un  grand  homme. 

Ciceron  dtait  un  grand  orateur. 

Nos  ancetres  allaient  tons  les  jouri 
a  la  chasse. 

Les  Romains  cultivaient  les  arts  et 
les  sciences,  et  rdcompensaiei!  !« 
merite. 

Vous  promeniez-vous  ? 

Je  ne  me  womenais  uas. 


FIFTY-NINTH      LESSON.    (1.) 


Were  )ou  in  Paris  when  the  king  • 
was  there  ? 

I  was  there  when  he  was  there. 

Where  were  you  when  I  was  in  Lon- 
don ? 

A.t  what  time  did  you  breakfast  when 
you  were  in  Germany  ? 

t  breakfasted  when  my  father  break- 
fasted. 

Did  you  work  when  he  was  working  ? 

I  studied  when  he  was  working. 

Some  fish.  Some  game. 

When  I  lived  (used  to  live)  at  my 
father's,  I  rose  (used  to  rise)  earlier 
than  I  do  now.  ($  145 — 1.) 

When  we  lived  in  that  country,  we 
went  a  fishing  often. 

When  I  was  ill,  I  kept  in  bed  all  day. 

(<ast  summer,  when  I  was  in  the 
country,  there  was  a  great  deal  of 
fruit 


6tiez-vous  a  Paris  lorsque  le  roi   J 

etait  ? 

J'y  etais  lorsqu'il  y  etait. 
Ou  etiez-vous  lorsque  j'utais  a  Lon- 

dres? 
Quand  dejeuniez-vous  lorsque  voui 

etiez  en  Allemagne  ? 
Je  dejeunais"  lorsque  mon  pere  do- 

jeunait. 

Travailliez-vous  lorsqu'il  travaiilait  t 
J'etudiais  lorsqu'il  travaillait. 
Du  poisson.  Du  gibier. 

Quand  je  demeurais  chez  mon  pero, 

je  me  levais  de  mrilleure  heuro 

que  je  ne  le  fais  a  present.  (531, 

Obs.  120.) 
Quand    nous  demeuriona  dins    te 

pays-la,  nous  allion*  smivent  a  la 

pGclie. 
Quand  j'<;tais  malade,  ja  gardais  le 

lit  toute  la  jour; 
L'etd  passe,  pendant  que  JT«':: 

campagne,  il  y  avail  be.iucoup  de 

fruit. 


CINQUANT:  i:  'IiiKMi:.     Ire  Sec. 

Qui  cherchicz-vous?  Je  cherphais  mon  petit  fiere,  que  je  ne  peux 
irouver  ni  en  haut  ni  en  bas.  Si  vous  le  cherchez  encore,  il  faut 
aller  pre.s  du  fleuve.  Que  fait-il  la  ?  II  peche,  assis  eur  le  bane  que 
vous  y  avez  fait  mettre,  (had  or  got  placed.)  II  n'etait  pas  tres-bien 
hier ;  rhuinidite  ne  le  rendra-t-elle  pas  malade  ?  J'espere  que  non. — 
Tl  y  a  ii  hi  porte  un  gar(?on  qui  vous  demande.  Faites-le  entrer. 
Que  me  voulez-vous  ?  Je  vous  apporte  vos  habits.  Pourquoi  ne  lea 
avez-vous  pas  aoportes  avant?  Ils  n'etaient  pas  fails,  de  sorte  que 
jo  ne  pouvais  pas  lesapporter;  mais  lesvoici.  C;estbon.  Mettez- 
les  sur  cette  chaise.  Quand  je  les  aurai  essayes,  je  passerai  chez  le 
taiileur.  Tres-bien,  M. — Vous  avez  appris  votre  lepon,  pourquoi 
fotre  sccur  ne  savait-elle  pas  la  sienne?  Elle  a  fait  uno  longue 
^long,  fern.)  promenade  avec  notre  chere  mere,  de  sorte  qu7elle  n'a 
pas  pu  1'etudier.  Ou  ont-elles  ete  ?  Elles  out  d'abord  ete  pres  de  la 
riviere  qui  est  demere  noire  jardin,  ensuite  elles  ont  passe  devant  *a 
grande  maison  neuve,  dont  elles  out  fait  le  lour,  et  enfin,  elles  sout 
monlees  sur  la  monlagne.  Et  tout  cela  a  pied  ?  Oui;  mais  je  voua 
Assure  qu'elles  etaient  bien  faliguees.  Je  le  crois 

Were  you  loved  when  you  were  at  Dresden  ?  (Dresde?) — I  was 
Ui»t  lialed. — Was  ycur  brother  esteemed  when  he  was  in  London? 


FIFTi'-NINTH     LESSON.    (2.) 


307 


He  was  loved  and  esteemed. — When  were  you  in  Spam  ?  I  waa 
there  when  you  were  there. — Who  was  loved  and  who  was  hated? 
Those  that  were  good,  assiduous,  and  obedient,  were  loved,  and  those 
who  were  naughty,  (mcchant,)  idle,  and  disobedient,  were  punished, 
hated,  and  despised. — Were  you  in  Berlin  when  the  king  was  there? 
I  was  there  when  he  was  there. — Was  your  uncle  in  London  when 
I  was  there  ?  He  was  there  when  you  were  there. — Where  were 
you  when  I  was  at  Dresden?  I  was  in  Paris. — Where  was  youi 
father  when  you  were  in  Vienna?  He  was  in  England. 

At  what  time  did  you  breakfast  when  you  were  in  France  .*     1 
breakfasted  when  my  uncle  breakfasted. — Did  you  work  when  he 

orking?     I  studied  when  he  was  working. — Did  your  brother 

work  when  you  were  working?    He  played  when  I  was  working. — 

On  -vhat  (Dc  quci)  lived  our  ancestors?    They  lived  on  nothing  but 

li>h  and  game,  for  they  went  a  hunting  and  a  fishing  every  day. — 

:iding  the  river  (Jleuve)  while  it  rained?     Yes,  we 

Jang  it  v/hile  it  was  raining  very  fast;  and  a*>  we  had  no 

Bt — Did  you  often  go  to  see  your  friends 

when  at  Berlin?     1  went  to  see  them  often;  5  or  6  times 

k. — Were  you  writing  to  John?  I  was  writing  to  him,  his 
cousin  Julius,  and  his  friend  Alfred.  (64 — 2.) — Did  you  sometimes 
go  to  the  Champs-Elysees  when  you  were  at  Paris  ?  I  often  went. 

YOCABULAIRE.     2de  Sec. 

-•1  UK  The  same  thing, 

une  violin.      The  szmejlute. 
'.  one  ;  it  is  the  same  ;  it  makes 
no  difference  ;  no  matter,  &c. 
Such. 

Such  a  man.  Such  men. 

Such  a  woman.       Such  things. 
Such. 
Such  men  merit  esteem. 

Out. 

Out  of  the  city,  (the  town.) 
Without  or  out  of  doors.   Who  is  out  ? 
The  church  stands  outside  the  town. 
I  shall  wait  for  you  before  the  town 

gate. 

The  town  or  city  gate. 
The  barrier,  the  lurnpike-gate. 
Seldom,  (rarely.)        Some  brandy. 
The  life.     To  get  one's  livelihood  by. 
I  g^t  my  livelihood  by  wor! 
He  gets  his  living  by  writing. 


Une  chose.  La  memo 

Le  memo  violon.      La  memo  Jliitr. 

t  C'est  egal ;  c'est  la  meme  chose  ; 

fa  nefait  ricii  ;  cela  ne  fait  rien. 
Mas.  Un  tcl ;  fem.  Une  Idle. 
Un  tel  homme.        De  tela  honunr:-. 
Une  telle  femme.    De  telles  choses. 
Pareil ;  fern,  pareille. 
De    pareils    hommes    meritenl    do 

1'estime. 
Ilors  de. 
Hors  de  la  ville. 

Dehors.  Qui  est  dehora  ? 

L'eglise  est  hors  de  la  ville. 
Je  vous  attendrai  devant  la  porte  de 

la  ville. 

La  porte  de  la  ville. 
La  barriere. 

li.-irrment.  De  Peau  de  vie. 

La  vie.  Gagner  ea  vie  u, 

Je  gagne  ma  vie  a  travail  cr. 
Jl  gagne  sa  vie  a  e'crire. 


808  FIFTY- NINTH     LESSON.    (2.) 


I  gain  my  money  by  working. 

By  what  does  that  man  get  his  live- 
lihood ? 

To  proceed,  to  go  o?i,  to  continue. 

He  continues  his  speech. 

A  good  appetite. 

The  narrative,  the  tale. 

The  edg«,  the  border,  the  shore. 

The  edge  of  the  brook. 

The  sea-shore. 

On  the  sea-shore. 

The  shore,  the  water-side,  the  coast, 
ihi.'  bank. 

People  or  folks. 

They  are  good  folks. 


Je  gagne  mon  arge  it  a  travail! i  r. 
A  quoi  cet  honimt  gagne-t-il  eavie  ? 

Continuer,  1,  (de  or  c,  av.  1'inf.) 
II  continue  son  discours. 
Un  bon  appetit. 
Le  conte,  (la  narration. ) 
Le  bord. 

t-e  bord  du  ruisseau. 
Le  bord  de  la  rner. 
•  rd  dc  la  UK  r. 
-e,  hi  rive. 

t  Ce  sent  de  bonnes  gens. 


Obx.  11  1.    The  adject  i\  <  s  that  precede  gens  must  be  feminine,  those  that 
follow  it,  masculine. 

Those  people  are  despised.  I  Ces  gens-lu  Font  rm'j 

Thone  wiokcd  'people  are  despised.     I  Ces  mechanics  gens  sont  nn'pr'.- 


CiNQr.\NTi:-M:rvir.Mi-:  TiiibiK      2de  Sec. 

Qui  est  dehors?  Personne  n'est  dehors.  —  Thomas,  fermez  les 
poites  et  les  volets.  —  Lemarchand  de  vin  a-t-il  envoye  l'eau-de-vie? 
Non,  il  n'a  pas  encore  pn  1'envoyer,  parce  que  son  garcon  est  ma- 
lade.  A-t-il  bu  trop  d'eau-de-vie  '?  C'estcela  meme,  (the  very  thing.) 
—  Ou  serez-vous  oblige  d'attendre  votre  neveu  et  votre  niece  ?  Nous 
les  attendrons  :  elle,  a  la  barriere,  lui,  a  ratelier.  —  Les  attendiez-vous 
au  musee  hier?  Non,  je  les  attendais  au  pont  couvert.  —  Faisait-il 
de  Porage  alors  ?  Oui,  il  en  faisait.  Le  tonnerre  grondait,  il  pleuvait 
et  il  grelait.  Sont-ils  venus  apres  Porage  ±  Us  ont  cru  que  je  riV 
pas  sorti.  —  Quel  conte  ce  voyageur  vous  a-t-il  fait  ?  (did  he  relate  ?)  — 
11  m'a  fait  im  conte  auquel  je  n'ai  riencompris;  il  m'aditdeschoses 
etranges  et  extraordinaires.  —  C;est  dommage  que  les  voyageurs 
cfagercnt  (exaggerate)  comme  ils  le  font.  Y  aura-t-il  beaucoup  de 
fruit  cette  annee-ci  ?  II  y  en  aura  beaucoup,  des  pommes,  sunout^ 
(especially.)  —  Que  faisiez-vous  lorsque  vous  demouriez  dans  ce  pays- 
la?  Quand  nous  y  demeurions,  nous  allions  souvent  chasser  sur  lo 
Dord  de  la  mer.  —  Quels  gens  aviez-vous  la  1  Nous  y  avions  co 
bonnes  gens,  mais  ils  ne  sont  pas  heureux. 

Do  you  rise  early  ?  Not  so  eady  as  you,  but  when  I  lived  at  my 
nncle's  I  rose  earlier  than  I  do  now.  —  Did  you  sometimes  keep  in 
bed  when  you  lived  at  your  uncle's?  When  I  was  ill  I  kept  in  bed 
all  day.  —  Is  there  much  fruit  this  year?  I  do  not  know;  but  last 
summer,  when  I  was  in  the  country,  there  was  a  great  deal  of  fruit 
What  do  you  get  your  livelihood  by?  I  get  my  livelihood  by  work- 
Vi«j.  —  Does  your  friend  get  his  livelihood  by  writing  ?  He  gets  it  b^ 


SIXTIETH     LESSCN.    (.) 


309 


jpeaking  and  writing. — Do  these  gentlemen  get  their  livelihood  by 
working?  They  get  it  by  doing  nothing,  (a  ne  ricn  faire,)  for  they 
are  too  idle  to  work. — What  has  your  nephew  gained  that  money 
by  ?  He  has  gained  it  by  working. 

What  did  you  get  your  livelihood  by  when  you  were  in  England  ? 
I  got  it  by  writing. — Did  your  cousin  get  his  appetite  by  writing  ] 
He  got  it  by  working. — Have  you  ever  seen  such  a  person?  I  1 
never  seen  such  a  one,  (une  parcille.)—  Have  you  already  seen  our 
church?  I  have  not  seen  it  yet. — Where  does  it  stand?  It  stands 
outside  the  town.  If  you  wish  to  see  it,  I  will  go  with  you  in  order 
10  shov.  ;t  you. — What  do  the  people  live  upon  that  live  0:1  the  sea- 
shore ?  They  live  on  fish  alone. — Why  will  you  not  go  a  hunting 
any  more  '?  While  1  was  hunting  yesterday,  I  killed  nothing  but  an 
•.uat  I  shall  not  go  any  more  a  hunting. — Why  do  you 
not  eat?  Became  I  have  not  a  good  appetite. — Why  did  your  bu- 
BO  much?  Because  he  had  agood  appetite. — Do  you  make 
faults  in  your  e  '  I  do  sometimes.  You  must  not  (il  nc  faut 

pas  en)  make  any.  for  you  have  all  ($  91)  you  want  to  prevent  you 


MXTlI'/ni  LESSON,  60th.— Soixantiente  Lecon,  60mc. 

VOCABULAIRE.     Ire  Sec. 
IMPERFECT  CONTINUED.— Imparfait  Continue. 


\  forgot,  thou  fDrgottest,  he  or  she 
for<: 

rgot,  you  forgot,  they  forgot. 

When  we  went  to  school  we  often 
forgot  our  books. 

When  you  went  to  church  you  often 
prayed  to  the  Lord  for  your  chil- 
dren. 

I  paid,  thou  paidest,  he  or  she  paid. 

\\  »•  paid,  you  paid,  they  paid. 

When  we  received  some  money  we 
employed  it  in  purchasing  good 
books. 

When  you  bought  of  that  merchant 
you  did  not  always  pay  in  cash. 

ling  your  sister  succeeded  in  mend- 
ing your  cravut  ? 
She  has  succeeded  in  it. 


J'oubliais,  tu  oubliais,  il  ou  elle  ou 

bliait. 
Nous  oubltVons,  vous  oubh'/ez,  ils  ou 

elles  oubliaient.  ($  147 — 5.) 
Quand  nous  allions  a  1'ucolc  noun 

oublium*  souvent  nos  livres. 
Quand   vous  alliez  a  1'eglise  vous 

pritez  souvent  le  Seigneur  pour  voo 

enfants. 

Je  payais,  tu  payais,  il  ou  elle  payait. 
Nous  payion*,  vous   payiez,  ils  ou 

elles  payaient.  ($  147 — 6.) 
Quand  nous  recevions  de   1' argent 

nous   Femployijwj   a  acheter  de 

bons  livres. 
Quand  vous  achetiez  chez  ce  mar 

chand  vous  ne  payi'ez  pas  toujoura 

comptant. 
Votre  soeur  cst-elle  parvenua  u  rac 

commoder  votre  cravate  ? 
Elle  y  est  parvonue. 


810 


SIXTIETH     LESSON.    (l.> 


Has  the  woman  returned  from 

market  ? 

She  has  not  yet  returned. 
Did  the  women  agree  to  that? 


the 


La  femmc  est-elle  revenue  du  mar* 

che? 

Elle  n'en  est  pas  encore  revenue. 
Les  femmes  sont-elles  convenuee  dtf 

cela? 

Elles  en  sont  convenues. 
Oil  votre  scour  est-elle  allee? 
Elle  est  allee  a  1'eglise. 


They  did  agree  to  it. 

Where  is  your  sister  gone  to  ? 

She  is  gone  to  the  church. 

POTENTIAL,  IMPERFECT.— Conditional,  Simple  ou  Pret cnt. 

For  its  formation  and  use  see  ($  148.)     That  paragraph  must  be  well 
studied. 

I  would  ^o  if  I  had  time. 
IT  he  knew  what  you  have  done  he 

would  scold  you. 
To  scold.    Do  not  scold  if  you  can 

prevent  it. 
if  there  were  any  wood  he  would 

make  a  fire. 
Should  the  men  come,  it  would  be 

necessary  to  give  them  something 

to  drink. 
Should  we  receive  our  letters, 

would  not  read  them  until  to-mor- 
row. 
Not  until,  (meaning  not  before.) 


J'irais  si  j'avais  le  temps. 

S'il  savait  ce  que  vous  avcz  fait  il 

vous  gronderait. 
Grander,  I.    Ne grondcz pat 

pouvez  rempecher. 
S'il  y  avail  du  bois  il  ferait  du  feu. 

Si  les  hommes  venaicnt,  il  faiidrait 
leur  donner  quelque  chose  a  boire. 

Si  nous  recevions  nos  lettres,  nous 
ne  les  Hrions  pas  avant  deniain. 


Must  I  go  ? 
You  must  go. 
You  must  not  go. 
To  guess. 
An  acquaintance. 


Pas  avant,  (tie  av.  I'lni'mi.) 

Faut-il  que  j'aille  ? 

II  faut  que  vous  alliez. 

II  ne  faut  pas  que  vous  allie/. 

Deviner,  1. 

Une  connaissance.  Une  de  mess . . .  s, 


An  ....  of  mine. 

v< 

SoiXANTiiiME  TII&ME.     Ire  Sec. 

Attendez-vous  quelqu'un?  A  present?  Non.  J'altendais  u:: 
mvrier  (workman)  a  six  heures,  et  comme  il  n'est  pas  verm,  je  ne 
['attends  plus.  S'il  venait,  1'emploieriez-vous  ?  ($  144 — ?  }  Non,  si 
cet  ouvrier  venait  a  cette  heure-ci,  je  ne  remploierais  pas  s'il 
n'avait  pas  une  excellente  raison  a  me  donner  pour  avoir  manque 
de  venir.  Vous  avez  raison,  il  n'y  a  rien  de  tel  (06s.  7)  que  d'etre 
ponctuel. — Saviez-vous  que  M.  N.  D —  etait  mort?  Oui,  je  1'avais 
appris  avant  d'arriver. — Etait-ce  une  de  vos  connaissances  1  Oui, 
c' etait  une  de  mes  plus  anciennes  connaissances.  Combien  y  avail-  il 
que  vous  le  con^aissiez?  II  y  avait  environ. . .  .Devinez. — Deviner ! 
Je  ne  peux  jaiuais  deviner. — Dites-le  moi.  Eh !  bien,  il  y  avait 
quinze  ans.  0\\faut-il  que  faille  ?  II  faut  qud  vous  alliez  chez  lo 
marchand  de  bijoux. — Chez  le  bijoutur?  Oui,  chez  le  bijoutier. — 
Et  pourquoi  faut-il  que  j'y  aille?  Je  voulaie  faire  faire  (342)  quelquo 


SIXTIKTH     LESSON.    (2.)  811 

chose:  mais  conime  j'ai  change  d'inlention,  il  faut  que  vous  aliie2 
B  pour  1'empecher  de  comirencer  Fouvrage. 

Did  you  use  to  forget  anything  when  you  went  to  school?     We 

often  forgot  our  books. — Where  did  you  forget  them?     We  forgot 

them  at  the  school. — Did  we  forget  anything?  You  forgot  nothing. — 

Did  your  mother  pray  for  any  one  when  she  went  to  church?     Slu; 

prayed  for  her  children. — For  whom  did  we  pray?     You  prayed 

your  parents. — For  whom  did  our  parents  pray?     They  prayed 

for  their  children. — When  you  received  your  money,  what  did  you 

do  with  it?  (ijii-c ii  fai*icz-vi)its ?)     We  employed  it  in  purchasing 

Home  good  books.     Did  you  employ  yours  also  in  purchasing  books '? 

we  employed  it  in  assisting  the  poor,  (a  sccourir  Ics  pauv'ies.) — 

Did  you  not  pay  your  tailor?     We  did  pay  him. — Did  you  LAvays 

pay  in  ca  you  bought  of  that  merchant?     We  alwa)  j  paid 

:i,  for  we  never  buy  on  credit. 

Has  your  Bister  succeeded  in  mending  your  stockings?  SL*s  has 
succeeded  in  it. — Has  your  mother  returned  from  church?  Sl.e  has 
not  yet  returned. — She  would  return  if  it  did  not  rain ;  would  she 
not?  Y«-  mid. — Where  has  your  aunt  gone?  She  ha* 

gone  to  church. — Where  have  our  cousins  (fern.)  gone  ?  They  have 
gone  to  the  concert. — Have  they  not  yet  returned  from  it?  They 
have  not  yet  returned,  for  the  carriage  will  go  for  them  onl>  in  a 
quarter  of  an  hour. — Would  you  give  me  something  pretty  if  I 
were  (§  148 — 3)  good  ?  If  you  were  very  good,  and  if  you  \\t-rkecl 
well,  without  meddling  in  other  people's  business,  I  would  give 
you  a  fine  book. — Would  you  have  money  if  your  father  %vere 
here  ?  I  should  have  enough  if  he  should  arrive. 

VOCABULAIRE.     2de  Sec. 

POTENTIAL,  \>ER.FECT.—Conditionncl,  Passe  ou  Con/.**. 
For  its  formation  and  use,  see  ($  149.)     That  paragraph  must  be   well 
btudied. 

If  they  had  got  rid  of  their  old  horse,  ,  S'ils  s'etaient  defaits  de   leur  vieux 


they  would  have  procured  a  better 
one. 

If  he  had  washed  his  hands,  he  would 
have  wiped  th< 

If  I  knew  that,  I  would  behave  dif- 
ferently. 

If  I  bad  known  that,  I  would  have 
behaved  differently. 

If  llivji  haclst  taken  notice  of  that, 
tliou  wouldst  not  have  been  mis- 
taken. 


cheval,  ils  s'en  seraient  procurd  un 

meilleur. 
S'ii  s'etait  lave  les  molus,  il  so  leu 

serait  essuydes. 
Si  je  savais  cela,  je  me  Ajmporteraia 

difie'remment. 
Si  j'avais  su  cela,  je  m«  serais  com* 

porte  autrement. 
Si  tu  t'etais  aperc.u  dt  cela,  tu  nc  ts 

serais  pas  trompu. 


812 


SIXTIETH    LESSON.    (2.) 


Apprendriez-vous  le  Fran^aig  fii  je 

1'apprenais? 

Je  1'apprendrais  si  vous  1'apprcniez. 
Auriez-vous  appris  1'Allcmand  si  je 

1'avais  appris  ? 
Jc  1'aurais  appris  si  vous  1'aviez  ap 

pris. 
Iriez-vous  en   France,  si  j'y  allais 

avec  vous  ? 
J'irais,  si  vous  y  alliez  avec  moi. 

Seriez-vous  alle  en  Allemagne,  si 

j'y  etais  alle  avec  vous  ? 
Sortiriez-vous  si  je  restais  a  la  mai- 

son  ? 
Je  resterais  a  la  maison  ei  vous  sor- 

tiez. 
Auricz-vous  ecrit  une  lettre  si  j'avai* 

fcrit  un  billet  ? 
Voila  mon  livre. 
Voici  mon  ami,  ma  niece,  mon  livre. 

Le  voila.  La  voila. 

Les  voila,  nous  voila,  vous  voila. 

Me  voici,  vous  voici,  te  voici. 

En  voici.        En  voila  2  ou  3. 

Voilfi  pourquoi. 

Voihi  pourquoi  je  le  dis. 

Une  paire  de  gains.       de.pouletd. 

TH£ME.  2de  Sec. 
Ou  sont  mes  gants  de  chamois?  Les  voici,  derriere  votre  cha- 
peau.  S'ils  n'etaient  pas  ici,  iriez-vous  les  chercher?  Srils  n'a- 
vaient  pas  etc  ici,  j'aurais  ete  les  chercher.  Je  ne  vous  croyais  pas  si 
complaisant.  Vous  vous  trompiez. — Mes  cousins  sont-ils  en  haul  ? 
Faut-il  que  j'aille  voir?  Non;  les  voila.  De  qui  parliez-vous ? 
Devinez.  Je  ne  puis  deviner.  Nous  parlions  de  IMM.  Ducomb, 
(§  140 — 5,)  et  les  voilau — Ai-je  des  souliers  propres  ?  Je  ne  sais  pas. 
11  faut  que  vous  alliez  voir.  Oui,  en  voici.  Donnez-m'en  une  paire 
En  voici  deux.  Si  je  vous  en  avais  demande  deux  paires,  vous 
rie  nren  auriez  montre  qu'une.  En  voici  deux,  choisissez  la  paire 
que  vous  voudrez. — Ou  est  Thomas?  Le  voici.  Ou?  je  ne  le 
rois  pas.  II  etait  ici  il  y  a  un  moment  •  mais  il  s?en  est  alle. — Faut-il 
qu 3  j'aLle  le  chercher?  N?importe.  Parle-t-il  espagnol ?  II  pour- 
rait  le  parler,  s'il  voulait.  Vous  voulez  dire  qu:il  le  paiierait  s'il 
pouvait.  Aurcez-vous  ete  fi  Baltimore  si  votre  pere  et  votre  mere 
y  av^ient  etc  ?  Oui,  ils  nvy  anraient  menc  avec  eux.  Ne  seriez- 


Would  jrou  learn  French  if  I  learned 

it? 

I  would  learn  it  if  you  learned  it. 
Would  you  have  learned  German  if 

I  had  learned  it  ? 
I  would  have  learned  it  if  you  had 

learned  it. 
Would  you  go  to  France,  if  I  went 

thither  with  you? 
I  would  go  thither,  if  you  went  thither 

with  me. 
Would  you  have  gone  to  Germany, 

if  I  had  gone  thither  with  you  ? 
Would  you  go  out  if  I  remaincc  at 

home  ? 
I  would  remain  at  home  if  you  went 

out. 
Would  you  have  written  a  letter  if  I 

had  written  a  note  ? 
There  is  my  hook.  Behold  my  book. 
Here  is  my  friend,  my  niece,    my 

book. 

There  he  or  it  is.  There  she  or  it  is. 
There  they  are,  we  are,  you  are. 
Here  I  am,  here  you  are,  thou  art. 
Here  is  some.        There  are  2  or  3. 
That  is  the  reason  why. 
Therefore  I  say  so. 
A  pair  of  gloves,        of  chickens. 


SIXTIETH     LESSON.     (3.) 


313 


vous  pas  venue  plus  tot,  si  vous  aviez  pu  ?  Si  fait,  je  serais  venue 
avant  eux  si  j'avais  pu  le  faire.  Oil  faut-il  que  vous  alliez  ?  Nullo 
part. 

Who  is  there  ?  It  is  I,  (c'cst  moi.)— Wlio  are  those  men  ?  They 
•ire  foreigners,  who  wish  to  speak  to  you. — Of  \vhat  country  are 
they  ?  They  are  Americans. — Where  is  my  book  ?  There  it  is. — 
And  r^y  pen  ?  Here  it  is. — Where  is  your  sister?  There  she  is. — 
Where  are  our  cousins?  (fern.) — There  they  are. — Where  are  you, 
John?  (Jean.)  Here  I  am. — Why  do  your  children  live  in  France? 
They  wish  to  learn  French ;  that  is  the  reason  why  they  live  in 
France. — Why  do  you  sit  near  the  fire?  My  hands  and  feet  are 
cold ;  that  is  the  reason  why  I  sit  near  the  fire. — Are  your  sisters 
hands  cold  ?  No,  but  her  feet  are  cold. — What  is  the  matter  tyjth 
your  aunt  !  Hi-:-  ami  hints  her. — Is  anything  the  matter  with  yea'? 
My  head  hurts  me. — What  is  the  matter  with  that  woman?  Her 
;e  hurts  ht 

Why  do  you  not  eat  ?  I  shall  not  eat  before  I  have  (a'jant  d'untir) 
a  good  appetite. — Has  your  sister  a  good  appetite  ?  She  has  a  very 
good  appetite ;  that  is  the  reason  why  she  eats  so  much. — If  you 
0  read  the  books  which  I  lent  you,  why  do  you  not  return  them 
tome?  I  intend  reading  them  once  more,  (encore  une  fois;)  that 
is  tli-  v,  hy  I  have  not  yet  returned  them  to  you;  but  I  will 

return  them  to  you  as  soon  as  I  have  read  them  a  second  time, 
(pour  la  secondc  fois.) — Why  have  you  not  brought  my  shoes1 
They  were  not  made ;  therefore  I  did  not  bring  them ;  but  I  bring 
ihem  you  now ;  here  they  are. — Why  has  your  daughter  not  learned 
her  exercises?  She  has  taken  a  walk  with  her  companion,  (fem. ;) 
that  is  the  reason  why  she  has  not  learned  them ;  but  she  promises 
to  learn  them  to-morrow,  if  you  do  not  scold  her. — What  ail*  her 
horse  ?  It  has  a  sore  leg ;  that  is  why  she  did  not  ride. 

VOCABULAIRE.     3me  Sec. 


1  guess,  1  reckon,  (so  much  used  here.) 
I  guess  you  have  it. 
An  atmosphere.     A  dry  atmosphere. 
The  temperature.         A  u:~k 
A  low  temperature. 
A  plate. 

The  son-in-law. 

The  step-son.         Tlio  husband. 
The  daughter-in-law. 
Th3  jriep-daughter 
The  progress. 

To  profit.  To  improve. 

27 


A  high . . 
A  mean  .... 
A  soup-plate. 


Je  presume,  Jepcnse,fose  dire,  que  . 
Je  suis  presq,ue  sur  que  vous  1'avez. 
Une  atmosphere.     Une  ....  seche. 
La  temperature.       Une  ....  Slevee. 
Une  temperature  basse  . . .  moyenne, 
Une  assiette.     Une  assiette  a  soupa, 
Le  beau-fils,  le  gendre. 
Le  beau-fils.         Le  man. 
La  belle-fille.  la  bru. 
La  belle-fille. 
Le  progres. 
t  Faire  des  pro^rcs. 


SIXTIETH     LESSON.    (3.) 


To  improve  in  learning. 
The  progress  of  a  malady. 

The  fa;her-in-law,  the  step-father. 
The  mother-in-law,  the  step-mother. 
Must  I  be  ?  You  must  be. 

Must  Pnot  be  here  at  9  o'clock  ? 

It  is  not  necessary  for  you  to  be  here. 

Where  must  you  bo  to-morrow  ? 

I  must  be  in  Boston. 

Why  must  you  be  there  ? 

I  must  go  and  see  Mr.  Abbott. 


t  Faire  des  progres  dans  les  dtudca. 

dans  les  sciences. 
Le  progres  or  les  progres  d'une  mala 

die.1 

Le  beau-pere. 
La  belle-mure. 
Faut-ii  que  je  sois  ?  II  faut  que  voufi 

soyez. 
Ne  faut-il  pas  que  je  Bois  ici  a  9 

heures  ? 

II  ne  faut  pas  que  vous  y  soyez. 
Ou  faut-il  que  vous  soyez  domain  I 
II  faut  que  je  sois  a  Boston. 
Pourquoi  faut-il  que  vous  y  soyez  ? 
II  faut  que  j'aille  voir  M.  Abbott. 


SOIXANTIKMI:  TII£ME.     3me  Sec. 

Ou  faut-il  que  vous  soyez  demain  soir?  Pour  arriver  a  Boston, 
apres-demain  matin,  il  faut  que  je  sois  11  New  York  demain  soir. 
Votre  gendre  va-t-il  avec  vous?  JJy  vais  seul;  sans  compagnie  que 
celle  du  petit  Joseph,  qui  m/'accompagne.  Si  votre  fille  n'etait  pas 
malade,  votre  gendre,  son  rnari,  ne  vous  accompagnerait-il  point? 
Non;  il  ne  le  pourrait  pas,  parce  que  c'est  la  saison  des  affaires. — 
Ce  petit  garron  n'a-t-il  pas  froid  aux  pieds?  Pourquoi  le  croyez- 
vous?  Parce  <ju'il  a  de  si  mauvais  souliers,  (such  bad.)  II  aurait 
froid  s'ii  n'y  ctait  pas  accoutume. — Qui  est  parti  pour  le  Canada? 
Le  beau-pere<le  1'avocat  et  sa  belle-mere,  sa  belle-scour  et  son  beau- 
frere  sont  toufj  partis.  N'etait-il  pas  parti  avant  eux?  Lui?  II  n'est 
pas  encore  parti.  Je  croyais  qu'il  1'etait.  Nrauriez-vous  point  ecrit 
a  votre  chere;  petite  co'isme  et  a  votre  grand  cousin,  si  vous  aviez  su 
que  le  capituine  passerait  a  Newark?  J'aurais  ecrit  a  Tune,  mais 
non  pas  a  Tautre. 

Would  you  be  glad  if  I  were  to  lend  you  an  interesting  book?  To 
be  sure  I  would  be  glad.  (Dir.  6.)  You  know  very  well  that  I  am 
fond  of  reading.  But  have  you  any  interesting  book?  What  do 

you  think  of  one  of  W 's  works?  I  should  like  very  well 

(beaucoup)  to  read  his  last  work.  Would  you,  indeed !  (translate 
merely:  indeed  !)  Then  what  will  you  give  me  if  I  lend  it  to  you'? 
You  are  jesting ;  are  you  not  ?  Why  do  you  think  so  ?  Because  I 
think  you  say  so  only  to  plague  me,  (me  tracasser,  1.)  To  plague 
you !  You  know  that  .1  do  not  like  to  plague  you.  You !  You  do 
not  like  to  plague  me  ?  You  plague  me  every  day.  I  would  lilra 


1A11  nouns  ending  in  ie  are  feminine. 
to  the  English  termination  y. 


This  ending  frequently  ansuoya 


SIXTIETH      LESS  OK     (3.)  315 

to  plague  you;  but  I  cannot,  you  are  so  good.  —  Would  the  j  jbbei 
have  been  punished,  if  he  had  been  taken?  He  would  have  been 
punished,  if  they  had  been  able  to  prove  (prouvcr)  that  he  was 
culpable,  (coupablc.)  —  Would  your  cousin  progress  so  well,  if  she 
did  not  study  so  much?  She  does  not  study  so  much  as  you  think. 
She  does  not  study  as  much  as  I  (do)  ;  and,  notwithstanding,  she 
makes  more  progress,  (or  she  improves  more.)  How  is  that  ?  (Comr 
ment  ccla  sc  fait-il  ?)  She  learns  more  easily  (aisemcnt)  than  I. 


POUR  LA  GOME 

Avez-vous  trouve  le  bracelet  (bracelet)  que  j'ai  perdu  ?  Avez-vous 
perdu  un  bracelet?  Oui,  j'en  ai  perdu  un  d'or,  comme  celui-ci.  Je 
6i;is  fache  de  vous  dire  que  je  n'en  ai  pas  trouve.  Y  a-t-il  long- 
temps  que  vous  Pave/  perdu?  Je  les  ai  mis  tous  les  deux,  il  y  a  a 
peu  pres  une  heure,  et  a  present  je  n'ai  que  celui  du  bras  gauche. 
fites-vous  sortie  depuis  que  vous  les  avez  mis?  Non,  j?ai  cepen- 
dant  etc  a  la  porte  de  devant,  pour  y  accompagner  une  demoiselle 
de  ma  connaissance  qui  est  venue  me  voir.  Avez-vous,  depuis, 
cherche  votre  bracelet-la?  Oui,  ii  n'y  est  pas.  Si  vous  n'etes  pas 
sortie,  votre  bracelet  n'est  pas  perdu,  il  n'est  qiregare  (cgarer,  to 
mislay.)  Egare  ou  perdu,  c'est  a  peu  pres  la  meme  chose  ;  il  n'est 
plus  sur  mon  bras.  Vous  le  retrouverez,  ayez  patience.  Tenez,  je 
suis  presque  sur  (I  guess)  que  vous  avez  cru  mettre  (282,  Obs.  65) 
les  deux  bracelets,  et  que  vous  n'en  avez  mis  qivun.  Vous  plai- 
santez,  (you  jest,)  n?est-ce  pas?  Non,  je  ne  plaisante  pas.  Je  suis 
presque  sur  que  vous  le  trouverez  en  haut  sur  votre  table  ou  sur 
votre  toilette.  Je  vais  voir. 

M.  Saint-Cir,  fait-il  froid  dehors?  Froid  !  Non,  il  fait  un  temps 
charmant;  plus  frais  que  hier,  mais  agreable.  Agreable,  pour 
ceux  qui  marchent  ou  qui  se  promenent,  mais  froid,  pcur  ceux  qui 
restent  long-temps  assis  pour  ecrire  ou  pour  lire.  Ccla  sc  peut 
Quant  a  moi,  je  le  trouve  tres-agreable.  Mais  asseye/^vous  done, 
Voici  un  fauteuil.  Non,  gardez  le  fauteuil,  vous  qui  avez  froid; 
moi,  je  vais  m'asseoir  ici,  sur  ce  siege.  Se  porte-t-cn  bien  chcz 
vous?  Nous  nous  portons  tous  bien,  excepte  ma  petite  fillo 
Qu'a-t-elle  ?  Je  ne  sais  ;  mais  elle  est  malade  ;  aujc  nrd'hui,  mal 
aux  dents;  demain  mal  de  tete,  une  autre  fois  un  rhune..  .  .Maid 
voici  Louis.  Quant  a  celui-la,  ii  n;est  pas  malade,  je  vous  assure 
Bon  jour,  Louis,  comment  va  ?  Tres-b-en,  M.,  mere  i.  Dormez-voua 
fcien?  Oui,  je  dors  bien.  Mangez-vous,  buvez-vous,  jonez-vouH 
bien?  Oui,  il  fait  tout  cela  a  merveille.  fltudie-t-il  bien?  Oui, 
o'est  un  bon  ecolier%  Tenez,  je  crois  qu'il  est  venu  pour  me  r: 
Irer  quelquo  chose  qivil  a  traduit.  N?est-ce  pas,  Loui 


510 


SIXTY-FIRST     LESSON.     (I.) 


C'est  Une  petite  anecdote,  papa.  Voulez-vous  lui  permettre  de  la 
lire?  Saris  doute,  je  serai  charme  de  Pentendre. — Cette  traduction 
(translation)  n'a  pas  ete  corrigec,  de  sorte  qu'il  peut  y  avoir  dea 
fautes.  Que  vous  aurez  la  bonte  d'excuser. — Sans  doute.  Qui  ne 
fait  pas  de  fautes?  Li«  ta  traduction.  J'ai  peur,  papa.  Quoi!  Tu 
as  peur.  Tiens,  (come.)  Nc  fais  pas  V enfant,  (do  not  be  childish; 
from: /am?  1J enfant,  to  be  childish.)  Lis. — Traduction.  Un  officer 
Francais  etant  arrive  a  la  cour  (court)  de  Vienne,  Pimperatrice 
Therese  lui  demanda,  (asked,  §  153 — 35)  s'il  croyait  que  la  princesse 

de  N qu'il  avait  vue  la  vcille,  (the  day  before,)  etait  vraiment, 

comme  on  le  disait,  la  plus  belle  femme  du  (in  the)  monde? 
Madame,  repliqua  Pofficier,  je  le  croyais  hier. — C7est  bien,  Louis. 
Mais,  dis-moi,  comment  as-tu  epele  le  participe  passe:  vu?  Je  Pai 
i-pele,  v,  itj  e,  feminin.  Pourquoi?  Parce  que  son  regime  direct, 
QUC,  est  avant.  C'est  la  regie.  Tu  as  raison.  O'est  bien. 

La  reponse  de  Pofficier  Franc.ais  etait  ingenicuse,  (ingenious.) 
On  la  regarde  comme  telle ;  car  chaque  nation  laraconte,  et  change 
le  lieu.  Oui,  c'est  vrai;  les  Anglais  la  placeni  a  la  cour  d'Angle- 
lono,  sous  le  regne  de  leurreine  favorite,  Elizabeth;  les  Francais 
11  la  cour  de  France ;  les  Espagnols  a  Madrid,  &c.  &c.  Les  bonnes 
aneedotes  appartiennent  a  tout  le  monde.  Louis,  peux-tu  nous 
raconter  celle  du  vieux  monsieur  et  du  jeune  homme  a  Peglise  ? 
hi  ne  sais  pas  si  je  pourrai  la  dire,  mais  je  pourrais  la  lire  si  je 
Pavais  ici.  Non,  non,  essaie  de  nous  la  dire.  Je  vais  essayer;  maia 
je  crains  de  ne  pas  reussir.  Commence,  nous  sommes  prets  a 
t'ecoute.'. — Un  jeune  homme  etant  dans  une  eglise,  pen  attentif  au 
service,  et  ne  sachant  que  fiirc,  (restless,)  demanda  (§  153 — 3)  aun 
vieux  monsieur  qui  etait  dans  le  bane  voisin,  (next  pew,)  Connais- 
sez-vous,  Monsisur,  une  regie  sans  exception  ?  Oui,  repondit-il,  un 
homme  bien  eleve,  (a  gentleman,)  se  conduit  toujours  bien,  et  par- 
ticuliercmcnt,  (especially.)  a  1'cglise. 


SIXTY  FIRST  LESSON,  61st.— Soixantc  ct  i.memc  Lccon,  61me, 
VOCABULAIRE.     Ire  Sec. 


What  has  become  of  your  aunt  ? 
I  do  not  know  what  has  become  of 

her. 

What  has  become  of  your  sisters  ? 
I  cannot  tell  you  what  has  become  of 

them 


Qu'est  devenue  votre  tante  ? 

Je  ne  sais  pas  ce  qu'elle  est  devenue. 

Que  sont  devenues  vos  sa;urs  ? 
Je  ne  peux  pas  vous  dire  ce  qu'ellai 
sont  dcvenues. 


SIXTY-FIIIST     LESSON.    (I.) 


317 


To  die  (lose  life),     died,     do  not  die. 
J  die,     thou  diest,     he  or  she  dies. 
Shall  or  will  you  die  ?  I  shall. 

The  man  died  this  morning,  and  his 

wife  died  also. 
The  man  is  dead. 
The  woman  died  this  morning. 
To  be  alive. 
Wine  sells  well. 
Wine  will  sell  well  next  year. 

That  door  shuts  easily. 

That  window  does  not  open  easily. 

That  picture  is  seen  far  off. 

Far  off,  from  afar.  From  a  great  dis- 
tance. 

Winter  clothes  are  not  worn  in  sum- 
mer. 

That  is  not 

That  cannot  be  comprehended. 

To  conceive,  to  comprehend. 

It  is  clear. 

According  to  circumstances. 

The  circumstance. 

That  is  according  to  circumstances. 

It  depends. 

Glad  of 

Pleased  with  . . .  (not  plu,  but 

Sorry  of  or  for  . .  displeased  at,  with  . . 

Must  I  have  ?  You  must. 

Must  you  not  have  ? 

It  Is  'necessary.  It  is  not  .... 


J\Iourir,*  2,  mort,  ne  niourez  paa 
Je  meurs,  tumeurs,  ilouelle  meurt, 
Mourrez-vous  ?  (463.)  Je  mourrai. 
L'homme  est  mort  ce  matin,  ct  ea 

fern  me  cst  morte  aussi. 
L'bomme  est  mort. 
La  femme  est  morte  ce  matin. 
Etre  vivant-s,  etre  vivante-s. 
t  Le  vin  se  vend  bien. 
t  Le  vin  se  vcn.dra  bien  1'anneo  pro- 

chaine. 

t  Cette  porte  se  fcrme  facilement. 
t  Cette  fenCtre  ne  s'ouvrc  pas  facile- 

mcnt. 

t  Ce  tableau  se  voit  de  loin. 
De  loin.  De  bien  loir 

t  Les  vcjements  d'hiver  ne  se  por- 
tent pas  en  etc. 
t  Cela  ne  sc  dit  pas. 
t  Cela  ne  se  conceit  pas. 
Concevoir,  3. 
C'est  clair. 

t  Selon  les  circonstancco. 
La  circonstance. 

t  C'est  selon. 

Bien  aise,  (de,  av.  1'inf.) 
Content  (de).  (473,  Obs.  109.) 
Faclie*  (de.)  Mecontcnt  (de.) 
t  Faut-il  que  j'aie  ?  II  faut  quo  voua 

ayez. 

t  Ne  faut-il  pas  quo  vous  ayez  ? 
C'est  necessaire.     Ce  n'est  pas  .... 


SOIXANTE    ET    UN1EME    TlliblE,       Ire    Sec. 

Vous  souciez-vous  d'aller  au  musee?  Oui;  je  voudrais  bien  y 
aller;  niais  il  faut  que  j'aille  a  la  maison.  Et  pourquoi  done?  II 
faut  que  j'y  sois  avant  9  heures,  et  que  j'aie  fait  mon  devoir  avaut 
10  heures.  Vous  etes  ponctuel,  et  vous  faites  bien.  La  femme  qui 
etait  si  mal  hier  au  soir,  est-elle  morte  1  Le  medecin  croyait  qu'elle 
ne  passerait  pas  la  nuit;  mais  je  presume  qu'elle  n^est  pas  morte, 
car  nous  n'en  avons  pas  entendu  parler.  Les  medecins  ee  trompent 
quelque  fois  aussi  bien  que  les  autres.  Eh !  pourquoi  ne  se  trom- 
peraient-ils  point?  Us  sont  sujets  a  se  tromper  cpmme  les  autrea 
personnes. — Le  coton  se  vend-il  bien  cetle  annee  f^Oui,  le  prix  est 


•n 


peu  plus  haut  a  Liverpool.     S'est-il  bien  vendu  f  annee 


318 


SIXTY-FIRST     LESSON.    (2.) 


Oui,  il  s'est  tres-bien  vendu. — £tes-vous  contente  de  volre 
paire  de  soulisrs?  Pen  suis  assez  contente;  mais  je  I'aurais  ete 
davantage;  si  les  souliers  n'etaient  pas  tout-a-fait  si  grands. — Que 
pensez-vous  de  Salomon,  qui  est  sorti  ce  matin  avec  son  manteau 
d'hiver?  Cela  ne  se  concoit  pas.  II  faut  qu'il  soil  (he  must  bo) 
malade. — Lui?  Non  ;  ce  n'est  que  pour  avoir  Pair  singulier. 

What  has  become  of  your  uncle  ?  I  will  tell  you  what  naa 
become  of  him.  Here  is  the  chair  (la  chaise)  upon  which  he  often 
sat,  (etre  ftsszs,  512.) — Is  he  dead?  He  is  dead. — When  did  he  die? 
He  died  two  years  ago,  (472.) — I  am  very,  sorry  for  it.  Why  do 
vou  not  sit  down  ?  If  you  will  stay  with  (aupres  de)  me  I  will  sit 
down ;  but  if  you  go,  I  shall  go  (along)  with  you. — What  has 
become  of  your  aunt?  I  do  not  know  what  has  become  of  her. — • 
Will  you  tell  rne  what  has  become  of  your  niece?  I  will  tell  you 
what  has  become  of  her. — Is  she  dead  ?  She  is  not  dead,  but  alive. 
— What  has  become  of  her  ?  I  guess  sho  is  gone  to  Vienna. — What 
has  become  of  your  sisters?  I  cannot  toll  you  what  has  become  of 
them,  for  I  have  not  seen  them  these  two  years. — Are  your  parents 
still  alive  ?  They  are  not  alive,  but  dead. 

How  long  is  it  since  your  cousin  (fern.)  died?  I  guess  it  is  six 
months  since  she  died. — Did  wine  sell  well,  last  year  ?  It  did  not 
sell  very  well,  (pas  trop  lien;)  but  it  will  sell  better  (micux)  next 
\ ciir,  for  there  will  be  a  great  deal,  and  it  will  not  be  dear. — Why 
do  you  open  the  door?  Do  you  not  see  how  it  smokes  here  ?  I  see 
it,  but  you  must  (il  faut)  open  the  window  instead  of  opening  the 
door. — The  window  does  not  open  easily ;  that  is  the  reason  why  I 
open  the  door. — When  will  you  shut  it?  I  will  shut  it  as  soon  as 
there  is  (582)  no  more  smoke. — Did  you  often  go  a  fishing  when 
you  were  in  that  country?  We  often  went  a  fishing  and  a  hunting 
— If  you  will  go  -with  us  into  the  country,  you  will  see  my  fathers 
castle. — You  are  very  good,  Sir;  if  I  had  not  seen  that  castle,  I 
would  willingly  accept,  (accepter ;)  but  I  have  already  seen  it. — 
Never  mind;  you  must  go  with  us. — Can  I?  You  know  that  1 
must  be  at  home  this  evening,  and  that  I  have  20  miles  to  go.  (571.) 

YOCABULAIKE.     2dc  SeC. 


Arc  you  rich  ?  I  am. 

Are  the  women  handsome  ? 
They  are,  they  are  rich  and  hand- 
some. 

Are  you  from  France  ?        I  am. 
What  countrywoman  is  she  ? 
She  is  from  France. 
Would  you  be  sorry  if  you  were  rich  ? 


Ete^-vous  riche  ?        Je  le  suis. 

Les  femmes  sont-elles  Lien  ? 

Elles  le  sont,  elles  sont  riches  ci 

belles. 

Etes-vous  de  France  ?     J'en  suia. 
De  quel  pays  est-elle  ? 
Elle  est  de  France. 
Seriez-vous  fache  si  vous  etiez  richo  I 


SIXTY-FIRST     LESSON.    (2.) 


319 


1  should  not  be  sorry  for  it. 
To  be  angry  with  somebody. 
To  be  angry  about  something. 
What  are  you  angry  about  ? 
Are  you  sorry  lor  having  done  it  ? 
I  am  sorry  for  it. 

Honest,  polite.     Impolite,  dishonest. 
Polite,  courteous.  Uncivil. 

Happy,  lucky. 
Unhappy,         unli: 
Ensy,  not  hard.  to  do. 

Difficult,  hard.  Hard  to  say. 

Useful.  il  to  know. 

Useless.         Il  is  useless  to  P 
Is  it  useful  to  write  a  great  deal  ? 
It  is  il- 
ls it  w« 

of  ot; 

It  is  bad,  (wrong.) 
It  is  not  well  ;rig!: 
Well,  right.     L 
Of  wl.  Kit  I 

That  is  of  no  use. 

•  is  that  ? 
1  do  not  know  what  that  is. 

is  it  ? 

I  do  not  know  what  it  is. 
to  come  ? 
>u  to  come  alone. 
He  does  not. 

I  conic  without  ! 
Yo  i  must  come  without  her. 


Je  n'en  serais  pas  fache. 

Eire  fachi  contre  quelqu'un. 

Eire  fdche  de  quelque  chose. 

De  quoi  etes-vous  fache  ? 

Etes-vous  lache  de  1' avoir  fait  ? 

J'en  suis  fache. 

Honnete.  Malhonneto. 

Poli.  Impoli. 

Hcureux,        ftm.  heureuse. 

Malhcureux,     "     malheureose. 

Facile,  aise.       Facile  a  faire. 

Difficile.  Difficile  a  dire. 

Utile.        Utile  a  savoir. 

Inutile.     II  cst  inutile  de  le  rt-petcr. 

Est-il  utile  d'ecrire  beaucoup  ? 

C'cst  utile. 

Est-il  bien  de  prcndre  le  bion  dca 

autres  ? 
C'est  mal. 
Cc  n'est  pas  bicn. 
Mil; 

t  A  quoi  cela  est-il  bon  ? 

t  Cela  n'est  bon  a  ririi. 

t  Qu'est-ce  que  c'est  que  cela  ? 

t  Je  ne  sais  pas  ce  que  c'est  que  cela. 

t  Qu'cst-ce  que  c'cst  ? 

t  Jo  ne  sais  pas  ce  que  c'est. 

Veut-il  queje  vieane  ?  ($  151.) 

11  veut  que  vous  venicz  H-IU. 

II  no  veut  pas  que  vous  venicz  scul. 

Faut-il  que  je  viennc  sans  elle  ? 

II  faut  que  vous  veniez  sans  ellc. 


SOIXANTE    ET    UXi&ME    TlI^ME.       2de    SeC. 

filcs-vous  du  meme  pays  que  cette  dame-la?  Non;  je  suid 
Franraise,  et  elle  est  Suisse. — De  quoi  votre  beau-fils  se  pl^int-il  ? 
11  se  plaint  de  son  beau-frere. — Comment  appelez-vous  cette  demoi- 
selle-ci?  Ceci  est  Madame  de  Balmont.  Cette  jeune  personne  est- 
ell«  mariee  ?  Sans  doute.  Elle  semble  (seem)  etre  si  jeune,  quo 
je  ne  le  croirais  pas,  si  vous  ne  me  le  disiez  pas.  Elle  n'est  pas  si 
jeune  qu'elle  semble  1'etre.  Non !  Quel  age  a-t-elle  done  ?  De- 
vinez,  si  vous  pouvez.  Si  je  devine,  je  dirai  seize  ans.  Vous  n'avez 
pas  reussi  a  devirier. — Le  jeune  commis  n'est-il  pas  fache  contrn 
vous?  Non,  il  n'est  pas  fache  contre  moi,  car  je  ne  lui  ai  Hen  fait. 
Centre  qui  est-n  done  fache  1  II  est  mecontent  de  vous  qui  avex 
casse  sa  jolie  petite  canne.  Ne  Pai-je  pas  payee  ?  Si  fait;  mais  lo 
priy  n'est  pas  la  canne.  C'est  selon  :  quelque  fois  I'un  vaut  mieux, 


820 


SIXTY-FIRST     LESSON. 


(3.) 


quelque  fois  Fautre. — Dit-on:  remplissez  d'eau  la  bouteille?  Non, 
cela  ne  se  dit  pas.  Que  dit-on  done?  On  dit:  remplissez  labou- 
teille  d'eau. 

Where  did  you  take  this  book  from  ?  I  took  it  out  of  (dans)  the 
loom  of  your  friend,  (fern.) — Is  it  right  to  take  the  books  of  other 
people?  It  is  not  right,  I  know;  but  I  wanted  it,  and  I  hope  thai 
your  friend  will  not  be  displeased,  for  I  will  return  it  to  her  as  soon 
as  'I  have  read  it. — What  is  your  name  ?  My  name  is  William, 
(Guillaume.) — What  is  your  sisters  name?  Hei  name  is  Eleanor, 
(Leonore.) — Are  the  ladies  handsomer  in  Paris  than  in  London? 
Strangers  say  they  are. — Are  the  women  handsome  here  ?  Yes, 
they  are. — Are  they  rich?  Some  are  rich,  others  are  poor. — Are 
they  industrious  ?  They  used  to  be. — You  seem  unhappy ;  are  you 
angry  at  any  one  ?  Yes,  I  am  angry  at  my  husband,  who  has  not 
been  willing  to  (or  would  not)  take  me  to  Boston.  He  is  not  rich 
enough,  perhaps. 

Avis  AUX  LECTEUKS. — Nous  allons  des  aujourd:hui,  (from  to-day,) 
laisser  une  partie  des  questions  sans  reponses,  pour  accoutumer 
1'ecolier  a  les  faire  lui-meme. 

What  countrywoman  is  she? — Are  you,  too? — Would  you  be 
sorry  if  you  could  go  travelling  ? — Would  you  not  have  been  pleased 
if  she  had  not  died  ? — What  are  you  mad  at  ? — That  merchant  is 
honest;  people  can  do  business  with  him,  can  they  not? — Whom 
do  you  say  is  so  polite  ? — That  man  and  his  wife  are  happy,  are 
they  not? — This  young  girl  is  very  interesting;  is  she  not  happy? — • 
Are  your  gloves  easy  or  difficult  to  put  on  ? — Does  that  foreigner 
bring  good  wines  ? — What  do  they  sell  cheap  ? — What  is  useless  ?- 
What  is  impolite  ? — Is  the  German  hard  (difficult)  to  translate  ? — IP 
it,  to  pronounce  1 — Is  it  not,  to  speak  ? — If  this  (ceci)  is  useful,  why 
do  you  not  do  it  ?-*-If  to  get  up  early  is  useful  and  easy,  why  do 
you  not  get  up  earlier  than  you  do?  (492,  06s.  114.)— Is  it  right  to 
6pea£  ill  of  the  absent?— Do  not  fill  that  bottle  with  wine.— \Vha* 
would  you  fill  with  coffee,  if  you  had  any? — Would  he  have 
drunk  that  brandy,  if  I  hal  given  it  to  him?— What  is  that  gootf 
for? 

VOCABULAIRE.     3me  Sec. 


What  is  your  name  ? 
My  name  is  Charles. 
What  do  you  call  this  in  French  ? 

How  do  you  express  this  in  French  ? 
What  is  that  called  ? 
George  the  Third. 


t  Comment  vous  appelez-vous  ? 

t  Je  m'appelle  Charles. 

t  Comment  cela   s'appelle  t-il    en 

Fran§ais  ? 

t  Comment  dit-on  cela  en  Fiaigaii  I 
Comment  appelle^-on  cela  2 
George  trois. 


SIXTY-FIRST     LLSSON.     (3.) 


321 


Ols.  145.  After  the  Christian  name  of  a  sovereign,  the  French  emploj 
ihe  cardinal  numbers  without  an  article,  while  the  English  use  the  ordinal. 
Lewis  the  Fourteenth.  I  Louis  quatorze. 

Henry  the  Fourth.  I  Henri  quatre. 

06s.  146.  First  and  second,  however,  are  exceptions  to  this  rule  :  for  first, 
the  French  use  premier;  and  for  second,  either  deux  or  second.  Quint 
instead  of  cinq  is  also  used  in  speaking  of  the  emperor  Charles  V.  and  of 
the  pope  Sixtus  V. 


Henry  the  First. 

Henry  the  Second. 

Pope  Sixtus  the  Fifth. 

Charles  the  Fifth  spoke  several  Eu- 

Topean  languages  fluently. 
Europe,  European. 
Fluently. 
Jtath<  r. 

Rather  . . .  than. 
Rather  than  squander  my  money,  I 

will  keep  it. 

I  will  rather  pay  him  than  go  thither. 
I  will  rather  burn  the  coat  than  wear 

it. 

He  has  arrived  sooner  than  I. 
A  half- worn  coat. 

To  do  things  imperfectly,  (by  halves.) 
To  reign.  Does  she  reign  ? 

A  foolish  discourse.         Infernal. 
His,  her  maiesty.     Their  majesties. 

(f>72.   Obs     40.) 

SOIXANTE  ET  UXIEME    TllK\ME.       3me   SeC. 

Qui  regne  en  Angleterre?  La  reine  Victoria  premiere.  Quelroi 
regne  en  France  *  Aucun  roi  n;y  regne.  Quel  en  etait  le  dernier'? 
Louis  Philippe  premier.  Quel  a  ete  le  dernier  Charles  d'Espagne  ? 
Etait-ce  Charles  trois  ou  quatre  ?  fJ'a  ete  Charles  quatre.  Quel  a 
ete  son  successeur,  (successor?)  (p?a  ete  Ferdinand  sept.  Combien 
de  George  y  a-t-il  eu  en  Angleterre?  11  y  en  a  eu  quatre.  Y  en 
a-t-il  eu  en  France  1  Non,  il  n'y  en  a  eu  aucun.  Y  a-t-il  eu  uu 
Henri  quatre  dans  ce  dernier  pays  ?  Oui,  ii  y  en  a  eu  un,  qu'on 
nomme  Henri  le  Grand.  Sans  reponse.—  -Pouvez-vous  faire  dea 
reponses  en  Francois? — Auriez-vous  pu  en  faire  a  la  premioro 
lecon  ? — Que  faut-il  que  j'aie  ? — Veut-il  que  j'aille  chez  le  bijoutier  1 — 
Si  vous  etiez  riche  comme  Etienne  Girard  1'etait,  que  feriez-vous  ? — 
Ne  portait-il  pas  toujours  un  habit  a  demi-use  ? — Qui  fait  les  chosen 
kdemil — Que  teriez-vous  plutot  que  d'etre  marchand  ?  —  Qnel  roi 
de  France  a  ete  rcis  a  mort,  (put  to  death?) — Ou  voulez-vous  qut 


Henri  premier. 

Henri  second  or  Henri  deux. 

Le  pape  Sixte- Quint. 

Charles- Quint   parlait   couramment 

plusieurs  langues  europeennes. 
L'Europe,  europeen. 
Couramment. 
Plutdt . .  .  que. 
Plutot .  . .  que  de. 
Plutot  que  de  dissiper  mon  irgent,  ju 

le  garderai. 

Je  le  paierai  plutot  quo  d'y  aller. 
Je  brulerai  plutot  Thabit  que  de  lo 

porter. 

II  est  arrive  plus  tot  que  moi. 
t  Un  habit  a  demi-usu. 
t  Faire  les  choscs  a  dcmi. 
Regner,  1.  (282.)         Regne-t-clle  ? 
Un  sot  discours.        Infernal. 
Sa  majeste,  (nom/ew.)     Lcurs  ma 

jestes. 


822  SIXTY-SECOND     LESSON.     (1.) 

I 

What  did  Charles  V.  say  of  European  languages'?  Lliarles  V 
who  spoke  fluently  several  European  languages,  used  to  say 
(avail  coutume  de  dire)  that  we  should  speak  (qu:il  fallait  parlcr] 
Spanish  with  the  gods,  Italian  with  our  (son)  friend,  (fern.,)  French 
with  our  friend,  (mas.,)  German  with  soldiers,  English  with  geese, 
June  oie,)  Hungarian  (/iongrofs)  with  horses,  and  Bohemian  (bohu- 
m:.en)  with  the  devil,  (Ic  (liable.) — Do  you  admire  what  Charles  V. 
said  of  languages?  I  do  not,  I  assure  you.  I  think,  on  the  con- 
trary, that  it  is  a  very  foolish  speech. — Why  do  you  think  so  ?  Be- 
cause those  languages  must  be  spoken  (il  faut  parlcr  ccs  langues)  to 
the  people  who  speak  them,  and  not  to  geese,  horses,  and  the 
devil. — I  low  did  his  majesty  (sa  majeste)  the  emperor,  Charles  V., 
know  that  the  Bohemian  suited  his  infernal  majesty ?  (sa  majeste 
inieniale.) — Are  not  all  the  majesties  relations'? 

(Questions  sans  riponscs. — How  is  that  called  in  French  ? — What  is 
the  French  of:  companion? — of:   a  female  companion? — of:   an 
;«•<  jiiaiuuuice  of  mine  ? — Do  you  know,  or  do  you  not  know,  that  of. 
a  half-worn-out  hat? — Is  that  young  lady  called  Eleanor? — Is  her 
brother  called  Stephen?  (Etienne.) — Wiicre  did  George  III.  n\ 
—Was  Charles  the  First  put  to  death?  (mcttre  d  wiorf  ?)— Was 
tus  V.  a  pope  (papc)  or  a  king  ' — Are  all  kin-.  '—Have  there 

been  many  popes? — Is  it  correct  to  say  :  happy  M  i  a  pope 1 

—Who  would  not  rather  be  a  farmer  than  a  king?— What  must  J 
have? — Where  must  you  go? — You  wish  me  to  be  kind;  be  so 
yourself. — Does  >he  wi>h  me  to  come  and  play  at  her  concert7 


SIXTY-SECOND  LESSON,  62d.— Soixantc-dci'  >  :me. 

VOCABULAIRE.       Ire    SCC. 

As  to,  as  for.    As  to  me  ;  to  them.    I   Quanta  ;  quant  a  moi;  aeux,  a  elles 
As  to  that,  I  know  not  what  to  say.  |   Quant  a  cela,  je  ne  sais  que  dire. 

Obs.  147.   Ne  is  used  without  pas  with  the  four  verbs : — 

Cesscr,     oscr,     pouvoir,*     .•  - 
Je  ne  sais  que  faire. 
Ne  savez-vous  ou  aller  ? 
Elle  ne  sait  queTeponiiix;. 
Nous  ne  savons  qu'acneicr. 
Vous  ne  cessez  de  m' importuncr, 
Elle  ne  cesse  de  se  plaindre. 
Je  n'ose  vous  le  demandei. 
Elle  n'ose  vous  le  dire. 


To  cease,  to  dare,  to  be  able 

1  do  not  know  what  to  do. 

Do  you  not  know  where  to  go  ? 

She  does  not  know  what  to  answer. 

We  do  not  know  what  to  purchase. 

You  clo  not  cease  importnjuvg  me. 

Shs  continually  complains. 

I  dare  not  ask  you  for  it. 

fih'?  dares  not  tell  you. 


SIXTY-SECOND     LESSON.    (1.) 


323 


[  cannot  go  to  the  covered  !>; 

I  cannot  tell  you,  (would  not  know 

how.) 

Can  you  not  believe  it  ? 
To  die  of  a  disease,  (malady.) 
She  died  of  the  rarioloid. 
L\d  he  not  die  of  apoplexy  ? 
They  died  with  the  c/ioltra. 
The.  The  yellow  fever. 

A  chill. 

•ack  of  a. ... 
He  has  a  chill.      He  has  a  fever. 

His  fever  has  returned. 
He  w;is  strurk  wiih  apopfc 

ke,  knock,  rap,  at  the  door. 

What  has  !. 

i'our  me  out  a 

.icd  tears. 
To  pour  out  a  drink — some  v. 

I  pour  out  sunn;  drink  for  that  man. 

:-.  our,  or  my 
eyes. 

Id.  .  acid. 

Some  sweet  wine.     A  mild  air. 
A  mild  zephyr.          A  soft  sleep. 
Nothing  makes  life  more  agreeable 
than  the  society  of,  and  intercourse 
M  ith,  our  friends. 

I  TH£ME.     Ire  Sec. 

Alle/.-vuus  vous  verser  a  boire  ?  Moi,  non ;  mais  quant  a  Henri,  il 
ne  cesse  de  se  verser  a  boire.  II  faut  qu;il  ait  soif.  C'est  tres  proba- 
ble.— Versez  a  boire  au  jardinier.  Que  lui  verserai-je  ?  De  1'eau, 
de  Teau-de-vie,  ou  du  vin  doux?  Comme  il  a  eu  la  fievre,  versez- 
lui  un  peu  de  vin  doux.  Est-ce  bon  pour  la  fievre  ?  On  le 
dit. — Votre  cidre  est-il  doux  ou  sur  ?  II  n'est  ni  doux  ni  sur. — Aime- 
t-il  le  cafe  doux?  Non,  il  le  prend  sans  sucre. — Qu'est-ce  qui  rend 
la  vie  do  ice  ? — Mile.  Clara  a-t-elle  encore  la  fievre  intermittent? 
£a  lievre  est  passee.  Quel  accident  est  arrive  a  Pecclesiastique? 

II  est  tombe  de  cheval.  et  il  s'est  fait  beaucoup  de  mal  a  la  jamb« 
gauche  et  au  pied  droit. 

Sans  reponscs. — Vous  eces-vous  associe  avec  le  marchand  qui 
vend  si  bon  marche '! — A-t-on  DU  vous  dire  de  qnelle  maladie  le 


Je  ne  puis  aller  au  pont  couvert. 
Je  ne  saurais  vous  le  dire. 

Ne  sauricz-vous  le  croire  ? 
Mourir  d'une  miladie. 
Elle  est  morte  de  la  variolc. 
N'est-il  pas  mort  d'apoplexiet 
Us  sont  morts  du  cholera. 
\jQ.fie>  La  fievre  jaune. 

l,Tn/ri.s\s'on.      La  fievre  intermittent^. 
L'apoplexie.      Une  attaque  d'a  .... 
II  a  un  frisson,     t  La  fievre  l*a  pria 
t  II  a  eu  la  (un  acces  dc)  rievre. 
t  La  fievre  1'a  repris. 
II  a  ete  frappe  d'apoplexie. 
;  er,  1,  frapper  a  la  portc. 

>  et  ecclesiai?  iquo  ? 
Quc  lui  est-il  arrive  ?  (50*.) 

vr  un  accident  ajfreux. 

r,  1.  ioi  a  boiru. 

Une  larme.  -er  des  laimee. 

a  boire — de  1'eau. 
t  Je  verse  a  boire  a  cet  hominr. 
Les  larmes  aux  yeux. 

f 

Doux  ;  fern,  douce.     Sur. 
Du  vin  doux.         Un  air  doux. 
Un  doux  zrphir.     Un  doux  sommeil. 
Rien  nc  rend  la  vie  si  douce  que  ia 

societd   ct   le   commerce    de   nos 


824 


SIXTY-SECONI     LESSON.    (2.) 


vieil  ecclesiastique  est  mort? — Cevin  n?est-il  pas  un  peu  surl- 'Cos 
cerises  sont-elles  donees? — Mon  the  est  trop  doux,  versez-y  un  peu 
d'eau  et  de  lait. — Votre  fils  ne  craint-il  pas  la  fievre  jaune  a  la 
Nouvelle  Orleans,  ou  Pa-t-il  deja  eue  ? — Que  dit  le  medecin  1  Croit-il 
que  cette  attaque  d'"apoplexie  tuera  le  vieil  epicier  1 — Ne  faut-il  pa« 
que  vous  veniez  ? 

Of  what  illness  did  your  sister  die  ?  She  died  of  (de  la)  fever.— 
How  is  your  brother?  My  brother  is  no  longer  living j  he  died 
three  months  ago. — I  am  surprised  (etonne)  at  it,  for  he  was  very 
well  last  summer,  when  I  was  in  the  country. — Of  what  did  he  die  1 
He  died  of  apoplexy. — How  is  the  mother  of  your  friend?  She  is 
not  well ;  she  had  an  attack  of  ague,  the  day  before  yesterday,  and 
this  morning  the  fever  has  returned. — Has  she  an  intermittent  fever? 
I  do  not  know,  but  she  often  has  chills. — What  has  become  of 
the  woman  whom  I  saw  at  your  mothers  ?  She  died  this  morning, 
of  apoplexy. — Do  your  scholars  learn  their  exercises  by  heart? 
They  will  rather  tear  them  than  learn  them  by  heart. — What  does 
this  man  ask  me  for?  He  asks  you  for  the  money  which  you  owe 
him. 

Sans  rcponscs. — How  do  you  like  this  wine? — Shall  I  pour  you 
out  a  glass  of  brandy  and  water  ? — Does  she  not  prefer  a  glass  of 
mineral  water,  with  syrup? — Do  you  not  know  what  to  eat? — 
Where  must  you  be  to-ni§ht? — How  many  of  your  cousins  are 
alive? — How  much  syrup  shall  I  pour  out  for  her? — Did  you  noi 
hear  a  knock  at  the  front  door? — Why  does  she  shed  tears? — Has- 
an accident  happened 'S-'-What  has  happened  to  them? — Does  he 
not  quit  (cease)  speaking? — How  does  your  mother  like  our  food  1 
— Why  does  she  not  eat  any  more  ? 


VOCABULAIRE.     2de  Sec. 


A  case. 
The  report. 


Ten  cases  of  cholera. 
Is  the  report  favorable  ? 


To  augment,  increase.         Diminish, 

decrease. 
To  report. 

Do  they  report  all  the  cases  ? 
Does  the  cholera  increase  or  not  ? 
It  seems  to  be  diminishing  now. 
How  many  cases  have  they  reported  ? 
Only  7  for  the  last  24  hours. 

To  cry,  to  scream,  to  shriek. 
Tohdlp,  assist,  some  one  todo  a  thing. 
I  help  him  to  do  it. 


Un  cas. 
Le  rapport. 

able? 
Augmanter,  1. 


Dix  cas  de  cholera. 
Le  rapport  est-il  favor- 


Dimmuer,  1. 


Rapporter,  1. 

Rapporte-t-on  tous  les  cas? 

Le  choldra  augmente-t-il  ou  non  ? 

II  semble  diminuer  a  present. 

Combien  de  cas  a-t-oh  rapport<5  ? 

Settlement  7  pour   les  dernierea  24 

heures. 
Crier,  1. 

Aider,  1,  quelqurun  a  faire  une  chow 
Je  1'aide  a  le  faire. 


SIXTY-SECOND    LESSON.    (2.) 


325 


T  help  you  to  write. 
I  will  help  you  to  work 

To  cry  out  for  help. 

The  help. 

To  inquire  after  some  one. 

Whom  are  you  inquiring  after  ? 

Has  he  inquired  after  our  residence  ? 

Where,  when  you  please. 

As  you  please,  you  like  ;  at  yourplea- 

sur3. 

As  soon  as  you  like  it. 
To  trust  some  one.       Trust  no  one. 

I  trust  nobody. 

Do  you  trust  him  ?  her  ?  them,  (fern.)  ? 

I  do  trust  him,  her,  them. 

He  does  not  trust  me,  them,  (mat.} 

We  must  not  trust  everybody. 

To  distrust  one.  mistrust. 

i  distrust  that  lawyer  ? 
iistrusts  her  maid- servant. 
In  your  place,  I  would  distrust  him. 
A  seat,  a  place.       A  public  square. 
Make  me  a  little  room. 
To   laugh    at    something,    laughed, 

laugh. 
I  laugh,  thou  laughcst,  he,  she,  one 

laughs. 
Do  you  laugh  at  that  ?     I  do,  with 

all  my  heart,  and  he  does  also. 
At  what  do  they  laugh  ? 


Je  vous  aide  a  ecrire. 

Je  veux  vous  aider  a  travailler. 

Crier  a  Paide. 

Appeler  du  secours. 

L'aide,1  le  secours. 

S' informer,  1,  de  quelqu'ur.. 

De  qui  vous  informez-vous  ? 

S'est-il  informe  de  notre  demeurel 

Ou,  quand  ~\ 

Comme 

(46s.    065.107.) 
Aussitotqu',  desqu'./ 
t  Sejier,  1,  a  quelqu'un.     Ne  vout 

fiez  a  personne.  ($  55.) 
t  Je  ne  me  fie  a  personne. 
t  Vous  fiez-vous  a  lui,  a  elle,  a  clles  t 
t  Je  me  fie  a  lui,  a  elle,  a  elles.  (§  64.) 
t  II  ne  se  fie  pas  a  moi,  a  eux. 
t  line  faut  pas  se  fier  a  tout  le  monde. 
t  Se  defter  de  quclqiSun. 
t  Vous  defiez-vous  de  cet  avocat  ? 
t  Elle  se  defie  de  sa  domestique. 
A  votre  place,  je  me  dcfierais  de  lui. 
Une  place.          Une  place  publique 
Faites-moi  nn  pen  de  place. 
Rire,*  4,  de  quelque  chose,  ri  (p.  p  ), 

riez. 
Je  ris,  tu  ris,  il  rit,  elle  rit,  on  rit. 


Riez-vous  de  cela  ?     J'en  ris  de  tout 

mon  cceur,  et  lui  aussi. 
De  quoi  rient-ils  ?  rient-elles  ? 

SOIXANTE-DEUXIEME  TII£ME.     2de  Sec. 

Quel  est  le  rapport  du  cholera  ?  II  cst  moins  favorable  que  hier. — 
Combien  de  cas  dans  les  24  heures?  II  y  a  eu  42  cas  et  17  morts. 
— C'est  plus  que  hier;  car  il  n?y  avait  que  35  cas  et  14  morts. — Cela 
augmente  un  jour  et  diminue  Pautre. — II  faut  etre  prudent  ct  modere, 
(prudent  and  moderate.)1 — Combien  de  cas  a-t-on  rapporte  a  St. 
Louis?  Seulement  12. — Ce  n'est  pas  autan*  que  la  demiere  fois. 
Aidez-vous  votre  cousin  a  faire  son  devoir?  Seulement  lorsqu'il  esl 
trop  difficile.  Quant  a  moa  frere  et  a  moi7  nous  ne  nous  aidons 
jamais  Tun  Pautre. — Pourquoi  cet  enfant  crie-t-il^  II  s'est  fail  du 
mal  a  la  jambe  gauche.  A  quoi  sert  de  crier?  A  rien;  mais  lea 
enfants  crient. 


1  Aide,  in  the  signification  of  help,  ia  feminine ;  it  is  masculine  when  it 
means  an  assistant. 


B26  SIXTY-SECOND    LESSON,    (2.) 

Sai>*  reponscs. — Rit-elle  parce  que  ce  Monsieur  est  tuml^?-- 
Riez-vous  toujours  quand  vous  voyez  tomber  quel^u'un? — Ne  con« 
naissez-vous  personne  qui  crie  alors? — Vous  fiez-vous  a  ce  boucher* 
— Ne  se  fie-t-elle  pas  a  sn.  domestique  1 — Nous  pouvons  nous  fie;  a 
celle-ci,  n'est-ce  pas? — Ne  nous  trompera-t-elle  point ? — Savez-vous 
le  Fran^ais  de  :  As  you  please? — N''avez-vous  pas  entendu  frapper? 
— Que  vous  verse-t-elle  ? — N'appelle-t-on  pas  au  secours?  Sentez- 
vous  '3  doux  zephir? — Ne  faut-il  pas  que  j'ai  un  chapeau  neuf?— 
Seriez-vous  fache  si  je  m'en  allais  ? — Quel  est  le  nom  de  votre  nou- 
velle  connaissance  ? 

Have  you  inquired  after  the  merchant  who  sehs  so  cheap?  I 
have;  but  nobody  would1  or  could  ( person ne  n7a  voulu,  ou  ria  pit) 
tell  me  what  lias  become  of  him. — Never  mind;  y:-a  will  easily 
lind  another  who  sells  as  cheap. — I  wish  I  could,2  (Jc  voudrais 
pouvoir;2)  for  I  have  but  little  money. — Did  the  general's  nephew 
die  of  a  disease  or  of  an  accident?  He  died  of  the  yellow  fever. 
— Has  not  a  dreadful  accident  happened  to  the  apothecary's  old 
clerk?  11(3  fell  and  broke  his  arms  or  legs.  (Dir.  2— 242;  Obs.  55.) 
— His  arms  and  legs,  did  you  say?  No;  only  his  arms  or  legs. — 
Would  she  cry  for  help,  if  I  should  beat  her?  (§  148 — 3.)  If  you 
should  hurt  her,  I  guess  she  would  cry. — Would  they  not  laugh,  if 
1  was  to  tell  them  that  tale?  No,  I  guess  they  would  be  angry. — 
Must  I  not  go  for  some  cigars?  Yes,  you  must  go  for  some. — Must 
I  not  have  the  money  to  pay  for  them  !  Yes.  you  must  have  it; 
here  it  is. — After  you  have  paid  for  them,  (463,  ()!>*.  107.)  you  will 
have  six  cents  left;  yon  may  keep  them. 

Sans  reponscs. — What  dost  thou  ask  me  for  ? — Will  you  pass  me 
the  bottle,  if  you  please? — Have  you  not  drunk  enough? — Shall  1 
give  you  (faut-il  vous  vcrscr)  some  wine? — Why  do  you  not  eat? — 
Who  knocks  at  the  door  ? — Why  does  he  cry  ? — What  has  happened 
to  you? — Where  will  you  go  to,  this  evening? — Where  will  your 
brothers  go  to  ?— Why  do  you  go  to  town  ?— Will  you  go  with  me  ?— 
Must  I  sell  to  that  man  on  credit? — Has  he  already  deceived  (/rom- 
per) anybody ?— Must  I  trust  those  ladies?— Do  those  merchants 
trust  you?— Whom  do  those  gentlemen  laugh  at ?— Why  do  those 

1  Translate  could,  by:  j'ai  pu,  il  a  pu,  il  pouvait,  &c.  Would,  by:  j'ai 
voulu,  il  a  voulu,  je  voalais,  &c.,  when  they  refer  to  past  actions  instead  of 
future  ones.  ^  148—4.) 

2/  wish,  in  such  phrases  as,  I  wish  I  could,  I  might,  I  had,  &c.,  or  any 
other  imperfect  tense,  where  it  means,  I  should  like  to,  must  be  translated 
oy  :  Je  voudrai  pouvoir,  avoir,  &c.  When  I  wish,  does  not  mean,  I  should 
like  to,  but  merely,  1  want,  translate  it  by:  Jeveux,  &c.,  as:  /  wish  t  o  see  you, 
It,  veux  ou  desire  vous  voir. 


SIXTY-SECOND     LESSON.    (3.) 


327 


people  la. 


persons  who  speak  badiy  ? — What  are  you  laughing  at'? — How 
(dfptti  ing  it  so  large?  (grand.} 


Liugh  (faui-iL  .  / )  at 


IRE.     Sine  Sec. 


Ton,?  mall  bell. 

To  hzar  c.  >  • 
lie  must  £G. 
Where  HILT:  :-MC  go  ? 
Do  you  wish  him  to  be  good  or  not  ? 
I  wish  him  to   be  good,  and 
her  also  to  be  good. 

tailor's 

jrou. 

Full. 

\  book  full  of  errors. 

To  ajl 

Can  you  afford  to  buy  that  horse  ? 
I  can  afford  it. 
I  cannot  ailurd  it. 

bou< 

Is  it  1  It  is  not  he. 

Arc  they  your  brothers  ?  (473.) 

It  is  they.         It  is  not  they. 
Is  it  she  ? 
It  is  not  she. 

Are  they  your  sisters  ? 

It  is  they,  (fanin 
It  ia  not  they.  " 
It  is  I  who  speak. 

I§  it  they  who  laugh  ? 

It  is  you  who  laugh. 

}\  ie  thou  who  has  done  it. 


Conner,  1.  Une  cloche.  Une  chchftte. 
f  fan  tier.      Liitt'itdii  sonntr. 
II  faut  qu'i7  aille. 
Oii  f:iut-il  (\u\llc  a  I  Hi'  ? 
Voulez-vous  qu'i/  soit  bon  ou  nonf 
Jc  YCUX  qu'il  soil   bon,  et  je  veux 

'  bonne.  ($  151.) 

Ne  faut-il  pas(}u'*7«//  un  hal>it  neuf? 
11  iaut  (ju'i/  /  nioi  chcz  lo 

taii! 

'  u  // . 

Se  rirc 

18.  (54s. ', 

Vous  r  V.MIS 

moqn  •  nous?  (^  M7  —  l.l 

I'n  livre  plein  <; 

•re   in 
Cnitive.) 

votis  Ic3moycn,?d'ad 
che>-.  -  a  ai  les  moyene. 

n  ai  pas  lea  moyen.s. 

;^lll    ('St 

,  noud,  vous,  toi. 

Co  n'etit  pas  lui. 
Sont-ce  vo€  ir'jrcn  ?  or, 
Est-cc  quo  C3  sont  vos  frsres  ? 
Ce  sont  ei:^'.     Co  no  sont  pas  eux 
Est-cc  elle  ?  t.  elle. 

Ce  n'est  pas  el!c. 
Sont-ce  vos  sccurG  ?  or, 
Est-ce  quo  c-j  sr/nt  vos  sonurs  ? 
Ce  sont  clbs. 
Ce  ne  eont  paa  ellcs. 
C'cst  moi  qui  parle. 
Sont-ce  eux  (elles)  qui  rient  ?  or 
Est-ce  quo  cc  sont  eux  (ellee)  qai 

rient  ? 

C'est  vous  qui  riez. 
C'est  toi  qui  Tasfait. 


828  SIXTY-SECOND     LESSON.    (3.) 


It  is  you.  pen'l   .  ';?ivc  faicl  j  C'e-jt  vo 

ceii. 

.  J&TU  Frcnuh,  rry  brother  and  I.  j  t  Men  f  •  noni 

I         le  Fraii  rtf.ia. 

06*.  348.     The  uniting  pronoun  nous  or  tw««  must  be  placed  beficrs  • 
verb,  when  it  has  two  or  more  nominatives  of  different  '.  38.) 

You  and  I  will  go  into  the  country.       t  Voua  et  moi  r. 
You  and  he  will  stay  at  home. 
'J  n  for,  preceptor. 


pagne. 
t  Vous  et  lui  vouf  :  \  mai- 

Instituteur. 


SOLX  .'.ME.    3me 

N'a-t-on  pas  sonne  ?    Je  crois  quo  st,  (si  au  lieu  do  ;  es- 

cion  est  negative,  102,  065.  26.)  —  La  dome.-  a  la 

porte  1    Je  ne  I'ai  pas  entenduc.     II  faut  <:•.  'ia.  — 

Kile  n  'a  ;  ;  as  entendu  la  clochette. 

elle  qui  court?    Jc  presume  que  oui.    Oui,  « 
le  bonnet  de  Madame,     i 
\  ous  et  moi  nous  irons  si 
nr  vous  gronderait-il  BI  vous  nr 
devoir?     Non,  mais  il  serait 

'     II  ;  i  :  .   i'elle  le  soit  i  10i  heures.    A  qu» 
f;uit-ll  (]i:e  Charles  vienne?     II  faut  qu'il  viennc  un  (juart 
'.     La  voiture  sera-  >e?    Elle  sera 

-nous  pas  ausai  prendro  la  petite  Emilie  ? 

I  ;  elle  criera.  —  Est-ce  vous  qui  i 

•  •lie  au  nez  do  cet  Stranger?    De  qui  se  moque::;-!!-  .'  —  T 
voi>in  ne  se  moque-t-il  paa  do  vos  enfant  > 
la  nl  .'—  (  '•  'A  pas  fait  D 

—  Cr.  m'a  dit  que  ^  —  ,  vo 

grande  maisor*  de  E  -  au  coin  de  Hroadw: 

t-ce  vos  ?.:  .^nnent? 

Is  ii  ^o'/.r  ;-:si^r  who  is  playing  on  the  piano  ?     It  m 
(t7  fant  qus  ce  soit  die)  for  no  other  person  pi.  -  not 

hlu».  for  here  she  i  -  cr.i>iii.].. 

*.lu\v  vor  .rho  are  com:: 

libors  (fern.)  who  -ivcre  laughing  at  you?     They  are  not  oui 
iibors.  —  ^^  \v  ?     They  are  the  daughters  of  -the  cou 

rt-liOM1  brother  has  bought  your  house.  —  Are  they  the  ladies 
iKive  spoken  of  to  me?     They  are.  —  Shall  you  learn  German?    My 
brother  and  I  will  learn  it.  —  Shall  we  go  to  the  country,  to-morrow  ' 
I  shall  go  to  the  country,  and  you  will  remain  in  town.  —  Shall  my 
litter  and  I  goto  the  opera?     You  a:ul  she  will  remain  at  home, 


SIXTY-THIRD    LKSSO5.     (1.) 

Olid  your  brother  will  go  to  the  opera. — Wh;it  ilul  you 
'    I  said  IK 
y  task,  and  he  w 

<  ome  to  ii  r. 
me  back  the  books  whi  —  \Vho  ia 

-\  ho  hast  soiled  my 

.rt,  before  to-morrow  ? — (  learn 

o  not  go  to   I  Baltimore,  lint 

wet-r  I  ?— 

'  (et  vous?)1 — We  wish  we  \MMO 
-Does  she  not 


.'.Ml. 

IRE.    Ire  See. 
t  6" 


out  of  a  bad  $c 
it  of  the  scrape, 
man    always  gets    into    bad 
•crapes,  but  he  always  gets  out  of 

Between.  Be  long  us, 

among  acquaintances 

To  make  tome  one  t  acquaintance. 
To  tce+ma  ary •'•  >  »ne. 


affaire*. 

Jc  me  suis  tire  d'affaire. 
Cct  homme  s'attirc  toujoura  <:• 
vaiscs  affaires,   mais  il  h 

airs. 

Entre.    Entr'tMix.    KntrMIr.^ 
nous,  entre  connaissances.  1 
mis. 

>nnaiMiancc  avet  guel'j 

i  connaiitance  de  yiu  I-JH' nn* 


I  have  mode  his  or  her  acquaintance,  j 

I  have  become  acquaintt .:  \          fait  sa  connaiasanca. 

or  i 


i 
J 


»>  ' 

y  »-r  ?  j 


1  \\'<  have  seen,  (IS1,  Ob».  3d,)  that  n  cst-cc  pat  was  used  to  ask  a  n»  -Dative 
the  tame  perton  as  a  preceding  aflinmr 

r  not,  is  in  <;  ,"7t,usctha 

nrcd  personal  pronoun.     Don't  rout  9 

r  nous?  cux?  I  know  him  : 
i  ?—Docs  he  T  she  T  Peter,  &c.  : 
my  one?  must  1  .  i  Ic  connalt-il  ? 

know  is  nl  ways  expressed  by  connaitrc*  wh- 
H  acquainted  «cr  >      !>:.  Iknowtiiat* 

tnait  eet  hommc.  >  »y  l»-sson,  Jrtait  m* 

;  I  know  what  \ 


830 


SIXTY-THIRD     LESSON.      (1.) 


Jc  le  (la)  connais.     Jc  nc  la  cormais 

point. 

II  est  do  ma  connaissance. 
Elle  cst  de  ma  connaissance. 
Co  n'est  pas  un  ami,  ce  n'est  qu'une 

connaissance. 
Jouir,  2,  de. 

Jpuissez  vous  d'une  bonne  sante  ? 
(  Etre  Hen  portant,  portantc. 
(  &tre  en  "bonne  sante. 
r  f  Elle  est  bien  portante. 
3  t  Elle  se  porte  bien. 
/  f  Elle  est  en  bonne  sant«;. 
Jouit-elle  d'une  grande  fortune  \ 
Jouit-il  d'une  bonne  reputation? 
S^imagincr,  1. 
Nos  semblables. 
II  n'a  pas  son  semblid 
t  Ressembler,  1,  a  qudqifun.     (Mind 

the  ss  and  the  a.} 

Cet  homme  ressemble  a  mon  frerc. 
Cette  bicre  ressemblc  a,  do  1'cau. 
Nous  nous  ressemblons. 
Us  ou  ellcs  ne  se  ressemblent  pas. 
Est-il  temps  qua.  je  .  .  .  tu  . .  .  il .  .  . 

file  .  .  .  nous  .  .  .  vous  ...  ils  . .  . 

elles  . . .,  (govern  the  sub).  §  151.) 

Est-il  temps  que  nous  allions,  veni- 
ons,  ayons,  soyons  ?    II  est  temps 
que  nous  allions,  que  non- 
ons,  ayons,  soyons. 

SOIXANTE-TROISIEME  THEME.      Ire  Sec. 

Est-il  temps  que  nous  allions  a,  Washington  pour  TalTjiirc  dc  Fre- 
deric? Oui,  il  faut  que  nous  y  soyons  demain  on,  au  plus  tard, 
Mpivs-demain.  II  y  a  une  mauvaise  affaire ;  je  ne  sais  comment  il 
s'en  tirera.  Lui !  il  se  fait  sou  vent  de  mauvaises  affaires,  mais  il  s'en 
t i re tou jours.  C'estvrai,  ilesttres-heureux. — Ne jouit-elle  pasd'uno 
fortune  considerable?  Si  fait,  son  pere  lui  a  laisse  une  grande  for- 
tune, dont  elle  jouit,  et  dont  elle  fait  bon  usage.  Jouit-elle  d'une 
bonne  sant6?  Oui,  pour  une  personne  riche,  elle  jouit  d'une  tres- 
bonnc  .s:iute.  Sa  soeur  est-elle  bien  portante?  JSTon,  il  faut  qu'elle 
son  souvent  mo-lade,  car  elle  n'a  pas  bon  air. — Ce  monsieur,  n'est-il 
pas  une  de  vos  connaissances  ?  Lequel  ?  Celui  qui  est  entre  les 
deux  dames  en  jaune  ?  Non,  celui  qui  est  entre  la  table  et  la  fene- 
tre. — Kessemblez-vous  a  votre  soeur? — Vous  ressemble-t-elle  ? — A 
qui  ce  commis  ressemble4-il  ? — Mon  frdre  et  moi,  nous  ressemblons 


I  ;:IM — I  do.     I  am  not — I  do  not. 

He  is  an  acquaintance  of  mine. 
She  is  my  acquaintance. 
He  is  not  a  friend,  he  is  but  an  ac- 
quaintance. 
To  enjoy. 
Do  you  enjoy  good  health? 

To  be  well. 

She  is  well. 

Does  she  enjoy  a  great  fortune? 

Does  he  enjoy  a  good  reputation? 

To  imagine. 

Our  fellow  creatures. 

He  has  not  his  equal  or  his  match. 

To  resemble  some  one,  to  look  like 

some  one. 

That  man  resembles  my  brother. 
That  beer  looks  like  water. 
\Vc  rcM-mble  each  other. 
They  do  not  resemble  each  other. 
Is  it  time  t/tat  I ...  thou  .  .  . 

she  ...  \\ •  •  . 
Is  it  time  for  me ...  thec ...  him  ... 

her. . .  us,  &c.,  to  . .  ? 
I  s  i  1 1  imo  for  us  to  go,  come,  have,  be  ? 
It  is  time  for  us  to  go,  come,  have, 

be. 


SIXTY- THIRD     LESSON.    (2.) 


331 


nous?—  Cos  deux  sceurs  ne  se  ressemblent-elles  pas  ccmme  deux 
gouttcs  d:caUj  (2  drops  of  water?) — Pourquoi  cet  homme  s'enfuit-il 
comme  ca?  II  faut  qu'il  ait  fait  quelque  chose  de  mal.  ne  )e  croyez- 
vjns  pas? 

What  is  the  report  of  the  health-office,  to-day  \  i\\i  comitc  de 
ante?)  The  report  lias  increased  to-day. — How  many  cases  are 
there  7  53,  and  only  1 1  deaths.  We  must  hope  that  it  will  diminish 
§oon.  —  A  certain  (certain)  good-for-nothing  fellow  liked  brandy 
much,  but  he  found  in  it  (/MI)  two  bad  qualities,  (une  qualitc :)  "If 
I  put  water  to  it/7  said  he,  "  I  spoil  it;  and  if  I  do  not  put  any  to  it, 
it  spoils  me." — Does  your  cousin  resemble  you?  He  resembles  me. 
— Do  your  sisters  resemble  each  other?  They  do  not  resemble 
each  other;  for  the  elder  (Vainee)  is  idle  and  na:ighty,  and  tho 
younger  (la  cadcttc}  assiduous  and  good-natured  towards  everybody. 
— How  is  your  aunt?  >  .1. — Does  your  mother  enjoy 

good  health?  She  imagine  >>ys  (iinmpinc  jouir)  good 

.;h  ;  but  I  belie  \  ken,  for  she  has,  these  six  months, 

Had  a  cough,  of  which  (dont)  she  cannot  get  rid. 

Is  it  right  to  laugh  thus  at  everybody?  If  I  laugh  at  your  coat,  I 
do  not  laugh  at  everybody. — Does  your  son  resemble  any  one?  Ho 
resembles  no  one. — Why  do  you  not  drink?  I  do  not  know  what 
to  d; !  like  good  wine,  and  yours  looks  like  vinegar. — If  you 

wi>h  to  have  some  other,  I  shall  go  down  (dcsccndrc)  into  the  cellar 
nu  some. — You  are  too  polite,  Sir;  I  shall  drink  no  more 
to-day.— Have  you  known  my  father  long?  I  have  known  him 
.  for  I  made  his  acquaintance  when  1  was  yet  at  school.  We 
often  worked  for  one  another,  and  we  loved  each  other  liko 
b /others. — I  believe  it,  for  you  resemble  each  other. — When  I  had 
not  done  my  r  he  did  them  for  me;  and  when  he  had  not 

done  his,  I  did  them  fur  him. 

Ki'LAiuK.     2de  Sec. 


Each  other,  one  another.  Of  each 
other.  Without  one  another. 

The  brother  and  the  siste.*  love  each 
other. 

Are  you  pleased  with  each  other  ? 

We  are. 

As,  as  well  as  ;  as.  well  as  we  ;  they. 

Tha  nppearance,  the  countenance. 

To  show  a  disposition  to. 

That  man  whom  ycu  see  shows  a 
desire  to  approach  us. 

To  look  pleased  with  some  o*te. 


L'un  1'autre  I'une  1'autrc.  L'undo 
1'autre.  L' une  sans  1'autre. 

Le  frcre  ct  la  soeur  s'aiment  1'uu 

A  1'autre. 

Etf  s-vous  contents  Pun  de  1'aulre  ? 

Nous  le  soinmes. 

Ainsi  que  ;  ainsi  que  nous  ;  qu'ejx. 

La  mine. 

Faire  mine  de. 

Cette  homme  que  vous  voyez  tail 
mine  de  nous  approcher. 

Faire  bonne  mine  a  quelyu'un. 


SIXTY-THIRD    LESSON, 


To  Icok  cross  at  some  one. 

When  I  go  to  see  that  mar.,  instead 

of  receiving  me  with  pleasure,  he 

looks  displeased. 
A.  good-looking  man. 
A  bad-looking  man. 
Bad-looking  people,  or  folks. 
To  go  to  see  some  one. 

To  pay  some  one  a  visit. 

To  frequent  a  place. 

To  frequent  societies. 

To  associate  with  some  one. 

To  look  like,  to  appear.  < 

How  does  he  look  ? 

He  looks  gay,  (sad,  contented.) 

You  appear  very  well. 

You  look  like  a  doctor. 

She  seems   angry,  to   be  in   a  oad 

humor. 
They  look  pleased.     They  appear  to 

be  in  a  good  humor. 
To  look  good,  to  appear  to  be  good. 
To  drink  to  some  one. 
To  drink  some  one's  health. 
I  drink  your  health. 
It  is  all  over  with  me  !  her  !  them  . 

(fern.) 

It  is  all  over. 
It  is  better  for  me,  him,  you,  them, 

us,  thee  :  or  I,  he,  you,  we,  thou 

hadst  better .... 
It  is  better  for  me  to  do  it,  for  us  to 

do  it,  for  you  to  do  it.  (I  had  better 


Faire  mauvaise  mine  a  quelqu'un. 
Quand  je  vais  voir  cet  homme,  au  lion 

de  me  faire  bonne  mine,  il  me  fait 

mauvaise  mine. 
Un  homme  de  bonne  mine. 
Un  homme  de  mauvaise  mine. 
Des  gens  de  mauvaise  mine. 
Aller  voir  quelqu'un. 
Faire  unevisite>alw 
Rendre  visite     > 
Frequenter  un  lieu,  (endroit.) 
Frequenter  des  societes, 
t  Frequenter  quelqu'un. 
Avoir  Vair. 

Quelle  mine  a-t-il  ?    Quel  air  a-t-il  T 
II  a  1'air  enjoue,  (triste,  content.) 
Vous  avez  1'air  bien  portant. 
Vous  avez  1'air  d'un  me'decin. 
Elle  a  1'air  de  mauvaise  humeiir. 

Us  ont  Fair  content.        Us  ont  1'ak 

d'etre  de  bonne  humeur. 
Avoir  1'air  bon. 
t  Boire  a  quelqu'un. 
Boire  a  la  sante  de  quelqu  un. 
T  Je  bois  a  votre  santd. 
t  C'en    est    fait    do    moi !    J'ello  • 

d'elles ! 
t  C'en  est  fait, 
t  II  vaut  mieuxqueje,  il,  vous,  eliea, 

nous,  tu,  (must  be  followed  by  the 

subjunctive.) 
//  vaut  mieux  que  je  le  fasse,      nous 

le  fassions,         vous  le  fassiez. 


do  it,  &c.) 

JSOIXANTE-TROISIEME    Tn^ME.      2de  Sec. 

Pourquoi  freque  itez-vous  ces  gens-la?  Je  les  frequente  parce 
qu'ils  me  sont  utiles. — Si  vous  ne  cessez  de  les  frequenter,  vouj 
vous  attirerez  de  mauvaises  affaires,  car  ils  ont  beaucoup  (Penne- 
mis.  Vous  croyez?  Alors  je  ne  continuerai  plus  a  l3s  voir.  U 
vaut  mieux  que  vous  fassiez  ce  que  vous  dites.  Ces  gonsfont  mine 
de  nous  approcher.  Que  nous  veulent-ils  1  Le  leur.  demanderai-je  ] 
Oui,  faites-le.  Que  voulez-vous,  mes  amis  ?  Ils  ont  Pair  de  ne  paa 
m'entendre.  II  faut  qu'ils  soient  etrangers. — Quels  sont  ces  hornmos 
de  mauvaise  mine  qui  viennent  par  ici  ?  Si  ce  sont  des-  voleurs, 
c'on  est  fait  de  nous.  N'avez-vous  pas  peur? — Le  jeune  docteur  esi 
AD  homme  de  bonne  mine,  n'est-ce  pas'?— Qui  allez-vous  voir? — Si 


SIXTY-THIRD    LESSON.    (3.)  383 

rous  aviez  le  temps,  iriez-vous  rendre  visite  a  vos  cousines'? — Frc- 
quentez-vous  le  theatre  1 — Quels  endroits,  quels  lieux  frequentenU 
ils? — Ce  marchand  a  toujours  Pair  d'etre  de  mauvaise  humeur,  est-i? 
malade  ? 

Why  did  you  not  crme  to  dinner?  I  have  been  hindered.  I  am 
sorry  I  made  you  \vait.  (Je  suis  fdclie  de  . . . .)} — Until  what  time 
did  you  wait  ?  We  waited  for  you  till  a  quarter  past  four ;  and,  as 
you  did  not  come,  we  dined  without  you. — You  did  right.  I  wish 
I  had  (622,  N.  2)  sent  you  a  boy  to  inform  you  that  I  could  not  come; 
but  I  thought  J  could  come.1 — Never  mind;  did  you  drink  my 
health  ?  We  drank  yours  (d  la  votre)  and  that  of  your  parents. —  , 
How  does  your  uncle  look  ?  (quclle  mine  a  ....?)  He  looks  (a  Vair) 
very  gay,  (enjoue,)  for  he  is  much  pleased  with  his  children. — Do 
his  friends  look  (ont-ils  la  mine)  as  gay  as  he?  They,  on  the  ccn- 
trary,  look  sad,  because  they  are  discontented.  My  uncle  has  no 
money,  and  is  always  contented,  and  his  friends,  who  have  a  good 
deal  of  it,  are  scarcely  ever  so. 

Is  that  man  angry  with  you  ?  I  think  he  is  angry  with  me,  be- 
cause I  (de  ce  quc  jc)  do  not  go  to  see  him;  but  I  do  not  like  to  go  to 
his  house,  for  when  I  do,  instead  of  receiving  me  with  pleasure,  he 
looks  displeased. — You  must  not  believe  that;  he  is  not  angry  with 
you,  for  he  is  not  so  bad  (mechant)  as  he  looks,  (quil  en  a  Vair.)  He 
is  the  best  man  in  the  (du)  world ;  but  one  must  know  him  in  order 
to  appreciate  him,  (pour  pouvoir  Vapprecier.) — There  is  a  great  dif- 
ference (la  difference)  between  you  and  him,  (lui;)  you  look  pleased 
with  all  who  come  to  see  you,  and  he  looks  cross  at  those  who  call 
on  him,  (go  to  see  him.) 

VOCABULAIRE.     3me  Sec. 


To  please  (oblige)  some  one. 
You  oblige  (please)  her  much. 
To  hurt  some  one's  feelings, to  grieve. 
Have  you  hrrt  that  man's  feelings  ? 

I  did  not. 

You  grieve  me,  (hurt  my  feelings.) 
If  you  know  a  good  place  to  swim 

in,  oblige  me  by  showing  it  to  me. 


t  Faire  plaisir  a  quelqu'un. 
t  Vous  lui  faites  grand  plaisir. 
t  Faire  de  la  peine  a  quelqu'un. 
t  Avez-vous  fait  de  la  peine  a  cat 
homme  ?    Je  ne  lui  en  ai  pas  fait. 
t  Vous  me  faites  de  la  peine. 
Si  vous  connaissez  un  bon  endroit 

pour  nager,  faites -moi  le  plaisir  do 

me  le  montrer. 


1  When  the  same  nominative  I,  I,  he,  he,  &c.,  is  repeated  in  the  second 
member  of  a  compound  sentence,  as  :  I  am  sorry  /  have  made  you  wut ; 
the  French,  instead  of  the  second  nominative,  use  an  infinitive,  (with  or 
without  preposition.)  Thus,  instead  of  saying  :  Je  suis  fdche  que  je  vtui 
aifait  atteiidre  ;  they  say  :  Je  suis  fdche  de  vous  avoir  faif  attcndre.  (R.  3,.) 
(28*,  Obs.  65.) 


834 


SIXTY-THIRD     LESSON.    (3.) 


To  c&perience,  to  undergo. 

I  have   experienced  a  great  many 

misfortunes. 

To  suffer,   to  bear,  suffered,   suffer. 
Do  not  suffer  it. 

Dost  thou  sufler  ?     I  do.     He  suffers. 
To  feel  a  pain  in  one's  head,  foot. 
1  felt  a  pain  in  my  eye. 
To  neglect. 

Let  us  never  neglect  our  duty. 
We  must  yield  to  necessity. 
-T)  spring,  dart  forward. 
The  cat  springs  upon  the  rat. 
To  leap  on  horseback. 
An  increase,  an  augmentation. 
For  more  bad  luck. 
For  more  good  luck. 
For  more  bad  luck  I  have  lost  my 

purse. 

To  lose  one's  wits. 
That  man  has  lost  his  wits,  and  he 

does  not  know  what  to  do. 
Otetinatdy,  by  all  mni?is. 
That  man  wishes   by  all   means  to 

lend  me  his  money. 
To  follow. 

I  follow,  thou  folio  west,  lie  or  she 

follows,  people  follow. 
To  pursue. 


Kprouver,  1. 

J'ai  eprouve  beaucoup  de  malheufS 

Souffrir,*  2,         souffert,        souffre* 

Ne  le  souflrez  pas. 

SoufTres-tu?     Je  soufTre.     Ilsouflro 

t  Souffrir  de  la  tete,  du  pied. 

t  J'ai  soufTert  de  1'ceil. 

Negliger,  1,  (de,  av.  1'inf.  $144—2. 

Ne  ne'gligeons  jamais  notre  devoir. 

II  fcut  cdder  a  la  ne'cessite. 

t  S'elancer. 

Le  chat  s'elance  sur  le  rat. 

S'elancer  sur  son  chevaJ. 

Un  surcroit. 

Pour  surcroit  de  malheur. 

Pour  surcroit  de  bonheur. 

Pour  surcroit  de  malheur  j'ai  perdu 

ma  bourse. 
Perdre  la  tete. 

Cet  homme  a  perdu  la  tete,  et  il  ne 
v  sait  quo  fairc.  (G21,  Obs.  147.) 
A  tout e  force. 
Cet   homme   veut  a  toute  force  me 

prOter  son  argent. 
>'///< -re,*  4  ;  pres.  part,  suivant  ;  pa*l 

part,  suii-i. 
Je  suis,  tu  suis,  il  ou  elle  suit,  on 

suit. 
Poursuivre*  4,     (Is  conjugated  like 

ttctvre.) 
Conserver,  1. 


To  preserve    to  save. 

SoixANTE-TR)isi£ME  TH£ME.     3me  Sec. 

II  faut  quc  nous  nous  en  allions. — Pourquoi  faut-il  que  nous  nous 
en  allions'?  Je  n'aime  pas  la  mine  de  ces  gens-la.  Us  nous  suivent, 
je  crois.  Us  viennent  par  ici,  tournons  par-lii.  N'ayez  pas  peur 
tPeux/ — Quand  irons-nous  nager^  Nous  irions  a  present  merne,  si 
nous  pouvions  trouver  un  bon  endroit. — Qu'a-ce  petit  gar^on  ?  II 
soufTre  de  la  tete.  N'a-t-elle  pas  souffert  de  la  gorge  1 — Ne  faites- 
vous  pas  de  la  peine  a  votre  tanle? — Ne  font-ils  pas  de  la  peine  a 
leurs  parents'? — A  qui  cherchez-vous  a  faire  plaisir? — Si  j'allais  au 
theatre,  cela  ferait-il  plaisir  a  mon  oncle? — N7a-t-il  pas  fait  de  la 
peine  a  sa  belle -SGDUI  ? — Si  un  voleur  attaquait  (attacked)  M.  Ran- 
dolph, son  gros  chien  ne  s'elancerait-il  pas  sur  le  volear? — Ne  crie- 
t-elle  point,  parce  qu'il  faut  ceder  a  la  necessite  ? 

What  is  the  matter  with  you  ?     It  is  all  over  witli  me. — Why  dt 


SIXTY-FOURTH     LESSON.    ( 1 .)  335 

you  cry  thus?  Why  Jo  I  cry?  I  have  been  robbed  of  my  gold 
"ings,  (une  bague  d'or,)  my  best  clothes,  and  all  my  money;  that  ia 
ihe  reason  why  1  cry. — Do  not  make  (ne  faitcs  pas)  so  much  noise) 
Tor  it  is  we  who  have  taken  them  all.  (tout  cda:)  in  order  to  teach 
you  to  take  better  care  (avoir  plus  de  sow,  503)  cf  your  things, 
(affaires.)  and  to  shut  the  door  of  your  room  when  you  go  out. — 
Why  do  you  look  so  sad?  I  have  experienced  groat  misfortunes. 
After  having  lost  all  my  money,  I  was  beaten  by  bad-looking  men; 
and  to  my  still  greater  ill-luck,  I  hear  that  my  good  uncle,  whom  I 
love  so  much,  has  been  struck  with  apoplexy. — You  must  not  alliict 
yourself  (s-ajfliger)  so  much,  for  you  know  that  we  must  yield  to 
neces- 

Do  you  know  a  uood  place  to  swim  in  ?  I  know  one,  but  it  is 
rather  far.— Where  is  it?  If  you  will  go  with  me,  I  will  tell  you.— 
1  will  go  if  it  is  not  too  far.— On  that  side  (38!)  of  the  river,  behind 
the  wood,  (laforitj)  near  the  high  road,  (Ic  grand  chcmin.) — When 
*hau  ,111  ?  This  evening,  if  you  like. — Will  you  wait 

for  me  before  the  city  gate  ?  I  shall  wait  for  you  there ;  but  I  beg 
•  m  not  to  forget  it. — You  know  that  I  never  forget  my  promises. 
— Where  did  you  become  acquainted  with  that  lady?  I  became 
ainled  with  her  at  the  house  of  one  of  my  relations. — Why 
does  your  cousin  ask  me  for  (401)  money  and  books'?  Because  ho 
is  a  fool ;  of  me,  (car  d  moi,)  who  am  his  nearest  relation,  (son  plus 
prochc  parent.)  and  his  best  friend,  he  asks  nothing. — Can  you  get 
rid  of  that  man?  (o22).  I  cannot  get  rid  of  him,  for  he  will  a 
lutely  (d  toutc  force)  follow  me. — Has  he  not  lost  his  wits?  It  may 
be,  (ccla  sc  pent.)— What  does  he  ask  you  for?  He  wishes  to  sell 
me  a  ho:  -  I  do  not  want. 


SIXTY-FOURTH  LESSON,  64th.— Soixante-quatrieme  Lecon,  Mine 
VOCABULAIRE      Ire  Sec- 

Obs.  149.  How,  how  much,  how  many,  before  an  exclamation,  are  trans 
Jated  by  que.  Ex. 

How  good  you  are  !  J  Que  ™us  Otes  bon  ! 

(  Que  de  bonte  vous  avez ! 

How  fjolioh  he  is,  not  to  go  !  1   Qu'il  est  sot,  de  ne  pas  y  aller  \ 

Qls.  149i.  The  adjective  which  in  English  follows  how,  stands  in  French 
Mter  the  verb  :  and  M  hen  (±ue  is  followed  by  a  substantive,  dt  must  always 
precede  the  latter. 


336 


SIXTY-FOURTH    LESSON.    (I.) 


How  foolish  she  is  to  believe  him  ! 

How  rich  that  man  is ! 

How  handsome  that  woman  is ! 

How  much  kindness  you  have  for 
me  ! 

How  many  obligations  I  am  under  to 
you  ! 

To  be  under  obligations  to  some  one. 

I  am  under  many  obligations  to  him. 

How  many  people  ! 

How  happy  you  are  ! 

How  much  wealth  that  man  has  ! 

How  much  money  that  man  has 
spent  in  his  life  ! 

To  be  obliged  to  some  one  for  some- 
thing. 

To  be  indebted  to  some  one  for  some- 
thing. 

I  am  indebted  to  him  for  it. 

To  thank. 

To  thank  one  for  something. 


Qu'elle  est  sotte  de  le  croirc  ! 
Que  cet  homme  est  riche  ! 
Que  cette  femme  est  belle  ! 
Que  de  bonte  vous  avez  pour  moi ! 

t  Que  d'obligations  je  vous  ai ! 

t  Avoir  des  obligations  a  quelqu'un. 

t  Je  lui  ai  beaucoup  d'obligations. 

Que  de  monde  ! 

Que  vous  etes  heureux ! 

Que  de  richesses  cet  homme  a  ! 

Que  d'argent  cet  homme  a  depenstf 
dans  sa  vie ! 

Etre  oblige  a  quelqu'un  de  quelque 

A chose. 

Etre  redevable  a  quelqu'un  de  quel- 
que chose. 

Je  lui  en  suis  redevable. 

Eemercier,  1,  (has  no  prepos.  before 
the  pers.  but  de  before  the  object.) 

Remercier  quelqu'un  de  quelque 
chose. 

Voulez-vous  me  passer  cet  e'ventail  ? 

Ayez  la  bonte  de  me 

Faites-moi  le  plaisir  de  me 

Vous  prierai-je  de  me 

Veuillez  (imper.)  me 

Obs.  150.  Never  use  remercier  before  the  performance  of  the  action,  but 
one  of  the  opposite  phrases,  or  any  of  similar  import. 

I  thank  you  for  the  trouble  yov  have  I  Je  vous  remercie  de  la  pcine  que 
taken  for  me.  vous  avez  prise  pour  moi. 

SOIXANTE-QUATRIEME  TH£ME.     Ire  Sec. 

Que  ce  petit  garcon  est  sot  de  crier  comme  cela !  Que  vous  etes 
impoli  de  1'appeler  sot!  Et  vous,  que  vous  etes  impertinent  de 
m/appeler  impoli ! — Vous  a-t-il  repondu  ainsi,  lui  qui  vous  a  tant 
d'obligations !  II  est  riche,  et  il  a  oublie  toutes  les  obligations  qu'il 
m'a. — Qui  n'a  point  d'obligations  a  ses  semblables! — Nous  nous 
devoris  des  secours  les  uns  aux  autres. — C'est  vrai.  Quel  est  ce 
jeune  homme  en  habit  bleu  ?  C'est  le  neveu  d'un  de  nos  premiers 
marchands.  Que  d'argent  ce  neveu  a  depense !  Que  Madame 
Lewis  est  belle  !  n'est-ce  pas?  Et  qu'elle  est  aimable  !  Quelqu'un 
vous  a-t-il  remercie  des  dons  que  vous  nous  avez  faits?  Cela  n'en 
vaut  pas  la  peine.  Faites-moi  le  plaisir  (I  will  thank  you)  de  rre 
tes  montrer. — Volontiers.  Montons  dans  la  chambre  de  Levant- 


1  will  thank  you  for  that  fan,  or 
Shall  I  thank  you  for  that  fan  ? 


SIXTY-FOURTH     LESSON.    (2.)  337 

nous  les  y  trouverons.  -Veuillez  raraasser  ma  plume  d'acier,  (Fll 
thank  you  to. . . .)  La  voici.  Je  vous  remercie.  De  rien.  A  qui 
cet  offieier  est-il  redevable  de  sa  compagnic,  (company.)  II  en  est 
redevable  a  son  oncle,  le  general. — X  qui  est-il  redevable  de  sa 
place?  (situation?) 

How  many  people  there  were  at  the  ball !  Then  you  enjoyed 
yourself  (s'amuser)  a  good  deal;  I  presume  1  No,  not  at  all.  Why 
so  ?  There  was  there  such  a  multitude,  that  one  could  hardly  get 
iu.  How  many  invitations  they  must  have  sent !  Could  you 
dance?  (N.  622.)  No,  there  was  not  room  (place)  enough. — I 
bring  you  a  pretty  present,  with  which  you  will  be  much  pleased,  I 
hope.  How  good  you  are!  What  is  it?  A  silk  cravat.  How 
many  obligations  I  owe  you!  Where  is  it?  I  have  got  :t  in  my 
coat-pocket.  Here  it  is,  in  this  paper.  Shall  I  open  it?  Yes,  open 
it.  Now  I  see  the  cravat.  How  beautiful  it  is!  Does  it  please 
you?  It  pleases  me  much,  and  I  thank  you  for  it,  with  all  my 
heart.  I  hope  you  will  at  last  accept  (accepter)  something  from 
rne.  What  do  you  intend  to  give  me  ?  I  will  not  tell  you,  for  if  I 
did,  you  would  have  no  pleasure  when  I  should  give  it  to  you. 

Where  do  you  wish  me  to  go  for  you?  Where  do  I  want  you  to 
For  me  ?  It  is  rather  far. — No  matter,  (n'importe,)  I  am  so  much 
indebted  to  you,  that  I  will  go  wherever  (oil)  you  please.  (4G3,  Obs. 
107.) — How  kind  you  are!  Not  more  than  you,  (pas  plus.) — Ho\v 
foolish  Clarissa  i<.  to  stay  at  home  when  she  could  go  travelling! 
she  is  almost  too  old,  but  say  how  foolish  she  was  not  to  go 
1  .">  years  ago,  when  she  could  have  gone  !  With  whom  could  she 
have  gone  15  years  ago  ?  With  her  cousin's  family,  from  Virginia, 
(laVirginie.) — Had  she  lost  her  wits?  Perhaps,  or  perhaps  her 
heart. — Make  haste;  you  and  I  must  be  at  home  in  a  quarter  of  an 
hour.  Come,  then;  I  am  ready.  I  am  not,  (pas  moi:)  for,  before 
I  go  away,  I  must  have  my  pencils. — Here  they  are.  I  am  much 
obliged,  and  under  many  obligations  to  you. 

VOCABULAIRE.     iide  Sec. 


]  Io \v  large  ?  Of  what  size  is  the  dog  ? 
I  low  high?  Oi  what  height  is  the  tree  ? 
How  deep?  Of  what  depth  is  iliepond? 


De  quelle  grandeur  est  le  chien  ? 
De  quelle  hauteur  ...  est  1'arbre  ? 
De  quelle  profondeur  ...  est  \'elang  ? 


Ols.  150i.  When  speaking  of  dimensions,  the  English  use  the  verb 
tf  be,  while  the  French  use  avoir,  with  the  preposition  de  before  the  noun 
or  adjective  of  dimensions. — How  thick  is  this  1  Combien  ceci  a-t-il  d'epais- 
tr/r  f1 

1  In  general,  the  substantive  is  more  elegantly  used  than  the  adjective 
but  deep  cannot  be  expressed  by  de  profo?id,  nor  thick  by  d'e-pais. 
29 


338 


SIXTY-FOURTH     LESSON.    (2.) 


How  high  is  his  or  her  ho  ise  ? 
It  is  nearly  fifty  feet  high. 
Our  house  is  thirty  feet  broad. 
That  table  is  six  feet  long. 
Thai  river  is  twenty  feet  deep. 

The  size.    What  is  your  size  ?  how 

tall . . . 

i  am  5  feet  9  inches. 
Of  what  size  is  that  man  ? 
He  is  but  5  feet  1  inch. 
How  was  that  child  dressed  ? 
It  was  dressed  in  green. 
The  man  with  the  blue  coat. 
The  woman  with  the  red  gown. 
Is  it  true  that  his  house  is  burnt  ? 
It  is  true  ;  it  is  but  too  true. 
Is  it  not,  (or  is  it  not  true  ?) 
1  shall  perhaps  go  there  ;  but  not  he. 


t  Combien   sa    maison  a-t-ello    de 

haut  ou  de  hauteur  ? 
t  Elle  a  environ  cinquante  pieda  do 

haut  ou  de  hauteur, 
t  Notre  maison  a  trente  picds  do 

large  ou  de  largeur. 
t  Cette  table  a  six  pieds  dc  long  ou 

de  longueur, 
t  Cette  riviere  a  vingt  pieds  de  pro- 

fondeur.1 
La  taille.        Quelle  est  votre  taille  I 

t  J'ai  5  pieds  9  pouces. 
De  quelle  taille  cet  homme  est-il  ? 
t  II  n'a  que  5  pieds  1  pouce. 
Comment  cet  enfant  etait-il  habilld  ? 
t  II  dtait  habille  de  (ou  en)  vert, 
t  L'homme  a  1'habit  bleu, 
t  La  femme  a  la  robe  rouge. 
Est-il  vrai  que  sa  maison  est  brfileo  1 
C'est  vrai,  ce  n'est  que  trop  vrai. 
N'est  ce  pas,  (n'cst-il  pas  vrai?) 
J'irai  peut-etre  ;  mais  il  n'ira  pas. 


Obs.  151. 
of:  aller. 


Y  (there),  must  not  be  used  before  the  future  and  condition^ 


To  share,  to  divide. 

Whose  horse  is  this  ?  It  is  mine.  (292.) 

It  is  my  horse.  It  is  mine.  ($  38,  N.  3.) 

It  is  mine,  or  it  belongs  to  me. 

Whose  horses  are  these  ? 

Are  these  gloves  yours  ? 

They  are   mine,  or  they  belong   to 

me. 

Whose  house  is  that  ? 
It  is  mine,  or  it  belongs  to  me. 
Whose  houses  are  these  ? 
They  are  mine,  or  they  belong  to 

me. 

It  is  not  your  purse  :  is  it  ? 
These  are  not  your  notes :  are  they  ? 
No,  they  are  not. 


cr,  1. 

X  qui  est  ce  cheval  ?       II  est  a  moi. 
C'est  mon  cheval.       C'est  le  mien. 
C'est  le  mien,  ou  il  est  a  moi. 
A  qui  sont  ces  chevaux  ? 
Ces  gants  sont-ils  a  vous  ? 
Ce  sont  lea  miens,  ou  Us  sont  a  moi 

(47s.   06s.  110.) 
A  qui  est  cette  maison  ? 
C'est  la  mienne,  ou  elle  est  a  moi. 
A  qui  sont  ces  maisons  ? 
Ce  sont  les  miennes,  ou  elles  sont  B 

moi. 

Est-ce  que  c*  est 2  votre  bourse? 
Est-ce  que  ce  sont2  vos  billets  ? 
Non,  ce  ne  les  sont  pas.  ($  39 — 3.) 


1  Sec  note  on  page  337. 

2  When  a  simple  interrogation  is  used  after  a  negation,  as :  You  have  not 
my  ring,  hive  t,ow  ?     The  French  merely  use  the  interrogative  form  :  Eai-ce 
ft*«. . .  as:  Est-ce  que  vous  ave-z  ma  lague  ?    You  may  use  :  Avez-vous  ma 
lague  f  but  the  other  corresponds  better  with  the  doubt  which  the  English 
mode  seems  to  con  /ey. 


SIXTY-FOURTH     LESSON.    (2.)  339 

SoiXAXTE-QUATRlfeME    Tu&ME.      2de  Sec. 

Avex-vous  vu  la  nouvelle  maison  de  Fa"ocat?  Oui.  je  I'm  vue, 
•  ms,  ne  i:avez-vous  pas  encore  visitee?  Non,  il  faut  quo  j'aillo 
!a  voir  bientot.  II  vaut  mieux  que  vous  alliez  en  voir  la  grandeur, 
Combien  a-t-elle  de  hauteur  ?  Elle  a  au  vwins  56  pieds  de  hauteur. 
— Combien  de  largeur  a-t-elle  ?  Elle  j^  laissex-moi  voir,  les  deux 
salons  ont  chacun  18  pieds  de  largeur  et  le  vestibule  a  peu  pres  8,co 
qui  fait  44  pieds.  et  IVpaisseur  (the  thickness)  des  murs  a  pen  pres  4 
autres  pieds.  Alors  le  tout  fait  de  48  a  50  pieds  de  largeur,  n?est-ce- 
pas?  C'est  une  grande  maison  pour  un  petit  homme.  Quelle  est 
Ba  taille  ?  II  a  environ  5  pieds  3  pouces;  car  j'ai  au  moins  6  pouces 
dt»  plus  que  lui.  Votre  Ills  n?est-il  pas  grand  ?  Si  fait,  il  a  plus  de  0 
pieds. — A  qui  sont  ces  deux  beaux  chevaux  nbirs?  Ah  !  qu'ils  sont 
beaux  !  Ce  sont  ceux  du  ministrc  Americain.  N'est-ce  pas  le  Mon- 
Fieur  a  1'habit  noir,  au  gilet  blanc,  et  a  la  i  en  maxarin? — 

Combien  cette  riviere  a-t-elle  de  profondeur? — Combien  cette  table 
d'acajou  a-t-elle  de  hauteur  ?  N'est-il  pas  temps  que  nous  ullions  vuir 
le  pont-neuf  ? 

o  houses  are  t:.  T  are  mine. — Do  these  pens  belong 

to  you?  No,  they  belong  to  my  sister. — Are  those  (sont-ce  Id)  the 
pens  with  which  she  writes  so  well?  They  are  the  same. — Whose 
gun  is  this?  It  is  my  father's. — Are  these  books  your  sister's ?  They 
are  hers. — Whose  carriage  is  this  ?  It  is  mine. — Which  is  the  man 
of  whom  you  complain  ?  It  is  he  (celui)  who  wears  a  red  coat. — 
:e  they  dressed?  Some  were  dressed  in  blue,  some  in 
green,  some  in  yellow,  and  several  in  red. — Who  are  those  men  ? 
The  one  who  is  dressed  in  gray  is  my  neighbor,  and  the  man  with 
the  black  coat  the  physician  whose  son  has  given  my  neighbor  a 
blow  with  a  stick. — Who  is  the  man  with  the  green  coat?  He  is  one 
of  my  relations. — Are  there  many  philosophers  in  your  country? 
There  are  as  many  there  as  in  yours. — How  does  this  hat  fit  me  ?  It 
fits  you  very  well. — How  does  that  coat  fit  your  brother?  It  fits  him 
admirably. — Is  your  brother  as  tall  (grand)  as  you  ?  He  is  taller 
ihan  I,  but  I  am  older  (age)  than  he. — Of  what  size  (de  quclle  taille) 
is  that  man  ?  He  is  five  feet  four  inches  (un  pouce)  high. — How  high 
is  the  house  of  our  landlord?  It  is  sixty  feet  high. — Is  your  well 
deep  ?  Yes,  Sir,  for  it  is  fifty  feet  deep. — "There  are  many  learned 
men  (un  savant)  in  Rome,  are  there  not,  (n'est-ce  pas  ?;;)  Milton  asko  j 
a  Roman.  "Not  so  many  as  when  you  were  there,"  answered 
(repondit)  the  "Roman. 

VOCABULAIRE.     3me  Sec. 

T\)  mm  up,     run  up,  p.  p  ,       run  vp  i    Accourir,*  2,  account6,  accourczvite, 
tjutch.  \     (con jug u£  commc  Courir.}  ('10s,  48'.) 


34:0 


SIXTY-FOURTH     LESSON.    (3.) 


Many  men  had  run  up  ;  but  instead  of 
extinguishing  the  fire,  the  wretches 
set  to  plundering. 

To  run  to  the  assistance  of  some  one. 

To  save,  to  deliver  from  da?iger. 

To  save  anybody's  life. 

To  plunder,  (to  rob.)       The  pillage. 

To  set  about  something. 

Have  they  succeeded  in  extinguish- 
ing the  fire  ? 

They  have  succeeded  in  it. 

The  watch  indicates  the  hours. 

To  indicate,  to  mark. 

To  Quarrel. 

To  quarrel  with  one. 

To  dispute  (to  contend)  about  some- 
thing. 

What  are  those  officers  disputing 
about  ? 

They  are  disputing  about  who  shall 
go  first  to  the  attack. 

To  be  ignorant  of  something,  or 

Not  to  know  something. 

The  eve,  the  day  before. 

The  day  before  that  day  was  Satur- 
day. 

The  daybefore  Sunday  is  Saturday. 

What  day  comes  before  Sunday  ? 

/*  it  time  for  me  to  take  ?  It  is  time 
that  you  should  take,  we  should  take. 

Although  1  can,  thou  canst,  he  can. 

We  can  or  may,  you  can  or  may,  they 

may. 

For  the  formation  of  the  subjunctive 
To  cu»e,  heal.       To  cure  one's  self,  j 


Eeaucoup  d'hommes  etaiem  accou 
rus,  mais  au  lieud'eteindre  le  feu 
les  misembles  s'etaient  mis  a  piller 

Accourir,*  2,  au  secours  (a  1'assist 
ance,  a  1'aide)  de  quelqu'un, 

Sauver,  1,  du  danger. 

Sauver  la  vie  a  quelqu'un. 

Piller,  1.  Le  pillage. 

t  Se  mettre*  u  quelque  chose. 

Est-on  parvenu  a  eteindre^e  feu  ? 

On  y  est  parvenu. 

La  montre  marque  les  heures. 

Marquer,  1  ;  indiquer,  1 

Se  quereller,  1. 

t  Quereller  quelqu'un. 

Disputer  sur  quelque  chose. 

Sur  quoi  ces  ojjiciers  dis;utent-ils  f 

t  Ils  disputent  a  qui  ira  le  premier  a 
1'attaque. 

Ignorcr,  1,  quelque  chose,  (no prep.) 

La  veille,  (de  avant  le  nom  qui  suit.) 
t  La  veille  de  ce  jour-la  etait   un 

samedi. 

t  La  veille  de  dimanche  est  samedi. 
Quelle  est  la  veille  de  dimanche  ? 
Est-il  temps  queje  prennc  ?      II  eat 

temps  quc  vous  premez — que  noua 

prenions. 
Quoiqueje  puisse,      tu  puisses,      il 

puisse. 
Nous  puissions,   vous  puissiez,    ila 

puissent.. 

present,  see  ($  151.) 
Guerir,  2.  Seguerir.  Guerissez-voua. 

SOIXANTE-QUATRIEME    TH^ME.       3me    Sec. 

Est-il  viai  que  votre  oncle  soit  arrive  ?  Quoiqu'on  m'ait  dit  qu'il 
est  arrive,  je  ne  le  crois  pas?  je  vous  assure. — Le  ministre  vous  a-t-il 
assure  ce  son  assistance  ?  Oui,  je  vous  assure  que  c'est  vrai. — N?est-ii 
pas  temps  que  nous  prenions  le  the  ?  Si  fait,  il  est  temps  que  nous 
le  prenions. — Irez-vous  a  Passemblee  ?  Quoique  je  puisse  y  aller, 
je  n'irai  pas?  parce  que  m^a  mere  ne  desire  pas  que  j'y  aille. — Com- 
ment se  trouve  Emma  aajourd'hui?  Quoiqu^lle  soit  mieux,  elle 
n'est  pas  encore  bien.  Sort-elle?  Oui;  qucdqu'olle  ne  soit  paa 


SIXTY-FIFTH      LESSON.      (1.)  3-41 

guerie,  elle  sort. — Se  querellent-ils  toujours  ?  Us  se  querellent , 
mais  il  est  temps  qu'ils  soient  amis. — Sur  quoi  disputez-vous?  Nous 
disputons  sur  le  rapport  du  comite  de  same.  Disputerez-vous  tou- 
jours? Pourquoi  ne  disputerions-nous  pas? — Ne  vous  a-t-elle  pas 
sauve  d'un  grand  danger? — L'attaque  a-t-elle  eu  lieu? — A-t-elle 
reussi? — Ou  etiez-vous  la  veille  de  ce  jour-la? — Ignoriez-vous  le 
mariage  de  M.  Francois? — Quelle  est  la  veille  de  lundi? — Quells 
est  la  veille  du  douze?  N'entendez-vous  pas  crier  au  feu!  (fire!) 
au  feu  ! — A-t-on  sauve  la  maison? — A-t-on  pu  sauver  Pecurie? — Si 
I'on  avait  eu  plus  d'eau,  la  maison  aurait-elle  brule  ? 

•*  What  is  the  difference  (la  difference)  between  a  watch  and  me  ?" 
inquired  (demanda)  a  lady  of  a  young  officer. — "My  lady,;;  replied 
he,  "a  watch  marks  the  hours,  and,  near  (auprcs  de)  you,  one  for- 
gets them/'7 — How  many  obligations  I  am  under  to  you,  my  dear 
friend  !  You  have  saved  my  life  !  without  you  I  should  have  been 
lost. — Have  those  miserable  men  hurt  you  ?  They  have  beaten  and 
robbed  me,  and  when  you  ran  to  my  assistance  they  were  about  to 
(Us  allaicnt}  strip  (deshalillcr)  and  kill  me. — I  am  happy  to  have 
delivered  you  from  the  (dcs)  hands  of  those  robbers. — How  good 
you  are  !  I  shall  always  be  indebted  to  you  for  it ! — It  is  not  worth 
mentioning,  (speaking  about  it.) 

Why  are  those  officers  quarreling?  They  are  quarreling  because 
they  do  not  know  what  to  do. — Have  they  succeeded  in  extinguish- 
ing the  fire  ?  They  have  at  last  succeeded  in  it;  but  it  is  said  (on 
dit)  that  several  houses  have  been  burnt. — Have  they  not  been  able 
to  save  anything?  They  have  not  been  able  to  save  anything;  for, 
instead  of  extinguishing  the  fire,  the  miserable  wretches  (les  misc- 
rablcs)  who  had  come  up,  set  to  plundering. — What  has  happened  * 
A  great  misfortune  has  happened. — Why  did  my  friends  set  out 
without  me  ?  They  waited  for  you  till  twelve  o'clock,  and  seeing 
that  you  did  not  come,  they  set  out. — What  is  the  day  before  Mon- 
day called  ?  The  day  before  Monday  is  Sunday. — Why  did  you  not 
run  to  the  assistance  of  your  neighbor  whose  house  has  been  burnt? 
I  was  quite  (entiercment)  ignorant  of  his  house  being  on  fire,  (que  k 
feu  fut  a  sa  maison ;)  for,  had  I  known  it,  I  would  have  run  to  his 
assistance. 


SIXTY-FIFTH  LESSON,  65ih.—Soixante-cinquiemc  Lecon, 

VOCABULAIRE,  Ire  JSec. 

To  propose.  I  Se  proposer,  I,  (de  before  inhn.) 

I  propose  going  on  that  journey.         |  Je  me  propose  de  faire  ce  voyage 


342 


SIXTY-FIFTH     LESSON.    (1.) 


lie  proposes  joining  a  hunting  party. 

To  play  a  game  at  chess, 

A.  game  at  billiards. 

A.  game  at  cards. 

A.  party,  a  soiree  ;   a  musical  party. 

To  succeed. 

Do  you  succeed  in  doing  that  ? 

I  do  succeed  in  it. 

jib  crxleavor. 

I  endeavor  to  do  it. 

I  endeavor  to  succeed  in  it. 

Endeavor  to  do  better. 

Since,  seeing,  considering  that. 

Since,  you  are  happy,  why  do  you 
complain  ? 

To  be  thoroughly  acquainted  with  a 
thing. 

To  make  one's  self  thoroughly  ac- 
quainted with  a  thing. 

That  man  understands  that  business 
perfectly. 

I  understand  that  well. 

Since  or  from.  From  that  time. 

From  my  childhood. 

From  morning  until  evening. 

From  the  beginning  to  the  end. 

From  here  to  there. 
To  blow,  to  blow  out.    Strongly,  hard. 
East,  the  east,  to  the  east,  east  wind. 
The  north,  to  the  north,  the  north 

wind. 

The  west,  to  the  west,  the  west  wind 
The  south,  to  the  south,  the  south 

wind. 

The  north-west.        The  south-east. 
To  encourage.  To  unroot,  pull. 


II  se  propose  d'allcr  a  .me  partio  da 

chasse. 

t  Faire  une  partie  d'echcca. 
Une  partie  de  billard. 
Une  partie  de  cartes. 
Une  partie,  cu  soiree ;    tine  soirk 

musicale. 

Reussir,  2,  (d  before  infin.) 
Reussissez-vous  a  faire  ccla  ? 
J'y  reussis. 

Tdcher,  1,  (de  before  infin.) 
Je  tache  de  le  faire. 
Je  tache  d'y  reussir. 
Tachez  de  faire  mieux. 
Puisque. 
Puisque  rous  etes  heureux,  pourqitol 

vous  plaigncz-vous  ? 
Etre  aufait  de  quclquc  chose. 

Sc  metlre  an  fait  de  quelque  chose. 

Get  homme  cst  a».i  fait  de  celte  af' 

faire. 

Je  suis  au  fait  de  cela. 
Depuis.  Depuis  ce  moment-la. 

Depuis  ma  jeunesse. 
Depnis  le  matin  jusqu'au  soir. 
Depuis  le  commencement  jusqu'a  la 

fin. 

Depuis  ici  jusque  la. 
S-ovjJlcr,  1.  Fort. 

Est,  i'estr  a  Test,  le  vent  d'est. 
Le  nord,  au  nord,  le  vent  de  nord. 

L'ouest,  a  Touest,  le  vent  d'ouest. 
Le  sud,  au  sud,  le  vent  de  sud. 


Le  nord-ouest.          Le  sud-est. 
Encourager,    1.     ($144 — 2.)     Dera 
ciner,  1. 

SOIXANTE-CINQUI^ME    Tn^ME.   Ire    Sec. 

Vous  proposez-vous  de  faire  un  petit  voyage  cet  ete  ?  Je  me  pro- 
pose de  faire  "jn  petit  tour.  N7est-il  pas  temps  que  vous  partiez  ? 
(§151.)  Je  me  propose  de  le  faire  dans  quelques  jours.  Si  vous 
n'etes  pas  occupe,  ailons  faire  une  partie  de  billard.  II  y  a  si  long- 
temps  que  je  n'ai  jorje  au  billard,  que  vous  n'auriez  aucun  plaisir  a 
faire  une  partie  avec  moi;  mais  si  vous  aimez  les  echecs,  j'en  ferai 
une  partie  avec  vous.  J'aime  les  echecs  le  soir  quand  on  est  trail 


SIXTY-FIFTH     LESSON.     (1.)  343 

rjiiilie  — Mais  ne  faut-il  pas  que  nous  allions  nous  preparer  pour  la 
soiree  de  Madams  Rush?  Quoiqu?elle  m'ait  fait  1'honnenr  de  m'tn- 
viter,  (to  invite  me.)  je  ne  pourrai  pas  y  aller.  Tachez  d'y  venir. 
Puisque  vous  le  desire/,  je  tacherai  d'y  aller.  Y  jouera-t-on  aux 
cartes  ?  II  y  a  toujours  une  partie  de  cartes. — Ce  jeune  Irlandais  est-~~ 
il  au  fait? — Votre  scrvante  est-elle  au  fait  de  son  devoir? — Ce  com- 
mia  est  au  fait,  n'est-ce  pas? — Vous  dites  que  votre  cousine  est 
toujours  de  bonne  humeur,  pourquoi  done  se  plaint-elle  du  matia 
jusqu'au  soir7 — Quant  a  la  danse,  il  est  au  fait,  n7est-ce  pas? — Est- 
ce  qu'il  s'est  bien  conduit  depuis  sa  jeunesse?  (642,  N.  2.) — Quel 
bruit  est  cela  ?  N'est-ce  pas  le  vent  qui  souffle  ?  Oh !  Comme  il 
souffle /or£  /  Est-ce  que  c'est  un  vent  d'ouest  ou  ie  nord? 

The  wind  has  been  blowing  ($145)  from  the  east  these  (dcpuis] 
three  or  four  days,  are  you  not  astonished  that  we  have  no  rain  ?  (subj. 
$151.)  Yes,  I  am;  for  when  the  wind  blows  from  the  east,  we 
generally  have  rain. — Is  your  west  wind  warm  or  cold?  The  w- 
wind  is  not  very  cold,  but  the  north  and  the  north-we«t  winds  are 
usually  strong  and  very  cold. — Are  they  not  cool  in  summer?  Yes, 
they  are. — I  presume  your  south  wind  is  warm,  is  it  not?  It  is  our 
warmest  wind. — And  the  south-west  ?  That  is  pleasant. — Does  the 
wind  blow  hard  here  ?  It  sometimes  blows  hard  enough  to  unroot 
trees,  (deracincr  dcs  arbres.) — If  Miss  Clara  is  at  Mrs.  M.7s  party, 
will  you  present  me  to  her  ?  I  will,  with  pleasure. — Have  you  been 
long  acquainted  with  her?  I  have  known  her  these  2  years. — Does 
she  understand  the  figures  of  quadrilles?  (Est-elle  au  fait  des  figures 
des  quadrilles  ?)  She  knows  them  very  well,  or  understands  them 
perfectly,  do  you?  (642,  N.  2.) 

Who  won  the  game  of  chess  ?  I  endeavored  to  do  it,  but  I  could 
not  (622,  N.  1.) — Your  cousins  frequently  play  chess,  do  they  not? 
No,  they  more  frequently  play  billiards  or  cards. — I  wish  I  could 
translate  my  exercises  without  mistakes ;  but,  although  I  try  to  do 
it,  I  cannot  succeed.  Try  again.  It  is  the  only  means  to  succeed. 
Since  you  encourage  me,  I  will  continue. — If  she  was  not  unhappy, 
would  she  complain?  There  are  people  who  always  complain. — 
Why  are  you  without  a  light?  The  wind  blew  it  out  when  you 
came  in. — What  does  your  French  master  make  you  do?  He 
makes  me  read  a  lesson ;  afterwards  he  makes  me  translate  English 
exercises  into  French  on  the  lesson  which  he  made  me  read;  and 
from  the  beginning  to  the  end  of  the  lesson  he  speaks  French  to 
n?,  and  I  have  to  answer  him  (il  me  faut  lui  repondre)  in  the  very 
iatguage  (dans  la  langue  mime)  which  he  is  teaching  me. — Have 
you  already  learned  much  in  that  manner  ?  You  see  that  I  have 
ilready  learned  something. 


3-14 


SIXTY-FIFTH     LESSON.    (2.) 


VOCABULAIRE.       2de  Sec. 


To  reduce,  abate,     reduced.     Reduce. 
Dost   thou  reduce  ?     I  reduce,  she 

reduces. 

Tc  translate,  translated.    Translate. 
Tc  introduce,  to  present. 

TJ  induce  the  price. 
Reduce  the  price  a  crown. 
To  translate  into  French. 
Shall  I  translate  French  into  English  ? 
Translate   from   one   language   into 
another. 

I  introduce  him  to  you. 

1  introduce  you  to  him,  her. 

He  will  present  us  to  them. 

He  himself  has  told  it  me. 

lie  has  told  it  me,  to  myself,  (not  to 

another  person.) 
One  does  not  like  to  flatter  one's  self. 


Reduire,*  4, 
Reduis-tu  ? 


rcdut. 
Je  reduis,  elle  reduit 


Traduire,*  4.     Traduit.     Traduisex 
Introduire*  4,    (as    reuiiire.)     Prf 

senter,  1. 
Reduire  le  prix. 
Reduisez  le  prix  d'un  ecu. 
Traduire  en  Fran§ais. 
Traduirai-je  du  Fran$ais  en  Anglr»ii>? 
Traduisez  d'une   languc   dans   une 

autre. 

Je  1'introduis  chez  vou.s. 
t  Je  vous  le  presente. 
t  Je  vous  presente  a  lui,  a  cllc. 
t  II  nous  prcsentera  a  eux,  a  elles. 
II  me  1'a  dit  lu>meme.  (41  i.) 
11  me  Ta  dit  a  moi-mCme. 


On  n'aimc  pas  a  se  flatter  soi-mCme. 
01>s.  152.     Sometimes  the  word  mtme  is  an  adverb,  and  answers  to  tho 


English  word  even. 

He  has  not  even  money  enough  to 
buy  some  bread. 

We  must  love  everybody,  even  our 
enemies. 

A<;nin,  (anew.) 

He  speaks  ogain. 

To  fall,  to  lower. 

The  price  of  the  merchandise  fairs. 

To  deduct 

To  raise,  lift  up,  put  up,  rise,  increase. 

Is  llour  higher  or  lower  ? 

She  has  lowered  the  window ;  raise 
it  up. 

The  provisions.      Produce  has  risen. 

To  overcharge,  to  ask  too  much. 

Not  having  overcharged  you,  I  can- 
not deduct  anything. 

An  ell.  A  yard. 

A  metre,  (measure.} 

To  produce,  (to  yield,  to  projlt.) 

How  much  does  that  employment 
yield  you  a  year  ? 

An  employment. 

To  permit,        permitted.         Permit. 


II  n'a  pas  niemc  assez  d'argent  pour 

achcter  du  pain. 
II  faut  aimer  tout  le  monde,  memo 

nos  enncmis. 
De  nouvcau. 
11  parle  de  nouveau. 
Baisser,  I,  (tomber,  1,  5 11.) 
La  marchandise  baisse  dc  prix. 
Rabattre,  4,  (see  battre,  4,  3C'.> 
Lever,  1.  ($144—4.)  Hausse  . 

La  farine  a-t-elle  haussd  ou  baisse  I 
Elle  a  baissd  la  fenetre,  levcz-la. 

Lesdenrdes.  Lesdenre'esonthaussd 

Surfaire*  (like/ai're.*) 

Ne  vous  ayant  pas  surfait,  je  ne  sau- 

rais  rien  rabattre. 

Une  aune  Une  yard  ou  verge. 

I7n  metre. 
Rapport  er,  1. 
Combien  cet  emploi  (cctte  charge' 

vous  rapporte-t-il  (elle)  par  an? 
Un  emploi,  une  charge. 
Fermettre,*4:  (de),  permis.  Permutes* 

(mettve.) 


-TXTV-FIFTH     LESSON.    (3.)  345 

SOIXANTE-CINQUIEME    TflftME.       2de    SeC. 

A-t-il  reduit  le  prix  de  son  velours  de  sole?  Non,  il  (Tit  qiril  no 
rabattra  rien.  Ce  marchand  surfait  trop.  II  assure  qu'il  ne  surfait 
pas  du  tout,  mais  que  comme  ses  marchandises  sont  de  la  meilleure 
qualite,  il  est  oblige  de  vendre  plus  cher. — Voulez-vous  nrintroduiro 
•aunautre?  Je  vous  introduirai  avec  plaisir. — Qui  a  presente  ce 
jeune  avocat  au  president?  Le  ministre  le  lui  a  presente.  Le  roi 
a-t-il  etc  presente  au  ministre  ?  Non,  mais  le  ministre  1'a  ete  au 
roi. — Puisque  vous  connaissez  M.  Martin,  voulez-TOUs  me  le  pre- 
senter'? Je  vous  le  presenterai.  II  vient  par  ici.  Dr.  Prudieu.  per* 
mcttcz  moi  (permit  me)  de  vous  presenter  M.  Martin,  de  Louisville. 
Dr.,  je  suis  charm  c  d'avoir  le  plaisir  de  votre  connaissance.  C'esi 
beaucoup  de  plaisir,  M.,  que  je  fais  la  votre. — Vous  ]7a-t-il  dil 
lui-mcme  ?  Non,  mais  sa  femme  elle-meme  me  1'a  dit. — Votre  pero 
vous  a-t-il  perrnis  (from  pcrmcltrc,  to  permit)  d'acheter  3  aunes  de 
?e  drap?  11  me  1'.  — Leur  permet-il  cl»  ..•  de  son 

la  fenetre? — Le  colon  hausse-l-il? 

What  is  the  price  of  this  cloth?     I  sell  it  at  three  crowns  and  a 
half  the  ell. — 1  think  (tr  outer)  it  very  dear.     Has  the  price  of  cloth 
not  fallen  ?    It  has  not  fallen ;  the  price  of  all  goods  (la  merchandise) 
fallen,  except  that  of  cloth,  (exccpte  cdui  du  drap.) — I  will  give 
you  three  crowns  for  it,  (en.) — I  cannot  let  you  have  (donner)  it  for 
(a)  that  price,  fcr  it  costs  me  (cow/cr,  1)  more. — Will  you  have  the 
to  show  rre  some  pieces  (la  piece)  of  English  cloth?  With 
•ii  pleasure. — Does  this  silk  suit  you?     It  does  not  suit  me. — 
Why  does  it  not  suit  you?     Because  it  is  too  dear;  if  you  will  lowrr 
the  price,  (en  rabattrc  quelque  chose,)  I  shall  buy  twenty  yards  of  it. 
— Not  having  a.-ked  too  much,  I  cannot  take  off  anything. — Yon 
i  French;  does  your  master  let  you  translate?     He  lets  me 
,  write,  and  translate. 

cotton  risen  in  England,  by  the  last  news?  Yes,  it  had 
risen  J  of  a  penny. — Then  it  will  rise  here. — Probably,  (proba- 
blemcnt.) — Is  it  true  that  produce  and  provisions  are  lower?  I  .be- 
lieve they  are  the  same,  (au  meme  prix;)  that  they  have  neither 
ri>en  nor  sunk,  (lowered.) — What  is  the  price  of  a  yard  of  your 
eilk  velvet?  It  is  4  dollars  a  yard.  It  is  high.  How  beautiful  it 
is !  See ! — Is  flour  high  ?  Five  dollars  a  barrel. — Will  it  not  be 
lower  in  the  fall  ?  It  may  lower,  fall. — Wrill  you  permit  me  to  use 
your  fan  ?  If  he  would  reduce  the  price  of  his  house,  would  you 
take  it  for  your  family? — Would  he  purchase  2  barrels  of  flois,  if  it 
was  4$  dollars  a  barrel? — How  do  you  do,  to-day?  I  am  very 
unwell,  (tres-mal.) — How  do  you  like  that  soup?  I  think  (trwver) 
it  in  very  bad;  but  since  I  have  lost  my  appetite,  (VappC'tit.)  I  do 


840 


SIXTY-SIXTH     LESSON.    (1.) 


not  like  anything,  (je  ne  trouve  rien  de  bon.) — How  much  dot» 
lhat  employment  yield  to  your  father  ?  It  yields  him  more  than 
four  thousand  (mille  has  no  s  in  the  plural)  crowns. 


SIXTY-SIXTH  LESSON,  66th.— Smxante-sixitme  Le$on}  66mc 
VOCABULAIRE.  Ire  Sec. 


A  kind,  sort,  (a  species.) 
What  kind  of  fruit  is  that  ? 

A  stone  (of  a  fruit).      A  plum  stone. 
A  stone  of  a  peach,  an  apricot. 
Stone-fruit.          Break  these  stones. 

One  must  break  the  stone  before  one 

comes  at  the  kernel. 
A  kernel. 

An  almond.  Kernel-fruit. 

A  sweet  almond.     A  bitter  almond. 
It  is  a  kernel-fruit. 

licr,  gathered.  Gather. 
1  ira'.hcr,  iliou  gatherest,  lie  gathers. 
To  gather  fruit. 

re  up  the  soup,  the  breakfast. 
To  bring  in  the  (It 

The  fruit.      An  apricot.       A  peach. 
A.  plum.    An  anecdote.    Roast  meat. 
To  cease,  to  leave  off. 
I  leave  olT  reading. 
She  docs  not  leave  ofF  speaking. 
To  avoid. 
To  escape. 

To  escape  a  misfortune. 
lie  ran  away  to  avoid  death. 

TV  ft  c,  to  take  to  flight,  one'*  Aeefc,&c. 

To  do  without  a  thing. 

Can  you  do  without  bread  ? 

I  ran  do  without  it. 

There  are  many  things  which  we 
must  do  without. 

To  depend,  belong  to,  be  connected 
with. 

This*  employment  and  the  duties 
connected  with  it. 

That  lesson  and  the  exercises  be- 
longing to  it. 


Une  espece. 

Quelle  espece  de  fruit  cst  ceia,  (Q: 

est-ce  la?) 

Un  noyau.     Un  noyau  de  prune. 
Un  noyau  de  pechc,  d'abricot. 
Fruits  a  noyau.     Cassez  ces  noyaux. 

(W 

II  faut  casser  le  noyau  pour  en  avoir 

1'amanjle  :  (a  proverb.) 
Une  amande,  un  pepin. 
l'i:».'  amande.          Fruits  a  pepin. 
Une  amande  douce,        am 
C'cst  un  fruit  a  pepin. 
Cucillir,*  2,         cueilli.       Cueillez. 
Je  cnoille,      tu  cueilles,      il  cueille. 

( 'in  ill ir  tlit  fruit. 

In  foitpc,  le  dejeuner. 

le  dessert. 

Le  fruit.     Un  abricot.     Une  \ 
Une  prune.    Uno  anecdote.    Du  roti. 
Cesser,  1,  de. 
Je  cesse  de  lire. 
Elle  ne  cesse  de  parler.  (CC1.) 
Kvitcr,  1,  (Je  before  infin.) 
fichapper,  1. 

t  6chapper  a  un  malheur. 
II  a  pris  la  fuite  pour  cchapper  a  la 

mort. 

Prendre  la  fuite. 
Se  passer  de  quelque  chose. 
Pouvez-vous  vous  passer  de  pain  ? 
Je  puis  (je  peux)  m'en  passer. 
II  y  a  bien  dcs  choscs  dont  il  faut  ac 

passer. 
Dependre,  4,  de. 

Get  emploi  et  les  devoirs  qui  en  d<$« 

pendent. 
Cette  le§on  et  les  themes  qui  en  d6 

penden* 


SIXTV'.-UXTll      LESSON.    (1.)  347 

Soi  ;£MI;  TIIKME.     lreSjc. 

Ain  ez-vuus  les  amandes?     Oui,  je  les  aime  douees.--L'epiciei 
da  coin  vend-ii  de  bonnes  peches  seches  ?     Non,  les  peches  sechea 
qu:il  vend   sont   sures,  trop  sures.     C'est  dommage. — N?est-il  pas 
bientot  temps  que  nous  ayons  des  abricots  ?  Des  abricots?  Ce  n:est 
pas  encore  la  saison  (season.)     II  faut  que  les  cerises  et  les  fraisea 
viennent  (subj.  §  151)  avant.  Nousn'avons  pas  encore  eu  ces  fruits-la 
Dans  la  saison  des  fruits  j'aime  beaucoup  les  desserts. — Jean,  si  vouu 
allez  dans  le  jardin,  ne  cueillez  pas  les  fruits.   Non,  je  n'en  cueillerai 
.  mais  no  faut-ii  pas  que  je  cueille  un  bouquet?   Si  fait,  cueille? 
i  pour  votre  cousine  Marie. — Quelle  espece  de  fruit  est  cela? 
D  fruit.    Qu7est-ce  done  ?    C'est  une  tomate  (a  tomato.) 
Kile  ressemble  a  un  fruit,  n'est-ce  pas  ?     Dans  la  saison  des  tomates, 
je  ne  peux  pas  m>  et  vous?  (623,  N.  1.) — Mon-fils  ne  peut 

pas  »  t-ils  ?     Pourquoi  evitez* 

vous  M.  Chan*  _  :e  bien  heureuse  d'echapper 

a  la  mort. — Kile  a  •'  :it  afTreux,  ne  le  saviez-vous 

pas? 

You  must  speak,  (subj.)  \  .->t  be  afraid. — I  am  too  bashful 

[timiilc]  to  speak.  1  shuuld  like  to  (je  voudrais  bicn)  know  why  I 
am  so  bashful. — You  would  not  be  so  bashful  if  you  studied  better, 
Do  you  think  so?  To  be  sure,  I  do. — Have  they  already  brought  in 
the  dessert?  They  have  brought  it  in. — Do  you  like  fruit?  I  like 
iruit,  but  I  have  no  more  appetite. — Will  you  eat  a  little  cheese?  I 
I  liitle. — Shall  I  help  you  to  English  or  Dutch  cheese?  1 
%vill  eat  a  liitle  Dutch  che»^r.— What  kind  of  fruit  is  that?  It  i* 
stone-fruit. — What  is  it  called  ?  It  is  called  thus. — Will  you  wa-h 
your  hands?  I  should  like  to  (je  voudrais  lien)  wash  them,  but  1 
have  no  towel  to  (pour)  wipe  their,  with. — I  will  let  you  have  (fain 
donncr}  a  towel,  some  soap,  and.  some  water.  I  shall  be  much 
obliged  (fort  oblige)  to  you. 

May  I  ask  you  for  (oscrais-jc  vous  dcmandcr)  a  little  water  ?  Hero 
is  some,  (en  rozct.}  Can  you  do  without  soap?  As  for  soap,  I  can 
do  without  it,  but  I  must  have  a  towel  to  wipe  my  hands  with.— Do 
you  often  do  without  soap?  There  are  many  things  which  we  must 
do  without. — Why  has  that  man  run  away?  Because  he  had  no 
other  means  of  escaping  the  punishment  (la  punitiori)  which  he  had 
deserved,  (meritcr.) — Why  did  your  brothers  not  get  (se  procurer)  a 
better  horse  ?  If  they  had  got  rid  of  their  old  horse,  they  would 
have  got  a  better. — Has  your  father  arrived  already  ?  Not  yet,  but 
we  hope  that  he  will  arrive  this  very  day,  (aujounVkui'mcmc.) — lias 
year  Hend  set  out  in  time,  (d  temps?)  I  do  not  know,  but  I 
he  has  (qu^il  sera,  581,  Obs.  141)  set  out  in  lime 


54-8 


SIXTY-SIXTH     LESSON. 


717/1  IS-    >  S* 


acquitter,  1,  d' une  commission. 


VOCABULAIUE.      2de  See. 

Tit  execute  a  commission. 
To   acquit   o?ie>s    self  of 

sioji,  to  do  an  errand. 
I  have  executed  your  commission.      I  Je  rne  suis  acquitte  de  votre  com 

I       mission. 

f  Vous  etes-\ous  acquitte  de  ma  com 
Have  you  executed  my  commission  ?  -j      mission  t 

[  Avez-vous  fait  ma  commission? 


I  have  executed  it. 

7t»  do  one1  s  duty. 

To  discharge,  to  do,  or  to  fulfil  one  t 

duty. 

That  man  always  does  his  duty. 
That  man  always  fulfils  his  duty. 

To  rely,  to  depend  upon  somct/iim:. 
Ue  depends  upon  it. 

1  rely  upon  you. 

You  may  i  cly  upon  him. 

That  is  to  say,  (i.  e.)  Et  cetera,  (etc.) 
My  pen  (quill)  is  better  than  yours. 
They  will  warm  the  soup. 
Dinner  (or  supper)  is  on  the  table,  (is 

served  up.) 

Do  you  choose  any  soup  ? 
.Shall  '  help  you  to  some  soup  ? 
1  will  tro.uble  you  for  a  little. 
To  xrrve  up,  to  attend. 
Not  that  1  know  of,  you  k/iow  of. 


Je  m'en  suis  acquitte. 
Faire  son  devoir. 
/u inplir  S07i  devoir. 

Get  homme  fait  toujovirs  son  devoir. 

Get  homme  s'acquitte  toujoure  de 
son  devoir. 

Compter,  I,  sur  qudque  chose 

II  y  compte. 

Je  compte  sur  vous. 

Je  me  fie  a  vou&. 
C  Vous  pouvez  vous  Tier  a  lui. 
•j  Vous  pouvez  vous  y  fier. 
I  Vous  pouvez  compter  sur  lui. 

C'est-d-dirc.  Savoir.  Etc&ttra,  rtc.j 

Ma  plume  cst  meilleure  que  la  votre. 

On  fera  chauffer  la  soupe. 

On  a  servi. 

>  t  Vous  scrvirai-je  de  la  soupe  T 

t  Je  vous  en  demanderai  un  peu. 

Servir.  * 

Pas  que  je  sache,   vous  sachiez,  (sub 

*  151.) 
11  est  impossible  que  je  le  revived 

temps. 
Je  voudrais  lien  savoir.    Je  voudrais 

lien  savoir  pourquoi  il  le  dit. 
Je  voudrais  bien  savoir  si .... 


It  is  impossible  that  I  should  receive 

it  in  time,  (for  me  to  receive  it.) 
[should  like  to  know.     I  wonder  why 

he  says  it. 
I  wonder  whether,   (should   like  to 

know  if. ..) 

SOIXANTE-SIXI£ME  TII£ME.     2de  Sec. 

Que  faut-il  que  nous  fassions  aujounThui  ?  Je  vous  donne  a 
etudierle  vocabulaire  delasoixante-sixieme  le^on,  seconde  section ; 
et  a  preparer  les  themes  Fran^ais  et  Anglais  qui  en  dependent  (belong 
to  it;  connected  with  it.)  Tachez  de  ne  point  faire  de  fautes. 
J'essaie  toujours,  mais  je  n'y  reussis  pas.  Pierre  (Peter)  s'est-il  ac« 
quitte  de  ma  commission  ?  Fas  que  je  sache. — Votre  ccusine  parle- 


SIXTY-SIXTH     LESSON.    (3.)  84& 

• 

plus  que  votre  sccur?  Elle  le  fait;  non  parce  qirelle  parlo 
mieux,  mais  parce  qu7elle  n'est  pas  si  timicle. — J'ai  uno  commission 
Importante  a  faire.  pour  laquelle  je  compte  sur  vous. — Vous  pouvo/. 
i-nmpter  sur  moi.  Je  iri'en  acquitterai  de  mon  mieux.  Je  voudrais 
bien  savoir  si  Ton  peut  compter  sur  notre  domeslique  ! — Mile.  Emilio 
n:est  pas  encore  revenue,  faut-il  qu'o?i  tienne  (§ 151)  la  soupechaude 
pour  elle? — Vous  servirai-je  un  peu  de  soupe? — Pourquoi  n'cn 
prenez-vous  pas,  si  vous  ne  pouve/  pas  vous  en  passer? — Que  voua 
servirai-je  ?— Mon  neve:  vn,  voule/.-vons  qu'il  y  fassu 

quelque  commission? 

Have  you  executed  rny  commission  *         have  executed  it. — Has 
your  broti  vd  tlie  commission  which  I  gave  him  1     He  has 

executed  it. — Would  you  (voudricz-vous)  execute  a  commission  for 
me?     I  am  under  .-aliens  to  you  that  I  will  al\\ 

it  shall  please  you  to  give  me 

any. — Will  you  a-k  the  rrvrchant  whether  (ri)  lie  can   let  me  have 
(me  donner)  the  horse  at  the  price  (au  pri.r)  which  I  have  oil. 
him  ?     I  am  sure  that  he  would  b"  if  you  would  add  a  few 

tore. — If  I  were  sure  of  that  I  would  add  a  few  crowns 
more. — Good  morning,  my  children !  have  you  done  your  task  / 
•  always  do  it;  or  else  (ou  bien)  we  must  be 
•  must  have  a  good  excuse,  (une  excuse.) 

I  wonder  whether  you  could  tell  me  an  anecdote?     Will  you  try 
to  relate  one  to  us?  (nous  en  racontcrunc?) — In  English  or  in  French? 
;  but  in  French.     It  is  impossible  for  me  to  relate  it 
without  making  n.  We  think  so;  therefore  we  will 

excuse  them,  (>  )— One  of  the  valets  de  chambre  (un  dcs 

valets  dc  chambre)  of  Louis  XIV7.  (de  Louis  XIV.)  requested  that  prii. 
as  he  wa*  iroing  to  bed,  (comme  it  sc  mcttait  ciu  /*'/,)  to  recommend 
(de  faire  rccommandcr)  to  the  first  president  (d  Monsieur  le  premier 
president)  a  lawsuit  (un  proces)  which  he  had  against  (contrc)  hi.-/ 
father-in-law,  and  said,  in  urging  him,  (en  le  prcssant :)  "Alas, 
(Helas,)  Sire,  (Sire.)  you  have  but  to  say  one  word.77  "'Well,77 
(Eh!)  said  Louis  XIV.,  "it  is  not  that  which  embarrasses  me,  (cc 
n'est  pas  dc  quoi  jc  suis  en  pcine  ;)  but  tell  me,  (dis-moi.)  if  thou  wcrt 
in  thy  father-in-law's  place,  (d  la  place  de. . . .,)  and  thy  father-in-law 
in  thine,  wouldst  thou  be  glad  (bien  aisc)  if  I  said  that  word? 

VOCABULAIRE.     Cme  Sec. 


To  suffice,  le  sujirifnt,  answer. 
Is  that  bread  sufficient  for  you  ? 
_t  is  sufficient  for  me. 
\  auffice,  thou  dost  suffice. 


Sujjire,*  4,  sujfisant,  sujfit, 
Ce  pain  vous  suffit-il  ? 
II  me  suffit. 
Je  sum's,  tu  sum's. 


SIXTY-SIXTH      ^ESSON.    (3.) 


550 

• 

Will  that  money  be  sufficient  for  that 
man  ? 

It  will  be  sufficient  for  him. 
Little  wealth  suffices  for  the  wise. 
Has  that  sum  been  sufficient  for  that 

man  ? 
Was  that  man  contented  with  that 

sum  ?     With  those  three  dollars  f 
lie  was  (satisfied  with  it,  with  them.) 
He  has  been  contented  with  it. 
To  be  contented  with  something. 
It  would  be  sufficient  for  him  if  you 

would  only  add  a  few  crowns. 
He  would  be  contented  if  you  would 

only  add  a  few  crowns. 
To  add.          Add  nothing  to  it. 
To  embark,  to  go  on  board. 
A  bail. 
To  set  sail. 
To  set  sail  for. 
To  sail  for  America. 

To  sail. 

Under  full  sail. 

To  sail  under  full  sail. 

He  embarked  on  the  sixteenth  of  last 

month. 

He  sailed  on  the  third  instant. 
Thr  instant,  the  present  month. 
The  fourth  or  fifth  instant. 
The  letter  is  dated  the  6th  instant. 
To  Ir  ok  at.     Look  at  it,  (him  or  hcr.j 

SOIXANTE-SIXIEME 
Je  voudrais  bien  savoir  quand  le  batiment  mettra  a  la  voile  ?  Le 
capitaine  ne  le  dit-il  pas  dans  sa  lettre  du  quinze  du  courant  ?  Je  n,e 
wren  souviens  pas.  Regardez-la.  II  dit  seulement:  Mon  batiment 
iera  voile  tnccssammcnt,  ce  qui  veut  dire:  sans  delai,  bientot,  dans 
quelques  jours. — Quelle  est  la  date  aujourd:hui  ?  C'est  le  20  du 
courant. — Faut-il  que  vo^s  sachiez  le  jour  que  le  butiment  fera  voile  ? 
U  est  important  que  je  lesache.  ($  151.) — Ce  que  vous  avez  sur  votro 
liste  de  provisions  sufTira-t-u"?  La  regarderai-je  ?  Ne  Favez-vous 
pus  encore  regardee?  Non.  Si  je  Favais  regardee,  je  saurais  si 
30  que  vous  avez  suffirait.  Eh  bien !  regardez-la.  Du  fromage, 


Cet  argent  suffira  t-il  a  cet  homme* 

(usually  in  th<   '3d  pers.  sing.  <f 

plur.) 

II  lui  suffira. 

Peu  de  bien  suffit  au  sage. 
Cette  somme   a-t-elle   suffi   a    cet 

horn  me  ? 
Cet  homme  s'est-il  contente  de  cette 

somme  ?  De  ces  3  gourdes  ?  (fern.) 
Elle  lui  a  sum".     Elles  lui  ont  suffi 
II  s?en  est  contente. 
Sc  contenter  de  quelque  chose. 
Elle  lui  suffirait,  si  vous  vouliez  seiile- 

mcnt  y  ajouter  quelques  £cu8. 
II   se  contenterait,  ei  vous  votliei 

seulement  y  ajouter  quelques  ecus. 
Ajouter,  1.         N^y  ajoutez  rien. 
S'embarquer,  1. 
Une  voile.1 
t  Mettre  a  la  voile, 
t  Faire  voile  pour. 
Faire  voile  pour  I'Amlriquc,  (allci 

en  Ameriquc.) 
Marcl 
A  pleincs  voilos,  (a  toutes  voiles.) 

r  u  pleines  voiles,  (cingler.) 
II  s'est  embarque  le  seize  du  moie 

dernier. 

11  a  mis  il  la  voile  le  trois  courant. 
Le  courant. 

Le  quatre  ou  le  cinq  du  courant. 
La  lettre  est  du  six  du  courant. 
Regarder,  1.        Regardez-le,  (la.) 

:.     3me  Sec. 


1  Voile t  meaning  a  veil,  a  '.over,  is  masculine.     Ex.  She  J^as  bought  a  veil. 
Elle  s'est  achete  un  voile. 


SIXTY-SEVENTH     LESSON.    (1.)  351 

du  vin;  de  1'eau  de  vie,  du  biscuit,  du  beurre,  des  aiv.undes.  de.i 
pruneaux,  (prunes,)  des  raisins  sees,  (raisins.)  du  bcDuf.  Si  vous 
n'avez  pas  de  langues  saltes,  (salt  tongues,)  il  faut  en  ajouter.  Coin 
bien  en  ajouterai-je  ?  II  faut  que  vous  en  ajoutiez  au  moins  5  ou  6. 
Vous  passerez-vous  d'aufs  ?  (eggs  ?)  Non,  ni  de  poulets ;  car  j'aime 
beaucoup  les  arsis  et  les  poulets.  Ajoutez-les  a  la  liste. 

What  is  that  vessel  coming  under  full  sail  ?  It  is  tje  packet 
( paqVsCbot)  Susquehanna,  from  Liverpool.  How  fast  it  sails  !  Il  sailed 
from  Liverpool  the  3d  instant.  It  will  soon  come  (arrivcr)  to  the  wbarf. 
Let  me  finish  looking  at  your  list,  and  then  we  will  go  and  see  who  i* 
in  the  packet.  The  last  articles  are  chickens  and  eggs. — Will  twelve 
pair  of  chickens  be  sufficient?  I  would  think  so. — And  how  many 

I  will  you  want]  (uous  fuudra-t-il  ?)  About  ,*welve  doxer,,  (dou- 
zuiiics,)  or  one  hundred  and  fifty,  will  answer,  (sttjjiront.} — Will  you 
not  want  two  hundred  ?  X<\  vi-lve  do/en  will  bo  enough. 

You  will  do  well  to  put  them  up  in  salt.  I  wi<h  I  had  everything 
arranged.  I  also. — On  the  li<t  is  there  any  tea,  suirar,  eoliee.  rhnro- 
late,  pepper,  and  vinegar  I  see  all  those  articles. — Have  you 

.'  id  lord  /)    I  have  already  sent  several  chest? 

full  on  board.  We  must,  in  going  (en  allant)  to  the  Liverpool 
paeket.  see  il  they  have  been  received,  and  where  they  have  been 
put. 

they  served  up  the  soup?     They  have  served  it  up  somo 
mini  i  (alors)  it  must  be  cold;  I  like  soup  only  when 

v  will  warm  it  for  you.  You  will  oblige  me,  (obliger.) 
— Shall  I  help  you  to  some  of  this  roast  meat  ?  I  will  trouble  you  for 
a  little. — Will  you  eat  some  of  this  mutton  ?  I  thank  you,  I  like  fowl 
better,  but  a  very  small  piece  will  suffice  me. — May  I  offer  you  (vous 

•  I'ai-jc)  some  wine?  I  will  trouble  you  fora  little. — Is  this  bread 
fciitiicient  for  you  ?  It  would  be  sufficient  for  me  if  I  was  not  very 
hungry. — When  did  your  brother  embark  for  America?  He  sailed 
on  the  30th  of  last  month. — Do  you  promise  me  to  speak  to  your 
brother  ?  I  promise  you,  you  may  depend  upon  it.  I  rely  upon 
you. — Will  you  work  harder  (micujc)  for  next  lesson  than  you  have 
done  for  this?  (531,  and  $200.)  I  will  work  harder.— May  I  rely 
upon  it  ?  You  may. 


SIXTY-SEVENTH  LESSON.  6~t\\.—Soixante-scptieme  Le$on,  67m* 

IRE.     Ire  Sec. 

T)  be  a  judge  of  saint-'/.  |  t  Se  comiaitre  en  quclque  chose. 

Are  you  a  jutlgo  of  cloth  ?  I  t  Vous  connaissez-vous  en  drap  f 


852 


8lXf Y-SEVENTH    LESSON.    (1.) 


I  am  a  judge  of  it. 

I  am  not  a  judge  of  it. 

I  am  a  good  judge  of  it. 

I  am  not  a  good  judge  of  it. 

To  draw. 

To  chalk,  to  trace,  (to  counter -draw, ,} 

To  draw  a  landscape. 

To  draw  after  life. 

The  drawing.  The  drawer. 

Nature.  Natural. 

To  manage,  or  to  go  about  a  thine. 

How  do  you  manage  to  make  a  fire 
without  tongs  ? 

I  go  about  it  so. 

You  go  about  it  the  wrong  way. 

I  go  about  it  the  right  way. 

How  does  your  brother  manage  to  do 
that  ? 

.Skilfully,  handily,  dexterously,  cle- 
verly. 

Awkwardly,  unhandily,  badly. 

To  forbid. 

1  forbid  you  to  do  that. 

To  lower. 

To  cast  down  one's  r> 

The  curtain  (of  a  theatre). 

The  curtain  rises,  falls. 

The  stocks  have  fallen — risen. 

The  day  falls. 

Night  comes  on.        It  grows  dark. 

It  grows  late,  it  is  rather  late. 

TO  Stc  M». 


Je  m'y  connais, 

Je  ne  m'y  connais  pas. 

Je  m'y  connais  tres-bien. 

Je  ne  m'y  connais  pas  beaucoup, 

Dessmer,  I. 

Calquer,  1. 

Dessmer  un  paysage. 

Dessiner  d'apres  nature. 

Le  dessin.  Le  deseinateur. 

La  nature.         Naturel,  naturelle. 

•S'y  prcndre. 

Comment  vous  y  preneL-vous  pom 

faire  du  feu  sans  pincettes  ?' 
Je  m'y  prends  comme  cela. 
Vous  vous  y  prenez  mal. 
Je  m'y  prends  bien. 
Comment  votre  frers   s'y  prend-il 

pour  faire  cela  ? 
Adroitement. 

Malatlroitement. 
Dtfendre,  4,  (de  av.  l**nf.) 
Je  vous  defends  de  faire  cela. 
r,   1. 

r  los  yeux. 

Latoile  (d'un  theatre),  le  rideau. 
t  La  toile  (le  rideau)  se  le  ve,  se  baisse. 
Le  change  a  baissc — ha 
Le  jour  baisse. 
II  se  fait  nuit. 
II  se  fait  tard. 
Se  baisser. 


SOIXAM:  Ire  Sec. 

Je  voudrais  bien  savoir  (I  wonder)  qui  se  connait  bien  en  che 
vaux?  M.  Lenoir  s'y  connait.  Etes-vous  sur  qiril  s'y  connaisse 
bien?  (}  151.)  Oui,  j'en  suis  sur;  car  je  m'y  connais  moi-meme. 
mais  il  s'y  connait  mieux  que  moi. — Vous  dessinez,  je  sais.  Des- 
ginez-vous  d'apres  nature,  ou  copiez-vous  ?  Je  copie,  generalement 
— Voulez-vous  que  je  dessine  quelque  chose  pour  vous?  Je  vou- 
drais avoir  une  copie  (a  copy)  de  ce  paysage.  Jean  peut  vous  en 
dessiner  une  copie.  Croyez-vous  qiril  veuille  le  faire  ?  (§  151.)  En 

1  All  nouns  ending  in  Me  are  feminine,  except  the  two  following  :  un  amu> 
tstte,  an  amulet ;  un  squelette,  a  skeleton  ;  and  some  compounds,  ag  :  un 
vorte-mcuchettcs.  a  snuffer- stand;  untire-botte,  a  boot-jack  ;  un  caste-noisette 
nut-crackers. 


SIXTY-SEVENTH     LESSON.    (2.)  353 

cas  qiril  ne  veuille  pas,  (In  case  he  would  not,)  ne  pouvez-vous  pas 
le  calquer?  Comment  voulez-vous  le  calquer,  lorsqu'il  est  sons 
verre  ?  C'est  vrai.  Je  n'y  pensais  pas.  Ne  peut-on  pas  Foter  du 
cadre?  (frame.)  Sans  doute,  on  le  peut.  Comment  vous  y  pren- 
driez-vous  pour  Foter  ?  II  faut  d'abord  oter  les  clous  qui  tiemienl 
16  des  du  cadre.  Mais  pour  cela  ii  faut  que  nous  ayons  des  pin- 
cettes. Pai  une  paire  de  pincettes.  La  voici.  Voila  un  clou  d'ote, 
(31,  Obs.  7.)1  En  voila  deux  d'otes,  en  voila  trois.  Ah  !  II  ivy  en 
a  cue  trois.  Alors  ils  sont  tons  otes.  Mais  attendez  done ;  ne  nous 
est-il  pas  defend u  d'oter  les  gravurcs  (engravings)  des  cadres  pour 
calquer? 

Are  you  a  judge  of  cloth  ?  I  am  a  judge  of  it. — Will  you  buy 
=ome  yards  for  me?  (m'cn?)  If  you  will  give  me  the  money,  1 
•will  buy  you  some,  (rows  en.) — You  will  oblige  (obligcr)  me. — Is  that 
'•leik  a  judge  of  cloth?  Pie  is  not. — How  do  you  manage  to  do 
that?  I  manage  it  so. — Will  you  show  me  how  you  manage  it?  I 
will,  (je  le  vcux  lien.) — What  must  I  do  for  my  lesson  of  to-mor- 
row '*  You  will  copy  your  exercises  properly,  learn  the  next  voca- 
bulary, (vocabulaire  sitivant.)  and  write  the  exercises  belonging  to 
it. — How  do  you  manage  to  get  goods  (des  marchandiscs)  without 
money?  I  buy  on  credit. — How  does  your  sister  manage  to  learn 
French  without  (521)  a  dictionary?  She  manages  it  thus.  She 
manages  it  very  dexterously. 

But  how  does  your  brother  manage  it?  (Mais  M.  voirc  frere  com- 
ment s'i/  prcnd-il?)  He  manages  it  very  awkwardly;  he  reads  and 
looks  for  the  words  in  the  dictionary. — He  may  (pent)  learn  in  this 
manner  twenty  years  without  knowing  how  to  make  a  single  sen- 
tence, (une  sculc  phrase.) — Why  does  your  sister  cast  down  her  eyes  ? 
Is  it  because  she  is  bashful?  She  casts  them  down  because  she  is 
ashamed  of  not  having  done  her  task. — Shall  we  breakfast  in  the 
garden,  to-day?  The  weather  is  so  fine,  that  we  should  (qu'il  faut) 
*ake  advantage  of  it,  (en  profiter.) — How  do  you  like  that  coffee? 
I  like  it  very  much,  (excellent.) — I  wonder  why  you  stoop  ?  I  stoop 
to  pick  up  the  handkerchief  which  I  have  dropped,  and  in  which  I 
have  put  some  money. 

VOCABULAIRE.   2de  Sec 


Fo  smell,  to  fed. 

He  smells  of  garlic  ;  she   of  musk. 

To  feel  some  one's  pulse. 


Se?itir*  (542.) 

II  sent  Vail ;  elle,  le  muse. 

t  Tater  le  pouls  a  quelqu'un. 


1  After  a  noun,  the  past  participle  (used  as  an  adjective,  that  is,  without 
an  auxiliary)  must  be  preceded  by  de  or  d'.  (31,  Ols.  7. — 301,  Ob*.  71.) 


854 


aiXTY-bEVEN  TH     LESSON.    (2.) 


To  consent  to  a  thing. 

I  consent  to  it. 

To  hide,  to  conceal.    To  hide  one1 8  self. 

The  wit,  the  mind.   Indeed.   In  fact. 

The  truth.        The  effect.        True. 

k  true  man. 

This  is  the  right  place  for  that  pic- 
ture. 

To  think  much  of  one,  (to  esteem  one.} 
T)  esteem  some  one. 

I  do  not  think  much  of  that  man. 

I  think  much  of  him,  (I  es.^em  him 

much.) 

/"he  flower,  the  bloom,  the  blossom. 
^n  a  level  v)ilh,  even  with. 
That  man  has  his  eyes  on  a  level 

with  his  head,  (prominent  eyes.) 
To  blossom,  (to  flourish.) 
To  grow,          growing,         grown. 
I   grow,   thou  growest,   he   or  she 

grows,  one  grows,  people  grow. 
To  grow  rapidly,  (fast.) 
To  grow  tall  or  big,      grown  tall. 
That  child  grows  so  fast  that  vt« 

may  even  s- 
That  child  has  grown  very  fast  in  a 

short  time. 

That  rain  liar  made  the  corn  grow. 
Corn.  Indian  corn. 

What    a  fine    carnation !     What   a 

good  odor ! 
Has  mignonette  a  fine  ocent,  odor,  or 

smell  ?  does  it  smell  good,  nice  ? 
That  heliotrope  has  a  delightful  scent. 
To  be  witty,  wrirt,  talented. 


Consentir*  a  quelque  chose.  (542.) 

J'y  consens. 

Cacher,!.     Se  cacher.     Cachez-vou& 

L'esprit.        En  verite.        En  efiei. 

La  verite.       L'efFet.  Vrai. 

Un  homme  vrai. 

Voila  la  vraie  place  de  ce  tableau. 


Fatre  cas  de  quclqu'un.     Estimer,  1, 

quelqu'un. 
Je   ne   fais  pas   grand    cas  de   eel 

homme. 
Je  fais  grand  cas  de  lui,  (je  rcstime 

beaucoup.) 
La  fleur. 
A  fleur  de. 
Get  homme  a  les  yeux  a  fleur  de 

tete. 

tr,  2.1 

Croitrc,*  4,        croissant,        cr\t. 
Je  crois,  tu  crois,  il  ou  clle  croit,  on 

croit. 

Croitrc  rapidemcnt. 
Grandi r.  *J,  grandi. 

t  Get  enfant  grandit  a  vue  d'ceil. 

Get  enfant  a  bicn  grandi  en  peu  de 

temps. 

Cctte  pluie  a  fait  grandir  les  bles. 
Du  ble.  Du  ma'is. 

Quel  bel  ceillet !        Queile    bonne 

odeur ! 
Le  reseda  sent-il  bon  ?  ou  a-t-il  une 

bonne  odeur  ? 

Get  heliotrope  a  une  odeur  delicieusc. 
t  Avoir  de  1'esprit. 

Tni>iE.     2de  Sec. 

Quelle  belle  (what  a  fine)  fleur  vous  avez-la!  Sent-elle  bon  7 
£entez-la  et  regardez-la.  Elie  est  belle ;  mais  elle  ne  sent  pas  bon. 
Quelle  espece  de  fleur  est-ce  *  Ne  la  connaissez-vous  pas  ?  C'est 

1  Fleurir,  to  blossom,  is  regular  ;  but  when  it  means  to  flourish,  its  pre- 
sent participle  isflorissant,  and  its  imperfect  indicative  florissait,jlorissatent. 
Ex.  Un  empire  florissant,  a  flourishing  empire  ;  une  armee  flortssante,  a 
flourishing  army;  cet  auteui  jSj+ifittit  sous  so?i  regne,  that  author  flourished 
under  his  reign  ;  les  arts  ti  l,t  v%<  ces  florissaie?it  alors,  arts  ar.d  sciencei 
werr  then  flourishing. 


SIXTY-SEVENTH      LESSON.    (2.)  3-JO 

an  dahlie. — Ce  beurre  sent  Tail.  L'aimez-vous  quand  il  a  le  gout 
ivail?  Je  ne  Palme  ni  quand  il  sent  Fail  ni  quand  il  en  a  le  gout. 
(2427  Obs.  55.) — Quo  pensez-vous  desouvrages  de  W.  Irving'?  J'en 
tais  grarui  I  de  ceux  de  C.  D.  ?  Je  n'en  fais  pas  grand  ras. 

II  y  a  trop  do  mots  dedans. — Votre  cuisine  est-elle  a  lleur  de  terre? 
Oui,  comme  presque  toutes  les  cuisines  modcrncs,  ou  quo  Ton  bath  a 
present.  Les  anciennes  cuisines  n'etaient  pas  a  fleur  de  terre ;  ma's 
uu  dessous. — Que  cachex-vous  ?  Quelque  chose  que  je  ne  veux 
pas  que  vous  roi/icr,  (}  151.)  En  vcrite  !  Je  suis  fdche  que  vous  le 
'cachicz;  (§  151)  en  avez-vous  honte  ?  N'importe.cela  me  concern®, 
et  ne  vous  concerne  pas.  Kn  eflet,  cela  ne  me  regarde  pas;  mais  je 
ne  croyais  pas  que  vous  en  auriez  fait  un  secret. — Votre  neveu  grandit 
beaucoup,  n'est-ce  pas? — S;L  BCBtU  ne  grandit-elle  pasa  vue  d'ceil? — 
Qui  ne  grandit  plus? 

Which  is  the  m  city  of  the  United  Stales?  (dcs  Etats- 

Unis?)  It  is  New  York,  I  think;  but  there  are  many  other  flourish- 
ing cities  in  the  U.  .S.,  (K.  U.) — Which  are  the  other  flourishing 
places?  (emiroits  ?)  Philadelphia,  Baltimore,  Boston,  Cincinnati,  La 
Nouveli.-  i'itt>bourg,  &c.  £c. — Does  Indian  corn  grow  well 

this  season  ?  Yes,  it  looks  very  well.  The  last  rain  we  had  (have 
had)  has  made  it  grow  very  fast.  The  mind  always  shows  itself — 
it  cannot  be  hidden. — That  lawyer  is  witty,  is  he  not?  Yes,  indeed. 
How  witty  (d'esprit)  is  that  young  lady ! — Truth  has  always  a  good 
•t,  has  it  not.'  No,  not  always;  truth  sometimes  make  us  ene- 
mies.— Is  your  portrait  ("portrait)  in  its  right  (true)  place?  No,  the 
light  comes  from  the  wrong  (mauvais)  side.  Your  portrait  ought  to 
be  on  the  other  side  of  the  parlor.  Then  it  would  be  in  its  true 
light,  (jour.) — Had  you  not  better  change  its  place  ?  The  family  will 
not  consent  to  it. 

That  engraving  would  be  in  its  true  place,  there  ;  and  your  portrait 
in  its,  here  :  if  I  were  you,  I  would  change  them.  It  is  indifferent 
to  me,  and  as  the  rest  of  the  family  have  arranged  it  so,  I  will  not 
meddle  with  it. — Do  you  like  the  smell  of  this  little  flower?  It  is 
delightful. — Is  it  not  a  piece  of  mignonette  ?  No,  it  is  a  piece  of 
heliotrope. — Why  do  your  sisters  hide  themselves?  They  would 
not  hide  themselves  if  they  did  not  fear  to  be  seen. — Whom  are  they 
afraid  of?  They  are  afraid  of  their  governess,  (une  institutrice.)  who 
scolded  them  yesterday  because  they  had  not  done  their  tasks,  (leur 
devoir.)—  Have  you  already  seen  my  son  ?  I  have  not  seen  him 
yet ;  how  is  he  ?  He  is  very  well ;  you  will  not  be  able  to  recognise 
Him,  for  he  has  grown  very  tall  in  a  short  time. 


S56 


SIXTY-SEVENTH     LESSON.    (3.) 


VOCABULAIRE,  3me  Sec. 

A  cover.  A  shelter.  A  cottage,  a  hut.  |  Un  gite.     Un  abri.    Une  chaumierc 

To  shelter  one's  self  from  something. )  _ 

To  take  shelter  from  something.         \  Se  mettre  a  l  abn  de  1uel(iue  cho& 


Let  us  shelter  ourselves   from   the 

rain,  the  wind. 
Let  us  enter  that  cottage  in  order  to 

be  sheltered  from  the  storm,  (the 

tempest.) 

Everywhere,  all  over,  throughout. 
All  over  (throughout)  the  town. 
A  shade.  Under  the  shade. 

Ixit  us  sit  down  under  the  shade  of 

that  tree. 
To  pretend. 

That  man  pretends  to  sleep. 
That  young  lady  pretends  to  know 

French. 
They  pretend  to  come  near  us. 

Now.  From,  since. 

From  morning. 

From  the  break  of  day. 

From  the  cradle,  from  a  child. 

From  this  time  forward. 

As  soon  as.     As  soon  a 

As  soon  as  I  see  him  I  shall  speak  to 

him. 

For  fear  of. 
To  catch  a  cold. 
I  win  not  go  out  for  fear  of  catching 

a  cold. 
He  does  not  wish  to  go  to  town,  for 

fear  of  meeting  with  one  of  his 

creditors, 
fie  does  not  wish  to  open  his  purse, 

for  fear  of  losing  his  nwiiey. 
To  transcribe  fairly. 
A  grammar.         A  French  grammar. 


Met  tons- no  us  a  Fabri  de  lapluie,ds 

vent. 
Entrons  dans  cette  chaumiere,  poui 

etre  a  couvert  de  la  tempetc,  ou 

pour  etre  a  1'abri  des  injures  dn 

temps. 
Partout. 

Par  toute  la  ville. 
Une  ombre.1  A  I' ombre. 

Aliens  nous  asseoir  a  lYmbre  docet 

arbre. 

Faire  semblant  de. 

Get  hommc  fait  semblant  de  dormir. 
Cette  demoiselle   fait  semblant  do 

eavoir  ie  Fran$ais. 
Us  font  semblant  de  e'approcher  do 

nous. 

JlniHtcnant.  DCS. 

DCs  le  matin. 
DCS  le  point  du  jour. 
DCS  le  berceau. 

i  present. 

Des  oue.        Des  que  vous  voudrez 
DCS  que  jc  le  vcrrai  je  lui  parlerai. 

DC  craitite  on  de  peur  de. 

Prcndre  froid,  s' cnrhumer. 

Je  ne  veux  pas  sortir,  de  peur  de 

m'enrhumer. 
II  ne  veut  pas  aller  a  la  ville,  de  peuf 

de  rencontrer  un  de  ses  creanciers 

II  ne  veut  pas  ouvrir  sa  bourse,  do 

peur  de  perdre  son  argent. 
Mettre*  au  net.  (331.) 
Une  gramma  ire.         Une  gram  mairo 
Franchise. 

SOIXANTE-SEPTIEME  TH£ME.     ome  Sec. 

Le  ciel  est  couvert,  ne  ferons-nous  pas  mieux  de  prendre  chacr.n 
un  parapluic?     Oh!  non,  cela  n'en  vaut  pas  la  peine.     Sril  plect, 

1  Omlre,  a  shadow,  is  feminine  ;  but  ornbre,  a  kind  of  fish,  and  2  cmtr  e  a 
game  at  cards,  are  masculine. 


SIXTY-SEVENTH     LESSON.    (3.)  357 

nous  trouverons  quelqirabri.  Sans  doute,  nous  trouverons  quelque 
maison  ou  quelque  chaumiere.  Aliens,  allons. — Tenez,  mainte- 
nant  il  fait  du  soleil,  et  un  soleil  bien  chaud.  II  faut  que  nous  pre- 
nions  (§151)  le  cote  de  1'ombre.  Oui,  vous  avcz  raison,  allons  a 
Pombre.  Lorsque  nous  aurons  passe  par  toute  la  ville,  nous  senti- 
rons  assez  le  soleil  a  la  campagne.  Passerons-nous  a  1'ombre. 
(^uant  a  moi,  je  ne  m'en  soucie  pas.  Je  n'ai  pas  trop  chaud  de  ce 
note-ci,  mais  je  ne  vous  empeche  pas  dialler  a  Fabri  des  maisons, 
si  vous  avez  trop  chaud  au  soleil.  Jacques  (James)  et  moi,  nous 
allons  a  1'ombre,  vous  autres,  (47 J,  1,)  faites  comme  vous  voudrez. 
—Samuel  fait  semblant  de  ne  pas  (J  171 — 7)  avoir  peur  du  chaud, 
cependant,  il  le  sent  aussi  bien  que  nous  autres. — Tenez,  (06s.  94,) 
voyez  done  !  Thomas  a  sa  grammaire  Francaise  !  Eh  bien  !  qiry 
trouvez  vous  d'oxtraordinaire?  Si  jrai  le  temps  j'etudierai.  J'ai 
cU'ja  rri is  mes  themes  au  net,  et  vous,  avez- vous  mis  les  votres  an 
Je  les  mettrai  ce  soir. 

Why  does  that  man  give  nothing  to  the  poor?  (aux  paitvrcs  ?)  He 
o  avaricious,  (avare ;]  he  does  not  wish  to  open  his  purse,  foi 
fear  of  losing  hi.-;  money. — What  sort  of  weather  is  it'?  It  is  very 
warm ;  it  is  long  since  we  had  any  rain;  I  believe  we  shall  have  a 
storm,  (un  or  age.) — It  may  be,  (ccla  se  pent  bien.)  The  wind  blows, 
it.  thunders  already;  do  you  hear  it?  Yes,  I  hear  it,  but  the  storm 
is  still  far  off,  (encore  bien  loin.) — Not  so  far  as  you  think;  see  how 
it  lightens. — It  rains,  it  pours;  what  a  shower!  (qu.cllc  averse!) — If 
:o  into  some  place  (quelque  part)  we  shall  be  sheltered  from  the 
fetorm. — Let  us  go  into  that  cottage,  then,  (done;)  we  shall  be  shel- 
tered there  from  the  wind  and  the  rain. — The  storm  has  ceased. 
We  must  go. 

Let  us  thank  these  good  people  for  the  shelter  they  have  given 
us.  We  are  much  obliged  to  you.  Adieu  !  You  are  welcome.— 
Where  shall  we  go  now?  Which  road  shall  we  take?  The 
shortest  'court)  will  be  the  best. — We  have  too  much  sun,  and  I  am 
Flill  very  tired;  let  us  sit  down  under  the  shade  of  that  tree. — Who 
is  (qucl  est)  that  man  who  is  sitting  under  the  tree  ?  I  do  not  know 
him. — It  seems  he  (il  parait  qu'il)  wishes  to  be  alone,  (seul;)  for 
when  we  offer  (vouloir*)  to  approach  him,  he  pretends  to  bo 
asleep. — He  is  like  your  sister:  she  understands  French  very  well, 
(fort  bien;)  but  when  I  begin  to  speak  to  her,  she  pretends  not  to 
understand  me. — Has  not  your  uncle  given  the  cleik  (Dir.  3)  some- 
thing to  transcribe  ?  Yes,  he  has. — I  wonder  whether  it  is  important 
that  he  should  transcribe  it  (}  151)  immediately?  Yes,  it  is,  for 
fear  the  gentleman  should  go  without  the  copy,  (§  151.) 


358 


SIXTY -EIGHTH     LRSSON.      I.J 


SIXTY-EIGHTH  LESSON,  GSih.—Soixantc-huitiemc  Logon,  68  ra 

VOCABULAIRE.     Ire  Sec. 
SECOND  IMPERFECT  TENSE.— Preterit. 
For  its  formation  and  use,  see  ($  153,)  and  study  it  carefully. 

INFINITIVE.          IMPERFECT.  PR£TERIT. 

fo  have,    Avoir,     I  had.       J'eus,  tu  eus,  i!  eut,  nous  eumes,  vous  eutes,  ils  eurent 

To  be,         Eire,       I  was.       Je  fus,     fus, 

Had  you  money  enough  ?  I  had 

enough. 

Had  he  the  pleasure  :f  ewing  her  ? 

No,  he  was  deprived  o  '  u.  (To  de- 
prive.) 

Had  they  no  soup  on  that  day  ? 

They  had  none,  but  we  had  some. 


Had  I  less  good  luck  than  they  ? 
You  had  as  much  as  they,    (fern.) 
Wast  thou  happy  in  thy  choice  ? 
J  was  not  at  all.  Who  was  ? 

We  were,  they  were  ;  but  you  were 

not. 

To  go,        Aller,          I  went.          J'allai, 
To  find,      Trouver,    I  found.          Je  trouvai,    vas, 
To  bring,  Apporier,   I  brought.      J'apportai,    tas, 


fut,  fumes,  futes,       furent. 

Eutes-vous  asse«  d'argeat  ?        J'efi 

eus  assez. 

Eut-ii  le  plaisir  de  la  Toir  ? 
Non.  il  en  fut  Drive.  (P river,  1.) 


N'eurent-ilspasde  soupe  ce  jour-la  » 
Us  n'en  eurent  pas,  mais  nous  on 

eumes. 

Eus-je  moins  de  bonheur  qu'eux  ? 
Vous  eri  eutes  autant  qu'elles. 
Fus-tu  heureux  dans  ton  choix  ? 
Je  ne  le  fus  pas  du  tout.   Qui  le  fut  I 
Nous  le  fumes,  ils  le  furent ;   maia 

vous  ne  le  futes  pas. 

alias,  alia,  alhtmes,  allates,  allerer.l 
va,  vames,  vatea,  verent. 
la,  tames,  tales,  tdrcnt. 


Where  did  you  go  last  night  ?  ($  153.) 
I  went  nowhere,  I  stayed  at  home. 

Who  went  to  the  minister's  ball  ? 
None  of  the  family  went,  but  Sarah 

and  Fanny  will  go  to  the  consul' s 

ball. 
Did  not  the  consul  give  one  3  weeks 

ago? 
Not  the  consul,  but  the  ambassador 

and  his  wife  gave  one  then. 

And  it  was  there  that  his  wife  were 

her  beautiful  wreath,  was  it  nof.  ? 
Di  1  you  find  what  you  were  seeking  ? 

[  did,  but  after  looking  long  for  it. 

Was  the  battle  decisive  ? 

ft  was  completely  so. 

The  year  before  last.  The  week  . .  . 

This  steamboat  ••'c.'unsftip. 


Oil   allates-vous    hicr    soir  ?   (timo 

past.) 
Je  n'allai  nulle  part,  je  restai   a  la 

maison. 

Qui  alia  au  bal  du  ministre  ? 
Personne   ($  153 — 3,)  de   la  famille 

n'y  alia,  mais  Saraet  Fanny  iron! 

au  bal  du  consul. 
Le  consul  n'en  donna-t-il  pas  un  il  y 

a  trois  semaines  ? 
Pas  le  consul,  (§  153—3,)  mais  Vam 

bassadeur  et  son  tpouse  en  donnu- 

rent  un  alors.  \ 

Et  ce  fut  la  que  son  epouse  porta  son 

superbe  Landeau,  n'est-ce  pas?  — 
Trouvates-vous  ce  que  vous  chci- 

chiez  ? 
Je   le  troiivai,   mais    apres    Tavont 

cherch(r  long-temps. 
La  batailU  fut-elle  decisive  ? 
Elle  le  fut  completement. 
Uavaut  derniere  annie.      fecmaino 
Ce  bateau  d  vapcur.          Un  tiaiin  a 

vapcur 


SIXTY-EIGHTH     LESSON.     (1.)  359 


On  board  the  steam  packet. 
Now  and  then,  from  time  to  time. 
He  gave  it  up  on  that  account. 


A  bord  du  paquebot  d  vapeur. 

De  temps  en  temps . 

11  Vabaudonna  a  caut^  de  cela. 

TnfoiE.     Ire  Sec. 

Que  trouvates-vous  dans  le  sac  que  vous  xamassates  ?  J7y  trouvai 
an  mouchoir,  une  jolie  bourse  et  un  morceau  de  gateau.  Trouvate&- 
7  jus,  sur  le  mouchoir,  le  nom  de  la  personne  a  qui  il  appartient? 
Je  Py  trouvai.  Allates-vous  le  lui  rendre  ?  Je  Py  envoyai  par  la 
domestique.  L'ambassadeur  eut-il  beaucoup  de  monuo*  hier?  II 
n;eut  presque  personne ;  il  faisait  trop  chau^  I\estale»-vous  long- 
temps  a  Saratoga?  Je  iry  restai  que  quelques  jours;  mais  mes 
freres  y  resterent  plus  de  3  semaines.  Eutes-vous  le  temps  d?y  voir 
le  consul  ?  Non,  il  n'etait  pas  encore  arrive  quand  je  quittai  Pen- 
droit;  mais  mes  freres  eurent  le  temps  et  le  plaisir  de  Py  rencontrer 
—Jackson  etait-il  a  la  Nouvelle  Orleans  quand  vous  y  arrivates?  La 
bataille  du  8  Janvier  fut-elle  decisive?  Le  fut-elle  aussi  complete- 
ment  que  celle  de  Waterloo?  Eurent-elles  de  bonne  musique  a 
leur  concert?  Ne  fus-je  pas  complaisant?  Ces  petites  filles  ne 
furent-elles  pas  obeissantes?  Elles  s'en  allerent,  n?est-ce  pas? 

Did  you  not  go  last  week  to  see  the  great  panorama  ?  I  was 
unwell,  so  that  I  did  not  go;  but  almost  all  the  family  went. — Were 
you  obliged  to  transcribe  that  note  more  than  once  ?  I  wras  obliged 
to  transcribe  it  three  times. — Did  not  your  cousin  get  (avoir)  the 
yellow  fever  when  he  was  in  Mobile  the  year  before  last?  No,  he 
did  not  get  it;  but  my  nephew  and  my  niece  had  it. — Had  they  a 
light  or  a  violent  attack  ?  The  latter  had  a  light  attack  of  it,  but  the 
former  had  a  violent  one,  and  he  could  hardly  escape  death,  (ce  fut 
avec  peine  qu'il.) — Did  you  find  your  father  at  Burlington?  I  was 
lucky  enough  to  find  him  there,  at  the  moment  he  was  going  on 
board  the  steamboat. — Did  you  both  stay  in  Burlington  then  ?  No, 
he  took  me  on  board  the  steamboat  with  him  and  brought  me  here. 

What  steamboat  was  it ?  (etait-ce?)  It  was  the  John  Stevens. — 
Were  there  many  persons  on  board  ?  (y  avait-il  ?)  There  were  not 
many. — Did  the  office  (employment,  la  charge)  which  your  uncle 
nad,  produce  much  to  him  ?  The  office  and  all  the  functions  which 
Belonged  to  it,  produced  him  between  1500  and  2000  dollars  a  year, 
(15  cents  et  2  millc  gourdes.) — Had  he  much  to  do  ?  (not  past.)  ires, 
lie  had  a  great  deal  to  do. — Did  his  occupation  (occupation]  make 
(use  to  make)  him  sick  now  and  then  ?  Yes,  now  and  then  he  was 
'used  to  be)  sick. — Had  he  not,  once,  more  to  do  than  usual  I  (past.) 
Ves,  once  he  had  a  great  deal  more  to  do. — Was  he  sick  then  7  (past.) 
Yes,  he  was  very  sick  that  time. — Was  he  sick  a  long  time  ?  Did 
he  give  up  his  office  on  that  account?  Where  did  we  go  o?1  that 
account?  Did  \vc  give  it  up  on  that  account1 


360 


SIXTY- EIGHTH     LESSON.    (2.J 


VOCABULAIEE.     2de  Sec. 
IMPERFECT  CONTINUED.— Preterit  Continue. 


INFINITIVES.  IMPERFECT. 

To  punish^     punir,  {£  punished^  Je  punis, 

To  succeed,   reussir,  I  succeeded,  Je  reussis, 

To  restore,     rendre,  I  restored,       Je  rendis, 

To  owe,^      devoir,  4l  owed^          Je  dus, 


PRETERIT. 

nit,    nimes, 


nis,  nit,    nimes,  nitea,  n.rcM 

sis,  sit,    simes,  sites,  si  rent. 

dis,  dit,    dimes,  dites,  dirent 

dus  dut,  dtimes,  dutes,  durent. 


J'avais  fini  de  lire  quand  il  descendit. 


Avais-je  trouve  ma  bourse  quand 
vous  perdites   la  votre  ? 


I  had  done  reading  when  he  came 

down. 
Had  I  found  my  purse  when  you  lost 

yours  ? 

These  examples,  and  some  previously  given,  show  that 

THE  PLUPERFECT.— Le  Plusqueparfait.  ($154.) 
is  formed  in  French  as  in  English,  with  the  imperfect  of  the  auxiliary  and 
the  past  participle  of  the  verb  to  be  conjugated. 


We  had  dined  when  he  arrived. 
The  king  had  named  an  admiral  when 

he  heard  of  you.  (To  name.) 
After  having  spoken,  you  went  away 

with  the  colonel. 
After  shaving,   I  washed  and  wiped 

my  face. 
After  having   warmed   themselves, 

they  went  into  the  garden. 
As  soon  as  the  bell  rung,  you  awoke 

and  you  rose,  (got  up.) 
As  soon  as  they  called  me,  I  got  up. 
As  soon  as  he  was  ready,  he  came  to 

see  me,  and  so  did  the  colonel. 
As  soon  as  we  had  our  money,  we 

agreed  to  that. 
A s  soon  as  he  had  his  horse,  he  came 

to  show  it  me,  and  we  tried  it. 
After  trying  several  times,  they  suc- 
ceeded in  doing  it. 
As  soon  as  I  saw  him,  I  obtained 

what  I  wanted. 
As  soon  as  I  spoke  to  him,  he  kept 

his  word,  and  did  what  I  told  him. 
The  business  was  soon  over. 
His  word  (meaning  promise)  of  honor. 


Nous  avions  dine  lorsqu'il  arnva. 
Le  roi  avail  nomme  un  amiral,  quand 

on  luiparla  de  vous.  (Nommcr,  1.) 
Apres  avoir  parle,  vous  vous  en  al- 

Idtes  avec  le  colonel. 
Apres  m'etre  rase,  je  me  lavai  et 

mjcssuyai  la  figure. 
Apres  s'Gtre  chaufles,  Us  alUrcnt  au 

jardin.  — 
Des  que  la  cloche  sonna,  vous  vous 

re  veil! dies,  et  vous  vous  levdtes. 
Des  qu'ils  m'appelercnt,  je  me  levai. 
Aussitot  qu'il  fut  pret,  il  m?it  me 

voir,  et  le  colonel  vint  aussi. 
Aussitot  que  nous  enmes  noire  ar 

gent,  nous  conmnmes  de  cela. 
Aussitot  qu'il  eut  son  cheval,  il  vint 

me  le  montrer,  et  nous  Vessaydmes. 
Apres  avoir  essaye  plusieurs  fois,  ila 

parvinrent  a  le  iaire. 
Aussitot  que  je  le  vis,  Collins  ce 

dont  j'avais  besoin. 
Aussitot  que  je  lui  parlai,  il  tint  sa 

parole,  et  jit  ce  que  je  lui  dis. 
L'a'ffaire/tt*  bientot  faite. 
Sa  parole  (not  mot)  d'honneur. 


SOIXANTE-IIUITIliME    Tfl^ME.       2de  Sec. 

Qne  faisiez-vous  quand  il  arriva  ?  Nous  nous  preparions  a  soring. — 
Fordites-vous  la  parlie  cTechecs  ?  Oui,  je  la  perdis,  mais  je  gagnai 
la  partie  de  billard. — Que  demandates-vous  an  capitainc  lorsque 
vors  le  rencontrates  au  quai?  Je  Ini  demandai  si  sou  colonel  avail 


81XTY-2IOHTH    LESSON.   (2.)  861 

£le  voir  Pambassadeur  Anglais  ?  Repondhvil  que  oui  ?  II  no  me 
repondiJ  rien.  C'etait  tres poli;  irest>ce  pas  ?  Je  crois  qu'il  n'entendit 
pas  ma  question.  O'est  different.  Vous  aurait-il  repondu  s'il  voua 
avail  entendu  ?  Je  n'en  doute  pas,  car  il  est  extremement  poli  et 
affable. — Est-il  important  que  vous  passiez  chez  le  marchand  de 
eoie  ? — N?y  passerent-ils  pas  sans  vous?— Vous  donna-t-elle  des  oouia 
pour  dejeuner? — Vous  en  dormera-t-elle  de  nouveau? — Nous  en 
dcnnsriez-vous  si  nous  ne  les  aimions  pas? 

Did  not  Mr.  N.  Biddle  sell  his  beautiful  black  horse  tc  nis  sister-in- 
IBW'*  No,  she  did  not  buy  it. — Why  did  she  not  buy  it?  Because 
•Le  was  afraid  of  the  price. — What  did  he  ask  her  for  it?  I  was 
tcldthat  he  had  asked  her  450  dollars  for  it. — When  did  Sarah  finish 
her  task  ?  She  finished  it  at  £  past  9. — Did  you  finish  yours  before 
that  hour?  I  finished  mine  1  hour  before.  Who  arrived  this  morn- 
ing by  the  steamboat?  I  do  not  know  who  arrived  this  morning, 
but  Julius  arrived  yesterday,  (past,)  by  the  steam  packet. — What 
news  has  the  steamer  brought  1  It  brought  favorable  news.1  Cotton 
and  provisions  kept  up  (mcintcnir)  their  prices,  and  the  continent  of 
Europe  was  a  little  more  quiet. 

At  what  time  does  year  uncle  William  generally  get  up*  He 
rises  generally  early.  I  thought  so. — Did  he  get  up  early  to-day  ? 
No,  he  did  not,  (not  past.)—  Did  he  get  up  early  yesterday  ?  (past.) 
No,  he  did  not — Why  did  he  not  get  up  to-day  and  yesterday  (mind 
the  distinction  to  be  observed  in  French)  as  early  as  usual?  Because 
he  was  a  little  unwell  (not  has  6ccn),  and  isyat  so.  Do  you  not  take 
your  drawing  lessons  (lemons  de  dessin)  early  every  other  day?  Yes, 
we  take  them  pretty  early. — Did  you  receive  the  last  as  early  as 
usual?  No,  we  received  it  only  after  breakfast. — Why  did  you 
receive  it  only  after  breakfast?  Because  our  teacher  did  not  come 
before. — Did  you  buy  your  books  at  Appleton's,  corner  of  Chestnut 
and  7th?  (de  lalmc'*)  Yes,  I  did:  it  is  there  that  I  always  buy 
books. 

1  Although,  speaking  of  Julius's  arrival,  the  French  may  use  the  Preterit 
ar.d  say :  //  arriia  hier,  because,  on  his  landing,  there  was  a  completion  of 
the  action  ;  yet  they  cannot,  speaking  of  the  steamer,  translate  :  It  brought 
favorable  news,  by  :  II  apporta  des  nouvellesfavoralles,  because  we  are  not 
yet  fully  acquainted  with  the  news  it  brought,  and,  of  course,  there  is  no 
completion  of  the  action.  This  is  a  nice  distinction,  which  the  judicious 
pup»l  must  treasure  up.  But  had  the  steamer  been  in  port  two  or  three 
weeKS,  II  apporta  des  nouvelles  favorables,  might  be  used  ;  because  the 
knowledge  of  the  news  it  brought  might  be  supposed  complete,  and  we 
must  recollect  that  the  P*e(erit  is  used,  o?ily,  when  "  the  event  c~  action  u 
past  ard  finished.11 
81 


862 


SIXTY-EIGHTH     LESSON,    (ff.) 


VOCABULAIRE.     3me  Sec. 
SECOND  PLUPERFECT—  Preterit  Anleneur.i 

For  its  formation  and  use  see  ($  155.)    That  article  must  bo  carefullj 
learned. 

To  elucidate  the  two  rules  given  in  it,  we  here  put  a  few  examples. 
On  1st  Rule. — The  conjunctive  adverb  connected  with  the  simple  tense. 


Had  we  not  dined  when  he  came  ? 


Had  she  finished  when  you  called 
her?  (U55— 1.) 

Had  we  not  dined  when  he  came,  or 
used  to  come  ? 

She  had  finished  when  you  were  call- 
ing her,  or  used  to  call  her. 

llere,  the  Plusqueparfait  is  used,  whether  the  simple  ttnse  is  the  Parfaitt 
the  Preterit,  or  the  Imparfait. 

Rule  2d.     The  conjunctive  adverb  connected  with  the  compound  tense. 


N'avions-noua    pas   dine   quand    il 

vint  ? 
Avait-elle  nui  quand  vous  rappelStcs, 

ou  1'avez  appelee  ? 
N'avions-nous    pas   dine  quand    i) 

venait  ? 
Elle  avait  fini  qviand  VOL-S  1'appeJipz. 


Quand  Us  eurent  acheve  de  jouer,  ils 
se  mirent  a  chanter.  (Pret.) 

Quand  ils  avaient  Jini  de  jouer,  ilfl 
se  mettaient  a  chanter.  (Imparf.) 

Quand  j'ews  dine,  midi  sonna. 

Aussitot  que  j' 'avals  dine,  midi  son 
nait.  (Imparf.) 

II  cut  fini  en  un  moment. 

II  avail  fini  en  un  moment 


When  they  had  done  playing,  they  be- 
gan to  sing.  ($  155 — 2.) 

When  they  had  done  playing,  they 
usually  began  to  sing. 

When  I  had  dined,  it  struck  12. 

As  soon  as  1  had  dined,  it  used  to 
strike  12. 

He  had  done  in  a  moment,  (if  only 
once.) 

He  had  done  in  a  moment,  (if  more 
than  once.) 

SOIXANTE-HUITIEME  Tn^ME.     3me  Sec. 

Que  fites-vous  quand  vous  eutes  fini  votre  lettre?  J'allai  chez 
mon  frere,  qui  me  mena  au  paquebot  a  vapeur,  oil  j'eus  le  plaisir  de 
trouver  une  de  mes  anciennes  amies  que  je  n'avais  pas  vue  depuis 
plusieurs  annees.— rQue  faisait-elle  des  qu'elle  avait  fini  de  prendre 
sa  lee.  on  de  chant'?  Elle  allait  chez  son.  amie  Jeanne,  et  toutes 
deux  se  promenaien*  dans  le  jardin,  ou  elles  cueillaient,  ou  dea 
fleurs  pour  le  salon,  ou  des  fmita  pour  le  dejeuner. — Qu'as-tu  fait 
apres  t'etre  leve  ce  matin?  (not  past.) — Apres  avoir  lu  les  lettres  du 
comte  polonais,  j'ai  ete  voir  le  theatre  du  prince,  que  je  n'avais  paa 
encore  vu.  —  Que  fis-tu  hier  matin  apres  t;etre  leve?  J'allai  au 
marche  pour  y  acheter  nos  provisions,  et  quand  je  fus  revenu  a  la 
maison,  je  lus  mes  lettres  et  j'y  repondis. — Que  faisaient  vos  amis 


1  There  is  another  P-eterit  Anterieur,  called  the  Prflerit  Ante'riexr  In 
i,  which  is,  however,  seldom  employed. 


SIXTV-NINTH     LESSON.    (1.)  3G?i 

tousles  matins  a  la  campagne  Pete  dernier?  Us  prenaient  lenra 
fusils  et  se  rendaient  (se  rendre,  4,  to  repair,  to  go)  a  Photel  du 
village  pour  y  prendre  leurs  papiers  et  leurs  lettres. 

What  did  the  colonel  do  when  he  had  breakfasted,  this  morning  * 
He  shaved  and  went  out,  (not  past.) — Did  he  shave  and  go  out  yes- 
lerday,  after  breakfast,  also?  (past.)  No,  he  shaved  before  break- 
fast, and  went  out  after. — Had  he  gone  out  when  you  came  in? 
He  had  gone  out  long  before. — Did  he  read  the  gazette  before  ho 
went  otrt?  No,  he  read  something  else,  (quclqu'autre  chose.) — After 
reading,  did  he  do  anything  else  before  he  went  out?  He  smcked 
a  cigar. — Did  he  use  to  smoke  when  he  was  in  the  woods?  No, 
lie  did  not,  because  he  could  not  get  good  cigars,  and  rather  thar 
sinoke  bad  tobacco,  he  would  not  smoke  (622;  N.  1)  at  all. — What  did 
your  friend  do  after  he  had  been  walking?  He  went  to  the  baron's 
house. — Did  the  baron  receive  him  wrell?  Yes,  he  received  him 
as  well  as  he  had  (avail)  received  him  before. 

When  do  you  set  out?  I  do  not  set  out  till  (je  ne  pars  que)  to 
mo'.j-ow ;  for  before  I  leave  I  will  once  more  see  my  good  friends. — 
What  did  your  children  do  when  they  had  -breakfasted  ?  They 
went  a  walking  with  their  dear  preceptor,  (preccptcur.) — Where  did 
your  uncle  go  after  he  had  warmed  himself?  He  went  nowhere. 
After  he  had  warmed  himself  he  undressed  and  went  to  bed. — At 
what  o'clock  did  he  get  up?  He  got  up  at  sunrise. — Did  you  wake 
him  ?  I  had  no  need  to  wake  him,  for  he  had  got  up  before  me. — 
What  did  your  cousin  do  when  he  heard  of  the  death  (la  mort)  of 
his  best  friend?  He  was  much  afflicted,  (trcs-ajfligc,)  and  went  to 
bed  without  saying  a  word. — Did  you  shave  before  you  break- 
fasted? I  shaved  when  I  had  breakfasted. — Did  you  go  to  bed 
when  you  had  eaten  supper?  When  I  had  eaten  supper  I  wrote 
my  letters,  and  when  I  had  written  them  I  went  to  bed. 


SIXTY-NINTH  LESSON,  69th.— Soixante-ncuvieme  Lcron,  69mc. 
YOCABULAIRE.     Ire  Sea 


To  get  beaten,  (whipped.) 

To  get  paid. 

To  get  one's  self  invited  to  line. 

At  first. 

Firstlv,  ($  170.) 

Secondly. 

Thirdly,  &c. 


t  Se  faire  ba'tre. 

t  Se  faire  payer. 

t  Se  faire  inviier  a  diner. 

D'abord. 

Premierement,  en  premier  lieu. 

Secondement,  en  second  lieu. 

Troisiemement,en  troisieme  lien 


Is  your  mother  at  home  ?  \  ^otre  m!re  68t-c,1!e  ?h,ez  ellfl  ? 

(  Votre  mere  est-elle  a  la  maison  ? 


304 


SIXTY-NINTH    LESSON.    (1.) 


She  is.  She  is  not. 

J  am  going  to  her  house. 

A  cause,  a  reason. 

A  cause  of  complaint. 

A  cause  of  sadness. 

She  has  reason  to  be  sad. 

Grief,  sorrow,  sadness. 

Is  that  woman  ready  to  go  out  ? 

•She  is.    Is  she  not  ? 

Notwithstanding,  in  spite  of. 

Notwithstanding  that — you. 

In  epite  of  him,  her,  them. 

To  contrive,  to  manage. 

Do  you  manage  to  finish  your  work 

every  Saturday  night  ? 
Do  you  manage  to  have  your  work 

done  r.vcry  Saturday  night? 
Try  to  do  that  to  oblige  me. 

I  will  do  everything  to  oblige  you. 
To  command,  look  vpon,  overlook. 
Tin-  window  looks  into  the  street. 
Tin-  window  looks  out  upon  the  river. 
Th«»  hark-door  looks  into  the  garden. 

To  fasten,  to  tic.      '1  '<»  tii  his  shoes. 

He  \\  U  fasti  :i<  il  to  :i  ' 
I'nlil  you  »«/  home.  ($  151.) 


Elle  y  eat.  Elle  n'>  eat  pern. 

Je  vais  chez  elle. 

Un  sujet,  une  raison,  une  cau*e. 

Un  sujet  de  chagrin. 

Un  sujet  de  tristesse. 

Elle  a  un  sujet  de  tristesse. 

Le  chagrin,  la  tristesse. 

Cette  femme  est-clle  prete  a  sortrr  i 

Elle  1'est.  Ne  1'est-elle  pas  ? 

J\lalgre,  en  depit  de. 

Malgre  cela.         En  depit  de  vous. 

Malgre  lui,  elle.     En  ddpit  d'cux. 

Faire  en  sorte  de. 

Faites-vous  en  sorte  de  finir  votre 

ouvrage  tous  les  samedis  soir  ? 
Faites-vous  en  sorte  d' avoir  fini  votrc 

ouvrage  tous  les  samedis  soir  ?  - 
Faites  en  sorte  de  faire  cela  pou* 

in'ohliger. 

Je  furai  tout  pour  vous  obliger. 
Donner  sur. 

'.  .line  sur  la  rue. 
La  fcnTtrc  donnc  stir  la  rivi 
La    porte  dc  derricre  donne  sur   10 

jardin. 

-OS  SOllliL'rS. 

<  >n  rattai-ha  a  uu  ar;  : 

:    :i    ia 


maison. 
Soi>.  i  TH^MB,     Ire  Sec. 

Comme  M.  Salomon  vient  lard  pour  nous  faire  visile  !  11  vienl 
pour  se  faire  inviler  a  diner. — Allutcs-vous  chez  le  colonel  avant- 
hier?  Non,  je  n'y  allai  pas.  V  etes-vous  alle  ce  matin?  Non,  et 
je  n'irai  pas  avant  sa  soiree  musicale.  Et  pourquoi  pas?  D'abord, 
paree  que  je  ne  lui  dois  point  de  visile,  et  secondement,  parce  qu'ori 
pourrait  croire  que  je  veux  me  faire  inviter. — Ce  garQon  ne  s'est-ii 
pas  fait  battre?  11  est  si  mechant  qu'il  se  fit  batlre  deux  fois  la 

semaine  passee. — M.  D vous  doit-il  encore?     Non,  je  me  suis 

fait  payer. — Quel  sujet  de  chagrin  cette  jeune  dame  a-t-elle  ?  A-t- 
elle  perdu  son  mari?  Non,  elle  a  perdu  son  oiseau  favori.  Est-ce 
la  ce  qui  cause  son  chagrin?  Je  crois  que  oui. — Us  ne  veulent  paa 
que  vous  fassiez  cela.  N'importe,  je  le  ferai  en  depit  d'eux. — Fera- 
t-elle  en  sorte  de  venir? — Lorsqu'il  sut  qu'elle  nrirait  pas,  il  lit  en 
torte  do  s'y  rendre,  nrest-ce  pas ? 

When  had  you  finished  your  task  ?  I  had  finished  i*  when  you 
came  in.  ($155—- 1,  2.) — As  soon  as  Caesar  (Cesar)  had  crossed 


SIXTY- NINTH     LESSON.    (2.)  3G2 

(passer)  the  Rubicon,  he  had  no  longer  to  deliberate,  (dilibiftr:)  ho 
was  obliged  (devoir)  to  conquer  (vaincrc)  or  to  die. — An  emperor  (ur 
empcreur)  who  was  irritated  at  (irrite  contre)  an  astrologer,  (un  astro- 
logue,)  asked  him :  "  Wretch !  what  death  (de  qucllc)  dost  tliou  believe 
thou  wilt  die?"  "I  shall  die  of  a  fever,'"'  replied  the  astrologer. 
"  Thou  liest/7  said  the  emperor,  li  thou  wilt  die  this  instant  of  a  vio- 
lent death. ;;  As  soon  as  he  was  seized,  (saistr,)  he  said  to  the  em- 
peror, ''Sire,  (Seigneur*)  order  some  one  to  feel  (ordonnez  qiSon  nit 
tdte)1  my  pulse,  (242,  Obs.  55)  and  it  will  be  found  that  I  have  a 

Tiiis  sally  (cette  saillie)  saved  his  life. 

Do  you  perceive  yonder  house  ?  (ccttc  nwiaon  Id-bas  ?)  I  do. — Had 
you  perceived  it  before?  I  had  not. — Would  you  have  perceived  it 
if  I  had  not  shown  it  to  you?  May  be  so,  (pent  ctre  que  OMI,)  may 
be  not.  But  now  that  you  have  shown  it  to  me,  what  kind  of  a 

it?  It  is  an  inn,  (une  aiibcrgc.) — If  you  agree,  we  will  go 
into  it,  to  drink  a  glass  of  wine  or  cider,  for  I  am  very  thirsty.  Try 
(faitcs  en  sortc)  to  keep  your  thirst  until  you  get  home.  Itdoesnot 
Fuit  men  like  us  to  enter  (dans)  inns.  1  see  that  the  inn  overlooks 
the  river.  And  as  the  house  is  high,  it  commands  a  large  portion 
of  the  country. — You  appear  sad;  what  cause  of  grief  have  you? 
If  you  were  as  thirsty  as  I  am,  you  would  also  have  a  cause  for 
grief. — Are  you  always  thirsty  when  you  see  an  inn?  I  once  saw 
a  small  black  horse  that  managed  to  stop  at.  every  inn  before  which 
he  passed.  Ah!  ah!  I  guess  he  was  thirsty  too. — Did  the  colonel 
you  last  week]  No,  he  could  not.  He  might  have  done  it,  if 
his  nephew  had  not  spent  all  his  money;  but  he  will  manage  to  pay 
me  to-mor: 

iMe  Sec. 

To  dro'rn.  I   Xoycr,  1. 

To  dro»?n  a  dog,  a  cat.  I   Noyer  un  chien,  un  cliai. 

To  be  drowned,  to  be  drowning.        )   g 
To  drown  one's  self,  to  get  drowned.  $ 


To  leap  through  the  window. 

To  throw  out  of  the  window. 

I  am  drowning. 

He  jumped  out  of  the  window. 

The  cattle. 

To  keep  warm.     To  keep  cool. 

To  keep  clean. 


Sauter  par  la  fenetre. 

Jeter  par  la  fenetre. 

Je  me  noie.  (144 — 3.) 

II  sauta  par  la  fenetre. 

Le  betail;  plur.  les  bestiaux 

t  Se  tenir  chaud.     t  Se  teni 

Se  tenir  propre. 


To  keep  one's  self  up,  straight.  ,   Se  tenir  droit. 

Keep  yourself  properly.  .  Tenez-vous  comine  il  faut . . . 

To  keep  on  one's  guard  against  some  I  t  Se  tenir  en  garde  coritre  quciqu  un 
one. 

1  Ordontier  que  . .  .  (c*der  that . . .)  requires  the  subjunctive  alter  iu 


30(5 


SIXTY-NINTH    LESSON.    (2.) 


Keep  on   your  guard    against   that 

man. 
To  take  care  (to  beware)  of  somebody 

or  something. 
If  you  do  not  take  care  of  that  horse, 

it  will  kick  you. 

Take  care  that  you  do  not  fall. 

To  keep  on  one's  guard  against  some 
one. 

To  beware  of  somebody  or  some- 
thing. 

Keep  on  your  guard  against  that 
man. 

Take  CMIT. 

A  thought.         An  idcn.        A  sally. 

To  bo  struck  with  a  thought. 

A  thought  strikes  me. 

That  nrvcr  crossed  my  mind. 

To  I  nit'  it  into  one  $  hunt. 

He  took  it  into  his  head  lately  to  rob 
me. 

What  is  in  your  head  ? 


t  Tenez-vous  en  garde   centre   oe< 

homme. 
Prcndre    garde   d   quelqiCun   ou    d 

quelque  chose. 
Si  vous  ne  prenez  pas  garde  a  cc 

cheval,  il  vous  donnera  un  coup 

de  pied. 
T  Prenez  garde  de  tombor. 

*  Se  tenir  (etre)  sur  ses  ganK 

quelqu'un. 

*  Se  garder  de  quelqu'un  ou  quelque 

chose. 
T  Tenez-vous  sur  vos  gardes  avee 

cet  homme. 
Proncz  garde. 

Une  pensde.  Yne  idee.    Une  saillie. 
Venir  enpensce,  fa  1'idt'e,  a  1'eiiprit.) 
II  me  vient  unc  p< 
Cela  ne  m'cst  jamais  vcnu  a  i 
t  S'avi< 
t  II  s'avisa  Pautrc  jo'jr  dc  me  volrr 

t  DC  r; 


Soix  2de  Sec. 

Avez-vous  vu  ce  mechant  petit  garcon  attacher  ce  pauvrc  peli 
chien,  le  jeler  dans  hi  riviere,  et  le  noyer  ?  Si  je  1'avais  vu,  j'auraH 
fait  en  sorte  de  Pen  empecher.  J  de  le  faire;  mais  je  n'ai 

pu  y  reuss'ir. — La  petile  fille  qui  tomba  dans  Peau,  de  la  fenetre  dn 
bateau  a  vapeur,  se  noya-t-elle  ?  Non,  on  la  sauva,  dans  un  petit 
bateau. — Le  voleur  fut-il  pris?  Non,  il  sauta  par  la  fenetre  et  fit  en 
sorte  de  se  sauver. — Vous  etes  sur  un  bane  casse ;  prenez  garde  de 
tomber.  J'y  prendrai  garde. — Voyez  comme  cette  jeune  demoiselle 
aux  cheveux  noirs  se  tient  bien  !  Oui,  c'est  un  plaisir  de  voir  comme 
elle  se  tient ! — Si  vous  vous  approchez  trop  de  ce  cheval,  il  vous  don- 
nera un  coup  de  pied.  Py  prendrai  garde. — Faites-vous  des  affaires 
avec  cet  homme  la-bas  ?  Lequel  ?  Celui  au  chapeau  blanc.  Non, 
j'en  faisais  autrefois;  mais  a  present  je  me  tiens  sur  mes  gardes 
centre  lui. — Ne  s'avisa-t-elle  pas  de  revenir  ici Tautre  jour?  Ne 
craignez  rien.  II  ne  s^avisera  plus  de  le  faire. 

You  appear  very  well  satisfied ;  what  thought  struck  you  1  Some- 
ching  which  had  never  crossed  my  mind  before. — What  is  it  ?  Should 
I  tell  yon,  (if  I  were,)  you  would  be  as  wise  as  I. — Did  William 
jump  out  of  the  window?  Yes,  he  did. — What  did  he  do  aitei 
lumping  out  of  the  window  ?  After  he  had  jumped,  he  first  ran  to 
(he  garden  gate,  opened  it,  and  then  ran  towards  the  bridge  — Did  hu 


SIXTY- NINTH     WESSON.    (3.)  I>fi7 

go  as  far  as  the  bridge  ?-    No,  there  were  some  cattle  in  the  road,  and 

aid  ot  them,  so  that  he  stopped.    Are  the  cattle  as  large  here 

the  caltie  (bestiaux)  are  larger  there  than  here. — How 

i  keep  mys'-lf  warm  ?    Put  on  a  warmer  coat. — Where  must  I 

out  the  butter  to  keep  it  cool  ?     You  must  put  it  in  the  cellar. — Who 

is  that  little  boy  .'     Il«-  is  tae  baker's  son. — I  admire  him,  for  he 

himself  so  clean. — Does  your  cook  keep  her  kitchei. 

,  hy  do  the  cattle  go  in  the  sha 

Did  Thomas  dare  (s'aviscr)  to  ask  ypu  for  money  ?   Yes,  he  did.— 

Did  you  lend  him  anyl     No,  I  was  on  my  guard  against  him. — • 

What  was  the  cause  of  your  quarrel  with  the  gardener's  boy?     He 

took  it  into  his  head  (or  he  dared)  to  call  me  a  fool. — Did  you  not 

him  after  he  had  called  you  so  '    1  ily,  (comm  :l  faut.) 

— Why  do  you  laugh  at  me  ?     I  do  not  laugh  at  you,  but  at  your 

not  look  like  (G3J)  yn(;r>  f    It  does  not  look  like  it,  for 

mine  is  short  (court)  and  yours  is  too  lo  i  mine  is  black  and 

-  is  green. — Why  do  yi  i:h  (M-1)  that  man?     I 

would  not  associate  with  him  if  he  had  not  rendered  me  great  ser- 

jj  (le  service.)     Do  not  trust  him,  (nc  vous  y  ficz  pas:)  for  if  you 

are  not  on  your  guard,  he  will  cheat  (trompcr)  you. 

Yo(  3nie  Sec. 


/il.-i  »»r  hi  r  jiltict-. 
ythini;  in  r 

•\round,  round.  All  around. 

We  sailed  around  England. 

They  went  about  the  town  to 
all  the  curiosities. 

To  go  around  the  house.  < 

To  go  about  the  house. 
How  much  does  that  cost  yo2  ? 
How  much  does  this  book  cost  you  ? 
It  costs  me  three  crowns  and  a  half. 
That  table  costs  him  twenty  crowns. 
A  lone,  ly  one's  self. 
I  was  alone.      One  woman  only. 
One  God. 

Goa  alone  can  do  that. 
The  very  thought  of  it  is  criminal. 
A  single  reading  is  not  sufficient  to 
satisfy  a  mind  that  has  a  true  taste. 
To  kill  ly  shooting. 
To  blow  out  some  one's  brains. 


-t  ma,  votrc,  sn  place. 

II  faut  mettre  chaquc  chose  a  sa  place. 

ur.  Tout  autour. 

Nous  naviguamcs  autour  de  1*  Angle- 

terre.  - 

t  Us  allcrcnt  ca  et  la  dans  la  ville, 
pour  en  voir  toutes  les  curiositiio. 
Aller  autour  de  la  maison. 
Faire  le  tour  de  la  maison. 
Aller  c.a  et  la  dans  la  maison. 
Combien  cela  vous  coute-t-il  ? 
Combien  ce  livre  vous  coute-t-il? 
11  me  coute  trois  dcus  et  demi. 
Cetle  table  lui  coute  vingt  dcus, 
Seul ;  fem.  seule. 
J'etais  seul.         Une  seule  femrro. 
Un  seul  Dieu. 
Dieu  seul  peut  faire  cela. 
La  seule  pense'e  de  cela  est  criminellc 
Une  seule  lecture  ne  suffit  pas  pom 
contenter  un  homme  qui  a  da  gout 
Tucr  d'un  coup  djarme  a  feu. 
Brulcr  la  cervelle  a  quelqu'un. 


368 


SIXTY-NINTH     LESSON.    (3.) 


To  shoot  one's  self  with  a  pistol. 

He  has  blown  out  his  brains. 

He  has  blown  out  his  brains  with  a 

pistol. 
He  served  for  a  long  time,  acquired 

honorr,  and  died  contented. 


Se  bruler  la  cervclle  d  un  co'ip  ;\9 

pistolet. 

II  s'est  brule  la  cervelle. 
II  s'est  brule  la  cervelle  d'un  coup 

de  pistolet. 
II    servit    long-temps,   parvint   aux 

honneurs,  et  mourut  content. 


O6.i.  153'.  In  narratives,  when  the  verbs  are  in  the  £:.Tne  tense,  tlis  OTO- 
auuns  of  the  third  person  are  not  repeated. 

He  arrived  poor,  grew  rich  in  ashcfrt  I  II  arriva  pauvre,  devin,  ric)^  en  pet, 
time,  and  lost  all  in  a  still  shorter  de  temps,  et  perdit  tout  en  inning 
time.  I  de  tempe  encc"e. 

SoiXAXTE-XEUvifeME  JntiME.     3me  Sec. 

A  volre  place  je  ne  laisserais  pas  mes  livres  et  mes  papiers  <;a  ei 
.a,  mais  je  mettrais  chaque  cbose  a  sa  place.  Je  tache  do  tenii 
chaque  chose  a  sa  place  ;  mais  je  ne  puis  y  reussir.— Pourquoi  a-t-on 
mis  cela  autour  de  ce  jeune  arbre?  Pour  empecher  le  betail  de  1« 
mordre  et  de  le  casser. — Le  capitaine  navigua-t-il  autour  de  Pen- 
droit?  II  navigua  tout- au  tour  dans  son  bateau.  Ne  descendit-il 
pas  1  Si  fait,  il  descendit.  N'altacha-t-il  pas  son  bateau  a  un  arbre  1 
II  Py  attacha. — Lut-il  le  livre  ?  II  le  hit  en  un  seul  jour. — Etait-elle 
seule  quand  le  voleur  entra?  Oui,  elle  etait  seule.  Voulut-il  lui 
bruler  la  cervelle  d'un  coup  de  pistolet?  Oui;  mais  comme  elle 
allait  prendre  line  prise  de  tabac,  elle  jeta  tout  son  tabac  dans  les 
yeux  du  voleur,  qui  lira  son  coup  sans  la -toucher.  II  lui  vint  une 
heureuse  idee,  n'est-ce  pas?  Oui,  elle  cut  vraiment  une  heureuse 
pensee. — Combien  ce  parapluie  vous  coute-t-il? — Ce  drap-la  voua 
a-t-il  coutc  4  gourdes  la  verge? — Cette  maison  lui  coutera  aumoins 
15;000  gourdes,  n:est-ce  pas  ? — Dieu  seul  connait  notreJcsJijJce,  (fate,) 
n'est-ce  pas  ? 

AVhat  is  th?  matter  \vith  you  ?  Why  do  you  look  so  melancholy  ? 
(avoir  Vair  mclancolique?) — I  should  not  look  so  melancholy  if  i  had 
no  reason  to  be  sad.  I  have  heard  just  now  (492)  that  one  of  my 
best  friends  has  shot  himself  with  a  pistol,  and  tr  at  one  of  my  wife's 
best  friends  has  drowned  herself. — Where  has  she  drownod  herself1 
She  drowned  herself  in  the  river  which  is  behind  her  house.  Yes- 
terday, at  four  o'clock  in  the  morning,  she  rose  without  saying  a 
word  to  any  one,  (d  pcrsonne,)  leaped  out  of  the  window  which 
looks  into  the  garden,  and  threw  herself  into  th«  ri^er,  where  she 
was  drowned. — I  have  a  great  mind  (grarde  envie)  to  bathe  (st 
baigttfr)  to-day. — Where  will  you  bathe  ?  In  the  rivr^. — Are  you 
not  afraid  of  teing  drowned?  Oh5  no!  I  can  swim.-  Who  taught 


SEVENTIETH     LESSON.    (1.) 


369 


you  1     Last  summer  I  took  a  few  lessons  in  the  swimm IT /g- school 
&  Vecole  de  natation.) 

Were  you  not  afraid  to  go  into  the  \vater  before  you  could  s\vim^ 
A  little,  but  I  could  not  have  learned  without  going  into  the  water. 
—You  did  not  think  like  the  man  who  said  :  I  will  go  into  the  water 
only  when  I  know  how  to  swim.  There  are  many  who,  like  thai 
man,  think  that  they  will  try  to  speak  French  only  when  they  know 
>_0v.— Do  they  not  know  that  if  they  do  not  try  to  speak  they  can- 
not  learn?  I  guess  they  forget  it.— Why  do  you  work  so  much? 
I  work  in  order  to  be  one  day  useful  to  my  country  .—Would  you 
copy  your  exercises  if  I  copied  mine  ?  I  would  copy  them  if  you 
copied  yours.— Would  your  sister  have  transcribed  her  letter  if  I  had 
transcribed  mine  ?  She  would  have  transcribed  it.— Would  she  have 
set  out  if  I  had  set  out?  I  cannot  tell  you  what  she  would  havo 
done  if  you  had  set  out. 


SKYKNTiKTII   LESSON,  70th.—  Soixante  ct  dixicmc  Lcrt  .1,  70me. 
YOCABULAIUK,  Ire  Sec.  * 

As  we  began  to  use  the  verb  in  the  Imperative  mood  from  the  8th  lesson, 
and  referred"  to  the  article  in  the  Synopsis  in  the  (252),  and  all  subsequent 
lessons, 


That 


Till:   1.MIT.UAT1VF, 

will  be  nothing  new  to  the  student.     However,  as  that  mood  must  be  found 
Fomewhere,  we  place  it  hrr  r  its  formation  and  use,  (*>  l.'.O.) 

article  must  be  carefully  studied. 

Have  patience. 

•a)  attentive,  patient,  affable. 
Go  (ye)  there.         Do  not  go  there. 


Give  it  to  me.   Do  not  give  it  to  me. 

Send'it  to  him. 
Lend  it  to  me. 

Have  the  goodness  to  hand  me  that 
plate. 

To  borrow of  or  from. 

I  will  borrow  some  money  of  you. 

I  will  borrow  that  money  of  you. 

Borrow  it  of  (or  from)  him. 

Do  not  borrow  it  of  him. 

I  borrow  it  from  him. 

Do  not  tell  him  or  her.        Tell  her. 

Return  it  to  them.  ($  150- -8.) 


Ayez  patience. 

Soyez  attentif,  patient,  affable. 
Allez-y.  N'y  allez  pas.  ($  150—8.) 
Donnez-le-moi.       Ne  me  le  donnel 

pas. 

Envoyez-le-lui. 
Pretez-le-moi. 
Ayez  la  bonte  de  me  passer  ce  plat. 

Emprunter,  1 ...  d. 

Je  veux  vous  emprunter  de  Targem 

Je  veux  vous  emprunter  cet  argenu 

Empruntez-le-lui. 

Ne  le  lui  empruntez  pas. 

Je  le  lui  emprunte. 

Ne  le  lui  dites  pas.       Dites-le-iuL 

Rendcz-le,  (-la-)-leur. 


3TO 


SEVENTIETH     LESSON.     (1.) 


Do  not  return  it  to  them. 

Patience,  impatience. 

'Die  neighbor. 

Die  snuff-box.         The  segar-box. 

i^ood.    Be  not  (so).  ($  150—8.) 
Know  it.  Do  not. 

Obey  your  masters,  and  never  give 

tl.jin  any  trouble. 

I'M)-  what  you  owe,  comfort  the  af- 
. ,  and  do  good  to  those  that 
have  offended  you. 
Love  God,  and  thy  neighbor  as  thy- 
self. 
Ton  f-y  your  father, 

] i tort.          Comfort  them. 
To  olii ml.  nd  no  one. 

;il ways  love  and  practise  vir- 
.nd  we  shall  be  happy  both  in 
tins  life  and  in  the  i  > 
To  practise 

'Tuscan  shoot  best. 

riend. 
ss  your- 

r«>    makr   one'a 

-tood. 
T.»  MCMtOffl. 

Children  must  <  arly  be  ace 
lo  labor. 

'a  self  to  something. 

'oincd  to  n  : 
\  am  an   istomed  to  it. 


Ne  le  leur  rendez  pas. 

La  patience,  1'impatience. 

Le  prochain. 

La  tabatiere.        La  boite  a  c:gaied, 

Soyez  bons.          Ne  le  eoycz  pas. 

Sachez-le.  Ne  le  sachez  paa. 

Obeissez  a  vos  maitres,  et  ne   Itm 

donnez  jamais  de  chagrin. 
Payez  ce  que  vous  devez,  consolei 

les  malheureux,  et  faitesdu  bicn  a 

ceiuc  qui  vous  ont  ofli 

/.  lo  bon  Dieu,  et  le  ju 

Consoler,  1.  les. 

OHenser,  1.      N'ollcnscz  personne. 
Aimons  et    pratiquons   toujours   la 
•us  scrons  hcureux  dani 
cette  vie  ct  dans  1'a 
Prmlijtu 
• 

Erprtsi 
Kxprimcz  votre  si» 

con 
Accou: 

S'acc< 

;  ust. 


SOIXANTE    ET    DIXI^ME    Tll£>: 


iye  •  d€  la  padeocej  soyez  attentif,  et  vous 

iTotre  paliont  ct  uttentif.  —  Si  vous  avezina  \ 

dniiiu>/-la-moi.     Je  YOUS  Taurais  dt'ja  donnr  iri. 

HitM-  ilos  (]iic  jo  Tens  finie,  je  la  mis  dans  mon  pupitre  pour  vo. 

er,  mais  vous  ne  vinles  pas.  —  Faites  vc>  -.rquoi  no 

les  faites-vous  pas  ?     Mon  frere  n'est  pas  a  la  II  ne  faut  pas 

.]ue  vous  les  lui  fassiez  faire.  Je  ne  les  lui  fait  pas  faire,  mais  ii  a 
hi  clef  dti  pupitre.  Non,  la  voici.  Ouvrcz-le,  prenez  votre  livre, 
votre  cahier,  et  tout  ce  qu'il  vous  faut,  et  commencez.  Je  vai? 
nrettre  ii  1'instant.  —  Que  fait  Sara?  Elle  lit  le  livre  que  vous  lui 
Rvez  prete.  Kile  a  tort  d'etre  toujours  a  lire.  Dites-lui  cle  dessiner 
ce  paysage.  (671.)  Et  lorsqu'elle  1'aura  fini,  pourra-t-elle  se  mettre  a 


SEVENTIETH      LISSON.    (2.)  371 

In  lecture  ?  (reading  .dors  faites-lui  dediner  (.o  decline)  quel* 

ques  noms  avec  des  adjectifs.  Comment?  Comme  ceci:  La  belle 
pomme,  de  la  belle  pomme,  a  la  belle  pomme.  Les  poires  mures, 
(ripe  pears.)  des  poi.  .  aux  poires  mures. 

Have  patience,  in y  dear  friend,  and  be  not  sad  ;  for  sadness  alters 

(changer)  nothing,  and  impatience  makes  bad  worse,  (empirer  le 

mal.)     Be  not  afraid  of  your  creditors;  be  sure  that  they  will  do  you 

DO  ha  |  ou  cannot  pay  them  yet. — Pay  me  what 

you  owe  me,  will  you  '.     As  soon  as  I  have  money,  I  will  pay  all 

.hat  you  nave  advanced  (avanccr)  for  me.     Don't  you  forget!  you 

1     I  shall  not  turret,  you  may  depend  npon  it,  for  I  think  of  it 

(j'ii  ay.     1  am  your  debtor,  (lc  dtbitcur,)  and  I  shall 

-  r)  it. — What  a  beautiful  inkstand  you  have  there ! 

it  me. — What  do  yon  wi-h  to  do  with  it?     I  wish  to  show 

•  of  it,  and  do  not  break  it. — 

What  do  j  :  my  brother?    I  want  to  borrow  some  money 

of  him. — Burrow  some  of  somebody  else,  (d  nn  autrc.) — If  he  will 

not  1.  will  borrow  some  of  somebody  else.     You  will 

do  well. — Do  not  wish  for  (sottkaitcr)  what  you  cannot  have,  but  bo 

contented  with  what  Providence  (la  Providence)  has  given  you,  and 

remember  that  there  are  many  men  who  have  not  what  you  have. 

ifl  short,  (court,)  let  us  endeavor  (651)  to  make  it  (563,  Obs. 

irreeable  (agreablc)  as  possible,  (qu'il  cst  possible.)     But  let 

•member  that  the  abuse  (Vabus)  of  pleasure  (in  the  plural 

•merCj  fern.) — What  must  we  do  in  order 

«  love  and  practise  virtue,  and  you  will 

be  ha  fe  and  in  the  next. 

2de  Sec. 


ivc  the  habit  of. 
Ot  express  myself  in  French, 
for  I  am  not  in  the  habit  of  speak - 

You  speak  prop- 
To  converge,  to  chatter,  to  prate. 
\  prattler. 
A.  chatterer. 

To  practise.       I  practise  speaking. 
To  permit,  to  allow. 

Permit  me  to  go  (there.)  I  do. 


Avoir  riiabhude  dc  . . 

Je  ne  puis  pas  bien  m'exprimer  en 

Fransais,  parce  que  jc  n'ai  pas  1'ha- 

bitude  de  parler. 
Vous  parlez  comme  il  faut. 
Carter,  1.  Bavarder,  1.  Ja*cr,  1. 
Un  causeur,  fern,  euse.1 
Un  ja8eur,/em.  euse. 
Exercer,  1.      Je  m'exerce  a  parler. 
Permeltrc*  2,  de.  (Comrr.e   mettre 

25',  331.) 
Permettez-moi  d'y  aller.        Je  voui 

le  permets. 


TJne  cansevtc  means  also  a  small  sofa  for  two  persons. 


872 


SEVENTIETH    1  CSSON.    (2.) 


I  do  not  permit  her  to  go. 

The  permission,  the  permit. 

Do  good  to  the  poor,  have  compassion 
on  the  unfortunate,  and  God  will 
take  care  of  the  rest. 

To  do  good  to  some  one. 

To  have  compassion  on  some  one. 

Compassion.      Pity.      The  rest. 

If  he  comes,  tell  him  I  am  in  the  gar- 
den, under  the  jasmin  bower. 


Je  ne  lui  permets  pas  d  y  allcr. 

La  permission,  le  permis. 

Faites  du  bien  aux  pauvres,  aye 
compassion  des  malheureux,  fit  1» 
bon  Dieu  aura  soin  du  reste. 

Faire  du  lien  d  quelqu'un. 

Avoir  compassion  de  quelqu'un. 

La  compassion.  La  pitie.  Le  reste. 

S't'Zvient,  dites-luiquejesuisau  jar- 
din,  sous  le  berceau  de  jasmin. 


Obs.  154.     The  letter    suffers  elision  in  the  conjunction  si,  if,  before  the 
personal  pronouns,  il,  he    Us,  they ;  but  not  before  elle  or  elles.  (212,  06s.  47.) 

Ask  the  merchant  whether  he  can  lot  |  Demandez  au  marchand  s'il  peut  mo 
me   have  the   horse    at  the   price         donner  le  cheval  au  prix  quo  je  hn 


ai  ofTert. 
j  ai  lu,  et  Von  m'a  raconte. 


which  I  have  offered  him. 
I  read,  and  was  told. 

06s.  155.     The  indefinite  pronoun  on  takes  a  euphonic  Z'  after  the 
ct,  ou,  ou,  si,  que,  and  qui. 

There  they  laugh  and  weep  by  turns. 
If  they  knew  what  you  have  done. 
The   country   where   diamonds  arc 

found. 
You.  have  been,  or  will  soon  be  told. 


We  say  with  precision  what  we  un- 
derstand well. 

Whom  do- people  love  ?  Those  to 
whom  they  owe  their  happiness. 

Can  one  be  great  without  being  just  ? 

One  can  be  great  onlf  inasmuch  as 
lie  is  just. 


On  y  rit  et  Von  y  pleure  tour  a  tour. 
Si  Von  savait  ce  que  vous  avez  fait. 
Le  pays  ou  Von  trouve  le  diamant. 


On   vous   a  dit,  ou   Von  vous  dira 

bit-ntot. 
Ce  que  Von  concpit   bien  o'cnonce 

clairement. 
Qui  aime-t-on  ?  On  aime  ccux  u.  quj 

Ton  doit  son  bonheur. 
Peut-on  etre  grand  sans  etre  juste  ? 
On   ne  peut  etre   grand   qu'auiar.l 

que  Ton  est  juste. 


Obs.  156.  But-  the  euphonic  Z'  is  omitted,  when  on  is  followed  by  le,  la, 
or  les.  Say  :  Je  ne  veux  pas  qu'on  le  tenrmente,  I  do  not  wish  him  to  be 
molested,  and  not  que  Von  le,  &c.,  which  would  be  harsher  than  qu'on  le. 

SOIXANTE   ET   DIXI^ME    TH&ME.       2de  S«C. 

Boa  jour,  Mile.  N . . . .  Ah !  vous  voila  enfin.  Je  vous  ai  attendue 
avec  impatience. — Vous  etes  une  causeuse,  je  crois.  Vous  me  par 
donnerez,  n'est-ce  pas,  ma  chere  ?  Je  n'ai  pas  cause,  je  vous  assure , 
mais  je  n'ai  pas  pu  venir  (N.  622)  plus  tot.  Permettez-moi  de  voir 
ce  que  vous  avez  apporte.  Vous  permeltre  de  le  regarder  !  Je  Pai 
apporte  erpres  (on  purpose)  pour  vous  le  montrer.  Tenez,  le  voila, 
prenez-le. — Je  le  tiens.  Ah!  que  c'estjoli!  Vous  exercez-vous  a 
peindre  ?  Je  pratique  quelque  fois.  Mais  comment  se  porte  madams 
votre  mere  7  On  dit  qu:elle  se  porte  mieux  depuis  qu'elle  est  aux  emu 


BEVEN  TV-FIRST     LESSON.    (1.)  378 

(at  the  springs)  et  Fon  croit  qu'elle  sera  bientot  guerie.  Que  je  suis 
charmee  de  1'apprendre  ! — Votre  pere'vous  permit-il  d'aller  au  bal 
avant-hier?  Oui,  des  que  je  lui  eus  demande  il  m'en  donna  la  per- 
mission.—Salomon  a-t-il  compassion  des  pauvres?  Lui!  II  n'a 
compassion  de  personne. — Parlons  Franc,  ais.  Ayez  la  bonte  de  par- 
ler,  vous;  et  moi,  je  vous  repondrai  en  Anglais.  Vous  parlez  tout 
arssi  bien  que  moi.  Vous  plaisantez,  (plaisantei,  l;  to  jest.)  Non, 
jf  ne  plaisante  pas.  Vous  me  flattez  pour  me  faire  parler. 

Since  (puisquc)  we  \vish  to  be  happy,  let  us  do  good  to  the  poor, 
and  let  us  have  compassion  on  the  unfortunate ;  let  us  obey  our  mas- 
ters, and  never  give  them  any  trouble ;  let  us  comfort  the  unfortunate 
(Ics  infortuncSj)  love  our  neighbor  as  ourselves,  and  not  hate  those 
(et  nc  ha'issonspas  ccux)  that  have  offended  us;  in  short,  (en  un  mot.) 
let  us  always  fulfil  our  duty,  and  God  will  take  care  of  the  rest. — My 
son,  in  order  to  be  loved  you  must  be  laborious  (laborieux)  and  good. 
Thou  art  accused  (on  t' accuse)  of  having  been  idle  and  nenliircn/ 
(negligent)  in  thy  affairs.  Thou  knowest,  however,  (pourtant.)  that 
thy  brother  has  been  punished  for  having  been  naughty.  Being 
lately  (l-autre  jour)  in  town,  I  received  a  letter  from  thy  tutor,  in 
which  he  strongly  (fort)  complained  of  thee. 

Do  not  weep,  (pleurcr ;)  now  go  into  thy  room,  learn  thy  lesson, 
and  be  a  good  boy,  (sagc})  otherwise  (autrement)  thou  wilt  get  nothing 
for  dinner,  (d  diner.)  I  shall  be  so  good,  my  dear  father,  that  you 
will  certainly  (ccrtaincmcnt)  be  satisfied  with  me. — Has  the  little  boy 
kept  his  word  ?  (tcnir*  parole?)  Not  quite;  for  after  having  said 
that,  he  went  into  his  room,  took  his  books,  sat>down  at  the  table, 
(sc  mit  d  unc  table.)  and  fell  asleep,  (s1  cndornrit.)  "He  is  a  very 
good  boy  when  he  sleeps,"  said  his  father,  seeing  him  some  timo 
(qitelque  temps)  after. — Do  you  understand  all'I  am  telling  you?  t  I 
understand  (entendre)  and  comprehend  (comprcndre*)  it  very  well; 
but  I  cannot  express  myself  well  in  French,  because  I  am  not  in  the 
habit  of  speaking  it.  That  will  come  in  (avec  le)  time.  I  wish  (sou- 
hotter)  it  with  all  my  heart. 


SEVENTY-FIRST  LESSON,  71st.— Soixante-onzicme   Le$on,  lime. 

VOCABULAIRE.       IrC    Sec. 
fo  stind  up.    To  remain  up.  I  Eire  debout.        Hester  debou 


Will   >TDU  permit  rne  to  go   to    the 

market  ? 
To  ha  ft  en,  to  mal\e  haste. 


Voulcz-vous  me  permettre  d'aller  an 

marche  ? 
t  Sc  depfcher,  1 ,  de. 


574 


SEVENTY-FIRST     LESSON.    (l.J 


Wake  haste,  and  return  soon. 
Go  and  tell  him  that  I  cannot  come 
to-day. 


Depechez-vous,  et  revcLez  LicAtOt. 
Allez  lui  dire  quo  je  ne  puis  veni,' 
aujourd'hui. 


Obs.  157.  In  French  the  yerbs  alter,*  to  go,  and  venir,*  to  como,  art 
always  followed  by  the  infinitive  instead  of  another  tense  used  in  English, 
and  the  crnj  unction  and  is  not  rendered.  ($  150 — 12.) 


He  came  and  told  us  he  could  not 
come. 

GJo  and  see  your  friends. 

To  weep,  to  cry. 

The  least  blow  makes  him  cry. 

To  frighten. 

To  be  frightened,  to  startle. 

The  least  thing  frightens  him  or  her. 

Be  not  frightened. 

To  ho  frightened  at  something. 

What  are  you  frightened  at  ? 

At  my  expense. 

At  Ijis,  her,  ourexpct, 

At  other  people's  expense. 

That  man  I.  rybody's  ex- 

pense. 

To  depend. 

That  depends  u;;on  circumstances. 

That  does  not  drpeml  upon  nn-. 

It  depends  upon  him  to  do  that. 

0  !   yes,  it  depends  upon  him. 
To  astonish,  to  surprise. 

To  le  astonish*-'!,  to  womlcr. 
To  lc  surprised  at  something. 

1  am  surprised  at  it. 

An  extraordinary  thing  happened 
which  surprised  everybody. 

7«i  ttikc  place,  to  h<i}>i> 

Many  things  have  passed  which  will 

surprise  you. 
To  surpi  v<e. 
Many  days  will  pass  before  that. 

A  man  came  in  wl  ,D  asked  me  how  1 
was.- 


II  vint  noud  dire  qu'il  ne  pouvait  pat 

venir. 

Allez  voir  vos  amis. 
Pleurcr,  1. 

Le  moindrc  *ioup  le  lait  pleuer 
Ejfrayer,  1.  * 
'/v/r/rr,  1. 
L:i  moindrc  chose  I'cflraic. 

;s  cliraye/  pas. 
S'cflraycr  de  quelque  chose. 
De  quoi  vous  efirayez-vous  f 
A  mes  depens. 
A  ses,  a  nos  depens. 
Aux  depens  d'autrui. 
Get  hommc  vit  aux  depens  tic  tout 

le  monde. 
Dtpendre  de. 
Ccla  <! 

:is  dc  moi. 

::d  ili-  lui  dc  fnire  ct-ln. 
Oh  !  oui,  ccla  depend  dc  lui. 


v*. 

S'itonncr,  1. 

Lire  etonne  >' 

J'en  suis  etonne. 

11  arriva  une  <  -rdinairc  qui 

dtonna  tout  le  monde. 
Se  passer,  1. 
11  s'est  passe   plusieurs  choses  qui 

vous  surprcndront. 
Surprendre,*  (comme  prcndre.) 
II  se  passera  plusieurs  jours  avani 

cela. 
II  entra  un  homme  qui  me  demuida 

comment  je  me  portais. 

TH£ME.     Ire  Sec. 

Pleure/-vous,  mon  petit  bon  homme,  (a  familiar  expression  con- 
stantly used  for:  my  little  boy,)  parce  que  vous  etes  oblige  de  rester 
doJout?  Oui,  il  y  a  si  long-temps  que  je  suis  debout  que  je  suie 
tre&-fatigue.  Si  1'on  vous  permettait  de  vous  asseoir,  seriez-vcus  plua 


SEVENTY-FIRST     LESSON.     (2.) 

sage  une  autre  fois?  Je  tacherais  de  Tetre.  Je  cjmple  sur  votr 
parole.  Asseyez-vous  la-bas,  (yonder.) — Si  vous  aviez  louche  cette 
petite  fille,  eile  aurait  pleure,  car  elle  pleure  pour  la  moindre  chose. 
Je  suis  etonne  <A'!t'elle  (§151)  ne  pleure  pas,  car  je  lui  ai  donne  un 
coup.  Alors,  il  est  vraiment  etonnant  qu'e\\G  ne  pleure  pas. — Aux 
depens  de  qui  ave/.-vous  fait  ces  belles  emplettes?  A  mes  propret 
depens;  je  n'en  fais  jamais  aux  depens  d'autrui. — Votre  ami  obtien- 
dra-t-il  1'emploi  qu'il  desire  ?  C?est  selon  :  cela  dependra  des  circon- 
stances.  Si  cela  dependait  de  votre  cousin,  le  secretaire,  1'obtien- 
drait-il'1  Oui;  mais  cela  ne  depend  pas  de  lui. — Lorsque  la  chose 
fut  arrivee,  cela  iretonna-t-il  pas  tout  le  monde?  Oui,  chacun  en 
fut  etonne. — Vous  surprenez  tout  le  monde,  mais  votre  neveir  ne  sur- 
prend  personne.  11  me  surprend. 

Can  you  stand  one  hour  on  one  foot  without  mo-onir!     I  have 
never  tried,  but  I  think  I  could.    If  yon  were  to  t:  •  . .  imparf.) 

you  would  find  out  you:  in.)  before  J  an  hour. — 

Is  your  letter  written  ?    No,  not  quite.    Make  haste  to  finish  it. — And 
why  should  1  make  I  ish  i1  '     You  must  make  haste,  ($  151,) 

to  go  by  ;  i-hip.     I  thought  it  went  only  (nc 

mcttait  d  la  voile,  quo)  on  \  :ay  next.  (X. p.  1<>7.)    That  is  true;- 

but  from  Boston,  not  New  York.    And  my  letter  must  go  (§  151)  from 
here  to  Boston  by  the  mail,  (le  conrricr.)    So  that  I  must  make  ha 

y.     Go  then  and  tell  William  to  get  ready,  so  as  to  carry  it 

to  the  post  office  (la  poste)  as  soon  as  I  finish  it.     Do  not  be  afraid, 

yet  time  enouirh.     Do  not  speak  to  me,  or  else  I  shall  not 

.  ~h  it  in  time. 

.-ui  wonder  at  (dc)  what  takes  place?     No;  now,  nothing 
.i*hes  me.     Everything  is  now  so  astonishing,  so  wonderful,  that 
nothing  a.  'raordinary. — Wliy  does  that  woman  weep  ?     J  las 

her  child  been  dead  long? — -This  little  girl  weeps  because  she  has 
t  piece;  have  you  not  one  to  give  her? — Does  that 
man  live  at  his  own  expense,  or  at  that  of  other  people  ? — Does  it 
depend  on  him  to  do  that? — Does  not  that  marriage  depend  on  his 
brother-in-law  ? — On  whom  does  it  depend  then  ? — I  wonder  whether 
(662)  the  general  will  be  elected?  (Hire*  4,  like  lire.)— Shall  I  go 
and  tell  them  to  make  l?ss  noise  ? — Shall  I  go  and  buy  you  a  bottle 
of  cologne? 

VOCABULAIRE.     2de  Sec. 

Done. 

C'est  pourquoi.     Ennui,  1'ennui. 

L'autre  jour.        Dernierement. 


hut,  illy. 

Therefore.  Ennui. 

The  other  day.        Lately. 


In  a  short  time.        In.  \  Dans  peu  de  temps.         DanSj  en. 

Obs.  158.     When  speaking  of  time,  dims  expresses  tho  epoch,  and  eii  ili 
duration. 


B76 


SEVENTY-FIRST    LESSON. 


He  will  arrive  in  a  week,  (when  a 

week  is  elapsed.) 
It  took  him  a  week  to  make   this 

journey. 
He  will  have  finished  his  studies  in 

three  months. 

He  finished  his  studies  in  a  year. 
He  has  applied  himself  particularly 

to  geometry  and  mathematics. 

He  nas  a  good  many  friends. 


II  arrivera  dans  huit  jours. 

II  a  fait  ce  voyage  en  huit  jo'inu. 

II   aura  fini   ses   etudes  duns   it  >il 

mois. 

II  a  fini  ses  etudes  en  un  an. 
II  a  fait  une  etude  particuliere  de  la 

geometric  et  des  mathematiques. 
II  a  lien  des  amis. 
II  a  beaucoup  d'amis. 


Obs.  159.     The  word  lien  is  always  followed  by  the  article,  and  beaucm*p 
by  the  preposition  de. 

Vous  avez  bien  de  la  patience. 
Vous  avez  beaucoup  de  patience. 
Us  out  bien  de  1'argent. 
Vous  avez  bien  du  courage. 
Faire    present    de   quelque  chose    d 


YJU  have  a  great  deal  of  patience.    \ 

They  have  a  great  deal  of  money. 

You  have  a  great  deal  of  courage. 

To  make  a  present  of  something  to 
some  one. 

Mr.  Lambert  wrote  to  me  lately, 
that  his  sisters  would  be  here  in  a 

.  short  time,  and  requested  me  to 
tell  you  so  ;  you  will  then  be  able 
to  see  them,  and  to  give  them  the 
l.ooko  which  you  have  bought. 
They  hope  that  you  will  make 
them  a  present  of  them.  Their 
brother  has  assured  me  that  they 
esteem  you,  without  knowing  you 
personally. 

To  want  amusement. 

To  get  or  be  tired. 

How  could  I  get  tired  in  your  com- 
pany ? 

He  gets  tired  everywhere. 

Agreeable,  (pleasing.)        Tiresome. 

To  be  welcome. 

You  are  welcome  everywhere. 


Monsieur  Lambert  m'ecrivit  Tautre 
jour  que  mesdemoiselles  ses  soeurs 
vicndraient  ici  dans  peude  temps. 
et  me  pria  de  vous  le  dire.  Vous 
pourrez  done  les  voir,  et  leur  donner 
les  livres  que  vous  avez  achctes. 
Elles  esperent  que  vous  leur  en 
ferez  prdsent.  Leur  frere  m'a  as- 
sure qu'elles  vous  estiment,  sano 
vous  connaitre  personnellcmcnt. 


>  t  S'en?iuyer,  1. 


t  Comment  pourrais-je   m'ennuycr 

aupres  de  vous? 
II  s'ennuie  partout. 
A^reable.      Ennuyeux — euse,/cm. 
t  Etre  le  bienvenu. 
t  Vous  etes  partout  lc*  bienvenu. 


SoiXAXTE-OXZlfeME    TllfblE.       2de    See. 

Voudriez-vous  n'avoir  rien  a  faire?  Non,  je  vous  assure,  car  je 
m/ennuierais  comme  tous  ceux  qui  n'ont  pas  d'occupations.  Voug 
avez  bien  raison.  Cependant  il  y  a  bien  des  jeunes  gens  qui  vou 
draient  ne  point  avoir  d'occupation.  Us  ne  savent  pas  ce  qu'ils  desi- 
rent.  Us  srennuieraient  s'ils  n'en  avaient  point. — Que  faisait-il  der- 
aieremcnt1  Rien,  c:est  pourquoi  il  mourait  d'ennui. — Le  colonel 
D'arrivera-i-i!  pas  dans  peu  de  temps'?  Au  contraire,  il  va  joindri 


SEVENTY-SECOND    LESSON.    (1,)  077 

ion  regiment  f  (to  join  his  regiment.) — A  quel  regiment  apparUent-il  1 
II  appartient  au  cinquieme  regiment. — Que  dessina-t-elle  1'aotre 
jour?  Quand  je  la  vis,  elle  dessinait  le  nouveau  paquebot. — J'en- 
tends  tonjours  Mme.  G.. . .  gronder  sa  demoiselle  parce  qirelle  ne 
se  lient  pas  droit,  la  voila,  ne  trouvez-vous  pas  qu'elle  se  tient  com  me 
il  faut?  Elle  se  tie/it  aussi  droit  qu;il  le  faut. — Quand  le  capitaine 
joindra-t-il  sa  compagnie  ?  H  la  joindra  dans  3  jours. — Combien  <!e 
jours  lui  faut-il  pour  faire  le  voyage  ?  II  lui  en  faut  8,  et  commu  i* 
est  en  chemin  depuis  5  jours,  il  lui  en  faut  encore  5  pour  le  finir. 

Will  you  drink  a  cup  (line  tasse)  of  tea?  I  thank  you;  I  do  not 
like  tea. — Do  you  like  coffee?  I  like  it,  but  I  have  just  (492,  Obs. 
115)  drunk  some. — Do  you  not  get  tired  here?  How  could  I  get 
tired  in  this  agreeable  society?  As  to  me,  I  always  want  amuse- 
ment.— If  you  did  as  I  do,  you  would  not  want  amusement,  for  I 
listen  to  all  those  who  tell  me  anything.  In  this  manner  I  learn 
many  anecdotes,  a  thousand  agreeable  things,  and  I  have  no  time 
to  get  tired;  but  you  do  nothing  of  that  kind,  (dc  tout  ccla,)  that  is 
the  reason  why  you  want  amusement.  I  would  do  everything  liko 
(comme)  you,  if  I  had  no  reason  to  be  sad. — Have  you  seen  Mr. 
Lambert?  I  have  seen  him;  he  told  me  that  his  sisters  would  be 
here  in  a  short  time,  and  desired  (prior)  me  to  tell  you  so. 

When  they  have  arrived  (463,  Obs.  106)  you  may  give  them  the 
gold  rings  (la  bague)  which  you  have  bought  to  make  them  a- present 
of.  Will  they  receive  them  ?  Oh !  yes,  for  they  love  you  without 
knowing  you  personally. — Has  my  sister  already  written  to  you? 
She  has  written  to  me  many  times,  and  I  am  going  to  answer  her, 
for  her  letters  are  always  agreeable  and  welcome,  (bienvcnucs.) — • 
Shall  I  (faut-il)  tell  her  that  you  are  here  ?  Tell  her;  but  do  not  tell 
her  that  I  am  waiting  for  her  impatiently. — Why  have  you  not 
brought  (583,  Obs.  142)  your  sister  along  with  you?  Which  one? 
The  one  you  always  bring,  the  youngest. — She  did  not  wish  to  go  out, 
because  she  has  the  toothache. — I  am  very  sorry  for  it,  for  she  is  a 
very  good  girl. — How  old  is  she  ?  She  is  nearly  fifteen  years  old. 
She  is  very  tall  (grande)  for  her  age,  (/'age.) — How  old  are  you  ?  I 
am  twenty-two.  Is  it  possible  !  I  thought  you  were  not  yet  twenty.  . 


SEVENTY-SECOND  LESSON,  7%ds-Soixante-douz:cmc  Lccon) 

VOCABULAIRE.     Ire  Sec. 
OF  NEGATIONS.— Des  Negations 

See  ($171)  for  the  manner  of  using  them,  and  consult  the  aitirle 
accessary. 


378 


8E  VENT  Y-f  EC  JND     LESSON.    (1.) 


Have  yju  none  of  my  copybooks  ? 
I  have  none,  and  I  have  seen  none. 

[lave  you  neither  seen  nor  heard  the 
great  lady  singer  ?  ($  171 — 4.) 

No,  and  I  shall  neither  see  nor  hear 
her. 

[  neither  care  about  seeing  nor  hear- 
ing her. 

What  did  he  do  as  soon  as  he  had 
recognised  his  sister  ? 

No  eooner  had  he  recognised  her 
than  he  threw  himself  in  her  arms. 

Touch  neither  the  flowers  nor  the 
fruits. 

[  shall  touch  neither  these  nor  those. 


Does   that  seamstress  earn  but  two 

dollars  a  week  ? 
That  seamstress  earns  but  two. 

Would  she  not  gain  more  if  she  was 
a  mantua-maker  ? 


JVavez-vous  aucun  de  mes  cahiers  1 

Je  n'en  ai  aucun,  et  je  nen  ai  vu 
aucun. 

JV'avez-vous  ni  vu  ni  cntendu  la 
grande  cantatrice? 

Non,  et  je  ne  la  verrai  ni  nc  Fe  ra- 
te ndrai. 

Je  ne  me  soucie  ni  de  J/i  voir  nC  de 
Tentendre. 

Que  fit-il  aussitot  qu'il  eut  reconna 
sa  sceur  ? 

II  ne  1'eut  pas  plutdt  reconnuc  qu'il 
sc  jeta  dans  ses  bras. 

Ne  touches  ni  les  fleurs  ni  les  fruits. 


Je  ne  toucherai  ni  ceux-ci  ni  celles- 

la. 
Cette  couturiire  ne  gagne-t-elle  quo 

deux  gourdes  par  semaine  ? 
Cette   couturiOre    n'en  gagnc  quo 

deux. 
N'engagnerait-elle  pasdavantage  si 

elle  etait/tmeMse  de  robes  ? 

Ainsi  nous  voyons  qu'avec  les  temps  simples  ne  ae  place  toujours  avant, 
ct  le  complement,  toujours  apres  le  verbe. 


Moreover,  besides.        Besides  that. 
Hesides  what  I  have  just  said. 
There  are  no  means  of  finding  money 

now. 

To  push,  shove,  jog.  Do  not . . .  me. 
Along  the  road.       Along  the  street. 

All  along  . . 

All  the  year  round. 

To  enable  to. 

To  enable  John  to  ... 

That  enabled  me  to  go. 

To  be  able  to. 

He  is  able  to  do  it. 

To  the  right.       On  the  right  side  or 

hand.  Straight  on. 

To  the  left.  On  the  left  side  or  hand. 
Could  you  not  tell  me  which  is  the 

nearest  way  to  .the  city  gate  ? — to 

the  bridge  ? 

follow  (or  go  along)  this  street,  and 
when  you   are   at  t'ne  end  of  it, 


Eft  outre,  d'ailleurs.       Outre  ccla. 

Outre  ce  que  je  viens  de  dire. 

II  n'y  a  pas  moyen  de  trouver  de 

1'argent  a  present. 
Pousser,  1.        Ne  me  poussez  pas. 
Le  long  du  chemin.     Lc  long  do  la 

rue. 

Tout  le  long  de  . . . 
t  Tout  le  long  de  1'annce. 
Melt  re  a  meme  de. 
Mettre  Jean  a  meme  de  . . . 
Cela  me  mit  a  meme  d'y  ailer. 
Etre  en  etat  ou  ctre  d  meme  de. 
II  est  en  etat  (a  meme)  de  le  faire. 
A  droite.        Sur  la  droite.          Tout 

droit. 

A  gauche,  Sur  ia  gauche.  —" 

Ne  pourriez-vous  pas  me  dire  qud 

est  le  chemin  le  plus  court  pour 

arriver  a  la  porte  de  la  ville  f — aa 

pont  ? 
Suivez  (allez  tout  le  long  de)  ceite 

rue,  et  quand  vous  serei  au  bout, 


SEVENTY-SECOND     LESSON. 


379 


turn  to  the  right,  and  you  will  find 
a  cross-way,  which  you  must  go 
through. 

And  then,  where  shall  I  go  ? 

You  will  then  enter  a  broad  street, 
which  will  bring  you  to  a  public 
square,  on  the  right  you  will  see  a 
alley  or  court. 


You  must  leave  the  blind  alley  on 
your  left,  and  pass  under  the  arcsde 
that  is  near  it. 

Then  you  must  ask  again. 

An  arcade.  The  cross-  way. 

A  blind  alley.  A  court. 

To  cross,  to  cross  over.  Let  us  cross. 


tournez  a  droite,  vous  trjuverez  uu 
carrefour,  que  vous  travcrserez. 

Et  puis,  oil  irai-je  ? 

Puis  vous  entrerez  dans  une  rue  as« 
sez  large,  qui  vous  munera  sur  uno 
grande  place  publique,  a  droite 
vous  verrez  un  cul-de-sac  ou  uno 
impasse. 

Vous  laisserez  le  cul-de-sac  a  main 
gauche,  et  vous  passerez  sous  lea 
arcades  qui  sont  a  cote. 

t  Ensuite  vous  demanderez. 

Une  arcade.         Le  carrefour. 

Un  cul-de-sac.     Une  impasse. 

Tnu'i'rscr,  1.       Traversons. 


SOIXANTE-DOUZIEME    TlI^ME.       IrO  SeC. 

Est-elle  en  etat  d'aller  a  pied  jusqu'a  la  promenade  publique? 
Non,  elle  n'est  pas  en  etat  de  s?y  rendre  a  pied.  D'ailleu.rs,  ie  me- 
decin  n'a-t-il  pas  defendu  qu'elle  aille  (§151)  a  pied  1  Oui;  il  Pa 
defendu  ;  d'ailleurs,  elle  ne  peut  plus  mettre  ses  souliers.  II  faut  que 
nous  ayons  une  voiture.  Par  ou  passerons-nous?  Nous  irons  tout 
le  long  de  notre  rue,  jusqu'au  jardin  public,  la  nous  nous  arreterons 
quelques  instants.  Pour  la  laisser  reposer.  n?est-ce  pas  ?  Oui,  et  en 
outre,  pour  la  laisser  jouir  du  frais,  (de  lafraicheur,  cool,  coolness.) — 
Apres  cela,  ne  traverserons-nous  pas  le  jardin  public  ?  Non.  Per- 
sonne  n'y  passe  en  voiture. — Ou  irons-nous  done  ?  Nous  tqurnerons 
a  gauche,  et  nous  passerons  sous  Parcade  du  coin,  ou  elle  pourra 
prendre  le  verre  d'eau  minerale  ordonnee  par  le  medecin.  N'en 
prendrons-nous  pas  aussi?  Si  fait;  quoique  le  docteur  ne  Pait  pas 
ordonnee. — De  quel  cote  tournerons-nous  ensuite  ?  A  droite,  jusqu'a 
Pimpasse  du  voleur.  Nous  laisserons  cette  impasse  a  gauche,  et 
nous  irons  tout  droit  jusqu'a  la  promenade  publique.  La,  nous 
descend rons. — La  couturiere  est-elle  venue  ? — La  faiseuse  de  robes 
a-t-elle  envoye  les  robes  neuves? — Qui  est  votre  faiseuse  de  robes'? 

Who  pushes  me  so?  I  cannot  write,  if  you  do  it  any  more.  No- 
body pusnea  you.  No,  nobody  pushes  me  now,  but  somebody  did 
push  me  a  little  while  ago.  Nobody  has  pushed  you.  You  write 
badly,  and  you  will  blame  us  for  it. — Why  does  that  officer  push  that 
man  all.  along  the  street?  Because  he  is  a  good-for-nothing  fellow, 
xvho  will  do  nothing. — What  is  the  gardener  going  to  put  all  along 
this  wall  ?  He  is  going  to  put  some  trees  there.  Fruit-trees  ?  (Des 
mbres  fruitiersJ)1  Plum-trees  here,  pear-trees  there,  further  on 

1  Peche,  pecker,  peach-tree  ;  pomme,  pommier,  apple-tree  ;  abricot,  abri- 
cotier.  apricot-tree;  hence,  prunier,  ceritier.  amandier,  rosier,  (rose-bush.) 


K80 


SEVENTY-SECOND     LESSON.    1 2.) 


peach-trees.-  -Is  he  not  going  to  put  cherry-trees  there  ?  No,  because 
they  grow  too  big,  (Us  viennent  trop  gros})  and  so  do  apple-trees. — 
Is  it  difficult  to  get  money  now  ?  No,  it  is  not  difficult  to  find,  bu! 
as  usual  you  must  give  a  good  security,  (bonne  securite.) — Can  you 
procure  me  any? — What  security  have  you  to  give? — Is  not  my 
name  sufficient  ?  A  single  name  is  not  sufficient  for  capitalists,  (tin 
capitaliste  ou  rentier.) 

What  did  you  do  for  him?  I  lent  him  a  horse,  and  that  has 
enabled  him  to  join  his  regiment  in  time. — Why  did  he  not  start  on 
horseback  ?  He  di3.  not,  because  he  depended  on  the  steamboats. 
— What  has  become  of  them?  One  has  been  burned,  so  that  he 
could  not  have  continued  his  journey  (voyage)  if  I  had  not  lent  him 
a  horse. — Has  he  sent  him  back  ?  (rcnvoycr,  I.)  I  suppose  the  horse 
is  on  the  way ;  but  as  it  requires  four  days  for  the  journey,  he  will 
arrive  only  the  day  after  to-morrow. — Did  the  colonel  write  to  you  by 
mail,  or  did  he  send  a  message  by  the  electric  telegraph  t  We  have  no 
electric  telegraph  along  our  roads,  so  that  he  wrote  me  by  mail. — In 
the  forests  there  must  be  (il  doit  y  avoir)  many  cross-ways,  (bicn  dcs}) 
how  can  the  mail-riders  (les  courriers)  recognise  them?  They  are 
ased  to  them. 

VOCABULAIRE.     2de  Sec. 

Dans  les  temps  composes.  ($  171 — 4,  5.) 

A-t-on  appele  aucun  dcs  ouvriers  ? 
On  ncn  a  appeld  aucun. 
On  n'a  appele  personne. 
JVaurait-elle  fmt-oue  cela  ? 
Elle  n'en  auran  fait  gucrc  plus,  ou 
elle  11 en   aurait  guere  plus  fait. 

A-t-elle   laisse  mon    livre   quelque 

part  ? 

Elle  ne  1'a  laisse  nulle  part. 
t  Se  marier,  1.  Ne  vous  mariez  pas. 
£pouscr,  1,  quelqu'un. 
JMarier,  (donncr  en  maria^e.) 
Mon  cousin,  ayant  marie  sa  SOBUI 

dpousa  Mademoiselle  Delby. 
M.  votre  cousin  est-il  marie  ? 
Non,  il  est  encore  garcon, 
Votre  niece  est-elle  mariee  ? 
Non,  mais  elle  va  se  marier. 
Eire  garc.on.     Un  vieux  gircon, 
Une  vieille  fille. 
Embarrasse. 
Un  embarraa. 


Were  any  of  the  workmen  called  ? 
Not  one  of  them  was  called. 
Nobody  has  been  called. 
Would  she  have  done  but  that  ? 
She  would  have  done  but  little  more, 

or,  she  would  not  have  done  much 

more. 
Has  she  left  my  book  anywhere  ? 

She  left  it  nowhere. 

To  get  (or  be)  married.  Do  not  get  m. 

To  marry  somebody. 

To  marry,  (to  give  in  marriage.) 

My  cousin,  having  given  his  sister  in 

marriage,  marriedj|jjdj^^y. 
Is  your  cousin  marflJl 
No,  he  is  still  a  b 
Is  your  niece  marriei 
No,  but  she  is  going  to  be  married- 
To  be  a  bachelor.    An  old  bachelor. 
An  old  girl,  maid. 
Embarrassed,  puzzled,  at  a  less. 
An  embarrassment,  a  puzzle. 


SEVENTY-SECOKrf     LESSON. 


981 


Vou  embarrass  (puzzle)  me. 
You  puzzle  (perplex)  me. 
He  asks  my  sister  in  marriage. 
The  measure. 
To  take  measures. 
I  shall  take  other  measures, 
'roocness  !  how  rapidly  time  passes 
in  your  society . 

The  compliment. 

You  make  me  a  compliment  which  I 

do  not  know  how  to  answer. 
It  is  not  my  fault. 
Do  not  lay  it  to  my  charge. 
To  lay  the  fault  to  one's  charge. 
Who  can  help  it  ?  Whose  fault  is  it  < 

I  cannot  help  it. 

The  delay.  He  does  it  without  delay. 
I  must  go,  (must  be  ofT.)  I  am  off. 
(.»o  away  !  Begone  ! 

To  jest,  joke,  be  in  fun.  Do  not  trifle. 
The  jest,  joke. 
Vou  are  jesting. 


Vous  m'embarrassez. 

Vousme  mettez  dans  I'embarras. 

II  dcmande  ma  sceur  en  manage. 

La  mesure. 

Prendre  des  mesures. 

Je  prendrai  d'autres  mesures. 

Mon  Dieu !  que  le  temps  passe  vitc 

dans  votre  societe !  (en  votre  com- 

pagnie.) 

Le  compliment. 
Vous  nie  faites  un  compliment  au- 

quel  je  ne  sais  que  repondre. 
Ce  n'est  pas  ma  fauje. 
Ne  me  1'imputez  pas. 
Imputer,  1,  la  faute  a  quelqu'un. 
A  qui  est  la  faute  ? 


(  Je  ne  sais  qu'y  faire. 
\  Je  n 


ne  saurais  qu'y  faire. 
Le  delai.     II  le  fait  sans  delai. 
Je  me  sauve.      Je  vais  me  sauver. 
Sauvez-vous !     Allez-vous-en ! 
Plaisanter,  1.     Ne  plaisantez  point. 
La  plaisanterie,  le  badinage. 
Vous  badinez.     Vous  vous  moquez. 


Si  la  negation  forme  le  nominatif,  il  y  a  un  changement  dans  la  maniera 
de  1'employer.  ($  151 — 6.) 


Does  anything  please  them  ? 

No,  since  their  return  nothing  pleases 

them. 

Nobody  cares  to  have  them. 
Neither  suit  me. 
Neither  these  nor  those  house3  will 

sell  dear. 

None  of  my  friends  is  going. 
No  one  knows  it. 


Quelque  chose  leur  plait-il  ? 

Non,  depuis  leur  retour  rien  ne  leur 

plait. 

Personne  ne  se  soucie  de  les  avoir. 
.Z\rtTun7iirautre7zemeconviennen-t. 
Ni  ces  maisons-ci  ni  celles-la  ne  sc 

vendront  cher. 
Aucun  de  mes  amis  n'y  va. 
JVwZ,  (pas  un)  ne  le  sait. 


SoiXANTE-DOUZLfcME    TH&ME.       2de    SeC. 

Votre  sccur,  nva-t-on  dit,  se  marie  bientot. — Oui,  elle  se  mariera 
la  semaine  prochaine.  Ne  devait-elle  pas  se  marier  le  mois  passe  1 
Si  fait,  mais  le  colonel  qu'elle  va  epouser  n'a  pas  pu  quitter  son 
regiment  alors.  Est-il  ici  pour  long-temps  1  Non,  il  n;y  restera 
que  quelques  semaines.  C'est  dommage  (572)  qiril  soit  oblige 
(§151)  de  partir  si  tot,  n?est-ce  pas?-  Je  presume  qu'il  aura  le  tempa 
de  passer  la  lunc  de  mid  (honey-moon)  ici.  En  outre,  s'il  ne  reste 
pas,  ce  n?est  pas  sa  faute.  II  prendra,  peut-etre,  des  mesures  poui 

ne  pas  partir  si  tot.     Mile.  S ,  ne  va-t-elle  pas  se  marier?    Nony 

elle  a  tant  d'admiraleors  (admirers)  qu'elle  eft  embarrassee  dans 


882'  SEVENTY-SECOND    LESION.    (2.) 

son  choix. — Qui  vous  blame  ?  Mon  oncle  me  blame,  mats  je  ne 
saurais  qu'y  faire.  Est-ce  ma  faute,  si  j'ai  mauvaise  memoire  ?  1< 
me  faut  si  long-temps  pour  apprendre  mes  lecons,  que  je  m'ennuie, 
que  je  nrendors,  et  que  je  n'apprends  lien. — Votre  oncle  Jacques  e&l 
un  vieux  garcon,  n'est-ce  pas?  Non,  il  est  marie,  mais  il  n'a  pas 
d'enfants. — Votre  cousine  est  presque  vieille  filk,  n'est-ce  pas'?  Ouiy 
c'est  tout-a-fait  une  vieille  fille. 

Bless  me  !  how  rapidly  time  passes  in  your  society ! — You  make 
me  a  compliment  which  I  do  not  know  how  to  answer. — Have  you 
bought  your  watch  in  Paris  ?  I  have  not  bought  it;  my  uncle  has 
made  me  a  present  of  it,  (en.) — What  has  that  woman  intrusted 
you  with  ?  She  has  intrusted  me  with  a  secret  about  a  (djun)  great 
count  who  is  in  great  embarrassment  about  the  (d  cause  dit)  manv^c 
of  one  of  his  daughters. — Does  any  one  ask  her  in  marriage  ?  The 
man  who  demands  her  in  marriage  is  a  nobleman  of  the  neighbor- 
hood, (le  voisinage.) — Is  he  rich?  No,  he  is  a  poor  devil,  (diablc:)} 
who  has  not  a  sou,  (le  sou,)  and  who,  besides,  is  old  and  disagreea- 
ble.— You  say  you  have  no  friends  among  your  schoolfellows,  (le 
condisciplc :)  but  is  it  not  your  fault?  You  Lave  spoken  ill  (mal parlc] 
of  them,  and  they  have  not  offended  you. 

What  are  you  astonished  at?  I  am  astonished  to  find  you  still  in 
bed. — If  you  knew  how  (coinbicn)  sick  I  am,  you  would  not  be 
astonished  (fern.)  at  it. — John,  (Jean!) — What  is  your  pleasure.  Sir.' 
Bring  some  wine.  Presently,  Sir. — Henry!  Madam?  Make  the 
lire,  (dufcu.)  The  maid-servant  has  made  it  already. — Bring  me 
some  paper,  pens,  and  ink.  Bring  me  also  some  sand  (du  sable)  or 
blotting-paper,  (du  papier  brouillard,)  sealing-wax,  (de  la  circ  d 
cachctcr,)  and  a  light,  (de  la  lumierc.) — I  am  going  for  the  blotting- 
paper,  the  sealing-wax,  and  the  light ;  but  we  have  no  sand. — Never 
mind  the  sand.  Afterwards  you  will  go  to  my  sister's,  to  tell  her 
/lot  to  wait  for  me.  Be  back  again  before  12  o'clock,  to  carry  my 
letters  to  the  post-office.  Very  well,  Madam. — Do  not  fail,  for  you 
know  that  the  mail  closes  (se  fermc)  at  12,  and  the  letters  must  be 
(il  faut  que ,  $151)  in  the  post  office  before  (avant  quc,  $151)  the 
hour  strikes. — I  will  not  fail,  Madam ;  you  may  depend  upon  it. 

1  Those  two  expressions:  Mon  Dicu  !  and  Diable,  are  constantly  usea 
by  the  French.  The  first  is  their  only  interjection  for  a  host  of  English 
ones,  such  as :  Bless  me  !  Oh  dear  !  Dear  me  !  Gracious  !  Goodness  !  &c.  &c. 
The  second  is  connected  with  every  sort  of  epithets  ;  such  as :  bon  diabie, 
(good  or  clever  fellow) ;  mauvais  diabie,  (bad  fellow,)  vilain,  vieux,  petit, 
grand,  gros,  beau,  &c.  &c.  Whoever  wishes  to  speak  French  with  French 
people,  ought  to  become  familiar  with  the  terms,  if  not  to  use  them  himself, 
at  least  to  understand  those  who  do.  Hence,  however  reluctantly,  we  fol- 
low the  text  of  OllendorfT. 


SEVENTY-SECOND     LESSON,    (i) 


SS3 


VOCABULAIRE.     3me  Sec. 


Avec  1'infinitif.  ($  171—7.)    That 

He  likes  to  do  nothing. 
Has  she  ever  promised  not  to  touch 
your  tvatch  ?  No,  never.   • 

What  are  they  afraid  of?  Not  to 
nave  done  their  task  in  time. 

Does  your  cousin  expect  many  people 
to  her  soiree  ? 

She  is  afraid  she  will  have  but  few. 

lie  cannot  take  a  joke,  is  no  joker. 

To  beg  someone's  pardon. 

To  pardon.  P  ar do  n  m  e . 

Mir  pardon. 
The  pardon.    The  time-piece,  house 

clock. 

To  udvunri',  <ro  too  fust.  Is  it  too  fast  ? 
The  watch  goes  too  fast,  (gains.) 
To  retard,  go  too  slow.  Is  it  too 

slow  ? 

The  time-piece  goes  too  slow,  (loses.) 
My  watch  has  stopped. 
To  go  right,  to  stop,  to  go  wrong. 
Where  did  we  stop  ? 
We  left  oflfat  the  fortieth  lesson,  page 

one  hundred  and  thirty-six. 
To  wind  up  a  (town  clock.)  a  watch. 
To  regulate  a  watch,  a  time-piece,  a 

clock. 
Your  watch  is  twenty  minutes  too 

fast,  and  mine  a  quarter  of  an  hour 

too  slow. 

It  will  soon  strike  twelve. 
Has  it  already  struck  twelve  ? 
To  strike.       Make  the  clock  strike. 
What  hour  is  striking  ?      It  is  one. 

On  condition,  or  provided. 

[  will  lend  you  money,  provided  you 
will  henceforth  he  more  economi- 
cal than  you  have  hitherto  been. 

Hereafter,  for  the  future,  henceforth. 
The  future.          My  prospect,  fate. 
Economical. 


article  must  be  carefully  studied. 

II  aime  a  ne  rien  fairc. 

A-t-elle  jamais   promis   de   ne  paa 

toucher  votre  montre  ?  Non, 

jamais. 
De  quoi  ont-ils  peur  ?         De  ne  piu 

avoir  fait  leur  tdche  a  temps. 
Votre  cousine  attend-elle  beaucoup 

de  raonde  a  sa  soiree  ? 
Elle  craint  de  n'en  avoir  que  ptm 

(282,  Obs.  65.) 
t  II  n'entend  pas  railleric. 
Demander  pardon  d  quelqu'un. 
Pardomicr,  1.          Pardonnez-moi. 
Je  vous  demande  pardon. 
Le  pardon.  Cette  pendule. 

Avancer,  1.          Avance-t-elle  ? 

La  montro  avance. 

Iietarder,  1.         lletarde-t-elle  ? 

La  pendule  retarde. 

Ma  montre  s'est  arretde. 

Aller  bien,  s'arreter.  1.  aller  mal. 

t  Ou  en  ctions-nous  ? 

t  Nous  etions  a  la  lec.on  quarante, 
page  cent-trente-six. 

Monter  une  horloge,      une  montre. 

Reglerune  montre,  une  pendule,  una 
horloge. 

Votre  montre  avance  de  vingt  mi- 
nutes, et  la  mienne  retarde  d'un 
quart  d'heure. 

II  va  sonner  midi. 

Midi  est-il  deja  sonne  ? 

Sonner,  1.  Faitcs  sonner  la  pendule. 

Quelle  heure  sonne-t-il  ?  C'est  une 
heure. 

A  condition. 

Sous  condition. 

Je  vous  preterai  de  1'argent,  a  con- 
dition que  vous  serez  desormain 
plus  e'conome  que  vous  n'avex  6l4 
jusqu'ici. 

Desormais,  dorenavant,  a  1'avenir 

L'avenir.     •         Mon  avenir. 

feconomo,  rconomique,  manager. 


884  SEVENTY-SECOND     LESSON. 


To  renounce  gambling.  Renounce  it. 
To  folio  wad  vice  (counsel).  Follow  the 

good. 

You  look  so  melancholy. 
Adieu,  farewell. 


Renoncer  au  jeu.    Renoncez-y. 
Suivre  un  conseil.     Suivez  les  bonr 

Vous  avcz  1'air  si  melancolique. 


Adieu,  farewell.  >  .,. 

God  be  with  you,  good-by.  >  • 

Till  I  see  you  again.  I  Au  plaisir  dc  vous  revoir. 

1  hope  to  see  you  again  soon.  |  Sans  adieu,  au  revoir. 

Quand  le  verbo  est  omis  (ometlre,*  4,  to  omit.)  ($  151 — 8.)    Study  it 
carefully. 


What  is  he  afraid  of?         Nothing. 
Whom  is  she  afraid  of?     Nobody. 
Whom  does  she  fear  ?       No  one. 
Do  you  want  five  ?      Not  more  than 
two. 


De  quoi  a-t-il  peur  ?        De  ricn. 
De  qui  a-t-elle  peur  ?  De  personno. 
Qui  craint-elle  ?  Fersonne. 

Vous  en  faut-il  cinq  ?       Pas  plus  do 
deux. 


SOIXANTE-DOUZIEME  TiifhiE.     3me  Sec. 

Quelle  heure  est-il?  II  est  plus  d'une  heure  et  demie. — Voua 
dites  qu'il  est  une  heure  et  demie,  et  a  ma  montre,  il  n'est  que  midi 
et  demi.  En  moins  de  vingt-cinq  minutes  deux  heures  sonneront. 
Pardonnez-moi,  une  heure  n'est  pas  encore  sonnee.  Je  vous  assure 
qu'il  est  deux  heures  moins  vingt-quatre  minutes,  car  ma  montre  va 
tres-bien. — Va-t-elle  aussi  bien  qu'un  chronometre  ?  Je  crois  qu'elle 
va  mieux  que  bien  des  chronometres.  Elle  va  mieux  que  notre 
horloge,  qu'on  est  oblige  de  regler  loules  les  semaines. — Comment 
va  votre  pendule  ?  Elle  va  super  ieurcmcnt  aussi.  Ni  ma  montre  ni 
notre  pendule  ne  varicnt  (iwier,  1,  to  vary)  d;une  minute  dans  six 
mois.  Elles  vont  toujours  ensemble.  Votre  montre  doit  etre  arretee 
on  derangee,  (out  of  order.)  Est-elle  montee?  Je  1'ai  montee  hier 
soir  en  me  couchant. — A  quelle  condition  le  leriez-vous? — Suivez 
pon  conseil  a  condition  qu'il  suive  ($  151)  le  votre. — Son  avenir  ne 
serait-il  pas  moins  incertain  s'il  etait  plus  econome?  Ne  le  serait-il 
pas  encore  moins  s'il  renoncait  au  jeu  ?  Donnez-lui  en  le  conseil 
Te  n'y  manquerai  pas.  Adieu,  au  plaisir.  Sans  adieu. 

Your  schoolfellows  have  done  you  good,  and  nevertheless  you 
have  quarrelled  with  them;  why  did  you?  Was  it  my  fault?  I 
think  it  was  theirs.  Never  mind.  You  must,  without  delay,  make 
your  peace  with  them. — Dialogue  (le  dialogue)  between  a  tailor  and 
his  journeyman,  (le  gar$on.) — Charles,  have  you  taken  the  clothes  to 
tho  Count  Narissi  ?  Yes,  Sir,  I  have  taken  them  to  him. — What  did 
he  say  ?  He  said  nothing  but  (sinon)  that  he  had  a  great  mind  to 
give  me  a  box  on  the  ear,  (des  soufflets,  plur..)  because  I  had  not 
brought  them  sooner. — What  did  you  answer  him  ?  Sir,  said  1. 1  do 
not  understand  that  joke  :  pay  me  what  you  owe  me;  and  if  you  do 


SEVENTY-THIRD     LESSON.    (1.) 


385 


not  do  so  instantly,  I  shall  take  other  measures.  Scarcely  had  I  said 
jhat,  when  he  put  his  hand  to  his  sword,  (porter  la  main  d  son  epee,) 
and  I  ran  away. 

Has  it  already  struck  twelve  ?  Yes,  madam,  t  is  already  half- 
past  twelve. — Is  it  so  late?  Is  it  possible?  That  13  not  late,  it  is 
slill  early. — Does  your  watch  go  well?  (bien?)  No,  Miss  N.,  it  is  a 
quarter  of  an  hour  too  fast.  And  mine  is  half  an  hour  too  slow. 
Perhaps  it  has  stopped.  In  fact,  you  are  right. — Is  it  wound  up  ? — 
[t  !e  wound  up,  and  yet  (pourtant)  it  does  not  go. — Do  you  hear?  it 
is  striking  one  o'clock.  Then  I  \vill  regulate  my  watch  and  gc 
homo. — Pray  (de  grace)  stay  a  little  longer,  (encore  un  peu !)  I  can- 
not, for  we  dine  precisely  at  one  o'clock,  (d  une  heure  precise.)  Adieu, 
•hen,  till  I  see  you  again. — You  say  you  want  fifty  dollars;  I  will 
lend  them  to  you  with  all  my  heart,  but  on  condition  that  you  will 
renounce  gambling,  (rcnoncer  au  jeu,)  and  be  more  economical  than 
you  have  hitherto  been.  I  see  now  that  you  are  my  friend,  and  T 
love  yon  too  much  not  to  follow  your  advice. 


SEVENTY-THIRD  LESSON,  72d.—Soixantc-trciziein?  Lc$on:  73me 
VOCABULAIRE.  Ire  Sec. 


To  last,  (to  wear  well,)  stand.        A 

short  time. 

That  cloth  will  wear  well. 
How  long  has  that  coat  .asted  you  ? 
It  lasted  me  a  year. 
That  color  is  not  a  standing  one. 

To  my,  his,  her,  their,  our  liking. 
To  everybody's  liking. 
Nobody  can  do  anything  to  his  liking. 
A  boarding-house.  A  boarding-school. 
To  keep  house,  (a  boarding-house.) 
To  board  with  any  one  or  anywhere. 

To  be  a  boarder. 
To  exclaim. 
To  make  uneasy. 
To  get  or  grow  uneasy. 
To  be  uneasy. 

Why  do  yo  i  fret,  (are  you  uneasy  ?; 
t  do  not  fret,  (am  not  uneasy.) 
That  news  makes  me  uneasy. 

am  uneasy  at  not  receiving  any 

D07.S. 

33 


Durer,  1. 


Peu  de  temps 


Ce  drap  durera  bien. 

Combien  de  temps  cet  habit  \ou& 

a-t-il  dure  ?       II  m' a  dure  un  an. 
Cette  couleur  n'est   pas  de   dureo. 

(II1,  Obs.  27.) 

A  mon,  son,  leur,  notre,  gre. 
Au  gre  de  tout  le  monde. 
On  ne  peut  rien  faire  a  son  gre. 
Une  pension. 

Tenir  maison.  Tenir  pension, 

fctre  en  pension.  Se  mettre  en 

pension.  Eire  penaionnaire. 

SJ eerier,  1. 
Inquiet  cr,  1. 
S'inquieter. 

fitre  inquiet,  fern,  inquiete. 
Pourquoi  vous  inquietez-vous  ? 
Je  ne  m'inquiete  pas. 
Cette  nouvelle  m'inquiete. 
Je  suis  inquiet  de  ne  point  rocevofe 

de  nouvelles. 


886 


SEVENTY-THIRD     LESSON.     (1.) 


She  is  uneasy  about  that  affair. 

Do  not  be  uneasy. 

The  uneasiness,  trouble. 

Quiet.        Be  quiet,  just  wait,  stop. 

To  quiet.  Compose  yourself 

To  change,  alter,  fade,  pass  away. 

That  man  has  altered  a  great  deal 

since  I  saw  him. 
To  bt  of  use. 

Of  what  use  is  that  to  you  ? 
T*nat  is  of  no  use  to  me. 
Of  what  use  is  that  to  your  brother  ? 
It  is  of  no  use  to  him. 
Of  what  use  is  that  stick  to  you  ? 
I  use  it  to  beat  my  dogs. 
Of  what  use  are  those   baskets  to 

your  brother  ? 
He  uses  them  to  carry  his  vegetables 

to  market. 


1  Elle  est  inquiete  sur  cette  affaire, 
Ne  vous  inquietez  pas. 
L'inquietude. 

Tranquille.  So'yez  tranquillo 

Tranquilliser,  1.  Tranquillisez-voua 
Changer,  1.  La  couleur  change. 
Get  homme  a  beaucoup  change  de 

puis  que  je  re  Tai  vu. 
t  Servir,*  2,  d  quelque  chose. 
t  A  quoi  cela  vous  sert-il  ? 
t  Cela  ne  me  sert  a  rien. 
t  A  quoi  cela  sert-il  a  votre  tren1  f 
t  Cela  ne  lui  sert  fi  rien. 
t  A  quoi  ce  baton  vous  sert-il  v 
t  II  me  sert  a  battre  mes  chiens. 
t  A  quoi  ces  paniers  servent-ils  d 

votre  frere  ? 
t  Us  lui  scrvent  a  porter 

au  marchu.  11  s'en  .««-rt  poui1 

porter  ses  k'gu::M •.-  au  niLjrcht. 

SoiXAXTE-TitKiziKME  TII£ME.     Ire  Sec. 

lu.'l  d  rap  ferez-vous  emplette?     Je  veux  du  drap  vert;  maia 
je  veux  qu'il  dure  et  que  la  couleur  tienne  ($  151),  qu-elle  ne  p; 
pas      Si  vous  voulez  de  bon  drap,  il  faut  aller  chez  les  Messieurs 

• .     Ne  demeurenl-ils  pas  au  coin  de  cette  rue-ci .'     Si  fait.  « 

la  qn'ils  ont  leur  magasin.  Au  dessus  du  (above  the)  magasin  n'v 
a-t-il  pas  une  pension  bien  tenue?  Si  fait7  il  y  a  ce  qu/on  appelle 
\ine  pension  d 'I a  mode }  (a  fashionable  boarding-house.) — Vous  con 
naissez-vous  en  drap  ?  Oui,  ass^z  bien. — Voulez-vous  venir  m'aider 
a  en  choisir?  Volontiers.  —  Mais  ne  vous  inquietez  pas,  soyez 

tranquille ;  car  si  vous  achetez  le  drap  chez  ces  MM. ,  il  sera 

bon  et  ]a  couleur  tiendra,  elle  ne  changera  pas,  je  vous  assure. — 
Votre  cousin  a  beaucoup  change  dornieremeiit,  a-t-il  ete  malade  ? 
Son  epouse  est  encore  plus  changce. — Sont-ils  dans  une  bonne  pen- 
sion 1 — Combien  de  pensionnaires  y  a-t-il  ? — Qnel  est  le  prix  de  la 
pension? — Si  votre  associe  reste  dans  une  mauvaise  pension,  a  quoi 
lui  sert  son  argent? — Est-il  avare  ? — S'il  esv  marie;  pourquoi  ne  tient-il 
pas  maison  ? — La  pension  leur  convient-elle  ? 

Sir,  may  (oser)  I  ask  where  General  B lives?     He  lives  neai 

the  arsenal,  (arsenal,  mas.,)  on  the  other  side  of  the  river. — Could  you 
tell  me  woich  road  I  must  (je  dois)  take  to  go  there?  You  must  go 
($  Irf  1)  along  \he  shore,  and  at  the  end  take  a  little  street  (quand 
vous  serez  au  boutj  prenez  une  petite  rue)  on  the  right,  which  will 
load  you  straight  to  his  house.  It  is  a  fine  house ;  you  will  ^rid  i« 
easily.  I  thank  you,  Sir. — Does  Captain  N — • —  live  here  ?  Yes, 


SEVENTY-THIRD     LESSON.    (2) 


387 


Sir,  walk  in,  (donnez-vous  la  peine  d'cntrer,)  if  you  please. — Is  the 
captain  at  home  ?  I  wish  to  have  the  honor  (Vhonneur)  to  speak 
to  him.  Yes,  Sir,  he  is  at  home. — Whom  shall  I  have  the  honor  to 

announce?  (annoncer?)  I  am  from  B ,  and  my  name  is  F , 

— Who  keeps  this  fashionable  boarding-house'?     Miss  P ,  an 

old  maid. 

Last  summer,  when  we  were  a  hunting  together,  (ensemlle}) 
night  grew  upon  us  (la  nuit  nous  surprit)  at  ten  leagues  (une  lieue)  at 
least  from  our  country  seat,  (la  maison  de  campagne.) — Well,  (Eh 
bicn,)  where  did  you  pass  the  night?  I  was  v^ry  uneasy  at  first, 
but  your  brother,  not  in  the  least,  (pas  le  moins  du  monde ;)  on  the 
contrary,  in  his  opinion  (gre)  it  was  an  agreeable  incident ;  he  tran- 
quillized me  so  that  I  lost  my  uneasiness.  After  some  time  we 
found  a  peasant's  hut,  where  we  passed  the  night.  Here  I  had  an 
opportunity  to  see  how  clever  your  brother  is.  A  few  benches  and 
a  truss  of  straw  (une  botte  de  paille)  served  him  to  make  a  comforta- 
ble (commode)  bed;  he  used  a  bottle  as  a  candlestick,  another  bundle 
of  straw  served  us  as  a  pillow,  and  our  cravats  as  nightcaps.  When 
we  awoke  in  the  morning,  we  were  as  fresh  and  healthy  (lien  por* 
iant)  as  if  we  had  slept  in  our  own  beds. 


VOCABULAIRE 

Of  what  use  are  these  bottles  to  your 

landlord  ? 

They  serve  him  to  put  his  wine  in. 
To  stand  instead,  to  be  as. 
I  use  my  gun  as  a  stick. 
This  hole  serves  him  for  a  house. 
He  usedj^ cravat  as  a  nightcap. 


fo  araii 

What  avails  it  to  you  to  cry  ? 

It  avails  me  nothing. 

Opposite  to. 

Opposite  that  house. 

Opposite  the  garden 

Opposite  to  me. 

Right  opposite. 

He  lives  opposite  the  arsenal. 

I  .ive  opposite  the  king's  library. 

To  get  hold  of...        JSeizeuponit. 

JLC  take  possession  of.  ) 

To  witness.  To  show. 

To  give  evidence  against  some  one 


.     2de  Sec. 

t  A  quoi  ces  bouteilleo  servent-ellea 

a  votre  hote  ? 

t  Elles  lui  servent  a  mettre  son  vin. 
t  Servir,*  de.      — •*" 
t  Mon  fusil  me  sert  de  baton, 
t  Ce  trou  lui  sert  de  maison. 
t  Sa  cravate  lui  a  servi  de  bonnst  d* 

nuit. 

t  Servir,*  (de  before  inf.) 
t  A  quoi  vous  sert-il  de  plouier  ? 
t  Cela  ne  me  sert  a  rien. 
Vis-a-vis  de. 

Vis-a-vis  de  cette  maison. 
Vis-a-vis  du  jardin. 
Vis-a-vis  de  moi. 
Tout  vis-a-vis. 

II  demeure  vis-a-vis  de  V arscrM,l. 
Je  demeure  vis-a-vis  de  la   biblio- 
theque  royale. 

S'emparer  de  . .'.    Emparez-vous-cn 

Temoigner,  1. 

Temoigner  centre  quelqu'an. 


388 


SEVENTY-THIRD     LESSON.    (2.) 


He  has  shown  a  great  deal  of  friend- 
ship to  me. 

To  turn  some  one  into  ridicule. 

To  become  ridiculous. 

To  make  one's  self  ridiculous. 

To  be  born. 

Wnere  were  you  born  ? 

I  was  born  in  this  country. 

Where  was  your  sister  born  ? 

She  was  born  in  the  United  States  of 
North  America. 

Where  were  your  brothers  born  ? 

They  were  born  in  France. 

The  game.     The  gnme-bag,  pouch. 

A  horse-hair.  The  feathers. 

A  pillow.          A  cushion,  down. 

A  hair  cushion.        A  down  pillow. 


I'lii-  boarder. 


The  pensioner. 


II  in' a  temoigne  beaucoup  d'oinii'iA 

Tourner  quelqu'un  en  ridicule. 

Tomber  dans  le  ridicule. 

Se  rendre  ridicule. 

Eire  ne. 

t  Ou  etes-vous  ne  ? 

t  Je  suis  ne  dans  ce  pays-ci. 

t  Ou  vctre  sceur  est-elle  nee  ? 

t  Elle  cst  ne'e  aux   £tats   Unis  dc 

1'Aim'ruiue  du  Nord. 
t  Oil  \os  frcres  eont-ils  nes  ? 
t  Us  sont  ncs  en  France. 
Le  gibicr.  La  gibecieie. 

Un  crin.  Les  plumes. 

Un  oreiller.    Un  coussin,  le  duvet.-" 
Un  coussin  de  crin.      Un  oreiller  de 

duvet. 
Le    pensionnairc  . ..    du    gouverne- 

ment. 


Soi.x  Sec. 

A  41101  lui  sert  dc  savoir  le  Franrais,  si  elle  ne  le  parle,  ni  ne  le 
lit,  ni  ne  le  pratique?  (§  171 — 3.)    II  lui  servira  quand  elle  voyagera 
pn  Kurope. — Se  sert-il  de  sa  gibeciere  pour  oreiller?    Oui,  lorsqu'il 
se  couche  sous  les  arbres  ;i  la  rampairne. — A  qnoi  vous  sert  de  1 
ailliger?     Je  ne  peux  m'empecher  d'etre  alllige  du  malheur  a: 
a  mon  ami. — Son  cheval  lui  sert-il  a  quelque  chose  ?    11  se  promene 
;i  i-hoval  tous  les  jours. — Qu  son  fils  est-il  ne?    II  est  ne  a  Philadel- 
phie.     Sa  fille  y  est-elle   nee  aussi?     Oui;  elle   est  nee  dans   la 
maison  vis-a-vis. — Si  vous  etiez  ne  en  Ecosse,  mon  petit  bon  liomme, 
que  seriez-vous?    Je  serais  ecossais,  irest-ce  pas  ?     (  Kt 

votre  strur  que  serait-elle,  si  elle  y  etait  nee  ?  Elle  serait  ecossais 
aussi  Non  pas  ecossais,  mais  ecossaisc . — De  quoi  le  voleur  s7est-U 
empare?  ii  s'est  cmpare  de  tout  ce  qu?il  a  pu. — Qui  a  temoigne 
rontre  lui?  Le  bijoutier  qui  demeurak  vis-a-vis  de  la  poste,  el 
1'aubergiste  qui  demeure  au  coin  de  la  place  ou  se  trouve  la  bibli- 
otheque  de  la  ville. — Ne  tournez  personne  en  ridicule.  Aimeriez- 
vous  a  etre  tourne  en  ridicule  ? — Ne  ferai-je  pas  bien  de  le  l^attre,  s'il 
me  tourne  en  ridicule  ? 

Which  is  the  shortest  (court)  way  to  the  arsena.  ?  \un  arsenal?] 
Go  down  (suivez)  this  street,  and  when  you  come  to  the  end  (au 
bout,}  turn  to  the  left,  and  take  the  cross-way,  (vous  tnmvercz  un — 
que  vous  travcrscrcz  :)  you  will  then  enter  into  a  rather  narrow  (ttroit] 
street,  which  will  lead  you  to  a  great  square,  (Li  place,}  where  you 
will  soe  a  bl>id  alley. — Through  (par)  which  I  must  pas<  ?  No,  for 


SEVENTY-FOURTH    LESSON.    (1.) 


3S9 


there  is  no  outlet,  (une  issue.)  You  must  leave  it  on  the  right,  and 
pass  under  the  arcade  which  is  near  it.— And  then  1  And  then  you 
must  inquire,  (further.)— I  am  very  much  obliged  to  you.— Do  not 
mention  it,  (il  njy  a  pas  de  quoi.)— Are  you  able  to  translate  an 
English  letter  into  French?  I  am.— Who  has  taught  you?  My 
French  master  has  enabled  me  to  do  it.— Was  your  French  teacher 
born  in  France  ?  No,  he  was  not. 

Your  mother  is  wrong  to  fret  about  her  eldest  son;  for,  although 
he  is  ($  151)  in  the  army,  (dVarmee,')  he  knows  how  to  get  out  of  a 
bad  scrape. — A  candidate  (un  candidat)  petitioned  (dcmandc"  a)  the 
king  of  Prussia  (de  Prusse)  for  an  employment,  (un  cmploi.)  This 
prince  asked  him  where  he  was  born.  "I  was  born  at  Berlin," 
answered  he.  "  Begone  !;;  said  the  monarch,  (le  monarque,)  "  all 
-the  men  of  Berlin  (un  Bcrlinois)  are  good  for  nothing/"7  "I  beg 
your  majesty's  pardon,'7  replied  the  candidate ;  "  there  are  some  good 
ones,  and  I  know  two."  "  Which  are  those  twc  ?"  asked  the  king. 
1  The  first,"  replied  the  candidate,  "  is  your  majesty,  and  I  am  the 
second."  The  king  could  not  help  laughing  (ne  put  stemptcher  de 
rire)  at  this  answer,  and  granted  (accordcr)  the  request,  (li  de- 
mande.) 


SEVENTY-FOURTH  LESSON. — Soixant'.-quatorziemc  Lc£on}  lime. 


VOCABULAIRE.     Ire  Sec. 


To  lose  sight  of. 

The  sight.      My  sight  is  good.        (I 

have  good  sigk.t.) 
I  wear  spectacles  because  my  sight 

is  bad,  (or  I  have  a  bad  sight.)  (242, 

065.  55.) 

Are  you  near-sighted,or  iOng-sighted  ? 
I  am  near-sighted. 
The  ship  is  so  far  off,  that  we  shall 

eoon  lose  sight  of  it. 
I  have  lost  sight  of  that. 
As  it  is  long  since  I  was  in  England, 

I  have  lost  sight  of  your  brother. 


Perdrr.  de  vue. 
La  vuc. 


t  J'ai  bonne  v* 


Je  porte  des  lunettes  parce  que  j'ai 
Zavuemauvaise,  (oumauvaise  vue.) 

t  Avez-vous  la  vue  courte  ou  longue  ? 

t  J'ai  la  vue  courte. 

Le  bailment  est  si  loin,  que  nous  lo 

perdrons  bientot  de  vue. 
J'ai  perdu  cela  de  vue. 
Comme  il  y  a  long-temps  que  je  n'ai 

et<5  en  Angleterre,  j'ai  perdu  voirc 

frere  de  vue. 
Comme  il  y  a  long-temps  que  je  n'ai 

lude  Francois,  je  Tai  perdu  de  vuo. 


As  it  is  long  since  I  have  read  any 

French,  1  have  lost  sight  of  it. 

Obs.  1GO.  Ought  and  sliould  (when  it  means  ought)  are  rendered  into 
French  by  the  condiliound  ($  148)  of  the  verb  devoir,  to  owe.  Ought  te 
have,  should  have,  by  the  conditiunnel  pasfc.  ($  149.) 


390 


SEVENTY-FOURTH     LESSON.    (1.) 


You  ought  to  or  should  do  that. 

He  ought  not  to  speak  thus  to  his 

father. 
We  ought  to  go  thither  earlier. 

They  should  listen  to  what  you  say. 

You  should  pay  more  attention  to 
what  I  say. 

You  ought  to  have  done  that. 

2Ie  should  have  managed  the  thing 
better  than  he  has  done. 

You  should  have  managed  the  thing 
differently. 

They  ought  to  have  managed  the  thing 
as  I  did. 

We  ought  to  have  managed  it  differ- 
ently from  what  they  did. 

You  ought  to  have  played  on  the  flute 

while  I  was  playing  on  the  violin. 
I  wished  to  do  it,  but  my  flute  was 

out  of  order. 

He  ought  to  have  wished  it  to  you. 
A  stay,  a  sojourn.    To  make  a  stay. 
Do  you  intend  to  make  a  long  stay  in 

the  town  ? 
I  do  not  intend  to  make  a  lon^  stay 

in  it. 


Vous  devriez  faire  eel  a. 

II  ne  devrait  pas  parler  ainsi  a  BOC 

pere. 
Nous  devrions  y  aller  de  meilleurfl 

heure. 
Us  devraient  e*couter  ce  quo   Tout 

dites. 
Vous  devriez  faire  plus  d'atteation  a 

ce  que  je  dis. 
Vous  auriez  du  faire  cela. 
II  aurait  du  s'  y  prendre  mieux  quT 

n'a  fait. 
Vous  auriez  du  vous  y  prendre  d' 

maniere  differente. 
Us  auraient  du  s'y  prendre  comm 

je  m'y  suis  pris.     • 
Nous   aurions   du    nous   y  prendre 

d'une  autre  maniere  qu:ils  ne  s'v 

sont  pris. 
Vous  auriez  du  jouer  de  la  flute  pen 

dant  que  je  jouais  du  violon. 
Je  souhaitais  le  faire.  mais  ma  flut- 

etait  derange'e. 

II  aurait  du  vous  le  souhaiter. 
Un  sejour.          Faire  un  sejour, 
Comptez-vous  faire  un  long  sej< 

dans  la  ville  ? 
Je  ne  compte  pas  y  faire  un  long 

jour. 


. 


SoixANTE-QUATORZiiiMB  TnfiiviE.    Ire  Sec. 

Y  a-t-il  long-temps  que  vous  n'avez  vu  Favocat?  Oui,  je  1'ai 
perdu  de  vue. — Voyez  cet  oiseau,  comme  il  est  haut !  II  est  presque 
d  pcrte  de  vue,  (out  of  sight.) — Pourquoi,  lui  qui  a  la  vue  courte,  ne 
porte-t-il  pas  de  lunettes'?  II  ne  s'en  soucie  pas. — Vous  devriez 
faire  ce  que  votre  mere  desire.  Je  Paurais  fait,  si  j 'avals  pu;  mais 
quoique  j'aie  essaye  trois  fois,  je  n?ai  pas  pu  reussir. — Vous  voila 
deja  de  retour !  Vous  auriez  du  faire  un  plus  long  sejour  aupres  de 
votre  vieille  tante.  J'y  en  ai  fait  un  assez  long,  ne  vous  deplaise, 
(please  your  honor.) — Quei  sejour  y  avez-vous  fait?  Vous  croirez  a 
peine  que  fy  ai  fait  un  sejour  de  six  sernaines  et  demie. — Ce  n'est 
pas  possible  !  Si  fait,  c'est  tres-possible.  J'etais  aupres  d'elle  le  14 
Juin,  et  je  ne  Pai  quittee  que  hier;  et  vous  savez  que  c?est  aujour- 
d'hui  le  4  d'aout;  ainsi  comptez.  Je  ne  me  le  serais  pas  imagine 
Vous  m'avez  perdu  de  vue  sans  chagrin. 

A  peasant,  (paysan,)  having  seen  that  old  men,  (le  vieillard,) 
svhose  sight  was  bad,  used  spectacles  to  read,  went  to  an  optician 


SEVENTY-FOURTH     LESSON.    (2.) 


391 


(tm  opticien)  and  asked  for  a  pair  The  peasant  then  took  a  book, 
and,  having  opened  it,  said  the  spectacles  were  not  good,  (fern.) 
The  optician  put  another  pair  of  the  best  which  he  could  find  in  hia 
shop  (la  boutique)  upon  his  nose ;  but  the  peasant  being  still  unable 
to  read?  the  merchant  said  to  him :  '•  My  friend,  perhaps  you  cannot 
read  at  allP  "If  I  could,"  said  the  peasant,  "I  should  not  want 
your  spectacles." — I  thought  that  you  would  be  thirsty;  that  is  the 
reason  I  brought  you  to  the  apothecary's  shop  to  take  a  glass  of 
mineral  water  and  syrup.  Give  us  two  glasses  of  mineral  water.— 
What  syrup,  Miss?  No  matter  which,  (n'importc  le  quel ;)  I  like 
mem  all. 

.1  have  seen  six  players  (le  joueur)  to-day,  who  were  all  winning 
(gagner)  at  the  same  time,  (en  meme  temps.) — That  cannot  be,  for  a 
player  can  only  win  when  another  loses. — You  would  be  right  if  1 
were  speaking  of  people  who  play  at  c«,rds  or  billiards,  (06s.  118, 
5 11-)  but  I  am  speaking  of  flute  and  violin  players,  (de  joueur s  de 
Jlute  et  de  violon.) — Do  you  sometimes  practise  (fain*)  music  ?  (de 
la  musique?)  Very  often,  for  I  like  it  much. — What  instrument 
(Obs.  118,  511)  do  you  play?  I  play  the  violin,  and  my  sister  plays 
the  piano.  My  brother,  who  plays  the  bass,  (la  basse.)  accompanies 
(accompagner)  us,  and  Miss  Stolz  sometimes  applauds  (applaudir)  us. 
— Does  she  not  also  play  some  musical  instrument  ?  (un  instrument 
de  musique?)  She  plays  the  harp,  (la  harpe,)  but  she  is  too  proud 
(fiere)  to  practise  music  with  us. 

VOCABULAIRE.     2de  Sec. 


To  suspect,  to  guess. 

I  suspect  what  he  has  done. 

He  does  not  suspect  what  is  going  to 

happonto  him. 
To  think  of  some  one  or  of  something. 

Oi  whom  do  you  think  ? 

I  tnink  of  my  friend. 

Do  you  think  often  of  him — her  ? 

I  do,  very  often. 

Of  what  do  you  think  ? 

To  turn  upon.        To  be  the  question. 

It  is  questioned,  it  turns  upon. 

The  questfon  is  not  your  pleasure, 

but  your  improvement. 
You  play,  Sir,  but  playing  is  not  the 

thing,  but  studying. 

What  is  going  on  ? 


Se  douter,  1,  (de,  av.  1'inf.) 

Je  me  doute  de  ce  qu'il  a  fait. 

II  ne  se  doute  pas  de  ce  qui  va  lui 

arriver. 
Penser   d   quelqu'un   ou   d   quelquc 

chose. 

A  qui  pensez-vous  ? 
Je  pense  a  mon  ami — amie. 
Y  pensez-vous  souvent  ?  ($50,  2.) 
J'y  pense  tres-souvent. 
A  quoi  pensez-vous  ? 
t  S'agirde. 
II  s'agit  de. 
II  ne  s'agit  pas  de  votre  plaisir,  mail 

de  vos  progres. 
Vous  jouez,  Monsieur,  mais  il  no 

s'agit  pas  de  jouer,  il  s'agit  d'etu 

dier. 
De  quoi  s'agit-il  ? 


392 


SEVENTY-FOURI  fl    LESSON.    (2.) 


The  question  'a  to  know  what  we 
shall  do  to  pass  the  time  agreeably. 

On  purpose. 

I  beg  your  pardon,  I  have  not  done 

it  on  purpose, 

To  be  silent,  beingsilent,  been  silent. 
Da  eiient,  quit  talking.  Hush,  I  say. 
Are  you  silent?  Do  you  cease  talking? 
[  am.     I  do.        He  is  never  silent. 
After  speaking  half  an  hour  he  was 

silent,  he  ceased  speaking,  &c. 


II  s'agit  de  savoir  ce  que  nous  feionn 
poir  passer  notre  temps  agreable 
ment. 

Expres. 

Je  vous  demande  pardon,  je  ne  1'ai 
pas  fait  expres. 

t  Se  taire,*  4.  ai?ant — tu. 

t  Taisez-vous.       Taisez-vous  done. 

t  Vous  taisez-vous? 

t  Je  me  tais.      II  ne  se  tait  jemais. 

Apres  avoir  parlc  pendant  une  dt?mi- 
heure,  il  se  tut. 


Ols.  1C1.     Could  ($149)  is  rendered  by  the  r 
be  able.)    Alight,  by  the  conditionnel  mod;: 
have,  might  have,  by  the  conditionnel  j 

Could  you  speak  if  you  tried  ?  Pourriez-vou*    parler    si    vi> 


/  mi  'lit,  but  I  am  sure  he  could. 

Could  y»u  ring  before  a  large  audi- 
ence ? 

/  could  not,  but  Miss  B.,  (could,) 
might. 

(\ntld  thtij  han  danced  llie  Polka? 

They  might,  but  1  know  she  could 
ilam-cd  it.) 

( 'ould  you  have  played  before  those 
great  musician 

We  could  not,  but  Henry  might  have 
played  before  them. 


sntiitz  ? 
Sc  pinirrnif    . 

<;u'il  pourrnit. 

inter  dcva: 

Obs.  116;  une  grandc  audit 
Jc  ne  pourrais  pas,  mais    V 

(pourrait,)  poitrruit  : 
Auraicnt-ils  pit  danser  le  Polka  ? 
Ilsaurr.  t  're  pu,  mcii  - 

qu'ellc  I'aurait  pu. 

•rous  pu    jouer    devant    ces 
grands  musiciens  ? 
Abu*  n'aurion*  pas  pu,  mais   Henri 
aurait  pcut-etre  pu  jouer 


SOIXANTE-QUATORZlfcME    TlI^ME.       2de    SeC. 

Savez-vous  ce  qu'il  aurait  fait  si  je  n'avais  pas  ele  ici?  Je  mo 
doute  de  ce  qu'il  aurait  voulu  faire. — Aurait-il  pu  reussir ?  II  y  serait 
peut-etre  parvenu. — A  cjui  pensez-vous  quand  vous  ne  pensez  a 
lieu  ?  Je  pense  a  la  personne  qui  fait  cette  belle  question. — DC 
quoi  s'agit-i  ?  11  s'agit  du  musicien,  de  Phonneur  de  la  famille. — 
De  quoi  s?agissait-in  De  savoir  s:ii  avail  casse  le  chandelier 
expres  ou  non. — Moi,  je  crois  qu?il  Tavait  fait  expres.  Sil  Pavait 
fait  expres,  il  ne  pleurerait  pas  de  cette  maniere.  Ce  n7est  que  pour 
nous  faire  croire  qu'il  ne  Fa  pas  fait  expres. — Taisez-vous;  vous  lu» 
impute z  toujours  des  torts.  Je  ne  me  tairai  pas  pour  vous.  Laissons 
cela,  et  racontez-nous  une  anecdote. — Une  ville  assez  pauvre  fit  une 
depense  considerable  en  fetes  et  en  illuminations,  a  ''occasion  du 
passage  ie  son  prince.  Celui-ci  en  paraissar.t  etonne  un  courtisan 


SEVENTY-FIFTH     Lfcs^ON.    ^1.)  393 

(&  courtier)  dit,  "  Elle  n?a  fait  que  ce  qirelle  devait  a  votre  majesle.' 
c<  O'est  vrai,"  reprit  un  autre,  "  mais  elle  doit  tout  ce  qirelle  a  fait."— 
C'est  tres-bien,  je  ne  me  doutais  pas  que  vous  auriez  si  bleu  reussi 
Je  vous  remercie  du  compliment. 

A  thief  having  one  day  entered  a  boarding-house,  stole  three 
cloaks,  (le  manteau.) — In  going  away  he  was  met  by  one  of  the 
hoarders,  who  had  a  fine  laced  (galonne)  cloak.  Seeing  so  many 
cloaks,  he  asked  the  man  where  he  had  taken  them.  The  thief 
answered  boldly  (froidemcnt)  that  they  belonged  to  three  gentlemen 
of  the  house,  who  had  given  them  to  be  cleaned,  (a  degraisscr.) 
"  Then  you  must  also  clean  (degraisscs  done  aussi)  mine,  for  it  is 
very  much  in  need  of  it,  (en  avoir  grand  besom,")  said  the  boarder; 
"but,"  added  he,  "  you  must  return  it  to  me  at  three  o'clock."  "  I 
shall  not  fail,  (y  manqucr,)  Sir,"  answered  the  thief,  as  he  carried 
off  (cmportcr)  the  four  clonks,  with  which  he  (qu'\~)  is  still  to  return, 
(n\i  pas  encore  rapportes.) 

You  are  singing,  (chanter,)  gentlemen,  but  it  is  not  a  time  for  (il 
.  you  ought  to  be  silent,  and  to  listen  to  what 

you  are  told.  We  are  at  a  loss. — What  are  you  at  a  loss  about?  I 
am  ^-i»ii:ir  to  tell  you :  the  question  is  with  us  how  we  shall  pass  our 
time  agreeably.  Play  a  game  at  billiards  or  at  chess.  (5 11.) — We 
have  proposed  joining  a  hunting-party;  do  you  go  with  us?  (ctes-vous 
dcs  notrcs?)  1  cannot,  for  I  have  not  done  my  task  yet;  and  if  I 
cct  il,  my  master  will  scold  me.  Every  one  according  to  hid 
liking;  if  you  like  staying  at  home  better  than  going  a  hunting,  we 

raunot  hinder  you. — Does  Mr.  B go  with  us?  Perhaps. — I 

should  not  like  to  go  with  him,  for  he  is  too  great  a  talker,  (trop 
«  d.)  excepting  that,  (d  cela  pres})  he  is  a  clever  man,  a  fine  fellow, 
(VH  excellent  homiic.) 


SEVENTY-FIFTH  LESSON,  75th.— Smxantc-quinsieme  Lcron, 
VOCABULAIRE.     Ire  Sec. 


Towards,  (physically,)  (morally.) 

He  comes  towards  me — us. 

He  has  behaved  very  well  towards  me. 

We  must  always  behave  well  towards 

everybody. 
The   behavior  of  others   is   but   an 

echo  of  our  own.     If  we    behave 


Vers.  Envers. 

II  vient  vcrs  moi — nous. 

II  s'est  tres-b'en   comporte  cnven 

moi. 
II  faut  toujours  nous  bien  comportcr 

envers  tout  le  monde. 
La  concfuite  des  autres  n'est  qu'un 

echo  de  la  notre.      Si  nous  nous 


well  towards  them,  they  will  also  |       comportons  bien  envers  eux,  ils  BC 


594 


SEVENTY-FIFTH     LESSON 


behave  well  towards  us ;  but  if  we 
use  them  ill,  we  must  not  expect 
better  from  them. 

To  treat  or  to  use  somebody  well. 
To  use  somebody  ill. 
As  you  have  always  used  me  well,  I 
will  not  use  you  ill. 


\s  he  haa  always  used  me  well,  I 
uiways  used  him  in  the  same 
manner. 

To  delay,  (to  tarry.} 
Do  nut  be  long  before  you  return. 
1  shall  not  be  long  before  1  return. 
/  long  to  or  for. 

Obs.  1G2.     The  subject  of  the  verb  /<»/;:,  must  be  rendered  in  Frenr 
I  he  indirect  object,  me,  te,  lui,  no;  :  ln/r.  (:>'.)',  Obs.  90.) 

ng  to  see  my  brother.  t  H  me  tarde  de  voir  mon  fr< 

t  II  lui  tarde  de  rec< 
t  11  nous  tarde  de  d . 


comporteront   bien    ou^si  enveri 
nous;  mais  si  nous  en  usons  mal 
avec  eux,  nous  ne  devons  pas  at- 
tendre  mieux  de  leur  part. 
En  user  lien  avcc  quelqu'un. 
En  user  mal  avec  quelqu'un. 
Comme  vous  en  avez  use  toujours 
bien  avec  moi,  je  n'en  usen;i  pas 
mal  avec  vous. 

Comme  il  en  a  toujours  bien  use  arec 
moi,  j'en  ai  toujours  usd  de   la 
;ne  maniure  avec  lui. 
r,  1,  (takes  a  av.  rinf.»  — 
irdez  pas  d  revenir. 

irderai  pas  d  revenir. 
t  11  me  tarde . . .  (unipersont. 


ve  his  money. 

\\V  Idi i jr  lor  dinner,  bccauy 
v  hungry. 

tired. 

•''  off. 

L-  t  us  put  that  oil'  until  to-morrow. 
Let  us  put  ofl'that  Irsson  until  another 

(imr. 


t  II  leu: 

•ice. 

fois. 


SGJ.X  Ire  Sec. 

Comment  Jacques  se  couduit-ii  envers  ses  parents'?    II  ne 
duit  j>;is  biiMi  i  v. — A-t-il  des  amisici?     11  i 

il  si*  coinporte'rnal  envers  tout  le  monde. — Qu'aurait-il  du  faire  , 
(jiril  me  vit?    11  aurait  du  s?avancer  vers  moi  et  me  souhaiter  unt 
bonne (MncC) (a  :  \vyear.) — Ne leurtarde-t-il pasde sebaigner1 

(to  bathe?)  Si  fait,  il  leur  tarde  beaucoup:  mais  1'eau  de  la  riviere 
est  encore  trop  froide. — Ne  vous  tarde-t-il  pas  que  lecourrier arrive? 
($151.)  Sifait;  mais  il  me  tarderait  beaucoup  plus  si  je  n'avais  pas 
eiitoiulu  parlor  de  mon  ami. — Ne  tardez  pas  a  revenir,  entendez- 
vous?  Je  ne  tarderai  pag  car  il  me  tarde  de  partir. — Rernettrons- 
nous  TalTaire  a  demain?  Non,  ne  la  remettons  pas;  car  il  roua 
tarde  qu'elle  soit  finie.  (§  151.) — Que  voudriez-vous  savoir?  II  r.ous 
larde  de  connaitre  le  resultat  (the  result)  de  Selection  — Commerft 
57est  il  comporte  envers  sa  femme?  Pendant  la  lune  de  miel,  il 
s'est  comporto  comme  il  faut.  Et  ensuite  ?  Mal,  comme  il  le  faij 
envers  toutes  ses  connaissances. 


SEVENTY-FIFTH     L  ESSON.    (2.) 


395 


As  yoj  have  always  used  me  well,  I  will  use  you  in  llie  same 
rummer.  I  will  lend  you  the  money  you  want,  but  on  condition  that 
you  will  return  it  to  me  next  week. — You  may  depend  upon  it.— 
How  has  my  son  behaved  towards  you  ?  He  has  behaved  well 
towards  me,  for  he  behaves  well  towards  everybody.  His  fathei 
fold  him  often :  The  behavior  of  others  is  but  an  echo  of  our  own, 
If  we  behave  well  towards  them,  they  will  also  behave  well  towards 
js;  but  if  we  use  them  ill,  we  must  not  expect  better  from  them.— 
May  I  see  your  brothers  ?  You  will  see  them  to-morrow.  As  they 
Have  just  arrived  from  a  long  journey,  (Ic  voyage,)  they  long  for  sleep, 
for  they  are  very  tired. — What  has  my  sister  said?  She  said  that 
ehe  longed  for  dinner,  because  she  was  very  hungry. 

I  have  the  honor  to  wish  you  a  good  morning.  How  do  you  do? 
Very  well  -^rvice. — And  how  are  all  at  home?  Tc.lerably 

well,  thank  God  !  a  little  indisposed,  (indisposce,)  but 

she  is  well,  (rctablie ;)  she  told  (charger  dc)  me  to  give  you  her  best 
compliments. — 1  am  irlad  (charme)  to  lu'ar  that  she  is  well.  As  for 
you,  you  are  health  it>elf.  (la  saute  vicmc ;)  you  cannot  look  better, 
s-  avez  la  mcillcurc  mine  da  mo-ndc.) — 1  have  no  time  to  be  ill 
my  business  (mcs  njfaircs)  would  not  permit  me.  Please  (donnez- 
'vous  la  pcinc)  to  til  down ;  here  is  a  chair.  I  will  not  detain  (dis- 
trairc)  you  from  your  bi;  s  occupations;)  I  know  that  a  mer- 

dia-u's  urn,  i>;  (qitc  Ic  temps  cst  precicux  d  un  negotiant.) 


VOGABULAIBl 

fortqble, 

I   am  very  much  at  in}    case  upon 

this  chr.ir. 
You   are  uncomfortable   upon  your 

chair. 

What  can  that  he  ? 
Wo  are  uncomfortable  in  that  board- 

ing-house. 
That   man  is  well   ofT,  for  he   has 

plenty  of  money. 
That  man  is  badly  off,  for  he  is  poor. 


To  make  o?ie's  self  comfortable. 
Make  yourself  comfortable. 
To  be  uncomfortable. 
To  inconvenience  one's  self. 
To  put  one's  self  out  of  the  way. 
J)o  not  put  yourself  out  of  the  \vny. 
That  man  never  inconveniences  him- 
self; he  never  does  it  for  anybody. 


.     2dc  Sec. 
Etre  d  sou  a 
£trc  mal  d  sou  aix<-. 
Jc  suis  bien  a   rnon   aisc  sur  cetto 

chaise. 
Vous  Ctcs  mal  a  votre  aise  sur  votre 

chaise. 

t  Qu'est-ce  que  cela  peut  Otre  ? 
Nous  sommes  mal  a  notre  aise  dana 

cette  pension. 
Get  homme  est  a  son  aise,  car  il  a 

beaucoup  d'argent. 
Get  homme  est  mal  a  son  aise,  parcc 

qu'il  est  pauvre. 
Se  melt  re  d  son  aise. 
Mettez-vous  a  votre  aise, 


£  Se  gener,  1. 


Ne  vous  genez  pas. 
Get  homrne  ne  se  gene  jamais  ;  il  he 
se  Rene  jamais  pour  personne. 


£96  SEVENTY-FIFTH      LESSOR    V2.) 


Can  you,  without  putting  yourself  to 

inconvenience,  lend  me  ten  dollars 

and  your  gun  ? 
To  make  entreaties. 
To  beg  with  entreaty. 
I  employed  every  kind  of  entreaty 

to  engage  him  to  it. 
To  solicit,  to  press,  to  sue,  to  entreat. 
Here  and  there,  up  and  down,   all 

about. 

Now  and  then.     From  time  to  tine. 
Iruiillerently,  (as  good  as  bad.) 
1  have  done  my  composition  tolerably 

well. 


Pouvez-vous,  sans  vous  gSner,  me 
preter  dix  gourdes,  et  sans  ir.con 
venient  me  preter  votre  fusil  ? 

Faire  des  instances. 

Prier  avec  instances. 

Je  Ten  ai  sollicite  avec  toutes  les  in 
stances  possibles. 

Sollicitcr,  1. 

Par-ci,  par-la;  ici  ct  la.  » 

De  loin  en  loin.  I)e  temps  en  tc  mps. 
Tant  bien  quc  mal. 
J'ai  fait  ma  composition  taut  bien 
quc  mai. 


SOIXANTE-QUJN.  2de  SeC. 

.J'ai  perdu  do  vue  les  enfants^de  Madame  R .     Sont-ils  ehe/ 

elle  ?     Jls  sont  en  pension. — Comment  s'y  trouvent-ils?     i 

irouve  mill  da  :  plaint,  il  n'yest  pa 

Kt  les  lilies,  sont-elles  a  leur  aise  dans  la  leur?     Ki  !ain- 

draient  si  dies  ne  s'y  trouvaient   : 

U'tirai-r.     >i  \ 

:<e. — Ce  mrderin  est-il  a  son  aise  ?     II  n'irai: 

cMait  i*. — Oil  all--  par- 

la.     Qne!  •'•  montc  la  rue,  d'autre  fois  je  la  descent1 

al?     DC  temps  en  temps,  de  loin  en  loin. 

Comment   ave/.-vons  fait  votre  tlicme  '?     Tant  bien  que  mal. — \A-. 
I'ommis  i!  ;-;t  fait-il  sou  devoir  ?    11  le  fait  tant  bien  (me  mal : 

mais  le  nr-'H-iant  r.'en  est  pas  content. — Oil  sont  nos  messieurs?    Us 
ne  se  genent  pas;  ils  sont  a  fumer  dans  le  salon. — Les  avez-voua 
pries  d'aller  fumer  donors?     Je  les  ai  pries  avec  instances  de  le 
mais  ils  n'ont  pas  envie  de  se  gener. 

Have  you  made  your  French  composition  ?  I  have  made  it. — 
Was  your  tutor  pleased  with  it  ?  He  was  not ;  for  it  was  difficult,  and 
I  made  it  but  indifferently,  (tant  bien  quc  mal.) — Are  you  comfortable 
in  your  fashionable  boarding-house  ?  I  am. — Is  there  not  too  much 
etiquette  there  for  you  ?  A  little  etiquette  is  necessary.  I  do  not  like  u 
be  always  with  people  who  put  themselves  too  much  at  their  ease, 
who  use  no  ceremony,  (sont  sans  ceremonic.) — When  the  dog  was 
attacking  you,  did  you  not  entreat  them  (prier  avec  instances  de)  to 
pome  to  )*our  assistance  ?  I  did  earnestly  beg  them  to  come,  but 
ihey  would  not,  (time  expired.) — Did  the  dog  bite  and  hurt  you  much7 
He  bit  me  a  little  here  and  there. — At  what  o'clock  were  they  tc 
:36l,  Obs.  84)  play  off  that  game  of  billiards,  before  they  (2S27  Obs.  65) 
put  it  off?  They  were  to  play  it  at  f>  orclock  in  the  morning. — Why 


SET  ENT  Y-FIf  TH     .LESSOR    (3.)  §97 

did  they  postpone  it  ?    They  did  so,  because  one  of  them  was  obligea 
to  go  to  New  York,  but  he  will  return  in  a  day  or  two. 

Who  got  you  that  situation?  Cousin  James  did.— How  do  yon 
like  to  be  a  clerk?  I  like  it  pretty  well. — What  does  it  bring  you  ? 
Not  much  now,  because  I  am  not  thoroughly  acquainted  with  tho 
business,  but  when  (463)  I  am  I  shall  earn  more. — Why  are  you  going 
away  so  soon?  Stay.  I  have  nothing  pressing  (de  presse  a)  to  do 
now,  my  courier  is  already  despatched,  (??ion  courricr  cst  dejd  cxpedie.) 
I  shall  not  stay  any  longer.  I  only  wished  in  passing  (en  passant  par 
id)  to  inquire  about  your  health.  You  do  me  much  honoi. — It  is 
rery  fine  weather  to-day.  If  you  will  allow  me,  I  shall  have  the 
pleasure  of  seeing  you  again  (revoir*)  this  afternoon,  (cctte  apres 
dince,)  ana  if  you  have  time  we  will  take  a  little  turn  together. 
With  the  greatest  pleasure.  In  that  case  I  shall  wait  for  you.  I  will 
:!ome  for  you  (vcnir  prcndrc)  about  (vcrs)  seven  o'clock.  Adieu,  then, 
till  I  see  you  again.  I  have  the  honor  to  bid  yon  adieu. 

VOCABULAIRE.     Gme  Sec. 


somebody. 

mpartcd    that    to    your 

tab 

I  have  imparted  it  to  him. 
To  look  ....  to  repeal;,  in  vain. 

In  vain  1  looked  all  anuimi. 
neither   man   n»r   house:    ii"»t    the 
least  sign  of  settlement. 

A  dwelling,  habitation,  settlement. 

In  vain  I  speak,  for  you  do  not  listen 
to  me. 

In  vain  I  do  my  best,  I  cannot  do 
anything  to  his  liking. 

You  may  say  what  you  please,  no- 
body will  believe  you. 

It  is  in  vain  that  they  earn  money, 
they  will  never  be  rich. 

"We  seaich  in  vain,  for  what  we  have 
.ost  we  cannot  find. 

To  salute,  bid  adieu,  good  day,  bow. 
I  have  the  honor  to  bid  you  adieu. 
Present  my  compliments  to  him,  (to 

her.) 
Remember  me  to  him,  (to  her.) 


Faire  part  dc  yttclqiie  chose  d  quel- 

qu'iin. 

-ou8  fait  part  de  cela  a  votro 

pere? 

Je  lui  en  ai  fait  part, 
t  Avoir  beau  rcgardcr  . . .  avoir  beau 

parler. 
J'avais  beau  regarder  tout  autour  de 

moi,  je  ne  voyais  ni  homme,  ni 

maison  :  pas  la  moindre  apparenco 

d'habitation. 
Une  habitation. 
J'ai  beaa  parler,  vous  ne  m'ecoutez 

pas. 
J'ai  beau  faire  de  mon  mieux,  je  no 

peux  rien  faire  a  son  grc. 
Vous  avez  beau  dire,  personno  nc 

vous  croira. 
Us  ont  beau  gagner  de  F argent,  lie 

ne  seront  jamais  riches. 
Nous  avons  beau  chercher,  nous  ne 

pourrons  pas  trouver  ce  que  noua 

avons  perdu. 
Saluer,  1. 
J'ai  1'honnem-  Je  vous  saluer. 

-  Dites-lui  bien  des  choses  de  ma  port 


598  SEV  ii  NT  Y-  FIFTH     LESSEN.     (3.) 


Pray  present  my  compliments  to 
your  sister. 

Remember  me  (present  my  compli- 
ments) to  him,  (to  her.) 

I  shall  not  fail. 

The  present,  (the  present  'imc  or 
tense.) 

The  past.  The  future. 

The  loss  of  time. 

Knjoy  all  the  pleasures  that  virtue 
permits. 


Je   vous  prie  de  faire  mes  compli 
mentsa  Mademoiselle  votre  somr, 

Presentez-lui    mes    civilite's,    (mea 
tres-humbles  respects.) 

Je  n'y  manquerai  pas. 

Le  present. 

Le  passe.  L'avenir,  le  futur, 

La  perte  du  temps. 
Jouissez  de  tous  les  plaisirs  que  la 
vertu  permet. 


SoiXAXTE-QUIXZlfcME    Tllfc.ME.       oKlC  Sec. 

Bon  jour,  Mile.,  j'espere  que  vous  vous  portez  bien !  J'ai  1'hon- 
neur  de  vous  saluer,  M.  Je  suis  bien  portante,  je  vous  remercie. — 
KH  effect,  vows  avez  tres-bonne  mine.  Et  vous,  vous  etes  la  sante 
meme.  Vous  voulez-vous  moquer  de  moi!  car,  je  suis  a  demi- 
mort.  Non,  vraiment,  je  trouve  que  vous  avez  tres-bonne  mine. 
Vous  avez  beau  dire,  Mile.,  je  sens  que  je  ne  suis  pas  la  saute 
meme.  Vous,  M.,  vous  avez  beau  dire,  vous  ne  me  ferez  pas  croire 
que  je  n'y  vois  pas. — Avez-vous  fait  part  a  quelqu'un  de  la  houvelle 
donl  je  vous  ai  fait  part  hier?  Oui,  j'en  ai  fait  part  a  mon  cousi 
je  me  pmpo>ai>  dVn  fairr  part  a  qnelqu'autre  personne.  Ktait-ce 
mi  secret?  Non  ;  -rnenl. — M.  F.  est  riche,  est-ii  de  la 

honm;   so  Non,  il  a  beau   etre  riche,   on  ne  veut  pas  Fy 

ad  moll  re. — Lc  Ills  dn  consul  a  p<Tvlu  beaucoup  de  temps;  rnais  i! 
pout  le  re  pare  r  s'il  s'applituie.     Vous  avo/  beau  dire,  la 
temps  est  irreparable.     Onadit.'i,  perniis  <i 

avai-e  que  du  tc-. 

That  ofd  woman  is  always  scolding,  (est  toujours  a  prouder  , ;  in 
vain  I  do  my  best.  No  one  can  do  anything  to  her  likiuir. — You 
may  say  what  you  please;  no  one  will  believe  you.  It  is  true, 
nevertheless. — Can  /ou,  without  putting, yourself  to  inconvenience, 
Irnd  me  one  hundred  dollars  ?  As  you  have  always  used  me  well,  I 
will  treat  you  in  the  same  manner,  and  will  lend  you  that  sum. — • 
Have  you  imparted  to  your  brother  what  I  told  you  to  tell  him  1  As 
he  was  very  tired,  he  longed  to  go  to  sleep ;  so  that  I  have  postponed 
imparting  it  to  him  till  to-morrow. — Will  that  do  ?  Yes,  it  will. 

The -loss  of  time  is  an  irreparable  loss.  A  single  minute  cannot 
oe  recovered  (sc  rccouvrer)  for  all  the  gold  in  the  (du)  world.  It  is, 
Chen,  of  the  greatest  importance  to  employ  well  the  time,  which 
consists  (consister)  only  of  (en)  minutes,  of  which  we  must  make 
good  use.  We  have  but  the  present;  the  past  is  no  longer  anything, 
(n-fsf  plus  ricn.)  and  the  future  is  uncertain,  (incertain.) — A  great 
smny  people  ruin  themselves  (se  rui*ier}  because  they  wish  to 


SEVENTY-SIXTH     LESSON.    (1.) 


399 


thdulge  themselves  too  much,  (a  force  de  vouloir  se  fairc  du  bien.} 
if  most  men  (la  plupart  des  hommes)  knew  how  to  content  them 
selves  (secontentcr  de)  with  what  they  have,  they  would  be  happy 
but  their  greediness  (leur  aviditc)  veiy  often  makes  (rend re)  them 
unhappy. — In  order  to  be  happy  we  must  forget  the  past,  not  trouble 
ourselves  about  (nc  pas  s'inquieter  de)  the  future,  and  enjoy  the 
present. — I  was  very  much  dejected  (triste)  when  my  cousin  came 
to  oe,  (vint  me  trouvcr.)  "  What  is  the  matter  with  you  ?;;  he  asked 
me.  "  Oh,  (all !)  my  dear  cousin,"  replied  I,  "  in  losing  that  money 
I  ha/e  lost  everything.'7  "Do  not  fret,7'  said  he  to  me;  "fci  I 
have  found  your  money.77 


STY-SIXTH  LESSON,  ~${\i.—Soixantc-sci:iemc  Lc<;on,  lime. 


VOCABULAIRE.     Ire  Sec. 


Do  you  t 

Are  you  reading  ? 


I  do. 
I  am. 


They 


A.re  they  making  a  noise  ? 

are  (making  one). 
Is  she  coming  ?  She  is. 

Were  you  scolding  ?         I  was  so. 

Will   he   not  be  dressing   himself? 

Yes,  he  will. 
To  mean. 

What  do  you  mean  ? 
I  mean  what  I  was  saying. 
What  does  that  man  mean  ?  Nothing. 
He  means  nothing. 
What  docs  that  mean  ? 

What  does  :  "  Je  suis  d  Zi/e,"  mean  ? 
That  means  :  I  am  reading. 
That  does  not  mean  anything. 
I  do  not  know  what  that  means. 
To  lie  dost.          To  be  particular. 
I  do  not  like  to  deal  with  that  man, 
for  he  is  too  particular. 

To  grow  impatient,  to  J ret. 

Do  not  fret  about  that. 

To  fit  up,  to  watch.    I  nm  sitting  up. 

I  have  sat  up  all  night. 


|   Liscz-vous?  Je  lis. 

Etes-vous  a  lire  (}>  144 — 6.)     Je  suis 

a  lire. 
Sont-ils  ar  fairc  du  bruit  ?     Us  sont  a 

en  faire. 

Est-elle  a  venir  ?     Elle  est  a  venir. 
Edez-Youa  a  gronder  ?     J'etais  a  Ic 

faire. 
Ne  sera-t-il  pas  a  s'habiller  ?          Si 

fait. 

Vouloir  dvre. 
t  Que  voulez-vous  dire  ? 
t  Je  veux  dire  ce  que  j'utais  a  dire, 
t  Que  veut  dire  cet  homme  ?    Rien. 
t  II  ne  veut  rien  dire, 
t  Que  veut  dire  cela?         Qu'est-co 

que  cela  veut  dire  ? 
t  Que  veut  dire  :     Je  suis  d  lire  t 
t  Cela  veut  dire :  I  am  reading, 
t  Cela  ne  veut  rien  dire, 
t  Je  ne  sais  pas  ce  que  cela  veut  diro. 
t  Yregarderde  pres. 
t  Je  n'aime  pas  a  faire  des  a'ffaires 
avec  cet  homme,  car  il  y  regards 
de  trop  pres. 
t  S' impatient er  de. 
Ne  vous  impatientez  pas  de'ccla, 
Veiller,  1.     Je  suis  a  vciller. 
J'ai  veille  toute  la  nuit. 


too 


SEVENTi'-SlXTH     LESSOK.     (1.) 


To  advise.     He  is  advising  him  to  ... 

The  dress,  the  costume.  An  elegant 

dress. 

To  dress  one's  self. 
That  man  always  dresses  well. 
To  find  fault  with  something. 
That  man  always  finds  fault   with 

everything  he  sees. 
Do  you  find  fault  with  that  ? 
I  do  not  find  fault  witii  it. 
,4  trick,  (a  turn,  a  round.'      T:  play 

a  trick. 

To  play  a  trick  upon  some  one. 
To  take  a  turn. 

I  have  taken  a- turn  round  the  garden. 
He  has  taken  n  couple  of  turns  round 

the  garden. 
To  take  a  little  turn. 
To  travel  through  Europe. 
More  (meaning)  besides. 

You  have  given  me  three  books,  but 

I  wain  tin' 

/.-  if,  .Many  less. 

Three  l<>i'.         Three  too  many. 


Co?iseiller,  1,  de  . .      II  es>.  3  le  i»n 

seiller  de  . . . 
La  mise.         Unc  mise  elegante. 

Se  mettre,*  4. 

Get  homme  se  met  toujours  bien. 
t  Trouver  a  redire  d  quelque  diose. 
t  Get  homme  trouve  toujours  a  redirf 

a  tout  ce  qu'il  voit. 
t  Trouvez-vous  a  redire  a  cela? 
t  Je  n'y  trouve  rien  a  redire. 
Un  tour.  Jouer  un  tour. 

JOINT  un  tour  aquelqu'un. 
t  Faire  un  tour, 
t  J'ai  fait  un  tour  de  jardin. 
t  II  a  fait  deux  tours  de  jardin. 

t  Fairc  un  petit  tour. 

t  Faire  le  tour  dc  1'Europc. 

DC  plus.   (3D1,  Ols.  71.)  (Aprcs      t 

?i om  ou  nombre.) 
Vous  m'avez  donnc  trois  livn 

i  veux  trois  de  plus. 
De  moins.     Beaucoup  de  moins. 
Trois  de  moins.     Trois  de  trop. 


SOTXAM;  Ire  Sec. 

Ah!  vous  voila.  Oui,  c'est  moi-mc-mr.  Venez-vous  de  faire  im 
^etit  tour  ?  Non,  je  viens  du  magasin  de  M.  D.;  ou  je  voulais  achetcr 
dt»s  pints  dc  pcau  (kid)  mais  je  n'ai  pas  pu.  Et  pourquoi  done  ? 
n'tMi  a-t-il  pas!  Si  fait,  il  en  a  de  superbes;  mais  il  y  regarde  de 
trop  pres.  Que  voul«z-vous  dire  par  cela?  Ce  qne  je  veux  dire  ? 
C'est  tout  simple,  (it  is  plain.)  Je  veux  dire  qu;il  vend  cher  et  qu'il 
ne  veut  rieu  rabattre.  Je  sais  qu'il  n'a  qurun  prix;  mais  je  ne  croia 
pas  qu'il  y  regarde  de  trop  pres.  N'avez-vous  pas  trouve  a  redire  a 
son  prix?  Si  fait,  ei  je  lui  ai  dit  qu'il  demandait  12  sous  et  demi  de 
plus  que  les  autres  marchands.  Kt  vous  lui  avez  peut-etre  offert  25 
sous  de  moins  que  son  prix  ?  Non,  mais  12  sous  et  demi.  Alors, 
ne  vous  plaignez  pas :  ne  trouvez  pas  a  redire  a  sa  conduite,  car 
n;y  regardez-vous  pas  d'aussi  pres  que  lui^?  Moi !  y  regarder  d'aussi 
pres  que  lui ! — Jean,  qives-tu  a  faire  ?  Je  su:s  a  nettoyer  mon  fusil. — 
Quo  fait  Anne  ?  Ne  Fentendex-vous  pas?  Elle  est  a  pratiquer  son 
piano  et-a  chanter.  Est-ce  elle  qui  est  a  pratiquer?  Je  croyais  que 
c'etait  Julie  qui  etait  a  le  faire.  Anne  a  fait  beaucoup  de  progres 
depuis  que  je  ne  I'ai  entendue. 


SEVEN  TY-SIXTH     LESSON.     (2.) 


401 


Did  you  mean  to  say  that  you  and  your  cousin  Henry  are  going 
623,  Obs.  148)  to  make  the  tour  of  Europe?  No,  I  meant  to  say 
that  he  and  I  are  going  to  make  the  tour  of  the  United  States  of 
North  America.  De  VAmerique  du  rord,  are  four  words  too  many, 
United  States  is  enough. — You  like  to  find  fault;  but  who  is  that 
young  lady  so  elegantly  dressed?  (mise  si  elegammcnt  ?}  Is  it  not  the 
one  whc  was  drinking  a  glass  of  mineral  water  at  the  corner  ?  Oh ' 
it  is  not  the  same.  She  looks  like  her.  At  any  rate  (apres  tout)  she 
has  on  an  elegant  dress.  She  is  walking,  (a  marcher.)  Ho\y  well 
she  walks !  Now  she  is  laughing.  How  pretty  are  her  teeth !  Hush ! 
hush  !  you  make  me  mad  (vous  iriimpaticntcz)  with  your  exclama- 
lions  !  Hush  yourself.  You  have  no  taste.  What  does  that  mean, 
Sir?  That  means  that  although  you  dress  ($  151)  well  yourself,  yov 
are  too  particular  about  other  people's  dress. — Do  not  play  a  tricl? 
upon  me.  I  will  not  play  one  upon  you. 

Why  have  you  played  a  trick  upon  that  man  ?  Because  he  alwayi 
finds  fault  with  even-thing  he  sees.— What  does  that  mean,  Sir* 
That  means  that  I  do  not  like  *o  deal  with  you,  because  you  are  to& 
particular. — I  wonder  why  your  brother  has  not  done  his  task.  I* 
was  too  difficult.  He  has  sat  up  all  night,  and  has  not  been  able  to 
L*O  it,  because  it  was  too  difficult. — Why  are  you  so  sad  ?  You  do 
not  know  what  makes  me  uneasy,  my  dear  friend,  (fern.)  Tell  me, 
for  I  assure  you  that  I  share  (partager)  your  sufferings  (la  pcine)  a?, 
well  as  your  pleasures. — I  am  sure  that  you  feel  for  me,  (prcndrc* 
part  d  mcs  peines.)  but  I  cannot  tell  you  now  (en  ce  moment)  what 
makes  me  uneasy.  I  will,  however,  tell  you  when  an  opportunity 
offers,  (d  Voccasion.) 


VOCABCLAIRE.     2de  Sec. 


I^T/,  his,  her  reach.  The  child's  reach. 

Within  my  reach.    Out  of  my  reach. 
Those  things  are  not  within  the  reach 

of  everybody. 
Within  gun-shot. 
A  gun-shot,  (meaning  distance.) 
Two  gun-shots,  (        '*        .) 
IIow  many  shots  have  you  fired  I 

I  wonder  why  that  man  makes  such 

a  noise  ? 
So  long  as. 
So  long  as  you  behave  well,  people 

will  love  you. 
To  carry  oft 


A  la  portee  de 


Ufa,  sa  portee. 

1'enfant. 

A  ma  portee.         Hors  de  ma  porte'e. 
Ces  choses  ne  sont  pas  a  la  portee 

de  tout  le  monde. 
A  la  porte'e  du  fusil. 
Une  portee  de  fusil. 
Deux  portees  de  fusil. 
Combien  de  coups  de  fusil  avez-vous 
tire's  ?  (482.) 
Je  voudrais  bien  savoir  pourquoi  eel 

homme  fait  un  tel  bruit  ? 
Tant  que. 
Tant    quo  vous  vous  comporterex 

bien,  on  vous  aimera. 
,  1, 


402 


SEVENTY-SIXTH     LESSON.    (2.) 


A.  mouthful.         A  sweet  mouthful. 

To  overwhelm,  to  heap,  to  load. 

i'o  overwhelm  some  one  with  joy. 

Generous. 

Charitable,  beneficent. 

You  have  heaped  benefits  upon  me. 

Sincere.  Sincerely. 

\n  advantage. 

The  disadvantage,  prejudice. 

I  shaii  never  say  anything  to  your 

disadvantage. 
fb  surrender. 

i'he  enemies  have  surrendered. 
So  prefer. 
I  prefer  the  useful  to  the  agreeable. 


Une  bouchee.     Une  bonne  bouch£e 

Combler,  1. 

Combler  quelqu'un  de  joie. 

Genereux,  genereuse,  genereusea 

Biemaisant,  charitable. 

Vous  m'avez  comble  de  bierifaits. 

Sincere.  Sincerement. 

Un  avantage. 

Le  desavantage. 

Je  ne  dirai  jamais  rien   a  votrc  dii 

savantage. 
Se  rendre,  4. 

Lcs  ennemis  se  sor.t  rendus. 
Preferer. 
Je  prefere  Tutile  a  1'agreable. 


Obs.  163.   All  adjectives  and  verbs  used  substantively  are  masculine.  Ex. 


The  drinking. 

The  eating. 

To  behold. 

Rehold  those  beautiful  flowers  with 

their  colors  BO  fresh  and  bright. 
The  color,  tho  complexion.  The  lily. 
The  violet.        The  forget-me-not. 
The  rose.  An  emblem. 

Fresh  verd'ire  is  salutary  to  our  eyes. 

What  was  he  doing  when  he  was  told 

of  his  cousin's  arrival  ? 
He  was  taking  hb'iftvsic  lesson. 


Le  boire. 

Le  manger. 

Regarder,  1. 

Regardez  ces  superbes  fleurs  au  tcint 

si  frais  et  si  eclatant. 
La  couleur,  le  teint.  Le  Ms. 

La  violette.        La  germandrec. 
La  rose.  Un  embleme. 

La  verdure  fraiche  fait  du  bien  a  nos 

ycux. 
Qu'etait-il  a  faire  quand  on  vient  lui 

annoncer  Farrivee  de  son  cousin  ? 
II  etait  a  prendre  sa  le£on  de  musique. 


2de  Sec. 

Je  voudrais  bieu  saroir  pourquoi  cette  petite  fille  fait  tant  de  bruit? 
Elle  crie  de  cette  maniere  parce  qu'elle  veut  cette  tasse  verte  et 
jaune,  qui  est  hors  de  sa  ponee.  Je  suis  presque  sur  que  c'est  une 
enfant  tre«-gatee ;  car,  si  elle  ne  Petait  pas  tant,  eile  aimerait  mieux 
attendre  que  de  crier.  Mais  comme  la  tasse  est  a  votre  portee, 
donnez-la-lui,  pour  combler  ses  souhaits.  (satisfy.)  Voyez,  regardez, 
vous  I7avez  comblee  de  joie.  Vous  m/avez  fait  faire  une  action 
charitable. — Pourquoi  ce  petit  garcon  ne  tire-t-il  pas  a  Poiseau  qui 
est  sur  Parbre  ?  Ne  le  voi^-il  pas  ?  II  sait  que  Poiseau  est  hors  de 
la  portee  de  son  fusil;  mais  il  est  a  le  veiller,  il  s'approche  pcudpeu^ 
(little  by  little.)  A  present,  regardez,  il  va  tirer.  II  a  touche  Poiseau, 
mais  il  ne  Pa  pas  tue. — L'amie  de  Sophie  est-elle  sincere  ?  Je  la 
crois  tres-charitable  et  tres-sincere. — Qui  est  genereux  et  bienfai&aat? 
— Parle-t-il  sincerement  ? — A-t-il  trouve  quelque  chose  a  redire  a  la 
smutaite  de  Pavocat2 — A-t-il  parle  a  son  desavantage  ? — Marie  vou 


SEVENTY -SE  VENT  II     LESSON.    (1.)  403 

drait  bieii  savoir  quiaenleve  son  portefeuille  Francais.— -Le  toint  do 
cette  demoiselle  est  superbe,  n'est-ce  pasl 

What  do  you  think  of  the  man  who  spoke  to  us  at  the  concert? 
He  is  a  man  of  much  understanding,  (de  beaucoup  d'esprit,)  and  not 
at  all  proud  (ficr)  of  his  merit. — As  soon  as  Mr.  Flausen  sees  me, 
ne  begins  to  speak  English,  in  order  to  practise,  and  overwhelms 
me  with  politeness,  (d'honnetete,)  so  that  I  often  do  not  know  what 
lo  answer.  His  brothers  do  the  same,  (en  font  autant.)  However, 
they  are  very  good  people;  they  are  not  only  (non seulemcnl)  rich 
And  amiable,  but  they  are  also  generous  and  charitable.  They  love 
me  sincerely,  therefore  I  love  them  also,  and  consequently  (par 
consequent)  shall  never  say  anything  to  their  disadvantage.  I  should 
love  them  still  more,  if  they  did  not  make  so  much  ceremony, 
(tant  de  ceremonies ;)  but  every  one  has  his  faults,  (le  defaut,)  and 
mine  is  to  speak  too  much  of  their  ceremonies. 

Behold,  ladies,  (Mcsdames,)  those  beautiful  flowers,  with  their 
colors  so  fresh  and  bright ;  they  drink  nothing  but  water.  The  white 
lily  has  the  color  of  innocence,  (I' innocence;)  the  violet  indicates 
gentleness,  (marque  la  douceur :)  you  may  see  it  in  Louisa's  eyes. 
The  forget-me-not  has  the  color  of  heaven,  our  future  dwelling,  and 
the  rose,  the  queen  of  flowers,  is  the  emblem  of  beauty  and  of  joy. 
You  see  all  that  personified  (personnijie)  in  seeing  the  beautiful  Ame- 
lia, (Amelie.)  How  beautiful  is  the  fresh  verdure  !  It  is  salutary  to 
our  eyes,  and  has  the  color  of  hope,  (de  Vesper  ance,)  our  most  faith- 
ful (Jidelc)  friend,  (fern..)  who  never  deserts  (quitter)  us,  not  even  in 
death,  (d  la  mort.) — One  word  more,  my  dear  friefid.  What  is  your 
pleasure  ?  I  forgot  to  tell  you  to  present  my  compliments  to  your 
mother.  I  thank  you  for  her,  (de  sapart ;)  I  shall  not  fail.  Fare- 
well, then. 


?FrENTY^SE¥ENTH  LESSON.— Soixante-dix-septicmc  Lcron.llmc. 

VOCABULAIRE.      IfG  Sec. 


A  silk  gown. 
A  kitchen  table. 
A  mahogany  table 
A  brick  house. 
A  stone  house. 
A.  windmill. 
A  coffee-mill. 


Une  robe  de  sole. 
Une  table  de  cuisine. 
Une  table  d1  acajou. 
Une  maison  de  brique. 
Une  maison  de  pierre. 
Un  moulin  d  vent. 
Un  moulin  d  cafe. 


O6x.  1631.  We  have  seen  (21)  that  the  preposition  de  is  put  Between  two 
•nibstantives,  the  latter  of  which  expresses  the  substance  of  which  the  former 
;8  made  ;  but  the  preposition  d  is  made  use  of  when  the  latter  expresses  tha 


104 


SEVENTY-SEVENTH    LESSON. 


use  of  the  former.    In  both  cases  the  order  of  the  two   substantives  is 
inverted  in  French  when  they  make  a  compound  in  English. 


A  velvet  bonnet. 

A  silver  tankard. 

A  water-mi.l. 

A  steam-mill. 

Gunpowder. 

Fire-arms. 

A  one-horse  wagon. 

A  four-horse  carriage. 

A  two-wheeled  wagon. 

A  four-wheeled  carriage. 

A  one-story  house. 

A  two-story  house. 

A.  three-story  house. 

To  exaggerate,  amplify,  heighten. 

That  man  exaggerates   all   that-  he 

says  and  does. 
To  take  the  place  of,  to  be  in  stead  of. 

That  man  is  a  father  to  me. 

That  umbrella  serves  him  as  a  stick. 

On  a  small  scale.     On  a  largo  scale. 
Thereabouts,  nearly. 
Alternately,  turn  by  turn. 
To  c?idcavor,  to  strive. 
To  give  one's  self  up  to  grief. 
To  melt.  T§  melt  in  tears. 

To  shake. 

Shake  that  tree,  and  the  fruit  will 
fall  down. 


Un  chapeau  de  Velours. 

Un  pot  d1 argent. 

Un  moulin  a  eau. 

Un  moulin  d  vapeur. 

De  la  poudre  d  canon. 

Des  armts  d  feu. 

Une  voiture  a  un  ciuwVi. 

Une  voiture  d  quatre  chnvirax. 

Une  voiture  d  deux  roues. 

Une  voiture  d  quatre  roues. 
'  Une  maison  d  un  etage. 
|  Une  maison  d  deux  etages. 
i  Une  maison  d  trois  etages. 

Outrer,  1.  Exagerer,  i. 

Get  hommc  outre  tci  t  ce  qu'-.l  L<  st 
tout  ce  qu'il  fait. 

Tcnir  lieu  de Servir  de.  (?32.) 

t  Cet  homme  me  tient  lieu  de  pero, 

t  Cet  homme  mo  sert  de  pere. 

t  Ce  parapluie  lui  tient  lieu  de  canne, 

t  Ce  parapluie  lui  sert  de  canne. 

En  petit.  Er  grand. 

A  peu  pres. 

Tour  a  tour. 

t  S'efforcer,  1,  (de  av.  I'ini.) 

5" abandonner  d  la  douleur. 

l-'ondre,  4.  Fondre  en  larmes 

Secouer,  1. 

Secouez  cet  arbre,  et  les  fruits  cu 
tomberont. 


SOIXANTE-DIX-SEPTIEME  TH&ME.     Ire  Sec. 

Demeurez-vous  dans  une  maison  de  pieire  ou  de  hois'?  Nous 
occupons  une  maison  de  brique.  Presque  toutes  IPS  maisons  se 
uatissent  en  brique  dans  ce  quartier-ci,  (quarter,  district.) — Voulez- 
vous  faire  emplette  d'un  moulin  a  eau  ou  a  vent  ?  Je  prefcre  les 
moulins  a  eau,  et  je  presume  que  j'en  acheterai  un. — Madame,  lo 
moulin  a  cafe  vient  de  se  casser.  Ah !  c'est  uh  malheur  !  Avez- 
vous  moulu  (to  grind,  moudre,^  4)  assez  de  cafe  ?  Non,  Madame 
pas  encore.  Envoyez  la  petite  Marguerite  empruritei  {R.  2)  le 
moulin  du  voisin. — Les  voitures  a  deux  roues  ne  sont  plus  a  la 
mode.  On  a  partout  des  voitures  a  4  roues. — Est-il  a  voyager  en 
voiture?  Non,  il  est  a  voyager  par  M  route  de  /cr,  (the  railroad.) — 
Comment  preferez-vous  voyager  ?  Par  le  bateau  a  vapeur.  Sophie 
n?C8i-elle  pas  a  coudre  (coudre,*  to  sew)  sa  robe  de  soie  ?  Elle  etait 


SEV  EJXTY-SEVENTft     LESSON.    (1.)  405 

&.  la  coudre  hier,  mais  maintenant  elle  doit  etre  d  coudre*  (she  mu§l 
bo  sewing*  sa  robe  de  satin. — Voulez-vous  qu'elle  couse  quelquc 
chose  pour  vous  ? 

Has  your  sister  been  out  ^to-day  ?  She  has  been  out  to  buy  seve- 
ral things. — What  has  she  bought  ?  She  has  bought  (s'est  achete)  a 
silk  gown,  a  velvet  bonnet,  and  a  lace  veil,  (un  voile  de  denielle.) — 
What  have  you  done  with  (de)  my  silver  tankard?  It  is  on  the 
kitchen-table,  together  with  (avcc)  the  oil-bottle,  the  milk-pot,  the 
pitcher,  the  mustard-pot,  and  the  cofFee-mill. — Do  you  ask  for  a 
wine-bottle?  No,  I  ask  for  a  bottle  of  wine,  and  not  for  a  wine- 
bottle. — If  you  will  have  the  goodness  to  give  me  the  key  of  the 
wine-cellar,  (la  cave  au  rt'n,)  I  shall  go  for  one. — What  does  that 
man  want  of  me  ?  He  exacts  nothing ;  but  he  will  accept  what  you 
will  give  him,  for  he  is  in  want  of  everything. — I  will  tell  you  that 
I  am  not  fond  of  him,  for  his  behavior  raises  suspicions  in  my  mind. 
He  exaggerates  all  that  he  says  and  does. 

You  are  wrong  in  having  such  a  bad  opinion  (unc  opinion)  of  him, 
for  he  has  been  a  father  to  you. — I  know  what  I  say.  lie  has  cheated 
me  en  a  small  and  on  a  large  scale,  and  whenever  he  calls  he  asks 
me  for  something.  In  this  manner  he  has  alternately  asked  me  for 
all  I  had :  my  fowling-piece,  my  fishing-line,  my  repeater,  and  my 
golden  candlesticks. — Do  not  give  yourself  up  so  much  to  grief, 
else  (sinan)  you  will  make  me  melt  in  tears.  Democritus  and 
Heraclitus  were  two  philosophers  of  a  very  different  character,  (d'un 
caractere  bien  different:)  the  first  laughed  at  the  follies  (lafolie)  of 
men;  and  the  other  wept  at  them. — They  were  both  right,  for  the 
follies  of  men  deserve  to  be  laughed  and  wept  at,  (meritent  qu'onen 
lie  et  qu'on  en  pleure.j* 

1  We  have  &cen  (Obs.  90,  391,)  that  faut  (must)  can  have  no  other  nomi 
native  but  il.     If  any  other  nominative  is  used,  the  English  verb  must  is 
not   to   be  translated  by  faut,  but  by  some  other  verb,  usually  by  devoir. 
Practice  must,  before  this,  have  taught  the  student  that:  il  faut,  faut-il, 
que  faut-il,  &c.,  always  stand  at  the  head  of  the  sentence,  and  that,  of 
course,  if  any  other  nominative  has  been  employed,  the  preceding  direction 
\s  to  be  complied  with.     She  must  le  sewing,  the  sentence  above,  might, 
beginning  with  il  faut,  have  been  correctly  rendered  by :  il  faut  qu'elle 
soit  d  coudre,  but,  if  elle  is  taken  for  subject,  you  Are  compelled  to  say  as 
above  :  elle  doit  etre  d  coudre. 

2  The  follies  deserve  to  le  laughed  and  wept  at.     Les  folies  meritent  qu'on 
en  nc,  ct  qu'on  en  pi  cure.     N.  B.     The  infinitive  of  a  passive  verb  coming 
after  another  verb,  is  rendered  by  qu'on  as  nominative  indefinite  of  the  fol- 
lowing verb,  which  must  be  put  in  its  proper  tense.     He  hopes  not  to  be 
laughed  at,  II  espere  qu'on  ne  se  moquera  pas  de  lui.     It  is  very  frequently 
followed  by  the  subjunctive,  as  in  the  exercise 


SEVENTY-SEVENTH     LESSON.    £2.") 


VOCABULAIRE.     2de  Sec. 


To  give  birth  to,  (meaning  to  raise,  to 
cause.) 

To  raise  difficulties. 

To  cause  quarrels. 

To  cause  suspicions. 

The  behavior  of  that  man  raised  sus- 
picions in  my  mind. 

To  be  in  want  of.       To  be  short  of. 

To  want. 

That  man  is  in  want  of  everything. 

I  am  in  want  of  nothing. 

To  set  the  table,  to  lay  the  cloth. 

A  cover. 

A  table  fo  •  four  persons. 

A  table  for  ten  persons. 

A  writing-table  or  desk. 

A  dining-room. 

A  sleeping  or  bed-room. 

A  repeater. 

An  oil-bottle. 

A  mustard-pot. 

A  pitcher. 

A  fowling-piece. 

A  fishing-line. 

To  exact,  to  want  of,  to  require 
What  do  you  want  of  me  ? 
What  do  you  exact  of  me  ? 
I  exact  nothing  of  you. 
A  milk-pot. 

Obs  1G3|.  When  the  second  noun  is  used  to  determine  the  first  more  pre 
cisely,  or  to  *how  that  the  first  contains  a  portion  of  the  second,  it  is  pro 
ceded  by  au  or  a  la  for  the  singular,  and  aux  for  the  plural. 


Faire  naitre. 

t  Faire  naitre  des  difficultdd. 
t  Faire  naitre  des  querelles. 
t  Faire  n-aitre  des  soupcons. 
t  La  conduite  de  cet  homme  a  fail 

naitre  des  soup§ons  daiis  man 

espru. 

Manquer  de. 

Cet  homme  manque  de  tout. 

Je  nc  manque  de  rien. 

t  Mettre  le  convert. 

Un  couvert.1 

Une  table  de  quatre  couverta. 

Une  table  de  dix  couverts. 

Une  table  a  ecrire. 

Une  salle  a  manger. 

Une  chambre  a  couchor. 

Une  montre  a  repetition. 

Une  bouteille  a  1'huile. 

Un  pot  a  moutarde. 

Un  pot  a  Peau. 

Un  fusil  de  chassc. 

Une  ligne  a  pechcr, 

Exiger,  1. 
Qu'exigez-vous  de  moi  ? 

Je  n'exige  rien  de  vous. 
Un  pot  au  lait. 


The  rabbit-man. 

The  oyster-woman. 

The  bottle  with  vinegar  in,  (not  full.) 

The  bottle  of  wine,  (full  of. 

The  bottle  with  wine  in. 

The  wine-bottle,  (none  in.) 


L'homme  aux  lapins. 
La  femme  aux  hultres. 
La  bouteille  au  vinaigrc- 
La  bouteille  de  vin. 
La  bouteille  au  vin. 
La  bouteille  a  vin. 


These  last  three  sentences  express  the  precise  distinction  to  be  conveyed. 

1  Couvert.  Cover  (Webster)  means  everything  usually  wanted  to  eat  s 
meal  with.  Un  couvert  for  dinner  is  not  the  same  as  un  couvert  for  break 
fast  or  tea.  Cups  and  saucers  being  used  al  the  latter,  and  not  at  the  former 
meal. 


SEVENTY-SEVENTH    LESSON.    (2.J  407 


Dainties. 

He  is  fond  of  dainties. 
At  broad  daylight. 
To  sit  down  to  a  meal 


Les  bons  morceaux. 

II  aime  les  bons  morceaux. 

En  plein  jour. 

Se  metlre  a  table. 


SOIXANTE-DIX-SEIJTIEME  THEME.     2de  Sec. 

Uestez  a  diner  avec  nous.  Nous  avons  quelques  bons  morceaux, 
VTous  voulez  que  nous  dinions  (5151)  avec  vous,  puisque  vous  nous 
paries  de  bons  morceaux.  Sans  doute  que  (Dir.  6)  je  le  veux, 
autrement  je  ne  vous  prierais  pas  de  rester.  Mais  dinerez-voua 
bientot ;  car,  j'ai  bien  des  choses  a  acheter  cet  apres-midi.  Laissez- 
moi  voir  Pheure.  II  est  une  heure  moms  un  quart.  La  fille  doit 
etre  a  meltre  (must  be  setting,  772?  N.)  le  convert;  ainsi  vous  voyez 
oue  vous  aurez  apres  diner,  assez  de  temps  pour  faire  vos  em- 
plettes  Qu'avez-voufl  a  acheter  ?  Des  bois  de  lit,  des  oreillers  de 
plume,  des  tables,  et  des  toilettes  d'acajou,  des  armoires  (walnut 
wardrobes)  de  noyer?  Non,  non,  je  suis  a  faire  faire  tout  cela. 
Mais  nous  sommes  a  chercher  un  poele  pour  la  cuisine,  un  moulin 
a  cafe,  des  pots  a  1'eau  de  differentes  grandeurs,  des  cuvettes,  (bowls,) 
des  cafetieres  (coffee-pots)  des  tasses  a  cafe.  Ne  vous  faut-il  pag 
aussi  des  tasses  a  the  ?  Non,  je  crois  que  nous  ne  prendrons  pas  de 
the,  nous  ne  Taimons  point.  Messieurs,  le  diner  est  servi.  Allons, 
ne  faites  point  de  difficultes.  Venez  vous  mettre  t\  table  et  gouter 
nos  bons  morceaux. 

Have  you  seen  your  niece  ?  .Yes ;  she  is  a  very  wood  girl,  who 
writes  well,  and  speaks  French  still  better;  therefore,  she  is  loved 
and  honored  by  everybody. — And  her  brother;  what  is  he  doing? 
Do  not  speak  to  me  of  him  ;  he  is  a  naughty  boy,  who  writes  always 
badly,  and  speaks  French  still  worse;  he  is  therefore  iaussi  n'est-H) 
loved  by  nobody.  He  is  very  fond  of  dainties,  but  he  does  not  like 
books.  Sometimes  he  goes  to  bed  at  broad  daylight,  and  pretends 
to  be  ill;  but  when  we  sit  down  to  dinner  he  is  .fffinerally  well 
again,  (retabli.)  He  is  to  study  physic,  (la  medecine,)  but  he  Jias  not 
the  slightest  inclination  for  it,  (aucune  envie.)  He  is  almost  always 
talking  of  his  dogs,  \vhich  he  loves  passionately,  (passj.onnc?ncnt.) 

His  father  is  extremely  sorry  for  it.  The  young  simpleton  (un 
imbecile)  said  lately  to  his  sister,  "  I  shall  enlist  as  soon  as  a  peace 
ffapaix)  is  proclaimed,  ( public  r")  My  dear  father  and  rny  deal 
another  dined  yesterday  with  some  friends  at  the  Kinjor  of  Spain, 
[VEvpagnety — Why  do  you  always  speak  English  and  never  French* 
Because  I  am  too  bashful,  (timide.)  You  are  joking :  is  a.)  English- 
man ever  bashful? — I  have  a  keen  appetite,  (grand  apfitil ;)  gum 
me  something  good  to  eat. — Have  you  any  money"?  No,  Sil, — 


408 


SEVENTY -EIGHTH     LESSON.    (1.) 


Then  I  have  nothing  to  give  you. — Will  you  not  let  me  have  some 
(ne  me  donnez-vous  pas)  on  credit?  I  pledge  ( engager)  my  honor. 
That  is  too  little.—- What,  (comment,)  Sir!  What  do  you  mean?  I 
mean  what  I  say. 


SEVENTH-EIGHTH  LESSON.— Soixantc-dix-huitiimc  Lccon,  78me. 

VOCABCLAIRE.       Ire    See. 

I'llESENT  OF  THE  SUBJUNCTIV 
Present  du  Suljonctif. 

For  its  use  and   formation  sec  ($151.)     That  article  is  to  be  carefull) 
studied. 

Je  tu  il 

parle,      parle*,      parle,      parlion*, 


They 
Speak. 
Finish. 
Heccive. 


Us,  dies 
parlen*. 

finisseut. 


II  faut  qu'ils 
parlent. 
finisseiit. 
regoi, 
rcndent. 


vous 
parlivz. 


finisse,     finisses,     fttiisse,     ! 

'ivc,  recev 
rende,      rendcs,     rciule,     rendi  . 


As  the  student  is  already  acquainted  with  some  of  the  persons  of  the 

ilar  ones,  f.s  in  all,  by  our  rule,  as  may  be  seen  at  $  151,)  we  will  at 

once  introduce  tin  in,  witli  some  of  the  known  antecedents.    In  going  over 

tho  following,  let  the  antecedent  w  person.     As: 

//  /tint  tju'il  ait  hi  Ixjnte,  &,c.     ll  faut  yu' Us  aunt  la,  &,C. 


You  must  have  the  goodness  to  do 

that— h«\  they 

.Must  I  be  here  early? 

Is  it  necessary  for  him  to  be  :. 
You  must  be  here  early. 

It  is  not  necessary  that  he  should 

come. 
Is  if  the  only  one  you  know  ?  he 

know*s?        they  know? 
It  is  the  only  one  I  know,  he  knows, 

they  know. 
•When  will  it  be  time  for  us  to  come  ? 

for  her  ?    for  thee  ? 

It  will  be  time  for  you,  for  her,  for  me 

to  come  at  6  o'clock. 
Do  you  wish  me  to  do  that  ?       How 

do  yon  wish  me  to  do  it  ? 
I  wisn  you  to  do  it   this  way  ;  him, 

her  to  d^  't. 


II  faut  que  vous  aycz  la  bonte  do 

cela,  iju'il  ait,  qu'ils  ;. 
Faut-il   que    je   sois   ici   de    bonne 

heure  ? 

Faut-il  qu'il  soit  ici  ? 
II  faut  que  vous  soyez  ici  de  btu.iie 

heure. 
II  n'est  pas  necessaire  qu'il  v 

scul 'juc  voussachiez?  qu'il 

sache  ?     qu'ils  sachem  / 
C'est  le  seul  que  je   sache,  qu'il 

sache,  qu'ils  sachent. 
Quand    sera-t-il    temps    que    nous 

venions  ?      qu'elle   vienne  ?       tu 

viennes  ? 
II  sera  temps  que  vous  veniez,  qu'elle 

vienne,  je  vienne  a  6  heures. 
Voulez- vous  que  jefasse  cela?  Com- 
ment votilez-vous  que  je  le  fasse  ? 
Je  veux  q'ue  vous  le  fassiez  commo 

ceci,  qu'il  le  fassc.  qu'elle  le  fasse. 


-»  ENTY-EIGHTH     LESSON.     (1.) 


46$ 


Although  you  can  do  it,  I'd  rather 
you  wourl  not  do  it. 

Is  it  not  time  for  us  to  go  to  school  ? 

for  them  ?  for  thee  ? 
\    IB  high  time  for  us,  for  them,  for 

lli'J'J  tO  gO. 

1 9  ho  sorry  I  can  ?      we  can  ?     she 
cau  ?     thou  canst  ? 

H  j  is  not  sorry  you  can,  we  can,  she 
can,  I  can. 

?»  she  glad  we  are  worth  as  much  as 

She  is. 
Will  he  do  it  without  our  wishing  it  ? 

.  my  wishing  it  ? 

lit;  will  not  do  it  except  you  wish  it, 
.  it. 


Quoique   vous  puissiez   Ic  .'aire,  je 

ne    me   soucie    pas*"que   vous   le 

fassiez. 
N'est-il  pas  temps  que  nous  alliona 

a.  1'ecole  ?  qu'ils  aillent  ?  tu  ailles  i 
II  est  grand  temps  que  nous  y  allions, 

qu'ils  y  aillent,  que  tu  y  ailles. 
Est-il  fache  que  je  puisse  ?        Nouo 

puissions?    qu'elle  puissc  ?      quu 

tu  puisses? 
II  n'est  pas  iache  que  vous  puissiez, 

nous  puissions,  qu'elle   puisse,  '•* 

puisse. 
Est-elle  contente  ~ue  nous  valiona 

autant  qu'eux  ?        Elle  Test. 
Le  fera  t-il  sans  que  nous  le  voulions  ? 

vous  le  vouliez  ?  je  le  veuille  ? 
II  ne  le  fera  pas  sans  que  vous  lo 

vouliez,  nous  le  voulions,  qu'ils  lo 

vcuillcnt. 


SoiXANTK-DIX-IIUlTlfcME    TlI^ME.        Ire    SCC. 

()u  vm;li'/-votis  que  j'aille?    Allez  chez  le  bijoutier. — Oil  voulez- 

qu'il  aille?     Je  desire  qu'il  aille  chez  le  menuisier. — Et,  elle? 

qirelle  aille  chez  la  faiseuse  de  robes. — Oil  faut-il  que  je 

;i  liuit  heures?     II  faut  que  vous  soyez  au  magasin.     Oil  faut-ils 

(ju'ils  soient'?     11  faut  que  Jean,  Frederic,  et  Marie,  soient  -a  1'ecole. 

9  ii  dix  heures  oil  a  dix  heures  et  demie  qu'il  faut  que  nous 

;iu  a  vapeur?    11  faut  que  nous  y  soyons  a  dix  heures 

et  demie  ;  inais  il  vaut  mieux  que  nous  y  allions  de  meilleure  heure. 

-  doule. — Est-il  necessaire  que  le  cuisinier  acliete  plus  cVune 

livrc  (a  pound)  de  beurre?     Oui,  ii  faut  qiril  en  achete  au  molns 

livres.     Trois  livres  !  y  pcnscz-vous  ?  (are  you  thinking  of  what 

5  ou  say?  are  you  in  earnest?) — Faut-il  dire  au  boulanger  d'apporter 

Mtits-pains?  (rolls?)     Oui,  il  faut  le  lui  dire,  car  il  n'en  appor- 

lera  pas  saris  que  nous  le  lui  disions. — Est-ce  le  seul  medecin  que 

eonnziissiez? — N'est-il  pas  temps  que  je  traduise,  que  j'echvo, 

et  que  je  lise  inon  theme? — Convient-ii  (is  it  suitable)  qu'elle  receive 

u?  billet,  qu'elle  le  lise,  et  qu'elle  y  reponde  ? 

\Vill  you  relate  (raconter)  something  to  me  ?  What  do  you  wish 
;re  to  relate  to  you?  A  little  anecdote,  if  you  like.  A  little  boy 
out  day  at  table  (d  table)  asked  for  some  meat;  his  father  said  that 
it  u-as  not  polite  to  ask  for  any,  and  added  :  ci  You  must  wait  till  (jus- 
qv.^.  cc  (jHCj  §  151)  some  is  given  to  you."  After  a  little  while,  tho 
pnor  boy.  seeing  every  one  eat,  and  that  nothing  was  given  to 
35 


410 


SEVENTY-EIGHTH     1ESSON. 


said  to  his  father :  "  My  dear  father,  give  me  a  lit  Je  salt,  if  you 
please."  "  What  will  you  do  with  it  ?;;  asked  the  father.  "  I  wish 
to  eat  it  with  the  meat  which  you  will  give  me,"  replied  (rcplique**) 
the  child.  Everybody  admired  (admirer)  the  little  boy's  wit;  and 
his  father,  perceiving  that  he  had  forgotten  him,  gave  him  a  piece 
of  meat,  some  salt,  and  vegetables. 

Who  was  that  little  boy  that  asked  for  meat  at  table  ?  He  was  th*« 
son  of  one  of  my  friends. — Why  did  he  ask  for  some  meat?  He 
asked  for  some  because  he  had  a  good  appetite. — Why  did  his  father 
not  give  him  some  immediately  ?  Because  he  had  forgotten  it. — 
Was  the  little  boy  wrong  in  asking  for  some  ?  He  was  wrong,  for 
he  ought  to  have  waited. — If  it  was  impolite  to  ask  for  meat,  was  it 
not  impolite  also  to  ask  for  salt,  or  anything  else  ?  And  to  be  con- 
sistent, ought  not  the  father  to  have  told  him  again :  "  i  ou  must  wait 
until  some  is  given  to  you?"  That  may  be;  but  although  the 
father's  conduct  may  be  called  inconsistent,  the  child's  request  was 
not  the  less  witty,  (n'en  it  ait  pas  moins  spirituclle.) — It  is  a  pity 
($  151)  the  cook  did  not  go  to  market,  for  I  am  afraid  that  the  best 
fruit  is  sold  by  this  time,  (ne  soit  vcndu  (}  151 — G)  a  ceJe  hcure-ci.)1 

.     2de  Sec. 

Est-il  extraordinaire  qu. 

voulions  pas  ! — qu'ils  ne  le  veuill- 

cnt  pas  ? 
II  est  extraordinaire  que  vous  nc  le 

voulicx  iias-— qu'ils  ne  le  veuillent 

pas. 
N'est-il    pas    facheux    qu'elle    lea 

perde  ?  que  je  les  perdg  ?  vous  en 

perdicz  ? 
II  est  tres-iacheux  qu'elle  les  perde  ; 

que   vous   les  perdiez ;    que  j'cn 

perde. 
Est-il  juste  que  je  me  leve  et  que 

vous  ne  vous  leviez  pas  ? 
II  est  juste  que  nous  nous  hmons 

tons  deux. 
N'est-il    pas  injuste   que  nous  cu 

ayons,  et  qu'ils  n'en  aient  pas? 

Si  fait,  il  est  injuste  que  vous  OTI 
receviez  et  qu'ils  n'en  rec.oivenf 
pas. 


Is  it  extraordinary  that  we  do  not 
wish  it  ? — they  do  not  wish  it  ? 

It  is  (extraordinary  that  you  do  not 
wish  it — that  they  do  not  wish  it). 

Is  it  not  vexing  (sad)  that  she  bses 

them  ?     I  lose  them  ?    You  lose 

some  ? 
It  is  very  sad  for  her  to  lose  them  ; 

for  you  to  lose  them  ;   lor  me  to 

lose  some. 
la  it  right  that  I  should  get  up  and 

that  you  should  not  ? 
It  is  right  for  us  both  to  get  up. 

Is  it  not  wrong  that  we  should  have 
some,  and  that  they  should  not 
have  any  ? 

Ves,  it  is  wrong  that  you  should  re- 
ceive some  and  they  none. 


1  As  the  student  knows  the  subjunctive  present  of  the  auxiliaries  (avoir, 
ffr*),  he  can  easily  form  the  compound  tenses.  Although  [  have  been 
Qttoique  j'aic  etc. 


SEVENTY-EIGHTH     LESSON.    (2.) 


411 


»B  it  not  surprising  that  they  go  to 
bed  ?  we  go  to  bed,  so  su- 
it is  not  surprising  that  they  go 
to  bed,  that  you  go  to  bed  so  soon. 

Id  it  not  better  for  her  to  start  when 

her  uncles  start  ? 
It  is  better  she  should  not  start  at  all. 

• 

Wili  it  do  for  us  to  say  it,  or  for 

them  ? 
It  will  not  do  for  you  to  say  it ;  but 

for  them,  it  will  do. 
Is  it  possible  that  his  horses  should 
rth  more  than  his  brother's  ? 
not   possible    they  shou! . 
:h  more. 

.able  that   he   should   take 
.rd  ? 

that 
.  >uld  take  board. 


N'est-il  pas  surprenant  qu'ils  se  cou 

client  ?  que  nous  i:c  us  couchionat 

si  tot  ? 
Non,  il  n'est  pas  t'tonnur.t  qa 

couchent,  que  vous  vous  L\ 

si  tot. 
Ne  vaut-il  pas  mieux  q  if  ell- 

quand  ses  oncles  partiront  ? 
II  vaut  mifi!.\  partepaadu 

tout. 
Convient-il  que  nous  le  disions,  cu 

qu'ils  le  discnt  ? 
II  ne  convient  pas  que  vous  le  disicz, 

mais  il  convient  qu'ils  le  disent. 
Est-il  possible  que  ses  chevaux  vaill- 

ent  mieux  que  reux  di 
II  n'est  pas  possible  qu'ils  vaillent 

mieux. 

sion  ? 
preniez,(iu- 


Tnf>ME.     2de  Sec. 
'•.enantqr,:  1  bien  rallcma:.  ilifestpas 

Qt  qu'il  le  sache  si  bien,  puisque  sa  mere  iv<t  allemaude. 
qu'on  le  loue  1     II  aime  qif  on  le  lone,  raais  il  ivaime  ]>;i- 
isloues.  Suppo?e:t-il  que  nous  rapprouvions(^  151 — 5) 
II  suppose  que  vous  I'approuvez,  que  nous 
-Que  di;i'  racontais 

petite  anecdote  en  1  Je  dirais  (|ue  vous  i'-!es  au.--i  aim 

['ordinaire.    Un  jeune  prince,  de  sept  ans?  etait  adniirc-  par  tout 

le  moude  a  cause  de  son  esprit.     II  entendit  un  jour  un  olficierj  qui 

parlait<le  lui.  ;iand  les  enfants  ont  taut  (Uesprit  dans  leur 

i!s  en  ont  ordinairement  fort  peu  quand  ils  sont  avarices  en 

aiiisi,"  ditle  jeune  prince,  "vousdevez  avoij  ru 

iiili:  dans  votre  enfance  !;? — Y  a-t-il  long-temps  quo 

vou-  ;e  anecdote  ?     II  a  fallu  que  je  la  traduise  hier,  (I  had 

TO )  — Dcsire-t-on  qu'elle  rcussisse  ou  que  vous  reussissiez?     Or 

-ire  pas  que  nous  reussissions ;  mais  qu'elle  reussisse. 
Do  you  wish  me  to  relate  to  you  another  anecdote  ?  You  \vilj 
greatly  (bcaucoup)  oblige  me. — Some  one  purchasing  some  gooes  of 
a  shopkeeper,  (un  marchand)  said  to  him:  '-You  ask  too  much 
you  must  (§  151)  not  sell  so  dear  to  me  as  to  another,  because  I  am 
u  friend,  (puisque  je  suis  dcs  amis  de  la  maison.")  The  merchant 
replied  :  "  Sir,  we  nust  gain  something  by  (avec)  our  friends,  for  oui 


i!2  SEVENTY-EIGHTH     LESSON.    (3.) 

Rrieniies  will  never  come  to  the  shop.J7 — An  Englishman,  on  first 
visaing  France,  met  with  a  very  young  child  in  the  streets  of  Calais, 
who  spoke  tne  French  language  with  fluency  and  elegance,  (cou- 
rammcnt  ct  avec  elegance.)  "  Good  heaven,  (Mon  Dieu!)  is  it  possi- 
ble?^ exclaimed  he,  "that  even  children  here  speak  the  French 
language  with  purity,  (la  purete.") 

Let  us  seek  (rcchercher)  the  friendship  of  the  good,  and  avoid 
(evitcr)  the  society  of  the  wicked  (le  mechant ;)  for  bad  company 
corrupts  (les  mauvaises  societes  corrompent)  good  "manners,  (les  bonnes 
nwmrs.} — What  sort  of  weather  is  it  to-day  ?  It  snows  continually, 
(toujours,)  as  it  snowed  yesterday,  and  according  to  all  appearances, 
will  also  snow  to-morrow. — Do  you  think  it  will  snow  (§  151 — 5)  to- 
morrow also  ?  I  hope  it  will,  for  I  am  always  very  well  when  it  is 
very  cold.  And  I  am  (et  ?noz,  je  me  porte)  always  very  well  when  it  is 
neither  cold  nor  warm. — It  is  too  windy  to-day,  and  we  shculd  do 
better  if  we  stayed  at  home.  Whatever  weather  it  may  be,  (Qucl- 
que  temps  qiCil  fasse,  §  151 — 11,)  I  must  go  out;  for  I  promised  to  be 
with  my  sister  at  a  quarter  past  eleven,  and  I  must  keep  my  word, 
(tcnir*  parole.) 

VOCABULAIRE.     3me  Sec. 

See  ($  151)  and  study  it  carefully,  and  make  a  list  of  the  antecedents  ad 
they  occur. 

It  seems  you  are  angry,  (you  appear.)  I  II  semble1  que  voussoi/ez  fache  (R.  4.) 
You  appear  angry,  (to  be  angry.)  I  Vous  semblez  faclie,  (etre  fache.) 

The  -subjunctive  is  employed  in  the  first  sentence  because  il  semlleis  used 
unipersonally ;  but  not  being  used  so  in  the  second,  the  indicative  is  employed. 


Is  it  sufficient  that  you  and  I  should 

complain  of  it  ? 
Yes,  it  is  sufficient  that  we  complain 

of  it  (for  us  to  complain.)    So  that 

neither  she  nor  they  must  complain. 
Let  him  come  if  he  wishes. 
Let  them  wait  if  they  have  a  mind. 
Let  Julius  write  the  btter,  and  you 

will  carry  it. 


Suffit-il  que  vous  vous  en  plaigniez 

et  que  je  m'en.plaigne  ? 
Oui,  il  suffit  que  nous  nous  en  plai- 

gnions.     Ainsi  ni   lui  ni  eux  no 

doivent  s'en  plaindre.  (771,  N.) 
Qu'il  vienne  s'il  veut.  ($  150 — 7.) 
Qu'ils  attendent  s'ils  en  ont  envie. 
Que  Jules  e'crive  la  lettre,  et  vous  la 

porterez. 


Obs.  164.  We  saw  ($  150 — 7)  that  the  3d  pers.  sing,  and  plur.  of  the  impera- 
live  were  like  the  same  persons  of  the  present  of  the  subjunctive,  consfl 
quently,  we  can  now  use  those  persons  of  the  imperative  without  difficulty. 

Il  scnible,  it  seems,  is  also  construed  with  the  indicative  when  it  has  an 
indirect  object,  as  :  It  seems  to  me  that  you  are  angry  ;  il  me  semlle  que  roua 
tie*  fachv.  It  seems  to  thec,  il  te  semble,  \1  lui  semlde,  &c.,  to  him  of 
her,  &c. 


SEVENTY-EIGHTH     LESSON.     (3.) 


413 


Let  him  have  the  goodness  to  hold  it. 

ird. 

Where  do  you  pr«  buy  the 

candy  ?          Let  him  buy  it  at  the 
grocer*  s. 
Watch  the  bird.      Take  care  it  does 

not  run  or  liy  tn 
Let  them  mind  it. 

>  tell  the  cook  to  cook 

able  to  cook  it,  for 
:nostout.  (•'. 

I  wi>'  cd. 

-  arrived,    i! 

e  told  ao. 
ishcs  me  to  have  pati* 

li.  2.) 

He   complains  of    your   hm 

in . 
1  am  very  sorry  for  your  having  done 


should  ha-. 
o  of  my  not  going 
'  said  it. 

:ng  T 

to  drink  ? 

Sor 
Sutlit-il  que  vous  ledisiez  pour  qu'on  le  croie? 


Qu'il  nit  la  bonu'  cle  le 
Que  Sophie  rct;u\\ 
Oil    prcitrez-vous   qu'il    achOtc    le 
caudi  ?  Qu'il   1' adit  to  clu-x 

i'oiscau.    Pronez  gar<. 
nes'enfuie,  (ne  s'en  aille,  t'envole.) 
Qu'ils  y  prennent  garde. 
Priez  Lisette  de  dire  a  la  an; 

f<iire  en  ire  le  poisson  > 
Je  dou'< 
car  s« 
.at. 

Je  doutc  qu'il  soil  arr. 
Jc  souhaite  qu'on  le  lui 

itc  qu'il  5.  -on. 

Jc  crains  que  nous  n'ayons  un  orage. 
II  nie  qu'il 
II  86  plaint  que  vous  rni/>z   mal- 

Je  suis  au  desespoir  que  vous  / '<n/,-i 

oblig6 

d'att< 
Vous  trouverez  bo  \  <////«.• 

pas. 
II  a  tro-; 

dit. 
Que  voulez-vous 

Quo  voulez-vous  qu'il 
Vous  attendez-vous  a  ce  qu'il  voua 
donne  ses  march  r  ricn  ? 

voulez-vous  que  je  boive  ? 

sufTl 


eant  que  je  le  dise  pour  qu'on  le  croie?  —  MiYitc-t-il  ([u'on  1'attcndc  ? 
({  151  —  2.)     S'il  in  i  I'atteiHU'  '  >ute  (ju'il  le  mc'rilo! 

--S'i!  ;t  p  >]  '  ;  le  feuillet.  c.u'il  le  rctr^n-r^  (liiul  it  airnin.)     (^u'il  lo 


1  The  syllable  re  prefixed  to  a  French  verb,  corresponds  in  English   to  : 

ne  back,  porter,  reporter,  to 

carry  back  or  again;  tron-.  r,  to  find  arain  ;  voir,  revoir,  to  ecf 

agaii;  >ubler,  r^frullcr,  to  redouble,  dtc.  ;  . 

liderer,  reronsi  Icrtr,  to  consider  again  or  anew. 


i!4  5EVENTY-EIGH.TII     LESSON.    (4.) 

retrouve !  c'est  plus  aise  a  dire  qu'a  faire.  Qu;il  essaie.— Tenez- 
vous  bien  la  flute  ?  Prenez  garde  qu'elle  ne  tombc.  Je  la  tieiib 
bien.  Je  prendrai  garde  qu'elle  ne  tombe. — II  est  impossible  que  le 
courrier  ne  soit  pas  encore  arrive !  Pourquoi  Salomon  reste-t-il  si 
long-temps?  II  est  possible  que  la  neige  ait  empeche  le  courrier 
d'arriver  a  Pheure  ordinaire.  II  est  possible  que  cela  soit;  mais 
j'espere  qu'il  n'en  est  pas  ainsi.  ($  151 — 2.)  Je  1'espere  aussi,  mais 
ayons  patience  jusqu'a  ce  que  Salomon  revienne.  Quelque  desir 
que  vous  ayez  d'avoir  vos  lettres,  ot  quelqu'hnportantes  que  les  nou- 
velles  puissent  etre,  il  faut  que  nous  attendions  avec  patience.  Voua 
en  parlez  bien  a  votre  aise.  J'attends  sans  m'impatienter. 

Have  you  corrected  Louisa's  exercise  1  Yes,  I  have. — How  many 
mistakes  had  she  ?  She  had  but  three  or  four.  But  three  or  four ! 
That  is  a  good  deal  for  her. — The  exercise  must  nave  been  very 
hard,  (difficult.)  (771,  N.)  It  was.  She  is  the  most  attentive  and 
studious  pupil  I  have. — Are  you  not  afraid  we  shall  have  ( j  151 — 6) 
a  storm  ?  I  am  afraid  we  shall  have  a  violent  one.  See,  how  black 
Uie  sky  is  at  the  west ! — Are  you  glad  that  I  did  it,  and  that  he  could 
not  do  it?  (622,  N.  1.)  I  am  glad  you  did  it;  but  I  am  sorry  that  he 
could  not  do  it.  Let  the"  girl  go  (06s.  1G4)  to  the  apothecary's.  What 
do  you  wish  her  to  purchase  ?  I  want  her  to  buy  some  perfumed 
soap,  and  to  (}  151 — 9)  put  it  in  my  desk. 

What  must  we  bring  you  from  the  country  ?  Is  it  necessary  that 
you  should  go?  We  have  promised  to  go. — Would  you  not  be 
astonished  if  we  did  not  keep  our  promise?  (}  148,  N.  3.) — You 
come  late;  you  have  made  us  wait  a  long  time.  We  regret  that 
you  have  been  obliged  to  wait. — How  long  have  you  been  waiting? 
Never  mind  the  time  we  have  already  lost,  let  us  lose  no  more;  but 
let  us  finish  our  affair  quickly,  so  that  (afin  que,  §  151)  we  may  go 
home.  It  seems  you  are  a  little  cross,  (un  pcu  de  mauvaisc  humeur.) 
It  does  not  suit  you,  Sir,  to  find  fault  with  me,  when  the  fault  is 
yours.  Come.  Let  us  have  done. 

VOCABULAIRE.     4me  Sec. 


I  believe  he  is  in  the  right. 

Do  you  believe  that  horse  is  worth  a 

hundred  crowns  ? 
)  do  not  believe  that  it  is  worth  a 

hundred  crowns. 
I  hopo  he  will  come, 
bo  yd  i  hope  he  will  come  ? 
I  think  he  has  done  it. 
Oo  you  think  he  has  done  it  ?* 
If  you  think  it  will  be  fine  weather, 

let  us  set  out  for  the  country. 


Ind.  Je  crois  qu'il  a  raison. 

Subj.    Croyez-vous    que   ce  cnevaS 

vaille  cent  e'cus  ?  ($  151 — 5.) 
Subj.  Je  ne  crois  pas  qu'il  vail  fa  cent 

ecus. 

Ind.  J'espere  qu'il  viendra. 
Subj.  Esperez-vous  qu'il  vienr.e? 
Ind.  Je  pense  qu'il  1'a  fait. 
Subj.  Pensez-vous  qu'il  I1  ait  foil  ? 
Si    vous    pensez    qu'il  fasse   beau 

temps,  partons  pour  la  campagna 


-r  u;  IITH    LESSON.  (4.) 


415 


MS  qu'ils  we 

•ir  que  vous  nc  parlicz  de  inoi 

.ut-il  pas  quo  vous  n't 

Craignex-vous  de  roflenser  t 

idais  que  vous  \v  : 

vicnne. 

Ne  doutez  pr\»  sois  toujoura 

votrr 

.  ous  no  I'aycz  fait. 


I  come.  ($  151 — G.\ 

II  speak  of  me. 

it  you  might  speak 

:m  ? 

vou  would 

•!iat  the  man  will 

always  your 
,1.  i<>i.-' i— 8.) 
•  snot  deny  ij done  it. 

.•>  subjunctive  is  further  governed  by  an  a<: 
.   itre,*   to  be;  j*ira\t 
8  of  such  adjectives  or  paiticiples  arc  : 

astonished. 

surpr 

Je  suis/aVAe  qu'cllc  soit  malade. 

Je  suis  charm*  que  vous  toyt ; 

Je  suis  lien  ai$c  qu'il  ait  eu  son  ar 

gent. 
Ello  est/icMeque  vous  toycz  m.-n 

Jo  suis  ctonni  que  vous  ne  io> 


glad. 

om  sorry  tin;  »he  is  ill. 

it  you  arc  li 
id  that  he  has  rccci\ 

>he  is  angry  that  you  ai  - 


r  prised  that  you  are  not  more 
y  glad  that  your  sister 

afflicted  that  y 
lessons. 
{irisec*  thf :  you  have  not  done 


plus  attt  : 
Jo  suis  enchant*  quo  votrc  sojur  toil 

Votre  pure  est  ujfligc  que  vous  man* 

uuifz  vos  lecons. 
Je  suis  lurpri*  que  vous  n'aycz  pas 

fait 


all  these  instances,  if  de  ce  should  be  placed  before 

•  Hows.     But  the  subjunctive,  as  above,  is  preferable. 

Je  suis  charme  de  ce  que  vous  6tea 

II  est  bien  aise  de  ce  que  vous  aver, 
eu  votre  argent. 


d  at  your  being  here. 


fie  is  glad  that  you  have  received 
yoi  f 


1   i»  certain  that  you  ore  in  the  wrong. 
a  certain  that  you  are  in  the 
right.  (*  151—4.) 
It  is  probable  that  \\^  will  i1 
(e  it  probable  that  he  will  do  it  T 
rue  that  he  is  capable  of  it. 
true  that  he  is  capat>!' 


•  st  certain  que  vous  avez  tort 
I  pas  certain  que  voue 
on. 
est  probable  quf il  Ic  fera. 

fie  qd'il  le  fassc! 
I  ml.  II  rst  vrai  qu'il  en  est  r 

rni'ju'il  «:n  w)it  capablo. 


416  SEVENTY-NINTH     LESSON.    (1.) 


SOIXANTE-DIX-IIUITI£ME  TiiibiE.     4me  Sec. 

Cioyez-vous  qu'il  ait  raison  ou  qu'elle  ait  raison  ?  Nous  croyone 
qu'ils  ont  tort,  tous  deux.  —  Si  le  colonel  est  en  ville,  je  crains  bier 
qu7ilne  vienne  nousvoir.  Etmoi,  je  crains  qirilne  vienne  pas.  —  Croi« 
ent-ils  que  leur  maison  vaille  dix  mille  gourdes?  Qu'ils  le  croient 
on  non,  ils  en  demandent  ce  prix-la.  —  Elle  a  peur  que  nous  ne  par* 
lions  d'elle,  n'esl-ce  pas  ?  Pen  lui  importe,  (it  is  of  little  importance 
o  her;  she  does  not  care,)  r  ue  nous  parlions  d'elle  ou  que  nous  n'en 
pariions  pas.  —  M.  D  -  apromis  de  venir.  n:est-co  pas?  Esperez* 
TOUS  qu'il  vienne  malgre  le  nauvais  temps  ?  J'espere  qu:il  vicndra 
malgre  le  mauvais  temps,  car  je  ne  doute  pas  qiril  ne  tienne  parole. 
Nous  craignonsbeaucoup  que  cet  homme  ne  revienne  pendant  volro 
absence.  Je  n'ai  pas  peur  qu?il  revienne,  ainsi  no  craignez  rien. 

You  have  forbidden  him  to  go  to  the  wharf,  (voits  lid  avcz  defends 
de  ;)  do  you  think  he  went  there  ?  ($  151.)  I  do  riot  think  he  went, 
but  his  sister  thinks  he  did  go.  —  Is  he  not  afraid  that  you  will  busy 
yourself  with  it?  I  care  very  little  whether  he  is  afraid  or  not.  (Pen 
mjimporte  quc}  §  151.)  —  If  you  think  that  we  can  go  to  Burlington  and 
come  back  in  two  hours,  let  us  start.  I  do  not  think  we  can  go  and 
return  in  so  short  a  time.  ({  200.)  —  As  it  is  important  that  we  should 
see  the  lawyer  before  Tuesday,  suppose  we  go,  (should  go  )  V«ry 
well,  let  us  go.  —  Let  John  take  care  of  the  store  during  my  absence. 
John  or  William  ?  No  matter  which,  (n'importe  Icqucl,)  provide.] 
the  store  is  taken  (§  151  —  2)  care  of. 

Are  you  not  glad  we  have  received  the  invitation  we  so  much 
desired  ?  I  am  very  glad,  on  your  account,  that  we  have  received 
U.  On  my  account  !  How  ?  don't  you  wish  to  go?  I  care  very  little 
about  i*  That  is  something  new.  I  thought  that  you  were  as  anxious 
to  go  (vous  aviez  ant  ant  cnvie  (Vy  aller)  as  I.  I  was  as  anxious  to  go 
as  you  at  first  ;  buf  now  I  think  I  would  rather  not  go.  .It  is  asto- 
nishing th?t  you  change  so!  —  Sarah,  I  am  glad  you  are  here.  Are 
you,  indeed?  I,  for  my  part,  am  glad  I  am  here.  (282,  Obs.  65.)  — 
Is  not  that  clerk's  uncle  much  afflicted  that  his  nephew  behaves  so 
badly  ?  No,  he  cares  very  little  now,  whether  he  behaves  well  01 
not  :  at  first,  he  was  very  much  afflicted  at  it.  I  believe  he  was. 


SEVENTY-NINTH  LESSON.— Soixantc-dix-rcuvicmc  Lc$vn., 

VOCABULAIRE.     Ire  Sec. 

SUBJUNCTIVE  IMPERFECT.— Subjoi^tif  Imparfait. 
tor  its  formation  see  ($  152.)     That  article  is  to  be  carefully  studied. 
After  the  following  conjunctions  use  the  subjunctwo  ; 


SEVEN  PY-NISTH                            (1.)                                 -U 

Mhat,  in  order  tha 
/     to  the  end  tha 

Nonohelant  qucJ  fur   ull   tl. 
Hiding  thai 

tie, 

unless. 

Post'  . 

suppose  that. 

if. 

before. 

Pour  yue. 

that,  in  order  tha 

though.         [  —  ( 

I 

Pour  i 

r  so  little,  hy 

] 

little  soever./ 

lest. 

?«*» 

,    ;ivo/ha 

•:iSCf  if.           / 

though...     / 
\\  ithout  .  •  .  / 

1,  until. 

Sipeuque,    >                      fflo. 

rom. 

wlicther. 

that. 

Suppo$t  que,          suppose  that. 

can  go 


Afin  iur, 

A  mointque. 
Au  cas  tftie, 
Avant  que, 
'/we, 

r  que, 
«  que, 

. 

JVon  j"  - 

i  > 

s  back. 

I  sent  you  my  bo 

i  it. 

not  go  out. 

.die,  yet 

so  little  a^ 

•  was  bound 
•  nrt  in  the 

-on  as  much  as  if 

, 
ing,  she  was  nevertheless  a:. 

I   would   not  have   h< : 

.rh  she  is  rich,  and  has  a  great 
deal  of  wit,   because    she    is   not 
:-heartcd. 
:«-d  you   are   my  fricn-i 

.11  are  right  or  wrong. 


Voulcx  J 

i*sc  sortir  avcc  vous  f 
Je  nortir 
En  cat  que\ 

Je  vou  -  fin  qu<\ 

VOUS 
-1  mains  que  VOUS  nc  I'ar 

cllc  ne  sortira  pas. 
Bien  que  vos 

connu 

d'un   autre,   il  fallait 
dans 
sa  person ii- 

illi-IUMM*'   Ml   C' 

-  lie   r*i 
\aisc  mine,  clle  i. 

able. 

i  voudrais  pas  pour   ! 
qnoiqiCelle  soil  riclie,  it  '/u'tllf  aif 
beaucoup   d'esprit,    pan-c   (jii'cllo 

.ous  soycz  dc  UK  - 
je  suis  content. 


Soil  que  vans  ayez  raison  ou  tort. 
Soi.\  TH£ME.     Ire  Sec. 

il  que  je  !•>  \"on,  il  ne  pref^rait  pas  que  vous  Jo 

^rait-il  pas  que  vous  y  allassiez  ?     Non,  mais  i\ 
un'-fererait  que  ses  neveux  y  allassent.     Jerome  n'ctait-il   pas  un 
/.  bon  domestif[ue  ?     Si,  (juoiqu'il  oubliat  quelque  fois  de  fe~ 
Ties. — Niai'-il  (ju'il   D6  l't':':t  lait  .'     Xon.  il  ne  le  niait  pas.-- 
i'-il  (Hie  v  moi,  no;:-  \oiij 


t!8  SEVENTH-NINTH     LESSON.    ^2.) 

il  ne  se  plaignit  pas  que  nous  eussions  tout  mange,  mais  ii  s'ea 
etonna. — Ne  Be  souciait-il  pas  que  vous  vinssiez'?  II  aurait,  au 
contraire,  beaucoup  desire  que  je  vinsse,  mais  il  ne  se  souciait  pas 
que  ces  enfants-la  vinssent. — N'exigedtcs-vovs  pas  (require)  que 
nous  le  promissions  sur  le  champ  ?  Je  ne  m'en  souviens  pas.  Est-ce 
que  j'exigeai  que  vous  le  promissiez? — feait-il  a  ecrire  quand 
vous  1'appelates  ? — Pourquoi  votre  ami  ne  vient-il  pas  a  cette  heuro- 
ci  T  11  faut  qu'il  soit  a  etudier. 

M.  de  Turenne  would  never  buy  any  thing  on  credit  of  tradesmen, 
(b  marchand,)  for  fear,  he  said,  they  should  lose  a  great  part  of  theif 
money,  if  he  happened  to  be  killed.  All  the  workmen  who  were 
employed  about  his  house  had  orders  (avait  ordre)  to  bring  in  their 
bills  (un  memoire)  before  he  set  out  ($  152)  for  the  campaign,  (se 
metlre*  en  campagne,)  and  they  were  regularly  paid. — You  will 
never  be  respected  (respecter)  unless  you  forsake  (abandojtner)  the 
bad  company  you  keep. — You  cannot  finish  your  work  to-night, 
unless  I  help  you. — I  will  explain  to  you  (cxpliquer)  every  difficulty, 
that  you  may  not  be  disheartened  (decourager)  in  your  undertaking, 
(une  enterprise.) 

Suppose  you  should  lose  your  friends,  what  would  become  of 
you  1  In  case  you  want  my  assistance,  call  me ;  I  shall  help  you. — 
A  wise  and  prudent  man  (un  homme  sage  el  prudent]  lives  with  eco 
nomy  when  yonng,  in  order  that  he  may  enjoy  the  fruit  of  his 
labour  when  he  is  old. — Carry  this  money  to  Mr.  N.,  in  order  that 
he  may  be  able  to  pay  his  debts,  (une  dette.) — Will  you  lend  me 
that  money  ?  I  will  not  lend  it  you  unless  you  promise  to  return 
(rendre)  it  to  me  as  soon  as  you  can. — Did  the  general  arrive  ?  He 
arrived  yesterday  morning  at  the  camp,  (le  camp,)  weary,  (/as,)  and 
tired,  (harasse,)  but  very  seasonably,  (tres-d  propos;)  he  immediately 
gave  his  orders  to  begin  the  action,  though  he  had  not  yet  all  hia 
troops. — Are  your  sisters  happy  1  They  are  not,  though  they  are 
vich,  because  they  are  not  contented. 

VOCABITLAIRE.  2de  Sec. 

THE  PERFECT  OF  THE  SUBJUNCTIVE  (Parfait  du  Sbbjonctif)  is  formed 
5y  the  present  of  the  auxiliary  and  the  past  participle.  It  requires  an  ante- 
cedent. 


[  must  have  sent  them  there. 
She  must  have  come  early. 

Although  he  has  not  dressed  himself. 
Don't  you  hope  the  thief  has  been 
taken  ? 


II  faut  que  je  les  y  ai  envoyes. 
Il.faut  qu'elle  soit  venue  de  bonne 

heure. 

Quoiqu'il  ne  se  soit  pas  habillc*. 
N'esperez-vous  pas  que  le  voleur  &il 

etc  pris  ? 


It  combines  wifh  the  piesent  and  the  future  of  the  Indicative.  ($  151 — 12.) 


SEV  ENT  Y-NI  ^SON.    (2.) 


419 


He  will  not  come  ah  hough  I  luive 
invited  him. 

Shall  (should)  \v-2  go  without  being 
invited? 

Bhe  always  looks  (lofikedf  well,  how- 
ever little  she  may  (might)  be 
dressed. 

1  do  not  think  he  rejoiced  at  the  good 
ne  \  received 


THE  PLUPERFECT  o?  i  I  (Pluy  queparfail  du  Su 

nned  from  the  imperfect  of  the  auxiliary  and  the  past  participle  of  ano- 
\erb.  ($  151  —  12.)     It  combines  with  the  past  tenses  and  conditionnels. 


II   ne   viendni  pas  411014110  je  l'aie 

i:i\ 
Ircns-nous    (irions-nous)    sans    quo 

nous  soyons  (fussions)  invites  ? 
Elle  a  (avail)  toujours  bonne  mine, 

si  pen  gu'elle  soit  (/uO  ha! 

Je  ne  crois  pas  qu'il  se  soit  rejoui  do 
la  bonne  nouvelle  que  nous  avona 


:  r«il. 

re  she  had 
not  been  ratified  by  the  senate. 


:  que  j'cussc  aim<5. 
Mi'elle  fut  panic. 
:  qu'ils  s'en  fussent  a;' 
Quoique  vous  eussiez  <5te  vus. 
.iait  qu'on  1'eulpuni. 

les  functions  de  consul, 
quoique  ea  nomination  n'eut  pae 
.sanctionnee  par  le  senat. 


.  so  much  that.) 

Except  that. 

•  us  conduiscz  dc  fafoit 
.•  do  tout  lemonde. 

.S'i//i/.   Conduise/.-vous  de  fafon  quc 
vous  soyez  airnu. 


Ubs.  166.  Some  conjunctions  govern  the  indicative  when  the  sen.ence 
nffir;  •  the  thing  in  question  is  or  will  be,  and  the  subjunc- 

.en  it  is  not  certain,  or  only  wished  for.     They  arc  the  following: 

j  it  r. 

£/*  writ- 

que. 

that 

i  are  loved  by  everybody. 
:ve  in  such   a  manner   that  you 

!>e  loved. 

SoiXANTK-DIX-NKUVlfeME    TlI^MK.       2de  SeC. 

( IiiiiUuinu;  r>t-il  11  lire  dans  sa  chambre  ?  Non?  il  etait  a  jouer  do 
la  liuto  dans  le  jardin  avant  que  vous  entrassiez. — Qu'est-il  a  faire 
maintenant  ?  II  faut  qu:il  soit  a  se  promener  dans  le  bosquet,  (grove. ) 
— Faut-il  que  j'aille  Fappelerl  Non,  qu'il  s'y  promene;  mais  en 
cas  qu?il  revienne  bientot,  vous  lui  direz  que  je  desirerais  qu'il 
B;liabillat  pour  sortir  avec  moi.  S'il  eiit  su  (had  he  known)  que  voua 
desiriez  qu'il  sortit  avec  vous,  il  se  serait  deja  habille.  Cda  ne  pi  csse 
pus,  (there  is  no  hurry.)  II  aura  le  temps  de  se  preparer  avant  quo 
jo  sois  prete  rnoi-me*ne. — POM?*  pcu  que  vous  eussiez  attendu  co 
matin,  vous  auriez  pu  voir  le  general,  car  vous  etiez  a  peine  sorti 
qu'il  est  rentre.  Puis-je  avoir  le  plaisir  de  le  voir?  Non;  il  OB! 


420 


SEVENT  Y-fllNTII     LESSOR. 


oncore  soiti.     Ne  vaut-il  pas  mieux  que  vous  attendiez  \    Si  /ail 
pourvu  que  vous  soyez  sur  qu'il  rentrera  bientot. 

Although  they  have  a  good  memory;  that  is  not  enough  to  learr, 
any  language  whatever,  (quelque  langue  que  ce  soit ;)  they  must  make 
use  of  their  judgment,  (le  jugement.) — Behold  how  amiable  that  lady 
is;  for  all  that  she  (quoiqu'elle)  has  no  fortune,  I  do  not  love  her  the 
less. — Will  you  lend  me  your  violin  ?  I  will  lend  it  you.  provided 
you  return  it  to  me  to-night. — Would  your  mother  call  upon  me  ? 
She  would,  provided  you  would  promise  to  (ake  her  to  the  concert 
I  shall  not  cease  to  importune  (importuner)  her,  till  she  has  forgiven 
Die. — Give  me  that  penknife.  I  will  give  it  you,  provided  you  will 
not  make  a  bad  use  of  it. — Shall  you  go  to  London  ?  I  will  go.  pro* 
vided  you  accompany  (accompagner)  me :  and  I  will  write  again 
\recrirc*)  to  your  brother,  lest  he  should  not  have  received  my  letter, 

Where  were  you  during  the  engagement'?  I  was  #1  bed  to  have 
my  wourds  (une  blessure)  dressed,  (panser.)  Would  to  God  (Plut  a 
Dieu)  I  had  been  there !  I  would  have  conquered  (vaincre)  or  per- 
ished, (perir.)  We  avoided  an  engagement  for  fear  we  should  be 
taken,  their  force  being  superior  (supericurc)  to  ours. — God  forbid  (d 
Dicu  ne  plaise,  with  the  subjunctive,)  I  should  blame  your  conduc< 
but  your  business  will  never  be  done  properly  unless  you  do  it  your- 
self.— Will  you  set  out  soon?  I  shall  not  set  out  till  I  have  dined. — 
Why  did  you  tell  me  that  my  father  was  arrived,  though  you  knew 
the  contrary?  You  are  so  hasty,  (prompt,)  that  however  little  you 
are  contradicted  (contrarie)  you  fly  into  a  passion  (s'cmportcr)  in  an 
instant. 

YOCABULAIRE.     3me  Sec. 


Since  you  know  him  and  are  respon- 
sible for  him.  ($  151—9.) 

Unless  you  are  attentive,  and  do 
your  task  regularly,  you  will  not 
learn. 

If  your  friend  were  here,  ana  would 

call  upon  me.  (§  151 — 10.) 
If  he  loved  me,  and  sincerely  wished 

my  welfare. 
If  anybody  come,  and  I  should  not 

be  at  home,  send  h:  me. 

If  your  brother  *vrites  to  you,  and 
you  are  satisfied  with  his  letter,  I 
beg  of  you  to  let  me  know  it. 

Be  industrious,  that  your  parents 
may  be  satisfied.  (§  151 — 10.) 


Ind.   Des  que  vous  le  connaissez  et 

que  vous  repondez  de  lui. 
Subj.    A  mains  que  vous  ne  soyez 

attentif,  et  que  vous  nefassiez  re- 

gulierement    votre    devoir,    vous 

ri'apprendrez  pas. 
Si  votre  ami  etait  ici,  ct  qy+'il  voulut 

venir  me  voir. 
*S"il  m'aimait,  et  qu'il  dtgirdt  sincere 

ment  mon  bonheur. 
Si  quelqu'un  venait,   et  que  jc   no 

/wssepas  alamaieon,  envcyez-raoi 

chercher. 
Si  votre  frere  vous  ecrit,  et  que  vous 

soyez  content  de  sa  lettre,  jc  vous 

prie  de  m'en  faire  part. 
Appliquez-vous,    que    vos    parent! 

soient  contents,  (afin 


SEVEN  11-N1NTH     LESSON.    (3) 


Queje  Use  ou  quefecrh  e,  on  y  trouve 

toujours  a  red\re,  (soil  que.) 
Je  ne   puis   rien  dire  que  tu  ne  k 

saches,  (sans  que.} 
Ne  commencez  pas  que  je  ne  voua 

avertisse,  (avant  que.) 
Jamais  on  ne  le  punit  qu'il  ne  rait 

meritCj  (d  mains  que.) 
Attendez   que  votre  pere  r 


Whether  1  reader  write,  it  is  always 
found  fault  with. 

1  can  say  nothing  without  your  know- 
ing it. 

Do  not  begin  before  I  give  you  no- 
tice. 

lie  is  never  punished  unless  he  has 
deserved  it. 

Wait  till  your  father  returns. 

(jusqu'd  ce  que.) 

SOIXANTE-DIX-NEUVIEME  TH£ME.     3me  Sec 

Puisqne  vous  allez  de  ce  cote-la,  et  que  vous  passez  tic  vain  la 
boutique  de  1'apothicaire,  arretez-vous-y  et  dites-lui  de  nous  enrcyer 
une  boite  de  poudre  minerale.  Je  le  ferai  avec  plaisir.  A  queLe 
heure  faut-il  qu'il  1'envoie  ?  N'importe  a  quelle  heure,  pourvu  que 
ce  soit  avant  1'heure  du  coucher,  (bed-time.)  Quoiqu'il  n'apprit  pas 
facilement,  et  qu'il  n'eut  guere  de  temps,  il  faisait  des  progr.es.  Oui, 
parce  qu'il  etait  attentif  et  studieux.  Si  vous  eussiez  etc  aussi  indus- 
trieux  que  votre  cousine,  et  que  vous  vous  fussiez  mieux  applique, 
nreussiez-vous  pas  appris  davantage  ?  Quoiqu'il  fut  a  faire  une 
partie  d:echecs,  et  qu'il  eut  presque  gagne,  il  la  quitta  des  qiril  apprit 
que  sa  soDur  desirait  qu'"il  1'accompagnat. — Ne  commencez  pas  que 
je  ne  vous  en  avertisse,  et  que  je  ne  vous  envoie  un  autre  crayon. 
Je  n'y  manquerai  pas. 

Should  your  father  not  arrive  to-day,  and  if  you  want  money,  I  will 
lend  you  some.  I  am  much  obliged  to  you. — Have  you  done  your 
task  ?  Not  quite  ;  if  I  had  had  time,  and  if  I  had  not  been  so  uneasy 
about  (de)  the  arrival  (Varrivee)  of  my  father,  I  should  have  done 
it. — If  you  would  study  and  be  attentive,  I  assure  you  that  you  might 
learn  the  French  language  in  a  very  short  time. — He  who  wishes  to 
teach  an  art,  must  know  it  thoroughly,  (dfond;)  he  must  give  none 
but  clear  (precise)  and  well-digested  (digercr)  notions  (la  notion)  of 
it;  he  must  instil  (faire  entrer)  them  one  by  one  into  the  minds 
(dans  Vesprit)  of  his  pupils,  and  above  all,  (surtout.)  he  must  not 
overburden  (surcharger)  their  memory  with  useless  or  unimportant 
(insignifiant)  rules. 

My  dear  friend,  lend  me  a  louis.  Here  are  (en  void)  two  instead 
of  one. — How  much  obliged  I  am  to  you,  (que  d' ^obligations  je  vous 
ml)  I  am  always  glad  when  I  see  you,  and  I  find  my  happiness  in 
yours. — Is  this  house  to  be  sold  ?  Do  you  wish  to  buy  it  ? — Why 
not? — Do  you  think  it  is  a  good  house,  and  that  it  is  worth  7000 
dol.ars?  I  do  not  think  it  is. — Why  was  not  your  sister  studying? 
d  etudier  ?)  She  would  have  been  studying  if  she  were  not  always 


422 


EIGHTIETH     LESSON.    (1.) 


«o  absent,  (distrait  ) — I  like  pretty  anecdotes;  they  season  (assaisci* 
ner)  conversation,  (la  conversation,)  and  amuse  everybody.  Pray 
relate  me  some.  Look,  if  yon  please,  at  page  148  of  the  book  which 
I  lent  you,  and  you  will  find  some 


Quelque  bon  \\ie  vous  soyer. 
Quelqu'acariatre  qu'elle  ait 

Quelque  riches  qu'ils  fussent. 
Quelque  riche  qu'elle  cut  pu 
QuelquYldgants  qu'ils  so  crusaent. 


EIGHTIETH  LESSON,  80th.— Quatre  vingtieme  Lc^on,  80mc. 
VOCABULAIBI.     Ire  Sec. 
SUBJONCTIF  Continut. 

Qiielquc,  whatever,  whatsoever,  however,  is  connected  in  three 
(*151— 1L) 

However  good  you  are  or  may  be, 

(1st  way.) 
However   cross   (peevish)   she   may 

have  been. 

Howev.  re,  (mijzht  lic.i 

However  rich  she  might  have  been. 
However  elegant  they  thought  them- 
selves. 

Whatsoever  courage  you  may  have, 

is  more  than  you.  ($  151 — 11.) 

Whatsoever  patience  we  may  have, 

wr  will  never  have  enough. 

•ever  riches  he  may  have,  he 

will  soon  sec  the  end  of  them. 
Whatsoever  kindness  I  have  had  for 

him,  I  never  shall  have  as  much 

as  he  merits. 
Whatsoever  faults  you  may  make,  I 

will  take  care  to  correct  them. 
Vhatever    may    be   the    happiness 

which   you  enjoy,  I  am  happier 

than  you.  ($  151 — 11.) 
Whatsoever    may    be    the    fortune 

which  you  enjoy,  you  may  lose  it 

in  an  instant. 
Whatsoever  may  be  the  efforts  which 

you  make,  you  never  can  succeed. 

Whatsoever  may  be  the  pains  which 

you  take,  no  one  will  be   under 

obligations  to  you  for  them. 
WJtatever,  wJiatson-cr,  (meaning  all 

things  soever.) 


Quelque  courage  que  vous  « 

en  a  plus  que  voiid. 
Quelque  patience  que  nous  ayoms. 

nous  n'cn  aurons  jamais  assez. 
Quelques  richesses  qu'il  ait,  il  m 

vcrra  bientot  la  fin. 
Quelque  bonte  que  •  ir  lui, 

je  n'en  aurai  jamais  autant  qu'il  le 

m-'rite. 
Quelques  fautes  que  vous  fastin, 

j'aurai  soin  de  les  cor; 

»nheur  (tout  vous 
-<ier,  je  suisplus  heureux  que 

vous. 
Qiidle  que  soit  la  fortune  dont  vmis 

jouissiez,  vous  pouvez  la  perdrc  en 

un  instant. 
Quels  que  soient  les  efforts  que  vous 

fassiez,   vous  ne   pouvez  jamaia 

reussir. 
Quelles  que  soient  lespeinesqne  vous 

pre?iicz,  on  ne  vous  en  aura  aucun? 

obligation. 
Quelque  chose  q;<.e,  or  quoi  que  C€  soil 


EIGHTIETH     LESSON.     (1.) 


425 


Whatsoever  you  may  do  for  my  fa- 
ther, he  >vill  reward  you  for  it. 
($  151—13.) 

I  complain  of  nothing  whatsoever. 

Of  whomsoever  you  may  speak,  avoid 
slander.  ($151— 13.) 

1  know  nobody  who  is  so  good  as  you 
are.  <$  151—5.) 

I  have  seen  nothing  that  could  be 
tmed  in  his  conduct. 

Whatever  his  projects  might  be,  they 
did  not  succeed.  ($  151—11.' 


Qiiflque  chose  qtte  (or  quoi  que)  VOUI 

faseiez  pour  mon  perc,  il  vous  re'* 

compensera. 

Je  ne  me  plains  de  quoique  ce  soit. 
De  qui  que  ce  soit  que  vous  j 

t'vitez  la  mddisance. 
Je  ne  connais  pcrsonnc  qui  soit  aussi 

bon  que  vous. 
Jc  n'ai  ricn  vu  qu'on  pnisse  blamcr 

dans  sa  conduite. 
Quels  que   fussent   ses   projots,   ila 

n'ont  pas  n 


QUATIU.  TH£>LE.     Ire  S 

Qtfest  il  a  fa  ire  srcher?     II  est  a  faire  secher  se-  inais 

u'il  prenne  a  le  fairc,  il  ne  re  uss'ira  pas  do  long-temps. — 
De  comK 

.«:«  you  possess*     De  deux  manieres,  jo  crois.     Quelles  sont- 
ellr-  ii   pas  employer  le  suh- 

ut,  il  faut  ['employer.    Alois  on  doit 

r  .-Me  est  la  srronde 

•^Uc  que  soit  la  richcsse  <;  X'ya-t-il 

tticre  '     1'as    qua   ;•'   sache.     Comment  peut-on 

' fowcvcr  rich  you  may  be?     Oh !  mais ce  n?est 

hatever  riches  you  possess?     Non,  ce 

ne  s-  :nesmots;mai  pas  la  meme  significa- 

tion ?     Alors,  on  peut  dire:  cLne  vous  soycz,  n'e- 

i:is  doule.     I'n  peu  de  jugemeiit  ost  la  seule  chose  qui  soit 

You  miKt  liave  patience,  though  you  have  no  desire  to  have  it; 
for  I  mr.  ii  till  I  receive  my  money.     Should  I  (en  cos  que) 

receive  it  to-day,  I  will  pay  you  all  that  I  owe  you.  Do  not  believe 
that  I  have  forgotten  it;  for  I  think  of  it  every  day.  Or  did  you  be- 
lieve, perhaps,  that  I  had  already  received  it? — I  did  not  believe 
that  you  have  already  received  it;  but  I  feared  that  your  other  credit- 
ors (le  cr fancier)  had  already  received  it. — You  wish  you  had  more 
time  to  study,  and  your  brothers  wish  they  did  not  need  to  learn. — 
Would  to  God  you  had  what  I  wish  you,  and  that  I  had  what  I 
\vi-h. — Though  we  have  not  had  what  we  wish,  yet  we  have  almost 
always  been  contented ;  and  Messieurs  B.  have  almost  always  been 
discontented,  though  they  have  had  everything  a  reasonable  man 
(un  hommc  raisnnnable)  can  be  contented  with. — Do  not  believe, 
Madam,  that  I  have  had  your  fan,  (un  cventail.)  Whc  tells  you  that 
I  believe  it? — My  brother-in-law  wishes  he  had  not  had  what  he 


£24  EIGHTIETH     LESSON.    (2.) 

has  had.  Wherefore  T  He  has  always  had  many  creditors,  and  no 
money. — I  wish  you  would  always  speak  French  to  me;  and  you 
must  obey,  if  you  wish  to  learn,  and  if  you  do  not  wish  to  lose  youi 
lime  uselessly,  (inutilcment.)  I  wish  you  were  more^  industnoufi 
{asstdu)  and  more  attentive  when  I  speak  to  you.  .t 

VOCABULAIRE.     2de  Sec. 
The  superlative  followed  by  qui  or  quet  ($  151 — 3.) 

are  the  most  amiable  lady  I  Vous  etes  la  dame  la  plus  aim&bls 

que  je  connaisse. 

C'est  I'homme  le  plus  extraordinaire 
que  f  a ie  jamais  vu. 

Vous  etes  les  eleves  les  plus  studieus 
que  faie  jamais  eus. 

La  meilleure  gMrde  qu'un  roi  puissi 


know.  ($  151—3.) 
He  i&  the  most  extraordinary  man 

that  I  have  ever  seen. 
You  are  the  most  studious  pupils  I 

have  ever  had. 
The  best  guard  a  king  can  have  is 

the  heart  of  his  subjects. 


avoir,  c'est  le  co3ur  de  sea  eujets. 


An  ordinal  number  followed  by  qui  or  que.  ($  151 — 3.) 


He  is  the  first  man  who  has  dared  to 

tell  me  so. 
You  are  the  second  amiable  lady  that 

I  have  met  with  in  this  town. 


C'est  le  premier  homme  qni  ait  osiS 

me  le  dire. 
Vous  etes  la  deuxieme  dame  aimable 

que  faie  rencontnie   duns    cette 

ville. 


The  words  le  seul,  V unique,  the  only  one,  &c.  ($  151 — 3.) 


You  are  the  only  one  upon  whom  I 

can  rely. 
£  want  an  office  the  duties  of  which 

may  be  easy  to  fulfil.  ($  151 — 14.) 
I  have  an  office  of  which  it  is  easy  to 

fulfil  the  duties. 
I  aim   at   a  situation   that   may  be 

agreeable  and  lucrative. 
I  aim  at  a  situation  that  is  an  agree- 
able and  lucrative  one. 
She   is  the  handsomest  woman   of 

those  that  were  at  the  opera. 
I  do  not  know  any  of  the  persons 

who  called  on  you  this  morning. 

I  hope  you  will  say  nothing  of  what 
I  have  intrusted  you  with. 

£  have  read  the  second  volume  of  the 
work  which  you  nave  lent  me. 

May  heaven  ever  preserve  you  from 
such  a  misfortune. 

Would  to  God. 


Vous  etes  le  seul  sur  qui  je  pvime 

compter. 
Je  desire  une  place  dont  les  fonction* 

soient  aisees  a  remplir. 
J'ai  un  emploi  dont  il  est  aise  do 

remplir  les  fonctions. 
J'aspire  a  une  place  qui  soil  agree- 
able et  lucrative. 
J'aspire  a  un  emploi  qui  est  agre 

able  et  lucratif. 
C'est  la  plus  belle  des  femmes  qui 

etaient  a  r opera.  ($  151 — 14.) 
Je  ne  connais  aucune  des  personnea 

qui    sont  venues    chez    vous  ce 

matin. 
J'espere  que  vous  ne  direz  rien  dc  c« 

que  je  vous  ai  confie. 
J'ai  lu  le  second  volume  de  1'ouvrnpo 

que  vous  m'avea  prete*. 
Fasse  le  Ciel  que  pareil  malheur  nc 

vous  arrive  jamais. 
Plut  a  Dieu. 
Plut  au  Ciel. 


EIGHTIETH    LESSON.    (3.)  495 

Would  to  God  it  were  so  !  i    Plut  a  Dieu  qu  il  en  fut  ainsi  I 

Would  to  God  he  had  done  it !  |  Plut  a  Dieu  qu'il  1'eut  fait ! 

QUATRE-VIXGTIEME    TlIiblE.       2de    SCC. 

M.  J.  B,  m'a  ecrit  un  billet,  clans  lequel  il  me  dit:  Quoique  1'ar- 
gent  soil  rare  et  qu'on  n'en  obtiernie  que  diilicilement,  je  vous 
envoie  un  bon  (check)  sur  la  banque,  pour  la  somme  dont  vous  avez 
besom.  Puisqu'il  en.  agit  ainsi,  il  s'ensuit  qu'*il  est  mon  ami. 
H  151 — 4.) — Quel  est  le  plus  beau  don  que  Dieu  ait  fait  a  Phommel 
L;Evangile  esi  ie  plus  beau  present  que  l;hornme  ait  rect  de  Dieu. 
Si  la  vie  et  la  mort  de  Socrate  sont  d;un  sage,  que  peut-on  dire  de 
la  vie  et  de  la  mort  de  Jesus-Christ'?  Que  ce  sont  celles  d'ur. 
dieu. — Arrive-t-il  souvent  qiron  soit  trompe  par  ses  amis?  11  ^'ar- 
rive pas  souvent  qu'on  soit  trompe  par  eux.  On  est  souvent  irompe 
par  de  faux  amis:  niais  il  est  rare  qu'on  le  soit  par  de  vrais  amis. 

If  I  were  not  your  friend,  and  if  you  were  not  mine,  I  should  not 
speak  thus  to  you. — Do  not  trust  (meficz-vous  dc)  Mr.  N.,  for  he 
flatters  you:  do  you  think  a  llatterer  (un  Jlatteur)  can  be  a  friend? 
— You  do  not  know  him  as  well  as  I,  though  you  see  him  every 
day. — Do  not  think  that  I  am  angry  with  him,  because  his  father 
has  offended  me. — Oh!  here  he  is  coming,  (le  voild  qui  vient,)  you  . 
may  tell  him  all  yourself. — What  do  you  think  of  our  king  ?  I  say 
he  is  a  great  man,  but  I  add,  that  though  kings  be  ever  so  powerful, 
(puissant,)  they  die  as  well  as  the  meanest  (v:l)  of  their  subjects. — 
Have  you  been  pleased  with  my  sisters?  I  have;  for  howevei 
plain  (laidc)  they  may  be,  they  are  still  very  amiable ;  and  however 
learned  (savant)  our  neighbor's  daughters  may  be,  they  are  still 
sometimes  mistaken. — Is  not  their  father  rich?  However  rich  he 
may  be,  he  may  Jose  all  in  an  instant. — Whoever  the  enemy  may 
be  whose  malice  (la  malice)  you  dread,  (apprihcndcr,)  you  ought  to 
rely  (se  reposer)  upon  your  innocence;  but  the  laws  (la  loi)  condemn 
(condamncr)  all  criminals,  (un  crimincl),  whatever  they  may  be. — 
Whatever  your  intentions  (une  intention)  might  be,  you  should  have 
acted  differently,  (differcmmcnt.)— Whatever  the  reasons  (la  raison) 
be  which  you  may  allege,  (alleguei'j)  they  will  not  excuse  youi 
action,  blame ible  in  itself. 

VOCABULAIRE.     3me  Sec. 
to  God   that  all  great  lords  |  Plut   a   Dieu   que   tous   les  granda 


loved  peace!  (§  151 — 15.) 
Would   to    God  we   may  never   he 


seigneurs  aimassent  la  paix  ! 
Plut  au  Ciel  que  nous  ne  fussioni 


more  unhapy  .  jamais  plus  malheureux: 


May  you  be  happy  ! 


Puissiez-vous  etre  heureux ! 


Though  it  cost  me  alJ  I  have,  I  shall     Dut-il  m'en  coiiter  tout  cc   .^uo  jo 


126 


EIGHTIETH     LESSON.    (3.) 


possede,  je  saurai  me  preserve! 
d'un  semblable  rnalheur.1 
Fussent-ils  a  cent  lieuesd'ici.  j'iraia 
les  chercher.2 


know  hew  to  preserve  myself  from 

such  anr.sfortune.  ($  151. — 15.) 
S.iould  \»ey  be   a  hundred  leagues 

hence,  I  would  go  for  them. 

06s.  166£.  It  is  essential  for  foreigners  to  observe,  that  in  the  French  lan- 
guage the  construction  with  the  infinitive  is  preferable  to  that  with  the  sub- 
junctive, whenever  the  former  may  be  employed  without  ambiguity,  that 
is,  when  the  same  English  subject  is  repeated.  (282,  Obs.  65.)  Say,  there- 
ibre : 

I  come  (in  order)  to  see  you ;  not :      (  Je  viens  pour  votis  voir;  and  not : 
I  come  that  1  may  see  you.  t  Je  viens  pour  qne  je  vous  voie. 

{Je  ne  crois  pas  pouvoir  sortit  dcmaiu ; 
and  not : 
Je  ne  crois  pas  que  je  puisse  scrtir 
demain. 


I   shall  marry  a  woman  who   will 

please  me.  ($  151 — 14.) 
I  shall  marry  a  woman  who  must 

please  me :  or,  the  woman  I  shall 

marry  must  please  me. 
fere  is  a  book  for  you  which   you 

may  consult  occasionally. 
?i ve  me  a  book  that  I  may  be  able 

to  consult  occasionally. 
Lend  me  that  book,  which  you  do 

not  want. 
Lend  me  a  book  which  you  may  not 

be  in  want  of. 
Do  not  leave  a  place  where  you  are 

comfortable,  and  whence  you  tear 

well, 
'hoose  a  place  where  you  may  be 

comfortable,  and  whence  you  may 

hear  well. 


Ind.  J'cpouserai  une  femmo  qui  me 

plaira. 
Subj.  J'epouserai  une  femme  qui  me 

plaise. 

Ind.  Voila  un  livro  que  vous  pourtea 

consulter  an  besoin. 
Sulj.  Donnez-moi  un  livre  que  je 

puissc  consulter  au  besoin. 
Ind.  Prctez-moi  ce  livre,  dont  vous 

n'avcz  pas  besoin. 
Snhj.  Pretez-moi  un  livre  dont  vous 

n'ayez  pas  besoin. 
Ind.    Ne   quittez  pas   une  place  ou 

vous  etes  commodemcnt,  et  d'<m 

vous  entendez  bien. 
Subj.  Choisissez  une  place  ou  vous 

soyez  commodement,  et  d'oa  vous 

entendiez  bien. 


QUATRE-VINGTIEME    Tfi^ME.       3me  See. 

L'homme,  en  general,  peut-il  lever  un  fardcau  (burden)  de  300 
livres  ?  Quelques  hommes  peuvent  lever  des  fardeaux  beaucoup  plus 
pcsants  (heavy) ;  mais  il  y  a  peu  d'hommes  qui  puissent  en  lever 
un  de  300  livres. — Avons-nous  du  riz  ?  Nous  en  avons  un  peu,  mais 
;e  ne  crois  pas  que  nous  en  ayons  assez. — Faut-il  que  j'en  achete  ilh 
i*ac  ?  Non7  un  boisscau  (bushel)  sera  assez.  Pensez-vous  qu?ua 
boisseau  dure  jusqu'a  ce  que  le  riz  nouveau  paraisse  1  Je  pense  que 
oui.  La  recolte  de  riz  (crop)  peut  etre  mauvaise ;  ne  vaudrait-il  paa 

1  Instead  of — Quand  meme  il  devrait  m* en  couter  tout  ce  qu*  .;e  postcdc 
&c.     Si  meme  il  devait  m'en  couter,  &c. 
8  Quajid  meme  us  seraient  d  cent  lieues  d'ici,  6/c.  SJ Us  elaieyt 


EIGHTY  -FIRST     LESSON-,     (l)  427 

mieux  que  nous  en  achetassions  plus  (Tim  boisseau  ? — Comme  la 
recolte  de  ble  et  celle  de  mais  ont  ete  bonnes,  la  difference  de  prix 
ne  pourrait  pas  etre  considerable,  en  ca.s  ($151)  meme  que  la 
recolte  de  riz  vint  a  manquer.  Cependant,  faites  comme  vous 
voudrez.  Non,  je  ferai  comme  il  vous  plaira,  pourvu  que  vous  mo 
le  disiez. 

Whatever  may  happen  to  you  in  this  world,  never  murmur  (i/iur- 
murer)  against  Divine  Providence,  (la  divine  providence  :)  for  what- 
ever we  may  suffer,  we  deserve  it. — Whatever  I  may  do,  you  aro 
never  satisfied.  —  Whatever  you  may  say,  your  sisters  shall  be 
punished,  if  they  deserve  it,  and  if  they  do  not  endeavor  to  amend, 
(*7  amende  r.) — Who  has  taken  my  gold  watch  ?  I  do  not  know.  Do 
not  believe  that  I  have  had  it.  or  that  Miss  C.  has,  had  your  silver 
snuff-box,  (la  tabatiere,)  for  I  saw  both  in  the  hands  of  your  sister 
when  we  weie  playing  at  forfaits,  (au  gage  touche.) — To  morrow  1 
shall  set  out  for  Dover;  but  in  a  fortnight  I  shall  be  back  again, 
(revcnir,*)  and  then  I  shall  come  and  see  you  and  your  family. — 
Where  is  your  sister  at  present  1  She  is  at  Paris,  and  my  brother  is 
at  Berlin. — That  little  woman  is  said  (on  dit)  to  be  going  to  marry 
General  (le  general)  K.,  your  friend ;  is  it  true  ?  I  have  not  heard  of 
it. — What  news  is  there  of  our  great  army  ?  It  is  said  to  be  lying 
(etre)  between  the  Weser  (le  Veser)  and  the  Rhine,  (le  Rhin.) — All 
that  the  courier  told  me  seeming  (paraitre)  very  probable.,  (vraisem- 
liable.)  I  went  home  immediately,  wrote  some  letters,  and  departed 
lor  London. 


EIGHTY-FIRST  LESSON,  81st.— Quatre-vingt-uwme  Lcron,  81m*. 

VOCABULAIRE,   Ire  SeC. 


Just  a  little,  ever  so  little. 

Will  you  do  me  the  favor  of  giving 

me  apiece  of  bread? 
Do  you  wish  a  great  deal  ? 


Tant  s.oit  pen. 

Voulez-vous  me  faire  le  plaisir  de  mo 

donner  un  morceau  de  pain  ? 
En  voulez-vous  beaucoup  ? 


No,  just  a  little.  •   Non,  tant  soit  pcu. 

To  turn  to  account  >  t  Fai 

> 


To  make  the  best  of. 

That  man  does  not   know  how  to 

make  the  most  of  his  talents. 
That  man  turns  his  monsy  to  account 

in  trade. 
How  do  you  employ  your  money  ? 


t  Get  homme  ne  sait  pas  faire  valcif 

ses  talents, 
t  Get  homme  fait  valoir  son  argent 

dams  le  commerce. 
1  Comment  faites-vous  valoir  \otrc 


argent  ? 

I  employ  it  in  the  stocks.  )  t  Je  le  fais  valoir  dans  les  fonds  pub 

I  turn  it  to  account  in  the  stocks.       5          lies. 


428 


EIGHTY-FIRST     LESSON.    (].) 


la  it  not  proper  that  he  should  claim 
his  rights  ?  Let  him  claim  them. 

To  boast,  to  brag. 

I  do  not  like  that  man,  because  he 
boasts  too  much. 

Notwithstanding  that. 
For  all  that,  although. 
That  man  is  a  little  bit  of  a  rogue, 

but  notwithstanding  he  passes  for 

an  honest  man. 
Although  that  man  is  not  very  well, 

he  notwithstanding  works  a  great 

deal. 
Although   that  woman   is   not  very 

pretty,  still  she  is  very  amiable. 

Although  that  man  has  not  the  least  , 
talent,  yet  for  all  that  he  boasts  a 
great  deal. 

Although  that  tavern-keeper's  wife  is 
rather  swarthy,  yet  for  all  that  she 
turns  the  business  to  good  account. 

Provided  you  write  on  the  3d,  and 
put  your  letter  in  the  post-office 
before  11  o'clock,  I  will  receive  it 
on  the  5th. 

To  go  lack,  to  return. 

The  top,  the  upper  part. 
Upper  Canada. 

The  bottom,  the  lower  part. 
Lower  Canada. 

Up  to  the  top.     To  the  very  bottom. 

The  eldest  brother.  The  eldest  sister. 

He  is  the  eldest.    She  was  the  eldest. 


N'est-il  pas  apropos  qu'ilfasae  veloi 
see  droits  ?  Qu'll  les  fasso  veloh 

t  Sefaire  valoir. 

t  Je  n'aime  pas  cet  homma.  pare* 
qu'il  se  fait  trop  valoir. 


>  JVe  laisser  pas  de. 


Cet  homme  est  tar.t  soit  pea  fripon, 
mais  il  ne  laisse  pas  de  passer  poul 
honnete  homme. 

Quoique  cet  homme  ne  soit  pas  bicD 
portant,  il  ne  laisse  pas  de  tra« 
vailler  beaucoup. 

Quoique  cette  femme  ne  soit  pas  bien 
jolie,  elle  ne  laisse  pas  d'etre  fori 
aimable. 

Quoique  cet  homme  n'ait  aucun  ta- 
lent, il  ne  laisse  pas  de  se  faire 
beaucoup  valoir. 

Quoique  la  femme  de  cet  aubergiste 
soit  tant  soit  peu  basanee,  elle  no 
laisse  pas  de  faire  valoir  le  bouchon. 

Pourvu  que  \ous  e'criviez  le  3,  et 
c.ue  \ous  mettiez  votre  lettre  a  lo 
poste  avant  11  heureB,je    la  re 
cevrai  le  5. 

lift  ourner,  1. 

Le  haut. 
Le  Haut  Canrda. 

Le  bas. 
Le  Bas  Canada. 

Jusqu'en  haut.     Jusqu'en  bas. 

Le  frere  aine.      La  sceur  ainec. 

C'est  1'aine.        C'etait  1'ainee. 

TiifhiE.  Ire  Sec. 
Mon  cafe  n'est  pas  assez  sucre,  veuillez  me  donner  tant  soit  peu 
plus  de  sucre.  Avec  plaisir.  II  faut  que  vous  aimiez  votre  cafe 
bien  sucre,  car  je  crois  y  avoir  mis  deux  cueillerecs  (spoonfuls)  de 
Sucre.  Que  vous  y  ayez  mis  ($  151 — 10)  deux  cueillerees  o»i  non, 
le  cafe  n'etait  pas  assez  sucre.  II  est  possible  que  je  n'y  en  aie  mig 
qu'une.  Serait-il  etonnant  que  vous  n'y  en  eussiez  pas  mis  du  tout] 
Oui,  vraiment;  il  serait  tres  etonnant  que  j'eusse  oublie  d'y  en  met- 
tre.  Cela  ne  vous  arrive-t-il  jamais1?  Pas  tres-souvent,  je  vous 
assure.  Je  le  crois.  Je  peux  dire,  sans  me  faire  valoir,  que  jo  suis 
au  fait  de  ma  bcsogne,  (business.)  Ce  n'est  pas  d'aujourd'hui  que  jo 
m'en  apen;ois. — Vous  connaissez  Mlle.Eloise,  n'est-<;e  pas?  N'est- 


EIGHTY-FIRST    LESSON.    (2.) 


elle  pas  amiable?  Quoiqifelle  ne  soit  ni  jolie  ni  spiritualle,  (witty,) 
clie  ne  laisse  pas  d'etre  tres-aimable. 

Where  are  the  two  Misses  Vignette  ?  They  have  not  yet  returned 
from  Europe. — You  are  acquainted  with  them,  are  you  not  ?  I  know 
the  eldest  only. — Is  it  possible  that  you  do  not  know  both  of  them1 
When  are  they  to  return?  They  will  not  return  before  their  com- 
pany  has  visited  Italy  and  the  upper  and  the  lower  Rhine. — Although 

Theodore  B is  younger  than  his  brother  Henry,  for  all  that  he  is 

ai  talented  (a  autant  de  talents)  as  his  elder  brother,  (sonfrfre  aine, 
or  simply  son  aine.) — Whither  shall  you  go  next  year?  I  shall  go 
to  England,  for  it  is  a  fine  kingdom,  (le  royaume,)  \vhere  I  intend 
spending  the  summer  on  (a)  my  return  from  France.— Whither  shall 
you  go  in  the  winter  ?  I  shall  go  to  Italy,  and  ihence  (de  Id)  to  the 
West  Indies,  (aux  Indcs  occidentals ,  ou  aux  colonies,)1  but  before  that 
I  must  go  to  Holland  to  take  leave  of  my  friends. — What  country  do 
these  people  inhabit?  (haliter?)  They  inhabit  the  south  (le  midi) 
of  Europe ;  their  countries  are  called  Italy,  Spain,  and  Portugal,  and 
they  themselves  are  Italians,  Spaniards,  or  Portuguese  ;  but  the  pooplc 
called  Ptussians,  Swedes,  Poles,  and  Hungarians  (Hongrois)  inhabit 
the  north  and  east  of  Europe  •  and  the  names  of  their  countries  are 
Russia,  Sweden,  Poland,  (la  Pologne,)  and  Hungary.  France  is 
separated  (separcr)  from  Italy  by  (par)  the  Alps,  (les  Mpes,)  and 
from  Spain  by  the  Pyrenees,  (les  Pyrenees.) 


VOCABULAIRE.     2de  Sec. 


To  appear,  to  seem,  seeming,  seemed, 

appear.     Let  him  appear. 
I  appear,  thou  appearest,  he  appears. 
To  keep,  to  maintain. 
My  keeping  or  maintenance. 
My  keeping  costs  me  six  hundred 

francs  a  year. 
To  drive  in,  to  sink. 
To  converse  with. 
A  conversation. 

To  spare,  save,  lay  up,  put  by  lOOOf. 
Spare  your  money. 
To  get  tired. 
To  be  tired. 
To  handle.  To  lean  against. 


par 


Paraitre,*4,  paraissant,   paru, 

aissez.     Qu?il  paraisse. 
Je  parais,  tu  parais,  il  parait. 
Entretenir,*  2. 
Mon  entreticn. 
Mon  entretien  me  coute  six   ccn; 

francs  par  an. 
Enf oncer,  1. 
S'entretenir*  avec. 
Un  e-ntretien,  une  conversation. 
6pargner,  1.     Sauver  mille  francs. 
6pargnez  votre  argent. 
Se  lasser,  (de  bef.  inf.) 
£tre  las ;  fern,  lasse,  (de  bef.  inf.) 
Manier,  1.  S'appuyer,  1. 


1  The  word  Colonies,  is  more  used  by  the  French  than,  Indes  occidentals , 
(West  Indies,)  which  is  the  book-word;  just  as  in  New  York  they  say  the 
North  instead  of  the  Hudson  river,  &c.  East  Indies,  (book- word)  Indcs 
nnentalcs  ;  (colloquial)  Lcs  hides  ou  les  Grandes  Indcs 


£30 


EIGHTY-FIRST    LfcSSON.    (2.) 


Lean  against  me. 

^ean  against  the  wall. 

To  aim  at. 

Short.  To  stop  short 

Virtue  is  amiable.  (§  15.) 

Vice  is  odious. 

Men  are  mortal. 

Gold  is  precious. 

Corn  is  sold  at  a  crown  a  bushtl. 

Beef  costs  four  pence  a  pound. 

The  horror  of  vice,  and  the  love  of 

virtue,  are  the  delights  of  the  wise 

man. 
England  is  a  fine  country. 


Appuyez-vous  sur  moi. 
Appuyez-vous  contre  la  muraillc, 
Coucher  enjoue. 

Court.          S'arreter  tout  court. 
La  vertu  est  aimable. 
Le  vice  est  odieux. 
Les  hommes  soat  mortels. 
L>  or  est  precieux. 
Le  bl6  se  vend  un  e*cu  le  boisseau. 
Le  bceuf  coute  quatre  sous  la  livre. 
L'horreur  du  vice,  et  1' amour  de  U 
vertu,  sont  les  delices  du  scge. 

L'Angleterre  est  u:i  beau  pays. 


Ols.  167.  The  definite  article  is  also  used  before  the  names  of  kingdoms, 
countries,  and  provinces.-    ($  15.) 


Italy  is  the  garden  of  Europe. 
The  dog  is  the  friend  and  companion 
of  man. 


L? Italic  est  le  jardin  de  T Europe. 
Le  chien  est  Z'ami  ct  le  compagnon 
de  Z'homme. 


Obs.  168.  The  articles  are  repeated  in  French  before  every  substantive, 
nnd  agree  with  it  in  gender  and  number.     (Dir.  2.) 


Thessaly  produces  wine,  oranges, 
lemons,  olives,  and  all  sorts  of 
fruit. 

He  ate  the  bread,  meat,  apples,  and 
cakes;  he  drank  the  wine,  beer, 
and  cider. 

Beauty,  gracefulness,  and  wit,  are 
valuable  endowments  when  heigh- 
tened by  modesty. 

The  longer  the  days  the  shorter  the 
nights,  and  the  longer  the  nights 
the  shorter  the  days.  ($  200 — 12.) 


Txi  Thessalie  produit  du  vin,  de* 
oranges,  des. citrons,  des  olivos,  et 
toute's  sortes  de  fruits. 

II  a  mange*  le  pain,  la  viande,  les 
pommes,  et  les  gateaux  ;  ilabu  lo 
vin,  la  biere,  et  le  cidre. 

La  beaut^,  les  graces,  et  Z'esprit,  sont 
des  avantages  bien  precieiui,  quand 
ils  sont  releve's  par  la  modcstio. 

Plus  les  jours  sont  lon^  plus  les 
nuits  sont  courtes,  et  plus  les  nuita 
sont  longues  plus  leo  jours  sont 
courts. 


QUATRE-VINGT-UNIEME  TH£ME.     2de  Sec. 

Plus  vous  paraissez  vous  amuser,  plus  il  parait  s'anuiser  aussi. 
(§200  —  12.)  —  Le  vaisseau  a  touche,  (grounded,)  n'est-ct?  p?.s  dom- 
mage  1  II  est  dommage  qu'il  ait  echouej  (echouer,  1,  to  ground,) 
mais  je  ne  crois  pas  que  nous  courions  aucun  danger.  Oh  !  vcyex 
comme  il  s'enfonce  !  N'ayez  aucune  peur.  Plus  il  s'enfonccra 
dans  le  sable  moins  nous  courrons  danger  de  chavirer,  (upset.)  C'est 
7ra";  p*^s  il  entrera  dans  le  sable  moins  il  y  aura  de  danger  qu7>] 


'  Except  when  preceded  by  en  or  de.     Ex.   JTirai  en  Ati>:Magne  a,  mo* 
rctour  de  France,  T  shall  go  to  Germany  on  riy  return  from  Fiance. 


EIGHTY-SECOND    LESSON,    (l  )  433 

chavire,  a  moms  qu;il  ne  s'enfonce  entierement.  Ne  craignez  paa 
cela.  J'ai  grand7  peur.  Appuyez-vous  sur  moi.  Je  vous  lasserai, 
je  vous  fatiguerai. — Qu'est-ce  qui  est  aimable,  la  vertu  ou  le  vice  ?— 
Qu'est-ce  qui  estodieux? — Qu'est-ce  qui  est  precieux? — Qu'est-ce 
qui  se  vend  un  ecu  le  boisseau  ? — Vous  avez  visite  PAngleterre ,  c'est 
uu  beau  royaume,  n'est-ce  pas  ? 

Though  the  Mahometans  (le  Mahometan)  are  forbidden  the  use  of 
wine,  (defendre  quelque  chose  a  quelqu:un,)  yet  for  all  that  some  of 
them  drink  it. — Has  your  brother  eaten  anything  this  morning  ?  He 
has  eaten  a  great  deal ;  though  he  said  he  had  no  appetite,  yet  for 
all  that  he  ate  all  the  meat,  bread,  and  vegetables,  (les  legumes,)  and 
drank  all  the  wine,  beer,  and  cider. — Are  eggs  (un  <mf]  dear  at  pre- 
sent? They  are  sold  at  six  francs  a  hundred.  In  case  they  are 
cheaper  to-morrow,  buy  J  a  hundred. — Do  you  like  grapes?  (ie  rai- 
sin'?) I  do  not  only  (non  settlement)  like  grapes,  but  also  plums, 
(une  prune,)  almonds,  nuts,  and  all  sorts  of  fruit. — Though  modesty, 
candor,  and  an  amiable  disposition  (Vamabilite)  are  valuable  endow- 
ments, yet  for  all  that  there  are  some  ladies  that  are  neither  modest, 
nor  candid,  (candide,)  nor  amiable. — The  fear  of  death  and  the  love 
of  life  being  natural  to  men,  they  ought  to  shun  (fuir*)  vice,  (le  vice,) 
and  adhere  to  (s'attachcr  d)  virtue. — What  does  your  living  dost  you 
a  year? — Do  you  spend  less  than  your  eldest  brother? — The  less 
you  will  spend  the  more  you  will  save  ;  are  you  not  of  my  opinion  ? 
— Are  you  taking  aim  at  that  small  bird?  Is  it  worth  killing? — 
Was  not  the  last  scholar  who  recited  obliged  to  stop  several  times, 
and  finally  to  stop  short? — Was  it  not  a  pity? — Did  he  not  appear 
very  modest,  although  he  was  talented  ?  The  more  I  sang  the  lesa 
embarrassed  I  felt,  (ctais,  ou  je  me  scntais.)  Is  it  so  with  you? 


EIGHTY-SECOND  LESSON.— Quatre-vingt-deuxicme  Le$on}  82m*. 

VOCABULAIRE.       Ire  Sec. 


To  give  occasion. 

Do  not  give  him  cause  to  complain. 

To  leave  it  to  one.' 

1  leave  it  to  you. 

A  good  bargain. 

To  stick  or  to  abide  by  a  thing. 

1  abido  by  the  offer  you  have  made 

me. 
I  do  not  doubi  but  you  are  my  friend 


Donner  lieu,  (dc  before  infin.) 

Ne  lui  donnez  pas  lieu  de  se  plaindro. 

t  S1  en  rapporter  d  quclqu'iin. 

t  Je  m'en  rapporte  a  voua. 

Un  bon  marche. 

t  S'en  tenir  a. 

t  Je  m'en  tiens  a  1'oflre  quo  <roni 

m'avez  faite. 

Je  ne  doute  pas  que  vous  ne  eoyoa 
mon  ami. 


432 


EIGHTY-SECOND    LESSON.    (I.) 


Ota.  169.     When  the  verb  douter  is  negatively  used,  it  requires  Tie  before 
subjunctive. 


[  do  not  doubt  but  he  will  do  it. 

To  suffer,  to  bear. 

They  were  exposed  to  the  whole  fire 

,of  the  place. 
To  examine  one  artfully,  or  to  draw 

a  secret  from  one. 
J  examined  him  artfully,  and  by  that 

means  I  have  made  myself  ac- 

duainted  with  all  his  affairs. 
To  'bear,  or  to  put  up  with. 
You  will  be  obliged  to  put  up  with 

all  he  wishes. 
Thick. 

A  thick  cloud.       A  thick  beard. 
A  burst.  A  burst  of  laughter. 

To  burst  out  laughing.  To  burst  out. 
To  burst  out  a  laughing. 
Splendor,  brightness. 
To  make  a  great  show.     To  light. 
To  suffer  one's  self  to  be  beaten. 
To  let  or  to  suffer  one's  self  to  fall. 
To  suffer  one's  self  to  be  insulted. 
To  suffer  one's  self  to  die. 
To  let  one's  self  be  struck. 
To  send  back,  to  send  away. 
To  extol,  to  praise  up. 
To  boast,  to  praise  one's  self,  to  brag. 


Je  ne  doute  pas  qu'il  ne  Jr.  fasse. 

Essuyer,  1. 

Us  essuyerent  tout  le  feu  de  la  place. 

Tirer  les  vers  du  nez  a  quelqu'un. 

Je  lui  ai  tire  les  vers  du  nez,  et  pat 
ce  moyen  je  me  suis  mis  au  fait  de 
toutes  ses  affaires. 

En  passer  par. 

Vous  serez  oblige  d'en  passer  par 
tout  ce  qu'il  voudra. 

6pais  ;  fern,  dpaisse. 

Un  nuage  epais.     Une  barbe  epaisse, 

Un  eclat.  Un  eclat  de  rire. 

Faire  un  eclat  de  rire.      Eclater,  1. 


fcclairer,  1. 


e  rire. 
L'e'clat. 

t  Faire  de  1'eclat. 
Se  laisser  battre. 
Se  laisser  tomber. 
Se  laisser  insulter. 
Se  laisser  mourir. 
Se  laisser  frapper. 
Renvoyer,  1. 
Vanter,  1. 
Se  vanter. 


QUATRE-VINGT-DEUXIEME    TH&ME.       Ire  Sec. 

11  se  plaint  que  nous  le  grondions,  n'est-ce  pas?  Oui,  il  s'en 
plaint.  II  (lit  que  quelque  chose  qu'il  fasse,  on  y  trouve  toujours  a 
redire. — Quoi  que  ce  soit  qu'il  fasse  mal;  on  y  trouve  a  redire.  Mais 
que  fait-il  de  bien? — Est-il  possible  que  vous  ayez  fait  un  si  bon 
marche  1 — Ne  vous  donnent-ils  pas  lieu  de  se  plaindre  d'eux  ? — A 
qui  vous  en  rapportez-vous  1 — Doutez-vous  encore  que  je  sois  votre 
ami  1 — Doutez-vous  de  leur  arriv£e  1 — Doutent-ils  que  leur  cousin 
soit  arrive  ? — Les  Russes  n'ont-ils  pas  essuye  une  perte  considerable  7 
— S'il  ne  vous  Pa  pas  promis,  vous  serez  oblige  d'en  passer  par  tout 
ce  qu'il  voudra,  et  je  crains  qu'il  soit  impossible  que  vous  receviez 
?os  fonds. — Comme  les  nuages  sont  epais  !  Ne  va-t-il  pas  neiger  ? 
— Qui  a  fa/'t  cet  eclat  de  rire  ?  Qui  ?  Cela  peut-ii  etre  quelqu'autre 
qu'Etienne? — Ce  jeune  homme  se  vante  toujours  de  pouvoir  tout 
Cairo ;  il  est  vrai-  qu'il  fait  bien  des  choses.  II  se  laisse  tomber  do 
jhcval.  II  se  laisse  insulter.  meme  frapper.  Enfin,  1'autre  jour  il 


EJGHTV-SECOND     LESSON.    (2.) 


438 


t'est  laisse  baure. — Les  Russes  ne  se  sont-ils  pas  laisse  battre? — Get 
nomine  n'est-il  pas  ivre?  (drunk?)    . 

Will  you  drink  a  cup  of  coffee '?  I  thank  you,  I  do  not  like  coi- 
fee. — Then  you  will  drink  a  glass  of  wine  ?  I  have  just  drunk  some. 
— Let  us  take  a  walk.  Willingly,  (je  le  veux  bien:)  but  \vhere  shall 
we  go  to  ?  Come  with  me  into  my  aunt's  garden ;  we  shall  there  find 
very  agreeable  society.  I  believe  it,  (je  le  crois  bien;)  but  the  que$- 
iion  is  (Jest  d  saroir)  whether  this  agreeable  society  will  admit  me, 
(vzidra  de  moi.)  You  are  welcome  everywhere. — What  ails  you, 
iqiCavcz-vous.)  my  friend?  How  do  you  like  that  wine?  i  like  it 
very  well,  (excellent :)  but  1  have  drunk  enough  of  it,  (sujfwmment.) 
—Drink  once  more,  (encore  un  coup.)  No,  too  much  is  unwhole- 
some, (mahaiii ;)  I  know  my  constitution,  (le  temperament.) — Do  not 
fall.  What  is  the  matter  with  you  ?  I  do  not  know;  but  my  head 
is  giddy,  (la  tcte  me  tourne :)  I  think  t  am  fainting,  (tomber  en  de- 
f alliance.)  I  think  so  also,  for  you  look  almost  like  a  dead  person, 
(un  morl.) — What  countryman  are  you  ?  I  am  an  Englishman. — You 
speak  French  so  well  that  I  took  you  for  a  Frenchman  by  birth, 
(Fran^ais  de  nation.)  You  are  jesting.  Pardon  me;  I  do  not  jest  a£ 
<U1. — How  long  have  you  been  in  France  ?  A  few7  days.  In  earnest  ? 
(Serieusemcnl?)  You  doubt  it,  perhaps,  because  I  speak  French;  I 
knew  it  before  I  came  to  France. — How  did  you  learn  it  so  well'' 
[  did  like  the  prudent  starling. 

VOCABULAIRE.       2dc  Sec. 


Go  thither.  Let  us  go  thither. 

Go  thoii.  Go  there. 

Go  away.  Do  not  go  away. 

Let  him  go  thither. 

Let  them  go  thither. 

Go  away,  begone.      Let  us  begone. 

Let  him  go  away,  let  him  begone. 

Give  me. 

Give  it  to  me. 

Give  it  to  him. 

Give  him  some. 

Get  paid. 

Let  us  set  out.  Let  us  not. 

Let  us  breakfast.        Let  me  dine. 

Let  him  give  it  me. 

Ixjt  him  be  here  at  twelve  o'clock. 

Let  him  send  it  me. 

He  may  believe  it. 

Make  an  end  of  it.      Let  him  finish. 

Lx?t  him  take  it.  Let  her  say  so. 


Allez-y.  Allons-y. 

Va.         Vas-y.  ($  150—5.) 

Va-t'en.  Ne  t'en  va  pas. 

Qu'ii  y  aille. 

Qu'ils  y  aillent. 

Allez-vous  en.          Allons-noue  en. 

Qu'il  s'en  ailie. 

Donnez-moi. 

Donnez-le-moi. 

Donnez-le-lui. 

Donnez-lui-en. 

Faites-vous  payer. 

Partons.  Ne  partona  pas. 

Dejeunons.        Laisser,  moi  dinoi . 

Qu'il  me  le  donne. 

Qu'il  soit  ici  arnidi. 

Qu'il  me  1'envoie. 

Qu'il  le  croie. 

Finissez.         Qu'ii  finisse. 

Qu'il  !c  premne.      Qu'elle  le  diwe. 


434. 


EIGHTY-SECOND    LESSON.    (2.) 


The  starling. 

If  I  were  to  question  you  as  I  used 
to  do  at  the  beginning  of  our  les- 
sons, what  would  you  answer  ? 


*A'o  found  these  questions  at  first 
rather  ridiculous;  but  full  of  con- 
fidence in  your  method,  we  an- 
swered as  well  as  the  small  quan- 
tity of  words  and  rules  we  then 
possessed  allowed  us. 

We  were  not  long  in  finding  out  that 
those  questions  were  calculated  to 
ground  us  in  the  rules  and  to  ex- 
ercise us  in  conversation,  by  the 
contradictory  answers  we  were 
obliged  to  make. 

We  can  now  almost  keep  up  a  con- 
versation in  French. 

This  phraso  does  not  seem  to  us 
logically  correct. 

We  snould  be  ungrateful  if  we  al- 
lowed such  an  opportunity  to  es- 
cape without  expressing  our  live- 
liest gratitude  to  you. 

In  all  cases,  at  all  events. 

The  native. 

The  insurmountable  difficulty. 


Le  sansonnet. 

Si  je  vous  posais  maintenant  dea 
questions  comme  je  vous  en  ai 
pose  au  commencement  de  noa 
lecons,  (comme  j'avais  d'abord 
1'habitude  de  le  faire,)  que  repon- 
driez-vous? 

.Nous  avonsd'abord  trouve  ces  ques- 
tions tant  soit  peu  ridicules ;  maie 
pleins  de  confiance  en  votre  me** 
thode,  nous  y  avonsrepondu  aussi 
bien  que  la  petite  provision  de  mots 
et  de  principes  que  nous  avions 
alors  pouvait  nous  le  permettre. 

Nous  n'avons  pas  tarde'  n.  nous  aper- 
cevoir  que  ces  questions  etaient 
calculees  pour  nons  inculquer  les 
principes  et  nous  exeicer  a  la  con- 
versation, par  les  reponses  contra- 
dictoires  que  nous  etions  forces 
d'y  faire. 

Maintenant  nous  savoris  presque  sou- 
tenir  une  conversation  en  Fransais. 

Cette  phrase  ne  nous  paralt  pas 
logiquement  correcle. 

Nous  serions  des  ingrats  si  nous  lais- 
sions  echapper  une  si  belle  occa* 
sion,  sans  vous  tdmoigner  la  recon- 
naissance la  plus  vive. 

En  tout  cas. 

L' horn  me  ne  dans  le  pays. 

La  difficulte  insurrnontable. 


QtJATRE-VINGT-DETJXIEME    TH&ME.       2de  See. 

Jean  veut  s'en  aller?  Je  croyais  qu'il  s'en  ctait  deja  alle. — Non 
il  est  encore  dans  Pautre  chambre.  Qu'est-il  a  faire  ?  II  est  a 
regarder  les  nuages.  Occupation  tres-instructive,  vraiment!  II  a 
peur  qu'il  pleuve,  et  comme  il  demeure  loin,  il  voudrait  savoir  s'b 
peut  s'en  aller. — Qu'il  s'en  aille,  s'il  craint  qu'il  pleuve.  Si  vous  lo 
craignez  aussi,  pretez-lui  un  parapluie.  Je  n'en  ai  pas  a  lui  pretcr. 
Faut-il  que  je  prenne  le  votre  ?  II  ne  faut  pas  que  vous  preniez  le 
neuf.  parce  que  vous  savez  que  Jean  est  un  etourdi,  (giddy  boy;) 
et  il  pourraitle  perclre,  mais  prenez  le  vieux,  et  quil  s'en  aille  bien 
\rite,  ou  plulot  qu'ii  attende,  car  la  pluie  a  commence.  Est-il 
probable  que  ce  ne  soit  qivune  ondee  ?  (shower?)  II  me  parait  que 
ce  ne  sera  qu'une  ondee. — A  quelle  heure  faut-il  qu'il  soit  ici  ?— * 
Nefaut-il  pas  que  je  fimsse  !e  paysage  avant  de  rn'en  aller1- 


EIGHTY-THIRD    LESSON.    (1.)  435 

Qu'elle  le  disc  on  non,  je  n'en  crois  rien,  et  vous? — NJest-il  pas  a 
dejeuner? — N'etaient-elles  pas  a  coudre  ? — Si  vous  ne  venez  qu'a 
cinq  heures  au  lieude  trois,  ils  ne  pourront  pas  sortir  avec  nous,  parce 
qu'£  cette  heure-la  ils  seront  a  reciter  leurs  lecons. 

DIALOGUE. 

The  Master. — If  I  were  now  to  ask  you  such  questions  as  I  did  in 
the  beginning  of  our  lessons,  vij.  (telles  que :)  Have  you  the  liat 
which  my  brother  has  ?  am  I  hungry  ?  has  he  the  tree  of  my  brother's 
garden  1  &c.  What  would  you  answer  1 

The  Pupils. — We  are  obliged  (etre  force)  to  confess  that  we  found 
these  questions  at  first  rather  ridiculous ;  but  full  of  confidence  in 
the  method  you  follow,  we  answered  as  well  as  the  small  quantity 
of  words  and  rules  we  then  possessed  allowed  us.  We  were,  in 
fact,  not  long  in  finding  out  that  these  questions  were  calculated  to 
ground  us  in  the  rules,  and  to  exercise  us  in  conversation,  by  the 
contradictory  answers  we  were  obliged  to  make.  But  now  that  we 
can  almost  keep  up  a  conversation  in  the  beautiful  language  which 
you  teach  us,  we  should  answer:  It  is  impossible  that  we  should 
have  the  same  hat  which  your  brother  has,  for  two  persons  cannot 
have  one  and  the  same  thing.  To  the  second  question  we  should 
answer,  that  it  is  impossible  for  us  to  know  whether  you  are  hungry 
or  not.  As  to  the  last,  we  should  say :  that  there  is  more  than  one 
tree  in  a  garden ;  and  in  asking  us  whether  he  has  the  tree  of  the 
garden,  the  phrase  does  not  seem  to  us  logically  correct.  At  all 
events  we  should  be  ungrateful  (ingrat)  if  we  allowed  such  an  op- 
portunity to  escape,  without  expressing  (temoigncr)  our  liveliest  gra- 
titude to  you  for  the  trouble  you  have  taken.  In  arranging  those 
wise  combinations,  (la  combinaison,)  you  have  succeeded  in  ground- 
ing us  almost  imperceptibly  (impcrceptiblenient)  in  the  rules,  and 
exercising  us  in  the  conversation,  of  a  language  which,  taught  in 
any  other  way,  presents  to  foreigners,  and  even  to  natives,  almosl 
insurmountable  difficulties. 


EIGHTY-THIRD  LESSOR  .—Quatre-vingt-troisieme  Lccon,  83m* 
"VocAEULAiRE.     Ire  Sec. 


It  lacks  a  quarter. 

It  lacks  a  half. 

How  much  does  it  want  \ 

It  daes  not  want  much. 


j   t  II  s'en  faut  cTun  quart, 
t  II  s'en  faut  de  la  moitic. 
Combien  s'en  faut-il ! 
II  ne  s'en  faut  pas  beaucoup. 


It  want 3  but  a  trifle.  '   II  sYn  faut  de  peu  de  chose. 


436 


EIGHTY-THIRD    LESSON.    (1.) 


It  lacks  but  an  inch  of  my  being  as 

tall  as  you. 
It  lacked  a  great  deal  of  my  being  as 

ricli  as  you. 

In  a  foolish  manner,  at  random. 
il3  talks  at  random  like  a  crazy  man, 

a  fool,  or  a  drunkard. 
To  resort  to  violence. 
A  fact.  It  is  a  fact. 

Else,  or  else.  To  make  fun  of. 

To  contradict,  to  give  one  the  lie. 
Should  he  say  so,  I  would  give  him 

the  lie. 

His  actions  belie  his  words. 
To  scratch. 
To  escape. 
1  fell  from  the  top  of  the  tree  to  the 

bottom,  but  I  did  not  hurt  myself 

much. 
I  escaped  with  a  scratch. 

The  thief  has  been  taken,  but  he 
will  escape  with  a  few  months' 
imprisonment. 

By  dint  of. 

By  dint  of  labor. 

By  too  much  weeping. 

You  will  cry  your  eyes  out. 

I  obtained  of  him  that  favor  by  dint 

of  entreaty. 
That  excepted. 
That  fault  excepted,  he  is  a  good 

man. 


II  s'en  faut  d'un  pouce  qne  je  eoli 

aussi  grand  que  vous. 
II   s'en  fallait  de  beaucoup  que  je 

fusse  aussi  riche  que  vous. 
t  A  tort  et  d  travers. 
II  parle  a  tort  et  a  travers  ccmrne  un 

fou,  un  sot,  ou  un  ivrogne, 
En  venir  aux  voies  de  fait. 
Un  fait.  C'est  un  fait. 

Ou  lien.  Se  moquer  de. 

Dementir  quelqu'un. 
S'il  disait  ccla,  je  le  demenlirars. 

Ses  actions  dementcnt  ses  paroles. 

Kgratignerj  1. 

t  En  etre  quitte  pozr. 

J'ai  tombe  duhaut  de  Tarbre  en  bja, 
mais  je  ne  me  suls  pas  fait  beau- 
coup  dc  mal. 

J'en  ai  ctu  quitte  pour  .me  egra- 
tignure. 

Le  voleur  a  ete  pris,  mais  il  en  serm 
quitte  pour  quclques  mois  de  pri- 
son. 

t  A  force  de. 

t  A  force  de  travail. 

t  A  force  de  pleurer. 

t  A  force  de  pleurer,  vous  perdrez 
les  yeux. 

t  J'obtins  de  lui  cette  faveur  a  force 
de  prieres. 

t  A  cela  pres. 

t  A  ce  defaut  pres,  c'est  un  bou 
homme. 


QUATRE-VINGT-TROISI£ME  TiiihiE.     Ire  Sec. 

Avez-vous  toute  la  somme  ?  II  s'en  faut  d'un  quart  que  ju  ne 
I'aie.  D'un  quart,  avez-vous  dit  ? — II  s'en  fiiut  presquo  de  la  moitie. 
Seriez-vous  salisfait  de  la  J  de  ce  que  je  possede  ?  Ce  que  j'ai  et  la 
J  de  ce  que  vous  possedez,  me  rendraient  riche. — Vous  ne  pensez 
pas  a  ce  que  vous  dites,  y  pensez-vous  ?  Est-ce  que  je  parle 
comme  un  fou,  un  sot,  ou  un  ivrogne'?  Pour  peu  que  vous  soyez 
ivre,  vous  parlez  comrne  un  sot  ou  comme  un  fou.  Je  vous  remercie 
du  compliment.  Vous  etes  le  bienvenu,  car  vous  le  rneritez  autant 
que  qui  que  ce  soil. — Croyiez-vous  etre  aussi  grand  que  Rochamp  ri 
Otij  je  le  croyais,  mais  Tautre  jour,  quand  je  me  tirsdebout  aupres 
de  lui,  ie  vis  qne  j'etais  de  beancoup  plus  petit.  De  oombien  do 


RIGHT  Y-TillllD     LESSON.     (2.)  437 

pouces  eles-vous  plus  petit1?  II  s-en  faut  de  trois  pouces  au  nioins 
quo  je  ne  sois  aussi  grand  que  lui.  Ne  querellez  plus  avec  lui 
autrement  vous  en  viendrez  aux  voies  de  fait.  Si  vous  ne  voiilez  pas 
que  je  me  querelle  avec  lui,  il  faut  Pempecher  de  se  moquer  de  moi. 
Je  tacherai  de  le  faire. 

Do  you  not  often  contradict  Henry  when  he  relates  something  1 
[  do  only  when  he  says  incredible,  (incroyable.)  inconsistent,  (incon- 
stant.) or  false  things.  ( $  200—7.)  What  do  you  think  of  Mrs.  A—  1 
Her  company,  her  conversation,  is  agreeable  enough;  only,  she 
exaggerates  too  much ;  that  excepted,  she  is  a  pleasant  lady. — Your 
uncle  will  not  grant  what  you  want.  I  hope  he  will,  by  dint  of 
entreaty. — You  will  entreat  in  vain,  (beau  pricr  ;)  you  will  not  obtain 
it.  Never  mind,  I  will  ask  whether  I  obtain  it  or  not. 

Will  you  be  my  guest'?  (manger  avec  quclqu'un.)  I  thank  you;  a 
friend  of  mine  has  invited  me  to  dinner:  he  has  ordered  (faire  pre- 
parer)  my  favorite  dish,  (nn  mets  favor i.) — What  is  it?  It  is  a  dish 
of  milk,  (du  laitagc.) — As  for  me,  I  do  not  like  milk-meat :  there  is 
nothing  like  (il  rfy  a  ricn  tcl  qu"1)  a  good  piece  of  roast  beef  or  veal. 
— What  has  become  of  your  younger  brother?  He  has  suffered 
shipwreck  (faire  naufrage)  in  going  to  America. — You  must  give  rne 
an  account  of  that,  (raconter  quelque  chose.)  Very  willingly,  (volon- 
ticrs.)  Being  on  the  open  sea,  (en  pleine  raer,)  a  great  storm  arose. 
The  lightning  struck  the  ship  and  set  it  on  fire,  (le  mil  en  feu.)  The 
crew  (Vequipage)  jumped  into  the  sea  to  save  themselves  by  swim- 
ming. My  brother  knew  not  wrhat  to  do,  having  never  learned  to 
ewirn. 

VOCABULAIRE.       2de  SCC. 


To  vie  with  each  other. 

Those  men  are  trying  to  rival  each 
other. 

Clean. 

Clean  linen. 

The  more — as. 

The  less — as. 

I  am  the  more  discontented  with  his 
conduct,  as  he  is  under  many  obli- 
gations to  me. 

I  am  the  less  pleased  with  his  con- 


t  A  Veuviej  (Vun  de  Vautrc.) 

t  Ces  hommes  travaillent  a  1'cnvic, 

(1'un  de  1'autre.) 
Propre. 

Du  linge  propre  ou  blanc. 
D'autant  plus—*que. 
D'autant  moins — que. 
Je  suis  (Vautant  plus  mecoritent  de 

sa  conduite,  qu'il  m'a  beaucoup 

d'obligations. 
Je  suis  d'autant  moins  satisfait  de  sa 


duct,  as  I  had  more  right  to  his  |      conduite,  tfwej'avais  plus  de  droitt 

friendship.  a  son  amitie 

1  wish  that,      I  should  like  ...  I  Je  voudrais  que  . . .  ($  151—12.) 

I  wish  that  house  belonged  to  me.     >   t  Je  voudrais  quo  cetto  maison  tut 
1  ehouJd  like  to  own  that  house.         5         a  moi. 


438 


EIGHTY-THIRD     LESSON.    (2.) 


To  muse,  to  I'hiiik. 

[  thought  a  long  time  on  that  affair. 

To  be  naked. 

To  have  the  head  uncovered. 

To  have  the  feet  uncovered. 


Never,  1,  (a  before  noun./ 

J'ai  reve  long-temps  a  cette  affaire 

Etre  nu — nue. 

t  Avoir  la  tete  nue. 

t  Avoir  les  pieds  nus. 

06s.  1691.  The  adjective  nu,  like  demi,  (192,  N.  3)  is  indecliz;able  before 
(he  noun,  but  declinable  after. 

To  be  barefooted. 
To  be  bareheaded. 
To  ride  barebacked. 


Etre  /m-pieds. 

Etre  7iw-tete. 

t  Ailer  a  poil. 

t  ]\Ia?iquer  ou  penser. 


To  have  like  to,  or  to  think  to  have. 

Obs.  169?.  J\la?iquer  takes  de  before  the  infinitive,  but  penser  dees  not, 

I  had  like  to  have  lost  my  money. 

[  thought  I  had  lost  my  life. 

We  had  like  to  have  cut  our  fingers. 


{   J'ai  manque  de  perdre  mon  argent. 
(   J'ai  pense  perdre  mon  argent. 


Je  pensai  perdre  la  vie. 

Nous  avons  manque  de  nous  coupei 

les  doigts. 

II  a  manque*  de  tomber. 
II  a  manque  d'etre  tut;. 
II  a  pense  etre  tue. 
Peu  s'en  est  fallu  qu'il  n'ait  e*te  tu& 
II  a  pense  mourir. 
A  vos  trousses. 
L'ennemi  est  a  nos  trousses. 
t  Tomber. 

La  foudre  est  tombee. 
La  foudre  tomba  sur  le  vaisseau. 


fie  was  very  near  falling. 

He  was  within  a  hair's  breadth  cf 
being  killed. 

He  had  liked  to  have  died. 

At,  on,  or  upon  your  heels. 

The  enemy  is  at  our  heels. 

To  strike,  (in  speaking  of  lightning.) 

The  lightning  has  struck. 

The  lightning  struck  the  ship. 

QUATRE-VINGT-TROISI&ME    TflfblE.       2de  SeC. 

J'ai  plusieurs  bons  ecoliers  dans  cette  classe.  Est-ce  qu'ils  etudient 
k  1'envie  Tun  de  1'autre  ?  Oui,  ils  etudient  a  Fenvie.  N&vez-voua 
pas  auSsi  des  ecolieres  qui  etudient  a  Tenvie  1'une  de  1'autre  ?  Si 
fait,  j'en  ai  qui  etudient  a  1'envie  les  unes  des  autres. — Etes-vous 
satisfait  (are  you  pleased)  de  la  maniere  dont  Leopold  se  conduit? 
Non,  j'en  suis  d'autant  moins  satisfait  qu'il  avait  promis  davantage.— 
Ne  sorit-ils  pas  etonnes  qu'elle  ait  agi  de  cette  maniere?  Si  fait, 
ils  en  sont  tres-etonnes,  et  ils  sont  d'autant  plus  mecontents,  (so  much 
the  more  displeased,)  qu'elle  connaissait  parfaitement  leur  opinion.— 
Que  pensez-vous  de  mon  proces?  Je  ne  m'en  suis  pas  encoro 
occupe.  Je  voudrais  que  vous  y  revassiez  un  peu.  Je  suis  a  y 
rever.  Mais  vous  voyez  que  je  suis  nu-pieds;  il  faut  que  je  me 
chausse,  (chausser,  1,  to  dress  one's  feet,  to  put  on  what  is  to  go  on  the 
feet  as  a  part  of  dres*,)  que  je  finisse  de  m/habiiler,  et  j'y  reverai.  Jo 
vousenavertis,  je  serai  a  vos  trousses  jusqu'a  ce  que  vous  vous  en 
aocupiez  serieusement.  —  Savez-vous  que  Montcalme  a  rtanqti 


EIGHTY-THIRD    LESSON.    (3.) 


43S 


d'etre  tue  ?  Non,  je  n'en  savais  rien.  Quel  accident  lui  est-il 
arrive  ?  Comment  a-t-il  manque  d'etre  tue  ?  II  est  tombe  de  cheval. 

I  wish  that  umbrella  was  mine.  Have  you  none  1  No,  I  wish  I 
had  one.  (622.)  Can  you  not  afford  to  buy  one!  No,  I  cannot;  for 
I  was  robbed,  and  was  near  being  killed. — How  so  ?  The  robbers 
upset  our  carriage,  and  we  were  all  very  near  being  killed.  (Pen 
s'm  estfallu  que  nous  rfayons  tous  ete  tues.)  When  were  you  so  near 
being  killed'?  It  was  last  week  that  we  were  so  nearly  killed, 
Were  you  all  robbed  ?  Yes,  but  I  was  the  only  one  who  had  much 
money.  My  companions  had  only  a  few  dollars  each.  I  entreated 
very  hard,  but  it  was  in  vain.  (J'ai  eu  beau  prier,  f 'a  ete  en  vain.) 

My  brother  reflected  in  vain ;  he  found  no  means  to  save  his  life. 
He  was  struck  with  fright  when  he  saw  that  the  fire  was  gaining  en 
all  sides.  He  hesitated  no  longer,  and  jumped  into  the  sea. — Well, 
(eh  Men.)  what  has  become  of  him'?  I  do  not  know,  having  not 
heard  from  him  yet— But  who  told  you  all  that?  My  nephew,  who 
was  there,  and  who  saved  himself. — As  you  are  talking  of  your 
nephew,  d  propos  dc  — ,)  where  is  he  at  present2  He  is  in  Italy. — 
Is  it  long  since  you  heard  from  him  ?  I  have  received  a  letter  from 
him  to-day. — What  does  he  write  to  you  ?  I  will  tell  you  by  and  by. 

VOCABULAIHE.     3me  Sec. 
The  half,  the  third,  the  fourth.  I  La  moitie,  le  tiers,  le  quart. 

Obs.  170.  These  are  irregularly  formed,  but  from  le  cinqvifime,  the  fifth, 
all  others  are  regular. 


What  is  the  half  of  6  ?  It  is  3. 

What  is  the  I  of  7  ?      It  is  3  and  £. 
What  is  the  third  of  9  ?         It  is  3. 
What  is  the  I  of  10  ?     It  is  3  and  *. 


That  of  1  1  ? 
What  is  is  the 
That  of  13  ? 
That  of  14  ? 
That  of  15  ? 


It  is  3  and  f  . 

of  12?  It  is  3. 

It  is  3  and  *. 

It  is  3  and  i. 

It  is  3  and  *. 


The  t  of  12  are  8.   The  *  of  12  are  9. 

While  my  brother  was  on  the  open 
sea,  a  violent  storm  arose  unexpect- 
edly ;  the  lightning  struck  the  ship, 
which  it  set  on  fire,  and  the  whole 
crew  jumped  into  the  sea  to  save 
themselves  by  swimming. 

He  was  struck  with  fright  when  he 
saw  that  the  fire  was  gaining  on 
all  sides. 


Quelle  est  la  moitie  de  6  ?     C'est  3. 

Celle  de  7  ?  C'est  3  et  demi. 

Quelle  est  le  tiers  de  9  ?      C'est  3. 

Quel  est  le  I  de  10?     C'estSetun 
tiers. 

Celui  de  1 1  ?  C'est  3  et  deux  tiers  (f .) 

Quel  est  le  quart  de  12  ?      C'est  3. 

Celui  de  13?  C'eotSetunquart  (i.) 

Celui  de  14  ?      C:est  3  et  demi  (£.) 

Celui  de  15  ?  C'est  3  et  trois 

quarts  (*.) 

Les  f  de  12  sont  8.          Les  I  de  13  ^ 
sont  9. 

Mon  frere  6tant  en  pleine  mer,  il  sur- 
vint  une  grande  tempete ;  la  foudro 
tomba  sur  le  vaisseau,  qu'elle  mit 
en  feu,  et  tout  r equipage  ee  jeta 
dans  la  mer,  pour  se  sauver  a  la 
nage. 

II  fut  saisi  de  frayeur,  voyant  quo  !c 
feu  gagnait  de  tons  les  cotea, 


440 


EIGHTY -THIRD     LESSON.    (3.) 


He  did  not  know  what  to  do. 

He  nesitated  no  longer. 

I  have  not  heard  of  him  yet 

An  angel. 

A  masterpiece 

Masterpieces. 


I  t  II  ne  eavait  quel  part\  prendra. 
II  ne  balan^a  plus, 
t  Je  n'ai  pas  encore  cu  de  ses  nou 

vellns. 
Un  ange. 
Un  chef-d'csuvre. 
DCS  chefs-d'oeuvre. 


Obs.  171.     Of  a  word  compounded  by  means  of  a  preposition, 
•it  understood,  the  firet  ^ord  only  takes  the  mark  of  the  plural. 


Four  o'clock  flowers. 
His  or  her  physiognomy. 
His  or  her  shape. 
Tho  expression.        The  look. 
Contentment.  Respect. 

Admiration.  Grace,  charm. 

Delightfully.  Fascinating. 

Thin,  (slender.)    Uncommonly  well. 
His  or  her  look  inspires  respect  and 
admiration. 


Des  belles-de-nuit. 
Sa  physionomie. 
Sa  taille. 
L' expression. 
Le  contentement. 
L' admiration. 
A  ravir. 


l.i  aspect. 
Le  respect. 
Les  graces. 
Engageant. 


Svelte.  Superieurement  bien. 

Son  aspect  inspire  du  respect  et  de 
I'admiration. 


QUATRE-VINGT-TROISI£ME  TH£ME.    3me  Sec. 

Avez-vous  eii  des  nouvelles  de  votre  ami,  1'avocat,  depuis  qu'il 
cst  parti  pour  la  Caliiomie?  Oui,  j'en  ai  eu.  Sa  lettre  doit  etre 
interessante !  quedit-il?  11  dit  que  Tor  y  est  abondant;  que  ceux 
qui  ont  du  bonheur,  le  ramassent  en  quantitc  ;  que  ceux  qui  out  dti 
malheur,  travaillent  beacoup  et  ramassent  peu.  Du  nombre  des  quels 
est-il  1  De  ceux  des  heureux  ou  des  malheureux  ?  Des  heureux,  jo 
presume,  quoiqu'il  se  plaigne  un  peu. — Avez-vous  vu  le  chef-d'oeuvre 
de  Power,  le  sculpteur?  Son  esclave  Grecque?  Oui,  cela  meme. 
Oui,  je  Pai  vu  ce  chef-d'oeuvre.  Cette  esclave  ressemble  a  un  ange. 
Cette  statue  moderne  sera  placee  parmi  les  chefs-d'oeuvre  des  sculp* 
teurs  anciens.  —  Quand  les  belles-de-nuit  s:ouvrent-elles  ?  •  Ellea 
s'ouvrent  a  quatre  heures,  quand  le  soleil  commence  a  baisser. 
Quelle  odeur  aimez-vous  le  mieux,  celle  des  Jleurs  d'orange  ou  des 
iubereuscs  ?  Je  n'ai  pas  de  choix.  Plus  je  sens  la  fleur  d  'orange  plus 
j'en  aime  1'ocleur  •  et  plus  1'odeur  de  la  tubereuse  irappe  mon  odorat, 
(sense  of  smell,)  plus  je  voudrais  la  sentir.  Quelle  physionomie 
agreable  et  quelle  taille  admirable  cette  demoiselle  a ! 

My  nephew,  in  his  letter,  which  is  an  interesting  one.  writes  to 
me  that  he  is  going  to  marry  a  young  woman  who  brings  him  (qui 
lui  apporte\  a  hundred  thousand  crowns. — Is  she  handsome  ?  Hand* 
Borne  as  an  angel;  she  is  a  master-piece  of  nature.  Her  physiog 
nomy  is  mild  and  full  of  expression ;  her  eyes  are  the  finest  in  the 
{du)  world,  and  her  mouth  is  charming,  (et  sa  bouche  est  mignonnc.} 
She  is  neither  too  tall  nor  too  short;  her  shape  is  slender;  all  hei 


EIGHTY-FOURTH     LESSON.    Ql.) 


441 


actions  are  full  of  grace,  and  her  manners  are  engaging.  Her  look 
inspiieo  respect  and  admiration.  She  has  also  a  great  deal  of  wit 
she  speaks  several  languages,  dances  uncommonly  well,  and  sings 
delightfully.  My  nephew  finds  in  her  (lui  trouve)  but  one  defect, 
(un  defaut.)—An&  what  is  that  defect?  She  is  affected,  (avoir  des 
ptetcntions.) — There  is  nothing  perfect  in  the  world. — How  happy 
you  are  !  you  are  rich,  you  have  a  good  wife,  pretty  children,  a  fine 
house,  and  all  you  wish.  Not  all,  my  friend. — What  do  you  desire 
more  ?  Contentment ;  for  you  know  that  he  only  is  happy  who  is 
contented. 


EIGHTY-FOURTH  LESSON.— Quatre-vingi-qitatriemc  Lc$on} 
VOCABTLAIUK.    Ire  Sec. 


To  unriddle,  to  disenta?iglc. 

To  find  out. 

fo  disentangle  the  hair. 

To  unravel  difficulties. 

t  have  not  been  able  to  find  out  the 

sense  of  that  phrase. 
A  quarrel. 
To  have  differences  (a  quarrel)  with 

somebody. 
To    lake  good   care,  to  slmn,  to   be- 

ware. 

I  will  take  good  care  not  to  do  it. 
Mind    you    do    not    lend   that   man 

money. 
He  takes  good  care  not   to   answer 

the  question  which  I  asked  him. 
To  ask  a  question. 
If  you  take  it  into  your  head  to  do 

that,  I  will  punish  you. 
To  become,  to  fit  weJ.    Fitting  well. 


I  Demvler,  1. 

Demeler  les  cheveux. 

Demeler  des  difficultes. 

Je  n'ai  pas  pu  demeler  le  sens  de 

cette  phrase. 
Un  demele. 
Avoir  des  demeles  avcc  quelqu'un 

Se  garder  de. 

Je  me  garderai  bien  de  le  faire. 
Gardez-vous   bien  de    prcter  votre 

argent  a  cet  homme. 
II  se  garde  bien  de  repondre  a  la 

question  que  je  lui  ai  faite. 
t  Faire  une  question. 
Si  vous  vous  avisez  de  le  faire,  je 

vous  punirai. 
Seoir,*  3.     Seyant  or  scant. 


Obs.  172.  This  verb  is  used  only  in  the  third  person,  singular  and  plural 


Does  that  become  me  ? 

That  does  not  become  you. 

It  does  not  become  you  to  do  that. 

That  fits  you  wonderfully  well. 

Her  head-dress  did  not  become  her. 

it  does  not  become  you  to  reproach 

me  with  it ! 
To  fast.     To  be  fasting. 


Cela  me  sied-il  ? 

Cela  ne  vous  sied  pas. 

II  ne  vous  sied  pas  de  faire  cela. 

Cela  vous  sied  a  merveille. 

Sa  coiffure  lui  seyait  mal. 

II  vous  Fied  bien  de  me  le  reprocher 

(an  irorical  expression.} 
J tuner    1.  6tre  ajeun. 


M2  EIGHTY-FOURTH     LESSON.    (I.) 

To  gi73  notice  to.  ^ 

To  let  anybody  know.  >  Avertir  quelqu'un  de  quelque  chogflf 

To  warn  some  one  of  something.        ) 

Give  notice  to  that  man  of  his  bro-  I  Avertissez  cet  homme  du  retoiir  di 
ther's  return.  I      son  frere. 

QUATRE-VINGT-QUATRIEME    TH&ME.       Ire    Sec. 

Un  certain  roi  devant,  un  jour,  faire  son  entree  dans  une  villc  & 
deux  heures  de  1'apres-midi,  le  senat  envoya  quelques  deputes 
( deputies)  pour  le  complimenter.  Celui  qui  devait  porter  la  parole, 
n;etant  pas  accoutume  a  parler  en  public,  ccmmenca  ainsi:  "  Alex- 
andre  le  Grand,  le  Grand  Alexandre,"  et  s'arreta  tout  court.  Le 
roi,  qui  avait  grand'faim,  (322,)  dit:  "  Ah !  mon  ami,  Alexandre  le 
Grand  avait  dine,  et  moi,  je  suis  encore  a  jeun."  Ayant  dit  ces 
paroles,  il  continua  son  chemin  vers  Photel  de  ville,  ou  on  lui  avait 
prepare  un  diner  magnifique. 

Savez-vous  deviner  les  enigmes  (enigmas?)  Je  ne  les  devine  pas 
tres-aisernent.  cependant,  il  m'arrive  quelque  fois  de  le  faire.  Vou 
lez-vous  que  je  vous  en  disc  une  courte  ?  Voyons,  dites-la. — La 
voici.  Plus  il  y  en  a  moins  fa  pese. — Plus  il  y  en  a  moins  ca  peso. 
Qu'est-ce  que  cela  peut  etre  ?  Je  ne  peux  m'imagii.er  ce  que  c'est. 
— Vous  rendez-vous?  (do  you  give  it  up  ?)  Oui,  je  me  rends.  Et 
moi  aussi. 

The  emperor  Charles  the  Fifth  (Charles-Quint)  being  one  day  out 
a  hunting  lost  his  way  in  the  forest,  and,  having  come  to  a  house, 
entered  it  to  refresh  himself.  There  were  in  it  four  men,  who  pre- 
tended to  sleep.  One  of  them  rose,  and  approaching  the  emperor, 
told  him  he  had  dreamed  he  should  take  his  watch,  and  took 
it.  Then  another  rose  and  said  he  had  dreamed  that  his  sur- 
tout  fitted  him  wonderfully,  and  took  it.  The  third  took  his 
purse.  At  last  the  fourth  came  up,  and  said  he  hoped  he  would 
not  take  it  ill  if  he  searched  him,  and  in  doing  it  perceived  around 
the  emperor's  neck  a  small  gold  chain  to  which  a  whistle  (un 
sijflet)  was  attached,  which  he  wished  to  rob  aim  of.  But  the  em- 
peror said  :  "  My  good  friend,  before  depriving  me  (privcr  quelqu'un 
dc  quelque  chose)  of  this  trinket,  (le  bijou,)  I  must  teach  you  its  virtue/' 
Saying  this  he  whistled,  (sifflerj  1.)  His  attendants,  (scs  gens,)  who 
seeking  him,  hastened  to  the  house,  and  were  thunderstruck 
e  cVetonncmcnt)  to  behold  his  majesty  in  such  a  st^te.  But  the 
emperor,  seeing  himself  out  of  danger,  (hors  dc  danger.)  said :  "These 
men  (void  dcs  hommes  qui)  have  dreamed  all  that  they  likeJ.  I 
wish  in  my  turn  also  to  dream."  And  after  having  mused  a 
few  seconds,  he  said :  "  I  have  dreamed  that  you  all  four  deserve 


JLIGHTY-FOUU  111     LESSON.     (2.) 


443 


to  be  hanged:"  which  was  no  sconer  spoken  than  executed  before 
•he  house. 

VOCABULAIRE.     2ie  Sec. 


To  follow  from  it. 

It  follows  from  it  that  you  should  not 

do  that. 
How  is  it  that  vou  have  come  so  late  ? 

I  do  not  know  low  it  is. 

How  is  it  that  ne  had  not  his  gun  ? 

I  do  not  know  how  it  happened. 

To  clear,  to  elucidate,  to  clear  up. 

The  v/eather  is  clearing  up. 

To  refresh. 

Refresh  yourself,  and  return  to  me 

immediately. 

To  whiten,  to  bleach.    To  blacken. 
To  turn  pale,  to  grow  pale. 
To  blush,  to  redden. 
To  grow  old.        To  grow  young. 
To  make  merry.  Gay,  merry.  Mirth. 
To  make  one's  self  merry.  Cheer  up. 
He  makes  merry  at  my  expense. 
To   feign,     counterfeit,     dissemble, 

pretend.  Never  pretend. 

I  feign,  thou  feignest,  he  feigns. 
lie  knows  the  art  of  dissembling. 
To  procrastinate,  to  go  slow  about. 
I  do  not   like  to  transact   business 

with  that  man,  for  he  always  goe? 

very  slow  about  it. 
A  proof.  This  is  a  proof. 

To  stray,  to  get  Icxt,  to  lose  one's) 

self,  to  lose  one's  v&y.  ) 

Through. 
The  cannon-ball  went  through  the 

wall. 

ran  him  through  the  body. 


S'cnsuivrc,*  4. 

II  s'ensuit  que  vous  ne  devriez  pas 

faire  cela. 
t  Comment  se  fait-il  que  vous  soyez 

venu  si  tard  ? 

t  Je  ne  sais  pas  con.ment  cela  se  fait, 
t  Comment  se  faisait-ii  qu'il  n'eut 

pas  son  fusil  ? 
t  Je  ne  sais  pas  comment  cela  so 

faisau 

ficlaircir,  2. 
Le  temps  s'eclaircii. 
Rafraichir,  2. 
RafraTchissez-vous,  ct  revenez  tout 

de  suite. 

Blanchir,  2.  Noircir,  2. 

Palir,  2. 
Rougir. 

Vieillir,  2.  Rajeunir,  2. 

£gayer.       Gai.       La  gaiete. 
S'egayer,  1.  -frgayez-vous. 

II  s'egaie  a  mes  depens. 
Feindre,*  4,  feignant,  feint.          Ne 

feignez  jamais. 
Je  feins,  tu  feins,  il  feint. 
II  possede  1'art  de  feindre. 
t  Trainer  les  choses  en  longueur. 
Je  n'aime  pas  a  faire  des  affaires  avec 
cet  homrne,  parce  qu'il  traine  tou 
jours  les  choses  en  longueur. 
Une  preuvc.         C'est  une  preuve. 

S'cgarer,  1. 

A  travers  Ic,  or  Au  travers  de. 

Le  boulet  a  passe  a  travers  la  mu- 

raille. 
Je  lui  ai  passe  mon  epec  au  travcra 

du  corps. 

QUATRE-VINQT-QUATRIEME    TllihlE.      2de  Sec. 

Un  bon  vieillard.  etant  fort  malade,  fit  appeler  son  epouse,  qm 
fttait  encore  fort  jeune,  et  lui  dit:  "Ma  chere,  vous  voyez  que  ma 
derniere  heure  s'approche,  et  que  je  suis  force  de  vous  quitter.  C'est 
pourquoi;  si  vous  voulez  que  je  meure  en  paix,  il  faut  que  vous  mo 


444 


EIGHTY-FIFTH     LESSON. 


fassiez  ime  grace.  Vous  etes  encore  jeune,  et  sans  doute  vous  von* 
remarierez;  je  le  sais ;  mais  je  vous  prie  de  ne  pas  prendrc  M.  Louis 
car  j'avoue  que  j'ai  toujours  ete  tres-jaloux  de  lui,  et  que  je  le  suig 
encore.  Je  mourrais  done  desespere,  &i  vous  ne  me  promettiez  paa 
eela.77  La  femme  repcudit:  "Mon  coeur,  je  vous  supplie,  que  cela 
ne  vous  empechs  pas  de  mourir  en  paix;  car  je  vous  assure  que 
quand  meme  je  voudrais  Fepouser,  je  ne  le  pourrais  pas,  etant  deja 
promise  a  un  autre/7 

It  was  customary  with  Frederick  the  Great,  whenever  a  ne^ 
soldier  appeared  in  his  guards,  to  ask  him  three  questions ;  viz.  "Hov, 
old  are  you?  How  long  have  you  been  in  my  service?  Are  you 
satisfied  with  your  pay  and  treatment?''7  It  happened  that  a  young 
soldier,  born  in  France,  who  had  served  in  his  own  country,  desired 
to  enlist  in  the  Prussian  service.  His  figure  caused  him  to  be  im- 
mediately accepted;  but  he  was  totally  ignorant  of  the  German  dia- 
lect; and  his  captain  giving  him  notice  that  the  king  would  question 
him  in  that  tongue  the  first  time  he  should  see  him,  advised  him 
at  the  same  time  to  learn  by  heart  the  three  answers  that  he  was  to 
make  to  the  king.  Accordingly  he  learned  them  by  the  next  day; 
and  as  soon  as  he  appeared  in  the  ranks  Frederick  came  up  to  inter- 
rogate him:  but  he  happened  to  begin  with  him. by  the  second  ques- 
tion, and  asked  him,  "How  long  have  you  been  in  my  service?" 
"Twenty-one  years,"  answered  the  soldier.  The  king,  struck  with 
his  youth,  which  plainly  Indicated  that  he  had  not  borne  a  musket 
BO  long  as  that,  said  to  him,  much  astonished,  "  How  old  are  you  7" 
"One  year,  an't  please  your  majesty,  (rfen  deplaise  d  Votre  Majcs- 
<<?.")  Frederick,  more  astonished  still,  cried,  "  You  or  I  must  cer- 
tainly be  bereft  of  our  senses.77  The  soldier,  who  took  this  for  the 
third  question,  replied  firmly,  (avec  aplomb,)  "Both,  an't  please  your 
majesty.77  . 


EIGHTY-FIFTH  LESSON.— Quatre-vingt-cirujuieme  Lc^n,  85me. 
VOCABULAIRE.     Ire  Sec. 


To  double.         The  double. 

Your  share,  your  part. 

That  merchant  asks  twice  as  much 

aa  he  ought. 
You  must  bargain  with  him ;  he  will 

give  it  you  for  the  half. 
You  have  twice  your  share. 


Doubler,  1.  Le  double. 

Votre  part,  (fern..} 

t  Ce  marchand  surfait  du  double 

t  II  faut  que  vous  marchandiez  avw 

lui ;  il  vous  rabattra  la  moitie. 
Vous  avez  double  part. 


EIGHTY-FIFTH    LESSON.    (1.) 


445 


You  have  three  times  your  share. 

To  renew.  To  stun. 

Wild,  giddy.        Open,  frank,  real. 

To  shake  somebody's  hand. 

I  told  him  yes. 

I  told  him  no. 

To  squeeze,  press. 

To  lay  up,  to  put  by. 

Put  your  money  by. 

Aa  soon  as  I  have  read  my  book  I 

pat  it  by. 
I  do  not  care  much  about  going  to 

the  play  to-night. 
To  satisfy  one's  self  with  a  thing. 

I  have  been  eating  an  hour,  and  I  ^ 
cannot  satisfy  my  hunger. 

To  be  satisfied. 

To  que?ich  one's  thirst. 

I  have  been  drinking  this  half  hour, 

but  I  cannot  quench  my  thirst. 
To  have  one's  thirst  quenched. 
To  thfTst  for,  to  be  thirsty  or  dry. 
That  is  a  blood-thirsty  fellow. 


Vous  avez  triple  part. 
Renouveler,  1.         £tourdir,  2. 
fitourdi — e.  Franc — franchc. 

Serrer  la  main  a  quelqu'un. 
t  Je  lui  dis  qu'oui. 
t  Je  lui  dis  que  non. 

Serrer. 

Serrez  votre  argent. 

Aussitot  que  j'ai  lu  mon  livre,  je  If 

serre. 
Je  ne  me  soucie  pas  beaucoup  d'aLcr 

a  la  comedie  ce  soir. 
t  Se  rassasier,  1. 
f  II  y  a  une  heure  que  je  mange,  el 

je  ne  puis  me  rassasier;  or, 
t  Je  mange  depuis  une  heure,  ct  je 

ne  peux  pas  me  rassasier. 
Eire  rassasie. 
t  Se  desalterer,  I. 
II  y  a  une  demi-heure  que  jc  boia 

maisje  ne  puis  me  desalterer. 
Ktre  desalterc. 
Etre  alt  ere. 
t  C'est  un  homme  altere  de  sang. 


QUATRE-VINGT-CINQUIEME  TH£ME.     Ire  Sec. 

Un  homme  a-vait  deux  fils :  Fun  aimait  a  dormir  la  grasse  ma 
tinee,  et  Faulre  etait  tres-laborieux,  et  se  Icvait  toujours  de  tres-bonne 
heure.  Celui-ci  etant  un  jour  sorti  de  grand  matin,  trouva  une 
bourse  remplie  d'argent.  II  courut  a  son  frere,  lui  faire  part  de  sa 
bonne  fortune,  et  lui  dit :  "  Voyez-vous,  Louis,  ce  qu7on  gagne  a  se 
lever  de  bonne  heure  ?;;  "  Ma  foi,"  repondit  son  frere,  "  si  celui  a 
qui  elle  appartient  ne  s'etait  pas  leve  de  meilleure  heure  que  mci, 
il  ne  Faurait  pas  perdue." 

On  demandait  a  un  jeune  faineant,  ce  qui  le  faisait  rester  au  lit  si 
long-temps.  "Je  suis  occupe/;  dit-il,  "a  tenir  conseii  tous  lea 
matins.  Le  travail  me  conseille  de  me  lever,  la  paresse  de  rester 
couche  ;  et  ils  me  donnent  ainsi  vingt  raisons  pour  et  contre.  C'est 
a  moi  d'entendre  ce  qu7on  dit  des  deux  parts;  et  a  peine  la  cause 
est-elle  entendue  que  le  diner  est  pret.;7 

It  was  a  beautiful  turn  given  by  a  great  lady,  who,  being  (on  ?•«- 
tonte  un  lean  trait  (V — )  asked  where  her  husband  was,  when  he  lay 
concealed  (etre  cache)  for  having  been  deeply  concerned  in  a  con- 
spiracy, (pour  avoir  trempe  dans  une  conspiration,)  resolutely  (coura- 
geuscvmnt)  answered,  she  had  hid  him.  This  confession  (un  aveu) 


446 


EIGHTY-FIFTH     LESSON.    (2.) 


drew  her  before  the  king,  who  told  her,  nothing  but  her  discovering 
where  her  lord  was  concealed  could  save  her  from  the  torture, 
(qu'elh  ne  pouvait  echapper  d  la  torture  qu'en  decouvrant  la  retraite 
de  son  tpoux.)  "  And  will  that  doP  (suffiref*)  said  the  lady.  "  Yes," 
says  the  king,  "  I  will  give  you  my  word  for  it.??  "Then,"  says 
she,  "  I  have  hid  him  in  my  heart,  where  you  will  find  him." 
Which  surprising  answer  (cette  reponse  iidmirabic\  charmed  ho* 
enemies. 

VOCABUI.AIRE.  2de  8cc 

On  both  sides,  on  every  side. 

On  afl  sides. 

Allow  me,  my  lady,  to  introduce  to 

you  Mr.  G.,  an  old  friend  of  our 

family. 
I  am  delighted  to  become  acquainted 

with  you. 
I  shall  do  all  in  my  power  to  deserve 

your  good  opinion. 


Allow  me  to  introduce  to  you  Mr.  BM 
whose  brother  has  rendered  such 
eminent  services  to  your  cousin. 

flow  happy  \vc  are  to  see  you  at  our 
house ! 

it  is  the  prerogative  of  great  men  to 
conquer  envy  ;  merit  gives  it  birth, 
and  merit  destroys  it. 


De  part  et  d'autre. 

De  toutes  parts. 

Permettez,  Madame,  que  je  vous  pre- 

sente  Monsieur  de  G.,  commo  an« 

c'.vn  ami  de  notre  famille. 
Je  sais  charmee,  Monsieur,  de  fa;'ro 

votre  connaissance. 
Je  ferai  tout  ce  qui  seraenmonpou- 

voir,  pour  me  rendre  digne  de  vos 

bonnes  grace§. 
Mesdames,  permettez  que  je  vous 

presente  M.  de  B.,  dont  le  frere  a 

rendu  de  si  eminents  services  a  vo 

tre  cousin. 
Ah  !  Monsieur,  que  noussommesen- 

chantees   de   vous  recevoir    chez 

nous! 
C'est  le  privilege  des  grands  hommes 

de   vainere   1'envie ;   le  merite   la 

fait  naitre,  le  merite  la  fait  mou- 

rir. 
It  is  the  finest  country  in  Europe.  C'est  le  plus  beau  pays  defEuropo, 

Obs.  173.  The  preposition  in.  connected  with  a  relative  superlative,  ia 
rendered  in  French  by :  de. 


Candia  is  one  of  the  most  agreeable 
islands  in  the  Mediterranean. 

He  lives  in  his  retreat  like  a  real 
philosopher. 


Candie  est  uno  ties  lies  les  plus  ogrea 

bles  de  la  Mediterranee. 
II  vit  dans  sa  retraite  en  ^rai  philo 

sophe. 


Obs.  174.  Like  is  rendered  by  en  when  it  means  equal  to.     fix 


You  live  like  a  king. 
He  acts  like  a  madman. 
To  behave  like  a  blunderbuss. 
Who,  where  I  am,  knocks  as  if  he 
were  master  ? 


Vous  vivez  en  roi. 

II  agit  en  furieux. 

Se  conduire  en  6tourdi. 

Qui  frappe  en  maitre  ou  je  euio? 


EIGHTY-FIFTH    LESSON.    (2.)  447 

QUATRE-VIXGT-CINQUIEME    TH&ME.       2de    Sec. 

Quel  est  le  pays  le  plus  etendu,  dans  lequel,  exactement  le  meme 
langage  est  employe  par  la  masse  de  la  nation?  Ce  sont  les  Etats- 
Unis.  Y  parle-t-on  le  meme  langage  depuis  le  Nord  jusqu'au  sud, 
et  de  Pest  a  Fouest  1  Oui,  la  masse  de  la  langue  est  la  meme,  ce- 
pendant  il  y  a  des  mots  caracteristiques  de  presque  toutes  les  locali- 
tes.  Les  habitants  du  Nord  peuvent-ils  comprendre  sans  difficulte, 
le  langage  de  ceux  du  midi,  qui  demeurent  quelque  fois  a  2500 
milles?  Oui,  ils  le  comprennent  tout  de  suite;  mais  ils  ne  laissent 
pas  de  reconnaitre  immediatement  la  partie  des  Etats-Unis  ou  Fin- 
dividu  qui  leur  parle,  a  recu  son  education.  En  est-il  de  meme  en 
Europe?  Non,  pas  a  beaucoup  pres,  (far  from  it.)  Chaque  pro- 
vince, chaque  comte,  chaque  district  presque,  a  son  langage  parti- 
culler,  que  les  voisins  n'entendent  pas  plus  que  nos  indiens  ameri- 
cains  ne  s'entendent  les  uns  les  autres.  Nos  indiens  ne  s'entendent- 
ils  pas  tous?  Non,  chaque  tribu  a  sa  langue  exclusive,  et  ces  tribus 
different  autant  par  le  langage  que  par  le  costume,  (dress.) 

Cornelia,  the  illustrious  (illustrc)  mother  of  the  Gracchi,  (des  Grac- 
ques,)  after  the  death  of  her  husband,  who  left  her  with  twelve 
children,  applied  herself  to  (sc  vouer  d)  the  care  of  her  family,  with 
a  wisdom  (la  sagesse)  and  prudence  that  acquired  for  (acquerir*) 
her  universal  esteem,  (Vestime  univcrsclle.)  Only  three  out  of 
(d'entre)  the  twelve  lived  to  years  of  maturity,  (Vdge  mur ;)  one 
daughter,  Sempronia,  whom  she  married  to  the  second  Scipio  Afri- 
canus;  and  two  sons,  Tiberius  and  Caius,  whom  she  brought  up 
(elcver)  with  so  much  care,  that,  though  they  were  generally  ac- 
knowledged (savoir  generalemcnt)  to  have  been  born  with  the  most 
happy  dispositions,  (la  disposition.)  it  was  judged  that  they  were  still 
more  indebted  (etre  rcdcvablc)  to  education  than  nature.  The  answer 
she  gave  (faire*)  a  Campanian  lady  (une  dame  de  Campanie)  con- 
cerning them  (d  leur  sujet)  is  very  famous,  (famcux — se;)  and  includes 
in  it  (renfermer)  great  instruction  for  ladies  and  moihers. 

That  lady,  who  was  very  rich,  and  fond  of  pomp  and  show, 
(ctrc  passionne  pour  le  faste  etl'eclat,)  having  displayed  (etaler)  her 
diamonds,  (le  diamantj)  pearls,  (la  perle,)  and  richest  jewels,  earnestly 
desired  Cornelia  to  let  her  see  her  jewels  also.  Cornelia  dexterously 
(adroitement)  turned  the  conversation  to  another  subject,  to  wait  the 
return  of  her  sons,  who  were  gone  to  the  public  schools.  When 
ihey  returned,  and  entered  their  mother's  apartment,  she  said  to  the 
Campanian  lady,  pointing  to  them,  (monircr :)  "These  are  my 
«ewels,  and  the  only  ornaments  (Za  parure)  I  puze,  (priser.")  And 
such  ornaments,  which  are  the  strength  (la  force)  and  support  (It 


448 


EIGHTY-SIXTH    LESSON.    (1.) 


wulicn)  of  society,  add  a  brighter  lustre  (un  plus  grand  lustre)  to 
fair  (la  becute)  than  all  the  jewels  of  the  East,  (de  V Orient.) 


EIGHTY-SIXTH  LESSON,  86th.—  Quatre-vingt-sixieme  Ler<y,i,  8£me 

PRESENT  OR  ACTIVE  PARTICIPLE. 

Participe  present. 

For  its  use  and  formation,  sec  ($  156£).    Study  it  carefully. 
VOCABULAIRE.     Ire  Sec. 


The  house  being  built,  we  occu- 
pied it. 

Having  studied,  I  recited  well. 

Not  having  studied,  my  cousin  did 
not  recite  as  well  as  I  did. 

Not  knowing  the  name  of  the  gentle- 
man, I  could  not  write  it. 

The  note  becoming  due  on  Sunday, 
it  must  be  paid  on  Saturday. 

His  brother-in-law's  coat  fitting  him, 
he  put  it  on. 

Understanding  the  language  they 
spoke,  I  learned  their  secret. 

How  did  you  find  it  out  ? 

By  listening  to  their  conversation. 

Where  did  you  find  her  purse  ? 

In  the  bushes,  while  looking  for  birds' 
eggs. 

We  saw  the  fire  while  crossing. 

How  is  the  plural  of  nouns  and  of 
adjectives  formed  ? 

By  adding  an  s  to  the  singular. 

How  is  the  present  participle  formed  ? 

By  changing  the  ons  of  the  first  per- 
son plural  into  ant. 

How  can  they  improve  their  writing  ? 
By  copying  good  copper-plate 
models. 

How  does  it  happen  that .  . .  ? 

How  does  it  happen  that  he  is  so 
small,  his  parents  being  so  tall  ? 

Il  is  one  of  tnose  facts  we  see,  but 

for  which  we  cannot  account. 
Aa  mesmerism,  I  suppose. 


La  maison  etant  batie,  nous  1'occa 

pames. 

Ayant  etudie,  je  recitai  bien. 
jy'ayant  pas  etudie,  mon  cousin,  ne 

recita  pas  aussi  bien  que  moi. 
Ne  sachant  pas  le  nom  du  M.,  je  nu 

pus  pas  1'ecrire. 
Le  billet  edieant  dimanche,  ii  faut 

le  payer  samedi. 
L'habit  de  son  beau-frere  lui  scant, 

il  le  mit. 
Comprenant   la   langue   qu'ils  par- 

laient,  j'appris  leur  secret. 
Comment  le  decouvrites-vous? 
En  ecoutant  leur  conversation. 
Ou  trouvates-vous  sa  bourse  ? 
Dans  les  buissons,  en  cherchant  des 

O3ufs  d'oiseaux. 

Nous  vTmes  le  feu  en  traversanl. 
Comment  forme-t-on  le  pluriel  des 

noms  et  des  adjectifs  ? 
En  ajoutant  s  au  singulier. 
Comment    forme-t-on   le    participe 

present  ? 
En  changeant  le  ons  de  la  premiere 

personne  du  pluriei  en  ant. 
Comment  peuvent-ils  bonni/lcr  leur 

ecriture  ?          En  copiant  de  bcr.s 

modeles  graves. 

Comment  se  fait-ii  que  .  .  .  ?  ($  151.* 
Comment    se    fait-il    quM    soil    si 

petit,  son  pere  et  sa  mere  etant  £i 

grands  ? 
C'est   un  de    ces   faits   qu'on  voit, 

mais  qu'on  ne  peut  expliquer. 
Comme  le  mesme'nsme,  je  siippoeo 


EIGHTY-SIXTH     LKSSOK.     (1.) 


445 


The  more  you  study  the  more  you 
learn. 

Po  not  people  learn  by  studying  ? 

Yes,  the  more  one  studies  the  more 
one  learns. 

Go  up  stairs  and  get  me  a  silk  hand- 
kerchief. 

Will  you  choose  a  good  steel  pen  and 
write  a  letter  to  Julia  ? 


Plus  vousetudiez  plus  vousapprenez 

]X'apptend-on  pas  en  etudiant? 

Si  fait,  plus  on  etudie  plus  on  ap- 

prend. 
Allez    en     haut    me    chercher    un 

mouchoir  de  soie. 
Voulez-vous  choisir  une  bonne  plunio 

d'acier  pour  ecrire  a  Julie  ? 


QuATRE-viNGT-sixiiiME  TiiibiE.      Ire  Sec. 

La  venture  etant  cassee,  que  nous  faut-il  faire?  II  nous  faut 
atlendre  qu'*elle  soil  raccommodee.  Plus  nous  attendrons  plus  nous 
nous  reposerons,  et  je  vous  assure  que  j'ai  grand  besoin  de  repos, 
car  je  suis  tres-fatiguee ;  ne  1'etes-vous  pas?  Non,  je  ne  le  suis  pas 
du  tout.  Comment  se  fait-il  que  vous  ne  le  soyez  pas?  Je  ne  sais 
pas  comment  cela  se  fait;  mais,  je  ne  me  sens  pas  fatiguee,  pas  le 
moins  du  monde.  II  parait  que  plus  vous  voyagez,  moins  vous 
souffrez,  et  moi,  au  contraire,  plus  je  voyage,  plus  je  souffle.  C'est 
peut-etre,  parce  que  vous  aviez  peur  des  derniers  chevaux  que  nous 
avons  eus.  C;est  vrai,  j'en  ai  eu  peur;  ils  etaient  vigoureux  et 
fringants,  (frisky.)  et  je  craignais  qu'ilsne  prissent  lemors  aux  dents, 
(would  run  away.)  Moi,  je  les  ai  trouves beaux,  etvoilatout.  J'ai 
trouve  qu'ils  allaient  vite,  mais  je  n7ai  pas  eu  la  moindre  peur.  Quoi ! 
N'avez-vous  pas  eu  peur  quand  ils  ont  pris  le  galop?  (began  to 
gallop.)  Non;  ce  n'etait  que  le  petit  galop  (hand-gallop  or  canter.) 
— Votre  peur  vous  a  plus  fatiguee  que  le  voyage. 

The  more  I  look  at  her,  the  more  I  admire  her,  don't  you?  (623, 
N.  1.)  No,  on  the  contrary,  the  more  I  look  at  her,  the  less  I  admire 
her  face,  her  manners  and  voice;  but  whose  handsome  carriage  is 
this?  Which  one  do  you  mean?  for  I  see  several.  That  dark 
green  carriage,  with  the  driver's  seat  (le  siege  du  cocher)  in  white 
cloth. — I  see  it  now,  you  are  right,  it  is  elegant;  but  I  do  not  know 
whose  it  is. — Do  you  see  it,  Theodore?  Yes,  I  do.  Whose  is  it? 
I  do  not  know.  Do  you,  Aletta?  I  neither.  ( $  171 — 9.)  Does  your 
cousin  Eloise  ?  She  neither. — Does  any  one?  (623,  N.  1.)  No,  no- 
body here  knows  it.  It  looks  like  a  new  carnage,  and  is  very  tasty, 
(d'un  gout  cxquis.) — I  came  down  without  my  parasol;  I  must  go 
back  for  it. — No,  no,  cousin,  I  will  go  up  and  get  it  for  you,  (montei 
.e  chercher.)  Where  shall  I  find  it?  I  had  it  in  my  hand,  so  that  1 
must  have  left  it  cither  on  the  bed,  the  bureau,  the  toilet,  or  a  chair; 
vou  will  certainly  find  it  somewhere  in  the  room.  I  shall  be  back 
in  a  minute. 

I  carrot  play  that  new  polka.     You  will  learn  it  by  practising.— 


450  EIGHTY -SIXTH     LESSON.    (2.) 

Can  you  speak  while  playing  on  the  piano  ?  Yes,  I  can  speak  whilu 
playing  a  tune  I  know.  Could  you  not  speak  while  playing  on  the 
violin'?  No,  I  cannot;  but  I  have  seen  a  good  many  persons  that 
could.  Ladies  can  generally  talk  while  playing  the  piano,  can  they 
not?  Yes,  as  they  frequently  sing  while  playing;  they  do  not  find 
it  moro  llfficult  to  speak  than  to  sing. 

QuATRE-viNGT-sixiisiME  TH£ME,     2de  Sec. 

POLITENESS. 

When  the  Earl  of  Stair  was  at  the  court  of  Louis  XIV.  his  man- 
ners, address,  and  conversation,  gained  much  on  the  esieem  ana 
friendship  of  that  monarch.  One  day,  in  a  circle  of  his  courtiers, 
talking  of  the  advantage  of  good  breeding  and  easy  manners,  the 
king  offered  to  lay  a  wager  he  would  name  an  English  nobleman 
that  should  excel  in  those  particulars  any  Frenchman  of  his  court. 
The  wager  was  jocularly  accepted,  and  his  majesty  was  to  chooso 
his  own  lime  and  place  for  the  experiment. 

To  avoid  suspicion,  the  king  let  the  subject  drop  for  some  months, 
till  the  courtiers  thought  he  had  forgotten  it ;  he  then  chose  the  fol 
lowing  stratagem :  he  appointed  Lord  Stair,  and  two  of  the  most 
polished  noblemen  of  his  court,  to  take  an  airing  with  him  after  the 
breaking  up  of  the  levee ;  the  king  accordingly  came  down  the 
great  staircase  at  Versailles,  attended  by  those  three  lords,  and  corn- 
ing up  to  the  side  of  the  coach,  instead  of  going  in  first,  as  usual,  he 
pointed  to  the  French  lords  to  enter;  they,  upon  this  unusual 
ceremony,  shrunk  back,  and  submissively  declined  the  honor;  he 
then  pointed  to  Lord  Stair,  who  made  his  bow,  and  instantly  sprang 
into  the  coach :  the  king  and  the  French  lords  followed. 

When  they  were  seated,  the  king  exclaimed:  "  Well,  gentlemen, 
I  believe  you  will  acknowledge  I  have  won  my  wager.'7  "How 
so,  sire  V  "  Why,"  continued  the  king,  "  when  I  desired  yov  both 
to  go  into  the  coach,  you  declined  it:  but  this  polite  foreigner  (point- 
ing to  Lord  Stair)  no  sooner  received  the  commands  of  a  king,  though 
not  his  sovereign,  than  he  instantly  obeyed/7  The  courtiers  hung 
down  their  heads  in  confusion,  and  acknowledged  the  justness  of 
his  majesty's  claim. 

I  cannot  see  the  justness  of  that  decision.  The  French  lords,  by 
refusing  the  honor  proffered  by  the  king,  (que  le  roi  leur  of  rait,)  dis- 
played (monlrerent]  'ess  obedience,  but  more  politeness. 

MILDNESS. 

The  mildness  of  Sir  Isaac  Newton's  temper  through  the  coo  so  oi 
bis  lifo,  commanded  admiration  from  all  who  knew  him ;  but  in  nc 


EIGHTY-SIXTH     LESSON      (C)  451 

one  instance,  perhaps,  more  than  the  following.  Sir  Isaac  nad  a 
favorite  dog,  which  he  called  Diamond ;  and  being  one  day  called 
out  of  his  study  into  the  next  room,  Diamond  was  left  behind.  When 
Sir  Isaac  returned,  having  been  absent  but  a  few  minutes,  he  had 
the  mortification  to  find  that  Diamond  having  thrown  down  a  lighted 
candle  among  some  papers,  the  nearly  finished  labor  of  many  years 
was  in  flames,  and  almost  consumed  to  ashes.  This  loss,  as  Sir 
Isaac  Newton  was  then  very  far  advanced  in  years,  was  irretrieva 
bio ;  yet,  without  once  striking  the  dog,  he  only  rebuked  him  with 
this  exclamation :  "  0 !  Diamond  !  Diamond  !  thou  little  knowest  the 
mischief  thou  hast  done/' 

Zeuxis  entered  into  a  contest  of  art  with  Parrhasius.  The  former 
painted  grapes  so  truly,  that  birds  came  and  pecked  at  them.  The 
latter  delineated  a  curtain  so  exactly,  that  Zeuxis,  coming  in,  said : 
"  Take  away  the  curtain,  that  we  may  see  this  piece. '7  And  finding 
his  error,  said :  "  Parrhasius,  thou  hast  conquered  :  I  only  deceived 
birds,  thou  an  artist. ;; 

Zeuxis  painted  a  boy  carrying  grapes;  the  birds  came  again  and 
pecked.  Some  applauding,  Zeuxis  flew  to  the  picture  in  a  passion, 
and  saying,  "  My  boy  must  be  very  badly  painted/7  daubed  his  face, 
(lui  barbouilla  la  figure.) 

The  inhabitants  of  a  great  town  offered  to  Marshal  de  Turenne 
a  hundred  thousand  crowns  upon  condition  that  he  should  take 
another  road,  and  not  march  his  troops  their  way.  He  answered 
them :  "  As  your  town  is  not  on  the  road  I  intend  to  march,  I  cannot 
accept  the  money  you  offer  me." 

A  corporal  of  the  life-guard  of  Frederick  the  Great,  who  had  a 
great  deal  of  vanity,  but  at  the  same  time  was  a  brave  fellow,  wore 
a  watch-chain,  to  which  he  affixed  a  musket-bullet  instead  of  a  watch, 
which  he  was  unable  to  buy.  The  king,  being  inclined  one  day  to 
rally  him,  said :  "  Apropos,  corporal,  you  must  have  been  very  frugal 
to  buy  a  watch :  it  is  six  o'clock  by  mine ;  tell  me  what  it  is  by 
yours?'7  The  soldier,  who  guessed  the  king's  intention,  instantly 
drew  out  the  bullet  from  his  fob,  and  said:  "My  watch  neither 
marks  five  nor  six  o'clock;  but  it  tells  me  every  moment,  that  it  is 
my  duty  to  die  for  your  majesty."  "  Here,  my  friend,77  said  the  king, 
quite  affected,  "take  this  watch,  that  you  may  be  able  to  tell  the 
hour  also.77  And  he  gave  him  his  watch,  which  was  adorned  with 
brilhants. 

AN    AFFECTING    NARRATIVE    OF    THE    RECOVERY   OF    EYESIGHT. 

The  operator,  Mr.  Grant,  having  observed  the  eyes  of  his  blind 
patient,  and  convinced  his  friends  and  relations,  among  others  the 


1:52  EIGHTY-SIXTH     LESSON.    (2.) 

Rev.  Mr.  Kerswell,  that  it  was  highly  probable  he  should  bo  able  tc 
remove  the  obstacle  which  prevented  the  use  of  his  sight;  all  who 
knew  and  had  any  regard  for  the  young  man,  or  curiosity  to  be  pro- 
sent  when  one  of  full  age  and  understanding  received  a  new  sense, 
assembled  themselves  on  this  ocasion.  Mr.  Kerswell,  being  particu- 
larly interested,  desired  the  whole  company,  in  case  the  blindness 
should  be  cured,  to  let  the  patient  make  his  own  observations,  with- 
out enabling  him  to  discover  his  friends  by  their  voices.  Among 
several  others,  the  mother,  brother,  sisters,  and  a  young  lauy  for 
whom  he  had  a  passion,  were  present.  The  work  was  performed 
with  great  skill  and  dexterity.  When  the  patient  first  received  the 
dawn  of  light,  there  appeared  such  an  ecstasy  in  his  action,  that  he 
seemed  ready  to  swoon  away  in  the  surprise  of  joy  and  wonder. 
The  surgeon  stood  before  him  with  his  instruments  in  his  hands. 
The  young  man  observed  him  from  head  to  foot,  after  which  he 
surveyed  himself  as  carefully,  and  seemed  to  compare  himself,  and 
think  they  were  exactly  alike,  except  the  instruments,  which  ho 
took  for  part  of  his  hands.  When  he  had  continued  in  mis  amaze- 
ment some  time,  his  mother  could  no  longer  bear  the  agitations  of 
go  many  passions,  but  fell  upon  his  neck,  crying  out,  "  My  son,  my 
eon."  The  young  man  knew  her  voice,  and  could  speak  no  more 
fhan,  "Oh!  me,  are  you  my  mother?" — and  fainted. 

The  whole  room  were,  you  will  easily  conceive,  busily  employed 
in  recovering  him,  except  the  young  lady  who  was  attached  to  him, 
whose  agitation  was  so  great  that  she  shrieked  in  the  loudest  man- 
ner;— that  voice  seemed  to  have  had  a  sudden  effect  upon  him,  as  he 
recovered ;  and  he  showed  a  double  curiosity  in  observing  her,  as 
she  spoke  and  called  to  him,  till  at  last  he  exclaimed :  "  What  has 
been  done  to  me  ? — Whither  am  I  carried  1 — Is  all  this  about  me  ? 
— The  thing  I  have  so  often  heard  of,  is  this  the  light? — Is  this  see- 
ing ? — Were  you  always  thus  happy,  when  you  said  you  were  glad 
to  see  each  other? — Where  is  Tom  who  used  to  lead  me?  But  I 
could  /iOW,  methinks,  go  anywhere  without  him."  He  offered  to 
move,  but  seemed  afraid  of  everything  around  him.  He  was  told 
ihat  for  some  time  he  must  suffer  his  eyes  to  be  covered,  and  Tom 
to  lead  him  as  usual,  which  he  consented  to  with  great  reluctance. 

He  was  at  last  prevailed  on  to  have  his  eyes  bound,  in  which 
situation  they  kept  him  in  a  dark  room,  until  it  was  judged  proper 
to  let  the  organ  receive  its  objects  without  further  precaution.  During 
the  lime  of  this  darkness,  he  bewailed  himself  in  the  most  distress- 
ful manner,,  and  accused  all  his  friends,  complaining  that  some 
incantation  had  been  wrought  on  him,  and  some  strange  magic  used 
to  deceive  him  into  an  opinion  that  he  hid  enjoyed  what  they  Called 


EIGHTY-SIXTH     LESSON.    (2.)  453 

sight.  He  added,  that  the  impression  then  let  in  upon  his  soul, 
would  certainly  distract  him,  if  he  were  not  so  at  that  present  time. 

After  some  days,  it  was  thought  proper  to  take  the  bandage  from 
his  eyes,  and  the  young  lady  whom  he  loved  was  instructed  to  do  it, 
as  well  to  endear  herself  to  him  by  such  a  circumstance,  as  to 
moderate  his  ecstasies,  by  the  persuasion  of  a  voice  which  had  so 
much  po-^er  over  him  as  hers  ever  had. 

When  this  beloved  object  began  to  take  off  the  binding  from  hi* 
eyes,  she  spoke  to  him  as  follows  : 

"  My  dear  William,  I  am  nrw  taking  the  binding  off,  though, 
when  I  consider  what  I  am  doin<<,  I  tremble  with  the  apprehension, 
chat  though  I  have  from  my  very  childhood  loved  yot  dark  as  you 
were,  and  though  you  have  conceived  so  strong  a  love  for  me,  yet 
you  will  find  there  is  such  a  thing  as  beauty,  'vhich  may  ensnare  you 
into  a  thousand  passions  of  which  you  are  innocent,  and  take  you 
from  me  for  ever:  but  before  I  hazard  this,  tell  me  in  what  mailer 
the  love  you  always  professed  to  me  entered  into  your  heart,  for 
its  usual  admission  is  at  the  eyes.77 

The  young  man  answered — "  Dear  Lydia — If  I  am  to  lose  by  sight 
jhe  soft  emotions  which  I  have  always  felt  when  I  have  heard  your 
voice ;  if  I  am  no  more  to  distinguish  the  step  of  her  I  love  when 
she  approaches  me,  but  to  change  that  sweet  and  frequent  pleasure 
for  such  an  amazement  as  I  knew  the  little  time  I  lately  saw  ;  or,  if 
I  am  to  have  anything  besides  which  may  take  from  me  the  senso 
I  have,  of  what  appeared  most  pleasing  to  me  at  that  time,  the  sight 
of  you,  pull  out  these  eyes,  before  they  lead  me  to  be  ungrateful  to 
you,  or  undo  myself.  I  wished  for  sight  only  to  behold  you;  pull 
them  out  if  they  are  to  make  me  forget  you/5 

With  these  assurances.  Lydia  was  well  satisfied.  In  all  his  con 
versation  with  her  he  showed  but  very  faint  ideas  of  anything  which 
had  not  been  received  at  the  ears. 

INTERESTING    NARRATIVE. 

The  following  is  an  extract  from  a  letter  written  by  a  young  mar- 
ried lady  in  India,  to  her  mother  in  England,  and  must  be  consi- 
dered as  a  beautiful  specimen  of  affection,  fortitude,  and  piety. 

"  About  three  o'clock  we  left  Rose  farm,  and  at  half  past  five  saw 
the  ship  coming  towards  us  with  many  sails  set;  but  before  I  pro- 
ceed to  say  another  syllable,  I  must  caution  you  strongly,  and  par- 
ticularly, my  dear  mamma,  against  giving  way  to  your  feelings,  but 
continually  bear  in  mind  that  all  is  past,  and  I  am,  thank  God,  now 
safe  and  well,  as  is  my  dear  brother  Frank.  The  story  1  must  relate 
is  certainly  disastrous,  and  might  have  been  dreadful;  but  for  the 


454  EVGHTY-SIXTH     LESSOR.    (2.) 

mercy  of  Providence,  who  in  this  instance  appears  to  have  stretched 
forth  his  omnipotent  arm  to  rescue  us  from  a  precipitate  and  shock- 
ing end  (namely,  a  watery  grave),  almost  miraculously.  The  cir- 
cumstances were  nearly,  as  the  terrible  agitation  I  underwent  would 
permit  my  memory  its  exercise,  as  follows : — The  ship  was  going  with 
a  fine  breeze  at  the  rate  of  four  miles  an  hour  over  (or  against)  a 
strong  ebb  tide  running  nearly  at  the  same  rate  ;  and,  as  it  was  ia 
our  favour,  we  soon  came  close  to  the  ship,  and  the  officer,  keeping 
watch  on  deck,  seeing  who  it  was,  ordered  a  rope  to  be  thrown, 
which  our  boatman  caught  and  fastened  to  a  part  of  the  boat,  in 
order  that  the  men  in  the  ship  (as  is  customary)  might  pull  us  to  the 
side ;  but  Frank,  when  they  began  to  do  so,  finding  the  tide  too 
ftrong,  and  the  progress  the  ship  was  making  against  it,  too  great 
for  it  to  be  accomplished  with  facility,  called  to  his  chief  officer,  Mr 
G.,  to  request  the  pilot  to  let  fly  some  particular  sail,  which  request 
after  a  little  hesitation,  was  complied  with ;  but  Frank,  perceiving 
the  difficulty  of  our  coming  along  side  continuing  to  exist,  ordered 
Mr.  G.  again  to  tell  the  pilot  to  back  the  topsails;  Mr.  G.  returned 
for  answer,  "  The  pilot  won't,  Sir/'7  Brother  then  called  out  to  the 
pilot,  John,  to  whom  he  personally  repeated  his  request,  adding,  "  For 
God;s  sake  comply,  for  there  is  a  lady  in  the  boat,  and  you  will 
certainly  pull  us  under  water.j;  I,  through  the  Venetian,  saw  the  pilot 
shake  his  head,  and  heard  Frank  call  out  to  let  go  the  rope,  which  had 
been  thrown  from  the  ship  to  us ;  but  the  men  not  executing  imme- 
diately their  order,  what  he  had  foretold  actually  occurred;  we  were 
dragged  under  water.  Oh !  what  a  dreadful  moment ;  no  words 
can  express  the  feelings  such  a  moment  creates,  and  no  one,  excepi 
those  who  have  been  placed  in  a  similar  situation,  can  conceive  the 
agony,  the  horror  of  it.  The  boat  we  were  in  is  called  a  boleah ;  it 
is  a  large  boat  with  a  thing  like  a  house  on  the  top  of  it;  therefore, 
instead  of  the  cabin  being  below,  as  in  English  pleasure  yachts,  il 
is  on  the  deck.  When  the  accident  happened  I  was  alone  in  the 
cabin  with  all  the  baggage,  beds,  &c. ;  my  maid  was  sitting  near 
the  door,  and  brother  was  at  the  further  extremity  of  the  boat.  He, 
when  under  water,  let  go  the  rope  which  fastened  us  to  the  ship, 
and  by  this  means  saved  every  soul  but  one  from  perishing,  for  the 
boat,  instead  of  sinking,  upset  and  floated  with  the  bottom  upwards. 
Poor  Frank  with  great  difficulty  (he  cannot  swim),  from  the  in- 
cumbrance  of  a  great  coat,  got  above  water,  and  held  on  to  the 
bottom  of  the  boat.  My  proceedings  inside  were  attended  with  more 
difficulty.  I  possessed  during  the  whole  time  entire  presence  of 
mind;  which,  though  it  saved  me,  adde'l  trebly  to  the  dreadfulness 


EIGHTY-SIXTH     LESSON.     (2.)  453 

of  iny  situati  :m.  I  was  as  composed  as  I  am  at  this  moment.  1 
felt  death  to  be  ineritable,  and  resigned  myself  to  the  mercy  of 
God.  I  saw  my  poor  servant  sink  (I  thought  for  ever),  and  heard 
with  firmness,  though  with  agonized  despair,  her  last  faint  exclama 
tion  of  Oh  Ma,  Oh  Ma,  the  funeral  or  death  cry  of  the  natives.  The 
boxes,  &c.,  in  the  cabin  had  fallen  to  the  ceiling,  which  had  of 
course,  from  the  situation  of  the  boat,  become  the  undermost  part; 
they  feu  lonunaibly  without  injuring  me;  and  I  stood  on  the  same 
Uoor  with  them,  and  made  an  effort  to  open  the  door,  but,  from  the 
unusual  position,  n  resisted  my  attempt.  The  water  now  began  to 
cusn  through  the  Venetians  all  round  into  the  cabin,  and  I  felt  thai 
1  was  consuming  fast  the  air  of  which  any  further  supply  was  totally 
impossible;  therefore,  two  dreadful  deaths  presented  themselves^— 
drowning  and  suffocation.  Perfectly  sensible  and  collected,  I  made 
another  more  violent  attempt  to  open  the  door,  in  which  I  succeeded, 
and  the  prospect  before  me  made  my  fate  appear  more  certain  even 
than  before,  and  undoubtedly  more  dreadful ;  for  the  ceiling  the 
boat  made  over  my  head,  rendered  it  only  sufficiently  light  for  me 
to  behold  the  dismally  dark  green  of  the  water  all  round.  Even  in 
this  horrible  state  my  recollection  never  failed  me  for  an  instant; 
indeed,  the  effect  was  contrary,  for  my  memory  was  almost  cruelly 
retentive ;  and  actually  while  I  was  deliberating  which  course  to 
take,  or  rather  which  death  to  die,  I  thought  of  you  all,  of  my  home, 
my  country,  my  husband;  and  indeed  every  circumstance  of  my 
life  passed  in  review  before  me.  Beginning  to  gasp  a  little,  I  found 
the  horrors  of  drowning  diminish,  and  being  perfectly  aware  that 
cither  way  my  sufferings  would  soon  be  over,  I  again  commended 
myself  to  the  Almighty,  and  placing  my  h?jids  close  down  to  my 
sides  (not  a  drop  of  water  had  yet  touched  /ne),  I  resigned  myself 
to  that  element,  knowing  that  the  tide  would  soon  carry  me  from 
underneath  the  boat,  and  that  there  was  a  possibility  of  my  being 
able  to  get  at  the  top  of  it.  From  my  perfect  composure,  even 
when  immersed,  I  was  convinced  that  any  action  of  my  body  would 
counteract  the  buoyant  effect  of  the  water,  therefore  I  remained  oer- 
tectly  still ;  my  eyes  were  open,  and  I  soon  perceived,  from  the  color 
of  the  wrater  becoming  lighter,  that  I  was  rising.  When  my  head 
came  above,  I  saw  I  was  only  a  few  yards  from  the  boat,  to  which 
the  tide  carried  me ;  and,  with  an  effort  so  natural  to  a  drowning 
wretch,  endeavored  to  seize  it :  but  the  bottom  was  coppered  and 
go  perfectly  smooth  that  I  only  could  hold  by  pressing  my  extr»nded 
hands,  arms,  and  cheek,  to  its  slippery  surface  *  this  was  no  hoi/*  and 
the  noxt  wave  carried  me  off  again  with  my  head  the  second  time 


458  EIGHTY-SIXTH    LESSON.    (2.) 

under  water.  Though  nearly  exhausted,  my  presence  of  mind  never 
forsook  me ;  I  was  buoyed  up  again,  and  reached  the  boat  as  before 
and  as  I  now  saw  Frank's  head  above  water,  with  some  of  the  dan- 
dies (boatmen),  I  increased  my  efforts  to  hold  on,  for  the  desire  of 
life  was  become  stronger,  though  struggling  with  the  water.  I 
called  out,  "  Frank,  I  am  safe,  do  not  be  alarmed."  At  this  moment 
he  got  on  the  top  of  the  boat,  and,  crawling  to  the  place  where  I 
was  holding  on,  entreated  me  to  give  him  my  hands  that  he  might 
pull  me  up ;  but  I  knew  the  impossibility  of  his  doing  so,  and  felt 
that  even  to  quit  my  precarious  hold  would  be  ruin,  for  my  strength 
was  too  much  exhausted  to  permit  me  to  use  any  further  exertion 
of  body :  my  mind  was  as  vigorous  as  at  first.  Danger  levels  all 
distinction.  A  poor  dandy  rose  near  me;  and,  partly  to  support 
myself  and  save  him,  I  grasped  his  hand,  and  at  the  same  time  got 
a  finger  through  a  small  hole  which  was  bored  for  the  purpose  of 
letting  the  water  off  the  deck  of  the  boat;  these  holds  were  better, 
and  I  kept  them  for  a  considerable  time,  though  up  to  my  throat  in 
water.  In  short,  my  woman  was  saved,  and,  with  the  boatman, 
like  brother,  got  on  the  top.  The  ship  meanwhile  was  going  on, 
and,  the  tide  drifting  us  in  a  contrary  direction,  we  were  soon  three 
or  four  miles  apart.  Frank's  officers  were  much  concerned,  as  were 
his  men,  of  whom  all  the  best,  headed  by  the  Syrang,  jumped  over- 
board, and  swam  on  shore.  Shame  to  say.  the  ship  was  not  pro- 
vided with  one  boat  fit  for  use ;  that  which  they  lowered  down 
sunk  immediately,  and  the  second  officer,  who  had  got  into  her,  was 
saved  by  a  rope  thrown  to  him  from  the  ship.  The  men  who  swam 
on  shore  had  three  or  four  miles  to  run  before  they  came  to  the  spot 
where  we  were,  therefore  imagine  our  situation.  Brother,  when  1 
could  hold  no  longer,  seized  my  hands,  and  with  herculean  strength 
pulled  me  up,  and  seated  me  near  him.  We  now  began  the  mourn- 
ful task  of  numbering  our  people,  and  found  only  one  man  missing; 
all  the  remainder  (twelve  souls,  including  ourselves)  being  seated  at 
the  top  of  the  boat.  Night  was  fast  approaching,  and  the  melancholy 
cry  of  the  poor  creatures,  in  this  perilous  situation,  of  "  Oh  Ma,  Oh 
Ma,?;  uttered  at  regular  intervals,  increased  the  wretchedness  of  the 
scene.  Frank,  in  a  state  of  distraction  on  my  account,  hallooed 
repeatedly  for  assistance,  but  none  came  till  quite  n?"ght,  and 
for  more  than  three  hours  were  we  in  this  miserable  Condition, 
when  boats  came,  and  brother's  ship's  crew  appeared  on  the  shore. ; 


V.  VALUE'S 
GRAMMATICAL  SYNOPSIS. 

GRAMMAIRE  SYNOPTIQUE. 


DIRECTIONS. 

DIRECTION  1. — The  pupil  must  be  informed  that,  in  English,  to  the  ques- 
tion :  Have  you  read  the  book  ?  ho  may  answer,  Yes,  Sir,  /  have ; '  No, 
Miss,  /  have  not.  To  the  question  :  Would  they  buy  the  paper?  he  may 
answer:  Yes,  they  would,  or  No,  they  would  not.  But  the  same  liberty  ia 
not  allowed  in  French,  and  he  must  then  either  stop  after  Yes,  or  Yes,  Sir, 
Oui,or  Oui,  M.,  or  Non,  or  Non,  Mllo. ;  otherwise  he  must  give  an  answer 
containing  the  subject,  the  verb,  and  the  objective.  To  the  first  question  :  1 
have  it,  or  I  have  not  got  it  ;  to  the  second,  They  would  buy  it,  or  they  would 
not  buy  it. 


Do  you  see  tire  fans  ?       I  do. 


Voyez-vous  les  cventails  ?        Je  lea 

vois. 

Les  a-t-il  pris  ?     II  ne  les  a  pas  pris 
Les  auriez-vous  achetes  ?  Je 

1'aurais  fait. 


Has  he  taken  them  ?        He  has  not. 
Would  you  have  bought  them  ?       I 
would. 

Dm.  2. — Every  attending  word,  whether  article  or  pronoun,  showing  the 
gender  and  number  of  nouns,  must  be  repeated  before  every  noun  in  the 
eame  sentence. 


He  received  a  hat,  a  sword,  pistols,  &c. 

We  saw  the  man,  woman,  children, 

and  servants. 
This  grammar,  this  inkstand,  and 

these  pencils  are  mine. 


II  re§ut  un  chapcau,  une  epee,  des 

pistolets,  &c. 
Nous  vTmesZ'homme,  la  femme,  les 

enfants,  et  les  domcstiques. 
•  Qette  grammaire,  cet  encrier,  et  ces 

crayons  sont  a  moi. 


And  likewise  the  preposition  governing  several  nouns  or  verbs  must  be 
repeated  before  evory  one  of  them,  although  it  is  not  in  English. 


He  speaks  of  his  brother,  sister,  and 
cousins. 

fie  likes  to  write,  read,  and  play. 

Tell  the  cook  to  go  to  market,  to  buy 
eggs,  to  bring  them  here,  and  to 
make  an  omelet  with  them. 

89 


II  parle  de  son  frere,  de  sa  sosur,  et  tip 

ses  cousins. 

II  aime  d  ecrire,  d  lire,  et  d  jouer 
Dites  au  cuisinier  <f  aller  au  marche. 

oTy  acheter  des  ceufs,  de  les  ap- 

porter  ici,  etd'en  faire  une  omelette 

($  4,  20,  25.) 

(457) 


458  GRAMMATICAL     STNOPSI8. 

Dm.  3. —  On  Objective  Pronouns.  The  French  word  LLI,  translating, 
sometimes,  to  him,  to  her.  and  sometimes  merely  him  or  hrr,  is  a  source  of 
constant  difficulty.  Should  to  him  or  to  her  be  always  used,  when  implied, 
in  English,  the  difficulty  would,  in  a  great  measure,  be  removed ;  for,  il 
would  be  easy  to  remember  that,  send  an  apple  TO  HIM,  and  send  an  apph 
ro  HER,  are  both  translated  by,  envoyez-im  une  pomme.  But,  instead  of 
using  the  preposition  to,  the  Americans  usually  suppress  it,  and  say :  Send 
HIM  an  apple  ;  send  HER  an  apple.  Hence  arises  the  difficulty.  As  HIM, 
unconnected  with  the  preposition,  is  translated  by  LE,  and  HER,  by  LA,  the 
loonier  is  induced,  whenever  the  preposition  is  omitted,  (as  in  the  last  two 
Ex.)  to  use  LE  or  LA  instead  of  LUI,  and  very  naturally  too.  One  way 
to  overcome  this  difficulty,  is  to  examine  mentally  whether  the  preposition 
could  be  used  in  English ;  for  instance,  if,  instead  af  send  HIM  an  apple, 
it  would  be  correct  to  say:  send  an  apple  TO  HIM.  If  so,  then  LUI  must 
be  used. 

But  a  still  better  dependence  is  to  be  placed  on  the  French  verb  .(self. 
If  it  requires  the  preposition  a  to  govern  its  indirect  object,  lui  must  be  used, 
not  otherwise.  How  is  this  to  be  ascertained?  By  consulting  the  list  of 
verbs,  (§  156—5.) 

N.  B.  The  same  direction  applies  to  the  indirect  pronoun  LEUR,  which 
translates  both  THEM,  and  TO  THEM. 

The  other  objective  pronouns  do  not  present  the  same  difficulty,  because 
they  are  the  same,  whether  direct  or  indirect,  (me,  te,  nous,  vous,  $47.) 

DIR.  4. —  On  Objective  Nouns.  The  preposition  connected  with  an  objec- 
tive pronoun,  is  sometimes  suppressed,  or  at  least  connected  with  the  pro- 
noun so  as  to  form  a  single  word.  Ex.  Me,  is  used  for  a  moi,  to  me.  Lui, 
for  a  lui,  a  elle,  to  him,  to  her,  &c. — and  then  both  in  English  and  French 
there  is  an  inversion  or  change  in  the  position  of  the  pronoun ;  which,  in 
English,  is  placed  before  the  objective  case  ;  while,  in  French,  it  is  put  still 
nearer  the  beginning  of  the  sentence,  viz  :  before  the  verb.  Will  you  give 
u  pencil  to  me?  is  the  grammatical  construction,  which,  by  the  ^suppression 
of  the  preposition  to,  and  the  inversion  it  necessitates,  becomes  will  you 
give  me  a  pc?icil  ?  in  which  me  and  pencil  appear  in  an  inverted  order. 
Voulcz-vous  me  donner  un  crayon,  is  the  only  way  the  French  have  to  trans- 
late both  the  grammatical  and  inverted  construction  ;  because  the  sup- 
pression of  the  preposition  a,  which  necessarily  takes  place,  (there  being 
only  one  object,  51,)  forces  the  pronoun  me  to  be  placed  before  the  infinitive 
donner.  But  mark  this  carefully.  The  preposition  connected  with  the 
objective  noun  is  never  suppressed  in  French,  although  it  is  frequentl) 
done  in  English  by  means  of  an  inversion.  ($51i.)  The  phrase  :  Give  Alan, 
an  apple,  in  which  there  is  an  inversion,  is  more  used  than  give  an  appl* 
to  Mary,  although  the  latter  is  the  true  grammatical  construction.  But  ir 
French  it  is  only  the  last  order  that  is  to  be  translated,  and  ?iever  the  former 
Donncz  une  pomme  a  Marie  ;  and  never :  donnez  Marie  une  pomme. 
[  will  send  John  the  knife,  (the  knife  !  J'enverrai  le  couteau  a  Jean. 

to  John.) 
3hc  wrote  her  mother  a  letter,  (a  let-     E'.le  dcrivit  une  lettre  a  sa  mere 

*er  to  her  mother.) 


GRAMMATICAL    SYNOPSIS.  450 


Fhow  Sarah  the  piusent  I  made  you. 

1'ell  Andrew  the    French   of:   His 
horse. 


Montrez   a   Sara   le  present  quo  je 

vous  ai  fait.  ^ 

Dites  a  Andre  le  Francois  de :  Ilia 

horse. 


Whenever  you  meet  with  a  similarly  constructed  sentence,  give  it  its  full 
grammatical  extent  and  translate  it. 

DIR.  5.— When  you  do  not  know  the  infinitive  of  a  verb,  find  it  in  a  dic- 
tionary, and  any  of  its  persons  may  be  formed  by  the  rules  given  for  the  for- 
mation of  the  different  tenses. 

DIR.  6. — A  simple  sentence  consists  of  a  verb  and  its  nominative  ;  I  ad- 
mire, is  a  simple  sentence.  You  do  so  well,  is  another.  A  compound  sentence 
consists  of  two  or  more  simple  sentences,  connected  by  a  conjunction  or  a 
relative  pronoun.  I  admire  what  you  do  so  well ;  I  suppose  that  you  know  it. 
He  speaks  and  writes  eloquently.  In  English,  the  conjunction  that,  and  the 
rrlativ3  pronouns  whom,  which,  that,  are  usually  omitted,  as:  1.  I  believe 
you  know  it,  (that  omitted.)  2.  I  know  the  person  you  call,  (whom  left  out.) 
3.  I  read  the  book  he  has  written,  (which.)  4.  He  learns  the  lesson  you 
gave  him,  (that.)  In  French,  neither  the  relative  pronoun  nor  the  conjunc- 
tion is  omitted.  Hence,  translate  the  four  sentences  above  by:  1.  Je  crois 
QUE  vous  le  savez.  2.  Je  connais  la  personne  QUE  vous  appelez.  3.  Je  lis 
le  livre  qu'il  a  ecrit.  4.  II  apprend  la  lecon  QUE  vous  lui  avez  donnee. 
Avez-vous  mon  couteau  ?  Je  crois  QUE  oui ;  que  is  used  because  oui  is 
equivalent  to :  j'ai  votre  couteau  ;  which,  being  a  simple  sentence,  must  be 
connected  by  que  with  the  former,  je  crois,  to  form  the  compound  sentence  • 
Je  crois  que  fai  votre  couteau,  or  je  crois  que  oui.  (211.) 

DIR.  7. — Much,  many,  enough,  little,  &c.,  are  called  adjectives  in  English, 
wnen  connected  with  nouns.  In  French,  combien,  beaucoup,  assez,  pcu, 
trop,  autant,  plus,  moms,  guere,  un  peu,  &c.,  are  considered  as  adverbs  of 
quantity ;  and  as  such,  having  no  affinity  with  nouns,  they  require  a  con- 
necting link,  which  is  the  preposition  de.  Hence,  always  use  de  after  beau- 
coup,  combien,  &c.,  before  the  following  noun,  and  repeat  it  before  every 
one.  When  the  noun  is  left  out,  the  partitive  pronoun  en,  placed  before 
the  verb,  and  repeated  before  every  one,  takes  its  place  and  that  of  the  pre- 
'  position  de.  (§47,  N.  4.  121.2  &c.) 

DIR.  8. — In  English,  to  form  an  interrogation  with  the  verbs  to  be  and  to 
have,  the  pronoun  nominative  is  placed  after  the  verb  ;  for  instance,  I  have, 
affirmation;  by  transposition  becomes  have  I?  interrogation.  You  hare, 
have  you  ? — I  am  ;  am  I  ? — You  are ;  are  you  ?  &c. 

This  way  of  forming  the  interrogation  tallies  with  the  genera,  rule  in 
French,  which  is  to  put  the  pronoun  nominative  after  the  verb,  not  only 
with  the  two  verbs  avoir,  to  have,  and  tire,  to  be  ;  but  with  every  other 
verb.  So  :  J'ai,  becomes  ui-je  ?  Je  suis,  suis-jc  ?  Je  dois,  d?is-je  ?  Jf 
refoig,  regois-je?  &c. 

Should  the  Americans  use  the  same  mode  of  interrogation  with  olhe* 
verbs  as  they  do  with  to  have  and  to  be,  students  would  meet  with  no  diffi- 
culty; but  instead  of  transposing  the  pronouns,  they  retain  the  affirmative 
form  and  use  auxiliaries,  such  as  do,  did,  shall,  &c.  For  instance  :  1  owe, 
Joco  not  become  interrogative  !>y  saying  :  owe  I  ?  but  by  putting  ^  be  for* 


460  GRAMMATICAL     SYNOPSIS. 

I  owe,  as,  do  I  owe?  do  I  receive  f  &c.,  for  the  present  tense.  Did  I  au?«  ( 
did  I  receive?  for  the  imperfect.  Shall  and  will,  for  the  future  tense  , 
should,  would,  &c.,  for  the  potential,  &c.  So  that  when  the  student  wishej 
to  form  an  interrogation,  in  French,  he  naturally  looks  out  for  a  word  cor- 
responding to  the  auxiliary,  do,  or  did,  or  shall,  &c.,  and  feels  much  disap- 
pointed when  told  there  is  none.  It  is  for  a  long  time  with  him  a  source  of 
perplexity.  When  he  discovers  that  do  is  sometimes  translated  by  fait,  he 
is  constantly  using  fait  wherever  does  occurs ;  when  told  it  is  wrong,  he 
naturally  feels  dispirited.  It  is  hoped  that  the  full  explanation,  here  given, 
will  convince  the  learner  that  the  principal  use  of  do,  did,  &c.  is  to  form 
interrogations  and  negations  in  English,1  and  that  since  he  can,  with  the 
verbs  to  have  and  to  be,  interrogate  without  using  do,  did,  &c.,  so  he  can  in 
all  French  verbs.  If  he  is  once  convinced  of  this  idea,  a  great  cause  of  per- 
plexity will  be  removed. 

The  French,  however,  have  another  mode  of  interrogating,  which  consists 
inputting:  EST-CE  QUE  (281)  before  the  affirmative  form  of  every  person, 
which  can  be  used  interrogatively.  Ex.  J'ai,  I  have.  Est-ce  que  j'ai? 
have  I  ?  Tu  es,  thou  art.  Est-ce  que  tu  es  ?  art  thou  ?  II  lit,  he  reads. 
Est-ce  qu'il  lit  ?  does  he  read  ?  Nous  devons,  we  owe.  Est-ce  que  nous 
devons  ?  do  we  owe  ?  Vous  savez,  you  know.  Est-ce  que  vous  savez  ? 
do  you  know  ?  Us  aiment,  they  love.  Est-ce  qu'ils  aiment  ?  do  they  love  ? 
From  these  examples  it  is  evident  that  this  mode  of  interrogation  may  be 
used  in  every  case,  but  it  must  be  employed  in  the  first  person  singular  of 
some  verbs  in  which  the  transposition  of  the  pronoun  would  produce  a  diffi- 
cult or  an  unpleasant  sound.  1st.  When  that  first  person  is  a  monosyllable, 
as  :  je  sens,  je  prends,  je  tends,  jefonds.  2d.  When  the  last  syllable  sounds 
like  je,  such  as:  je  mange,  je  range,  &c.  ;  and  others,  such  as  :  j'unis,  je 
pe.rmetStj'ojfre,  &c. 

DIR.  9.— The  student  may  easily  notice  that  the  parfait  is  formed  by 
merely  adding  the  pas:  participle  to  the  well  known  expressions  fai,  jr. 
Vai,  je  nel'aipas,  je  n'ai  rien,  fen  ai,  je  Ics  ai,  &c.  As  je  1'ai  eu,  (312) 
je  ne  1'ai  pas  eu,  je  n'ai  rien  eu,  j'en  ai  eu,  je  les  ai  eus,  &c.,  and  so  of  any 
other  past  participle.  Je  1'ai  vut  je  les  ai  donnes,  j'en  ai  envoy  i,  &c. 


KULES. 

RULE  1. — Every  preposition  governs  the  infinitive  mood,  except  the  pre- 
oosition  en  (in)  which  governs  the  present  participle.  (201.) 

Note  1.  Apres,  (after)  like  every  other  preposition,  (except  e?i,}  must  be 
followed  by  the  infinitive  mood  in  French,  but  there  is  this  peculiarity 
respecting  apres,  that  it  can  be  followed  only  by  the  infinitive  of  the  auxi- 
liaries avoir  or  etre  ;  as,  Apres  avoir,  parle,  after  having  spoken.  Apres 
etre  parti,  after  having  departed.  Apres  vous  etre  leve,  after  having 

i  To  form  a  negative,  do,  did,  &c.,  are  invariably  used,  for  instance;  1  go,  does 
r.ot  become  negative  by  saying  :  /  go  not ;  but  by :  I  d o  not  go.  /  icent  is  not  /  went 
not,  but  I  did  not  go,  &c.,  &c.  As  the  French  form  their  negations  in  a  different 
way,  the  student  must  not  loo'--  for  anything  corresponding  to  do,  did,  &c.,  in  tha 
French  nog  alive;? 


GRAMMATICAL     SYNOPSIS.  461 

•iaen.  Now,  although  in  English  you  may  omit  the  auxiliary  havi?ig,  and 
•ay:  after  speaking  ;  after  departing  ;  after  rising  ;  it  cannot  be  done  in 
French.  (40l.) 

R.  2. — When  two  verbs  come  together,  the  second  is  in  the  infinitive  mood 
voulez-vous  faire,  (IS1,)  if  the  first  is  neither  to  have  (avoir)  or  to  be  (etre) 
used  as  auxiliary  of  a  past  tense.  Of  course,  if  the  two  verbs  are  connected 
by  a  preposition,  such  as :  d,  to,  de,  of,  from,  &c.,  it  governs  the  second  verb  in 
the  infinitive,  according  to  R.  1.,  and  the  preposition  must  be  repeated  before 
every  verb.  (201.) 

R.  3. — Do  you  speak  before  you  listen  ?  There  are  in  this  sentence  two 
verbs,  speak  and  listen,  connected  by  a  preposition  and  having  the  same  nomi- 
native, you.  Whenever  that  is  the  case,  the  French  dispense  with  the  second 
nominative  by  using  the  infinitive  mood  after  the  preposition,  (R.  1,)  and 
pay  :  Parlez-vous  avant  d'ecoutcr  ?  which  corresponds  to :  Do  you  speak  befort 
listening  ?  (282,  06s.  G5.) 

R.  4. — When  the  nominatives  are  different,  as:  He  writes  after  yaa  have 
spoken,  the  French  use  the  English  construction,  and  say :  11  ecrit  aprcs  que 
vous  avez  parle.  They,  of  course,  insert  the  conjunction  que,  left  out  in 
English,  but  never  omitted  in  French. 

Note. — After  that  conjunction  que  the  verb  is  frequently  in  the  subjunc- 
tive mood.  (§  151.) 

R.  5. — When  two  or  more  nouns,  two  or  more  adjectives,  or  two  or  more 
verbs  govern  a  noun  or  a  verb,  they  must  govern  it  without  any  preposition, 
or  with  the  same. 

If  they  require  different  prepositions,  see  ($  140 — 9.) 

R.  6.-~Every  French  preposition  precedes  the  word  it  governs,  is  never 
separated  from  it,  and  v,  repeated  before  every  word.  ($  117, 163,  &c.) 


ARTICLES. 

$  1. — ARTICLES  are  used  in  French  to  show  the  gender  and  number  of 
nouns.  Although  French  grammarians  admit  of  but  one  article,  viz  :  the 
definite,  le,  la,  les,  (the),  two  others  are  usually  introduced  in  English- 
French  grammars,  i.  e.  the  indefinite,  un  or  unc,  a,  an,1  and  the  partitive, 
du,  de  la,  dcs,  some. 

It  seems  to  me  that  the  name  of  Article  might  appropriately  be  given  to 
il!  the  words  which  point  out  the  gender  or  number  of  nouns.  Accordingly 
we  might  call : 

1.  Mon,  ma,  mes,  my,  ($29,)  &c.,  possessive  articles,  (because,  besides 

1  And  likewise  the  following : 

Aucun,  tout,  any,  &c.  Indefinite  Articles.          Tout  homme  J  peut  le  faire. 

Toute  femme  > 
Avez-vous  aucun  ami  (aucune  connaissauce,)  a  Paris  ? 


&G2  GRAMMATICAL    SYNOPSIS. 

showing  the  gender  and  number,  they  indicate  possession,)  instead  ol  namlig 
them  possessive  adjective  pronouns. 

2.  C'e,  cet,  cette,  ces,  this,  these,  &c.,  demonstrative  ai tides  or  adjectives, 
instead  of  demonstrative  adjective  pronouns.  ($  36.) 

3.  Quel  ?  quels  ?  quelle  ?  quelles  ?  which  ?  interrogative  articles,  instead 
of  interrogative  adjective  pronouns. 

4.  Deux,  trois,  &c.,  numeral  articles.1 

$#.  In  English,  articles  are  not,  as  in  French,  used  to  show  the  gender 
and  number,  but  to  limit  the  signification  of  the  noun.  From  this  funda- 
mental distinction  arises  the  great  difference  in  the  use  of  the  articles  rn 
the  two  languages. 

INDEFINITE  ARTICLE.— Article Iniifan. 


&  3.— Singular.  A  or  an,  (123,8i,  &c.) 

For  a,  with  a,  of  a,  to  a. 
Plural. — Some,  any,  a  few. 
For  some.  For  a  few. 

With  some.  To  a  few. 

Of,  or  from  some,  or  a  few. 


Singulier. —  Un,  masculm.          Une, 

feminin. 

Pour  un,  avec  une,  d'un,  a  uno. 
Pluriel.— DCS.         Quelques  (141.) 
Pour  des.  Pour  quelques. 

Avec  des.  A  quelques. 

De  quelques. 


And  so  it  unites  with  every  other  preposition,  both  in  the  singular  and 
oloraL 

$4. — Some,  any,  a  few,  arc  frequently  understood  or  left  out  in  English, 
but  never  in  French.    Ex. 
He  admires  some  modern  authors.         II  admire  quelques  auteurs  modernes. 


We  have  friends  in  town. 
Have  you  received  letters  ? 


Nous  avons  des  amis  en  ville. 
Avez-vous  re§u  quelques  lettres  ? 


$5. — In  the  singular  it  is  generally  used  alike  in  both  languages,  and  re- 
peated before  every  noun,  so  as  to  mark  its  gender.    As : 
He  has  a  pencil,  a  ruler,  and  a  book.  |   II  a  un  crayon,  une  regie,  et  un  livre. 

$  6.— 1st  Exception.  Cent,  (14a,)  a  .lundred  ;  mille,  a  thousand ;  long-tempt 
i.362,)  a  long  time ;  beaucoup,  (131,)  a  great  deal,  a  great  many,  in  French  have 
no  article. 

$7. — 2d  Exception.  Before  a  noun  of  weight,  measure,  and  number 
connected  with  its  price,  use  the  definite  le,  la,  les,  not  the  indefinite 
article. 


Butter  sells  at  twenty  cents  a  pound. 

This  cloth  is  worth  three  dollars  a 

yard  ;  the  metre  (652.) 
Coal  sells  at  five  dollars  a  ton. 


Le  beurre  se  vend  vingt  cents  la 

livre. 
Ce  drap  vaut  trois  dollars  la  verge  ; 

le  metre. 
Le  charbon  se  vend  cinq  dollars  le 

tonneau. 


1  This  classification  may  )e  new  in  anEnglisa-French  grammar,  although  .ong  ago 
thought  of  by  some  of  the  lest  French  grammarians.  See  Gram,  dog  Giam.  <>a 
trticlcs.  Note  234. 


GRAMMATICAL    SYNOPSIS.  463 


ARTICLE  DEFINITE. 

$8r--The.     Smgular  masculine  before  a  consonant  le. 

Singular  feminine  before  a  consonant :  la. 

Singular  mas.  or  fern,  before  a  vowel  or  h  mute :    Z'. 
Plural  mas.  or  fern,  before  vowels  or  consonants :  les. 
For  the,  Pour  le,  pour  la,  pour  1',  pcur  Ice. 

Before  the,  Avant  le,  la,  T  or  les. 

And  so  on  with  every  preposition,  except  de,  (of  or  from,)  and  d,  (to,  at, 
&c.  ;  and  every  preposition  ending  with  de  and  a.  These  two  prepositions, 
in  their  connexion  with  the  definite  article,  present  an  exception  which  ia 
easily  explained  and  understood,  but  which  much  practice  alone  c&ji  enablo 
ihe  student  to  use  with  accuracy. 

Of  the,  from  the,  sing,  fern.,  is  de  la,  (the  preposition  and  article  remain- 
ing separated  before  a  consonant.) 

Of,  from  the,  sing.  mas.  or  fern.,  before  a  vowel  or  h  mute  u  :  .le  V 
Thus  far  the  connexion  is  formed  regularly,  as  in  English,  that  is,  the  : re- 
position de  and  the  article  la  or  V  remain  separate  :  de  la,  ds  ?'  But  it  ia 
different  with  the  masculine  singular. 

Of,  froin  the,  sing,  mas.,  regularly,  would  be  de  le,  but  those  two  words 
are,  before  a  consonant,  always  contracted  into  du.1 

Of,  from  the:  plur,  mas.  or  fern.,  instead  of  de  leg,  is  contracted  into 
Jet.1 
To  the,  fern,  sing.,  remains  in  two  words :  (regular")  d  la. 

mas.  or  fem.  before  a  vowel  or  h  mute,  is  (regular}  a  V . 

mas.  sing,  instead  cf :  a  le  in  two  words,  contracts  irregularly  into  au* 

plur.  mas.  and  fem.  instead  of  dies,  contracts  irregularly  into  aux.2 

$  9. — The  contraction  du,  being  the  union  of  the  preposition  de  and  the 
article  le,  ought  never  to  be  used  when  that  article  is  not  required.  Then, 
translate  of  my  friend,  by  de  mon  ami,  and  never  by  du  man  ami,  which 
would  be  equivalent  to  de  le  mon  ami,  of  the  my  friend,  in  which  the 
article  le  is  unnecessarily  introduced.  But,  translate  of  yours,  by  du  votre, 
because,  yours  without  article  in  English,  being  le  votre,  with  the  article, 
in  French,  of  yours  becomes  de  le  vo£re,  or  its  contraction,  du  votre.  And 
BO  it  must  be,  whenever  the  article  le  is  admitted  by  the  French  construc- 
tion, although  it  may  be  rejected  from  the  English. 

Near  being  pres  de..  near  the  becomes  pres  de  le,  or,  contracted,  pres  du. 
Near  the  castle,  is  then  pres  du  chateau. 

The  very  same  process  applies  t2  des,  which  is  the  contraction  of  de 

.  Ws.en  in  trench  you  meet  v»ith :  de  le,  de  let,  jt  is  as  a  preposition  and  a  pro- 
cotm  objective :  II  parle  de  le  faire,  he  speaks  of  doing  t*  il  parle  de  les  faire,  ho 
upeaks  if  doing  them;  and  not  a  preposition  and  article.  In  the  lat'.er  case,  de  ley 
singular,  before  a  consonant,  de  les,  plural,  are  never  t.sed,  bn  their  contractions, 
iu,  des.  II  parle  du  capitaine,  des  capitaines.  He  speaks  Ofthe  captain,  of  tht 
Captains. 

2  When  you  meet  with  a  le,  d  les,  it  is  as  a  preposition  and  pronoun  objective :  II 
ponse  d  le  faire,  d  les  faire ;  he  thinks  of  doing  it,  of  doing  them;  and  not  as  a  pre- 
position and  article.  Instead  of  d  le,  use  au.  Instead  of  d  les,  use  aux.  II  par'* 
tiu  capitaine,  nr.x  capitaines;  he  speaks  to  the  captain,  to  the  captains. 


464  GRAMMATICAL     SYNOPSIS. 

les.     Then,  of  my  friends,  (plur.,)  must  not  be  des  mes  cmis,  \\hich  would 
be  equivalent  to  of  the  my  friends  ;  but  de  mes  am:s. 

$10. — Des  (contraction  of  de  les,  preposition  and  article  plural)  is  not, 
[and  mind  it  carefully]  the  plural  of  de,  which,  being  a  preposition,  is  inva 
riable  ;  but  that  of  du  (contraction  of  de  le,  preposition  and  article  masculine 
singular.) 

$  11. — Near  the,  pres  du,  pres  de  la,  pres  de  V ,  pres  des.  Let  this  be  the 
model  for  every  preposition  ending  with  dc,  when  it  is  to  be  connected  with 
he  definite  article,  but  not  otherwise.  (51 M 

$32- — To  the,  for  the  masculine,  should  be  d  le,  but  it  js  always  COB- 
iracted  into  au,  before  a  consonant.  To  the  dictionary,  au  dictionna:-re.  To 
my  dictionary,  is  not  au  mon  dictionnaire,  which  would  be  equivalent  to 
a  le  mon  diciiojinaire,  to  the  my  dictionary;  but  d  mon  dictionnaire, 
leaving  out  the  article.  To  mine,  must  be  VM  mien;  because  mine,  is  le 
mien,  &c. 

$13. — A*  far  as,  being  :  jusqu'a  ;  as  far  as  the,  will  be  jusqu'au,  jusqu'a 
la,  jusqu'd  V ,  jusqujaux.  As  far  as  the  castle,  literally  jusgu'd  le  chateau, 
which,  contracted,  becomes  JUSQU'AU  chateau.  Takejtttgtt'atc,  &c.,  as  the 
model  of  every  preposition  ending  with  a,  in  its  connexion  with  the  definite 
article,  but  not  otherwise.  (381.) 

To  the,  in  the  plural,  should  be  a  les,  but  it  is  always  contracted  into  aux. 
To  the  childre?i ;  aux  enfants.  To  my  children,  should  be  d  mes  enfants, 
and  not  aux  mes  evfants,  which  would  be  equivalent  to  d  les  mes  enfants, 
(to  the  my  children.) 

$  14. — The  function  of  the  article  being  to  show  the  gender  and  ?ntmler 
if  French  nouns,  and  not  merely  to  limit  their  signification,  (§  2,)  we  deduce 
from  it  these  general  principles. 

$15. — The  definite  article  must  be  placed  before  every  noun,  if  that  noun 
is  not  determined  by  some  other  qualifying,  determining,  or  limiting  word. 
(141,  Ex  )  See  ($  140—6)  for  an  exception. 

$  16. — Proper  names  of  countries  require  a  French  gender  or  number  ; 
hence  the  article  that  accompanies  each  one.  Le  Bresil.  La  France.  Les 
Etats-U,;:s.  Those  ending  in  e  mute  are  mostly  feminine,  all  others  mas 
culine.  ($  140 — 8.)  Exceptions  among  nouns. 

$  IT. — Proper  names  of  individuals,  pointing  out  their  own  gender,  requiie 
no  article.  Alexandre,  Jeanne,  Philadelphie. 

$  18. — When  two  or  more  adjectives  qualify  the  same  noun,  the  article 
is  not  repeated  before  each.  The  old  and  brave  soldier.  Le  vieux  et  brave 
eoldat.  Le  vieux  et  le  brave  soldat,  would  indicate  that  there  are  two  ;  one 
old  and  one  brave. 

PARTITIVE  ARTICLE. 

A. though  there  is  in  English  grammars  no  article  so  called,  yet,  as  the 
English -French  grammars  have  it,  and  as  it  has  some  or  any  for  correspond- 
ent in  English,  we  insert  it  here. 


GRAMMATICAL     SYNOPSIS.  465 

$19. — FIRST  PARTITIVE,  before  a  noun. 

Some  or  any,  before  sing.  mas.  beginning  with  a  consonant :  du. 

"      sing.  fern.         "  "  "  de  la. 

"  "         "      sing.  m.  or  f.    "  "      a  vowel:  del1. 

"         "       the  plural         "  "  "  des. 

2  20. — It  has  exactly  the  same  form  as  the  definite  article  connected  with 
die  preposition  de.     And  it  is  repeated  before  every  noun. 

$  21. — For  some  or  any.    Pour  du.  I  With  some  or  any.        Avec  de  la. 
Before  some  or  any.        Avant  de  V.  \  To  some  or  any.  A  du,  a  des. 

$  22. — When  connected  with  of  or  from,  as : 
Of,  or  from  some,  it  is  (not  de  du,  de  de  la,  de  des,  -.tit)  simply  de. 
Of  some  authors.        Dictionaries.      |  D'auteurs.  De  dictionnaires. 

$23. — Some  or  any. 

For  some.  With  some. 

Of,  from  some.        To  some. 

$21. — Near  some.  I   Pres  du  (sing.)         Pres  de  quclquc. 

(Model  for  the  prepositions  with  de.)  I  Pres  de  (plur.)         Pres  de  quelques. 

$25. —  Obs.    Some  or  any,  is  frequently  omitted  in  English,  but  never 
in  French. 

Nous  avons  de  la  soupe  et  du  boeuf 

pour  diner. 

Nous  avons  de  Tor  de  Californie. 
Avez-vous  mangd   des  chataigncs, 
des  pommes,  et  des  noix  ? 

. — SECOND  PARTITIVE  ARTICLE,  before  an  adjective, or  after  allegation. 


Quelque,  sing.  Quelques,  plur. 

Pour  quelqtie.  Avec  queltfues. 

De  quelques.  A  quelque. 


We  have  soup  and  beef  for  dinner. 

We  have  California  gold. 
Have  you  eaten  chestnuts,  apples,  and 
nuts  ? 


De  or  d' ,  (not  des,  mind  it.) 
Nous  avons  du  pain,  (1st  partitive.) 
Nous  avons  de  bon  pain,  de  bonno 
viande,  de  bons  poulets.  (2d  partit., 
II  a  du  pain,  il  n'a  pas  de  bcurre. 
II  a  d'aimables  enfants. 


Some  or  any  :  Mas,  fern.  sing.  plur. 

We  have  some  bread. 

We   have   some   good   oread,  good 

meat,  good  chickens.  (II2.) 
fie  has  bread,  he  has  no  butter.  (II1.) 
He  has   amiable  children,  (some,  a 

few.) 

$  27. — N.  B.  If  the  adjective  is  placed  after  the  noun,'  instead  of  the  2d, 
use  the  1st  partitive  article.  JIc  has  amiable  children,  may  be  translated  in 
French  by : 

II  a  d'aimables  enfants.  2d  partitive,  the  adjective  being  before. 

II  a  des  enfants  aimables.  1st  partitive,  the  noun  being  before. 

$28.— I  have  some  more,  orothers.  |  J'cn  ai  d'autre,  ou  d'autres; 
not  des  autres,  because  the  partitive  comes  immediately  before  the  adjective. 

529.— POSSESSIVE  ARTICLES,  OR  ADJECTIVES,  USUALLY 
CALLED  POSSESSIVE  PRONOUNS.  ($1.) 

$30. — The  following  words  arc  usually  classed  among  pronouns,  but  a«, 
Ul  English  as  well  as  in  French,  they  merely  refer  to  nouns;  as  they  arf 


£66  GRAMMATICAL     SYNCF31S. 

always  prefixed  to  them,  and  never  take  their  pla?c;  the  term  Possessive 
Articles,  instead  of  Possessive  Pronouns,  does  not  seem  inappropriate. 


31.                       Before  a  consonant.         Before  a  vowel      Before  all 

or  h  mute. 

Sing.  Mas. 

Sing.  Fern 

M.  $  F. 

Plur.  M.  f 

P 

My 

mon 

ma 

mon 

mes. 

Thy 

ton 

ta 

ton 

tes. 

His,  her,  its1 

son 

sa 

son 

scs. 

Our 

notre 

notre 

notre 

nos. 

Your 

votre 

votre 

votre 

vos. 

Their  2 

leur 

leur 

leur 

leurs. 

As  its  function  is  to  show'the  gender  and  number : 

£32. — RULE.  The  Possessive  Article,  in  French,  agrees  with  the  object 
possessed,  and  not  with  the  possessor,  as  it  does  in  English.  Or  else  : 

It  agrees  with  the  noun  to  which  it  is  prefixed,  not  that  it  refers  to;  ami 
.t  must  be  repeated  before  every  noun. 


The  father,  his  son,  and  daughter. 
The  mother,  her  son,  her  daughter, 
and  friends. 


Le  pere,  son  fils,  et  sa  fille. 
La  mere,  son   fils,  sa   fille,  et 


amies. 


1  What  is  ITS  infinitive?  is  translated  ty:  Quel  EN  est  L'infinitif?  because  the 
words,  ITS  infinitive,  can  be  changed  to:  THE  infinitive  OK  IT,  corresponding  to  tho 
French:  EN  est  tfinfinitif.    Hence  this  rule.  (302.) 

ITS  is  not  translated  by  son,  sa,  ses,  but  by  LE,  LA,  ou  LES  .  .  .  EN,  when  it  can  b« 
I'lmnged  to:  THE... or  IT. 

Ex  1.   I  like  Philadelphia;  ITS  markets  i  J'aime   Philadelphie;    LES   marches  EN 
nre  excellent.  I      sont  excellents. 

When  that  inversion  cannot  be  made  without  destroying  the  sense,  use:  son,  sa, 
les.  Ex.2.  The  country  has  ITS  delights,  mast  be  translated  by:  La  campagne  a 
IBS  agrtments,  because  the  sentence  does  not  admit  of  the  inversion  :  the  country  has 
'he  delights  of  it. 

2  THEIR,  is  not  translated  by  leur  or  leurs,  but  by  le,  la,  les  .  .  .en,  when  their 
ran  be  changed  to  :  the  . .  .of  them. 

These  languages  are  copious;  I  admire  '  Cos  langues  sont  copieuses ;  j 'EX  admire 

THEIR  beauties  (the  . . .  of  them).  '      LES  beautes. 

tint  use  leur  or  leurs,  when  the  inversion  is  inadmissible. 

'  Those  languages  have  THEIR  beauties.    As  we  cannot  say  :  have  the  beauties  of 
them,  wo  must  use  leurs,  and  say:  Ces  langues  ont  LZURS  beaut£s. 

The  above  rule  being  derived  from  the  English  cor.struct.ion,  will  be  founu  more 
practical  than  the  rule  of  French  Grammarians,  which  is:  When  the  possessor  is 
nominative  of  the  sentence  in  which  ITS  or  THEIR  is  used,  translate  by:  son,  sa,  sea, 
or  leur,  leurs.  If  the  possessor  is  not  the  nominative,  translate  by:  le,  la,  les  ... 
&a.  (See  examples  above.) 

Exception. — AVhen  the  thing  possessed  is  governed  by  a  preposition,  use:  son,  sa, 
WB}  leur,  leurs. 


The  Philade.phia  water-works  are  admi- 
rable; everybody  wonders  at  their  sim- 
p.icity. 


Les  machines  hydrauliques  de  Philade.- 
phie  sont  admirables;  tout  lo  monde 
s'etonnede  leur  simplicite. 


But  if  you  employ  a  verb  that  requires  no  preposition,  the  rule  must  be  used.    An 
lout  le  monde  en  admire  la  simplicite.     This  (brim  an  exception  to  both  rules. 


GRAMMATICAL     SYNOPSIS.  467 

My  cousin's  brother  and  sister.1         I  Le  frere  de  mon  cousin  et  sa  soeur. 
My  cousin's  sister  and  brother.  I  La  sceur  de  mon  cousin  et  son  frere, 

$33.— DEMONSTRATIVE  ARTICLES  OR  ADJECTIVES. 
$  34. — Always  prefixed  to  a  noun,  and  repeated  before  everyone.  (See  $  30.} 
Masculine.  Singular.  Femmine. 

This,  that.         \  C«-  bKef°re  a  consonant  or  h  aspirated.  )      Cet(e 

C   Get,  before  a  vowel  or  h  mute.  5 

These,  those.  Ces,  for  the  Plur.  Mas.  and  Fem.  before  all  letters. 

Before  a  consonant,          This  hat,  that  hat.  Ce  chapeau.     Mas.  Sing. 

Be/ore  h  aspirated.  This  hero,  that  hero.        Ce  heros. 

Before  a  vowel.  This,  that  child.  Get  enfant. 

Before  a  silent  h.  This,  that  man.  Get  homme. 

Before  all  letters.  This,  that  table.  Cette  table.     Fen  .  Sing. 

<4»,  81,  92,  101.)  This,  that  needle.  Cette  aiguille. 

These,  those  men.  Ces  hommes,    Mas.  Plur. 

These,  those  women.       Ces  femmes.    Fem.  Plur. 

But  when  much  precision  is  required,  -ci  and  -la  are  added  ;  as: 


This  hat.  (81.)  Ce  chapeau-ci. 

This  child.  Get  enfant-ci. 

This  table.  Cette  table-ci. 

These  men.  Ces  hommes-ci. 


That  hat.  Ce  chapeau-la.. 

That  child.  Get  enfant-la. 

That  table.  Cette  table-la. 

Those  women.  Ces  femmes-la. 


$35. — When  one  says :  If  you  read  this  book,  I  will  read  that  or  that  one, 
it  is  evident  that  the  word  this  connected  with  book,  takes  the  place  of  no 
other  word  previously  expressed,  and  that,  consequently,  it  is  not  a  pronoun, 
but  a  mere  attendant  on  the  noun  book,  to  limit  its  signification,  in  the  same 
manner  as  the  article  does  ;  and  that  it  may  then  be  considered  as  a  demon- 
strative article  or  adjective,  but  not  a  pronoun.  In  every  similar  case,  it 
must  be  translated  by :  ce,  or  cet,  cette,  ces. 

It  is  also  evident  that  the  word  that,  or  that  one,  takes  the  place  of  a 
noun  previously  named,  viz :  book,  and  that,  of  course,  it  is  not  an  article  or 
adjective,  bu«  a  true  pronoun  demonstrative,  ($  36,)  to  be  translated  by :  celui- 
la.  &c. 


PRONOUNS. 
$36.— DEMONSTRATIVE  ADJECTIVE  PRONOUNS. 


Masc.  Sing. 


This,  this  one.      >  ^  ,   .    . 
•r,,  >  Celin-ci. 

The  latter.  $ 

That,  that  on 
The  former. 


That,  that  one.     )  ~  .   .'" 
>  Celui-la. 


Mate,  ftur. 
These.  Ceux-ci. 

Those.  Ceux-la. 


t  My  cousin's  brother  and  sister,  is  an  ellipsis  for  my  cousin's  brother  and  my  cou- 
0m'«  sister  ;  which  in  French  would  be :  Le  frere  de  mon  cousin  et  la  sceur  de  mon  cou- 
wr>;  but  instead  of  putting  the  second  noun  in  the  possessive  case,  use  a  poseossivp 
article  ($  31),  and  say  :  Lefrfre  de  mon  cousin  et  sa  saur.  (§  140.) 


GRAMMATICAL    SYNOPSIS. 


Obs.  -Ci  and  -la  are  omitted  when  other  words  (such  as:  de,  of;  qut,  01 
e,  which ;)  are  added  to  complete  the  sense. 


Of 

I  Celle-ci. 


Henrietta's, those  Ceux  deHemieUe. 

of  H. 

Those  which  are . .  Ceux  qui  sent . .. « 
Fern.  Plur. 


These, 

Those. 

Those  rf.... 
Those  which . 


Celles-ci. 

Celles-la. 

Celles  de  . . 
Celles  qae  . 


Henry's,  that  of  H.    Celui  de  Henri. 
The  one  which  I    Celui  que  j'ai. 

have. 

Fern.  Sing. 
This,  this  one, 
The  latter. 

That  that  one.      )  Celle_Ia. 
The  former.  ) 

That  of,  the  one  of.  Celle  de  . . 
That,     the     one     Celle  qui . 

which 

§37. — Obs.  As  these  are  pronouns,  they  always  come  after  a  i  tntecedeni 
noun  to  which  they  refer  and  with  which  they  agree.  And  therefore  when 
you  have  an  English  sentence  like  :•  this  or  that  book,  the  noun,  in  French, 
must  be  put  in  the  first  part  of  the  sentence,  to  serve  as  an  antecedent  to  the 
pronoun  (flat)  which  follows.  This  book  or  that . . .  Ce  livre-ci  ou  celui-lt. 
Celui-la  referring  to :  book  ;  whilst  ce,  cet,  cette,  (this  or  that,  same  Eng- 
lish as  above),  ces  (these  or  those),  are  always  placed  before  the  neun  of  which 
they  point  out  the  gender  and  number,  witho.ut  referring  to  anything  pre- 
viously  mentioned. 

$38.— PERSONAL  PRONOUNS.    NOMINATIVES. 
Pronoms  Personnels.     Nominatifs. 


2d  CLASS.          2de  CLASSE. 
Separated  from  the  verb,  in  French.1 

Singulier. 

I.  Moi.2 

Thou.  Toi. 

He,  she.  Lui,  elle. 


1st  CLASS.          Ire  CLASSE. 
Connected  with  the  verb,  in  French .1 

Singular. 

I.  Jc,j'. 

Tncj'i.  Tu. 

He,  she,  it.  II,  elle — il,  elle. 

One,  some  or  any  one.        On.     (Always  connected  with  a  verb  of  the  3d 
pers.  sing.,  although  liie  English  pronoun  may  be  plur.    See  below,  3d  plur.; 

1  The  negative  ne,  ri1 ,  and  any  objective  pronouns,  le,  me,  &c.,  (§  47,Vinay  intervene 
between  a  nominative  of  the  1st  class  and  the  verb,  without  destroying  the  connex- 
ion; but  no  other  word.    As:  il  donne,  lime  donne,  il  ne  donne  pas,  il  ne  me  le 
donne  pas,  donne-t-il?    But  to  translate:  he  who  gives,  do  not  say:  il  qui  donno; 
tut :  lui  qui  donne,  because  who  separates  he,  and  gives :  He  !  Can  he  do  it  ?     Lui ! 
^ut-il  lefaire?    Can  he  do  it  ?  He  !     Peut-il  le  faired  Lui ! 

2  The  separated  nominative  is  frequently  left  out  in  English,  or,  if  expressed,  it  i» 
&y  as  for  me,  as  to  me,  &c.    The  French  moi,  tot,  &c.,  is  evidently  an  abridgment- 
of  as  to  me,   and,   consequently,   is   nothing  but  the  objective  case  used  as  a 
nominative : 

As  for  me,  I  do  not  know  anything  about  j  Quant  a  moi,  or  simply  moi!  jo  i 


He /  He  did  not  do  it.    (As  to  him. ) 

<)idst  thou  go  ? 

We  believe  it.    (As  to  us.) 


sais  rien.  (Je  n'en  sais  rien, 'moi  /) 
Lui  !  il  ne  1'a  pas  fait. 
Y  as-tu  6te,  toi ! 
Nous!  nous  le  croyora.    Nous  le  orosr 

ons.  nous. 


GRAMMATICAL   SYNOPSIS. 


469 


Plural.  i 

We.  Nous.1  We. 

Vou  or  ye.  Vous.1  Ye  or  you. 

They.  Us,  m.  elles,/.         I    They. 

People,  they,  we,  you.  On.  People  seek  happiness. 


Pluriel. 
Nous. 
Vous. 

Eux,  m.   Elles,/, 
On  cherche  le  bonheur. 


In  the  3d  pers.  sing,  and  plur.  may  be  classed  the  following  expressions, 
which  remain  the  same,  whether  connected  with,  or  separated  from  the 
verb. 


Singulier. 

fie,  she,  it.  Ce,  c'.2 

This,  that,  it.4        Ceci,  cela,5  c.a,  ce, 


Pluriel. 

They,  (it).4  Ce.2         Ce.3 

These,   those,      Ces  choses-ci.  Caa 
they.  choses-la. 


1  The  uniting  pronoun  ncus  or  vous,  must  be  placed  before  a  verb,  when  it  has 
two  or  more  nominatives  of  different  persons.    Ex.  at  (171  Exercise.) 

2  Instead  of:  il,  elle,  Us,  elles,  use  ce  or  c'  with  the  verb  to  be,  when  it  liaB  a  nomi- 
native predicate,  as  some  grammarians  say,  or  two  nominatives  according  to  others. 
As:   He,  is  an  Englishman;  Jest  un  Anglais:  because  Englishman,  un  Anglais,  ii 
used  as  a  predicate  noun  to  he.    But  you  must  translate  he  is  English,  by  il  est 
Anglais,  and  not :  c'est  Anglais  ;  because,  English  is  then  used  a«  HH  adjective,  and 
not  as  a  second  nominative  or  a  noun  predicate.  (2Gl,  Obs.  59.) 


She  is  an  English  girl. 
She  is  English. 
They  are  Frenchmen. 
They  are  French. 


C'est  une  Anglaise. 
Elle  est  Anglaise. 
Ce  sont  des  Francais 
Us  sont  Francais. 


3  $39— J*?s,  is  translated  by  ce  sont;   is  it?   by  sont-ce?  (20 ',  Obs.  59.)  only 
when  followed  by  a  3d  person  plural.  As :  Is  it  they  who  sell  those  beautiful  shawls  ? 
Sont-ce  eztz  qui  vendent  ces  beaux  chales?     Yes,  it  is  they.    Oui,  ce  sont  eux.    But 
it  is  we  who  have  that;  is  rendered  by  C'est  nous  qui  avons  cela;  not  ce  sont  nous, 
because,  we,  although  plural,  is  not  a  3d  person,  (473,  Obs.  110.) 

4  When  you  say:  take  this,  pointing  to  an  object  without  naming  it,  or  without 
applying  the  word  this  to  a  noun  previously  mentioned,  it  is  evident  that,  in  such  a  case, 
the  word  this  means  this  thing,  or  this  object,  or  this  article,  and  that,  of  course,  it 
is  used  as  the  name  of  the  object  itself,  or  as  a  noun,  (although  usually  called  a 
demonstrative    adjective   pronoun.)     In  every  similar  case,   translate  as  above. 
Hence,  ceci,  cela,  ceux-ci,  ceux-ld,  should  never  be  connected  with  nouns,  although 
thisj  that,  these,  those,  in  English,  can  be  used  witn  f  r  without  a  noun.     This  admi- 
nistration, is,  Cette  administration,  not  ceci  ou  cela  administration.  (243,  302.) 

5  When  former  and  latter  apply  to  actions,  translate  by  cela  and  ceci,  not  by  celui- 
*d  and  celui-ci,  which  refer  only  to  definite  nouns  or  objects.  As :  Have  you  my  book 
ani  his  ?    I  have  the  former,  but  not  the  latter,  (here  former  and  latter  apply  to  tlft 
noun  book,)  then  say :  J'ai  celui-ld,  mais  non  pas  celui-ci.    Have  you  taken  my  booK 
and  torn  his  ?    I  did  the  former,  but  not  the  latter,  (they  1  ere  apply  to  actions,)  thou 
nay :  J'ai  fait  cela,  mais  non  pas  ceci.  (N.  pa.  271.) 

6  Ce,  cannot  be  used  immediately  before  an  objective  pronoun.    It  is  not  correct 
to  translate  it  pleases  me,  by  ce  me  plait,  but   by  cela  me  plait,  ca  ou   ceci  mt 
pla\i.     Ce  is  mostly  used  with  the  verb  to  be,  seldom  with  others.     It  is  suitable, 
t'est  3onvenable;  but,  it  suits,  must  be  cela  convient,  not  ce  convient.     It  is  suffi- 
cient, &-est  suffisant,  or  else,  cela  suffit,  and  not  ce  suilit.  (473,  CG3  ) 


Thin  IB  gool,  that  is,  or  it  is  good, 
i'hat  s  it,  it  is  that.  C'est  cela. 

£'4  is  a  cnnfaction  of  cela. 


Ceei  est  bon,  cela  ou  c'eat  ben. 
That's  not  ifr,  'tis  not  so.       Ce  a'Ost  pat 
eeJu. 


470 


GRAMMATICAL    SKrtOPSCS. 


Smguher. 

This  one,  that  one.    Celui-ci,  celui-la.m 
The  latter,  the  for-  Celle-ci,  celle-la./. 
mer. 


This  one..  That  one.  Celui-ci . .  cet  autre 
The  one  who,  that,  Ceiui  qui,  celle  qui. 

which. 

Some  one,  any  one.   Quelqu'un. 
Nobody,  not  anyone.  Personne  ne. 
No  one,  not  anyone.  Nul  ne,  nulle  ne. 
None,  no  one.  Aucun  ne,  aucune 

ne. 

Each  one, every  one.  Chacun,  chacune. 
The  one  or  the  other.  L'un  ou  1'autre. 


Plume*. 

These, those,  some,  ^ 
The  latter,  the  for-  J  Ceux-ci,  ceux-U.m, 

mer,    (some  do,  f  Celles-ci,  cellee-lA../ 

some  do  not.)       J 


Some  ..  .  others. 

Ceux-ci  .  .  d'autres. 

Those  who,  that, 

Ceuxqui,celles<jui 

which. 

Some,  a  few. 

Que.ques  uns. 

j 

All. 

Tous 

The  one    and    the  L'un  et  1'autro. 
other,  both. 


/  Some  .  .  .  others. 

Les  uns  .  .  lei 

jautrga. 

The  one.,  the  other. 

L'un...!' 

autre. 

)  Both. 

Tous    deux, 

ton  tea 

( 

be  deux. 

Nt'.ther. 

Ni  1'un  ni 

1'autre, 

Neither  of  them. 

Ni  les  uns, 

ni   lets 

autres. 

Neither  this  one  nor  Ni  celui-c 

i  ni  celui- 

Neither  these  nor 

Ni  ccux-ci  n 

i  coux 

that  one. 

la. 

those. 

la. 

Nothing,  not  any. 

Rien  ne  .  . 

All. 

Tous. 

Who  (pour  les  pers.) 

Qui.  Quie 

st-cequi 

7 

(the  t  of  qui  is  nev< 

5r  cut  off.) 

What  ?    (pour    les 

^tt'est-ce  qui? 

A  few,some  ..  others 

Quelques    uns  .... 

choses.) 

d'autres. 

N.  K.  The  nominative  case  and  the  verb  are  frequently  left  out  in 
English.  As:  This,  when  followed  by  . . .,  Those,  where  preceded  by  . . .,  That, 
9n  the  side-board  ;  My  gloves,  in  my  pocket,  &c.  In  all  similar  sentences, 
ihc  pronoun  and  verb  must  be  expressed  in  French  :  Ceci,  quand  il  est . ,  . 

PERSONAL  PRONOUNS.— Pronoms  Personnels. 


Separated  from  the  verb. 

$  4O.    NOMINATIVES.       NOMINATIFS. 

$  41.   OBJECTIVES.             REGIMES, 

I  who,  I  that.              Moi  qui. 

I  whom,  I  that.            Moi  que. 

Thou  who,  thouthat.  Toi  qui. 

Thou  whom.                Toi  que. 

He  who   he  that.        Lui  qui.1 

J 

He  whom,  he  that, 

g  Lui  que.1 

Celui  qui,2 

p 

|  Celui  que.2 

She  who,  she  that.      Elle  qui,1 

o 

She  whom,  she  that 

|  Elle  que.1 

Celle  qui,2 

? 

|  Celle  que.2 

i  Lui,4lle,  apply  not  to  people  in  general,  but  to  particular  persons,  and  require 
no  complement. 


Who  is  called  the  Father  of  his  Country  ? 

He  (pointing  to  Washington) . 
Bhe  (Miss  D.)  who  writes  so  well. 


Qui  est  appele  le  Pere  de   sa  Patrio9 

Lui  (montrant  Washington) 
Elle  (Mile.  D.)  qui  ecrit  si  bien. 


The  plurals,  eux,  elles,  apply  to  particular  persons. 


They  (the  kings)  who  had  promised  so 

much. 
They  (the  Misses  R.)  who  speak  French 

so  prettily. 


Eux  (les  rois)  qui  avaient  tant  promu-. 

Elles  (les  Demoiselles  R.)  qui  parlontsi 
joliment  le  Franc/ais 


Lut,  elle,  eux,  &c.,  apply  only  to  persons,  not  to  things. 

2  Celui,  celle.  ceux,  celles,  apply  to  nouns  having  a  general  sense,.  Dr  to  nouns  thfcf 
require  complements 


GRAMMATICAL    SYNOPSIS. 


471 


NOMINATIVES.  OBJECTIVES. 

The  person  who.       La  pcrsonne  qui.  i  The  person  whom.       La      personno 


Plural. 

PlurieL 

Plural. 

Plurm 

We  who,  we  that. 
You  who,  you  tha'.. 
They  who,   they 
that. 

Nous  qui. 
Vous  qui. 
Eux  qui.1 

We  whom,  that. 
You  whom. 
They  whom,  that. 

Nous  que. 
Vous  que. 
Eux  que.1 

Those  who,  that. 
They  who,  that. 
Those  who,  that. 
John  and   Louis 

Ceux  qui.2 
Elles  qui.1 
Celles  qui.2 
Jean  c*.   Louis 

Those  whom,  that. 
They  whom,  that. 
Those  whom,  that. 
J.  and  L.,  whom. 

Ceux  que.2 
Elles  que.1 
Celles  que.a 
Jean  et  Louis 

who. 

qui. 

que. 

*.— COMPOUND  PERSONAL  PRONOUNS. 


Myself, 

Thyself, 

Himse.f, 

Herself, 

Itself, 


NOMINATIVES    AND    OBJECTIVES. 

Oneself, 

Ourselves, 

Yourself, 

Yourselves, 

Themselves, 


moi-meme, 

toi-memc. 
lui-mCmc. 
elle-mcme. 
lui,elle,soi-meme. 


soi-meme. 

nous-memes. 

vous-mSme. 

vous-memes. 

eux-memes. 

elles-memes. 


Among  compound  pronouns  may  be  included : 
We,  (nom.,)  among  us,  (ohj.)  i   Nous  autres. 

You,  (nom.,)  among  you,  (obj.)  I  Vous  autres. 

When  objectives,  they  unite  with  every  preposition. 

The  French  use  them  frequently  in  familiar  discourse ;  but  only  in  the 
1st  and  2d  per.  plur. 


We  citizens  like  country  air. 
Among  you  merchants  are  there  no 


rogues  ? 


Nous  autres  citoyens  nous  aimone 

1'airde  la  campagne. 
Parmi   vous  autres   marchands  n'y 

a-t-il  pas  de  fripons  ? 


*  42.— OBJECTIVE  PRONOUNS. 


$  43. — The  Frencn  have  two  kinds.  1st.  Those  which  are  immediately 
governed  by  the  verb,  and  called  DIRECT  OBJECTIVES,  or  REGIMES 
DIRECTS.  They  correspond  to  the  objective  case  of  an  English  verb. 

$  44. — 2d.  Those  which  are  governed  by  a  preposition,  and  called  INDI- 
RECT OBJECTIVES,  or  REGIMES  INDIRECTS.  These  correspond  to  the  objec- 
tive case  of  an  English  preposition.  The  latter  are  subdivided  into  two 
classes. 

He   (any  one)    who  practises  virtue  is  \  Celui  qui  pratique  la  vertu  est  heurenx. 
happy. 

Celles  qui  etudient  le  Frangais  . . . 


They  (a.l  ladies)  who  study  French 
I  have  the  book  of  him  who  is  firk. 

1  Soo  note  1,  preceding  page. 

2  Seo  note  a,  preceding  page 


J'ai  le  livre  de  celui  qui  est  mnladt. 


472  GRAMMATICAL     SYNOPSIS, ' 

$  45. — The  1st  class  includes  those  which,  in  a  single  word,  express  both 
the  preposition  and  the  pronoun.  Ex. :  To  him,  is  expressed  in  French  by 
ihe  single  word  lui,  (Dir.  2) ;  to  her,  by  the  same  word,  lui ;  to  them,  by 
\he  single  word  Icur  ;  of  it,  of  them,  by  ($47)  en,  &c. 

$  46.— The  2d  class  includes  those  that  are  attended  by  a  preposition 
expressed.  Ex. :  For  her,  pour  elle  ;  with  them,  avec  eux,  avec  dies  ;  with 
out  me,  sans  moi ;  to  me,  a  moi  ;  of  me,  de  moi. 

*47 .—OBJECTIVE  PRONOUNS.— Protum*   Objectifs  ou  Regimes, 

MONOSYLLABLES. 

BEFORE  THE  VERB,  except  with  the  Imperative  commanding. 
Direct  objectives.     Regimes  directs.     Indirect  objectives.     Regimes  inUirects 

1.  Me,  me,  m'.  To  me,  me,  in' 

2.  Thee,  te,  t'.  To  thee,  te,  t'. 
•j.tfz.llim,                    le,  P.                       To  him,  /.  of,  from  him,             m.  lui,     en. 

/.Her,  la,  1'.  To  her,  of,  fromher(porsoiig),     /.  lui,     en. 

n.  It,  le,  ln,l'.  Toit,there.ofit,fromit(thin$rs),  n.  y.        en. 

1.  Us,  nous.  To  us,  nous. 

2.  You,  vous.  To  you,  vous. 

3.  m.  Them,  les.  To  them,    of  them,  m.  leur,  en. 
/.Them,                 les.                          To  them,    from  them,                /.    leur,  en. 
n.  Them,                 les.                          To  them,    of  them  (things),      n.   y,       en. 

§47£.  Pronouns  having,  by  themselves,  a  definite  signification,  ought 
never  to  represent  a  noun  taken  in  an  indefinite  sense,  that  is,  a  noun  used 
without  article  or  without  some  limiting  word. 

When,  then,  the  question,  Parlez-vous  Fran$ais?  is  answered  by,je  h 
parle,  that  le  relates  to  a  word  used  without  any  limiting  article  ;  hence,  the 
answer  seems  incorrect.  It  is  correct,  however;  but  the  question  ought  to 
be,  Parlez-vous  le  Fransais  ?  using  the  article  after  parlez-vous,  in  the  same 
manner  as  it  is  used  after  etudiez-vous,  apprenez-vous,  lisez-vous,  &c. 
Custom,  nevertheless,  rejects  le  after  the  verb  parler.  (26l.) 

$48. — AFTER   THE    VERB.  APRES   LE    VERBE. 

In  the  Imperative  commanding.  A  Tlmperatif  commandant. 

Direct  objectives.     Regimes  directs.     Indirect  objectives.     Regimes  indirect** 

1.  A.Te,  moi.  To  me,  •     moi. 
J.        Thes,                  toi.                                To  thee,  toi. 

3.  *n.  Him,  le.  To  him,  of  him,  lui,  en 

/.  Her,  la,  To  her,  of  her,  lui,  en. 

n.  It,  le,  la.  To  it,  of  it,  y,  en. 

t.        Us,  nous.  To  us,  nous. 

2.  You,  vous.  To  you,  vous. 

3.  m.  Them,  les.  To  them,    of  them,  leur,        en. 
/.    Them,                les.  To  them,    of  then:,,  leur,        en. 
n.   Them,                les.  To  them,    of  them,  y,  en. 

$49.  Any  objective  pronoun  followed  by  a  verb  in  the  infinitive  mocxi. 
S2ir. :  I  wish  you  to  come,  must  be  turned  to  /  wish  that  you  would  comt, 
requiring,  in  French,  the  subjunctive  nood :  Je  desire  que  vous  vcniez. 


GRAMMATICAL     SYNOPSIS  473 

$  50.  When  the  English  objective  pronoun  it  or  them,  alone,  or  governed 
Dy  in,  with,  of,  or  any  other  English  preposition,  is  to  be  translated  by  a 
French  verb  requiring  the  preposition  o,  use?/.  II  y  repond ;  he  answers 
it  :  il  y  reussit ;  he  succeeds  in  it :  ii  y  pense  ;  he  thinks  of  it.  The 
verbs  ripondre,  reussir,  penser,  requiring  o,  the  English  pronoun  it,  by 
•taelf,  or  with  any  English  preposition,  must  be  translated  by  y.  ($48.) 

And  by  en,  if  the  French  verb  requires  the  preposition  de.  II  en  cet 
faclie  ;  he  is  sorry  for  it:  on  Yen  blame;  he  is  blamed  for  it;  on  «* 
dome  ;  they  doubt  it.  ($  48.) 

We  have  seen  (I1,  &c.)  nouns  connected  with  the  definite  article;  to 
replace  them,  when  used  in  the  objective  case,  they  require  a  definite  pro- 
noun ;  in  English  it  or  them;  in  French,  le,  la,  les.  I  have  it;  je  1'ai:  I 
have  them  ;  je  les  ai.  ($48.) 

We  have  seen  (121, 2,  $4,  &c.)  nouns  connected  with  the  indefinite  or  par- 
titive article  ;  to  replace  them,  when  used  in  the  objective  case,  they  require 
an  indefinite  or  partitive  pronoun  ;  in  English,  some,  or  any  of  it,  of  them, 
in  French,  en,  meaning,  of  the  thing  or  things,  person  or  persons  spoken  of. 
As,  in  French,  the  article  is  never  left  out,  neither  is  the  pronoun  en  ever 
omitted. 

PLACE  OF  THE  OBJECTIVES.    PRONOUNS. 

The  direct  and  indirect  of  a  single  word,  or  monosyllable. 

$  51. — RULE  1st.  When  the  verb  has  but  one  regime  direct,  or  indirect 
($47,)  or  else  one  double  regime,  ($57,)  that  -cgime  goes  before  the  verb 
except  in  one  mood,  ($$  54,  64.)  • 

When  it  has  several  objectives,  ($56.) 


I  give.  I  give  you. 

I  see  my  friend.  I  see  him. 
I  have  given  an  apple  away. 
I  have  given  an  apple  to  her. 
He  is  devoted  to  her. 


Je  donne.  Jc  vous  donna. 

Je  vois  mon  ami.       Je  le  vois. 
J'ai  donne  une  pom  me., 
Je  lui  ai  donne'  une  pomme. 
II  lui  est  devoud. 


$  51i. — The  objective  noun  is  always  placed  after  the  verb,  as  in  Eng- 
lish ;  but  not  the  pronoin.  And  the  preposition  which  governs  the  noun  ii 
never  understood  in  French,  although  it  is  frequently  left  out  in  English. 
As  :  Give  John  an  apple  ;  for,  Give  an  apple  to  John.  Donnezune  pomme 
«  Jean.  Follow  this  last  construction.  (Dir.  4.) 

$  52. — When  the  verb  to  have,  or  to  le,  is  used  as  auxiliary,  the  objec- 
tive pronoun  is  always  placed  before  it;  never  after:  that  is,  not  imme- 
diately before  the  past  participle.  Ex. :  translate  /  have  seen  you,  by:  Je 
vous  ai  vu  (1  you  have  seen},  placing  vous  before  ai,  and  not  by  fai  vous  vu, 
vous  being  wrongly  placed  after  ai,  and  immediately  before  the  past  part, 
vu.  I  have  had  it ;  Je  Tai  eu  ;  not  J'ai  I 'en. 


He  spoke  to  them,  (he  to  them  spoke.) 
He  has  spoken  to  them,  (lie  to  them 


II  leur  parla. 

II  leur  a  parle,  (not  il  a  leur  purle".) 


has.) 

$  53. — HINT.  He  spoke  to  them  (English  imperfect  tense),  may  be  trans 


GRAMMATICAL     SYNOPSIS 


loted  by  il  Itui  parla,  the  Fi erica  preterit,  ($  153,)  or  else  by  il  leuraparle 
French  parfait,  (§  145,)  corresponding  to  the  perfect  tense  of  the  English  con 
jugation.  The  latter  is  the  tense  generally  used  in  colloquial  intercourse 
by  the  French. 

Vous  le  preta-t-il  ?  on  rnieux, 

Vous  Z'a-t-il  prete  ? 

II  me  le  preta;  ou  il  me  l'a  pr3to. 


Did  he  lend,  it  to  you  ?   (you  it  did 

he  ?  &c.) 

He  lent  it  to' me,  (he  to  me,  &c.) 
I  will  not  speak  to  them,  (I  not  to 

them,  &c.) 
U  you  want  the  book,  I  must  not 

keep  it  any  longer. 
He  was  afraid  I  would  not  lend  it  to 

him,  (I  not  it  to  him,  &c.) 
He  amuses  himself. 
It  is  impossible  for  me  to  go,  (it  to  me.) 


Je  ne  leur  parlera"  pas. 

Si  vous  voulez  le  livre,  ii  ne  faut  pas 
que  je  le  garde  plus  long-temps. 

II  avait  peur  que  je  ns  le  lui  pre- 
tasse  pas. 

il  se  divertit. 

II  m'est  impossible  d'y  allcr. 


$  64. — 2d.  The  objective  pronouns  are  placed  after  the  imperative  mood, 
commanding  or  used  affirmatively,  except  in  the  3d  person  sing,  and  plur. 


Give  me. 
Let  me  speak. 


Give  it  to  me. 
Let  me  see. 


Ex.:  Donuez-mot.     Donne z-7e-root'. 
Laissez-moi  parler.      Laissez 
moi  voir. 

?£r-e«,  un. 


Let  him  give  it  to  me. 
Let  them  speak  to  them. 


Let  us  send  them  one. 
Dress  thyself.     Boast  of  it. 

But,  in  the  3d  person,  place  it  Ixtfore : 

Qu'it  me  le  donne. 
Qu'ils  leur  parlent. 

Exception. — When  two  imperatives  are  joined  by  the  conjunction  and, 
the  objective  pronoun  connected  with  the  second  verb  is  frequently 
placed  before  it,  although  the  mood  is  affirmative  ;  as  :  Cherchez  macanne, 
et  me  Z'apportez,  instead  of:  et  apportez-la-moi.  Look  for  my  cane,  and 
bring  it  to  me.  Both  ways  are  correct,  ($  150 — 12.) 

$  55.  But  when  the  imperative  mood  forbids  or  is  used  negatively,  the) 
are  placed  before,  according  to  Rule  1st. 

Do  not  give  me.     Do  not  give  it  to  j  Ne  me  donnez  pas.     Ne  me  le  don 


me. 

Let  us  not  send  them  away. 
Let  me  not  speak. 
Do  not  dress  thyself.     DC  not  ooost 

of  it. 

Do  not  take  them.  Ne  ies  prenez  pas. 

Do  not  (thou)  distuib  me  Ne  me  derange  pas. 

Send  her  but  two.  Ne  lui  en  envoyez  que  deux 

Bend  them  nothing.  |  Ne  leur  envoyez  rien 

Do  not  trust  to  it.  j  Ne  vous  y  fiez  pas. 

Do  not  boast  of  it.  !  Ne  vous  en  vantez  pas 

Do  not  deceive  yourself.  !  Ne  vous  trompez  point. 


nez  pas. 

Ne  Ies  envoyons  pas. 
Ne  me  laissez  pas  parler. 
Ne  t'habille  pas.    Ne  t'en  vanfe  oaa 


GRAMMATICAL     SYNOPSIS. 


475 


And  in  the  3d  person,  also  before. 

Let  him  not  give  it  to  me.  I  Qu'il  ne  me  le  dohne  pas. 

Let  them  not  speak  to  her.  I  Qu'ils  ne  lui  parlent  pas. 

$  56. — 3d.  When  the  French  objective  pronoun  is  attended  with  a  preposi- 
tion expressed,  they  both  (that  is,  the  preposition  and  the  pronoun)  go  after 
the  verb,  and  the  preposition  must  be  repeated  before  every  pronoun.  Ex. : 


Come  with  me. 

I  cannot  go  without  you. 

He  speaks  of  him,  you,  and  them. 

We  speak  of  her  and  her  sister. 

Does  he  not  speak  of  them  too  ? 

Yes,  he  speaks  of  him,  her,  them,  you, 

and  of  me  also. 
Do  you  think  of  me  or  him  ? 
Do  not  apply  to  her  nor  to  him,  but  to 

me.  ($64—2.) 
I  will  apply  neither  to  his,  nor  to  him, 

but  to  you. 


Venez  (or  viens)  avec  moi. 

Je  ne  peux  y  aller  sans  vous. 

II  parle  de  lui,  de  vous,  et  d'euz. 

Nous  parlons  d'elle  et  de  sa  soeur, 

Ne  parle-t-il  pas  d'eux  aussi  ? 

Si  fait,  il  parle  de  lui,  d'clle,  d'cux< 

de  vous,  et  de  moi  aussi. 
Pensez-vous  a  7/101  ou  a  lui  ? 
Ne  vous  adressez  ni  a  elle,  ni  c  lu\, 

mais  a  moi. 
Je  ne  m'adresserai  ni  a  elle,  ni  a  lui, 

mais  a  vous. 


DOUBLE   OBJECTIVE  PRONOUNS—  Doubles  Regimes. 

Regimes  directs  et  indirect s. 
$  57. — MONOSYLLABLES.  AVANT  LE  VERBE.      $  58. — APRES  L'IMPERATIF 


/t  to  me,  me  it,  then  to  me. 
It  to  thee,  thee  it,  them  to 

thee. 
It  to  him, 


It  to  her, 
It  to  UB, 


them  to  him. 
them  to  her. 


It  to  you,yofc  it,them  to  you. 
It  to  them,       them  to  them. 


flVIe  le,  me  la,  me  1',  me  lea. 
|Te  le,  te  la,  te  I',  te  les. 

Le  lui,  la  lui,  les  lui. 
Le  lui,  la  lui,  les  lui. 
fNous  le,  nous  la,  1',  nous 

les. 
f-Vous  le,  vous  la,  1',  vous 

les. 
Le  leur,  la  leur,  les  leur. 


-le-moi,  -la-moi,  -les-moi 
-te-le,  -te-la,  -te-les. 

•le-lui,  -la-lui,  -les-lui. 
-Je-lui,  -la-lui,  -tes-lui. 
•le-nous,  -la-nous,  -les- 


-le-leur,  -la-leur, -les-leur 


BEFORE  THE  VERB.  AVANT  LE  VBREE. 

Singular.  Singulier. 

Me  t3  it,  there,  m'y. 

Thee  to  it,  there,  t'y. 

Him  to  it,  there,  1'y. 

Her  to  it,  there,  1'y, 

It  to  it,  there,  1'y- 

Joan  there,  to  it,  y  . . .  .  Jean 

Plural.  Pluriel. 

Us  to  it,  there,  nous  y. 

You  to  it,  there,  vous  y. 

Them  to  it,  there,  les  y.                    j 

My  friends  there,  y  . .  . .  mes  amis.  ] 

N.  B.  When  the  pronouns  are  both  of  the  3d  person,  as  :  It  to  him,  item 
to  him,  it  to  them,  them  to  them,  they  have  the  same  order  in  French,  viz : 
lo  lui,  les  lui,  le  leur,  les  leur ;  but  when  the  pronouns  are  of  different 
persons,  1st  and  3d,  or  2d  and  3d,  reverse  the  English  order,  and  instead  of: 
it  to  mtj  it  to  you,  <fcc.,  say:  to  me  it,  to  you  it,  &c.,  me  le,  vous  le,  &c. 


AFTER  THE  VERB. 

APRES  LE  VERBE, 

Singular. 

Singulier. 

Me  to  it,  there, 

y  moi. 

Him  to  it.  there, 

1'y. 

Her  to  it,  there, 

1'y. 

It  to  it,  there, 

1'y. 

John  there,  to  it 

y  Jean. 

Plural. 

Pluriel 

lous  y. 

vous  y. 

les  y. 

y  mes  ami 

is. 

476 


GRAMMATICAL     SYNOPSIS. 


.— PERSONAL  AND  PARTITIVE.— Personnels  ct  Partitifs. 


BEFORE  AND  AFTER   AVAN1  ET  APRES 
THE    VERB.  LE  VERBE. 

Singular.  Singulier. 

Mo,  some,  or  any,  ($  62,)  \ 
Some  to  me,  or  any  to  >  m'en. 

me,  ) 

Thee  some,  some  to  thee,    t'en. 
Some  to  him,  him  some,     lui  en. 
Some  to  her,  her  some,       lui  en. 
John  some,  some  to  John,    en  (the  verb)  a 


Jean. 

Plural. 

Pluriel. 

Plural. 

Pluriel. 

Ijcine  to  us,  us  some. 

nous-en. 

Us  some  there, 

;  ncus-y-en,     y-en- 

some  to  us, 

>                            nou 

Von  some,  some  to  you, 

vous-en. 

You  some  there, 

vous-y-en. 

$  60.— AVANT    $  til. 

LE  VERBE. 

Sing.  Sing. 

Me  some  there,  )    m, 
Some  to  me,       ) 


>*-«••  no  i 


Thee  some  there  t'y  en. 

Him  some  there,  lui  y  en,  y  en  iiL  , 

Her  some  there,  lai  y  en,  y  en  iai. 

Some  to  J .  there,  y  en  ....  a  Jeau. 


Them  some,  somo  to  them,  leur-en.  Them  come  there,  leur-y-en,      y-on-leur 

$  62. — Some,  in  English,  is  used  for  the  affirmation,  and  any  for  tin 
interrogation  and  negation  ;  and  consequently  en  corresponds  both  to  sonu 
and  any.' 

Ex  :  I  have  some,  (of  a  thing  referred  |  Ex.:  Fen  ai. 

to.) 
Have  you  any  ?     He  has  not 


given  me  a?iy. 


En  avez-vous  ?     11  ne  m'en  a 
pas  donne. 


*  63.— OB  JECTIVE  PRONOUNS; 
With  a  preposition  always  placed  after  the  verb,  as  in  English 


To  me. 
To  theft, 


Singular. 

from  me,  of  me,  near  me. 
from  or  of  thee,  far  from  thee. 


of  him,  from  him, without  him. 
of,  from  her,         for  her. 
To  one's  self,  of  one's  self,  towards  one. 


To  him, 
To  her, 


Singulier. 
A  moi,(§61i;)de  moi, (§64  ',)pres  Jemo;. 


A  toi,  de  toi,  loin  de  toi. 

A  lui,  de  lui,  sans  lui. 

A  elle,  d'elle,  pour  e  le. 

A  soi,  de  soi,  envers  soi 

To  it,  of  it,  from  it,  with  it,  are  not  translated  after  the  verb. 

Pluriel. 

A  nous,  de  nous,   avec  nous. 

A  vous,  de  vous,   avant  vous. 

A  eux,(^  64*,)  d'eux,       apres  eux. 
A  elles,($  GIZjjd'elles,    au  milieu  d'el'ca 


To  us, 
To  you, 
To  them, 


Plural. 

from  or  of  us,        with  us. 
of,  from  you,         before  you. 
from,  of  them,      after  them. 
To  them,    from,  of  them,  in  the  midst  of 

them. 

A  eux,  a  elles,  &c.,  apply  to  persons,  not  to  things. 
§  64. — 1.  Moi,  toi,  lui,  elle,  &c.,  connected  with  the  two  oreposition?  d 
and  de,  are  only  used  after  some  verbs,  such  as : 
Presenter  a,  To  introduce  to. 


Penser  a,  (742,) 
\ccourir  a,  (643:/ 
Se  fier  a,  (622,) 
Se  souvenir  de,  (5 


Me  thinks  of  me. 
She  hastened  to  us. 
Do  you  mist  them  ? 
He  remembers  you. 


Quand  me   presenteroa 

vous  a  lui  ? 
il  pense  a  moi. 
Elle  accourut  a  nous. 
Vous  fiez-vous  a  eux  f 
II  se  souvicnt  de  voua 


GRAMMATICAL     SYNOPilS 


477 


In  other  instances,  to  me,  to  him,  &c. :  of  me,  of  them,  &c.,  mist  be  trans 
«£cd  as  directed  (§  54). 

Renoncer  a S'en  temr  a 


Compter  sur. 

Se  souvenir  de 

Se  ressouvenir  de  . . . . 
Penser  a  .... 
Accourir  a  .... 
Se  fier  a  . . 


S'en  rapporter  a  ... 
Se  mefier  de  . . . 

Se  de'fier  de 

S'adress^r  a  

Se  plaindre  de  .  . . . 


2.  When  there  are  two  or  more  objective  case?  connected  with  the  same 
verb.  —  Do  you  speak  to  me?  Me  parlez-vous  ?  Ne  is  placed  before, 
Decause  there  is  but  one  objective  case;  but,  as  in  the  following  answer, 
there  are  more  than  one  object,  say  :  I  speak  to  you,  to  him,  and  his  brother  ; 
je  parle  a  vous,  d  lui,  et  a  son  fret  i.  The  three  objective  cases  coming 
after  the  verb,  the  preposition  a  must  be  used  and  repeated  before  each, 


$  65.  —  But  when  the  preposition  is  expressed  in  French,  whether  it  be  ;», 
de,  sans,  avec,  &c.,  both  the  preposition  ancl  pronoun  come  after  the  verb, 
(I  56.)  ' 

$6G.—  REFLECTIVE  PRONOUNS.    (431.) 

Fully  to  explain  this  subject,  we  will  give  it  a  new  form.  The  French 
Reflective  Verbs,  Verbes  Reflechis,  may  be  divided  into  three  classes. 

$  67.  —  1st  CLASS.  Those  that  admit  of  one  direct,  but  of  no  indirect 
objective.  Ex.  :  I  dress  myself. 

$  68.  —  2d  CLASS.  Those  which,  beside  the  direct,  admit  also  of  an  indi- 
rect objective,  governed  by  the  preposition  d.  Ex.:  I  apply  myself  to 
study. 

$  69.  —  3d  CLASS.  Those  in  which  the  indirect  objective  is  governed  by 
the  preposition  de.  Ex.  :  I  blame  myself  for  that  action. 

§  70.  —  Observe  that  when  the  indirect  objective  is  a  noun,  it  goes  after 
the  verb,  as  in  English  ;  but,  when  the  indirect  objective  is  the  pronoun 
it  or  them,  that  pronoun  is  incorporated  with  the  French  preposition  a  or 
de,  and  both  are  expressed  by  a  single  word,  placed  as  directed  ($  50,  $  54, 
rnd  following.)  Hence  there  are  three  classes  of 

*  71.—  REFLECTIVE   PRONOUNS.—  Pronoms  Rljltchis. 


1st  CLASS.     No  indirect  objective. 

Myself,          me,  m'. 
Thyself,         te,  t'. 
HimseSf,         se,  s'. 
Herself,          se,  s'. 
Dursel^eS;     nous. 

To  cure  myself,          me  guerir. 
To  cure  thyself,         te  guerir. 
To  cure  himself,         so  guerir, 
To  cure  herself,          se  guerir. 
To  cure  ourselves,     nous  guerir. 

To  dress  mys.,  m'habiller 
To  dress  thys.,  t'habi.ler. 
To  dress  hiins.,  s'habiller 
To  dress  hersf.  s'habi.Jer. 
To  dress  ours.,   nous  ham. 
ler. 

?''rarE3lv?E,  vous. 

To  cure  yourselves,  vous  guerir. 

To  dress  yours.  .vous  halnl 

ler. 

Themselves,  PC.  s'. 
One-b  Bolf,      so.  s'. 

To  cure  themselves,   se  gu&rir, 
To  cure  cue's   self,    Re  gut-rir, 

To  dress  thems..8!hab;}ier. 
To  dress  one's,  s''nai>iller. 

478 


GRAMMATICAL     SYNOPSIS. 


$  72 «  — 2d  CLASS.  With  the  preposition  a.  When  the  object!  e  pronoun 
it,  or  f/ie/ft,  alone,  or  governed  by  any  English  preposition,  is  to  be  trans- 
lated by  a  French  reflective  verb,  requiring  the  preposition  d,  translate  on 
follows : — 


Mjrself  to  it,  m'y. 

(Thyself)  into  .t,       -'y. 
(Himself)  toit,tliein,s!y 

it          >    , 
with  them,  J  s  y> 


it, 

to  them, 
to  it, 

to  it, 
is  them. 


nousy 
vousy 
nousy 


I  apply  myself  to  it. 
Thou  glidest  into  it. 
He  opposes  it,  them. 
She  understands  it. 
She  is    acquainted  wi'.h 

them. 

We  expect  it. 
Go  to  them. 
Let  us  submit  to  it. 
They  retired  to  it. 
They  withdrew  in  then. 


Je  m'y  applique. 
Tu  t'y  glisses. 
II  s'y  oppose. 


Elle  s'y  connait. 

Nous  nous  y  attendone 

Rendez-vous-y. 

Soumettons-nous-y. 

Us  s'y  retirerent. 


$  73. — 3d  CLASS.  With  the  preposition  de.  When  the  objective  pro. 
noun  it,  or  them,  alone,  or  governed  by  any  English  preposition,  is  to  bo 
translated  by  a  French  reflective  verb,  requiring  the  preposition  de,  trans- 
late as  follows: — 

Myself  of  it,          m'en. 
at  it,          t'en. 
at  it,  i 

with  them,  \  s  en' 


it,  them,  sVn. 

upon  it,  nous  en. 

at  it,  vous  en. 

about  it,  s'en. 

to  it,  e'en. 


I  assured  myself  of  it. 
Thou  wilt  wonder  at  it. 
He  takes  offence  at  it. 
He    is    displeased    w 

them. 

She  remembers  it,  them. 
We  can  seize  upon  it. 


ith  I 


Do  you  laugh  at  it  ? 
They  do  not  care  about  it. 
They  attend  to  it. 


Je  m'en  assurai. 
Tu  t'en  etonneras. 

II  s 'en  offense. 

Elle  s'cn  souvient. 
Nous    pouvons    nous    o 

saisir. 

Vous  en  moquez-vous? 
Us  ne  s'en  soucient  pas. 
Elles  s'en  occupent. 


$  74. — It  is  evident,  from  the  examples  aboVe,  that  the  use  of  Jie  French 
pronouns  m'y,  t'y,  &c.,  m'en,  t'en,  &c.,  does  not  depend  on  the  English  pre- 
position used,  but  on  the  French  one,  which  is  incorporated  with  the  pronoun. 
When  the  French  verb  requires  a,  you  must  use,  m'y,  t'y,  &c.  When  it 
requires  de,  use  m'en,  t'en,  &c.  But  no  such  incorporation  takes  place,  if 
the  French  preposition  is  avec,  pour,  sans,  &c.,  instead  of  de  or  a. 

RELATIVE  PRONOUNS.— Pronoms  Relatifs. 


$  75. — NOMINATIVES.     Wb.3,   that, 

which,  whoever. 
The  man  who  speaks. 
The  lady  that  smiles. 
The  hat  which  becomes  you. 
Whoever  (who)  studies,  improves. 


NOMINATIF.     Qui. 

L'homme  qui  parle. 

La  dame  qui  sourit. 

Le  chapeau  qui  vous  convier.f. 

Qui  etudio,  fait  des  progres. 


$  76. — The  nominative  relative  pronoun  is  never  understood  in  English 
aor  in  French. 

$77. — OBJECTIVE,     Without  a  pre-  i         R^GIMC.     Sans  proposition. 

position. 
Whom,  that,  which    ($81.1  '  Quo,  qu'. 


GRAMMATICAL     SYNOPSIS. 


479 


$  78. — The  objective  relative  pronoun  is  frequently  left  out  in  English, 
but  never  in  French. 


The  gentleman  (whom)  you  call. 
The  girl  (that)  he  admires. 
The  history  (which)  you  relate. 

$  70. — OBJECTIVE.    With   a  prepo- 
sition. 

of  which. 


<)f  whom, 
whom. 

To  whom, 
whom, 

For  whom 


to  which, 
to  which, 
for  which. 


Sing. 
Plur. 

S. 


From  whom,      from  which. 
With  whom,      with  which. 


P. 

S. 
f. 

S. 

p. 

S. 

p. 


Le  monsieur  que  vous  appelei. 
La  fille  qu'il  admire. 
L'histoire  que  vous  facon  /ez. 

REGIME.     Avec  une  preposition. 


De  qui,  dont,  duquel,  de  laquellc, 

desqueis,  desquelles. 
A  qui,         huquel,  a  laquelle. 

auxquels,       auxquelLes. 
Pour  qui,  pour  lequel,  pour  laquelle, 

1 '    pour  lesquels,  pour  lesquellea. 
De  qui,  dont,  duquel,  de  laquelle. 

desqueis,    desquelles. 
Avec  qui,  avec  lequel,  avec  laqueHe. 
"     avec  lesquels,    avec  lesquellea 

$  80. — Although  the  pronoun  can  be  omitted,  and  the  preposition  trans- 
posed, in  English,  it  cannot  be  in  French. 

The   man   of  whom   we  speak,  or    f  L'homme  de  qui  nous  parlons,  ou 

1'homme  dont  nous  parlons,  ou 

1'homme  du  quel  nous  parlons. 

La  femme   de  qui,   ou  dojit,  ou  d« 


the   man  whom  we  speak  of,  or 
the  man  we  speak  of. 
The  woman  we  speak  of. 


The  employer  she  works  for. 


laquelle  nous  parlons. 
Le  patron  pour  qui  (ou  lequel)  eiio 
travaille. 

§  81. — When  the  relative  whom,  or  that,  or  which,  is  immediately  pre- 
ceded by  its  antecedent,  it  is  never  translated  by  lequel,  laquelle,  &c.,  bm 
by  que.  In  this  case,  it  may  be  omitted  in  English,  but  never  in  French. 

The  cases   (which)  you  have   men-    Les  cas  que  vous  avez  mentionnds. 

tioned. 

The  ideas  he  has  suggested. 
The  statesmen  (whom)  he  employed. 


Les  idees  qu'il  a  suggere"es. 

Les  hommes  d'etat  qu'il  employa. 

$  82. — But,  when  which  is  separated  from  its  antecedent,  translate  by 
lequel,  laquelle,  &.c. ;  not  by  que. 

II  me  dit  lequel  il  voulait. 
Je  sais  laquelle  lui  conviendra. 
Je  sais  lequel  elle  prefere. 
C'est  une  plante   trouvee   en  Amfl 
rique,  laquelle  merite  attention. 


He  told  me  which  he  wanted. 
I  know  which  will  suit  him. 
I  know  whom  she  prefers. 
This  is  a  plant  found  in  America, 
which  is  worthy  of  attention. 

$  83. — In  this  case,  which  means  which  one,  and  cannot  be  omitted,  eve» 
in  English. 

$  84. — Except  in  similar  sentences,  the  French  words  lequel,  laquelle, 
&,c.,  which,  which  one,  are  interrogative,  and  not  relative  pronouns,  if 
gtiiployed  without  a  preposition. 


480  GRAMMATICAL     SYNOPSIS, 

$  85. — Qui,  nominative,  relates  to  persons  and  things. 
A  qui,  de  qui,  pour  qui,  &c.    (or  qui,  with  any  preposition,)  relates  to 
persons  only. 

The  man  (the  book)  which  suits  him.  |  L'homme  (le  livre)  qui  lui  convient. 
Without  whom  are  you  going  ?  I  Sans  qui  allez-vous  ? 

$  86. — Dont,  duquel,  de  laquelle,  &c.,  relate  to  persons  and  things. 


The  child  (the  dog)  whose  name  you 

know. 
The  grammar  you  spoke  to  me  of. 


L'enfant  (le  chien)  dont  (duquel)  vous 

savez  le  nom. 
La  grammaire  dont  (de  laquelle)  vous 


avez  parle. 

WHICH,  meaning  which  one,  or  the  one  which,  is  translated  by: 
Celui  qui,  (nom.)       celui  que,  (obj.)    Ceux  qui,  (nom.)        celles  que,  (obj.) 
Celle  qui,  celle  que.  Celles  qui,  celles  que. 


I  know  which  one  he  speaks  of. 
I  spoke  to  her  he  admires. 
He  sees  the  one  you  speak  to. 


Je  sais  celle  dont  il  parle. 
Je  parlai  a  celle  qu'il  admire. 
11  voit  celui  auquel  vous  parlez. 


$  87. — 1.  The  one  in  the  garden  :  which  is  is  evidently  understood,  but  n 
/iiust  be  expressed  in  French.     Then  say,  Celui  qui  est  dans  le  jardin,  nevei 
Celui  dans,  &,c. 
I  know  which  is  first,  (that  is,  which  f  Je  sais  celui  qui  est  premier. 

one,  or  the  one  which.)  (  Je  snis  celle  qui  est  premiere. 

(Jo  sais  celui  que 
Je  sais  celle  que 
Je  sais  ceux  que 
Je  sais  celles  que 


you  will  choose.  J  Je  sais  ceux  que 


(Jo  sais  celui  que 
Je  sais  celle  que     I 

vous  choisirez. 


Speaking  of  a  house  : 
Can  you  guess  which  will  suit  me  ? 

C^n  you  guess  which  I  have  taken  \ 


Pouvez-vous   devinei    celle  qui  me 

convienclra  ? 
Pouvez-vous  deviner  celle  que  j'ai 


prise  ? 

2.  The  otic,  OY  those,  followed  by  a  preposition  or  present  participle,  generally 
means,  that  which  is,  (sing.,)  those  which  are,  (plur.)     The  one.  on  the  table 
Here,  the  one  evidently  means  that  which  is,  and  must  be  translated  by: 

celui  qui  est.     1  The  one  coming,     celui  qui  vient. 
Those  in  the  vessel,    ceux  qui  sont . .  I  Those  speaking,      ceux  qui  parlent. 

3.  When  a  nominative  case  is  immediately  followed  by  a  preposition  or  par 
(iciple,  as  the  relative  pronoun  and  verb  are  then  understood  in  English,  they 
must  be  supplied  in  French.  (§  39,  N.  B.) 


The  broom  on  the  floor.     The  man 

sweeping. 
'1  he  boy  caught  is  innocent  (who  has 


Le   balai   qui   est   sur   le    plancher. 

L'homme  qui  balaie. 
Le  gargon  qui  a  ete  pris  est  innocent. 


been.) 

4.  What  tV,  (that  which  is,)  as  relative,  when  followed  by  a  preposition,  is 
translated  by,  ce  qu'il  y  a,  (472,  Obs.  108,)  or  any  other  tense  of  the  earnc 


G  U  A  M  M  A  T  ;  :  A  i     SYNOPSIS,  4&1 

1  know  what  is  in  that  trunk.  Je  sais  ce  qu'il  y  a  dans  cette  malle. 

Where  is  what  was  in  niy  desk?  Oii  est  ce  qu'il  y  avait  dans  mon 

|       pupitre  ? 

$  88. — DONT.   French  relative,  indirect  object,  is  followed  by  a  nomina- 
tive case  in  French,  whether  it  is  so  in  English  or  not. 
The    country    whose    government  1  Le  pays  dont  le  gouvernement  voua 


pleases  you. 
The  country  whose  government  you 

admire. 

I  know  her  (the  one}  he  spsaks  of. 
!  do  not  trust  the  man  whose  horse 

you  have  borrowed. 


plait. 

Le  pays  dont  vous  admircz  le  gou- 
vernement. 

Je  connais  celle  dont  ii  parle. 

Je  ne  me  fie  pas  a  I'homme  dont  vona 
avez  emprunte  Is  chcval. 


And  not,  dont  le  cheval  vous  avez  emprunte. 
The  construction  would  be  the  same,  if,  in  English,  of  whom  was  used 
instead  of  whose.     As  :  The  man  of  whom  you  have  borrowed  the  horse. 

$89. — The  compound  relative  pronoun  WHAT,  without  a  preposition. 
What  is  called  a  compound  relative  pronoun  when  it  means  that  which, 
and  is  translated  by,  cc  qui,  when  nominative,  and  ce  que,  when  objec- 
tive. Ex.: 

I  know  what  will  suit,  I  Je  sais  ce  qui  conviendra. 

I  know  what  you  say.  I  Je  sais  ce  que  vous  dit.es. 

$90. —  IVhich  has  sometimes  a  clause  of  a  sentence  for  its  antecedent ;  in 
such  a  case  the  French  consider  it  as  equivalent  to  the  compound  relative 
what,  and  translate  it  as  above,  by  ce  qui  or  ce  que.     Ex. : 
fie  went  away,  which  grieved  us.       I  II  s'en  alia,  ce  qui  nous  chagrina. 
The  law  is  such,  which  you  know.     I  La  loi  est  telle,  ce  que  vous  savez. 

§  91. — All  that,  or  the  single  word  all,  meaning  all  that  which,  is  often  used 
as  a  relative  pronoun,  and  translated  all  that  by  tout  ce  qui,  (nom.»)  and 
generally  all  by  tout  ce  que,  (obj.) 


You  know  all  that  which  is  wanted. 
1  know  all  that  will  suit. 
I  know  aT.  you  say. 


Vous  savez  tout  cequi  est  necessaire, 
Je  sais  tout  ce  qui  conviendra. 
Je  sais  tout  ce  que  vous  dites. 


After  all,  the  word  which,  or  that  which,  may  be  omitted  in  English,  aa 
shown  above,  but  ce  qui  or  ce  que  must  always  be  expressed  in  French. 

$92. — WHAT,  governed  by  a  preposition,  when  that  preposition  can  be 
transposed. 

For  what  or  what fcr.  Pour  quoi  .  .  .  ce  pour  quoi. 

Of  what  or  what  (is  he  speaking)  ot.  De  quoi ce  dont.  (§  93.) 

To  what  or  what to.  A  quoi ce  a  quoi. 

f  rom  what  or  what from.  De  quoi ce  dont.  (§  93.; 

In  what  or  what in.  Dans  quoi  .  .  .  ce  dans  quoi. 

W.'th  what  or  what with.  Avec  quoi  .  .  .  ce  avec  quoi. 

393. — When  the  prep-jsition  of,  governing  what  is  rendered  in  French  I  y 
dt,  ce  dont  is  more  generally  used  ilnn  dc  quoi. 


GRAMMATICAL     SYNOPSIS. 


I  know  what  he  speaks  of. 

He  knows  what  1  have  need  of. 
Tell  me  what  you  are  thinking  of. 
Does  he  know  why  I  do  not  go  there  ? 
I  will  tell  you  what  I  am  going  to  do 
it  with. 


Je   sais  de  quoi,  imieux)  C6  dont   '0 

parle. 

II  sait  ce  dent  j'ai  besoin. 
Dites-moi  ce  a  quoi  vous  pense?-. 
Sait-i\  pourquoi  je  n'y  vais  pas'? 
Je  vais  vous  dire  ce  avec  quoi  je  vrJa 

le  faire. 


$94. — In  the  third  example,  the  preposition  of,  connected  with  the  parti- 
ciple thinking,  is  not  translated  by  tne  French  picposition  de,  but  byd, 
because  the  verb  penser  requires-  d  and  not  de,  (and,  as  we  have  already 
noticed,  ($50,)  it  is  the  French  preposition  that  must  be  attended  to,  and  not 
the  English.)  Accordingly,  ce  dont  cannot  be  used,  but  ce  d  quoi,  as  in  the 
example. 

It  will  easily  be  noticed  that  when  what  is  governed  by  any  other  prep> 
flition  than  de,  that  preposition  is  placed  between  ce  and  quoi.     Ex. : 
This  is  what  he  applies  to.  .    j  C'est  ce  d  quoi  il  s'applique. 

We -know  what  he  is  running  after.     \  Nous  savons  ce  aprcs  quoi  il  court. 

$  95. — English  grammarians  say  that  the  preposition  ought  not  to  be  sepa- 
rated from  the. pronoun  it  governs,  and  that  in,  I  know  what  he  speaks  of, 
the  preposition  of  or.ght  to  be  placed  before  what ,  instead  of  being  placed  at 
the  end  of  the  sentence,  and  that  the  correct  expression  is,  I  know  of  what 
he  speaks. 

Yet  general  custom  disregards  that  rule,  and  the  preposition  usually  ends 
the  sentence  as  exemplified  here.  In  French,  however,  the  preposition 
cannot  be  transposed  :  it  must  always  precede  the  pronoun,  as  shown  in  the 
above  examples. 

$96. — WHAT,  connected  with  the  preposition  of  or  to,  changes  its  meaning 
according  to  the  place  of  the  preposition. 

$97. —  Of  what,  meaning  of  that  which,  de  ce  qui,  (nominatif,)  de  ce  quct 
(reg.)     (The  English  preposition  cannot  be  transposed.) 
He  speaks  of  what  was  found.  \  II  parle  de  ce  qui  fut  trouvij. 

It  would  not  be  correct  to  say,  what  was  found  of. 
He  speaks  of  what  I  know.  |  11  parle  de  ce  que  je  sais. 

$98. —  To  what,  meaning,  to  that  which,  d  ce  qui.  (nom.,)  d  ce  que,  !r%. 
No  transposition  in  English. 

You  appiy  to  what  is  useful.  i  Vous  vous  appliquez  d  ce  qui  est  utile, 

Attend  to  what  I  tell  you.  j  Faites  attention  d  ce  queje  vous  dis. 

$  99. —  What  ...of,  meaning  that  of  which,  ce  dont .  ..   ce  de  quoi. 

Ce  dont  -vous  parlez  n'cst  pas  juste. 

(ce  de  quoi.) 

Vous  ne  savez  pas  ce  dent  je  Pin- 
formal. 


you  speak  of  is  not  just. 

You  do  not  know  what  I  informed 
him  of. 


$  100. —  IVJiat .  . .  to,  meaning  that  to  which,  ce  d  quoi,  d  quoi. 


I  see  what  he  pretends  to. 

Who  knows  who!  he  applies  himself 
to. 


Je  vois  ce  d  quoi  il  pretend,  (:u,  £ 

quoi.) 
Qui  sait  d  quoi  (on  ce  fi  qu  >i;  il  afaj> 

plique. 


GR1MMATICAL    SYNOPS1I. 


483 


1..   -What  of  it?  is  an  irregular  expression,  translated  by  Qu*tm 
resulte-t-il  ? 
What  of  his  opinion !  j     Qu'importe  son  opinion  ! 

«102 — PERSONAL   PRONOUNS   CONNECTED   WITH   THB 
RELATIVES,  governed  by  prepositions. 


I  to  whom,  I  whose. 

Thou  of  whom,  thou  whose. 

He  of  whom,  he  whose. 

She  from  whom. 

He  or  the  one  without  whom. 

She  or  the  one  without  whom. 

The  person  of  whom,  (from  whom.) 

The  thing  of  which. 

The  object  for  which. 

Julius  after  whom. 

Clara  after  whom. 

We  to  whom. 

You  of  whom,  or  whose. 

They  from  whom,  (m.) 

They  from  whom.  (/.) 

They  for  whom,  (m.) 

They  near  whom.  (/.) 

Those  in  the  midst  of  which,  (m.) 

Those,  far  from  which.  (/.) 


Moi  a  qui,  moi  auquel,  moi  a  laquellc. 
Toi  de  qui,  toi  dont,  toi  duquel,  toi  do 

laquelle. 

Lui  de  qui,  lui  dont,  lui  duquel. 
Elle  de  qui,  elle  don%  elle  de  laquelle. 
Celui  sans  qui,  celui  sans  lequel. 
Celle  sans  qui,  celle  sans  laquelle. 
La  personne  de  qui,  dont,  de  laquelle. 
La  chose  de  laquelle. 
L'objet  pour  lequel. 
Jules  apres  qui,  apres  lequel. 
Clara  aprus  qui,  apres  laquelle. 
Nous  a  qui,  nous  auxquels,  auxquelles. 
Vous  de  qui,  vous  dont,  desquels,  &c. 
Eux  de  qui,  eux  dont,  eux  desquels. 
Elles  de  qui,  elles  dont,  elles  desquellea. 
Ceux  pour  qui,  ceux  pour  lesquels. 
Celles  pres  de  qui,  pres  desquelles. 
Ceux  au  milieu  de  qui,  desquels. 
Celles  loin  de  qui,  loin  desqnelles. 


$103.— POSSESSIVE  PRONOUNS. 

They  arc  generally  divided  into  two  classes :  1st.  Those  which  are  always 
connected  with  nouns,  viz  :  my,  thy,  his,  her,  its,  our,  your,  their.  As  these 
never  take  the  place  of  nouns,  they  will  be  found  under  the  head  of  Posses- 
sive Articles.  ($  30,  31,  32.) 

$  104. — 2d.  Those  wrich,  taking  the  place  of  nouns,  are  properly  called 


pronouns. 

Whose  thimble  is  this  ? 


It 


Mine, 
Thine, 
His, 
Hers, 

Its, 
Ours, 
Yours. 
Theirs, 


le  mien, 
le  tien, 
le  sien, 
le  sien, 
le  sien, 
le  notre, 
le  votre, 
le  leur, 


is  mine.        A  qui  est  ce  de  ? 

la  mienne,         les  miens, 
les  tiens, 
les  siens, 
les  siens, 
les  siens, 
les  notres, 
les  votres, 


The  priest's,  celui  dupretre, 
The  friend's,  celui  de  1'ami, 
Mr.  Petit's,  celui  de  M.  P., 
To  mine,  au  miefi, 


la  tienne, 

la  sienne, 

la  sienne, 

la  sienne, 

la  notre, 

la  votre, 

la  leur,  les  leurs, 

celle  dupretre,  ceux  dupretre, 

celle  de  1'ami,  ceux  de  1'ami, 

celledeM.  P.,  ceuxdeM.  P., 

a  la  mienne,      aux  miens, 


C'est  le  mien, 
les  miennes. 
les  tiennes. 
les  siennes. 
les  siennes. 
les  siennes. 
les  notres. 
les  votres. 
les  leurs. 
celles  du  p. 
celles  de  1'ami 
celles  de  M.  P 
aux  niicnncs. 


484 


GRAMMATICAL     S  VT  N  0  ?  S  I  B. 


If, from  mine, du  mien,  de  la  mienne,  des  miens,        des  miennes. 

With  mine,     avec  le  mien,    avec  la  mienne, avecles  miens, avec  les  miennea 
Near  mine,     pres  du  mien,    pres  de  la  m.,  pres  des  miens,  pres  des  m. 
As  to  mine,    quant  au  mien,  quant  a  la  m.,  aux  miens,       aux  mienneg. 

$  105.  The  above  pronouns  are  used  as  objectives  and  nominatives  with 
every  verb,  and  even  after  the  verb  tire,  to  be,  when  the  personal  pronoun 
ce  is  nominative  before. 
Give  me  mine. 
Yours  looks  well. 
Where  is  his,  theirs,  ours  ? 
Ours  are  here,  and  his  also. 
It  is  theirs,  (ce  being  nom.  before.) 
It  was  not  mine,  but  thine. 
Is  it  hers,  yours,  mine,  or  theirs  ? 


Donnez-moi  le  mien. 

Le  votre  a  bonne  mine. 

Ou  est  le  sien,  le  leur,  le  notre  ? 

Le  notre  est  ici,  et  le  sien  aussi. 

C'est  le  leur.  ($39.) 

Ce  n'etait  pas  le  mien,  mais  le  tien. 

Est-ce  le  sien,  le  votre,  le  mien,  le 

leur? 
Are  they  yours  or  ours  ?  ($  39.)  Sont-ce  les  votres  ou  les  i.otres  ? 

$  106. — But  when  etre,  to  be*  has  for  its  nominative  either  a  noun  or  the 
pronoun  t7,  elle,  Us,  elles,  the  French  do  not  use  the  above  pronouns,  but 
the  following  : 


Singular. 

Mine,  a  moi.  Thine,  a  toi. 

His,  a  lui.  Hers,  a  elle. 

John's,  a  Jean.       Whose,  a  qui. 
Whose  book  is  this  ? 
It  is  mine. 
Whose  pen  is  that  ? 
It  is  thine. 

Whose  gloves  are  these  ? 
They  are  hers. 
Whose  boots  are  those  ? 
They  are  his. 
Are  they  Mr.  Lebon's  ? 
No,  they  are  not  his. 
Whose  are  they  ? 
I  do  not  know  who«c  they  are. 
Is  this  yours  ? 
That  is  mine. 


Plural. 

Ours,  a  nous.          Yours,  a  vous. 
Theirs,  a  eux.  (TO.)  Theirs,  aejles.  (/. 
My  brothers'.          A  mes  freres 
I  A  qui  est  ce  livre  ? 
I  II  est  a  moi. 

A  qui  est  cette  plume-la  ? 

Elle  est  a  toi. 

A  qui  sont  ces  gants? 

Us  sont  a  elle. 

A  qui  sont  ces  bottes-la  ? 

Elles  sont  a  lui. 

Sont-elles  a  M.  Lebon  ? 

Elles  ne  sont  pas  a  lui. 

A  qui  sont-elles  ? 

Je  ne  sais  pas  a  qui  elles  sont. 

Ceci  est-il  a  vous  ?     Est-ce  a  vous  \ 

Cela  est  a  moi.  C'est  a  moi. 


$  107. — The  expression  a  book  of  mine,  a  friend  ot  hers,  &c.,  is  frequently 
used  in  English.     The  French  do  not  use  this  phraseology,  but  say, 

One  of  her  friends.  Unede  ses  amies, 
A  pen  of  ours.     Une  de  nos  plumes 

A  ...  of  vours.  Une  de  vos 

A  ...  of  theirs.  Une  de  leurs 

Un  des  amis  de  Jean,  or 
Une  des  amies  de  Jean. 
$108, — When,  instead  of  a  book  of  mi"e,  the   English  use,  this,  thatt  ' 


One  of  my  books.     Un  de  mes  livres. 
A  book  of  mine.      Un  de  mes  livres. 
A.  book  of  thine.     Un  de  tes  livres. 
A.  book  of  his,  hers.  Un  de  ses  livres. 
A  friend  of  John's,  is  expressed  by 


GRAMMATICAL     SYNOPSIS. 


485 


Those  pills  of  his  cure  the  headache. 


e,  or  those,  saying,  this  book  of  mine,  those  gloves  of  hers,  &c.,  no 
regular  French  can  be  given  of  them ,  except  using  the  possessive  article.  ($  31.N 

This  book  of  mine  is  spoiled.  \  *Ion. livre  est  & i6' 

(  Ce  livre,  qui  m  apparlicnt,  est  gate. 

Ces  pilules,  de  son  invention,  gucria- 

sent  le  mal  de  tete. 
Ses  pilules  gueVissent  le  mal  de  tete, 

$  109. — WHOSE,  possessive  pronoun,  requires  a  particular  explanation* 
It  is  used  in  English  in  two  different  ways.     1st.  When  it  means  io 
translate  by  d  qui. 
1.  I,  whose  horse  this  is,  means,  i,  to 

whom  this  horse  belongs. 


Whose  book  is  this  ?  or,  to  whom  does 

this  book  belong  ? 
2.  I,  whose  horse  you  have. 
Here,  whose  means  not  I,  to  w/iom,  but 

I,  of  whom  you  have  the  horse. 
f Vkose  opinion  do  you  adopt  ? 


Moi,  d  qui  ,-c   dieval  est  ou  appar- 
tient. 


A  qui  est  ce  livre  ?  ou  A  qui  ce  IITT« 

appartient-il  ? 
Moi,  dont  vous  avez  le  cheval. 

Moi,  de  qui  vous  avez  le  cheval 
De  qui  adoptez-vous  1'opinion  ? 


$  110. — 2d.  WHOSE,  governed  by  a  preposition. 


Of  whose  title,  or  the  title  of  whom. 

To  whose   name,  to   the   name   of 

whom. 
From  whose  race,  from  the  race  of 

whom. 

In  whose  states. 
For  whose  daughter. 
Through  whose  hands. 
Under  whose  protection. 


Du    titre    de    qui,   duquel,   de    la 

quelle,  &c. 
Au   nom  de  qai,  duquel,  desquel.* 

&c. 
De    la    race   de   qui,   duquel,    dc? 

quelles. 

Dans  lesetatsde  qui, de  laquelle,&c 
Pour  la  fille  de  qui,  &c. 
Par  la  main  de  qui. 
Sous  la  protection   duquel,  de   la 

quelle,  &c. 


INTERROGATIVE  PRONOUNS. 

$  111.—  lWo  ?  (nom.)    Whom  ?  (obj.)  I   Qui  ?  (nom.)     Qui  ?  (regime.)  (21*.) 
Who  is  good  ?      Whom  do  you  see  ?  I   Qui  est  bon  ?       Qui  voyez-vous  ? 

Qui  never  loses  its  f,  say  then,  qui  y  va  ?  not  Qu'y  va  ?  Who  goes  there  f 
Qui  aimez-vous  ?  Whom  do  you  like  ?  and  not  Qu'aimcz-vous,  which  means 
VVha-;  do  you  like  ? 


.  —  WHAT  or   WHICH  ?     1st.    When   connected   with   a  noun  ex- 
pressed, is  translated  by  the  interrogative  articles  or  adjectives,  ($  1,) 
quels,  quelle,  quelles. 
IVhat  government  do  you  prefer  ? 
What  is  the  authority  of  the  mayor  ? 
What  or  which  articles  has  he  sent? 
Wliat  or  which  plants  do  you  prefer  ? 


Quel  gouvernement  preferez-vous  ? 
Quelle  est  i'autorite  du  maire  ? 
Quels  articles  a-t-il  envoyes  ? 
Quelles  plantes  prcf£rez-vous? 


$113. — 2d.  WHAT,  interrogative,  meaning  what  thing,  when  not  con 


iS6 


GHAMMATICAL  SYNOPSIS. 


nected  with  ano^n,  but  with  a  verb,  (2i,)  is  translated  by  que,  qu\  or 
chose.  (§  114.)    It  is  then  objective  to  the  verb,  and  placed  before  it.  ($  1)5. 

What  (what  thing)  do  you  prefer  ?          Que  preferez-vous  ? 
What  does  the  mayor  ?  Que  fait  le  maire  ? 

What  (what  things)  has  he  sent  ?  Qu'a-t-il  envoye  ? 

$  114.— Or  else  by  qu'est-ce  que  ?  (281.) 

What  do  you  prefer  ?  i   Qu'est-ce  que  vous  preferez  ? 

What  does  the  ma^r  ?  '  Qu'est-ce  que  le  maire  fait  ? 

What  has  he  sent  ?  Qu'est-ce  qu'il  a  envoye  ? 

Then  the  verb  retains  the  affirmative  form,  because  the  interrogation  ie 
found  in  Qu'est-ce  que . . .  ? 

$  115. — When  placed  after  the  verb,  it  is  translated,  not  by  qu?,  but 
by  quoi,  (211,)  and  the  verb  retains,  as  in  English,  the  affirmative  form. 


What  does  the  mayor  ? 
The  mayor  does  what  ? 
What  does  he  say  ?     He  says  what  ? 
What  has  he  sent  ?          He  has  sent 
what  ? 


Que  fait  le  maire  ? 
Le  maire  fait  quoi  ? 
Que  dit-il  ?  II  dit  quoi  ? 

Qu'a.-t-i\  envoye  ?  II  a  envoys 

quoi  ? 

§  116. — 3d.    WHAT,    when   nominative   to   a   verb,    is    translated    by: 
Qu'est-ce  qui  ? 


IVJiat  pleases  you  ? 
What  is  agreeable  ? 
What  makes  you  laugh  ? 
What  grieves  that  child  ? 

§  117. — 4th.    Wliat,  unconnected  with  a  noun,  and  governed  by  a  prepo 
sition,  is  expressed  by  QUOI.  (R.  6.) 

Wlat  is  he  speaking  of?     That  is : 

Of  what  is  he  speaking  ?  (21 1.) 
fF?.Oi  is  she  going  to  draw  with  ? 
What  docs  the  child  cry  for  ?  (for 

what  ?) 

What  is  she  thinking  of?  (of  what?) 
To  what  does  he  apply  ?    He  applies 

to  reading,  writing,  and  arithmetic. 
There  is  in  it  something  pleasing. 
I  have  enough  (wherewith)  to  live  upon, 


It  is  sufficient  (enough)  to  frighten 
him. 


Qu'est-ce  qui  vous  plait  ? 
Qu'est-ce  qui  est  agreable  ? 
Qu'est-ce  qui  vous  fait  rire  ? 
Qu'est-ce  qui  chagrine  cet  enfant  ? 


De  quoi  parle-t-il  ? 

Avec  quoi  va-t-elle  dessiner  ? 
Pourquoi  1'enfant  crie-t-il  ? 


.A  quoi  pense-t-elle  ? 
A  quoi  s'applique-t-il  ?   II  s' applique 
d  la  lecture,  d  1'ecriture  et  au  calcul 
II  y  a  unje  ne  sais  quoi  qui  plait. 
J'ai  de  quoi  vivre. 
lly  ade  juoi  1'efTraycr. 


$  118. — 5th.  WHAT,  in  the  collocations,  (472,)  what  is,  what  was,  wkc.t 
will  be,  &c.,  followed  by  in,  on,  or  any  other  preposition,  is  expressed  by  : 
Qu'y  a-t-il  dans  . . . .  ?  Qtf  "y  avait-il  dans  . . . .  ?  Qu'y  aura-t-il  dans . . . -  \ 

What  is  on  the  table  ?  Qu'y  a-t-il  sur  la  table  ? 

What  may  le  (may  there  be;  for  mo  ?     Qvepeut-il  y  avoir  pour  moi  ? 
What  was  under  it  ?  I  Qu'y  avait-il  dessous  ? 


GRAMMATICAL    SYNOPSIS. 


487 


$  119. — WHAT,  expressing  admiration  ;  as  :  What  can  be  more  agreeable 
What  can  there  be  more  agreeable !  or,  What  more  agreeable !  is  trans 
ated  by  que,  with  the  verb;  as:  Quz  peut-il  y  avoir  de  plus  agreable, 
Dy  quoi  de  !  without  the  verb  ;  as :  Quoi  de'plus  agreable  ! 

Que  peut-il  y  avoir  de  plus  doux  ! 


What  can  be  (there  be)  sweeter  !  (64 *.) 
What  sweeter ! 


Quoi  de  plus  doux  ! 


$  120. — 6th.  WHAT,  when  a  compound  relative  pronoun,  is  translated  b» 
cc  q ui,  (nom.,)  ce  que,  (obj.) 

v  121. — WHAT,  interjection,  is:   Quoi!  Comment! 
What !  he  is  not  here  !  |  Quoi !  (Comment !)  il  n'est  pas  ioi . 

$  122. — WHICH,  in  the  same  manner  as  what,  when  connected  with  a 
noun,  is  used  as  an  adjective,  or  an  article,  and  translated  by  quel,  qucllc, 
'fuels,  quclles. 


IVhich  dictionary 
Which  grammar 


Which  dictionaries  MO  you  prefer  ? 
Which  grammars   J 


Quel  dictionnaire     -^ 
Quelle  grammaire     1 
Quels  dictionnaires   j  ' 
Quelles  grammairesj 


And  likewise  when  it  is  governed  by  a  preposition.  (R.  6.) 

A  quel  dictionnaire  donnez-voua  la 
preference  ? 
Pour  quelle   grammaire    avez-vous 

donne  un  dollar  ? 

Avcc  quel  crayon  avez-vous  ecrit  ? 
De  quelles  montagnes  venez-voua  ? 
Pres  de  quelle  rue  demeurez-vous  ? 


To  which  dictionary  do  you  give  the 

preference  ? 
For  which  grammar  did  you  give  a 

dollar  ? 

Which  pencil  did  you  write  with? 
Which  mountains  do  you  come  from  ? 
Near  which  street  do  you  live  ? 
Which  candidate  will  you  vote  for? 


Pour  quel  candidat  voterez-vous  ? 


$123. — When  which  becomes  a  pronoun,  and  takes  the  place  of  the  noun, 
or,  in  other  words,  when  which  means  which  one,  which  of  them,  it  must  bo 
translated  not  by  quel,  &c.,  alone,  but  by  lequel,  laquelle,  lesquels,  les- 
quelles,  the  article  Ze,  la,  les,  being  used,  in  French,  before  the  pronoun,  to 
translate  the  word  one,  or  of  them,  placed  after,  in  English,  or  understood. 
So,  in  French,  the  expression  is,  the  which,  instead  of  which  one,  which  of 
them. 


Thei  3  are  several  candidates  ;  'VHICH 
(or  which  one,  or  which  of  them,}  do 
you  prefer , 

Which  of  these  ladies  is  your  cousin  ? 

Among  these  young  men,  which  learn 

French  ?  (which  ones  ?) 
Among  these    young    ladies,    which 

learn  French  ?  (which  ones  ?) 


II  y  a  plusieurs  candidats ;  LEQUEI 
(not  quel  mi]  preferez-vous  ? 

Laquelle  de  ces.  dames  est  votre  cou- 

sine  ? 
Parmi  ces  jeunes  gens,  lesquelt  ap- 

prennent  le  Franc.ais  ? 
Parmi  ces  demoiselles,  lesquelles  ap- 

prennent  le  Franc.ais  ? 


$12-1. — N.  B.   Although  sne,  or  of  them,  may  not  be  expressed  aftej 
which,  as  is  us^illy  the  case;  tianslate  as  above,  whenever  it  is  implied. 


tss 


GRAMMATICAL     SYNOPSIS. 


Which  is   tiie    Erst?   (that  is,  which 

one  ?) 

Which  is  the  last  ? 
Which  are  the  best  ?   (speaking  of 

boys.) 
Which   am  the  best?  'speaking  of 

girls,) 

£  1?5. — To  which,  meaning  to  which  one,  to  which  of  them,  ia  eyprcssed  i?i 
•.iuj'.tel,  d  taquelle,  auxquels,  auxquelles. 


Leqncl  est  pren  ier  ?  (6*.) 

Laquclle  est  derniere  ? 
Lesqutls  sont  les  meiiieurs  ? 

Lesquelles  sont  les  rneilleures  ? 


De    ces    trois    hotels,    auqucl  iret« 
vous  ? 


Of  these  three  hotels,  to  which  (one) 

will  you  go  ?  (or  which  will  you  go 

to?) 
Of  the  four  seasons,  to  which  (one) 

does  he  give  the  preference  ?   (or 

which to  ?) 

Of  all  those    gentlemen,   to  which 

(ones)  shall  we  send  invitations  ? 
To  which  of  them  (ladies)  will  you 

send  presents  ?  (or  which  ....  to  ?) 

$  126. — OF  WHICH  one,  or  ones,  OF  WHICH  of  them,  duquel,  de  toquclle 
•Jesqucls,  dcsquelles. 
Which  do  you    speak    of?    (which 

one ?) 

Which  do  you  speak  of?  (one  lady?) 
Which  do  you  speak  of?  (boys.) 
Which  ones  do  you  speak  of?  (girls.) 


De  laquelle  parlez-vous  ? 
Desquels  parlez-vous  ? 
Desquelles  parlez-vous  ? 

$  127. — WITH  WHICH  of  them,  is  avcc  lequel,  avec  laquelle,  &c. 


Des  quatre  saisons,  d  laqnelle  don- 
ne-t-il  la  preference? 

De  tous  ces  messieurs,  auxquels  en- 
verro;is-nous  des  invitations  ? 

Auxquelles  enverrez-vous  des  pr«5 
sents  ? 


Duquel  parlez-vous  ? 


Avec  laquelle  de  ces  demoiselles  al- 
Icz-vous  chanter  ? 


Which  of  these  young  ladies  are  you 

going  to  sing  with  ? 

And  so,  of  every  other  preposition. 

$  129. — N.  B.  Forget  not  that  the  preposition,  in  French,  must  always 
precede  the  word  it  governs,  although  it  may  be  separated  from  it  in  Eng- 
lish. ($95.) 

IVltich  are  you  going  to  apply  to  ?        \  Auquel  allez-vous  vous  adresser  ? 
Which  did  you  come  through  ?  (road.)  I  Par  laquelle  etes-vous  venu  ?  (route.) 

$  130. — When  WHICH  is  a  relative,  not  an  interrogative  pronoun,  it  is 
sometimes  translated  by  lequel,  laquelle,  &c.,  ($82,)  when  anything  inter- 
venes between  the  antecedent  and  pronoun. 

I  can  see  which  (one)  you  prefer. 
This  is  the  history  of  W.  S.,  which 
contains  so  many  fictions. 


Je  peux  voir  lertuel  vous  prdferez. 
("est  1'histoire  de  W.  S.,  *aqueiifi 
contient  tant  «ie  fictions. 


OF  THE  FRENCH  PRONOUN  ON. 

$  131. — The  pronoun  ON  (3T2)  invariably  governs  the  3d  person  singu  r»; 
Whatever  may  be  the  English  by  which  it  is  represented.  ($38.) 


GRAMMATICAL     SYNOPSIS.  489 

2. — 1.  That  pronoun  corresponds  to  any  English  pronoun  taken  in  an 
Indefinite  sense,  as  one,  any  o?ie,  some  o?ie,  we,  they,  people,  men,  &c., 
whether  singular  or  plural.  (442.) 

$  133. — 2.  It  corresponds  also  to  the  passive  verb,  expressing  an  idea  by 
au  indefinite  manner.  (442.) 

Silver  is  found  everywhere,  is  general  in  its  acceptation,  and  translated  by 
on  trouve  V argent  vartout.  for  it  means  one  finds,  or  people  find,  or  men 
tind  silver  everywhere.  But  when  we  say :  Silver  is  found  by  the  Peruvians^ 
there  is  evidently  a  restriction,  which  causes  the  rejection  of  on,  and  the 
French  is,  L'argent  est  trouve  par  les  Peruviens.  or  still  better,  Lea  Peru- 
vicns  trouvent  1'argent.  A  naval  asylum  is  to  be  established.  As  it  is  nol 
eaid  by  whom,  on  becomes  the  nominative  of  the  active  phrase.  People 
will  establish,  &c.,  translated  by  on  etablira  un  hopital  de  marine.  But 
if  the  sentence  is,  A  naval  asylum  is  to  be  established  by  government,  then, 
government  becoming  nominative  of  the  active  phrase  Goyernment  will 
establish,  &c.,  on  is  rejected,  and  the  translation  is;  Le  gouvcrnement 
etablira  un  hopital  de  marine. 

$  134. — By  the  above  examples,  it  will  be  seen  that  whenever  ON  is  used 
the  sentence  must  assume  the  active  form.  It  is  said  that  a  cwnct  is  seen 
Now,  instead  of  translating  literally,  by  il  est  dit  qiCune  comcle  est  vue,  the 
French  change  the  construction,  and  say: 


People  say  they  see  a  comet. 
Gold  is  found  ;  turn,  one  finds  gold. 
He  was  told  to  come :  One  told  him  . . 
What  is  said  ?  What  do  people  say  ? 


On  dit  qu'on  voit  un  come.t. 
0?i  trouve  Tor. 
On  lui  a  dit  de  venir. 
Que  dit-on  ? 


A  bridge  is  to  be  made  over  the  river.)  Qn  doit  fairc  un    6m  svf  ,a  r[v[^ 
1  hey  are  to  make  a  bridge  ....          ) 

$135. — L'on  is  used  instead  of  on  for  the  sake   of  euphony,  after  the 
words  ce  que,  si,  oil,  ou,  ct,  que,  qui.     That  Z  has  no  particular  meaning, 
and  is  not  to  be  translated. 
What  you  were  told  is  not  true.  Ce  que  Von  vous  a  dit,  n'est  pas  vrai. 


If  I  am  wanted,  call  me.  (702.) 

It  is  a  place  where  everyV)dy  is  seen. 

We  do  not  like  to  see  those  to  whom 
we  owe  so  much. 


Si  Von  me  veut,  appelez-moi. 
C'est   un  lieu  ou  Von  voit  tout   le 

monde. 
On  n'aime  pas  a  voir  ceux  a  qui  Z'oji 

doit  tant. 


You  are  seen  and  heard.        '  i    On  vous  voit  et  Von  vous  entend. 

$136. — The  student  should  be  exercised  to  turning  the  English  passivo 
^hrase  into  the  active  before  he  translates. 


ADJECTIVES. 

$137. — 1.  Adjectives  have  a  plural  like  nouns,  (91,2,)  and  form  il  in  tha 
52me  manner. 

The  Jlne  horse.         The  fine  horses,  i  Le  beau  cheval.    Lcsleaux  chevaux 
My  new  friend.         My  new  friends.    I  Mon nouvcl ami.  Mcsjiouveaux amis 


^  GRAIKMA.TICAL    SYNOPSIS. 

2  Much,  many,  more,  less,  little,  too  much,  how  much,  hra)  miny,  &c. 
considered  as  adjectives  in  Cnglish,  are  adverbs  in  French,  and  require  b 
connecting  link  when  they  are  united  to  a  noun ;  that  connecting  link  is  the 
preposition  de.  (131.) 

More  than,  no*  separated  by  a  noun,  is  expressed  by  plus  que,  except  before 
a  number,  it  is  tnen  plus  de.  More  than  you,  plus  que  vous ;  More  than 
'wo,  plus  de  deux.  (162.) 

3.  Cardinal  numbers  are  used  for  dates  and  the  designation  of  sovereigns: 
Charles  quatre  ;  Le  31  Mai. 

4.  Adjectives  agree  in  number  with  the  noun  or  pronoun  they  qualify. 
(IS2,  222,)  and  also  in  genders.  (552.) 

5.  All  adjectives,  without  exception,  end  in  e  mute  in  the  feminine  An- 
gular, and  in  es  in  the  feminine  plural.     Young,  sing,  jeune,  piur.  jcur"^. 
Small,  petit,  petite,  petites. 

6.  Two  or  more  masculine  nouns,  require  the  adjcc!:vp  to  be  rnasculinn 
plural. 

The  father  and  son  are  polite.  |  Le  pure  et  le  fils  sont  pulis. 

7.  Two  or  more  feminine  nouns  require  the  adjective  to  be  feminine  plural 
The  mother  and  daughter  are  polite.   |  La  mere  et  la  fille  sont  polics. 

8.  Two  or  more  nouns  of  different  genders,  require  the  adjective  to  IMS 
masculine  plural. 

The  preceding  lessons  and  exercises.     Les  lecons  et  les  exercicespriccdenls. 
His  mouth  and  eyes  open.  Sa  bouche  et  ses  yeux  ouverts. 

As  the  adjective  must  be  masculine,  the  ear  requires  the  substantive 
masculine  to  be  put  last,  as  above,  instead  of:  Ses  yeux  et  sa  bouche  ouverts. 

9.  The  adjective  cannot  be  separated  by  an  article  from  the  noun  it  quali- 
fies ;  therefore  the  article  placed  after  the  adjective  in  English,  comes  before  it 
in  French.     Except  tout,  which  admits  the  article  after  it. 


Such  a  man,  (592,)        such  men. 

Sach  a  woman,  such  women. 

All  his  time.          all  the  day  (a  day.) 


Un  tel  homme  (not  tcl  un},  de  tel* 

hommes. 

Une  telle  femme,    de  telles  femmes. 
Tout  son  temps, tout  Zejour  (w7tjour.) 


10.  If  with  such  there  is  another  adjective,  as,  such  a  good  look,  the  French 
io  not  use  tel,  but  say,  un  si  lin  livre,  the  same  as  so  good  a  book.  So  kind 
»  friend,  such  a  kind  friend.  Un  si  bon  ami  (never  un  tel  bon  ami.) 

REMARK  1.     Adjecl'ves  form  their  feminine  in  various  ways,  viz  . 
i.  The  following  double  the  last  consonant : 

Masculin.  Feminin. 

Low. 


.  Thick. 
Express. 

Genteel,  gentle,  pretty. 
Fat. 
Big. 

Weary.  . 
No,  none. 
Initiated. 


Bas,  basse. 

ISpais,  epaisse. 

Expres,  expresse. 

Gentil,  gentille. 

Gras,  grasse. 

Gros,  grosse. 

Las,  lasse. 

Nul,  .  nulle. 

Profes,  prolessOt 


Silly,  foolish.  Sot,  sotte. 


GRAMMATICAL     SYNOPSIS 


491 


Masculin. 


I1  en 


Deceitful,            (eur  —  euse.) 

Trompeur,    . 

trompeuse. 

Lying,                    "         " 

Menteur, 

menteuse. 

Talkative, 

Parleur, 

parleuse. 

Executing,          (cur  —  rice.} 

Exdcuteur, 

executrice. 

Persecuting,          "        " 

Pcrsecuteur, 

persecutrice. 

Enchanting;        {eur—  eresse.) 

Enchanteur, 

enchanteresso. 

Sinning,                "         '• 

Pecheur, 

pecheressc. 

Avenging,                                     Vengeur. 

vengeresse. 

i  lie  following  form  their  leminine  quite  irregularly  : 

Absolved.                                   f  Absous, 

absoute. 

Benign. 

Benin, 

bdnigne. 

Declining. 

Caduc. 

caduque. 

Dry. 

Sec, 

seche. 

False. 

Faux, 

fausse. 

Favorite. 

Favor  i, 

favorite. 

Free. 

Franc, 

Tranche. 

Fresh. 

Frais, 

fraiche. 

Greek. 

Grec, 

grccque. 

Long. 

Long, 

longue. 

Public. 

Public, 

publiquc. 

Red. 

Roux, 

rousse. 

Sweet. 

Doux, 

douce. 

Third. 

Tiers, 

tierce. 

Traitorous 

TraTtrc, 

traitresse. 

Turkish. 

Turc, 

Turque. 

White. 

Blanc, 

blanche. 

Wicked. 

Malin, 

nialigne. 

2.  The  plural  of  adjeclives  informed  like  that  of  the  substantives,  (9»,  10,) 
Of  the  following  twenty-eight  adjectives,  the  first  eighteen  have  no  plural 
for  the  masculine,  the  last  ten  may  form  it  by  adding  an  s,  but  it  is  lx>ttor 
to  avoid  using  them  in  the  plural  for  the  masculine  gender. 


Austral, 

southern. 

Sentimental, 

sentimcntaL 

Beneficial, 

beneficiary. 

Vocal, 

vocal. 

B^rdal, 

northern. 

Zodiacal, 

zodiacal. 

Brumal, 

brumal. 

Canonial, 

canonical. 

Diametral, 

diametrical. 

Amicorl 

friendly, 

Experimental, 

experimental. 

Fatal, 

fatal. 

Labial, 

labial. 

Filial, 

filial. 

Lingual, 

lingual. 

Final, 

final. 

Lustral, 

lustral. 

Frugal, 

frugal. 

Matinal, 

early. 

Glacial, 

frozen. 

Mddical, 

medical. 

Jovial, 

jovial. 

Mental, 

mental. 

Naval, 

naval. 

ft**!, 

natal. 

Pascal, 

pascal. 

Patron  a!, 

patronal. 

Virgina-, 

virghai 

192 


GRAMMATICAL     SYNOPSIS 


$138. — 1.  The  comparative  of  equality  is  formed  by  <ii<.tunt  «/<• ....  qut 
. . .,  as  much. ..  as. . . ,  with  nouns;  aussi.  ..que. . . ,  as.. .  as. . . ,  wi.n  adjec- 
tives and  adverbs,  (16 ',  272.)  That  of  inequality,  by  plus  . . .  qae,  more  . . . 
than  ;  mains  . . .  que  . . . ,  less  . . .  than  . . . ,  with  adjectives  and  adverbs,  (291,2,) 
and  plus  de  .  . .  que  de  . . . ,  moins  de  .  . .  que  .  .  .  de  .  . . ,  with  nouns.  Not  so 
much  ...  as,  with  nouns,  is  expressed  by  we  ...  pas  tant  de  . . .  que  de  ;  not 
so  . . .  as  . . . ;  with  adjectives  and  adverbs,  by  ne  . . .  pas  si . . .  que. 

I  have  not  so  much  pride  as  he.  |  Je  ?i'ai  pas  tant  d'orgueil  que  lui. 

I  am  not  so  proud  as  he.  I  Je  ne  suis  pas  si  orgueilleax  que  lui 

2.  The  more  . . .  the  less  is  expressed   by :   plus  . . .  moins  without  the 
article,  although  it  is  used  in  English;  because  the  addition  of  the  article 
LE  to  plus,  would  make  at  a  superlative,  while  more  remains  a  comparative, 
even  when  it  is  preceded  by  the. 

The  more  you  study,  the  more  you  j  Plus  vous  etudioz,  plus  vous  appro 

learn.  nez. 

The  more  he  plays,  the  less  he  learns,  j  Plus  il  joue,  moins  il  apprend. 
The  greener  the  fruit,  the  less  healthy 

it  is. 

The  nominative,  in  French,  follows  plus  or  mom*.  Then  you  must  not 
say :  Plus  vert  est  le  fruit  moins  sain  il  est ;  but  as  it  is  above. 

3.  In  comparisons  of  inequality,  formed  by  plus,  more  ;   moms,  less ; 
autrc,  autrement,  otherwise,  differently,  &c.,  if  the  part  of  the  sentence 
which  precedes  que  (than)  is  affirmative,  NE  must  be  used  before  the  verb 
coming  after  que.  ($  531,  06s.  120.) 

J'ai  plus  de  pain  que  je  n'en  peux 

manger. 

II  etudie  moins  que  je  ne  le  fais. 
Louis  ecrit  mieux  qu'il  ne  parle. 
Us  s"e  comportent  autrement  que 


Plus  le   fruit  est  vert,  moins  il  est 
sain. 


I  have  more  bread  than  I  can  cat. 


He  studies  less  than  I  do.  (492.) 
Louis  writes  better  than  he  speaks. 
They  behave  otherwise    than   you 
think. 


vous  ne  pensez. 

4.  But  do  not  use  NE  after  que,  than,  if  the  first  part  of  the  sentence  is 
negative  or  interrogative. 


He  does  not  study  less  than  I  do. 
Louis  does  not  wite  better  than  he 

speaks. 
They  do  not  behave  otherwise  than 

you  think. 
Can  I  eat  more  bread  than  I  have  ? 


II  ?i'etudie  pas  moins  que'}  'etudie. 
Louis  71^  cent  pas  mieux  qu'il  parle. 


Us  ne  so  comportent  pas  autrement 

que  vous  croyez. 
Puis-je  manger  plus  de  pain  que  j'en 

ai? 

In   comparisons  of  equality,  expressed  by  autant,  as  much ;  tant,  so 
much  ;  aussi,  as  ;  si,  so,  &c. :  NE  is  never  used  after  que,  (as.) 


I  have  as  much  bread  as  I  can  eat. 

He  does  not  study  so  much  as  I  do. 
Loci*  writes  as  well  as  he  speaks. 
They  do  not  behave  so  well  as  you 
think. 


J'ai  autant  de  pain  que  je  peux  CB 

manger. 

II  n'etudie  pas  tant  que  j'etudie. 
Louis  ecrit  aussi  lie?i  qu'il  parle. 
Us  ne  se  comportent  pas  si  lieji  qvt 

vous  croyez. 


GRAMMATICAL    SYNOPSIS. 


493 


.— PLACE  OF  THE  ADJECTIVES. 

1.  The  following  are  placed  before  the  noun.     Note  that  when  tho  posi- 
tive goes  before,  so  do  the  comparative  and  superlative.     Premier,  first 
second,  second  ;  and  other  adjectives  of  number. 


Beau,  bel,  m. 

Belle,/. 

Bon,  bonne, 

Grand, 

Gros,  grossr , 

leuno. 

Joii, 

Mauvais, 

Me'chant, 

A  pretty  little  dog. 


fine. 

handsome. 

good. 

great,  tall. 

big,  bulky. 

young. 

pretty. 

bad. 

wicked. 


Meilleur, 

Meme, 

Moindre, 

Petit, 

Plusieurs; 

Saint, 

Tout, 

Vieux,  vicil,  m.)     , 

Vr-     MI          /•        '  f   ol 

Vieille,/.  5 

Un  joli  petit  chien. 


better. 

same. 

less. 

little,  small. 

several. 

holy. 


2.  But  if  any  of  these  adjectives  is  connects  with  another  that  carinoi 
be  placed  before  the  noun,  both  go  after,  joined  by  a  conjunction. 


A  handsome,  amiable  woman.2 
A  good,  complaisant  husband. 
A  young,  rich,  and  virtuous  woman. 


Une  femme  aimable  ct  belle. 
Un  mari  bon  et  complaisant. 
Une  demoiselle,  jeune,  richc,  ct  vcr* 


tueuse. 
3.  Adjectives  of  nations,  color,  and  shape,  follow  the  noun.  (2C2,  Obs.  61.) 


NOUNS. 

§  140. — 1.  NOUNS  in  French  not  being,  as  in  English,  used  as  an  adjective 
to  another  noun,  as,  a  cloth  coat,  a  preposition  is  used  to  show  the  relation 
between  the  two  nouns,  the  second  of  which  in  English  becomes  the  first 
in  French. 

De  is  used  between  the  name  of  the  thing  and  that  of  the  substance  of 
which  it  is  made:  Un  habit  de  drop;  un  chandelier  d'arge?it.  If  several 
nouns  are  ised  as  adjectives,  the  French  construction  is  the  same;  the  last 
in  English  becomes  first  in  French.  Silver,  gold,  and  steel  jewels  ;  de* 
bijoux  d1  argent,  djor,  et  deader. 

2.  De  shows  also  the  possession  marked  in  English  by  's.     John's  book. 
The  French  construction  remains  the  same  :  Le  livre  de  Jean. 
The  boy  has  a  stick  :  is  it  the  gene-  i  Le  garc.on  a  un  baton :  est-ce  celui  du 

raVs,  the  lawyer's,  or  the  doctor's  ?  \      ge?itral,  de  Vavocat,  ou  du  docteur  ? 

1  The  adjective  cher,  dear,  also  stands  before  the  noun,  except  when  it  denotes  th« 
price  of  a  thing.    Ex.  Mon  cher  ami,  my  dear  friend ;  ma  chere  sceur,  iny  dear  eis- 
tor;  but  un  fusil  cher,  a  dear  gun ;  une  table  chere,  a  dear  table. 

2  In  tho  following  examples,  the  peculiarity  with  respect  to  the  place  of  the  adjec 
ttve  should  be  observed :  Un  grand  homme  meass  a  great  man,  and  un  homme  grand 
a  tali  man;  une  grosse  femme,  a  fat  woman,  and  une  femme  grosse,  a  woman  will 
child;  une  sage-femme,  a  midwife,  and  une  femme  sage,  a  wise  or  modest  woir.an 
in  qaJant  homme,  a  isw.n  of  honor,  and  un  homme  galant,  a  courtier. 


£94  GRAMMATICAL    SYNOPSIS. 


The  child's  and  the  laker's  dog. 

The  grocer's  butter,  biscuits,  and  cof- 
fee. 

The  grocer's  butter,  his  biscuits  and 
co  flee. 


Le  chien  du  ga.rc.on  et  du  boulanger. 
Li  beurre,  les  biscuits,  et  le  cafi  <fc 

Vipicier. 
Le  beurre  de  1'epicier,  sea  biscuits, 

et  son  cafe,  ($  32,  N.,  at  page  467. 


To  translate  a  double  possessive  case,  take  the  last  noun  in  English  foi 
the  first  in  French,  and  then  retrograde  regularly. 


My  brother's  friend's  book. 

The  grocer's  clerk's  father's  horse. 


Le  livre  de  Vami  de  mon  frere. 
Le  cheval  du  pere  du  commis 


1'epicier. 

3.  De  is  also  used  'n  French  to  translate  of,  placed  in  a  like  situation  in 
English. 

A.  barrel  of  flour.  i  Un  baril  de  farlne. 

A.  bag  of  rice.  I  Un  sac  de  riz. 

4.  A  is  used  when  the  last  French  noun  expresses  the  uso  of  the  first. 
\  coffee-mill.  Un  moulin  a  cafe.  (771.) 


Gunpowder. 
A  flour-barrel. 


De  la  poudre  a  canon. 
Un  baril  a  farine. 


A  la,  d  V,  au,  aux,  are  used,  when  the  first  French  noun  contains  a  por- 
tion of  the  second. 


The  barrel  with  flour  in  (but  not  full.) 
The  bottle  with  vinegar  in. 
The  bag  with  apples. 


Le  baril  d  la  farine.  (772.) 
La  bouteille  au  vinaigre. 
Le  sac  aux  pommes. 


5.  Proper  names,  used  as  such,  have  no  plural. 

Your  friends,  the  Clintons,  are  here.    Vos  amis,  les  Clinton,' son.1  id. 

But  if  used  as  common  nouns,  they  take  an  s. 
Washingtons  are  rare.  |  Les  Washingtons  sont  rarea. 

6.  In  an  enumeration,  nouns  are  frequently  used  without  articles. 

You  have  what  you  want  to  eat  with,     Vous  avez  ce  qu'il  vous  faut  pour 


a  knife,  fork,  plate,  napkin,  &c. 


manger,  coutcau,  fourchette,  &c. 


You  may  likewise  say,  un  couteau,  une  fourchette,  une  assiette,  &c.f 
repeating  the  article  before  every  noun,  if  placed  before  the  first ;  but  it  is 
better  not  to  use  it. 

Men,  women,  children,  were  out.       I  Hommes,   femmes,   enfa?its,   ctaient 

I      dehors. 

7.  Compound  nouns  are  formed  by  connecting: 

A  noun  with  a  noun  :  as,  un  chou-fieur,  a  cauliflower ;  dcs  choux-jleuis. 

A  noun  with  an  adjective  :  as,  une  basse-taille,  a  bass-voice  ;  des  basses- 
tallies. 

In  such  nouns,  both  the  substantive  and  adjective  become  plural. 

A  'noun  with  a  verb  :  as,  un  porte-crayon,  a  pencil-case ;  des  porte-crayona. 

In  such  nouns,  the  substantive  alone  becomes  plural,  if  the  idea  admits 
of  plurality.  The  case  may  have  one  or  two  pencils  in. 

A  noun  with  a  noun  by  a  preposition  :  as,  un  chef-d'oeuvre,  a  master-piece 
dee  chefa-d'wuvre. 

Here,  the  first  substantive  alone  becomes  plural,  if  the  idea  admits  of 
nlnralhv. 


GRAMMATICAL     SYNOPSIS. 


495 


A  compound  noun,  formed  from  a  verb,  preposition,  or  adverb,  is  invariable! 
because  its  component  parts  are  themselves  invariable.  Un  passe-partout^ 
tt  dead-latch  key  ;  des  passe-partout. 

8.  The  feminine  of  substantives  ending  in  eris  regularly  formed,  by  add- 
ing an  e  to  the  masculine,  and  changing  the  e  mute  into  e  grave.  As  : 


A  milkman. 
A  baker. 
A  merchant. 


A  milkwoman. 
A  baker  woman. 
A  female  merchant. 


Un  laitier. 
Un  boulanger. 
Un  marchand. 


Une  laitiere. 
Une  boulangere. 
Une  marchande. 


As  there  are  many  nouns  and  adjectives,  (§200,)  which,  although  incor- 
porated in  the  Vocabularies,  are  not  used  in  the  Exercises,  contrary  to  oul 
fundamental  principle,  viz:  to  make  an  immediate  and,  continued,  uge  of 
expressions  introduced,  I  place  in  the  Synopsis  an  English  alphabetical  list 
jf  them,  which  may  be  consulted  when  necessary. 

The  following  substantives  have  a  distinct  form  for  individu;  Is  of  the 
'em  ale  sex : — 

Masculine. 
un  abbe, 
un  accusateur, 
un  acteur, 
un  ambassadeur, 
un  apprenti, 
un  baron, 
un  berger, 
un  bienfaiteur, 
un  chanoine, 
un  chanteur, 
un  chasseur, 
un  chasseur, 
un  comte, 
un  danseur, 
un  dieu, 
un  due, 
un  dlecteur, 
un  empereur, 
un  fondateur, 
un  jouvenceau; 
un  lion, 
un  paien, 
un  paon, 
un  paysan, 
un  prieur, 
un  prince, 
un  protecteur, 
un  roi, 


An  abbot, 
An  accuser, 
An  actor, 
An  ambassador, 
An  apprentice, 
A  baron, 
A  shepherd, 
A  benefactor, 
A  canon, 
A  singer, 
A  hunter, 

,  (in  puetry,) 


A  count, 
1  dancer, 
A  god, 
A  duke, 
An  elector, 
An  emperor 
A  founder, 
A  lad, 
A  lion, 
A  heathen, 
A  peacock, 
A  peasant, 
A  prior, 
A  prince, 
A  protector.. 
A  king, 

9.  When  a  noun  is  the  object  of  two  or  more  verbs,  those  verbs  mutr 
govern  that  noun,  without  preposition,  or  with  the  same  preposition. 


Femiilint. 
une  abbesse. 
une  accusatrice.   . 
une  actrice. 
une  ambassadrice. 
une  apprentie. 
une  baronne. 
une  bergere. 
une  bienfaitrice. 
une  chanoinesse. 
une  chanteuse. 
une  chasseuse. 
une  chasseresse. 
une  comtesse. 
une  danseuse. 
une  deesse. 
une  duchesse. 
une  electrice. 
?.^.ne  imperatrice. 
une  fondatrice. 
une  jouvencelle. 
une  lionne. 
une  paienne. 
une  paonne. 
une  paysanne. 
une  prieure. 
une  princesse. 
une  protectrice. 
une  reine. 


JL96  GRAMMATICAL    SYKOP8I8. 


He  buys  and  sells  cloth,  (no  vrcp.} 
We  promise  and  give  to  the  people,  (a.) 

She  speaks  and  boasts  o/her  beauty. 


II  achete  et  vend  du  drap. 

Nous  promotions   et   donnuns   aux 

gens. 
Elle  parle  et  se  vantc  dc  sa  bcautd. 


But  in  French  the  sense  cannot  be  suspended  after  a  preposition  as  in 
English  ;  for  instance,  you  must  not  say,  Rien  n'est  plus  agreable  que  die 
converser  avec  et  que  de  jouir  de  la  societe  de  nos  amis,  Nothing  is  more 
agreeable  than  to  converse  with  and  to  enjoy  the  company  of  our  friertde. 
The  sense  cannot  be  suspended  after  the  French  preposition  avec,  as  it  can 
be  after  the  English  preposition  with.  Hence  we  have  this  rule  :  When  the 
two  verbs  require  different  prepositions,  do  not  suspend  the  sense,  but  make 
the  nftun  the  regime  ($  44)  of  the  first  preposition  (or  regime  indirect  of  the 
first  verb},  and  place  an  objective  pronoun  ($  48)  with  the  second  verb. 
The  above  sentence  is  translated  thus :  Rien  n'est  plus  agreable  one  dc 
co?iverser  avec  nos  amis  et  que  de  jouir  deleur  societe. 

10.  The  nouns  of  multitude,  in  French,  noms  collcctifs,  are  divided  by 
them  into  two  classes.  1st  CLASS.  Collectif  general,  when  it  represents  the 
entire  collection.  La  foule  des  hommes  est  vouee  au  malheur,  the  bulk 
of  mankind  is  doomed  to  misfortune.  The  following  verb  is  in  the  singular, 
and  agrees  with  the  collective.  2d  CLASS.  Collectif  partitif,  when  it  repre- 
sents only  a  part  of  the  collection.  Une  foule  de  pauvres  re$oivent  nos 
gecours,  a  crowd  of  poor  receive  our  assistance.  A  crowd  of  poor,  contains 
but  a  portion  of  all  the  poor.  The  verb  is  in  the  plural,  and  agrees  with  the 
noun  that  follows  the  collective. 
1st  CL.  The  army. of  the  Americans.  I  L'armee  des  Americains  est .... 

The  multitude  of  the  stars.     I  La  multitude  des  etoiles  est 

2d  CL.  A  troop  of  robbers.  '    Une  troupe  de  voleurs  sont .... 

A  multitude  of  stars.  i   Une  multitude  d'etoiles  sont .... 


11.  Of  the  farmer's  hay,  cabbages, 
butter,  and  cheese. 


Du  foin  du  fermier,  de  ses  choux,  de 
son  beurre,  et  de  son  fromage. 


This  is  an  elliptical  expression  for  the  hay  of  the  farmer,  the  callage  of  thf 
farmer,  the  butter  of  the  farmer,  &c. ;  but  instead  of  using  the  noun  in  the 
possessive  case  a  second  time,  the  French  use  a  possessive  pronoun.  ($  32,  N. 
page  367.) 

12.  OBSERVATIONS  ON  THE  PROPER  NAMES  OF  PERSONS 

TAKEN  FROM  THE  LATIN  AND  GREEK. 

1.  Proper  names  of  men  ending  in  English  in  a  are  the  same  in  both  lan- 
guages ;  but  those  of  women  and  goddesses  having  that  ending  become 
French  by  changing  the  final  a  into  e  mute. 


Caligula.  Dolabella. 

Cleopatra.  Diana.       Julia. 


Caligula.  Dolabella- 

Cleopatre.  Diane.        Julie. 


2.  Most  proper  names  ending  in  English  in  as  or  es  become  French  bv 
changing  these  Snals  into  e  mute. 
Eneas.  Pythagoras.  6nee.  Pythagore. 


Ulysses.  Socrates. 


Ulysse.  Socrate. 


«  R  A  M  M  A  T  1  C  A  L     S  V  N  O  P  S I  3. 


497 


3.  Piopcr  riar.ics  ending  in  o  change  it  in  French  inlo  on. 
Cicero.  Dido.  |    Cicercn.  Didon 

4.  Most  proper  names  ending  in  us  are  the  same  in  both  languages  when 
they  have  but  two  syllables ;  but  when  they  are  composed  of  three  or  moro 
syllables,  they  become  French  by  changing  it  into  e  mute. 

Cyrus.  Venus.  I  Cyrus.  Venus. 

Camillus.  Orpheus.  I  Camille.  Orphee. 

5.  Most  of  those  ending  in  al  or  is  are  the  same  in  both  languages. 
Jsvenal.  Sesostris.  •  ]  Juvenal.  Sesostris. 

6.  Those  ending  in  English  in  under  change  it  in  French  Lito  andre. 
Alexander.  Lysander.  |  Alexandre.  Lysandre. 

REMARK. — The  proper  names  of  kingdoms,  provinces,  and  towns,  ending 
in  English  in  a,  become  French  by  changing  the  ending  a  into  e  mute,  and 
those  of  towns  ending  in  lurg,  change  it  into  lourg.1 
Arabia.  Asia.  I  L' Arabic.  L'Asie. 

Friburg.  Hamburg.  |  Fribourg.  Hambourg. 

-—  CARDINAL  AND  ORDINAL  NUMBERS. 


NOT  A  Ires 
{Jardiiiaitx. 

Un,  m.  une,/. 

Deux  (2) 

Trois 

Ouatre ~ 

Cinq 


v'-nal 
inters. 

1. 

2. 

3. 

4. 


Sept. ~ 7. 

Huit ~ 8. 

Neuf — 9. 

Dix 10. 

Onze 11. 

Douze. ..12. 

Treize  ~ ^ 1C- 

Quatorzo 14 . 

C^uinzo - 15. 


A 'ombres  Gfil'rnal 

Ordmaux.  M '.unbent 

Premier,  in.  premiere,  f. ».  -  lot. 

Deuxieme,  second,  seconde— 9d. 

Troisieme ^~ . .  .-;<}. 

Quatneme - 4th. 

Cmquiemo — ~ 5th. 

Sixieme— .-.^. 6th. 

Septieme ~. ~ . 7th. 

Huitieme ^^. 8th. 

Neuvieme . — ^  9th. 

Dixieme _ loth 

Onzieme -...-, ,  lltJi 

Douzieme 12th 

Treizieme.^ ^ 13th 

Quatorzieme 14tS» 

Quinzierne 15th 


1  Suck  proper  names  as  deviate  from  this  rule  are  either  separately  noted,  or  ar« 
the  same  in  both  languages. 

«  From  2  to  10  there  is  an  irregularity  in  the  pronunciation  of  the  numbers,  wh:ca 
it  ia  well  to  notice. 

At  the  end  of  a  sentence.  Before  a  consonant 

Deux  iz  pronounced  deu,  x  silent.  deu 

Trois            "               troi,  s  silent.  troi. 

Cinq               '               cinq,  q  sounded.  ein. 


Six 

f-opt 
Huit 
Neuf 
Dix 


troi,  s  silent, 
cinq,  q  sounded, 
sis,  x  like  s. 
seot,  t  sounded, 
nuit,  t  sounded, 
neuf,/  sounded, 
ills,  x  like  s. 


si. 

EC. 

Jim. 
neu. 
di. 


Before  a  vowel. 

deu-z  amis, 
troi-z  amis, 
cin-q  amis, 
si-z  amis. 
se-t  amis. 
nui-t  amis, 
neu-v  nmia. 
c-i-z  auus. 


And  in  the  same  manner  wherever  they  occur, 


GRAMMATICAL     SYNOPSIS. 


Nmnfirc*  Cz.T.!inal 

tlGminaux,  Numbers 

Seize -  1G. 

Dix-sept 17 

Dix-huit - :3. 

Dix-neuf —  -  19. 

Vingt(i) 20. 

Viugt  et  ur» - 21. 

Vingt-deux - -  22. 

Vingt-trois '. 23. 

Vingt-quatre v. .  24. 

Vingt-cinq -  25. 

Vingt-six 20. 

Vingt-sept 27. 

Vingt-huit 28.. 

Vingt-neuf 29. 

Trente 30. 

Trente  et  un — -—.  31. 

Trente-deux ~~  .  32. 

Trente-trois — 33. 

Quaranto 40. 

Quc.ranto  et  un. . .». ~....  41. 

CJuarante-deux 42. 

Quanmte-trois 43. 

Cinquante 50. 

Cinquante  et  u' 51. 

Jinquante-deux . .. . -  52. 

Soixante » ^  60. 

Soixante  et  un .  Gl. 

Soixante-deux G2. 

Soixante  et  dix 70. 

Soixante-onze 71. 

Soixante-douze 72. 

Soixanto-treize — 73. 

Soixante-quatorze 74. 

Soixante-quinze. 75. 

Soixante-seize -... .-. 70. 

Soixante-dix-sept 77. 

Soixante-dix-huit 78. 

Soixante-dix-neuf 79. 

Quatre-vingts(2) ,  .^  .  80. 

Quatre-vingt-un 81. 

Quatre-vmgt-deux 82. 

Quatre-vingt-dix - 90. 

Quatre-vingt-onze 91. 

Quatre-vingt-douze  .- 92. 

Quatre-vingt-treize 93. 

Quatre-vingt-quatorze 94. 

Quatre-vingt-quinze... 95. 

Quatre-vingt-seize 9G. 

Quatro- vingt-dix-sept 97. 

Quatre  vingt-dix-huit 98.    I 

k^uatre  vingt-dix-neuf     99.  1 


Nom  I/res  Or  J  i  raJ 

Ordiiiaux,  Number* 

Seizierne ,  16th 

Dix-septieme -  17th 

Dix-huitieme 13th 

Dix-neuvieme - 19th 

Vingtieme 20th 

Vingt  et  unieme 21s» 

Vingt-deuxierae - -  «  22cL 

Vingt-troisieme  . .. . .  ~  .^  — ......  23d. 

Vingt-quatrieme 24 tk 

Vingt-cinquieme ~~~~  25th 

Vingt-sixieme ..^.^^,  26tli 

Vingt-septieme 27th 

Vingt-huitieme  — 2Slh 

Vingt-neuvieme -  . -  ~ — -  29th 

Trentieme.— ^  -  30th 

Trente  et  unieme 31st 

Trente-deuxieme — ~ 32d. 

Trente-troisieme 33<J. 

Quarantieme.., - 40th 

Quarante  et  unieme — .. ..  4 1st 

Quarar.to-deuxieme - 4'2d. 

Quararite-troisieino 43d. 

CinqnantiOme .   ,—- —  50th 

Cinquante  et  unidme 51st 

Cinquante-deuxieme  ^^..^  52d. 

&Jixantieme 60th 

Soixante  et  unieme Gist 

Soixante-deuxieme G'Jd. 

Soixante  et  dizieme      .    « 7()th 

Soixante-onzieme  ....... 71st. 

Soixante-douzieme ~  72tl. 

Soixante-treizieme 73d. 

Soixante-quatorzieme 74  tlj 

Soixante-quinzieme 75tli 

Soixante-seizieme . 76th 

Soixante-dix-septieme.  ~  . . ...  77th 

Soixante-dix-huitieme.. 78th 

Soixante-dix-neuvieme 79th 

Quatre-vingtieme 80th 

Quatre-vingt-unieme 81st. 

Quatre-vingt-deuxieme 82d. 

Quatre-vingt-dixieme -  .^ 90th 

Quatre-vingt-onzieme ~.  ^^.  91st. 

Quatre-vingt-douzieme  . .  .^ 92d 

Quatre-vingt-treizieme  « 93d, 

Quatrc- vingt-quatorzieme 94  th 

Quatre-vingt-quinzieme 95th 

Quatre-vingt-seizieme .- ^  _  96th 

Quatre-vingt-dix-septieme ^  97th 

Quatre-vingt-dix-huitieme 98th 

Quatre-vingt-dix-neuvieme 99lS 


1  In  vingt  the  t  is  silent,  but  sounded  in  vingt  et  un,  vingt-deux   to 

2  In  quatro-vingts  the  /  ^a  never  sounded. 


GRAMMATICAL     SYNOPSIS 


499 


Membra 
dtrdinaux. 


Cent  un  (not  cent  et  un) 
C^nt  deux 


Cardinal 

Numbers. 

-     .   100. 

101. 

102. 


Ccnttrois.  ....................  -  .,   103. 


Cent  dix  ...................  .  .....  - 

Cent  onze  ........................ 

Cent  vingt  ........................ 

Cent  vingt  et  un  .................. 


200. 
'201. 


Deux  cents 

Deux  cent  un  ............ 

Mille  (not  dix  cents)  .............    1000. 

Mille  un  ...........................  1001. 

Mille  deux.  &c  ....................  1002. 

Mille  cent  (onze  cents)  ...........  1  100. 

Mille  neuf  cents  (dix-neuf  cents)    1900. 


NomLres 
Ordinauf. 

Centieme 
Cent-unieme 
Cent-deuxieme  .  ~  ......  - 


Number* 

-  100th 
101st. 
102d. 


Cent-troisieme  ...............   .  .    103d. 


110.  Cent-dixieme  .   ,. 110th 

111.  Cent-onzieme lllth. 

120.  Cent-vingtieme ...   12G1.1. 

121.  Cent  vingt  et  usicme 121st. 

Deux  centiemc 200th. 

Deux  cent-unieme „ 201st. 

Millieme 1000th 

Mille-unieme 1001st. 

Mille-deuxieme,  &c 1002d. 

Mille-centieme,  (onzo-eontieme   1100th. 
Mille-neuf-ceatieme,    (dix-neuf- 

centieme  ~  ~ ...  ^. 1900th. 

After  which  the  French  do  not  count  any  more  by  hundreds,  as  the  English 
do.  They  do  not  say  :  Vingt,  vingt  et  un,  vingt-doux,  &c.,  cents ;  twenty, 
twenty-one,  twenty-two,  &c.,  hundred,  but : 


Deux  mille 2000. 

Deux  mille  cinq  cents  . — ~. 2500. 

Un  million ~~  1,000,000. 


Deux  millieme 2000th 

Deux  milJe  cinq-centieme 2500th. 

Millionicme millionth. 


In  dates,  Mille  is  spelt  Mil.     Mil  sept  cent  soixante-seize,  1776. 
Mil  huit  cent  quarante-neuf,  ou  Dix-huit  cent  quarante-neuf,  1849. 


llic  whole.  A  part. 

The  half.  The  third,  I. 

The  two-thirds,  f.   The  three-thirds. 
The  fourth  part,  the  i.     The  f  . 
The  fifth  part,  the  1-5.    The  4-5. 

The  sixth  part,  the  1-5,  and  so  forth, 

by  adding  ieme  to  the  cardinal. 
What  is  the  half  of  4  ?  It  is  2. 
What  is  that  of  5  ?  It  is  2  and  a  naif. 

What  is  the  !  of  6  ?     It  is  5  and 

i,  51. 
Which  is  the  fourth  of  11  ?     It  is  2f. 

The  |  are  8*. 

fc  142.  —  The  seasons  of  the  year  are  : 
The  spring.  The  summer. 

The  autumn,  or  fall.     The  winter. 


.  —  Names  of  the  months  of  the 
year. 

The  first  month  is  January. 
18  not  the  second  month  February  ? 
The  thin'  is  March. 


Le  tout,  1' unite.  Une  partie. 

La  moitie,  la  demie.    Le  tiers,  |. 
Lesdeux-tiers,  f.        Les  trois-tiere. 
Le  quart,  le  £.      Les  trois  quarts,  I, 
Le  cinquieme,  1<3  1-5.    Les  4  cin- 

quiemes. 
Le  sixieme,  le  1-6,  et  ainsi  de  suite, 

en  ajoutant  ieme  au  cardinal. 
Quelle  est  la  moitie  de  4  ?     C'eet  2. 
Quelle  est  celle  de  5?     C'est  2  et 

demi. 
Quels  sont  les  f  de  8  ?     C'est  5  cl 

un  tiers,  5y. 
Quel  est  le  quart  de  11  ?     C'est  2  ov 

f .    Les  |  sont  8*. 

Les  saisons  de  1'annee,  sont : 

Le  printemps,  (382.)     L'e'te,  (3$!,) 

L'automr.e.  L'hiver. 

Noms  des  mols  de  1'annee. 
Le  premier  mois  est  Janvier. 

Le  second  n'est-il  pas  Fevricr  ? 

Le  troisieme  est  Mars. 


600 


GRAMMATICAL     SYNOPSIS. 


April  May.  June. 

Jul*.  August.          September. 

October.      November.    December. 
Next  January.  Last  January. 

The  coming  February.    Last  March. 
In  April.  On  the  first  of  May. 

On  the  4th  of  July,  1776. 
New  Year's  day.        On  New  Year. 
I  wish  you  a  happy  New  Year. 
Christmas  day.  On  Christrias. 

fs  not  June  the  6th  month  ? 
STes,  it  is ;  and  September  is  the  9th. 
[low  many  days  are  there  in  July  ? 

There  are  31. 

How  many  are  there  in  August  ? 
Are  there  as  many  in  October  ? 
There  are  just  as  many, 
lias  September  as  many  ? 
No,  it  has  but  30,  the  same  as  April, 

June,  and  November. 
The    shortest    month  is  February, 

which,  in  common  years,  has  but 

28  days,  and  29  in  leap  (bissextile) 

years. 


Avril.          Mai.  Juin. 

Juillet.        Aout.  Septembre 

Octobre.  Novembre.  jDecemDic. 
Janvier  pro  chain.  Janvier  (lcrnt«jr 
Fevrier  qui  vient.  Mars  dernier. 
En  Avril.  Le  premier  Jc  I 

Le  quatre  de  Juillet,  1776. 
Le  jour  de  1'an.     Le  premie/  de  I*  an 
Je  vous  souhaite  une  bonno  annce. 
Le  jour  de  Noel. 
Juin  n'est-il  pas  le  6me  mois?  [9i 
Si  fait,  ce  Test;  et  Septemue  est 
Combien    de   jours    y   a-t  iJ    Jans 

Juillet  ?     II  y  en  a  31. 
Combien  y  en  a-t-il  en  Aofu  \ 
Y  en  a-t-il  autant  en  Octobic 
II  yen  a  tout  autant. 
Septembre  en  a-t-il  autant  ? 
Non,  il  n'en  a  que  30,  de  m6me  que 

Avril,  Juin,  et  Novembre. 
Le  mois  le  plus  court  est  Fevrier,  qui, 

dans   les    annees    communes,  n'a 

que  28  jours,  et  29  dans  les  annees 

bissextiles. 


iicr. 

*» 

Tan 

aee. 

^H 

1 


VEEBS. 


$  144.— INDICATIVE  PRESENT.— IndicattJ  Present. 

To  find  the  present  tense  of  a  verb,  its  present  participle  must  be  known, 
as  it  serves  to  form  the  three  persons  plural.  It  always  ends  in  ant :  and, 
as  all  grammars  and  dictionaries  give  it,  it  is  easily  learned.1  The  first, 
second,  and  third  persons  plural,  of  the  present  tense,  are  formed  by 
changing  the  termination  ant,  of  the  present  participle,  into  ons,  for  the 
first  person  ;  into  ez,  for  the  second,  and  into  ent,  for  the  third.2  Ex. : — 

1  The  formation  of  the  indicative  present  from  the  infinitive,  although  it  would  be 
preferable,  presents  too  many  exceptions,  and  is  cuusequently  too  difficult  for 
beginners. 

*  The  second  person  singular  always  ends  in  5.*     In  trie  first  conjugation,  tLc 
third  person  singular  ends  in  e,  and  is  the  same  as  the  first  person  ;  in  the  second  and 
third  conjugations,  it  ends  in  t ;  first  and  second  have  s.    In  th»  fourth  conjugation, 
it  adds  nothing  to  the  root,*  

*  Except  in  the  imperative  of  the  first  conjugation,  and  of  some  verbs  of  tact 
second,  where  the  5  is  dropped.    Ex.-:  Parle,  speak,  (thou.)    When  the  imperative 
however,  is  followed  by  one  of  the  pronouns,  en,  T/,  the  letter  s  is  not  dropped;  as. 
Jonnes-en,  a  ton  frere>  give  some  to  thy  brother;  portes-y  :es  livres,  take  thy  books 
ihither. 

f  By  root  we  understand  iJiai  part  of  the  verb  which  precedes  the  terminationn  er, 
V,  oir,  rtt  of  the  infinitive  :  far  esamule,  in  the  verb  finir,  to  finish,  Jin  in  the  rooi 


GRAMMATICAL     SYNOPSIS. 


501 


FIRST    CON.UGATION. 

Infinitive.  Present  participle. 

TJ  epeak.  Speaking. 

Present  tense. 

We  speak,  you  speak,  the)  speak. 
£  speak,  thou  speakest,  he  speaks. 

SECOND    CONJUGATION. 

I\>  fmisli.  Finishing. 

We  finish,  you  finish,  they  finish. 

[  finish,  thou  finishest,  he  finishes. 

THIRD    CONJUGATION. 

To  receive.  Receivi?ig. 

We  receive,  you  receive,  they  receive. 

[  receive,  thou  receivest,  he  receives. 

FOURTH    CONJUGAIEON. 

To  sell.  Selling. 

We  sell,  you  sell,  they  sell 
I  sell,  thou  sellest,  he  sells. 


PREMIERE    COJS  JUG  ALSO Jf. 

Infinitif.  Participe  present* 

Parler.  Parlant. 

Present. 

Nous  parlons,  vout  rarlez,  ils  parlent. 
Je  parle,  tu  paries,  il  parle. 

SECONDE    CONJUGATION. 

Finir.  Finis  s  ant. 

Nous  finissons,  vous  finissez,  ils  fi« 

Je  finis,  tu  finis,  il  finit.         [nissent. 

TROISIEME    CONJUGAISON. 

Recevoir.  Recevaid. 

Nous  recevons,  vous  recevez,  ils  re- 

Te  re9ois,  tu  regois,  il  regoit.  [§oivent. 

QUATRIEME    CONJUGAISON. 

Vendre.  Vendant. 

Nous  vendons,  vous  vendez,  ils  veil- 

Je  vends,  tu  vends,  il  vend.     [  denU 


HINT. — From  the  third  person  plural,  the  scholar  can  easily  learn  the 
Bingular. 

For  the  first  conjugation,  change  the  pronouns,  but  pronounce  the  verb 
just  like  the  third  person  plural:  Ils  parlent,  je  parle,  tu  parle,  il  parle. 

For  the  second,  third,  and  fourth  conjugations,  drop  the  last  mute  sylla- 
ble of  the  third  person  plural ;  then  the  remainder  will  be  the  sound  of  the 
singular. 

llsfinissent,  jefaii,  tu  fini,  ilfini. 

Us  regoivcnt,  je  re$oi,  tu  regoi,  il  regoi* 

llsvendent,  jeven,  tuven,  il  ven. 

The  scholar  haa  only  the  sounds  here  ;  the  correct  spelling  is  to  bo 
learned  by  the  written  directions  in  ($  144,  N.  2),  and  by  translating  the 
exercises.  This  answers  for  the  regular  conjugations,  and  many  of  the  irre- 
gular ones. 

(*  144.) 

(  Etre,*  etant. 

Nous  sommes,  vous  etes,  ils  sent. 


Exceptions  to  the  general  rule 

To  be,  being. 

We  are,  you  are,  they  are. 

To  have,  having. 

We  have,  you  have,  they  have. 

To  know,  knowing. 

We  know,  you  know,  they  know. 
To  do,  make,      doing. 
You  do,  they  do. 
To  say,  tell,        saying,  telling. 
You  say,  tell. 


Avoir,*  ay  ant. 

Nous  avons,  vous  avez,  ils  ont. 
S  avoir,*  sachant. 

Nous  savons,  vous  savez   ils  savant, 
Faire,*  faisant. 

Ire  reg.  vous  faites,  ils  font. 
JDire,*  disant. 

Ire  reg.  vous  dites.      3me  reg 


1  Tlic  third  person  plural  of  the  third  conjugation  offers,  as  may  bo  noon,  nn 
don  ;  us  tho  present  p.'irtirip'a  ;'*  changed  to  le^oivent. 


GRAMMATICAL     SYNOPSIS 


In  ($114,  N.  i,j  it  was  observed,  that  the  third  person  plural  of  the 
conjugation  "was  irregularly  formed ;  so  it  is  with  the  following  conjugations* 


1st. 

Alter, 

to  go; 

allant  : 

Us  vonl, 

they  go. 

2d. 

Venir, 

to  come  ; 

venant  : 

Us  viennent, 

they  come. 

Tenir, 

to  keep,  hold 

tenant  : 

Us  tiennent, 

they  hold. 

Acquerir 

to  acquire  ; 

acqueraji 

t  :     Us  acquit  rent, 

they  acquire. 

Dlourir, 

to  die  (lose  life) 

;  mourant 

Us  meurent, 

they  die. 

3d 

Recevoir  . 

to  receive  ; 

recevant 

its  regoivent, 

they  receive. 

Devoir, 

to  owe  ; 

deviant  : 

Us  doivext, 

they  owe. 

Mouvoir, 

to  move  ; 

mouvant 

Us  meuvent, 

fhey  move. 

Pcuvoir, 

to  be  able  ; 

pouvant 

ih  peuvent, 

they  can. 

Couloir, 

to  be  willing  ; 

voulant 

Us  veulent, 

they  will. 

till 

Boire, 

to  drink  ; 

buvant  : 

Us  boivent, 

they  drink. 

Prendre, 

to  take  ; 

prenant 

Us  prennent, 

they  take. 

1.  In  recevoir,  or  any  other  verb  in  which  the  c  is  soft  in  the  infinitive,  the, 
c  must  remain  so  throughout,  hence,  it  takes  a  cedilla  (5),  when  followed 
by  a,  o,  u.     Ex.    Je  regois,  I  receive ;  re$u,  received ;  forcer,  to  force ; 
forgant,  forcing,  &,c.  (241.) 

2.  In  verbs  ending  in  ger,  the  letter  e,  for  the  softening  of  the  sound,  ia 
retained  in  all  those  persons  where  g  is  followed  by  a  or  o.  (242.) 

3.  In  verbs  ending  in  ayer,  oycr,  uycr,  the  letter  y  is  changed  into  i,  in 
all  persons  where  it  is  followed  by  e  mute.  (24*.) 

4.  In  verbs  having  e(mute)  in  the  last  syllable  but  one  of  the  infinitive, 
the  letter  e  has  the  grave  accent  (e)  in  all  persons,  where  the  consonant 
immediately  after  it,  is  followed  by  e  mute,  as  in  mener,  to  guide,  to  take  ; 
promener,  to  walk  ;  achcver,  to  finish,  &.c.     As  : 


I  buy,  thou  buyest,  he  buys. 
I  lead,  thou  leadest,  he  leads. 
Do  you  take  him  to  the  play  ? 
I  do  take  him  thither.    • 
N.  B. 


J'achete,  tu  achctes,  il  achete. 
Je  mene,  tu  menes,  il  mene. 
Le  menez-vous  au  spectacle  ? 
Je  1'y  mene.  (251.) 

Except  with  the  terminations  eler,  eter,  in  which  the  consonant 


is  doubled.  (333.) 

•5.  In  verbs  having  e  (acute)  in  the  last  syllable  but  one  of  th«  infinitive, 
that  e  becomes  e  (grave)  \vhen  followed  by  a  mute  syllable.  As,  secher,  to 
dry ;  je  scche,  I  dry ;  Us  sechent,  they  dry.  Ceder,  to  yield ;  il  cede,  he 
yields,  &c.  (282.) 

.6.  The  English  present  tense,  expressed  (24*)  in  three  ways,  I  love,  I  do 
love,  I  am  loving,  is  translated  by  only  one  French  expression  :  faitne, 
Hence,  Je  Us,  corresponds  to,  I  read,  I  do  read,  I  am  reading.  The  French 
have,  however,  another  way  much  used  by  them,  although  unnoticed  in 
grammars.  The  true,  the  real  present  in  English  is  1  am  reading  ;  the 
corresponding  French  is  je  suis  a  lire.  It  consists  of  two  parts.  The  1st 
93  in  English  is  the  verb  to  be.,  (etre,)  in  all  its  persons ;  the  2d  is,  not  the  p  re 


1  Ard  aL  ir.  eve<rt  na  3/j<?r<revotr,  to  perceive;  conceioir,  to  concelv^  &  *. 


GRAMMATICAL     SVWOPSIS.  503 

sent  participle,  (reading,}  but  the  preposition  a,  followed,  of  course,  by  the 
infinitive,  (Z*>e ;)  for  recollect  RULE  1st.  Every  preposition,  except  en, 
governs  the  infinitive.  Then  je  suis  d  lire  corresponds  exactly  to  /  am 
reading,  although,  if  translated  literally,  it  would  mean,  I  am  to  read,  which 
signifies  a  very  different  thing.  But  never  mind  the  literal  sense,  take*  only 
the  common  acceptation  attached  to  the  expression,  (761,)  viz  : — 
I  am  reading.  [  read.  I  Je  suis  a  lire.  Je  lis. 

We  are  reading.  We  read.        |  Nous  sommes  a  lire.        N.  lisons, 

The  component  parts  of  this  expression  are  quite  familiar  to  the  student, 
ani  bnt  little  practice  will  enable  him  to  use  them  with  ease.  This  modfc 
of  forming  the  present  applies  to  every  other  tense. 


Were  yju  reading  ?  I  was. 

Was  he  writing  ?  He  was. 

When  they  will  be  eating. 
Call  us,  even  if  we  were  taking  tea, 

(even  should  we  be,  &c.) 
Will  they  not  be  playing  ?  Yes,  they 

will. 

8Kc  is  travelling,  is  she  not  ? 
Vhev  are  not  travelling,  are  they  ? 


Etiez-vous  a  lire  ?     J'et^.s  a  lire. 
Etait-il  a  ecrire  ?       II  etait  a  ecriio. 
Quand  ils  seront  a  manger. 
Appelez-nous    quand    memo    nous 

serions  a  prendre  le  the. 
Ne  seront-ils  pas  a  jouer  ?     Si  fait, 

ils  seront  a  jouer. 
Elle  est  a  voyager,  n'est-ce  pas  ? 
Est-ce  qu'ils  sont  a  voyager  ? 


(642,  N.  2.) 
Vnoa  art  listening,  art  thou  not  ?         I  Tu  es  a  ecouter,  n'est-ce  pas  ? 

PARFAIT1  ou  PRESENT  COMPOSE. 

Study  carefully  the  article,  and  the  example  at  (331,  §53.) 

$145. — The  English  Perfect  invariably  conveys  an  allusion  to  the  present , 
the  Parfait  not  only  conveys  an  allusion  to  the  present,  but  also  refers  tc 
actions  past  at  a  time  wholly  expired,  or  to  actions  expressed  by  the  English 
imperfect.  Hence,  it  corresponds  to  the  English  perfect  and  imperfect  tenses. 
The  French  use  it-  to  express  the  daily  occurrences  of  life. 

1.  How  long  is  it  since  you  tasted  coffee?  It  is  three  monlJis  since  I  tasted 
any.  Since  I  wrote  to  him,  France  has  become  a  republic.  (§  492.)  In 
these  sentences,  and  all  similarly  formed,  although  no  negative  is  used,  one 
is  evidently  implied,  or,  at  least,  a  negative  turn  may  be  given  to  them,  for 
the  first  means,  You  have  NOT  tasted  coffee  for  how  long  a  time  ?  The  second 
means,  I  nave  NOT  tasted  any  these  three  months.  And  the  third,  1  have  NOI 
written  to  him  for  some  time,  during  which  France  has  become  a  republic 
It  is  evident  that  the  same  negative  turn  cannot  be  given  to,  How  long 
is  it  since  your  co&sin  set  out  ?  since  you  dined  ?  you  cannot  say,  has  not  set 
out,  you  did  not  dine.  Consequently,  as  no  negative  is  implied,  say,  without 
the  NE,  Combien  y  a-t-il  que  votre  cousin  est  parti?  que  vous  avez  dlnet 

In  translating  the  sentences  in  which  a  negative  is  implied,  but  not  ex 

1  Frequently  called  Preterit  Indlfini.  J3ut  as  the  word  is  foreign  to  the  Enpliah 
conjugation,  it  has  no  definite  sense  for  the  American  pupil,  while  the  word  Par/ate 
UHTOoponding  to  his  own  Perfect,  offers  at  once  a  clear  idea. 


!  7*t; 

a 


GRAMMATICAL    SYNOPSIS 

pressed,  the  French  use  NE,  but  suppress  PAS  (that  is,  they  suppress 
part  of  the  negative,  instead  of  suppressing  it  altogether  as  the  English  do. 
Hence,  the  first  is  translated  by  Combieny  a-t-il  que  vous  N'avez  goute  de 
cafe  ?  The  second,  by  II  y  a  trois  mois  queje  N' en  ai  goute.  The  third,  by 
Depuis  que  je  NE  lui  ai  ecrit,  la  France  est  devenue  repuUiqne.  This  con- 
struction takes  place  only  after  il-y  a  and  depuis  que,  followed  by  a  definite 
period  of  time,  and  when  the  French  verb  is  in  the  parfait,  (English  perfect 
tense.)  In  the  present  tense,  PAS  is  used  :  as,  II  y  a  troia  mois  que  je 
goute  PAS  de  cafe,  It  is  three  months  since  I  taste  no  coffee,  or,  I  have  tastei 
no  coffee  these  three  months.  Depuis  que  je  ne  lui  ecris  PAS,  la  France 
&C.  Since  I  do  not  write  to  him,  France  has,  &c.  (492,  06s.  114.) 

2.  The  English  perfect,  formed  from  the  present  of  the  auxiliary  and  the 
past  participle,  as,  I  have  spoken ;  We  have  written  letters ;  He  has  exa- 
mined your  cloth  ;  is  the  only  one  usually  given  in  grammars;  but  there  is 
another,  formed  by  the  verbs  to  have  and  to  be,  prefixed  to  the  present  par 
ticiple  ;  as,  /  have  bee?i  speaking  ;  we  have  been  writing  letters  ;  he  has  been 
examining  your  cloth  ;  which,  although  not  commonly  found  in  grammars 
•and  not  quite  synonymous  with  the  other  perfect,  is,  nevertheless,  constantly 
used  in  conversation.     Some  grammarians  have  introduced  it,  and  call  it 
the  compound  form  of  the  perfect.     As  the  French  have  no  tense  similarly 
constructed,  they  use  the  parfait,  and  say:  Taiparle  ;  nous  avons  ecrit  des 
lettres  ;  il  a  examine  votre  drap. 

3.  The  English  say,  1  come  from  my  store,  to  express  that  the  act'-on  ot 
coming  has  just  taken  place.     But,  when  any  other  verb  is  used,  such  as, 
to  speak,  to  write,  &c.,  instead  of  saying,  I  come  from  speaking,  from 
writing,  &c.,  they  change  it  to,  I  have  just  spoken,  written,  &c.    The  French 
say  :  Je  viens  de  mon  magasin,  to  signify  that  the  action  of  coming  has  jnst 
been  performed,  and  they  apply  the  same  mode  of  expression  for  any  other 
action.     Hence,  they  say:  Je  viens  deparler,  d'ecrire,  &c.  (492,  06s.  115.) 

Jt  is  hoped  that  this  brief  explanation  will  remove  a  difficulty,  which,  in 
this  case,  the  great  difference  of  construction  presents  to  many  pupils. 


FIRST  FUTURE.— Futur. 

$  146. — 1.  The  Future  Tense,  in  all  French  verbs,  ends  as  follows:  roi, 
ras,  ra,  rons,  rez,  ront.  Therefore,  as  soon  as  we  know  one  person,  we  also 
know  the  others.  (461.) 

2.  The  first  person  singular  is  formed  from  the  infinitive  by  changing  the 
final  r  of  the  first  and  second  conjugations;  the  ot;-,  of  the  third,  and  the 
rf  of  the  fourth,  into  rat.  Ex. : — 


(njiiiitive. 
To  love, 
l\>  finish, 
To  receive, 
To  restore, 


Future. 

I  shall  or  will  love. 
I  shall  or  will  finish. 
I  shall  or  will  receive. 
I  shall  CT  will  restore. 


Infnitif.  Futur. 

1st  Conj.     Aimer,  j' aimer  ai. 

2d    "          Finir,  je  finirai. 

3d    "          Recevoir,  je  recevral 

4th  "          Rendre,  je  rendrai. 


GRAMMATICAL     SYNOPSIS. 


505 


Futurs. 
Tu  aimeras.  Tu  finiru?. 

II  aimera  II  finira. 

Nous  aimer<?ws.  Nous  fmirons. 

Vous  aimeres.  Vous  finirez. 

Us  aimeront.  Us  fimro?it. 

Tu  recevras  Tu  rendras. 

II  recevra.  II  rendra. 

Nous  recevrons.  Ncus  remb-ons, 

Vous  recevrez.  Vous  rendrez. 

Us  reccvro?it.  (4G1.)  Ils  rcndro?if. 


Thau  shall  or  wilt  love,  ihou  shall  or 

wilt  finish. 
He  shall  or  will  love,  he  shall  or  will 

finish. 
We  shall  or  vs  ill  love,  we  shall  or  will 

finish, 
You  shall  cr  will  love,  you  shall  or 

will  finish. 
They  shall  or  will  love,  they  shall  or 

will  finish. 
Thou  shalt  or  wilt  receive,  thou  shalt 

or  wilt  restore. 
He  shall  or  will  receive,  he  shall  or 

will  restore. 
We  shall  or  will  receive,  we  shall  or 

will  restore. 
You  shall  or  "will  receive,  you  shall 

or  will  restore. 
They  shall  or  will  receive,  they  shall 

or  will  restore. 

The  future  tense  is  sometimes  connected  with  if;  sometimes  with  when, 

3.  In  English,  you  may  say:  I  will  go,  if  he  lends  me  his  horse;  or,  If  In 
will  lend  me  his  horse.     In  the   first:  if  he  lends  me,  &c.,  lends  is  in  the 
present.     In  the  second  :  If  he  will  lend  me,  &c.,  will  lend,  appears  to  be 
in  the  first  future  tense,  although  it  is  actually  in  the  present ;  for,  will  lend, 
in  that  case,  does  not  mean  shall  lend,  but  is  willing  to  lend,  or  agrees  to 
lend.     Scholars  are  very  apt,  in  similar  sentences,  to  take  the  word  will  aa 
a  sign  of  the  future,  and  to  use  that  tense  in  French,  while  they  should  use 
the  present.     /  will  go  if  he  lends  me  his  Jiorse,  is  readily  and  correctly 
translated  by:  J'irai  s'i'Z  me  prtte  son  cheval.     But,  1  will  go  if  he  will 
lend  me  his  horse,  is  as  readily  but  incorrectly  translated  by  :  Tirai  s'il  me 
pretera  son  cheval.     It  ought  to  be  :  J'irai  s't'Z  veut  me  prefer  son  cheval ; 
using  the  present  tense  of  vouloir.     Si,  in  all  similar  phrases,  must  be  fol- 
lowed in  French  by  the  present  tense,  never  by  the  future.  (4G2,  Obs.  105 
and  N.) 

N.  B.  Translate  if  he,  if  they,  by  s't'Z  and  s'ils.     In  no  other  case  is  titf 
i  of  si  cut  off  by  an  apostrophe. 

4.  On  the  contrary,  the  verb  following  quand,  when,  must  be  in  the  future 
tense,  although  the  English  present  is  then  used;  as,  I  will  go  when  you 
do,  (or  when  you  go.)     J'irai  quand  vous  irez,  (not  vous  allez.} 

II  Pecrira  si  vous  Vecrivez. 


lie  will  write  it  if  you  do. 

lie  will  write  it  when  you  do. 

I  will  tell  you  of  it,  if  you  are  here. 

I  will  tei.  you  of  it,  when  you  are 


here. 

5.  If,  instead  of 

4:? 


II  Tecrira  quand  vous  Ticrirez. 

Je  vous  le  dirai,  si  vous  ctcs  ici. 

Je  vous  le  dirai,  quand  vous  se^ot 


ici.  (462,  Obs.  106.) 
,  quand,  the  words  what,  ce  qui,  cc  quc,  as  *(*m  a* 


506  GRAMMATICAL      SYKOP3I8. 

Riissitot  que,  des  que,  after  apres  quo  ;  as,  commc,  u<keie,  ou,  arc  used,  l.hs 
French  future  must  be  employed. 

She  will  sing  what  you  please.  (46*, 

06*.  107.) 
He  will  return  as  soon  as  you  start. 

W<a  will  do  it  after  you  have  done  it. 

Ho  will  put  it  where  you  please. 
Ho  will  do  it  as  you  wish. 


Eile  chantera  ce  qui  vous  plaira, 
Elle  chantera  ce  que  vous  voudrez. 
II  reviendra  aussitot  que  vous  par- 

tirez. 
Nous  le  ferons  apres  que  vous  Fan 

rez  fait. 

II  le  mettra  ou  vous  voudrez. 
II  le  fera  comme  vous  le  souhaiterez 


$147.— OF  THE  IMPERFECT.— De  VImparfait. 

1.  The  Imperfect  of  the  Indicative,  in  all  French  verhs,  ends  as  fellows 

ais,  ais,  ait,  ions,  iez,  aient.  (591.) 

Hence,  as  soon  as  one  person  is  known,  all  the  others  may  be  formed. 

2.  The  first  person  singular  is  formed  from  the  present  indicative  bj 
changing  the  final  ons  of  the  first  person  plural  to  ais.     As  :• 


Nous 

JYJe 

tu 

il,  elle,  on 

nous 

vous 

ils,  elles 

Avons, 

avafc, 

avais, 

avait, 

avions, 

aviez, 

avaient.(') 

Croyon5j 

croyafc, 

croyais, 

croyait, 

croyions, 

croyiez, 

cr»yaicnt. 

Bisons, 

disafc, 

disais, 

disait, 

disions, 

disiez, 

disaient. 

Faisow5,(2) 

faisai5,(2) 

faisais, 

faisait, 

faisions, 

faisiez, 

faisaient. 

from  : 

Fesons,(2) 

fesafc,(2) 

fesais, 

fesait, 

fesions, 

fesiez, 

fesaient. 

We  have  begun  with  those  verbs,  because  the  scholar  already  knows  soric 
of  their  persons  ;  the  four  regular  conjugations  are  as  follows: — 


PRESENTS. 

IMPERFECTS. 

IMPARFAITS. 

T.V«            "mis 

(  I  was  speaking, 

>  Je  parlais, 

jiarlais, 

parlait. 

speaK,      parlons 

(      used  to  speak. 

)  parlions, 

parliez, 

parlaient. 

r     •                       • 

<  I  was  finishing, 

1  Je  finissais, 

finissais, 

iinissait. 

' 

(      used  to  finish. 

J  finissions, 

finissiez, 

finissaient 

recci-  •>,  recevons 

(  I  was  receiving, 
(     used  to  receive. 

)  Je  recevais, 
)  recevions, 

recevais, 
receviez, 

recevait. 
recevaient. 

sell,          vendons 

(  I  was  selling, 
(     used  to  fell. 

)  Je  vendais, 
)  vendions, 

vendais, 
vendiez, 

vendait. 
veudttient 

3    The  only  exception  to  this  rule 

is: 

We  are. 

I  was,  or 

)  J'  eta  is, 

ttais, 

etait. 

Nous  sommes. 

iisevl  to  be. 

)  etions, 

etiez, 

e  latent. 

1  The  orthography  of  the  first  and  second  persons  singular,  and  of  the  third  persoL 
singular  and  plural,  of  the  imperfect,  was  formerly  je  parlois,  tu  parlois,  il  parloil, 
ils  parloient.    Some  authors  still  persist  in  this  way  of  spelling,  but  they  ought  no! 
to  be  imitated.    The  orthography  w*  follow  was  first  proposed  in  1675,  by  a  lawyai 
of  tho  name  of  Berain,  and  has  since  oeen  adopted  by  the  generality  of  French  au 
thors.    According  to  the  ancient  orthography,  the  conditionals,  and  other  words,  a* 
j'aimerais,  paraitre,  disparaltre,  faible,  monnaie,  Anglais,  Francais,  Hollandais, 
Tflandais,  &c.,  were  written:   j^aimerois,  paroltre,  disparoltre,  foible,  monnoic* 
Anglois,  Francois,  Hollandois,  Irlandois,  &c. 

2  Faisais,  fesais,  whether  spelt  fat  or  fe,  the  first  syllable  in  the  plum!  of  tn« 
present,  in  all  the  imperfect  future,  and  conditionnel,  is  pronounced  fe.,  tho  e  beivj< 
mutn 


GRAMMATICAL     SYNOPSIS.  507 

4.  The  imperiect  expresses  an  action  begun,  but  not  ended  at  the  psu* 
lime  spoken  of — or  else  as  yet  going  on.    1  was  writing  at  noon,  means,  i 
Had  begun  to  write,  Init  I  had  not  finished  at  noon.     I  used  to  ride  when  I  was 
in  the  country,  means,  I  continued  to  ride,  &c.     The  English  given  above, 
corresponds  to  the  French  imperfect,  and  if  it  were  always  employed,  there 
would  be  no  difficulty  in  the  use  of  the  French  tense  ;  but  the  other  form 
of  the  English  imperfect,  viz  :  1  spoke,  I  finished,  I  received,  1  sold,  is  fre- 
quently used  ;  and  thence  the  difficulty  arises  ;  for,  1  spoke,  I  finished,  &c., 
mu»;  be  translated  by  the  French  imperfect,  only  when  they  mean  I  was 
f peaking,  or  used  to  speak  ;  was  finishing,  or  used  to  finish,  &c.  (591,  &c.) 

5.  Wh3n  the  first  person  plural  of  the  present  indicative  ends  in  ions,  aa 
n3ua  oublions,  we  forget ;  nous  rions,  we  laugh ;  nous  prions,  we  pray ; 
the  first  and  second  persons  plural  of  the  imperfect  of  the  indicative,  have- 
double  i.  (GO1.)     Ex.  Nous  oubliions,  nous  riions,  &c. 

6.  When  the  same  person  plural  ends  in  yons,  put  an  i  after  :he  y.  As, 
Nous  croyo?is,  we  think  ;  nous  croyions,  we  were  thinking  ;  nous  employons, 
use ;  nous  employions,  were  using.     And  likewise,  nous  nous  asscyions, 
nous  e?ivoyio?is,  essayions,  and  fuyio?is ,  voyions,  &c.  (601.) 

$  118.— POTENTIAL,  IMPERFECT.— Conditional. 

1.  In  every  French  verb  it  ends  in  :  rais,  rais,  rait,  rions,  riez,  raieni. 

2.  Its  first  person  singular  is  formed  by  adding  s  to  the  first  person  singulai 
of  the  French  futur.  (See  461,2,  &c. — §  146.)  Futur,  rai;  conditionnel,  rais. 
J  aurai,  j'aurais.     Consequently  the   conditionnel   is   irregular  when  the 
future  is.  ($  146.) 


I  should  have,  thou  wouldst  have,  he 

or  she  would  have. 
We  should  have,  you  would  have, 

they  would  have. 

1  should  be,  thou  wouldst  be,  he  or 

she  would  be, 
We  should  be,  you  would  be,  they 

would  be. 
t  should  speak,  thou  wouldst  speak, 

he  or  she  would  speak. 
We  should  speak,  you  would  speak, 

they  would  speak. 

3.  As  its  name  implies,  the  conditionnel  is  always  connected  with  a  con- 
dition either  expressed  or  understood.  When  si  (if)  accompanies  it,  that 
si  must  be  followed  by  the  French  imperfect,1  regardless  of  the  English 
ic  rise. 

i  TV  e  have  already  seen  (402.  Qbs.  105)  that  si,  (if,  meaning  granting,  that^^s.', 
Connects  \\iefutur  and  present.  Now,  we  add,  that  si  connects  the  condition-Mi 
and,  4tnnarfa.it.  When  si,  however,  means  whether,  it  is  followed  by  the  condi- 
lionnel. f  do  not  know  if  (whether)  I  would  go,  even  if  (supposing  that)  I  ttrora 
tarited.  J'e  ne  sais  pas  51"  j'irais  (cond.)  moine  gj  j'ctais  (imparf )  invite. 


J'aurais,  tu  aurais,  il  ou  elle  aurait. 

Nous   aurions,  vous   auriez,  ils  on 
elles  auraient. 

Je  serais,  tu  serais,  il  on  elle  serait. 

Nous  serions,  vons  striez,  ils  ou  ellea 

seraient. 
Je  parlerais,  tu  parlerais,  il  ou  elle 

parlerait. 
Nous  parlerions,  vous  parleriez,  ila 

ou  elles  parleraient. 


608 


GRAMMATICAL     SYNOPSIS. 


If  I  had  money  I  would  ha,ve  a  new 

coat. 
rf  thbu  Qouldst  do  thi'3  thou  wouldst 

do  that. 

If  he  could  lie  would. 
if  he  would  he  could. 


Si  j' avals  de  Taigent   j'aurais  ua 

habit  neuf. 
Si  tu  savais  faire  ceci  tu  voudfoia 

faire  cela. 

S'il  pouvait  il  voudrait. 
S'il  voulait  il  pourrait. 

4.  COULD  and  WOULD,  connected  with  the  potential,  always  allude  to  a 
future  action r  and  are  then  translated  by  the  conditio?mel  or  by  the  imper 
feet  after  si.  But  COULD  and  WOULD,  alluding  to  a  past,  instead  of  a  future 
action,  are  not  to  be  rendered  by  the  conditionnel,  but  by  a  past  tense.  1 
COULI,  by  fai  pu—je  pouvais,  &c.  I  WOULD,  by  fai  vouhi — -je  vou- 

•MlSj   &C. 

f  wDuld  go  if  I  could. 

Did   John  and  his  sister  go  to  the 

party  last  night  ?   No  ;  John  could 

not  go,  consequently  she   would 

not  go.  (622,  N.  at  page  326.) 


J'irais,  (cond.)  si  je  pouvais.  (in  pa.) 

Jean  et  sa  so3ur  sont-ils  alles  a  la 

partie  hier  soir  ?     Non  ;  Jean  ne 

pouvait  pas  y  aller,  consequem- 

ment  elle  n'a  pas  voulu  y  aller. 


5.  When  I  wish  is  followed  by  the  English  imperfect,  it  usually  means. 
I  should  like  to,  and  must  be  translated  by  je  voudrais,  (G22,  N.  2.) 
I  wish  I  knew  it — I  had  it.  Je  voudrais  le  savoir — 1'avoir.  (R.  3.1 

(282,  065.  65.) 
I  wish  he  knew  it.  (§  151—12.)  Je  voudrais  qu'il  le  sut. 


$  149.— POTENTIAL    MOOD,    PERFECT    TENSE.— Condiltonn 

Compose. 

1.  This  is  formed  from  the  present  of  the  conditional  of  the  auxiliary,  an 
the  past  participle  of  the  verb  to  be  conjugated.  (602.) 


I  should,  thou  wouldst,  he  or  she 

would  have  spoken. 
We  should,  you  would,  they  would 

have  spoken. 

I  should,  thou  wouldst,  j 

he     or     she     would  >  departed. 

have  ) 

We        should,        you) 

would,    they    would  S  departed. 

have  ) 

If  I  had  received  my  money,  I  would 

have  bought  new  shoes, 
?.f  you  had  risen  early,  you  would 

not  have  caught  a  cold. 

If  oho  had  come,  would    you  have 

gone  ? 

cTad  he  been  seen,  ha  would  have 
been  taken. 


J'aurais,  tu  aurais,  il  ou  elle  aurau 

parle. 
Nous   aurions,   vous   auriez,    ils 

elles  auraient  parle. 

Je  serais,  tu  serais,)      parti ; 
il  ou  elle  serait     \  fern,  partie. 


" 


Nous  serions,  votis)  pi.  max.  partis; 
seriez,  ils  ou  elles  >  pi.  fern,  par- 
seraient  )  ties. 

Si  j'avais  re$u  mon  argent,  j'aurais 

achete  des  souliers  neufs. 
Si  vous  vous  etiez  leve   de  bonno 

heure,  vous  ne  vous  seriez  pas  en- 

rhume. 
Si  eLe  etait  venue,  seriez-vous  parti  \ 

S'il  ivait  eto  vu,  il  aurait  gte  pria 


GRAMMATICAL     SYNOPSIS. 


509 


2.  With  the  conditifltmel  compose,  si,  (if,)  is  generally  followed  by  thf 
pluperfect,  as  seen  fibove. 

3.  Although  grammarians  usually  give  the  imperfect  of  the  potential 
with  its  four  signs,  would,  could,  should,  might,  as  a  translation  of  the  con- 
ditionnel,  students  must  not  infer  that  the  single  French  expression  corre- 
sponds accurately  to  the  four  English  ones.     Would  usually  stands  for  the 
conditionnel,  and  so  does  should,  when  it  does  not  mean  ought  to;  bat 
could  and  might  ought  always  to  he  expressed  by  ihe  French  verb  pouvoir. 


I  would  or  should  go,  if  I  could. 

I  should  or  ought  to  go,  if  I  could. 

I  could  go,  if  I  would. 

I  might  go,  if  I  would. 

1  ought  to  write,  if  I  could.  ($  14C.) 


J'irais  si  je  pouvais. 
Je  devrais  y  aller  si  jc  pouvais. 
Je  pourrais  y  aller  si  je  voulais. 
Je  pourrais  peut-etre  y  aller,  &c. 
Je  devrais  ecrire  si  je  pouvciis. 


Let  these  be  models  of  those  different  acceptations,  and  for  the  compost : 


I  would  or  shou'.a  have  gone,  if  I  had 

been  able. 
I  should  (ought  to)  have  gone,  had  I 

been  able. 

I  could  have  gone,  if  I  had  wished. 
I  might  have  gone,  if  I  had  wished. 


J'y  serais  alle  sifavais  pu. 
J'aurais  du  y  aller  sifavais  pu. 

Vaurait  pu  y  aller  si  j'avais  voulu. 
J'aurais  peut-etre  pu  y  aller  si  j' avals 
voulu. 

4.  When  I  wish  is  followed  by  the  English  pluperfect,  i.t  means  I  should 
have  liked,  and  must  be  translated  by  faurais  voulu . . . 


I  wish  I  had  been  able  to  go. 

1  wish  I  had  known  it.  (282,  Obs.  65.) 

We  wish  she  had  been  able  to  go. 

\rou  vt '?b  we  had  known  it  sooner. 


J'aurais  voulu  pouvoir  y  aller. 
J'aurais  voulu  le  savoir.  (R.  3.) 
Nous  aurions  voulu  qu'elle  peut  y 

aller. 
Vous    auriez    voulu    quo     nous    le 

sussions  plus  tot  (que  nous  Veu*- 

sions  su.) 


$150.— OF  THE  IMPERATIVE.— De  Vlmperatif. 

1.  In  English,  by  omitting  tho  nominative  you  of  the  second  person 
of  the  indicative  mood,  present  tense,  you  obtain  the  second  person  plural 
of  the  Imperative.  As :  Indicative  present,  you  come,  imperative,  come  ; 
you  go,  go;  you  write,  write,  &c.  It  is  the  same  in  French.  Hence, 
from  vous  venez,  by  omitting  the  nominative,  vous,  you  obtain  vcncz  for  tha 
imperative,  second  person  plural.  From  vous  allez,  allez ;  from  vous 
icrivez,  ecrivez,  &c. 

How  do  you  obtain  the  2d  person  plu-  Comment  obtencz-vous  la  2do  per- 

ral  of  the  imperative  I  sonne  plur.  de  1'imperatif  ? 

By  omitting,  as  in  English,  the  nomi-  En  omettant,  comme  en  Anglais, 

native,  you,  of  the  present  indi-  le  nominatif  vous  de  I'indicatif 

cative.  present. 

Are  there  any  excepttcns  to  this  rule  1  Y  a-t-il  des  exceptions  a  cctfo  regie  f 


GRAMMATICAL     SYNOPSIS. 

Yea    ihere  are  four  in  French,  viz:       Oui,  il  y  en  a  quitre  en   Fran  gals 

savoir : 


INDICATIF.  IMI>ERATIF. 

Vcus  avez,  you  have.    -Ayez,  have. 
Vr>us  savez,  you  know.  Sachez,  know. 


INDICATIF. 
Vous  ttes,  you  are.  Soyez,  be. 

Vous  voulez,  you  will.      Veuillez,  br/ 


willing. 

N,  B.  In  reflective  verbs  there  are  two  pronouns,  vous,  of  the  same  per8 
Bon,  a  nominative  and  objective  one  ;  Vous  vous  habillez,  you  dress  your- 
self. When,  to  form  the  imperative,  yov  omit  the  nominative  vous,  you^ 
the  objective  vous,  yourself,  remains  with  the  verb,  viz :  habillez-t'OM?, 
dress  yourself ;  amusez-vous,  enjoy  yourself.  (431.) 

HINT. — We  have  in  this  article  put  a  few  questions  and  answers  in 
French,  to  show  the  teacher  and  student  how  easily  it  can  be  done,  and  to 
induce  them  to  attempt  it. 

2.  The  first  person  plural  is  in  French  obtained  by  dropping  the  nomi- 
native nous,  we.     Hence,  nous  venons,  we  come,  becomes  venous,  let  us 
come ;  nous  allons,  we  go :  allons,  let  us  go ;  nous  ecrivons,  we  write  ; 
Kcrivo?is,  let  us  write,  &c. 

Comment  obtenez-vous  la  Ire  per-  j  En  omettant  le  nominatif  nous  du 
sonne  pluriel  de  i'impcratif  ?  I      present  de  1'indicatif. 

3.  Ayons,  let  us  have  ;  soyons,  let  us  be  ;  sachons,  let  us  know  ;  veuillons, 
'ct  us  be  willing,  are  the  four  exceptions  to  this  rule. 

4.  Let  me,  lojssez-moi,  followed  both  in  English  and  French  by  an  infini- 
ti"e,  as,  Let  me  see,  laissez-moi  voir  ;  let  me  go,  laissez-moi  oiler  ;  let  me 
be,  laissez-moi  etre  /  let  me  have,  laissez-moi  avoir  ;  let  me  read,  laissez- 
moi  lire,  &c.,  may  be  considered  as  the  first  person  singular  of  the  impera- 
tive.   This  is  an  innovation,  I  know,  therefore  I  merely  suggest  its  adoption. 
If  introduced  in  the  imperative  of  every  verb,  the  expression,  let  me,  laissez- 
moi,   so  frequently  used  in  both  languages,  will  soon  become   perfectly 
familiar.     But  if  not  placed  there,  as  it  has  no  other  appropriate  situation; 
it  is  usually  overlooked  and  not  learned. 


What  can  be  considered  as  the  first 
person  singular  of  the  imperative  ? 

Let  me,  followed  by  the  infinitive  of 
the  verb  to  be  conjugated. 

Let  me  do  it — tell  it  to  them. 


Que  peut-on  considerer  comme  la 
Ire  pers.  sing,  de  1'imperatif  ? 

Laissez-moi,  suivi  par  1  infinitif  du 
verbe  qu'on  conjugue. 

Laissez-moi  le  faire — le  leur  dire. 


5.  The  second  person  singular  is  obtained,  in  all  French  verbs,  from  the 
first  person  singular  of  the  indicative,  by  omitting  the  pronoun  je,  I 

Present.  Imperative.  I  Present  Imperat.  2d pers.  sixg. 

I  speak,  speak  thou.  I  Je  parle,  parle.1 

i  When  the  second  person  singular  of  the  imperative  ends  in  e,  it  takes  s  after  it, 
Before  tho  relative  pronouns  en,  y.  Ex.  Offrts  en  a  to,  stzur,  offer  some  to  thy  sister, 
portes-y  tes  livres,  carry  thy  books  thither.  But  when  en  is  a  preposition,  the  impe- 
rative takes  no  s.  Ex.  Donn*,  en  cctte  occasion,  des  preuvcs  de  ton  zele  ;  Give,  o« 
this  otnasion,  proofs  of  thy  zeal. 


GRAMMATICAL     SYNOPSIS. 


511 


Imperative. 
come  thou. 
perceive  thou. 
take  ihou. 


Present. 

Je  viens, 
J'aj.er5ois, 
Je  prends, 


Imperat.  %d  pera.  sing. 
viens. 


prends. 


I  come, 
I  perceive 
I  take, 

The  five  following  verbs  must  be  excepted  from  this  rule  :  fai,  I  have  , 
imperat.  aie,  have  thou  ;  je  suis,  I  am  ;  sois,  be  thou  ;  je  vais,  I  go  •  va,  go 
thou  ;  je  sai's,  I  know  ;  sache,  know  thou  ;  je  vcux,  I  am  willing  ;  veuille, 
be  thou  willing. 

The  imperative  va  takes  s,  when  it  is  followed  by  the  relative  pronoun  y. 
£x.  Vas-y,  go  thou  thither  ;  but  when  there  is  another  verb  after  the  pro- 
noun y,  va  must  be  written  without  an  s.  Ex.  Va  y  donner  Vordre,  go 
thither  to  give  the  order  ;  va  y  faire  un  tour,  go  thither  to  take  a  turn.  In 
the  expression  va-t'en,  go  away,  an  apostrophe  must  be  placed  ^after  the 
letter  t,  and  not  a  hyphen,  as  it  is  not  here  the  euphonic  t,  but  te,  an  apos- 
trophe supplying  the  place  of  c  before  a  vowel. 

6.  The  third  persons  singular  and  plural  are  like  the  same  persons  of  tho 
subjunctive  present,  ($  151  —  1,)  omitting  the  antecedent  which  governs  that 
mood,  but  retaining  the  que,  and  the  pronouns  il,  Us,  die,  elles,  on.     Tho 
other  persons  admit  of  no  pronouns  before  them.     Let  him  go,  qu'il  aille  ; 
ibt  them  come,  quails  mcnnent  ;  let  anyone  speak,  qu'on  parle  ;   come, 
eiens  ;  let  us  see,  voyons  ;  know,  saclicz. 

7.  Imperative  of  the  five  irregular  verbs  :  — 


Let  me  have,  have  (thou), 

et  him  have. 

Laissez-moi  avoir,aie,          qu'il  ait. 

Let  us  have,  have  (ye), 

et  them  h. 

Ayons,                      aycz,       qu'ils  aiont. 

Lot  me  be,    "be  (thou), 

et  him  be. 

Laissez-moi  ctre,  sois,        qu'il  soil. 

Let  us  be,      be  (ye), 

et  them  bo. 

Voyons,                    soyez,     qu'ils  soient. 

Let  me  go,     go  (thou), 

et  her  go. 

Laissez-moi  allcr,  va,    •      qu'elle  aille. 

Let  us  go,      go  (ye), 

et  them  go. 

Allons,                     allez,      qu-elles  aillent. 

Let  me           know(thou), 

e  tone  know. 

L.-rnoi  savoir,        sache,     qu'on  sache. 

know,  . 

Let  us  k.,      know  (ye), 

et  all  know. 

Sachons,                  snchez,  quetoussachent 

Let  me  be      be  willing, 

et  him  will. 

Laissez-moi            veuille,  qu'il  veuille. 

willing, 

vouloir. 

Let  us  be  w.,  be  willing, 

et  them  will. 

Veuillons,               veuillez,  qu'ils  veuillent 

8.  Examples  for  the  regular  verbs  : — 

Present 

Lef  me          • 
Laissez-ir-  i  parler, 
finir, 
recevoir, 
perdre, 


Imperative. 


You 

apeak, 

finish, 

receive 

lose, 


vous 

parlez, 

finissez, 

recevez, 

perdez, 


thou 
parle, 

finis, 

recois, 

perds, 


Let  us 

parlons, 
finissons, 
recevons, 
perdons, 


you 

parlez. 

finissez. 

recenez 

perdez 


Let  me  not 
break, 
build, 
owe, 

i eetore , 


NEGATIVELY. 

Nemelaissezpas  Do  (thou)  not 

casser,  no  casse  pas, 

batir,  ne  batis  pas, 


devoir, 
rondre, 


ne  dois  pas, 
ne  rends  pas, 


NEGATIVEME^I. 

Let  us  not....     Do  (you)  not 
ne  cassons  pas,    ne  casse?  pas. 
nebatissons  pas,  ne  batisa*zpa« 
ne  devons  pas,     ne  devez  pas. 
ne  rendons  pas,   K9  rendez  pas 


512 


GRAMMATICAL    SYNOPSIS 


Affirmatively,  the  objective  pronouns  arc  placed  alter :  (V5  54,  55, 


Let  me 
took  for  it, 
punish  them, 
perceive  some, 
eel?  ft  to  yon, 
go  there,  to  it,     y  aller, 
take  him  there,    1'y  mener 


Laissez-moi  Do  (thou)   ... 

le  chercher,  cherche-le, 

les  punir,  punis-moi, 

en  apercevoir,  apercois-en, 

vousle  vencre,  vends-le  lui, 


vas-y,  (O6.at5  )  allons-y 
menes-v-moi,       menons-v-en 


Let  us~. . .  Do.-  .. 

cherchons-le,       chercliez-l'y. 
punissons-les,      puriissez-nous, 
apercevons-en,    apercevez-en-uu 
vendons-la-leur,  vendez-nouH  «w 
allez-y. 


inenez-nous-v 


Negatively,  the  objective  pronouns  are  placed  before. 


Let  me  not       Ne  me  laissez  pas 

Do  not  

Let  us  not.... 

Do  not.  ... 

bring  it, 

Papporter, 

ne  les  apporte 

ne  leur  appor- 

n'en     apportaa 

pas, 

tons  rien, 

plus. 

jo  there,  to  it, 

y  aller, 

n'y  va  pas, 

n'y  allons  pas, 

n'y  allezplus. 

lend  him  any, 

lui  en  preter, 

ne"  m'en  prete 

ne  le  lui  pretona 

ne  »a  leur  pretci 

pas, 

plus, 

pas. 

awe  them,   to 

les  leur  devoir, 

ne  lui  dois  rien, 

ne  leur  en  de- 

ne  la  lui  devea 

them, 

vons  pas, 

pas. 

Imperalif  des  Verbes 

Rejleclds. 

Let  me 

Laissez-moi 

thyself, 

ourselves, 

yourself-ves. 

dress  myself, 

m'habiller, 

habilie-toi, 

habillons-nous, 

habillez-vous. 

cure  myself, 

me  guerir, 

gueris-toi, 

guerisgons-nous, 

guerissez-voua. 

eit  down, 

m'asseoir, 

assie<ls-toi, 

asseyons-nous, 

asseyez-voug. 

put  myself, 

mo  rnettre, 

mets-toi, 

mettons-nous, 

mettez-vous. 

go  away, 

m'en  aller, 

va-t'en,(N.  B.  at  i.)  allons-nous-en, 

allez-vous-en. 

NEGATIVEMENT. 

Let  me  not      No  mo  laissez  pas    Do  not Let  us  not Do  not 

go  to  bed,           me  coucher,       ne    te   touche    ne    nous    cou-  ne  v.  couchezp 

pas,  chons  pas, 

runaway,           m'enfuir,            ne  t'enfuis  pas,   nenousenfuyons  ne  v.  enfuyez  p. 

pas, 

laugh  at.              me  rire  de —    ne  te  ris  pas  de,  ne  n.  rions  p.  de,  nev.riezp.de 

go  away ,            rii'en  aller,         ne  t'en  va  pas,    nen.enallonsp.  ne  v.enallezpas 

9.  Let  himhave,  qu'il  ait,  Let  us  have,  ayons,  having  always  been  used  in 
English-French  grammars,  is  it  not  strange,  that  let  me  have,  should  not 
have  been  introduced  ? 

10.  Let  me  may  also  be  translated  by  the  second  person  singular,  viz : 
laisse-moi  aller,   let   (thou)   me   go ;    laisse-moi    prendre,   let   (thou)   me 
take,  &c. 

11.  Let  him  have  it,  may  be  translated  in  two  ways:  first,  by  qujil  Vait, 
as  it  is  generally  in  grammars,  or,  secondly,  by  laissez-le  T avoir.     Let  us 
write  them  ;  may  be  rendered,  first,  by  ecrivons-les,  or  laissez-nous  les  icrire. 
These  expressions,  however,  are  not  synonymous.     The  first,  meaning, 
we  must  set  about  writing  them,  the  second,  requesting  leave  to  do  it. 

12.  Come  and  see  me,  do.     Take  your  pencil  and  write,  are  expressions 
frequently  used  in  English.     The  French  sometimes  translate  them  literally 
and  say :  prenez  votre  crayon  et  ccrivcz  ;  but  they  more  frequently  put  the 
ieeond  verb  in  the  infinitive  mood  instead  of  the  imperative,  as :  Prenez 
rotre  crayon  pour  ecrire  ;  venez  me  voir,  je  vous  en  prie,  &c.  ($  54,  Except. 


GRAMMATICAL     SYNOPSIS.  513 

*  151.— SUBJUNCTIVE  MOOD.— Mode  Subjonctif. 
PRESENT  TENSE. — Present. 

\.  In  all  French  verbs,  it  ends  in  e,  es,  e,  tores,  iez,  cut. 

To  form  it,  attend  to  this  Rule  : — 1. 

1st  part. — The  THIED  person  plural  is  exactly  like  that  of  the  FRESEOT 
INDICATIVE  ;  from  which,  by  dropping  the  nt,  you  obtain  thcjirst  and  third 
persons  singular.  An  5  added  to  either, 'gives  the  second. 

2d  part. — The  first  and  second  persons  plural  are  exactly  like  those  of  the 
inperfsct. 

The  following  are  regularly  formed  : — 


They             ils             quoiqu'ils       je 

tu 

il 

AOUS 

vous 

come,         viennent,    viennent 

,      vienne, 

viennes, 

'ienne, 

\cnionc. 

venicz. 

drink,         boivent,      boivent, 

boive, 

boives, 

Doive, 

ouvions, 

uvioz. 

Exceptions,  eight  in  all  :• 

1  .  It  is  time  for  them  to  go  ; 

mo  to  go, 

thee  to  go, 

him  to  go, 

us  to  go, 

you  to  go 

II  est  temps  quails  aillent; 

j'aille, 

tu  ailles, 

il  allies, 

n.allions, 

v.  alliez. 

2.  Although  they  can; 

I  can, 

thou  canst, 

he, 

\ve, 

you  can. 

(Juoiqu'ils  puissent  ; 

puisse, 

puisses, 

puisse, 

puissions, 

puissie2 

3.  In  case  they  are  worth  ; 

I  am, 

thou  art, 

he  is, 

we  are, 

you  are 

En  cas  qurils  vaillent;' 

vaiile, 

vaiile?, 

vaiile, 

valions, 

valiez.1 

1.  He  wishes  them  to  have  ; 

me  to, 

thee  to, 

her  to, 

us  to, 

you  tc. 

II  vent  qur\\s  aient  ; 

aie, 

aies, 

ait, 

ayons, 

ayez. 

5.  On  condition  they  will  : 

I, 

thou, 

he,  her, 

we, 

you. 

A  condition  qu'ilsvemUent  ; 

veuillo, 

veuilles, 

veuille,' 

voulions, 

voulicz. 

B.  Not  that  they  know  of; 

I  know  of, 

thou, 

he,  she, 

we, 

you. 

Pas  qu'ils  sachent; 

sache, 

saches, 

sache, 

sachions, 

sac  h  iez. 

T.   Without  their  b&ing  so  ; 

my, 

thy, 

his,  her, 

our, 

your. 

Sans  quails  le  soient  ; 

lo  sois, 

le  sois, 

lo  soil, 

le  soyons, 

le  soyez. 

8.  They  had  better  do  it  ; 

I  had, 

thou, 

he, 

we. 

you. 

11  vaut  mieux  gu'ils  le  fassent  ; 

le  fasse, 

le  fasses, 

le  fasse. 

fassipns. 

fassiez. 

2.  The  use  of  the  subjunctive  mood  (as  its  name  implies)  depends  in 
French,  on  some  antecedent,  ending  with  que  or  qui,  which  antecedent 
governs  that  mooo.  The  antecedent  rray  be  a  verb  or  a  conjunction.2  As 
the  indicative  is  the  mood  of  affirmation,  the  subjunctive  is  the  mood  of 
indecision,  of  doubt.  If  then  the  verbal  antecedent  affirms  with  precision,  with 
positive-ness ,  the  indicative  must  be  used  after  que  or  qui  ;  but  if  the  verbal 
antecedent  expresses  indecision,  doubt,  then  the  subjunctive  is  to  be  used 
after  the  connecting  word  que  or  qui.  For  instance,  when  we  say  :  [know 
he  is  here,  I  am  certain  that  he  is  here,  a  positive  affirmation  is  expressed,  by 
the  antecedent,  and  on  that  account  no  other  turn  could  be  given  to  the 
second  verb,  is  ;  it  would  be  contradictory  to  say:  /  am  certain  lie  may  be 
here.  Hence,  the  indicative  is  used  after;  and  *ve  must  say:  Je  sain,  ji 

1  Prevaloir,*  to  prevail,  is  regular  in  the  present  of  the  subjunctive,  and  forrrood 
from  prevalent,  they  prevail. 

2  The  conjunction  if  (si)  is  the  most  frequent  attendant  of  the  English  subjunc- 
CITO  ;  but  in  French  that  mood  is  seldom  governed  by  si,  which  is,  we  know,  ug-jally 
acnnectad  w.Uh  the  present  nnd  imperfect  indicative,  (462,  Qbs.  105—$  1-18,  N.  1.) 


5J4  GRAMMATICAL     SYNOPSIS. 

mis  certain  qu'il  est  id.  But  when  you  say  :  It  is  possible,  il  is  doubtful 
ihat  he  is  here,  indecision,  doubt,  is  expressed  by  the  antecedent,  and  another 
»urn  may  be  given  to  the  second  verb,  such  as :  It  is  passible  he  may  fe 
here,  for  him  to  be  here — It  is  doubtful  whether  he  is  here  or  not  ;  his  being 
here  is  doubtful,  and  consequently  the  subjunctive  must  be  used  after  it. 
ll  est  possible,  il  est  douteux,  qu'il  soit  id.  Certainty  or  uncertainty  is  then 
the  great  theoretical  criterion  by  which  the  use  of  the  subjunctive  is  deter- 
mined or  ascertained.  This,  however,  does  not  apply  to  the  antecedents 
that  always  require  the  subjunctive,  but  merely  to  some  particular  cases 
that  will  be  further  explained. 

Grammarians  have  given  rules  based  on  the  signification  of  verbs,  saying 
that  the  subjunctive  is  to  be  used  if  the  antecedent  expresses  surprise,  de- 
spair, complaint,  admiration,  will,  wish,  consent,  forbidding,  hindrance, 
doubt,  fear,  ignorance,  apprehension,  order,  command,  and  they  generally 
wind  up  this  comprehensive  enumeration  by  the  very  definite  expression,  or 
u7iy  affection  of  the  mind.  To  find  the  true  sense  of  a  verb,  requires  a  gram- 
matical acumen,  not  generally  possessed  by  pupils  ;  therefore,  as  something 
more  practical  is  desirable,  let  pupils  attend  to  the  following  Rule,  as  calcu- 
lated, in  most  cases,  to  direct  them  accurately. 

RULE  2.  When  the  verb  in  the  second  part  is  connected  with 
1.  May,  2.  should,  3.  whether,  \  or,  if  not  connected,  can 

4.  forme  to  be,  thee  to  be,  or  any  other  infinitive,   (be  turned  to  any  of  them, 

5.  my  being,  thy  being,  or  any  other  present  par-  f  as   shown    above,   then 

ticiple  or  noun  ;  )  that  second  part  must  be 

in  the  subjunctive  mood  in  French  ;  but  in  the  indicative,  if  no  such  alteration 
can  be  made.  As  a  further  illustration,  let  us  examine  the  following  sen- 
tences. 

f     The  second  part,  to  be  laughed  at, 
1.  1  deserve  to  le  laughed  at.  1          be  dhcred   but  mark  the  di(rer. 

8.  I  hope  to  be  laughed  at.  j  ence  ;n  ^  ahcralion. 

1.  I  deserve  that  people  should  laugh  at  me. 

2.  I  hope  that  people  will  (not  should)  laugh  at  me. 

The  word  will  gives  to  the  second  sentence  a  decisive,  a  precise  meaning, 
which  is  not  conveyed  by  the  \vord  should  in  the  first.  Hence  the  second 
is  translated  in  French  by  ihe  future  of  the  indicative,  the  first  by  the  sub- 
junctive present. 

1.  Je  merite  qu'on  se  moque  de  moi.  (sub.))      Do  the  two  verbs,  I de&erv€ 

2.  J'espere  qu'on  se  moquerade  moi.  (ind.)f  and  I  hope,  express  affections 
of  the  soul  or  not  ?     How  inadequate  are  those  wholesale  rules  !    And  how 
perplexed  must  the  student  be  when  he  has  no  other  guide  ! 

As  a  first  corollary  to  Rule  2,  we  say  that,  after  a  French  verb,  followed 
by  que  or  qui,  if  the  fourth  or  fifth  English  form  above  is  to  be  translated,  it 
mu3t  be  by  the  French  subjunctive.  He  wishes  me  to  laugh,  il  vest  qusj* 
rie.  He  is  pleased  at  our  speaking,  il  est  content  que  nous  parlions. 

Asa  second  corollary,  that,  after  a  French  verb  followed  by  que  or  quis 
the  infinitive  of  a  passive  verb,  that  can  be  changed  to  should,  must  be  trana 
lated  by  the  French  subjunctive,  with  the  indefinite  pronoun  o?i  as  a  nomf- 
tiatlve,  as  in  the  example,  /  deserve  to  be  laughed  at.  (771,  Note.) 


GRAMMATICAL   SYNOPSIS. 


515 


3.  When  the  antecedent  is  a  superlative,  or  a  word  having  a  superlative 
flio.'ining;  such  as  le  seul,  V  unique,  the  only  one;  le  premier,  the  first, 
le  dernier,  the  last,  and  any  ordinal  jiumber,  deuxiime,  &,c.,  the  subjunctive 
follows. 


The  gospel  is  the  finest  present  that 


God  has  made  to  man. 
Il   is   the  f-rst,   the    last,   the   only 
VD  ume  that  we  have. 


L'£vangile  est  le  plus  beau  present 


que  Dieu  ait  fait  aux  hommes. 
C'est  le  premier,  le  dernier,  le  seid 
volume  que  nous  ayons. 

4.  When  the  antecedent  is  a  unipersonal  verb,  or  used  unipersonally :-- 


lie  must  come. 

It  is  suitable  he  should  do  it. 

It  is  right  for  him  to  know  it. 


II  fa ut  qu'il  vienne. 

II  convient  qu'il  le  fasse. 

II  est  juste  qu'il  le  sachc. 

Except:  11  s'ensuit,  it  follows;  il  resulte,  it  results;  il  arrive,  there 
happens,  and  il  est,  accompanied  by  an  adjective  denoting  evidence,  certainty, 
probability;  such  as ;  cZair,  clear;  certain,  certain  ;  evident,  evident ;  vrai, 
true ;  probable,  probable,  &c.,  which  govern  the  indicative,  when  affirma- 
tively used,  brt  follow,  when  interrogative,  negative,  or  conditional. 


It  follows  from  it  that  you  are  my 

friend. 
It  often  happens  that  one  is  deceived. 


II  s'ensuit,  il  resulte,  que  vous  etea 

mon  ami. 
II  arrive  souvcnt  qu'on  est  trompe. 


5.  When  the  antecedent  is  .interrogative,  negative,  or  conditional.  (The 
words  peu,  little  ;  d  pcine,  hardly,  having  a  negative  meaning,  come  under 
this  rule.) 


I  believe  we  have  some. 

Do  you  believe  we  have  any? 

I  do  not  think  that  we  have  any. 


but   few   men   who 

a  scholar  who   can 


Je  crois  que  nous  en  avons. 
Croyez-vous  que  nous  en  ayons  ? 
Je  ne  crois  pas  que  nous  en  ayons. 
Nous  avons  peu  d'hommes  qui  puis- 

sent  le  faire. 
II  a  a  peine  un  dcolier  qui  puisse  le 

traduire. 

is:    *S'il  est  vrai  que  vous  Vayez  ;  while 
is  :    S'il  est  vrai  que  vous  1'avez ;  the  in- 


We   have 

do  it. 
He  has  hard!; 

translate  it. 

If  it  be  true  that  you  havr  it, 
If  it  is  true  that  you  have  it, 
dicative  is  used  because  there  is  no  supposition,  no  condition  implied,  the 
meaning  being  positive,  Sines  you  have  it,  and  not  conditional,  as  in  the 
first  sentence,  which  means :  Should  you  have  it. 


It  is  not  certain,  true,  sure,  that  you 

be  my  friend. 

Ore  i<3  not  frequently  deceived  by 
one's  friends. 


II  tt'est  pas  certain,  vrai,  sur  quo 
vous  soyez  mon  ami. 

II  n'arrive  pas  souvent  qu'on  soil 
trompe  par  ses  amis. 

6.  Any  verb  expressing  fear,  such  as  craindre,  to  fear ;  avoir  peur,  to 
be  afraid  ;  when  used  affirmatively,  governs  the  subjunctive  with  ne  before 
it.    But  ne  is  not  used  if  the  phrase  is  interrogative,  negative,  or  condi- 
tional. (781.) 

7.  When  the  verbs  mentioned  at  6  are  used  negatively,  they  govern  the 
subjunctive  without  nc.  (784.) 


616  GRAMMATICAL    SYNOPSIS. 

8.  The  \erbs  douter,  to  doubt,  and  ?iier.  to  deny,  when  negative,  requiia 
ne  before  the  subjunctive.  (784.) 

9.  The  conjunction  que  employed  in  the  second  member  of  a  sentence 
to  avoid  the  repetition  of  a  conjunction  used  in  the  first,  governs  the  same 
mood  as  the  word  it  stands  for.  (783.) 

10.  Tho  word  que,  used  to  avoid  the  repetition  of  si  and  of  ether  con- 
junctions  such  as  ajin  que,  soit  quc,  sans  que,  avant  que,  &c.,  governs  th€ 
»ub*unctive.  (783.) 

1...  Quelque,  whatever,  wnatsoever  however,  is  connected  Li  threo  ways 
and  aiways  governs  the  subjunctive. 

1st  WAY.  Quelque  (before  an  adjective,  used  \vithout  a  noun)  is  indecli 
nablc.  (801.) 

2d  WAY.  Quelque  before  a  noun  (accompanied  or  not  by  an  adjectivet 
agrees  with  that  noun.  (801.) 

3d  WAY.  Immediately  before  a  verb,  whatever,  whatsoever,  isrendeied,  in 
French,  by  two  words,  quel  and  que.  And  then,  que?t  alone,  agrees  with 
the  subject  of  the  verb — que  is  invariable.  (801.) 

12.  As  the  antecedent  belongs  to  the  indicative  mood,  it  is  necessary  to 
give  rules  for  the  correspondence  of  the  tenses  of  the  indicative  and  sub 
junctive. 

1.  If  the  antecedent  is  present  or  future,  it  governs  the  present  or  perfect 
of  the  subjunctive. 


You  must  come. 

You  will  have  to  come,  (be  necessary 

for  you.) 
You  must  have  come  when  1  was  out. 


Ilfaut  que  vous  veniez. 
llfaudra  que  vous  veniez. 

11  faut   (ilfaudra)  que  vous  soycz 


venu  quandfetais  dehors. 
It  a  condition  is  annexed,  then  use  the  imperfect  and  pluperfect. 


I  do  not  think  you  would  do  it  if  you 

were  not  compelled. 
I  do  not  think  you  would  have  done  it 

had  you  not  been  compelled. 


Je  ne  crois  pas  que  vous  le  fissiet. 

si  Von  ne  vous  y  contraignait. 
Je  ne  crois  pas  que  vous  I'eussies 

fait  si  Ton  ne  vous  y  eut  contraint. 


2.  The  imperfect,  the  past  tenses.)  mi  /•   ,       -\     ^         r   + 

,   ,  ,1  .J      '          J.  '  S  Ihe  imperfect  and  pluperfect.  (79*.) 

id  the  condiiwnnels  require  \ 


and 

I  was  not  certain  you  would  come. 
I  was  not  sure  you  would  have  come. 

I  wish  you  had  more  fortitude. 
(622,  N.  2.) 


Je  iielais  pas  sur  que  vous  vinssiez. 
Je  n'etais  pas  sur  que  vous  fussies 


venu. 


Je  voudrais  que  vous  eussiez  plus  de 
fermete. 


13.  Whatever  or  whatsoever  (meaning  all  things  soever]  is  generally  ex- 
pressed by  quelque  chose  que  ou  quoi  que,  quoi  que  ce  soit  que,  when  at  the 
beginning  of  a  sentence,  and  only  by  quoi  que  ce  soit  oufut,  after  a  verb. 
The  subjunctive  follows  that  French  antecedent.  (801.) 

Whoever,  whomsoever,  qui  que  ce  soit,  qui  que  ce  fut,  also  governs  ihe 
flibmnctive.  (801.) 


GRAMMATICAL     6  If  NO  PS  IS.  517 

14.  h  the  verb  which  follows  yui,  que,  do?it,  de  ce,  ou}  expresses  doul)lt 
Wicertaijity,  &c.,  use  the  subjunctive.     If  not,  the  indicative.  (802.) 

15.  The   subjunctive   is   employed   at  the   beginning  of  a  sentence,  tc 
express  surprise,  a  desire,  or  an  imprecation  ;  and  also  instead  of  quaw! 
memc,  though,  or  si,  if,  suppressed.  (SO2.) 

IMPERFECT. — Imparfait.  (79}.) 

V>1&2. — The  Imperfect  of  the  subjunctive  is  formed  from  the  prottnl, 
691,  $  153,)  by  changing  the  final  ai  into  asse,  for  the  verbs  of  the  first  con- 
jugation, and  by  adding  se  to  those  of  the  other  three  conjugations.  As 
the  preterit  has  four  sets  of  terminations :  ist,  ai;  3d,  is;  3d,  us;  4th, 
ins  ;  this  imperfect  has  also  four.  The  first  set,  as  with  the  y.retdrit, 
'DO longs  exclusively  to  the  first  conjugation.  Those  sets  are  :•— 

1st  set,  asse,  nsses,  at,  assions,  nssiez,  atscnt. 

3d     "  isse,  isses,  it,  issions,  issiez,  isscnL 

3d     "  usse,  usscs,  fit,  ussicms,  ussiez,  ussent. 

Uh  u  insse,  insses,  int,  mssions,  inssiex.  inssent 

Connecting  them  with  verbs,  we  will  have 

1st.  A.though  I  spoke,  quoique  jc  yarlasse,         (from  parlai  ) 

Cu  parlasscs,  il  parlat,   nous  parlassions,  vous  parlasstez,  Us  parlassent. 

2d.  I  had  to  say,  to  tell,  il  fallait  que  jo  disse,       (from  dis.) 

Tit  dii>ses,        iltfit,         nous  dissions,  vous  dissiez,  Us  dissent. 

3d.  Whether  I  had,  soit  que  j'eusse,  (from  j'tus.} 

Tu  eusses,       il  eut,        nous  eusssions,  vous  eussiez,  Us  eussent. 

4th.  Provided  I  held,  I  kept,  pourvu  que  je  tinsse,        (from  tins.) 

Tu  tin&ses,      il  tint,       nous  tinssions,  vous  tinssiez,  Us  tinssent. 

No  exception.     Attend  to  your  list  of  antece'dents. 

This  imperfect  is  used  after  the  indicative  imperfect,  all  past  tenses,  and 
the  conditionuds.  ($  151 — 2.) 


Perfect,  (page  418.) 
Pluperfect,  (p.  419.) 


Parfait. 
Plusqueparfait. 


§  153.— INDICATIVE,  SECOND  IMPERFECT.1— Preterit* 
The  Priterit  of  the  indicative  mood  has,  for  regular  verbs,  three  sets  of 

1  Lindley  Murray  defines  it  thus :  "  The  imperfect  tense  represents  the  action  01 
svcnt,  either  as  past  and  finished,  or  as  remaining  unfinished  at  a  certain  timo  past  • 
as,  "  I  loved  her  for  her  modesty  arffl  virtue,"  "  They  were  travelling  post  when  he 
met  them.n  The  French  Preterit  corresponds  only  to  the  first  clause,  viz:  to  the 
uction  or  event  past  and  finished,  or  to  R.  C.  Smith's  definition,  which  is:  The  im- 
perfect tense  expresses  what  took  place  in  tinre  nsst,  however  distant:  as,  "John 
Jicd." 

«  I  merely  use  the  word  Pr£t£rit'xitlif,\ii  i\o  adjective  dtfini  (usually  added)  be- 
cause the  pupil  will  more  easily  distinguish  the  two  tenses;  one  being  the  Pret&rit^ 
another  the  Preterit  antgrieur,  (G83).  If  those  terms,  definite  and  indefinite,  wero 
npyUei  to  the  English  tenses,  it  would  be  advisable,  perhaps  necessary  to  retain 
<hem  in  French,  but  as  they  are  new  to  the  American  student,  they  are  moie  per- 
f-lexing  than  useful.  The  French  themselves,  in  speaking  of  that  tense,  call  it  more 
frequently  Pr£t6rit,  than  Pr6t6rit  dtfini.  After  all,  as  the  adjective  defini  would 
cor.vuy  hnt  an  indefinite,  idea  to  the  pupil,  its  use  may  be  indefinitely  postponed 


S18  GI^MM  .s^ICAL     S7NCPSIS. 

terminations,  formed  from  tneir  past  participles.     By  changing,  foi  the  nr*1 
conjugation,  e  to 

at,     as,     a,     antes,     dies,     ercnt,     you  have  the  firs't  set. 
For  the  second  and  fourth  conjugation?,  i  and  u  to 

is,     ist     it,     imes,    ites,     irent,     you  have  the  second  set. 
for  the  third  conjugation,  u  te 

US)    us,    ut,    umes,    utei,     urent,    you  have  the  third  set. 

The  preterit  of  all  regular  verbs,  without  exception,  may  be  formed  b? 
\&e  rules  given  above.  The  firo*  set  belongs  exclusively  to  the  first  conju« 
gallon.  There  is  a  fourth  set,  viz:  ins,  ins,  i?it,  t?imes,  intes,  inrent, 
which  belongs  exclusively  to  the  irregular  verbs  tenir,  venir,  and  thei*. 
compounds. 

EXAMPLES   FOP.   THE   REGULAR   VERBS. 

Infin.           Part.  Preterits. 

Passes.        Je  tu  il,  on  nous  vous  ite,  ellcs 

Parler,         parlt*.  parlai,  parlas,  parla,  parlawies,  parltffes,  parleren*, 

Tinir,          fini.  finis,  finis.  finif,  finzmes,  fnn/es,  tinirent, 

Recevoir,   recw.  recws,  recus.  rocut,  resumes,  reciitcs,  recurent, 

Venclre,       vendw.  vendis,  veuUf.s,  vendt^,  vendzwes,  vendi^s,  vendirenr. 

1.  These  rules  even  apply  to  many  of  the  irregular  verbs,  by  premising 
that  their  past  participles  in  t,  is,  it,  take  the  second  set,  viz  :  «"s,  is,  it,  &c., 
while  those  ending  in  u  take  the  third  set,  viz :  MS,  us,  ut,  &,c.,  if  not 
(bund  in  the  list  we  will  give  of  irregular  formations. 

EXAMPLES   FOR   IRREGULAR   VERBS   FORMED    BY   THE    RULES. 
In  fin.  Part.  Pr6t6rits  of  the  second  set,  (de  la  2de  sirie.) 

Passes.         Je  tu  il,on  nous          vous       ils,  elles 

Sentir,*         senti.        sentis,         sentis,      sentit,       eentimes,  sentitcs,  sehtirent. 
Mettre,*        mis.          mis,  mis,          mit,  &c. 

Prendre,*      pri*.          pris,  P™8*         Prit,          &c. 

Dire,*  dit  dis,  dis,  dit,  &c. 

Pr&tirits  de  Ia3me  strie. 

Counr,*         couru.      courus,        courus,    courut,     courumes,  courutes,  coururent 
Connaitr^*  connu.      connus,       connus,    eonnut,    &c. 
Vivre,*         vecu.        vecus,         &c. 

Fourth  set,  exclusively  for  tenir,  venir,  and  their  compounds 
Tenir,*         tenu.         tins,  tins,          tint,          tinmes,        tintes,      tinrent. 

Venir,*         venu.        vins,  vins,        vint,         vinmes.      vintes,     vinrent. 

The  following  irregular  verbs  are  exceptions  to  the  rules  : — 


Infinitive. 

Past  Part. 

Preterit  Definite. 

Couvrir,* 

to  cover, 

couvsrt. 

Je  couvris, 

is,    it, 

lines, 

ites,  irent 

Orfrir,* 

to  offer, 

offert. 

J'offris, 

«      it 

it 

((               U 

Ouvrir,* 

to  open, 

ouvert. 

J?ouvris, 

u       « 

u 

'.:           it 

Bouffrir,* 

to  suffer, 

souffert 

Je  souffris, 

«       u 

U 

ti           i> 

Mourir,* 

to  die, 

mort. 

Je  mourus, 

US,    Ut, 

umos, 

(ites,  u  rent 

Vetir,* 

to  clothe, 

vetu. 

Je  vetis, 

is,    it, 

Imes, 

I  tea,   irer.1 

tfoir,* 

to  see. 

vu 

Je  vis, 

«      tt 

if 

4 

u 

Prevoir,* 

to  foresee, 

prevu. 

Je  previs. 

n      u 

U 

i 

it 

Ceindre,* 

to  gird, 

ceint. 

Je  ceignis. 

c(      u 

'* 

1 

(4 

A-stremdre,* 

to  restrain, 

astreint 

f  J'astreignis 

tt      tt 

tt 

1 

(i 

Craina  o,* 

to  fear. 

craint 

Je  craignia, 

it        ^ 

U 

1          " 

G  R  A  M  31  A  T  1  C  A  L     SYNOPSIS. 


519 


Infinitive  . 

Past  Part. 

P  reteii  l  Definite. 

Emjpreindre/ 

to  imprint, 

empreint. 

J'erapreignis,   is,    it, 

fmes,  ites, 

lHOttl 

Enfriendre,* 

to  infringe, 

enfreint. 

J'enfreignis,       "      ,4 

a         tt 

M 

Epreindre,* 

to  squeeze, 

epreint. 

J'epreignis,        "      " 

ti         n 

II 

Feindre,* 

to  feign, 

feint. 

Je  feignis,          "     *4 

tt         n 

tt 

Joindre,* 

to  join, 

joint. 

Je  joignis,          "      " 

tt         u 

1 

Oindre,* 

to  anoint, 

oint. 

J'oignis,             "      " 

(          n 

I 

Teinire,* 

to  paint, 

peint. 

Je  peignis,          "      " 

tt 

' 

Plaindre,* 

to  lament, 

plaint. 

Je  plaignis,        a      " 

t           u 

I 

Restreindro.* 

to  restrain, 

restreirt. 

Je  restreignis,   "      " 

i          « 

I 

Toindre,* 

to  dye, 

teint. 

Je  teignis,          u       ' 

Cl 

(f 

Cuiro,* 

to  cook, 

cuit 

Je  cuisis,                    ' 

•   *           " 

l 

Conduire,* 

to  conduct- 

conduit. 

Gonstruire,* 

to  construct, 

construit. 

Je  construisis,  «'       < 

<          tt 

* 

Detruiro,* 

to  destroy, 

detruit. 

Je  detruisis,       £<       ( 

I           tt 

u 

Euduire,* 

to  lay  over, 

enduit. 

J'enduisis,         "       { 

u 

u 

Ittuiro,* 

to  induce, 

:"nduit. 

J'induisis,          :<       ' 

' 

" 

Instruire,* 

to  instruct, 

instruit. 

J'instruisis,       "       ' 

t          it 

(1 

Introduire,* 

to  introduce, 

introduit. 

J'introduisis,     '*       ' 

i          f 

I 

Keduire,* 

H»;duire,* 

to  reduce, 
to  seduce, 

reduit. 
seduit. 

Je  seduisis,        "      u 

ii          ti 

t 

Traduiro,* 

to  translate, 

traduit. 

Je  traduisis,      u      " 

it          it 

t 

Luire,* 

to  shine, 

.ui. 

Je  .uisis,            u      " 

Nuire,* 

to  hurt, 

ml. 

Je  nuisis,           «'      " 

a          it 

1 

Coudre,* 

to  sew, 

cousu. 

Je  cousis,           u      u 

ti          tt 

i 

Ecrirc,* 

to  write, 

ecrit. 

J'ecrivis,           «      » 

it          it 

t 

Etro,* 

to  be, 

etc. 

Je  fus,              fus,  tut, 

umes,  fites, 

urent. 

Faire,* 

to  do, 

fait. 

Je  fis,               fis,   fit, 

fimes,  fites, 

firont. 

Naitre,* 

to  bo  born, 

no. 

Je  naquis,         is,    it, 

imes,    ites, 

irent. 

Vaincre,* 

to  vanquish, 

value  u. 

Jo  vainquis,       u      " 

tc           u 

u 

REMARK. 

The  learner  will  remark,  that  in  the  above  list  some  irregular  verbs  follow 
the  conjugation  of  others  ;  thus  we  see  three  verbs  conjugated  exactly  like 
couvrir,  to  cover,  viz:  ojfrir,  to  offer;  ouvrir,  to  open;  'sowjfrir,  to  suffer  : 
venir,  to  come,  we  see  conjugated  like  tenir,  to  hold;  twelve  verbs  after 
ceindre,  to  gird ;  ten  after  cuire,  to  bake,  to  cook ;  and  one  after  luire,  to 
shine,  viz  :  nuire,  to  hurt.  Now  this  is  not  only  the  case  with  respect  to  the 
preterit  defini  of  these  verbs,  but  for  all  the  other  tenses.  It  would  therefore 
be  of  essential  importance  to  the  learner  to  commit  them  to  memory  in  the 
'order  we  have  given  them,  as  by  their  help  the  greatest  difficulties  of  the 
irregular  verbs  are  almost  overcome. 

USE  OF  THE  PR£T£RIT. 

2.  We  saw  (33 ')  that  the  parfatt  not  only  conveys  an  allusion  to  the  pre- 
sent, but  also  refers  to  actions  past  at  a  time  wholly  expired.  Now  the 
Btudent  must  be  informed  that  the  preterit  has  no  connexion  with  the 
present,  but  only  refers  to  "  actions  and  events  past  andfaiished :"  (Murray/ 
It  cannot  bo  used  in  connexion  with  this  century,  this  year,  this  month,  thit 
day  or  to-day,  this  morning,  because  the  time  is  not  wholly  expired  ;  but  it 
maybe  used  in  connexion  with  last  century,  last  year,  &c.  and  with  yester- 
day, because  the  time  is  then  wholly  past.  Hence,  yesterday,  limits  tit 
approach  to  the  present.  Accordingly  we  may  say  :  JE  LE  vis  Z'ume'e  der- 


520  GRAMMATICAL     SYNOPSIS- 

nitre 1 1  SAW  HIM  last  year  ;  le  mois  dernier,  last  month  ;  il  y  a  quinzt  JQWl, 
it  fortnight  ago  ;  hier,  yesterday  ,'  and  there  stops  the  use  of  the  preterit- 
To  express,  I  saw  him  to-day,  this  morning,  this  week,  &c.,  say  :  Je  Va\ 
vu  nujourd'hui,  ce  matin,  cette  semaine,  &c.,  and  not  je  le  vis  ;  because 
the  time  is  not  fully  past. 

In  colloquial  intercourse,  when  the  time  is  wholly  past,  the  preterit  and 
par/ait  may  be  used  the  one  for  the  other,  that  is :  I  saw  him  last  week- 
Caesar  conquered  Gaul ;  may  be  translated  either  by  :  Je  le  vis  ou  je  Z'ai 
vu  la  semaine  passee — Cesar  conquit  ou  a  conquis  la  Gaule.  But  when  the 
time  is  unexpir^d,  the  priterit  cannot  replace  the  parfait.  So,  1  sold  my 
house  this  year,  must  be  rendered  by  fai  vcndu  ($145)  ma  maison  cette 
ULimee-ci,  (time  unexpired,)  and  not  by  je  vcndis  ($153)  ma  maison  cette 
annee-ci. 

3.  On  the  other  hand,  in  narrating  events  long  past,  or  historical  facts, 
the  preterit  is  the  tense  to  be  used,  to  the  exclusion  of  the  parfait.  As 
soon  as  he  saw  his  enemy,  he  drew  his  sword  and  began  with  him,  &c. 
Desqu'il  vit  (not  a  vu)  son  cnnemi,  il  tira  son  epee  et  commcn$a  avec  lui, 
&.C.  ($  153.) 

N.  B.  The  French,  to  give  more  animation  to  the  narration,  frequently 
use  the  present  tense  instead  of  the  preterit,  and  say:  Des  qu'il  voit  sou 
ennemi,  il  tire  son  ep<5e  et  commence  avec  lui,  &c.  It  is  in  English  usually 
translated  by  the  imperfect,  although  they,  themselves,  use  the  present 
tense  for  the  same  purpose. 

$  1M.— PLUPERFECT  (GQ^—Plusqueparfait. 

Is  formed  from  the  imperfect  of  the  auxiliary  with  the  past  participle,  and 

used  pretty  much  like  the  English  pluperfect. 

Had  you  not  spent  your  money  when     N'aviez-vous  pas  depense  votre  ar- 

you  asked  me  for  some  ?  gentquandvous  m'endemandatesf 

Besides  the  plus queparf ait  (682)  formed  by  the  French  imparfait  and  past 
participle,  there  is  another  tense  formed  by  the  preterit  and  past  participle, 
called  Preterit  Anterieur,  (anterior,)  viz:  J'eus  fini,  I  had  finished  ;  Nous 
eumes  dine,  we  had  dined.  As  the  English  have  no  tense  corresponding  to 
it,  they  have  to  translate  both  this  tense  and  the  plusquepa.rfa.il  exactly 
in  the  same  way ;  consequently,  the  American  student  is  frequently  at  a 
loss,  to  know  which  of  the  French  tenses  he  is  to  select.  We  will  try,  by 
explanations  and  examples,  to  lessen  the  difficulty. 

The  imparfait  (591)  expresses  an  action  begun  but  not  ended,  or,  as  going 
on  at  the  past  time  spoken  of.  The  preterit,  (681,)  on  the  contrary,  refer* 
to  an  action  or  event  past  and  finished,  or  of  which  the  time  is  fully  expired. 
It  is  this  distinction  of  the  simple  tenses,  which,  passing  into  the  compound, 
must  be  kept  in  view,  and  which,  in  many  instances,  will  enable  the  learnei 
10  choose  the  proper  French  tense. 

As  there  is  no  English  tense  corresponding  to  the  French,  I  offer 

S  155,- The  2d  PLUPERFECT.— Preterit  Anterieur. 

The  Preterit  Anterieur  (683)  is  formed  by  the  preterit  of  the  auxilia 
the  past  participle  of  the  verb  to  be  conjugated. 


OR  A  MM  A  TIC  A  I.    SYNOPSIS.  521 

i  expresses  an  action  quickly  or  instantaneously  done,  and  is  selilora 
i,  except  after  the  Adverbial  conjunctions, 
Ad  Boon  as,  Aussitot,    or    shot    que,    des  que, 

d'abord  que. 
Apres  que.  Lorsque,  quand, 


ter.  When. 

v  so  one-.  Scarcely. 


Pas  plutot.  A  peine. 


lie  has  done  in  a  moment. 

sis  soon  as  1  had  done  my  work,  I 

Tarried  it  to  him. 
Wkcnl  had  dressed  myseJf,  I  went  out. 


EXAMPLES. 


II  cut  fini  en  un  moment  (inslanler.) 
Aussitdt  que  feus  fini  mon  ouvrage, 

je  le  lui  portai. 
Qua?id  je  me  f:ts  JiabilU,  je  sortis. 


Tor  its  practical  use,  the  student  may  be  governed  by  the  following  plain 
airections.  In  similar  sentences,  there  are  usually  two  tenses,  one  pimple 
and  one  compound. 

RULE  1. — If  the  adverbial  conjunction,  when,  as  soon  as,  &c.,  is  befon 
the  simple  tense,  the  compound  tense  is  necessarily  the  plusqvtjvrfait.  (682. 

RULE  2. — If  the  conjunctive  adverb  is  before  the  compound  tense,  tha\ 
compound  tense  must  again  be  the  plusqueparfait,  provided  the  simple  tense 
is  an  imparfait,  but  should  the  simple  tense  be  a  preterit,  then  the  compound 
tense  must  be  the  preterit  anterieur.  (G83.) 

$  158.— INFINITIVE.— ^jmi-*»y. 

1.  Prepositions,  in  English,  govern  the  present  participle,  .except  to, 
which  governs  the  infinitive.     On  the  contrary,  the  infinitive  is  governed  by 
every  French  preposition,  except  the  preposition  en,  which  governs  the 
present  participle. 

He  speaks  of  coming. 

We  like  to  walk,  after  we  have  done 

our  duty. 

After  coming,  he  rested. 
After  dressing,  wo  went  out. 

times. 

Remark  that  the  French  preposition  apres  is  always  followed  by  the  infi- 
nitive of  the  auxiliary  avoir  or  tire  ;  while  in  English  the  present  participle 
of  those  auxiliaries  having  and  being,  are  usually  left  out  and  replaced  by 
the  present  participle  of  the  following  verb.     For  instance,  instead  of 
After  having  drunk  his  tea,  he  felt  I  Apres  avoir  bu  son  the,  il  se  trcuva 

better  ;  I      mieux  ;  (401),  (R.  1,  N.  1.) 

You  may  say :   After  drinking  his  tea,  &c. ;  but  the  French  cannot  be  con 
tracted. 

2.  When  two  verbs  come  together, Without  being  joined  by  a  conjunction, 
-.he  latter  is  governed  by  the  former  in  the  infinitive,  sometimes  with  and 
sometimes  without  a  preposition. 

IMPORTANT  REMARK. — If  the  verb  has  no  preposition,  it  may  receive  any 
nnc  the  sense  requires  ;  but,  if  it  has  a  particular  one,  tlal  particular  on* 
rejects  evcru  olher,  and  must  w  variably  attend  the  verb  T*  '"  so  in  English 


II  parle  de  venir. 

Nous  aimons  a promener,  apres  avail 

fait  notre  devoir. 
Apres  etre  arrive,  ii  se  reposa. 
Apres  nous  etre  habilles,  nous  $01 


522 


GRAMMATICAL     SYNOPSIS. 


as  well  as  in  French.  For  instance,  as  the  ^erbs  will,  dare,  let,  &c.,  hart 
no  preposition,  we  must  say  without  preposition,  /  Mill  say,  1  dare  say,  J 
>et  go  ;  and  not  with  the  preposition  to,  or  any  other,  1  will  to  say,  &c.  O» 
the  contrary,  to  like,  to  have,  &c.,  requiring  the  preposition  to,  we  musi 
say,  /  like  to  see,  1  have  to  write,  &c.,  and  not,  without  any,  I  like  see,  J 
have  write,  &c.  It  is  the  same  in  French.  The  verbs  vouloir,  oser,  laisscr, 
&c.,  requiring  no  prepositi&n,  we  must  way,  je  veux  dire,  fose  dire,  ju 
laisse  aller ;  and  not  je  veux  a  dire,  f  ose  pour  dire,  &,c.  On  the  contrary, 
aimer,  avoir,  &c.,  taking  d,  we  must  say,  f  aime  d  voir,  fai  d  ecrire,  &c,, 
and  notj'aime  votr,fai  ecrire,  &c. 

3.  Sometimes  the  English  verb  requires  no  preposition,  while  the  French 
has  one — To  answer,  ripondre  d,  (21 !.)    Sometimes  the  English  has  one,  and 
the  French  none—  To  listen  to,  ecoutc  ,  (253.)    At  other  times  the  English 
has  of,  and  the  French  d — To  think  oj,  penser  d,  (532.)     Then  the  English 
has  to,  and  the  French  de — To  permit  to,  permettre  de,  (G52.)     But  in  every 
case  each  Englu\  and  each  French  verb  retains  its  own  particular  struc- 
ture. ($50.) 

4.  FRENCH  VERBS  that  govern.others  without  a  preposition:  — 


Aimer  mieux; 

J'aime  mieux  le/atre.l 

1  would  rather  do  it 

Aller; 

Allans  nous  promener. 

Let  us  go  to  take  a  walk. 

Apercevoir  ; 

Je  I'aperpois  mouvoir 

I  perceive  it  move. 

Assurer  ; 

11  assure  I'arotr  fait. 

He  asserts  to  have  done  it 

Croire  ; 

11  croit  me  tromper. 

He  thinks  to  deceive  me. 

C  ampler  ; 

11  compte  partir  BOUS  peu. 

lie  purposes  to  go  soon. 

Daigner  ; 

Daignez  me  dire  quand. 

Deign  to  tell  me  when. 

Declarer;' 

11  declare  le  savoir. 

He  declares  he  knows  it. 

Devoir  ; 

11  doit  me  Venvoyer. 

He  is  to  send  it  to  me. 

Entendre  ; 

Je  l'entendspar/er. 

I  hear  him  speak. 

Envoyer  ; 

Envoyez-le  chercher. 

Send  for  it,  or  to  fetch  it. 

Esperer  / 

J'espere  le  rencontrer. 

I  expect  to  meet  him. 

Faillir  ; 

11  a  failli  me  voir. 

lie  missed  seeing  me. 

Faire  ; 

Qu'avez-vons  fait  venir  ? 

What  did  you  send  for? 

Falltir; 

11  faut  lui  aider. 

It  is  necessary  to  help  him. 

•'  Imaging  ; 

Je  m'imagine  y  ctre. 

I  fancy  myself  to  be  there. 

Laisser  ; 

Laissez-le  dire  et  fairs. 

Let  him  say  and  do. 

Nier; 

11  me  I'  avoir. 

He  denies  having  it. 

Oser; 

Jl  n'ose  1'afoKcr. 

He  dares  not  confess  it. 

Faraitre  ; 

II  parait  V  entendre. 

He  seems  to  understand  it. 

Penser; 

II  a  pense  tomber. 

He  had  like  to  have  fallen. 

Pr&tendre; 

Pretend-il  lefaire? 

Does  he  pretend  to  do  it  ? 

Pouvoir  ; 

11  n'a  pas  pu  me  le  dire, 

He  could  not  tell  it  me. 

Reconnoitre  ; 

Je  reconnais  Vavoir  dit. 

I  acknowledge  to  have  said  if 

Regarder  ; 

Je  vous  regardey"aire. 

I  am  looking  at  you  doing  it. 

Retourner  ; 

Elle  retourna  la  voir. 

She  returned  to  see  him. 

Savoir  ; 

11  sait  ou  la  trouver. 

He  knows  where  to  find  her. 

Sembler  ; 

Elle  semble  avoir  peur. 

She  seems  to  be  afraid. 

Souhaiter  ; 

Je  souhaite  la  voir.2 

I  wish  to  see  ier. 

•  Aimer  mieux,  valff'.r  mieux  followed  by  another  ve,rb  in  the  infinitive,  requiro  :'« 
tefore  the  second  infinitive  ;  as, 

I  would  rather  stay  than  go.  I   J'aimerais  mieuz  rester  quo  d'y  aller. 

It  is  bolter  to  go  than  stay  alone.  1   II  vaut  mieux  y  aller  que  dc  rester  sevl. 

*  JVvhaitor  may  also  be  used  will)  cle;  as,  Je  souhaite  de  voir,  r-  Jo  /j  x*oir, 
r^          *eo  him. 


GRAMMATICAL     SYNOPSIS. 


523 


Sovtenir  ; 
Valoir  rrjcux, 
Venir  ; 
Voir; 
Vottloir ; 


II  soutient  1 'avoir  vu. 
II  vaut  mieux  Jui  6crireA 
Viendrez-vous  ino  voir.2 
Je  vois  venir  votre  sojur. 
Elle  ne  veut  pas  rester. 


lie  maintains  he  ias  seen  it. 
It  is  better  to  wrjte  to  her. 
Will  you  come  to  see  me! 
I  see  your  sister  coming. 
She  will  not  stay. 


5.  FRENCH  VERBS  and  ADJECTIVES  that  govern  the  following  infmitiva 
!>y  means  of  the  preposition  a. 
N.  B.  This  usually  takes  place  after  nouns,  used  in  a  partitive  senoe ;  OB  : 


He  haa  pleasure  in  scemg  her. 

11  a  du  plaisir  a 

la  voir.  (2  12,  252.) 

la  ihere  vanity  in 

thinking  so  ? 

Y  a-t-il  de  la  vanite  a  le  penser  ? 

a'Abaisser  d, 

Stoop  to. 

Desagreable  d,(/e 

,3  Visagref.able  to 

Accoutumer  d, 

.dccwsfom  to. 

Destiner  d, 

Destine  to. 

Admettre  d, 

Admit  to. 

Determiner  d, 

Resoli'e  upon. 

Admirable  d,  d*e,3 

Wonderful  to. 

Difficile  d,  de,3 

Difficult  to. 

Affroux  d,  c/e,3 

Dreadful  to. 

Diligent  d, 

Diligent  to 

Agreable  d,  </e,3 

Agreeable  to. 

Disposer  d, 

Dispose  to. 

Aider  d, 

Jfe/p  to. 

Donner  d, 

GVre  to. 

A'iner  d, 

Lifce  to. 

s'Echauffer  d, 

Jfea«  to. 

Aise  a, 

.Easy  to. 

s'KfT;>rcer  d, 

Spend  one's  se//fc  yjn 

Amuser  d. 

.^//zuse  to,  with. 

Effroyable  d,rfe,3 

Frightful  to. 

Animer  d, 

Animate  to. 

Employer  d, 

Employ  to,    Z/*e  to, 

A'Appliquer  d, 

Apply  to. 

Encourager  d, 

Encourage  to. 

Apprendre  d, 

.Learn  to. 

Enclin  d, 

Inclined  to. 

*  Appreter  d, 

Cre*  ready  to. 

Engager  d, 

Induce  to. 

Aspirer  d, 

Aspire  to. 

Enhardir  d, 

Embolden  to. 

Assidu  d, 

.4SSU/MOUS  tO. 

Enseigner  d, 

Teac/i  to. 

e'Attaclier  d, 

S^'cA;  to. 

s'Etudier  d, 

S/wrfy  to. 

Autoriser  d, 

Authorise  to. 

Etre  d, 

^e  to. 

Avoir  d, 

Jfat%«  to. 

Exact  d, 

J?arac«  to. 

Beau  d,  de,3 

.F/ne  to. 

Exercer  d, 

Exercise  to. 

Bon  d,  de,3 

Good  to. 

Exciter  d, 

Excite  to. 

Charmant  d, 

Charming  to. 

Exposer  d> 

Expose  to. 

Chercher  d, 

Seefc  to. 

Facile,  d,  de,3 

.Easy  to. 

Condamner  d, 

Condemn  to.               'se  Fatiguer  c, 

Ger  a'raZ  with. 

Condescendre  d, 

Condescend  to, 

Forcer  d,  rfe,i 

.Force  to. 

Consister  d, 

Consist  to,  in. 

Gagner  d, 

Gain  to. 

Contraindre  d,  de^  Crmpel  to, 

Habile  d, 

C/erer  to. 

Contribuer  d,4 

Contribute  to. 

Habituer  d, 

Accustom  to. 

Demander  d, 

.A5&  tO. 

Hesiter  d, 

Hesitate  to. 

Depenser  d, 

Spend  to;  in. 

Horrible  d,  o"e,3 

jrtorrid  to. 

Dernier  d, 

.Las*  to. 

Inciter  d, 

/nctfe  to. 

1  See  Note  2,  page  522. 

2  7ent>  used  for  *o  6e  ywsf,  ^o  /ictre  j'wsi,  requires  rfe  before  the  following  inf  nilive  j 
ttiul  in  the  sense  of  Jo  happen,  it  requires  d;  as : 

I  have  just  seen  her.  I    Je  riens  DE  la  voir. 

If  she  should  happen  to  know  it.  I    Si  elle  venait  a  le  savoir. 

3  These  adjectives  require  d,  when  the  verb  which  precedes  them  has  a  personal 
nominative;  they  require  c/e,  when  the  nominative  is  impersonal:  Ex. 

Cela  est  agreable,  ion,  beau,  a  i-oir,  a  rfi're,  afaire.  Th;*t  is  agreeable,  fine  fo  SG3.  &  c 
II  est  agrgatle,  bon,  beau,  de  rot'r,  de  c/tre,  de/azre.     It  is  agreeab'e,  fine  to  Be«,  A  o 

4  I?e  or  d,  as  it  sounds  best,  in  the  active  sense;  always  de  in  the  passive;  05, 
Dn  m'a  oblig6  de  or  a  lefaire.  \  They  have  obliged  me  to  do  it. 

j'at  ttt  oblige  de  /e  /af're.  [  I  have  been  obliged  to  do  it. 


524 


GRAMMATICAL     SYNOPSIS, 


Ingenieux  d,           Ingenious  to. 

Prfeparer  d,              Prepare  tiy. 

Inviter  d,                 Invite  to". 

Pret  d,                      Ready  to. 

Laid  d,                      Ugly  to. 

Prompt  d,                Quick  to. 

Lent  d,                     SJoto  to. 

Propre  d,                 Ft?  to. 

Manquer  a,              Oraif  to. 

Recommencer  a,    Begin  again  to 

10  Mettre  d,                Se«  a&owi  to 

Renoncer  d,            Renounce  to. 

Montrer  d,               Show  to. 

Resoudre  d,             Resolve  to. 

Obliger  a,  de,i         Oblige  to. 

Rester  d,                  5iay  to. 

s'Obst  nor  d,              Obstinate  to. 

Reussir  d,               Succeed  to,  in 

Occupe  a,               J5«5y  to. 

Servir  d,                  Serve  to. 

s'Opiniatrer  d,           Obstinate  to. 

Soigneux  ^,             Careful  to. 

Parvcnir  d,               Arrive  to. 

Souger  d,                 T/imfc  of. 

Passer  d,                  Spend  in. 

Sujet  d,                   Subject  to,  A}  t  fc 

Ponser  d,                 T/u'nfc  of. 

Tachor  d,                Aim  at. 

Perclre  d,                Lose  in. 

Tarder  d,                 De^ay  to. 

Persister  d,             Persist  in. 

Tendre  d,                Tend  to. 

uePlaire  d,                 Delight  in. 

Terrible  d,  de,2       Terrible  to 

Porter  d,                  Induce  to. 

Travailler  d,           Work  to. 

Premier  d,               JFtrsr  to. 

Venir  d,                   Cowe  to. 

6.  FRENCH  VERBS  and  ADJECTIVES  which  govern  -he  following  infinitive 

by  means  of  the  preposition  de. 

N.  B.     This  usually  happens  after  nouns  used  in  a  definite  sense. 

He  has  the  pleasure  of  seeing  her. 

11  a  le  plaisir  <Ze  la  voir. 

She  lias  the  vanity  to  think  so. 

Elle  a  la  vanite  dc  le  croire. 

a'Abstenir  de,             Abstain  from. 

Decourager  de,          Discourage  wi*  i 

Accuser  de,               Accuse  of. 

Defend  re  de,              Forbid  to. 

Achever  de,               Finish  to. 

seDepecher  de,             Make  haste  to. 

Affecter  de,               Affect  to. 

Desesperer  de,          Despair  to. 

Afflig&  de,                  Afflicted  to. 

Desirer  de,                 irt'5/i  to. 

Aise  de,                      Glad  to. 

Determiner  de,          Determine  to. 

Apprehender  de,       Pear  to. 

Detourner  de,            Divert  from. 

B'Attcndre,  de,  d,3      Expect  to. 

Differer  de,                De/er  to,  De/ay  *« 

Aveftir  de,                 Warn  to. 

Dire  de,                      Tell  to. 

s'Aviser  de,                  Bethink  to. 

Discontinuer  de,       Discontinue  to 

Blamerde,                 Blame  to. 

Disconvenir  de,        Disown  to. 

Capable  de,               Capable  of,  to. 

Dispenser  de,            Dispense  with. 

Cesser  de,                  Cease  to. 

Dissuader  de,            Dissuade  from. 

Charsr?r  de,               Charge  to. 

Doux  de,                    Pleasant  to. 

Charm6de,  Ravi  de.  Delighted  with 

Ecrire  de,                  TFrite  to. 

Commander  de,         Command  to. 

s'Effbrcer  de,               Endeavor  to. 

Commencer  de,  d,3   Begin  to. 

Enjoindre  dt,,            Enjoin  to. 

Conjurer  de,              Entreat  to. 

Empecher  de,            Prevent  to. 

Conseiller  de,            Advise  to. 

K'Empresser  de^           Eager  to. 

Consoler  de,              Console  for. 

Knnuye  de  ,                Tired  of. 

Content  de,                Content  to. 

Enrage  de,                 Enraged  at. 

Continuer  de,  d,3      Continue  to. 

Entreprendre  de,       Undertake  to 

Convaincre  de,          Convince  of. 

Essayer  de,  £,3          Try  to. 

Convenir  de,              Agree  to 

Etonnede,                 Astonished  si 

Craindre  de,               Pear  to.                          Eviter  rfe,                  .4t'oitffc». 

Curieux  de,                Curious  tc.                    Excuser  de,               .Excwj*  to 

1  Soo  Note  4,  page  523.  -2  See  Note  3,  page  52,3. 

3  AB  it  sounds  best,  i.  o.;  •/••  to  avoid  the  sound  of  several  d,  and  i  to  avoid  l&t 
of  ooveral  d« 


GRAMMATICAL     SYNOPSIS. 


525 


Exempter  de,  Exempt  from. 

Exhorter  de,  rl,i  Exhort  to. 

Fache  de,  Sorry  to. 

Feindre  de,  Feign  to. 

Fitir  de,  Finish  to. 

a«  Flatter  de,  Flatter  to. 

wGarder  de,  Tafce  care  to. 

Grander  de.  Scold  for. 

scHaterde,  Ifasteto. 

Heureux  de,  Happy  to. 

Impossible  de  Impossible  to. 

Incapable  de,  Incapable  of. 

Inppirer  ds,  Inspire  to. 

Jugor  a  propos  de,    TAwA;  proper  to. 

Jurer  de,  Swear  to. 

Juste  i?0,  JUS*  tO. 

Lassii  dt,  Tired  of,  with. 

Libre  de,  At  liberty  to. 

Mander  de,  Send  u>ord  to. 

Manquer  de,  Fail  to. 

Menacer  de,  Threaten  to. 

Meriter  de,  Deserve  to. 

Necessaire  de,  Necessary  to. 

Negliger  de,  Neglect  to. 

Offrir  de,  Offer  to. 

Omettre  dc,  Omtf  to. 

Ordonner  de,  Order  to. 

Oublier  de,  Forget  to. 

Pardonner  de,  Forgive  for. 

Permettro  de,  Permit  to. 

Persuader  de,  Persuade  to. 

BePiquer  de,  Pretind  to. 

7.  The  French  infuiitive  preceded 
present  participle  after  the  verb  to  be. 
Am  I  writing  ?     You  were  reading. 
Wilt  thou  be  working  ? 
We  would  be  walking. 
Who  can  be  ringing? 
They  may  be  sleeping. 
People  might  be  fishing. 
Let  her  be  doing  no  ma'ter  what, 

she  must  come. 
Sho  must  be  practising. 


Plaindre  de, 
Possible  de, 
Prescrire  de, 
Presser  de, 
Prier  de, 
Promettre  de, 
Proposer  de, 


Pity  to,  for. 
Possible  to. 
Prescribe  to. 
Press  to.  . 
Request  to. 
Promise  to. 
Propose  to. 


Recommandei  :7e,     Recommend  lo, 

Refu|er  de.  Refuse  to. 

Regretter  de,  Regret  to. 

se  Rejouir  de,  Rejoice  to 

Remercier  de,  Thank  for. 

se  Repentir  de.  Repent  of,  to. 

Reprocher  de,  Reproach  for. 

R6soudre  de.  Resolve  to. 

Risquer  de,  Risk  to. 

Rougir  de,  L lush  to. 

Satisfait  de,  Satisfied  to,  witft. 

Solliciterde,  Solicit  to. 

Somraer  de,  Summon  tc  . 

seSoucierde,  Care  to. 

Soulmiter  de,  Wish  to. 

Soupconner  de,         Suspect  to. 

se  Souvenir  de,  Remember  to. 

Suffire  de,  Sufficient  to. 

Suggerer  de,  Suggest  to. 

Supplier  de,  Entreat  to. 

Sur  de,  Sure  to. 

Surpris  de,  Surprised  to. 

Tacher  de,  Endeavor  to. 

Tarder  de,  Long-  to. 

seVanter'de,  jB^asfof. 

by  a,  is  used  to  translate  the  English 
(76 l,  ^144—6.) 

Suis-je  d  ecrire  ?     Vous  eticz  a  lire. 

Seras-tu  d  travailler  ? 

Nous  serions  d  nous  promener. 

Qui  peut  etre  c  sonner  ? 

Us  peuvent  etre  a  dormir. 

On  pourrait  etre  a  pecher. 

Qu'elle  soit  d  faire  n'importe  quot, 
il  faut  qu'elle  vienne. 

II  faut  qu'elle  soit  d  pratiquer. 


$  157.— PAST  PARTICIPLE—  Participe  Passe. 

1.  At  (311)  we  saw  that  the  Past  Participle,  (Participe  Passe,)  was  usually 
placed  after  the  auxiliaries  AVOIR,  to  have,  ETRE,  to  be,  to  form  the  pust 
or  compound  tenses.  [Young  pupils,  attend  carefully  to  this  direction.] 

I  have  seen.        Jladst  thou  given  ?     \  J'at  vu.        As-tu  donne*  ? 
Ho  shall  have  written.  (581.)  \  II  aura  ecrit. 


See  Note  3,  page  521. 


52G 


GRAMMATICAL     SYNOPSIS 


She  may  have  left. 
We  would  have  gone  out.  (602.) 
They  would  have  arrived  sooner. 
Would  you  have  dressed  yourselves  ? 


Elle  peu.t  avoir  laisse. 

Nous  serions  sortis. 

Us  seraient  arrives  plus  toi, 

Vous     seriez-vous     habiiles  ?      ,41 

$  160—2.) 
Ces    demoiselles    se     seraienl    ap 

pliquees  a  la  musique. 
Quoiqu'elle  se  soit  trompee. 
II  faut  que  tu  aies  eu  peur.  (792.) 
II  ne  croyait  pas  que  vous  eussiez 

parle  si  bien  et  si  long-temps.  (7S2.) 


Those  young  ladies  would  have  ap- 
plied themselves  to  music. 

Although  she  made  a  mistake* 

Thou  must  have  been  afraid. 

He  did  not  think  you  would  have 
epoken  so  well  and  so  long. 

2.  Since  the  past  participle  is  connected  sometimes  with  tire,  sometimes 
with  avoir,  we  must  give  rules  on  the  subject. 

When  connected  with  etre,  the  jarticipe  passe  is  considered  as  an  adjec 
tive,  and  agrees  with  the  nominative  or  subject  of  the  verb  etre,  to  be.  Thai 
takes  place  in  passive  verbs,  (421,)  and  in  the  neuter  verbs  that  take  etre  foi 
an  auxiliary,  (341.)  In  passive  verbs, 

A  gentleman  must  translate  1  am  known,  by  Je  suis  counu. 

A  lady  must  translate  I  am  known,  by  Je  suis  connue. 

Boys  must  translate  We  are  praised,  by  Nous  sommes  louts. 

Girls  must  translate  We  are  praised,  by  Nous  sommes  loueen 

With  neuter  verbs  having  etre  for  auxiliary,  say : 


Elle  est  nee. 

Ces  dames  sont  neea. 


Jean,  seras-ui  revenu  a  9  heures? 


lie  was  born.  She  was  born.        II  est  ne. 

They  were  born,  (?«.)     These  ladies    Us  sont  nes. 

were  born. 
John,  wilt  thou  have  returned  by  9 

o'clock  ? 
She  would  not  have  died  so  soon.          Elle  ne  serait  pas  morte  si  tot. 

3.  Connected  with  avoir,  the  parlicipe  passe  agrees,  not  with  the  nomi- 
native or  subject,  but  with  the  direct  object  (regime  direct,  $43)  of  thapar-. 
ticipe,  when  that  regime  precedes  the  participe,  but  not  when  it  comes  after. 

The  regime  indirect  (§  44)  has  no  influence  on  the  part-tape. 

Have  you  received  my  letters  ?  |  Avez-vous  re$u  mes  lettres  ?    The 

regime,  mes  lettres,  coming  after  rc$u,  the  participe  does  not  change.  But, 
in:  The  letters  which  you  have  received,  the  regime,  which,  preceding  the 
participe,  the  latter  must  agree  with  the  former,  and  be  feminine  plural. 
Hence  the  French  phrase  «s :  Les  lettres  que  vous  avez  regues. 


Nous  avons  corrige  les  themes  quo 

vous  avez  ecrits  et  envoy es. 
Combien  de  coups  avez- vous  tires  ? 


We    have    corrected  the  exercises 

that  you  have  written  and  sent. 
How  many  shots  did  you  fire  ? 

Combien  de  coups,  the  regime,  being  before,  the  participe  is  declinable. 
f  have  fired  six.  |  J'en  ai  tire  six. 

Here  the  regime  is  s?>  ;  and  as  it  comes  after  the  participe,  the  latter  is 
Undeclinable.  (311.) 

4.  The  objective   pronoun    en  may  be  regime  direct  ($43)  or  indirect* 


GRAMMATICAL     SYNOPSIS.  527 

(J44,)  hat  the  parlicipe  is  never  declinable  after  it ;  because  en  has  neithei 
gender  nor  number,  and  consequently,  when  regime  direct,  it  cannot 
change  the  participe.  As  regime  indirect,  it  has  no  influence  on  it. 


Have  you  gathered  any  flowers? 
I  have  gathered  some. 
He  has  not  answered  the  two  letters 
he  has  received  from  them.  • 


Avez-vous  cueilli  des  fleurs  ? 
yen  ai  cueilli.  ($43.) 
II  n'a  pas  repondu  aux  deux  lettrea 
qu^\\  en  a  revues.  ($  44.) 


Here  the  participe  is  regues,  fern,  plur.,  not  on  account  cf  e?i,  regime  indi- 
rect, but  of  que,  its  regime  direct,  which  precedes,  and  with  which  it  must 
iigree,  independently  of  en. 

5.  The  rule  given  at  3  is  easily  observed  in  plain  and  ordinary  cases  in 
which  the  regime  direct  is  easily  distinguished ;  but  there  are  sentences,  in 
which  even  grammarians  can  hardly  decide.  Without  presenting  those 
knotty  points  to  the  student,  I  will  give  him  the  principle  by  which  he  ia  to 
be  guided,  and  leave  the  rest  to  his  judgment. 

Sometimes  after  the  participle,  preceded  by  an  object,  thei«  is  a  verb  in 
the  infinitive  ;  then  it  ia  necessary  to  consider  whether  the  object  is  governed 
by  the  participle,  or  by  the  infinitive  which  follows  it. 

If  the  object  is  governed  by  the  participle,  the  participle  must  be  of  the 
same  gender  and  number  as  that  object.    Ex. : 
The  letter  I  have  given  him  to  copy.  ]  La  lettre  quo  je  lui  ai  donnico,  copier. 

If  the  object  is  governed  by  the  infinitive  which  follows  the  participle,  tho 
participle  has  no  agreement  with  the  object.     As  : 
The  letter  I  have  told  him  to  copy.     |  La  lettre  que  je  lui  ai  dit  de  copier.1 

The  participles  phi,  pleased  ;  du,  owed,  ought  ;  pu,  been  able,  and  voulu, 
been  willing  ;  do  not  agree  with  the  object  that  precedes  them,  because  the 
infinitive  of  the  foregoing  verb  is  understood  after  them.     Ex. : 
I  have  done  him  all  the  services  that  I  Je  lui  ai  rendu  tous  les  services  qu« 

I  have  been  able,  (to  do  understood.)  I       que  j'ai^w,  (lui  rendre  understood.) 

$  157^.— PRESENT  PARTICIPLE.— Particle  Present. 

•  The  Present  Participle  in  English  is  used  after  every  preposition  except 
the  preposition  to,  and  it  enters  in  the  formation  of  every  tense  of  almost 
every  verb,  as  :  I  am  speaking,  I  was,  have  been,  had  been,  shall  be,  shall 
have  bee?i,  &c.  &c.,  speaking  ;  while  in  French,  it  is  excluded  from  thoso 
tenses,  and  is  much  used  only  in  connexion  with  the  preposition  en,  tho 

I  If  you  are  uncertain  whether  the  object  is  governed  by  the  participle,  or  by  tho 
mfiniti/e  which  follows  it,  transpose  the  words,  and  see  after  which  the  object  may 
rnors  properly  be  placed. 

If  the  object  can  be  placed  after  the  participle,  as  in  the  first  instance,  The  lettei 
I  have  given  him  to  copy,  which  may  be  turned,  I  have  given  him  the  letter  to  ccpy* 
the  participle  given  governs  the  object  letter,  and  it  must  agree  with  it. 

If  the  object  comes  more  properly  after  the  infinitive,  as  in  tho  second  iastanco, 
Thit  letter  I  have  told  him  to  copy,  which  might  be  turned,  I  have  told  him  to  copf 
ike  letter,  (not,  the  letter  to  copy,)  the  object  letter  is  governed  by  the  infinitive  1* 
copy,  and  tke  'xr-tieiple  has  no  agreement  with  it. 


B28 


GRAMMATICAL     SYNOPSIS. 


only  one  which  in  that  language  governs  the  present  participle.  In  conse 
quence  of  that  radical  difference,  it  was  thought  inexpedient  to  direct  the 
attention  of  the  pupil  to  that  part  of  the  verb,  for  fear  that  its  knowledge 
should  lead  him  into  constant  errors,  whilst  a  want  of  it  could  not  be  felt, 
since  the  French  construction  does  not  require  it.  But  now  that  he  has  gone 
through  the  various  portions  of  the  verb,  and  that  the  same  danger  is  not  to 
be  apprehended,  we  proceed  to  its  introduction.  As  the  present  participle 
always  ends  in  ant,  and  is  invariable,  it  is  attended  with  no  difficulty. 

1.  It  is  formed  from  the  first  person  plural  of  the  present  indicative,  by 
changing  its  termination  o?is  into  ant. 

Ire  Conj.   We  speak,        Nous  parlons.  Speaking,  Parlant. 

2do  Conj.  We  finish,         Nous  finissons.  Finishing,          Finissant. 

3me  Conj.  We  receive,      Nous  recevons.  Receiving,         Recevant. 

4me  Conj.  We  sell,  Nous  vcndons.  Selling,  Vendant. 

2.  The  five  following  verbs  form  exceptions  to  this  rule  : — 


To  have, 
To  be, 

To  become  due, 
To  know, 
To  become, 


having, 
being.    . 
becoming  due. 
knowing, 
becoming. 


Avoir, 

£tre, 

fichoir, 

Savoir, 

Seoir, 


ayant. 

dtant. 

echeant. 

sachant. 

suant. 


3.  It  is  used  when  an  agent  performs  two  actions  at  the  same  time,  as  in 
the  following  examples : 
The  man  eats  while  running. 
I  correct  while  reading. 
I  question  while  speaking.  ' 
You  speak  while  answering  me. 
I  improve  by  reading. 
Take  exercise  by  walking,  (walk  for 

exercise.) 

Let  us  go  leisurely  to  the  store. 
When  must  he  do  it  ?     In  going,  (as 

he  goes.) 

Call  there  as  you  come. 
Do  they  sing  while  dancing  ? 
People  ruin  themselves  by  gambling. 


L'homme  mange  en  courant. 

Je  corrige  en  lisant. 

Je  questionne  en  parlant. 

Vous  parlez  en  me  repondant. 

Je  m'instruis  en  lisant. 

Prends  de  1'exercice  en  marchant. 

Allons  au  magasin  en  promenant. 
Quand  faut-il  qu'il  le  fasse  ?         En 

s'en  allant. 
Passez-y  en  venant. 
Chantent-ils  en  dansant  ? 
On  se  ruine  en  jouant. 


4.  En  being  the  only  French  preposition  which  governs  the  present  par 
ticiple,  as  we  have  said,  (R.  1,)  it  follows  that,  whatever  may  be  the  Eng 
lish  preposition  connected  with  the  present  participle,  it  can  be  translated 
only  by  EN,  if  the  French  participle  is  used. 


While  digging  the  foundation,  they 

found  a  skeleton. 
The  house  being  built,  we  occupied 

it. 
Waving  studied,  I  recited  well. 


En  creusant  les  fondements,  :>n  trouva 

un  squelette.  (671,  N.  1.) 
La  maison  etant  bade,  n6us  1'occu- 

pames. 
Ayant  etudid,  je  recitai  bien. 


1  In  speaking  of  a  lease,  or  n  given  portion  of  time. 


GRAMMATICAL     SYNOPSIS.  529 

5.  The  present  participle  qualifying  a  noun,  is  considered  as  an  adjeclivet 
iKnglish,  participial  adjective  ;  French,  adject  if  verbal,)  and  agrees  with  the 
noun  in  gender  and  number. 


A.  charming  man. 
A  charming  woman. 
Charming  men. 


Un  homme  charmant. 
Une  fcrnme  charmante. 
Des  hommes  charmants. 


Charming  women.  j  Des  fcmmes  charmantes. 

6.  The  English  present  participle,  showing  the  action  of  a  nominative 
case,  is  translated  in  French  by  the  present  participle,  which  is  of  course 
invariable. 


This    actor,   dancing    gracefully,   is 

much  admired. 
Those  actresses,  dancing  gracefully, 

are  much  admired. 


Cet  acteur,  dansant  avec  graces,  est 

tres-admire. 
Ces  actrices,  dansant   avec  graces, 

sont  tres-admirees. 


7.  The  English  present  participle,  relating  to  an  objective  case,  may  be 
translated  by  the  French  present  participle,  but  the  indicative  is  preferable. 


I  found  her  coming  here. 
See    those   children  playing   in    the 
shade. 


Je  la  trouvai  qui  vcnait  ici. 
Vois  ces  e?ifants  se  jouant  (ou  qui 
jouenf)  sous  I'ombrage. 


8.  The  English  present  participle,  governed  by  a  ve»5  or  a  preposition,  (en 
excepted,)  is  translated  by  a  French  infinitive. 

I  see  her  reading,  and  I  am  tired  of  I  Je  la  vois  lire,  ct  je  suis  fatigue  de 
waiting  for  her.  I      Vattendre. 

9  The  English  present  participle,  used  as  a  nominative  in  a  general  sense, 
is  never  translated  by  the  French  present  participle,  but  by  an  infinitive,  or 
a  noun,  if  there  is  one  synonymous  to  the  verb. 

Playing  is  tin  delight  of  children.      I  Jouer  est  le  delice  des  enfants  ;  or, 

j  Le  jeu  est  le  delice  des  enfants. 

10.  If  not  taken  in  a  general  sense,  use  a  noun ;  or,  if  no  synonymous 
noun  can  be  found,  give  the  sentence  another  -turn. 


He  gives  all  his  time  to  studying. 
Their  singing  was  much  admired. 
Is  that  the  cause  of  his  being  poor  ? 
What  is  the  reason  of  your  coming  so 


II  donne  tout  son  temps  a  V  etude, 
Leur  chant  fut  fort  admire. 
Est-ce  la  cause  de  sa  pauvretc  ? 
Pourquoi  venez-vou*  si  tard  ? 


latt)  ? 

11.  Tho  present  particinle,  after  to  be,  is  translated  by  the  infinitive.  (See 
$  150-  -7.) 

$  158.— NEUTER  VERBS.—  Verbes  Neutres. 

1.  in  neuter  verbs  the  action  is  intransitive,  that  is,  it  remains  in  tin; 
u.^cnt.  They  are  conjugated  like  the  active.  The  latter,  however,  always 
form  their  past  tenses  with  the  auxiliary  avoir,*  to  have  ;  on  the  contrary, 
j~me  neuter  verbs  take  etre,*  to  be,  and  others  avoir,*  for  their  auxiliary, 
others  again  take  sometimes  avoir,*  and  sometimes  itrc*  according  as  action 


530 


GRAMMATICAL    SYNOPSIS. 


2.  When  conjugated  with  etre,  their  past  participles  agree  with  the  nomi 
native  of  that  verb.     But,  when  conjugated  with  avoir,  their  past  participlea 
are  invariable,  for  they  have  no  regime  direct  with  which  they  can  agree. 

3.  Verbs  which   without   being  reflective,   take   etre,  to  be,   as   auxili 
ary.  (341.) 

To  I      To 

arrive,  happen,       arriver. 
attain,  parvenir. 

be  born,  naitre. 

become,  devenir. 

comq,  venir. 

come  bacx,  revenir. 

come  in,  entrer. 

decay,  dechoir. 

die,  mourir. 


|  die, 
disagree, 
fall, 

go. 

go  out, 
happen,  come  to 

pass,  survenir. 

intervene,  intervenir. 

set  out,  partir. 


deceder. 
discon  venir. 
tomber. 
aller. 
sortir. 


$159.     PASSIVE  VERBS.—  Verbes  Passifs. 

1.  Those  verbs,  although  extensively  used  in  English,  are   not  so  m 
French.    In  both  languages  they  are  formed,  as  taught  (421),  by  means  ot 
the  auxiliary  verb  to  be,  etre,  joined  to  the  past  participle  of  any  active  verb. 

2.  The  past  participle  being  then  used  as  an  adjective,  agrees  with  the 
nominative  or  subject  of  the  verb  to  be. 


The  boy  is  praised  by  his  friends. 
The  girl  is  praised  by  them. 
The  boys  are  all  blamed. 
Are  not  these  girls  admired  ? 


Le  gargoji  est  lone  par  ses  amis. 
Lafdle  est  louee  par  eux. 
Les  gar$ons  sont  tons  blames. 
Cesjilles  ne  sont-elles  pas  admirees  ? 


3.  The  French,  instead  of  the  passive  voice,  use  the  active  form  with  on 
for  nominative,  or  else  the  reflective  verb.  The  student  should  then  be  able 
to  change  any  one  form  to  another  with  ease. 


Active  voice.     /  shut  the  door. 
Passive  voice.     The  door  is  shut  by 


Jeferme  la  porte. 

La  port e  est  fermee  par  moi. 


The  preposition  by  and  the  pronoun  it  governs  are  frequently  left  out ;  foi 
example,  the  passive  voice  of,  people  say,  is,  it  is  said,  without  adding  by 
the  people. — People  know,  it  is  known. — They  believe,  it  is  believed. 

It  is  advisable  to  exercis.e  the  scholar  on  these  alterations,  principally  from 
the  English  passive  to  the  French  active  form  with  the  pronoun  on ;  as : 


Is  it  expected  ?     Is  it  believed  ? 
We  are  told.      On  nous  dit. 

And  to  the  reflective  form.    As 
The  church  will  be  opened  soon. 
Their  house  was  sold  yesterday. 
Water  i*  carried  everywhere. 


Le  croit-on  ? 
It  will  be  seen. 


On  verra. 


L'dglise  s'ouvrira  bientol. 

Leur  maison  se  vendit  hier. 

L'eau  se  conduit  partout. 
4.  The  infinitive  of  a  passive  verb  coming  after  another  verb,  is  rendered 
z>y  oTi,  as  nominative  indefinite  of  the  following  verb,  which  must  be  put  in 
its  proper  tense.  (771,  N.  B.) 

I  fear  to  be  laughed  at.  (Subj.)  I  Je  crains  qu'oTi  ne  se  moque  de  moi. 

He  is  certain  to  be  laughed  at.  (Ind.)  I  II  est  certain  qu'cra  se  mocuerade  lui 


GRAMMATICAL    SYNOPSIS.  55i 

$160 .-REFLECTED  VERBS.—  Verbes  Rijlichis, 

1.  Wnen  the  action  falls  upon  the  agent,  and  the  objective  case  refers  to 
the  same  person  as  the  nominative,  the  verb  is  called  Reflective.    The 
French  use  nearly  all  their  active  verbs  under  a  reflective  form.    They  are 
as  fond  of  that  kind  of  verbs  as  the  English  are  of  the  passive  form,  ($  159,) 
und  frequently  translate  the  latter  by  *t. 

2.  In  reflective  verbs,  the  pronoun  of  the  object  is  of  the  same  person  as 
that  of  the  subject.     Each  person  is  therefore  conjugated  with  a  double 
personal  pronoun.     One  is  nominative  ;  the  other  objective,  or  rejlective. 
($71,  &c.) 

We  . . .  ourselves.  Nous  nous. 

You  . . .  yourselves.  Vous  vous. 

They. . .  themselves.  Ilsse... 

They. . .  themselves.  Elles  se.  [se. 

The  men  . .  themselves.  Leshommea 

The  girls  . .  themselves.  Les  filles  se. 


I . . .  myself, 
Thou  . .  .  thyself, 
He  ...  himself, 
She  . . .  herself, 
It ...  itself, 


One  ...  one's  self,  On 


N.  B.  The  third' person  reflective  is  always  se  for  both  genders  and  numbers. 

3.  In  the  imperative  there  is  but  one  pronoun,  the  reflective  or  objective 
one.  ($  150,  N.  B.)    Habillez-vows,  dress  yourself.     Ne  te  trompe  pas,  do 
not  make  a  mistake.    Allons-7ious-en,  let  us  go  away.  (En,  there,  means 
from  here,  from  there.) 

4.  In  French,  all  reflective  verbs  form  their  compound  tenses  with  the 
auxiliary  verb  tire,  while,  in  English,  they  take  to  have.    As,  in  this  case, 
the  verb  to  be  is  used  in  place  of  to  have,  the  past  participle  of  a  reflective 
verb  does  not,  as  in  neuter  verbs,  (341,  $  158,)  and  passive  verbs,  (421,  $  159,) 
agree  with  the  subject,  but  with  the  direct  object,  when  that  object  is  before, 
in  the  same  manner  as  when  to  have  (avoir)  is  the  auxiliary.  (321,  Obs.  75.) 
Hence  the  French  write,  Nous  nous  sommes  coupes  ;  the  past  participle 
taking  an  s,  because  nous,  its  direct  object,  is  before  ;  but  in  Nous  nous 
Bommes  coupe  les  doigts,  the  participle  coupe  has  no  s,  because  its  object  (les 
doigts)  comes  after. 

5.  Most  passive  verbs  having  an  inanimate  object  for  their  nominatives 
are  reflected  in  French  ;   as,  Les  mauvaises  nouvelles  se  rcpandent  plua 
prornptement  que  les  bonnes,  Bad  news  is  sooner  spread  than  good.     On 
81 'etonne  do  1'accroissement  rapide  des  fitats-Unis,  People  are  astonished  at 
iho  rapid  increase  of  the  United  States.  ($  159—3.; 


ADVERBS. 

$  161 , — 1.  ADVERBS  qualifying  verbs,  are  on  that  account  placed  as  near  thcj 
?erb  as  possible.  The  French  say :  Vaime,  mieux  le  bosuf  que  le  mouton ;  not 
'faime  le  noeuf  mieux,  because  the  adverb  mieux  qualifies  the  verb  j' aims, 
ir»d  not  the  noun,  bceuf.  (513.) 

2.  Adverbs,  expressed  in  a  single  word,  are  usually  placed  after  the  verb, 
in  a  simple  tense,  and  between  the  auxiliary  and  the  participle,  in  a  com 


532  GRAMMATICAL     SYNOPSIS. 

He  writes  well.  \  II  ecrit  lien. 


He  has  written  well 
lie  has  written  badly. 


II  a  bien  ecrit. 
II  a  mal  ecrit. 


3.  If  the    adverb    is    expressed  in  two  or  more  words,  if  gu-f-.  alt  :r  the 
verb,  whether  the  tense  is  simple  or  compound. 


He  writes  properly. 

lie  will  write  tolerably  well. 

SJu  Bang  well,  as  usual. 


II  dent  comme  il  faut. 

II  ecrira  passablevient  lien. 

Elle  a  bien  chante,  comme  a  Vordv 


naire. 


4.  Combien,  how  much,  many  ?  ne  . . ,  quc  only,  but  ;  trop,  too  much,  &c. ; 
beaucoup,  much,  many;  assez,  enough ;  ne  .  .  .  guere,  b^t  little,  are  called 
?>v  the  French  adverbs  of  quantity.  (Dir.  7 — 13!.i 

In  English,  to  form  adverbs  from  adjectives,  .he  final  ly  is  added  ;  as, 
wise,  wisely.     In  French,  that  final  is  ment. 

5.  Adjectives  which  end  in  a  vowel,  become  adverbs  by  adding  ment  to 
it ;    as,  sage,   poll,  inginu,  adjectives ;    sagement,   poliment,    ingenument, 
adverbs. 

6.  Adjectives  ending  in  nt,  change  that  final  to  mme?it  ;  as,  constant,  pru- 
<1  ait ,  patient ,  adjectives;  constamment,  prudcmmcnt,  patiemment,  adverbs. 

7.  Adjectives  which  end  neither  in  a  vowel,  nor  in  nt,  become  abvcrbi 
by  adding  ment  to  their  feminine  termination ;  as,  grand,  doux,  heureux, 
adjectives  masculine  ;  grande,  douce,  heureuse,  adjectives  feminine  ;  gra?ide' 
ment,  greatly ;  doucemcr.t,  softly,  slowly,  sweetly;  hcureusement,  happily 
luckily,  adverbs. 


NEGATIONS. 

$102. — LA  connaissance  quo  nous  avons  dt'ja  de  la  negation  nous  met  a 
nicine  de  dcduire  les  neuf  articles  euivants: — 

ART.  1.  La  negation  est  gencYalement  en  deux  mots,  dont  Tun  cst  inva- 
riablement  ncou  n',  et  1'autre  un  compleme?it,  qui  change  scion  les  circon- 
stances.1 

2.  Ne  se  place  toujours  avant  le  verbe,  e:  avant  les  pronoms  ohjectifa, 
s'il  y  en  a. 

3.  Dans  les  temps  simples,  ne  est  avant,  et  le  complement  aprus  le  verbe. 

4.  Dans  les  temps  composes,  le  compliment  se  place  quelque  fois  avant  Io 
participe  passe* :  Je  ne  1'ai  pas  vu. 

5.  Quelque  fois  aprea.     Je  ?i'ai  vu  personne. 

6.  Le  complement  se  met  avnut  ne  et  tous  deux  avant  le  verbe  dans  lei 
temps  simples  et  avant  1'auxiliaire  dans  les  composes,  quand  la  negation 
forme  le  nominatif.    Ricn  ne  le  d^courage,  nothing  discourages  him. 

i  The  word  complement  n^cnnR  here  completing  the  wnw. 


GRAMMATICAL    SYNOPSIS. 


533 


7.  Avant  i'infmitif  ne  et  son  complement  sont  jo'ims,  ct  se  placcnt  gene* 
ilcment  avant :  Ne  rien  avoir. 

8.  Quand  le  verbe  est  omis,  Ic  complement  seul  exprime  la  negation :  Pat 
ii,  not  he. 

9.  Neither,  non  plus. 

ART.  3.  Ne,  avant,  le  complement  apres. — Liste  alphabe'tique  dez»  uega- 
ons  avec  les  temps  simples : 

Ne  ....  quo  . . . 

Ne ....  guere,  pas  beaucoup,  qu  an 
pou. 

Ne ni ni. 

Ne ni  ne ni  ne. 

Je    rt'ecris,    ne   lis,   ni    ne    traduis 
I'Allemand. 

Ne jamais. 

Ne  ....  jamais  plus,  cr  plus  jawais 

Ne jamais  rien. 

. .  pas  de,  point  de.1 
. .  pas  un,  pas  unc. 
. .  aucun,  aucunc. 
. .  nul,  nulie. 


lut,  only.  (131.) 

lut  little,  only  a  little.  (13>.) 

Neither . . .  nor . .  (before  nouns.  (51.) 
Neither . . .  nor  . .  (before  verbs,  sim- 
ple tenses.) 

fever.  (31«.) 
N"ever  any  more. 
NTever  anything. 

No,  not any.  (21.) 


Nobody,  no  one,  no  person,  not  any- 
body. 

No  longer,  no  more,  not  any  longer, 
more. 

No  longer,  anything,  nothing  more, 
fee. 

None,  not  any. 

In  no  manner,  no  wi?o,  by  no  means. 

No  sooner.  (682,  $  1  ;>:>.) 

Not. 

Not  anything,  nothing.  (31.) 

Not  anywhere,  nowhere.  (1C2.) 

Not  at  all,  not  in  the  least. 

Not  in  the  least. 

Not  much  more,  not  many  more,  only 
a  little  more. 

Nothing  but. 

Only  a  little,  not  much.  (131.) 

Only  a  little  more,  a  fev*  **ore. 


. . .  personne.  (72.) 
Ne  . . . .  plus.  (3G2.) 
Ne  ....  plus  rien. 

N'en  . .  pas,  point — aucun,  no, 
Ne  ....  d'aucune  maniere. 

Nc pas  plutot. 

Ne  ....  pas  ou  point.1 
Ne ....  rien. 

Ne nulle  part. 

Ne pas  du  tout,  point  du  tou 

Ne pas  le  moins  du  monde. 

Ne guere  plus — plus  guere, 

Ne  ....  que — rien  quo. 

Ne  ....  qu'un  peu,  guere,  pas  beau 

coup. 
Ne guere,  pas  beaucoup,  qu'un 

peu,  plus. 


l  Purists  find  out  some  difference  between  pas  and  point.  There  is  some,  but  it  ir 
obly  ono  well  acquainted  with  Hie  language  that  could  find  use  for  the  distinction 
Ueo  at  pleasure,  the  one  or  the  other,  merely  consulting  euphony.  (412  ) 


534 


GRAMMATICAL     SYNOPSIS. 


NEGATIONS    AVEC    LES    TEMPS    COMPO«£s. 

4.  hiate  des  rogations,  dont  le  comple'ment  est  place  avant  le 
passe*: 

Je  n'en  ai  guere  vu.  (31!.) 
But  a  little,  only  a  little. 


Neitncr, 
Never. 
Never . . 


,  nor . .  nor . .  (before  verbs.) 


more  or  any  more. 


Never . . .  anything. 

No. 

No  longer,  no  more,  not  any  longer, 

&c. 

No  longer,  anything,  &c. 
None,  not  any. 
No  sooner. 
Not. 
Nothing,  not ...  anything. 

Not  much  more. 

None  at  all,  not . . .  the  least  bit. 


Je  7t'en  ai  pas  beaucoup  vu. 

Je  n'en  ai  pas  vu  beaucoup. 

Je  7te  1'ai  ni  vu,  ni  entendu. 

Je  ne  Vaijamais  vu. 

Je  ne  I'aijamais  plus  (OTljrfusjafrifcfJJ 

vu. 

Je  7ie  lui  aijamais  rien  Jit. 
Je  ne  lui  ai  pas  donne  d'argcnt. 
Je  ne  lui  en  ai  plus  donne'. 

Je  7ie  lui  ai  plus  rien  donne. 

Ne  lui  en  ai-je  pas  donn£  ? 

II  ne  1'eut  pas  plutot  dit  qu'il . . . 

Ne  le  lui  avez-vous  pas  donnd  ? 

Ne  leur  avez-vous  rien  dit  ? 
f  Je  ne  lui  en  ai  gucre  plus  donne. 
<  Je  7ie  lui  en  ai  pas  donne  beaucouji 
(      plus. 

J  Je  ne  lui  en  ai  pas  du  tout  donne. 
\  Jei 


!  ne  lui  en  ai  poijit  donne  du  tout. 
5.  Liste  des  negations  dont  le  complement  est  placd  apres  le  participe. 


But,  only. 

J*ut  a  little,  only  a  little. 

Neither . . .  nor . .  .  nor  . . . 

No,  not  any. 

Nobody,  no  one,  not . .  any  onfi,  &c. 

In  no  manner,  nowise,  by  no  means. 

Nowhere,  not . . .  anywhere. 

Nothing  Irut. 

Only  a  little  more. 

Not ...  in  the  least ...  not ...  o  bit. 


Je  n'ai  vu  yweccla. 
JV'en  a-t-il  pris  qu'un  pcu  ? 
JV^a-t-il  vu  ni  Tun  ni  1'autre  ? 
N'en  avez-vous  appris  aucun  ? 
Qui  7i'a  vu  personne  ? 
Je  ne  Tai  fait  d'aucune  manicre. 
Ne  Tavons-nous  laisse  nulle  part  ? 
II  n'a  fait  yue  chanter,  (rien  que.} 
Je  n'cn  ai  apportd  yu'un  peu  plus. 
11  ne  Ta  point  change  le  mains  du 
monde. 

6.  Negations  employees  comme  nominatifs  ou  sujets. 
Le  complement  se  met  avant  ne  et  tous  deux  avant  le  vcrbc  dans  let 
temps  simples  et  avant  1'auxiliaire  dans  les  composes. 

J\Ti  1'un  ni  1'autre  ne  lui  conviennent 

Ni  1'un  72t  1'autre  rt'ont  pu  lui  con- 
venir. 

Personne  ne  le  fera. 

Personne  ne  1'a  fait. 

Aucun  Ti'ira.  Nulle  7i'ira. 

Nul  ri'y  a  etc.    Aucune  n'y  eat  a!i(5o 


Neither  : 

Nobody: 
None,  not  one: 

Neither  suit  him. 
Neither  could  suit  her. 
(past.) 
No  one  will  do  it. 
Nobody  did  it. 
None  will  go. 
Not  one  went. 

GRAMMATICAL    SYNOPSIS. 


Nothing :  Nothing      displeases 

him. 

Nothing  disturbed  her. 
Nothing  over :  Nothing  ever  pleases 

him. 
Nothing  ever  pleased 

her. 

Nobody  ever  pleased 
her. 


Ricn  ne  lui  deplait. 

Rien  ne  Pa  derangee. 
Jumais  rien  ne  lui  plait. 

Eien  jamais  ne  lui  a  plu. 
Jamais  persojine  ne  lui  a  plu. 


7,  Avcc  1'inftnitif.     Ne  et  son  compleme?it  son  joints  et  places  avant. 
He  likes  to  do  nothing.  I  II  aime  a  ne  ricn  faire.  (432.) 

He  fears  he  shall  have  none.  I  II  craint  de  ne  pas  en  avoir. 

II  y  a  quelques  exceptions,  que  nous  aliens  presenter. 


II  a  envic  de  n'en  prendre  qu'un. 
II  a  penr  de  n' en  avoir  aiLCun. 
Dites-lui  de  ft'inviter  personne. 
II  a  envie  de  7i'aller  nullepart. 


He  fears  he  can  never  get  it. 


He  has  a  mind  to  take  but  one. 
He  is  afraid  to  have  none. 
Tell  him  to  invite  nobody. 
He  has  a  mind  to  go  nowhere. 

Les  autres  suivent  la  7me  r<Vle  generale.  II  est  essentiei  cependau 
d'ajouter  que  tres-souvent  l'infinitif  peut  se  mettre  entre  ne  et  le  comple- 
ment. 

(   II  craint  de  ne  jamais  F  avoir. 
(  II  craint  dc  ne  1'  avoir  jamais. 

H.  Quand  le  verbe  est  omis,  (omitted  or  understood,)  ne,  se  trouvant  avant 
vissi ;  consuqucmmcnt  le  complement  eeul  cxprimc  la  negation. 

Veut-il  du  pain  et  du  fro  mage  ?  II  vcut  du  pain,  mais  pas  de  fromage, 
ino  cheese.)  Lc  verbe  veut  etant  omis ;  t'Z  ne,  qui  sont  avant,  le  sont  ausbi. 
Qu'a-t-il  ?  Ric7i.  Quand  viendra-t-il?  Jamais?  Qui  aimez-vous?  Personne. 
Que  leur  faut-il  ?  Ricn  de  plus. 

9.  *Vc  have  seen  that  neither  . . .  nor,  was  translated  by  ne . . .  ni .  . .  m, 
(5:,  $  162 — 3,  4,  6.)  When  neither  is  unconnected  with  nor,  translate  it  by 
non  plus,  which  means  no  more,  not  any  more.  (Page  If/J.) 


I  neither.  Neither  do  I. 

Thou  neither.         Neither  do  you. 
Lui  non  plus.         Elle  non  plus. 
Ceci  non  plus.        Cela  non  plus. 
Lc  gendral  non  plus. 


J\loi  ?ioji  plus.       Nous  non  plus. 
Toi  non  plus.        Vous  non  plua. 
Eux  non  plus.      Elles  non  plus. 
Ceux-ci  non  plus.  Celles-la  non  plus, 
Les  generawx  non  plus. 


.  PREPOSITIONS. 

$  163. — 1.  French  prepositions,  except  en,  govern  the  infinitive  of  verbs, 
while  in  English  they  govern  the  present  participle.  (Rule  1.) 


They  speak  of  coming  without  wri- 
ting to  you,  and  before  sending  the 
present. 

We  improve  bv  reading  and  medita- 
ting. 


Us  parlent  de  venir  sans  VOUB  ecriro 
et  avant  d'envoyer  le  present. 

On  s'instruit  en  lisant  .ct  c\  medi 
tant.  (H57i.) 


51)6  GRAMMATICAL     SYNOPSIS 

2.  In  French  the  preposition  is  always  placed  before  the  word  it  governs, 
and  must  be  repealed  before  every  one.  In  English,  on  the  contrary,  the 
preposition  is  placed  either  before  or  after,  and  need  not  be  repeated. 


With  whom  were  you  speaking  ? 
Whom  were  you  speaking  with  ? 
[    come   from    France,   Italy,   and 
Spain-. 


Avec  qui  parL'ez-vous  ?  never 
Qui  parliez-v^us  avec  ? 
Je    viens    de    France,    d' Italic 
d'Espagne. 


3.  The  preposition,  and  the  verb  it  governs,  may  be  separated  by  any 
negation  or  objective  pronoun. 


I  arri  sorry  I  did  not  know  it. 
lias  he  sold  the  house  without  telling 
you  of  it  ? 


Je  su!s  fache  dene  pas -V avoir  su. 
A-t-il  vendu  la  maison  sans  vous  en 
avertir  ? 


REMARKS    ON    SOME    PREPOSITIONS. 

4.  OF,  FROM;  DE.     We  have  noticed  ($8,   &c.)  the  conn-action  of  J« 
with  the  definite  article  le,  les,  into  du,  des  ;  and  refer  to  those  paragraphs. 

5.  To,  AT,  IN  ;  A.     We  have  seen  ($$  8,  12,  &c.)  how  d,  connected  with 
le,  les,  contracts  into  au,  aux,  and  refer  to  those  paragraphs. 

G.  As  FAR  AS.     Jusqu'a.  ($  13.) 

7.  AT,  IN,  TO,  relating  to  a  person's  residence,  is  CHEZ.  (181.) 
I  must  go  to  my  sister's.  I  II  faut  que  j'aille  chez  ma  scour. 

They  live  at  or  in  our  house.  I  Us  demeurent  chez  nous. 

CHEZ,  means  to,  in  or  at  the  house  of,  consequently,  its  complement  must 
be  an  objective  personal  pronoun,  instead  of  the  English  possessive,  and  tho 
word  maison,  house,  is  not  used. 
At  my  house,  (turn,  to  the  house  of  me.}     Chez  moi. 


To  his,  our,  your,  thy,  her,  their, 

house. 

From  a  person's  house,  my  house. 
To  Hv3,  stay  with  somebody. 


Chez  lui,  nous,  vous,  toi,  cllc,  cux, 

dies,  soi. 

Dechez  quelqu'un,  de  chez  moi. 
Rester  chez  or  avcc  quelqu'un. 


CHEZ  sometimes  relates  to  the  character  of  a  person,  and  means  in. 
This  virtue  is  a  vice  in  you.  ]  Cette  vertu  est  chez  vous  un  vice. 

CHEZ,  applied  to  nations,  is  translated  by  among. 
Among  the  Greeks  and  Romans.        |  Chez  les  Grecs  ct  chez  les  Remains. 

8.  FROM  ;  DE  LA  PART.  "  From,  with  the  verbs  to  go,  to  come,  not  fron: 
tnc  house,  but  from  a  person,  is  de  la  part,  de  la  part  de. 


Go  from  me  to  my  friend's. 

Whom  do  you  come  from  ?     Who 


Allez  de  ma  part  chez  mon  ami. 
De  la  part  de  qui  venez-vous  ? 


sent  you  ? 

9.  BEFORE;  A VANT,  DEVANT.  A  vant  relates  to  time  or  order,  and  is  tht 
opposite  of  apres,  after.  Devant  relates  to  situation,  and  is  the  opposite  ot 
derriere,  behind.  (493.) 


If  you  arrive  before  me,  I  will  arrive 

after  you. 
Walk  before^lic  will  walk  behind 


Si  vous  arrivez  avanr.  moi,  j'arrivera* 

apres  vous. 
Marchez  devant ,  il  marchera  derriera 


GRAMMATICAL     SYNOPSIS.  537 

N.  B.  -Without  an  object,  before  is  auparavant. 
i  had  bought  it  before.  |  Je  1'avais  achete  auparavant. 

10.  BY  ;  PRES  DE,  A  COTE  DE.     In  the  sense   of  near,  by  is  prts  de*     J5t 
the,  Pres  de  /',  pres  de  la,  pres  die.   $$  9,  11.) 

He  was  sitting  by  me.  i  II  dtait  assis  d  cote  de  moi,  (pres  de.) 

We  passed  by  them.  Nous passames pres d'eux,  (dcoted'j 

N.  B.  By,  joined  to  myself,  thyself,  &c.,  is  equivalent  to  alone,  and  is 
expressed  by  the  adjective  seul. 
Was  she  by  herself?  |  £tait-elle  seule  ?  (31*.) 

11.  Iw,  INTO  ;  DANS,  EX.     Dans  is  usually  followed  by  a  definite  noun. 
i  nave  read  that  in  the  Bible.  |  J'ai  lu  cela  dans  la  Bible. 

We  saw  that  in  Racine.  I  Nous  avons  vu  cela  dans  Racine. 

En  is  followed  by  an  indefinite  noun.    • 
There  are  many  in  France.  |  II  y  en  a  beaucoup  en  France. 

12.  IN  ;  DANS,  EN.     Speaking  of  time,  in  is  expressed  by  dans,  to  denote 
fhe  time  after  which  an  action  will  be  performed.     1  will  answer  you  tn 
'hrcednys,  that  is,  after  three  days,  Je  vous  repondrai  dans  trois  jours.  (712.) 

1'l.v,  the  time  that  will  be  employed  in  performing  it. 

We   shall   be   at    Washington  in  6  I  Nous   serons    a   Washington   en  6 
hours,  (shall  be  G  hours  going.)        \      heures. 

13.  AT,  IN,  TO;  A,  EN.     Before  a  city,  d;  before  a  country,  en.     (381.) 


He  goes  to  Madrid,  in  Spain. 
She  resides  in  Ireland,  at  Dublin. 


11  va  ;i  .Madrid,  en  Espagne. 
Elle  reside  en  Irlande,  a  Dublin. 


14.  IN,  ON,  not  translated  before  nouns  denoting  any  part  of  the  day  or 
before  the  names  of  the  days,  or  before  dates. 
In  the  morning. — In  the  evening.        I  Le  matin. — Le  soir.  (222.) 
On  Tuesday  in  the  evening.       .         I  Mardi  soir.  (S22.) 


CONJUNCTIONS. 

. — 1.  We  have  seen  that  the  subjunctive  mood  ($  151 — 2)  required 
an  antecedent  which  was  frequently  a  conjunction.  See  at  (791)  a  list  of 
those  which  govern  the  subjunctive  mood.  Of  course  the  others  govern  tho 
indicative. 

A  moins  que,  de  crainte  que,  de  pair  que,  require  NE  before  the  verb 
which  they  govern.  ($  151 — 6). 

Jusqu'd,  being  a  preposition,  is  used  before  nnoun  or  pronoun,  but  not  be- 
fore a  verb.  Until  to  morrow,^*?^??^  demain,  (371.) 

Before  a  vcrb,jusqu'd  ce  que,  the  conjunction,  is  to  be  used. 
Until  he  come,  (should  come.)  J  Jusqu'd  ce  qu'il  vienne,  (791.) 

2.  When  a  conjunction  governs  several  verbs,  it  is  placed  before  the  first 
verb  only,  and  que  is  used  before  the  other  verbs,  and  governs  the  samfl 
mood  as  the  conjunction  does. 


638  GRAMMATICAL    SYNOPSIS. 


As  he  is  diligem  and  takes  pains. 
Unless  he  be  diligent  and  take  pains. 


Comme  il  est  diligent  et  qu'i\  prend 

de  la  peine. 
A  moins  qu'il  ne  soil  diligent  et  gu'il 


ne  prenne  de  la  peine. 

3.  When  si,  if,  governs  two  verbs,  instead  of  repeating  si  before  the 
second  verb,  use  que,  and  after  it  the  subjunctive,  although  the  verb  which 
follows  si,  may  govern  the  indicative. 

You  will  learn  if  you  are  diligent  and  I  Vous  apprendrez  si  vous  etes  diligent 
take  pains.  et  que  vous  preniez  de  la  peine. 

4.  In  (Dir.  6)  we  have  seen  that  the  conjunction  THAT  is  frequently  used 
to  form  two  simple  sentences  into  one,  and  that,  although  frequently  omit- 
ted in  English,  it  was  always  expressed  in  French.     We  here  repeat  it. 

I  know  he  intends  writing  one.       .    |  Je  sais  qu'il  compte  en  ecrire  un. 

5.  WHETHER,  used  in  the  sense  of  if,  is  translated  by  si  with  the  following 
verb  in  the  indicative.    As: 

Does  she  know  whether  he  will  go  ?  |  Sait-elle  s'il  ira  ? 

WHETHER,  in  the  sense  of  let,  is  translated  by  que,  or  soit  que,  with  the 
"ollowing  verb  in  the  subjunctive.     As  : 
IVJwther  she  comes  or  not,  or  let  her  I  Soit   qu'eUe   vienno   ou  non,  nous 

come  or  not,  we  will  go.  |      irons,    Qu'clle  vienne  ou  non,  &c. 

6.  BUT  FOR,  WERE  IT  NOT  FOR,  correspond  to  sans,  and  so  does  if  it  had 
nut.  been.     As : 

But  for  his  friends.  1 

Uad  it  not  been  for  his  friends,  he  f-^uns  eea  amis,  il  await  etd  renvoyfc. 
would  have  been  dismissed.  ) 

$170.— See  ($  161,  &c.) 
$  171.— See  (*  162,  &c.) 
$180.— See  (1160,  &c.) 
*  200  —See  (\  137  fcc.) 


533 


AVE 


tc  hare. 

ti  '.in-.'w«i 

PARTICIPLES. 

AM**. 

1 

PAST. 

Ayan: 

had. 

too. 

PRETERIT  INDEFINITE. 

/  have. 

/Ar: 

CAM  AM!. 

Tu  as  en. 

.",,-u  has!  Air,.'. 

A«AM. 

«r< 

M  AMI  L'i' 

•     /,    '  .r.-. 

they  hace. 

iAry  A 

MPERFECT. 

/  |  •  '. 

/A/rrf. 

thou  kadtt. 

'•••    v:..'. 

A«  Aflrf  hail. 

r.       |       . 

we  had  had. 

Vf  •  1TWJ  1  H 

M  u  Ud  MA 

IMJ  AM; 

f  Ary  Aa4  AaJ. 

PRKTI 

PRRTERI 

r  ANTERIOR. 

M  •  '. 

<A«m  A«//jr. 

*  /Aim  A«4*l  A«^ 

A  •  /i  ••, 

/.  r  ,'imi  'tml 

M  MA 

MAM*AM\ 

OU, 

you  fcufAW. 

•  AM; 

!;-  «  -:.i.  r,:  MI 

/.'i.y  Aii.^  AiM/. 

FUTURE. 

i  •.:-  1 

Ithn 

I  shall  have  haa. 

(A»«  «A4/f  Aar*. 

•WtMMlUul. 

he  «hall  have. 

!tf  f>i>ut  A/irr  A/I//. 

tee  thaJl  have. 

tee  f  halt  h< 

yon  thail  Anrr. 

t±ry»h*ll 

lla  aur 

they  ghaU  hace  had. 

COND1T 

IONAL  PAST. 

/«AM 

llkoHtdh, 

kM  -  A.  '!*:...«.  • 

. 

ikon  *houid*t  have  had. 

MMMtf  AM«. 

11  aur 

he9hottidl.n 

wet/. 

iratt  «A<M^<f  Artrr. 

1 

1."  sin 

f  A/-y  jAut^'4  Aa  r«.     Us  auraici  . 

arid  have  had. 

IMPERATIVE  MOOD. 
have 

that  I  may  hare. 

that  he  m  :  - 
that  we  may  han . 

that  they  may  hare,      i; 

trier. 

' 

; «»«•!»,          that  than  mi^ 
that  he  mi<: 

i-jht  hare. 


that  A 
cii,    that  we  may  hni 

that  they  i/< 
t'EUFECT. 

'    ' 


540 


CONJUGATION   OF  ETKE 


CONJUGATION  OF  THE  AUXILIARY  VERB  ETREt  TO  BE. 


fit™, 

EUint, 
Et6, 


PRESENT. 
PAST. 


INFINITIVE  rMooo. 

to  be.  \  Avoir  6 16, 
PARTICIPLES. 

being.   \ 

Ayant  C16. 
Z>ccn.   J 

INDICATIVE  MOOD. 


•to  have  bcrr\ 


having  been. 


FBKSK5T. 

Jo  suis, 

Tu  cs, 

51  est, 

Nous  "oinmes, 

Vousetes, 

Ils  sont, 

IMPERFECT. 

.1' eta  is, 
Tu  6tais, 
II  6tait, 
Nouselions, 
Vous  6tie/, 
Ils  6 talent, 

FRET  Eh  IT  DEFINITE. 

Je  fits, 

Tu  fus,  • 

11  tut, 

Nous  fumes, 

Vous  f files, 

Us  furent, 


/  am. 

£/tou  ar£. 

he  in. 

toe  arc. 

yea  arc. 

they  are. 

I  was. 

than  wast. 

he  was. 

we  were. 

11,1:1  in  n  . 
they  were. 

1  was. 

thou  wast. 

he  was. 

ice  were. 

I, 'iiy  wen: 


/  shall  b,: 

Tu  s.eras,  t'l-itt  n  halt  In: 

!l  sera,  Ac  sAa//  £r. 

Nonas----  ice  shall  be. 

Vous  sei  tfZi  ?/««  sAtt//  Z>c. 

Us  seront,  .-•//«//  //<•. 

"'NDITIONAL   PRK: 

.!c  serais.  /  should  be. 

Tu  serai-*,  fA«M  shon' 

II  t-crait,  /«e  should  be. 

Nous  serious,  ?rr  .i.'muld  be. 

Vous  scriex,  ?/«M  should  be. 


PRETERIT  INDEFINITE. 

JVi  6t6,  /  /iflt-c  fcecn, 

Tu  as  etc,  thou  hast  been. 

II  a  6tf,  Ae  Aa*  *ec«. 

Nous  avons  <*  K:,  tee  have  ice?*, 

Vous  av«  you  hane  been. 

Ils  ont  ett.1,  tA«f  Aauc  ACC/J, 

PLUPERFECT. 

J'avsiis  I  had  In- n. 

Tu  avals  6t6,  than  hadxt 

II  avail  (•{«-,  he  had  been. 

Nous  avious  •'•tc  ?rr  A«r/  />fr«. 

Vousavii-x  dr,  you  // 

Ils  avaient  dr,  ///<  //  //(7</  iecrt. 

PRLTKSUT   ANTKRIOR. 

J'eas  616,  Ihadbrcn. 

Tu  cus  et6,  f/;6-«  /<«//.•*/.  /ur». 

II  cut  6t6,  /.T  // 

Nous  eumes  •  »/T  //«//  /»,-,-«. 

\'ous  ci::  /  ////-/I. 

Ils  curt-He  f//f  ?/  A«J  been. 
i  i  r  r 


.T'aurai  6t6, 
Tu  aur.. 
11  aura  616, 

Nousain 

\'«)i!S  :ili!' 

ILs  auront  616, 

CONDITIONAL  PAST. 

/  should  have  bcm, 
Tu  aurais  6t6,  t/um  s/ioiiln'st  h 

lie  should  In; 
WC  shoil/d  /id!', 

{/•HI  should  have  bcni. 


1  shall  liavc  been, 
t/iou  shalt  have  been. 
he  shall  have  been, 
ire  shall  km- 
you,  shti/l  h tn- 
ih  cy  shall  have  been. 


IMPEKATI 
Soyez, 

SOBJL'NCT 
HMCSKKT, 

Quo  je  Pols,  that  I  may  lie. 

Quo  lu  sois,  that  thou  mayst  be. 

Qu'il  soit,  that,  he  may  be. 

Que  nous  soyons,  that  we  may  be. 

Que  vous  soyez,  that  you  may  be. 

Qu'ila  soient,  that  they  may  be. 

IMI'EUFKCT. 

Que  jo  fusse,  t  hat  I  might  be. 

Que  tu  fusses,  that  thou  mightst  be. 

Qu'il  flit,  that  he  might  be. 

Que  nous  fussior.s,  that  we  might,  be. 

Que  vous  fussiez,  that  you  might  be. 

Qu'ila  fusscnt,  that  they  might  be. 


11  auruit  et6, 
Nous  aurions  6t6, 
Vous  auriex.  • 

Ils  aui'aicu*  etc,  t!i  y  should  have  I 

VE  MOOD. 

be  (lho-ii.\ 
ii  t  «>  //'•. 
be  (you.) 
IVE  .MOOD. 

I'RETEniT. 

Quo  j'ai-  that  I  may  hacc  3<m, 

Qiu;  tu  aies  «j>c,  t/iat  thou  mayst  have  been. 
Qu'il  ait  6t6,  that  he  may  have  been. 

Que  nous  ayons  6t6,  that  we  may  havt  been. 
Que  vous  ayez6t6,  that  you  may  have  been, 
Qu'ils  aient  etc,  that  they  may  /tact  been, 

PLUPERFECT. 

Que  .fensse  <•«'•,  ,  that  I  might} 

Que  tu  cusses  Cte,  that  thou  mightst  g 
Qifil  cut  6te,  that  he  might  I  ^ 

Que  nous  eussions  6t6,  that  we  might  f  * 
Que  vous  eussiez  6te,  that  you  might  I  ' 
Qu'ils  dissent  etc,  that  they  mirktj  "* 


641 


I.1FIIIITIVE    ' 


Parier, 

to  speak. 

PARTICU-: 

PRESENT. 

speaking.   \ 

PA8T. 

kaviuff  fp9\en, 

/:. 

v'D. 

;  HIT  ISDEFi 

V. 

/A  »tt  speaker  •'.        1   ;  :•>  j  •  -r!  ••,                               thnn  liast  . 

hi-  fjffiii'.  •?.        11  :i  jMiir,                                            fo  llOS 

ire  apeak.       N.UH  jivon-*  ]'•;.••:•,                     Iff  , 

Utey 

/  «r<w  *peaki»f.     J*avals  ; 

l!nu  tcast  tpcakinf.  1  Tu  tiTais  narld,                    '•    "  ''<;/-;  .-•'./ 

A«  :. 

icr  icrre  epeaJti*                                                              ice  had  spakfu. 

yam  were  *{<• 

wom  /:>n!  If  •'.    '.'. 

they  wen  tpe*ki*g. 

tkfj 

TCRir   PCMMTB. 

PRETERIT  A.M>.;> 

.I'.-:-  |..ir'.'. 

. 

kc  tpoke.  \  I)  eul  pjirle, 

••s                               ve  tpoke.     Nous  « 

l^                                               •/    u  yy..-.  •  .        \  ,.  >  »'!'.'•-   ji.i:  i  •. 

tAry  tpoke. 

/  th,dl  speak. 

than  shall  tpcak. 

ke  tluUl  speak. 

' 

i-'  Ufa  1  .<:•'•  '.. 

i,v*  tkall  - 

'. 

^Ao//  speak. 

I  *hvu!<l  speak. 

/  sHon 

'.otddat  ipcak. 

'*  jKirte,  thuu  t/iou. 

ke  fbnud  speak. 

kc  ghon 

..  .                     we  should  speak. 

. 

tpeak. 

• 

OD. 

•peak. 

speak  or  do  speak  (you.) 

JLNCTIVE  MOOD. 

PRETERIT. 

tk-if                     .-peak. 

Qu'ii 

may  (    * 

Ini 

that  n   •: 

Ihr.! 

Mat 

542' 


KEfjv)  N  D   CO NJ Uo  A  1  lU N IR. 


SECOND  CONJUGATION—iN  IR. 
INFINITIVE  MOOD. 


Finir,                                                to  finish. 

Avoir  fini,                             .(c  have  finished^ 

PARTICIPLES. 

PRESENT. 

FiniflMitt'-,                                         finishing1. 

PAST. 

PAST. 

Ayant  ftni-,                              having  finished, 

Fini,                                                     finished. 

INDICATIVE  MOOD. 

PRESENT. 

PRKTEniT  INDEFINITE. 

Jo  flnis,                                                I  finish. 

J'ai  fiiii,                                     I  have  finished 

Vu  finis,                                     ihou  finis/test. 

Tu  as  fini,                           thou.  hast  fini  shed. 

11  finit,                                            he  fin  ishfy. 

11  a  flni,                                    he  has  finished. 

Nous  finiasons,                                  we  finish. 

Nous  avons  fini,                   we  have  finished. 

Voiisliii,                                              you  finish. 

Vousavex,  lini,                      1/011  have  finished. 

Us  finissent,                                  .Jifij  finish. 

Us  out  lini,                           they  hace  finished. 

IMPERFECT. 

PLUPERFECT. 

,'  (  •  fit  i  i  -                                           I  wag  fin  is!:  ing  . 

.ravnis  lini,                                 I  had  finish  nf. 

Tu  linissais,                         /A««  vast  finishing. 

Tu  avais  fini,                     thou  hadst  finished. 

*1  flnissaiU                                Ac  was  fi  n  is/i  mg. 

II  avail  fini,                              he  had  finished. 

N'oiislin:-                              we  were  fin 

Nous  avions  fini,                    we  had'jhn'shed. 

V'oiis  linissic/,                     »/rxi  were  finishing. 

Vousaviox  fini,                     you.  had  finished. 

men!,                     EMf  were  finishing. 

:it  fini,                           /  had  finished. 

PRETERIT  DEFINITE. 

PRETERIT  ANTERIOR. 

,'c  finis,                                                    /  finished. 

•l\-us  fini,                                        I  had  finished 

'I'll  finis,                                          fA'/w  tinishedst. 

Tu  t-.is  lini,                      (!imt.  hadst  finished 

1  Mini  I,                                                           ///xAn/. 

11  i-iit  lini.                                   lie  had  finished. 

Nous  Jiii  :                                             we  finished. 

Nous  cu  Mies  fini,                      trr  had  finished. 

Vous  linili  -,                                      y«n  finished. 

X'otis  cutrs  fini,                      you  hadfinishnl. 

Us  linhvm,                                they  j 

rit  fini,                        they  kadfi 

»   JT    ! 

PAST   i-M.'TlJKK. 

•'(«  finiraU                                        1  shit" 

•T^aurai  fini,                        /  shall  hare  finished. 

Vu  tin..                                    *Am/  sh,i/f 

Tu  auras  lini,           i/n-*  shall  have  finished 

\\  linira,                                        Ac  f  hall  finish. 

11  aura  lini, 

.Nous  Ihiirons,                             n-c  shall  finish. 

Nous  aiirons  lini. 

Voiisl;:.                                        »/"//  shall  finish. 

Vous  auiv/  fini,          n<nt  shall  hare  finished 

Us  finironl, 

Us  iiurunt  fini,          r 

CONDITIONAL   PRESENT. 

•  ((  IOWAL  1'AST. 

Jo  finirais,                                   /  shmifd  finish. 

."aura  is  fini.                                           .'.'</]  -^ 

Tu  finirais,                          f  /.VM  shoti/dst  finish. 

Tu  aurais  lini,                                 •/.«.•//  A/.--  r     -c 

11  finirai!.                                   Ar  should  finish. 

11  aurait  fini,                                         «„•'./  !   ^' 

NOUK  finiri(»ns,                       tec  tkmUdJhusM. 

Nous  aurions  fini,                                 •>nld  (  '  £ 

\'ous  liniric/,,                        v»»t  should  finish. 

Vous  aurii-z  lini,                      //,.«  *ln>uld  \   £ 

n»  liieirak-n'                         (/<-//  sfumJa1  finish. 

Us  auruient  lini,                                 .*«/</  J  ^ 

IMPERATIVE  MOOD. 

Finis                        .tfw/sA  (rAou.) 

K'uiissons,                   //'i  us  finish. 

ritiissc/,                    finish  (you.) 

SUBJUNCTIVE  MOOD. 

FRKSKNT. 

PRKTKRIT 

V^ue  je  finis>»'.                        M<;<  I  may  finish. 

Quo  j'aie  fini,                          that  I  may  )  -5' 

Que  tu  Jinissr.-i,            tAol  //*<»M  nt<n/st  finish. 

Quo  tu  aios  lini,               that  than  imn/st     £ 

Qu'il  linisi-f,                          ?An«  Ae  may  finish. 

Qifil  ait  fini,                             thai  he  ii'iay  i  '| 

'..>;u-  i  ous  liiii^sioMS,          /Aflt  rre  may  finish. 

Que  nous  ayons  fini,             that  ice  may  [  <*« 

Quo  vous  fuiissk-/.,           r//«t  ?/««  may  finish. 

Que  vous  ay  ez  iini,            that  y<m  may     i; 

Qu'ils  finissi-at,               (Aaf  fAn/  may  finish. 

Qu'ils  aieut  fini,                  that  they  may]  .| 

IMPERFECT. 

PM.-PKRFKCT. 

Quo  je  finisso                     /A««  I  might  finish. 

Qucj'eusse  fini,                    that  I  might  ]  -£ 

Que  tu  finisscs,        fArtt  fA««  migktstjinish. 

Que  tu  cusses  lini,       that  f/tau  inightst  \  4! 

Qu'il  finit,                      tAni  Ac  might  finish. 

Qu'il  cut  fini,                        that  he  might  (  -3 

Que  nous  finissk»'\s,      f  A/i  t  w:e  •/?/  />//  r  j/  //  /.<//  . 
Que  vous  fini?a»oz,       that  you  might  jlnis!i. 

Que  nous  cushions  fini,      that  ire  might  (  & 
Quo  vous  eussiez  fini,      that  y«ti.  mi:-rht      g 

3u'ils  flnisseii'.,             fAflf  they  might  'finish. 

Qu'ils  eussent  fini,          Uiat  they  jmg/tt  )  g 

THIRD  CONJUGATION — OIR.  543 


Reccvoti 


H;IK:  -IN  OIR. 

INFINITIVE  MOOD. 

BENT.  PAST. 

t->  receive.   \   Avoir  to  have  received, 

PARTICIP: 


i-.iL,                                       reec< 

PAST 

K/c^u,                                                    received. 

having  rectivtd. 

INDICATIVE  MOOD. 

PRESENT. 

PRETERIT  IMiKFIMTK. 

•;u,                                        Ifinr,    \ 

thou  receivest. 

tAou  hatt  r 

11  a  r-                                            he  h«* 

we  r 

in 

tin  y  rt  cure. 

r*-«;  u,   '                    thry  have  r 

IMPERFECT.                                   fr 

PLUPEHI  , 

/  »/• 

/  had  '• 

thou  wast  n  i 

he  wot  rec. 

Iff  \rrrr  nr>  r  r   ••.-.-. 

they  hud  r, 

>ITB. 

PRETERIT  A  .NTKKIOK. 

/  r« 

/  had  ' 

thin: 

we  r« 
ij0u  received, 

rvoi, 

they  had  r. 

ft    \    :  •   ;  i 

I  shall 

:-<-ri|,                    1  sh«>< 

r,,',  ,r<  . 

t/iou  sh'. 

i,     TC«  shall  />• 

you                       .  \  VOUB  aurcz  re£u,     you  shall 

1,          f//M/  5//r; 

•  OHAtTIOKAL  PAST. 

I  should  receive. 

/  should   . 

thtu  should*1 

;,  /Atn/  shout  ti 

he  .</ 

h>;  shon 

r«!  * 

;  "CU,  ire  *At/i// 

M  xlioultl  hnr> 
/  should  hare  received, 

OD. 

Rt>r                              r*o 

/ct  Kf  reo 

reccir,  i  //,///.) 

SUL:                     ;OOD. 

BUT. 

PRETERIT. 

that  f  may  r 
.'  thutt  jnay+t 

•;u.                          f/ta«  I  ni<nj*\  ^ 
>  n,            f/^;i  f//im  mmist.  (    ^ 

that  he  may  / 

Qu'il  .lit  nTii,"                       ^/iat  /t«  /««»/  I   C 

that  we  m<r 

ifl  rcru,           that  we  may  f  Z 

(inc  votis  aye/,  n-ru,            //<««  yon  may      £ 

Uu'il.-s  rvcoivciit,          that  t:« 

Qif  ils  iiient  re^u,                ^/mt  tAq/  7««y  j  ^ 

tKECT. 

PLUPERFECT. 

Ciue  je  re^uaeo,                              that  I  ^  £ 
t\at  thou  \  ^ 
^u'il  r                                                 that  htt  {  'i 

.-'^.u,                  that  Tmiiffit.}  ~* 
(i>i"  In  cusses  rcru,    fA«f  thoumiff/itxt      i 
(iu'il  cut  rc<;u,     '               Hint,  ]<• 

f//fl«  we.  (  ^ 
V-nt,                          i//rtf  tkrij]   ^ 

(iucnous  (•ii>»iol)srcru,    ////;/.  irr  7iii<rf!t  (  ** 
Um-  \>  '                          '/'i,   ///•'/-  ?/<'U  iniif/tf       u 
a-rii,  '     ///«£  thnj  mi^ht  }  j 

544 


FOUK'IH  CONJUGATION-  -KK. 


Voudre, 


IOU11TH  CONJUGATION— IN  RE 


PRESENT. 


INFINITIVE  MOOD. 

to  sell.  \  Avoir  vendu, 
PARTICIPLES. 


to  hi 


Vendanl, 

Mttoy. 

PAST. 

PAST 

Ayjmt  vcndu,                               having  scltL 

Vendu, 

sold. 

INDICATIVE  MOOD. 

PRESENT. 

PRETERIT  INDEFiNIFE. 

Je  vends. 

/  sell. 

.I'ai  veiutu,                                      I  have  sold 

Tu  vends, 

tllOII    .11'llttL. 

Tu  as  vendu,                            thou.  hast  sold. 

II   Vend, 

he  sells. 

II  (i  vundu,                                     he  has  sold. 

Nous  vend  on*. 

we  sell. 

Nous  avuiis  vcn'Iu,                    we  have  sold. 

Vou.s  vend*1/, 

you.  sell. 

Vous  avez  vendu,                     you  have  sold. 

Us  vendent, 

thcii  sell. 

Us  out  vendu,                            thnj  have  sold. 

IMPKRFE 

CT. 

+                              PLUPERFECT. 

Jo  vondais, 

/  was  filling. 

J'avais  vendu,                                 /  had  f,?lil. 

I'u  vendais, 

f/nni  irtitt  selling. 

Tu  avals  vendu,                      ///.»//  ; 

11  vendait. 

lie  was  selling. 

1!  avail  vendn,                                 he  had  sold. 

odions, 

we  wn-r,  selling. 

Nous  avioos  vendu,                     ire  had  ?<>!<!, 

Vous  vendioz, 

,rrrc  selling. 

Vous  avie/  vendu,                       you  /i<i<!  a<>,'il. 

11-  vendaienl. 

they  were  sell  ing. 

ll.s  uvaient  vendu,                        thnj  had  tmtd. 

I'lU.TKUI  r  U 

PRETERIT  ANTERIOR. 

Jr  vendis. 

I  sold. 

.I'c'i-  vendu,                                           /  /a; 

Tu  veji 

Hunt  #<>l(le.<t. 

Tu  eus  vendu,                           thtm  // 

II  vi-nilil, 

lie  sold. 

11  cut  vendu,                                       he  hut/  fold. 

Nous  vendimes, 

we  sold. 

N.'iidil, 

VollS  \  »-ndlle>, 

'i  $ol<l. 

ndn. 

!:relit, 

/  sold. 

:>ut  vendu,                        tiieij  had  told. 

II    11  1 

RE. 

.!••  vendrai. 

I  shall  tell. 

.raurai  vendu,                       7  gha/l  har 

'I'll    VCIl 

Tu  auras  vendu,            tfnui  shall  IK 

II  vendra, 

lie  shall  ad'. 

11  aura  ven<lu,                              til  IKUT.  .fn/if. 

Nous  vendrons, 

ire 

Nous  aurons  vendu. 

VolM  Vi  '!, 

>/,  in  fl 

N'ous  aure/.  vendu,           i/<nt  ahnll  ! 

Us  vendrotlt, 

'mil  sell. 

\\A  auronl  vendu.              tiny  shall  . 

CONDITIONAL 

v  u  KM;  NT. 

fl  HiTIONAL  PAST. 

Je  vendra  is, 

/  Sinn, 

J'aurais  vendti,                    7  thoiild  Ittirr  §0U. 

Tu  ven;  Ira  is, 

than  shuiUdst  sell. 

Tu  aurais  vendu,      thuu  shtmldstl  ' 

11  vendrait, 

II  aurait  veiuju,                he  xhuultl  h 

Nous  vend:-ioii>. 

ire  s/ninld  sell. 

Nous  aurions  vendu,     ire  shnn.'d 

Vous  vendrie/.. 

sfi,'ii!d  sell. 

.-•/•ui/fZ  hare  sold. 

Us  vendraient, 

. 

• 

Hue  jo  vende, 
line  lu  ven-i- 
Qu'il  vende, 
Clue  nous  vendions, 
Hue  vous  veiulie/, 
Qu'ils  vendent, 


IMPERATIVE  MOOD. 

Vends,  sell  (tfuni.i 

Vendoilftt  let  us  sell. 

Vende/,  sell  (i/tni.) 

SUBJUNCTIVE  MOOD. 

PRKTKRIT. 

that  I  nay  sell.      Que  j'aie  vendu,  that  1  may 

ihut  than  mayst  sell, 
that  he  may  sell, 
that  ice  maij  *'<'"• 
that  you  may  sell, 
that  they  may  sell. 


IMPKRFKCT. 

Quo  jo  vend  that  I  might  aell. 

Uuo  tu  vendisses,        that  t/:»u  wufkttt  .<^V. 
QuMl  vendit,  that  he  mtfkt  self. 

Quc  nous  vemlissions,     tJtat  we  mi<rht  sell. 
Quo  vous  vendis^ie/,      that  yuu  //, 
liu'ils  vcudisecnt,  that  they  might  sell. 


Uuo  tu  aies  vendu,  that  thou  mayst  I  ^ 
Ciu'il  ait  vendu,  that  he  may  I  « 

<->ue  nous  ayons  vendu,  that  we  viav  j  ^ 
Uuevousayez  vendu,  that  you  may  |  j 
Uu'ils  aient  vendu,  that  they  may  , 

PLUPERFECT. 

Quo j'eusse  vendu,  that  I  might} 

UiH'tu  eusses  veiulu,  that  thou  inighlst  ^ 
Qu'il  cut  vendu,  that  he  might  i  ^ 

Que  nous  eussions  vend  u,  thaticcmight  [  g 
Quo  vous  eussie/.  vendu,  that  you  in iyht  j 
Uifils  eus.fcnt  vendu,  that  Lhry  might  I  ** 


• 


515 


:   OF  A   K 
INFINITIVE  MOOD. 


to  ri.«  . 

PARTICIPLES. 


to  have  ristm* 


rising.   \  PAST. 

having  mm 
risen,  \ 

INDICATIVE  MOOD. 

PRETERIT 
Jo  mt 

l-.'ves, 

PLUPERFECT. 
•s  1CV6,  /  ha>: 

thou  hadst 

. 
id  risen. 


PRETERIT  AN 


I  rite, 
thou 

he  rises, 
we  rise. 
you  rtS6 
they  rise. 
:  ECT. 

thou  vast 

. 

WC  Krr 

. 
I'K    /•<•><•. 

we  rose. 

ym  r*M, 
they  rose. 

I  sh 

he  shall  rise, 
we  shall  rise, 
you  shall  rise, 
they  shall  rise. 

'"  ///.o.lv  rite, 
we  sh": 

. 
they  should 

IMPERATIVE  MOOD. 

rise  (thou.) 
<  x  rise. 

-voug,  rise 

SUBJUNCTIVE  MOOD. 

FRET  F.KIT. 
that  I  may  r 
that  Hum  in 

that  he  may  rise. 
:t  we  may  ri.«e. 
that  yon  • 
that  they  may  rise. 
IMPERFECT. 

that  I 
tnat  th, 


NDEFINITE. 

/ /tar e  rtscn. 
thou  hast  risen, 
ht:  has  risen. 

you  hn re  risen, 


tflllU   111!' 

tec  //.. 
you  h 
tlitij  It 


II  80  flit 

I 

Us  86  fuival  i 

IT  FUTURE. 

J  shall  har. 
thou  shalt  If. 

\\  80  sen  he  shall  Inn- 

•*,  ve  shall  hnr 

. 

lls  80  8Cr.  t.'iry  shall  hu i 

CONDITIONAL  I' A 

/  should "      . 

he  should  {  '• 
'  -s         we  shi'i 

'it/il  |   '% 
tluy  should  J  •* 


that  r\ 
nat  thou      % 
that  he  \  '£ 
that  we  (^ 
\Jiat  you  }  -^ 
that  they)    ft 


-  leve, 

Qui-  tu  that  thou  J 

that  he  I 
.    t.'nit  ire  | 

(hat  you 
Qu'ils  so  soiiMi;  that  they  } 

PLUPERVECT. 

Quc  jo  ir.e  fu?--  /A«£  7 

Quetu  ;  ,  tiflt  thou. 

that  he 

:,  ///rtf  WC 

'i'li-  vims  vo:i-  :  .  that  you 


6 1C 


IRREGULAR  VERBS. 


PRIMITIVE  TENSES. 


1RREGULAB 


PRESENT 
OF  THE 

FIRST 

INFINITIVE.                            PRESENT. 

TAsj  r 

Alter, 

t)  go. 

Allant. 

Alle. 

Je  vais. 

J'allai. 

Envoyer, 

to  send. 

Fnvoyaut. 

Envoy  c. 

J'envoic. 

J'onvoyiii. 

Acquerir, 

to  acquire. 

Acqu6ract. 

J'acquiera 

rteqttta, 

Booinir, 

Courir, 

Ooefflir, 
Dormir, 

Faillir, 
Fuir, 
JMnitir, 

to  boil, 
o  run. 

it  <r  nt  In  r. 

•frit. 

<>  i/,-. 

Huuillanl. 
Courant. 

Ciifillant. 
.M-:nlaiit. 

Uouilli. 
Couru. 

Ctioilli. 
Donni. 

l-'l'ii.  '* 
Mfiiti. 

JO  1)' 

Jecoun*. 

Je  cu'.'illo. 
•If  dors. 
.If  laiix. 
Jo  fiiis. 

JO  11! 

Jo  bouillis. 
Jo  couru.-. 

iiii^. 
mis. 

.If  I'ailli.s. 
MtlB. 

ftlourir, 

to  (in-. 

Mom 

Mort. 

•Te  meurs. 

OlFrir, 

Ouvrlr, 

I'arlir, 
Sorlir, 

to  ujj'cr. 
tn  njirii. 

to  get  out. 
to  feel, 
to  go  out. 

<  UTraiit. 
OiiM-ant. 

S-ntant. 

Bortanft. 

Oflert. 

Paitt. 

J'OUTTS, 

Jo  pare. 
Je  aura. 

Jc   p.: 

Tenir, 

to  hold. 

Tfiiant. 

Trim. 

Jc  t 

Tressaillir, 

O  ttart. 

TreoBailltuit. 

: 

Je  tressaiili.j. 

Venir 

to  come.. 

\Vrn-. 

Jo  vins. 

Veth; 

to  elotlu 

Vfitant. 

n*. 

Jo  veto. 

Jo  v^tia. 

THIRD 

Falloir, 

to  be  necessary. 

I-'al  iu 

UfmiU 

11  fallut. 

Mouvoir, 

to  move. 

Mouvaut. 

Mu. 

Jo  Mcus. 

Je  inua. 

Pleuvoir, 
Pourvoii, 

to  rain, 
to  provide. 

PleuvanU 

Tourvoyant. 

IM.i. 
Pourvu. 

II  pleut. 
Je  pourvois. 

11  pint. 
Jc  ix>urT-ia 

Pouvoir, 
Privaloir, 

to  be  able, 
to  prevail. 

Pouvaut. 
Prevalant. 

Pu. 

Pr6valu. 

Je  peux  or  je 

puis. 

Je  prevaux. 

Jo  pus.      . 
Je  prtvalui 

tfnauoir, 

to  sit  down. 

S'aaseyant. 

Aasis. 

Je  ro'aasiedfl. 

Jo  ,„•.-«!•. 

Oavoir, 

to  know. 

Sachant. 

Su. 

Je  bais 

Josuj. 

IRREGULAR   VKRBS.  547 


DERIVED  T 

NOTB.  —  J'crsflns  regularly  formtd  arc  in  Itc~i:t 

OCWJ! 

\      I'rff.  t.  .  Vi:,  ils  vont.—  f'wf.  J'nai, 

'-i'!C 

•i  ailk-s,  qu'il  aillo,  i/uc  noiu  utiiuius,  yuc  r-nis  attic:,  qu'ils  aillrnl. 
Fut.  J'envrrrai,  til  envcrras,  etc.—  Cvnd.  JV;<  \i-iTais,  i-tc. 

\  M  (.  \Tlo\. 

fv/r'/v:,  ils  ao 
.  in  nc'iurrr;:  j-icrniK  lu  siojiu'ir 

.  >iu'il  ;u-.|Ui.  ;  'jutrwiu,(ju4 

I  "  nl. 

i  courras,  etc.—  ConJ.  Jo  courrais,  tu  r 

,  etc.—  tinu/.  Je  cuciller&e,  tu  ciu-illrra, 


.'.!  ini-tuv,  quc  nous  nwun 


, 

:ie,  qae  nou*  tcnwns,  qttc  vous  tt/i  .iKitl. 

.  Je  treasailJcrai,  etc.— Cond.  Jo  IruasaUlerais,  . 

<  Tritons^  nous  rm/-:,  ils  vicnncn 

.''•/.  U'ui 

,  ie  tu  vieniH  ns^  quc  vtnu  Venn 

.•.-MI. 

I.  faudru. — I'-ond.  11  fuudniit. — Prcs.subj.  Qu'il  faille,  (no  pnrticij- 


1       Prcs.  ind.    Je  irt< 


^    VM.  ive,  r/uc  nous  mvu< 

f  / 


(       I  -r  ;>  [>uis,  tit  ]>rns*  i!  \n-ut.  in>u*  pnuvons,  nous  pnu r>--.  \\  pouvrnt, 

' — f'«r.   .!••  pourrai,  tu  pour  >,l.    Je  pourrais,  tu  j>ourrui.s,  etc. — Prcs.  tuhj. 

(  Qi:  ie  tu  puisses,  etc. 

•       Like  vidoir,  exwpt  \hepre*.  »ubj^  which  is  regular 

iv-T/x   i:* 
.  etc.     They  say  aim:  .)••  u. 
nu,  tu  faKM-ienus  do.— ( ;>nd.  .)••  D  Ul  t'assterais,  etc.;  or,  jo  m'uaseir. 

f       rrcs.  ind.  .//-  .  //  suit*  noiis  .sivtii-.  fiit.-»-/m7>.  »W.  Jt 

?  savais.  -irai,  in  saiints  t-tc.— CV/?i«/.  Jo  Siiuraia,  tu  Baurahs  «*« 

(  —Imp.  Sadie,  saclums,  .^ 


54$ 


IRREGULAR  VERBS. 


IRREGULAR 


PRIMITIVE   TENSES. 


PRKRKNT  OF  THE                   PAUTICIPLK         PARTICIPLE 
INFINITIVE.                             PKKSENT.                   PAST. 

OP   THK             «««RIT. 

INDICATIVE. 

I'uloi", 

to  be  worth. 

Valanl. 

Valu. 

J(  vaux. 

Je  valua. 

Voir, 

to  see. 

Voyant. 

VlL 

Ji'  \oia. 

Je  via. 

"  'ouloir, 

to  be  w/- 

Vouhint. 

Voulu. 

Jr   \oulll8. 

FOURTH 

to  also1  re. 

•!vai»L. 

Ahsous. 

J'jllr 

BattiBJ 

to  strike. 

Hattaiit. 

Battu. 

Jc  battitJ. 

Hoi  re, 

to  drill/;. 

I>uvant. 

Bo. 

Jc  bois. 

Jc  bud. 

Braire, 

to  brny. 

11  bniit. 

• 

•  Kisaiit 

.'i«i|V, 

to  shut. 

<  'oiirltirc, 

to  conclude. 

CoiK-ltiaJit. 

Oooota. 

DCtalL 

(  'ondrc, 

.ill. 

Is. 

(  Irnire, 

t.i  tn  : 

<  rii\aiit. 

Croilic, 

to   .rn.10  «/». 

Orik. 

Je  croia. 

Dfce, 

to  say. 

D.t. 

r.-!<>rc 

to  hatch. 

fccriVBt 

In  irriti-. 

1     !!lt. 

I  AC!  urc 

to  <  jr 

nut. 

ftOBi 

I'airc, 

to  in  j/.r,  to  do. 

mi 

r,i. 

•Joimlrc, 

JdilTM 

lohH. 

Lira, 

to  read. 

1,11. 

to  shin  p. 

mi 

I.tii. 

Mettre, 

to  put. 

Mrltant. 

•li-  UK-:--. 

Moudre, 

to  jjriiid. 

-Mitiilant. 

Jc  IHOltlllS. 

Kaltre, 

to  be  born. 

Naissant. 

Jc  naiiiiis. 

Nuire, 

to  harm. 

Nuisani. 

Nui. 

pnodre, 

to  take. 

Bit 

Jc  preiula. 

Je  pns. 

Ropondrv, 

to  ansircr 

xlant. 

Repondu. 

;"tnds. 

•n«li» 

Reaoudro, 

to  rcsoivc. 

Irani. 

Je  n-sous. 

-.ilua. 

Riro, 

t(>  ItUKjll. 

Riant 

Ri. 

Je  ris. 

Je  ris. 

Ivompre, 

to  brink. 

Kitnipant. 

Hoinpu. 

Jc  romps. 

Je  rompi?. 

Bofflre, 

to  suffice. 

Boflfc 

Baft, 

Jc  suflis. 

Je  ^uflis. 

BuivrBi 

to  follow. 

Sui\;'iit. 

Baifl 

Jesuis. 

Be  taint 

to  be  silent. 

-ant. 

Tu.       ' 

Je  !!!«•  tais. 

Je  me 

Traire, 

to  milk. 

Tray  ant. 

Trait. 

Je  Irai.s. 

vSn^ 

to  vanquish, 
to  lief* 

Vaicqoani, 

Vivaiit, 

V.iincu. 
Vecu. 

Je  vairics. 
Je  >1a. 

Jc  \ainqul* 
Je  vecua. 

.-LiULAR  VERBS.  549 

VERBS. 

DERIVED  TENSES. 

:-:. — Persons  rtgulnrly  furmed  arc  in  italics. 

\       t  '-aiix.  tu  7-nHr,  iV  ratit^  nous  ratoiifi  row*  ra/«>:,  t7*  talent. —  Fitt.   Jo 

.  •  1C.— No  uiijxr.—  r, 
f  Uueje  vuillf,  quo  tu  vailk-s,  (ju'il  vaiiU',  //<.  /•,>«*•  i-a/u-:,  (ju'ils  vail  lout. 

-  il  vriit,    N«|  ',:.  ils  vrulcnt.—  J-'M/.  Jo 

,    VO'.  .  .-itihj. 

uli'jns.  yuc  vuii*  coulicz,  qu'ilri 
{  veu  . 

OOVJUGATJON. 

• 

^       /  su6/. 

.    r;i/e   rt»«jf  i«r</ :,  qu'iUs 

.  ut. 


nouj  diton  . 

ike  roiw  «/«•.,  .-•,;,  tnw« 

i'T  |.'T>oji-,  ;:n,l  i,  :. 


; 

.  jp  ' 


'   ,  it  prnid)   nnii*  J>r  IN  IirCllHOl 

CPrcf.4  I  ,  qoetd   prvnsi'-*.  (pi'il  i-ri-nnc,  y</c   Ml  <jit& 

neot 


/Vw.  ind.  ./c  vainr.*,  tu  value*,  il  vainc,  w,.»«5  -oainquonX)  vans  vainfjur:,  ?/.<  r 


:.;>uncl  verbs  arc  conjugated  in  all  moods  and  tense's  like  the  reros  from  %v isi  -t. 
Iboy  nr  r,  repartir^  container^  promcttre,  &c.,  arc  conjugat'xl  like 

mroyfr,  pnrtir,  mincre,  tnettre^  &C, 

With  tho  aid  of  !>-•  ;M  §141  and  1 

French  vrrb  vi  hirli  tin-  Irnnior  will  not  i 


ftECUEIL  EPISTOLA1RE.. 


Da  Style  Epislolaire. 

LES  lettres  ont  pour  objet  de  cominuniquer  scs  pense'es  et  ses  aeufl 
t.s  u,  dcs  personnes  absentes ;  elles  sent  dictees  par  Tamiti^,  la  con- 
nance,  la  politesse,  ou  1'interet.      C'est  uno  conversation  par  font: 
i  le  ton  dcs  lettres  ne  doit  differer  de  cclui  dc  la  conversation  ordi- 
naire, quo  par  un  peu  plus  de  choix  dans  les  objets,  de  correction  dans 
le  style,  et  une  plus  grande  precision.     Le  naturel  et  1'aisance  forment 
done  lo  caractere  essentieldu  style  (jpistolaire  ;  la  prevention  al'esprit 

;e  y  sont  insupportables. 

philosophic,  la  politique,  les  arts,  les  anecdotes,  les  bons-raots, 
peut  entrer  duns  les  lettres ;  mais  avcc  1'air  d'abandon,  d'aisance, 
.0   premier  mouvement  qui   distingue  la   conversation   des   goua 
rit. 

u'une  lettre  ct  sa  rdponse  ne  sont  qu'une  conversation  entro 

•/.,  comine  vous  leur  purlcricz  s'ils  6taient  la,  c'est-a-diro 

avec  il,  cette  facilite,  cet  agr£ment  meme  quo  demande  un  en- 

tretien  familier.     Quelle  doit  etre  une  conversation?  claire  et  simple  ; 

ce  sout-la  aussi  les  deux  qualities  du  style  (jpistolaire. 

DU  CEIIKMOMAL  DES  LETTRES. 

Madame,  Monsieur,  Mademoiselle,  se  placent  au-dessus  de  la  premiere 
ligne  d'une  lettre  lorsqu'on  dcrit  a  quclqu'un  quo  Ton  veut  traiter  avec 
heaucoup  dY'gards  ou  de  politesse.  La  distance  se  mesure  ordinaire- 
meni  sur  le  degre*  de  respect  qu'on  lui  porte.  Dans  les  lettres  plug 
families  ces  qualifications  viennent  dans  la  ligne  apres  les  premiera 
mots:  iTaireru,  monsieur;  je  suis  lien  reconnaissant,  madame;  permet- 
tez,  mademoiselle,  $c. 

Lorsque  la  personne  cst  ducore*e  d'un  titre,  d'une  dignitd,  ouremplit 

uue  charge  honorable,  &c.,  il  estd'usage  de  les  repe'ter  une  ouplusieurs 

fois  suivant  1'etcndue  de  la  lettre,  monseigneur  (en  parlant  a  un6veque» 

a  un  ministre,  &c.,)  monsieur  le  marshal,  madame  la  duchess e,  monsieur  le 

lent,  $c. 

Dtins  les  lettres  d'affaires,  d'6gal  i  dgal,  entre  amis,  la  date  se  place 
nu  haut  dc  la  page  La  placer  au  bas  est  une  marque  de  deTlrence  on 
de  rcppect 


652  RECUEIL     EPISTO;,AIRE. 

Lcs  Icttrcs  so  terminent  ordinaircmcnt  par  I'expression  cTun  set  tf- 
inent  de  respect,  dc  reconnaissance,  d'attachement,  dont  voici  quelques 
exemples : 

Rccevcz    madame,  avcc  bontd  1' assurance  de  mon  rcspectueux  attacne 
ment. 

Agruez,  madame,  1'hommage  de  mon  respecl. 

Les  sentimens  que  vous  m'avez  inspires,  monsieur,  sont  aussi  sincere? 
que  durables. 

Ccrnptsz  a  jamais,  monsieur,  sur  la  reconnaissance  et  1'attachement  do 
Sic. 

Mon  tendre  et  respectueux  attachement  ne  finira  qu'avec  ma  vie. 

Adieu,  je  vous  embrasse  comme  je  vous  aime,  et  c'est  de  tout  rnon  cceur 

Agrecz,  monsieur,  1'hommage  des  sentiments  distingues  que  je  vous  ai 
v<>  Jos  et  que  vous  mdritez  si  bien,  &c. 

J'ai  1'honncur  d'etre,  monsieur,  avec  un  respect  infini. 

Agrcez,  je  vous  prie,  mademoiselle,  mcs  sentiments  les  plus  respectuoux. 

J'ai  I'lioiineur  d'etre,  monsieur,  avec  des  sentiments  remplis  de  respect  et 
sidcration. 

/,  je  vous  prie,  les  assurances  de   la  haute  consideration  avec  lu 
qurlle  j'ai  1'honncur  d'etre,  monsieur,  &c. 

Lcs  expressions  ci-dcssus  sont  suivics  dc  la  formule  d'i; 

Votrc   trcs-humblc  et  trt-~  ;«'vouec,   on  tiv 

t'umnc  scrviteur,  &c.,  pour  un  homrae. 

•  tivs-humlilc  (.->  -:..'c,  ou  trcs-affcc- 

timiiK-e  Fcrvantc,  &c.,  pour  unc  fcinme. — La  signature  se  place  immc- 
di at omcnt  au-dcssous. 

11  cst  bon  d'obscrvcr  que  le  choix  parmi  ccs  locutions  ct  bcaucoup 
d'nutrcs,  que  nous  aurions  pu  dgalemcnt  donncr,  ck'pcnd,  en  gun 
de  la  nature    dcs   liaisons  ct  ;..»rts    cntrc  les  pcrsonncs  qui 

-  cut. 


.  COMMERCE. 

Lr.s  MtiTs  des  r.t'jrooiants  ct  dcs  marchands1  doivcnt  Gtrc  concisoa 
ct  clairos.  l>:ins  les  expressions  dcs  ordrcs  et  avis,  ou  doit  plutot 
observer  bcaucoup  de  circonspection  ct  d'cxactitude,  qu'un  Inn 
(floqueht  ct  flcuri.  Les  c<Sr<-nionies  et  les  complimens  en  doivcnt 
Otrc  bannis,  ou  du  nioins  on  doit  s'en  servir  tres-pcu ;  parce  quo 
d\us  les  affaires  de  negoce,  on  nc  doit  envisager  que  1'utile :  ct, 
d'ailleurs,  le  ndgociant  qui  a  bcsoin  de  yon  temps  le  doit  manager, 
tt  1'cniploycr  avantngeusement. 

Quand  on  a  plusieurs  sujets  a  trailer,  il  est  bon  de  commcnc 

1  O.i  appelie,  on  Fr;incais,  nfgoeiants  ceux  qui  ne  font  le  commerce  que  p-:i 
puys  ctrany;ei's;  ot  Ten  nomine  marchan.-ls  ccnx  aui  ne  Inific 'icnt.  • 
i/«t?)il.  nuo  rI:niK  IVinlroit  on  ils  r«'.--; 


R  E  C  L'  E  I  L     E  P I  S  T  0  I,  A  I  R  E.  553 

oouvelle  lignc  a  chaquc  cbangement  clc  matiere :  car  cet  usage  est 
-commode  pour  les  personnes  a  qui  on  ccrit 

rociant  qui  ecrit  dans  les  pays  Strangers  doit  i-trc  tres-re*servd 
Kiir  ies  nouvcllcs,  ct  particulicrcment  cellos  d'etat,  dans  ses  lettrcs  ; 
ie  pour  dc  s'attircr  dc  mauvaiscs  aliaircs,  ct  dc  faire,  duns  les  paya 
denpotiques,  arreter  ou  ses  lettres  on  ses  correspopdantB. 

Un  corrcspondant  ou  factcur,  qui  rcyoit  une  lettre,  doit  etro  fort 
exact  a  repohdre  clairement,  article  par  article,  a  tout  ce  qu'cllc  cou- 
UcLt,  te  de  prejudicier  son  commerce,  en  y  omettant  quelqueo 

fan.  ou  en  y  laissant  la  moindre  ambiguitC-. 

.rchanrl  d  un  ftfarfkand  t?i  'sros. 

; — Sur    la   recominandution    d'un  voisin,  (jui   s'cst  beaucoup 

la  yur  votre  r<:putat;:)ii,  je  crois  devoir,  en  entrant  dans  le  commerce, 

Hi'iui  MS,  pour  vuiij;  pricr  de  m't nvoy<  r  uric-  <•'  naine  quantite*  do 

.'landises  coiivenalili-s  a  un  jeune  honiinu  qui   coininenco,  de   la  prr- 

aux  prix  les  plus  raisonnables  :  *  u:  crois  d'autant 

plus  :  Pavuiir  tonics  les  aHaires 

nt  an  comptant.  Je  suis.  monsieur,  &c. 

Gros. 

fi  riionncur  de  la  vutrc  du  6  du  cuurant,  je  vous 

enverrai  {>ar  un  roulicr  (jui  part  clemain  une  petite  partie  des  articles  que  je 
is  commets  comme  un  Jchantillon  de  leur  qualite  ct  de  la 
moderation  de  leur  p:  >\i$  plaisait  dc  renouveler  votre  commande, 

je  fi ;  qu'il  d^pendrait  de  moi  pour  me  montrer  digne  de  votro 

bienveillance.     Je  su  .  sinceres  pour  vos  succes,  votre 

recoi: :  ;r. 

. 

-  Nous  venons  dc  :  ivis  de  IVr!  •  deux  bal- 

lots  dans  cettc  i!  '> "ous  allons  les  retircr,  et  par  In  prochain  courrier 

vous  en  dirons  notre  sentiment ;  ct  mCmc,  si  la  (jualite  de  la  mare-ban- 

que  nous  1'esperons,  nous  pourrons  vous  envoycr  io 

comptc   ci  Xuus  n'avons  rien  autre   ehosc   a   vous  dire  pour  le 

Ni/;  vos  tres-huiubles  et  tres-o[jeissants  sc; 

Pour  donncr  avis  de  la  vente  de  Marchandises. 

ballot,  numero  cinq,  est  deja  vendu,  ct  nous  auriona 
;e  qui  nous  reste,  plus  avantageusement,  si  nous  avions  voulu 
iccorder  truis  mois  de  terme  pour  le  payement :  mais  nous^  n'avons  i>aa 
j'Jgc  •  le  r:iire  sans  votre  participation.     Vous  rccevrcz  ci-inclus 

l/j  compte  de  vente,  montant  a  mL'ie  francs,  dont  nous  vous  avons  creditus, 
\^  UT  vous  en  faire  remise  par  nos  premieres.     Le  prix  que  nous  en  avona 
ux  pour  le  temps:  il  nous  donne  lieu  d'cspercr  que 
fruts  de   re  prrrnier  cssai,  et  que  \ous  nous  contliv.i 
;-nnes  Iree-parfaifenu' 


554  RECUE1L     EPISTOLAIRB. 

Wun  Commis  a  son  Negotiant. 

MONSIEUR  : — Presumant  que  la  prolongation  de  votre  sejour  a  la  cam- 
pagne  est  occasionnee  par  quelque  affaire  impre~vue,  je  creis  de  mon  devon 
dc  m'informer  de  votre  sante,  et  en  meme  temps  de  vous  assurer  que  Ton 
donne  ici  a  vos  affaires  de  commerce  toute  1' attention  et  tout  le  soin  qu'elles 
exigent.  Si  done  votre  absence  peut  vous  procurer  quelque  avantage, 
coyez  sur  que  vous  pouvez  la  prolonger  sans  danger,  quoiqu'au  surolua 
votre  retour  soit  ardernment  desire  par  votre  fidule  serviteur 

Riponse  du  Negotiant  d  son  Commis. 

MONSIEUR  : — Vous  avez  conjecture  juste  ;  des  evenements  mattendus  onl 
rclardd  mon  depart  d'ici :  mais  je  suis  convaincu  de  votre  fidelite  et  de  votre 
vigilance.  Je  suis,  graces  a  Dieu,  en  bonne  sante,  ct  j'espere  me  mettr*1 
bientot  en  route  pour  revenir  en  ville.  Votre,  &c. 

Tf  un  Negotiant  d  un  autre  pour  prendre  des  Informations  sur  un  Commis. 
MONSIEUR: — Mr.  L.  m'a  fait  la  demande  d'une  place  qui  se  trouve  vacanic 
dans  ma  maison.  II  me  parait  honnete  ;  mais  1'apparence  n'etant  pas  uno 
caution  suffisante,  je  prends  la  liberte  de  vous  demander  franchement  votre 
opinion  sur  sa  probitd  et  sur  ses  talens.  II  m'a  dit  avoir  etc  employe  quel- 
que temps  dans  votre  maison,  et  je  desirerais  savoir  particulierement  pour- 
quoi  vous  vous  etes  quitlcs.  Comme  il  doit  venir  la  semaine  prochaine,  si 
vous  me  faites  reponse  avant  ce  temps  vous  obligerez  infiniment  votre  trcs- 
humblc  serviteur. 

Riponse. 

MONSIEUR  : — La  pe.-sortne  dorit  vous  me  parlez  dans  votre  iettre  est  rdelle- 
ment  digne  et  dc  votre  confiance  et  de  votre  bienveillance.  II  travaillah 
BOUS  moi  lorsque  j'etais  associe  avec  Mr.  F. ;  mais  cette  societe  dissoute, 
j'ai  dt6  obligd  de  reformer  plusieurs  commis,  pour  diminuer  mes  depenses, 
et  nous  avons  toua  deux  cprouvc  le  plus  grand  regret  de  cette  separation. 

Je  suis  votre  trtls-humble  serviteur. 

De   Crifiit,}  pour  tin  Kt ranker. 

Mr.  T ,  :\  Paris. 

A  BOSTOX,  10  Avril,   1849. 

MONSIEUR: — Vous  rccevrez  cclle-ci  des  mains  de  Monsieur  T.  Nelton, 
Americain,  que  ses  parents  font  voyager  dans  divers  dtats  de  1'Europe.  Je 
voiie  prie  de  le  munir  de  lettres  de  recommandation  sur  differentes  places 
de  France,  d'Allemagne,  et  d'ltalie.  Son  dessein  etant  de  se  rendre  d'ici 
en  aroiture  dans  votre  ville,  j'ai  cru  ne  pouvoir  inieux  faire  que  de  voua 
le  recommander,  d'autant  que  c'est  une  personne  aussi  distinguee  par  sa 
umiesance  que  par  son  merite  personnel :  ayez  done  la  bonte  de  lui  faire  tout 
Paccueil  qui  dependra  de  vous,  pendant  le  sejour  qu'il  doit  faire  dans  votra 

1  LOB  icttros  qu'un  banquierou  negociant  donne  h  quelqu'un  pour  recevoir  on 
I'argsnt  do  sos  correspondents,  en  des  lieux  eloignes,  s'appellent  iti'trfs  de  credit. 
Quoique  cos  lettres  soient  di/Drentes  des  httres  dc  change,  olios  ont  d-pen-prcs  .et 


RJtCUEIL     EPISTOLAIRE. 

rilio,  etde  lui  n.Mdre  tous  Ie3  services  possibles.  Vous  lui  fournirez  sur 
MS  doubles  re$us  tout  1'argent  dont  il  pourra  avoir  besoi.i  jusqu'ii  la  concur- 
rence de  dix  millc  francs,  dont  vous  pourrez  vous  rcmbourser  sur  in- 

.isant  passer  un  de  ces  re^us.     J'ai  1'honm  i  plus  pur 

10  Avril,  1849, 

R: — Cc  (]•;                   » st  la  copie  d'ur:  vona 

ecra  r                             cur  T.  Nelton,  Anu'ncain.                             ire  obligcr 

.ui  je  suis  en  liaison  ;   et  pour  qui  j'ai  accepte*,  av 

1'occasion  de  lui  etre  utile,  en  lui  fournissant  quclqucs  let::  ;it  et 

nandation  sur    difierentes  places,  je  vous   supp  ';un- 
;ueje  lui  ;n 

Vous  lui  fournirez,  s*.  '.  pour  ses  besoins,  jusqu'a  dix  inrllc  lr: 

DO  double  q  lont  vous  i 

Sours  des  avanccs  quo  vous  lui  nun-/ 
i  signature,  aim  (juc  voua  puissiez  la  reconn 

a  conscqu*  ,'ie  vous  me  san: 

,  rr^r 
ideation.    J'ui  I'honrn 

ngf, 

Mr.   1*  .  i  Hoston. 

A  PARIS,  le  26  Jum,  1849. 

,«  ur  de  la  votre  du  10  d'A\ 

dc  crddit  et  derecommnnd 

(MMT 

'.iris.    Je  me  for  «le  lui  rcndre  tous  les  services  qu. 

pendront  <!  coBur  quo  de  vous  temoigner  par  des 

•  •n  je  fais  cas  de  tout  ce  qui  me  peir 

'  victitude  dans  les  < 
a  cstime,  avcc  hqtielle  j'ai  1'hoi. 
do  ni-  Monsieur,  votre,  &,c. 

•  ;i.«r  a  li  I  tcrecci-dessus. 

>>n. 

A  PAKIS,  ie  4  Aoiit,  I 

Me'  Votre  leftrc  du  10  d' Avril  me  fir  r  ;»nr  Moi.- 

T.  N«  'To  viiir.     J'ous  le  plaii/r 

da  l'a\  •'.  moi  le  m6me  jour,  ct  d'npprendre  j>ar  moi-:r. 

pnr  la  po?«te:  la  signature  do  la  peraAnnequi  OH! 
aliarfto"*  !  ,   mo  de  <l  < 

go1**)  • 


5jG  UKCUEILEPISTOLAIRV:. 

quu  vous  ne  m'avez  fait  qu'une  legerc  peinture  de  son  men  to.  qui,  d  c«  que 
j'en  puia  juger,  va  au-delade  tout  ce  qu'on  en  peut  dire.  Soyez  persuodrf 
que  ce  sera  avec  le  plus  grand  plaisir  du  monde  que  je  m'empresseraide  hj«. 
etre  utile,  et  de  lui  rendre  tous  les  service?  qui  seront  en  mon  pouvoir,  pen 
dant  eon  sejour  dans  cette  ville.  J'ai  1'honneur  dc  me  dire,  avec  une  par- 
foite  tuTectiun, 

Monsieur,  votre,  &c 


DES  BILLETS. 

TLS  supposcnt  une  sortc  defamiliarite  entreceuxcui  se  Icsenvoicnt. 
On  en  corit  aussi  it  ses  inferieurs;  on  n'en  re9oit  point  d'eux.  Ilg 
different  d'une  lettre  en  ce  qu'ils  n'exigent  aucim  ceremonial,  qu'ilg 
sont  plus  courts,  qu'ils  ne  portent  qu'un  simple  nom  pour  adresse, 
que,  jusqu'ii  la  maniere  tortille*e  ou  bizarre  de  les  plier,  ils  bravent 
toute  etiquette,  qu'cnfin  ils  ne  s'emploient.guere  que  pour  faire  uno 
invitation,  accompagner  un  petit  present,  annonccr  uu  c^jnement  de 
soci<it«3,  so  donner  memo  une  simple  marque  de  souvenir,  t-t  tcnir  lieu 
d'une  visite. 

Lorsqu'tm  mot  agrdablc  .ou  ingenieux  se  place  naturellemcnt  dang 
un  billet,  il  y  ajoute  quelque  prix. 

*'  Les  affaires  et  les  ennuis  continuant  Ti  me  tourmenter.  Je  vous 
ittends  a  diner  aujourd'hui ;  venez  jetcr  quclques  fleurs  sur  ma  vie." 

Voltaire  invita  1'auteur  de  I' Art  iV Aimer  a  souper  chcz  M;i<l;ime  du 
riifitelct  par  cc  quatrain  si  connu  : 

AU  nom  du  Pirulo  et  de  Cy there 
Gentil  Bernard  est  averti, 
Que  1'art  d'aimer  doit  samedi 
Venir  souper  chez  1'art  de  plaire. 

On  ccrit  commum(?ment  les  billets  en  se  servant  dc  la  troisieme  per- 
Bonne,  et  sous  ce  rapport,  ils  demandent  beaucoup  d'attention  pour  no 
pas  Gtre  amphibologiques.  Par  exemple  :  M.  A  *  *  *  prie  Mr.  B  *  *  * 
de  vouloir  bien  diner  chez  LUI.  Chez  qui  ?  II  j  a  evidemment  ici  une 
Equivoque  au  moins  grammatical.  Madame  D***  previent  Madame 
G***  qu'dle  a  aujourd'hui  sa  loge  ti  V Optra.  A  laquelle  des  deux  se 
rapportent  eels  pronoms  elle  et  sa  ? 

II  est  facile  d'imaginer  d'autres  manieres  de  tourner  sans  amphibo. 
logic  ces  billets  qu'on  nomme  du  matin.  Par  exemple  :  Madame  d€ 
M***  aura  samedi  au  soir,  un  ou  deux  violons  et  quelques  danseurs  ; 
elle  s'estimerait  lieurcuse,  si  Madame  et  Mademoiselle  de  L***, 
venaient  cmbcllir  sa  petite  fete  ainsi  qu'ellc  a  1'bonncur  dc  les  cu 
prier. 


R  E  C  U  K  II.     F.  P  1  S  T  O  L  A  I  R  K. 

Mis  *  a  aujourd'hui  sa  logo  aux  Frnnc.ais.  l  r  clu  spec 

tacle  sera  double  pour  cllc  si  tile  pcu: 
4iime  le  1'***,  a  qui  elle  oflre  unc  ou  niCme  deux  pla. 

M.  de  ***  scrait  bien  aimablc  s'ilpouvaitaujourd'hu; 
L.,  qi.  instance  ct  lui  dit  mille  choses  honnetes. 

Madame  S***  cnvoie  savoir  des  nou>elles  de  la  migraine  de 
aclle   F***,  a  qui  elle  fait  les  plus  tendres  compliments.     Kile  es;  •  ru  ru-< 
cc-ttc  indi.-;  •  ira  pas  de  suites,  et  que  la  deesse  de  lasai:1 

rira  i>as  sc  brouiller  avec  les  graces. 

fivants  et  leurs  rdponses  relatives  aur  circonstancea  lea 
plus  ordinaires  de  la  socidt^,  peuvent 

. 

sentesespliis  sincercscompliin* 
.  i  permission  de  1'accompagncr  d  1'asscmlii 

C.  pour  son  oilre  obi; 
o  pouvoir  accepter,  etant  t 


tin. 

•  rnir  cc  soir  prcndrc  1« 

rue. 

licures  du  ;/ 
lie  so  fait  -. 

.•npliments  de  la  ;  .luharnais  a  .Mi; 

i  sesjeunes  demoiselles:  elle  csperc  qu'elles  sont  an 
aaris  acriii  son,  et  parfaitcment  remises  des  fatigues  de  la  der- 

niere  F 


'•/,,    d  :    !  . 

lilcs.  de  Ste.  A.  sont  Bensibles  a  I'intcret  que  1» 
Mme.  de  B.  ;  clles  sont  arrivees  saines  et  sauves,  et  se  portent  toutes 
t  i'  exception  de  Josephine,  qui  a  attr, 

Mt  n 

Mille  compliments  de  Mmc.  de  Segur  a  IMlle.  le  Compte  :  cllc  la  prie  de 
^ii  accordcr  le  plaisir  de  sa  societu  a  diner  Dinianchc  prochain.  On  M 
mcttra  a  table  a  cinq  h> 

_  ;  ___ 
'  Nom  du  principal  thfeatre  dc  Pane. 


558  IxlCCUEIL     KPISTOLAIRE. 

Reports  e. 

Mille  compliments  de  Mile,  le  C.;  elle  ne  manquera  pas  de  «e  rcndre  i 
I'invitaUon  dc  Mme.  de  S. 
* 

Lundi,  4  Novembre,  1849 

Devant  donner  une  lecture,  Jeudi  prochain  a  8  heures  du  soir,  dans  mon 
grand  salon  d'e'tude,  sur  la  litterature  Fransaise,  je  prends  la  liberte  de  vout 
unvoyer  un  billet  d'admission  pour  vous  et  votre  aimable  famille.  Jc  tache- 
rai  de  ne  pas  erre  ennuyeux. 


AlardimatiJi,  5  Kov., 
Noua  acceptons  avec  reconnaissance  1'invitation  a  votre  lecture  sur  la  lit« 
loraturc  Franchise.     C'est  un  sujet  pour  nouy  si  attrayant  que  je  vous  defio 
u'etre  ennuyeux.    J'y  mcnerai  un  ou  deiis  amis. 


LETTRES  DE  CHAN 

Bon  pour  1000  francs. 
.  I-RKS,  le  4  Dcccmbrc,  1849. 

MONSTEUR: — A  vue  il  vous  plaira  payer,  par  ccttc  premiere  de  change,  a 
Monsieih  R ,  la  somme  de  mille  francs,  pour  valcur  rc^ue  de  lui,  et  pas- 
en,  compte,  comme  par  avis  de 

Votrc  trcs-humble  serviteur,  C 

Monsieur  D ,  N«5gociant  a  Bordeaux. 

Pour  en  donner 

\   LONDRES,  ce  4  Decembre,  1§49. 
MONSIKTR: — Jc  vous  ai  tire  ce  jourd'hui  mille  francs,  payablcs  a  vue  a 

.Monsieur  R ,  pour  valcur  regue  de  lui.     Je  vous  prie  d'y  faire  honneur, 

i-t  do  m'en  donner  debit,  dans  mon  compte;  ce  qu'espc'rant  de  votre  ; 
tualit6,  je  suis,  Monsieur,  votre.,  &c. 

A  BOSTON,  ce  18  Nov.,  1849. 

MONSIEUR: — A  huit  jours  dc  vue,  il  vous  plaira  payer,  par  cette  ecule 
lottro  de  change,  a  Monsieur  N  ,  ou  a  son  ordre,  la  sommc  de  deua 
cents  piastres,  pour  valeur  rec.ue  de  lui  en  marchandises,  rue  vous  passerei 
r.i  compte,  comme  pav*  avis  de 

Votre  tres-humble  serviteur,  D— -. 

Bon  pour  200  pias:~cs. 

A  Monsieur  E ,  Negociant,  a  Charleston. 

BORDEREAU. 
J/r.  Frtdtric  VouiUc, 

Doit  d  Jean  31arclt 

18-49.  5  Sept. — Pour  une  paire  de  bottes,  cuir  fin,       .        .        f3C. 
Pour  acquit,  JEAN  MA  ROT. 


TNJ)EX. 


A, 

A,  $12.  163—3,  to,  at,  in,  $  163, 
13;  used  before  the  name  of  a  city, 
:3:i8.)  with. 

,  $163—10,  by,  by  the 
Bid* 

A  LA,  A  L',  AU,  ATX,  $8,  to  the. 
;,LE,    $  79,    to    whom, 

ALE.  ;  what  they  mean. 

!'»!.  to  mine.  (See 

— -J,  mi- 

LUI,     ELLE,    &C., 

him,    iirr. 

re,  $  106,  mine,  thine,  &c. 
A  QUI,  $  79,  to  whom  ;  for  persons 
only. 

A,  A-. 

tic!  :sed  before 

'.  a  hundred;  long-trmps,  a  long 

time  ;  millc,  a  thous:md  ;    btuucouji, 

•-•at  many. 

A  FEW,  SOME,  $3,  t7r.7,  yuclqucs  ; 
never  omitted  iii  French. 

A  GRKAT  MArv,  $6,  leaucovp. 

VDRE\   $6,  CC7t£. 
oXGTIME,   $6,   lons-ttmps. 

A   ;  '  6,  mt'ZJe. 

ABIDE,  (to  )  by,  $64,  s'en  few/r  o. 
ABL-,  (to  be,)  pouvoir,  92,  175; 
t*re  en  ctat,  tire  a  mCme  de,  378. 
ABOUT,  189,  environ. 
ABOVE,  UP  STAIRS,  en  haut. 
ACCENTS  :    e  (mute]  changed  to  e 
grave)  in  certain  verbs,  $  144- -4. 


ACCENTS:  e  (aci^c]  ui  j»rave  ifl 
others,  $  144—5. 

ACCORDING  TO,  selon  ;  according 
to  circumstances,  scion  Ics  circon* 
stances  ;  that  is,  according  tr  circum- 
stances, it  depend  //,  317. 

ACCOURIK,  $64,  to  rim  to,  up. 

ACCUSTOM,    (to,)    accoutumr.r.      To 
be  accustomed  to  a  thing,  etrc  cccvu- 
:  qucli/ac  chose,  370. 

ACHE,  (the,)  Icmal;  the  ( 
le  mal   d'orcillc;    the   hcartaclie,  It 

cceurj  &c.,  291. 

ACQUAINTED  (to  be)  with,  connai- 
tre  ;  been  acquainted  with,  connu  ; 
to  become  acquainted  with  some- 
body, to  make  some  one's  acquaint- 
ance, fnirc  ronnaissance  de,  (avec,) 
n  ;  I  have  become  acquaint- 
ed witlrhim  or  her,  fat  fail  sa  CU-JL 
•'•c,  329  ;  to  be  thoroughly  ac- 
quainted vrith  a  thing,  <'trc  uu  fait. 
d'une  diose ;  to  make  one's  self 
thoroughly  acquainted  with  a  thing, 
se  mettre  an  fait  d'une  chose,  342. 

ADIEU,  adieu,  farewell,  God  be 
with  you,  good-by.  Au  plaisir  de 
vans  rcuoir,  (au  revoir,)  till  I  see  you 
again,  I  hope  to  see  you  again  soon, 
384. 

ADJECTIVES  :  agree  with  their  noun 
in  number,  107 ;  in  gender,  466,  284. 
Feminine  adjectives,  284;  their  for- 
mation from  masculine  adjectives 
286,  287.  Adjectives  that  have  no 
plural  for  the  masculine  gender,  491. 
Comparison  of  adjectives,  490,  491. 
Adjectives  that  are  irregular  in  the 
formation  sf  their  comparatives  and 


SCO 


INDEX. 


superlatives,  144.  Adjectives  sub- 
sta.ntively  used,  402.  Place  of  the 
adjective  with  regard  to  the  substan- 
tive, 132.  The  adjective  which  in 
English  follows  7*0u?,sfcmds  m  French 
after  the  verb,  335.  2d  partitive  ar 
tide  before  adj.,  (<7e,)$26.  1st  par 
titive,  if  adj.  is  after  the  noun,  $27, 
28.  Two  adject,  qualify /ng  the  same 
noun,  do  not  take  two  articles,  $  18; 
have  a  plur.  and  agree  with  the  noun, 
$  137 — 4  ;  end  in  e  mute  in  the  feinin. 
— *  '.  when  they  require  a  masc.  plur. 
••-6;  — 8;  when  a  fern. — 7;  such  a 
man, — 9;  — 10;  formation  of  femin. 
and  plur.  of  irreg.  adj.,  (p.  400,  491 ;) 
their  place,  $  129—1—2—3. 

ADRESSER  (s')  a,  $64,  to  apply  to. 

ADVERBS,  $  161.  Advcrbcs;  of  place. 
88,   193,  200 ;  quality  and  manner, 
26,  140,  180;  of  number,  165,  363; 
nf   time,    90,    107,    108,    110,    189; 
comparative,  66,  77,  78,  137;  com 
parison  of,  145 ;  irregularly  formed, 
147.     Their  places,  $161,  2,  3 
how  much,  too  much,  &c. ;  a*: 
in   French,  a:l  i  Ingli^h,  1. 

How  formed  from  adjectives,  5,  6,  7. 
KD  (to\  avoir  las  moyens,  327. 
i;,(Ruk'  1,  N.  1,)460,  gpres ; 
after  them  ($  63,)  aprc* 

\rn:u\VAKi>s,  cnsnite,  88. 

AGREE,  (to),  to  athing/omtrcftirrfe 
yuclque  chose,  276  ;  consentir  a,  354. 

AGAIN,  (anew),  de  nouveau,  344. 

AIMER  a,  to  like  to,  &c.,  114;  aimer 
micux,  to  like  better,  to  prefer,  263. 

AINSI,  thus  or  so,  152  ;  ainsi  que, 
us,  as  well  as,  331. 

AISE,  lien  aise  dc,  glad,  317;  itre 
d  so-:i  aisc,  to  be  comfortable,  well 
off,  at  one's  ease ;  etre  mal  d  son 
vise,  lire  gene,  to  bo  uncomfortable, 
895. 

ALTGIIT,  (to,)  from  ^ne's  horse,  to 
dismount,  descendre  dc  chcvul,  -70  ; 
fc  voiture,  30'J. 

ALL,  every,  tout ,  tons,  tcufc,  tuxtcs. 
110;  nil  at  once,  all  of  a  midden,  &c. ; 


tout  d  coup,  lout  d  la  fois,  soudiiinc 
ment,  287;  all  that  which,  all  which, 
all,  $  91.  Never  omitted  in  French, 
lout  ce  qui,  ce  que. 

ALLER,  to  go,  84  ;  'alii,  gone,  165; 
present  tense,  88  to  96 ;  etc,  pasl 
participle  of  itre,  with  the  auxiliary 
avoir  u£<td  for  allc,  past  participle  of 
alter,  which  is  always  connected 
with  etre  as  auxiliary,  160  ;  alln  ci\ 
voiture  a  cheval,  a  pied,  214;  alter, 
to  travel  to  a  place,  213  ;  aller  bie?i, 
to  fit,  to  go  right,  239.  Aller  and 
venir,  followed  by  infinitive,  374. 
S'en  aller,  to  go  away,  219,  242,  243 

ALMOST,  presque,  180. 

ALONE,  by  one's  self,  seul,  e,  367. 

ALONG,  le  long  du,  de  la,  &c.f  378. 

ALOUD,  Jiaut,  d  haut> 

ALREADY,  dejd, 

ALWAYS,  toujours,  I 

;:,  (to,)  ojie's  self,  (to  t-njoy 
to  divert,  »*amuscr  d,  217. 

AN,  ANNKE,  year,  their  difli 
289,  N.  3. 

ANECDOTES  :    Witty  answer  of  a 
young  prince,  411.    The  French  lan- 
guage, 412.   A  shopkeeper's  answer, 
411.    The  Emperor  Charles  V 
The  entrance  of  a  king  into  a  town, 

442.  The  last  request  of  an  old  man, 

443.  The  three  questions,  444.    An- 
swer of   a    lazy   young    man,  41."» 
Hearing  counsel,  445.    Noble  answct 
of  a  lady,  445.     Cornelia,  447.     Po- 
liteness, 450.    Mildness,  447.     The 
contest  of  art,  451.  Zeuxis,  451.  The 
corporal  of  Frederick  the  Great,  451. 
Marshal  de  Turenne,  451.   An  affect- 
ing narrative,  451.    Interesting  nar- 
rative, 453. 

ANGRY  (to  be)  with  somebody,  ttrt 
fdche  contre  quelqu* un  ;  about  same- 
thing,  de  quclque  chose,  319. 

ANY,  some,  (before  a  noun,)  <Ju 
de  la,  des,  55,  281 ;  before  an  adjee- 
ive,  de,  57,  281.  See  SOME.  $62,  en, 

ANYBODY,  somebody,  any  one 
some  one,  quelqu'un,  39. 


INI 


561 


ANYTHING,    something, 
Chose,  28 ;  good,  de  ban,  28. 

APPEAR,  (to,)  to  look  like,  avoir 
fair,  la  mine  ;  she  looks  angry,  ap- 
pears to  be  angry,  die  a  fair  fdche, 
332 

APPLY,  (to,)  $64,  s'adresser  d. 
f.s,    $  63,    after ;    always   fol- 
!»y  the  infinitives  avoir  or  ct  re. 
YOU  HUNGRY,  28 ;  thirsty,  28  ; 
-,29. 

ARTICLES,  461.    Their  distinction  ; 

general  obs.,  463 ;  difference  in  the 

use  of    the   article   in   French   and 

'i,  $2,  5;    INDEFINITE,   from 

7  ;  when  the  definite  /r. 

tor  the  English  indefinite,  $  7. 

OKFINITE,  $8;  their  functions,  $  14; 

y  noun,  &c.,  $  15  ; 

;. roper    names   of    countries, 

$  1<~> ;  not  of  individuals,  $  17  ;  when 

re   adjectives  qualify  the 

.same  noun,  do  not  repeat  the  article, 

icforc  nouns, 

$  19  to  25;  2o  PARTITJ-. 

/e  or  after  a  negation,  $  26  to 
.,  $29, 

:u  ;    i ' 

res. 

.  jiitqu  a,  d  .' 
f  13. 

— 1,  auturit 

'  138 — 1  ;  ai/5.vi .  .  .  </j/r. 
.:ough  ;  $  161 
—4. 
AT,  to,  in,  $  1G3 — 5,  a,  7 ;  1 

;i  city,  13 ;  en,  before  a  country. 
Au,  $8  ;  aux,  a  la,  &c.,  to  the. 

•  •[EN,  a  la  miemic,  a?/./ 
a?;*  rr.uiuics,  §  104  ;  to  mim\ 

Au  MILIEU  D'EUX,  $63,  in  tnt>  midst 
of  them. 

AUCUN,   aucuite,    none,    not   any, 
i  162. 
AUPARAVANT,  ^  163 — 9  ;  before. 

AUTANT  DE  .  .  .,  &C.     See  As  MUCH. 

AUQUEL,  $79;  to  whom,  which, 
,  auxquclles,  $  125. 


AUTRE,  d'autres,  $  l>8. 

AUXILIARY.  Verbs  which  in  Eng- 
lish generally  take  to  have  ibr  their 
auxiliary,  while  in  French  they  taka 
ct  re,  $  158—3. 

A  VANT,  before,  takes  de  before  thfl 
infinitive,  142;  pas  avant,  not  until, 
310. 

r.c,  w:'th,  $63. 

AVOIR,  to  have  ;  cit,  had,  160,  162, 
Ot>s.  75.  Avoir  beau,  in  vain,  397. 
When  speaking  of  dimension  we  use 
in  French  avoir  when  the  English 
use  to  be,  338. 

IL  Y  A,  there  is,  there  are,  180,  238, 
246,  -J 17,  248,  338.  11  y  a  cannot  be 
rendered  into  English  by  there  is 
-  used  in  reply  to 
the  question,  ll.iw  Innjj  is  it 
246  ;  nor  when  it  is  nsnl  in  reply  to 
the  question,  How  far  ^  <.jitdle  din- 
lance  f 

.,  to  ache,  to  in  1  a  pain 

AWAKE,  (to,)  re  veil /cr,  sc  rt> 
269. 


V,  N.  2,  3 

157  (0/A«c.  74s  160;    to  bo  at  homo. 
ilre  d   In   jnnisoH,   M  ;   to  bo  in  tht 

•f  d  la  cam].-: 

IB,  is  rendered  by  (I<i-oir, \\-\\ci. 
•  sscs  obligation,  185. 

To  BE,  translated  by  avoir.  Arc 
you  hungry?  Aviz-vous  faim  ?  I 
am  thirsty,  fai  soif,  28  ;  <n 
sonnndl?  sleepy,  L".  )  ;  ch  <i  a  d ,  ^  fro  id 
pcur,  warm,  cold,  afraid,  31.  What 
is  the  matter?  Qu\rrcz-ro; 
Am  I  afraid,  ashamed?  Ai-jcpeur't' 
honte?  45.  Am  I  right,  wrong?  Ai- 
je  raiso?i  ?  tort  ?  36.  How  old  are 
you?  Qucldgeavcz-vous  ?  180.  How 
high  is  his  house  ?  Combien  sa  maison 
a-t-elie  de  haul  ou  de  hauteur  ?  It  IB 
nearly  fifty  feet  high  ,  elle  a  e/it-rrori 
cingttanto  picds  de  ftaKt,  338. 

To  DE  under  obligations  tc  8om0 


r  a  08 1 


>no,   <m  ,r  de»    cbltgatwrji   d  ottd 
fu'tm,  336.     My  feet  are  cul  : 

I  uux  pied*  ;  her  handa  ore  cold, 
die  afroiil  nux  main*,  110. 

•••  ant  of,  avoir  leioin  de, 

T:    BE,    translated   by  te  porter, 

'},  tranalated  by  FAIKE.    la  it 

//    du   vent?     It    in 

Homy  til  fait  deVorage.  la  it  foggy  I 

fail-i/  «/*  brouillard  I  208,  215,  301. 

•SeeWBATHER,  WARM,  COLD,  DARK, 

itc.)    la  it  good  travelling  f  7 

lea  i  «•/,;",  r  f  'ji:;.  07,  Ml 

BE,  (to,)  followed  by  a  present  par- 

>,  ia  tranalated  by  «fre  with  a 

ind  an  infinitive;  I  am  reading,  jc 

*  156—7. 

BEAU,  W,  fine,  handaome;  bow 
heae  two  worda  mutt  be  employed, 
192,  287.    Avoir  btan,  in  Tain,  397. 
BRAUCOUP   de,    much,    many,    a 
good  deal  of,  very  much,  65. 

7—459,  *  \ew 

aay  mi  beavcoup,  a  great  many. 

^0,  187. 

BECOME,  (to,)  devenir*    What  has 
/  /ctf-il  dc9***t 

225.  What  will  become  of  him? 
QIM  darirmdra+Ut  242.  What  baa 
become  of  your  aunt  r  Q«'e»t  4t*e- 
niie  votr*  tantef  316.  To  become 
ubua,  tomkcr  dmm»  U  ridicmlt, 


BEFORE,  OMM<  tfe.  Do  you  apeak 
before  you  listen  f  Parto-ttut  OWM< 
iT<i-  re.JtMMJ.afct. 

::>0.    The  day  before,  U  *, 
the  day  before  Sunday,  la  **UU  de 
tfiaianc**,  340.     ^MHlt  Jnxmf,  an- 
jMravcml,  their  difference,  *  163—9. 

BRO,  (to,)  prier  de,  304.  To  beg 
wme  one'a  pardon,  demonder  pa  Am 
i  V«r/vu'iii»t  383. 

BCHATR,  (to,)  Sf  comport* 
S93. 

BSMEVE,   (to)   croirr.*    1 


BELOW,   or  down  tftaira,  €U  &BJ, 

BESIDES,  cut  re;  bcaidea  that,  *w 
t-9  cela;  beaidea,  i  moreover,  '* 
outre,  378. 

BETTER  —  than,  micux—qur 
To  be  better,  taloit  atioir.  .  '  •.     1. 
it  better  f    i 

BETWSBVV  art**,  999, 

BiRif,  well,  140,  147,  319. 
well,  a  great  deal,  a  great  mat 
always  followed  by  the  partitive  ar- 
ticle, but  bcaufoup  ia  followed  by  the 
preposition  de,  1 

Buurrdr,  aoon,  abortly,  185  ;  aooii, 
very  aoon,  259. 

Blow,  (a,)  »»  coup,  244. 

BLOW,  (to,)  to  blow  out,  fot&er. 
342;  to  blowout  one'a  brains,  br*. 
/•  -  la  certclli  d  q*<l<]*'*n  ;  be  lioi 
blown  out  his  brains,  i/  »'r>t  LruU  la 


BOARD,  (to,)  with  any  one  or  any- 
where, fire  en  pcntiom,  99  mettre  en 

;  '  •*«:..-..   /  -.•. 

BoARDiao-nouaR,  (a,)  a  boarding- 
school,  **e  pension;  to  keep  a  board 
ing  -house,  four*  pention,  385. 

BOAST,  (to,)  to  brag,  «r/ai>«  ra/0i>, 
428. 

BOIRE,*  to  drink  ;  lu,  Jru 

Bov,  good,  26,284;  H  re  bonded- 
f*e  ckote,  to  be  good  for  aomething. 
A  q**t  cela  e*t-il  bo*  r  Of  what  use 
ia  that?  Cela  neit  bo*  d  run.  it  n 
good  for  nothing,  2:  .  bom 

i  n   <  ii  I'  .-it  '    Is  it    :  •  •  I  IIYU  i  iM 
Paris? 

BoRJl,  (to  be,)  it  re  **,  nee  ;  wher* 
were  you  born?  Oi  ite*-\ou»  ni 
(nee?}  388. 

BEI.XG,  apporter,  amener  ;  differ  - 
ence  between  theae  two  v«  . 

BURST,  (a,)  n 

laughter,  vn  Mat  de  rire  ;  to  burst 
out,  Mater  ;  to  burst  out  laugh 
Mater  de  rire,fairc  vn  iclat  de  • 

!• 


INDEX. 


UM  if  .  transact  business, 

-/««; 
bare  but  one  friend;  je  n'«. 

.  <tc—que.   lie 
has  no-  ..  s,  H  na  que 


/OK,  had  it  not  been,  were  it 

Got  for,  $  164— <>,  tans. 

v.  (to  purchase. 

• 

!  y  rendered  by  de, 

0  use  of  the  POMIVO  voice 

230.    By,  anprrf*  de  ;  to  paw  .by  • 
place,  patter  awprit  fun  m 
i.j  of,  4  rffrf  £/<.  3$6. 
BY  MYSELF,  thyself,  dec..  *  lf.3—10 

Srttl,  trtih,  trnlr.  irulf*. 

•  in  I  faction  of  crla,  t: 

'»,  6. 
here  and  there,  about, 

all  that  : 
Comment  eela  *'*pjx 

•.umber*.  $  137—4, used 
ales  and  aorereigna,  %  14 1 . 

•JO,  80.  ID- 

CARRY,   to,)  to  take,  porter,  me- 
itstinction,  303. 

'  comptant  ;  to  buy  for 
cash,  odbefer  comptant,  239. 
CAST  (to)  down,  laitter ;  to  caat 

1  one's  eyes,  laitter  Irt  ytux, 

•hat,  these,  those.     ' 

TA'hen 
•   be  used,  (N.  6,  p. 

469  : 

Id.  f: 


what,    or   the    thing    which,    181 
that  is  to  Ear, 
•  pouryuoi,  then 
375. 

CE,  $38,  be,  ei.  n  wad 

instead  of  i 

.  that,  $38,  N.5i 
use  cert,  cr/a,  to  translate  tho  1  r 
the  former,  when  they  apply  not  to 
nouns,  but  to  action* 

this  one;  crlui-ld,e,: 
one.      Cct  autrf,  that  i  -;MI, 

who  i: 

\ 5-n,  these ;  cr*r-/4,  cell  - 
those;  cmxyui. 
30,46,  886,207,  $6- 

huvr  n,,nr.  -ITt*.  N.  1,  -J. 

CEDILLA,  (Milled  its  use,  p.  509 
—1. 

CELA.  that,  (meaning  that  thing,) 

I   English  ; 
ooun  it  relates  to  a  preceding 

when  to  a  following,  1 
Cti.ri  DU,  de  7a,  </. 
«/«,  &.r.,  $  104,  that  of,  or  the  pos- 


a  hundred,  takes  an 
plural  and  not  followed  by  another 
numeral,  184.     Never  preceded  by 
lowed  by  • 
HO  oysters,  $6,  p. 
462. 

CEFEJCDAXT,  however,  J34. 
CE  QU'IL  Y  A,  $87 — I 

what  is. 
CE  QUE,  ce  qui,  $89,  what ;  $90, 

i.     Cepouryuoi,  $92, 
for  what ;  ce  d  91*01,  dang  < 
qnoi,  6tc.,  $93,  94.     Ce  qr 
$  1?0,  what,  that  N-. 
Cctrx.    (SeeC- 
Cni' 

\I*OE,  (to,)  men: 

\  other  things,  changer.  Do  you  change 
"rs- 


504 


INDEX, 


CHAQUE,  each  ;  chayuc  homme,each 
man,  217. 

CHEZ,  84,  3G3,  $  163—7,  at,  in,  to. 

CINQUIEME,  1-5,  $  141,  fifth. 

CoLD,/roiJ.  It  is  cold,  ilfaitfroid, 
$2,  207.  To  have  a  cold,  tire  en- 
rkume,  293.  To  catch  a  cold,  pren- 
drefroid,  s1 cnrJiumcr,  356.  I  have  a 
rcold,  fai  un  rhuine  de  cerveau,  293. 
(See  J3r,  translated  by  avoir.} 

COLLECTIFS,  (w>ms,)$140— 10.  (See 
NOUNS.) 

COMBIEN  de?  65,  $137—2,  how 
much  ?  how  many  ?  $  161—4. 

COME,  (to,)  rrwir,  175.    (See  VE- 

N1B.) 

I:.NT!  inter].,  $121,  what  ! 

COM!  nlilV,  tutluni 

de  .  .  .   que  tic    . .  .  ,     »/ 
$138 — 1  ;  of  inc-: 
yuede  . .. ,   moins  de.  . 
plus  . . .  qu<  .  que. 

COMPARISON  of  ndj.  an-i  .  .  Ill: 
irreg.,  1 17. 

COMI'AS 

COM  ri  f/«,  254. 

COMPOUND    form    of    iho    : 
$  145—2. 

Coan  ul,  182. 

COMI  rcomp- 

fc/.-f,  to  In,; 

COMPTER,  (no  prepos.,)  to  inimd, 
•.•iifiit-r  sur,  to  depend  on,  $  64. 

CON  i  ^148.    (See 

POTENTIAL.)     Compose,  $1 19.    (See 
POTENTIAL.) 

CONDUCT,  (to,)  conduirc,  136  ;  con- 
ducted conduit,  17.'>;  one's  self,  *e 
conduire,  270. 

CONJI  <onjugaison*,§144, 

let,  2d,  3d,  4th. 

CONJUNCT;  w.  (See 

at  (791)  a  list  of  those  that  govern  the 
•ubj. ;  all  others  govern  the  indicat.) 
A  moins  que,  de  crainte  quet  &c., 
require  ne.  Jusqu'd,  jusqu'd  ceque, 
their  dillorenre,  ^164 — 1.  When  a 
Conjunct,  governs  several  verbs,  — 2  ; 
fi,  if,  governs  tv.o  verbs,  — 3  j 


que,  that,  not  omitied   in    French 
whether,  «';  whether,  soil  %uc,  ho« 
used,  —4 ;   but  for,  were   it  not  for, 
had  it  not  been  for,  sa?is,  — 5.    Conj 
with  preterit  antcrieur,  521. 

CONI/AITRE,  to  be  acquainted  \vith, 
(to  know,)  112,  140,  172,  329. 

CONSENT,  (to,)  co?ise?itir,  278.  I 
consent  to  it,fy  consent,  'J>. 

CONSENTIK,  to  consent,  27S,  334. 

CONVENIR,  to  suit,  237;  de,  to 
agree  to,  L". 

CONVERSE  (to)   wit!/. 
avcc,  i 

COT£,  d  co/6    Jt,    :  side  of, 

266.     De  ce  cotc-c:,   &,c.,  tl. 
!'J3. 

Cou> 

ixtyi  ites-vou*  ?  2 

Cour,   (tin,)  a  l»!o\v.   a    : 
knock,  a  stab,  a  shot,  a  ^ 
a  slap,  244. 

CBAINDRE,  to  fc  !,  &,c., 

220,  260. 

CREDIT,  (on,)  a  credit,  239. 

CROIRE,  to  believe,  111. 

CROITRE,  to  grow,  croissn, 

'.MR,     tO     \' 

fruit.  3 

CURTAIN, 
the   cur 

se  laisse,  352. 

CUT,  (to,)  couper,  80;  one's  self 
secoupcr,  217,  21'.'. 

D. 

63,  105   i>: 
^163— 11— U. 

DARK,  sombre,  obscur,  208.  Il 
grows  dark,  t7  sefaittard,  nut 

DAVANTAGE,  more,  never  precedes 
a  noun,  198. 

DE,  (partitive,)  some  or  any,  57, 
2S4.  Of,  from,  $8;  dt,  between 
nouns,  27,  404 ;  locutions  that  re- 
quire de  before  an  infinitive,"  SO.  \\2. 
228;  dc  JM»,  of,  from  whom,  $79. 


J7:  DK.X. 


565 


Pr 

A)CFAIRE,  to  undo;  se  de/ 
1  of,  268. 

v  64. 

M  tardfz  pas  a  revenir, 

.;,  to  dwell, 

^-3,   187, 

DEMI,  f,  half,  moitiit  $11! 

rompter  gur, 
v  64. 

tanding, 

res  nc  before 
1)4. 

y,   $3;   i* 

ir.  of  de,  $  10. 

'/tie,  as 

eoon  as,  governs  the   pn'u'rit  ante- 

'dtt  &,c.,of,  from 

::,  to  go,  to  i 

DEV. 

to  beconi' 

IR  (see  Pi  <>  owe, 

ro   you  to?   drvez-rout?    184, 

between  a  master  and 
his  pupils,  435. 

7.     (See  MOURIR.) 
.  to  tell,  say;  <7 
170. 

a  verb, 

1.     On  short  English 
iniwtTe,  ! 


DIR  t    attending 

words,  articles,  proi.ouns,  &,c.,  457. 

DIR.  3.    On  the  ohj.  pron.  ZMI,  to 
him,  t,>   her  :  .      •   them. 

458. 

DIR.  4.   On  obj.  nouns.     The  pro 
pos.  m  N  ;ood. 

DIR. 

tionary,  and  t":T.n  the  tenses 
rules,  459. 

!  cuinjwund 

,  459. 

DIR.  7  •  :iouph,&«v. 

adverb? 

rogations,  -•> 

DIR.  9.   Formation  of  the  ; 

.USTf  (to,)  fi 

Do,  (to,)  to  in; 
made,  fait,  Ifc. 

dc  son  mieux,   249;  —  <> 
,   ton  devoir,  348;  —  good   to 
somebody,  du  lien  d  quclqu'i; 
372.     Shall    you    BOOH 
writing?  AM 

writing 

do  \sithout,  tepasffrdi. 
translated  by  se  porter,  275. 

• 

.    that   of  which,    2J-  . 
past  particip!-  nt  dooa 

a  it,  229. 

y  the  iiDininntivr  of  :!. 
verb. 
DORMIR,  to  sleep,  121. 

fo  undrcse  ; 
dedabiller,  269,  338,  400. 

DRINK,    (to,)   loire,  86,   121,    172 
332  ;  coffee,  prcndre  le  (du)  cafe,  132. 

to  ride.     >See  A 
214. 

DRY,  srr ;  il  fait  sec,  208. 
Du,  some,  any, ^ 
Duqr: 
86,  87, 


£66 


INDEX. 


DUTY,  devoir,  348. 
DYE,    (to,)   to   color,   ieindre,    <en 
uoir,)  195. 

E. 

E  (mute)  changed  to  e  (grave)  $  144 
—4  ",  e  (acute)  to  grave,  $  144 — 5. 

EACH,  chaque,  each  one ;  chacun, 
E17,  $  38, 

EACH  OTHER,  Vun  Vautre,&,c.,  331. 

EA.RLY,  de  bonne  heure,  earlier,  de 
meilleurc  hcure,  plus  tdt,  150. 

£CR:RE,  to  write,  ccrit,  written, 
tcrivez,  write,  89,  111,  121,  172. 

ELLE,  she,  $  38.  When  ce  must 
replace  elle,  N»  2;  elle-meme,  her- 
self, $4H,  &c.,  tfelle,  of,  from  her, 
•n,  $  47,  48—$  63.  .EMe  requires  no 
complement.  Possessive-,  d  elle,  &c., 
U06. 

ELSE  (what),  ^wo?  encore,  otherwise, 
<.wtrement,  113. 

EN,  some,  any  of  it,  of  them,  59, 
51,  63,  "$62.  Yen,  87,  88.  Its  place 
wirli  personal  pronouns,  96  ;  of  him, 
&c.,  en,  113.  Past  participle  does 
not  agree  with  en,  162,  Obs.  76 ;  from 
it,  them,  &c.,  185,  $47,  48;  $50. 

EN,  in,  at,  to,  375,  407,  before  the 
name  of  a  country.  ($  163 — 11  to  13.) 

ENCORE,  still,  yet,  &c.,  some,  any 
more,  73. 

ENCRIER,  inkstand,  41 ;  ecritoire, 
(fern  in.) 

.ENDEAVOR,  (to,)  tdcher,  342.    S'ef- 
forcer,  404. 

ENS*  TIR  (S'),  to  fly,  run  away,  253; 
262. 

ENLIST,  (lo,)sefaire  soldat,  s'en- 
rtler^  226. 

E^NUYEII  (s'),  to  want  amusement, 
576. 

ENSUITE,  afterwards,  88. 
,ENTRER,  (to,)  dans,  to  go  in,  come 
in,  &c.,  302. 

EJMTRETENIR,  to  Keep,  s'entretenir 
vt>ec,  to  converse  with,  £29. 
SPICIER,  grocer,  36. 

ET,  and,  35;  372,  374. 


ETEINDRE,  to  extinguish,  175. 

ETRE,  to  be  5  etv,  been,  84,  157, 
160.  Ou  en  etions-nous  ?  where  did 
we  stop  ?  383.  Verbs  that  take  etrt 
as  auxiliary,  530 ;  past  'part,  agrees 
with  nomin.,  530.  C'est,  ce  sont,  it 
is,  &c.,  241,  327,  338,  348;  elm 
followed  by  the  preposition  d  and  an 
infinitive,  corresponds  to  the  verb  t(* 
be  followed  by  a  present  participle 
$  156—7.  (3ee  Is  IT  NOT  ?) 

&VENTAIL,  fan,  eventaiU,  45. 

EVER,  jamaw,  157. 

EVERY,  all,  tout,  toute,  &c.  110, 
289,  219,  356. 

Eux,  $  38,  they ;  more  than  t\cy, 
73. 

EUX-MEMES,  themselves,  $4H;  6 
eux,  to  them,  $63,  d'eux,  deux,  theirp 
$106. 

F. 

FAIRE,  to  make,  to  do ;  faisant, 
fait,  83,  131,  168;  you  had  better, 
240  ;  it  is  all  over  with  me,  332 ;  the 
soup  will  be  warmed,  348  ;  I  cannot 
help  it,  381 ;  it  grows  dark,  352;  to 
think  much  of  one,  354  ;  to  do  one's 
best,  249.  FAIT,  (si,)  yes,  51,  Obs.  26. 

FALL,  (to,)  tombcr,-270.  Baisser. 
The  day,  stocks  fall,  lejour  Itaisse,  It 
change  baisse,  352. 

FALLOIR,  to  be  necessary,  must. 
All  verbs  expressing  necessity,  obli- 
gation, or  want,  are  in  French  trans- 
lated by  PALLOIR,  197. 

FAR,  loin.  How  far  ?  Quelle  din 
tance  ?  252 ;  far  off,  de  loin,  317 ;  from 
thee,  detoi,  $63. 

FARMER,  fermier,  38. 

FAULT,  la  faute.  Whose  fault  is 
it  ?  A  qui  est  la  faute  ?  381 ;  to  find 
fault  with  .  .  .  trouver  d  redire  a  ... 
400. 

FAVOR,  (a,)  un  plaisir.  Faire  un  . . 
110. 

FEAR,  (to,)  craindre,  220.  260.  For 
'bar  of,  de  craintc  (peur)  d?,  356 ;  rfrf 
crainle  (peit  •)  qnc . .  ne,  417  $  104 — 1 


INDEX. 


567 


FEEL,  (to,)  scntir,  278.     Tu  feel  a 
pain,  souffrir  dc,  334;  sleepy,  avoir 
.  cnvie  de  dormir,  220. 

FEW,  (a,)  books,  quelgues  livres  ;  a 
few  (of  them,)  en  . .  quelques  uns,  69. 

FIER  (se)  a,  to  trust  to,  §  64. 

FIFTH,  1-5,  cinquieme,.$14l. 

FILL,  (to..)  remplir,  302. 

FIRE,  (to,)  tircr  ;  a  gun,  a  pistol, 
sw  coup  de  fusil,  de  pistolct  ;  to  some 
one,  d  (sur)  quelqu'un,  244. 

FIRST,  1st,  premier,  ler,  70; 
d'abordj  88. 

FIRSTLY,  Istly, premierement ,lmi  rJ . 
3<J3,  $  161—7. 

FIT,  (to,)  flZ/er  &*>;*,  239.  (See 
ALLSR.) 

FLEURIR,  to  blossom, is  regular  ;  to 
flourish,  irregular. 

•ENTLY,  couramment,  321. 
.  (to,)  to  run  away,  s'enfuir, 
•162. 

Full,   car,    107;    during,   pendant, 
i-or  and  at,  when  used  to  ex- 
press the  price  of  a  tiling,  not  ren- 
i  French ,  276 ;  rendered  by  de, 
276  ;  by  pour,  for  more  bad  luck,  pour 
surcroit  de  malheur,  334.    For  what, 
what  for,  pourquoi,  cc  pourquoi,  $  92. 
•;:R,  cclui-ld,  $  36  ;  ceZa,when 
applied  to  actions,  469,  N.  5. 

FORMERLY,  autrcfois,  155. 

FORTNIGHT,  (a,)  quinze  jours  ;  a 
fortnight  ago,  il  y  a  quinze jours,  247. 

FRIGHTEN,  (to,)  effrayer,  s' effrayer; 
In  moindre  chose  V  effraie,  374. 

FROM,  de,  252,  318 ;  des,  356  ;  de 
temps  en  temps,  356.  From  the,  du, 
18. 

FUTURE,  (1st,)  futur,  $  146 ;  its 
terminations.  Not  used  after  «',  if, 
but  the  present  is,  — 3 ;  used  after 
quand,  when,  $  146 — 4  ;  ce  qui,  ce 
quc,  aussilot  que,  &c.,  -—5;  2d  fut., 
its  formation,  299. 

G. 

GAME,  ,'a,)  unc  pa-rtie,  at  chess; 
£  tehees  ;  at  billiards,  de  billard  ;  at 


cards,  de  cartes  .•  faire  une  partu 
de  .  ^ ,  342. 

GENER,  (se,)  to  inconvenience  onw'e 
self,  395. 

GATHER,  (to,)  cueillir,  346. 

GENERAL,  general,  generaux,  4G. 

GET,  (to,)  one's  livelihood  by, 
gagjier  sa  me  a,  307 ;  made,  /aire 
faire  ;  dyed,  fain,  tcindre,  177,  196  ; 
beateflj  (whipped,)  se  faire  battre ; 
paid,  payer  ;  one's  self  invited  to 
dinner,  invitcr  d  di?ier,  363 ;  rid  of 
something,  se  defaire  de  quelquc 
chose;  of  somebody,  se  dcbarrasser 
dc  quelqu'un,  268. 

GIVE,  (to,)  donner,  94;  rise  to 
difficulties,  quarrels,  suspicions,  fa  /re 
naitredes  dijjlcultes,  des  querelles,  dts 
soup$ons,  406  ;  up,  renonccr  d,  $  64. 

Go,  (to,)  alhr,  84,  165 ;  there,  y 
aller,  102,  165 ;  round  the  house, 
autour  de  la  maison,  faire  le  tour, 
&c.,  367;  down,  alight,  desce?idre, 
303 ;  on  foot,  aller  d  pied,  214  ;  on  a 
journey,  faire  un  voyage,  295  ;  to 
bed,  aller  se  couchcr,  semettreau  lit, 
220  ;  to  the  country,  a  la  campagne, 
289  ;  to  some  one's  house,  chez  quel- 
qu'un,  84;  to  see  some  one,  voir 
quelqu'un,  332 ;  a  walking,  seprome- 
ner,  222;  to  go  away,  s'c;i  aller; 
vous  en  allez-vous  ?  219,  242,  243  ;  to 
go  for,  aller  chercher,  105 ;  go  out, 
sortir,  110,  121,  150,  175;  to  bo 
going  to,  aller,  (see  it.)  Are  you 
coming  ?  Allez-vous  ve?iir?  90,  N.  1. 
Je  vais,  used  instead  of  je  veux,  88, 
N.  1. 

GROCER,  tpicicr,  36. 

GROW,  (to,)  croitre,  354.  It  gnowa 
dark,  late,  il  sefait  nuit,  tard  352. 

H. 

HABILLER,  to  dress,  269. 
HAD  it  not  been,  §  164,  sans. 
HAIL,  (to,)greler,  228. 
HAIR,  to  hate,  213. 
HALF    dcmi,  demie.     (Sec  DEMI, 
*  1-11.) 


508 


I  N  D  K  X  , 


EN,  (to,)  arrivcr,  takes  &re, 
254. 

HARDLY,  a  peine,  180. 

HAUT,  (en,)  abcve,  up  stairs ;  en 
Das,  below,  down  stairs,  193. 

HAVE,  (to,;  avoir,  had,  eu,  160;  a 
uold,  un  rhurne,  293 ;  sore  linger, 
mal  an  doigt,  aux  ycur,  a  V&il,  a  la 
main,  aux  de?ils,  d  la  tite,  126,  234; 
d  la  gorge,  au  cote,  295,  284.  To 
have  just,  venir  de,  249,  $  145 — 3. 

HEALTH,  sanli,  332. 

HEAR,  (to  ...  of,)  entendre  parlcr 
dc,  246  ;  apprcndre,  253. 

HE,  il,  ce,  lui;  who,  qui,  that,  quc, 
$38- 

HER,  son,  sa,  ses,  38,  44,  282,$  31 ; 
la;  to  her,  lui,  $47,  48;  herself, 
elle-mcmc,  $41,}  ;  it,  (them,)  to  her, 
Ic,  la,  Zes  lui  ;  -It-lui,  -la-lui,  -les- 
fot",  $58;  her  there,  Z'y,  $57,  58; 
her  some,  airy,  lui  en,  $59;  her  any 
there,  lui  y  en,  ^  GO.  To  her,  a  die, 
)f,  from  her,  d* die,  &c.,  $63;  her- 
self, (reflective,)  se,  s'y,  $71;  hers, 
le  sien,  la  siennc,  &c.,  $  104  ;  a  die, 
,  $  106. 

HERE,  id,  (y,)  110.  Here  and 
there,  3%.  Here  is,  void,  312. 

HEURE.    (See  HOUR.) 

HIM,  lui,  being  the  masculine  of 
her,  see  the  same  paragraphs. 

HOME,  (at,)  a  la  inaison,  84. 

HORS  de,  out ;  out  of  the  city  ;  dc- 
hors,  out  of  doors,  301,  307. 

HOUR,  (the,)  Ihcure,  at  what 
o'clock,  at  one  o'clock,  at  half  past 
one,  d  une  heure  ct  identic,  90.  At  9 
in  the  morning,  in  the  evening,  d  neuf 
heures  du  matin,  du  soir,  185.  Early, 
earlier,  sooner,  150.  To  ask  the 
hour,  110. 

How,  how  much,  many,  before  an 
exclamation,  quc.  How  good  you 
are !  que  vous  5tes  bo?i  !  &c.,  335. 
Flow  far,  jusqii'ou,  193,  252.  How 
long,  coinbien  de  temps,  246  ;  since 
what  time,  depuis  quand  ?  248 ; 
fuaqu'd  quand,  189  How  much, 


many,  cctnbic/i  de,  65.  How 
times,  how  often?  combien  de  foist 
Once,  une  fois,  deux  fois,  plusieurt 
fois,  165,  $137,  2;  $161—4. 

HOWEVER,  cependant,  134;  quel- 
que . .  .qKe,  quel  quc  . . . ,  quels  que . . . , 
que,  &c.,  422,  516. 

HUNDRED,  cent,  184.   (See  CENT.; 

HURT,  (to,)  somebody,  faire  du  mal 
dquelqu'un,  223,  224;  one's  feel- 
ings, faire  de  la  peine  d  quelqujunt 
333. 

I. 

ltje,  ft  £5,  469.  I  who,  that,  moi 
qui,  que,  470. 

Ici,  (y,}  here,  110. 

IDIOMS,  after  INDEX. 

IF,  si,  107;  when  it  loses  the  x, 
372,  $146—3;  when  followed  by 
the  present  tense,  233,  06s.  105  ;  by 
the  imperfect,  507,  N.  1 ;  when  it 
governs  two  verbs,  538,  $  164 — 3. 

IL,  Us,  he,  it,  they,  $38;  whqn 
replaced  by  cc,  469,  N.  2. 

IMMEDIATELY,  tout  de  suite,  sur  le 
champ,  237. 

IMPART,  (to,)  faire  part  de  quilyue 
chose  d  quelqu'un,  397. 

IMPERATIVE,  imperatif,  509,  $  150 ; 
its  formation,  1  to  6  of  $  150.  Five 
irregular  ones,  — 7;  regular  ones,  with 
objectives  and  negation,  — 8.  How 
to  translate,  Come  and  see  me,  &c., 
—12. 

IMPERFECT  (the)  of  the  Indicative, 
506,  $147.  Translated  by  French 
parfait  and  preterit.  Its  terminations, 
— 1 ;  how  formed, — 2;  regular  verbs, 
exceptions,  — 3  ;  when  used,  —4 ; 
when  it  ends  in  iions,  — 5 ;  in  yions, 
— 6  ;  used  after  si,  507,  $  148 — 4 ;  of 
the  POTENTIAL,  Conditionnd,  its  ter- 
minations ;  its  formation,  507.  Could, 
would,  how  to  translate  them,  508 — 
4.  I  wish,  when  it  is,  je  voudrats, 
— 5.  SECOND  IMPERFECT,  Preterit, 
its  terminations,  517,  518,  $  153  ;  re- 
gular and  irregular  verb«,  list  of  the 


I  If  P  E  * 


5G9 


alter:  use  of  the  preterit,  519,  520: 
z>f  the  subjunctive,  its  formation  ;  its 
terminations,  416,  517.  Impersonal 
verbs  govern  the  subjunctive,  515, 
§151—4. 

IMPROVE,  (to,)  to  profit,  faire  dcs 
prog  res,  313. 

I.N,   dans,   63,  105;  in,   dans,   en, 

ihcir  difference,  375.     IN,  translated 

by  iS,  242,  367,  2S9  ;  by  de,  338 ;  by 

r  a  superlative  ;  c'est  le  plus 

••iys  de  V Europe,  446.     In  this 

manner,  de  cctte  maniere,  180.     In  a 

short  time,  dans  pcu  de  temps,  375. 

to,  by  a,  535,  §  163 — 5;  not 

-11.     In    the   midst 

of .  .  .,  ttu  milieu  dc .  .  .  ,  476,  $  63. 

INDEFINITE,  (article,)  never  omitted 
in  the  plural;  when  not  used  in  tiie 
singular ;  when  replaced  by  the  defi- 
nite, 462. 

INDICATIVE,    Indicatif.     Present, 
500,  $144;    Imperfect,  507,  $147; 
Second    Imperfect,    Prettrit,    517, 
Pluperfect,  520,   $154;  Se- 
rond  Pluperfect,  Preterit  antvricur, 
$  !."».") ;  conjunctions  after  which  it  is 
Jl,    (see  those  tenses;)  Fu- 
ture, 504;  Second  Future,  . 

I.M'ii  i  LUI:NTLY,  tant  lien  quemal, 
3S6. 

INDIRECT  (regime)  objective  of  a 
preposition,  $43. 

INFINITIVE,  79  ;  words  which  re- 
quire it,  with  the  preposition  de,  80. 

INFINITIVE,  with  its  4  terminations, 
79,  80;  words  requiring  it  with  the 
preposition  de,  80 ;  governed  by  every 
preposition  except  en,  521,  $  156 — 1 ; 
remark  on  apres,  after, — Infinitive 
governed  by  another  verb,  — 2;  im- 
portant remark  on  it ;  different  prepo- 
sition in  English  and  French  ;  verbs 
that  govern  it  without  a  preposition, 
~-4  ;  adj.  and  verbs  that  take  a,  — 5  ; 
t.hose  that  take  dc,  — 6.  After  a, 
the  French  infinitive  translates  the 
present  participle  coming  after  the 
verb  to  he,  399,  502,  $  144— €. 


INQUIRE  (to;  after  some  one,  dn- 
ma?tder  quriqit'un  ;  qui  dmmndcz- 
vou8  ?  204. 

INSTANTLY,  d  V instant,  fur  It 
champ,  (this  instant,)  237. 

INSTEAD  of,  au  lieu  de,  124. 

INSTRUIRE,  to  instruct,  instruisc.iit9 
instruit,  266. 

INTRODUCE,  (to,)  presenter  a,  in- 
troduire  a,  476,  $64. 

IT,  le,  V,  26;  it,  nomin.,  il,  cll>\ 
ce,  $38;  it  is,  c'est,  ce  sont,  469, 
N.  2,  3;  them,Zes,  it,  (to  it,  to  them,) 
y,  101 ;  it,  them,  (of,  from,)  en,  $47, 
48,  50;  it  to  me,  before  the  verb, 
me,  le,  la,  &c.,  te  le,.la  ;  le  lui,  hi 
lui,  &c.,  $57;  after  the  verb,  -/<•- 
moi,  -la-moi,  &c.f  $58;  it  to  it, 
there,  Z'y,  $57,  58;  to  it,  of  it,  with 
it  or  with  them,  applying  to  things, 
are  not  translated  after  the  verb, 
$  63 ;  it,  (with  reflective  verbs,) 
Cen,  s  en,  nous  cny  vous  en,  m'en, 
478,  $  73. 

ITS,  son,  sa,  *cs.  What  is  its  in- 
finitive ?  Qucl  en  csi  V infinitif  ?  466, 
$31,  N.I. 

J. 

J A.MAIS,  ever  ;  nc . .  .jamais,  never 
157. 

JE,  I,  and  before  a  vowel  or  h 
mute,_;',  25. 

JEST,  (to,)  plaisanlcr,  badiner,  roun 
vous  moqucz,  you  are  jesting,  lie  i.s 
no  joker,  il  n'entcjid  pas  raillert'c, 
381. 

JETER,  to  throw,  throw  away,  173, 
Ols.  73. 

JOHN  some,  en  . . .  d  Jean,  476, 
$59. 

JOUR,  day,  en  pleinjour,  in  broad 
daylight,  407. 

JOUR,  JOURNEE,  their  difference 
283,  N.2. 

JOUER,  to  play,  takes  de  when  au 
instrument,  and  a  when  a  game  in 
spoken  of,  259;  vn  tour,  to  play  « 
trick,  400 


570 

JUDGE  (to  be  a)  of  something,  se 
toiwaitre  en  -juelque  chose,  351. 

JUSQUE,  up  to,  as  far  as,  189,  193 ; 
jusqu'd  ce  quc,  until,  537,  $  164. 

JUST,  (to  have,)  venir  de.  He  has 
out  just  come,  il  ne  fait  que  d'ar- 
river,  249,  504,  $  145—3. 

K. 

KEEP,  \'to,)  garder,  239;  tenir, 
274.  To  keep  warm,  cool,  clean, 
BI>,  tenir  chaud,  frais,  propre,  365 ; 
one's  self  ready,  pret,  274;  on  one's 
guard  against  one,  en  garde  centre 
yuelqu'un,  366  ;  to  maintain,  entrc- 
tenir,  429 ;  keep  a  boarding-schcol, 
house,  tenir  pension,  385. 

KILL,  (to,)  tuer,  92;  to  ;<ill  by 
ehooting,  tuer  tfun  coup  d^arme  a 
feu,  367. 

KNOW,  (to,)  savoir,  connaitre,  112, 
140,  172;  how  to  swim,  nagcr,  13.5. 
Difference  of  savoir  and  coruiailre, 
329,  N.  1. 

L. 

LA,  (article  feminine,)  the,  281, 463. 
LA,  (objective  pronoun,)  her,  it,  281, 
472.  LA,  (y,)  there,  110. 

LAQUELLE,  (relative,)  which,  479, 
$82;  (interrogative,)  $34. 

LAST,  dernier,  ere,  71. 

LATE,  tard;  too  late,  troptard,  110. 

LATELY,  the  other  day,  Vautre 
jour,  dermercment,  375. 

LATTER,  cdui-ci,  468,  $36;  ccci, 
when  applied  to  actions,  469,  N.5. 
Former,  celui-ld  ;  cela. 

LAUGH,  (to,)  rire,  325.  (See  RIKE.) 

LAY  (to)  to  one's  charge,  imputerd 
guelqu'ufi  ;  ne  me  V imputes  pas,  381. 

LE,  the,  T,  before  a  vowel  or  silent 
ft,  25,  463. 

LE,  him,  it,  so,  168,  472;  le  lui, 
Ics  lui,  it,  them  to  him  ;  -le-lui,  -les- 
lui,  475.  Lc,  relating  to  a  noun,  an 
sdjective,  or  even  a  whole  sentence, 
is  rendered  by  so,  and  frequently 
frinittedin  English,  171,  173. 


LKAGJE,  (a,)  une  lieue ;  to  walk 
or  travel  a  league,  faire  une  lime 
295: 

LEAKN,  (to,)  apprcndre,  127,  179 
le  Fran^ais,  129 ;  by  heart,  par  cceui 
208. 

LEFT,  to,  on  the  left  side  or  hand 
d  gauche,  sur  la  gauche,  378. 

LEFT,  (to  have,)  rester.  When  J 
have  paid  for  the  horse,  I  shall  huvo 
only  ten  dollars  left,  quand  faurci 
&c.  They  have  one  louis  left,  il  leu 
restc  un  louis,  300. 

LE  MIEN,  la  mienne,  &c.,  484, 
$  104  to  109 ;  mine,  used  even  after 
etre  when  ce  is  nominative,  $  105. 

LEQUEL  ?  which  one  ?  lesqucls, 
35,  44,  230,  283,  488. 

LESS,  moins,  the  l«ast,  le  moinx, 
147;  less,  fewer,  moins,  272.  (See 
MOINS.) 

LEST,  for  fear,  de  peur  (c  ruin  ft-} 
que...  ne,  537,  $  164. 

LEUR,  s,  their,  44, 282 ;  le  (la]  latr, 
les  leurs,  theirs,  49,  291.     When  it 
must  be  translated  by  en  . . .  I 
N.  2. 

LEUR,  them,  to  them,  for  persons, 
282,  O6s.l28,472.  Leur,  (le,  la,  les,} 
it  or  them,  to  them,  475,  $  57.  Leur 
en,  them  some,  476,  $  59.  Leur  y  en, 
some  to  them,  there,  $60. 

LEVEL  (on  a)  with,  even  with,  c 
fieur  de,  354. 

LIEU  (au}  de,  instead  of,  124 ;  lenir 
lieu  de,  404. 

LIGHTEN,  (to,)  faire  des  iclairest 
227. 

LIKE,  (to,*  aimer;  I  like  fish, 
faime  le  poisson  ;  to  like,  trouver  ; 
how  do  you  like  that  wine  ?  comment 
trouvez-vous  ce  vin?  I  like  it  well, 
je  le  trouve  Ion,  208.  As  yo^a  liko, 
comme  il  vous  plaira,  325. 

LIKE  better,  (to,)  orefer,  aimt' 
mieux,  263,  264;  to  my  liking,  c 
man  gre,  385. 

LIRE,  to  read,  lisant,  lu.  licez.  1 10, 
121,  H8,  172. 


INDEX. 


571 


LITTLE,,  small,  petit,  47;  little, 
peu,  347,  peude  ;  a  little,  un  peu  de, 
57;  but  or  only  a  little,  ne . . .  gucre 
dc,  67  ;  just  a  little,  taut  soipeu,  427. 

LIVE,  (to,)  demeurer,  187,  N.  3. 

LONG,  (to,)  tarder  de. ;  I  long  to 
see  my  brother,  il  me  tarde  de  voir 
mon  frtre,  394. 

LONG,  (so,)  as,  tant  que,  401.  How 
long  ?  combien,  combicn  de  temps  ? 
1246.  How  long  since?  (since  what 
time?)  depuis  quand?  248.  How 
long  ?  jusqu'd  quand  ?  189. 

LONG-TEMPS,  (never  un  long- 
temps,)  a  long  time,  462,  $6. 

LOOK,  (to,)  upon,  donner  sur  ;  the 
window  looks  upon  the  street,  lafc- 
ivtre  donne  sur  la  rue,  361.  (^ec 
A.FPEAR.)  To  look  pleased  with 
somebody,  faire  bonne  mine  a  quel- 
IILUII  ;  displeased  -with,  ma:.vaise 
-nine  d,  332 ; — avoir  Vair  ;  to  look 
sad,  avoir  Vair  triste,  384. 

LOKSQUE,  quand,  when,  242  ;  used 
.vith  the  preterit  antcritur,  ">01. 
[Lorsque  is  never  used  to  ask  a 
question.) 

LOSE,  (to,}perdre,  182;  one's  wits, 
pcrdre  la  tcte,  334 ;  sight  of,  perdre 
de  vue,  389. 

LTIRE,  to  shine,  glitter,  l:*isant, 
'in,  228. 

M. 

MA,  my,  mon,  mes,  282,  466,  §31. 

MAIS,  but,  42. 

MAISON,  (a  /a,)  home  ;  (see  it.) 

MAKE,  (to,)  do  faire,  faisant, 121 ; 
fafas,  134;  made,/ai£,  168.  Faire 
present  dequelque  chose  a  quclqu'un, 
376.  To  make  sick,  rendre  malade, 
293  ;  one's  self  understood,  se  faire 
compre?idre,  370;  comfortable,  se 
mettre  d  son  aise,  395.  To  make 
entreaties,  faire.  des  instances,  396. 

MAL,  bad ;  worse,  pire,  the  worst, 
le  pirey  147 ;  badly,  140 :  wrong, 
bad,  319,  (See  HURT.) 

MANASE,  (to,1  to  go  abaut  a  thing, 


s'y  prc?idrt,  3.52;  faire  en  svrte  Je, 
364. 

MANY,  (much,)  leaucoup  de,  65 
not  many,  ne  .  . . :  gucre  de,  11  en  . . . ; 
guere,  67,  459. 

MARCHER,  to  march,  walk,  step, 
go,  must  not  be  mistaken  for  se  pro- 
me?ier,  295. 

MATIIN,  matifiee,  morning,  their 
difTerence,  289. 

ME,  me,  m\  ^47;  mot.  §48.  It  or 
them  to  me,  me  le,  la,  les,  §57.  Me 
to  it  there,  m'y,  §57;  -y-moi,  §58. 
Me  some,  mien,  59.  Me  some  there, 
m'y  en,  §60.  Me,  (to  me,)  o  mot ; 
from  me,  demoi;  near  me,  prcs  de. 
moi,  §63;  me,  (reflective,)  myself, 
§71  ;  mjen,  myself  of  it,  §73. 

MEAN,  (to,)  vouloir  dire.  What  do 
you  mean  ?  que  voulez-vous  dire  ? 
399. 

MEDDLE  (to)  with  a  thing,  se  mt- 
ler  de  quelque  chose.  De  quoi  vous 
milez-vous  ?  what  are  you  meddling 
with  ?  295. 

MEFIER,  (se.)  dc,  to  mistrust,  476, 
477,  §  64. 

MI*ME,  mimes,  sell,  selves;  moi* 
mime,  myself;  eux-mvmcs,  elles-mc- 
mm.  themselves — even,  (adv.,)  344, 
471. 

MENER,  to  take,  to  lead,  not  to  be 
used  for  porter,  303. 

MENTIR,  to  utter  a  falsehood,  to 
lie,  mcntant,  menti,  ne  mentcz  vas. 
226. 

METTRE,  to  put,  put  on  ;  mcttant, 
mis,  mettez,  149,  168 ;  an  net,  to 
transcribe  fairly,  356  ;  d  meme  dc,  to 
enable,  378  ;  se  mettre  d  table,  to  sit 
down  to  a  meal,  407 ;  d  quelque  chose, 
to  set  about  a  thing.  340 ;  d  Vahri  dc. 
to  shelter  one's  self  from,  3f>6. 

MIDST  (in  the)  of  them,  au  miLtu 
d'elles,  476. 

MIEUX,  better,  j%7.  Lemon,  ton, 
son,  &c.,  mieux,  in  tne  best  way  1, 
thou,  he,  &c.,  can,  217,  249.  (See 
BETTER.)  ' 


572 


MIGHT,  iiow  translated,  509,  $  119. 

MILE,  (a,)  un  mille.  To  walk  or 
travel  a  mile,/aire  un  mille,  295. 

MILIEU,  (le,)  the  middle  ;  au  mi- 
lieu. (See  MIDST.) 

MILLE,  a  thousand  ;  rot  wi  mille, 
462,  §6. 

MIEN,  (le,}  la  mienne,  &,c.,  mine, 
30,  49,  291. 

MINE,  le  mien,  la  mienne,  &,c.,  30, 
49,  291,  483,  484,  §104  to  110.  A 
brother  of  mine,  203,  484. 

MISTAKE,  (to,)  to  be  mistaken,  se 
tromper,  vous  vous  trompez,  219. 

MISTRUST,  (to,)  se  mefier  de,  se  de- 
fter de,  477. 

Moi,  I,  §38;  me,  to  me,  §47; 
moi-mime,  myself,  §41£;  moi  qui,  I 
who  ;  moi  que,  I  whom,  470;  dmoi, 
de  moi,  always  used  after  certain 
verbs,  476.  A  moi,  mine,  484,  §  106. 

MOINS,  less,  serves  to  form  the 
comparative  and  superlative  of  in- 
equality, 146.  Aloins  de,  less,  fewer, 
(before  a  noun,)  78,  490,  492.  When 
there  is  a  comparison  between  two 
pentences,  the  verb  which  follows 
plus  or  moms,  requires  the  negative 
ne.  Cet  liomme  a  mo  ins  d'amis  <jit/ il 
ne  pense,  272.  The  less  . . .  the  less, 
moins  .  .  .  moins,  492. 

MOITIIO,  (/a,)  the  half,  499  ;  demi. 

MON,  ma,  mcs,  my,  25,    i 
466. 

MONTER,  to  go  up,  mount,  ascend ; 
takes  avoir  and  tire  as  auxiliaries, 
304,  N.  1. 

MOONLIGHT,  clair  de  lune.  It  is 
moonlight,  il  fait  clair  de  lune,  208. 

MONTH,  (a,)  un  mois  ;  their  names, 
499,  §  143. 

MORE,  plus  ;  more  . . .  than,  (be- 
lore  an  objective, )plus  de  . . .  que  de  ; 
plus  de  (before  a  number) ;  plus  que, 
(before  a  nominative,)  78.  One  more 
book,  encore  un  livre  ;  a  few  books 
more,  encore  quelquei  livres,  73. 
More,  pi  its  ;  the  most,  le  plus,  146. 
More,  davantag-j,  198.  The  more .  . . 


the  less,  plus. . . .  moins,  492.  $  13H 
—2. 

MOUCHOIR,  (le,)  the  handkerchief, 
41. 

MOURIR,  to  die,  (lose  hfe,)  mou- 
rant,  mort.  L'hommeest  mort,  safem* 
merest  pas  morte,  317;  d'une  ma- 
ladie,  of  a  disease,  323. 

MUCH,  many,  a  good  decl  very 
much,  leaucoup  de,  (before  a  noun,) 
Much  of  it,  en  .  .  .  beaucoup ;  not 
much,  ne  . .  .guere  de,  65,  376,  490. 
Much  more,  encore  leaucoup,  lean- 
coup  plus.  So  much,  tant,  78,  210, 
293.  Dir.  7,  459. 

MULTITUDE,  (nouns  of.)  (.See 
NOUNS,  496—10.) 

MUST,  falloir,  (see  it.)  11  being 
its  only  nominative,  see  197,  Obs.  90. 

MY.  (See  MON.)  Myself,  moi- 
meme,471.  Myself,  (reflective,)  me, 
m\  478,  §71;  myself  to  it,  m'y, 
§  72 ;  myself  of  it,  m'en,  §  73. 

N. 

NAIVIE,  nom  ;  proper  names,  noms 
prnjirrs,  496,  497.  Names  of  the 
months,  noms  dci  mois,  499.  What 
is  your  name?  Comment  vous  appe- 
lez-vous  ?  Je  m'cppelle  Charles,  320, 

NATIVE,  (the,)  I'homme  ne  dans  It 
pays,  423. 

NE,  part  of  the  French  negative, 
532,  3;  4,  5,  §  162,  an  important  sec- 
tion. Ne  is  used  without  pas,  with 
the  verbs  cesser,  to  cease ;  oeer,  to 
dare ;  pouvoir,  savoir,  to  be  abb, 
322.  Ne  . . .  guere  de,  ri1 en  . . .  gusrc 
ne  . . .  pas  leaucoup  de,  n'en  . .  pc  • 
leaucoup  ;  ne  .  ,  .  que  pcu  de,  but  li.' 
tie,  only  a  little,  not  much,  &c.,  G"> 
Ne. . .  ni,  neither,  ni,  nor  ;  Je  n'u 
ni  cclui-ci  ni  celui-ld,  32.  Ne . . . 
nulle  part,  nowhere,  not  anywhere, 
89.  Ne . . .  pas,  ne...  point,  not  28- 
Ne. .  .pas  encore,  not  yet,  352.  Nt 
. . .  plus,  no  longer,  no  more,  not  any 
more,  74,  187.  Ne  .  .  .  plus  guor* 
de  •  .  . ,  (ri*en  .  .  .  plus  eitere  )  not 


INDEX.  673 


much,  many,  more,  74.  Ne  . . .  que, 
only,  but,  Je  njai  quun  ami,  je  ri en 
m  qu'un,  65 ;  ne  . . .  que.  nothing  but, 
225.  Ne  . .  .  rien,  nothing,  not  any- 
thing, 28,  requires  de  before  an  ad- 
jective, 29,  065.  7.  When  the  verb 
»»  understood,  use  rien  without  ne, 
..eit  out  with  the  verb,  34.  Ne,  when 
u*ed  without  pas,  in  comparison  of 
inequality,  492,  $138—3;  when  not 
nsed,  $138 — 4;  and  when  implied, 
503,  $  145—1.  It  is  used  when  the 
negation  is  implied,  503,  $  145 — 1 ; 
248,  06*.  114.  (See  NEGATIONS.) 

NEAR,  pres  de  ;  near  me,  pres  de 
moi,  124;  near  six,  pres  de  six,  180  ; 
near  going,  pres  d' alter,  260. 

NEARLY,  pres  de,  180  ;  therea- 
bouts, d  pen  pres,  404. 

NEGATIONS,  negations,  532,  3,  4, 
5,  $162;  its  formation,  1;  place  of 
ne  and  its  complement,  2,  3,  4,  5 ; 
when  nominative,  — 6  ;  with  the  in- 
finitive mood,  — 7;  when  the  verb  is 
omitted,  — 8.  Neither,  non  plus,  — 9. 
List  of  negations  and  examples  for, 
j;  4  ;  5,  6;  7;  8  and  9. 

NEITHER  . . .  nor,  ne  .  . .  ni . .  .  ni 
. .  . ,  32.  Ni  Vun  ni  Vautre  ;  ni  Ics 
uns  ni  les  autrcs,  $162.  I,  neither, 
moi  non  plus,  $  162 — 9. 

NEUF,  nouveau,  nouvcl,  new.  Their 
difference,  191,  N.  1. 

NEUTER  VERBS,  verles  neulres, 
529,  $158;  what  they  are,  and  how 
formed,  — 1 ;  take  etre  and  avoir, 
—2.  Verbs  that  take  etre,  —3. 

NEVER,  ne. .  .jamais,  157,  533. 

NEW,  neuf,  nouveau,  (nouvel,  be- 
fore a  vcwel  or  k  mute,  191,)  N.  1. 

NIER,  to  deny,  takes  ne  before 
disjunctive,  $  516 — 8. 

No,  not  any,  ne...pas  de,  55. 
None,  not  any,  ne  . .  .  aucun,  pas  un. 
No  one,  nobody,  ne .  . .  personne,  422. 
Nobody,  not  anybody,  (nominative,) 
personne  ne  ;  nul  ne,  &c.,  39.  No 
'onger,  ne  . .  .plus,  187,  Na  sooner 
pus  jihituf,  521. 


Noi:  ne  . .  .pas,  ne  .  .  .point,  377, 
378.  IS  ot  any  more,  no  more,  ne . . . 
plus  de.  Not  much  more,  ne .  . . 
plus  guere  de,  74.  Not  quite,  pat 
tout  d  fait,  180.  Not  until,  pas 
avant,  310.  Not  yet,  ne...pas  en- 
core,  152.  Not  so  much  . . .  as,  ne  .  .  . 
pas  tant  de  .  .  .  que  de.  Not  so  ... 

as,   ne...pas   si...  que,  492,    $13^' 
I 

NOMS,  nouns,  names.  Les  noma 
des  mois,  of  the  months,  499.  (See 
NAME.) 

NOMINATIVE,  nomr«jatif;  1st  class, 
with  the  verb  ;  2d,  separate: d  from 
it,  468,  $  38.  Nominative  frequently 
left  out  in  English  ;  not  in  French, 
470.  N.B.,480,  $87—1. 

NOTHING,  ne . . .  rien,  (jobjective,) 
422,  533;  rien  ne,  (nominative,)  535. 
Rien  de  Ion,  29,  Obs.  7.  Nothing 
but,  Tie  ...  que,  ne  . . .  rien  . .  .  que, 
225. 

NOTRE,  plural,  nos,  our,  44,  282. 

NOTRE,  (le,  la,)  les  ndtres.  ours, 
30,  49,  291,  483. 

NOTWITHSTANDING,  malgrd ;  not- 
withstanding that,  malgre  cela,  364  ; 
for  all  that,  although,  ns  laisser  pat 
de  :  11  ne  laisse  pas  de  passer  pour 
ho?mete  homme,  428. 

NOUNS,  noms,  suT)sta?itifs,  493, 
$  140.  Not  used  as  adjectives,  and 
connected  by  some  preposition, 
$  140 — 1  ;  functions  of  de,  c,  &c.,  — 
2,  3,  4 ;  no  plural  to  proper  names, 
except  when  used  as  common,  — 5; 
articles  left  out  in  enumerations,  — 6 ; 
formation  of  compound  nouns,  — 7 ; 
of  the  feminine,  —8,  495 ;  when  a 
noun  is  the  object  of  two  or  three 
verbs,  — 9 ;  nouns  of  multitude,  — 
10;  possessive  case,  — 11.  Proper 
names  from  the  Greek  and  Latin , 
of  kingdoms,  provinces,  &c.,  496, 
497.  Cardinal  and  ordinal  numbers, 
&c.,  with  Notes  and  06*.,  497  to  49'J, 
Names  of  the  seasons,  of  rr. 
499. 


574 


INDEX. 


Nous,  \ve,  us  ;  nous  qui,  we  who  ; 
nous  que,  we  whom,  459,  470  ;  nous- 
mtones,  ourselves;  nous  autres,  we, 
among  us,  471 ;  nous,  us,  to  us,  472 ; 
nous  le,  la,  les\  it,  them  to  us,  475 ; 
nous  en,  some,  any  to  us,  §59; 
nous  y  en,  us  some  there,  $  GO  ;  d 
iwus,  to  us ;  de  nous,  of,  from  us, 
$63,  476;  nous,  (reflective,)  our- 
selves, $  71  ;  nous  y,  (reflective,)  our- 
selves, (it,)  $  72  ;  nous  en,  ourselves 
at  it,  $  73,  478  ;  a  nous,  (possessive,) 
ours,  484,  $  106. 

Now,  maintenant,  d  present,  356  ; 
now  and  then,  de  loin,  en  loin,  396. 

NUMBERS,  nombres,  (cardinal,)  65, 
N.  1,  4CJ7;  when  used,  70,  065.  32; 
321,  Obs.  146,  426  ;  (ordinal,)  70,  06s. 
33.  Adverbs,  prcmierement,  en  pre- 
mi<  ;•  lint,  first,  firstly,  &c.,  363,  426. 

O. 

OBJECTIVE  PRONOUNS,  rt 
471,  $43  to  47.  Objective  pronouns 
before  infinitives  are  turned  into  the 
subjunctive,  472,  $49;  their  places, 
$48  to  65;  one  exception,  $51; 
double  objectives,  it  to  me,  to  thee, 
&c.,  me  le,  la  ;  te  le,  la,  &c.,  always 
before  auxiliaries,  473,  $52;  when 
attended  by  a  preposition,  go  after 
verbs,  475,  §36  ;  N.  I>.  on  their  or- 
der, §  57.  Personal  and  partitive, 
me  some,  thee  any,  &c.,  m'en,  t'en, 
«fec. ;  me  some  there,  m'y  en,  &c., 
$  59  to  61.  Objective  pronoun,  with 
a  proposition,  goes  after  the  verb, 
$63  to  $66,  476;  two  or  more  ob- 
jective cases,  with  a  verb,  go  after, 
$64 — 2.  Reflective,  me,  tc,  se  ; 
nous,  vous  ;  rti^y,  i*y,  s'y,  &c. ;  m'en, 
t'en,  sJen,  &c.,  477,  $71,  72,  73. 

OBJECTIVE  NOUNS,  their  place ; 
the  preposition  never  omitted  before 
them,  and  it  is  repeated  before  every 
Dne,  473,  $5U. 

OBLIGED,  (to  be,)  or  indebted  to 
some  one  for  ...  it  re.  oblige,  (rcJcw 
Wt',)  d  qucl(]u  un  de  ....  33<^ 


(EiL.  (Z',)  the  eye;  les  yeux,  tht 
eyes,  47. 

OF,  de  ;  of,  from  the,  du,  27,  82 
112, 204,  229, 403.  A  book  of  mine  ; 
turn,  one  of  my  books,  un  de,  me* 
livres,  203,  484,  $  107,  108. 

OFFRTR,  to  oiler ;  off  rant,  c/ert 
offrez,  255. 

OFTEN,  souvent  ;  as  often  as,  aueai 
souvent  que  ;  not  so  often  as,  mo\n& 
touvent  <jue  ;  oftener  than,  pl-us  sou* 
vent  que,  337. 

OMBRE,  (une,}  a  shadow ;  d  Z'om- 
bre  de . . . ,  under  the  shade  of,  356,, 

ON,  upon,  sur ;  upon  it,  dessus, 
175.  On  a  small  scale,  en  petit  ; 
large  scale,  en  grand,  404.  Not 
translated.  On,  not  translated  before 
dates,  &c.,  537. 

ON,  one,  the  people,  they;  any 
one,  191 ;  when  used,  224,  Obs.  101 ; 
when  it  takes  V  before  et,  ou,  ou,  «i, 
que,  &c.,  372,  488,  489. 

ONCE,  une  fois  ;  once  a  day,  unt 
fois  par  jour,  210. 

ONE,  (people,)  they  or  any  one, 
1;  one,  un  ;  the  one,  cilui, 
30;  both,  Vun  et  Vautre,  72.  Never 
translate  theoneby  Vun,  except  when 
it  is  connected  with  the  other;  as, 
the  one  and  the  other. 

ONE'S  SELF,  soi-mtme,  471  ;  one's 
self,  (reflective,)  se,  531 ;  to  one's 
self,  d  soi ;  from  one's  self,  dc  soi, 
476. 

ONLY,  but,  ne  . . .  que,  65  ;  seule- 
mcnt,  324  ;  not  only,  non  scnhuunt. 

OPPOSITE   vis-d-vis  de,  387. 

OR,  ou,  c'O;  or  people,  on  Von, 
372. 

ORDINAL,  (numbers,)  tiombres  or 
dinaux,  497  to  499. 

OTHER,  autre  ;  anotner  dollar,  w, 
autre  dollar;  some  other  dollars, 
d* autres  dollars.  No  other,  nc  .  .  . 
pas  d' out  re.  I  have  no  other,  jt 
i'7en  at  pas  d' 'autre,  69.  Other? 
jthcr  people,  autrui,  295. 

OTHERWISE,  else,  autrfmeut.  113 


573 


Ou  <xr,  30 ;  ou  V  on,  or  people 
172. 

Ou,  where,  whither,  whereto,  86, 
184.  D  ou,  whence,  where  from,  -00, 
252. 

OUGHT  and  SHOULD,  (I,)  rendered 
by  the  conditionnel  ut  devoir,  je 
vrais,  &c.,  372,  509. 

OUR,  noire,  nos,  44,  282;  466, 
131,  32. 

OURS,  le,  la  nvtre,  les  notres,  30, 
4J,  291. 

Our,  hors  de  ;  out  of  doors,  de- 
\ort,  301,  307. 

OUTRE,  besides;  outre  cela,  be- 
nides  that;  en  outre,  moreover,  37ti. 

OUVRIK,  to  open,  alterant,  ouvcrt, 
imcrtz,  117",  17.K 

P. 

PAIN  284. 

PAR,    by,   210,    212,    211);    par-ci, 
par-Id,  here  and  there,  396. 
PARAITRE,    to    appear,    to   seem, 

PAKCE  QUE,  because,  80,  187. 

PAKFAIT,  Perio  .e  latter 

word.) 

PARFAIT  orpristnl  compose.  (See 
the  latter.) 

PARLERPra/ifaKSto  I] 
I  47*. 

PARMI,  among. 

PART,  (de  la..  .  de,)  from,  536— 8. 
Faire  part  de,  to  impart,  397. 

PARTICIPIAL  ADJECT! VE,  ailjcctif 
verbal,  529—5. 

PARTICIPLE  past,  parlicipt  passe, 
us  formation,  157,  257;  when  used, 
156,  525  ;  when  connected  with  tire, 
it  agrees  with  the  nominative,  212, 
530;  with  avoir,  it  agrees  with  the 
direct  object,  &c.,  162,  Obs.  75,  212, 
286,  299,  556.  It  does  not  agree 
with  the  pronoans  en  and  dont,  be- 
cause they  are  not  direct  objects,  163, 
Obs.  76  |  229,  Obs.  103,  526.  Serves 
co  form  the  passive  voice,  212.  Some 
difficulties  explained,  527^-5. 


PARTICIPLE,  (present,)  p^rticipc 
]>rcsc}it,  its  iJimation  and  excep- 
tions, 528.  Diilerence  in  its  use  in 
English  and  French,  527 ;  en  alona 
governing  it,  what  follows,  528 — 4; 
when  it  qualities  a  noun,  529 — 5; 
when  translated  by  a  present  parti- 
ciple, — 6  ;  when  by  the  indicative, 
—  7  ;  by  the  infinitive,  — 8,  or  by  ft 
noun,  — 9,  — 10;  after  to  fe, — 11. 
How  the  present  participle  ia  to  bo 
translated,  20'1,  - 

PARTICULAR,  (to  be,)  y  regarderdt 
pres,  399. 

PARTIR,  to  depart,  to  set  oui,  par- 
tant,  parti,  142,  175. 

PARTITIVE,  (article,)  article  parti- 
tif :  1st,  before  a  noun,  465,  $  19  to 
25  ;  2d,  before  an  adjective  or  after  a 
negation,  $26  to  28. 

PARVENIR.  to  succeed,  237. 

PAS,  with  ne  before  the  verb,  not, 
27;  pas  tout,  not  all;  pas  du  tout, 
not  at  all,  115. 

PASSER,  (se  .  . .  de,)  to  do  without 
346. 

PASSIVE  VERBS,  verbes  passifs, 
how  formed,  212;  not  so  much  used 
as  in  English,  530,  $  159 ;  past  par- 
ciple  agrees  with  nominative,  — 2 ; 
on,  as  nominative,  — 3  ;  the  infini- 
tive rendered  by  on,  — 4. 

;o)  for,  payer  ;  to  pay  a  man 
for  a  horse,  payer  mi  clitval  d  un 
homme,  201,  Obs.  293.  To  pay  some 
one  a  visit,  faire  une  msite  (rcndr* 
visitc)  d  quelqu'un,  332. 

PEINE,  (a,)  scarcely,  with  preterit 
anlerieur,  521. 

PENDANT,  during,  for,  186. 

PENKNIFE,  canif,  32. 

PENSER  d,  to  think  of,  476  ;  y  pen- 
ser. 

PENSION,  boarding- house,  achool, 
385. 

PEOPLE,  they,  one,  on,  468,  $38; 
488,  489. 

PERFECT  tense  ot  the  indicative, 
oorfait  or  present  compose,  (see  tliu 


57C> 


INDEX. 


Utter ;)  of  the  subjunctive,  its  forma- 
tion and  use,  418. 

PERFECT,  parfait,  503,  $145 ;  when 
ne  is  to  be  used,  — 1 ;  compound 
form  of  the  perfect,  — 2 ;  I  have 
just,  Je  viens  dc  . .  .  ,  — 3. 

PERMETTRE,  to  permit,  to  allow, 
371. 

PERSONAL  PRONOUNS,  pronoms 
personnels,  4G8,  $  38  :  1st  class,  with 
the  verb,  jc,  lu,  il,  &c. ;  2d  class, 
separated  from  the  verb,  mot,  toi, 
lui,  &c. 

PEF.SONNE  ne,  nobody,  (nomina- 
tive,) 39,  468  ;  ne  . .  .  personne,  (ob- 
jective,) 422.  Personne  as  a  pronoun 
is  masculine  ;  as  a  substantive,  it  is 
feminize  286,  N.I.  Ne ..  .personne 
VT/?,  qur,  nobody  who,  that,  governs 
the  subjunctive,  515 — 5. 

PEU,  little,  147,  400  ;  pen  de,  (be- 
fore  a  noun,)  G7  ;  tin  pen  de,  a  little, 
67;  d  pen  prcs,  thereabout,  nearly, 
4()1. 

Pi:ri;,  fear,  afraid.  Are  you  afraid  ? 
Avez-vous  peur?  31.  De  peur  que . . . 
NC...,  (governs  subjunctive,)  for 
fear,  lest,  537,  $164. 

PLACE,  o  ma,  votre,  sa  plarr,  in 
my,  your,  his  or  her  place,  367;  of 
objective  pronouns,  473  to  477;  of 
adjectives,  493  ;  of  adverbs,  531,  532. 

PLATWRE,  to  pity;  plaignant, 
plaint ;  se  plaindre,  to  complain, 
SM,  '176. 

PLAIRE,  to  please,  to  be  pleased, 
plaisant,plu;  se  plaire,  2-10,  Obs.109. 

PLAISANTER,  (badiner,)to  jest,  381. 

PLAISIR,  (avec,)  with  pleasure,  47, 
48. 

PLAY,  (to,)  joucr,  126 ;  upon  an 
instrument,  d'un  instrument ;  at 
cards,  aux  caftes,  259 ;  a  trick  on 
some  one,  un  tour  a  quelqiCun,  400. 

PLEASE,  (to,)  plaire,  se  plaire; 
K.;?ie  one,  a  quelqii'un.  How  are 
jnou  pleased  here  ?  Comment  vous 
•plaisez-vous  id?  241.  If  you  please, 
»'i7  vous  plait,  325. 


PLEASED  WITH,  content  dt,  317. 

PLEASURE,  to  give  pleasure,  /atfc 
plaisir,  110. 

PLEASURE,  (with,)  avzcplaisir,  4V, 
88. 

PLEUVOIR,  to  rain;  il  plcut,  it 
rains,  227. 

PLUPERFECT  (the)  of  the  indica- 
tive its  formation  and  use,  360, 
520;  Df  the  subjunctive,  its  forma 
tion  and  use,  4'16  to  419:  2d  pluper- 
fect, pretirit  a?itirieur,  (see  it,)  520. 
$155. 

PLUPERFECT  of  the  subjunctive, 
plusque  parfait,  its  formation,  &,c., 
419. 

PLURAL,  its  formation  in  nouna 
and  adjectives,  44,  46,  4Y,  107,  N.  1. 

PLUS,  more,  serves  to  torrn  the 
comparative  of  inequality  of  adjec- 
tives and  adverbs ;  leplus,  the  most, 
forms  the  superlative,  144.  Differ- 
ence between  plus  and  davantagct 
198.  Plus  de,  more,  (before  a  noun,) 
78.  When  there  is  a  comparison 
between  two  sentences,  the  verb 
which  follows  plus  or  moins  requires 
7V//.S  de,  plus  quc,  when 
used,  490. 

PLUT  a  Dicu,  plat  au  del,  would  to 
God,  require  the  subjunctive,  424. 

PLUTOT  que,  rather  ;  plutot  quede, 
rather  than,  321;  pas  plus  idt,  no 
sooner,  521. 

PONT,  bridge,  157. 

PORTE-CRAYOIT,  pencil-case,  37* 
porte-feuille,  pocket-book,  41  ;  their 
plural,  494,  $  140—7. 

PORTER,  to  carry,  to  take  ;  not  to 
be  mistaken  for  metier,  303,  Obs.  143. 

POSSESSIVE  articles  or  pronouns, 
my,  thy,  &c.,  mon,  ton,  &,c.,  44, 
108;  ma,  la,  &c.,  282;  466,  mine, 
thine,  &c.,  le  mien,  le  tien,  &c.  483 
Possessive  case  of  nouns,  30,  32; 
493,  $140—2—11. 

POTENTIAL,  (imperfect,)  condition- 
nel,  507,  $  148,  ends  in  rain,  rais, 
rait,  rious,  riez*  raicnl,  $148-—  Ij 


INDEX. 


577 


how  formed,  —2  ;  after  *i,  if,  use  the 
imperfect  instead  of  the  conditionnel, 
—3.  Potential,  (perfect,)  conditionncl 
compose,  508,  §  149 ;  its  formation, 
— 1  ;  with  it  si,  if,  is  followed  by 
oluperfect,  — 2  ;  how  to  translate 
would,  should,  could,  might,  — 3  ;  I 
wish  I  knew  it,  je  voudrais  le  sa- 
eri>;  I  wish  I  had  known  h,faurais 
&3iilu  le  savoir. 

POTENTIAL.     (.See  IMPERFECT.) 

POUR,  to,  in  order  to,  92,  364. 

POUR  (to)  out,  verser  ;  to  pour  out 
•Oinc  drink  fur,  versi-r  a  boire  a  .    .  , 
. 

PCUKQUOI,  .  v/hy?  81,  184;  for 
uhat,  or  what .  .  .  for?  481. 

PUUKSI-IVKC,  to  purcue,  344. 

PouvoiR,to  be  able,  (can, )pouvant, 
pit,  92,  N.  1,  175;  puitje?  not 
peux-je?  can  1  ? 

HER,  ler,  first,  lot,  70;  pre- 
mifrtuu  t.t,  t?i  premier  lieu,,  363,  $  161 
—7. 

PKEXDRE,  to  take,  prenant,  pris, 
.  1152,  173,  352,  366;  prcndrc, 
to  drink,  132;  soin,  care,  i^56 ;  la 
fuite,  to  make  one's  escape,  to  ru-n 
away,  &c.,  346  ;  s'y  prenire,  to  ma- 
nage, to  go  about  a  thing,  352. 

PREPOSITIONS  govern  the  infinitive 
in  French,  except  en,  which  governs 
the  preseit  participle,  92,  201,  215, 
460,  535.  The  English  preposition 
for,  with  Jie  verbs  to  ask,  demander, 
to  pay,  payer,  is  not  rendered  in 
French,  201,  06s.  93.  At  and  for 
not  translated  when  used  to  express 
the  price  of  a  thing,  276.  Prepositions 
formed  with  a  and  a  noun  take  de 
after  them  ;  almost  all  others  have 
no  preposition,  266.  Use  of  d,  100, 
193,  404,  406,  464  ;  use  of  de,  27, 
403,  404  ;  place  of  the  preposition  in 
the-  sentence  :  always  before  the  word 
it  governs,  (488,  "$J29,)  536;  not 
aa/jsposed  in  French,  482,  §  95  ;  pre- 
positkns  never  omitted  before  objec- 
tive nouns  4M  473,  t)ir.  4  :  d  and 
40' 


de,  connected  with  reflected  verbs, 
variously  translated,  477,  ($  71  to 74;* 
not  transposed  in  English,  when  of 
what  means  of  that  which,  de  ce  qui, 
que,  482,  §97;  to  what,  meaning  te 
that  which,  d  ce  qui,  que,  $  98,  may  be 
separated  by  the  negation  or  objec- 
tive pronoun,  536,  $  163 — 3  as  far  as, 
jusqu'd,  464,536;  at,  in,  to,  chez 
84, 536 ;  from,  de  la  part  de  ;  before, 
avant,  devant,  auparavant,  536  ;  by, 
pres  de,  d  cote  de  ;  by  myself,  seul, 
e,  &c. ;  in,  into,  dans,  en;  at,  in, to, 
a,  en  ;  in,  on,  not  translated  before 
dates,  &c. 

PRES  DE,  near,  260,  46i,  537. 

PRESENT  (the)  tense,  indicative 
its  formation,  500,  $  144 ;  three  Eng- 
lish present  tenses  expressed  by  one 
in  French,  114;  verbs  that  take  a 
cedilla  under  the,  (<•,)  502,  §  144—1 ; 
those  that  take  e  after  #,  — 2 ;  those 
that  change  y  into  t,  when  it  is  fol- 
lowed by  e  mute,  — 3;  e  mute 
changed  to  e  grave,  — 1 ;  excepting 
the  terminations  eler,  eter,  N.B.,  <? 
(acute)  into  «  (grave),  — 5  ;  true  pre- 
sent tense  explained  :  I  am  reading, 
je  suis  d  lire,  — 6.  Do  and  am,  &c., 
used  to  interrogate,  may  be  translated 
by  est-ce  que.  In  some  verbs,  est-c* 
que  must  be  used,  139,  N.  1,  (459, 
Dir.  8.)  PRESENT  COMPOSE  or  Par-' 
fait,  English  perfect,  its  formation, 
*167 ;  its  use,  168 ;  503,  §  145.  When 
ne,  without  pas,  is  used  with  it,  60S, 
504  ;  it  translates  the  compound  form 
of  the  perfect,  viz :  I  have  been 
reading,  fai  lu.  I  have  just  written, 
is  not  rendered  by  the  parfait,  but 
by  je  viens  d'ecrire.  PRESENT  3V 
THE  SUBJUNCTIVE,  (78j,)  408,  5] 3. 
$  151 ;  its  terminations ;  its  formation 
and  exceptions,  $  151 — 1 ;  its  use, 
—2,  513  to  515;  different  ante?* 
dents  that  require  the  subjunctive, 
515  to  517.  In  English,  the  state  of 
existence  or  of  action,  when  in  its 
duration,  is  always  expiesM,tl  by  the 


578 


INDEX 


compound  perfect,  while  the  French 
use  the  present  tense.  He  has  been 
•a  Pans  these  three  years,  il  y  a  trois 
ans  qu'il  esi  a  Paris,  274.  Present 
used  after  si,  in  connexion  with  the 
future,  (233,  Obs.  105,)  505,  $  146—3. 

PRESENTER  d,  to  present  to,  intro- 
duce, 476,  $64. 

PRESENTLY,  tout  a  Vheure,  237. 

PRETEND,  (to,)  faire  semblant  dc, 
356. 

PRETERIT,  (le,}  English  second  im- 
perfect, 358.  (See  IMPERFECT.) 

PRETERIT  ANTERIEUR,  second  plu- 
perfect, its  formation,  520,  $  155  ;  its 
use ;  conjunctions  after  which  it  is 
used;  practical  rules,  362,  521. 

PRIER^C,  to  desire,  beg,  pray,  re- 
quest, 304. 

PROMENER,  (?e.)  to  take  an  airing, 
a  walk  for  plcasuiv  ;  allcr  se  prome- 
ner,  to  go  walking  ;  en  carrosse,  to  go 
in  a  carriage ;  d  chcval,  to  ride  on 
horseback,  to  take  a  ride,  2 

PROMETTRE  de,  to  promise,  171). 

PRONOUNS,  (possessive  or  articles,} 
my,  thy,  &c.,  466,  $31;  rule  for 
their  use,  $  32 ;  demonstrative,  $33  ; 
al  ;vays  prefixed  to  a  noun  and  repeat- 
ed, $  34  ;  true  demonstrative,  $  36, 
37.  PERSONAL,  468,  $  38  to  40 ;  no- 
fc  minatives,  separated  from  the  verb,  I 
who,  mot  qui,  thou  who,  toi  qui,  &c. 
Objectives  the  same,  followed  by 
que,  470,  $40,  41.  COMPOUND  PER- 
SONAL, myself,  moi-meme,  &c.,  471, 
$41£.  OBJECTIVE  PRONOUNS,  $  42  to 
50;  their  place,  $51  to  56,  Dir.  4. 
Double  objective  pronouns,  $57  to 
63 ;  examples  at  p.  94,  &c. ;  with  a 
preposition,  d  moi,  ds  toi,  &c.,  $63 
to  66.  REFLECTIVE,  1st  class,  477, 
$67,71;  2d  class,  $68,  72;  3d  class, 
ft  69,  73,  74.  RELATIVE,  qui,  who, 
nominative,  never  omitted  either  in 
French  or  English,  478,  $75,  76. 
Objective  quey  whom,  that,  which, 
***  to  80 ;  personal,  connected  with 
relatives,  4S3,  $  102.  POSSESSIVE, 


whose,  d  qui?  $103,  mine,  thine. 
&.C.,  le  mien,  le  tien,  &c.,  used  witD 
every  verb,  even  etre,  when  ce  is  no- 
minative, 484,  $  104,  105  ;  but  when 
il,  elle,  Us,  elles,  are  nominatives,  use 
the  following :  d  moi,  a  toi,  &c.,  a 
ces  Messieurs.  A  book  of  mine, 
turn  to,  one  of  my  books,  $  107.  IN- 

TERROGATIVE,     who  ?     qui  /     whom  ? 

qui?  485,  $111.  Qui  never  losee 
its  i.  What  ?  quel,  quelle,  &c.,  que, 
qu'est-ce  que ;  after  the  verb,  by 
quoi?  $112,115.  What?  nomina- 
tive,  qu'cst-ce  qui?  486,  $116;  go- 
verned by  a  preposition,  quoi?  d 
quoi,  $  117.  What  is  in  ?  &c.  Qu'y 
a-t-il  dans  . .  ,$  118 ;  see  to  $  130.  IN- 
DEFINITE, on,  one,  people,  &c.  488, 
489;  examples  at  87,  94,  281,  107, 
328,  38,  44,  108,  281,  30,  48,  276,  44, 
283,  41,  43,  100,  283,  229,  39. 

PROPER  NAMES,  ?wmspropres,494l 
496,  497. 

PROPERLY,  comme  ilfaut,  204. 

PROPOSER  (se)  de,  to  propose,  in- 
tend ;  je  me  propose  de  faire  ce  voy- 
age, I  propose  going  on  that  journey, 
341. 

PROVERBIAL  forms  of  expression, 
(at  the  end  of  INDEX.) 

PULL,  (to,)  tirer,  2-14  ;  to  pull  out, 
arracher,  s'arracher  ;  he  pulls  out  hia 
hair,  il  s'arrache  les  cheveux,  219. 

PURCHASE  (to)  anything,  faire  em- 
plctte  de  quclque  chose,  faire  des  em- 
pit-ties,  256. 

PUT,  (to,)  to  put  on,  mcttre,  168  ;  to 
put  off,  postpone,  rcmettre  d,  394  ;  to 
inconvenience  one's  self,  sc  gtner, 
395. 

Q. 

QUAND,   lorsque,   when,   88,  242 
with    the    preterit    a?itericur,    523 
Quand  meme,  though,  followed  by 
conditionnel,  425,  517. 

QUANT  d,  as  to,  as  for;  quciit  o 
noi,  as  to  me,  322. 

QUATRE-VINGTS,    Cl^hty,    [OSCS    Kf 


INDEX. 


579 


0  when  followed  by  another  numeral, 
184. 

QUE,  that,  which,  (relative  pro- 
noun,)  43 ;  que  de,  than,  (before  a 
noun,)  78 ;  que,  qui,  take  a  euphonic 

1  before  o?i,  372;  que,  used  to  avoid 
the  repetition  of  a  conjunction,  go- 
verns the  same  mood  as  that  conjunc- 
tion;  when   the   conjunction   is  si, 
vkc.,   que  governs  the  subjunctive, 
51C.     Qu'est-ce  que  c*  est  que  cela? 
tvlia;  is  that  ?  Je  ne  sais  pas  ce  que 
•'est   que  cela,  319.     Qu'est~ce    que 
cela  peut-vtret   what   can  that   be? 
395.  Que!  exclamation!  what!  how! 
335,  487. 

QU'EST-CE  QUE  C'EST  ?  what  is  it  ? 
1:39,  171. 

QUEL?  what,  which?  (interroga- 
tive,) 25;  quehj  44;  quelle,  &c., 
286,  485,  487. 

QUEL  que,  quelle  que,  whatever, 
in  two  words,  govern  the  subjunc- 
tive, 422,  516,  3d  way.  Quelque,  1st 
way,  however  ;  2d  way,  whatever, 
govern  subjunctives,  422,  516. 

QUELQUE,  s,  some,  any,  a  few,  68. 

QUELQUE  CHOSE,  some,  anything ; 
de  Ion,  good,  88,  462,  (takes  de  be- 
fore an  adjective.)  Que^ue  chose  que, 
what3ver,  governs  the  subjunctive, 
423,  516—13. 

QUELQUE  TAUT,  some,  anywhere, 
89,  Obs. 

QUELQU'"X,  sorv.e,  anybody,  39. 

QUELQUES  UNS,  (en...,)  a  few, 
some,  68. 

QUESTION,  (to  be  the,)  to  turn 
•ipon,  s'agir  de  :  the  question  is,  il 
t'agit  de,  391.  Qu'cn  resulte-t-il? 
wruat  of  it  ?  483. 

Qui,  who  ?  100,  470,  230.  A  qui, 
whose?  147,  483;  to  whom?  230, 
f .  B.  The  i  is  never  cut  off. 

Qui  QUE  CE  SOIT,  whoever,  governs 
•he  subjunctive,  422,  516 — 13. 

QUICK,  fast,  vite,  264. 

QUITE   (just)  as  much,  as  many, 


tout  autant,  74,  76;  Lanl  de.,.qttc. 
so  much  ...  as,  78. 

Quoi,  (after  the  verb  or  a  preposi* 
tion,)  que,  (before,)  what  ?  100.  Quoi; 
admirative,  what !  487.  Quoi  encore  I 
what  else,  more?  113. 

QUOIQUE,  whatever,  422 ;  though, 
417,  governs  the  subjunctive. 

R. 

RAIN,  (to,)  pleuvc  r,  227.  Dooc  il 
rain?  pleut-il?  fail-il  de  la  pluie? 
301.  11  pleut  d  verse,  it  rains  very 
hard,  it  pours,  227. 

RAPPELER,  (se,)  to  recollect.  Vous 
rappelez-vous  cela  ?  do  you  recollect 
that  ?  I  do,  je  me  le  rappelle,  261. 

RATHER  THAN,  plutut  que  de,  321. 

READ,  (to,)  lire,  lu,  172.  (See 
LIRE.) 

RECOLLECT,  (to,)  se  rappeler,  si 
souvenir,  se  ressouvenir,  262. 

RECONNAITKE,  to  recognise,  to 
acknowledge,  272. 

REDUIRE.  to  reduce,  rcduisant,  re- 
duit,  344. 

REJOUIR  (se)  dc  quclque  chose,  to 
rejoice  at  something,  223. 

RELY,  (lo,)  sefterd;  you  may  rely 
upon  him,  vous  pouvez  vous  fier  d  lui. 
&c.,  348. 

REMAIN,  (to,)  restcr,  182,  N.I, 
demeurer,  187,  N.  1. 

REMETTRE  d,  to  poutp.vie,  put  off, 
394. 

RENDRE,  to  return,  give  back,  re 
store,  80,  199 ;  rendre  visile,  to  pay 
a  visit,  332. 

RESTER.  to  remain,  stay,  110, 
takes  avoir  and  utre  as  auxiliary,  182, 
N.  1.  Hester,  to  have  left,  300. 

RESTORE,  rendre.     (See  it.) 

RETENIR,  to  hold  back,  retain,  re- 
tenant,  relent  retcnez,  260. 

RETURN,  to  give  back,  restore; 
rendre,  80,  199.  Retourner,  to  go 
back,  428 ;  revcnir,  to  come  backJS/X 

REUSSIR  d,  to  succeed,  34?,. 


580 


INDEX. 


REVENIK,  to  come  liack,  to  return, 
185. 

RIDE  (to)  on  horseback,  aller  (mon- 
ler)  a  cheval,  214.  To  take  a  ride, 
ee  promc?ier  d  cheval,  222. 

RIEN,  (ne...,)  qui,  que,  nothing 
that,  governs  the  subjunctive,  423. 

RJSIIT,  (to  be,)  avoir  raison,  36. 
To  the  right,  on  the  right  side  or 
'land,  d  droite,  sur  la  droite,  378.  It 
j'e  right;  c'est  lien,  319. 

RIRE,  to  laugh,  riant,  ri,  ricz.  Se 
rire  (moquer)  de  quelqu'un,  to  laugh, 
to  deride  one ;  rire  au  ncz  de  quel- 
»7w'?m,  to  laugh  in  a  person's  face, 
32-r>. 

ROOM,  (the,)  lachambre;  the  front 
room,  la  chambrededevant,  surle  de- 
vunt  ;  the  back  room,  de  derricre, 
sur  le  derriere  ;  the  upper  room,  du 
haut,  (Ven  haul,  284. 

RULES:  1.  All  prepositions  govern 
the  infinitive,  N.I,  on  Aprcs ,  after, 
460. 

R.  2.  Of  two  verbs,  the  second  is 
in  the  infinitive,  &c.,  461. 

R.  3.    Do  you  speak  before  you 
ii.Mcn  ?  Parlez-vous  avant  d'c 
The  French  dispense  with  the  second 
nominative,  when  it  is  the  same  ns 
the  first,  461. 

the  nominatives  are 
ths  English  construc- 


Jn  two  or  more  nouns, 
ia  noun  or  a  verb,  they 
_  i  it  without  any  preposi- 

t.jn  or  with  the  same,  461. 

K.  6.  Every  French  preposition 
precedes  the  word  it  governs,  is  never 
separated  from  it,  and  is  repeated  be- 
inre  f.vcry  word  461. 

S. 

Si,  *onf  ges,  his,  her,  2S2,  466, 
*32. 

SAIL,  (a,)  une  voile.  To  set  sail, 
mciire  c  la  voile,  350,  N.I  To  se! 


sail  for,/aire  voile  pour  ;   umlu  fulr 
sail,  marcher  dpleines  voiles,  3c>0. 

SALT,  (to,)  sa/er,  92. 

SALIK,  to  soil,  dir*y,  220. 

SALUTATIONS,  (daily,)  salutationi 
journalieres.  At  pp.  26,  29,  32,  33t 
35,  37,  39,  40,  42,  44,  48,  50,  52, 
54,  56,  58,  63,  (N.  B.  On  composing 
an  exercise  on  daily  salutations,  70, 
71,  73,)  104,  107,  112,  114,  119,  121, 
123,  130,  134,  136,  139,  142. 

SAME  ;  the   same  thing,  la  menu 
chose;     the     same    man,    le    mime 
homme ;  '  it   is   all  one,  (the   same, 
c'est  egul,  c'cst  la  mime  clw? 
307. 

SANS,  without,  215 ;  sans  doutc, 
without  doubt,  to  be  sure,  108. 

SAKTE,  (la,)  the  health,  31 

SAVOIR,  to  know  ;  sachant, 

•v.es   no  preposition   after  it, 
135,  17.-). 

SATISFIED  (to  be)  with  some  one  or 
something,  itre  content  de  yuclqu' un 
ou  de  quelque  chose,  210. 

SCARCELY,  dpiinc,  521. 

SEASONS,  (the,)  Ics  snison*,  -1 '.»!». 

SECOND,  second,  e,  70.  Secondly 
2J,  secondement,  363,  532—7 . 

SEE,  (to,)  voir,  voi/mit,  rw,  172. 

SI:EM,  (to,)  para  it  re,  semLltr. 

SELF,  selves,  meme,  mime* ;  my 
sell,  moi-meme ;  themselves,  eux- 
mimes,  eUes-mimes  ;  one's  self,  tsoi- 
mtme,  154,  471. 

SELON,  according  to ;  selon  In 
circonstanccs  ;  c'est  felon,  it  depends, 

sr. 

SENTIR,  to  feel ;  sentant,  scnti. 
278  ;  to  smell,  353. 

SERVIR,  to  serve,  wait  upon,  ser- 
vant, servi,  254 ;  se  servir  de,  to 
make  use  of,  to  use,  266 ;  servir  la 
soupe,  le  dessert,  to  serve  up  the 
soup,  the  dessert,  348.  To  be  of 
use.  d  quoi  cela  vous  sert-il  ?  of  what 
use  is  that  to  you  ?  Servir  de,  tc 
star.d  instead,  to  be  as ;  moiifusilm* 


INDEX. 


581 


»ert  de  baton,  I  use  my  gun  as  a 
stick ;  servir  de,  to  avail ;  a  quoi 
vous  sert-il  de  pleurer?  what  avails 
you  to  cry  ?  cela  ne  me  sort  d  rien,  it 
avails  me  nothing,  386.  On  a  servi, 
the  meal  is  on  the  table,  (is  served 
up;)  vous  servi rai-je  de  la  soupe? 
shall  I  help  you  to  some  &oup  ?  do 
you  choose  any  soup  ? 

SET  (to)  out,  to  depart,  leave,  par- 
tir,  142,  175. 

SEUL,  e,  alone,  by  one's  self,  137, 
159,  3G7;  seulement,  noh  seulement, 
not  only,  324. 

SHAWL,  (a,)  vn  chdle,  34. 
SHORTLY,  (soon,)  bicntdt ,  !• 
SHOULD  or  Ought.     (See  OUGHT.) 
SHOW,  faire   voir,    montrer,    134. 
To  show  a  disposition  to,  faire  mine 
dc,  331 ;  the  show,  (splendor,  bright- 
ness,) V eclat  ;  to  make  a  great  show, 
fuirc  del' eclat,  432. 

Si,  if;  the  t  is  cutoffbcfore  il,  iJs, 
but  nowhere  else  ;  after  ti,  the  pro- 
noun on  takes  Z',  372.  Si  usually 
attends  the  conditionnel,  and  is  fol- 
lowed by  the  imparfait,  310,  507. 
Que,  used  to  avoid  the  repetition  of 
ri,  governs  the  subjunctive,  51G — 10. 
.S'/\  meaning  granting,  connects  the 
future  with  the  present,  233,  Obs.  105. 
Si,  so  ;  si  lien,  so  well,  165. 
SIEN,  (le,)  la  sicnnc,  &c.,  his  or 
hers,  39,  49,  291,  483 ;  d  lui,  d  elle, 
484. 

SIDE,  cote ,  by  the  side  of,  a  cote 
de,  266  ;  this  side,  de  ce  cote-ci  ;  on 
that  side,  de  ce  wle-ld,  193. 

SILENT,  (to  be,)  to  stop  spetiking, 
setaire,  392. 

SINCE  or  FROM,  depuis  ;  from  that 
time,  depuis  ce  moment  ;  my  child- 
hood, majeunesse;  from  here  there, 
depuis  id  jusque  Id.  Since,  (consi- 
dering,) puisque,  342. 

SIT  (to)  down,  sjasseoir,  262;  to 
be  seated,  eire  ass  is,  assise,  302. 
SLEEP,  (to,)  dormir,  121 ;  215.  Are 


you  sleepy  ?  avcz-vous  sommeil  ?  2U 
To  feel  sleepy,  avoir  cnvie  de  dor 
jnir,  220. 

SLOW,  slowly,  lentemcnt,  2$4. 

SNOW,  (to,)  neiger,  227;  it  snowo 
ilfait  de  la  neige,  301. 

So,  (it,)  le,  171,  Obs.  77;  so,  thus.. 
ai?isi;  so,  so,  comme  cela;  so  that. 
de  sorte  quc,  230 ;  so  much,  tant  de  ; 
so  much  as,  tant  que,  77,  210,  260. 

SOIR,  soiree,  evening,  their  difld* 
ence,  289,  N.  2. 

SOME  or  ANY,  (before  a  noun,)  dut 
de  la,  des  ;  'before  an  adjective  or 
after  a  negation,;  de,  55, 284.  Some  of 
it,  of  them,  en,  before  the  verb,  59 ; 
some  or  any  more,  encore,  used  affir- 
matively; encore  du  vin,  encore  dcs 
boutons,  75.  N.  B.  (Encore  is  placed 
immediately  after  the  verb.)  Some- 
thing, quelque  chose  ;  anything  good, 
quelque  chose  de  bon,  29,  191 ;  some- 
times, quelque  fois,  153  ;  some,  any- 
where, quelque  part  ;  nowhere,  not 
anywhere,  ne  . . .  nullepart,  89. 

So  much,  many,  tant,  77,  210,  260, 

SON,  sa,  ses,  his  or  hers,  38,  44, 
282,  466,  $  32. 

SOON,  very  soon,  bientot,  108,  185. 
Aussitdt  que,  as  soon  as,  aussitdt  que, 
215.  No  sooner,  pas  plus  tot,  with 
prttirit  anterieur,  521. 

SORE,  vial ;  a  sore  ^^^^H  an 
pied,  110. 

SORTIR,    tO    gO   OUt, 

110,  121,  150»  175. 

SOUDAINEMENT,  suddenly, H 
sudden,  290. 

SOUFFRIR,  to  suffer,  souffrant, 
sou/ert,  334. 

Sous,  under ;  dcssous,  under  it 
177. 

SOUVENIR  (se)  de,  se  ressouveuif 
de,  to  remember,  to  recollect,  262. 

SOUVENT,  often ;  awsi  swtvtJd 
que,  as  often  as ;  plus  sowssiit  qve, 
oftener  than ;  moins  souvent  quc,  not 
so  often  as,  137. 


682 


r  N  D  a  x 


SPEAK  (to)  French.  (See  FARLER.) 

SPEECH,  (a,)  un  discours.  To  make 
a  speech,  faire  un  discours,  295. 

SPEND  (to)  time  at  something,  pas- 
ser le  temps  a  quelque  c7i0se,  250. 

SPITE,  (in  ...  of,)  en  depit  de,  346. 

STEEL,  acier,  55. 

STEP,  (a,)  unpas.  To  walk  a  step, 
faire  unpas;  to  take  a  step,  (mea- 
iiires,)  faire  une  demarche,  295. 

STORE,  store-house,  magasin,  63. 

STRIKE,  (to,) / rapper,  323.  To  be 
struck  with  a  thought,  venir  en 
pensce,d  Videc,  dl1  esprit.  A  thought 
strikes  me,  il  me  vient  une  pensce, 
366. 

SUBJECT.    (See  NOMINATIVE.) 

SUBJUNCTIVE,  subjonctif.  (See 
PRESENT,  IMPERFECT,  &c.,  408.) 
Present ;  how  it  ends,  513,  $  151 — 1 ; 
how  it  is  formed,  — 2 ;  eight  excep- 
tions, its  use, — 2;  important  ob- 
xervationon  it.  When  the  antecedent 
is  a  superlative, — 3;  when  imper- 
sonal, — 4 ;  interrogative,  negative, 
or  conditional,  — 5 ;  it  expresses/ear, 
&c.,  takes  ne,  — 6,  — 7 ;  doutcr,  nier, 
take  ne,  — 8  ;  what,  que,  governs, 
— 9, — 10;  whatever,  however,  — 11, 
quelque  que,  &c. ;  its  connexion  with 
indicative, — 12;  whatever,  whatso- 
ever, — 12  ;  quelque  chose  que,  quoi 
que,-quoique  ce  soil;  whomsoever, 
qui  que  ce  soil  ;  when  it  must  follow 
qui,  que,  dont,  &c., — 14;  when  it 
must  begin  the  sentence,  — 15.  Im- 
perfect, 517;  its  formation.  Per- 
fect, (p.  418,)  parfait.  Pluperfect, 
(p.  419,)  plusque  parfait. 

SUBSTANTIVES,  substan'.ifs,  noms, 
formation  of  plural,  44.  Exceptions, 
46,  N.  1,  2,  3,  281.  Feminine,  281. 
Genders,  194  ;  402,  06s.  163 ;  187, 
Obs.  85;  297,  06s.  140;  314;  239, 
N.  1 ;  284  ;  356.  Compound  siib- 
Btantives,  47,  N.  1,  or  4S4— 7;  183, 
Oli.  82;  440,  06s.  171.  De  is  put 
between  the  name  of  the  thing  and 
that  of  the  substance  of  which  it  is 


made,  27,  403,  493;  d,  when  the  lat- 
ter expresses  the  use  of  the  former 
404,  494 ;  a  la,  au,  aux,  to  determine 
it  more  precisely,  406,  494.  Sub- 
stantives having  a  distinct  form  foi 
the  feminine,  495;  used  for  both 
sexes,  298. 

SUCCEED,  (to,)  parteuir  a.  Have 
you  succeeded  in  learning  it*?  cles* 
vous  parvenu  a  ^Vapprendre  ?  237. 
reussir  a  ;  avc~-vous  reussi  a  Z'op- 
prc?iuie?  237,  3-12. 

SUCH,  un  tcl,  une  idle,  pareilt 
pareille,  307,  490—9,  —10 ;  un  si  bon 
livre. 

SUFFER,  (to,)  souffrir,  334 ;  to  suffer 
one's  self  to  be  beaten,  se  laisger 
battre  ;  to  let  one's  self  fall,  selaisser 
tomber  ;  to  suffer  one's  self  to  be  m 
suited,  se  laisser  insulter,  432. 

SUFFIRE  a,  to  suffice,  be  suffi 
cient,  sHjfisant,  sujjl.,  349. 

SUIT,  (to,)  convenir  a,  237. 

SUITE,  (tout  de,)  immediately,  237. 

SUIVRE,  to  follow;  suivant,  suivi, 
334.  Suivre  un  conaeil,  to  follow 
advice,  384. 

SUN,  (the,)  le  soleil.  We  have  iuu 
much  sun,  il  fait  trop  de  soleil,  208. 

SUPERLATIVE,  superlatif,  a  nev« 
explanation  on  its  formation,  144  5 
followed  by  que  or  qui,  requires  the 
subjunctive,  515 — 3. 

SUR,  on,  upon,  175  ;  dcssus,  upon 
it,  177. 

SURFAIRE,  to  overcharge,  ask  too 
much,  344. 

SURPRENDRE,  to  surprise,  374. 

SURPRISE,  (to,)  etonncr.  To  bo 
surprised  at,  s'etonner  de,  374. 

SWEET,  doux,  douce,  491. 

SWEETEN,  (to,)  sucrer,  adoucir,  92, 

T. 

TA,  ton,  tcs,  thy,  282,  108,  466. 

TAIRE,  '«e,)  to  hold  one's  tongue 
be  silent,  taisant  ;  tu  ;  taisez-WM\ 
be  silent,  392. 

TAKE  (to)  place,  avoir  lieu,  165 


INI   EX. 


caro  of  something,  prcndre  (avoir) 
soix  de  quelque  chose,  256  ;  of  some 
one,  to  beware  of  one,  prcndre  garde 
d  quelqu'un,  366  ;  an  airing  in  a  car- 
riage, se  prom??ier  en  carrosse,  222. 

TANT,  so  much;  par  an,  a  year; 
partete,  a  head,  210,  293 ;  tant  que, 
BO  long  as,  401 ;  tant  soi  pcu,  just  a 
little,  ever  so  little,  427 ;  tant  lien 
g«c  mal,  indifferently,  396 ;  tant  que 
cx?H«  voudrez,  so,  as  long  as  you 
plraoe,  401,  492. 

TAXDEK,  to  delay.  (See  the  latter.) 

TASTE,  (to,)  gouter,  129,  208;  the 
taste,  le  gout ;  each  man  has  his 
i.aste,  chaque  homme  a  son  gout ,  217. 

TE,  thee,  to  thee,  te  le,  les,  108, 
47-.  TJe7i,  thee  some;  tj y  en,  thee 
some  there.  Te,  t'en,  t'y,  (reflective,) 
478,  $71,  72,  73. 

TEACH,  (to,)  enseigner ;  to  teach 
some  one  something,  cnseigner  quel- 
quc  chose  d  quelqu'un;  some  one  to 
do  something,  apprcndre  a  quclqu'un 
tifairc  quclque  chose,  266. 

TT.AK,  (;i,)  une  larmc ;  to  shed 
tears,  verser  des  larmes  ;  with  tears 
in  his,  her,  our,  &c.,  eyes,  les  larmes 
•-r.r,  323. 

TE  INDIE,  to  dye,  color;  teignant, 
tjcint;  en  zoir,  en  rouge,  to  dye  black, 
red,  195. 

TEL,  tclle,  tcls,  tellcs,  such  ;  un  tcl 
komme,  une  tellefenime,  such  a  man, 
woman  ;  de  tels  hommes,  de  telles 
femmes,  such  men,  women,  307. 
Tel  is  not  used  with  another  adjec- 
tive. Such  a  kind  friend,  un  si  ban 
ami,  490—9,  —10. 

TELL,  (to,)  to  say,  dire  ;  told,  dit, 
168. 

TENTH,  to  hold  ;  tenant,  tenu  ;  te- 
nez.  Tenez,  the  imperative,  is  used 
aa  an  exclamation,  203,  06s.  94.  Se 
lenir  pret,  to  keep  one's  self  ready, 
274,  Tenir pension,  keep  a  boarding- 
house,  school,  385.  Licude,  to  take 
the  place  of,  be  instead  of,  404.  (See 


KEEP.)    S'cn  tenir  a,  to  abide  by, 
477. 

TENSES,  (the,)  les  temps.  Present, 
114,  500  to  503,  including  true  pre- 
sent, je  suis  d  lire,  502.  Perfect, 
167,  503,  504.  First  future,  231, 
504  to  506  ;  second  future,  299.  .Im- 
perfect, ?Q5,  506.  Imperfect  of  tho 
potential,  condilionnel,  310,  507, 
508.  Perfect  of  the  potential,  311, 
508,  509.  Imperative,  369,  509  to 
513.  Subjunctive  present,  408, 513 ; 
subjunctive  imperfect,  416,  517.  Per- 
fect, 418.  Pluperfect,  419.  Prete- 
rit or  second  imperfect  of  the  indica- 
tive, 368,  517  to  520.  Pluperfect  ot 
indicative  is  formed  like  the  English 
tense,  by  the  imperfect  of  the  auxi- 
liary and  past  participle  of  the  verb 
to  be  conjugated,  520.  Examples 
after  the  59th  lesson,  p.  305.  Second 
pluperfect,  preterit  anter'n  r,  362, 
520,  521.  Infinitive,  four  jrmina- 
tions  of  it,  80;  explanations,  521  to 
525.  Past  participle,  156,  525  to 
527.  Present  participle,  114,  448, 
500. 

TUAN,  que  de,  (before  nouns,)  78. 
Than,  before  a  number,  is  rendered 
by  de,  and  not  by  que ;  more  than 
nine,  plus  dc  ncuf,  246. 

THAT  or  Which,  que,  (relative,) 
43,  478.  That,  (meaning  that  thing,) 
ccla,  168,  467,  469,  N.  4.  That,  (the 
one,)  cdui,  plural,  ceux,  celle,  celles, 
30,  48,  286,  467.  That  which,  the 
one  which,  those  which,  celui  que, 
ceux  que,  &c.,  43,  48,  286,  467,  468. 
That  which,  (the  thing  which,)  ct 
que,  (objective,)  ce  qui,  (nomine 
tive,)  124,  481.  That  book  of  mine, 
485.  . 

THE,  le,  la,  les,  25,  44,  281 ;  iti 
connexion  with  prepositions,  463. 

THEIR,  leur,  leurs,  44,  282;  when 
it  must  be  translated  by  en . . .  les, 
4r,6,  N.  2. 
TIIEIKS,  le  (fa)  leur,  leg  leurs,  49 


584 


INDEX  . 


891,  483  ;  after  il,  die,  &c.,  a  eux,  a 
elles  484. 

THEM,  to  them,  leur.     (Sec  it.) 

THEMSELVES,  eux-mtmes,  elles- 
mvmes,  471 ;  (reflective,)  se,  s'y,  s'en, 
477,  478. 

THEN,  alors  ;  until  then  jusqu'* 
Qfors,  189. 

THERE,  to  it,  at  it,  in  it,  87,  101. 
To  go,  to  be,  there,  y  aller,  y  itre, 
87.  There,  Id,  y,  110.  There  is,  il 
y  a,  180,  238,  246,  7,  8,^338.  There 
\&,  (behold,)  voild ;  there  it  is,  le 
voild,  la  voild ;  they  arc,  les  voild, 
(here  is,  void,)  310,  312. 

THINE,  letie?i,  latienne,  &c.,  108, 
•291,483;  after  il,  die,  &c.,  d  toi, 
484. 

THINK  (to)  of,  pcnser  d,  470. 

THIRD,  troisieme,  70;  tiers,  499. 
Thirdly,  troisiemcment,  363 — 7. 

THIS,  THAT,  these,  those,  ce,  cet, 
cette,  ccs.  This  one,  that  one,  these, 
those,  celui-ci,  cdui-ld,  &c.,  30,  41, 
44,  50,  286. 

THOU,  tu,  107. 

THOUGH,  quoique,  (see  it,)  417. 

THOUSAND,  (a,)  mille,  does  not 
take  u?i,  462. 

THROW,  (to,)  jcter,  173,  502,  N.  B. 

THUNDER,  le  tonnerrc.  It  thun- 
ders very  much,  il  fait  leaucoup  de 
tonnerre,  215. 

THUS,  So,ai?isi,  179. 

THY,  ton,  ta,  tes,  108,  282,  466. 

THYSELF,  toi-meme,  471 ;  (reflec- 
tive,) te,  t'y,  4,'en,  477,  478. 

TIEN,  (le,)  la  tienne,  les  tiens,  les 
liennes,  thine,  108,  291,  483;  d  toi, 
484. 

TILL,  until,  jusque ;  till  noon, 
iusqu'a  midi,  189;  not  until,  pas 
avant  de,  310. 

TIRED,  (to  be,)  ct re  las,  lasse,  429  ; 
to  get  tired,  s'c?inuyer,  376. 

TIRER,  to  pull,  draw,  shoot,  fire, 
844. 

To,  a,  101,  102;  to  the,  au,  a  la, 
&c.,  463  ;  in  order  to,  pour,  92. 


1 01,  thou  ;  ioi  quit  yue,  4C8,  470 
d  td,  to  thec,  476  ;  d  loi,  thine,  484 

TON,  *«,  fes,  thy,  108,  282,  466. 

Too,  trop,  150;  too  much,  many 
trap,  66,  67;  too  late,  trop  tard  ; 
soon,  early,  Jrop  *5£;  large,  great, 
trop  grand;  little,  trop  peu ;  too 
small,  trop  petit,  150. 

Tccii  A  TO'JR,  alternate^  by 
turns,  404. 

TOUT,  tons,  all.  Tout  Le  vin ; 
tons  les  livres,  110.  Toitt  autant, 
quite  (just)  as  much,  76.  Tout  dt 
suite,  immediately,  108 ;  pas  du  tout. 
not  at  all,  115.  Tout  d  coup,  all  at 
once,  290. 

TOWARDS,  envers,  vers,  270,  393. 

TRAVEL,  (to,)  voyager,  194,  213; 
through  Europe,  faire  le  tour  Jd 
V Europe,  400. 

TREAT,  (to  )  use  somebody  well, 
(ill,)  en  user  lien,  (mal,)  avec  quel- 
qu'un,  394. 

TRICK,  (to  play  a,)  jouer  un  tour, 
400. 

TROMPER,  to  deceive,  cheat;  se 
tromper,  to  make  a  mistake,  219. 

TROP,  too,  too  much,  many,  65, 
150. 

TRUST  (to)  one,  sejicr  d  quclqu'un; 
to  distrust  one,  se  defer  de  quel- 
qu'un,  325. 

TRUTH,  (the,)  la  veritv  ;  in  truth, 
indeed,  en  verite  !  47,  105. 

Tu,  thou,  107,  N.  1. 

TURN,  (to,)  a  soldier,  se  faire  sol- 
datj  225 ;  to  account,  (make  the  best 
of,)  faire  valoirt  427 ;  one  into  ridi- 
cule, tourner  quelqu'un  en  ridicule, 
388.  Turn,  (the,)  le  tour.  To  take 
a  turn,  (a  walk,)  faire  un  tour,  242, 
400. 

T'Y,  thee  to  it  there,  475  ;  t'y  en, 
thee  some  there,  476  ;  t'y,  (rcflec* 
tive,)  thyself,  478. 

U. 

UN,  une,  a,  fn,  one,  63,  68,  70^ 
285,  129  ;  not  used  before  cent,  &c« 


INDEX. 


585 


462.  Pas  un  qui,  que,  not  one  that, 
governs  the  subjunctive,  515 — 5. 
L'un  I'autre,  Vvae  Vaulre,  each 
other;  etes  vous  contents  Vun  de 
I'autre?  are  you  pleased  with  each 
other  ?  Nous  le  sommes,  we  are,  331. 
The  one,  (when  not  in  apposition  to 
the  other,)  not  Vun,  but  celui,  43. 

UNDER,  sous;  under  it,  dessous, 
177. 

UNDERSTAND,  (to,)  comprendrc, 
compris,  182;  to  make  one's  self 
understood,  sefaire  comprendrc,  370. 

UNIPERSONAL  VERBS  govern  the 
subjunctive,  515 — 4. 

UNLESS,  a  mains  que . . .  ne  . . . , 
govern  the  subjunctive,  537. 

UNTIL,  jusqiCd  ce  que,  governs  the 
subjunctive,  537;  jusqu'alors,  189. 

UP,  to  get  up,  (to  rise,)  se  lever, 
'2-22.  To  go  up,  monter,  304,  N.  1 ; 
to  stand  up,  ctre  debout  ;  to  remain 
up,  Tester  debout,  373.  Up  stairs,  en 
laut,  193.  Up  to  the  lop,jusqu'en 
kaut,  428. 

••;,  sur  ;  upon  it,  dessus,  175. 

Us,  nous,  d  nous.     See  Nous. 

USER,  to  wear  out,  180.  En  uter 
lien  (mal)avcc  quelqu'un.  To  tr:at 
one  well,  (ill,)  394. 

V. 

VALOIR,  to  be  worth  ;  volant,  valu, 
valoir  mieux,  to  be  better,  199  ;  la 
peinc,  to  be  worth  while.  Cela  en 
vaut-il  la  peine  ?  Is  it  worth  while  ? 
270.  Faire  valoir,  to  turn  to  account, 
427. 

VEILLE,  (Za,)  the  day  before,  340. 

VENIR,  to  come,  venant,  venu,  88, 
121,  175.  Vcnir  de,  to  have  just, 
248,  504 — 3.  Venir  en  pensce,  (d 
Videe,  d  V esprit,}  to  have  a  thought, 
366.  Venir  and  aller,  are  in  French 
followed  by  an  infinitive,  and  the 
conjunction  and  is  not  rendered,  374, 
512—12. 

VERBS,  verbes.  The  four  conjuga- 
tions, 80.  Compound  and  derivative 


verbs  are  conjugated  like  theii  primi- 
tives, 179.  Auxiliaries,  See  AVOIR, 
ETRE.  Verbs  requiring  it  re,  to  be,  aa 
auxiliary,  175,530.  Active  verbs, 167. 
Neuter,  175, 530.  Passive,  212,  530. 
Reflective,  217,  531.  Always  conju- 
gated with  the  auxiliary  ttre,  —4 
They  always  have  two  pronouns  of 
the  same  person,  — 2.  Impersonal, 
227.  They  usually  govern  the  sub- 
junctive, 515—4.  Do,  am,  &c.,  when 
used  to  interrogate,  may  be  rendered 
by  cst-ce  que?  With  some  verbs 
est-ceque  must  be  used,  139.  When 
ne  is  used  without  pas,  322;  clre 
connected  by  d  with  an  infinitive 
expresses  the  present  tense,  as  Je 
suis  d  lire,  I  am  reading,  399,  502 — 6. 
Most  passive  verbs  may  be  made 
reflected,  531—5. 

VERS,  envers,  towards,  270 ;  the 
former  is  used  physically,  the  latter 
morally,  393. 

VIS-A-VIS  de,  opposite  to,  387. 

VIVRE,  to  live,  vivant,  vecu,  214; 
Fail-il  Ion  vivre  d  Paris  ?  Is  thb 
living  good  in  Paris  ?  315. 

VOILA,  there  is ;  void,  here  is  • 
voild  pourquoi,  that  is  the  reasoi, 
why;  voild  pourquoi  je  ledis,  there 
fore  I  say  so,  312. 

VOILE,  (un,)  a  veil,  is  masculine  ; 
wie  voile,  a  sail,  feminine,  350,  N.  1 
A  pleines  voiles,  (d  toutes  voiles,}  un 
der  full  sail,  350. 

VOIR,  to  see,  voyant,  vu,  voycz^  92, 
121,  172. 

VOTRE,  plural  vos,  your,  25,  44, 
282,  466. 

VOTRE,  (le,  la.)  les  votres,  yours, 
30,  291,  483. 

VOULOIR,  to  be  willing,  to  wish. 
voulant,  voulu,  83,  175. 

Vous,  you,  25,  409.  Vous  quif 
you  who,  vous-meme,  s,  yourself,  471. 
Objective  vous,  you,  to  you,  472; 
vous  y,  you  there,  475  ;  vous  en,  you 
some,  vous  y  tn,  you  some  there ;  d 
vous,  to  you.  476  ;  vous  (reflect.)  lei 


586 


IND  SX- 


clasp,  477,  vous  y  ;  2d  class,  nous  en ; 
3d  c3ass,  yourselves,  478 ;  a  vous, 
yours,  484,  $  106. 

VOYAGER,  (to  travel,)  194,  voya- 
gcant,  502—2. 

W. 

WAKE,  (to,)  eveiller,  reveiller,  369. 

WALK,  (to,)  marcher,  295  ;  to  take 
a  walk,  se  promener ;  to  go  walking ; 
viler  se  promener,  222.  To  walk  or 
Iravel  a  mile,/aire  un  mille,  295. 

WANT,  (to,)  to  be  in  want  of,  fo 
have  need  of,  avoir  besoin  de,  112; 
falloir,  ilfaut,  197,  06s.  89;  vouloir, 
83.  175. 

WARM,  cliaud.  Are  you  warni  ? 
avez-vous  chaud  ?  31.  Is  it  warm  ? 
fait-il  chaud  ?  53. 

WAY,  chemin,  105 ;  on  the  way, 
en  chemin,  121  ;  in  this  way,  de  cctte 
maniere,  180 ;  about  asking  the  way, 
378. 

WE,  nous,  67,  409;  we,  nous  au- 
:;v.s',  471. 

WEATHER,  (the,)  le  temps.  How 
is  the  weather  ?  what  weather  is  it  ? 
qucl  temps  fait-il  ?  53,  208. 

WELCOME,  (to  be,)  etre  le  lien 
vcjiu,  376. 

WELL,  lien,  26,  147,  ?19.  To  be 
well,  clre  lien  portant,  e,  etre  en  lonne 
stints  ;  she  is  well,  die  est  bien  por- 
tante,  clle  se  porte  bien,  elle  est  en 
bonne  santc,  330. 

WET,  damp,  humide.  Is  the  wea- 
ther damp  ?  Fait-il  humide  ?  208. 

WHAT?  que?  (before  a  verb,)  29; 
alter  verbs  and  prepositions,  quoi? 
100;  que,  quoi,  qu'est-ce  que?  what, 
nominative,  qu'est-ce  quit  what  is, 
w&s,  &c.,  (interrogative,)  followed  by 
a  preposition,  qu'y  a-t-il...?  qu'y 
avait-il?  486.  What,  (or  the  thing 
which,)  ce  qui,  ce  que,  124,  481 ,  $  89 ; 
what  is,  (relative,)  followed  by  a  pre- 
position, ce  qifil  y  a.  480—4.  What  ? 
yiiest  -cc  que  ccst  ?  qu'cst-ce  que  c'est 


que  ccla?    .129,    171.     What! 
quoi!  487. 

WHATEVER,  whatsoever, 
quelque,  quelleque,&LC.,  quelquechnni 
que,  quoique,  quoi  que  ce  soit,  422, 
423,  516. 

WHEN,  quand,  lorsque,  88,  242; 
used  with  the  preterit  anterieur,  521. 
When  connects  two  future  tenses, 
235,  06s.  106. 

WHERE?  ou  ?  86.  Where  fiumi 
whence?  d'oit?  200,  252.  Where 
did  we  stop?  ou  en  eiions-nousl 
Somewhere,  anywhere,  quelqucpart; 
nowhere,  not  anywhere,  nulle  pan, 
89. 

WHICH  or  WHAT?  quel?  quelst 
&c.,  25,  27,  45,  386,  485,  486.  Of 
which,  dont,  228, 481.  Which  one  ? 
Lequel,  laquelle?  &c.,  36,  45,  386. 
Which,  having  a  part  of  a  sentence 
for  antecedent,  is  translated  by  cs 
qui,  ce  que,  481,  $  90.  (See  THATJ 

WHO  ?  qui  ?  whose  ?  d  qui  ?  dont, 
de  qui,  100,  147;  d  qui,  aux  quels  ? 
230.  Whom?  qui?  478;  whom, 
(relative,)  que,  479. 

WHOEVER,  qui  que  ce    soit,  422, 
516. 
.WHY?  pourquoi?  81,  184. 

WIPE,  essuyer,  184,  502 — 3. 

WISH,  (to,)  souhaiter,  vouloir,  dc 
sirer,  83,  131.     I  wish  I  had  it,  ji 
voudrais  Vavoir,  508.     I  wish  I  hau 
been  able  to  go,faurais  voulu  pou— 
voir  y  allcr,  509. 

WITH,  avec,  88.  With,  rendered 
by  de,  224,  254,  210,  303 ;  by  d,  338, 
Vhomme  d  Z' habit  bleu. 

WITHDRAW,  (to,)  go  away  from, 
s'eloigner  de.  I  go  from  the  firet%7€ 
m'cloigne  dufeu,  260. 

WITHOUT,  sa?is  ;  without  ipeak 
ing,  sansparler,  215, 

WORD,  (the,)  le  mot,  50,  172, 
Words  used  with  the  preposition  de 
before  an  infinitive,  80.  When  a 
word  is  composed  of  a  noun  and  an 


ID1OMATICAL     EXPRESSIONS. 


587 


adjective,  both  take  the  mark  of 
the  plural,  183.  Compound  words, 
494. 

WORTH,  (to  be,)  valoir,  199.  To 
be  worth  while,  valoir  la  pei?ie,  270. 

WOULD  TO  GOD,  plut  d  Dieu,  au 
r.tcl,  424.  How  would  must  be  trans- 
lated, 508. 

WHITE,  (to,)  ecrire,  ecrit,  89,  121, 
172. 

WRONG,  tort,  36.     (See  To  BE.) 

Y. 

Y,  to  it,  in  it,  87.  Y,  there,  (stands 
before  tho  verb.)  Y  aller,  to  go 
there  ;  y  vtre,  to  be  there.  Its  place 
with  the  personal  pronouns,  and  en, 
87,  Obs.  102,  110.  F,  (id,)  here;  y, 


(Id,)  there,  110.  Yregarder  depres, 
to  be  particular,  399.  Y  a-t-il  ?  ia 
there?  180.  (See  THERE  is.)  Y 
translates  the  English  objective  pro- 
noun it  ;  when  by  itself,  or  governed 
by  a  preposition,  (in,  with,  &c.,)  it  is 
connected  with  a  verb  requiring  the 
preposition  d,  473,  §  50. 

YES,  OMI,  25.  Si  FAIT,  51,  Obs.  26. 

YESTERDAY,  hier  ;  the  day  before 
yesterday;  avant-Jiier,  107. 

You,  vous,  25,  409.    (See  Vous.) 

YOUR,  votre,  vos,  25,  44,  282,  466. 

YOURS,  le,  (la)  v6tre,  les  votres, 
30,  291,483;  d  vous,  484. 

YOURSELF,  yourselves,  vous-mwne. 
voiis-memes,  471;  (reflected,)  vous, 
vous  y,  vous  C2i,  477,  478. 


IDIOMATICAL    EXPRESSIONS, 


She  does  everything  gracefully. 
These  are  very  beautiful  pictures. 

The  German  interest  was  contrary 

to  the  Russian. 
Cheer  up,  soldiers;  the  day  is  ours. 

To  Bleep  very  late. 

To  be  on  the  brink  of  rum. 

To  cast  a  mist  before  one's  eyes. 

To  fret  and  fume. 

To  share  the  prorit. 

To  put  somebody  to  the  sword. 

To  meet  with  one's  match. 

What  day  of  the  month  is  it  ? 

Ali  blessings  come  from  God. 

la  that  your  opinion  ? — Do  not  ques- 
tion it. 

Are  those  your  servants  ? — Yes,  they 
are. 

Madam,  are  you  the  mother  of  that 
child  ? — Yes,  I  am. 

Ladies,  are  you  the  strangers  that 


Elle  a  if  ela  g  race  dans  tout  cc  qu'clle 

fait. 
Voila    des   tableaux   d'une    grande 

beaut  6. 
L'interet  de   V Alhmagne   etait   op 

pose  a  celui  de  la  Russie. 
Courage,  soldats ;  la  victoire  eat  u 

nous. 

Dormir  la  grass e  matinee. 
Etre  d  deux  doigts  de  sa  perte. 
Jeter  de  la  poudre  aux  yeux. 
Jeter  feu  et  famine. 
Partager  le  gateau. 
Passer  quelqu'un  auf.1  de  Tepee. 
Trouver  son  maitre. 
Quel  quantiome  du  mois  avons-nous  ? 
Tons  les  biens  nous  viennent  de  Dieu 
Est-ce  la  votre  opinion  ? — Ne  doatex 

point  que  ce  ne  la  soit. 
Sont-ce  la  vos  domcstiques  ? — Oui, 

ce  les  sont. 
Madame,  etes-vous  la  mere  dc  cet 

enfant  ? — Oui,  je  la  suis. 
Mesdames,  etes-vous  Zes  clrange-cs 


588 


IDIOMATICAL     EXPRESSIONS. 


have  been  announced  to  me  ? — 
Yes,  we  are. 

Ladies,  are   you  pleased  with   that 
music  ? — Yes,  we  are. 

Madam,  are  you  a  mother  ? — Yes, 

am. 
Madam,  are  you  ill  ? — Yes,  I  am. 


been 


Madam,   how  long  have   you 
married  ? — A  year. 

*e  it  long  since  you  arrived  ? — A  fort- 
night. 

Although  that  woman  shows  more 
resolution  than  the  others,  she  is 
nevertheless  not  the  least  afflicted. 

That  woman  has  the  art  of  shedding 
tears,  even  when  she  is  least 
afflicted. 

That  woman  proposed  herself  as  a 
model  for  ker  children. 

He  (or  she)  has  not  succeeded  in  that 
stratagem. 

To  be  free  and  open. 

To  be  full  of  business. 

To  take  fire  presently. 

The  dry  weather  we  had  in  the  spring 
has  destroyed  all  the  fruit. 

To  put  to  the  vote. 

Life  is  at  stake. 

My  honor  is  concerned  in  it. 

That  is  understood. 

To  act  deliberately. 

To  go  fuU  speed. 

Shall  you  go  to  the  opera  fh:'s  even- 
ing ? — Yes,  I  shall. 

Would  you  cheerfully  go  to  Rome  ? 
— Yes,  I  would. 


qu'ou  m'a  annoncees  ? — Oui,  noua 

les  sommes. 
Mesdames,   etes-vous  contentca  d* 

cette    musique  ?  —  Ou»,    nou«i    I* 

sommes. 
Madame,  etes-vous  mere  I — Oui,  je 

le  suis. 
Madame,  etes-vous  malade  ?— Oui, 

je  le  suis. 

Madame,  depuis  quel    jemps  etes- 
vous  mariee  ? — Je  le  suis  depuifl 

un  an. 
Y,a-t-il  long-temps  que  vous  etes 

arrivee  ? — Je  le  suis  depuis  quinzc 

jours. 
Quoique  cette  femme  montre  plus  do 

fermete  que  les  autresj  elle  n'esi 

pas  pour  cela  la  moins  affligee. 
Cette  iemme  a  1'art  de  repandre  dea 

larmes  dans  le  temps  meme  qu'ella 

est  le  moins  ajjligte. 
Cette   femme  s'est  proposee   pour 

module  a  ses  enfants. 
Cette  ruse  ne  lui  a  pas  rcussi. 

Avoir  le  comr  sur  les  levres. 
Avoir    des    affaires    par-dessus    lea 

yeux. 

Avoir  la  tete  pres  du  bonnet. 
La  secheresse  qu'il  y  a  eu  au  prin- 

temps  a  fait  perir  tous  lee  fruits. 
Aller  aux  voix. 
II  y  va  de  la  vie. 
II  y  va  de  mon  honneur. 
Cela  va  sans  dire. 
Aller  pas  a  pas. 
Aller  a  bride  abattue. 
Irez-vous  ce  w»r  a  i'opera  ? — Oui, 

firai. 
Iriez-vous  avrc   plaisir  a  Romef— 

Oui,  firais. 

3- 


THE   END. 


RETURN  TO  the  circulation  desk  of  any 
University  of  California  Library 

or  to  the 

NORTHERN  REGIONAL  LIBRARY  FACILITY 
Bldg.  400,  Richmond  Field  Station 
University  of  California 
Richmond,  CA  94804-4698 

ALL  BOOKS  MAY  BE  RECALLED  AFTER  7  DAYS 

•  2-month  loans  may  be  renewed  by  calling 
(510)642-6753 

•  1-year  loans  may  be  recharged  by  bringing 
books  to  NRLF 

•  Renewals  and  recharges  may  be  made  4 
days  prior  to  due  date. 

DUE  AS  STAMPED  BELOW 


APR  11  2000 


JUL  1  5  2002 


12,000(11/95) 


BERKELEY  LIBRARIES 


/ '874 


THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA  LIBRARY 


